40 CFR Part 60 · Subpart OOOOb--Appendix-A-6-to-Part-60
Part 60—Standards of Performance for New Stationary Sources
Protection of Environment · Chapter I, Chapter I—Environmental Protection Agency · Subchapter C
40 CFR Part 60, Subpart OOOOb--Appendix-A-6-to-Part-60 - Words
- 1,701,097
- Sections
- 338
- Last amended
- September 17, 2026
- Administered by
- Environmental Protection Agency
40 CFR Part 60
Text as published by eCFR on .
Subpart OOOOb—Standards of Performance for Crude Oil and Natural Gas Facilities for Which Construction, Modification or Reconstruction Commenced After December 6, 2022
89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, unless otherwise noted.
§ 60.5360b What is the purpose of this subpart?
(a) Scope. This subpart establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of the pollutant greenhouse gases (GHG). The greenhouse gas standard in this subpart is in the form of a limitation on emissions of methane from affected facilities in the crude oil and natural gas source category that commence construction, modification, or reconstruction after December 6, 2022. This subpart also establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of volatile organic compounds (VOC) and sulfur dioxide (SO2) emissions from affected facilities in the crude oil and natural gas source category that commence construction, modification, or reconstruction after December 6, 2022.
(b) Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) and title V thresholds for Greenhouse Gases. (1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48) and in any State Implementation Plan (SIP) approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Clean Air Act as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(49).
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2.
(c) Exemption. You are exempt from the obligation to obtain a permit under 40 CFR part 70 or 40 CFR part 71, provided you are not otherwise required by law to obtain a permit under 40 CFR 70.3(a) or 40 CFR 71.3(a). Notwithstanding the previous sentence, you must continue to comply with the provisions of this subpart.
§ 60.5365b Am I subject to this subpart?
You are subject to the applicable provisions of this subpart if you are the owner or operator of one or more of the onshore affected facilities listed in paragraphs (a) through (i) of this section, that is located within the Crude Oil and Natural Gas source category, as defined in § 60.5430b, for which you commence construction, modification, or reconstruction after December 6, 2022. Facilities located inside and including the Local Distribution Company (LDC) custody transfer station are not subject to this subpart.
(a) Each well affected facility, which is a single well drilled for the purpose of producing oil or natural gas.
(1) In addition to § 60.14, a “modification” of an existing well occurs when:
(i) An existing well is hydraulically fractured, or
(ii) An existing well is hydraulically refractured.
(2) For the purposes of a well affected facility, a liquids unloading event is not considered to be a modification.
(3) Except as provided in § 60.5365b(e)(3)(ii)(C) and (i)(3)(ii), any action described by paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, by itself, does not affect the modification status of process unit equipment, centrifugal or reciprocating compressors, pumps, or process controllers.
(b) Each centrifugal compressor affected facility, which is a single centrifugal compressor. A centrifugal compressor located at a well site is not an affected facility under this subpart. A centrifugal compressor located at a centralized production facility is an affected facility under this subpart.
(c) Each reciprocating compressor affected facility, which is a single reciprocating compressor. A reciprocating compressor located at a well site is not an affected facility under this subpart. A reciprocating compressor located at a centralized production facility is an affected facility under this subpart.
(d) Each process controller affected facility, which is the collection of natural gas-driven process controllers at a well site, centralized production facility, onshore natural gas processing plant, or a compressor station. Natural gas-driven process controllers that function as emergency shutdown devices and process controllers that are not driven by natural gas are not included in the affected facility.
(1) For the purposes of § 60.5390b, in addition to the definition in § 60.14, a modification occurs when the number of natural gas-driven process controllers in the affected facility is increased by one or more.
(2) For the purposes of § 60.5390b, owners and operators may choose to apply reconstruction as defined in § 60.15(b) based on the fixed capital cost of the new process controllers in accordance with paragraph (d)(2)(i) of this section, or the definition of reconstruction based on the number of natural gas-driven process controllers in the affected facility in accordance with paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section. Owners and operators may choose which definition of reconstruction to apply and whether to comply with paragraph (d)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section; they do not need to apply both. If owners and operators choose to comply with paragraph (d)(2)(ii) of this section they may demonstrate compliance with § 60.15(b)(1) by showing that more than 50 percent of the number of natural gas-driven process controllers in the affected facility is replaced. That is, if an owner or operator meets the definition of reconstruction through the “number of controllers” criterion in (d)(2)(ii) of this section, they will have shown that the “fixed capital cost of the new components exceeds 50 percent of the fixed capital cost that would be required to construct a comparable entirely new facility,” as required in § 60.15(b)(1). Therefore, an owner or operator may comply with the remaining provisions of § 60.15 that reference “fixed capital cost” through an initial showing that the number of natural gas-driven process controllers replaced exceeds 50 percent. For purposes of paragraphs (d)(2)(i) and (ii), “commenced” means that an owner or operator has undertaken a continuous program of natural gas-driven process controller replacement or that an owner or operator has entered into a contractual obligation to undertake and complete, within a reasonable time, a continuous program of natural gas-driven process controller replacement.
(i) If the owner or operator applies the definition of reconstruction in § 60.15(b)(1), reconstruction occurs when the fixed capital cost of the new process controllers exceeds 50 percent of the fixed capital cost that would be required to replace all the natural gas-driven process controllers in the affected facility. The “fixed capital cost of the new process controllers” includes the fixed capital cost of all natural gas-driven process controllers which are or will be replaced pursuant to all continuous programs of component replacement which are commenced within any 24-month rolling period following December 6, 2022.
(ii) If the owner or operator applies the definition of reconstruction based on the percentage of natural gas-driven process controllers replaced, reconstruction occurs when greater than 50 percent of the natural gas-driven process controllers at a site are replaced. The percentage includes all natural gas-driven process controllers which are or will be replaced pursuant to all continuous programs of natural gas-driven process controller replacement which are commenced within any 24-month rolling period following December 6, 2022. If an owner or operator determines reconstruction based on the percentage of natural gas-driven process controllers that are replaced, the owner or operator must also comply with § 60.15(a).
(e) Each storage vessel affected facility, which is a tank battery that has the potential for emissions as specified in either paragraph (e)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. A tank battery with the potential for emissions below both of the thresholds specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section is not a storage vessel affected facility provided the owner/operator keeps records of the potential for emissions calculation for the life of the storage vessel or until such time the tank battery becomes a storage vessel affected facility because the potential for emissions meets or exceeds either threshold specified in either paragraph (e)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(1)(i) Potential for VOC emissions equal to or greater than 6 tons per year (tpy) as determined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(ii) Potential for methane emissions equal to or greater than 20 tpy as determined in paragraph (e)(2) of this section.
(2) The potential for VOC and methane emissions must be calculated as the cumulative emissions from all storage vessels within the tank battery as specified by the applicable requirements in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section. The determination may take into account requirements under a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under a Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority.
(i) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, for purposes of determining the applicability of a storage vessel tank battery as an affected facility, a legally and practicably enforceable limit must include the elements provided in paragraphs (e)(2)(i)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) A quantitative production limit and quantitative operational limit(s) for the equipment, or quantitative operational limits for the equipment;
(B) An averaging time period for the production limit in (e)(2)(i)(A) of this section, if a production-based limit is used, that is equal to or less than 30 days;
(C) Established parametric limits for the production and/or operational limit(s) in paragraph (e)(2)(i)(A) of this section, and where a control device is used to achieve an operational limit, an initial compliance demonstration (i.e., performance test) for the control device that establishes the parametric limits;
(D) Ongoing monitoring of the parametric limits in (e)(2)(i)(C) of this section that demonstrates continuous compliance with the production and/or operational limit(s) in (e)(2)(i)(A) of this section;
(E) Recordkeeping by the owner or operator that demonstrates continuous compliance with the limit(s) in (e)(2)(i)(A) through (D) of this section; and
(F) Periodic reporting that demonstrates continuous compliance.
(ii) For each tank battery located at a well site or centralized production facility, you must determine the potential for VOC and methane emissions within 30 days after startup of production, or within 30 days after an action specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (e)(5)(iv) of this section. Beginning January 22, 2027, the potential for VOC and methane emissions must be calculated using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working, and breathing losses, based on the maximum average daily throughput to the tank battery determined for a 30-day period of production.
(iii) For each tank battery not located at a well site or centralized production facility, including each tank battery located at a compressor station or onshore natural gas processing plant, you must determine the potential for VOC and methane emissions prior to startup of the compressor station, onshore natural gas processing plant, or other facility within 30 days after an action specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, using either method described in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) Determine the potential for VOC and methane emissions using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working and breathing losses and based on the throughput to the tank battery established in a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under a Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority; or
(B) Determine the potential for VOC and methane emissions using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working and breathing losses and based on projected maximum average daily throughput. Maximum average daily throughput is determined using a generally accepted engineering model (e.g., volumetric condensate rates from the tank battery based on the maximum gas throughput capacity of each producing facility) to project the maximum average daily throughput for the tank battery.
(3) For the purposes of § 60.5395b, the following definitions of “reconstruction” and “modification” apply for determining when an existing tank battery becomes a storage vessel affected facility under this subpart.
(i) “Reconstruction” of a tank battery occurs when the potential for VOC or methane emissions to meet or exceed either of the thresholds specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section and—
(A) At least half of the storage vessels are replaced in the existing tank battery that consists of more than one storage vessel; or
(B) The provisions of § 60.15 are met for the existing tank battery.
(ii) “Modification” of a tank battery occurs when any of the actions in paragraphs (e)(3)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section occurs and the potential for VOC or methane emissions meet or exceed either of the thresholds specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(A) A storage vessel is added to an existing tank battery;
(B) One or more storage vessels are replaced such that the cumulative storage capacity of the existing tank battery increases;
(C) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, for tank batteries at well sites or centralized production facilities, an existing tank battery receives additional crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbons, or produced water throughput from actions, including but not limited to, the addition of operations or a production well, or changes to operations or a production well (including hydraulic fracturing or refracturing of the well).
(D) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, for tank batteries not located at a well site or centralized production facility, including each tank battery at compressor stations or onshore natural gas processing plants, an existing tank battery receives additional fluids which cumulatively exceed the throughput used in the most recent (i.e., prior to an action in paragraph (e)(3)(ii)(A), (B), or (D) of this section) determination of the potential for VOC or methane emissions.
(4) A storage vessel affected facility that subsequently has its potential for VOC emissions decrease to less than 6 tpy shall remain an affected facility under this subpart.
(5) For storage vessels not subject to a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority, any vapor from the storage vessel that is recovered and routed to a process through a vapor recovery unit designed and operated as specified in this section is not required to be included in the determination of potential for VOC or methane emissions for purposes of determining affected facility status, provided you comply with the requirements of paragraphs (e)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You meet the cover requirements specified in § 60.5411b(b).
(ii) You meet the closed vent system requirements specified in § 60.5411b(a)(2) through (4) and (c).
(iii) You must maintain records that document compliance with paragraphs (e)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(iv) In the event of removal of apparatus that recovers and routes vapor to a process, or operation that is inconsistent with the conditions specified in paragraphs (e)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must determine the storage vessel's potential for VOC emissions according to this section within 30 days of such removal or operation.
(6) The requirements of this paragraph (e)(6) apply to each storage vessel affected facility immediately upon startup, startup of production, or return to service. A storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility that is reconnected to the original source of liquids remains a storage vessel affected facility subject to the same requirements that applied before being removed from service. Any storage vessel that is used to replace a storage vessel affected facility, or portion of a storage vessel affected facility, or used to expand a storage vessel affected facility assumes the affected facility status of the storage vessel affected facility being replaced or expanded.
(7) A storage vessel with a capacity greater than 100,000 gallons used to recycle water that has been passed through two stage separation is not a storage vessel affected facility.
(f) Each process unit equipment affected facility, which is the group of all equipment within a process unit at an onshore natural gas processing plant is an affected facility.
(1) Addition or replacement of equipment for the purpose of process improvement that is accomplished without a capital expenditure shall not by itself be considered a modification under this subpart.
(2) Equipment associated with a compressor station, dehydration unit, sweetening unit, underground storage vessel, field gas gathering system, or liquefied natural gas unit is covered by §§ 60.5400b, 60.5401b, 60.5402b, 60.5421b, and 60.5422b if it is located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. Equipment not located at the onshore natural gas processing plant site is exempt from the provisions of §§ 60.5400b, 60.5401b, 60.5402b, 60.5421b, and 60.5422b.
(g) Each sweetening unit affected facility as defined by paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Each sweetening unit that processes natural gas produced from either onshore or offshore wells is an affected facility; and
(2) Each sweetening unit that processes natural gas followed by a sulfur recovery unit is an affected facility.
(3) Facilities that have a design capacity less than 2 long tons per day (LT/D) of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) in the acid gas (expressed as sulfur) are required to comply with recordkeeping and reporting requirements specified in § 60.5423b(e) but are not required to comply with §§ 60.5405b through 60.5407b and §§ 60.5410b(i) and 60.5415b(k).
(4) Sweetening facilities producing acid gas that is completely re-injected into oil-or-gas-bearing geologic strata or that is otherwise not released to the atmosphere are not subject to §§ 60.5405b through 60.5407b, 60.5410b(i), 60.5415b(k), and 60.5423b.
(h) Each pump affected facility, which is the collection of natural gas-driven pumps at a well site, centralized production facility, onshore natural gas processing plant, or a compressor station. Pumps that are not driven by natural gas are not included in the pump affected facility.
(1) For the purposes of § 60.5393b, in addition to the definition in § 60.14, a modification occurs when the number of natural gas-driven pumps in the affected facility is increased by one or more.
(2) For the purposes of § 60.5393b, owners and operators may choose to apply reconstruction as defined in § 60.15(b) based on the fixed capital cost of the new pumps in accordance with paragraph (h)(2)(i) of this section, or the definition of reconstruction based on the number of natural gas-driven pumps in the affected facility in accordance with paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section. Owners and operators may choose which definition of reconstruction to apply and whether to comply with paragraph (h)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section; they do not need to apply both. If owners and operators choose to comply with paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section they may demonstrate compliance with § 60.15(b)(1) by showing that more than 50 percent of the number of natural gas-driven pumps is replaced. That is, if an owner or operator meets the definition of reconstruction through the “number of pumps” criterion in paragraph (h)(2)(ii) of this section, they will have shown that the “fixed capital cost of the new components exceeds 50 percent of the fixed capital cost that would be required to construct a comparable entirely new facility,” as required in § 60.15(b)(1). Therefore, an owner or operator may comply with the remaining provisions of § 60.15 that reference “fixed capital cost” through an initial showing that the number of natural gas-driven pumps replaced exceeds 50 percent. For purposes of paragraphs (h)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, “commenced” means that an owner or operator has undertaken a continuous program of component replacement or that an owner or operator has entered into a contractual obligation to undertake and complete, within a reasonable time, a continuous program of natural gas-driven pump replacement.
(i) If the owner or operator applies the definition of reconstruction in § 60.15, reconstruction occurs when the fixed capital cost of the new pumps exceeds 50 percent of the fixed capital cost that would be required to replace all the natural gas-driven pumps in the affected facility. The “fixed capital cost of the new pumps” includes the fixed capital cost of all natural gas-driven pumps which are or will be replaced pursuant to all continuous programs of component replacement which are commenced within any 24-month rolling period following December 6, 2022.
(ii) If the owner or operator applies the definition of reconstruction based on the percentage of natural gas-driven pumps replaced, reconstruction occurs when greater than 50 percent of the natural gas-driven pumps in the affected facility are replaced. The percentage includes all natural gas-driven pumps which are or will be replaced pursuant to all continuous programs of component replacement which are commenced within any 24-month rolling period following December 6, 2022. If an owner or operator determines reconstruction based on the percentage of natural gas-driven pumps that are replaced, the owner or operator must comply with § 60.15(a).
(3) A natural gas-driven pump that is in operation less than 90 days per calendar year is not part of an affected facility under this subpart. For the purposes of this section, any period of operation during a calendar day counts toward the 90-calendar day threshold.
(i) Each fugitive emissions components affected facility, which is the collection of fugitive emissions components at a well site, centralized production facility, or a compressor station.
(1) For purposes of § 60.5397b and § 60.5398b, a “modification” to a well site occurs when:
(i) A new well is drilled at an existing well site;
(ii) A well at an existing well site is hydraulically fractured; or
(iii) A well at an existing well site is hydraulically refractured.
(2) For purposes of § 60.5397b and § 60.5398b, a “modification” to centralized production facility occurs when:
(i) Any of the actions in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section occurs at an existing centralized production facility;
(ii) A well sending production to an existing centralized production facility is modified, as defined in paragraphs (i)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section; or
(iii) A well site subject to the requirements of § 60.5397b or § 60.5398b removes all major production and processing equipment, such that it becomes a wellhead only well site and sends production to an existing centralized production facility.
(3) For purposes of §§ 60.5397b and 60.5398b, a “modification” to a compressor station occurs when:
(i) An additional compressor is installed at a compressor station; or
(ii) One or more compressors at a compressor station is replaced by one or more compressors of greater total horsepower than the compressor(s) being replaced. When one or more compressors is replaced by one or more compressors of an equal or smaller total horsepower than the compressor(s) being replaced, installation of the replacement compressor(s) does not trigger a modification of the compressor station for purposes of §§ 60.5397b and 60.5398b.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62888, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35981, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5370b When must I comply with this subpart?
(a) You must be in compliance with the standards of this subpart no later than May 7, 2024, or upon initial startup, whichever date is later, except as specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section for reciprocating compressor affected facilities, paragraphs (a)(2) and (3) of this section for storage vessel affected facilities, paragraph (a)(4) of this section for process unit equipment affected facilities at onshore natural gas processing plants, paragraph (a)(5) of this section for process controllers, paragraph (a)(6) of this section for pumps, paragraph (a)(7) of this section for centrifugal compressor affected facilities, paragraph (a)(8) of this section for enclosed combustion devices, paragraph (a)(9) of this section for enclosed combustion devices or flares, and paragraphs § 60.5377b(b) or (c) for associated gas wells.
(1) You must comply with the requirements of § 60.5385b for your reciprocating compressor affected facility as specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) You must comply with the requirements of § 60.5385b(a)(1) on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last rod packing replacement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later; and
(ii) You must comply with the requirements of § 60.5385b(a)(2) within 8,760 hours after compliance with § 60.5385b(a)(1) and (d)(3).
(iii) You must comply with the requirements of § 60.5385b(d)(1) and (2) for your reciprocating compressor upon initial startup.
(2) You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs § 60.5395b(a)(1) for your storage vessel affected facility as specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Within 30 days after startup of production, or within 30 days after reconstruction or modification of the storage vessel affected facility, for each storage vessel affected facility located at a well site or centralized production facility.
(ii) Prior to startup of the compressor station or onshore natural gas processing plant, or within 30 days after reconstruction or modification of the storage vessel affected facility, for each storage vessel affected facility located at a compressor station or onshore natural gas processing plant.
(3) You must comply with the requirements of paragraph § 60.5395b(a)(2) as specified in paragraph (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable:
(i) For each storage vessel affected facility located at a well site or centralized production facility, you must achieve the required emissions reductions within 30 days after the determination in paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section.
(ii) For storage vessel affected facilities located at a compressor station or onshore natural gas processing plant, you must achieve the required emissions reductions within 30 days after the determination in paragraph (a)(2)(ii) of this section.
(4) Except as specified in paragraph (a)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must comply with the requirements of § 60.5400b or as an alternative, the requirements in § 60.5401b, for all process unit equipment affected facilities at a natural gas processing plant, as soon as practicable but no later than 180 days after the initial startup of the process unit.
(i) If complying with § 60.5400b, beginning January 22, 2027, or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the requirements of § 60.5400b(h)(2)(ii).
(ii) If complying with § 60.5401b, beginning January 22, 2027, or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the requirements of § 60.5401b(i)(2)(ii).
(5) For process controller affected facilities, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Any process controller affected facilities may comply with § 60.5390b(b)(1) and (2) or (3) as an alternative to compliance with § 60.5390b(a) until January 22, 2027.
(ii) On or after January 22, 2027, process controller affected facilities must comply with § 60.5390b(a) or (b), as specified in those paragraphs.
(6) For pump affected facilities, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(6)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Any pump affected facility may comply with § 60.5393b(b)(2) through (8), as applicable, as an alternative to compliance with § 60.5393b(a) until May 7, 2025.
(ii) On or after May 7, 2025, pump affected facilities must comply with § 60.5393b(a) or (b), as specified in those paragraphs.
(7) For centrifugal compressor affected facilities, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(7)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) You must comply with the requirements of § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2) or (a)(3) for your centrifugal compressor upon initial startup.
(ii) Each centrifugal compressor affected facility that uses dry seals, each self-contained wet seal compressor, and each centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, complying with one of the alternatives in § 60.5380b(a)(4), (5), or (6), must comply with the specified performance-based volumetric flow rate work practice standards on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last seal replacement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(8) For an enclosed combustion device, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Beginning January 22, 2027, or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the performance testing procedures of § 60.5413b(b).
(ii) [Reserved]
(9) For an enclosed combustion device or for a flare, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(9)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Beginning June 1, 2026, or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the continuous monitoring systems requirements of § 60.5417b(d)(8)(i) through (iv).
(ii) Beginning May 7, 2024 or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the visible emission observation requirements of § 60.5417b(d)(8)(v).
(iii) Beginning June 1, 2026, or 180 days after startup, whichever is later, you must comply with the continuous monitoring systems requirements of § 60.5417b(d)(8)(vi) for enclosed combustion devices or flares that are air-assisted or steam-assisted.
(b) At all times, including periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction, owners and operators shall maintain and operate any affected facility including associated air pollution control equipment in a manner consistent with good air pollution control practice for minimizing emissions. Determination of whether acceptable operating and maintenance procedures are being used will be based on information available to the Administrator which may include, but is not limited to, monitoring results, opacity observations, review of operating and maintenance procedures, and inspection of the source. The provisions for exemption from compliance during periods of startup, shutdown and malfunctions provided for in 40 CFR 60.8(c) do not apply to this subpart.
(c) You are exempt from the obligation to obtain a permit under 40 CFR part 70 or 40 CFR part 71, provided you are not otherwise required by law to obtain a permit under 40 CFR 70.3(a) or 40 CFR 71.3(a). Notwithstanding the previous sentence, you must continue to comply with the provisions of this subpart.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62891, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35982, July 31, 2025; 90 FR 55681, Dec. 3, 2025]
§ 60.5371b What GHG and VOC standards apply to super-emitter events?
The provisions of this section will not apply between July 31, 2025, and January 22, 2027. The provisions of this section will apply after January 22, 2027. This section applies to super-emitter events. For purposes of this section, a super-emitter event is defined as any emissions event that is located at or near an oil and natural gas facility (e.g., individual well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) and that is detected using remote detection methods and has quantified emission rate of 100 kg/hr of methane or greater. Paragraph (a) of this section describes the qualifications one must meet to apply to be a third-party notifier of super-emitter events. Paragraph (b) of this section describes the procedures for certifying third-party notifiers, as well as the procedures for petitioning the Agency for removal of a third-party notifier from the list of certified notifiers. Paragraph (c) of this section contains the required information that must be included in any notification submitted to the EPA from a certified third-party notifier and a timetable for notifications. The EPA shall review these notifications and if the EPA determines the notification is complete and does not contain information that the EPA finds to be erroneous or inaccurate to a reasonable degree of certainty, the EPA shall assign the notification a unique notification identification number, provide the notification to the owner or operator of the oil and natural gas facility identified in the notification, and post the notification, except for the owner/operator attribution, at www.epa.gov/super-emitter. Upon receiving such notification, owners or operators must take the actions listed in paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section. The EPA shall post the reports submitted under paragraph (e) of this section, § 60.5371(b) and § 60.5371a(b) of subparts OOOO and OOOOa of this part, and applicable State or Federal plan implementing § 60.5388c(b) of subpart OOOOc of this part, including owner/operator attributions that have been confirmed by the reports; where the reporting deadlines have passed but no reports have been received, the EPA intends to post owner/operator attributions that the EPA reasonably believes to be accurate. The reports will be publicly available at www.epa.gov/super-emitter.
(a) Qualifications for third-party notifiers. An entity may apply to the Administrator under paragraph (b) of this section for approval as a third-party notifier if it meets the qualifications in this paragraph (a). The entity must be a person, as defined in 42 U.S.C. 7602(e), excluding the owner or operator of the site where the super-emitter event is detected, the Administrator, or the delegated authority. The entity must use a method that has been approved under § 60.5398b(d) for one of the technologies specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Satellite detection of methane emissions.
(2) Remote-sensing equipment on aircraft.
(3) Mobile monitoring platforms.
(b) Third-party notifier certification. An entity meeting the qualifications in paragraph (a) of this section may apply to be certified as a third-party notifier. Only entities certified as third-party notifiers may submit information on super-emitter events to the EPA under paragraph (c) of this section. An entity seeking certification as a third-party notifier must submit a request to the Administrator as described in paragraph (b)(1) of this section. Certified third-party notifiers must follow the recordkeeping requirements in paragraph (b)(2) of this section; failure to maintain the required records may result in loss of certification status. The Administrator will determine whether the request for certification is adequate and issue an approval or disapproval of the request as described in paragraph (b)(3) of this section. A certified third-party notifier must re-apply when material changes are made, as described in paragraph (b)(4) of this section. A third-party notifier may be removed from the list of certified notifiers as detailed in paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
(1) A request to be certified as a third-party notifier must be submitted to: U.S. EPA, Attn: Leader, Measurement Technology Group, Mail Drop: E143-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, NC 27711. The request must include the supporting information in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section. If your submittal includes information claimed to be CBI, submit the portion of the information claimed as CBI to the OAQPS CBI office. The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov and should include clear CBI markings and be flagged to the attention of the Leader, Measurement Technology Group. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link. If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer and Measurement Technology Group Leader, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, NC 27711. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(i) General identification information for the candidate third-party notifier requesting certification as a third-party notifier including the mailing address, the physical address, the name of a principal officer and an email address for the principal officer, and name of the certifying official(s) and the certifying official(s)'s email address.
(ii) Description of the technologies the entity will use to identify emissions that are 100 kg/hr of methane or greater. At a minimum, the description must include the following:
(A) Reference to the approval of the method to be used under § 60.5398b(d).
(B) Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) or contracting agreements with the technology provider(s) that will be used to identify super-emitter events (if applicable).
(iii) Curriculum vitae of the certifying official(s) detailing their work history, education, skill set, and training for evaluating the results of the technologies that will be used to identify super-emitter events.
(iv) The candidate third-party notifier's standard operating procedure(s) detailing the procedures and processes for data review. At a minimum, this must include the following:
(A) Procedures for evaluating the emission data provided by the technology, including the accuracy of the data and whether the data was collected in compliance with the method requirements approved under § 60.5398b(d).
(B) Process for verifying the accuracy of the locality of emissions.
(C) Process for identifying and verifying the owner or operator of a site where a super-emitter event occurs, including the source of information that will be used to make the identification.
(D) Procedures for handling potentially erroneous data.
(v) Description of the systems used for maintaining essential records identified in paragraph (b)(2) of this section.
(vi) A Quality Management Plan consistent with EPA's Quality Management Plan Standard (Directive No: CIO 2015-S-01.0, January 17, 2023) for Non-EPA organizations.
(2) Certified third-party notifiers must maintain the records identified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section. Upon request, the certified third-party notifier must make these records available to the Administrator for review.
(i) Records for all surveys conducted by or sponsored by the certified third-party notifier, including outputs (e.g., emission rates, locations) and associated data needed to confirm the accuracy of the outputs and the performance of the method used.
(ii) Records of all notifications of super-emitter events provided to the EPA. Retain any information collected that is used to evaluate the validity of a super-emitter event but which is not required to be submitted as part of the notification.
(iii) A copy of any records and/or identification of any databases used in the identification of the potential owner or operator of the site where a super-emitter event occurred.
(3) Based upon the Administrator's judgment of the completeness, reasonableness, and accuracy of the entity's request, the Administrator will approve or disapprove the entity for certification as a third-party notifier. For those third parties that receive approval, the Administrator will provide you a unique notifier ID. Starting 15 calendar days after being approved as a certified third-party notifier, the notifier may submit notifications of super-emitter events to the EPA as outlined in paragraph (c) of this section. All approved third-party notifiers shall be posted on the EPA website at www.epa.gov/emc-third-party-certifications.
(4) If a third-party notifier intends to make any significant changes to their procedures for identifying super-emitter events, meaning a change to the technology used to identify super-emitter events or a change to the certifying official(s), you must request an amendment to your certification and be recertified under paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(5) A certified third-party notifier may be removed from the list of approved third-party notifiers in any of the circumstances listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section. Entities removed from the list of approved third-party notifiers cannot submit notifications to the EPA under paragraph (c) of this section. Entities may be added back to the list of approved third-party notifiers by receiving approval of a new certification request submitted under paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(i) If a certified third-party notifier has made material changes to their procedures for identifying super-emitter events, meaning a change to the technology used to identify super-emitter events or a change to the certifying official, without seeking recertification.
(ii) If the Administrator finds that the certified third-party notifier has persistently submitted data with significant errors (e.g., misidentification of the owner or operator) or if the third-party notifier has engaged in illegal activity during the during the assessment of a super-emitter event (e.g., trespassing).
(iii) If the Administrator receives a petition from an owner or operator to remove a certified third-party notifier from the list of approved notifiers, as set forth below, and the Administrator makes the finding noted below. Any owner or operator that has received more than three notices with meaningful and/or demonstrable errors of a super-emitter event at the same oil and natural gas facility (e.g., a well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) from the EPA that were submitted to the EPA by the same third party may petition the Administrator to remove that third party from the list of approved notifiers, by providing evidence that the claimed super-emitter events did not occur. Such petitions may not be used to dispute the methodology that were approved through the process described in § 60.5398b(d). The third party will be given the opportunity to respond to the petition. If, in the Administrator's discretion, the Administrator determines that the three notifications contain meaningful and/or demonstrable errors, including that the third party did not use the methane detection technology identified in their submittal, the emissions event did not exceed the threshold of 100 kg/hr of methane, the third-party knowingly misidentified the date of a super-emitter event, the third party may be removed by the Administrator from the list of approved notifiers. The failure of the owner or operator to find the source of the super-emitter event upon subsequent inspection shall not be proof, by itself, of demonstrable error.
(c) Notification of super-emitter events. Notifications must be submitted to the EPA using the Super-Emitter Program Portal (available at http://www.epa.gov/super-emitter). Notifications must contain the information specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (8) of this section. The EPA will review the submitted notifications of super-emitter events for completeness and accuracy. If the EPA determines that the notification is complete and does not contain information that the EPA finds to be inaccurate to a reasonable degree of certainty, the EPA will assign the notification a unique notification report identification number, make the notification publicly available at www.epa.gov/super-emitter, and provide the super-emitter event notification to the owner or operator identified in the notification. The EPA will not review and provide the notification to an owner or operator if the notification is submitted after the date specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(1) Unique Third-Party Notifier ID.
(2) Date of detection of the super-emitter event. If multiple surveys were required to detect and quantify the super-emitter event, the date of detection is the date of the final survey.
(3) Location of super-emitter event in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of four (4) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(4) Owner(s) or operator(s) of any oil and natural gas facility (e.g., individual well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) within 50 meters of the latitude and longitude coordinates of the super-emitter event, if available.
(5) Identification of the detection technology and reference to the approval of the technology used under § 60.5398b(d).
(6) Documentation (e.g., imagery) depicting the detected super-emitter event and the site from which the super-emitter event was detected.
(7) Quantified emission rate of the super-emitter event in kg/hr and associated uncertainty bounds (e.g., 1-σ) of the measurement.
(8) Attestation statement, signed and dated by the third-party notifier certifying official submitting the data collected. The attestation must state: “I certify that I have been approved to be a notifier under 40 CFR 60.5371b(b) and that the emission detection information included in this notification was collected and interpreted as described in this notification. Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the collection and analysis of the data, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(9) The third-party notifier must submit the notification within 15 calendar days of the date of detection of the super-emitter event.
(d) Identification of super-emitter events. Within 5 calendar days of receiving a notification from the EPA of a super-emitter event, the owner or operator of an oil and natural gas facility (e.g., a well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) must initiate a super-emitter event investigation. The investigation must be conducted in accordance with this paragraph (d) and completed within 15 days of receiving the notification from the EPA. The owner or operator must maintain records of its super-emitter event investigations and report the findings from the investigation according to the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section.
(1) If you do not own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the notification, report this result to the EPA under paragraph (e) of this section. Your super-emitter event investigation is deemed complete.
(2) If you own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the notification, you must investigate to determine the source of super-emitter event. The investigation may include but is not limited to the actions specified below in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Review any maintenance activities (e.g., liquids unloading) or process activities from the affected facilities subject to regulation under this subpart, starting from the date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification, until the date of investigation, to determine if the activities indicate any potential source(s) of the super-emitter event emissions.
(ii) Review all monitoring data from control devices (e.g., flares) from the affected facilities subject to regulation under this subpart from the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification until the date of receiving the notification from the EPA. Identify any malfunctions of control devices or periods when the control devices were not in compliance with applicable requirements and that indicate a potential source of the super-emitter event emissions.
(iii) If you conducted a fugitive emissions survey or periodic screening event in accordance with § 60.5397b or § 60.5398b(b) between the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification and the date the notification from the EPA was received, review the results of the survey to identify any potential source(s) of the super-emitter event emissions.
(iv) If you conduct continuous monitoring with advanced methane detection technology in accordance with § 60.5398b(c), review the monitoring data collected on or after the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification, until the date of receiving the notification from the EPA.
(v) Screen the entire oil and natural gas facility with OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, or an alternative test method(s) approved per § 60.5398b(d), to determine if a super-emitter event is present.
(3) If the source of the super-emitter event was found to be from fugitive emission components at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station subject to this subpart, you must comply with the repair requirements under § 60.5397b and the associated recordkeeping and reporting requirements under § 60.5420b(b)(9) and (c)(14).
(e) Super-emitter event report. You must submit the results of the super-emitter event investigation conducted under paragraph (d) of this section to the EPA in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section. If the super-emitter event (i.e., emission at 100 kg/hr of methane or more) is ongoing at the time of the initial report, submit the additional information in accordance with paragraph (e)(2) of this section. You must attest to the information included in the report as specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(1) Within 15 days of receiving a notification from the EPA under paragraph (c) of this section, you must submit a report of the super-emitter event investigation conducted under paragraph (d) of this section through the Super-Emitter Program Portal. You must include the applicable information in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section in the report. If you have identified a demonstrable error in the notification, the report may include a statement of the demonstrable error.
(i) Notification Report ID of the super-emitter event notification.
(ii) Identification of whether you are the owner or operator of an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the EPA notification. If you do not own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the EPA notification, you are not required to report the information in paragraphs (e)(1)(iii) through (viii) of this section.
(iii) General identification information for the facility, including, facility name, the physical address, applicable ID Number (e.g., EPA ID Number, API Well ID Number), the owner or operator or responsible official (where applicable) and their email address.
(iv) Identification of whether there is an affected facility or associated equipment subject to regulation under this subpart at this oil and natural gas facility.
(v) Indication of whether you were able to identify the source of the super-emitter event. If you indicate you were unable to identify the source of the super-emitter event, you must certify that all applicable investigations specified in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (v) of this section have been conducted for all affected facilities and associated equipment subject to this subpart that are at this oil and natural gas facility, and you have determined that the affected facilities and associated equipment are not the source of the super-emitter event. If you indicate that you were not able to identify the source of the super-emitter event, you are not required to report the information in paragraphs (e)(1)(vi) through (viii) of this section.
(vi) The source(s) of the super-emitter event.
(vii) Identification of whether the source of the super-emitter event is equipment subject to regulation under this subpart. If the source of the super-emitter event is equipment subject to regulation under this subpart, identify the applicable regulation(s) under this subpart.
(viii) Indication of whether the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal (i.e., emissions at 100 kg/hr of methane or more).
(A) If the super-emitter event is not ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, provide the actual (or if unknown) estimated date and time the super-emitter event ended.
(B) If the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, provide a short narrative of your plan to end the super-emitter event, including the targeted end date for the efforts to be completed and the super-emitter event ended.
(2) If the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, within 5 business days of the date the super-emitter event ends, you must update your initial report through the Super-Emitter Program Portal to provide the end date and time of the super-emitter event.
(3) You must sign the following attestation when submitting data into the Super-Emitter Program Portal: “I certify that the information provided in this report regarding the specified super-emitter event was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the investigations were conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5371b(d) and (e). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that knowingly false statements may be punishable by fine or imprisonment.”
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62891, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35982, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5375b What GHG and VOC standards apply to well completions at well affected facilities?
(a) You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section for each well completion operation with hydraulic fracturing and refracturing at a well affected facility, except as provided in paragraphs (f), (g) and (h) of this section. You must maintain a log as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(1) For each stage of the well completion operation, follow the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) During the initial flowback stage, route the flowback into one or more well completion vessels or storage vessels and commence operation of a separator unless it is technically infeasible for a separator to function. The separator may be a production separator, but the production separator also must be designed to accommodate flowback. Any gas present in the initial flowback stage is not subject to control under this section.
(ii) During the separation flowback stage, route all recovered liquids from the separator to one or more well completion vessels or storage vessels, re-inject the recovered liquids into the well or another well, or route the recovered liquids to a collection system. Route the recovered gas from the separator into a gas flow line or collection system, re-inject the recovered gas into the well or another well, use the recovered gas as an onsite fuel source, or use the recovered gas for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve. If it is technically infeasible to route the recovered gas as required above, follow the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section. If, at any time during the separation flowback stage, it is technically infeasible for a separator to function, you must comply with paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section.
(iii) You must have the separator onsite or otherwise available for use at a centralized production facility or well pad that services the well completion affected facility during well completions. The separator must be available and ready for use to comply with paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section during the entirety of the flowback period, except as provided in paragraphs (a)(1)(iii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) A well that is not hydraulically fractured or refractured with liquids, or that does not generate condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids, or produced water such that there is no liquid collection system at the well site is not required to have a separator onsite.
(B) If conditions allow for liquid collection, then the operator must immediately stop the well completion operation, install a separator, and restart the well completion operation in accordance with paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(C) The owner or operator of a well that meets the criteria of paragraph (a)(1)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section must submit the report in § 60.5420b(b)(2) and maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(iii).
(2) If it is technically infeasible to route the recovered gas as required in paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section, then you must capture and direct recovered gas to a completion combustion device, except in conditions that may result in a fire hazard or explosion, or where high heat emissions from a completion combustion device may negatively impact tundra, permafrost or waterways. After January 22, 2027, completion combustion devices must be equipped with a reliable continuous pilot flame.
(3) You have a general duty to safely maximize resource recovery and minimize releases to the atmosphere during flowback and subsequent recovery.
(b) You must maintain a log for each well completion operation at each well affected facility. The log must be completed on a daily basis for the duration of the well completion operation and must contain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(iii).
(c) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the well completion operation standards that apply to well affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(a).
(d) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the well completion operation standards that apply to well affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(a).
(e) You must perform the required notification, reporting and recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(a)(2), (b)(1) and (2), and (c)(1).
(f) For each well affected facility specified in paragraphs (f)(1) and (2) of this section, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (f)(3) and (4) of this section.
(1) Each well completion operation with hydraulic fracturing at a wildcat or delineation well.
(2) Each well completion operation with hydraulic fracturing at a non-wildcat low pressure well or non-delineation low pressure well.
(3) You must comply with paragraph (f)(3)(i) of this section. You must also comply with paragraph (b) of this section. As an alternative, if you are able to operate a separator, you may comply with paragraph (b) and (f)(3)(ii) of this section. Compliance with paragraphs (f)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section is not required if you meet the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section.
(i) Route all flowback to a completion combustion device, except in conditions that may result in a fire hazard or explosion, or where high heat emissions from a completion combustion device may negatively impact tundra, permafrost or waterways. After January 22, 2027, completion combustion devices must be equipped with a reliable continuous pilot flame.
(ii) Route all flowback into one or more well completion vessels and commence operation of a separator unless it is technically infeasible for a separator to function. You must have the separator onsite or otherwise available for use at the wildcat well, delineation well, or low pressure well. The separator must be available and ready for use to comply with paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section during the entirety of the flowback period. Any gas present in the flowback before the separator can function is not subject to control under this section. Capture and direct recovered gas to a completion combustion device, except in conditions that may result in a fire hazard or explosion, or where high heat emissions from a completion combustion device may negatively impact tundra, permafrost, or waterways. After January 22, 2027, completion combustion devices must be equipped with a reliable continuous pilot flame.
(4) You must submit the notification as specified in § 60.5420b(a)(2), submit annual reports as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (2) and maintain records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(i) through (iii) and (vii) for each wildcat well, each delineation well, and each low pressure well.
(g) For each well completion affected facility with less than 300 scf of gas per stock tank barrel of oil produced, you must comply with paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must maintain records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(vi).
(2) You must submit reports specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (2).
(h) A well modified in accordance with § 60.5365b(a)(1)(ii) (i.e., an existing well that is hydraulically refractured) is exempt from the well completion operation standards in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section, when the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section are met.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 90 FR 35982, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5376b What GHG and VOC standards apply to gas well liquids unloading operations at well affected facilities?
(a) General requirements. You must comply with the requirements of this section for each gas well liquids unloading operation at your gas well affected facility as specified by paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. You have a general duty to safely maximize resource recovery and minimize releases to the atmosphere during gas well liquids unloading operations.
(1) If a gas well liquids unloading operation technology or technique employed does not result in venting of methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) and (d) and (e) of this section. If an unplanned venting event occurs, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section.
(i) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2)(i).
(ii) Submit the information specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (b)(3)(i) in the annual report.
(2) If a gas well liquids unloading operation technology or technique vents methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs (b) and (c), or paragraph (g) of this section.
(b) Work Practice Standards. If a gas well liquids unloading operation employs a technology or technique that vents methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) and paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section.
(1) Employ best management practices to minimize venting of methane and VOC emissions as specified in paragraph (c) of this section for each gas well liquids unloading operation.
(2) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2)(ii).
(3) Submit the information specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (b)(3)(ii) in the annual report.
(c) Best management practice requirements. For each gas well liquids unloading operation complying with paragraphs (a)(2) and (b) of this section, you must develop, maintain, and follow a best management practice plan to minimize venting of methane and VOC emissions to the maximum extent possible from each gas well liquids unloading operation. This best management practice plan must meet the minimum criteria specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Include steps that create a differential pressure to minimize the need to vent a well to unload liquids,
(2) Include steps to reduce wellbore pressure as much as possible prior to opening the well to the atmosphere,
(3) Unload liquids through the separator where feasible, and
(4) Close all wellhead vents to the atmosphere and return the well to production as soon as practicable.
(d) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to well liquids unloading operations at your well affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(b).
(e) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to well liquids unloading operations at your well affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(b).
(f) Recordkeeping and reporting. You must perform the required notification, recordkeeping and reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(3) and (c)(2).
(g) Other compliance options. Reduce methane and VOC emissions from well affected facility gas wells that unload liquids by 95.0 percent by complying with the requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section and meeting the initial and continuous compliance and recordkeeping and reporting requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(3) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must route emissions through a closed vent system to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(2) You must route emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(3) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to well affected facility gas well liquids unloading as required by § 60.5410b(b).
(4) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to well affected facility gas well liquids unloading as required by § 60.5415b(b).
(5) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1), (3), and (11) through (13), as applicable, and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(2), (8), and (10) through (13), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62891, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5377b What GHG and VOC standards apply to associated gas wells at well affected facilities?
(a) You must comply with either paragraph (a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) of this section for each associated gas well upon startup and at all times, except as provided in paragraphs (b) through (f) of this section. You must also comply with paragraphs (h), (i), and (j) of this section.
(1) Recover the associated gas from the separator and route the recovered gas into a gas gathering flow line or collection system to a sales line.
(2) Recover the associated gas from the separator and use the recovered gas as an onsite fuel source.
(3) Recover the associated gas from the separator and use the recovered gas for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve.
(4) Recover the associated gas from the separator and reinject the recovered gas into the well or inject the recovered gas into another well.
(b) For associated gas wells that commenced construction between May 7, 2024 and May 7, 2026, you can comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section continually upon startup instead of paragraph (a) of this section until May 7, 2026 if you demonstrate and certify that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. After May 7, 2026, you must continually comply with paragraph (a) of this section at all times.
(c) For associated gas wells that commenced construction between December 6, 2022, and May 7, 2024, and for associated gas wells that undergo reconstruction or modification after December 6, 2022, you can comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section instead of paragraph (a) of this section if you demonstrate and certify that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. Associated gas wells that are modified or reconstructed must comply with paragraph (a) or (f) of this section upon startup and at all times thereafter.
(d) If you are complying with paragraph (a) of this section, you may temporarily route the associated gas to a flare or control device that achieves a 95.0 percent reduction in VOC and methane emissions in the situations and for the durations identified in paragraph (d)(1), (2), (3), or (4) of this section. The associated gas must be routed through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and the control device must meet the conditions specified in § 60.5412b during the period when the associated gas is routed to the flare. Records must be kept of all instances in which associated gas is temporarily routed to a flare or to a control device in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(3)(i)(B) and reported in the annual report in accordance with § 60.5420b(b)(4)(i)(B).
(1) During a malfunction or incident that endangers the safety of operator personnel or the public you are allowed to route associated gas to a flare or control device until the malfunction or incident is resolved, but not longer than 72 hours per incident. Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed only until the malfunction or incident is resolved. Notwithstanding the previous sentences, if there are exigent circumstances that reasonably require routing to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section apply.
(i) An “exigent circumstance” for purposes of this paragraph (d)(1) is a situation that results in the inability to reasonably access a site with the necessary equipment and personnel to address and resolve incidents that cause the need to temporarily flare associated gas for more than 72 hours. This includes circumstances where there is a need to flare beyond 72 hours due to an unexpected malfunction event and equipment needed to resolve an incident are not readily available due to an owner's or operator's inability to secure the required equipment for reasons beyond an owner's or operator's control (i.e., supply chain issues); or there is a temporary shortage of personnel needed to resolve an incident due to a circumstance such as a declared national pandemic that is beyond the owner's or operator's control.
(ii) Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed until the malfunction or incident is resolved, but shall not be longer than 72 hours after the site can be accessed following the passing of the exigent circumstance.
(iii) For instances where you route associated gas to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, you must meet the reporting requirements specified in § 60.5420b(b)(4)(i)(B)(4) and must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(3)(v).
(2) During repair and maintenance, including blow downs, a production test, or commissioning, you are allowed to route associated gas to a flare or control device until the incident is resolved, but no longer than 72 hours per incident. Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed only until the incident is resolved. Notwithstanding the previous sentences, if there are exigent circumstances that reasonably require routing to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, paragraphs (d)(1)(i) through (iii) apply.
(3) For wells complying with paragraph (a)(1) of this section, during a temporary interruption in service from the gathering or pipeline system you are allowed to route to a flare or route to a control device for the duration of the temporary interruption not to exceed 30 days per incident.
(4) During periods when the composition of the associated gas does not meet pipeline specifications for sources complying with paragraph (a)(1) of this section, or when the composition of the associated gas does not meet the quality requirements for use as a fuel for sources complying with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, or when the composition of the associated gas does not meet the quality requirements for another useful purpose for sources complying with paragraph (a)(3) of this section, you are allowed to route to a flare or control device until the associated gas meets the required specifications or for 72 hours per incident, whichever is less.
(e) If you are complying with paragraph (a), (d), or (f) of this section, you may vent the associated gas in the situations and for the durations identified in paragraph (e)(1), (2), or (3) of this section per incident. The cumulative period of venting must not exceed 24 hours for any calendar year. Records must be kept of all venting instances in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(3)(ii) and reported in the annual report in accordance with § 60.5420b(b)(4)(ii).
(1) For up to 12 hours per incident to protect the safety of personnel.
(2) For up to 30 minutes per incident during bradenhead monitoring.
(3) For up to 30 minutes per incident during a packer leakage test.
(f) You must route the associated gas to a control device that reduces methane and VOC emissions by at least 95.0 percent. The associated gas must be routed through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and the control device must meet the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(1) For associated gas wells identified in paragraph (b) of this section, you can comply with the requirements in this paragraph (f) for up to a one year period if you demonstrate and certify that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. This allowance is renewable each year with an updated technical infeasibility demonstration and certification in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. Associated gas wells identified in paragraph (b) of this section are not allowed to comply with the requirements in this paragraph (f) after May 7, 2026.
(2) For associated gas wells identified in paragraph (c) of this section, you can comply with the requirements in this paragraph (f) for up to a one year period if you demonstrate and certify that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section. This allowance is renewable each year with an updated technical infeasibility demonstration and certification in accordance with paragraph (g) of this section.
(g) For affected sources identified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section that are complying with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section, you must demonstrate that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons by providing a detailed analysis documenting and certifying the technical reasons for this infeasibility.
(1) The demonstration must address the technical infeasibility for all options identified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section.
(2) This demonstration must be certified by a professional engineer or another qualified individual with expertise in the uses of associated gas. The following certification, signed and dated by the qualified professional engineer or other qualified individual shall state: “I certify that the assessment of technical and safety infeasibility was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the assessment was conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5377b(b). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(3) This demonstration and certification are valid for no more than 12 months. You must re-analyze the feasibility of complying with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section and finalize a new demonstration and certification each year.
(4) Documentation of these demonstrations, along with the certifications, must be maintained in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(3)(iii) and submitted in annual reports in accordance with § 60.5420b(b)(4)(iii)(C) and (D).
(h) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to associated gas wells as required by § 60.5410b(c).
(i) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to associated gas wells as required by § 60.5415b(c).
(j) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (4), and (b)(11) and (12), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(3) and (8), and (c)(10) through (13), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62891, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18093, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5380b What GHG and VOC standards apply to centrifugal compressor affected facilities?
Each centrifugal compressor affected facility must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section.
(a) Each centrifugal compressor affected facility that uses wet seals must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in paragraphs (a)(1), (2), or (3) of this section. Each self-contained wet seal compressor, and each centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section, or one of the alternatives in (a)(3) through (5) of this section, as applicable, and (a)(8) of this section. Each centrifugal compressor affected facility that uses dry seals must comply with paragraphs (a)(6) through (8) of this section, or with of the alternatives in paragraph (a)(9) of this section.
(1) You must reduce methane and VOC emissions from each centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system by 95.0 percent.
(2) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and the closed vent system must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(3) As an alternative to routing the closed vent system to a control device, you may route the closed vent system to a process. If you route the emissions to a process, you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(4) If you own or operate a self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor you may comply with the GHG and VOC requirements as specified in paragraph (a)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section, using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate, in lieu of meeting the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. You must determine the volumetric flow rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(i) of this section.
(i) The volumetric flow rate must not exceed 3 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 3 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(i) of this section exceeds 3 scfm multiplied by the number of wet seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(ii) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurement from your self-contained wet seal compressor on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024 or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(iii) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement which demonstrates compliance with the 3 scfm volumetric flow rate per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 3 scfm.
(5) If you own or operate a centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with seal oil separator and capture system, you may comply with the GHG and VOC requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate, in lieu of meeting the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2). You must determine the volumetric flow rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(ii) of this section.
(i) The volumetric flow rate per seal must not exceed 9 scfm per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 9 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(ii) of this section exceeds 9 scfm multiplied by the number of wet seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(ii) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurement from your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with a sour seal oil separator and capture system on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024 or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(iii) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal separator and capture system on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement which demonstrates compliance with the 9 scfm volumetric flow rate per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 9 scfm.
(6) If you own or operate a centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals, you must comply with the GHG and VOC requirements as specified in paragraphs (a)(6)(i) through (iii), using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate. You must determine the volumetric flow rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(iii) of this section.
(i) The volumetric flow rate per seal must not exceed 10 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 10 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(7)(iii) of this section exceeds 10 scfm multiplied by the number of dry seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(ii) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurement from your centrifugal compressor equipped with a dry seal on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024 or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(iii) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement which demonstrates compliance with the 10 scfm volumetric flow rate per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 10 scfm.
(7) You must determine the volumetric flow rate for your centrifugal compressor, as specified in paragraphs (a)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) You must determine the volumetric flow rate from your self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor wet seal as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(i)(A) or (B) of this section. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 3 scfm multiplied by the number of wet seals connected to the vent, the wet seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(A) For self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressors in operating-mode or in standby-pressurized-mode, determine volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from each self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor wet seal using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (a)(7)(i)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) You may choose to use any of the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a) to screen for leaks/emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, when using any of the methods in § 60.5386b(a), emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to the method. If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(i)(A)(2) or (3) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5386b(a), then you may assume that the volumetric emissions are zero.
(2) Use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b).
(3) Use a high-volume sampler according to the method set forth in § 60.5386b(c).
(B) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor seals, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from the self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor seal as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(i)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor seal inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(2) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(i)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(ii) You must determine the volumetric flow rate from your centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 9 scfm multiplied by the number of wet seals connected to the vent, the wet seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(A) For centrifugal compressors in operating-mode or in standby-pressurized-mode, determine volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from each centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with a sour seal oil separator and capture system using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (a)(7)(ii)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) You may choose to use any of the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a) to screen for leaks/emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, when using any of the methods in § 60.5386b(a), emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to the method. If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(ii)(A)(2) or (3) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5386b(a), then you may assume that the volumetric emissions are zero.
(2) Use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b).
(3) Use a high-volume sampler according to the method set forth in § 60.5386b(c).
(B) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of centrifugal compressors on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separators and capture systems, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from the centrifugal compressors equipped with sour seal oil separators and capture systems as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(ii)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all centrifugal compressors on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system wet seal inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(2) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(ii)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(iii) You must determine the volumetric flow rate from your centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 10 scfm multiplied by the number of dry seals connected to the vent, the dry seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(8) of this section.
(A) For centrifugal compressors equipped with dry seals in operating-mode or in standby-pressurized-mode, determine volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from each centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (a)(7)(iii)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) You may choose to use any of the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a) to screen for leaks/emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, when using any of the methods in § 60.5386b(a), emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to the method. If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(iii)(A)(2) or (3) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5386b(a), then you may assume that the volumetric emissions are zero.
(2) Use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b).
(3) Use a high-volume sampler according to the method set forth in § 60.5386b(c).
(B) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of centrifugal compressors equipped with dry seals, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from the dry seal centrifugal compressors as specified in paragraph (a)(7)(iii)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all centrifugal compressors equipped with dry seals inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(2) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7)(iii)(A)(1) through (3) of this section.
(8) The seal must be repaired within 90 calendar days after the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per seal. You must conduct follow-up volumetric flow rate measurements from seal vents using the methods specified in paragraph (a)(7) of this section within 15 days after the repair to document that the rate has been reduced to less than the applicable required flow rate per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line or vent, the volumetric flow rate must be reduced to less than the sum of the individual seals multiplied by the applicable required flow rate per seal specified in paragraph (a)(4) through (6) of this section, as applicable. Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (a)(8)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) If the repair of the wet or dry seal is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per seal, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(ii) If the repair requires replacement of the compressor seal or a part thereof, but the replacement cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified under this section due to the condition specified in paragraph (a)(8)(ii)(A) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (a)(8)(ii)(B) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(4)(iii)(F) through (H).
(A) Seal or part thereof supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(B) The required replacement must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the centrifugal compressor seal is added to the delay of repair list due to parts unavailability. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement seal or part, unless the repair requires a compressor station shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (a)(8)(i) of this section.
(9) As an alternative to meeting the requirements for centrifugal compressors with dry seals specified in paragraphs (a)(6) through (8) of this section, owners or operators are allowed to comply with the standard by meeting the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(9)(i) and (ii), or (a)(9)(iii) of this section.
(i) You must reduce methane and VOC emissions from each centrifugal compressor dry seal system by 95.0 percent.
(ii) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must equip the dry seal system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and the closed vent system must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(iii) As an alternative to routing the closed vent system to a control device, you may route the closed vent system to a process. If you route the emissions to a process, you must equip the dry seal system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(b) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to centrifugal compressor affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(d).
(c) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to centrifugal compressor affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(d).
(d) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (5), and (b)(11) through (13), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(4), and (8) through (13), as applicable.
§ 60.5385b What GHG and VOC standards apply to reciprocating compressor affected facilities?
Each reciprocating compressor affected facility must comply with the GHG and VOC standards, using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate, in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, or the GHG and VOC standards in paragraph (d) of this section. You must also comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e) through (g) of this section.
(a) The volumetric flow rate of each cylinder, measured in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, must not exceed 2 scfm per individual cylinder. If the individual cylinders are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm. You must conduct measurements of the volumetric flow rate in accordance with the schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section and determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section. If the volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, for a cylinder exceeds 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined volumetric flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm), the rod packing or packings must be repaired or replaced as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(1) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurements from your reciprocating compressor rod packing vent on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last rod packing replacement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(2) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your reciprocating compressor rod packing vent on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement which demonstrates compliance with the applicable volumetric flow rate of 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined volumetric flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm), or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last rod packing replacement, whichever date is later.
(3) The rod packing must be repaired or replaced within 90 calendar days after the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeded 2 scfm per cylinder. You must conduct follow-up volumetric flow rate measurements from compressor vents using the methods specified in paragraph (b) or (c) of this section within 15 days after the repair (or rod packing replacement) to document that the rate has been reduced to less than 2 scfm per cylinder. Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraph (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) If the repair (or rod packing replacement) is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair (or rod packing replacement) must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per cylinder, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(ii) If the repair requires replacement of the rod packing or a part, but the replacement cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified under this section due to the condition specified in paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(5)(viii) through (x).
(A) Rod packing or part supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(B) The required rod packing or part replacement must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the reciprocating compressor is added to the delay of repair list due to parts unavailability. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement rod packing or part, unless the repair requires a compressor station shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section.
(b) You must determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder from your reciprocating compressor as specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) For reciprocating compressor rod packing equipped with an open-ended vent line on compressors in operating or standby pressurized mode, determine the volumetric flow rate of the rod packing using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the open-ended vent line using a high-volume sampler according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(c).
(ii) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the open-ended vent line using a temporary or permanent meter, according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b).
(iii) Any of the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a) to screen for leaks and emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to any of the methods in § 60.5386b(a). If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5386b(a), then you may assume that the volumetric flow rate is zero.
(2) For reciprocating compressor rod packing not equipped with an open-ended vent line on compressors in operating or standby pressurized mode, you must determine the volumetric flow rate of the rod packing using the methods specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must use the methods described in § 60.5386b(a) to conduct leak detection of emissions from the rod packing case into an open distance piece, or, for compressors with a closed distance piece, you must conduct annual leak detection of emissions from the rod packing vent, distance piece vent, compressor crank case breather cap, or other vent emitting gas from the rod packing.
(ii) You must measure emissions found in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section using a meter or high-volume sampler according to methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b) or (c).
(c) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of reciprocating compressor affected facilities, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from reciprocating compressor rod packing vent as specified in paragraph (c)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all compressor vent inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(2) Determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A temporary or permanent flow meter according to the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(b).
(ii) A high-volume sampler according to methods set forth § 60.5386b(c).
(iii) An alternative method, as set forth in § 60.5386b(d).
(iv) Any of the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a) to screen for emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected when using any of the methods in § 60.5386b(a). If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5386b(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5386b(a), then you may assume that the volumetric flow rate is zero.
(d) As an alternative to complying with the GHG and VOC standards in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, owners or operators can meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.
(1) Collect the methane and VOC emissions from your reciprocating compressor rod packing using a rod packing emissions collection system that is operated to route the rod packing emissions to a process. In order to comply with this option, you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(2) Reduce methane and VOC emissions from each rod packing emissions collection system by using a control device that reduces methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent. In order to comply with this option, you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and the closed vent system must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(3) As an alternative to conducting the required volumetric flow rate measurements under paragraph (a) of this section, an owner or operator can choose to comply by replacing the rod packing on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after May 7, 2024, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous flow rate measurement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the date of the most recent compressor rod packing replacement, whichever date is later.
(e) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to reciprocating compressor affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(e).
(f) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to reciprocating compressor affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(g).
(g) You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (6), and (11) through (13), as applicable; and the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(5) and (8) through (13), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62891, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5386b What test methods and procedures must I use for my centrifugal compressor and reciprocating compressor affected facilities?
(a) You must use one of the methods described in paragraph (a)(1) and (2) of this section to screen for emissions or leaks from the reciprocating compressor rod packing when complying with § 60.5385b(b)(1)(iii) and from applicable wet seal centrifugal compressor and dry seal centrifugal compressor vents when complying with § 60.5380b(a)(3) through (6).
(1) OGI instrument. Use an OGI instrument for equipment leak detection as specified in either paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. For the purposes of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, any visible emissions observed by the OGI instrument from reciprocating rod packing or compressor dry or wet seal vent is a leak.
(i) OGI instrument as specified in appendix K of this part. For reciprocating compressor, applicable wet seal centrifugal compressor, and dry seal centrifugal compressor affected facilities located at onshore natural gas processing plants, use an OGI instrument to screen for emissions from reciprocating rod packing or centrifugal compressor dry seal vent in accordance with the protocol specified in appendix K of this part.
(ii) OGI instrument as specified in § 60.5397b of this subpart. For reciprocating compressor, applicable wet seal centrifugal compressor, and dry seal centrifugal compressor affected facilities located at centralized production facilities, compressor stations, or other location that is not an onshore natural gas processing plant, use an OGI instrument to screen for emissions from reciprocating rod packing or compressor dry seals in accordance with the elements of § 60.5397b(c)(7).
(2) Method 21. Use Method 21 in appendix A-7 to this part according to § 60.5403b(b)(1) and (2). For the purposes of this section, an instrument reading of 500 parts per million by volume (ppmv) above background or greater is a leak.
(b) You must determine natural gas volumetric flow rate using a rate meter which meets the requirement in Method 2D in appendix A-1 of this part. Rate meters must be calibrated on an annual basis according to the requirements in Method 2D.
(c) You must use a high-volume sampler to measure emissions of the reciprocating compressor rod packing, applicable centrifugal compressor wet seal vent, or centrifugal compressor dry seal vent in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must use a high-volume sampler designed to capture the entirety of the emissions from the applicable vent and measure the entire range of methane concentrations being emitted as well as the total volumetric flow at standard conditions. You must develop a standard operating procedure for this device and document these procedures in the appropriate monitoring plan. In order to get reliable results, persons using this device should be knowledgeable in its operation and the requirements in this section.
(2) This procedure may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This procedure may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this procedure.
(3) The high-volume sampler must include a methane gas sensor(s) which meets the requirements in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The methane sensor(s) must be selective to methane with minimal interference, less than 2.5 percent for the sum of responses to other compounds in the gas matrix. You must document the minimal interference though empirical testing or through data provided by the manufacturer of the sensor.
(ii) The methane sensor(s) must have a measurement range over the entire expected range of concentrations.
(iii) The methane sensor(s) must be capable of taking a measurement once every second, and the data system must be capable of recording these results for each sensor at all times during operation of the sampler.
(4) The high-volume sampler must be designed such that it is capable of sampling sufficient volume in order to capture all emissions from the applicable vent. Your high-volume sampler must include a flow measurement sensor(s) which meets the requirements of paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) The flow measurement sensor must have a measurement range over the entire expected range of flow rates sampled. If needed multiple sensors may be used to capture the entire range of expected flow rates.
(ii) The flow measurement sensor(s) must be capable of taking a measurement once every second, and the data system must be capable of recording these results for each sensor at all times during operation of the sampler.
(5) You must calibrate your methane sensor(s) according to the procedures in paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, and flow measurement sensors must be calibrated according to the procedures in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
(i) For Methane Sensor Calibration:
(A) Initially and on a semi-annual basis, determine the linearity at four points through the measurement range for each methane sensor using methane gaseous calibration cylinder standards. At each point, the difference between the cylinder value and the sensor reading must be less than 5 percent of the respective calibration gas value. If the sensor does not meet this requirement, perform corrective action on the sensor, and do not use the sampler until these criteria can be met.
(B) Prior to and at the end of each testing day, challenge each sensor at two points, a low point, and a mid-point, using methane gaseous calibration cylinder standards. At each point, the difference between the cylinder value and the sensor reading must be less than 5 percent of the respective calibration gas value. If the sensor does not meet this requirement, perform corrective action on the sensor and do not use the sampler again until these criteria can be met. If the post-test calibration check fails at either point, invalidate the data from all tests performed subsequent to the last passing calibration check.
(ii) Flow measurement sensors must meet the requirements in Method 2D in appendix A-1 of this part. Rate meters must be calibrated on an annual basis according to the requirements in Method 2D. If your flow sensor relies on ancillary temperature and pressure measurements to correct the flow rate to standard conditions, the temperature and pressure sensors must also be calibrated on an annual basis. Standard conditions are defined as 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
(6) You must conduct sampling of the reciprocating compressor rod packing, applicable wet seal centrifugal compressor, or dry seal centrifugal compressor vent in accordance with the procedures in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) The instrument must be operated consistent with manufacturer recommendations; users are encouraged to develop a standard operating procedure to document the exact procedures used for sampling.
(ii) Identify the rod packing, applicable wet seal centrifugal compressor, or dry seal centrifugal compressor vent to be measured and record the signal to noise ratio (S/N) of the engine. Collect a background methane sample in ppmv for a minimum of one minute and record the result along with the date and time.
(iii) Approach the vent with the sample hose and adjust the sampler so that you are measuring at the full flow rate. Then, adjust the flow rate to ensure the measured methane concentration is within the calibrated range of the methane sensor and minimum methane concentration is at least 2 ppmv higher than the background concentration. Sample for a period of at least one minute and record the average flow rate in standard cubic feet per minute and the methane sample concentration in ppmv, along with the date and time. Standard conditions are defined as 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
(iv) Calculate the leak rate according to the following equation:
Where:
CH4B = background methane concentration, ppmv
CH4S = methane sample concentration, ppmv
V = Average flow rate of the sampler, scfm
Q = Methane emission rate, scfm
(v) You must collect at least three separate one-minute measurements and determine the average leak rate. The relative percent difference of these three separate samples should be less than 10 percent.
(7) If the measured natural gas flow determined as specified in paragraph (c)(6) of this section exceeds 70.0 percent of the manufacturer's reported maximum sampling flow rate you must either use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to paragraph (b) of this section or use another method meeting the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section to determine the leak or flow rate.
(d) As an alternative to a high-volume sampler, you may use any other method that has been validated in accordance with the procedures specified in Method 301 in appendix A in 40 CFR part 63, subject to Administrator approval, as specified in § 60.8(b).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62892, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5390b What GHG and VOC standards apply to process controller affected facilities?
Each process controller affected facility must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in this section.
(a) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, you must design and operate each process controller affected facility with zero methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(1) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, emissions must be routed to a process through a closed vent system.
(2) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must design and operate each self-contained natural gas-driven process controller with no identifiable emissions, as demonstrated by § 60.5416b(b).
(b) For each process controller affected facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power, you may comply with either paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section or with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, instead of complying with paragraph (a) of this section.
(1) With the exception of natural gas-driven continuous bleed controllers that meet the condition in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section and that comply with paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, each natural gas-driven continuous bleed process controller in the process controller affected facility must have a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 standard cubic feet per hour (scfh).
(i) A natural gas-driven continuous bleed process controller with a bleed rate higher than 6 scfh may be used if the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section are met.
(ii) You demonstrate that a natural gas-driven continuous bleed controller with a bleed rate higher than 6 scfh is required. The demonstration must be based on the specific functional need, including but not limited to response time, safety, or positive actuation.
(2) Each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller in the process controller affected facility must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller must not emit to the atmosphere during idle periods.
(ii) You must monitor each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller to ensure that it is not emitting to the atmosphere during idle periods, as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Monitoring must be conducted at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397b(g).
(B) You must include the monitoring of each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller in the monitoring plan required in § 60.5397b(b).
(C) When monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from a natural gas-driven intermittent vent controller during idle periods, you must take corrective action by repairing or replacing the natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller within 5 calendar days of the date the emissions to the atmosphere were detected. After the repair or replacement of a natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller, you must re-survey the natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller within five days to verify that it is not venting emissions during idle periods.
(3) You must reduce methane and VOC emissions from all controllers in the process controller affected facility by 95.0 percent. You must route emissions through a closed vent system to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(c) If you route process controller emissions to a process or a control device, you must route the process controller affected facility emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(d) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to process controller affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(f).
(e) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to process controller affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(h).
(f) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1), (7), and (11) through (13), as applicable, and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(6), (8), and (10) through (13), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5393b What GHG and VOC standards apply to pump affected facilities?
Each pump affected facility must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in this section.
(a) For each pump affected facility meeting the criteria specified in paragraphs (a)(1) or (2) of this section, you must design and operate the pump affected facility with zero methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere. If you comply by routing the pump affected facility emissions to a process, the emissions must be routed to the process through a closed vent system.
(1) The pump affected facility is located at a site that has access to electrical power.
(2) The pump affected facility is located at a site that does not have access to electrical power and has three or more natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps.
(b)(1) For each pump affected facility located at a site that does not have access to electrical power and that also has fewer than three natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps, you must comply with paragraph (b)(2) or (3) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(4) through (8) of this section.
(2) Emissions from the pump affected facility must be routed through a closed vent system to a process if a vapor recovery unit is onsite.
(3) If a vapor recovery unit is not onsite, you must reduce methane and VOC emissions from the pump affected facility by 95.0 percent. You must route affected pump facility emissions through a closed vent system to a control device meeting the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(4) You are not required to install an emissions control device or a vapor recovery unit, if such a unit is necessary to enable emissions to be routed to a process, solely for the purpose of complying with the requirements of paragraph (b)(2) or (3) of this section. If no control device capable of achieving a 95.0 percent emissions reduction and no vapor recovery unit is present on site, you must comply with paragraph (b)(5) or (6) of this section, as applicable. For the purposes of this section, boilers and process heaters are not considered to be control devices.
(5) If an emissions control device is on site but is unable to achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction, you must route the pump affected facility emissions through a closed vent system to that control device. You must certify that there is no vapor recovery unit on site and that there is no control device capable of achieving a 95.0 percent emissions reduction on site.
(6) If there is no vapor recovery unit on site and no emission control device is on site, you must certify that there is no vapor recovery unit or emissions control device on site. If you subsequently install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(6)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must be in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) of this section, as applicable, within 30 days of startup of the control device or vapor recovery unit.
(ii) You must maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(15)(ii) through (iv), as applicable. You are no longer required to maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(15)(v) certifying that there is no vapor recovery unit or control device on site.
(7) If an owner or operator complying with paragraph (b)(1) of this section determines, through an engineering assessment, that routing the pump affected facility emissions to a control device or to a process is technically infeasible, the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section must be met.
(i) The owner or operator must conduct the assessment of technical infeasibility in accordance with the criteria in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section and have it certified by either a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer with expertise on the design and operation of the pump affected facility and the control device or processes at the site in accordance with paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section.
(ii) The assessment of technical infeasibility to route emissions from the pump affected facility to an existing control device or process must include, but is not limited to, safety considerations, distance from the control device or process, pressure losses and differentials in the closed vent system, and the ability of the control device or process to handle the pump affected facility emissions which are routed to them. The assessment of technical infeasibility must be prepared under the direction or supervision of the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer who signs the certification in accordance with paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section.
(iii) The following certification, signed and dated by the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer, must state: “I certify that the assessment of technical infeasibility was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the assessment was conducted and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5393b(b)(7)(ii). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(8) If the pump affected facility emissions are routed to a control device or process and the control device or process is subsequently removed from the location or is no longer available, such that there is no option to route to a control device or process, you are no longer required to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) or (3) of this section, and instead must comply with paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(c) If you use a control device or route to a process to reduce emissions, you must route the pump affected facility emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(d) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to pump affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(g).
(e) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to pump affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(e).
(f) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1), (10), and (11) through (13), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(8), (10) through (13), and (15), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62892, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5395b What GHG and VOC standards apply to storage vessel affected facilities?
Each storage vessel affected facility must comply with the GHG and VOC standards in this section, except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section.
(a) General requirements. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. After 12 consecutive months of compliance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you may continue to comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, or you may comply with paragraph (a)(3) of this section, if applicable. If you choose to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(3) of this section, you are not required to comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section except as provided in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(1) Determine the potential for methane and VOC emissions in accordance with § 60.5365b(e)(2).
(2) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent.
(3) Maintain the uncontrolled actual VOC emissions at less than 4 tpy and the actual methane emissions at less than 14 tpy from the storage vessel affected facility without considering control. Prior to using the uncontrolled actual VOC and methane emission rates for compliance purposes, you must demonstrate that the uncontrolled actual VOC emissions have remained less than 4 tpy and the uncontrolled actual methane emissions have remained less than 14 tpy as determined monthly for 12 consecutive months. After such demonstration, you must determine the uncontrolled actual rolling 12-month determination VOC and methane emissions rates each month. The uncontrolled actual VOC and methane emissions must be calculated using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology which account for flashing, working and breathing losses, and the calculations must be based on the actual average throughput, temperature, and separator pressure for the month. You may no longer comply with this paragraph and must instead comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section if your storage vessel affected facility meets the conditions specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) If a well feeding the storage vessel affected facility undergoes fracturing or refracturing, you must comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section as soon as liquids from the well following fracturing or refracturing are routed to the storage vessel affected facility.
(ii) If the rolling 12-month emissions determination required in this section indicates that VOC emissions increase to 4 tpy or greater or the methane emissions increase to 14 tpy or greater from your storage vessel affected facility and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel affected facility, you must comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section within 30 days of the monthly determination.
(b) Control requirements. (1) Except as required in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, if you use a control device to reduce methane and VOC emissions from your storage vessel affected facility, you must meet all of the design and operational criteria specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Each storage vessel in the tank battery must be equipped with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b);
(ii) The tank battery must be equipped with one or more closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c); and
(iii) The vapors collected in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) of this section must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b. As an alternative to routing the closed vent system to a control device, you may route the closed vent system to a process.
(2) For storage vessel affected facilities that do not have flashing emissions and that are not located at well sites or centralized production facilities, you may use a floating roof to reduce emissions. If you use a floating roof to reduce emissions, you must meet the requirements of § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) and the relevant monitoring, inspection, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in subpart Kb of this part. You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) with the initial annual report specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (8).
(c) Requirements for storage vessel affected facilities that are removed from service or returned to service. If you remove a storage vessel affected facility from service or remove a portion of a storage vessel affected facility from service, you must comply with the applicable paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section. A storage vessel is not an affected facility under this subpart for the period that it is removed from service.
(1) For a storage vessel affected facility to be removed from service, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must completely empty and degas each storage vessel, such that each storage vessel no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(ii) You must submit a notification as required in § 60.5420b(b)(8)(vii) in your next annual report, identifying each storage vessel affected facility removed from service during the reporting period and the date of its removal from service.
(2) For a portion of a storage vessel affected facility to be removed from service, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You must completely empty and degas the storage vessel(s), such that the storage vessel(s) no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(ii) You must disconnect the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery by isolating the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery such that the storage vessel(s) is no longer manifolded to the tank battery by liquid or vapor transfer.
(iii) You must submit a notification as required in § 60.5420b(b)(8)(vii) in your next annual report, identifying each storage vessel removed from service during the reporting period, the impacted storage vessel affected facility, and the date of its removal from service.
(iv) The remaining storage vessel(s) in the tank battery remain a storage vessel affected facility and must continue to comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
(3) If a storage vessel identified in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) or (c)(2)(iii) of this section is returned to service, you must determine its affected facility status as provided in § 60.5365b(e)(6).
(4) For each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility returned to service during the reporting period, you must submit a notification in your next annual report as required in § 60.5420b(b)(8)(viii), identifying each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility and the date of its return to service.
(d) Compliance, notification, recordkeeping, and reporting. You must comply with paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards as required by § 60.5410b(j).
(2) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards as required by § 60.5415b(i).
(3) You must perform the required reporting as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (8) and (b)(11) through (13), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420b(c)(7) and (c)(8) through (13), as applicable.
(e) Exemptions. This subpart does not apply to storage vessels subject to and controlled in accordance with the requirements for storage vessels in subpart Kb of this part, and 40 CFR part 63, subparts G, CC, HH, or WW.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62892, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5397b What GHG and VOC standards apply to fugitive emissions components affected facilities?
This section applies to fugitive emissions components affected facilities. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (l) of this section to reduce fugitive emissions of methane and VOC. The requirements of this section are independent of the cover and closed vent system requirements of § 60.5411b.
(a) General requirements. You must monitor all fugitive emissions components affected facilities in accordance with paragraphs (b) through (g) of this section. You must repair all sources of fugitive emissions in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance in accordance with paragraph (i) of this section. You must keep records in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section and report in accordance with paragraph (k) of this section. You must meet the requirements for well closures in accordance with paragraph (l) of this section.
(b) Develop fugitive emissions monitoring plan. You must develop a fugitive emissions monitoring plan that covers all fugitive emissions components affected facilities within each company-defined area in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(c) Elements of fugitive emissions monitoring plan. Your fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (8) of this section, at a minimum.
(1) Frequency for conducting surveys. Surveys must be conducted at least as frequently as required by paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section.
(2) Technique for determining fugitive emissions (i.e., AVO or other detection methods, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, and/or OGI and meeting the requirements of paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (vii) of this section).
(3) Manufacturer and model number of fugitive emissions detection equipment to be used, if applicable.
(4) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components from which fugitive emissions are detected, including timeframes for fugitive emission components that are unsafe to repair. Your repair schedule must meet the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section at a minimum.
(5) Procedures and timeframes for verifying fugitive emission component repairs.
(6) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(7) If you are using OGI, your plan must also include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Verification that your OGI equipment meets the specifications of paragraphs (c)(7)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. This verification is an initial verification, and may either be performed by the facility, by the manufacturer, or by a third party. For the purposes of complying with the fugitive emissions monitoring program with OGI, fugitive emissions are defined as any visible emissions observed using OGI.
(A) Your OGI equipment must be capable of imaging gases in the spectral range for the compound of highest concentration in the potential fugitive emissions.
(B) Your OGI equipment must be capable of imaging a gas that is half methane, half propane at a concentration of 10,000 ppm at a flow rate of ≤60 g/hr from a quarter inch diameter orifice.
(ii) Procedure for a daily verification check.
(iii) Procedure for determining the operator's maximum viewing distance from the equipment and how the operator will ensure that this distance is maintained.
(iv) Procedure for determining maximum wind speed during which monitoring can be performed and how the operator will ensure monitoring occurs only at wind speeds below this threshold.
(v) Procedures for conducting surveys, including the items specified in paragraphs (c)(7)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) How the operator will ensure an adequate thermal background is present in order to view potential fugitive emissions.
(B) How the operator will deal with adverse monitoring conditions, such as wind.
(C) How the operator will deal with interferences (e.g., steam).
(vi) Training and experience needed prior to performing surveys.
(vii) Procedures for calibration and maintenance. At a minimum, procedures must comply with those recommended by the manufacturer.
(8) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, your plan must also include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section. For the purposes of complying with the fugitive emissions monitoring program using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part a fugitive emission is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater.
(i) Verification that your monitoring equipment meets the requirements specified in Section 6.0 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. For purposes of instrument capability, the fugitive emissions definition shall be 500 ppmv or greater methane using a FID-based instrument. If you wish to use an analyzer other than an FID-based instrument, you must develop a site-specific fugitive emission definition that would be equivalent to 500 ppmv methane using a FID-based instrument (e.g., 10.6 eV PID with a specified isobutylene concentration as the fugitive emission definition would provide equivalent response to your compound of interest).
(ii) Procedures for conducting surveys. At a minimum, the procedures shall ensure that the surveys comply with the relevant sections of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, including Section 8.3.1.
(iii) Procedures for calibration. The instrument must be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. At a minimum, you must also conduct precision tests at the interval specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 8.1.2, and a calibration drift assessment at the end of each monitoring day. The calibration drift assessment must be conducted as specified in paragraph (c)(8)(iii)(A) of this section. Corrective action for drift assessments is specified in paragraphs (c)(8)(iii)(B) and (C) of this section.
(A) Check the instrument using the same calibration gas that was used to calibrate the instrument before use. Follow the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 10.1, except do not adjust the meter readout to correspond to the calibration gas value. If multiple scales are used, record the instrument reading for each scale used. Divide the arithmetic difference of the initial and post-test calibration response by the corresponding calibration gas value for each scale and multiply by 100 to express the calibration drift as a percentage.
(B) If a calibration drift assessment shows a negative drift of more than 10 percent, then all equipment with instrument readings between the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 minus the percent of negative drift) divided by 100 and the fugitive emission definition that was monitored since the last calibration must be re-monitored.
(C) If any calibration drift assessment shows a positive drift of more than 10 percent from the initial calibration value, then, at the owner/operator's discretion, all equipment with instrument readings above the fugitive emission definition and below the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 plus the percent of positive drift) divided by 100 monitored since the last calibration may be re-monitored.
(iv) Procedures for monitoring yard piping (other than buried yard piping). At a minimum, place the probe inlet at the surface of the yard piping and run the probe down the length of the piping. Connection points on the piping must be monitored following the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(d) Additional elements of fugitive emissions monitoring plan. Each fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the elements specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section, at a minimum, as applicable.
(1) If you are using OGI, your plan must include procedures to ensure that all fugitive emissions components, except buried yard piping and associated components (e.g., connectors), are monitored during each survey. Example procedures include, but are not limited to, a sitemap with an observation path, a written narrative of where the fugitive emissions components are located and how they will be monitored, or an inventory of fugitive emissions components.
(2) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, your plan must include a list of fugitive emissions components to be monitored and method for determining the location of fugitive emissions components to be monitored in the field (e.g., tagging, identification on a process and instrumentation diagram, etc.). Your fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the written plan developed for all of the fugitive emissions components designated as difficult-to-monitor in accordance with paragraph (g)(2) of this section, and the written plan for fugitive emissions components designated as unsafe-to-monitor in accordance with paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
(e) Monitoring of fugitive emissions components. Each fugitive emissions component, except buried yard piping and associated components (e.g., connectors), shall be observed or monitored for fugitive emissions during each monitoring survey.
(f) Initial monitoring survey. You must conduct initial monitoring surveys according to the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) At single wellhead only sites and small sites, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey using audible, visual, and olfactory (AVO), or any other detection methods (e.g., OGI), within 90 days of the startup of production, for each fugitive emissions components affected facility or by June 6, 2024 whichever date is later.
(2) For multi-wellhead only well sites, well sites or centralized production facilities that contain the major production and processing equipment specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A), (B), (C), or (D) of this section, and compressor station sites, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part within 90 days of the startup of production, for each fugitive emissions components affected facility or by June 6, 2024 whichever date is later.
(3) For a modified or reconstructed fugitive emissions components affected facility, the initial monitoring survey must be conducted within 90 days of the startup of production for each fugitive emissions components affected facility after the modification or reconstruction or by June 6, 2024, whichever date is later.
(4) Notwithstanding the deadlines specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section, for each fugitive emissions components affected facility located on the Alaskan North Slope that starts up production between September and March, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey within 6 months of the startup of production for a new well site, within 6 months of the first day of production after a modification of the fugitive emissions components affected facility, or by the following June 30, whichever date is latest.
(g) Monitoring frequency. A monitoring survey of each fugitive emissions components affected facility must be performed as specified in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, with the exceptions noted in paragraphs (g)(2) through (4) of this section. Monitoring for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at well sites and centralized production facilities that have wells located onsite must continue at the specified frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (vi) of this section until the well closure requirements of paragraph (l) of this section are completed.
(1) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components affected facilities must be conducted using the methods and at the frequencies specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions component affected facilities located at single wellhead only well sites must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(ii) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions component affected facilities located at small well sites must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. At small well sites with an uncontrolled storage vessel, a visual inspection of all thief hatches and other openings on the storage vessel that are fugitive emissions components must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey to ensure that they are kept closed and sealed at all times except during times of adding or removing material, inspecting or sampling material, or during required maintenance operations. If evidence of a deviation from this requirement is found, you must take corrective action. At small well sites with a separator, a visual inspection of all separator dump valves to ensure the dump valve is free of debris and not stuck in an open position must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey. Any dump valve not operating as designed must be repaired.
(iii) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at multi-wellhead only well sites must be conducted in accordance with paragraphs (g)(1)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section.
(A) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(B) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least semiannually using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive semiannual surveys must be conducted at least 4 months apart and no more than 7 months apart.
(iv) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at well sites or centralized production facilities that contain the major production and processing equipment specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A), (B), (C), or (D) must be conducted at the frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(E) and (F) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section.
(A) One or more controlled storage vessels or tank batteries.
(B) One or more control devices.
(C) One or more natural gas-driven process controllers or pumps.
(D) Two or more pieces of major production and processing equipment not specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(E) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least bimonthly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. A visual inspection of all thief hatches and other openings on storage vessels (or tank batteries) that are fugitive emissions components must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey to ensure that they are kept closed and sealed at all times except during times of adding or removing material, inspecting or sampling material, or during required maintenance operations. If evidence of a deviation from this requirement is found, you must take corrective action. A visual inspection must be conducted of all separator dump valves to ensure the dump valve is free of debris and not stuck in an open position must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey. Any dump valve not operating as designed must be repaired.
(F) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive quarterly monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 60 calendar days apart.
(v) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components affected facility located at a compressor station must be conducted at the frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(v)(A) and (B) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section,
(A) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least monthly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(B) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive quarterly monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 60 calendar days apart.
(vi) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components affected facility located on the Alaska North Slope must be conducted using OGI of this part or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part at least annually. Consecutive annual monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 9 months apart and no more than 13 months apart.
(2) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, fugitive emissions components that cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 2 meters above the surface may be designated as difficult-to-monitor. Fugitive emissions components that are designated difficult-to-monitor must meet the specifications of paragraphs (g)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A written plan must be developed for all the fugitive emissions components designated difficult-to-monitor. This written plan must be incorporated into the fugitive emissions monitoring plan required by paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(ii) The plan must include the identification and location of each fugitive emissions component designated as difficult-to-monitor.
(iii) The plan must include an explanation of why each fugitive emissions component designated as difficult-to-monitor is difficult-to-monitor.
(iv) The plan must include a schedule for monitoring the difficult-to-monitor fugitive emissions components at least once per calendar year.
(3) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, fugitive emissions components that cannot be monitored because monitoring personnel would be exposed to immediate danger while conducting a monitoring survey may be designated as unsafe-to-monitor. Fugitive emissions components that are designated unsafe-to-monitor must meet the specifications of paragraphs (g)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A written plan must be developed for all the fugitive emissions components designated unsafe-to-monitor. This written plan must be incorporated into the fugitive emissions monitoring plan required by paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(ii) The plan must include the identification and location of each fugitive emissions component designated as unsafe-to-monitor.
(iii) The plan must include an explanation of why each fugitive emissions component designated as unsafe-to-monitor is unsafe-to-monitor.
(iv) The plan must include a schedule for monitoring the fugitive emissions components designated as unsafe-to-monitor.
(4) The requirements of paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(F) and (g)(1)(v)(B) of this section are waived during a quarterly monitoring period for any fugitive emissions components affected facility located within an area that has an average calendar month temperature below 0 degrees Fahrenheit for two of three consecutive calendar months of a quarterly monitoring period. The calendar month temperature average for each month within the quarterly monitoring period must be determined using historical monthly average temperatures over the previous three years as reported by a National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration source or other source approved by the Administrator. The requirements of paragraph (g)(1)(iv) and (v) of this section shall not be waived for two consecutive quarterly monitoring periods.
(h) Repairs. Each identified source of fugitive emissions shall be repaired in accordance with paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) A first attempt at repair shall be made in accordance with paragraphs (h)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 15 calendar days after detection of fugitive emissions that were identified using AVO.
(ii) If you are complying with paragraph (g)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, a first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 30 calendar days after detection of the fugitive emissions.
(2) Repair shall be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days after the first attempt at repair as required in paragraph (h)(1)(i) of this section, and 30 calendar days after the first attempt at repair as required in paragraph (h)(1)(ii) of this section.
(3) Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) If the repair is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, a well shutdown or well shut-in, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, scheduled well shutdown, scheduled well shut-in, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of detecting the fugitive emissions, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(ii) If the repair requires replacement of a fugitive emissions component or a part thereof, but the replacement cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified in paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) of this section due to either of the conditions specified in paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(C) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(14)(v)(I).
(A) Valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(B) A replacement fugitive emissions component or a part thereof requires custom fabrication.
(C) The required replacement must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the first attempt at repair. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement component, unless the repair requires a compressor station or well shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station or well shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this section.
(4) Each identified source of fugitive emissions must be resurveyed to complete repair according to the requirements of paragraphs (h)(4)(i) through (v) of this section, to ensure that there are no fugitive emissions.
(i) The operator may resurvey the fugitive emissions components to verify repair using either Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part or OGI, except as specified in paragraph (h)(4)(v) of this section.
(ii) For each repair that cannot be made during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions are initially found, a digital photograph must be taken of that component, or the component must be tagged during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions were initially found for identification purposes and subsequent repair. The digital photograph must include the date that the photograph was taken and must clearly identify the component by location within the site (e.g., the latitude and longitude of the component or by other descriptive landmarks visible in the picture).
(iii) Operators that use Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part to resurvey the repaired fugitive emissions components are subject to the resurvey provisions specified in paragraphs (h)(4)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A fugitive emissions component is repaired when the Method 21 instrument indicates a concentration of less than 500 ppmv above background or when no soap bubbles are observed when the alternative screening procedures specified in section 8.3.3 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part are used.
(B) Operators must use the Method 21 monitoring requirements specified in paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section or the alternative screening procedures specified in section 8.3.3 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iv) Operators that use OGI to resurvey the repaired fugitive emissions components are subject to the resurvey provisions specified in paragraphs (h)(4)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A fugitive emissions component is repaired when the OGI instrument shows no indication of visible emissions.
(B) Operators must use the OGI monitoring requirements specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(v) For fugitive emissions identified using AVO detection methods, the operator may resurvey using those same methods, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, or OGI. For operators that use AVO detection methods, a fugitive emissions component is repaired when there are no indications of fugitive emissions using these methods.
(i) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to fugitive emissions components affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(k).
(j) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to fugitive emissions components affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(l).
(k) Reporting and recordkeeping. You must comply with the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (9), and the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(14).
(l) Well closure requirements. You must complete the requirements specified in paragraphs (l)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must submit a well closure plan to the Administrator within 30 days of the cessation of production from all wells located at the well site as specified in § 60.5420b(a)(4)(i). The well closure plan must include, at a minimum, the information specified in paragraphs (l)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Description of the steps necessary to close all wells at the well site, including permanent plugging of all wells;
(ii) Description of the financial requirements and disclosure of financial assurance to complete closure; and
(iii) Description of the schedule for completing all activities in the well closure plan.
(2) You must submit a notification as specified in § 60.5420b(a)(4)(ii) of intent to close the well site to the Administrator 60 days before you begin well closure activities.
(3) You must conduct a survey of the well site using OGI, including each closed well, after completing all well closure activities outlined in the well closure plan specified in paragraph (l)(1) of this section. If any emissions are imaged by the OGI instrument, then you must take steps to eliminate those emissions and you must resurvey the source of emissions. You must repeat steps to eliminate emissions and resurvey the source of emissions until no emissions are imaged by the OGI instrument. You must update the well closure plan specified in paragraph (l)(1) of this section to include the video of the OGI survey demonstrating closure of all wells at the site.
(4) You must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(14) and submit the reports specified in § 60.5420b(b)(9).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62892, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5398b What alternative GHG and VOC standards apply to fugitive emissions components affected facilities and what inspection and monitoring requirements apply to covers and closed vent systems when using an alternative technology?
This section provides alternative GHG and VOC standards for fugitive emissions components affected facilities in § 60.5397b and alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems in § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii) and (iii), (2)(ii) through (iv), and (3)(iii) and (iv). If you choose to use an alternative standard under this section, you must submit the notification under paragraph (a) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance with the alternative GHG and VOC standards through periodic screening, you are subject to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance through a continuous monitoring system, you are subject to the requirements in paragraph (c) of this section. The technology used for periodic screenings under paragraph (b) of this section or continuous monitoring under paragraph (c) of this section must be approved in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section.
(a) Notification. If you choose to demonstrate compliance with the alternative GHG and VOC standards in either paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, you must notify the Administrator of adoption of the alternative standards in the first annual report following implementation of the alternative standards, as specified in § 60.5424b(a). Once you have implemented the alternative standards, you must continue to comply with the alternative standards.
(b) Periodic Screening. You may choose to demonstrate compliance for your fugitive emissions components affected facility and compliance with continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for your covers and closed vent systems through periodic screenings using any methane measurement technology approved in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance using periodic screenings, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section and comply with the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 60.5424b.
(1) You must use one or more alternative test method(s) approved per paragraph (d) of this section to conduct periodic screenings.
(i) The required frequencies for conducting periodic screenings are listed in tables 1 and 2 to this subpart. You must choose the appropriate frequency for conducting periodic screenings based on the minimum aggregate detection threshold of the method used to conduct the periodic screenings. You must also use tables 1 and 2 to this subpart to determine whether you must conduct an annual fugitive emissions survey using OGI, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section.
(ii) For well sites, centralized production facilities, and compressor stations subject to quarterly OGI monitoring surveys in § 60.5397b(g)(1)(iv) and/or (v), prior to March 9, 2026, if you use an alternative test method approved per paragraph (d) of this section with a minimum aggregated detection threshold less than or equal to 3 kg/hr, in lieu of conducting periodic screening events at the frequency specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section, you may conduct periodic screening events quarterly. After March 9, 2026, you must conduct periodic screening events at the frequency specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section.
(iii) Use of table 1 or 2 to this subpart is based on the required frequency for conducting monitoring surveys in § 60.5397b(g)(1)(i) through (v).
(iv) You may replace one or more individual periodic screening events required by table 1 or 2 to this subpart with an OGI survey. The OGI survey must be conducted according to the requirements outlined in § 60.5397b.
(v) If you use multiple methods to conduct periodic screenings, you must conduct all periodic screenings, regardless of the method used for the individual periodic screening event, at the frequency required for the alternative test method with the highest aggregate detection threshold (e.g., if you use methods with aggregate detection thresholds of 15 kg/hr, your periodic screenings must be conducted monthly). You must also conduct an annual OGI survey if an annual OGI survey is required for the alternative test method with the highest aggregate detection threshold.
(2) You must develop a monitoring plan that covers the collection of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems at each site where you will use periodic screenings to demonstrate compliance. You may develop a site-specific monitoring plan, or you may include multiple sites that you own or operate in one plan. At a minimum, the monitoring plan must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (ix) of this section.
(i) Identification of each site that will be monitored through periodic screening, including latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least four decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Identification of the alternative test method(s) approved per paragraph (d) of this section that will be used for periodic screenings and the spatial resolution (i.e., component-level, area-level, or facility-level) of the technology used for each method.
(iii) Identification of and contact information for the entities that will be performing the periodic screenings.
(iv) Required frequency for conducting periodic screenings, based on the criteria outlined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(v) If you are required to conduct an annual OGI survey by paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (iii) of this section or you choose to replace any individual screening event with an OGI survey, your monitoring plan must also include the information required by § 60.5397b(b).
(vi) Procedures for conducting monitoring surveys required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii)(A), (b)(5)(iii)(A), and (b)(5)(iv)(A) of this section. At a minimum, your monitoring plan must include the information required by § 60.5397b(c)(2), (3), (7), and (8), and (d), as applicable. The provisions of § 60.5397b(d)(3) do not apply for purposes of conducting monitoring surveys required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems from which emissions are detected.
(viii) Procedures and timeframes for verifying repairs for fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems.
(ix) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(3) You must conduct the initial screening of your site according to the timeframes specified in (b)(3)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Within 90 days of the startup of production for each fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility located at a new well site or centralized production facility.
(ii) Within 90 days of the startup of a new compressor station for each fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility located at a new compressor station.
(iii) Within 90 days of the startup of production after modification for each modified fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility at a well site or centralized production facility.
(iv) Within 90 days of modification for each modified fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility at a compressor station.
(v) No later than the final date by which the next monitoring survey required by § 60.5397b(g)(1)(i) through (v) would have been required to be conducted if you were previously complying with the requirements in § 60.5397b and § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii) and (iii), (2)(ii) through (iv), and (3)(iii) and (iv).
(4) If you are required to conduct an annual OGI survey by paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (iii) of this section, you must conduct OGI surveys according to the schedule in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You must conduct the initial OGI survey no later than 12 calendar months after conducting the initial screening event in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(ii) Each subsequent OGI survey must be conducted no later than 12 calendar months after the previous OGI survey was conducted. Each identified source of fugitive emissions during the OGI survey shall be repaired in accordance with § 60.5397b(h).
(iii) If you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey or you are required to conduct a monitoring survey in accordance with paragraph (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section prior to the date that your next OGI survey under paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section is due, the OGI survey conducted in lieu of the periodic screening event or the monitoring survey under paragraph (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section can be used to fulfill the requirements of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section. The next OGI survey is required to be conducted no later than 12 calendar months after the date of the survey conducted under paragraph (b)(1)(iv) or (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.
(iv) You cannot use a monitoring survey conducted under paragraph (b)(5)(iii)(A) or (b)(5)(iv)(A) of this section to fulfill the requirements of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section unless the monitoring survey included all fugitive emission components at the site.
(5) You must investigate confirmed detections of emissions from periodic screening events and repair each identified source of emissions in accordance with paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) You must receive the results of the periodic screening no later than 5 calendar days after the screening event occurs.
(ii) If you use an alternative test method with a facility-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from an affected facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all the fugitive emissions components in an affected facility using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) You must inspect all covers and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 to appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416b(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(C) You must conduct a visual inspection of all covers and closed vent systems to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii), (a)(2)(iii), or (a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(iii) If you use an alternative test method with an area-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from an affected facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all your fugitive emissions components located within a 4-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) If the confirmed detection occurred in the portion of a site that contains a storage vessel or a closed vent system, you must inspect all covers and all closed vent systems that are connected to all storage vessels and closed vent systems that are within a 2-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection (i.e., you must inspect the whole system that is connected to the portion of the system in the radius of the detected event, not just the portion of the system that falls within the radius of the detected event).
(1) You must inspect the cover(s) and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 to appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416b(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(2) You must conduct a visual inspection of the closed vent system(s) and cover(s) to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii), (a)(2)(iii), or (a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(iv) If you use an alternative test method with a component-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from an affected facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all the fugitive emissions components located within a 1-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) If the confirmed detection occurred in the portion of a site that contains a storage vessel or a closed vent system, you must inspect all covers and all closed vent systems that are connected to all storage vessels and closed vent systems that are within a 0.5-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection (i.e., you must inspect the whole system that is connected to the portion of the system in the radius of the detected event, not just the portion of the system that falls within the radius of the detected event).
(1) You must inspect the cover(s) and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 to appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416b(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(2) You must conduct a visual inspection of the closed vent system(s) and cover(s) to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii), (a)(2)(iii), or (a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(v) You must repair all sources of fugitive emissions in accordance with § 60.5397b(h) and all emissions or defects of covers and closed vent systems in accordance with § 60.5416b(b)(5), except as specified in this paragraph (b)(5)(v). Except as allowed by § 60.5397b(h)(3) and § 60.5416b(b)(6), all repairs must be completed, including the resurvey verifying the repair, within 30 days of receiving the results of the periodic screening in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section.
(vi) If the results of the periodic screening event in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section indicate a confirmed detection at an affected facility, and the ground-based monitoring survey and inspections required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section demonstrate the confirmed detection was caused by a failure of a control device used to demonstrate continuous compliance under this subpart, you must initiate an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and other contributing cause(s) of such failure within 24 hours of receiving the results of the monitoring survey and/or inspection. As part of the investigation, you must determine if the control device is operating in compliance with the applicable requirements of § 60.5415b and § 60.5417b, and if not, what actions are necessary to bring the control device into compliance with those requirements as soon as possible and prevent future failures of the control device from the same underlying cause(s).
(vii) If the results of the inspections required in paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section indicate that there is an emission or defect in your cover or closed vent system, you must perform an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and other contributing cause(s) of emissions from your cover or closed vent system within 5 days of completing the inspection required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section. The investigative analysis must include a determination as to whether the system was operated outside of the engineering design analysis and whether updates are necessary for the cover or closed vent system to prevent future emissions from the cover and closed vent system.
(6) You must maintain records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(4) through (7), (14), and (15), and § 60.5424b(c).
(7) You must submit reports as specified in § 60.5424b.
(c) Continuous monitoring. You may choose to demonstrate compliance for your fugitive emissions components affected facility and compliance with continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for your covers and closed vent systems through continuous monitoring using a technology approved in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance using continuous monitoring, you must comply and develop a monitoring plan consistent with the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (9) of this section and comply with the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 60.5424b.
(1) For the purpose of this section, continuous monitoring means the ability of a methane monitoring system to determine and record a valid methane mass emissions rate or equivalent of affected facilities at least once for every 12-hour block.
(i) The detection threshold of the system must be such that it can detect at least 0.40 kg/hr (0.88 lb/hr) of methane.
(ii) The health of the devices used within the continuous monitoring system must be confirmed for power and function at least twice every six-hour block.
(iii) The continuous monitoring system must transmit all applicable valid data at least once every 24-hours. The continuous monitoring system must transmit all valid data collected, including health checks required in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.
(iv) The continuous monitoring system must continuously collect data as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, except as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section:
(A) The rolling 12-month average operational downtime of the continuous monitoring system must be less than or equal to 10 percent.
(B) Operational downtime of the continuous monitoring system is defined as a period of time for which any monitor fails to collect or transmit data as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section or any monitor is out-of-control as specified in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this section.
(C) A monitor is out-of-control if it fails ongoing quality assurance checks, as specified in the alternative test method approved under paragraph (d) of this section, or if the monitor output is outside of range. The beginning of the out-of-control period is defined as the time of the failure of the quality assurance check. The end of the out-of-control period is defined as the time when either the monitor passes a subsequent quality assurance check, or a new monitor is installed. The out-of-control period for a monitor outside of range starts at the time when the monitor first reads outside of range and ends when the monitor reads within range again.
(D) The downtime for the continuous monitoring system must be calculated each calendar month. Once 12 months of data are available, at the end of each calendar month, you must calculate the 12-month average by averaging that month with the previous 11 calendar months. You must determine the rolling 12-month average by recalculating the 12-month average at the end of each month.
(2) You must develop a monitoring plan that covers the collection of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems for each site where continuous monitoring will be used to demonstrate compliance. At a minimum, the monitoring plan must contain the information specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (xii) of this section.
(i) Identification of each site to be monitored through continuous monitoring, including latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least four decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Identification of the alternative test method(s) approved under paragraph (d) of this section used for the continuous monitoring, including the detection principle; the manufacturer, make, and model; instrument manual, if applicable; and the manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
(iii) If the continuous monitoring system is administered through a third-party provider, contact information where the provider can be reached 24 hours a day.
(iv) Number and location of monitors. If the continuous monitoring system uses open path technology, you must identify the location of any reflectors used. These locations should be identified by latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least five decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(v) Discussion of system calibration requirements, including but not limited to, the calibration procedures and calibration schedule for the detection systems and meteorology systems.
(vi) Identification of critical components and infrastructure (e.g., power, data systems) and procedures for their repairs.
(vii) Procedures for out-of-control periods.
(viii) Procedures for establishing baseline emissions, including the identification of any sources with methane emissions not subject to this subpart. The procedures for establishing the baseline emissions must account for variability in the operation of the site. Operation of the site during the development of the baseline emissions must represent the site's expected annual production or throughput.
(ix) Procedures for determining when a fugitive emissions event is detected by the continuous monitoring technology.
(x) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems from which emissions are detected.
(xi) Procedures and timeframes for verifying repairs for fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems.
(xii) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(3) You must install and begin conducting monitoring with your continuous monitoring system according to the timeframes specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Within 120 days of the startup of production for each fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility located at a new well site or centralized production facility.
(ii) Within 120 days of the startup of a new compressor station for each fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility located at a new compressor station.
(iii) Within 120 days of the startup of production after modification for each modified fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility at a well site or centralized production facility.
(iv) Within 120 days of modification for each modified fugitive emissions components affected facility and storage vessel affected facility at a compressor station.
(v) No later than the final date by which the next monitoring survey required by § 60.5397b(g)(1)(i) through (v) would have been required to be conducted if you were previously complying with the requirements in § 60.5397b and § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii) and (iii), (2)(ii) through (iv), and (3)(iii) and (iv).
(4) You are subject to the following action-levels as specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section for any affected facilities located at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station.
(i) For affected facilities located at a wellhead only well site, the action levels are as follows:
(A) The 90-day rolling average action-level is 1.2 kg/hr (2.6 lb/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(B) The 7-day rolling average action level is 15 kg/hr (34 lb/hr) of methane over site-specific baseline emissions.
(ii) For affected facilities located at well sites with major production and processing equipment (including small well sites), centralized production facilities, and compressor stations, the action levels are as follows:
(A) The 90-day rolling average action-level is 1.6 kg/hr (3.6 lb/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(B) The 7-day rolling average action level is 21 kg/hr (46 lb/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(5) You must establish site-specific baseline emissions upon initial installation and activation of a continuous monitoring system. You must establish the baseline emissions under the conditions outlined in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section. You must determine the baseline emission rates according to paragraphs (c)(5)(iv) and (v) of this section. The baseline must be established initially and any time there is a major change to the processing equipment at a well site (including small well sites), centralized production facility, or compressor station.
(i) Inspect all fugitive emissions components according to the requirements in § 60.5397b and covers and closed vent systems according to the requirements in § 60.5416b. This includes all fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems, regardless of whether they are regulated by this subpart. Repairs of any fugitive emissions, leaks, or defects found during the inspection must be completed prior to beginning the period in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
(ii) Verify control devices (e.g., flares) on all affected sources are operating in compliance with the applicable requirements of § 60.5415b and § 60.5417b. You must ensure that all control devices are operating in compliance with the applicable regulations prior to beginning the period in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this section. Verify that all other methane emission sources (e.g., reciprocating engines) located at the site are operating consistent with any applicable regulations. You must ensure that these sources are operating in compliance with the applicable regulations prior to beginning the period in paragraph (b)(5)(iii) of this section.
(iii) Using the alternative test method approved under paragraph (d) of this section, record the site-level emission rate from your continuous monitoring system for 30 operating days. You must minimize any activities that are not normal, day-to-day activities during this 30 operating day period. Document any maintenance activities and the period (including the start date and time and end date and time) such activities occurred during the 30 operating day period.
(iv) Determine the site-specific baseline by calculating the mean emission rate (kg/hr of methane) for the 30 operating day period, less any time periods when maintenance activities were conducted.
(v) The site-specific baseline emission rate must be no more than 10 times the applicable 90-day action-level defined in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(6) Calculate the emission rate from your site according to paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (iii) of this section. Compare the emission rate calculated in this paragraph (c)(6) to the appropriate action levels in paragraph (c)(4) of this section to determine whether you have exceeded an action level.
(i) Each calendar day, calculate the daily average mass emission rate in kg/hr of methane from your continuous monitoring system.
(ii) Once the system has been operating for 7 calendar days, at the end of each calendar day calculate the 7-day average mass emission rate by averaging the mass emission rate from that day with the mass emission rate from the previous 6 calendar days. Subtract the site-specific baseline mass emission rate from the 7-day average mass emission rate when comparing the mass emission rate to the applicable action level. Determine the 7-day rolling average by recalculating the 7-day average each calendar day, less the site-specific baseline.
(iii) Once the system has been operating for 90 calendar days, at the end of each calendar day calculate the 90-day average mass emission rate by averaging the mass emission rate from that day with the mass emission rate from the previous 89 calendar days. Subtract the site-specific baseline emission rate from the 90-day average mass emission rate when comparing the mass emission rate to the applicable action level. Determine the 90-day rolling average by recalculating the 90-day average each calendar day, less the site-specific baseline.
(7) Within 5 days of determining that either of your action levels in paragraph (c)(4) of this section has been exceeded, you must initiate an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and contributing cause(s) of such exceedance and actions to be taken to reduce the mass emission rate below the applicable action level.
(i) You must complete the investigative analysis and take initial steps to bring the mass emission rate below the action level no later than 5 days after determining there is an exceedance of the action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) or (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section.
(ii) You must complete the investigative analysis and take initial steps to bring the mass emission rate below the action level no later than 30 days after determining there is an exceedance of the action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(A) or (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section.
(8) You must develop a mass emission rate reduction plan if you meet any of the criteria in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iii) of this section. The plan must describe the action(s) completed to date to reduce the mass emission rate below the action level, additional measures that you propose to employ to reduce methane emissions below the action level, and a schedule for completion of these measures. You must submit the plan to the Administrator within 60 days of initially determining there is an exceedance of an action level in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(i) If, upon completion of the initial actions required under paragraph (c)(7) of this section, the average mass emission rate for the following 30-day period is not below the applicable action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(A) or (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section. The beginning of the 30-day period starts on the calendar day following completion of the initial actions in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(ii) If, upon completion of the initial actions required under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, the average mass emission rate for the following 24-hour period is not below the applicable action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) or (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section. The average mass emission rate will be the mass emission rate calculated according to paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section for the calendar day following completion of the initial corrective actions in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(iii) All actions needed to reduce the average mass emission rate below the action level require more than 30 days to implement.
(9) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(4) through (c)(7), (c)(14) and (c)(15), and § 60.5424b(e). You must submit the reports as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1), and (b)(4) through (10) and § 60.5424b.
(d) Alternative Test Method for Methane Detection Technology. Any alternative test method for methane d-etection technology used to meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (b) or (c) of this section or § 60.5371b must be approved by the Administrator as specified in this paragraph (d). Approval of an alternative test method for methane detection technology will include consideration of the combination of the measurement technology and the standard protocol for its operation. Any entity meeting the requirements in paragraph (d)(2) of this section may submit a request for an alternative test method for methane detection technology. At a minimum, the request must follow the requirements outlined in paragraph (d)(3) of this section. Approved alternative test methods for methane detection technology that are broadly applicable will be posted on the EPA's Emission Measurement Center web page (https://www.epa.gov/emc/oil-and-gas-alternative-test-methods). Any owner or operator that meets the specific applicability for the alternative test method, as outlined in the alternative test method for methane detection technology, may use the alternative test method to comply with the requirements of paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, as applicable, in lieu of the requirements for fugitive emissions components affected facilities in § 60.5397b and covers and closed vent systems in § 60.5416b(a)(1)(ii) and (iii), (a)(2)(ii) through (iv), and (a)(3)(iii) and (iv). Certified third-party notifiers may use the alternative test method to identify super-emitter events in § 60.5371b(b)(1)(ii).
(1) A request for an alternative test method for methane detection technology, along with the required supporting information, must be submitted to the EPA through the alternative methane detection technology portal at https://www.epa.gov/emc/oil-and-gas-alternative-test-methods. The EPA may make all the information submitted through the portal available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use the portal to submit information you claim as confidential business information (CBI). If you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in your submittal, submit the portion of the information claimed as CBI to the OAQPS CBI office. Clearly mark the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using the portal cannot later be claimed CBI. The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov and should include clear CBI markings and be flagged to the attention of the Leader, Measurement Technology Group. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link. If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer and Measurement Technology Group Leader, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, North Carolina 27711. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(i) The Administrator will complete an initial review for completeness within 90 days of receipt and notify the submitter of the results of the review.
(ii) If the entity submitting the request does not meet the requirements in paragraph (d)(2) of this section or the request does not contain the information in paragraph (d)(3) of this section, the submitter will be notified. The submitter may choose to revise the information and submit a new request for an alternative test method.
(iii) Within 270 days of receipt of an alternative test method request that was determined to be complete, the Administrator will determine whether the requested alternative test method is adequate for indicating compliance with the requirements for monitoring fugitive emissions components affected facilities in § 60.5397b and continuous inspection and monitoring of covers and closed vent systems in § 60.5416b and/or for identifying super-emitter events in § 60.5371b, except that the Administrator is not required to make determinations on such requests for methods for identifying super emitter events in § 60.5371b before January 22, 2027. The Administrator will issue either an approval or disapproval in writing to the submitter. Approvals may be considered site-specific or more broadly applicable. Broadly applicable alternative test methods and approval letters will be posted at https://www.epa.gov/emc/oil-andgas-approved--alternative-test-methods-approvals. If the Administrator fails to provide the submitter a decision on approval or disapproval within 270 days, the alternative test method will be given conditional approval status and posted on this same web page, except that conditional approval will not be given for purposes of identifying super-emitter events in § 60.5371b before January 22, 2027. If the Administrator finds any deficiencies in the request and disapproves the request in writing, the owner or operator may choose to revise the information and submit a new request for an alternative test method.
(iv) If the Administrator finds reasonable grounds to dispute the results obtained by any alternative test method for the purposes of demonstrating compliance with a relevant standard, the Administrator may require you to demonstrate compliance according to § 60.5397b for fugitive emissions components affected facilities and § 60.5416b for covers and closed vent systems.
(2) Any entity may submit an alternative test method for consideration, so long as you meet the requirements in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) An entity is limited to any individual or organization located in or that has representation in the United States.
(ii) If an entity is not considered an owner or operator of an affected facility regulated under this subpart or subpart OOOOa of this part or is not the owner or operator of a designated facility regulated under subpart OOOOc of this part, the provisions of paragraphs (d)(2)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section apply.
(A) The entity must directly represent the provider of the measurement system using advanced methane detection technology.
(B) The measurement system must have been applied to methane measurements or monitoring in the oil and gas sector either domestically or internationally.
(iii) The underlying technology or technologies must be readily available for use, meaning that the measurement system using these technologies has either been:
(A) Sold, leased, or licensed, or offered for sale, lease, or license to the general public or;
(B) Developed by an owner or operator for internal use and/or use by external partners.
(iv) The entity must be able to provide and submit to the Administrator the information required in paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
(3) The request must contain the information specified in paragraphs (d)(3)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) The submitter's name, mailing address, phone number and email address.
(ii) The desired applicability of the technology (i.e., site-specific, basin-specific, or broadly applicable across the sector, super-emitter detection).
(iii) Description of the measurement technology, including the physical components, the scientific theory, and the known limitations. At a minimum, this description must contain the information in paragraphs (d)(3)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Description of scientific theory and appropriate references outlining the underlying technology (e.g., reference material, literature review).
(B) Description of the physical instrumentation.
(C) Type of measurement and application (e.g., remote or in-situ measurements, mobile, airborne).
(D) Known limitation of the technology, including application limitations and weather limitations.
(iv) Description of how the measurement technology is converted to a methane mass emission rate (i.e., kg/hr of methane) or equivalent. At a minimum this description must contain the information in paragraphs (d)(3)(iv)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) Detailed workflow and description covering all steps and processes from measurement technology signal output to final, validated mass emission rate or equivalent. These workflows must cover the material in paragraph (d)(3)(v) of this section and put all technical components into context. The workflow must also cover the technology from data collection to generation of the final product and identify any raw data processing procedures; identification of whether processing steps are manual or automated, and when and what quality assurance checks are made to the data, including raw data, processed data, and output data.
(B) Description of how any meteorological data used are collected or sourced, including a description how the data are used.
(C) Description of any model(s) (e.g., AERMOD) used, including how inputs are determined or derived.
(D) All calculations used, including the defined variables for any of these calculations and a description of their purposes.
(E) Descriptions of a-priori methods and datasets used, including source and version numbers when applicable.
(F) Description of algorithms/machine learning procedures used in the data processing, if applicable.
(v) Description of how all data collected and generated by the measurement system are handled and stored. At a minimum this description must contain the information in paragraphs (d)(3)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) How the data, including metadata, are collected, maintained, and stored.
(B) A description of how raw data streams are processed and manipulated, including how the resultant data processing is documented and how version controlled is maintained.
(C) A description of what data streams are provided to the end-user of the data and how the data are delivered to the end-user.
(vi) Supporting information verifying that the technology meets the aggregate detection threshold(s) defined in paragraphs (b) and/or (c) of this section or in § 60.5371b, including supporting data to demonstrate the aggregate detection threshold of the measurement technology as applied in the field and if applicable, how probability of detection is determined. For the purpose of this subpart the average aggregate detection threshold is the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment (e.g., a singular flight that surveys multiple well sites, centralized production facility, and/or compressor stations) of a technology, unless this technology is to be applied to § 60.5371b. When the technology is applied to § 60.5371b, then the aggregate detection threshold is the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment in the same basin and field. At a minimum, you must provide the information identified in paragraphs (d)(3)(vi)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Published reports (e.g., scientific papers) produced by either the submitting entity or an outside entity evaluating the submitted measurement technology that has been independently evaluated. The published reports must identify either a site-level or aggregate detection threshold and be accompanied with sufficient supporting data to evaluate whether the performance metrics of the alternative testing procedures in paragraph (d)(3)(vi)(C) of this section are adequate and the data was collected consistent with those alternative testing procedures. The supporting data may be included in the published report or may be submitted separately.
(B) Standard operating procedures including safety considerations, measurement limitations, personnel qualification/responsibilities, equipment and supplies, data and record management, and quality assurance/quality control (i.e., initial and ongoing calibration procedures, data quality indicators, and data quality objectives).
(C) Detailed description of the alternative testing procedure(s), preferably in the format described in Guideline Document 45 on the Emission Measurement Center's website (available at https://www.epa.gov/sites/default/files/2020-08/documents/gd-045.pdf). The detailed description must address all key elements of the requested method(s) and must include objectives to ensure the detection threshold(s) required in paragraph (d)(3)(vi) of this section are maintained, including procedures for verifying the detection threshold and/or or probability of detection is maintained under field conditions.
(D) Any documents provided to end-users of the data generated by the measurement system, including but not limited to client products, manuals, and frequently asked questions documents.
(vii) If the technology will be used to monitor the collection of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station, you must submit supporting information verifying the spatial resolution of technology, as defined in paragraphs (d)(3)(vii)(A) through (C) of this section. This supporting information must be in the form of a published reports (e.g., scientific papers) produced by either the submitting entity or an outside entity evaluating the submitted measurement technology that has been independently evaluated. The report must include sufficient supporting data to evaluate whether the performance metrics of the alternative testing procedures in paragraph (d)(3)(vi)(C) of this section are adequate and the data was collected consistent with those alternative testing procedures.
(A) Facility-level spatial resolution means a technology with the ability to identify emissions within the boundary of a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station.
(B) Area-level spatial resolution means a technology with the ability to identify emissions within a radius of 2 meters of the emission source.
(C) Component-level spatial resolution means a technology with the ability to identify emissions within a radius of 0.5 meter of the emission source.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62892, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5399b What are the alternative means of emission limitations for GHG and VOC emissions from well completions, liquids unloading operations, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressors, fugitive emissions components, and process unit equipment affected facilities; and what are the alternative fugitive emissions standards based on State, local, and Tribal programs?
This section provides procedures for the submittal and approval of alternative means of emission limitation for GHG and VOC based on work practices for well completions, liquids unloading operations, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressors, fugitive emissions components and process unit equipment affected facilities. This section also provides procedures for the submittal and approval of alternative fugitive emissions standards based on programs under state, local, or Tribal authorities for the fugitive emissions components affected facility. Paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section outline the procedure for submittal and approval of alternative means of emission limitation for methane and VOC. Paragraphs (e) through (i) of this section outline the procedure for submittal and approval of alternative fugitive emissions standards. The requirements for a monitoring plan specified in § 60.5397b(c) and (d) apply to the alternative fugitive emissions standards in this section.
(a) Alternative means of emission limitation. If, in the Administrator's judgment, an alternative means of emission limitation will achieve a reduction in methane and VOC emissions at least equivalent to the reduction in methane and VOC emissions achieved under § 60.5375b, § 60.5376b, § 60.5380b, § 60.5385b, § 60.5397b, § 60.5400b, or § 60.5401b, the Administrator will publish, in the Federal Register, a notice permitting the use of that alternative means for the purpose of compliance with § 60.5375b, § 60.5376b, § 60.5380b, § 60.5385b, § 60.5397b, § 60.5400b, or § 60.5401b. The authority to approve an alternative means of emission limitation is retained by the Administrator and shall not be delegated to States under section 111(c) of the CAA.
(b) Notice. Any notice under paragraph (a) of this section must be published only after notice and an opportunity for a public hearing.
(c) Evaluation guidelines. Determination of equivalence to the design, equipment, work practice, or operational requirements of this section will be evaluated by the following guidelines:
(1) The applicant must provide information that is sufficient for demonstrating the alternative means of emission limitation achieves emission reductions that are at least equivalent to the emission reductions that would be achieved by complying with the relevant standards. At a minimum, the application must include the following information:
(i) Details of the specific equipment or components that would be included in the alternative.
(ii) A description of the alternative work practice, including, as appropriate, the monitoring method, monitoring instrument or measurement technology, and the data quality indicators for precision and bias.
(iii) The method detection limit of the technology, technique, or process and a description of the procedures used to determine the method detection limit. At a minimum, the applicant must collect, verify, and submit field data encompassing seasonal variations to support the determination of the method detection limit. The field data may be supplemented with modeling analyses, controlled test site data, or other documentation.
(iv) Any initial and ongoing quality assurance/quality control measures necessary for maintaining the technology, technique, or process, and the timeframes for conducting such measures.
(v) Frequency of measurements. For continuous monitoring techniques, the minimum data availability.
(vi) Any restrictions for using the technology, technique, or process.
(vii) Initial and continuous compliance procedures, including recordkeeping and reporting, if the compliance procedures are different than those specified in this subpart.
(2) For each technology, technique, or process for which a determination of equivalency is requested, the application must provide a demonstration that the emission reduction achieved by the alternative means of emission limitation is at least equivalent to the emission reduction that would be achieved by complying with the relevant standards in this subpart.
(d) Approval of alternative means of emission limitation. Any alternative means of emission limitations approved under this section shall constitute a required work practice, equipment, design, or operational standard within the meaning of section 111(h)(1) of the CAA.
(e) Alternative fugitive emissions standards. If, in the Administrator's judgment, an alternative fugitive emissions standard will achieve a reduction in methane and VOC emissions at least equivalent to the reductions achieved under § 60.5397b, the Administrator will publish, in the Federal Register, a notice permitting use of the alternative fugitive emissions standard for the purpose of compliance with § 60.5397b. The authority to approve alternative fugitive emissions standards is retained by the Administrator and shall not be delegated to States under section 111(c) of the CAA.
(f) Notice. Any notice under paragraph (e) of this section will be published only after notice and an opportunity for public hearing.
(g) Evaluation guidelines. Determination of alternative fugitive emissions standards to the design, equipment, work practice, or operational requirements of § 60.5397b will be evaluated by the following guidelines:
(1) The monitoring instrument, including the monitoring procedure;
(2) The monitoring frequency;
(3) The fugitive emissions definition;
(4) The repair requirements; and
(5) The recordkeeping and reporting requirements.
(h) Approval of alternative fugitive emissions standard. Any alternative fugitive emissions standard approved under this section shall:
(1) Constitute a required design, equipment, work practice, or operational standard within the meaning of section 111(h)(1) of the CAA; and
(2) Be made available for use by any owner or operator in meeting the relevant standards and requirements established for affected facilities under § 60.5397b.
(i) Notification. (1) An owner or operator must notify the Administrator of adoption of the alternative fugitive emissions standards within the first annual report following implementation of the alternative fugitive emissions standard, as specified in § 60.5420b(a)(3).
(2) An owner or operator implementing one of the alternative fugitive emissions standards must submit the reports specified in § 60.5420b(b)(9)(iii). An owner or operator must also maintain the records specified by the specific alternative fugitive emissions standard for a period of at least 5 years.
§ 60.5400b What GHG and VOC standards apply to process unit equipment affected facilities?
This section applies to process unit equipment affected facilities located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (l) of this section to reduce methane and VOC emissions from equipment leaks, except as provided in § 60.5402b. As an alternative to the standards in this section, you may comply with the requirements in § 60.5401b.
(a) General standards. You must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service, and connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service, as applicable. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section for each open-ended valve or line. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section for each closed vent system and control device used to comply with equipment leak provisions in this section. You must comply with paragraph (g) of this section for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service. You must make repairs as specified in paragraph (h) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (i) of this section. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (j) of this section. You must perform the reporting as specified in paragraph (k) of this section. You must perform the recordkeeping as required in paragraph (l) of this section.
(1) You may apply to the Administrator for permission to use an alternative means of emission limitation that achieves a reduction in emissions of methane and VOC at least equivalent to that achieved by the controls required in this subpart according to the requirements of § 60.5399b.
(2) Each piece of equipment is presumed to have the potential to emit methane or VOC unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC. For a piece of equipment to be considered not to have the potential to emit methane or VOC, the methane and VOC content of a gaseous stream must be below detection limits using Method 18 of appendix A-6 to this part. Alternatively, if the piece of equipment is in wet gas service, you may choose to determine the methane and VOC content of the stream is below the detection limit of the methods described in ASTM E168-16(R2023), E169-16(R2022), or E260-96 (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(b) Monitoring surveys. You must monitor for leaks using OGI in accordance with appendix K of this part, unless otherwise specified in paragraphs (c) or (d) of this section.
(1) Monitoring surveys must be conducted bimonthly.
(2) Any emissions observed using OGI are defined as a leak.
(c) Additional requirements for pumps in light liquid service. In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b), you must conduct weekly visual inspections of all pumps in light liquid service for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, except as specified in paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section. If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, you must follow the procedure specified in either paragraph (c)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Monitor the pump within 5 calendar days using OGI in accordance with Appendix K or the methods specified in § 60.5403b. A leak is detected if any emissions are observed using OGI or if an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater is provided using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) Designate the visual indications of liquids dripping as a leak and repair the leak as specified in paragraph (h) of this section.
(3) If any pump is equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a process, fuel gas system, or a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section, it is exempt from the weekly inspection requirements in paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Any pump that is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection requirements in paragraph (c) of this section, provided that each pump is visually inspected as often as practicable and at least bimonthly.
(d) Additional requirements for pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service. In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, you must monitor each pressure relief device as specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, except as specified in paragraphs (d)(2) and (3) of this section.
(1) You must monitor each pressure relief device within 5 calendar days after each pressure release to detect leaks using the methods specified in § 60.5403b. A leak is detected if any emissions are observed using OGI or if an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is provided using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) Any pressure relief device that is located in a nonfractionating plant that is monitored only by non-plant personnel may be monitored after a pressure release the next time the monitoring personnel are onsite or within 30 calendar days after a pressure release, whichever is sooner, instead of within 5 calendar days as specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section. No pressure relief device described in this paragraph may be allowed to operate for more than 30 calendar days after a pressure release without monitoring.
(3) Any pressure relief device that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting leakage through the pressure relief device to a control device as described in paragraph (f) of this section is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(e) Open-ended valves or lines. Each open-ended valve or line must be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a second valve, except as provided in paragraphs (e)(4) and (5) of this section. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve must seal the open end of the valve or line at all times except during operations requiring process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line.
(1) If evidence of a leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected.
(2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve must be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is closed before the second valve is closed.
(3) When a double block-and-bleed system is being used, the bleed valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the line between the block valves but shall remain closed at all other times.
(4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would autocatalytically polymerize or would present an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if capped or equipped with a double block-and-bleed system as specified in paragraphs (e) introductory text, (e)(2), and (3) of this section are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(f) Closed vent systems and control devices. Closed vent systems used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5411b and 60.5416b. Control devices used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5412b, 60.5415b(f), and 60.5417b.
(g) Pumps, valves, and connectors in heavy liquid service and pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service. If evidence of a potential leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected and must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(h) Repair requirements. When a leak is detected, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(1) through (5) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification tag, marked with the equipment identification number, must be attached to the leaking equipment. The identification tag on equipment may be removed after it has been repaired.
(2) A first attempt at repair must be made as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected. A first attempt at repair is not required if the leak is detected using OGI and the equipment identified as leaking would require elevating the repair personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(i) First attempts at repair for pumps in light liquid or heavy liquid service include, but are not limited to, the practices described in paragraphs (h)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, where practicable.
(A) Tightening the packing gland nuts.
(B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and temperature.
(ii) For each valve where a leak is detected, you must comply with (h)(2)(ii)(A), (B) or (C), and (D) of this section.
(A) Repack the existing valve with a low-e packing.
(B) Replace the existing valve with a low-e valve; or
(C) Perform a drill and tap repair with a low-e injectable packing.
(D) An owner or operator is not required to utilize a low-e valve or low-e packing to replace or repack a valve if the owner or operator demonstrates that a low-e valve or low-e packing is not technically feasible. Low-e valve or low-e packing that is not suitable for its intended use is considered to be technically infeasible. Factors that may be considered in determining technical infeasibility include: retrofit requirements for installation (e.g., re-piping or space limitation), commercial unavailability for valve type, or certain instrumentation assemblies.
(3) Repair of leaking equipment must be completed within 15 calendar days after detection of each leak, except as provided in paragraphs (h)(4), (5) and (6) of this section.
(4) If the repair for visual indications of liquids dripping for pumps in light liquid service can be made by eliminating visual indications of liquids dripping, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(5) If the repair for AVO or other indication of a leak for open-ended valves or lines; pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service; or pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service can be made by eliminating the AVO, or other indication of a potential leak, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(6) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected is allowed if repair within 15 days is technically infeasible without a process unit shutdown or as specified in paragraphs (h)(6)(i) through (v) of this section. Repair of this equipment shall occur before the end of the next process unit shutdown. Monitoring to verify repair must occur within 15 days after startup of the process unit.
(i) Delay of repair of equipment is allowed for equipment which is isolated from the process, and which does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC.
(ii) Delay of repair for valves and connectors is allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section are met.
(A) You must demonstrate that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(B) When repair procedures are conducted, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with paragraph (f) of this section.
(iii) Delay of repair for pumps is allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section are met.
(A) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(B) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(iv) If delay of repair is required to repack or replace the valve, you may use delay of repair. Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown is allowed for a valve, if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(v) When delay of repair is allowed for a leaking pump, valve, or connector that remains in service, the pump, valve, or connector may be considered to be repaired and no longer subject to delay of repair requirements if two consecutive bimonthly monitoring results show no leak remains.
(i) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5410b(h).
(j) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5415b(j).
(k) Reporting. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (11) through (13), as applicable, and § 60.5422b.
(l) Recordkeeping. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(8) and (10) through (13), as applicable, and § 60.5421b.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62893, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5401b What are the alternative GHG and VOC standards for process unit equipment affected facilities?
This section provides alternative standards for process unit equipment affected facilities located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. You may choose to comply with the standards in this section instead of the requirements in § 60.5400b. For purposes of the alternative standards provided in this section, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (m) of this section to reduce methane and VOC emissions from equipment leaks, except as provided in § 60.5402b.
(a) General standards. You must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b) of this section for each pump in light liquid service. You must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section for each open-ended valve or line. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section for each closed vent system and control device used to comply with equipment leak provisions in this section. You must comply with paragraph (f) of this section for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service. You must comply with paragraph (g) of this section for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service. You must comply with paragraph (h) of this section for each connector in gas/vapor and light liquid service. You must make repairs as specified in paragraph (i) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (j) of this section. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (k) of this section. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in paragraph (l) of this section. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as required in paragraph (m) of this section.
(1) You may apply to the Administrator for permission to use an alternative means of emission limitation that achieves a reduction in emissions of methane and VOC at least equivalent to that achieved by the controls required in this subpart according to the requirements of § 60.5399b.
(2) Each piece of equipment is presumed to have the potential to emit methane or VOC unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC. For a piece of equipment to be considered not to have the potential to emit methane or VOC, the methane and VOC content of a gaseous stream must be below detection limits using Method 18 of appendix A-6 to this part. Alternatively, if the piece of equipment is in wet gas service, you may choose to determine the methane and VOC content of the stream is below the detection limit of the methods described in ASTM E168-16(R2023), E169-16(R2022), or E260-96 (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(b) Pumps in light liquid service. You must monitor each pump in light liquid service monthly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 60.5403b, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) through (6) of this section. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater. A pump that begins operation in light liquid service after the initial startup date for the process unit must be monitored for the first time within 30 days after the end of its startup period, except for a pump that replaces a leaking pump and except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) through (6) of this section.
(1) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, you must conduct weekly visual inspections of all pumps in light liquid service for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal. If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, you must follow the procedure specified in either paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) Monitor the pump within 5 days using the methods specified in § 60.5403b. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater.
(ii) Designate the visual indications of liquids dripping as a leak, and repair the leak as specified in paragraph (i) of this section.
(2) Each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system is exempt from the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, provided the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (v) of this section are met.
(i) Each dual mechanical seal system meets the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A), (B), or (C) of this section.
(A) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is at all times greater than the pump stuffing box pressure; or
(B) Equipped with a barrier fluid degassing reservoir that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or connected by a closed vent system to a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section; or
(C) Equipped with a system that purges the barrier fluid into a process stream with zero VOC emissions to the atmosphere.
(ii) The barrier fluid system is in heavy liquid service or does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC.
(iii) Each barrier fluid system is equipped with a sensor that will detect failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(iv) Each pump is checked according to the requirements in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(v) Each sensor meets the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Each sensor as described in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section is checked daily or is equipped with an audible alarm.
(B) You determine, based on design considerations and operating experience, a criterion that indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(C) If the sensor indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both, based on the criterion established in paragraph (b)(2)(v)(B) of this section, a leak is detected.
(3) Any pump that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(12), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (b) introductory text, (b)(1), and (2) of this section if the pump:
(i) Has no externally actuated shaft penetrating the pump housing;
(ii) Is demonstrated to be operating with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background as measured by the methods specified in § 60.5403b; and
(iii) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(4) If any pump is equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a process, fuel gas system, or a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section, it is exempt from paragraphs (b), (b)(1) through (3) of this section, and the repair requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.
(5) Any pump that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor pump is exempt from the inspection and monitoring requirements of paragraphs (b) introductory text, (b)(1), and (b)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section if the conditions in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the pump is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (b) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the pump as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(6) Any pump that is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection requirements in paragraph (b)(1) and (b)(2)(iv) of this section, and the daily requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section, provided that each pump is visually inspected as often as practicable and at least monthly.
(c) Pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service. You must monitor each pressure relief device quarterly using the methods specified in § 60.5403b. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater above background.
(1) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (c) introductory text of this section, after each pressure release, you must monitor each pressure relief device within 5 calendar days after each pressure release to detect leaks. A leak is detected if an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is provided using the methods specified in § 60.5403b(b).
(2) Any pressure relief device that is located in a nonfractionating plant that is monitored only by non-plant personnel may be monitored after a pressure release the next time the monitoring personnel are onsite or within 30 calendar days after a pressure release, whichever is sooner, instead of within 5 calendar days as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(3) No pressure relief device described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section may be allowed to operate for more than 30 calendar days after a pressure release without monitoring.
(4) Any pressure relief device that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting leakage through the pressure relief device to a control device as described in paragraph (e) of this section is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (c) introductory text and (c)(1) of this section.
(5) Pressure relief devices equipped with a rupture disk are exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section provided you install a new rupture disk upstream of the pressure relief device as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after each pressure release, except as provided in paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(d) Open-ended valves or lines. Each open-ended valve or line must be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a second valve, except as provided in paragraphs (d)(4) and (5) of this section. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve must seal the open end of the valve or line at all times except during operations requiring process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line.
(1) If evidence of a leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected and must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (i) of this section. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater if Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used.
(2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve must be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is closed before the second valve is closed.
(3) When a double block-and-bleed system is being used, the bleed valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the line between the block valves but shall remain closed at all other times.
(4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (d) introductory text, and (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
(5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would autocatalytically polymerize or would present an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if capped or equipped with a double block-and-bleed system as specified in paragraphs (d) introductory text, (d)(2), and (3) of this section are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(e) Closed vent systems and control devices. Closed vent systems used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5411b and 60.5416b. Control devices used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5412b, 60.5415b(f), and 60.5417b.
(f) Valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service. You must monitor each valve in gas/vapor and in light liquid service quarterly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 60.5403b, except as provided in paragraphs (f)(3) through (5) of this section.
(1) A valve that begins operation in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service after the initial startup date for the process unit must be monitored for the first time within 90 days after the end of its startup period to ensure proper installation, except for a valve that replaces a leaking valve and except as provided in paragraphs (f)(3) through (5) of this section.
(2) An instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is a leak. You must repair each leaking valve according to the requirements in paragraph (i) of this section.
(3) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(12), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the valve:
(i) Has no externally actuating mechanism in contact with the process fluid;
(ii) Is operated with emissions less than 500 ppmv above background as determined by the methods specified in § 60.5403b; and
(iii) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(4) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor valve is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the requirements in paragraphs (f)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the valve is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (f) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the valve as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(5) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(14), as a difficult-to-monitor valve is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the requirements in paragraph (f)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the valve cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(ii) The process unit within which the valve is located has less than 3.0 percent of its total number of valves designated as difficult-to-monitor.
(iii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the at least once per calendar year.
(g) Pumps, valves, and connectors in heavy liquid service and pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service. If evidence of a potential leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, you must comply with either paragraph (g)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) You must monitor the equipment within 5 calendar days by the method specified in § 60.5403b and repair any leaks detected according to paragraph (i) of this section. An instrument reading of 10,000 ppmv or greater is defined as a leak.
(2) You must designate the AVO, or other indication of a leak as a leak and repair the leak according to paragraph (i) of this section.
(h) Connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service. You must initially monitor all connectors in the process unit for leaks by the later of either 12 months after the compliance date or 12 months after initial startup. If all connectors in the process unit have been monitored for leaks prior to the compliance date, no initial monitoring is required provided either no process changes have been made since the monitoring or the owner or operator can determine that the results of the monitoring, with or without adjustments, reliably demonstrate compliance despite process changes. If required to monitor because of a process change, you are required to monitor only those connectors involved in the process change.
(1) You must monitor all connectors in gas/vapor service and all connectors in light liquid service annually, except as provided in § 60.5399b, paragraph (e) of this section or paragraph (h)(2) of this section. If an instrument reading greater than or equal to 500 ppmv is measured, a leak is detected.
(2) Any connector that is designated, as described in § 60.5421b(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor connector is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (h) introductory text and (h)(1) of this section if the requirements of paragraphs (h)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate the connector is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs (h) introductory text and (h)(1) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the connector as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(3) Inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-line connectors.
(i) Any connector that is inaccessible or that is ceramic or ceramic-lined (e.g., porcelain, glass, or glass-lined), is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraphs (h) and (h)(1) of this section, from the leak repair requirements of paragraph (i) of this section, and from the recordkeeping and reporting requirements of §§ 60.5421b and 60.5422b. An inaccessible connector is one that meets any of the specifications in paragraphs (h)(3)(i)(A) through (F) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Buried.
(B) Insulated in a manner that prevents access to the connector by a monitor probe.
(C) Obstructed by equipment or piping that prevents access to the connector by a monitor probe.
(D) Unable to be reached from a wheeled scissor-lift or hydraulic-type scaffold that would allow access to connectors up to 7.6 meters (25 feet) above the ground.
(E) Inaccessible because it would require elevating monitoring personnel more than 2 meters (7 feet) above a permanent support surface or would require the erection of scaffold.
(F) Not able to be accessed at any time in a safe manner to perform monitoring. Unsafe access includes, but is not limited to, the use of a wheeled scissor-lift on unstable or uneven terrain, the use of a motorized man-lift basket in areas where an ignition potential exists, or access would require near proximity to hazards such as electrical lines or would risk damage to equipment.
(ii) If any inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-lined connector is observed by AVO or other means to be leaking, the indications of a leak to the atmosphere by AVO or other means must be eliminated as soon as practicable.
(4) Connectors which are part of an instrumentation systems and inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-lined connectors meeting the provisions of paragraph (h)(3) of this section, are not subject to the recordkeeping requirements of § 60.5421b(b)(1).
(i) Repair requirements. When a leak is detected, comply with the requirements of paragraphs (i)(1) through (5) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification tag, marked with the equipment identification number, must be attached to the leaking equipment. The identification tag on the equipment may be removed after it has been repaired.
(2) A first attempt at repair must be made as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected.
(i) First attempts at repair for pumps in light liquid or heavy liquid service include, but are not limited to, the practices described in paragraphs (i)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, where practicable.
(A) Tightening the packing gland nuts.
(B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and temperature.
(ii) For each valve where a leak is detected, you must comply with paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section, unless you meet the requirements of paragraph (i)(2)(ii)(D) of this section.
(A) Repack the existing valve with a low-e packing.
(B) Replace the existing valve with a low-e valve; or
(C) Perform a drill and tap repair with a low-e injectable packing.
(D) An owner or operator is not required to utilize a low-e valve or low-e packing to replace or repack a valve if the owner or operator demonstrates that a low-e valve or low-e packing is not technically feasible. Low-e valve or low-e packing that is not suitable for its intended use is considered to be technically infeasible. Factors that may be considered in determining technical infeasibility include: retrofit requirements for installation (e.g., re-piping or space limitation), commercial unavailability for valve type, or certain instrumentation assemblies.
(3) Repair of leaking equipment must be completed within 15 calendar days after detection of each leak, except as provided in paragraph (i)(4), (5), or (6) of this section.
(4) If the repair for visual indications of liquids dripping for pumps in light liquid service can be made by eliminating visual indications of liquids dripping, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(5) If the repair for AVO or other indication of a leak for open-ended lines or valves; pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service; or pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service can be made by eliminating the AVO, or other indication of a potential leak, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(6) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be allowed if repair within 15 calendar days is technically infeasible without a process unit shutdown or as specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) through (v) of this section. Repair of this equipment shall occur before the end of the next process unit shutdown. Monitoring to verify repair must occur within 15 calendar days after startup of the process unit.
(i) Delay of repair of equipment will be allowed for equipment which is isolated from the process, and which does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC.
(ii) Delay of repair for valves and connectors will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) are met.
(A) You demonstrate that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(B) When repair procedures are conducted, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with paragraph (e) of this section.
(iii) Delay of repair for pumps will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) are met.
(A) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(B) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(iv) If delay of repair is required to repack or replace the valve, you may use delay of repair. Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown will be allowed for a valve, if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(v) When delay of repair is allowed for a leaking pump, valve, or connector that remains in service, the pump, valve, or connector may be considered to be repaired and no longer subject to delay of repair requirements if two consecutive monthly monitoring results show no leak remains.
(i) Repair requirements. When a leak is detected, comply with the requirements of paragraphs (i)(1) through (5) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification tag, marked with the equipment identification number, must be attached to the leaking equipment. The identification tag on the equipment may be removed after it has been repaired.
(2) A first attempt at repair must be made as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected.
(i) First attempts at repair for pumps in light liquid or heavy liquid service include, but are not limited to, the practices described in paragraphs (i)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, where practicable.
(A) Tightening the packing gland nuts.
(B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and temperature.
(ii) For each valve where a leak is detected, you must comply with (h)(2)(ii)(A), (B) or (C), and (D) of this section.
(A) Repack the existing valve with a low-e packing.
(B) Replace the existing valve with a low-e valve; or
(C) Perform a drill and tap repair with a low-e injectable packing.
(D) An owner or operator is not required to utilize a low-e valve or low-e packing to replace or repack a valve if the owner or operator demonstrates that a low-e valve or low-e packing is not technically feasible. Low-e valve or low-e packing that is not suitable for its intended use is considered to be technically infeasible. Factors that may be considered in determining technical infeasibility include: retrofit requirements for installation (e.g., re-piping or space limitation), commercial unavailability for valve type, or certain instrumentation assemblies.
(3) Repair of leaking equipment must be completed within 15 calendar days after detection of each leak, except as provided in paragraph (i)(4), (5), or (6) of this section.
(4) If the repair for visual indications of liquids dripping for pumps in light liquid service can be made by eliminating visual indications of liquids dripping, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(5) If the repair for AVO or other indication of a leak for open-ended lines or valves; pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service; or pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service can be made by eliminating the AVO, or other indication of a potential leak, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(6) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be allowed if repair within 15 calendar days is technically infeasible without a process unit shutdown or as specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) through (v) of this section. Repair of this equipment shall occur before the end of the next process unit shutdown. Monitoring to verify repair must occur within 15 calendar days after startup of the process unit.
(i) Delay of repair of equipment will be allowed for equipment which is isolated from the process, and which does not have the potential to emit methane or VOC.
(ii) Delay of repair for valves and connectors will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) are met.
(A) You demonstrate that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(B) When repair procedures are conducted, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with paragraph (e) of this section.
(iii) Delay of repair for pumps will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) are met.
(A) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(B) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(iv) If delay of repair is required to repack or replace the valve, you may use delay of repair. Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown will be allowed for a valve, if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(v) When delay of repair is allowed for a leaking pump, valve, or connector that remains in service, the pump, valve, or connector may be considered to be repaired and no longer subject to delay of repair requirements if two consecutive monthly monitoring results show no leak remains.
(j) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5410b(h).
(k) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5415b(j).
(l) Reporting. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (11) through (13), as applicable, and § 60.5422b.
(m) Recordkeeping. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(8) and (10) through (13), as applicable, and § 60.5421b.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62893, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5402b What are the exceptions to the GHG and VOC standards for process unit equipment affected facilities?
(a) You may comply with the following exceptions to the provisions of §§ 60.5400b(a) and 60.5401b(a), as applicable.
(b) Pumps in light liquid service, pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service, valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service, and connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service that are located at a nonfractionating plant that does not have the design capacity to process 283,200 standard cubic meters per day (scmd) (10 million standard cubic feet per day) or more of field gas may comply with the exceptions specified in paragraphs (b)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) You are exempt from the bimonthly OGI monitoring as required under § 60.5400b(b).
(2) You are exempt from the routine Method 21 of appendix A-7 monitoring requirements of § 60.5401b(b), (c), (f), and (h), if complying with the alternative standards of § 60.5401b.
(c) Pumps in light liquid service, pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service, valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service, and connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service within a process unit that is located in the Alaskan North Slope are exempt from the monitoring requirements § 60.5400b(b) and (c) and § 60.5401b(b), (c), (f) and (h).
(d) You may use the following provisions instead of § 60.5403b(d):
(1) Equipment is in heavy liquid service if the weight percent evaporated is 10 percent or less at 150 degrees Celsius (302 degrees Fahrenheit) as determined by ASTM D86-96 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(2) Equipment is in light liquid service if the weight percent evaporated is greater than 10 percent at 150 degrees Celsius (302 degrees Fahrenheit) as determined by ASTM D86-96 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(e) Equipment that is in vacuum service, except connectors in gas/vapor and light liquid service, is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5400b(b) through (g), if it is identified as required in § 60.5421b(b)(15). Equipment that is in vacuum service is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5401b(b) through (g) if it is identified as required in § 60.5421b(b)(15).
(f) Equipment that you designate as having the potential to emit methane or VOC less than 300 hr/yr is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5400b(b) through (g) and § 60.5401b(b) through (h), if it is identified as required in § 60.5421b(b)(16) and it meets any of the conditions specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) The equipment has the potential to emit methane or VOC only during startup and shutdown.
(2) The equipment has the potential to emit methane or VOC only during process malfunctions or other emergencies.
(3) The equipment is backup equipment that has the potential to emit methane or VOC only when the primary equipment is out of service.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62895, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5403b What test methods and procedures must I use for my process unit equipment affected facilities?
(a) In conducting the performance tests required in § 60.8, you must use as reference methods and procedures the test methods in appendix A to this part or other methods and procedures as specified in this section, except as provided in § 60.8(b).
(b) You must determine compliance with the standards in § 60.5401b as follows:
(1) Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part shall be used to determine the presence of leaking sources. The instrument shall be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. The following calibration gases shall be used:
(i) Zero air (less than 10 ppmv of hydrocarbon in air); and
(ii) A mixture of methane or n-hexane and air at a concentration no more than 2,000 ppmv greater than the leak definition concentration of the equipment monitored. If the monitoring instrument's design allows for multiple calibration scales, then the lower scale shall be calibrated with a calibration gas that is no higher than 2,000 ppmv above the concentration specified as a leak, and the highest scale shall be calibrated with a calibration gas that is approximately or equal to 10,000 ppmv. If only one scale on an instrument will be used during monitoring, you need not calibrate the scales that will not be used during that day's monitoring.
(iii) Verification that your monitoring equipment meets the requirements specified in Section 6.0 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. For purposes of instrument capability, the leak definition shall be 500 ppmv or greater methane using a FID-based instrument for valves and connectors and 2,000 ppmv methane or greater for pumps. If you wish to use an analyzer other than a FID-based instrument, you must develop a site-specific leak definition that would be equivalent to 500 ppmv methane using a FID-based instrument (e.g., 10.6 eV PID with a specified isobutylene concentration as the leak definition would provide equivalent response to your compound of interest).
(2) The instrument must be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. At minimum, you must also conduct precision tests at the interval specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 8.1.2, and a calibration drift assessment at the end of each monitoring day. The calibration drift assessment must be conducted as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section. Corrective action for drift assessments is specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
(i) Check the instrument using the same calibration gas that was used to calibrate the instrument before use. Follow the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 10.1, except do not adjust the meter readout to correspond to the calibration gas value. If multiple scales are used, record the instrument reading for each scale used. Divide the arithmetic difference of the initial and post-test calibration response by the corresponding calibration gas value for each scale and multiply by 100 to express the calibration drift as a percentage.
(ii) If a calibration drift assessment shows a negative drift of more than 10 percent, then all equipment with instrument readings between the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 minus the percent of negative drift) divided by 100 and the fugitive emission definition that was monitored since the last calibration must be re-monitored.
(iii) If any calibration drift assessment shows a positive drift of more than 10 percent from the initial calibration value, then, at the owner/operator's discretion, all equipment with instrument readings above the fugitive emission definition and below the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 plus the percent of positive drift) divided by 100 monitored since the last calibration may be re-monitored.
(c) You shall determine compliance with the no detectable emission standards in § 60.5401b(b) and (f) as specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section shall apply.
(2) Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part shall be used to determine the background level. All potential leak interfaces shall be traversed as close to the interface as possible. The arithmetic difference between the maximum concentration indicated by the instrument and the background level is compared with 500 ppmv for determining compliance.
(d) You shall demonstrate that a piece of equipment is in light liquid service by showing that all of the following conditions apply:
(1) The vapor pressure of one or more of the organic components is greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 °C (1.2 in H2O at 68 °F). Standard reference texts or ASTM D2879-83, -96, or -97 (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) shall be used to determine the vapor pressures.
(2) The total concentration of the pure organic components having a vapor pressure greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 °C (1.2 in H2O at 68 °F) is equal to or greater than 20 percent by weight.
(3) The fluid is a liquid at operating conditions.
(e) Samples used in conjunction with paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section shall be representative of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts the equipment, or the gas being combusted in the flare.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62895, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5405b What standards apply to sweetening unit affected facilities?
(a) During the initial performance test required by § 60.8(b), you must achieve at a minimum, an SO2 emission reduction efficiency (Zi) to be determined from table 3 to this subpart based on the sulfur feed rate (X) and the sulfur content of the acid gas (Y) of the affected facility.
(b) After demonstrating compliance with the provisions of paragraph (a) of this section, you must achieve at a minimum, an SO2 emission reduction efficiency (Zc) to be determined from table 4 to this subpart based on the sulfur feed rate (X) and the sulfur content of the acid gas (Y) of the affected facility.
(c) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to sweetening unit affected facilities as required by § 60.5410b(i).
(d) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to sweetening unit affected facilities as required by § 60.5415b(k).
(e) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420b(a)(1), (b)(1), and § 60.5423b and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5423b.
§ 60.5406b What test methods and procedures must I use for my sweetening unit affected facilities?
(a) In conducting the performance tests required in § 60.8, you must use the test methods in appendix A to this part or other methods and procedures as specified in this section, except as provided in § 60.8(b).
(b) During a performance test required by § 60.8, you must determine the minimum required reduction efficiencies (Z) of SO2 emissions as required in § 60.5405b(a) and (b) as follows:
(1) The average sulfur feed rate (X) must be computed as follows:
Where:
X = average sulfur feed rate, Mg/D (LT/D).
Qa = average volumetric flow rate of acid gas from sweetening unit, dscm/day (dscf/day).
Y = average H2S concentration in acid gas feed from sweetening unit, percent by volume, expressed as a decimal.
K = (32 kg S/kg-mole)/((24.04 dscm/kg-mole)(1000 kg S/Mg)).
= 1.331 × 10−3Mg/dscm, for metric units.
= (32 lb S/lb-mole)/((385.36 dscf/lb-mole)(2240 lb S/long ton)).
= 3.707 × 10−5 long ton/dscf, for English units.
(2) You must use the continuous readings from the process flowmeter to determine the average volumetric flow rate (Qa) in dscm/day (dscf/day) of the acid gas from the sweetening unit for each run.
(3) You must use the Tutwiler procedure in § 60.5408b or a chromatographic procedure following ASTM E260-96 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) to determine the H2S concentration in the acid gas feed from the sweetening unit (Y). At least one sample per hour (at equally spaced intervals) must be taken during each 4-hour run. The arithmetic mean of all samples must be the average H2S concentration (Y) on a dry basis for the run. By multiplying the result from the Tutwiler procedure by 1.62 × 10 −3, the units gr/100 scf are converted to volume percent.
(4) Using the information from paragraphs (b)(1) and (3) of this section, tables 3 and 4 to this subpart must be used to determine the required initial (Zi) and continuous (Zc) reduction efficiencies of SO2 emissions.
(c) You must determine the emission reduction efficiency (R) achieved by the sulfur recovery technology as follows:
(1) You must compute the emission reduction efficiency (R) achieved by the sulfur recovery technology for each run using the following equation:
(2) You must use the level indicators or manual soundings to measure the liquid sulfur accumulation rate in the product storage vessels. You must use readings taken at the beginning and end of each run, the tank geometry, sulfur density at the storage temperature, and sample duration to determine the sulfur production rate (S) in kg/hr (lb/hr) for each run.
(3) You must compute the emission rate of sulfur for each run as follows:
Where:
E = emission rate of sulfur per run, kg/hr.
Ce = concentration of sulfur equivalent (SO2+ reduced sulfur), g/dscm (lb/dscf).
Qsd = volumetric flow rate of effluent gas, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
K1 = conversion factor, 1000 g/kg (7000 gr/lb).
(4) The concentration (Ce) of sulfur equivalent must be the sum of the SO2 and TRS concentrations, after being converted to sulfur equivalents. For each run and each of the test methods specified in this paragraph (c) of this section, you must use a sampling time of at least 4 hours. You must use Method 1 of appendix A-1 to this part to select the sampling site. The sampling point in the duct must be at the centroid of the cross-section if the area is less than 5 m 2 (54 ft 2) or at a point no closer to the walls than 1 m (39 in) if the cross-sectional area is 5 m 2 or more, and the centroid is more than 1 m (39 in) from the wall.
(i) You must use Method 6 or 6C of appendix A-4 to this part to determine the SO2 concentration. You must take eight samples of 20 minutes each at 30-minute intervals. The arithmetic average must be the concentration for the run. The concentration must be multiplied by 0.5 × 10−3 to convert the results to sulfur equivalent. In place of Method 6 of appendix A to this part, you may use ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(ii) You must use Method 2 of appendix A-1 to this part to determine the volumetric flow rate of the effluent gas. A velocity traverse must be conducted at the beginning and end of each run. The arithmetic average of the two measurements must be used to calculate the volumetric flow rate (Qsd) for the run. For the determination of the effluent gas molecular weight, a single integrated sample over the 4-hour period may be taken and analyzed or grab samples at 1-hour intervals may be taken, analyzed, and averaged.
(iii) You must use Method 4 of appendix A-2 to this part for moisture content. Alternatively, you must take two samples of at least 0.10 dscm (3.5 dscf) and 10 minutes at the beginning of the 4-hour run and near the end of the time period. The arithmetic average of the two runs must be the moisture content for the run.
(iv) You must use Method 15 of appendix A-5 to this part to determine the TRS concentration from reduction-type devices or where the oxygen content of the effluent gas is less than 1.0 percent by volume. The sampling rate must be at least 3 liters/min (0.1 ft 3/min) to insure minimum residence time in the sample line. You must take sixteen samples at 15-minute intervals. The arithmetic average of all the samples must be the concentration for the run. The concentration in ppmv reduced sulfur as sulfur must be multiplied by 1.333 × 10−3 to convert the results to sulfur equivalent.
(v) You must use Method 16A of appendix A-6 to this part or ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) to determine the reduced sulfur concentration from oxidation-type devices or where the oxygen content of the effluent gas is greater than 1.0 percent by volume. You must take eight samples of 20 minutes each at 30-minute intervals. The arithmetic average must be the concentration for the run. The concentration in ppm reduced sulfur as sulfur must be multiplied by 1.333 × 10−3 to convert the results to sulfur equivalent.
(vi) You must use EPA Method 2 of appendix A-1 to this part to determine the volumetric flow rate of the effluent gas. A velocity traverse must be conducted at the beginning and end of each run. The arithmetic average of the two measurements must be used to calculate the volumetric flow rate (Qsd) for the run. For the determination of the effluent gas molecular weight, a single integrated sample over the 4-hour period may be taken and analyzed or grab samples at 1-hour intervals may be taken, analyzed, and averaged. For the moisture content, you must take two samples of at least 0.10 dscm (3.5 dscf) and 10 minutes at the beginning of the 4-hour run and near the end of the time period. The arithmetic average of the two runs must be the moisture content for the run.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024; 89 FR 62895, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5407b What are the requirements for monitoring of emissions and operations from my sweetening unit affected facilities?
(a) If your sweetening unit affected facility is subject to the provisions of § 60.5405b(a) or (b) you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices or perform measurements to determine the following operations information on a daily basis:
(1) The accumulation of sulfur product over each 24-hour period. The monitoring method may incorporate the use of an instrument to measure and record the liquid sulfur production rate or may be a procedure for measuring and recording the sulfur liquid levels in the storage vessels with a level indicator or by manual soundings, with subsequent calculation of the sulfur production rate based on the tank geometry, stored sulfur density, and elapsed time between readings. The method must be designed to be accurate within ±2 percent of the 24-hour sulfur accumulation.
(2) The H2S concentration in the acid gas from the sweetening unit for each 24-hour period. At least one sample per 24-hour period must be collected and analyzed using the equation specified in § 60.5406b(b)(1). The Administrator may require you to demonstrate that the H2S concentration obtained from one or more samples over a 24-hour period is within ±20 percent of the average of 12 samples collected at equally spaced intervals during the 24-hour period. In instances where the H2S concentration of a single sample is not within ±20 percent of the average of the 12 equally spaced samples, the Administrator may require a more frequent sampling schedule.
(3) The average acid gas flow rate from the sweetening unit. You must install and operate a monitoring device to continuously measure the flow rate of acid gas. The monitoring device reading must be recorded at least once per hour during each 24-hour period. The average acid gas flow rate must be computed from the individual readings.
(4) The sulfur feed rate (X). For each 24-hour period, you must compute X using the equation specified in § 60.5406b(b)(1).
(5) The required sulfur dioxide emission reduction efficiency for the 24-hour period. You must use the sulfur feed rate and the H2S concentration in the acid gas for the 24-hour period, as applicable, to determine the required reduction efficiency in accordance with the provisions of § 60.5405b(b).
(b) Where compliance is achieved through the use of an oxidation control system or a reduction control system followed by a continually operated incineration device, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices and continuous emission monitors as follows:
(1) A continuous monitoring system to measure the total sulfur emission rate (E) of SO2 in the gases discharged to the atmosphere. The SO2 emission rate must be expressed in terms of equivalent sulfur mass flow rates (kg/hr (lb/hr)). The span of this monitoring system must be set so that the equivalent emission limit of § 60.5405b(b) will be between 30 percent and 70 percent of the measurement range of the instrument system.
(2) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(3) of this section: A monitoring device to measure the temperature of the gas leaving the combustion zone of the incinerator, if compliance with § 60.5405b(a) is achieved through the use of an oxidation control system or a reduction control system followed by a continually operated incineration device. The monitoring device must be certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within ±1 percent of the temperature being measured.
(3) When performance tests are conducted under the provision of § 60.8 to demonstrate compliance with the standards under § 60.5405b, the temperature of the gas leaving the incinerator combustion zone must be determined using the monitoring device. If the volumetric ratio of sulfur dioxide to sulfur dioxide plus total reduced sulfur (expressed as SO2) in the gas leaving the incinerator is equal to or less than 0.98, then temperature monitoring may be used to demonstrate that sulfur dioxide emission monitoring is sufficient to determine total sulfur emissions. At all times during the operation of the facility, you must maintain the average temperature of the gas leaving the combustion zone of the incinerator at or above the appropriate level determined during the most recent performance test to ensure the sulfur compound oxidation criteria are met. Operation at lower average temperatures may be considered by the Administrator to be unacceptable operation and maintenance of the affected facility. You may request that the minimum incinerator temperature be reestablished by conducting new performance tests under § 60.8.
(4) Upon promulgation of a performance specification of continuous monitoring systems for total reduced sulfur compounds at sulfur recovery plants, you may, as an alternative to paragraph (b)(2) of this section, install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous emission monitoring system for total reduced sulfur compounds as required in paragraph (c) of this section in addition to a sulfur dioxide emission monitoring system. The sum of the equivalent sulfur mass emission rates from the two monitoring systems must be used to compute the total sulfur emission rate (E).
(c) Where compliance is achieved using a reduction control system not followed by a continually operated incineration device, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system to measure the emission rate of reduced sulfur compounds as SO2 equivalent in the gases discharged to the atmosphere. The SO2 equivalent compound emission rate must be expressed in terms of equivalent sulfur mass flow rates (kg/hr (lb/hr)). The span of this monitoring system must be set so that the equivalent emission limit of § 60.5405b(b) will be between 30 and 70 percent of the measurement range of the system. This requirement becomes effective upon promulgation of a performance specification for continuous monitoring systems for total reduced sulfur compounds at sulfur recovery plants.
(d) For those sources required to comply with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, you must calculate the average sulfur emission reduction efficiency achieved (R) for each 24-hour clock interval. The 24-hour interval may begin and end at any selected clock time but must be consistent. You must compute the 24-hour average reduction efficiency (R) based on the 24-hour average sulfur production rate (S) and sulfur emission rate (E), using the equation in § 60.5406b(c)(1).
(1) You must use data obtained from the sulfur production rate monitoring device specified in paragraph (a) of this section to determine S.
(2) You must use data obtained from the sulfur emission rate monitoring systems specified in paragraphs (b) or (c) of this section to calculate a 24-hour average for the sulfur emission rate (E). The monitoring system must provide at least one data point in each successive 15-minute interval. You must use at least two data points to calculate each 1-hour average. You must use a minimum of 18 1-hour averages to compute each 24-hour average.
(e) In lieu of complying with paragraphs (b) or (c) of this section, those sources with a design capacity of less than 152 Mg/D (150 LT/D) of H2S expressed as sulfur may calculate the sulfur emission reduction efficiency achieved for each 24-hour period by:
Where:
R = The sulfur dioxide removal efficiency achieved during the 24-hour period, percent.
K2 = Conversion factor, 0.02400 Mg/D per kg/hr (0.01071 LT/D per lb/hr).
S = The sulfur production rate during the 24-hour period, kg/hr (lb/hr).
X = The sulfur feed rate in the acid gas, Mg/D (LT/D).
(f) The monitoring devices required in paragraphs (b)(1) and (3) and (c) of this section must be calibrated at least annually according to the manufacturer's specifications, as required by § 60.13(b).
(g) The continuous emission monitoring systems required in paragraphs (b)(1) and (3), and (c) of this section must be subject to the emission monitoring requirements of § 60.13. For conducting the continuous emission monitoring system performance evaluation required by § 60.13(c), Performance Specification 2 of appendix B to this part must apply, and Method 6 of appendix A-4 to this part must be used for systems required by paragraph (b) of this section. In place of Method 6 of appendix A-4 to this part, ASME PTC 19.10-1981 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) may be used.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62896, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5408b What is an optional procedure for measuring hydrogen sulfide in acid gas—Tutwiler Procedure?
The Tutwiler procedure may be found in the Gas Engineers Handbook, Fuel Gas Engineering practices, The Industrial Press, 93 Worth Street, New York, NY, 1966, First Edition, Second Printing, page 6/25 (Docket A-80-20-A, Entry II-I-67).
(a) Sampling. When an instantaneous sample is desired and H2S concentration is 10 grains per 1000 cubic foot or more, a 100 ml Tutwiler burette is used. For concentrations less than 10 grains, a 500 ml Tutwiler burette and more dilute solutions are used. In principle, this method consists of titrating hydrogen sulfide in a gas sample directly with a standard solution of iodine.
(b) Apparatus. (See figure 1 to this section.) A 100- or 500-ml capacity Tutwiler burette, with two-way glass stopcock at bottom and three-way stopcock at top that connect either with inlet tubulature or glass-stoppered cylinder, 10 ml capacity, graduated in 0.1 ml subdivision; rubber tubing connecting burette with leveling bottle.
(c) Reagents. (1) Iodine stock solution, 0.1N. Weight 12.7 g iodine, and 20 to 25 g cp potassium iodide (KI) for each liter of solution. Dissolve KI in as little water as necessary; dissolve iodine in concentrated KI solution, make up to proper volume, and store in glass-stoppered brown glass bottle.
(2) Standard iodine solution, 1 ml = 0.001771 g I. Transfer 33.7 ml of above 0.1N stock solution into a 250 ml volumetric flask; add water to mark and mix well. Then, for 100 ml sample of gas, 1 ml of standard iodine solution is equivalent to 100 grains H2S per cubic feet of gas.
(3) Rub into a thin paste about one teaspoonful of wheat starch with a little water; pour into about a pint of boiling water; stir; let cool and decant off clear solution. Make fresh solution every few days.
(d) Procedure. (Refer to figure 1 to this section.) Fill leveling bulb with starch solution. Raise (L), open cock (G), open (F) to (A), and close (F) when solutions start to run out of gas inlet. Close (G). Purge gas sampling line and connect with (A). Lower (L) and open (F) and (G). When liquid level is several ml past the 100 ml mark, close (G) and (F), and disconnect sampling tube. Open (G) and bring starch solution to 100 ml mark by raising (L); then close (G). Open (F) momentarily, to bring gas in burette to atmospheric pressure, and close (F). Open (G), bring liquid level down to 10 ml mark by lowering (L). Close (G), clamp rubber tubing near (E) and disconnect it from burette. Rinse graduated cylinder with a standard iodine solution (0.00171 g I per ml); fill cylinder and record reading. Introduce successive small amounts of iodine through (F); shake well after each addition; continue until a faint permanent blue color is obtained. Record reading; subtract from previous reading, and call difference D.
(e) Blank testing. (Refer to figure 1 to this section.) With every fresh stock of starch solution perform a blank test as follows: Introduce fresh starch solution into burette up to 100 ml mark. Close (F) and (G). Lower (L) and open (G). When liquid level reaches the 10 ml mark, close (G). With air in burette, titrate as during a test and up to same end point. Call ml of iodine used C. Then,
(f) Test sensitivity. Greater sensitivity can be attained if a 500 ml capacity Tutwiler burette is used with a more dilute (0.001N) iodine solution. Concentrations less than 1.0 grains per 100 cubic foot can be determined in this way. Usually, the starch-iodine end point is much less distinct, and a blank determination of end point, with H2S-free gas or air, is required.
Figure 1 to § 60.5408b. Tutwiler burette (lettered items mentioned in text).
§ 60.5410b How do I demonstrate initial compliance with the standards for each of my affected facilities?
You must determine initial compliance with the standards for each affected facility using the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (k) of this section. Except as otherwise provided in this section, the initial compliance period begins on the date specified in § 60.5370b and ends no later than 1 year after that date. The initial compliance period may be less than 1 full year.
(a) Well completion standards for well affected facilities. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each well completion operation conducted at your well affected facility as required by § 60.5375b, you must comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must submit the notification required in § 60.5420b(a)(2).
(2) You must submit the initial annual report for your well affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (2).
(3) You must maintain a log of records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(i) through (iv) and (vii), as applicable, for each well completion operation conducted. If you meet the exemption at § 60.5375b(g) for wells with a GOR less than 300 scf per stock barrel of oil produced, you do not have to maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(i) through (iv) and must maintain the record in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(vi). If you meet the exemption at § 60.5375b(h) for a well modified in accordance with § 60.5365b(a)(1)(ii) (i.e., an existing well is hydraulically refractured), you do not need to maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(i) through (iv) and must maintain the record in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(viii).
(4) For each well completion affected facility subject to both § 60.5375b(a)(1) and (2), as an alternative to retaining the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1)(i) through (iv), you may maintain records in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(1)(v).
(b) Gas well liquids unloading standards for well affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each gas well liquids unloading operation conducted at your gas well affected facility as required by § 60.5376b, you must comply with paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable.
(1) You must submit the initial annual report for your well affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (3).
(2) If you comply by using a liquids unloading technology or technique that does not vent to the atmosphere according to § 60.5376b(a)(1), you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2)(i).
(3) If you comply by using a liquids unloading technology or technique that vents to the atmosphere according to § 60.5376b(a)(2), (b) and (c), you must comply with paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Employ best management practices to minimize venting of methane and VOC emissions as specified in § 60.5376b(c) for each gas well liquids unloading operation.
(ii) Maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2)(ii).
(4) If you comply by using § 60.5376b(g), you must comply with paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture all emissions and route all emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after the initial gas well liquids unloading operation, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e), and comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(iv) You must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(v) You must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) You must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2)(iii),(c)(8) and (c)(10) through (13), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420b(b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(c) Associated gas well standards for well affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each associated gas well as required by § 60.5377b, you must comply with paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) If you comply with the requirements of § 60.5377b(a), you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(3)(i), (ii), and (iv).
(2) For associated gas wells that comply with § 60.5377b(f) based on a demonstration and certification that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1), (2), (3), and (4) of this section due to technical reasons in accordance with paragraph § 60.5377b(g), you must comply with paragraphs (c)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Document the technical reasons why it is infeasible to route recovered associated gas into a gas gathering flow line or collection system to a sales line, use it as an onsite fuel source, use it for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve, or re-inject it into the well or inject it into another well, maintain the documentation in accordance with § 60.5377(g), and submit this documentation in the initial annual report as required by paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(ii) Maintain a copy of the certification and submit the certification as required by § 60.5377b(g).
(3) If you comply with § 60.5377b(d) or (f), you must comply with paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture the associated gas and route the captured associated gas to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) Maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(3)(iv) and (c)(8) and (c)(10) through (13), as applicable.
(4) You must submit the initial annual report for your associated gas well as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (4) and (b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(d) Centrifugal compressor affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for your centrifugal compressor affected facility that uses a wet seal as required by § 60.5380b, you must comply with paragraphs (d)(1) through (5) and paragraphs (d)(7) and (8) of this section. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC alternative standards for your centrifugal compressor affected facility that is a self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor or a centrifugal compressor at the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system as allowed by § 60.5380b, you must comply with paragraphs (d)(6) through (8) of this section. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC alternative standards for your dry seal centrifugal compressor as required by § 60.5380b, you must comply with paragraphs (d)(6) through (8) of this section.
(1) You must reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater according to § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2) and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b, or you must route emissions to a process according to § 60.5380b(a)(3).
(2) If you use a control device to reduce emissions to comply with § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2), you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b) that is connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and is routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b. If you comply with § 60.5380b(a)(3) by routing the closed vent system to a process as an alternative to routing the closed vent system to a control device, you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b), and route captured vapors through a closed vent system to a process that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(3) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2), you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(4) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2) or comply with § 60.5380b(a)(3) by routing to a process, you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(5) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2), you must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(6) You must maintain the volumetric flow rates for your centrifugal compressors as specified in paragraphs (d)(6)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For your self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressors, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 3 scfm per seal. You must conduct your initial annual volumetric measurement as required by § 60.5380b(a)(4).
(ii) For your centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 9 scfm per seal. You must conduct your initial annual volumetric measurement as required by § 60.5380b(a)(5).
(iii) For your dry seal centrifugal compressor, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 10 scfm per seal. You must conduct your initial annual volumetric measurement as required by § 60.5380b(a)(6).
(7) You must submit the initial annual report for your centrifugal compressor affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (5) and (b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(8) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(4) and (c)(8) through (13), as applicable.
(e) Reciprocating compressor affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each reciprocating compressor affected facility as required by § 60.5385b, you must comply with paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) If you comply with § 60.5385b by maintaining volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined cylinder volumetric flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm) as required by § 60.5385b(a), you must maintain volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm and you must conduct your initial annual volumetric flow rate measurement as required by § 60.5385b(a)(1).
(2) If you comply with § 60.5385bby collecting the methane and VOC emissions from your reciprocating compressor rod packing using a rod packing emissions collection system as required by § 60.5385b(d)(1), you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b), route emissions to a process through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c), and you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(3) If you comply with § 60.5385b(d) by collecting the emissions from your rod packing emissions collection system by using a control device to reduce VOC and methane emissions by 95.0 percent as required by § 60.5385b(d)(2), you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b), route emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(4) If you comply with § 60.5385b(d)(2), you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(5) If you comply with § 60.5385b(d)(2), you must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(6) You must submit the initial annual report for your reciprocating compressor as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (6), and (11) through (13), as applicable.
(7) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(5) and (8) through (13) as applicable.
(f) Process controller affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with GHG and VOC emission standards for your process controller affected facility as required by § 60.5390b, you must comply with paragraphs (f)(1) through (5) of this section, as applicable. If you change compliance methods, you must also perform the applicable compliance demonstrations of paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section again for the new compliance method, note the change in compliance method in the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(7)(iv), and maintain the records required by paragraph (f)(5) of this section for the new compliance method.
(1) For process controller affected facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5390b(a), you must demonstrate that your process controller affected facility does not emit any VOC or methane to the atmosphere by meeting the requirements of paragraphs (f)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, you must meet the requirements for closed vent systems specified in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
(ii) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must conduct an initial no identifiable emissions inspection as required by § 60.5416b(b).
(2) For each process controller affected facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power, you must demonstrate initial compliance with § 60.5390b(b)(1) and (2) or with § 60.5390b(b)(3), instead of complying with paragraph § 60.5390b(a), by meeting the requirements specified in (f)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section for each process controller, as applicable.
(i) For each process controller in the process controller affected facility operating with a bleed rate of less than or equal to 6 scfh, you must maintain records in accordance with § 60.5420b(c)(6)(iii)(A) that demonstrate the process controller is designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(ii) For each process controller in the process controller affected facility operating with a bleed rate greater than 6 scfh, you must maintain records that demonstrate that a controller with a higher bleed rate than 6 scfh is required based on a specific functional need for that controller as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(6)(iii)(B).
(iii) For each intermittent vent process controller in the process controller affected facility you must demonstrate that each intermittent vent controller does not emit to the atmosphere during idle periods by conducting initial monitoring in accordance with § 60.5390b(b)(2)(ii).
(iv) For each process controller affected facility that complies by reducing methane and VOC emissions from all controllers in the process controller affected facility by 95.0 percent in accordance with § 60.5390b(b)(3), you must comply with paragraphs (b)(2)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b.
(B) Route all process controller affected facility emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b through a closed vent system that meets the requirements specified in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
(C) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(D) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(3) For each closed vent system used to comply with § 60.5390b, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c).
(ii) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(4) You must submit the initial annual report for your process controller affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (7).
(5) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(6).
(g) Pump affected facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for your pump affected facility as required by § 60.5393b, you must comply with paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable. If you change compliance methods, you must also perform the applicable compliance demonstrations of paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section again for the new compliance method, note the change in compliance method in the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(10)(v)(C), and maintain the records required by paragraph (g)(4) of this section for the new compliance method.
(1) For pump affected facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(a) or (b)(2) by routing emissions to a process, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(ii) and (iv) of this section. For pump affected facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(b)(3), you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from all pumps in the pump affected facility and route all emissions to a process or control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(2) Submit the certifications specified in paragraphs (g)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) The certification required by § 60.5393b(b)(5) that there is no vapor recovery unit on site and that there is a control device on site, but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction.
(ii) The certification required by § 60.5393b(b)(6) that there is no control device or process available on site.
(iii) The certification required by § 60.5393b(b)(7) that it is technically infeasible to capture and route the pump affected facility emissions to a process or an existing control device.
(3) You must submit the initial annual report for your pump affected facility as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (10), and (b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain the records for your pump affected facility as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(8) and (c)(10) through (13), as applicable, and (c)(15).
(h) Process unit equipment affected facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for process unit equipment affected facilities as required by § 60.5400b, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(1) through (4) and (h)(11) through (15) of this section, unless you meet and comply with the exception in § 60.5402b(b), (e), or (f) or meet the exemption in § 60.5402b(c). If you comply with the GHG and VOC standards for process unit equipment affected facilities using the alternative standards in § 60.5401b, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(5) through (15) of this section, unless you meet the exemption in § 60.5402b(b) or (c) or the exception in § 60.5402b(e) or (f).
(1) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service and connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5400b(b).
(2) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400b(c) for each pump in light liquid service.
(3) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400b(d) for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service.
(4) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5400b(e).
(5) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(b).
(6) You must conduct monitoring for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service as required by § 60.5401b(c).
(7) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5401b(d).
(8) You must conduct monitoring for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(f).
(9) You must conduct monitoring for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and each pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(g).
(10) You must conduct monitoring for each connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(h).
(11) For each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir to a process or a control device, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals to a process or a control device, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device to a process or a control device, you must meet the requirements of paragraph (h)(11)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b or route to a process.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device and route all emissions to a process or to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b.
(iii) If routing to a control device, conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or by May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e), and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) Maintain the records as required by § 60.5420b(c)(8) and (c)(10) through (c)(13), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420b(b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(12) You must tag and repair each identified leak as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i), as applicable.
(13) You must submit the notice required by § 60.5420b(a)(1).
(14) You must submit the initial semiannual report and subsequent semiannual report as required by § 60.5422b.
(15) You must maintain the records specified by § 60.5421b.
(i) Sweetening unit affected facility. To achieve initial compliance with the SO2 standard for your sweetening unit affected facility as required by § 60.5405b, you must comply with paragraphs (i)(1) through (14) of this section.
(1) You must conduct an initial performance test as required by § 60.8 and according to the requirements of § 60.5406b.
(2) You must determine the minimum required initial reduction efficiency of SO2 emissions (Zi) as required by § 60.5406b(b).
(3) You must determine the emission reduction efficiency (R) achieved by your sulfur reduction technology using the procedures in § 60.5406b(c)(1) through (4).
(4) You must demonstrate compliance with the standard as required by § 60.5405b(a) by comparing the minimum required SO2 emission reduction efficiency (Zi) to the emission reduction efficiency achieved by the sulfur recovery technology (R), where R must be greater than or equal to Zi.
(5) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices or perform measurements to determine the accumulation of sulfur product, the H2S concentration, the average acid gas flow rate, and the sulfur feed rate in accordance with § 60.5407b(a).
(6) You must determine the required SO2 emissions reduction efficiency each 24-hour period in accordance with § 60.5407b(a), (d), and (e), as applicable.
(7) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices and continuous emission monitors in accordance with § 60.5407b(b), (f), and (g), if you use an oxidation control system or a reduction control system followed by an incineration device.
(8) You must continuously operate the incineration device if you use an oxidation control system, or a reduction control system followed by an incineration device.
(9) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system to measure the emission rate of reduced sulfur compounds in accordance with § 60.5407b(c), (f), and (g), if you use a reduction control system not followed by an incineration device.
(10) You must submit the notification required by § 60.5420b(a)(1).
(11) You must submit the initial annual report required by § 60.5423b(b).
(12) You must submit the performance test report in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5420b(b)(12).
(13) You must submit the annual excess emissions reports required by § 60.5423b(d), if applicable.
(14) You must maintain the records required by § 60.5423b(a), (e) and (f), as applicable.
(j) Storage vessel affected facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each storage vessel affected facility as required by § 60.5395b, you must comply with paragraphs (j)(1) through (9) of this section. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for each storage vessel affected facility that complies by using a floating roof in accordance with § 60.5395b(b)(2), you must comply with paragraphs (j)(1) and (10) of this section.
(1) You must determine the potential for methane and VOC emissions as specified in § 60.5365b(e)(2).
(2) You must reduce methane and VOC emissions by 95.0 percent or greater according to § 60.5395b(a) and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413b or route to a process.
(3) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must equip each storage vessel in the storage vessel affected facility with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b), install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from the storage vessel affected facility, and route all emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412b. If you route emissions to a process, you must equip each storage vessel in the storage vessel affected facility with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(b), install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411b(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from the storage vessel affected facility, and route all emissions to a process.
(4) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413b within 180 days after initial startup or within 180 days of May 7, 2024, whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e), and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415b(f).
(5) You must conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(6) You must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) through (i), as applicable.
(7) You must maintain the records as required by § 60.5420b(c)(8) through (13), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420b(b)(11) through (13), as applicable.
(8) You must submit the initial annual report for your storage vessel affected facility required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (8).
(9) You must maintain the records required for your storage vessel affected facility, as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(7) for each storage vessel affected facility.
(10) For each storage vessel affected facility that complies by using a floating roof, you must meet the requirements of § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) and the relevant monitoring, inspection, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in subpart Kb of this part. You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(d)(a)(1) or (2) in accordance with § 60.5395b(b)(2) with the initial annual report specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (8).
(k) Fugitive emission components affected facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for fugitive emissions components affected facilities as required by § 60.5397b, you must comply with paragraphs (k)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must develop a fugitive emissions monitoring plan as required in § 60.5397b(b), (c), and (d).
(2) You must conduct an initial monitoring survey as required in § 60.5397b(e) and (f).
(3) You must repair each identified source of fugitive emissions for each affected facility as required in § 60.5397b(h).
(4) You must submit the initial annual report for each fugitive emissions components affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (9).
(5) You must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(14).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62896, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5411b What additional requirements must I meet to determine initial compliance for my covers and closed vent systems?
For each cover or closed vent system at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment affected facilities, you must comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section.
(a) Closed vent system requirements. (1) Reciprocating compressor rod packing, process controllers, and pumps. You must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a process.
(2) Associated gas wells, centrifugal compressors, process controllers in Alaska, pumps complying with § 60.5393b(b)(1), storage vessels, and process unit equipment. You must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a process or a control device that meets the requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a) through (d) of this section. For pumps complying with § 60.5393b(b)(3), you must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a control device that meets the requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a) through (d) of this section.
(3) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, you must design and operate the closed vent system with no identifiable emissions as demonstrated by § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(4) Bypass devices. You must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section if the closed vent system contains one or more bypass devices that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or fumes from entering the control device or being routed to a process.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section, you must comply with either paragraph (a)(4)(i)(A) or (B) of this section for each bypass device.
(A) You must properly install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a flow indicator at the inlet to the bypass device. The flow indicator must be capable of taking periodic readings as specified in § 60.5416b(a)(4)(i) and sound an alarm, or initiate notification via remote alarm to the nearest field office, when the bypass device is open such that the stream is being, or could be, diverted away from the control device or process, and sent to the atmosphere. You must maintain records of each time the alarm is activated according to § 60.5420b(c)(10).
(B) You must secure the bypass device valve installed at the inlet to the bypass device in the non-diverting position using a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration.
(ii) Low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, open-ended valves or lines, and safety devices are not subject to the requirements of paragraph (a)(4)(i) of this section.
(b) Cover requirements for storage vessels and centrifugal compressors, and reciprocating compressors. (1) The cover and all openings on the cover (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, pressure relief devices and gauge wells) shall form a continuous impermeable barrier over the entire surface area of the liquid in the storage vessel or centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system, or reciprocating compressor rod packing emissions collection system.
(2) Each cover opening shall be secured in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a gasketed lid or cap) whenever material is in the unit on which the cover is installed except during those times when it is necessary to use an opening as follows:
(i) To add material to, or remove material from the unit (this includes openings necessary to equalize or balance the internal pressure of the unit following changes in the level of the material in the unit);
(ii) To inspect or sample the material in the unit;
(iii) To inspect, maintain, repair, or replace equipment located inside the unit; or
(iv) To vent liquids, gases, or fumes from the unit through a closed vent system designed and operated in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section to a control device or to a process.
(3) Each storage vessel thief hatch shall be equipped, maintained and operated with a weighted mechanism or equivalent, to ensure that the lid remains properly seated and sealed under normal operating conditions, including such times when working, standing/breathing, and flash emissions may be generated. You must select gasket material for the hatch based on composition of the fluid in the storage vessel and weather conditions.
(4) Beginning January 22, 2027 or upon startup, whichever is later, you must design and operate the cover with no identifiable emissions as demonstrated by § 60.5416b(a) and (b), except when operated as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(c) Design requirements. (1) You must conduct an assessment that the closed vent system is of sufficient design and capacity to ensure that all gases, vapors, and fumes from the affected facility are routed to the control device or process and that the control device or process is of sufficient design and capacity to accommodate all emissions from the affected facility. The assessment must be certified by a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer with expertise on the design and operation of the closed vent system in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must provide the following certification, signed and dated by a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer: “I certify that the closed vent system design and capacity assessment was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the closed vent system design and capacity assessment was conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of subpart OOOOb of this part. Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(ii) The assessment shall be prepared under the direction or supervision of a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer who signs the certification in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62897, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5412b What additional requirements must I meet for determining initial compliance of my control devices?
You must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section for each control device used to comply with the emissions standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facility. If you use a carbon adsorption system as a control device to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you also must meet the requirements in paragraph (c) of this section.
(a) Each control device used to meet the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5377b(d) or (f) for your associated gas well at a well affected facility; § 60.5376b(g) for your well affected facility gas well that unloads liquids; § 60.5380b(a)(1) or (9) for your centrifugal compressor affected facility; § 60.5385b(d)(2) for your reciprocating compressor affected facility; § 60.5395b(a)(2) for your storage vessel affected facility; § 60.5390b(b)(3) for your process controller affected facility in Alaska; § 60.5393b(b)(3) for your pumps affected facility; or either § 60.5400b(f) or § 60.5401b(e) for your process equipment affected facility must be installed according to paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section. As an alternative to paragraph (a)(1) of this section, you may install a combustion control device model tested under § 60.5413b(d), which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and which meets the initial and continuous compliance requirements in § 60.5413b(e).
(1) Each enclosed combustion device (e.g., thermal vapor incinerator, catalytic vapor incinerator, boiler, or process heater) must be designed and operated in accordance with paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, meet one of the operating limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) through (v) of this section, and except for boilers and process heaters meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section and catalytic vapor incinerators meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(v) of this section, meet the operating limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(vi) through (ix) of this section. Alternatively, the enclosed combustion device must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) You must reduce the mass content of methane and VOC in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater or reduce the concentration of total organic compounds (TOC) in the exhaust gases at the outlet to the device to a level equal to or less than 275 ppmv as propane on a wet basis corrected to 3 percent oxygen as determined in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(b), with the exceptions noted in § 60.5413b(a).
(ii) For an enclosed combustion device for which you demonstrate during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413b(b) that combustion zone temperature is an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must operate at or above the minimum temperature established during the most recent performance test. During the performance test conducted under § 60.5413b(b), you must continuously record the temperature of the combustion zone and average the temperature for each test run. The established minimum temperature limit is the average of the test run averages.
(iii) For an enclosed combustion device which is a boiler or process heater, you must introduce the vent stream into the flame zone of the boiler or process heater and introduce the vent stream with the primary fuel or use the vent stream as the primary fuel.
(iv) For an enclosed combustion device other than those meeting the operating limits in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii), (iii), and (v) of this section, if the enclosed combustion device is unassisted or pressure-assisted, you must maintain the net heating value (NHV) of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above the applicable limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section. If the enclosed combustion device is steam-assisted or air-assisted, you must meet the applicable limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(iv)(C) and (D) of this section, as appropriate.
(A) For enclosed combustion devices that do not use assist gas or pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, 200 British thermal units (Btu) per standard cubic feet (Btu/scf).
(B) For enclosed combustion devices that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, 800 Btu/scf.
(C) For steam-assisted and air-assisted enclosed combustion devices, maintain the combustion zone NHV (NHVcz) at or above 270 Btu/scf.
(D) For enclosed combustion devices with perimeter assist air, maintain the NHV dilution parameter (NHVdil) at or above 22 British thermal units per square foot (Btu/sqft). If the only assist air provided to the enclosed combustion control device is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the burner tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are only required to comply with the NHVcz limit specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv)(C) of this section.
(v) For an enclosed combustion device which is a catalytic vapor incinerator, you must operate the catalytic vapor incinerator at or above the minimum temperature of the catalyst bed inlet and at or above the minimum temperature differential between the catalyst bed inlet and the catalyst bed outlet established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f) and as determined in your performance test conducted in accordance with § 60.5413b(b).
(vi) Unless you have an enclosed combustion device with pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, you must operate each enclosed combustion device at or below the maximum inlet gas flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f) and as determined in your performance test conducted in accordance with § 60.5413b(b).
(vii) You must operate the combustion control device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f).
(viii) After January 22, 2027, you must install and operate a continuous burning pilot or combustion flame. After January 22, 2027, an alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(ix) You must operate the enclosed combustion device with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test using section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417b(h). Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All inspection, repair, and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection. Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part visual observation as described in this paragraph or be monitored according to § 60.5417b(h).
(2) Each vapor recovery device (e.g., carbon adsorption system or condenser) or other non-destructive control device must be designed and operated to reduce the mass content of methane and VOC in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater as determined in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(b). As an alternative to the performance testing requirements of § 60.5413b(b), you may demonstrate initial compliance by conducting a design analysis for vapor recovery devices according to the requirements of § 60.5413b(c). For a condenser, you also must calculate the daily average condenser outlet temperature in accordance with § 60.5417b(e), and you must determine the condenser efficiency for the current operating day using the daily average condenser outlet temperature and the condenser performance curve established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f)(2). You must determine the average TOC emission reduction in accordance with § 60.5415b(f)(1)(ix)(D). For a carbon adsorption system, you also must comply with paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) Each flare must be designed and operated according to the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through (viii) of this section, as applicable. Alternatively, flares must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) For unassisted flares, you must maintain the NHV of the vent gas sent to the flare at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(ii) For flares that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, you must maintain the NHV of the vent gas sent to the flare at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(iii) For steam-assisted and air-assisted flares, you must maintain the NHVcz at or above 270 Btu/scf.
(iv) For flares with perimeter assist air, you must maintain the NHVdil at or above 22 Btu/sqft. If the only assist air provided to the flare is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are not required to comply with the NHVdil limit.
(v) For flares other than pressure-assisted flares, you must demonstrate compliance with the flare tip velocity limits in § 60.18(b) according to § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iv). The maximum flare tip velocity limits do not apply for pressure-assisted flares.
(vi) You must operate the flare at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The minimum inlet gas flow rate is established based on manufacturer recommendations.
(vii) You must operate the flare with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. You must conduct the compliance determination with the visible emission limits using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, or you must monitor the flare according to § 60.5417b(h).
(viii) After January 22, 2027, you must install and operate a continuous burning pilot or combustion flame. After January 22, 2027, an alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(b) You must operate each control device installed on your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facility in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must operate each control device used to comply with this subpart at all times when gases, vapors, and fumes are vented from the affected facility through the closed vent system to the control device. You may vent more than one affected facility to a control device used to comply with this subpart.
(2) For each control device monitored in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5417b(a) through (i), you must demonstrate compliance according to the requirements of § 60.5415b(f), as applicable.
(c) For each carbon adsorption system used as a control device to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. If the carbon adsorption system is a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you also must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(1) You must manage the carbon in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Following the initial startup of the control device, you must replace all carbon in the carbon adsorption system with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413b(c)(2) or (3). You must maintain records identifying the schedule for replacement and records of each carbon replacement as required in § 60.5420b(c)(11).
(ii) You must either regenerate, reactivate, or burn the spent carbon removed from the carbon adsorption system in one of the units specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(ii)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) Regenerate or reactivate the spent carbon in a unit for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart X.
(B) Regenerate or reactivate the spent carbon in a unit equipped with an operating organic air emissions control in accordance with an emissions standard for VOC under another subpart in 40 CFR part 63 or this part.
(C) Burn the spent carbon in a hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE, and has submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j).
(D) Burn the spent carbon in a hazardous waste boiler or industrial furnace for which the owner or operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE, and has submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j).
(E) Burn the spent carbon in an industrial furnace for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
(F) Burn the spent carbon in an industrial furnace that you have designed and operated in accordance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
(2) You must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section for each regenerative-type carbon adsorption system.
(i) You must measure and record the average total regeneration stream mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle to demonstrate compliance with the total regeneration stream flow established in accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2).
(ii) You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the flow continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion, if your continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor.
(iii) You must measure and record the average carbon bed temperature for the duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle and measure the actual carbon bed temperature after regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle. You must maintain the average carbon bed temperature above the temperature limit in established accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2) during the carbon bed steaming cycle and below the carbon bed temperature established in in accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2) after the regeneration cycle.
(d) To demonstrate that a flare or enclosed combustion device reduces methane and VOC in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater, as outlined in § 60.8(b), you may submit a request for an alternative test method. At a minimum, the request must follow the requirements outlined in paragraphs (d)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) The alternative method must be capable of demonstrating continuous compliance with a combustion efficiency of 95.0 percent or greater or it must be capable of demonstrating continuous compliance with the following metrics:
(i) NHVcz of 270 Btu/scf or greater.
(ii) NHVdil of 22 Btu/sqft or greater, if the alternative test method will be used for enclosed combustion devices or flares with perimeter assist air.
(2) The alternative method must be validated according to Method 301 in appendix A of 40 CFR part 63 for each type of control device covered by the alternative test method (e.g., air-assisted flare, unassisted enclosed combustion device) or the alternative test method must contain performance-based procedures and indicators to ensure self-validation.
(3) At a minimum the alternative test method must provide a reading for each successive 15-minute period.
(4) The alternative test method must be capable of documenting periods when the enclosed combustion device or flare operates with visible emissions. If the alternative test method cannot identify periods of visible emissions, you must conduct the inspections required by § 60.5417b(d)(8)(v).
(5) If the alternative test method demonstrates compliance with the metrics specified in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section instead of demonstrating continuous compliance with 95.0 percent or greater combustion efficiency, after January 22, 2027, you must still install the pilot or combustion flame monitoring system required by § 60.5417b(d)(8)(i). If the alternative test method demonstrates continuous compliance with a combustion efficiency of 95.0 percent or greater, the requirement in § 60.5417b(d)(8)(i) no longer applies.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62897, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5413b What are the performance testing procedures for control devices?
This section applies to the performance testing of control devices used to demonstrate compliance with the emissions standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facilities. You must demonstrate that a control device achieves the performance requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(1) or (2) using the performance test methods and procedures specified in this section. For condensers and carbon adsorbers, you may use a design analysis as specified in paragraph (c) of this section in lieu of complying with paragraph (b) of this section. In addition, this section contains the requirements for enclosed combustion device performance tests conducted by the manufacturer applicable to well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facilities.
(a) Performance test exemptions. You are exempt from the requirements to conduct initial and periodic performance tests and design analyses if you use any of the control devices described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this section. You are exempt from the requirements to conduct an initial performance test if you use a control device described in paragraph (a)(7) of this section.
(1) A flare that is designed and operated in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5412b(a)(3). You must conduct the compliance determination using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part to determine visible emissions or monitor the flare according to § 60.5417b(h). The net heating value of the vent gas must be determined according to § 60.5417b(d)(8)(ii).
(2) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 44 megawatts or greater.
(3) A boiler or process heater into which the vent stream is introduced with the primary fuel or is used as the primary fuel.
(4) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; you have certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; you have submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) and comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE; or you comply with 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE and will submit a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) by the date specified in § 60.5420b(b)(12) for submitting the initial performance test report.
(5) A hazardous waste incinerator for which you have submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j), or for which you will submit a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) by the date specified in § 60.5420b(b)(12) for submitting the initial performance test report, and you comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE.
(6) A control device for which performance test is waived in accordance with § 60.8(b).
(7) A control device whose model can be demonstrated to meet the performance requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(1)(i) through a performance test conducted by the manufacturer, as specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(b) Test methods and procedures. You must use the test methods and procedures specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable, for each performance test conducted to demonstrate that a control device meets the requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(1) or (2). You must conduct the initial and periodic performance tests according to the schedule specified in paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Each performance test must consist of a minimum of 3 test runs. Each run must be at least 1 hour long.
(1) You must use Method 1 or 1A of appendix A-1 to this part, as appropriate, to select the sampling sites. Any references to particulate mentioned in Methods 1 and 1A do not apply to this section.
(i) Sampling sites must be located at the inlet of the first control device and at the outlet of the final control device to determine compliance with a control device percent reduction requirement.
(ii) The sampling site must be located at the outlet of the combustion device to determine compliance with a TOC exhaust gas concentration limit.
(2) You must determine the gas volumetric flow rate using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of appendix A-2 to this part, as appropriate.
(3) To determine compliance with the control device percent reduction performance requirement in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(i) or (a)(2), you must use Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part. You must use Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part to convert the Method 25A results to a dry basis. You must use the procedures in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section to calculate percent reduction efficiency.
(i) You must compute the mass rate of TOC using the following equations:
Where:
Ei, Eo = Mass rate of TOC at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, kilograms per hour.
K2 = Constant, 2.494 × 10−6 (parts per million) (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/gram) (minute/hour), where standard temperature (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) is 20 degrees Celsius.
Ci, Co = Concentration of TOC, as propane, of the gas stream as measured by Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Mp = Molecular weight of propane, 44.1 gram/gram-mole.
Qi, Qo = Flow rate of gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry standard cubic meter per minute.
(ii) You must calculate the percent reduction in TOC as follows:
Where:
Rcd = Control efficiency of control device, percent.
Ei, = Mass rate of TOC at the inlet to the control device as calculated under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, kilograms per hour.
Eo = Mass rate of TOC at the outlet of the control device, as calculated under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, kilograms per hour.
(iii) If the vent stream entering a boiler or process heater with a design capacity less than 44 megawatts is introduced with the combustion air or as a secondary fuel, you must determine the weight-percent reduction of total TOC across the device by comparing the TOC in all combusted vent streams and primary and secondary fuels with the TOC exiting the device, respectively.
(4) You must use Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part to measure TOC, as propane, to determine compliance with the TOC exhaust gas concentration limit specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(i). You must determine the concentration in parts per million by volume on a wet basis and correct it to 3 percent oxygen. You must use the emission rate correction factor for excess air, integrated sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3A or 3B of appendix A-2 to this part, ASTM D6522-20, or ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (both incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) to determine the oxygen concentration. The samples must be taken during the same time that the samples are taken for determining TOC concentration. You must correct the TOC concentration for percent oxygen as follows:
Where:
Cc = TOC concentration, as propane, corrected to 3 percent oxygen, parts per million by volume on a wet basis.
Cm = TOC concentration, as propane, parts per million by volume on a wet basis.
%O2m = Concentration of oxygen, percent by volume as measured, wet.
(5) You must conduct performance tests according to the schedule specified in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) You must conduct an initial performance test within 180 days after initial startup for your affected facility. You must submit the performance test results as required in § 60.5420b(b)(12).
(ii) You must conduct periodic performance tests for all control devices required to conduct initial performance tests. You must conduct the first periodic performance test no later than 60 months after the initial performance test required in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section. You must conduct subsequent periodic performance tests at intervals no longer than 60 months following the previous periodic performance test or whenever you desire to establish a new operating limit. If a control device is not operational at the time a performance test is due, you must conduct the performance test no later than 30 calendar days after returning the control device to service. You must submit the periodic performance test results as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(12).
(iii) If the initial performance test was conducted by the manufacturer under paragraph (d) of this section, you must conduct the first periodic performance test no later than 60 months after initial installation and startup of the control device. You must conduct subsequent periodic performance tests at intervals no longer than 60 months following the previous periodic performance test. If a control device is not operational at the time a performance test is due, you must conduct the performance test no later than 30 calendar days after returning the control device to service. You must submit the periodic performance test results as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(12).
(c) Control device design analysis to meet the requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(2). (1) For a condenser, the design analysis must include an analysis of the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature and must establish the design outlet organic compound concentration level, design average temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream and the design average temperatures of the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and outlet.
(2) For a regenerable carbon adsorption system, the design analysis shall include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity and temperature and shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level, adsorption cycle time, number and capacity of carbon beds, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon beds, design total regeneration stream flow over the period of each complete carbon bed regeneration cycle, design carbon bed temperature after regeneration, design carbon bed regeneration time and design service life of the carbon.
(3) For a nonregenerable carbon adsorption system, such as a carbon canister, the design analysis shall include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity and temperature and shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level, capacity of the carbon bed, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon bed and design carbon replacement interval based on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source operating schedule. In addition, these systems shall incorporate dual carbon canisters in case of emission breakthrough occurring in one canister.
(4) If you and the Administrator do not agree on a demonstration of control device performance using a design analysis, then you must perform a performance test in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section to resolve the disagreement. The Administrator may choose to have an authorized representative observe the performance test.
(d) Performance testing for combustion control devices—manufacturers' performance test. (1) This paragraph (d) applies to the performance testing of a combustion control device conducted by the device manufacturer. The manufacturer must demonstrate that a specific model of control device achieves the performance requirements in paragraph (d)(11) of this section by conducting a performance test as specified in paragraphs (d)(2) through (10) of this section. You must submit a test report for each combustion control device in accordance with the requirements in paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(2) Performance testing must consist of three 1-hour (or longer) test runs for each of the four firing rate settings specified in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section, making a total of 12 test runs per test. Propene (propylene) gas must be used for the testing fuel. All fuel analyses must be performed by an independent third-party laboratory (not affiliated with the control device manufacturer or fuel supplier).
(i) 90-100 percent of maximum design rate (fixed rate).
(ii) 70-100-70 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at 70 percent of the maximum design rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 100 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 100 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10- to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to 70 percent of the maximum design rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(iii) 30-70-30 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at 30 percent of the maximum design rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 70 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 70 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10- to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to 30 percent of the maximum design rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(iv) 0-30-0 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at the minimum firing rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 30 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 30 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10- to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to the minimum firing rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(3) All models employing multiple enclosures must be tested simultaneously and with all burners operational. Results must be reported for each enclosure individually and for the average of the emissions from all interconnected combustion enclosures/chambers. Control device operating data must be collected continuously throughout the performance test using an electronic Data Acquisition System. A graphic presentation or strip chart of the control device operating data and emissions test data must be included in the test report in accordance with paragraph (d)(12) of this section. Inlet fuel meter data may be manually recorded provided that all inlet fuel data readings are included in the final report.
(4) Inlet testing must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) The inlet gas flow metering system must be located in accordance with Method 2A of appendix A-1 of this part (or other approved procedure) to measure inlet gas flow rate at the control device inlet location. You must position the fitting for filling fuel sample containers a minimum of eight pipe diameters upstream of any inlet gas flow monitoring meter.
(ii) Inlet flow rate must be determined using Method 2A to appendix A-1 of this part. Record the start and stop reading for each 60-minute THC test. Record the gas pressure and temperature at 5-minute intervals throughout each 60-minute test.
(5) Inlet gas sampling must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) At the inlet gas sampling location, securely connect a fused silica-coated stainless steel evacuated canister fitted with a flow controller sufficient to fill the canister over a 3-hour period. Filling must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(5)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Open the canister sampling valve at the beginning of each test run and close the canister at the end of each test run.
(B) Fill one canister across the three test runs such that one composite fuel sample exists for each test condition.
(C) Label the canisters individually and record sample information on a chain of custody form.
(ii) Analyze each inlet gas sample using the methods in paragraphs (d)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section. You must include the results in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(A) Hydrocarbon compounds containing between one and five atoms of carbon plus benzene using ASTM D1945-03(R2010) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(B) Hydrogen (H2), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), oxygen (O2) using ASTM D1945-03(R2010) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(C) Higher heating value using ASTM D3588-98(R2003) or ASTM D4891-89(R2006) (both incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(6) Outlet testing must be conducted in accordance with the criteria in paragraphs (d)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Sample and flow rate must be measured in accordance with paragraphs (d)(6)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) The outlet sampling location must be a minimum of four equivalent stack diameters downstream from the highest peak flame or any other flow disturbance, and a minimum of one equivalent stack diameter upstream of the exit or any other flow disturbance. A minimum of two sample ports must be used.
(B) Flow rate must be measured using Method 1 of appendix A-1 to this part for determining flow measurement traverse point location, and Method 2 of appendix A-1 to this part for measuring duct velocity. If low flow conditions are encountered (i.e., velocity pressure differentials less than 0.05 inches of water) during the performance test, a more sensitive manometer must be used to obtain an accurate flow profile.
(ii) Molecular weight and excess air must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
(iii) Carbon monoxide must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this section.
(iv) THC must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(9) of this section.
(v) Visible emissions must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(10) of this section.
(7) Molecular weight and excess air determination must be performed as specified in paragraphs (d)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) An integrated bag sample must be collected during the moisture test required by Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part following the procedure specified in (d)(7)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. Analyze the bag sample using a gas chromatograph-thermal conductivity detector (GC-TCD) analysis meeting the criteria in paragraphs (d)(7)(i)(C) and (D) of this section.
(A) Collect the integrated sample throughout the entire test and collect representative volumes from each traverse location.
(B) Purge the sampling line with stack gas before opening the valve and beginning to fill the bag. Clearly label each bag and record sample information on a chain of custody form.
(C) The bag contents must be vigorously mixed prior to the gas chromatograph analysis.
(D) The GC-TCD calibration procedure in Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part must be modified as follows: For the initial calibration, triplicate injections of any single concentration must agree within 5 percent of their mean to be valid. The calibration response factor for a single concentration re-check must be within 10 percent of the original calibration response factor for that concentration. If this criterion is not met, repeat the initial calibration using at least three concentration levels.
(ii) Calculate and report the molecular weight of oxygen, carbon dioxide, methane and nitrogen in the integrated bag sample and include in the test report specified in paragraph (d)(12) of this section. Moisture must be determined using Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part. Traverse both ports with the sampling train required by Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part during each test run. Ambient air must not be introduced into the integrated bag sample required by Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part during the port change.
(iii) Excess air must be determined using resultant data from the Method 3C tests and Method 3B of appendix A-2 to this part, equation 3B-1 in Method 3B, or ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(8) Carbon monoxide must be determined using Method 10 of appendix A-4 to this part. Run the test simultaneously with Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part using the same sampling points. An instrument range of 0-10 parts per million by volume-dry (ppmvd) is recommended.
(9) Total hydrocarbon determination must be performed as specified by in paragraphs (d)(9)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Conduct THC sampling using Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part, except that the option for locating the probe in the center 10 percent of the stack is not allowed. The THC probe must be traversed to 16.7 percent, 50 percent, and 83.3 percent of the stack diameter during each test run.
(ii) A valid test must consist of three Method 25A tests, each no less than 60 minutes in duration.
(iii) A 0 to 10 parts per million by volume-wet (ppmvw) (as propane) measurement range is preferred; as an alternative a 0 to 30 ppmvw (as propane) measurement range may be used.
(iv) Calibration gases must be propane in air and be certified through EPA-600/R-12/531—“EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards,” (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(v) THC measurements must be reported in terms of ppmvw as propane.
(vi) THC results must be corrected to 3 percent CO2, as measured by Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part. You must use the following equation for this diluent concentration correction:
Where:
Cmeas = The measured concentration of the pollutant.
CO2meas = The measured concentration of the CO2 diluent.
3 = The corrected reference concentration of CO2 diluent.
Ccorr = The corrected concentration of the pollutant.
(vii) Subtraction of methane or ethane from the THC data is not allowed in determining results.
(10) Visible emissions must be determined using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part. The test must be performed continuously during each test run. A digital color photograph of the exhaust point, taken from the position of the observer and annotated with date and time, must be taken once per test run and the 12 photos included in the test report specified in paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(11)(i) The control device model tested must meet the criteria in paragraphs (d)(11)(i)(A) through (D) of this section. These criteria must be reported in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(A) Results from Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part determined under paragraph (d)(10) of this section with no indication of visible emissions.
(B) Average results from Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part determined under paragraph (d)(9) of this section equal to or less than 10.0 ppmvw THC as propane corrected to 3.0 percent CO2.
(C) Average CO emissions determined under paragraph (d)(8) of this section equal to or less than 10 parts ppmvd, corrected to 3.0 percent CO2.
(D) Excess air determined under paragraph (d)(7) of this section equal to or greater than 150 percent.
(ii) The manufacturer must determine a minimum inlet gas flow rate above which each control device model must be operated to achieve the criteria in paragraph (d)(11)(iii) of this section. The manufacturer must determine a maximum inlet gas flow rate which must not be exceeded for each control device model to achieve the criteria in paragraph (d)(11)(iii) of this section. The minimum and maximum inlet gas flow rate must be included in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(iii) A manufacturer must demonstrate a destruction efficiency of at least 95.0 percent for THC, as propane. A control device model that demonstrates a destruction efficiency of 95.0 percent for THC, as propane, will meet the control requirement for 95.0 percent destruction of VOC and methane required under this subpart.
(12) The owner or operator of a combustion control device model tested under this paragraph (d)(12) must submit the information listed in paragraphs (d)(12)(i) through (vi) of this section for each test run in the test report required by this section in accordance with § 60.5420b(b)(13). Owners or operators who claim that any of the performance test information being submitted is confidential business information (CBI) must submit a complete file including information claimed to be CBI to the OAQPS CBI office. The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov and should include clear CBI markings and be flagged to the attention of the Leader, Measurement Policy Group. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link. If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer and Measurement Policy Group Leader, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, North Carolina 27711. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope. The same file with the CBI omitted must be submitted to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV.
(i) A full schematic of the control device and dimensions of the device components.
(ii) The maximum net heating value of the device.
(iii) The test fuel gas flow range (in both mass and volume). Include the minimum and maximum allowable inlet gas flow rate.
(iv) The air/stream injection/assist ranges, if used.
(v) The test conditions listed in paragraphs (d)(12)(v)(A) through (O) of this section, as applicable for the tested model.
(A) Fuel gas delivery pressure and temperature.
(B) Fuel gas moisture range.
(C) Purge gas usage range.
(D) Condensate (liquid fuel) separation range.
(E) Combustion zone temperature range. This is required for all devices that measure this parameter.
(F) Excess air range.
(G) Flame arrestor(s).
(H) Burner manifold.
(I) Continuous pilot flame indicator.
(J) Pilot flame design fuel and calculated or measured fuel usage.
(K) Tip velocity range.
(L) Momentum flux ratio.
(M) Exit temperature range.
(N) Exit flow rate.
(O) Wind velocity and direction.
(vi) The test report must include all calibration quality assurance/quality control data, calibration gas values, gas cylinder certification, strip charts, or other graphic presentations of the data annotated with test times and calibration values.
(e) Initial and continuous compliance for combustion control devices tested by the manufacturer in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. This paragraph (e) applies to the demonstration of compliance for a combustion control device tested under the provisions in paragraph (d) of this section. Owners or operators must demonstrate that a control device achieves the performance criteria in paragraph (d)(11) of this section by installing a device tested under paragraph (d) of this section, complying with the criteria specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (10) of this section, maintaining the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(11) and submitting the report specified in § 60.5420b(b)(11)(v) and (13).
(1) The inlet gas flow rate must be equal to or greater than the minimum inlet gas flow rate and equal to or less than the maximum inlet gas flow rate specified by the manufacturer.
(2) After January 22, 2027, a pilot or combustion flame must be present at all times of operation. After January 22, 2027, an alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(3) Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test conducted according to section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417b(h).
(4) Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All repairs and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection.
(5) Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a visual observation according to Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part as described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section or be monitored according to § 60.5417b(h).
(6) If the owner or operator operates a combustion control device model tested under this section, an electronic copy of the performance test results required by this section shall be submitted via email to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV unless the test results for that model of combustion control device are posted at the following website: https://www.epa.gov/controlling-air-pollution-oil-and-natural-gas-industry.
(7) Ensure that each enclosed combustion device is maintained in a leak free condition.
(8) Operate each control device following the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures and maintenance schedule to ensure good air pollution control practices for minimizing emissions.
(9) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417b(a) and (c) through (i).
(10) Comply with the applicable NHV limit specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(iv).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62897, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5415b How do I demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards for each of my affected facilities?
(a) Well completion standards for well affected facility. For each well completion operation at your well affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5375b by submitting the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (2) and maintaining the records for each completion operation specified in § 60.5420b(c)(1).
(b) Gas well liquids unloading standards for well affected facility. For each well liquids unloading operation at your well affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5376b by submitting the annual report information specified in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (3) and maintaining the records for each well liquids unloading event specified in § 60.5420b(c)(2). For each gas well liquids unloading well affected facility that complies with the requirements of § 60.5376b(g), you must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b. You also must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (f) of this section and maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(8), (10) and (12).
(c) Associated gas well standards for well affected facility. For each associated gas well, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5377b by submitting the reports required by § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (4) and maintaining the records specified in § 60.5420b(c)(3). For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5377b(d) or (f), you must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b. You also must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (f) of this section and maintain the records in § 60.5420b(c)(8), (10) and (12).
(d) Centrifugal compressor affected facility. For each wet seal centrifugal compressor affected facility complying with § 60.5380b(a)(1) and (2), or with § 60.5380b(a)(3) by routing emissions to a control device or to a process, you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraph (d)(1) and paragraphs (d)(3) and (4) of this section. For each self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor complying with the requirements in § 60.5380b(a)(4), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (d)(2) through (4) of this section. For each centrifugal compressor on the Alaska North Slope equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, complying with the requirements of § 60.5380b(a)(5), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (d)(2) through (4) of this section. For each dry seal centrifugal compressor complying with the requirements in § 60.5380b(a)(6), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (d)(2) through (4) of this section.
(1) For each wet seal centrifugal compressor affected facility complying by routing emissions to a control device or to a process, you must operate the wet seal emissions collection system to route emissions to a control device or a process through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the cover and closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b. If you comply with § 60.5380b(a)(2) by using a control device, you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) You must maintain volumetric flow rate at or below the flow rates specified in § 60.5380b(a)(4) for you self-contained centrifugal compressor, § 60.5380b(a)(5) for your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with a sour seal oil separator and capture system, and § 60.5380b(a)(6) for your centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals, as applicable. You must conduct the required volumetric flow rate measurement of your self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor in accordance with § 60.5380b(a)(4), your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with a sour seal oil separator and capture system in accordance with § 60.5380b(a)(5), and your dry seal centrifugal compressor in accordance with § 60.5380b(a)(6), as applicable, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after your last volumetric flow rate measurement which demonstrates compliance with the volumetric flow rate specified in § 60.5380b(a)(4) for your self-contained centrifugal compressor, § 60.5380b(a)(5) for your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with a sour seal oil separator and capture system and § 60.5380b(a)(6) for your centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals, as applicable.
(3) You must submit the annual reports as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (5), and (11)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain records as required in § 60.5420b(c)(4), (8) through (10), and (12), as applicable.
(e) Pump affected facility. To demonstrate continuous compliance with the GHG and VOC standards for your pump affected facility as required by § 60.5393b, you must comply with paragraphs (e)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) For pump affected facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(a) by routing emissions to a process, and for pump affected facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(b)(2), or (3), you must route emissions through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b. If you comply with § 60.5393b(b)(3), you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) You must submit the annual reports for your pump affected facility as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (10), and (11)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(3) You must maintain the records for your pump affected facility as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(8), (10) through (12), and (15), as applicable.
(f) Additional continuous compliance requirements for well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controllers in Alaska, storage vessel, process unit equipment, or pump affected facilities. For each associated gas well, each gas well that conducts liquids unloading, each centrifugal compressor affected facility, each reciprocating compressor affected facility, each process controller affected facility in Alaska, each storage vessel affected facility, each process unit equipment affected facility, and each pump affected facility referenced to this paragraph from either paragraph (b), (c), (d)(1), (e)(1), (g)(2), (h)(2), (i)(5)(ii)(B), or (j)(12) of this section, you must also install monitoring systems as specified in § 60.5417b, demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraph (f)(1) of this section, maintain the records in paragraph (f)(2) of this section, and comply with the reporting requirements specified in paragraph (f)(3) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the control device performance requirements of § 60.5412b(a) using the procedures specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section and conducting the monitoring as required by § 60.5417b. If you use a condenser as the control device to achieve the requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(2), you may demonstrate compliance according to paragraph (f)(1)(ix) of this section. You may switch between compliance with paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section and compliance with paragraph (f)(1)(ix) of this section only after at least 1 year of operation in compliance with the selected approach. You must provide notification of such a change in the compliance method in the next annual report, following the change. If you use an enclosed combustion device or a flare as the control device, you must also conduct the monitoring required in paragraph (f)(1)(x) of this section. If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), you must use the procedures in paragraph (f)(1)(xi) of this section in lieu of the procedures in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section, but you must still conduct the monitoring required in paragraph (f)(1)(x) of this section.
(i) You must operate below (or above) the site-specific maximum (or minimum) parameter value established according to the requirements of § 60.5417b(f)(1). For flares, you must operate above the limits specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(B) of this section.
(ii) You must calculate the average of the applicable monitored parameter in accordance with § 60.5417b(e).
(iii) Compliance with the operating parameter limit is achieved when the average of the monitoring parameter value calculated under paragraph (f)(1)(ii) of this section is either equal to or greater than the minimum parameter value or equal to or less than the maximum parameter value established under paragraph (f)(1)(i) of this section. When performance testing of a combustion control device is conducted by the device manufacturer as specified in § 60.5413b(d), compliance with the operating parameter limit is achieved when the criteria in § 60.5413b(e) are met.
(iv) You must operate the continuous monitoring system required in § 60.5417b(a) at all times the affected source is operating, except for periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities, including, as applicable, system accuracy audits and required zero and span adjustments. A monitoring system malfunction is any sudden, infrequent, not reasonably preventable failure of the monitoring system to provide valid data. Monitoring system failures that are caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions. You are required to complete monitoring system repairs in response to monitoring system malfunctions and to return the monitoring system to operation as expeditiously as practicable.
(v) You may not use data recorded during monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions, or required monitoring system quality assurance or control activities in calculations used to report emissions or operating levels. You must use all the data collected during all other required data collection periods to assess the operation of the control device and associated control system.
(vi) Failure to collect required data is a deviation of the monitoring requirements.
(vii) If you use an enclosed combustion device to meet the requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(1) and you demonstrate compliance using the test procedures specified in § 60.5413b(b), or you use a flare designed and operated in accordance with § 60.5412b(a)(3), you must comply with the applicable requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) For each enclosed combustion device which is not a catalytic vapor incinerator and for each flare, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(A)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) After January 22, 2027, a pilot or combustion flame must be present at all times of operation. After January 22, 2027, an alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(2) Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test conducted according to section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417b(h).
(3) Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All repairs and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection.
(4) Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part visual observation as described in paragraph (f)(1)(vii)(A)(2) of this section or be monitored according to § 60.5417b(h).
(B) For flares, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(B)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) For unassisted flares, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the flare at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(2) If you use a pressure assisted flare, maintain the NHV of gas sent to the flare at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(3) For steam-assisted and air-assisted flares, maintain the NHVcz at or above 270 Btu/scf.
(4) For flares with perimeter assist air, maintain the NHVdil at or above 22 Btu/sqft. If the only assist air provided to the flare is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are not required to comply with the NHVdil limit.
(5) Unless you use a pressure-assisted flare, maintain the flare tip velocity below the applicable limits in § 60.18(b).
(6) Maintain the total gas flow to the flare above the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The minimum inlet gas flow rate is established based on manufacturer recommendations.
(C) For enclosed combustion devices for which, during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413b(b), the combustion zone temperature is not an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(C)(1) through (5) of this section, as applicable.
(1) Maintain the total gas flow to the enclosed combustion device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate and at or below the maximum inlet flow rate for the enclosed combustion device established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f).
(2) For unassisted enclosed combustion devices, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(3) For enclosed combustion devices that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(4) For steam-assisted and air-assisted enclosed combustion devices, maintain the NHVcz at or above 270 Btu/scf.
(5) For enclosed combustion devices with perimeter assist air, maintain the NHVdil at or above 22 Btu/sqft. If the only assist air provided to the enclosed combustion device is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are not required to comply with the NHVdil limit.
(D) For enclosed combustion devices for which, during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413b(b), the combustion zone temperature is demonstrated to be an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(vii)(D)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Maintain the temperature at or above the minimum temperature established during the most recent performance test. The minimum temperature limit established during the most recent performance test is the average temperature recorded during each test run, averaged across the 3 test runs (average of the test run averages).
(2) Maintain the total gas flow to the enclosed combustion device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate and at or below the maximum inlet flow rate for the enclosed combustion device established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f).
(E) For catalytic vapor incinerators you must operate the catalytic vapor incinerator at or above the minimum temperature of the catalyst bed inlet and at or above the minimum temperature differential between the catalyst bed inlet and the catalyst bed outlet established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f).
(viii) If you use a carbon adsorption system as the control device to meet the requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(2), you must demonstrate compliance by the procedures in paragraphs (f)(1)(viii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) If you use a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must comply with paragraphs (f)(1)(viii)(A)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must maintain the average regenerative mass flow or volumetric flow to the carbon adsorber during each bed regeneration cycle above the limit established in in accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2).
(2) You must maintain the average carbon bed temperature above the temperature limit established in accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2) during the carbon bed steaming cycle and below the carbon bed temperature established in in accordance with § 60.5413b(c)(2) after the regeneration cycle.
(3) You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion if your continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor.
(4) You must replace all carbon in the carbon adsorption system with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413b(c)(2).
(B) If you use a nonregenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must replace all carbon in the control device with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413b(c)(3).
(ix) If you use a condenser as the control device to achieve the percent reduction performance requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(2), you must demonstrate compliance using the procedures in paragraphs (f)(1)(ix)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) You must establish a site-specific condenser performance curve according to § 60.5417b(f)(2).
(B) You must calculate the daily average condenser outlet temperature in accordance with § 60.5417b(e).
(C) You must determine the condenser efficiency for the current operating day using the daily average condenser outlet temperature calculated under paragraph (f)(1)(ix)(B) of this section and the condenser performance curve established under paragraph (f)(1)(ix)(A) of this section.
(D) Except as provided in paragraphs (f)(1)(ix)(D)(1) and (2) of this section, at the end of each operating day, you must calculate the 365-day rolling average TOC emission reduction, as appropriate, from the condenser efficiencies as determined in paragraph (f)(1)(ix)(C) of this section.
(1) After the compliance dates specified in § 60.5370b(a), if you have less than 120 days of data for determining average TOC emission reduction, you must calculate the average TOC emission reduction for the first 120 days of operation after the compliance date. You have demonstrated compliance with the overall 95.0 percent reduction requirement if the 120-day average TOC emission reduction is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(2) After 120 days and no more than 364 days of operation after the compliance date specified in § 60.5370b(a), you must calculate the average TOC emission reduction as the TOC emission reduction averaged over the number of days between the current day and the applicable compliance date. You have demonstrated compliance with the overall 95.0 percent reduction requirement if the average TOC emission reduction is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(E) If you have data for 365 days or more of operation, you have demonstrated compliance with the TOC emission reduction if the rolling 365-day average TOC emission reduction calculated in paragraph (f)(1)(ix)(D) of this section is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(x) During each inspection conducted using an OGI camera under § 60.5397b and during each periodic screening event or each inspection conducted using an OGI camera under § 60.5398b, you must observe each enclosed combustion device and flare to determine if it is operating properly. You must determine whether there is a flame present and whether any uncontrolled emissions from the control device are visible with the OGI camera or the technique used to conduct the periodic screening event. During each inspection conducted under § 60.5397b using AVO, you must observe each enclosed combustion device and flare to determine if it is operating properly. Visually confirm that the pilot or combustion flame is lit and that the pilot or combustion flame is operating properly.
(xi) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), you must comply with paragraphs (f)(1)(xi)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) You must maintain the combustion efficiency at or above 95.0 percent. Alternatively, if the alternative test method does not directly monitor combustion efficiency, you must comply with the applicable requirements in paragraphs (f)(1)(xi)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Maintain the NHVcz at or above 270 Btu/scf.
(2) For flares or enclosed combustion devices with perimeter assist air, maintain the NHVdil at or above 22 Btu/sqft. If the only assist air provided to the flare or enclosed combustion device is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are only required to comply with the NHVcz limit specified in paragraph (f)(1)(xi)(A)(1) of this section.
(B) You must calculate the value of the applicable monitored metric(s) in accordance with the approved alternative test method. Compliance with the limit is achieved when the calculated values are within the range specified in paragraph (f)(1)(xi)(A) of this section.
(C) You must conduct monitoring using the alternative test method at all times the affected source is operating, except for periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities, including, as applicable, system accuracy audits and required zero and span adjustments. A monitoring system malfunction is any sudden, infrequent, not reasonably preventable failure of the monitoring system to provide valid data. Monitoring system failures that are caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions. You are required to complete monitoring system repairs in response to monitoring system malfunctions and to return the monitoring system to operation as expeditiously as practicable.
(D) You may not use data recorded during monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions, or required monitoring system quality assurance or control activities in calculations used to report values to demonstrate compliance with the limits specified in paragraph (f)(1)(xi)(A) of this section. You must use all the data collected during all other required data collection periods to assess the operation of the control device and associated control system.
(E) Failure to collect required data is a deviation of the monitoring requirements.
(2) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(11) and (13).
(3) You must comply with the reporting requirements in § 60.5420b(b)(11) through (13).ecified in § 60.5420b(c)(11) and (13).
(3) You must comply with the reporting requirements in § 60.5420b(b)(11) through (13).
(g) Reciprocating compressor affected facility. For each reciprocating compressor affected facility complying with § 60.5385b(a) through (c), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (g)(1), (5), and (6) of this section. For each reciprocating compressor affected facility complying with § 60.5385b(d)(1) or (2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (g)(2), (5) and (6) of this section. For each reciprocating compressor affected facility complying with § 60.5385b(d)(3), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (g)(3) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm per cylinder (or at or below the combined volumetric flow rate determined by multiplying the number of cylinders by 2 scfm), and you must conduct the required volumetric flow rate measurement of your reciprocating compressor rod packing vents in accordance with § 60.5385b(b) on or before 8,760 hours of operation after your last volumetric flow rate measurement which demonstrated compliance with the applicable volumetric flow rate.
(2) You must operate the rod packing emissions collection system to route emissions to a control device or to a process through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the cover and closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b. If you comply with § 60.5385b(d) by using a control device, you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section.
(3) You must continuously monitor the number of hours of operation for each reciprocating compressor affected facility since initial startup, since May 7, 2024, since the previous flow rate measurement, or since the date of the most recent reciprocating compressor rod packing replacement, whichever date is latest.
(4) You must replace the reciprocating compressor rod packing on or before the total number of hours of operation reaches 8,760 hours.
(5) You must submit the annual reports as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (6), and (11)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(6) You must maintain records as required in § 60.5420b(c)(5), (8) through (10), and (12), as applicable.
(h) Process controller affected facility. To demonstrate continuous compliance with GHG and VOC emission standards for your process controller affected facility as required by § 60.5390b, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable.
(1) Beginning January 22, 2027, or upon startup, whichever is later, you must demonstrate that your process controller affected facility does not emit any VOC or methane to the atmosphere by meeting the requirements of paragraph (h)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, you must route emissions through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent system inspection and monitoring requirements of § 60.5416b.
(ii) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must conduct the no identifiable emissions inspections required by § 60.5416b(b).
(2) For each process controller affected facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power and that complies by reducing methane and VOC emissions from all controllers in the process controller affected facility by 95.0 percent in accordance with § 60.5390b(b)(3), you must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416b and the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section for the control device.
(3) You must submit the annual report for your process controller as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1), (7), and (11) through (13), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(6), (8), (10), and (12) for each process controller affected facility, as applicable.
(i) Storage vessel affected facility. For each storage vessel affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5395b according to paragraphs (i)(1) through (10) of this section, as applicable.
(1) For each storage vessel affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5395b(a)(2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (i)(5), (9) and (10) of this section.
(2) For each storage vessel affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5395b(a)(3), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (i)(2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, as applicable, and (i)(9) and (10) of this section.
(i) You must maintain the uncontrolled actual VOC emissions at less than 4 tpy and the uncontrolled actual methane emissions at less than 14 tpy from the storage vessel affected facility.
(ii) You must comply with paragraph (i)(5) of this section as soon as liquids from the well are routed to the storage vessel affected facility following fracturing or refracturing according to the requirements of § 60.5395b(a)(3)(i).
(iii) You must comply with paragraph (i)(5) of this section within 30 days of the monthly determination according to the requirements of § 60.5395b(a)(3)(ii), where the monthly emissions determination indicates that VOC emissions from your storage vessel affected facility increase to 4 tpy or greater or methane emissions from your storage vessel affected facility increase to 14 tpy or greater and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel affected facility.
(3) For each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility removed from service, you must demonstrate compliance with the requirements of § 60.5395b(c)(1) or (2) by complying with paragraphs (i)(6), (7), (9), and (10) of this section.
(4) For each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility returned to service, you must demonstrate compliance with the requirements of § 60.5395b(c)(3) and (4) by complying with paragraphs (i)(8) through (10) of this section.
(5) For each storage vessel affected facility, you must comply with paragraphs (i)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must reduce VOC emissions as specified in § 60.5395b(a)(2).
(ii) For each control device installed to meet the requirements of § 60.5395b(a)(2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the performance requirements of § 60.5412b for each storage vessel affected facility using the procedure specified in paragraphs (i)(5)(ii)(A) and (i)(5)(ii)(B) of this section. When routing emissions to a process, you must demonstrate continuous compliance as specified in paragraph (i)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.
(A) You must comply with § 60.5416b for each cover and closed vent system.
(B) You must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
(6) You must completely empty and degas each storage vessel, such that each storage vessel no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. For a portion of a storage vessel affected facility to be removed from service, you must completely empty and degas the storage vessel(s), such that the storage vessel(s) no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water, or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage, or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(7) You must disconnect the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery by isolating the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery such that the storage vessel(s) is no longer manifolded to the tank battery by liquid or vapor transfer.
(8) You must determine the affected facility status of a storage vessel returned to service as provided in § 60.5365b(e)(6).
(9) You must submit the annual reports as required by § 60.5420b(b)(1), (8), and (11)(i) through (iv).
(10) You must maintain the records as required by § 60.5420b(c)(7) through (10) and (c)(12), as applicable.
(j) Process unit equipment affected facility. For each process unit equipment affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5400b according to paragraphs (j)(1) through (4) and(11) through (15) of this section, unless you meet and comply with the exception in § 60.5402b(b), (e), or (f) or meet the exemption in § 60.5402b(c). Alternatively, if you comply with the GHG and VOC standards for process unit affected facilities using the standards in § 60.5401b, you must comply with paragraphs (j)(5) through (15) of this section, unless you meet the exemption in § 60.5402b(b) or (c) or the exception in § 60.5402b(e) and (f).
(1) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor and light liquid service and connector in gas/vapor and light liquid service as required by § 60.5400b(b).
(2) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400b(c) for each pump in light liquid service.
(3) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400b(d) for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service.
(4) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5400b(e).
(5) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(b).
(6) You must conduct monitoring for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service as required by § 60.5401b(c).
(7) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5401b(d).
(8) You must conduct monitoring for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(f).
(9) You must conduct monitoring for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and each pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(g).
(10) You must conduct monitoring for each connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401b(h).
(11) You must collect emissions and meet the closed vent system requirements as required by § 60.5416b for each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir to a process or a control device, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals to a process or control device, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device to a process or control device.
(12) You comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
(13) You must tag and repair each identified leak as required in § 60.5400(h) or § 60.5401b(i), as applicable.
(14) You must submit semiannual reports as required by § 60.5422b and the annual reports in § 60.5420b(b)(11)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(15) You must maintain the records specified by § 60.5420b(c)(8), (c)(10), and (c)(12) as applicable and § 60.5421b.
(k) Sweetening unit affected facility. For each sweetening unit affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5405b(b) according to paragraphs (k)(1) through (10) of this section.
(1) You must determine the minimum required continuous reduction efficiency of SO2 emissions (Zc) as required by § 60.5406b(b).
(2) You must determine the emission reduction efficiency (R) achieved by your sulfur reduction technology using the procedures in § 60.5406b(c)(1) through (c)(4).
(3) You must demonstrate compliance with the standard at § 60.5405b(b) by comparing the minimum required sulfur dioxide emission reduction efficiency (Zc) to the emission reduction efficiency achieved by the sulfur recovery technology (R), where R must be greater than or equal to Zc.
(4) You must calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices or perform measurements to determine the accumulation of sulfur product, the H2S concentration, the average acid gas flow rate, and the sulfur feed rate in accordance with § 60.5407b(a).
(5) You must determine the required SO2 emissions reduction efficiency each 24-hour period in accordance with § 60.5407b(a), § 60.5407b(d), and § 60.5407b(e), as applicable.
(6) You must calibrate, maintain, and operate monitoring devices and continuous emission monitors in accordance with § 60.5407b(b), (f), and (g), if you use an oxidation control system or a reduction control system followed by an incineration device.
(7) You must continuously operate the incineration device, if you use an oxidation control system or a reduction control system followed by an incineration device.
(8) You must calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous monitoring system to measure the emission rate of reduced sulfur compounds in accordance with § 60.5407b(c), (f), and (g), if you use a reduction control system not followed by an incineration device.
(9) You must submit the reports as required by § 60.5423b(d).
(10) You must maintain the records as required by § 60.5423b(a), (e), and (f), as applicable.
(l) Continuous compliance. For each fugitive emissions components affected facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5397b(a) according to paragraphs (l)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Monitoring. You must conduct periodic monitoring surveys as required in § 60.5397b(e) and (g).
(2) Repairs. You must repair each identified source of fugitive emissions as required in § 60.5397b(h).
(3) Reports. You must submit annual reports for fugitive emissions components affected facilities as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (9).
(4) Records. You must maintain records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(14).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62898, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35983, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5416b What are the initial and continuous cover and closed vent system inspection and monitoring requirements?
For each closed vent system and cover at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment affected facilities, you must comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. Each self-contained natural gas process controller must comply with paragraph (b) of this section.
(a) Inspections for closed vent systems, covers, and bypass devices. If you install a control device or route emissions to a process, you must inspect each closed vent system according to the procedures and schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section, inspect each cover according to the procedures and schedule specified in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, and inspect each bypass device according to the procedures of paragraph (a)(4) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(7) and (8) of this section.
(1) For each closed vent system joint, seam, or other connection that is permanently or semi-permanently sealed (e.g., a welded joint between two sections of hard piping or a bolted and gasketed ducting flange), you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Within the first 30 calendar days after January 22, 2027, or upon startup of the affected facility routing emissions through the closed vent system, whichever is later, conduct an initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that the closed vent system operates with no identifiable emissions.
(ii) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in piping; loose connections; liquid leaks; or broken or missing caps or other closure devices. Beginning on the first annual inspection after January 22, 2027, and for all annual inspections thereafter, you must monitor a component or connection using the test methods and procedures in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that it operates with no identifiable emissions following any time the component is repaired or replaced or the connection is unsealed.
(iii) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at the same type of site as specified in § 60.5397b(g). Process unit equipment affected facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
(2) For closed vent system components other than those specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Conduct an initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section within the first 30 calendars days after startup of the affected facility routing emissions through the closed vent system or January 22, 2027, whichever is later, to demonstrate that the closed vent system operates with no identifiable emissions.
(ii) Beginning January 22, 2027, conduct inspections according to the test methods, procedures, and frequencies specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that the components or connections operate with no identifiable emissions.
(iii) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in ductwork; loose connections; liquid leaks; or broken or missing caps or other closure devices. Beginning January 22, 2027, you must monitor a component or connection using the test methods and procedures in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that it operates with no identifiable emissions following any time the component is repaired or replaced or the connection is unsealed.
(iv) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397b(g). Process unit equipment affected facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
(3) For each cover, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Beginning January 22, 2027, conduct the inspections specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii) through (iv) of this section to identify defects that could result in air emissions and to ensure the cover operates with no identifiable emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in the cover, or between the cover and the separator wall; broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged seals or gaskets on closure devices; and broken or missing hatches, access covers, caps, or other closure devices. In the case where the storage vessel is buried partially or entirely underground, you must inspect only those portions of the cover that extend to or above the ground surface, and those connections that are on such portions of the cover (e.g., fill ports, access hatches, gauge wells, etc.) and can be opened to the atmosphere.
(ii) An initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, following installation of the cover to demonstrate that each cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(iii) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at the same type of site as specified in § 60.5397b(g). Process unit equipment affected facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
(iv) Inspections according to the test methods, procedures, and schedules specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that each cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(4) For each bypass device, except as provided for in § 60.5411b(a)(4)(ii), you must meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(4)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) Set the flow indicator to take a reading at least once every 15 minutes at the inlet to the bypass device that could divert the stream away from the control device and to the atmosphere.
(ii) If the bypass device valve installed at the inlet to the bypass device is secured in the non-diverting position using a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration, visually inspect the seal or closure mechanism at least once every month to verify that the valve is maintained in the non-diverting position and the vent stream is not diverted through the bypass device.
(b) No identifiable emissions test methods and procedures. If you are required to conduct an inspection of a closed vent system and cover as specified in paragraph (a)(1), (2), or (3) of this section or § 60.5398b(b), you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (9) of this section after January 22, 2027. You must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (4), and (9) of this section for each self-contained process controller at your process controller affected facility as specified at § 60.5390b(a)(2).
(1) Initial and periodic inspection. You must conduct initial and periodic no identifiable emissions inspections as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) You must conduct inspections for no identifiable emissions from your covers and closed vent systems at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, or storage vessel affected facility, using the procedures for conducting OGI inspections in § 60.5397b(c)(7). As an alternative you may conduct inspections in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. Monitoring must be conducted at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components affected facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397b(g).
(ii) For covers and closed vent systems located at onshore natural gas processing plants, OGI inspections for no identifiable emissions must be conducted initially and bimonthly in accordance with appendix K to this part. As an alternative you must conduct quarterly inspections for no identifiable emissions in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iii) For your self-contained process controller, you must conduct initial and quarterly inspections for no identifiable emissions using the procedures for conducting OGI inspections in § 60.5397b(c)(7). As an alternative you may conduct quarterly inspections in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) OGI application. Where OGI is used, the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if no emissions are imaged during the inspection. Emissions imaged by OGI constitute a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an OGI inspection conducted in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section determines that the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller, as applicable, operates with no identifiable emissions.
(3) AVO application. Where AVO inspections are required, the closed vent system or cover is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if no emissions are detected by AVO. Emissions detected by AVO constitute a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an AVO inspection determines that the closed vent system or cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(4) Method 21 application. Where Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used for the inspection, the requirements of paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vii) of this section apply.
(i) The detection instrument must meet the performance criteria of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, except that the instrument response factor criteria in section 8.1.1 of Method 21 must be for the average composition of the fluid and not for each individual organic compound in the stream.
(ii) You must calibrate the detection instrument before use on each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iii) Calibration gases must be as specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Zero air (less than 10 parts per million by volume hydrocarbon in air).
(B) A mixture of methane in air at a concentration less than 500 ppmv.
(iv) You may choose to adjust or not adjust the detection instrument readings to account for the background organic concentration level. If you choose to adjust the instrument readings for the background level, you must determine the background level value according to the procedures in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(v) Your detection instrument must meet the performance criteria specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(B) of this section, the detection instrument must meet the performance criteria of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, except the instrument response factor criteria in section 8.1.1 of Method 21 must be for the average composition of the process fluid, not each individual volatile organic compound in the stream. For process streams that contain nitrogen, air, or other inerts that are not organic hazardous air pollutants or volatile organic compounds, you must calculate the average stream response factor on an inert-free basis.
(B) If no instrument is available that will meet the performance criteria specified in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section, you may adjust the instrument readings by multiplying by the average response factor of the process fluid, calculated on an inert-free basis, as described in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section.
(vi) You must determine if a potential leak interface operates with no identifiable emissions using the applicable procedure specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vi)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) If you choose not to adjust the detection instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, then you must directly compare the maximum organic concentration value measured by the detection instrument to the applicable value for the potential leak interface as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vii) of this section.
(B) If you choose to adjust the detection instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, you must compare the value of the arithmetic difference between the maximum organic concentration value measured by the instrument and the background organic concentration value as determined in paragraph (b)(4)(iv) of this section with the applicable value for the potential leak interface as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vii) of this section.
(vii) A closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if the organic concentration value determined in paragraph (b)(4)(vi) of this section is less than 500 ppmv. An organic concentration value determined in paragraph (b)(4)(vi) of this section of greater than or equal to 500 ppmv constitutes a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an inspection conducted in accordance with paragraph (b)(4) of this section determines that the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller, as applicable, operates with no identifiable emissions.
(5) Repairs. Whenever emissions or a defect is detected, you must repair the emissions or defect as soon as practicable according to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(i) A first attempt at repair must be made no later than 5 calendar days after the emissions or defect is detected.
(ii) Repair must be completed no later than 30 calendar days after the emissions or defect is detected.
(iii) For covers, grease or another substance compatible with the gasket material must be applied to deteriorating or cracked gaskets to improve the seal while awaiting repair.
(6) Delay of repair. Delay of repair of a closed vent system or cover for which emissions or defects have been detected is allowed if the repair is technically infeasible without a shutdown, or if you determine that emissions resulting from immediate repair would be greater than the emissions likely to result from delay of repair. You must complete repair of such equipment by the end of the next shutdown.
(7) Unsafe to inspect requirements. You may designate any parts of the closed vent system or cover as unsafe to inspect if the requirements of paragraphs (b)(7)(i) and (ii) of this section are met. Unsafe to inspect parts are exempt from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(i) You determine that the equipment is unsafe to inspect because inspecting personnel would be exposed to an imminent or potential danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs (a)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.
(ii) You have a written plan that requires inspection of the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-inspect times.
(8) Difficult to inspect requirements. You may designate any parts of the closed vent system or cover as difficult to inspect if the requirements of paragraphs (b)(8)(i) and (ii) of this section are met. Difficult to inspect parts are exempt from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(i) You determine that the equipment cannot be inspected without elevating the inspecting personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(ii) You have a written plan that requires inspection of the equipment at least once every 5 years.
(9) Records and reports. You must maintain records of all inspection results as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(8) through (10). You must submit the reports as specified in § 60.5420b(b)(11).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62902, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35984, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5417b What are the continuous monitoring requirements for my control devices?
You must meet the requirements of this section to demonstrate continuous compliance for each control device used to meet emission standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment affected facilities.
(a) For each control device used to comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5377b(b) for well affected facilities, § 60.5380b(a)(1) for centrifugal compressor affected facilities, § 60.5385b(d)(2) for reciprocating compressor affected facilities, § 60.5390b(b)(3) for your process controller affected facility in Alaska, § 60.5393b(b)(3) for your pumps affected facility, § 60.5395b(a)(2) for your storage vessel affected facility, or either § 60.5400b(f) or § 60.5401b(e) for your process equipment affected facility, you must install and operate a continuous parameter monitoring system for each control device as specified in paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section, except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section. If you install and operate a flare in accordance with § 60.5412b(a)(3), you are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section. If you operate an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), you must operate the control device as specified in paragraph (i) of this section instead of using the procedures specified in paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section. You must keep records and report in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section.
(b) You are exempt from the monitoring requirements specified in paragraphs (c) through (g) of this section for the control devices listed in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) A boiler or process heater in which all vent streams are introduced with the primary fuel or are used as the primary fuel.
(2) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity equal to or greater than 44 megawatts.
(c) You must meet the specifications and requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Except for continuous parameter monitoring systems used to detect the presence of a pilot or combustion flame, each continuous parameter monitoring system must measure data values at least once every hour and record the values for each parameter as required in paragraph (c)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. Continuous parameter monitoring systems used to detect the presence of a pilot or combustion flame must record a reading at least once every 5 minutes.
(i) Each measured data value.
(ii) Each block average value for each 1-hour period or shorter periods calculated from all measured data values during each period.
(2) You must prepare a monitoring plan that covers each control device for affected facilities within each company-defined area. The monitoring plan must address the monitoring system design, data collection, and the quality assurance and quality control elements outlined in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (v) of this section. You must install, calibrate, operate, and maintain each continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with the procedures in your monitoring plan. Heat sensing monitoring devices that indicate the continuous ignition of a pilot or combustion flame are exempt from the calibration, quality assurance and quality control requirements of this section.
(i) The performance criteria and design specifications for the monitoring system equipment, including the sample interface, detector signal analyzer, and data acquisition and calculations.
(ii) Sampling interface (e.g., thermocouple) location such that the monitoring system will provide representative measurements.
(iii) Equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, or other audit procedures.
(iv) Ongoing operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with provisions in § 60.13(b).
(v) Ongoing recordkeeping procedures in accordance with provisions in § 60.7(f).
(3) You must conduct the continuous parameter monitoring system equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, or other audit procedures specified in the monitoring plan at least once every 12 months.
(4) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with the monitoring plan. Heat sensing monitoring devices that indicate the continuous ignition of a pilot or combustion flame are exempt from the calibration, quality assurance and quality control requirements of this section.
(d) You must install, calibrate, operate, and maintain a device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure the values of operating parameters appropriate for the control device as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section, as applicable. Instead of complying with the requirements in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section, you may install an organic monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder that measures the concentration level of organic compounds in the exhaust vent stream from the control device to demonstrate compliance with the applicable performance requirement specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1). The monitor must meet the requirements of Performance Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B to this part. You must install, calibrate, and maintain the monitor according to the manufacturer's specifications and the requirements in Performance Specification 8 or 9. You may also request approval from the Administrator to monitor different operating parameters than those specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section in accordance with § 60.13(i).
(1) For an enclosed combustion device that demonstrates during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413b(b) that combustion zone temperature is an accurate indicator of performance, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location representative of the combustion zone temperature. You must also comply with the requirements of paragraphs (d)(8)(i), (iv), and (v) of this section.
(2) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device must be capable of monitoring temperature at two locations and have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install one temperature sensor in the vent stream at the nearest feasible point to the catalyst bed inlet, and you must install a second temperature sensor in the vent stream at the nearest feasible point to the catalyst bed outlet.
(3) For a boiler or process heater, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location representative of the combustion zone temperature.
(4) For a condenser, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location in the exhaust vent stream from the condenser.
(5) For a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, a continuous monitoring system that meets the specifications in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section. You also must monitor the design carbon service life established using a design analysis performed as specified in § 60.5413b(c)(2).
(i) The continuous parameter monitoring system must measure and record the average total regeneration stream mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle. The flow sensor must have a measurement sensitivity of 5 percent of the flow rate or 10 cubic feet per minute, whichever is greater. You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the flow continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion if your flow continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor; and
(ii) The continuous parameter monitoring system must measure and record the average carbon bed temperature for the duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle and measure the actual carbon bed temperature after regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater.
(6) For a nonregenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must monitor the design carbon replacement interval established using a design analysis performed as specified in § 60.5413b(c)(3). The design carbon replacement interval must be based on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source operating schedule.
(7) For a combustion control device whose model is tested under § 60.5413b(d), continuous monitoring systems as specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) through (iv) and (vi) of this section and visible emission observations conducted as specified in paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section.
(8) For an enclosed combustion device, other than those listed in paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) and (7) of this section, or for a flare, continuous monitoring systems as specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section and visible emission observations conducted as specified in paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section. Additionally, for enclosed combustion devices or flares that are air-assisted or steam-assisted, the continuous monitoring systems specified in paragraph (d)(8)(vi) of this section.
(i) After January 22, 2027, continuously monitor at least once every five minutes for the presence of a pilot flame or combustion flame using a device (including, but not limited to, a thermocouple, ultraviolet beam sensor, or infrared sensor) capable of detecting that the pilot or combustion flame is present at all times. After January 22, 2027, an alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit. Continuous monitoring systems used for the presence of a pilot flame or combustion flame are not subject to a minimum accuracy requirement beyond being able to detect the presence or absence of a flame and are exempt from the calibration requirements of this section.
(ii) Except as provided in this paragraph (d)(8)(ii) and paragraphs (d)(8)(iii) and (vi) of this section, use one of the following methods to continuously determine the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare at standard conditions. If the inlet gas stream to the flare or enclosed combustion device does not include streams from processes or equipment where inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream are added (e.g., vent streams from acid gas removal (AGR) system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers without water removal, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams containing water or CO2 used for enhanced oil recovery, vent streams from storage vessels with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV, vent streams from gas plants that receive acid gas from sweetening units, and vent streams from nitrogen removal units (NRU)), the NHV of the inlet stream is considered to be sufficiently above the minimum required NHV for the inlet gas, and you are not required to conduct the continuous monitoring in this paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section or the demonstration in paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section, but you must submit the report in § 60.5420b(b)(11)(v)(I) and maintain the record in § 60.5420b(c)(11)(vi) indicating that the flare or enclosed combustion device does not receive inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream.
(A) A calorimeter with a minimum accuracy of ±2 percent of span.
(B) A gas chromatograph that meets the requirements in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(B)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must follow the procedure in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B of this part, except that a single daily mid-level calibration check can be used (rather than triplicate analysis), the multi-point calibration can be conducted quarterly (rather than monthly), and the sampling line temperature must be maintained at a minimum temperature of 60 °C (rather than 120 °C). Calibration gas cylinders must be certified to an accuracy of 2 percent and traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards.
(2) You must meet the accuracy requirements in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B of this part.
(3) You must use a calibration gas or multiple gases that includes the compounds that are reasonably expected to be present in the flare gas stream. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. You may only use the compounds used to calibrate the gas chromatograph in the calculation of the vent gas NHV.
(4) In lieu of the calibration gas described in paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(B)(3) of this section, you may use a surrogate calibration gas consisting of hydrogen and C1 through C5 normal hydrocarbons. All of the calibration gases may be combined in one cylinder. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. Use the response factor for the nearest normal hydrocarbon (i.e., n-alkane) in the calibration mixture to quantify unknown components detected in the analysis. Use the response factor for n-pentane to quantify unknown components detected in the analysis that elute after n-pentane.
(5) To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use any published values for the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere and use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(C) A mass spectrometer that meets the requirements in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(C)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must meet applicable requirements in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B of this part for continuous monitoring system acceptance including, but not limited to, performing an initial multi-point calibration check at three concentrations following the procedure in Section 10.1. A single daily mid-level calibration check can be used (rather than triplicate analysis), the multi-point calibration can be conducted quarterly (rather than monthly), and the sampling line temperature must be maintained at a minimum temperature of 60 °C (rather than 120 °C). Calibration gas cylinders must be certified to an accuracy of 2 percent and traceable to NIST standards.
(2) The average instrument calibration error (CE) for each calibration compound at any calibration concentration must not differ by more than 10 percent from the certified cylinder gas value. The CE for each component in the calibration blend must be calculated using the following equation:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(C)(2)
Where:
Cm = Average instrument response (ppm).
Ca = Certified cylinder gas value (ppm).
(3) You must use a calibration gas or multiple gases that includes the compounds that are reasonably expected to be present in the flare gas stream. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. You may only use the compounds used to calibrate the mass spectrometer in the calculation of the vent gas NHV.
(4) In lieu of the calibration gas described in paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(C)(3) of this section, you may use a surrogate calibration gas consisting of hydrogen and C1 through C5 normal hydrocarbons. All of the calibration gases may be combined in one cylinder. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. For unknown gas components that have similar analytical mass fragments to calibration compounds, you may report the unknowns as an increase in the overlapped calibration gas compound. For unknown compounds that produce mass fragments that do not overlap calibration compounds, you may use the response factor for the nearest molecular weight hydrocarbon in the calibration mix to quantify the unknown component. You may use the response factor for n-pentane to quantify any unknown components detected with a higher molecular weight than n-pentane.
(5) You must perform an initial calibration to identify mass fragment overlap and response factors for the target compounds.
(6) To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use any published value for the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere and use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(D) A grab sampling system capable of collecting an evacuated canister sample for subsequent compositional analysis at least once every eight hours. Subsequent compositional analysis of the samples must be performed according to ASTM D1945-14 (R2019) or alternatively GPA 2261-19 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use any published value for the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere and use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(iii) As an alternative to the continuous composition monitoring requirements in paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section, a sampling demonstration may be used as specified in this paragraph. Flares or enclosed combustion devices that are not required to monitor flare gas composition because the inlet gas streams to the flare or enclosed combustion device does not include streams from processes or equipment where inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream are added (e.g., vent streams from acid gas removal (AGR) system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers without water removal, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams containing water or CO2 used for enhanced oil recovery, vent streams from storage vessels with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV, vent streams from gas plants that receive acid gas from sweetening units, and vent streams from nitrogen removal units (NRU)), are not required to conduct sampling demonstrations specified in this paragraph. For an unassisted or pressure-assisted flare or enclosed combustion device, if you demonstrate according to the methods described in paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (F) of this section that the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare consistently exceeds the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B) or (C), continuous monitoring of the NHV is not required, but you must conduct the ongoing sampling in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(G) of this section. For flares and enclosed combustion devices that use assist air (including perimeter assist air) or assist steam, if you demonstrate according to the methods described in paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (F) of this section that the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare consistently exceeds 300 Btu/scf, continuous monitoring of the NHV is not required, but you must conduct the ongoing sampling in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(G) of this section. For an unassisted or pressure-assisted flare or enclosed combustion device, in lieu of conducting the demonstration outlined in paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section, you may conduct the demonstration outlined in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(H) of this section, but you must still comply with paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(E) through (G) of this section.
(A) Continuously monitor the inlet stream which is routed to the flare or enclosed combustion device for 14 operating days or collect a sample of the inlet gas which is routed to the enclosed combustion device or flare twice daily to determine the average NHV of the gas stream for 14 operating days with no sampling day to be spaced more than 3 operating days apart from the previous sampling day. If you do not continuously monitor the NHV, the minimum time of collection for each individual sample be at least one hour when technically feasible. When it is not technically feasible to collect individual samples for at least one hour (e.g., low or intermittent flow), the collection time must be as long as possible up to one hour. For samples taken during low or intermittent flow events, the collection time and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample must be documented and reported with the NHV sampling results. Samples must be separated by at least 6 hours. If inlet gas flow is intermittent such that there are not at least 28 samples over the 14 operating day period, you must continue to collect samples of the inlet gas beyond the 14 operating day period until you collect a minimum of 28 samples.
(B) If you collect samples twice per day, count the number of samples where the NHV value is less than 1.2 times the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B), (C), or this paragraph (d)(8)(iii) (i.e., values that are less than 240, 360, or 960 Btu/scf, as applicable) during the sample collection period in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section.
(C) If you continuously sample the inlet stream for 14 days, count the number of hourly block average (e.g., noon to 1 p.m., 1 p.m. to 2 p.m., etc.) NHV values that are less than the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B), § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(C), or this paragraph (d)(8)(iii) (i.e., values that are less than 200, 300, or 800 Btu/scf, as applicable), during the sample collection period in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section.
(D) If there are no samples counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(B) of this section or there are no hourly block average values counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(C) of this section, the gas stream is considered to consistently exceed the applicable NHV operating limit and on-going continuous monitoring is not required.
(E) If process operations are revised that could reduce the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare, such as the removal or addition of process equipment, and at any time the Administrator requires, re-evaluation of the gas stream must be performed according to paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days of the revisions to process operations to ensure the gas stream still consistently exceeds the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B), (C)(1), or this paragraph (d)(8)(iii). If any of the samples counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(B) of this section or any hourly block average values counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(C) of this section are less than the limits in the respective paragraph you must conduct the continuous monitoring required by one of the options paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days of the re-evaluation of the gas stream.
(F) When collecting samples under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section, the owner or operator must account for any sources of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream (e.g., vent streams from AGR system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams from enhanced oil recovery facilities, or vent streams from storage vessel with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV) that can be sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare. The owner or operator must document in the report in § 60.5420b(b)(11)(v)(I) and the records in § 60.5420b(c)(11)(vi) must note the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams, and whether the sampling included periods where the highest percentage of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream were sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare. If the introduction of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream is intermittent and does not occur during the initial demonstration, the introduction of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream will be considered a revision to process operations that triggers a re-evaluation under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(E). If conditions at the site did not allow sampling during periods where the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream was at the highest percentage possible, increasing the percentage of inerts will be considered a revision to process operations that triggers a re-evaluation under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(E).
(G) You must collect three samples of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare at least once every 5 years. The minimum time of collection for each individual sample must be at least one hour, when technically feasible. When it is not technically feasible to collect individual samples for at least one hour (e.g., low or intermittent flow), the collection time must be as long as possible up to one hour. For samples taken during low or intermittent flow events, the collection time and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample must be documented and reported with the NHV sampling results. The samples must be taken during the period with the lowest expected NHV (i.e., the period with the highest percentage of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream). The first set of periodic samples must be taken, or continuous monitoring commenced, no later than 60 calendar months following the last sample taken under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section. Subsequent periodic samples must be taken, or continuous monitoring commenced, no later than 60 calendar months following the previous sample. If any sample taken in accordance with this paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(G) has an NHV value less than 1.2 times the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B), (C), or this paragraph (d)(8)(iii) (i.e., values that are less than 240, 360, or 960 Btu/scf, as applicable), you must conduct the continuous monitoring required by one of the options in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days of receipt of the last sample.
(H) You may request an alternative test method under § 60.5412b(d) to demonstrate that the flare or enclosed combustion device reduces methane and VOC in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater. You must use an alternative test method that demonstrates compliance with the combustion efficiency limit; you may not use an alternative test method that demonstrates compliance with NHVcz and NHVdil in lieu of measuring combustion efficiency directly. You must measure data values at the frequency specified in the alternative test method and conduct the quality assurance and quality control requirements outlined in the alternative test method at the frequency outlined in the alternative test method. You must monitor the combustion efficiency of the flare continuously for 14 days. If there are no values of the combustion efficiency measured by the alternative test method that are less than 95.0 percent, the gas stream is considered to consistently exceed the applicable NHV operating limit, and you are not required to continuously monitor the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion device.
(iv) Except as noted in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(A) through (F) and (vi) of this section, a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the flow of gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare. You may use direct flow meters or other parameter monitoring systems combined with engineering calculations, such as inlet line pressure, line size, and burner nozzle dimensions, to satisfy this requirement. The monitoring instrument must have an accuracy of ±10 percent or better at the maximum expected flow rate.
(A) Pressure-assisted flares and pressure-assisted enclosed combustion devices are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(B) Unassisted flares are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(B)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the flare and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to increase the maximum flow rate to the flare, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the flare is compliant with the applicable maximum flare tip velocity provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter.
(2) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(C) Unassisted enclosed combustion devices are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(C)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the enclosed combustion device and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustion device cannot cause the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section to be exceeded. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to impact the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustion device, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustor is less than the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section.
(2) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(D) Air-assisted flares or enclosed combustion devices that use only perimeter assist air and have no assist steam or premix assist air are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device or the flow of assist air if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(D)(1) through (3) of this section, as applicable. For these flares and enclosed combustion devices, NHVcz is assumed to be equal to the vent gas NHV.
(1) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(2) If you are required to monitor vent gas composition for the flare or enclosed combustion device according to paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section, you must demonstrate, based on the maximum flow rate of perimeter assist air to the enclosed combustion device or flare and applicable engineering calculations, that the NHVdil can never be less than the minimum required NHVdil. The demonstration must clearly document why the maximum flow rate of perimeter assist air will never exceed the rate used in the demonstration. You must use the minimum flow rate of vent gas allowed by your backpressure regulator valve and the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare in your demonstration. You must update this demonstration if there are changes to the backpressure regulator valve, the backpressure regulator valve set point, or the maximum flow rate of perimeter assist air. You must also update this demonstration if any sampling results of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare under paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section are lower than the NHV vent gas value used in your demonstration.
(3) For air-assisted flares, you must also demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the flare and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to increase the maximum flow rate to the flare, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the flare is compliant with the applicable maximum flare tip velocity provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter.
(E) Air-assisted flares or enclosed combustion devices that use only premix assist air and have no assist steam or perimeter assist air are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device or the flow of assist air if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(E)(1) through (3) of this section, as applicable.
(1) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(2) If you are required to monitor vent gas composition for the flare or enclosed combustion device according to paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section, you must demonstrate, based on the maximum flow rate of premix assist air to the enclosed combustion device or flare and applicable engineering calculations, that the NHVcz will never be less than the minimum required NHVcz. The demonstration must clearly document why the maximum flow rate of premix assist air will never exceed the rate used in the demonstration. You must use the minimum flow rate of vent gas allowed by your backpressure regulator valve in and the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare in your demonstration. You must update this demonstration if there are changes to the backpressure regulator valve, the backpressure regulator valve set point, or the maximum flow rate of premix assist air. You must also update this demonstration if any sampling results of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare under paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section are lower than the NHV vent gas value used in your demonstration.
(3) For air-assisted flares, you must also demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the flare and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to increase the maximum flow rate to the flare, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the flare is compliant with the applicable maximum flare tip velocity provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter.
(F) Steam-assisted flares or enclosed combustion devices that have no premix assist air and or perimeter assist air (other than perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter of the flare tip is 9 inches or greater) are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device or the flow of assist steam if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(F)(1) through (3) of this section, as applicable.
(1) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(2) If you are required to monitor vent gas composition for the flare or enclosed combustion device according to paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section, you must demonstrate, based on the maximum flow rate of assist steam to the enclosed combustion device or flare and applicable engineering calculations, that the NHVcz will never be less than the minimum required NHVcz. The demonstration must clearly document why the maximum flow rate of assist steam will never exceed the rate used in the demonstration. You must use the minimum flow rate of vent gas allowed by your backpressure regulator valve in and the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare in your demonstration. You must update this demonstration if there are changes to the backpressure regulator valve, the backpressure regulator valve set point, or the maximum flow rate of assist steam. You must also update this demonstration if any sampling results of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare under paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or (iii) of this section are lower than the NHV vent gas value used in your demonstration.
(3) For steam-assisted flares, you must also demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the flare and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to increase the maximum flow rate to the flare, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the flare is compliant with the applicable maximum flare tip velocity provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter.
(v) Conduct inspections monthly and at other times as requested by the Administrator to monitor for visible emissions from the combustion device using section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A of this part or conduct visible emissions monitoring according to paragraph (h) of this section. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute. Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period.
(vi) If you use a flare or enclosed combustion device that is air-assisted or steam-assisted and that receives streams from processes or equipment where inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream are added (e.g., vent streams from acid gas removal (AGR) system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers without water removal, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams containing water or CO2 used for enhanced oil recovery, vent streams from storage vessels with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV, vent streams from gas plants that receive acid gas from sweetening units, and vent streams from nitrogen removal units (NRU)), you must either meet the applicable requirements in (d)(8)(vi)(A) through (D) of this section or you must use an approved alternative method allowed under § 60.5412b(d)(1)(i) and (ii) to continuously monitor NHVcz and, if applicable, NHVdil. If you elect to continuously monitor NHVcz and, if applicable, NHVdil using an approved alternative method as provided under § 60.5412b(d)(1)(i) and (ii), you are not required to monitor NHV of the vent gas as specified in paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section or monitor flow rates as specified in this paragraph (d)(8)(vi) provided you can demonstrate that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration.
(A) Except as allowed by paragraph (d)(8)(iv)(E) or (F) of this section, you must monitor and calculate NHVcz as specified in § 63.670(m) of this chapter. Additionally, for flares and enclosed combustion devices that use only perimeter assist air and do not use steam assist or premix assist air, the NHVcz is equal to the vent gas NHV. When NHVcz is equal to the vent gas NHV, you are not required to continuously monitor NHVcz if you meet the requirements in paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section.
(B) Except as allowed by paragraph (d)(8)(iv)(D) of this section, for each flare using perimeter assist air, you must also monitor and calculate NHVdil as specified in § 63.670(n) of this chapter. If the only assist air provided to the flare or enclosed combustion control device is perimeter assist air intentionally entrained in lower and/or upper steam at the flare tip and the effective diameter is 9 inches or greater, you are only required to comply with the NHVcz limit specified in paragraph (f)(8)(vi)(A) of this section.
(C) Except as allowed by paragraph (d)(8)(iv) of this section, you must monitor the flare vent gas and assist gas as specified in § 63.670(i) of this chapter.
(D) You must determine the flare vent gas net heating value as specified in § 63.670(l) of this chapter using one of the methods specified in paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section. Where the phrase “petroleum refinery” is used, for purposes of this subpart, it will refer to flares controlling an affected facility under this subpart. If you are not required to continuously monitor the NHV of the inlet gas because you have demonstrated that it consistently exceeds the applicable operating limit as provided in paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section, you must use the lowest net heating value measured in the sampling program in paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section for the calculations performed in paragraphs (d)(8)(vi)(A) and (B). You must update this value if a subsequent sampling result of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare under paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section is lower than the NHV vent gas value used in your calculations.
(e) Calculate the value of the applicable monitored parameter in accordance with paragraphs (e)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must calculate the daily average value for condenser outlet temperature for each operating day, using the data recorded by the monitoring system. If the emissions unit operation is continuous, the operating day is a 24-hour period. If the emissions unit operation is not continuous, the operating day is the total number of hours of control device operation per 24-hour period. Valid data points must be available for 75 percent of the operating hours in an operating day to compute the daily average.
(2) You must use the 5-minute readings from the heat sensing devices to assess the presence of a pilot or combustion flame.
(3) You must use the regeneration cycle time (i.e., duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle) for each regenerative-type carbon adsorption system to calculate the average parameter to compare with the maximum steam mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle and the maximum carbon bed temperature during the steaming cycle. The carbon bed temperature after the regeneration cycle should not be averaged; you must use the carbon bed temperature measured within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle to compare with the minimum carbon bed temperature after the regeneration cycle.
(4) You must use 15-minute blocks to calculate NHVcz and NHVdil.
(5) For all operating parameters others than those described in paragraphs (e)(1) through (4) of this section, you must calculate the 3-hour rolling average of each monitored parameter. For each operating hour, calculate the hourly value of the operating parameter from your continuous monitoring system. Average the three most recent hours of data to determine the 3-hour average. Determine the 3-hour rolling average by recalculating the 3-hour average each hour.
(f) For each operating parameter monitor installed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, you must comply with paragraph (f)(1) of this section for all control devices. When condensers are installed, you must also comply with paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
(1) You must establish a minimum operating parameter value or a maximum operating parameter value, as appropriate for the control device, to define the conditions at which the control device must be operated to continuously achieve the applicable performance requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(1) or (2). You must establish each minimum or maximum operating parameter value as specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) If you conduct performance tests in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(b) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1) or (2), then you must establish the minimum operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value based on values measured during the performance test and supplemented, as necessary, by a condenser or carbon adsorption system design analysis or control device manufacturer recommendations or a combination of both. If you operate an enclosed combustion device, you must establish the maximum inlet flow rate based on values measured during the performance test and you may establish the minimum inlet flow rate based on control device manufacturer recommendations.
(ii) If you use a condenser or carbon adsorption system design analysis in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(c) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(2), then you must establish the minimum operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value based on the design analysis and supplemented, as necessary, by the manufacturer's recommendations.
(iii) If you operate a control device where the performance test requirement was met under § 60.5413b(d) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1), then your control device inlet gas flow rate must be equal to or greater than the minimum inlet gas flow rate and equal to or less than the maximum inlet gas flow rate determined by the manufacturer.
(iv) If you operate an enclosed combustion device where the combustion zone temperature is not an indicator of destruction efficiency or a control device where the performance test requirement was met under § 60.5413b(d), you must maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device, the NHVcz, and the NHVdil above the applicable limits specified in paragraphs § 60.5412b(a)(1)(iv)(A) through (D).
(2) If you use a condenser as specified in paragraph (d)(1)(v) of this section, you must establish a condenser performance curve showing the relationship between condenser outlet temperature and condenser control efficiency, according to the requirements of paragraphs (f)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) If you conduct a performance test in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(b) to demonstrate that the condenser achieves the applicable performance requirements of § 60.5412b(a)(2), then the condenser performance curve must be based on values measured during the performance test and supplemented as necessary by control device design analysis, or control device manufacturer's recommendations, or a combination or both.
(ii) If you use a control device design analysis in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413b(c)(1) to demonstrate that the condenser achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412b(a)(2), then the condenser performance curve must be based on the condenser design analysis and supplemented, as necessary, by the control device manufacturer's recommendations.
(g) A deviation for a control device is determined to have occurred when the monitoring data or lack of monitoring data result in any one of the criteria specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (7) of this section being met. If you monitor multiple operating parameters for the same control device during the same operating day and more than one of these operating parameters meets a deviation criterion specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (7) of this section, then a single excursion is determined to have occurred for the control device for that operating day.
(1) A deviation occurs when the average value of a monitored operating parameter determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section is less than the minimum operating parameter limit (and, if applicable, greater than the maximum operating parameter limit) established in paragraph (f)(1) of this section; for flares, when the average value of a monitored operating parameter determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section is below the applicable limits specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B)(1) through (4) and (6) or above the limit specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(vii)(B)(5); or for each flare or enclosed combustion device except for boilers and process heaters meeting the requirements in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(iii) and catalytic vapor incinerators meeting the requirements in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(v), when the heat sensing device indicates that there is no pilot or combustion flame present for any time period. If you use a backpressure regulator valve to maintain the inlet gas flow to an enclosed combustion device or flare above the minimum value, a deviation occurs if the annual inspection finds that the backpressure regulator valve set point is not set correctly or indicates that the backpressure regulator valve does not fully close when not in the open position.
(2) If you are subject to § 60.5412b(a)(2), a deviation occurs when the 365-day average condenser efficiency calculated according to the requirements specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(ix)(D) is less than 95.0 percent.
(3) If you are subject to § 60.5412b(a)(2) and you have less than 365 days of data, a deviation occurs when the average condenser efficiency calculated according to the procedures specified in § 60.5415b(f)(1)(ix)(D)(1) or (2) is less than 95.0 percent.
(4) A deviation occurs when the monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours in a day.
(5) If the closed vent system contains one or more bypass devices that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or fumes from entering the control device, a deviation occurs when the requirements of paragraph (g)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) For each bypass line subject to § 60.5411b(a)(4)(i)(A), the flow indicator indicates that flow has been detected and that the stream has been diverted away from the control device to the atmosphere.
(ii) For each bypass line subject to § 60.5411b(a)(4)(i)(B), if the seal or closure mechanism has been broken, the bypass line valve position has changed, the key for the lock-and-key type lock has been checked out, or the car-seal has broken.
(6) For a combustion control device whose model is tested under § 60.5413b(d), a deviation occurs when the conditions of paragraph (g)(4), (5), or (6)(i) through (vi) of this section are met.
(i) The hourly inlet gas flow rate is less than the minimum inlet gas flow rate or greater than the maximum inlet gas flow rate determined by the manufacturer. If you use a backpressure regulator valve to maintain the inlet gas flow above the minimum value, a deviation occurs if the annual inspection finds that the backpressure regulator valve set point is not set correctly or indicates that the backpressure regulator valve does not fully close when not in the open position.
(ii) Results of the monthly visible emissions test conducted under § 60.5413b(e)(3) or monitoring under paragraph (h) of this section indicate visible emissions exceed 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(iii) There is no indication of the presence of a pilot or combustion flame for any 5-minute time period.
(iv) The control device is not maintained in a leak free condition.
(v) The control device is not operated in accordance with the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures and maintenance schedule.
(vi) The NHV of the vent gas, the NHVcz, or the NHVdil is below the applicable limit specified in § 60.5412b(a)(1)(iv).
(7) For an enclosed combustion device or flare subject to paragraph (d)(8) of this section, a deviation occurs when any of the conditions described by paragraphs (g)(1), (4) or (5) of this section are met or when the results of the visible emissions monitoring conducted under paragraph (d)(8)(v) or (h) of this section exceed 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(h) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, in lieu of conducting a visible emissions observation using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, you may use a video surveillance camera to continuously monitor and record the flare flame according to the requirements in paragraphs (h)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must provide real-time high-definition video surveillance camera output (i.e., at least 720p) at a frame rate of at least 15 frames per second to the control room or other continuously manned location where the camera images may be viewed at the same resolution at any time.
(2) You must record at least one frame every 15 seconds with date and time stamp.
(3) The camera must be located at a reasonable distance above the flare flame at an angle suitable for visual emissions observations. The position of the camera should be such that the sun is not in the field of view.
(4) The camera must be located no more than 400 m (0.25 miles) from the emission source.
(5) Operators must look at the video feed at least once daily for an observation period of at least 1 minute to determine if visible emissions are present. If visible emissions are present during a daily observation, the operator must observe the video feed for 15 minutes or until the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less.
(6) Enclosed combustion devices and flares must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period.
(i) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), you must comply with paragraphs (i)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must measure data values at the frequency specified in the alternative test method.
(2) You must prepare a monitoring plan that covers each control device for affected facilities within each company-defined area. The monitoring plan must address the monitoring system design, data collection, and the quality assurance and quality control elements outlined in the alternative test method and in paragraphs (i)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section. You must operate and maintain each monitoring system in accordance with the procedures in your monitoring plan.
(i) The performance criteria and design specifications for the monitoring system equipment.
(ii) Location of monitoring system in relation to the monitored control device.
(iii) Ongoing reporting and recordkeeping procedures.
(3) You must conduct the quality assurance and quality control requirements outlined in the alternative test method at the frequency outlined in the alternative test method.
(4) If required by § 60.5412b(d)(4), you must conduct the inspections required by paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section.
(5) If required by § 60.5412b(d)(5), you must install the pilot or combustion flame monitoring system required by paragraph (d)(8)(i) of this section.
(6) A deviation for the control device is determined to have occurred when the monitoring data or lack of monitoring data result in any one of the criteria specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) through (v) of this section being met.
(i) A deviation occurs if the combustion efficiency is less than 95.0 percent, the combustion zone NHV is less than 270 Btu/scf, or the NHV dilution parameter is less than 22 Btu/sqft.
(ii) A deviation occurs when the monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours in a day.
(iii) A deviation occurs when any of the conditions described by paragraph (g)(5) of this section are met.
(iv) If required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section to conduct visible emissions inspections, a deviation occurs when the results of the visible emissions monitoring conducted under paragraph (d)(8)(v) or (h) of this section exceeds 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(v) After January 22, 2027, if required by paragraph (i)(5) of this section to install a pilot or combustion flame monitoring system, a deviation occurs when there is no indication of the presence of a pilot or combustion flame for any 5-minute period.
(j) You must submit annual reports for control devices as required in § 60.5420b(b)(1) and (11). You must maintain records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(11).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62902, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35984, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5420b What are my notification, reporting, and recordkeeping requirements?
(a) Notifications. You must submit notifications according to paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section if you own or operate one or more of the affected facilities specified in § 60.5365b that was constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period. You must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(3) of this section if you use an alternative standard for fugitive emissions components in accordance with § 60.5399b. You must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(4) of this section if you undertake well closure activities as specified in § 60.5397b(l).
(1) If you own or operate a process unit equipment affected facility located at an onshore natural gas processing plant, or a sweetening unit, you must submit the notifications required in §§ 60.7(a)(1), (3), and (4) and 60.15(d). If you own or operate a well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, collection of fugitive emissions components at a well site, or collection of fugitive emissions components at a compressor station affected facility, you are not required to submit the notifications required in §§ 60.7(a)(1), (3), and (4) and 60.15(d).
(2) If you own or operate a well affected facility, you must notify the Administrator no later than 2 days prior to the commencement of each well completion operation listing the anticipated date of the well completion operation. The notification shall include contact information for the owner or operator; the United States Well Number; the latitude and longitude coordinates for each well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983; and the planned date of the beginning of flowback. You may submit the notification in writing or in electronic format. If you are subject to state regulations that require advance notification of well completions and you have met those notification requirements, then you are considered to have met the advance notification requirements of this paragraph.
(3) An owner or operator electing to comply with the provisions of § 60.5399b for fugitive emissions components shall notify the Administrator of the alternative fugitive emissions standard selected within the annual report, as specified in paragraph (b)(9)(iii) of this section.
(4) An owner or operator who commences well closure activities must submit the following notices to the Administrator according to the schedule in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section. The notification shall include contact information for the owner or operator; the United States Well Number; the latitude and longitude coordinates for each well at the well site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983. You must submit notifications in portable document format (PDF) following the procedures specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) You must submit a well closure plan to the Administrator within 30 days of the cessation of production from all wells located at the well site.
(ii) You must submit a notification of the intent to close a well site 60 days before you begin well closure activities.
(b) Reporting requirements. You must submit annual reports containing the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (14) of this section following the procedure specified in paragraph (b)(15) of this section. You must submit performance test reports as specified in paragraph (b)(12) or (13) of this section, if applicable. Subject to the exception in the next sentence, the initial annual report is due no later than 90 days after the end of the initial compliance period as determined according to § 60.5410b; subsequent annual reports are due no later than the same date each year as the initial annual report. Notwithstanding the preceding sentence, no annual report is due before November 30, 2026, on or before which date you must submit all annual reports that were due before November 30, 2026, per the timing specified in the preceding sentence; then subsequent annual reports thereafter are due no later than 90 days after the end of each annual compliance period. If you own or operate more than one affected facility, you may submit one report for multiple affected facilities provided the report contains all of the information required as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (14) of this section. Annual reports may coincide with title V reports as long as all the required elements of the annual report are included. You may arrange with the Administrator a common schedule on which reports required by this part may be submitted as long as the schedule does not extend the reporting period. You must submit the information in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section, as applicable, for your well affected facility which undergoes a change of ownership during the reporting period, regardless of whether reporting under paragraphs (b)(2) through (4) of this section is required for the well affected facility.
(1) The general information specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (v) of this section is required for all reports.
(i) The company name, facility site name associated with the affected facility, U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the affected facility, if applicable, and address of the affected facility. If an address is not available for the site, include a description of the site location and provide the latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) An identification of each affected facility being included in the annual report.
(iii) Beginning and ending dates of the reporting period.
(iv) A certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete. If your report is submitted via CEDRI, the certifier's electronic signature during the submission process replaces the requirement in this paragraph (b)(1)(iv).
(v) Identification of each well affected facility for which ownership changed due to sale or transfer of ownership including the United States Well Number; the latitude and longitude coordinates of the well affected facility in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983; and the information in paragraph (b)(1)(v)(A) or (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) The name and contact information, including the phone number, email address, and mailing address, of the owner or operator to which you sold or transferred ownership of the well affected facility identified in this paragraph (b)(1)(v).
(B) The name and contact information, including the phone number, email address, and mailing address, of the owner or operator from whom you acquired the well affected facility identified in this paragraph (b)(1)(v).
(2) For each well affected facility that is subject to § 60.5375b(a) or (f), the records of each well completion operation conducted during the reporting period, including the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (xiv) of this section, if applicable. In lieu of submitting the records specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (xiv) of this section, the owner or operator may submit a list of each well completion with hydraulic fracturing completed during the reporting period, and the digital photograph required by paragraph (c)(1)(v) of this section for each well completion. For each well affected facility that routes all flowback entirely through one or more production separators, only the records specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iv) and (vi) of this section are required to be reported. For periods where salable gas is unable to be separated, the records specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(iv) and (viii) through (xii) of this section must also be reported, as applicable. For each well affected facility that is subject to § 60.5375b(g), the record specified in paragraph (b)(2)(xv) of this section is required to be reported. For each well affected facility which makes a claim that the exemption in § 60.5375b(h) was met, the records specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) through (iv) and (xvi) of this section are required to be reported.
(i) Well Completion ID.
(ii) Latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983.
(iii) U.S. Well ID.
(iv) The date and time of the onset of flowback following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing or identification that the well immediately starts production.
(v) The date and time of each attempt to direct flowback to a separator as required in § 60.5375b(a)(1)(ii).
(vi) The date and time that the well was shut in and the flowback equipment was permanently disconnected, or the startup of production.
(vii) The duration (in hours) of flowback.
(viii) The duration (in hours) of recovery and disposition of recovery (i.e., routed to the gas flow line or collection system, re-injected into the well or another well, used as an onsite fuel source, or used for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve).
(ix) The duration (in hours) of combustion.
(x) The duration (in hours) of venting.
(xi) The specific reasons for venting in lieu of capture or combustion.
(xii) For any deviations recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation.
(xiii) For each well affected facility subject to § 60.5375b(f), a record of the well type (i.e., wildcat well, delineation well, or low pressure well (as defined § 60.5430b)) and supporting inputs and calculations, if applicable.
(xiv) For each well affected facility for which you claim an exception under § 60.5375b(a)(2), the specific exception claimed and reasons why the well meets the claimed exception.
(xv) For each well affected facility with less than 300 scf of gas per stock tank barrel of oil produced, the supporting analysis that was performed in order the make that claim, including but not limited to, GOR values for established leases and data from wells in the same basin and field.
(xvi) For each well affected facility which meets the exemption in § 60.5375b(h), a statement that the well completion operation requirements of § 60.5375b(a)(1) through (3) were met.
(3) For each well affected facility that is subject to § 60.5376b(a)(1) or (2), your annual report is required to include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each well affected facility where all gas well liquids unloading operations comply with § 60.5376b(a)(1), your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) through (C) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Identification of each well affected facility (U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the well affected facility) that conducts a gas well liquid unloading operation during the reporting period using a method that does not vent to the atmosphere and the technology or technique used. If more than one non-venting technology or technique is used, you must identify all of the differing non-venting liquids unloading methods used during the reporting period.
(B) Number of gas well liquids unloading operations conducted during the year where the well affected facility identified in (b)(3)(i)(A) had unplanned venting to the atmosphere and best management practices were conducted according to your best management practice plan, as required by § 60.5376b(c). If no venting events occurred, the number would be zero. Other reported information required to be submitted where unplanned venting occurs is specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(B)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Log of best management practice plan steps used during the unplanned venting to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(2) The number of liquids unloading events during the year where deviations from your best management practice plan occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, documentation of why best management practice plan steps were not followed, and what steps, in lieu of your best management practice plan steps, were followed to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(C) The number of liquids unloading events where unplanned emissions are vented to the atmosphere during a gas well liquids unloading operation where you complied with best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(ii) For each well affected facility where all gas well liquids unloading operations comply with § 60.5376b(b) and (c) best management practices, your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(ii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well affected facility that conducts a gas well liquids unloading during the reporting period.
(B) Number of liquids unloading events conducted during the reporting period.
(C) Log of best management practice plan steps used during the reporting period to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(D) The number of liquids unloading events during the year that best management practices were conducted according to your best management practice plan.
(E) The number of liquids unloading events during the year where deviations from your best management practice plan occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, documentation of why best management practice plan steps were not followed, and what steps, in lieu of your best management practice plan steps, were followed to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(4) For each associated gas well subject to § 60.5377b, your annual report is required to include the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vi) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each associated gas well that complies with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) your annual report is required to include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) An identification of each associated gas well constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period that complies with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4).
(B) The information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(i)(B)(1) through (4) of this section for each incident when the associated gas was temporarily routed to a flare or control device in accordance with § 60.5377b(d).
(1) The reason in § 60.5377b(d)(1), (2), (3), or (4) for each incident.
(2) The start date and time of each incident of routing associated gas to the flare or control device, along with the total duration in hours of each incident.
(3) Documentation that all CVS requirements specified in § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and all applicable flare or control device requirements specified in § 60.5412b were met during each period when the associated gas is routed to the flare or control device.
(4) For each instance where you route associated gas to a flare or control device beyond 72 hours due to “exigent circumstances” according to § 60.5377b(d)(1) or (2), you must include the record information specified in paragraph (c)(3)(v) of this section in your annual report.
(ii) For all instances where you temporarily vent the associated gas in accordance with § 60.5377b(e), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section. This information is required to be reported if you are routinely complying with § 60.5377b(a) or (f) or temporarily complying with § 60.5377b(d). In addition to this information for each incident, you must report the cumulative duration in hours of venting incidents and the cumulative VOC and methane emissions in pounds for all incidents in the calendar year.
(A) The reason in § 60.5377b(e)(1), (2), or (3) for each incident.
(B) The start date and time of each incident of venting the associated gas, along with the total duration in hours of each incident.
(C) The VOC and methane emissions in pounds that were emitted during each incident.
(D) The total duration of venting for all incidents in the year, along with the cumulative VOC and methane emissions in pounds that were emitted.
(iii) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5377b(f) your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(iii)(A) through (E) of this section. The information in paragraphs (b)(4)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section is only required in the initial annual report.
(A) An identification of each associated gas well that commenced construction between May 7, 2024, and May 7, 2026. This identification must include the certification of why it is infeasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) in accordance with § 60.5377b(g).
(B) An identification of each associated gas well that commenced construction between December 6, 2022, and May 7, 2024. This identification must include the certification of why it is infeasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) in accordance with § 60.5377b(g).
(C) An identification of each associated gas well modified or reconstructed during the reporting period that complies by routing the gas to a control device that reduces VOC and methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent. This identification must include the certification of why it is infeasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) in accordance with § 60.5377b(g).
(D) For each associated gas well that was constructed, modified or reconstructed in a previous reporting period that complies by routing the gas to a control device that reduces VOC and methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent, a re-certification of why it is infeasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) in accordance with § 60.5377b(g).
(E) The information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(iv) If you comply with § 60.5377b(f) with a control device, identification of the associated gas well using the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(11)(v) of this section.
(v) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(vi) For each deviation recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(3)(v) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(5) For each wet seal centrifugal compressor affected facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (v) of this section. For each self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor, Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, or dry seal centrifugal compressor affected facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(5)(vi) through (ix) of this section.
(i) An identification of each centrifugal compressor constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period.
(ii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(4) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iii) If required to comply with § 60.5380b(a)(2) or (3), the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section, as applicable.
(iv) If complying with § 60.5380b(a)(1) with a control device, identification of the centrifugal compressor with the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(11)(v) of this section.
(v) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(vi) If complying with § 60.5380b(a)(4), (5), or (6) for a self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor, Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, or dry seal centrifugal compressor requirements, the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since May 7, 2024, or since the previous volumetric flow rate emissions measurement, as applicable, which have elapsed prior to conducting your volumetric flow rate emission measurement or emissions screening.
(vii) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric emissions measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(viii) Number and type of seals on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(ix) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any seals that have been placed on delay of repair.
(6) For each reciprocating compressor affected facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(i) through (vii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) The cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since May 7, 2024, since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, or since the previous reciprocating compressor rod packing replacement, as applicable, which have elapsed prior to conducting your volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening. Alternatively, a statement that emissions from the rod packing are being routed to a process or control device through a closed vent system.
(ii) If applicable, for each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, duration of the deviation in hours and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iii) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(iv) If complying with § 60.5385b(d)(1) or (2), the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section. If complying by routing emissions to a control device, as required in § 60.5385b(d)(2), the information in paragraph (b)(11)(v) of this section.
(v) Number and type of rod packing replacements/repairs on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(vi) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any rod packing replacements/repairs that have been placed on delay of repair.
(vii) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(7) For each process controller affected facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section in your initial annual report and in subsequent annual reports for each process controller affected facility that is constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period. Each annual report must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(iv) through (x) of this section for each process controller affected facility.
(i) An identification of each process controller that is driven by natural gas, as required by § 60.5390b(d), that allows traceability to the records required in paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section.
(ii) For each process controller in the affected facility complying with § 60.5390b(a), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5390b(a) by routing the emissions to a process.
(B) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5390b(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller.
(iii) For each process controller affected facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power and that complies with § 60.5390b(b), you must report the information specified in paragraph (b)(7)(iii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section, as applicable.
(A) For each process controller complying with § 60.5390b(b)(1) process controller bleed rate requirements, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(iii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) The identification of process controllers designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(2) Where necessary to meet a functional need, the identification and demonstration why it is necessary to use a process controller with a natural gas bleed rate greater than 6 scfh.
(B) An identification of each intermittent vent process controller complying with the requirements in paragraph § 60.5390b(b)(2).
(C) An identification of each process controller complying with the requirements in § 60.5390b(b) by routing emissions to a control device in accordance with § 60.5390b(b)(3).
(iv) Identification of each process controller which changes its method of compliance during the reporting period and the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(v) through (ix) of this section for the new method of compliance.
(v) For each process controller in the affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5390b(a) by routing the emissions to a process, you must report the information specified in (b)(11)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(vi) For each process controller in the affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5390b(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416b(b); and
(B) Each defect or leak identified during each natural gas-driven-self-contained process controller system inspection, and the date of repair or date of anticipated repair if repair is delayed.
(vii) For each process controller in the affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5390b(b)(2), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(vii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Dates and results of the intermittent vent process controller monitoring required by § 60.5390b(b)(2)(ii).
(B) For each instance in which monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from an intermittent vent controller during idle periods, the date of repair or replacement or the date of anticipated repair or replacement if the repair or replacement is delayed, and the date and results of the re-survey after repair or replacement.
(viii) For each process controller affected facility complying with § 60.5390b(b)(3) by routing emissions to a control device, you must report the information specified in paragraph (b)(11) of this section.
(ix) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(x) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(vi) and (vii) and (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(8) For each storage vessel affected facility, the information in paragraphs (b)(8)(i) through (x) of this section.
(i) An identification, including the location, of each storage vessel affected facility, including those for which construction, modification, or reconstruction commenced during the reporting period, and those provided in previous reports. The location of the storage vessel affected facility shall be in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Documentation of the methane and VOC emission rate determination according to § 60.5365b(e)(1) for each tank battery that became an affected facility during the reporting period or is returned to service during the reporting period.
(iii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(7)(iii) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, duration of the deviation in hours and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iv) For each storage vessel affected facility constructed, modified, reconstructed, or returned to service during the reporting period complying with § 60.5395b(a)(2) with a control device, report the identification of the storage vessel affected facility with the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(11)(v) of this section.
(v) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(vi) If required to comply with § 60.5395b(b)(1), the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) You must identify each storage vessel affected facility that is removed from service during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5395b(c)(1)(ii), including the date the storage vessel affected facility was removed from service. You must identify each storage vessel that that is removed from service from a storage vessel affected facility during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5395b(c)(2)(iii), including identifying the impacted storage vessel affected facility and the date each storage vessel was removed from service.
(viii) You must identify each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility returned to service during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5395b(c)(4), including the date the storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility was returned to service.
(ix) You must identify each storage vessel affected facility that no longer complies with § 60.5395b(a)(3) and instead complies with § 60.5395b(a)(2). You must identify whether the change in the method of compliance was due to fracturing or refracturing or whether the change was due to an increase in the monthly emissions determination. If the change was due to an increase in the monthly emissions determination, you must provide documentation of the emissions rate. You must identify the date that you complied with § 60.5395b(a)(2) and must submit the information in (b)(8)(iii) through (vii) of this section.
(x) You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2), if applicable, in your initial annual report.
(9) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility, report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(i) through (v) of this section, as applicable.
(i)(A) Designation of the type of site (i.e., well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station) at which the fugitive emissions components affected facility is located.
(B) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site or centralized production facility that became an affected facility during the reporting period, you must include the date of the startup of production or the date of the first day of production after modification. For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a compressor station that became an affected facility during the reporting period, you must include the date of startup or the date of modification.
(C) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site, you must specify what type of well site it is (i.e., single wellhead only well site, small wellsite, multi-wellhead only well site, or a well site with major production and processing equipment).
(D) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site where during the reporting period you complete the removal of all major production and processing equipment such that the well site contains only one or more wellheads, you must include the date of the change to status as a wellhead only well site.
(E) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site where you previously reported under paragraph (b)(9)(i)(D) of this section the removal of all major production and processing equipment and during the reporting period major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site, the date that the first piece of major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site.
(F) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site where during the reporting period you undertake well closure requirements, the date of the cessation of production from all wells at the well site, the date you began well closure activities at the well site, and the dates of the notifications submitted in accordance with paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(ii) For each fugitive emissions monitoring survey performed during the annual reporting period, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(ii)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) Date of the survey.
(B) Monitoring instrument or, if the survey was conducted by AVO methods, notation that AVO was used.
(C) Any deviations from the monitoring plan elements under § 60.5397b(c)(1), (2), and (7), (c)(8)(i), or (d) or a statement that there were no deviations from these elements of the monitoring plan.
(D) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(E) Number and type of fugitive emissions components that were not repaired as required in § 60.5397b(h).
(F) Number and type of fugitive emission components (including designation as difficult-to-monitor or unsafe-to-monitor, if applicable) on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(G) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any components that have been placed on delay of repair.
(iii) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility complying with an alternative fugitive emissions standard under § 60.5399b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(iii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) The alternative standard with which you are complying.
(B) The site-specific reports specified by the specific alternative fugitive emissions standard, submitted in the format in which they were submitted to the state, local, or Tribal authority. If the report is in hard copy, you must scan the document and submit it as an electronic attachment to the annual report required in this paragraph (b).
(C) If the report specified by the specific alternative fugitive emissions standard is not site-specific, you must submit the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(i) and (ii) of this section for each individual site complying with the alternative standard.
(iv) For well closure activities which occurred during the reporting period, the information in paragraphs (b)(9)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A status report with dates for the well closure activities schedule developed in the well closure plan. If all steps in the well closure plan are completed in the reporting period, the date that all activities are completed.
(B) If an OGI survey is conducted during the reporting period, the information in paragraphs (b)(9)(iv)(B)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Date of the OGI survey.
(2) Monitoring instrument used.
(3) A statement that no fugitive emissions were found, or if fugitive emissions were found, a description of the steps taken to eliminate those emissions, the date of the resurvey, the results of the resurvey, and the date of the final resurvey which detected no emissions.
(v) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(10) For each pump affected facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section in your initial annual report and in subsequent annual reports for each pump affected facility that is constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period. Each annual report must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(v) through (ix) of this section for each pump affected facility.
(i) The identification of each of your pumps that are driven by natural gas, as required by § 60.5393b(a) that allows traceability to the records required by paragraph (c)(15)(i) of this section.
(ii) For each pump affected facility for which there is a control device on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction, the certification that there is a control device available on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction required under § 60.5393b(b)(5). You must also report the emissions reduction percentage the control device is designed to achieve.
(iii) For each pump affected facility for which there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site, the certification required under § 60.5393b(b)(6) that there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site.
(iv) For each pump affected facility for which it is technically infeasible to route the emissions to a process or control device, the certification of technically infeasibility required under § 60.5393b(b)(7).
(v) For any pump affected facility which has previously reported as required under paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section and for which a change in the reported condition has occurred during the reporting period, provide the identification of the pump affected facility and the date that the pump affected facility meets one of the change conditions described in paragraph (b)(10)(v)(A), (B), or (C) of this section.
(A) If you install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must report that a control device or vapor recovery unit has been added to the site and that the pump affected facility now is required to comply with § 60.5393b(b)(2), (3) or (5), as applicable.
(B) If your pump affected facility previously complied with § 60.5393b(b)(2), (3) or (5) by routing emissions to a process or a control device and the process or control device is subsequently removed from the site or is no longer available such that there is no ability to route the emissions to a process or control device at the site, or that it is not technically feasible to capture and route the emissions to another control device or process located on site, report that you are no longer complying with the applicable requirements of § 60.5393b(b)(2), (3), or (5) and submit the information provided in paragraph (b)(10)(v)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Certification that there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site.
(2) Certification of the engineering assessment that it is technically infeasible to capture and route the emissions to another control device or process located on site.
(C) If any pump affected facility or individual natural gas-driven pump changes its method of compliance during the reporting period other than for the reasons specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(v)(A) and (B) of this section, identify the new compliance method for each natural gas-driven pump within the affected facility which changes its method of compliance during the reporting period and provide the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(ii) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section for the new method of compliance.
(vi) For each pump affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(a) or (b)(1) or (3) by routing the emissions to a process, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) For each pump affected facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5393b(b)(3) or (5) by routing the emissions to a control device, you must report the information required under paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (v) of this section.
(viii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(ix) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(11) For each well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facility which uses a closed vent system routed to a control device to meet the emissions reduction standard, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (v) of this section. For each reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, or process unit equipment which uses a closed vent system to route to a process, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (iv) of this section. For each centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, and storage vessel equipped with a cover, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416b(a) and (b).
(ii) Each defect or emissions identified during each inspection and the date of repair or the date of anticipated repair if the repair is delayed.
(iii) Date and time of each bypass alarm or each instance the key is checked out if you are subject to the bypass requirements of § 60.5416b(a)(4).
(iv) You must submit the certification signed by the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer according to § 60.5411b(c) for each closed vent system routing to a control device or process in the reporting year in which the certification is signed.
(v) If you comply with the emissions standard for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment affected facility with a control device, the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(v)(A) through (L) of this section, unless you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d). If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), the information in paragraphs (b)(11)(v)(A) through (C) and (L) through (P) of this section.
(A) Identification of the control device.
(B) Make, model, and date of installation of the control device.
(C) Identification of the affected facility controlled by the device.
(D) For each continuous parameter monitoring system used to demonstrate compliance for the control device, a unique continuous parameter monitoring system identifier and the make, model number, and date of last calibration check of the continuous parameter monitoring system.
(E) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417b(g)(1) through (3) or (g)(5) through (7) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, the type of the deviation (e.g., NHV operating limit, lack of pilot or combustion flame, condenser efficiency, bypass line flow, visible emissions), and cause of the deviation.
(F) For each instance where there is a deviation of the continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with § 60.5417b(g)(4) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and cause of the deviation.
(G) For each visible emissions test following return to operation from a maintenance or repair activity, the date of the visible emissions test or observation of the video surveillance output, the length of the observation in minutes, and the number of minutes for which visible emissions were present.
(H) If a performance test was conducted on the control device during the reporting period, provide the date the performance test was conducted. Submit the performance test report following the procedures specified in paragraph (b)(12) of this section.
(I) An indication of whether the enclosed combustion device or flare receives inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, and if so, a description of the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams. If a demonstration of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare was conducted during the reporting period in accordance with § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iii), an indication of whether this is a re-evaluation of vent gas NHV and the reason for the re-evaluation; the applicable required minimum vent gas NHV; if twice daily samples of the vent stream were taken, the number of samples with NHV values that are less than 1.2 times the applicable required minimum NHV, an indication of whether full one hour samples were collected or if shorter sampling times were used, and, if shorter sampling times were used, the collection time(s) used and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample; if continuous NHV sampling of the vent stream was conducted, the number of hourly block average NHV values that are less than the required minimum vent gas NHV; if continuous combustion efficiency monitoring was conducted using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), the number of values of the combustion efficiency that were less than 95.0 percent; the resulting determination of whether continuous NHV monitoring is required or not in accordance with § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iii)(D), (E), or (H); and if the enclosed combustion device or flare received inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, whether the sampling included periods where the highest percentage of inert gases or other gases which may lower the NHV of the combined stream were sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare.
(J) If a demonstration was conducted in accordance with § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iv) that the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to an enclosed combustion device or flare cannot cause the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417b(f)(1) or a flare tip velocity limit of 18.3 meter/second (60 feet/second) to be exceeded, an indication of whether this is a re-evaluation of the gas flow and the reason for the re-evaluation; the demonstration conducted; and applicable engineering calculations.
(K) For each periodic sampling event conducted under § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iii)(G), provide the date of the sampling, the required minimum vent gas NHV, and the NHV value for each vent gas sample.
(L) For each flare and enclosed combustion device, provide the date each device is observed with OGI in accordance with § 60.5415b(f)(1)(x) and whether uncombusted emissions were present. Provide the date each device was visibly observed during an AVO inspection in accordance with § 60.5415b(f)(1)(x), whether the pilot or combustion flame was lit at the time of observation, and whether the device was found to be operating properly.
(M) An identification of the alternative test method used.
(N) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417b(i)(6)(i) or (iii) through (v) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, the type of the deviation (e.g., NHVcz operating limit, lack of pilot or combustion flame, visible emissions), and cause of the deviation.
(O) For each instance where there is a deviation of the data availability in accordance with § 60.5417b(i)(6)(ii) include the date of each operating day when monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours.
(P) If no deviations occurred under paragraph (b)(11)(v)(N) or (O) of this section, a statement that there were no deviations for the control device during the annual report period.
(Q) Any additional information required to be reported as specified by the Administrator as part of the alternative test method approval under § 60.5412b(d).
(12) Within 60 days after the date of completing each performance test (see § 60.8) required by this subpart, except testing conducted by the manufacturer as specified in § 60.5413b(d), you must submit the results of the performance test following the procedures specified in paragraph (d) of this section. Data collected using test methods that are supported by the EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) as listed on the EPA's ERT website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/electronic-reporting-tool-ert) at the time of the test must be submitted in a file format generated using the EPA's ERT. Alternatively, you may submit an electronic file consistent with the extensible markup language (XML) schema listed on the EPA's ERT website. Data collected using test methods that are not supported by the EPA's ERT as listed on the EPA's ERT website at the time of the test must be included as an attachment in the ERT or alternate electronic file.
(13) For combustion control devices tested by the manufacturer in accordance with § 60.5413b(d), an electronic copy of the performance test results required by § 60.5413b(d) shall be submitted via email to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV unless the test results for that model of combustion control device are posted at the following website: https://www.epa.gov/controlling-air-pollution-oil-and-natural-gas-industry.
(14) If you had a super-emitter event during the reporting period, the start date of the super-emitter event, the duration of the super-emitter event in hours, and the affected facility associated with the super-emitter event, if applicable.
(15) You must submit your annual report using the appropriate electronic report template on the Compliance and Emissions Data Reporting Interface (CEDRI) website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in paragraph (d) of this section. If the reporting form specific to this subpart is not available on the CEDRI website at the time that the report is due, you must submit the report to the Administrator at the appropriate address listed in § 60.4. Once the form has been available on the CEDRI website for at least 90 calendar days, you must begin submitting all subsequent reports via CEDRI. The date reporting forms become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted by the deadline specified in this subpart, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(c) Recordkeeping requirements. You must maintain the records identified as specified in § 60.7(f) and in paragraphs (c)(1) through (15) of this section. All records required by this subpart must be maintained either onsite or at the nearest local field office for at least 5 years. Any records required to be maintained by this subpart that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(1) The records for each well affected facility subject to the well completion operation standards of § 60.5375b, as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (vii) of this section, as applicable. For each well affected facility subject to the well completion operations of § 60.5375b, for which you make a claim that the well affected facility is not subject to the requirements for well completions pursuant to § 60.5375b(g), you must maintain the record in paragraph (c)(1)(vi) of this section, only. For each well affected facility which meets the exemption in § 60.5375b(h) for well completion operations (i.e., an existing well is hydraulically refractured), you must maintain the records in paragraph (c)(1)(viii), only. For each well affected facility that routes flowback entirely through one or more production separators that are designed to accommodate flowback, only records of the United States Well Number, the latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983, the Well Completion ID, and the date and time of startup of production are required. For periods where salable gas is unable to be separated, records of the date and time of onset of flowback, the duration and disposition of recovery, the duration of combustion and venting (if applicable), reasons for venting (if applicable), and deviations are required.
(i) Records identifying each well completion operation for each well affected facility.
(ii) Records of deviations in cases where well completion operations with hydraulic fracturing were not performed in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5375b, including the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(iii) You must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(iii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) For each well affected facility required to comply with the requirements of § 60.5375b(a), you must record: The latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number; the date and time of the onset of flowback following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing; the date and time of each attempt to direct flowback to a separator as required in § 60.5375b(a)(1)(ii); the date and time of each occurrence of returning to the initial flowback stage under § 60.5375b(a)(1)(i); and the date and time that the well was shut in and the flowback equipment was permanently disconnected, or the startup of production; the duration of flowback; duration of recovery and disposition of recovery (i.e., routed to the gas flow line or collection system, re-injected into the well or another well, used as an onsite fuel source, or used for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve); duration of combustion; duration of venting; and specific reasons for venting in lieu of capture or combustion. The duration must be specified in hours. In addition, for wells where it is technically infeasible to route the recovered gas as specified in § 60.5375b(a)(1)(ii), you must record the reasons for the claim of technical infeasibility with respect to all four options provided in § 60.5375b(a)(1)(ii).
(B) For each well affected facility required to comply with the requirements of § 60.5375b(f), you must record: Latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number; the date and time of the onset of flowback following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing; the date and time that the well was shut in and the flowback equipment was permanently disconnected, or the startup of production; the duration of flowback; duration of combustion; duration of venting; and specific reasons for venting in lieu combustion. The duration must be specified in hours.
(C) For each well affected facility for which you make a claim that it meets the criteria of § 60.5375b(a)(1)(iii)(A), you must maintain the following:
(1) The latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number; the date and time of the onset of flowback following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing; the date and time that the well was shut in and the flowback equipment was permanently disconnected, or the startup of production; the duration of flowback; duration of recovery and disposition of recovery (i.e., routed to the gas flow line or collection system, re-injected into the well or another well, used as an onsite fuel source, or used for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve); duration of combustion; duration of venting; and specific reasons for venting in lieu of capture or combustion. The duration must be specified in hours.
(2) If applicable, records that the conditions of § 60.5375b(a)(1)(iii)(A) are no longer met and that the well completion operation has been stopped and a separator installed. The records shall include the date and time the well completion operation was stopped and the date and time the separator was installed.
(3) A record of the claim signed by the certifying official that no liquids collection is at the well site. The claim must include a certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete.
(iv) For each well affected facility for which you claim an exception under § 60.5375b(a)(2), you must record: The latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number; the specific exception claimed; the starting date and ending date for the period the well operated under the exception; and an explanation of why the well meets the claimed exception.
(v) For each well affected facility required to comply with both § 60.5375b(a)(1) and (2), if you are using a digital photograph in lieu of the records required in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section, you must retain the records of the digital photograph as specified in § 60.5410b(a)(4).
(vi) For each well affected facility for which you make a claim that the well affected facility is not subject to the well completion standards according to § 60.5375b(g), you must maintain:
(A) A record of the analysis that was performed in order the make that claim, including but not limited to, GOR values for established leases and data from wells in the same basin and field;
(B) The latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number;
(C) A record of the claim signed by the certifying official. The claim must include a certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete.
(vii) For each well affected facility subject to § 60.5375b(f), a record of the well type (i.e., wildcat well, delineation well, or low pressure well (as defined § 60.5430b)) and supporting inputs and calculations, if applicable.
(viii) For each well affected facility which makes a claim it meets the exemption at § 60.5375b(h), a record of the latitude and longitude of the well in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using North American Datum of 1983; the United States Well Number; the date and time of the onset of flowback following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing and a record of the claim that the well completion operation requirements of § 60.5375b(a)(1) through (3) were met.
(2) For each gas well liquids unloading operation at your well affected facility that is subject to § 60.5376b(a)(1) or (2), the records of each gas well liquids unloading operation conducted during the reporting period, including the information specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each gas well liquids unloading operation that complies with § 60.5376b(a)(1) by performing all liquids unloading events without venting of methane and VOC emissions to the atmosphere, comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well (i.e., U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the well affected facility) that conducts a gas well liquids unloading operation during the reporting period without venting of methane and VOC emissions and the non-venting methane and VOC gas well liquids unloading method used. If more than one non-venting method is used, you must maintain records of all the differing non-venting liquids unloading methods used at the well affected facility complying with § 60.5376b(a)(1).
(B) Number of events where unplanned emissions are vented to the atmosphere during a gas well liquids unloading operation where you complied with best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(ii) For each gas well liquids unloading operation that complies with § 60.5376b(b) and (c) best management practices, maintain records documenting information specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well affected facility that conducts liquids unloading during the reporting period that employs best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(B) Documentation of your best management practice plan developed under paragraph § 60.5376b(c). You may update your best management practice plan to include additional steps which meet the criteria in § 60.5376b(c).
(C) A log of each best management practice plan step taken to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible for each gas well liquids unloading event.
(D) Documentation of each gas well liquids unloading event where deviations from your best management practice plan steps occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, documentation of best management practice plan steps not followed, and the steps taken in lieu of your best management practice plan steps during those events to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(iii) For each well affected facility that reduces methane and VOC emissions from well affected facility gas wells that unload liquids by 95.0 percent by routing emissions to a control device through closed vent system under § 60.5376b(g), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(2)(iii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified paragraph (c)(8) of this section.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(12) of this section.
(3) For each associated gas well, you must maintain the applicable records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) or (ii) and (iii), (iv), (v) and (vi) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i)(A) and (B).
(A) Documentation of the specific method(s) in § 60.5377b(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) that is used.
(B) For instances where you temporarily route the associated gas to a flare or control device in accordance with § 60.5377b(d), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i)(B)(1) through (3).
(1) The reason in § 60.5377b(d)(1), (2), (3), or (4) for each incident.
(2) The date of each incident, along with the times when routing the associated gas to the flare or control device started and ended, along with the total duration of each incident.
(3) Documentation that all CVS requirements specified in § 60.5411b(a) and (c) and all applicable flare or control device requirements specified in § 60.5412b are met during each period when the associated gas is routed to the flare or control device.
(ii) For instances where you temporarily vent the associated gas in accordance with § 60.5377b(e), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section. These records are required if you are routinely complying with § 60.5377b(a) or § 60.5377b(f) or temporarily complying with § 60.5377b(d).
(A) The reason in § 60.5377b(e)(1), (2), or (3) for each incident.
(B) The date of each incident, along with the times when venting the associated gas started and ended, along with the total duration of each incident.
(C) The VOC and methane emissions that were emitted during each incident.
(D) The cumulative duration of venting incidents and VOC and methane emissions for all incidents in each calendar year.
(iii) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5377b(f) because it has demonstrated that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1) through (4) due to technical reasons in accordance with § 60.5377b(g), records of each annual demonstration and certification of the technical reason that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5377b(a)(1) through (4) in accordance with § 60.5377b(g).
(iv) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5377b(f), meet the recordkeeping requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(iv)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) Identification of each instance when associated gas was vented and not routed to a control device that reduces VOC and methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent.
(B) If you comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5377b with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraphs (c)(11) and (13) of this section.
(C) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must maintain records of the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(12) of this section.
(v) For each instance where you route associated gas to a flare or control device beyond 72 hours due to an “exigent circumstance” according to § 60.5377b(d)(1) or (2), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(v)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) A written description of the “exigent circumstance” requiring the need to flare or route to a control device beyond 72 hours.
(B) A description of the steps taken to resolve the need for temporary flaring/routing to a control device;
(C) The dates and times an identified “exigent circumstance” started and ended (e.g., when owners or operators are able to access site, when personnel and/or equipment are available) and the total duration of each “exigent circumstance”; and
(D) The dates and times temporary flaring/routing to a control device started and ended and the total duration of temporary flaring/routing to a control device due to the identified “exigent circumstance.”
(vi) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(4) For each centrifugal compressor affected facility, you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) For each centrifugal compressor affected facility, you must maintain records of deviations in cases where the centrifugal compressor was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5380b, including a description of each deviation, the date and time each deviation began and the duration of each deviation.
(ii) For each wet seal compressor complying with the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5380b(a)(1), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(4)(ii)(A) through (E) of this section. For each wet seal compressor complying with the alternative standard in § 60.5380b(a)(3) by routing the closed vent system to a process, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(4)(ii)(B) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5380b(a)(1) with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must maintain the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(9) of this section, you must maintain the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(12) of this section.
(iii) For each centrifugal compressor affected facility using a self-contained wet seal compressor, centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, or dry seal compressor complying with the standard in § 60.5380b(a)(4), (5) or (6), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(A) through (H) of this section.
(A) Records of the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since May 7, 2024, or since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, as applicable.
(B) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(C) Records for all flow meters, composition analyzers and pressure gauges used to measure volumetric flow rates as specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(iii)(C)(1) through (6).
(1) Description of standard method published by a consensus-based standards organization or industry standard practice.
(2) Records of volumetric flow rate emissions calculations conducted according to paragraphs § 60.5380b(a)(4) through (6), as applicable.
(3) Records of manufacturer's operating procedures and measurement methods.
(4) Records of manufacturer's recommended procedures or an appropriate industry consensus standard method for calibration and results of calibration, recalibration, and accuracy checks.
(5) Records which demonstrate that measurements at the remote location(s) can, when appropriate correction factors are applied, reliably and accurately represent the actual temperature or total pressure at the flow meter under all expected ambient conditions. You must include the date of the demonstration, the data from the demonstration, the mathematical correlation(s) between the remote readings and actual flow meter conditions derived from the data, and any supporting engineering calculations. If adjustments were made to the mathematical relationships, a record and description of such adjustments.
(6) Record of each initial calibration or a recalibration which failed to meet the required accuracy specification and the date of the successful recalibration.
(D) Date when performance-based volumetric flow rate is exceeded.
(E) The date of successful repair of the compressor seal, including follow-up performance-based volumetric flow rate measurement to confirm successful repair.
(F) Identification of each compressor seal placed on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(G) For each compressor seal or part needed for repair placed on delay of repair because of replacement seal or part unavailability, the operator must document: the date the seal or part was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement seal or part was ordered, the anticipated seal or part delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the seal or part.
(H) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any seals or parts that have been placed on delay of repair.
(5) For each reciprocating compressor affected facility, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) through (x) and (c)(8) through (13) of this section, as applicable. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(i) For each reciprocating compressor affected facility, you must maintain records of deviations in cases where the reciprocating compressor was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5385b, including a description of each deviation, the date and time each deviation began and the duration of each deviation in hours.
(ii) Records of the date of installation of a rod packing emissions collection system and closed vent system as specified in § 60.5385b(d).
(iii) Records of the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since May 7, 2024, or since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, as applicable. Alternatively, a record that emissions from the rod packing are being routed to a process through a closed vent system.
(iv) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(v) Records for all flow meters, composition analyzers and pressure gauges used to measure volumetric flow rates as specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(v)(A) through (F).
(A) Description of standard method published by a consensus-based standards organization or industry standard practice.
(B) Records of volumetric flow rate calculations conducted according to § 60.5385b(b) or (c), as applicable.
(C) Records of manufacturer operating procedures and measurement methods.
(D) Records of manufacturer's recommended procedures or an appropriate industry consensus standard method for calibration and results of calibration, recalibration, and accuracy checks.
(E) Records which demonstrate that measurements at the remote location(s) can, when appropriate correction factors are applied, reliably and accurately represent the actual temperature or total pressure at the flow meter under all expected ambient conditions. You must include the date of the demonstration, the data from the demonstration, the mathematical correlation(s) between the remote readings and actual flow meter conditions derived from the data, and any supporting engineering calculations. If adjustments were made to the mathematical relationships, a record and description of such adjustments.
(F) Record of each initial calibration or a recalibration which failed to meet the required accuracy specification and the date of the successful recalibration.
(vi) Date when performance-based volumetric flow rate is exceeded.
(vii) The date of successful replacement or repair of reciprocating compressor rod packing, including follow-up performance-based volumetric flow rate measurement to confirm successful repair.
(viii) Identification of each reciprocating compressor placed on delay of repair because of rod packing or part unavailability and explanation for each delay of repair.
(ix) For each reciprocating compressor that is placed on delay of repair because of replacement rod packing or part unavailability, the operator must document: the date the rod packing or part was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement rod packing or part was ordered, the anticipated rod packing or part delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the rod packing or part.
(x) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any reciprocating compressors that have been placed on delay of repair due to the unavailability of rod packing or parts to conduct repairs.
(6) For each process controller affected facility, you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Records identifying each process controller that is driven by natural gas and that does not function as an emergency shutdown device.
(ii) For each process controller affected facility complying with § 60.5390b(a), you must maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) If you are complying with § 60.5390b(a) by routing process controller vapors to a process through a closed vent system, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) An identification of all the natural gas-driven process controllers in the process controller affected facility for which you collect and route vapors to a process through a closed vent system.
(2) The records specified in paragraphs (c)(8), (10), and (12) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(B) If you are complying with § 60.5390b(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(ii)(B)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5390b(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller;
(2) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416b(b); and
(3) Each defect or leak identified during each natural gas-driven-self-contained process controller system inspection, and date of repair or date of anticipated repair if repair is delayed.
(iii) For each process controller affected facility complying with the § 60.5390b(b)(1) process controller bleed rate requirements, you must maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) The identification of process controllers designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh and records of the manufacturer's specifications indicating that the process controller is designed with a natural gas bleed rate of less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(B) Where necessary to meet a functional need, the identification of the process controller and demonstration of why it is necessary to use a process controller with a natural gas bleed rate greater than 6 scfh.
(iv) For each intermittent vent process controller in the affected facility complying with the requirements in paragraphs § 60.5390b(b)(2), you must keep records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) The identification of each intermittent vent process controller.
(B) Dates and results of the intermittent vent process controller monitoring required by § 60.5390b(b)(2)(ii).
(C) For each instance in which monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from an intermittent vent controller during idle periods, the date of repair or replacement, or the date of anticipated repair or replacement if the repair or replacement is delayed and the date and results of the re-survey after repair or replacement.
(v) For each process controller affected facility complying with § 60.5390b(b)(3), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(6)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) An identification of each process controller for which emissions are routed to a control device.
(B) Records specified in paragraphs (c)(8) and (10) through (13) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(vi) Records of each change in compliance method, including identification of each natural gas-driven process controller which changes its method of compliance, the new method of compliance, and the date of the change in compliance method.
(vii) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(7) For each storage vessel affected facility, you must maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) You must maintain records of the identification and location in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983 of each storage vessel affected facility.
(ii) Records of each methane and VOC emissions determination for each storage vessel affected facility made under § 60.5365b(e) including identification of the model or calculation methodology used to calculate the methane and VOC emission rate.
(iii) For each instance where the storage vessel was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5395b a description of the deviation, the date and time each deviation began, and the duration of the deviation.
(iv) If complying with the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5395b(a)(2), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(7)(iv)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraphs (c)(11) and (13) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified paragraph (c)(8) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(9) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(12) of this section.
(v) For storage vessels that are skid-mounted or permanently attached to something that is mobile (such as trucks, railcars, barges or ships), records indicating the number of consecutive days that the vessel is located at a site in the crude oil and natural gas source category. If a storage vessel is removed from a site and, within 30 days, is either returned to the site or replaced by another storage vessel at the site to serve the same or similar function, then the entire period since the original storage vessel was first located at the site, including the days when the storage vessel was removed, will be added to the count towards the number of consecutive days.
(vi) Records of the date that each storage vessel affected facility or portion of a storage vessel affected facility is removed from service and returned to service, as applicable.
(vii) Records of the date that liquids from the well following fracturing or refracturing are routed to the storage vessel affected facility; or the date that you comply with paragraph § 60.5395b(a)(2), following a monthly emissions determination which indicates that VOC emissions from your storage vessel affected facility increase to 4 tpy or greater or methane emissions increase to 14 tpy or greater and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel affected facility, and records of the methane and VOC emissions rate and the model or calculation methodology used to calculate the methane and VOC emission rate.
(8) Records of each closed vent system inspection required under § 60.5416b(a)(1) and (2) and (b) for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment affected facility as required in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A record of each closed vent system inspection or no identifiable emissions monitoring survey. You must include an identification number for each closed vent system (or other unique identification description selected by you), the date of the inspection, and the method used to conduct the inspection (i.e., visual, AVO, OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part).
(ii) For each defect or emissions detected during inspections required by § 60.5416b(a)(1) and (2) or (b), you must record the location of the defect or emissions; a description of the defect; the maximum concentration reading obtained if using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part; the indication of emissions detected by AVO if using AVO; the date of detection; the date of each attempt to repair the emissions or defect; the corrective action taken during each attempt to repair the defect; and the date the repair to correct the defect or emissions is completed.
(iii) If repair of the defect is delayed as described in § 60.5416b(b)(6), you must record the reason for the delay and the date you expect to complete the repair.
(iv) Parts of the closed vent system designated as unsafe to inspect as described in § 60.5416b(b)(7) or difficult to inspect as described in § 60.5416b(b)(8), the reason for the designation, and written plan for inspection of that part of the closed vent system.
(9) A record of each cover inspection required under § 60.5416b(a)(3) for your centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, or storage vessel as required in paragraphs (c)(9)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A record of each cover inspection. You must include an identification number for each cover (or other unique identification description selected by you), the date of the inspection, and the method used to conduct the inspection (i.e., AVO, OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part).
(ii) For each defect detected during the inspection you must record the location of the defect; a description of the defect, the date of detection, the maximum concentration reading obtained if using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part; the indication of emissions detected by AVO if using AVO; the date of each attempt to repair the defect; the corrective action taken during each attempt to repair the defect; and the date the repair to correct the defect is completed.
(iii) If repair of the defect is delayed as described in § 60.5416b(b)(6), you must record the reason for the delay and the date you expect to complete the repair.
(iv) Parts of the cover designated as unsafe to inspect as described in § 60.5416b(b)(7) or difficult to inspect as described in § 60.5416b(b)(8), the reason for the designation, and written plan for inspection of that part of the cover.
(10) For each bypass subject to the bypass requirements of § 60.5416b(a)(4), you must maintain a record of the following, as applicable: readings from the flow indicator; each inspection of the seal or closure mechanism; the date and time of each instance the key is checked out; date and time of each instance the alarm is sounded.
(11) Records for each control device used to comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5377b(d) or (f) for associated gas wells, § 60.5380b(a)(1) or (9) for centrifugal compressor affected facilities, § 60.5385b(d)(2) for reciprocating compressor affected facilities, § 60.5390b(b)(3) for your process controller affected facility in Alaska, § 60.5393b(b)(3) for your pump affected facility, § 60.5395b(a)(2) for your storage vessel affected facility, § 60.5376b(g) for well affected facility gas well liquids unloading, or § 60.5400b(f) or 60.5401b(e) for your process equipment affected facility, as required in paragraphs (c)(11)(i) through (viii) of this section. If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), keep records of the information in paragraph (c)(11)(ix) of this section, in lieu of the records required by paragraphs (c)(11)(i) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section.
(i) For a control device tested under § 60.5413b(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413b(d)(11) and (e), keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(11)(i)(A) through (E) of this section, in addition to the records in paragraphs (c)(11)(ii) through (ix) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Serial number of purchased device and copy of purchase order.
(B) Location of the affected facility associated with the control device in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(C) Minimum and maximum inlet gas flow rate specified by the manufacturer.
(D) Records of the maintenance and repair log as specified in § 60.5413b(e)(4), for all inspection, repair, and maintenance activities for each control device failing the visible emissions test.
(E) Records of the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures, and maintenance schedule to ensure good air pollution control practices for minimizing emissions.
(ii) For all control devices, keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(11)(ii)(A) through (G) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Make, model, and date of installation of the control device, and identification of the affected facility controlled by the device.
(B) Records of deviations in accordance with § 60.5417b(g)(1) through (7), including a description of the deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and the cause of the deviation.
(C) The monitoring plan required by § 60.5417b(c)(2).
(D) Make and model number of each continuous parameter monitoring system.
(E) Records of minimum and maximum operating parameter values, continuous parameter monitoring system data (including records that the pilot or combustion flame is present at all times), calculated averages of continuous parameter monitoring system data, and results of all compliance calculations.
(F) Records of continuous parameter monitoring system equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, performance evaluations, or other audit procedures and results of all inspections specified in the monitoring plan in accordance with § 60.5417b(c)(2). Records of calibration gas cylinders, if applicable.
(G) Periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities Records of repairs on the monitoring system.
(iii) For each carbon adsorption system, records of the schedule for carbon replacement as determined by the design analysis requirements of § 60.5413b(c)(2) and (3) and records of each carbon replacement as specified in §§ 60.5412b(c)(1) and 60.5415b(f)(1)(viii).
(iv) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, records of visible emissions observations as specified in paragraph (c)(11)(iv)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) Records of observations with Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, including observations required following return to operation from a maintenance or repair activity, which include: company, location, company representative (name of the person performing the observation), sky conditions, process unit (type of control device), clock start time, observation period duration (in minutes and seconds), accumulated emission time (in minutes and seconds), and clock end time. You may create your own form including the above information or use Figure 22-1 in Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(B) If you monitor visible emissions with a video surveillance camera, location of the camera and distance to emission source, records of the video surveillance output, and documentation that an operator looked at the feed daily, including the date and start time of observation, the length of observation, and length of time visible emissions were present.
(v) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, video of the OGI inspection conducted in accordance with § 60.5415b(f)(1)(x). Records documenting each enclosed combustion device and flare was visibly observed during each inspection conducted under § 60.5397b using AVO in accordance with § 60.5415b(f)(1)(x).
(vi) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, an indication of whether the enclosed combustion device or flare receives inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, and if so, a description of the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams. Records of each demonstration of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare conducted in accordance with § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iii), including the sampling approach used (continuous NHV, twice daily sampling, alternative method), the date, time and results of each analysis, and, if shorter sampling times were used with twice daily sampling, the collection time(s) used and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample. For each re-evaluation of the NHV of the inlet gas, records of process changes and explanation of the conditions that led to the need to re-evaluation the NHV of the inlet gas. For each demonstration where the enclosed combustion device or flare received inert gases, record the highest percentage of inert gases that can be sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare and the highest percent of inert gases sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare during the NHV demonstration. Records of periodic sampling conducted under § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iii)(G).
(vii) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, if you use a backpressure regulator valve, the make and model of the valve, date of installation, and record of inlet flow rating. Maintain records of the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications that identify the pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate, the annual confirmation that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications, and the annual confirmation that the backpressure regulator valve fully closes when not in open position.
(viii) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, records of each demonstration required under § 60.5417b(d)(8)(iv).
(ix) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412b(d), keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(11)(ix)(A) through (H) of this section, in lieu of the records required by paragraphs (c)(11)(i) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section.
(A) An identification of the alternative test method used.
(B) Data recorded at the intervals required by the alternative test method.
(C) Monitoring plan required by § 60.5417(i)(2).
(D) Quality assurance and quality control activities conducted in accordance with the alternative test method.
(E) If required by § 60.5412b(d)(4) to conduct visible emissions observations, records required by paragraph (c)(11)(iv) of this section.
(F) If required by § 60.5412b(d)(5) to conduct pilot or combustion flame monitoring, record indicating the presence of a pilot or combustion flame and periods when the pilot or combustion flame is absent.
(G) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417b(i)(6)(i) through (v), the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and cause of the deviation.
(H) Any additional information required to be recorded as specified by the Administrator as part of the alternative test method approval under § 60.5412b(d).
(12) For each closed vent system routing to a control device or process, the records of the assessment conducted according to § 60.5411b(c):
(i) A copy of the assessment conducted according to § 60.5411b(c)(1); and
(ii) A copy of the certification according to § 60.5411b(c)(1)(i) and (ii).
(13) A copy of each performance test submitted under paragraph (b)(12) or (13) of this section.
(14) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility, maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(14)(i) through (viii) of this section.
(i) The date of the startup of production or the date of the first day of production after modification for the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site and the date of startup or the date of modification for the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a compressor station.
(ii) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site, you must maintain records specifying what type of well site it is (i.e., single wellhead only well site, small wellsite, multi-wellhead only well site, or a well site with major production and processing equipment.)
(iii) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility at a well site where you complete the removal of all major production and processing equipment such that the well site contains only one or more wellheads, record the date the well site completes the removal of all major production and processing equipment from the well site, and, if the well site is still producing, record the well ID or separate tank battery ID receiving the production from the well site. If major production and processing equipment is subsequently added back to the well site, record the date that the first piece of major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site.
(iv) The fugitive emissions monitoring plan as required in § 60.5397b(b), (c), and (d).
(v) The records of each monitoring survey as specified in paragraphs (c)(14)(v)(A) through (I) of this section.
(A) Date of the survey.
(B) Beginning and end time of the survey.
(C) Name of operator(s), training, and experience of the operator(s) performing the survey.
(D) Monitoring instrument or method used.
(E) Fugitive emissions component identification when Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used to perform the monitoring survey.
(F) Ambient temperature, sky conditions, and maximum wind speed at the time of the survey. For compressor stations, operating mode of each compressor (i.e., operating, standby pressurized, and not operating-depressurized modes) at the station at the time of the survey.
(G) Any deviations from the monitoring plan or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(H) Records of calibrations for the instrument used during the monitoring survey.
(I) Documentation of each fugitive emission detected during the monitoring survey, including the information specified in paragraphs (c)(14)(v)(I)(1) through (9) of this section.
(1) Location of each fugitive emission identified.
(2) Type of fugitive emissions component, including designation as difficult-to-monitor or unsafe-to-monitor, if applicable.
(3) If Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used for detection, record the component ID and instrument reading.
(4) For each repair that cannot be made during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions are initially found, a digital photograph or video must be taken of that component or the component must be tagged for identification purposes. The digital photograph must include the date that the photograph was taken and must clearly identify the component by location within the site (e.g., the latitude and longitude of the component or by other descriptive landmarks visible in the picture). The digital photograph or identification (e.g., tag) may be removed after the repair is completed, including verification of repair with the resurvey.
(5) The date of first attempt at repair of the fugitive emissions component(s).
(6) The date of successful repair of the fugitive emissions component, including the resurvey to verify repair and instrument used for the resurvey.
(7) Identification of each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(8) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(9) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any components that have been placed on delay of repair.
(vi) For the fugitive emissions components affected facility complying with an alternative means of emissions limitation under § 60.5399b, you must maintain the records specified by the specific alternative fugitive emissions standard for a period of at least 5 years.
(vii) For well closure activities, you must maintain the information specified in paragraphs (c)(14)(vii)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) The well closure plan developed in accordance with § 60.5397b(l) and the date the plan was submitted.
(B) The notification of the intent to close the well site and the date the notification was submitted.
(C) The date of the cessation of production from all wells at the well site.
(D) The date you began well closure activities at the well site.
(E) Each status report for the well closure activities reported in paragraph (b)(9)(iv)(A) of this section.
(F) Each OGI survey reported in paragraph (b)(9)(iv)(B) of this section including the date, the monitoring instrument used, and the results of the survey or resurvey.
(G) The final OGI survey video demonstrating the closure of all wells at the site. The video must include the date that the video was taken and must identify the well site location by latitude and longitude.
(viii) If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(14)(iv) and (v) of this section, you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5424b.
(15) For each pump affected facility, you must maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(15)(i) through (ix) of this section.
(i) Identification of each pump that is driven by natural gas and that is in operation 90 days or more per calendar year.
(ii) If you are complying with § 60.5393b(a) or (b)(1) by routing pump vapors to a process through a closed vent system, identification of all the pumps in the pump affected facility for which you collect and route vapors to a process through a closed vent system and the records specified in paragraphs (c)(8), (10), and (12) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(iii) If you are complying with § 60.5393b(b)(1) by routing pump vapors to control device achieving a 95.0 percent reduction in methane and VOC emissions, you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(8) and (10) through (13) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398b, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424b.
(iv) If you are complying with § 60.5393b(b)(5) by routing pump vapors to control device achieving less than a 95.0 percent reduction in methane and VOC emissions, you must maintain records of the certification that there is a control device on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction and a record of the design evaluation or manufacturer's specifications which indicate the percentage reduction the control device is designed to achieve.
(v) If you have less than three natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps in the pump affected facility, and you do not have a vapor recovery unit or control device installed on site by the compliance date, you must retain a record of your certification required under § 60.5393b(b)(6), certifying that there is no vapor recovery unit or control device on site. If you subsequently install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must maintain the records required under paragraph (c)(15)(ii), (iii) or (iv) of this section, as applicable.
(vi) If you determine, through an engineering assessment, that it is technically infeasible to route the pump affected facility emissions to a process or control device, you must retain records of your demonstration and certification that it is technically infeasible as required under § 60.5393b(b)(5).
(vii) If the pump is routed to a control device that is subsequently removed from the location or is no longer available such that there is no option to route to a control device, you are required to retain records of this change and the records required under paragraph (c)(15)(vi) of this section.
(viii) Records of each change in compliance method, including identification of each natural gas-driven pump which changes its method of compliance, the new method of compliance, and the date of the change in compliance method.
(ix) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(d) Electronic reporting. If you are required to submit notifications or reports following the procedure specified in this paragraph (d), you must submit notifications or reports to the EPA via CEDRI, which can be accessed through the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (https://cdx.epa.gov/). The EPA will make all the information submitted through CEDRI available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use CEDRI to submit information you claim as CBI. Although we do not expect persons to assert a claim of CBI, if you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in the report or notification, you must submit a complete file in the format specified in this subpart, including information claimed to be CBI, to the EPA following the procedures in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section. Clearly mark the part or all of the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using CEDRI cannot later be claimed CBI. Furthermore, under CAA section 114(c), emissions data is not entitled to confidential treatment, and the EPA is required to make emissions data available to the public. Thus, emissions data will not be protected as CBI and will be made publicly available. You must submit the same file submitted to the CBI office with the CBI omitted to the EPA via the EPA's CDX as described earlier in this paragraph (d).
(1) The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov, and as described above, should include clear CBI markings. ERT files should be flagged to the attention of the Group Leader, Measurement Policy Group; all other files should be flagged to the attention of the Oil and Natural Gas Sector Lead. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link.
(2) If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, NC 27711. ERT files should be sent to the secondary attention of the Group Leader, Measurement Policy Group, and all other files should be sent to the secondary attention of the Oil and Natural Gas Sector Lead. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(e) Claims of EPA system outage. If you are required to electronically submit a notification or report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of EPA system outage for failure to timely comply with that requirement. To assert a claim of EPA system outage, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must have been or will be precluded from accessing CEDRI and submitting a required report within the time prescribed due to an outage of either the EPA's CEDRI or CDX systems.
(2) The outage must have occurred within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date that the submission is due.
(3) The outage may be planned or unplanned.
(4) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(5) You must provide to the Administrator a written description identifying:
(i) The date(s) and time(s) when CDX or CEDRI was accessed and the system was unavailable;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to EPA system outage;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(6) The decision to accept the claim of EPA system outage and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(7) In any circumstance, the report must be submitted electronically as soon as possible after the outage is resolved.
(f) Claims of force majeure. If you are required to electronically submit a report or notification through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of force majeure for failure to timely comply with that requirement. To assert a claim of force majeure, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (f)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You may submit a claim if a force majeure event is about to occur, occurs, or has occurred or there are lingering effects from such an event within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date the submission is due. For the purposes of this section, a force majeure event is defined as an event that will be or has been caused by circumstances beyond the control of the affected facility, its contractors, or any entity controlled by the affected facility that prevents you from complying with the requirement to submit a report electronically within the time period prescribed. Examples of such events are acts of nature (e.g., hurricanes, earthquakes, or floods), acts of war or terrorism, or equipment failure or safety hazard beyond the control of the affected facility (e.g., large scale power outage).
(2) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(3) You must provide to the Administrator:
(i) A written description of the force majeure event;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to the force majeure event;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(4) The decision to accept the claim of force majeure and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(5) In any circumstance, the reporting must occur as soon as possible after the force majeure event occurs.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62902, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 55681, Dec. 3, 2025; 91 FR 18100, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5421b What are my additional recordkeeping requirements for process unit equipment affected facilities?
You must maintain a record of each equipment leak monitoring inspection and each leak identified under § 60.5400b and § 60.5401b as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (17) of this section. The record must be maintained either onsite or at the nearest local field office for at least 5 years. Any records required to be maintained that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(a) You may comply with the recordkeeping requirements for multiple process unit equipment affected facilities in one recordkeeping system if the system identifies each record by each facility.
(b) You must maintain the monitoring inspection records specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (17) of this section.
(1) Equipment Identification. Note that connectors need not be individually identified if all connectors in a designated area or length of pipe subject to the provisions of this subpart are identified as a group, and the number of connectors subject is indicated.
(2) Date and start and end times of the monitoring inspection.
(3) Inspector name.
(4) Leak determination method used for the monitoring inspection (i.e., OGI, Method 21, or AVO).
(5) Monitoring instrument identification (OGI and Method 21 only).
(6) Type of equipment monitored.
(7) Process unit identification.
(8) The records specified in Section 12 of appendix K of this part, for each monitoring inspection conducted with OGI.
(9) The records in paragraph (b)(9)(i) through (vii), for each monitoring inspection conducted with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(i) Instrument reading.
(ii) Date and time of instrument calibration and initials of operator performing the calibration.
(iii) Calibration gas cylinder identification, certification date, and certified concentration.
(iv) Instrument scale used.
(v) A description of any corrective action taken if the meter readout could not be adjusted to correspond to the calibration gas value in accordance with section 10.1 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(vi) Results of the daily calibration drift assessment.
(vii) If you make your own calibration gas, a description of the procedure used.
(10) For visual inspections of pumps in light liquid service, keep the records specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iii), for each monitored equipment:
(i) Date of inspection.
(ii) Inspector name.
(iii) Result of inspection (i.e., visual indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal or no visual indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal).
(11) For each leak detected, the records specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (v) of this section:
(i) The instrument and operator identification numbers and the process unit and equipment identification numbers. For leaks identified via AVO methods, enter the specific sensory method for instrument identification number.
(ii) The date the leak was detected.
(iii) For each attempt to repair the leak, record:
(A) The date.
(B) The repair method applied.
(C) Indication of whether a leak was still detected following each attempt to repair the leak.
(iv) The date of successful repair of the leak and the method of monitoring used to confirm the repair, as specified in paragraph (b)(11)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) If Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used to confirm the repair, maintain a record of the maximum instrument reading measured by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(B) If OGI conducted in accordance with appendix K of this part is used to confirm the repair, maintain a record of video footage of the repair confirmation.
(C) If the leak is repaired by eliminating AVO indications of a leak, maintain a record of the specific sensory method used to confirm that the evidence of the leak is eliminated.
(v) For each repair delayed beyond 15 calendar days after detection of the leak, record:
(A) “Repair delayed” and the reason for the delay.
(B) The signature of the certifying official who made the decision that repair could not be completed without a process shutdown.
(C) The expected date of successful repair of the leak.
(D) Dates of process unit shutdowns that occur while the equipment is unrepaired.
(12) A list of identification numbers for equipment that are designated for no detectable emissions complying with the provisions of § 60.5401b.
(13) A list of identification numbers for valves, pumps, and connectors that are designated as unsafe-to-monitor, an explanation for each valve, pump, or connector stating why the valve, pump, or connector is unsafe-to-monitor, and the plan for monitoring each valve, pump, or connector.
(14) A list of identification numbers for valves that are designated as difficult-to-monitor, an explanation for each valve stating why the valve is difficult-to-monitor, and the schedule for monitoring each valve.
(15) A list of identification numbers for equipment that is in vacuum service.
(16) A list of identification numbers for equipment you designate as having the potential to emit methane or VOC less than 300 hr/yr.
(17) A list of identification numbers for valves where it was infeasible to replace leaking valves with low-e valves or repack existing valves with low-e packing technology, including the reasoning for why it was infeasible.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62916, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5422b What are my additional reporting requirements for process unit equipment affected facilities?
(a) You must submit semiannual reports using the appropriate electronic report template on the CEDRI website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in § 60.5420b(d). If the reporting form specific to this subpart is not available on the CEDRI website at the time that the report is due, submit the report to the Administrator at the appropriate address listed in § 60.4. Once the form has been available on the CEDRI website for at least 90 calendar days, you must begin submitting all subsequent reports via CEDRI. The date reporting forms become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted within 45 days after the end of the semiannual reporting period, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(b) The initial semiannual report must include the following information:
(1) The general information specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(2) For each process unit:
(i) Process unit identification.
(ii) Number of valves subject to the monitoring requirements of §§ 60.5400b(b) and 60.5401b(f).
(iii) Number of pumps subject to the monitoring requirements of §§ 60.5400b(b) and 60.5401b(b).
(iv) Number of connectors subject to the monitoring requirements of §§ 60.5400b(b) and 60.5401b(h).
(v) Number of pressure relief devices subject to the monitoring requirements of §§ 60.5400b(b) and 60.5401b(c).
(vi) The information in paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section.
(c) All subsequent semiannual reports must include the following information:
(1) The general information specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The company name, facility site name, and address of the affected facility.
(ii) Beginning and ending dates of the reporting period.
(iii) A certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete. If your report is submitted via CEDRI, the certifier's electronic signature during the submission process replaces the requirement in this paragraph (c)(1)(iii).
(2) Process unit identification for each process unit.
(3) For each month during the semiannual reporting period for each process unit report:
(i) Number of valves for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400b(b) or § 60.5401b(f).
(ii) Number of valves for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i), the number of instances where it was technically infeasible to replace leaking valves with low-e valves or repack existing valves with low-e packing technology, including the reasoning for why it was technically infeasible.
(iii) Number of pumps for which leaks were detected as described § 60.5400b(b) or § 60.5401b(b).
(iv) Number of pumps for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i).
(v) Number of connectors for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400b(b) or § 60.5401b(h).
(vi) Number of connectors for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i).
(vii) Number of pressure relief devices for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400b(b) or § 60.5401b(c).
(viii) Number of pressure relief devices for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i).
(ix) Number of open-ended valves or lines for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400b(e) or § 60.5401b(d).
(x) Number of open-ended valves or lines for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i).
(xi) Number of pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service or pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400b(g) or § 60.5401b(g).
(xii) Number of pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service or pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400b(h) or § 60.5401b(i).
(xiii) The facts that explain each delay of repair and, where appropriate, why a process unit shutdown was technically infeasible.
(4) Dates of process unit shutdowns which occurred within the semiannual reporting period.
(5) Revisions to items reported according to paragraph (b) of this section if changes have occurred since the initial report or subsequent revisions to the initial report.
§ 60.5423b What are my additional recordkeeping and reporting requirements for sweetening unit affected facilities?
(a) You must retain records of the calculations and measurements required in §§ 60.5405b(a) and (b) and 60.5407b(a) through (g) for at least 2 years following the date of the measurements. This requirement is included under § 60.7(f) of the General Provisions.
(b) In your initial annual report submitted in accordance with the procedures and schedule in § 60.5420b(b), include the information in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) For each run of the initial performance test required by § 60.8(b):
(i) The average sulfur feed rate in Mg/D, determined according to § 60.5406b(b).
(ii) The average volumetric flow rate of acid gas from the sweetening unit, in dscm/day.
(iii) The H2S concentration in the acid gas feed from the sweetening unit, percent by volume.
(iv) The emission rate of sulfur in kg/hr.
(v) The sulfur production rate in kg/hr.
(vi) The emission reduction efficiency achieved by the sulfur recovery technology, determined according to § 60.5406b(c).
(vii) The required initial SO2 emission reduction efficiency, as determined from table 3 to this subpart based on the sulfur feed rate and the sulfur content of the acid gas of the affected facility.
(2) The required minimum SO2 emission reduction efficiency you must achieve on a continuous basis, as determined from table 4 to this subpart based on the sulfur feed rate and the sulfur content of the acid gas of the affected facility.
(c) You must submit the performance test report in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5420b(b)(12).
(d) You must submit a report of excess emissions to the Administrator in your annual report if you had excess emissions during the reporting period. The procedures and schedule for submitting annual reports are located in § 60.5420b(b). For the purpose of these reports, excess emissions are defined as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section. The report must contain the information specified in paragraph (d)(3) of this section.
(1) Any 24-hour period (at consistent intervals) during which the average sulfur emission reduction efficiency (R) is less than the minimum required efficiency (Z).
(2) For any affected facility electing to comply with the provisions of § 60.5407b(b)(2), any 24-hour period during which the average temperature of the gases leaving the combustion zone of an incinerator is less than the appropriate operating temperature as determined during the most recent performance test in accordance with the provisions of § 60.5407b(b)(3). Each 24-hour period must consist of at least 96 temperature measurements equally spaced over the 24 hours.
(3) For each period of excess emissions during the reporting period, include the following information in your report:
(i) The date and time of commencement and completion of each period of excess emissions;
(ii) The required minimum efficiency (Z) and the actual average sulfur emissions reduction (R) for periods defined in paragraph (d)(1) of this section; and
(iii) The appropriate operating temperature and the actual average temperature of the gases leaving the combustion zone for periods defined in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(e) To certify that a facility is exempt from the control requirements of these standards, for each facility with a design capacity less than 2 LT/D of H2S in the acid gas (expressed as sulfur) you must keep, for the life of the facility, an analysis demonstrating that the facility's design capacity is less than 2 LT/D of H2S expressed as sulfur.
(f) If you elect to comply with § 60.5407b(e) you must keep, for the life of the facility, a record demonstrating that the facility's design capacity is less than 150 LT/D of H2S expressed as sulfur.
(g) The requirements of paragraph (d) of this section remain in force until and unless the EPA, in delegating enforcement authority to a state under section 111(c) of the Act, approves reporting requirements or an alternative means of compliance surveillance adopted by such state. In that event, affected sources within the state will be relieved of obligation to comply with paragraph (d) of this section, provided they comply with the requirements established by the state. Electronic reporting to the EPA cannot be waived, and as such, the provisions of this paragraph do not relieve owners or operators of affected facilities of the requirement to submit the electronic reports required in this section to the EPA.
§ 60.5424b What are my additional recordkeeping and reporting requirements if I comply with the alternative GHG and VOC standards for fugitive emissions components affected facilities and covers and closed vent systems?
This section provides notification, reporting, and recordkeeping requirements for owners and operators who choose to comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard as specified in § 60.5398b for fugitive emissions components affected facilities and the alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems. You must submit an annual report in accordance with the schedule in § 60.5420b(b) which includes the information in paragraphs (a)(1), (b), and (d) of this section, as applicable. You must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and maintain the records in paragraphs (c) and (e) of this section, as applicable.
(a) Notifications. If you choose to comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard as specified in § 60.5398b for fugitive emissions components affected facilities and the alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems, you must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. If you are required by § 60.5398b(c)(8) to develop a mass emission rate reduction plan, you must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(1) A notification to the Administrator of adoption of the alternative standards in the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(4) through (11).
(2) A notification, which includes the submittal of the mass emission rate reduction plan required by § 60.5398b(c)(8). You must submit the mass emission rate reduction plan to the Administrator within 60 days of the initial exceedance of the action level.
(b) Information submittal. If you comply with the periodic screening requirements of § 60.5398b(b), you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(1) through (6) of this section in the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(4) through (11).
(1) Date of each periodic screening during the reporting period and date that results of the periodic screening were received.
(2) Alternative test method and technology used for each screening and the spatial resolution of the technology (i.e., facility-level, area-level, or component-level).
(3) Any deviations from the monitoring plan developed under § 60.5398b(b)(2) or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(4) Results from each periodic screening during the reporting period. If the results of the periodic screening indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from an affected facility, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) The date that the monitoring survey of your entire or the required portion of your fugitive emissions components affected facility was conducted.
(ii) The date that you completed the instrument inspections of all required covers and closed vent systems(s).
(iii) The date that you conducted the visual inspection for emissions of all required covers and closed vent systems.
(iv) For each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components affected facility and all emissions or defects of each cover and closed vent system, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(4)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(B) Each emission or defect identified during the inspection for each cover and closed vent system.
(C) Date of repair for each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components affected facility or each emission or defect for each cover and closed vent system.
(D) Number and type of fugitive emission components and identification of each cover or closed vent system placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(5) The information in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section if you are required to conduct OGI surveys in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(1)(i) or if you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(1)(iv).
(i) The date of the OGI survey.
(ii) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(iii) Number and type of fugitive emissions components that were not repaired as required in § 60.5397b(h).
(iv) Number and type of fugitive emission components placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(6) Any additional information regarding the performance of the periodic screening technology as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
(c) Maintain records. If you comply with the periodic screening requirements of § 60.5398b(b), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(1) through (11) of this section in addition to the records as specified in § 60.5420b(c)(3) through (9) and (c)(14) and (15).
(1) The monitoring plan as required in § 60.5398b(b)(2).
(2) Date of each periodic screening and date that results of the periodic screening were received.
(3) Name of screening operator.
(4) Alternative test method and technology used for screening, as well as the aggregate detection threshold for the technology and the spatial resolution of the technology (i.e., facility-level, area-level, or component-level).
(5) Records of calibrations for technology used during the screening if calibration is required by the alternative test method approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d).
(6) Results from periodic screening. If the results of the periodic screening indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from an affected facility, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) The date of the inspection of the fugitive emissions components and inspection of covers and closed vent system, as specified in § 60.5398b(b)(5).
(ii) Name of operator(s) performing the survey or inspection.
(iii) For surveys and instrument inspections, identification of the monitoring instrument(s) used.
(iv) Records of calibrations for the instrument(s) used during the survey or instrument inspection, as applicable.
(v) For each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components affected facility and each leak or defect for each cover and closed vent system inspection, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(6)(v)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) The location of the fugitive emissions identified using a unique identifier for the source of the emissions and the type of fugitive emissions component.
(B) The location of the emission or defect from a cover or closed vent system using a unique identifier for the source of the emission or defect.
(C) If a defect of a closed vent system, cover, or control device is identified, a description of the defect.
(D) The date of repair for each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components affected facility or each emission or defect for each cover and closed vent system.
(E) Number and type of fugitive emission components and identification of each cover or closed vent system placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(F) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(7) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(5)(vi) and (vii), as applicable.
(8) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken as a result of the investigative analysis and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(5)(vi) and (vii), as applicable.
(9) The information in paragraphs (c)(9)(i) through (vii) of this section if you are required to conduct OGI surveys in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(1)(i) or if you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey in accordance with § 60.5398b(b)(1)(iv).
(i) The date of the OGI survey.
(ii) Location of each fugitive emission identified.
(iii) Type of fugitive emissions component for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(iv) The date of first attempt at repair of the fugitive emissions component(s).
(v) The date of successful repair of the fugitive emissions component(s), including the resurvey to verify the repair.
(vi) Identification of each fugitive emissions component placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(vii) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(10) Any deviations from the monitoring plan or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(11) All records required by the alternative approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d).
(d) Information submittal. If you comply with the continuous monitoring system requirements of § 60.5398b(c), you must submit the information in paragraphs (d)(1) through (6) of this section in the annual report required by § 60.5420b(b)(4) through (11).
(1) The start date and end date for each period where the emissions rate determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(6) exceeded one of the action levels determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(4). Include which action level was exceeded (the 7-day or 90-day rolling average), the numerical value of the action level, and the mass emission rate calculated by the continuous monitoring system in the report.
(2) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(7), as applicable.
(3) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken to reduce the mass emission rate and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(7), as applicable.
(4) If there are no instances reported under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, report your numerical action levels and the highest 7-day rolling average and highest 90-day rolling average determined by your continuous monitoring system during the reporting period.
(5) The start date for each instance where the 12-month rolling average operational downtime of the system exceeded 10 percent and the value of the 12-month rolling average operational downtime during the period. If there were no instances during the reporting period where the 12-month rolling average operational downtime of the system exceeded 10 percent, report the highest value of the 12-month rolling average operational downtime during the reporting period.
(6) Any additional information regarding the performance of the continuous monitoring system as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
(e) Maintain records. If you comply with the continuous monitoring system requirements of § 60.5398b(c), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (e)(1) through (15) of this section.
(1) The monitoring plan required by § 60.5398b(c)(2).
(2) Date of commencement of continuous monitoring with your continuous monitoring system.
(3) The detection threshold of the continuous monitoring system.
(4) The results of checks for power and function in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(1)(ii).
(5) The beginning and end of each period of operational downtime for the system.
(6) Each rolling 12-month average operational downtime for the system, calculated in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(1)(iv)(D).
(7) The 7-day rolling average and 90-day rolling average action levels for the site determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(4).
(8) The information in paragraphs (e)(8)(i) through (v) of this section each time you establish site-specific baseline emissions in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(5).
(i) Records of inspections of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems required by § 60.5398b(c)(5)(i), including the date of inspection, location of each emission or defect identified, date of successful repair of each fugitive emissions component, cover, or closed vent system.
(ii) Records of inspections of control devices required by § 60.5398b(c)(5)(ii), including the date of the inspection and the results of the inspection.
(iii) The start date and time and end date and time of any maintenance activities that occurred during the 30 operating day period.
(iv) The site-level emission rate for each day during the 30 operating day period.
(v) The calculated site-specific baseline emission rate.
(9) Each methane mass emission rate reading determined by the system.
(10) Each daily, 7-day, and 90-day average mass emission rate which was determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(6). If you exceed the 90-day action level, you must also keep records of the 30-day average mass emission rate following completion of the initial actions to reduce the average mass emission rate, in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(8)(i).
(11) The results of each comparison of the emissions rate determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(6) to the action level determined in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(4).
(12) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(7), as applicable.
(13) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken to reduce the mass emission rate below the action level and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(7), as applicable.
(14) Each mass emission rate reduction plan developed in accordance with § 60.5398b(c)(8), as applicable. You must keep records of the actions taken in accordance with the plan and the date such actions are taken.
(15) Any additional information regarding the performance of the continuous monitoring technology as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62917, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5425b What parts of the General Provisions apply to me?
Table 5 to this subpart shows which parts of the General Provisions in §§ 60.1 through 60.19 apply to you.
§ 60.5430b What definitions apply to this subpart?
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act or in subpart A of this part; and the following terms shall have the specific meanings given them.
Access to electrical power means commercial line power is available onsite, with sufficient capacity to support the required power loading of onsite equipment, and which provides reliable and consistent power.
Acid gas means a gas stream of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and carbon dioxide (CO2) that has been separated from sour natural gas by a sweetening unit.
Alaskan North Slope means the approximately 69,000 square-mile area extending from the Brooks Range to the Arctic Ocean.
API Gravity means the weight per unit volume of hydrocarbon liquids as measured by a system recommended by the American Petroleum Institute (API) and is expressed in degrees.
Artificial lift equipment means mechanical pumps including, but not limited to, rod pumps and electric submersible pumps used to flowback fluids from a well.
Associated gas means the natural gas from wells operated primarily for oil production that is released from the liquid hydrocarbon during the initial stage of separation after the wellhead. Associated gas production begins at the startup of production after the flow back period ends. Gas from wildcat or delineation wells is not associated gas.
Average aggregate detection threshold means:
(1) For the purposes of § 60.5398b, the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment (e.g., a singular flight that surveys multiple well sites, centralized production facility, and/or compressor stations) of a technology; and
(2) For the purposes of § 60.5371b, the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment in the same basin and field.
Bleed rate means the rate in standard cubic feet per hour at which natural gas is continuously vented (bleeds) from a process controller.
Capital expenditure means, as an alternative to the definition in 40 CFR 60.2, an expenditure for a physical or operational change to an existing facility that:
(1) Exceeds P, the product of the facility's replacement cost, R, and an adjusted annual asset guideline repair allowance, A, as reflected by the following equation: P = R × A, where:
(i) The adjusted annual asset guideline repair allowance, A, is the product of the percent of the replacement cost, Y, and the applicable basic annual asset guideline repair allowance, B, divided by 100 as reflected by the following equation: A = Y × (B ÷ 100);
(ii) The percent Y is determined from the following equation: Y = (CPI of date of construction/most recently available CPI of date of project), where the “CPI-U, U.S. city average, all items” must be used for each CPI value; and
(iii) The applicable basic annual asset guideline repair allowance, B, is 4.5.
(2) [Reserved]
Centralized production facility means one or more storage vessels and all equipment at a single surface site used to gather, for the purpose of sale or processing to sell, crude oil, condensate, produced water, or intermediate hydrocarbon liquid from one or more offsite natural gas or oil production wells. This equipment includes, but is not limited to, equipment used for storage, separation, treating, dehydration, artificial lift, combustion, compression, pumping, metering, monitoring, and flowline. Process vessels and process tanks are not considered storage vessels or storage tanks. A centralized production facility is located upstream of the natural gas processing plant or the crude oil pipeline breakout station and is a part of producing operations.
Centrifugal compressor means any machine for raising the pressure of a natural gas by drawing in low pressure natural gas and discharging significantly higher-pressure natural gas by means of mechanical rotating vanes or impellers. Screw, sliding vane, and liquid ring compressors are not centrifugal compressors for the purposes of this subpart.
Centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system means a wet seal centrifugal compressor system which has an intermediate closed process that degasses most of the gas entrained in the sour seal oil and sends that gas to either another process or combustion device (i.e., degassed emissions are recovered). The de-gas emissions are routed back to a process or combustion device directly from the intermediate closed degassing process; after the intermediate closed process the oil is ultimately recycled for recirculation in the seals to the lube oil tank where any small amount of residual gas is released through a vent.
Certifying official means one of the following:
(1) For a corporation: A president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation, or a duly authorized representative of such person if the representative is responsible for the overall operation of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities with an affected facility subject to this subpart and either:
(i) The facilities employ more than 250 persons or have gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second quarter 1980 dollars); or
(ii) The Administrator is notified of such delegation of authority prior to the exercise of that authority. The Administrator reserves the right to evaluate such delegation;
(2) For a partnership (including but not limited to general partnerships, limited partnerships, and limited liability partnerships) or sole proprietorship: A general partner or the proprietor, respectively. If a general partner is a corporation, the provisions of paragraph (1) of this definition apply;
(3) For a municipality, state, Federal, or other public agency: Either a principal executive officer or ranking elected official. For the purposes of this part, a principal executive officer of a Federal agency includes the chief executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency (e.g., a Regional Administrator of EPA); or
(4) For affected facilities:
(i) The designated representative in so far as actions, standards, requirements, or prohibitions under title IV of the CAA or the regulations promulgated thereunder are concerned; or
(ii) The designated representative for any other purposes under this part.
Closed vent system means a system that is not open to the atmosphere and that is composed of hard-piping, ductwork, connections, and, if necessary, flow-inducing devices that transport gas or vapor from a piece or pieces of equipment to a control device or back to a process.
Coil tubing cleanout means the process where an operator runs a string of coil tubing to the packed proppant within a well and jets the well to dislodge the proppant and provide sufficient lift energy to flow it to the surface. Coil tubing cleanout includes mechanical methods to remove solids and/or debris from a wellbore.
Collection system means any infrastructure that conveys gas or liquids from the well site to another location for treatment, storage, processing, recycling, disposal or other handling.
Completion combustion device means any ignition device, installed horizontally or vertically, used in exploration and production operations to combust otherwise vented emissions from completions. Completion combustion devices include pit flares.
Compressor mode means the operational and pressurized status of a compressor. For both centrifugal compressors and reciprocating compressors, “mode” refers to either: Operating-mode, standby-pressurized-mode, or not-operating-depressurized-mode.
Compressor station means any permanent combination of one or more compressors that move natural gas at increased pressure through gathering or transmission pipelines, or into or out of storage. This includes but is not limited to gathering and boosting stations and transmission compressor stations. The combination of one or more compressors located at a well site, centralized production facility, or an onshore natural gas processing plant, is not a compressor station for purposes of § 60.5365b(e) and § 60.5397b.
Condensate means hydrocarbon liquid separated from natural gas that condenses due to changes in the temperature, pressure, or both, and remains liquid at standard conditions.
Connector means flanged, screwed, or other joined fittings used to connect two pipe lines or a pipe line and a piece of process equipment or that close an opening in a pipe that could be connected to another pipe. Joined fittings welded completely around the circumference of the interface are not considered connectors for the purpose of this regulation.
Continuous bleed means a continuous flow of pneumatic supply natural gas to a process controller.
Crude oil and natural gas source category means:
(1) Crude oil production, which includes the well and extends to the point of custody transfer to the crude oil transmission pipeline or any other forms of transportation; and
(2) Natural gas production, processing, transmission, and storage, which include the well and extend to, but do not include, the local distribution company custody transfer station.
Custody meter means the meter where natural gas or hydrocarbon liquids are measured for sales, transfers, and/or royalty determination.
Custody meter assembly means an assembly of fugitive emissions components, including the custody meter, valves, flanges, and connectors necessary for the proper operation of the custody meter.
Custody transfer means the transfer of crude oil or natural gas after processing and/or treatment in the producing operations, or from storage vessels or automatic transfer facilities or other such equipment, including product loading racks, to pipelines or any other forms of transportation.
Dehydrator means a device in which an absorbent directly contacts a natural gas stream and absorbs water in a contact tower or adsorption column (absorber).
Delineation well means a well drilled in order to determine the boundary of a field or producing reservoir.
Deviation means any instance in which an affected source subject to this subpart, or an owner or operator of such a source:
(1) Fails to meet any requirement or obligation established by this subpart including, but not limited to, any emission limit, operating limit, or work practice standard;
(2) Fails to meet any term or condition that is adopted to implement an applicable requirement in this subpart and that is included in the operating permit for any affected source required to obtain such a permit; or
(3) Fails to meet any emission limit, operating limit, or work practice standard of this subpart during startup, shutdown, or malfunction, regardless of whether or not such failure is permitted by this subpart.
Distance piece means an open or enclosed casing through which the piston rod travels, separating the compressor cylinder from the crankcase.
Double block and bleed system means two block valves connected in series with a bleed valve or line that can vent the line between the two block valves.
Duct work means a conveyance system such as those commonly used for heating and ventilation systems. It is often made of sheet metal and often has sections connected by screw or crimping. Hard-piping is not ductwork.
Emergency shutdown device means a device which functions exclusively to protect personnel and/or prevent physical damage to equipment by shutting down equipment or gas flow during unsafe conditions resulting from an unexpected event, such as a pipe break or fire. For the purposes of this subpart, an emergency shutdown device is not used for routine control of operating conditions.
Equipment, as used in the standards and requirements of this subpart relative to the process unit equipment affected facility at onshore natural gas processing plants, means each pump, pressure relief device, open-ended valve or line, valve, and flange or other connector that has the potential to emit methane or VOC and any device or system required by those same standards and requirements of this subpart.
Field gas means feedstock gas entering the natural gas processing plant.
Field gas gathering means the system used transport field gas from a field to the main pipeline in the area.
First attempt at repair means an action taken for the purpose of stopping or reducing fugitive emissions to the atmosphere. First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the following practices where practicable and appropriate: Tightening bonnet bolts; replacing bonnet bolts; tightening packing gland nuts; or injecting lubricant into lubricated packing.
Flare means a thermal oxidation system using an open (without enclosure) flame. Completion combustion devices as defined in this section are not considered flares.
Flow line means a pipeline used to transport oil and/or gas to a processing facility or a mainline pipeline.
Flowback means the process of allowing fluids and entrained solids to flow from a well following a treatment, either in preparation for a subsequent phase of treatment or in preparation for cleanup and returning the well to production. The term flowback also means the fluids and entrained solids that emerge from a well during the flowback process. The flowback period begins when material introduced into the well during the treatment returns to the surface following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing. The flowback period ends when either the well is shut in and permanently disconnected from the flowback equipment or at the startup of production. The flowback period includes the initial flowback stage and the separation flowback stage. Screenouts, coil tubing cleanouts, and plug drill-outs are not considered part of the flowback process.
Fuel gas means gases that are combusted to derive useful work or heat.
Fuel gas system means the offsite and onsite piping and flow and pressure control system that gathers gaseous stream(s) generated by onsite operations, may blend them with other sources of gas, and transports the gaseous stream for use as fuel gas in combustion devices or in-process combustion equipment, such as furnaces and gas turbines, either singly or in combination.
Fugitive emissions means, for the purposes of § 60.5397b, any indication of emissions observed from a fugitive emissions component using AVO, an indication of visible emissions observed from an OGI instrument, or an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
Fugitive emissions component means any component that has the potential to emit fugitive emissions of methane or VOC at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station, such as valves (including separator dump valves), connectors, pressure relief devices, open-ended lines, flanges, covers and closed vent systems not subject to § 60.5411b, thief hatches or other openings on a storage vessel not subject to § 60.5395b, compressors, instruments, meters, and yard piping.
Gas to oil ratio (GOR) means the ratio of the volume of gas at standard temperature and pressure that is produced from a volume of oil when depressurized to standard temperature and pressure.
Hard-piping means pipe or tubing that is manufactured and properly installed using good engineering judgment and standards such as ASME B31.3, Process Piping (available from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, P.O. Box 2300, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300).
Hydraulic fracturing means the process of directing pressurized fluids containing any combination of water, proppant, and any added chemicals to penetrate tight formations, such as shale or coal formations, that subsequently require high rate, extended flowback to expel fracture fluids and solids during completions.
Hydraulic refracturing means conducting a subsequent hydraulic fracturing operation at a well that has previously undergone a hydraulic fracturing operation.
In gas/vapor service means that the piece of equipment contains process fluid that is in the gaseous state at operating conditions.
In heavy liquid service means that the piece of equipment is not in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service.
In light liquid service means that the piece of equipment contains a liquid that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5402b(d)(2) or § 60.5403b.
In vacuum service means that equipment is operating at an internal pressure which is at least 5 kilopascals (kPa) (0.7 psia) below ambient pressure.
In wet gas service means that a compressor or piece of equipment contains or contacts the field gas before the extraction step at a gas processing plant process unit.
Initial calibration value as used in the standards and requirements of this subpart relative to the process unit equipment affected facility at onshore natural gas processing plants means the concentration measured during the initial calibration at the beginning of each day required in § 60.5403b, or the most recent calibration if the instrument is recalibrated during the day (i.e., the calibration is adjusted) after a calibration drift assessment.
Initial flowback stage means the period during a well completion operation which begins at the onset of flowback and ends at the separation flowback stage.
Intermediate hydrocarbon liquid means any naturally occurring, unrefined petroleum liquid.
Intermittent vent natural gas-driven process controller means a process controller that is not designed to have a continuous bleed rate but is instead designed to only release natural gas to the atmosphere as part of the actuation cycle.
Liquefied natural gas unit means a unit used to cool natural gas to the point at which it is condensed into a liquid which is colorless, odorless, non-corrosive and non-toxic.
Liquid collection system means tankage and/or lines at a well site to contain liquids from one or more wells or to convey liquids to another site.
Liquids dripping means any visible leakage from the seal, including spraying, misting, clouding, and ice formation.
Liquids unloading means the unloading of liquids that have accumulated over time in gas wells, which are impeding or halting production. Routine well maintenance activities, including workovers, screenouts, coil tubing cleanouts, or any other activity that requires a rig or other machinery are not considered liquids unloading.
Local distribution company (LDC) custody transfer station means a metering station where the LDC receives a natural gas supply from an upstream supplier, which may be an interstate transmission pipeline or a local natural gas producer, for delivery to customers through the LDC's intrastate transmission or distribution lines.
Low-e valve means a valve (including its specific packing assembly) for which the manufacturer has issued a written warranty or performance guarantee that it will not emit fugitives at greater than 100 ppm in the first five years. A valve may qualify as a low-e valve if it is as an extension of another valve that has qualified as a low-e valve.
Low-e packing means a valve packing product for which the manufacturer has issued a written warranty or performance guarantee that it will not emit fugitives at greater than 100 ppm in the first five years. Low-e injectable packing is a type of low-e packing product for which the manufacturer has also issued a written warranty or performance guarantee and that can be injected into a valve during a “drill-and-tap” repair of the valve.
Low pressure well means a well that satisfies at least one of the following conditions:
(1) The static pressure at the wellhead following fracturing but prior to the onset of flowback is less than the flow line pressure;
(2) The pressure of flowback fluid immediately before it enters the flow line, as determined under § 60.5432b, is less than the flow line pressure; or
(3) Flowback of the fracture fluids will not occur without the use of artificial lift equipment.
Major production and processing equipment means reciprocating or centrifugal compressors, glycol dehydrators, heater/treaters, separators, control devices, natural gas-driven process controllers, natural gas-driven pumps, and storage vessels or tank batteries collecting crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids, or produced water, for the purpose of determining whether a well site is a wellhead only well site.
Maximum average daily throughput means the following:
(1) The earliest calculation of daily average throughput, determined as described in paragraph (2) or (3) of this definition, to a tank battery over the days that production is routed to that tank battery during the 30-day PTE evaluation period employing generally accepted methods specified in § 60.5365b(e)(2).
(2) If throughput to the tank battery is measured on a daily basis (e.g., via level gauge automation or daily manual gauging), the maximum average daily throughput is the average of all daily throughputs for days on which throughput was routed to the tank battery during the 30-day evaluation period; or
(3) If throughput to the tank battery is not measured on a daily basis (e.g., via manual gauging at the start and end of loadouts), the maximum average daily throughput is the highest, of the average daily throughputs, determined for any production period to that tank battery during the 30-day evaluation period, as determined by averaging total throughput to that tank battery over each production period. A production period begins when production begins to be routed to a tank battery and ends either when throughput is routed away from that tank battery or when a loadout occurs from that tank battery, whichever happens first. Regardless of the determination methodology, operators must not include days during which throughput is not routed to the tank battery when calculating maximum average daily throughput for that tank battery.
Multi-wellhead only well site means a well site that contains two or more wellheads and no major production and processing equipment.
Natural gas-driven diaphragm pump means a positive displacement pump powered by pressurized natural gas that uses the reciprocating action of flexible diaphragms in conjunction with check valves to pump a fluid. A pump in which a fluid is displaced by a piston driven by a diaphragm is not considered a diaphragm pump for purposes of this subpart. A lean glycol circulation pump that relies on energy exchange with the rich glycol from the contactor is not considered a diaphragm pump.
Natural gas-driven piston pump means a positive displacement pump powered by pressurized natural gas that moves and pressurizes fluid by using one or more reciprocating pistons. A pump in which a fluid is displaced by a piston driven by a diaphragm is considered a piston pump for purposes of this subpart. A lean glycol circulation pump that relies on energy exchange with the rich glycol from the contactor is not considered a piston pump.
Natural gas-driven process controller means a process controller powered by pressurized natural gas.
Natural gas liquids means the hydrocarbons, such as ethane, propane, butane, and pentane that are extracted from field gas.
Natural gas processing plant (gas plant) means any processing site engaged in the extraction of natural gas liquids from field gas, fractionation of mixed natural gas liquids to natural gas products, or both. A Joule-Thompson valve, a dew point depression valve, or an isolated or standalone Joule-Thompson skid is not a natural gas processing plant.
Natural gas transmission means the pipelines used for the long-distance transport of natural gas (excluding processing). Specific equipment used in natural gas transmission includes the land, mains, valves, meters, boosters, regulators, storage vessels, dehydrators, compressors, and their driving units and appurtenances, and equipment used for transporting gas from a production plant, delivery point of purchased gas, gathering system, storage area, or other wholesale source of gas to one or more distribution area(s).
No detectable emissions means, for the purposes of § 60.5401b and § 60.5403b, that the equipment is operating with an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
No identifiable emissions means, for the purposes of covers, closed vent systems, and self-contained natural gas-driven process controllers and as determined according to the provisions of § 60.5416b, that no emissions are detected by AVO means when inspections are conducted by AVO; no emissions are imaged with an OGI camera when inspections are conducted with OGI; and equipment is operating with an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part when inspections are conducted with Method 21.
Nonfractionating plant means any gas plant that does not fractionate mixed natural gas liquids into natural gas products.
Non-natural gas-driven process controller means an instrument that is actuated using other sources of power than pressurized natural gas; examples include solar, electric, and instrument air.
Onshore means all facilities except those that are located in the territorial seas or on the outer continental shelf.
Open-ended valve or line or open-ended vent line means any valves, except safety relief valves, having one side of the valve seat in contact with process fluid and one side open to the atmosphere, either directly or through open piping.
Plug drill-out means the removal of a plug (or plugs) that was used to isolate different sections of the well.
Process controller means an automated instrument used for maintaining a process condition such as liquid level, pressure, delta-pressure and temperature.
Pressure release means the emission of materials resulting from system pressure being greater than set pressure of the pressure relief device.
Pressure vessel means a storage vessel that is used to store liquids or gases and is designed not to vent to the atmosphere as a result of compression of the vapor headspace in the pressure vessel during filling of the pressure vessel to its design capacity.
Pressurized mode means when the compressor contains natural gas that is maintained at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure.
Process improvement means routine changes made for safety and occupational health requirements, for energy savings, for better utility, for ease of maintenance and operation, for correction of design deficiencies, for bottleneck removal, for changing product requirements, or for environmental control.
Process unit means components assembled for the extraction of natural gas liquids from field gas, the fractionation of the liquids into natural gas products, or other operations associated with the processing of natural gas products. A process unit can operate independently if supplied with sufficient feed or raw materials and sufficient storage facilities for the products.
Process unit shutdown means a work practice or operational procedure that stops production from a process unit or part of a process unit during which it is technically feasible to clear process material from a process unit or part of a process unit consistent with safety constraints and during which repairs can be accomplished. The following are not considered process unit shutdowns:
(1) An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure that stops production from a process unit or part of a process unit for less than 24 hours.
(2) An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure that would stop production from a process unit or part of a process unit for a shorter period of time than would be required to clear the process unit or part of the process unit of materials and start up the unit, and would result in greater emissions than delay of repair of leaking components until the next scheduled process unit shutdown.
(3) The use of spare equipment and technically feasible bypassing of equipment without stopping production.
Produced water means water that is extracted from the earth from an oil or natural gas production well, or that is separated from crude oil, condensate, or natural gas after extraction.
Qualified Professional Engineer means an individual who is licensed by a state as a Professional Engineer to practice one or more disciplines of engineering and who is qualified by education, technical knowledge, and experience to make the specific technical certifications required under this subpart. Professional engineers making these certifications must be currently licensed in at least one state in which the certifying official is located.
Quarter means a 3-month period. For purposes of standards for process unit equipment affected facilities at onshore natural gas processing plants, the first quarter concludes on the last day of the last full month during the 180 days following initial startup.
Reciprocating compressor means a piece of equipment that increases the pressure of a process gas by positive displacement, employing linear movement of the driveshaft.
Reciprocating compressor rod packing means a series of flexible rings in machined metal cups that fit around the reciprocating compressor piston rod to create a seal limiting the amount of compressed natural gas that escapes to the atmosphere, or other mechanism that provides the same function.
Recovered gas means gas recovered through the separation process during flowback.
Recovered liquids means any crude oil, condensate or produced water recovered through the separation process during flowback.
Reduced emissions completion means a well completion following fracturing or refracturing where gas flowback that is otherwise vented is captured, cleaned, and routed to the gas flow line or collection system, re-injected into the well or another well, used as an onsite fuel source, or used for other useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve, with no direct release to the atmosphere.
Reduced sulfur compounds means H2S, carbonyl sulfide (COS), and carbon disulfide (CS2).
Removed from service means that a storage vessel affected facility has been physically isolated and disconnected from the process for a purpose other than maintenance in accordance with § 60.5395b(c)(1).
Repaired means the following:
(1) For the purposes of fugitive emissions components affected facilities, that fugitive emissions components are adjusted, replaced, or otherwise altered, in order to eliminate fugitive emissions and resurveyed as specified in § 60.5397b(h)(4) and it is verified that emissions from the fugitive emissions components are below the applicable fugitive emissions definition.
(2) For the purposes of process unit equipment affected facilities, that equipment is adjusted, or otherwise altered, in order to eliminate a leak as defined in §§ 60.5400b and 60.5401b and is re-monitored as specified in § 60.5400b(b) introductory text and (b)(1) or § 60.5403b, respectively, to verify that emissions from the equipment are below the applicable leak definition. Pumps in light liquid service subject to § 60.5400b(c)(2) or § 60.5401b(b)(1)(ii) are not subject to re-monitoring.
Replacement cost means the capital needed to purchase all the depreciable components in a facility.
Returned to service means that a storage vessel affected facility that was removed from service has been:
(1) Reconnected to the original source of liquids or has been used to replace any storage vessel affected facility; or
(2) Installed in any location covered by this subpart and introduced with crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids or produced water.
Routed to a process or route to a process means the emissions are conveyed via a closed vent system to any enclosed portion of a process that is operational where the emissions are predominantly recycled and/or consumed in the same manner as a material that fulfills the same function in the process and/or transformed by chemical reaction into materials that are not regulated materials and/or incorporated into a product; and/or recovered.
Salable quality gas means natural gas that meets the flow line or collection system operator specifications, regardless of whether such gas is sold.
Screenout means an attempt to clear proppant from the wellbore to dislodge the proppant out of the well.
Self-contained process controller means a natural gas-driven process controller that releases gas into the downstream piping and not to the atmosphere, resulting in zero methane and VOC emissions.
Self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor means:
(1) A wet seal centrifugal compressor system that is a closed process that ports the degassing emissions into the natural gas line at the compressor suction (i.e., degassed emissions are recovered) or which has an intermediate closed process that degasses most of the gas entrained in the seal oil and sends that gas to another process. The de-gas emissions are routed back to suction or process directly from the closed or intermediate closed degassing process; after the closed or intermediate closed degassing process the oil is ultimately recycled for recirculation in the seals to the lube oil tank where any small amount of residual gas is released through a vent.
(2) A wet seal centrifugal compressor equipped with mechanical wet seals, where
(i) A differential pressure is maintained on the system and there is no off gassing of the lube oil, and
(ii) The mechanical seal is integrated into the compressor housing.
Sensor means a device that measures a physical quantity or the change in a physical quantity such as temperature, pressure, flow rate, pH, or liquid level.
Separation flowback stage means the period during a well completion operation when it is technically feasible for a separator to function. The separation flowback stage ends either at the startup of production, or when the well is shut in and permanently disconnected from the flowback equipment.
Separator dump valve means, for purposes of the fugitive emission standards in §§ 60.5397b and 60.5398b, a liquid-control valve in a separator that controls the liquid level within the separator vessel.
Single wellhead only well site means a wellhead only well site that contains only one wellhead and no major production and processing equipment.
Small well site means, for purposes of the fugitive emissions standards in §§ 60.5397b and 60.5398b, a well site that contains a single wellhead, no more than one piece of certain major production and processing equipment, and associated meters and yard piping. Small well sites cannot include any controlled storage vessels (or controlled tank batteries), control devices, natural gas-driven process controllers, or natural gas-driven pumps.
Startup of production means the beginning of initial flow following the end of flowback when there is continuous recovery of salable quality gas and separation and recovery of any crude oil, condensate, or produced water, except as otherwise provided in this definition. For the purposes of the fugitive monitoring requirements of § 60.5397b, startup of production means the beginning of the continuous recovery of salable quality gas and separation and recovery of any crude oil, condensate, or produced water.
Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that contains an accumulation of crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids, or produced water, and that is constructed primarily of nonearthen materials (such as wood, concrete, steel, fiberglass, or plastic) which provide structural support. A well completion vessel that receives recovered liquids from a well after startup of production following flowback for a period which exceeds 60 days is considered a storage vessel under this subpart. A tank or other vessel shall not be considered a storage vessel if it has been removed from service in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5395b(c)(1) until such time as such tank or other vessel has been returned to service. For the purposes of this subpart, the following are not considered storage vessels:
(1) Vessels that are skid-mounted or permanently attached to something that is mobile (such as trucks, railcars, barges or ships), and are intended to be located at a site for less than 180 consecutive days. If you do not keep or are not able to produce records, as required by § 60.5420b(c)(7)(v), showing that the vessel has been located at a site for less than 180 consecutive days, the vessel described herein is considered to be a storage vessel from the date the original vessel was first located at the site. This exclusion does not apply to a well completion vessel as described above.
(2) Process vessels such as surge control vessels, bottoms receivers or knockout vessels.
(3) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 kilopascals and without emissions to the atmosphere.
Sulfur production rate means the rate of liquid sulfur accumulation from the sulfur recovery unit.
Sulfur recovery unit means a process device that recovers element sulfur from acid gas.
Surface site means any combination of one or more graded pad sites, gravel pad sites, foundations, platforms, or the immediate physical location upon which equipment is physically affixed.
Sweetening unit means a process device that removes hydrogen sulfide and/or carbon dioxide from the sour natural gas stream.
Tank battery means a group of all storage vessels that are manifolded together for liquid transfer. A tank battery may consist of a single storage vessel if only one storage vessel is present.
Total Reduced Sulfur (TRS) means the sum of the sulfur compounds hydrogen sulfide, methyl mercaptan, dimethyl sulfide, and dimethyl disulfide as measured by Method 16 of appendix A-6 to this part.
Total SO2 equivalents means the sum of volumetric or mass concentrations of the sulfur compounds obtained by adding the quantity existing as SO2 to the quantity of SO2 that would be obtained if all reduced sulfur compounds were converted to SO2 (ppmv or kg/dscm (lb/dscf)).
UIC Class I oilfield disposal well means a well with a UIC Class I permit that meets the definition in 40 CFR 144.6(a)(2) and receives eligible fluids from oil and natural gas exploration and production operations.
UIC Class II oilfield disposal well means a well with a UIC Class II permit where wastewater resulting from oil and natural gas production operations is injected into underground porous rock formations not productive of oil or gas, and sealed above and below by unbroken, impermeable strata.
Underground storage vessel means a storage vessel stored below ground.
Well means a hole drilled for the purpose of producing oil or natural gas, or a well into which fluids are injected.
Well completion means the process that allows for the flowback of petroleum or natural gas from newly drilled wells to expel drilling and reservoir fluids and tests the reservoir flow characteristics, which may vent produced hydrocarbons to the atmosphere via an open pit or tank.
Well completion operation means any well completion with hydraulic fracturing or refracturing occurring at a well completion affected facility.
Well completion vessel means a vessel that contains flowback during a well completion operation following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing. A well completion vessel may be a lined earthen pit, a tank or other vessel that is skid-mounted or portable. A well completion vessel that receives recovered liquids from a well after startup of production following flowback for a period which exceeds 60 days is considered a storage vessel under this subpart.
Well site means one or more surface sites that are constructed for the drilling and subsequent operation of any oil well, natural gas well, or injection well. For the purposes of the fugitive emissions standards at § 60.5397b, a well site does not include:
(1) UIC Class II oilfield disposal wells and disposal facilities;
(2) UIC Class I oilfield disposal wells; and
(3) The flange immediately upstream of the custody meter assembly and equipment, including fugitive emissions components, located downstream of this flange.
Wellhead means the piping, casing, tubing and connected valves protruding above the earth's surface for an oil and/or natural gas well. The wellhead ends where the flow line connects to a wellhead valve. The wellhead does not include other equipment at the well site except for any conveyance through which gas is vented to the atmosphere.
Wellhead only well site means, for the purposes of the fugitive emissions standards at § 60.5397b and the standards in § 60.5398b, a well site that contains one or more wellheads and no major production and processing equipment.
Wildcat well means a well outside known fields or the first well drilled in an oil or gas field where no other oil and gas production exists.
Yard piping means hard-piping at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station that is not part of a closed vent system.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62917, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5432b How do I determine whether a well is a low pressure well using the low pressure well equation?
(a) To determine that your well is a low pressure well subject to § 60.5375b(f), you must determine whether the characteristics of the well are such that the well meets the definition of low pressure well in § 60.5430b. To determine that the well meets the definition of low pressure well in § 60.5430b, you must use the low pressure well equation:
Where:
(1) PL is the pressure of flowback fluid immediately before it enters the flow line, expressed in pounds force per square inch (psia), and is to be calculated using the equation above;
(2) PR is the pressure of the reservoir containing oil, gas, and water at the well site, expressed in psia;
(3) L is the true vertical depth of the well, expressed in feet (ft);
(4) qo is the flow rate of oil in the well, expressed in cubic feet/second (cu ft/sec);
(5) qg is the flow rate of gas in the well, expressed in cu ft/sec;
(6) qw is the flow rate of water in the well, expressed in cu ft/sec;
(7) ro is the density of oil in the well, expressed in pounds mass per cubic feet (lbm/cu ft).
(b) You must determine the four values in paragraphs (a)(4) through (7) of this section, using the calculations in paragraphs (b)(1) through (15) of this section.
(1) Determine the value of the bottom hole pressure, PBH (psia), based on available information at the well site, or by calculating it using the reservoir pressure, PR (psia), in the following equation:
(2) Determine the value of the bottom hole temperature, TBH (F), based on available information at the well site, or by calculating it using the true vertical depth of the well, L (ft), in the following equation:
(3) Calculate the value of the applicable natural gas specific gravity that would result from a separator pressure of 100 psig, γgs, using the following equation with: Separator at standard conditions (pressure, p = 14.7 (psia), temperature, T = 60 (F)); the oil API gravity at the well site, γ0; and the gas specific gravity at the separator under standard conditions, γgp = 0.75:
(4) Calculate the value of the applicable dissolved GOR, Rs (scf/STBO), using the following equation with: The bottom hole pressure, PBH (psia), determined in (b)(1) of this section; the bottom hole temperature, TBH (F), determined in (b)(2) of this section; the gas gravity at separator pressure of 100 psig, γgs, calculated in (b)(3) of this section; the oil API gravity, γo, at the well site; and the constants, C1, C2, and C3, found in Table 1 to this paragraph(b)(4):
| Constant | γAPI ≤ 30 | γAPI > 30 |
|---|---|---|
| C1 | 0.0362 | 0.0178 |
| C2 | 1.0937 | 1.1870 |
| C3 | 25.7240 | 23.931 |
(5) Calculate the value of the oil formation volume factor, Bo (bbl/STBO), using the following equation with: The bottom hole temperature, TBH (F), determined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section; the gas gravity at separator pressure of 100 psig, γgs, calculated in paragraph (b)(3) of this section; the dissolved GOR, Rs (scf/STBO), calculated in paragraph (b)(4) of this section; the oil API gravity, γo, at the well site; and the constants, C1, C2, and C3, found in Table 2 to this paragraph (b)(5):
| Constant | γAPI ≤ 30 | γAPI > 30 |
|---|---|---|
| C1 | 4.677 × 10−4 | 4.670 × 10−4 |
| C2 | 1.751 × 10−5 | 1.100 × 10−5 |
| C3 | −1.811 × 10−8 | 1.337 × 10−9 |
(6) Calculate the density of oil at the wellhead,
using the following equation with the value of the oil API gravity, γo, at the well site:
(7) Calculate the density of oil at bottom hole conditions,
using the following equation with: the dissolved GOR, Rs (scf/STBO), calculated in paragraph (b)(4) of this section; the oil formation volume factor, Bo (bbl/STBO), calculated in paragraph (b)(5) of this section; the oil density at the wellhead,
calculated in paragraph (b)(6) of this section; and the dissolved gas gravity, γgd = 0.77:
(8) Calculate the density of oil in the well,
using the following equation with the density of oil at the wellhead,
calculated in paragraph (b)(6) of this section; and the density of oil at bottom hole conditions,
calculated in paragraph (b)(7) of this section:
(9) Calculate the oil flow rate, qo (cu ft/sec,) using the following equation with: the oil formation volume factor, Bo (bbl/STBO), as calculated in paragraph (b)(5) of this section; and the estimated oil production rate at the well head, Qo (STBO/day):
(10) Calculate the critical pressure, Pc (psia), and critical temperature, Tc (R), using the equations below with: Gas gravity at standard conditions (pressure, P = 14.7 (psia), temperature, T = 60 (F)), γ = 0.75; and where the mole fractions of nitrogen, carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide in the gas are XN2 = 0.168225, XCO2 = 0.013163, and XH2S = 0.013680, respectively:
Pc(psia) = 678 − 50 · (γg −0.5) − 206.7 · XN2 + 440 · XCO2 + 606.7 · XH2S
Tc(R) = 326 + 315.7 · (γg − 0.5) − 240 · XN2 − 88.3 · XCO2 + 133.3 · XH2S
(11) Calculate reduced pressure, Pr, and reduced temperature, Tr, using the following equations with: the bottom hole pressure, PBH, as determined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section; the bottom hole temperature, TBH (F), as determined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section in the following equations:
(12)(i) Calculate the gas compressibility factor, Z, using the following equation with the reduced pressure, Pr, calculated in paragraph (b)(11) of this section:
(ii) The values for A, B, C, D in the above equation, are calculated using the following equations with the reduced pressure, Pr, and reduced temperature, Tr, calculated in paragraph (b)(11) of this section:
(13) Calculate the gas formation volume factor,
using the bottom hole pressure, PBH (psia), as determined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section; and the bottom hole temperature, TBH (F), as determined in paragraph (b)(2) of this section:
(14) Calculate the gas flow rate,
using the following equation with: the value of gas formation volume factor,
calculated in paragraph (b)(13) of this section; the estimated gas production rate, Qg (scf/day); the estimated oil production rate, Qo (STBO/day); and the dissolved GOR, Rs (scf/STBO), as calculated in paragraph (b)(4) of this section:
(15) Calculate the flow rate of water in the well, qw (cu ft/sec), using the following equation with the water production rate Qw (bbl/day) at the well site:
§§ 60.5433b-60.5439b [Reserved]
Table 1 to Subpart OOOOb of Part 60—Alternative Technology Periodic Screening Frequency at Well Sites, Centralized Production Facilities, and Compressor Stations Subject to AVO Inspections With Quarterly OGI or EPA Method 21 Monitoring
| Minimum screening frequency | Minimum detection threshold of screening technology * (kg/hr) |
|---|---|
| Quarterly | ≤1 |
| Bimonthly | ≤2 |
| Bimonthly + Annual OGI | ≤10 |
| Monthly | ≤5 |
| Monthly + Annual OGI | ≤15 |
| * Based on a probability of detection of 90%. |
Table 2 to Subpart OOOOb of Part 60—Alternative Technology Periodic Screening Frequency at Well Sites and Centralized Production Facilities Subject to AVO Inspections and/or Semiannual OGI or EPA Method 21 Monitoring
| Minimum screening frequency | Minimum detection threshold of screening technology * (kg/hr) |
|---|---|
| Semiannual | ≤1 |
| Triannual | ≤2 |
| Triannual + Annual OGI | ≤10 |
| Quarterly | ≤5 |
| Quarterly + Annual OGI | ≤15 |
| Bimonthly | ≤15 |
| * Based on a probability of detection of 90% |
Table 3 to Subpart OOOOb of Part 60—Required Minimum Initial SO2 Emission Reduction Efficiency (Zi)
| H2 S content of acid gas (Y), % |
Sulfur feed rate (X), LT/D | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2.0 ≤ X ≤ 5.0 | 5.0 < X ≤ 15.0 | 15.0 < X ≤ 300.0 | X > 300.0 | |
| Y ≥ 50 | 79.0 | 88.51X0.0101 Y0.0125 or 99.9, whichever is smaller. | ||
| 20 ≤ Y < 50 | 79.0 | 88.51X0.0101 Y0.0125 or 97.9, whichever is smaller | 97.9 | |
| 10 ≤ Y < 20 | 79.0 | 88.51X0.0101 Y0.0125 or 93.5, whichever is smaller | 93.5 | 93.5 |
| Y < 10 | 79.0 | 79.0 | 79.0 | 79.0 |
[89 FR 62917, Aug. 1, 2024]
Table 4 to Subpart OOOOb of Part 60—Required Minimum SO2 Emission Reduction Efficiency (Zc)
| H2 S content of acid gas (Y),
% |
Sulfur feed rate (X), LT/D | |||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2.0 ≤ X ≤ 5.0 | 5.0 < X ≤ 15.0 | 15.0 < X ≤ 300.0 | X > 300.0 | |
| Y ≥ 50 | 74.0 | 85.35X0.0144 Y0.0128 or 99.9, whichever is smaller. | ||
| 20 ≤ Y < 50 | 74.0 | 85.35X0.0144 Y0.0128 or 97.5, whichever is smaller | 97.5 | |
| 10 ≤ Y < 20 | 74.0 | 85.35X0.0144 Y0.0128 or 90.8, whichever is smaller | 90.8 | 90.8 |
| Y < 10 | 74.0 | 74.0 | 74.0 | 74.0 |
[89 FR 62917, Aug. 1, 2024]
Table 5 to Subpart OOOOb of Part 60—Applicability of General Provisions to Subpart OOOOb
| General provisions citation | Subject of citation | Applies to subpart? |
Explanation |
|---|---|---|---|
| § 60.1 | General applicability of the General Provisions | Yes | |
| § 60.2 | Definitions | Yes | Additional terms defined in § 60.5430b. |
| § 60.3 | Units and abbreviations | Yes | |
| § 60.4 | Address | Yes | |
| § 60.5 | Determination of construction or modification | Yes | |
| § 60.6 | Review of plans | Yes | |
| § 60.7 | Notification and record keeping | Yes | Except that § 60.7 only applies as specified in §§ 60.5417b(c) and 60.5420b(a). |
| § 60.8 | Performance tests | Yes | Except that the format and submittal of performance test reports is described in § 60.5420b(b) and (d). Performance testing is required for control devices used on storage vessels, centrifugal compressors, wells, reciprocating compressors, process controllers, and pumps, as applicable, except that performance testing is not required for a control device used solely on pump(s). |
| § 60.9 | Availability of information | Yes | |
| § 60.10 | State authority | Yes | |
| § 60.11 | Compliance with standards and maintenance requirements | No | Requirements are specified in subpart OOOOb. |
| § 60.12 | Circumvention | Yes | |
| § 60.13 | Monitoring requirements | Yes | |
| § 60.14 | Modification | Yes | To the extent any provision in § 60.14 conflicts with specific provisions in subpart OOOOb, it is superseded by subpart OOOOb provisions. |
| § 60.15 | Reconstruction | Yes | Except that § 60.15(d) does not apply to wells (i.e., well completions, well liquids unloading, associated gas wells), process controllers, pumps, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressors, storage vessels, or fugitive emissions components affected facilities. |
| § 60.16 | Priority list | Yes | |
| § 60.17 | Incorporations by reference | Yes | |
| § 60.18 | General control device and work practice requirements | Yes | |
| § 60.19 | General notification and reporting requirement | Yes |
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62917, Aug. 1, 2024]
Subpart OOOOc—Emissions Guidelines for Greenhouse Gas Emissions From Existing Crude Oil and Natural Gas Facilities
89 FR 17140, Mar. 8, 2024, unless otherwise noted.
Introduction
§ 60.5360c What is the purpose of this subpart?
This subpart establishes emission guidelines and compliance schedules for the control of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from designated facilities in the crude oil and natural gas source category as defined in the Model Rule at § 60.5430c, in accordance with section 111(d) of the Clean Air Act and subpart Ba of this part. The designated facilities, standards section reference and compliance dates are listed in table 1 to this subpart. To the extent any requirement of this subpart is inconsistent with the requirements of subpart A or Ba of this part, the requirements of this subpart will apply.
§ 60.5361c Which pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
(a) Scope. The pollutants regulated by this subpart are greenhouse gases (GHG). The greenhouse gas standards in this subpart are in the form of a limitation on emissions of methane from designated facilities in the crude oil and natural gas source category that commenced construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022.
(b) PSD and title V Thresholds for Greenhouse Gases. (1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48) and in any State Implementation Plan (SIP) approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the plan, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(49).
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the plan, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the plan, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2 40 CFR.
§ 60.5362c Am I affected by this subpart?
(a) If you are the Administrator of an air pollution control agency in a state or United States protectorate with one or more designated facilities that commenced construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022, you must submit a state or Tribal plan to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) that implements the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. The submission of such plan shall be made in electronic format according to subpart Ba of this part.
(b) If you are the Administrator of an air pollution control agency in a state or United States protectorate with no designated facilities for which construction commenced on or before December 6, 2022, you must submit a negative declaration letter in place of the state or Tribal plan. The submission of such negative declaration letter shall be made in electronic format according to subpart Ba of this part.
(c) You must submit the state or Tribal plan or negative declaration letter to EPA by January 22, 2027.
[89 FR 17140, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 90 FR 35984, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5363c What must I include in my state or Tribal plan?
(a) You must include the ten items described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (10) of this section in your state or Tribal plan.
(1) Inventory of designated facilities. For purposes of this subpart, § 60.25a(a) does not apply.
(2) Inventory of emissions from designated facilities in your state. For purposes of this subpart, § 60.25a(a) does not apply.
(3) Compliance schedules for each designated facility or logical grouping of designated facilities.
(4) Standards of performance for designated facilities that are at least as stringent as the emission guidelines contained in this subpart, unless otherwise provided for under § 60.5365c. Standards for performance for designated facilities must apply at all times, including periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction.
(5) Performance testing, monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements.
(6) Documentation of meaningful engagement on such plan or plan revisions as specified in § 60.23a(i).
(7) Certification that the required hearing on the state or Tribal plan was held, a list of witnesses and their organizational affiliations, if any, appearing at the hearing, and a brief written summary of each presentation or written submission as specified in § 60.23a(c) through (e).
(8) Provision for state progress reports to EPA.
(9) Identification of enforceable state mechanisms that you selected for implementing the emission guidelines of this subpart.
(10) Demonstration of your state's legal authority to carry out the Clean Air Act section 111(d) state or Tribal plan.
(b) Unless superseded by this subpart, you must follow the requirements of subpart Ba of this part (Adoption and Submittal of State Plans for Designated Facilities) in your state or Tribal plan.
§ 60.5364c How do I apply to use my state standards as part of my state or Tribal plan submission?
In order for you to apply to use your state standards as part of your state or Tribal plan submission your state requirements for designated facilities must meet the standards of performance criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section and you must provide the supporting documentation that you met those criteria as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(a) You must demonstrate that the state standards of performance established for a designated facility in your state or Tribal plan meet the equivalency criteria specified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this section when compared to the designated facility presumptive standards specified in EG OOOOc.
(1) Designated facility,
(2) Designated pollutant,
(3) Standard type/format of standard,
(4) Emission reductions (considering applicability thresholds and exemptions) unless relying on § 60.5365c,
(5) Compliance determination method, and
(6) Ongoing compliance assurance requirements (e.g., monitoring, recordkeeping and reporting requirements).
(b) You must provide the supporting documentation that you met the equivalency criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Your state or Tribal plan should identify the designated facility requirements of your state program that you are submitting for approval to become federally enforceable requirements under the plan.
(2) You must include a detailed explanation and analysis of how the relied upon state standards are at least as stringent as the requirements of the final EG based on each of the criteria specified in paragraph (a) of this section, or comply with § 60.5365c for paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(3) You must include a copy of the actual state law/regulation or document submitted for approval and incorporation into the state or Tribal plan.
§ 60.5365c How do I apply for a less stringent standard taking into consideration the remaining useful life of a designated facility and other factors?
You may apply a standard of performance to a designated facility that is less stringent than otherwise required by the emission guidelines, provided you meet the requirements specified in § 60.24a.
§ 60.5366c [Reserved]
§ 60.5367c Is there an approval process for my state or Tribal plan?
Yes. The EPA will review your state or Tribal plan according to § 60.27a.
(a) The EPA will determine the completeness of your plan submission according § 60.27a(g).
(b) The EPA will act on your plan submission according to § 60.27a.
§ 60.5368c What if my state or Tribal plan is not approvable?
If you do not submit a state or Tribal plan (or a negative declaration letter) by January 22, 2027, or if EPA disapproves your state plan, EPA will develop a Federal plan according to § 60.27a(c) through (f) to implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart.
[90 FR 35984, July 31, 2025]
§ 60.5369c Is there an approval process for a negative declaration letter?
No. The EPA has no formal review process for negative declaration letters. Once your negative declaration letter has been received, the EPA will place a copy in the public docket and publish a notice in the Federal Register. If, at a later date, a designated facility for which construction commenced on or before December 6, 2022, is found in your state, that designated facility must be subject to a state, Tribal, or Federal plan in accordance with the requirements of this subpart and subpart Ba.
§ 60.5370c What compliance schedule must I include in my state or Tribal plan?
(a) For designated facilities that commenced construction, modification or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022, your state or Tribal plan must include compliance schedules that require designated facilities to achieve final compliance as expeditiously as practicable after approval of the state or Tribal plan but not later than the dates specified in § 60.5360c of this subpart, as applicable to each designated facility.
(b) The plan must include legally enforceable increments of progress to achieve compliance for each designated facility or category of facilities, as specified in §§ 60.5379c through 60.5381c.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62918, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5371c What requirements apply to revisions to my state or Tribal plan?
(a) Any significant revision to a state or Tribal plan shall be adopted and submitted as specified in § 60.28a.
(b) A revision of a plan, or any portion thereof, shall not be considered part of an applicable plan until approved by the Administrator in accordance with this subpart and subpart Ba of this part.
§ 60.5372c In lieu of a state or Tribal plan submittal, are there other acceptable option(s) for a state to meet its Clean Air Act section 111(d) obligations?
Yes, a state may meet its Clean Air Act section 111(d) obligations by submitting an acceptable written request for delegation of an applicable Federal plan that meets the requirements of this section. This is the only other option for a state to meet its section 111(d) obligations.
(a) An acceptable Federal plan delegation request must include the following:
(1) A demonstration of adequate resources and legal authority to administer and enforce the Federal plan.
(2) The items under § 60.5363c(a)(1), (a)(2), and (a)(8) of this subpart.
(3) Certification that the hearing on the state delegation request, similar to the hearing for a state or Tribal plan submittal, was held, a list of witnesses and their organizational affiliations, if any, appearing at the hearing, and a brief written summary of each presentation or written submission.
(4) A commitment to enter into a Memorandum of Agreement with the Regional Administrator that sets forth the terms, conditions, and effective date of the delegation and that serves as the mechanism for the transfer of authority. Additional guidance and information is given in EPA's Delegation Manual, Item 7-139, Implementation and Enforcement of 111(d)(2) and 111(d)/(2)/129 (b)(3) Federal plans.
(b) A state with an already approved oil and natural gas designated facility Clean Air Act section 111(d) state or Tribal plan is not precluded from receiving the EPA's approval of a delegation request for any revised Federal plan, provided the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section are met, and at the time of the delegation request, the state also requests withdrawal of the EPA's previous state or Tribal plan approval.
(c) A state's Clean Air Act section 111(d) obligations are separate from its obligations under title V of the Clean Air Act.
§ 60.5373c What authorities will not be delegated to state, local, or Tribal agencies?
The authorities that will not be delegated to state, local, or Tribal agencies are specified in paragraphs (a) through (h) of this section.
(a) Approval of alternatives to the emission limits and standards in tables 1, 2, and 3 to this subpart and operating limits established under § 60.5412c, § 60.5415c, or § 60.5417c.
(b) Approval of major alternatives to test methods.
(c) Approval of major alternatives to monitoring.
(d) Approval of major alternatives to recordkeeping and reporting.
(e) Approval of an alternative to any electronic reporting required by this subpart.
(f) [Reserved]
(g) [Reserved]
(h) Performance test and data reduction waivers under § 60.8(b).
§ 60.5374c Does this subpart directly affect designated facility owners and operators in my state?
(a) No. This subpart does not directly affect designated facility owners and operators in your state. However, designated facility owners and operators must comply with the state or Tribal plan you develop to implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. States may choose to incorporate the model rule text directly in their state or Tribal plan.
(b) If you do not submit a plan to implement and enforce the guidelines contained in this subpart by the date specified in § 60.5352c, or if EPA disapproves your plan, the EPA will implement and enforce a Federal plan, as provided in § 60.5368c, to ensure that each designated facility within your state that commenced construction, modification or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022, reaches compliance with all the provisions of this subpart by the dates specified in § 60.5360c.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62918, Aug. 1, 2024; 90 FR 35985, July 31, 2025]
Applicability of State or Tribal Plans
§ 60.5375c What designated facilities must I address in my state or Tribal plan?
(a) Your state or Tribal plan must address designated facilities that meet all three criteria described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Designated facilities in your state that commenced construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022.
(2) Designated facilities that are listed in table 1 to this subpart.
(3) Designated facilities not exempt under § 60.14(e).
(b) If the owner or operator of a designated facility makes changes that meet the definition of modification after December 6, 2022, the designated facility becomes subject to subpart OOOOb of this part, and the state or Tribal plan no longer applies to that facility.
(c) If the owner or operator of a designated facility makes physical or operational changes to a designated facility for which construction commenced on or before September 9, 2024, primarily to comply with your state or Tribal plan, subpart OOOOb of this part, does not apply to that designated facility. Such changes do not qualify as modifications under subpart OOOOb of this part.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62918, Aug. 1, 2024]
Use of Model Rule
§ 60.5376c What is the “model rule” in this subpart?
(a) The model rule is the portion of these emission guidelines (§§ 60.5385c through 60.5430c of this subpart) that includes the presumptive standards for designated facilities as well as associated measures to assure compliance including monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting. The model rule is organized in regulation format. You must develop a state or Tribal plan that is at least as protective as the model rule, or comply with § 60.5365c. You may use the model rule language as part of your state or Tribal plan. Alternative language may be used in your state or Tribal plan if you demonstrate that the alternative language is at least as protective as the model rule contained in this subpart, or comply with § 60.5365c.
(b) In the model rule of §§ 60.5385c through 60.5430c, “Administrator” has the meaning specified in § 60.2.
§ 60.5377c How does the model rule relate to the required elements of my state or Tribal plan?
You may use the model rule to satisfy the state or Tribal plan requirements specified in § 60.5363c(a)(3) through (a)(5).
§ 60.5378c What are the principal components of the model rule?
The model rule contains the nine major components listed in paragraphs (a) through (i) of this section.
(a) Increments of progress toward compliance.
(b) Operator training and qualification.
(c) Emission limits, emission standards, and operating limits.
(d) Initial compliance requirements.
(e) Continuous compliance requirements.
(f) Performance testing, monitoring, and calibration requirements.
(g) Recordkeeping and reporting.
(h) Definitions.
(i) Tables.
Model Rule—Increments of Progress
§ 60.5379c What are my requirements for meeting increments of progress and achieving final compliance?
You must meet one increment of progress as specified in paragraph (a) of this section and you must submit the Notification of Compliance report as specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(a) Submit a final compliance control plan on or before 28 months after the state plan submittal deadline specified in § 60.5362c(c).
(b) Submit a Notification of Compliance report on or before 60 days after the state plan compliance date as specified in § 60.5420c.
§ 60.5380c What if I do not meet the final control plan increment of progress compliance date?
If you fail to meet the final compliance control plan increment of progress report compliance date, you must submit a notification to the Administrator postmarked within 10 business days after the required submittal date for that increment of progress. You must inform the Administrator that you did not meet the increment, and you must continue to submit reports each subsequent calendar month until the increment of progress is met.
§ 60.5381c How do I comply with the increment of progress for submittal of a final compliance control plan?
For your final compliance control plan increment of progress report, you must satisfy the requirements specified in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section.
(a) Your final control plan must include the information specified paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) A description of the designated facilities covered under your plan.
(2) The emissions control methods that you plan to implement for each designated facility covered under your plan.
(b) A company is allowed to submit one plan that covers all of the company's designated facilities in a state in lieu of submitting a plan for each designated facility.
(c) Maintain an onsite copy of the final control plan.
Model Rule—Applicability
§ 60.5385c What is the purpose of this subpart?
(a) Scope. This subpart establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of the pollutant greenhouse gases (GHG). The greenhouse gas standard in this subpart is in the form of a limitation on emissions of methane from designated facilities in the crude oil and natural gas source category that commence construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022.
(b) Prevention of Significant Deterioration (PSD) and title V thresholds for Greenhouse Gases. (1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from designated facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48) and in any State Implementation Plan (SIP) approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from designated facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Clean Air Act as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(49).
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to GHG emissions from designated facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to GHG emissions from designated facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2.
(c) Exemption. You are exempt from the obligation to obtain a permit under 40 CFR part 70 or 40 CFR part 71, provided you are not otherwise required by law to obtain a permit under 40 CFR 70.3(a) or 40 CFR 71.3(a). Notwithstanding the previous sentence, you must continue to comply with the provisions of this subpart.
§ 60.5386c Am I subject to this subpart?
You are subject to the applicable provisions of this subpart if you are the owner or operator of one or more of the onshore designated facilities listed in paragraphs (a) through (h) of this section, that is located within the Crude Oil and Natural Gas source category, as defined in § 60.5430c, for which you commence construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022. Facilities located inside and including the Local Distribution Company (LDC) custody transfer station are not subject to this subpart.
(a) Each well designated facility, which is a single well drilled for the purpose of producing oil or natural gas.
(b) Each centrifugal compressor designated facility, which is a single centrifugal compressor. A centrifugal compressor located at a well site is not a designated facility under this subpart. A centrifugal compressor located at a centralized production facility is a designated facility under this subpart.
(c) Each reciprocating compressor designated facility, which is a single reciprocating compressor. A reciprocating compressor located at a well site is not a designated facility under this subpart. A reciprocating compressor located at a centralized production facility is a designated facility under this subpart.
(d) Each process controller designated facility, which is the collection of natural gas-driven process controllers at a well site, centralized production facility, onshore natural gas processing plant, or a compressor station. Natural gas-driven process controllers that function as emergency shutdown devices and process controllers that are not driven by natural gas are exempt from the designated facility.
(e)(1) Each storage vessel designated facility, which is a tank battery that has the potential for methane emissions equal to or greater than 20 tpy as specified in paragraph (e)(2) of this section. A tank battery with the potential for methane emissions below 20 tpy is not a storage vessel designated facility provided the owner or operator keeps records of the potential for emissions calculation for the life of the storage vessel or until such time the tank battery becomes a storage vessel designated facility because the potential for methane emissions meets or exceeds 20 tpy.
(2) The potential for methane emissions must be calculated as the cumulative emissions from all storage vessels within the tank battery as specified by the applicable requirements in paragraphs (e)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section. The determination may take into account requirements under a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under a Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority.
(i) For purposes of determining the applicability of a storage vessel tank battery as a designated facility, a legally and practicably enforceable limit must include the elements provided in paragraphs (e)(2)(i)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) A quantitative production limit and quantitative operational limit(s) for the equipment, or quantitative operational limits for the equipment;
(B) An averaging time period for the production limit in (e)(2)(i)(A), if a production-based limit is used, that is equal to or less than 30 days;
(C) Established parametric limits for the production and/or operational limit(s) in paragraph (e)(2)(i)(A), and where a control device is used to achieve an operational limit, an initial compliance demonstration (i.e., performance test) for the control device that establishes the parametric limits;
(D) Ongoing monitoring of the parametric limits in (e)(2)(i)(C) that demonstrates continuous compliance with the production and/or operational limit(s) in (e)(2)(i)(A);
(E) Recordkeeping by the owner or operator that demonstrates continuous compliance with the limit(s) in (e)(2)(i)(A) through (D); and
(F) Periodic reporting that demonstrates continuous compliance.
(ii) For each tank battery located at a well site or centralized production facility, you must determine the potential for methane emissions within 60 days after the effective date of the approved state or Tribal plan, except as provided in paragraph (e)(4)(iv) of this section. The potential for methane emissions must be calculated using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working, and breathing losses, based on the maximum average daily throughput to the tank battery determined for a 30-day period of production.
(iii) For each tank battery not located at a well site or centralized production facility, including each tank battery located at a compressor station or onshore natural gas processing plant, you must determine the potential for methane emissions within 60 days after the effective date of the approved state or Tribal plan, using either method described in paragraph (e)(2)(iii)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) Determine the potential for methane emissions using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working, and breathing losses, and based on the throughput to the tank battery established in a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under a Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority; or
(B) Determine the potential for methane emissions using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology that accounts for flashing, working and breathing losses, based on projected maximum average daily throughput. Maximum average daily throughput is determined using a generally accepted engineering model (e.g., volumetric condensate rates from the tank battery based on the maximum gas throughput capacity of each producing facility) to project the maximum average daily throughput for the tank battery.
(3) A storage vessel designated facility that subsequently has its potential for methane emissions decrease to less than 20 tpy shall remain a designated facility under this subpart.
(4) For storage vessels not subject to a legally and practicably enforceable limit in an operating permit or other requirement established under Federal, state, local, or Tribal authority, any vapor from the storage vessel that is recovered and routed to a process through a vapor recovery unit designed and operated as specified in this section is not required to be included in the determination of potential for methane emissions for purposes of determining designated facility status, provided you comply with the requirements of paragraphs (e)(4)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You meet the cover requirements specified in § 60.5411c(b).
(ii) You meet the closed vent system requirements specified in § 60.5411c(a)(2) through (4) and (c).
(iii) You must maintain records that document compliance with paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(iv) In the event of removal of apparatus that recovers and routes vapor to a process, or operation that is inconsistent with the conditions specified in paragraphs (e)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must determine the storage vessel's potential for methane emissions according to this section within 30 days of such removal or operation.
(5) The requirements of this paragraph (e)(5) apply to each storage vessel designated facility immediately upon return to service. A storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility that is reconnected to the original source of liquids remains a storage vessel designated facility subject to the same requirements that applied before being removed from service. Any storage vessel that is used to replace a storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility, or used to expand a storage vessel designated facility assumes the designated facility status of the storage vessel designated facility being replaced or expanded.
(6) A storage vessel with a capacity greater than 100,000 gallons used to recycle water that has been passed through two stage separation is not a storage vessel designated facility.
(f) Each process unit equipment designated facility, which is the group of all equipment within a process unit at an onshore natural gas processing plant is a designated facility. Equipment associated with a compressor station, dehydration unit, sweetening unit, underground storage vessel, field gas gathering system, or liquefied natural gas unit is covered by §§ 60.5400c, 60.5401c, 60.5402c, 60.5421c, and 60.5422c if it is located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. Equipment not located at the onshore natural gas processing plant site is exempt from the provisions of §§ 60.5400c, 60.5401c, 60.5402c, 60.5421c, and 60.5422c.
(g) Each pump designated facility, which is the collection of natural gas-driven diaphragm and piston pumps at a well site, centralized production facility, onshore natural gas processing plant, or a compressor station. Pumps that are not driven by natural gas and that are not in operation 90 days or more per calendar year are not included in the pump designated facility.
(h) Each fugitive emissions components designated facility, which is the collection of fugitive emissions components at a well site, centralized production facility, or a compressor station.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62918, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5387c When must I comply with this subpart?
Table 1 of this subpart specifies the final compliance date.
Model Rule—Emission and Work Practice Standards
§ 60.5388c What standards apply to super-emitter events?
This section applies to super-emitter events. For purposes of this section, a super-emitter event is defined as any emissions event that is located at an oil and natural gas facility (e.g., individual well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) and that is detected using remote detection methods and has a quantified emission rate of 100 kg/hr of methane or greater. Upon receiving a notification of a super emitter event issued by the EPA under § 60.5371b(c) in subpart OOOOb of this part, owners or operators must take the actions listed in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. Within 5 calendar days of receiving a notification from the EPA of a super-emitter event, the owner or operator of an oil and natural gas facility (e.g., a well site, centralized production facility, natural gas processing plant, or compressor station) must initiate a super-emitter event investigation.
(a) Identification of super-emitter events. (1) If you do not own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the notification subject to the regulation under this subpart, report this result to the EPA under paragraph (b) of this section. Your super-emitter event investigation is deemed complete under this subpart.
(2) If you own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the notification, and there is a designated facility or associated equipment subject to this subpart onsite, you must investigate to determine the source of the super-emitter event in accordance with this paragraph (a) and report the results in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section. The investigation required by this paragraph (a)(2) of this section may include but is not limited to the actions specified below in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Review any maintenance activities (e.g., liquids unloading) or process activities from the designated facilities subject to regulation under this subpart, starting from the date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification, until the date of investigation, to determine if the activities indicate any potential source(s) of the super-emitter event emissions.
(ii) Review all monitoring data from control devices (e.g., flares) from the designated facilities subject to regulation under this subpart from the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification, until the date of receiving the notification from the EPA to identify malfunctions of control devices or periods when the control devices were not in compliance with applicable requirements and that indicate a potential source of the super-emitter event emissions.
(iii) If you conducted a fugitive emissions survey or periodic screening event in accordance with § 60.5397c or § 60.5398c(b) between the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification and the date the notification from the EPA was received, review the results of the survey to identify any potential source(s) of the super-emitter event emissions.
(iv) If you use conduct continuous monitoring with advanced methane detection technology in accordance with § 60.5398c(c), review the monitoring data collected on or after the initial date of detection of the super-emitter event as identified in the notification, until the date of receiving the notification from the EPA.
(v) Screen the entire well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station with OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, or an alternative test method(s) approved per § 60.5398c(d), to determine if a super-emitter event is present
(3) If the source of the super-emitter event was found to be from fugitive emission components at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station subject to this subpart, you must comply with the repair requirements under § 60.5397c and the associated recordkeeping and reporting requirements under § 60.5420c(b)(8) and § 60.5420c(c)(13).
(b) Super-emitter event report. You must submit the results of the super-emitter event investigation conducted under paragraph (a) of this section to the EPA in accordance with paragraph (b)(1) of this section. If the super-emitter event (i.e., emission at 100 kg/hr of methane or more) is ongoing at the time of the initial report, submit the additional information in accordance with paragraph (b)(2) of this section. You must attest to the information included in the report as specified in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(1) Within 15 days of receiving a notification from the EPA under § 60.5371b(c), you must submit a report of the super-emitter event investigation conducted under paragraph (a) of this section through the Super-Emitter Program Portal, at www.epa.gov/super-emitter. You must include the applicable information in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section in the report. If you have identified a demonstrable error in the notification, the report may include a statement of the demonstrable error.
(i) Notification Report ID of the super-emitter event notification.
(ii) Identification of whether you are the owner or operator of an oil and natural gas facility that is located within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the EPA notification. If you do not own or operate an oil and natural gas facility within 50 meters from the latitude and longitude provided in the EPA notification, you are not required to report the information in paragraphs (b)(1)(iii) through (viii) of this section.
(iii) General identification information for the facility, including, facility name, the physical address, applicable ID Number (e.g., EPA ID Number, API Well ID Number), the owner or operator or responsible official (where applicable) and their email address.
(iv) Identification of whether there is a designated facility or associated equipment subject to regulation under this subpart at this oil and natural gas facility.
(v) Indication of whether you were able to identify the source of the super-emitter event. If you indicate you were unable to identify the source of the super-emitter event, you must certify that all applicable investigations specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (v) of this section have been conducted for all designated facilities and associated equipment subject to regulation under this subpart that are at this oil and natural gas facility, and you have determined that the designated facilities and associated equipment are not the source of the super-emitter event. If you indicate that you were not able to identify the source of the super-emitter event, you are not required to report the information in paragraphs (b)(1)(vi) through (viii) of this section.
(vi) The source(s) of the super-emitter event.
(vii) Identification of whether the source of the super-emitter event is a designated facility or associated equipment subject to regulation under of this subpart. If the source of the super-emitter event is a designated facility or associated equipment subject to regulation under this subpart, identify the applicable regulation(s) under this subpart.
(viii) Indication of whether the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal (i.e., emission at 100 kg/hr of methane or more).
(A) If the super-emitter event is not ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, provide the actual (or if not known, estimated) date and time the super-emitter event ended.
(B) If the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, provide a short narrative of your plan to end the super-emitter event, including the targeted end date for the efforts to be completed and the super-emitter event ended.
(2) If the super-emitter event is ongoing at the time of the initial report submittal, within 5 business days of the date the super-emitter event ends you must update your initial report through the Super-Emitter Program Portal to provide the end date and time of the super-emitter event.
(3) You must sign the following attestation when submitting data into the Super-Emitter Program Portal: “I certify that the information provided in this report regarding the specified super-emitter event was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the investigations were conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5371c (a) and (b). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete. I am aware that knowingly false statements may be punishable by fine or imprisonment.”
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62918, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5390c What GHG standards apply to gas well liquids unloading operations at well designated facilities?
(a) General requirements. You must comply with the requirements of this section for each gas well liquids unloading operation at your gas well designated facility as specified by paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. You have a general duty to safely maximize resource recovery and minimize releases to the atmosphere during gas well liquids unloading operations.
(1) If a gas well liquids unloading operation technology or technique employed does not result in venting of methane emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) and (d) and (e) of this section. If an unplanned venting event occurs, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section.
(i) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1)(i).
(ii) Submit the information specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (2)(i) in the annual report.
(2) If a gas well liquids unloading operation technology or technique vents methane emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements specified in paragraphs (b) and (c), or paragraph (g) of this section.
(b) Work Practice Standards. If a gas well liquids unloading operation employs a technology or technique that vents methane emissions to the atmosphere, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) and paragraphs (c) through (f) of this section.
(1) Employ best management practices to minimize venting of methane emissions as specified in paragraph (c) of this section for each gas well liquids unloading operation.
(2) Comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1)(ii).
(3) Submit the information specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (2)(ii) in the annual report.
(c) Best management practice requirements. For each gas well liquids unloading operation complying with paragraphs (a)(2) and (b) of this section, you must develop, maintain, and follow a best management practice plan to minimize venting of methane emissions to the maximum extent possible from each gas well liquids unloading operation. This best management practice plan must meet the minimum criteria specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Include steps that create a differential pressure to minimize the need to vent a well to unload liquids,
(2) Include steps to reduce wellbore pressure as much as possible prior to opening the well to the atmosphere,
(3) Unload liquids through the separator where feasible, and
(4) Close all wellhead vents to the atmosphere and return the well to production as soon as practicable.
(d) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to well liquids unloading operations at your well designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(a).
(e) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to well liquids unloading operations at your well designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(a).
(f) Recordkeeping and recording. You must perform the required notification, recordkeeping and reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(2) and (c)(1).
(g) Other compliance options. Reduce methane emissions from well designated facilities gas wells that unload liquids by 95.0 percent by complying with the requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(1) and (2) of this section and meeting the initial and continuous compliance and recordkeeping and reporting requirements specified in paragraphs (g)(3) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must route emissions through a closed vent system to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(2) You must route emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(3) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to well designated facility gas well liquids unloading as required by § 60.5410c(b).
(4) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to well designated facility gas well liquids unloading as required by § 60.5415c(b).
(5) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1), (2), and (10) through (12), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420c(c)(1), (7), and (9) through (12), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62919, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5391c What GHG standards apply to associated gas wells at well designated facilities?
(a) You must comply with either paragraph (a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) of this section for each associated gas well, except as provided in paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section. You must also comply with paragraphs (f), (g), and (h) of this section.
(1) Recover the associated gas from the separator and route the recovered gas into a gas gathering flow line or collection system to a sales line.
(2) Recover the associated gas from the separator and use the recovered gas as an onsite fuel source.
(3) Recover the associated gas from the separator and use the recovered gas for another useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve.
(4) Recover the associated gas from the separator and reinject the recovered gas into the well or inject the recovered gas into another well.
(b) If you meet one of the conditions in paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section, you may route the associated gas to a control device that reduces methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent instead of complying with paragraph (a) of this section. The associated gas must be routed through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and the control device must meet the conditions specified in § 60.5412c(a) through (c).
(1) If the annual methane contained in the associated gas from your oil well is 40 tons per year or less at the initial compliance date, determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section.
(2) If you demonstrate and certify that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section due to technical reasons by providing a detailed analysis documenting and certifying the technical reasons for this infeasibility in accordance with paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) In order to demonstrate that it is not feasible to comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section, you must provide a detailed analysis documenting and certifying the technical reasons for this infeasibility. The demonstration must address the technical infeasibility for all options identified in paragraphs (a)(1) through (4). Documentation of these demonstrations must be maintained in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(2)(iv).
(ii) This demonstration must be certified by a professional engineer or another qualified individual with expertise in the uses of associated gas. The following certification, signed and dated by the qualified professional engineer or other qualified individual shall state: “I certify that the assessment of technical and safety infeasibility was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the assessment was conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5391c(b)(2). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(iii) This demonstration and certification are valid for no more than 12 months. You must re-analyze the feasibility of complying with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section and finalize a new demonstration and certification each year.
(iv) Documentation of these demonstrations, along with the certifications, must be maintained in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(2)(iv) and submitted in annual reports in accordance with § 60.5420c(b)(3).
(c) If you are complying with paragraph (a) of this section, you may temporarily route the associated gas to a flare or control device in the situations and for the durations identified in paragraph (c)(1), (2), (3), or (4) of this section. The associated gas must be routed through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and the control device must meet the conditions specified in § 60.5412c. If you are routing to a flare, you must demonstrate that the § 60.18 flare requirements are met during the period when the associated gas is routed to the flare. Records must be kept of all temporary flaring instances in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(2) and reported in the annual report in accordance with § 60.5420c(b)(3).
(1) During a malfunction or incident that endangers the safety of operator personnel or the public you are allowed to route associated gas to a flare or control device until the malfunction or incident is resolved but not longer than 72 hours per incident. Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed only until the malfunction or incident is resolved. Notwithstanding the previous sentences, if there are exigent circumstances that reasonably require routing to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section apply.
(i) An “exigent circumstance” for purposes of this paragraph (c)(1) is a situation that results in the inability to reasonably access a site with the necessary equipment and personnel to address and resolve incidents that cause the need to temporarily flare associated gas for more than 72 hours. This includes circumstances where there is a need to flare beyond 72 hours due to an unexpected malfunction event and equipment needed to resolve an incident are not readily available due to an owner's or operator's inability to secure the required equipment for reasons beyond an owner's or operator's control (i.e., supply chain issues); or there is a temporary shortage of personnel needed to resolve an incident due to a circumstance such as a declared national pandemic that is beyond an owner's or operator's control.
(ii) Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed until the malfunction or incident is resolved, but shall not be longer than 72 hours after the site can be accessed following the passing of the exigent circumstance.
(iii) For instances where you route associated gas to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, you must meet the reporting requirements specified in § 60.5420c(b)(3)(i)(B)(4) and must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(2)(vi).
(2) During repair and maintenance, including blow downs, a production test, or commissioning, you are allowed to route associated gas to a flare or control device until the incident is resolved, but not longer than 72 hours per incident. Temporarily routing associated gas to a flare or control device is allowed only until the incident is resolved. Notwithstanding the previous sentences, if there are exigent circumstances that reasonably require routing to a flare or control device for more than 72 hours, paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) apply.
(3) For wells complying with paragraph (a)(1) of this section, for the duration of a temporary interruption in service from the gathering or pipeline system, or 30 days, whichever is less.
(4) For 72 hours from the time that the associated gas does not meet pipeline specifications, or until the associated gas meets pipeline specifications, whichever is less.
(d) If you are complying with paragraph (a), (b), or (c) of this section, you may vent the associated gas in the situations and for the durations identified in paragraph (d)(1), (2), or (3) of this section. Records must be kept of all venting instances in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(2) and reported in the annual report in accordance with § 60.5420c(b)(3).
(1) For up to 12 hours to protect the safety of personnel.
(2) For up to 30 minutes during bradenhead monitoring.
(3) For up to 30 minutes during a packer leakage test.
(e) Calculate the methane content in associated gas as specified in paragraph (e)(1) of this section and comply with paragraphs (e)(2) and (3) of this section.
(1) Calculate the methane content in associated gas from your oil well using the following equation:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (e)(1)
Where:
AGmethane = Amount of methane in associated gas from the oil well, tons methane per year.
GOR = Gas to oil ratio for the well in standard cubic feet of gas per barrel of oil; oil here refers to hydrocarbon liquids produced of all API gravities. GOR is to be determined for the well using available data, an appropriate standard method published by a consensus-based standards organization which include, but are not limited to, the following: ASTM International, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI), the American Gas Association (AGA), the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), the American Petroleum Institute (API), and the North American Energy Standards Board (NAESB), or in industry standard practice.
V = Volume of oil produced in the calendar year preceding the initial compliance date, in barrels per year.
Mmethane = mole fraction of methane in the associated gas.0.0192 = density of methane gas at 60 °F and 14.7 psia in kilograms per cubic foot.
907.2 = conversion of kilograms to tons, kilograms per ton.
(2) You must maintain records of the calculation of the methane in associated gas from your oil well results in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(2), and submit the information, as well as the background information, in the next annual report in accordance with § 60.5420c(b)(3).
(3) If a process change occurs that could increase the methane content in the associated gas, you must recalculate the methane content in accordance with paragraph (e)(1) of this section.
(f) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to associated gas wells at well designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(b).
(g) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to associated gas wells at well designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(b).
(h) You must perform the recordkeeping and reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1), (3), and (10) through (12), as applicable, and § 60.5420c(c)(2) and (7) and (9) through (12), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62919, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18112, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5392c What GHG standards apply to centrifugal compressor designated facilities?
Each centrifugal compressor designated facility must comply with the GHG standards in paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section.
(a) Each centrifugal compressor designated facility that is a wet or dry seal centrifugal compressor must comply with the GHG standards, using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate, as specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. Alternatively, you have the option of complying with the GHG standards for your wet seal and dry seal centrifugal compressor by meeting the requirements specified in paragraph (a)(3), and either paragraph (a)(4) or (5) of this section.
(1) If you utilize a centrifugal compressor, you must comply with the GHG standards in paragraph (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, and the seal repair requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
(i) You must conduct volumetric flow rate measurements from each wet seal centrifugal compressor (including each self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor) vent using the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and in accordance with the schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. The volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, must not exceed 3 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-vented line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 3 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 3 scfm multiplied by the number of seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
(A) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurement from your wet seal centrifugal compressor (including self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressors) vents on or before 8,760 hours of operation 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(B) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your wet seal centrifugal compressor (including self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor) vents on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement.
(ii) You must conduct volumetric flow rate measurements from each Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system using the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and in accordance with the schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section. The volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, must not exceed 9 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-vented line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 9 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 9 scfm multiplied by the number of seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
(A) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurement from your centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system utilized in Alaska wet seal vent on or before 8,760 hours of operation 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(B) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your centrifugal compressor wet seal vents on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement.
(iii) You must conduct volumetric flow rate vent measurements from each centrifugal compressor equipped with dry seals using the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and in accordance with the schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section. The volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, must not exceed 10 standard cubic feet per minute (scfm) per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-vented line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual seals multiplied by 10 scfm. If the volumetric flow rate exceeds 10 scfm multiplied by the number of seals connected to the vent, the seals connected to the measured vent must be repaired as provided in paragraph (a)(1)(iv) of this section.
(A) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate vent measurement from your centrifugal compressor equipped with a dry seal on or before 8,760 hours of operation 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(B) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate vent measurements from your centrifugal compressor equipped with a dry seal on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement.
(iv) The seal must be repaired within 90 calendar days after the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per seal. You must conduct follow-up volumetric flow rate measurements from seal vents using the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2) of this section within 15 days after the repair to document that the rate has been reduced to less than the applicable required flow rate per seal. If the individual seals are manifolded to a single open-ended line or vent, the volumetric flow rate must be reduced to less than the sum of the individual seals multiplied by the applicable required flow rate per seal specified in paragraph (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable. Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (a)(1)(iv)(A) or (B) of this section are met.
(A) If the repair of the wet or dry seal is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per seal, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(B) If the repair requires replacement of the compressor seal or a part thereof, but the replacement seal or part cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified under this section due to the condition specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv)(B)(1) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (a)(1)(iv)(B)(2) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(3)(iii)(F) through (H).
(1) Seal or part thereof supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(2) The required replacement seal or part must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the centrifugal compressor is added to the delay of repair list due to parts unavailability. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement seal or part, unless the repair requires a compressor station shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (a)(1)(iv)(A) of this section.
(2) You must determine the volumetric flow rates from your centrifugal compressor dry or wet seal vents as specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) For each dry or wet seal centrifugal compressor in operating-mode or in standby-pressurized-mode, determine volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from each dry or wet seal vent using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (a)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) You may choose to use any of the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a) to screen for leaks/emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, when using any of the methods in § 60.5405c(a), emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to the method. If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(B) or (C) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5405c(a), then you may assume that the volumetric flow rate is zero.
(B) Use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to methods set forth in § 60.5405c(b).
(C) Use a high-volume sampler according to the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(c).
(ii) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of dry or wet seal centrifugal compressors, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from the compressor dry or wet seal as specified in paragraph (a)(2)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all dry or wet seal compressor inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(B) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (a)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
(3) As an alternative to meeting the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section for compressors with wet seals and dry seals, you have the option of reducing methane emissions from each centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system by 95.0 percent by meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(4) of this section, or the option of routing the emissions from each centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system or dry seal system to a process by meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(5) of this section.
(4) If you use a control device to reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent, you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and the closed vent system must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(5) If you route the emissions to a process, you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system or dry seal system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(b) You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to centrifugal compressor designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(c).
(c) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to centrifugal compressor designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(c).
(d) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (4) and (b)(10) through (12), as applicable; and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420c(c)(3) and (c)(7) through (12), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5393c What GHG standards apply to reciprocating compressor designated facilities?
Each reciprocating compressor designated facility must comply with the GHG standards, using volumetric flow rate as a surrogate, in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, or the GHG standards in paragraph (d) of this section. You must also comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e) through (g) of this section.
(a) The volumetric flow rate of each cylinder, measured in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, must not exceed 2 scfm per individual cylinder. If the individual cylinders are manifolded to a single open-ended vent line, the volumetric flow rate must not exceed the sum of the individual cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm. You must conduct measurements of the volumetric flow rate in accordance with the schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section and determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section. If the volumetric flow rate, measured in accordance with paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, for a cylinder exceeds 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined volumetric flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm), the rod packing or packings must be repaired or replaced as provided in paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(1) You must conduct your first volumetric flow rate measurements from your reciprocating compressor rod packing vent on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the effective date of an approved state or Tribal plan, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last rod packing replacement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after startup, whichever date is later.
(2) You must conduct subsequent volumetric flow rate measurements from your reciprocating compressor rod packing vent on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous measurement which demonstrates compliance with the applicable volumetric flow rate of 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined cylinder volumetric flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm), or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after last rod packing replacement, whichever date is later.
(3) The rod packing must be repaired or replaced within 90 calendar days after the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeded 2 scfm per cylinder. You must conduct follow-up volumetric flow rate measurements from compressor vents using the methods specified in paragraph (b) of this section within 15 days after the repair (or rod packing replacement) to document that the rate has been reduced to less than 2 scfm per cylinder. Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) If the repair (or rod packing replacement) is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair (or rod packing replacement) must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of the date of the volumetric emissions measurement that exceeds the applicable required flow rate per cylinder, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(ii) If the repair requires replacement of the rod packing or a part, but the replacement cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified under this section due to the condition specified in paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(A) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (a)(3)(ii)(B) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(4)(viii) through (x).
(A) Rod packing or part supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(B) The required rod packing or part replacement must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the reciprocating compressor is added to the delay of repair list due to parts unavailability. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement rod packing or part, unless the repair requires a compressor station shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (a)(3)(i) of this section.
(b) You must determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder from your reciprocating compressor as specified in paragraph (b)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) For reciprocating compressor rod packing equipped with an open-ended vent line on compressors in operating or standby pressurized mode, determine the volumetric flow rate of the rod packing using one of the methods specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the open-ended vent line using a high-volume sampler according to methods set forth in § 60.5405c(c).
(ii) Determine the volumetric flow rate at standard conditions from the open-ended vent line using a temporary or permanent meter, according to methods set forth in § 60.5405c(b).
(iii) Any of the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a) to screen for leaks and emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected according to any of the methods in § 60.5405c(a). If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (b)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5405c(a), then you may assume that the volumetric flow rate is zero.
(2) For reciprocating compressor rod packing not equipped with an open-ended vent line on compressors in operating or standby pressurized mode, you must determine the volumetric flow rate of the rod packing using the methods specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must use the methods described in § 60.5405c(a) to conduct leak detection of emissions from the rod packing case into an open distance piece, or, for compressors with a closed distance piece, you must conduct annual leak detection of emissions from the rod packing vent, distance piece vent, compressor crank case breather cap, or other vent emitting gas from the rod packing.
(ii) You must measure emissions found in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section using a meter or high-volume sampler according to methods set forth in § 60.5405c(b) or (c).
(c) For conducting measurements on manifolded groups of reciprocating compressor designated facilities, you must determine the volumetric flow rate from reciprocating compressor rod packing vent as specified in paragraph (c)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Measure at a single point in the manifold downstream of all compressor vent inputs and, if practical, prior to comingling with other non-compressor emission sources.
(2) Determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder at standard conditions from the common stack using one of the methods specified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A temporary or permanent flow meter according to the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(b).
(ii) A high-volume sampler according to methods set forth § 60.5405c(c).
(iii) An alternative method, as set forth in § 60.5405c(d).
(iv) Any of the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a) to screen for emissions. For the purposes of this paragraph, emissions are detected whenever a leak is detected when using any of the methods in § 60.5405c(a). If emissions are detected using the methods set forth in § 60.5405c(a), then you must use one of the methods specified in paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section to determine the volumetric flow rate per cylinder. If emissions are not detected using the methods in § 60.5405c(a), then you may assume that the volumetric flow rate is zero.
(d) As an alternative to complying with the GHG standards in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, owners or operators can meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.
(1) Collect the methane emissions from your reciprocating compressor rod packing using a rod packing emissions collection system that is operated to route the rod packing emissions to a process. In order to comply with this option, you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(2) Reduce methane emissions from each rod packing emissions collection system by using a control device that reduces methane emissions by 95.0 percent. In order to comply with this option, you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b). The cover must be connected through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and the closed vent system must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(3) As an alternative to conducting the required volumetric flow rate measurements under paragraph (a) of this section, an owner or operator can choose to comply by replacing the rod packing on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the effective date of the final rule, on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the previous flow rate measurement, or on or before 8,760 hours of operation after the date of the most recent compressor rod packing replacement, whichever date is later.
(e) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to reciprocating compressor designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(d).
(f) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to reciprocating compressor designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(f).
(g) You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (5) and (10) through (12), as applicable; and the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(4) and (7) through (12), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5394c What GHG standards apply to process controller designated facilities?
Each process controller designated facility must comply with the GHG standards in this section.
(a) You must design and operate each process controller designated facility with zero methane emissions to the atmosphere, except as provided in paragraph (b) of this section.
(1) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, emissions must be routed to a process through a closed vent system.
(2) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must design and operate each self-contained natural gas-driven process controller with no identifiable emissions, as demonstrated by § 60.5416c(b).
(b) For each process controller designated facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power, you may comply with either paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section or with paragraph (b)(3) of this section, instead of complying with paragraph (a) of this section.
(1) With the exception of natural gas-driven continuous bleed controllers that meet the condition in paragraph (b)(1)(i) of this section and that comply with paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section, each natural gas-driven continuous bleed process controller in the process controller designated facility must have a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 standard cubic feet per hour (scfh).
(i) A natural gas-driven continuous bleed process controller with a bleed rate higher than 6 scfh may be used if the requirements of paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section are met.
(ii) You demonstrate that a natural gas-driven continuous bleed controller with a bleed rate higher than 6 scfh is required. The demonstration must be based on the specific functional need, including but not limited to response time, safety, or positive actuation.
(2) Each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller in the process controller designated facility must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller must not emit to the atmosphere during idle periods.
(ii) You must monitor each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller to ensure that it is not emitting to the atmosphere during idle periods, as specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Monitoring must be conducted at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397c(g).
(B) You must include the monitoring of each natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller in the monitoring plan required in § 60.5397c(b).
(C) When monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from a natural gas-driven intermittent vent controller during idle periods, you must take corrective action by repairing or replacing the natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller within 5 calendar days of the date the emissions to the atmosphere were detected. After the repair or replacement of a natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller, you must re-survey the natural gas-driven intermittent vent process controller within five days to verify that it is not venting emissions during idle periods.
(3) You must reduce methane emissions from all controllers in the process controller designated facility by 95.0 percent. You must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(c) If you route process controller emissions to a process or a control device, you must route the process controller designated facility emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(d) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to process controller designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(e).
(e) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards that apply to process controller designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(g).
(f) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1), (6) and (10) through (12), as applicable, and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420c(c)(5), (7), and (9) through (12), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5395c What GHG standards apply to pump designated facilities?
Each pump designated facility, you must comply with the GHG standards in this section.
(a) For each pump designated facility meeting the criteria specified in paragraphs (a)(1) or (2) of this section, you must design and operate the pump designated facility with zero methane emissions to the atmosphere. If you comply by routing the pump designated facility emissions to a process, the emissions must be routed to the process through a closed vent system.
(1) The pump designated facility is located at a site that has access to electrical power.
(2) The pump designated facility is located at a site that does not have access to electrical power and also has three or more natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps.
(b)(1) For each pump designated facility located at a site that does not have access to electrical power and that also has fewer than three natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps, you must comply with paragraph (b)(2) or (3) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(4) through (8) of this section.
(2) Emissions from the pump designated facility must be routed through a closed vent system to a process if a vapor recovery unit is onsite.
(3) If a vapor recovery unit is not onsite, you must reduce methane emissions from the pump designated facility by 95.0 percent. You must route designated pump facility emissions through a closed vent system to a control device meeting the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(4) You are not required to install an emissions control device or a vapor recovery unit, if such a unit is necessary to enable emissions to be routed to a process, solely for the purpose of complying with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2) or (3) of this section. If no control device capable of achieving a 95.0 percent emissions reduction and no vapor recovery unit is present on site, you must comply with paragraph (b)(5) or (6) of this section, as applicable. For the purposes of this section, boilers and process heaters are not considered to be control devices.
(5) If an emissions control device is on site but is unable to achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction, you must route the pump designated facility emissions through a closed vent system to that control device. You must certify that there is no vapor recovery unit on site and that there is no control device capable of achieving a 95.0 percent emissions reduction on site.
(6) If there is no vapor recovery unit on site and no emission control device is on site, you must certify that there is no vapor recovery unit or emissions control device on site. If you subsequently install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(6)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must be in compliance with the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) of this section, as applicable, within 30 days of startup of the control device or vapor recovery unit.
(ii) You must maintain the records in § 60.5420c(c)(14)(ii) and (v), as applicable. You are no longer required to maintain the records in § 60.5420c(c)(14)(v) certifying that there is no vapor recovery unit or control device on site.
(7) If an owner or operator complying with paragraph (b)(1) of this section determines, through an engineering assessment, that routing the pump designated facility emissions to a control device or to a process is technically infeasible, the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section must be met.
(i) The owner or operator must conduct the assessment of technical infeasibility in accordance with the criteria in paragraph (b)(7)(ii) of this section and have it certified by either a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer with expertise on the design and operation of the pump designated facility and the control device or processes at the site in accordance with paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section.
(ii) The assessment of technical infeasibility to route emissions from the pump designated facility to an existing control device or process must include, but is not limited to, safety considerations, distance from the control device or process, pressure losses and differentials in the closed vent system, and the ability of the control device or process to handle the pump designated facility emissions which are routed to them. The assessment of technical infeasibility must be prepared under the direction or supervision of the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer who signs the certification in accordance with paragraph (b)(7)(iii) of this section.
(iii) The following certification, signed and dated by the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer, must state: “I certify that the assessment of technical infeasibility was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the assessment was conducted and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of § 60.5395c(b)(7)(ii). Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(8) If the pump designated facility emissions are routed to a control device or process and the control device or process is subsequently removed from the location or is no longer available such that there is no option to route to a control device or process, you are no longer required to be in compliance with the requirements of paragraph (b)(2) or (3) of this section, and instead must comply with paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(c) If you use a control device or route to a process to reduce emissions, you must route the pump designated facility emissions through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(d) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards that apply to pump designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(f).
(e) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to pump designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(d).
(f) You must perform the reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1), (9), and (b)(10) through (12), as applicable, and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420c(c)(7), (c)(9) through (12), and (14), as applicable.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5396c What GHG standards apply to storage vessel designated facilities?
Each storage vessel designated facility must comply with the GHG standards in this section, except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section.
(a) General requirements. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. After 12 consecutive months of compliance with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you may continue to comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section, or you may comply with paragraph (a)(3) of this section, if applicable. If you choose to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(3) of this section, you are not required to comply with the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section except as provided in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(1) Determine the potential for methane emissions in accordance with § 60.5386c(e)(2).
(2) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent.
(3) Maintain the uncontrolled actual methane emissions from the storage vessel designated facility at less than 14 tpy without considering control in accordance with paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section. Prior to using the uncontrolled actual methane emission rates for compliance purposes, you must demonstrate that the uncontrolled actual methane emissions have remained less than 14 tpy as determined monthly for 12 consecutive months. After such demonstration, you must determine the uncontrolled actual rolling 12-month determination methane emissions rates each month. The uncontrolled actual methane emissions must be calculated using a generally accepted model or calculation methodology which account for flashing, working, and breathing losses, and the calculations must be based on the actual average throughput, temperature, and separator pressure for the month. You may no longer comply with this paragraph and must instead comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section if your storage vessel designated facility meets the conditions specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) If a well feeding the storage vessel designated facility undergoes fracturing or refracturing, you must comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section as soon as liquids from the well following fracturing or refracturing are routed to the storage vessel designated facility.
(ii) If the rolling 12-month emissions determination required in this section indicates that methane emissions increase to 14 tpy or greater from your storage vessel designated facility and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel designated facility, you must comply with paragraph (a)(2) of this section within 30 days of the monthly determination.
(b) Control requirements. (1) Except as required in paragraph (b)(2) of this section, if you use a control device to reduce methane emissions from your storage vessel designated facility, you must meet all of the design and operational criteria specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Each storage vessel in the tank battery must be equipped with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b);
(ii) The storage vessels must be manifolded together with piping such that all vapors are shared among the headspaces of the storage vessels in the tank battery;
(iii) The tank battery must be equipped with one or more closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c); and
(iv) The vapors collected in paragraphs (b)(1)(ii) and (iii) of this section must be routed to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c. As an alternative to routing the closed vent system to a control device, you may route the closed vent system to a process.
(2) For storage vessel designated facilities that do not have flashing emissions and that are not located at well sites or centralized production facilities, you may use a floating roof to reduce emissions. If you use a floating roof to reduce emissions, you must meet the requirements of § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) and the relevant monitoring, inspection, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in subpart Kb of this part. You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) with the initial annual report specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (7).
(c) Requirements for storage vessel designated facilities that are removed from service or returned to service. If you remove a storage vessel designated facility from service or remove a portion of a storage vessel designated facility from service, you must comply with the applicable paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section. A storage vessel is not a designated facility under this subpart for the period that it is removed from service.
(1) For a storage vessel designated facility to be removed from service, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must completely empty and degas each storage vessel, such that each storage vessel no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(ii) You must submit a notification as required in § 60.5420c(b)(7)(vii) in your next annual report, identifying each storage vessel designated facility removed from service during the reporting period and the date of its removal from service.
(2) For a portion of a storage vessel designated facility to be removed from service, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You must completely empty and degas the storage vessel(s), such that the storage vessel(s) no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(ii) You must disconnect the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery by isolating the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery such that the storage vessel(s) is no longer manifolded to the tank battery by liquid or vapor transfer.
(iii) You must submit a notification as required in § 60.5420c(b)(7)(viii) in your next annual report, identifying each storage vessel removed from service during the reporting period, the impacted storage vessel designated facility, and the date of its removal from service.
(iv) The remaining storage vessel(s) in the tank battery remain a storage vessel designated facility and must continue to comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section.
(3) If a storage vessel identified in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) or (c)(2)(iii) of this section is returned to service, you must determine its designated facility status as provided in § 60.5386c(e)(5).
(4) For each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility returned to service during the reporting period, you must submit a notification in your next annual report as required in § 60.5420c(b)(7)(viii), identifying each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility and the date of its return to service.
(d) Compliance, notification, recordkeeping, and reporting. You must comply with paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate initial compliance with standards as required by § 60.5410c(h).
(2) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with standards as required by § 60.5415c(h).
(3) You must perform the required reporting as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (7) and (b)(10) through (12), as applicable and the recordkeeping as required by § 60.5420c(c)(6) and (c)(7) through (12), as applicable.
(e) Exemptions. This subpart does not apply to storage vessels subject to and controlled in accordance with the requirements for storage vessels in subpart Kb of this part, and 40 CFR part 63, subparts G, CC, HH, or WW.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5397c What GHG standards apply to fugitive emissions components designated facilities?
This section applies to fugitive emissions components designated facilities. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (l) of this section to reduce fugitive emissions of methane. The requirements of this section are independent of the cover and closed vent system requirements of § 60.5411c.
(a) General requirements. You must monitor all fugitive emissions components in accordance with paragraphs (b) through (g) of this section. You must repair all sources of fugitive emissions in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance in accordance with paragraph (i) of this section. You must keep records in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section and report in accordance with paragraph (k) of this section. You must meet the requirements for well closures in accordance with paragraph (l) of this section.
(b) Develop fugitive emissions monitoring plan. You must develop a fugitive emissions monitoring plan that covers all fugitive emissions components designated facilities within each company-defined area in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(c) Fugitive emissions monitoring plan. Your fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(1) through (8) of this section, at a minimum.
(1) Frequency for conducting surveys. Surveys must be conducted at least as frequently as required by paragraphs (f) and (g) of this section.
(2) Technique for determining fugitive emissions (i.e., AVO or other detection methods, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part; and/or OGI and meeting the requirements of paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (vii) of this section).
(3) Manufacturer and model number of fugitive emissions detection equipment to be used, if applicable.
(4) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components from which fugitive emissions are detected, including timeframes for fugitive emission components that are unsafe to repair. Your repair schedule must meet the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section at a minimum.
(5) Procedures and timeframes for verifying fugitive emission component repairs.
(6) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(7) If you are using OGI, your plan must also include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Verification that your OGI equipment meets the specifications of paragraphs (c)(7)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. This verification is an initial verification, and may either be performed by the facility, by the manufacturer, or by a third party. For the purposes of complying with the fugitive emissions monitoring program with OGI, fugitive emissions are defined as any visible emissions observed using OGI.
(A) Your OGI equipment must be capable of imaging gases in the spectral range for the compound of highest concentration in the potential fugitive emissions.
(B) Your OGI equipment must be capable of imaging a gas that is half methane, half propane at a concentration of 10,000 ppm at a flow rate of ≤60 g/hr from a quarter inch diameter orifice.
(ii) Procedure for a daily verification check.
(iii) Procedure for determining the operator's maximum viewing distance from the equipment and how the operator will ensure that this distance is maintained.
(iv) Procedure for determining maximum wind speed during which monitoring can be performed and how the operator will ensure monitoring occurs only at wind speeds below this threshold.
(v) Procedures for conducting surveys, including the items specified in paragraphs (c)(7)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) How the operator will ensure an adequate thermal background is present in order to view potential fugitive emissions.
(B) How the operator will deal with adverse monitoring conditions, such as wind.
(C) How the operator will deal with interferences (e.g., steam).
(vi) Training and experience needed prior to performing surveys.
(vii) Procedures for calibration and maintenance. At a minimum, procedures must comply with those recommended by the manufacturer.
(8) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, your plan must also include the elements specified in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section. For the purposes of complying with the fugitive emissions monitoring program using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, a fugitive emission is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater.
(i) Verification that your monitoring equipment meets the requirements specified in Section 6.0 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. For purposes of instrument capability, the fugitive emissions definition shall be 500 ppmv or greater methane using a FID-based instrument. If you wish to use an analyzer other than a FID-based instrument, you must develop a site-specific fugitive emission definition that would be equivalent to 500 ppmv methane using a FID-based instrument (e.g., 10.6 eV PID with a specified isobutylene concentration as the fugitive emission definition would provide equivalent response to your compound of interest).
(ii) Procedures for conducting surveys. At a minimum, the procedures shall ensure that the surveys comply with the relevant sections of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, including Section 8.3.1.
(iii) Procedures for calibration. The instrument must be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. At a minimum, you must also conduct precision tests at the interval specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 8.1.2, and a calibration drift assessment at the end of each monitoring day. The calibration drift assessment must be conducted as specified in paragraph (c)(8)(iii)(A) of this section. Corrective action for drift assessments is specified in paragraphs (c)(8)(iii)(B) and (C) of this section.
(A) Check the instrument using the same calibration gas that was used to calibrate the instrument before use. Follow the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 10.1, except do not adjust the meter readout to correspond to the calibration gas value. If multiple scales are used, record the instrument reading for each scale used. Divide the arithmetic difference of the initial and post-test calibration response by the corresponding calibration gas value for each scale and multiply by 100 to express the calibration drift as a percentage.
(B) If a calibration drift assessment shows a negative drift of more than 10 percent, then all equipment with instrument readings between the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 minus the percent of negative drift) divided by 100 and the fugitive emission definition that was monitored since the last calibration must be re-monitored.
(C) If any calibration drift assessment shows a positive drift of more than 10 percent from the initial calibration value, then, at the owner/operator's discretion, all equipment with instrument readings above the fugitive emission definition and below the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 plus the percent of positive drift) divided by 100 monitored since the last calibration may be re-monitored.
(iv) Procedures for monitoring yard piping (other than buried yard piping). At a minimum, place the probe inlet at the surface of the yard piping and run the probe down the length of the piping. Connection points on the piping must be monitored following the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(d) Additional elements of fugitive emissions monitoring plan. Each fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the elements specified in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section, at a minimum, as applicable.
(1) If you are using OGI, your plan must include procedures to ensure that all fugitive emissions components, except buried yard piping and associated components (e.g., connectors), are monitored during each survey. Example procedures include, but are not limited to, a sitemap with an observation path, a written narrative of where the fugitive emissions components are located and how they will be monitored, or an inventory of fugitive emissions components.
(2) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, your plan must include a list of fugitive emissions components to be monitored and method for determining the location of fugitive emissions components to be monitored in the field (e.g., tagging, identification on a process and instrumentation diagram, etc.). Your fugitive emissions monitoring plan must include the written plan developed for all of the fugitive emissions components designated as difficult-to-monitor in accordance with paragraph (g)(2) of this section, and the written plan for fugitive emissions components designated as unsafe-to-monitor in accordance with paragraph (g)(3) of this section.
(e) Monitoring of fugitive emissions components. Each fugitive emissions component, except buried yard piping and associated components (e.g., connectors), shall be observed or monitored for fugitive emissions during each monitoring survey.
(f) Initial monitoring survey. You must conduct initial monitoring surveys according to the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) At single wellhead only sites and small sites, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey using audible, visual, and olfactory (AVO), or any other detection methods (e.g., OGI), within 90 days of the startup of production, for each fugitive emissions components designated facility or by 90 days after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later.
(2) For multi-wellhead only well sites, well sites or centralized production facilities that contain the major production and processing equipment specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A), (B), (C), or (D) of this section, and compressor station sites, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey using OGI or Method 21 to appendix A-7 to this part within 90 days of the effective date of your state or Tribal plan, for each fugitive emissions components designated facility, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later.
(3) Notwithstanding the deadlines, specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section for each fugitive emissions components designated facility located on the Alaskan North Slope, that would be subject to monitoring between September and March, you must conduct an initial monitoring survey within 6 months, or by the following June 30, whichever date is latest.
(g) Monitoring frequency. A monitoring survey of each fugitive emissions components designated facility must be performed as specified in paragraph (g)(1) of this section, with the exceptions noted in paragraphs (g)(2) through (4) of this section. Monitoring for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at well sites and centralized production facilities that have wells located onsite must continue at the specified frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(i), (ii), (iii), (iv) and (vi) of this section until the well closure requirements of paragraph (l) of this section are completed.
(1) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components designated facilities must be conducted using the methods and at the frequencies specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions component designated facilities located at single wellhead only well sites must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method after the initial survey, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(ii) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions component designated facilities located at small well sites must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method, after the initial survey except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. At small well sites with an uncontrolled storage vessel, a visual inspection of all thief hatches and other openings on the storage vessel that are fugitive emissions components must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey to ensure that they are kept closed and sealed at all times except during times of adding or removing material, inspecting or sampling material, or during required maintenance operations. If evidence of a deviation from this requirement is found, you must take corrective action. At small well sites with a separator, a visual inspection of all separator dump valves to ensure the dump valve is free of debris and not stuck in an open position must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey. Any dump valve not operating as designed must be repaired.
(iii) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at multi-wellhead only well sites must be conducted in accordance with paragraphs (g)(1)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section.
(A) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using AVO, or any other detection method after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(B) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least semiannually using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive semiannual surveys must be conducted at least 4 months apart and no more than 7 months apart.
(iv) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at well sites or centralized production facilities that contain the major production and processing equipment specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A), (B), (C), or (D) of this section must be conducted at the frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(E) and (F) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section.
(A) One or more controlled storage vessels or tank batteries.
(B) One or more control devices.
(C) One or more natural gas-driven process controllers or pumps.
(D) Two or more pieces of major production and processing equipment not specified in paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(E) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least bimonthly using AVO, or any other detection method after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section. A visual inspection of all thief hatches and other openings on storage vessels (or tank batteries) that are fugitive emissions components must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey to ensure that they are kept closed and sealed at all times except during times of adding or removing material, inspecting or sampling material, or during required maintenance operations. If evidence of a deviation from this requirement is found, you must take corrective action. A visual inspection must be conducted of all separator dump valves to ensure the dump valve is free of debris and not stuck in an open position must be conducted in conjunction with the monitoring survey. Any dump valve not operating as designed must be repaired.
(F) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive quarterly monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 60 calendar days apart.
(v) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components designated facility located at a compressor station must be conducted at the frequencies in paragraphs (g)(1)(v)(A) and (B) of this section, except as specified in paragraph (g)(1)(vi) of this section.
(A) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least monthly using AVO, or any other detection method after the initial survey. Any indications of fugitive emissions using these methods are considered fugitive emissions that must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(B) A monitoring survey must be conducted at least quarterly using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part after the initial survey. Consecutive quarterly monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 60 calendar days apart.
(vi) A monitoring survey of the fugitive emissions components designated facility located on the Alaska North Slope must be conducted using OGI of this part or Method 21 to appendix A-7 to this part at least annually. Consecutive annual monitoring surveys must be conducted at least 9 months apart and no more than 13 months apart.
(2) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, fugitive emissions components that cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 2 meters above the surface may be designated as difficult-to-monitor. Fugitive emissions components that are designated difficult-to-monitor must meet the specifications of paragraphs (g)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A written plan must be developed for all the fugitive emissions components designated difficult-to-monitor. This written plan must be incorporated into the fugitive emissions monitoring plan required by paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(ii) The plan must include the identification and location of each fugitive emissions component designated as difficult-to-monitor.
(iii) The plan must include an explanation of why each fugitive emissions component designated as difficult-to-monitor is difficult-to-monitor.
(iv) The plan must include a schedule for monitoring the difficult-to-monitor fugitive emissions components at least once per calendar year.
(3) If you are using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, fugitive emissions components that cannot be monitored because monitoring personnel would be exposed to immediate danger while conducting a monitoring survey may be designated as unsafe-to-monitor. Fugitive emissions components that are designated unsafe-to-monitor must meet the specifications of paragraphs (g)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A written plan must be developed for all the fugitive emissions components designated unsafe-to-monitor. This written plan must be incorporated into the fugitive emissions monitoring plan required by paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section.
(ii) The plan must include the identification and location of each fugitive emissions component designated as unsafe-to-monitor.
(iii) The plan must include an explanation of why each fugitive emissions component designated as unsafe-to-monitor is unsafe-to-monitor.
(iv) The plan must include a schedule for monitoring the fugitive emissions components designated as unsafe-to-monitor.
(4) The requirements of paragraphs (g)(1)(iv)(F) and (g)(1)(v)(B) of this section are waived during a quarterly monitoring period for any fugitive emissions components designated facility located within an area that has an average calendar month temperature below 0 degrees Fahrenheit for two of three consecutive calendar months of a quarterly monitoring period. The calendar month temperature average for each month within the quarterly monitoring period must be determined using historical monthly average temperatures over the previous three years as reported by a National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration source or other source approved by the Administrator. The requirements of paragraph (g)(1)(iv) and (v) of this section shall not be waived for two consecutive quarterly monitoring periods.
(h) Repairs. Each identified source of fugitive emissions shall be repaired in accordance with paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) A first attempt at repair shall be made in accordance with paragraphs (h)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 15 calendar days after detection of fugitive emissions that were identified using AVO.
(ii) If you are complying with paragraph (g)(1)(i) through (vi) of this section using OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, a first attempt at repair shall be made no later than 30 calendar days after detection of the fugitive emissions.
(2) Repair shall be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 15 calendar days after the first attempt at repair as required in paragraph (h)(1)(i) of this section, and 30 calendar days after the first attempt at repair as required in paragraph (h)(1)(ii) of this section.
(3) Delay of repair will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) If the repair is technically infeasible, would require a vent blowdown, a compressor station shutdown, a well shutdown or well shut-in, or would be unsafe to repair during operation of the unit, the repair must be completed during the next scheduled compressor station shutdown for maintenance, scheduled well shutdown, scheduled well shut-in, after a scheduled vent blowdown, or within 2 years of detecting the fugitive emissions, whichever is earliest. A vent blowdown is the opening of one or more blowdown valves to depressurize major production and processing equipment, other than a storage vessel.
(ii) If the repair requires replacement of a fugitive emissions component or a part thereof, but the replacement cannot be acquired and installed within the repair timelines specified in paragraphs (h)(1) and (2) of this section due to either of the conditions specified in paragraphs (h)(3)(ii)(A) or (B) of this section, the repair must be completed in accordance with paragraph (h)(3)(ii)(C) of this section and documented in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(13)(v)(I).
(A) Valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked but are depleted at the time of the required repair.
(B) A replacement fugitive emissions component or a part thereof requires custom fabrication.
(C) The required replacement must be ordered no later than 10 calendar days after the first attempt at repair. The repair must be completed as soon as practicable, but no later than 30 calendar days after receipt of the replacement component, unless the repair requires a compressor station or well shutdown. If the repair requires a compressor station or well shutdown, the repair must be completed in accordance with the timeframe specified in paragraph (h)(3)(i) of this section.
(4) Each identified source of fugitive emissions must be resurveyed to complete repair according to the requirements of paragraphs (h)(4)(i) through (v) of this section, to ensure that there are no fugitive emissions.
(i) The operator may resurvey the fugitive emissions components to verify repair using either Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part or OGI, except as specified in paragraph (h)(4)(v) of this section.
(ii) For each repair that cannot be made during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions are initially found, a digital photograph must be taken of that component, or the component must be tagged during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions were initially found for identification purposes and subsequent repair. The digital photograph must include the date that the photograph was taken and must clearly identify the component by location within the site (e.g., the latitude and longitude of the component or by other descriptive landmarks visible in the picture).
(iii) Operators that use Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part to resurvey the repaired fugitive emissions components are subject to the resurvey provisions specified in paragraphs (h)(4)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A fugitive emissions component is repaired when the Method 21 instrument indicates a concentration of less than 500 ppmv above background or when no soap bubbles are observed when the alternative screening procedures specified in section 8.3.3 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part are used.
(B) Operators must use the Method 21 monitoring requirements specified in paragraph (c)(8)(ii) of this section or the alternative screening procedures specified in section 8.3.3 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iv) Operators that use OGI to resurvey the repaired fugitive emissions components are subject to the resurvey provisions specified in paragraphs (h)(4)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A fugitive emissions component is repaired when the OGI instrument shows no indication of visible emissions.
(B) Operators must use the OGI monitoring requirements specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(v) For fugitive emissions identified using AVO detection methods, the operator may resurvey using those same methods, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, or OGI. For operators that use AVO detection methods, a fugitive emissions component is repaired when there are no indications of fugitive emissions using these methods.
(i) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to fugitive emissions components designated facilities as required by § 60.5410c(i).
(j) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to fugitive emissions components designated facilities as required by § 60.5415c(j).
(k) Reporting and recordkeeping. You must comply with the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (8), and the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(13).
(l) Well closure requirements. You must complete the requirements specified in paragraphs (l)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must submit a well closure plan to the Administrator within 30 days of the cessation of production from all wells located at the well site as specified in § 60.5420c(a)(4)(i). The well closure plan must include, at a minimum, the information specified in paragraphs (l)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Description of the steps necessary to close all wells at the well site, including permanent plugging of all wells;
(ii) Description of the financial requirements and disclosure of financial assurance to complete closure; and
(iii) Description of the schedule for completing all activities in the well closure plan.
(2) You must submit a notification as specified in § 60.5420c(a)(4)(ii) of intent to close the well site to the Administrator 60 days before you begin well closure activities.
(3) You must conduct a survey of the well site using OGI, including each closed well, after completing all well closure activities outlined in the well closure plan specified in paragraph (l)(1) of this section. If any emissions are imaged by the OGI instrument, then you must take steps to eliminate those emissions and you must resurvey the source of emissions. You must repeat steps to eliminate emissions and resurvey the source of emissions until no emissions are imaged by the OGI instrument. You must update the well closure plan specified in paragraph (l)(1) of this section to include the video of the OGI survey demonstrating closure of all wells at the site.
(4) You must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(13) and submit the reports specified in § 60.5420c(b)(8).
§ 60.5398c What alternative GHG standards apply to fugitive emissions components designated facilities and what inspection and monitoring requirements apply to covers and closed vent systems when using an alternative technology?
This section provides alternative GHG standards for fugitive emissions components designated facilities in § 60.5397c and alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems in § 60.5416c(a)(1)(ii) and (iii), (2)(ii) through (iv), and (3)(iii) and (iv). If you choose to use an alternative standard under this section, you must submit the notification under paragraph (a) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance with the alternative GHG standards through periodic screening, you are subject to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section. If you choose to demonstrate compliance through a continuous monitoring system, you are subject to the requirements in paragraph (c) of this section. The technology used for periodic screenings under paragraph (b) of this section or continuous monitoring under paragraph (c) of this section must be approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d).
(a) Notification. If you choose to demonstrate compliance with the alternative GHG standards in either paragraph (b) or (c) of this section, you must notify the Administrator of adoption of the alternative standards in the first annual report following implementation of the alternative standards, as specified in § 60.5424c(a). Once you have implemented the alternative standards, you must continue to comply with the alternative standards.
(b) Periodic screening. You may choose to demonstrate compliance for your fugitive emissions components designated facility and compliance with continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for your covers and closed vent systems through periodic screenings using any methane measurement technology approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d). If you choose to demonstrate compliance using periodic screenings, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section and comply with the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 60.5424c.
(1) You must use one or more alternative test method(s) approved per § 60.5398b(d) to conduct periodic screenings.
(i) The required frequencies for conducting periodic screenings are listed in tables 2 and 3 to this subpart. You must choose the appropriate frequency for conducting periodic screenings based on the minimum aggregate detection threshold of the method used to conduct the periodic screenings. You must also use tables 2 and 3 to this subpart to determine whether you must conduct an annual fugitive emissions survey using OGI, except as provided in paragraph (b)(1)(ii) of this section.
(ii) Use of table 2 or 3 to this subpart is based on the required frequency for conducting monitoring surveys in § 60.5397c(g)(1)(i) through (v).
(iii) You may replace one or more individual periodic screening events required by table 2 or 3 to this subpart with an OGI survey. The OGI survey must be conducted according to the requirements outlined in § 60.5397c.
(iv) If you use multiple methods to conduct periodic screenings, you must conduct all periodic screenings, regardless of the method used for the individual periodic screening event, at the frequency required for the alternative test method with the highest aggregate detection threshold (e.g., if you use methods with aggregate detection thresholds of 15 kg/hr, your periodic screenings must be conducted monthly). You must also conduct an annual OGI survey if an annual OGI survey is required for the alternative test method with the highest aggregate detection threshold.
(2) You must develop a monitoring plan that covers the collection of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems at each site where you will use periodic screenings to demonstrate compliance. You may develop a site-specific monitoring plan, or you may include multiple sites that you own or operate in one plan. At a minimum, the monitoring plan must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (ix) of this section.
(i) Identification of each site that will be monitored through periodic screening, including latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Identification of the alternative test method(s) approved per § 60.5398b(d) that will be used for periodic screenings and the spatial resolution (i.e., component-level, area-level, or facility-level) of the technology used for each method.
(iii) Identification of and contact information for the entities that will be performing the periodic screenings.
(iv) Required frequency for conducting periodic screenings, based on the criteria outlined in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(v) If you are required to conduct an annual OGI survey by paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (iii) of this section or you choose to replace any individual screening event with an OGI survey, your monitoring plan must also include the information required by § 60.5397c(b).
(vi) Procedures for conducting monitoring surveys required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii)(A), (b)(5)(iii)(A), and (b)(5)(iv)(A) of this section. At a minimum, your monitoring plan must include the information required by § 60.5397c(c)(2), (3), (7), and (8) and § 60.5397c(d), as applicable. The provisions of § 60.5397c(d)(3) do not apply for purposes of conducting monitoring surveys required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems from which emissions are detected.
(viii) Procedures and timeframes for verifying repairs for fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems.
(ix) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(3) You must conduct the initial screening of your site according to the timeframes specified in (b)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Within 90 days of the effective date of your state or Tribal plan for each fugitive emissions components designated facility and storage vessel designated facility located at a well site.
(ii) No later than the final date by which the next monitoring survey required by § 60.5397c(g)(1)(i) through (v) would have been required to be conducted if you were previously complying with the requirements in § 60.5397c and § 60.5416c.
(4) If you are required to conduct an annual OGI survey by paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (iii) of this section, you must conduct OGI surveys according to the schedule in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) You must conduct the initial OGI survey no later than 12 calendar months after conducting the initial screening survey in paragraph (b)(3) of this section.
(ii) Each subsequent OGI survey must be conducted no later than 12 calendar months after the previous OGI survey was conducted. Each identified source of fugitive emissions during the OGI survey shall be repaired in accordance with § 60.5397c(h).
(iii) If you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey or you are required to conduct a monitoring survey in accordance with paragraph (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section prior to the date that your next OGI survey under paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section is due, the OGI survey conducted in lieu of the periodic screening event or the monitoring survey under paragraph (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section can be used to fulfill the requirements of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section. The next OGI survey is required to be conducted no later than 12 calendar months after the date of the survey conducted under paragraph (b)(1)(iv) or (b)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.
(iv) You cannot use a monitoring survey conducted under paragraph (b)(5)(iii)(A) or (b)(5)(iv)(A) of this section to fulfill the requirements of paragraph (b)(4)(ii) of this section unless the monitoring survey included all fugitive emission components at the site.
(5) You must investigate confirmed detections of emissions from periodic screening events and repair each identified source of emissions in accordance with paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) You must receive the results of the periodic screening no later than 5 calendar days after the screening event occurs.
(ii) If you use an alternative test method with a facility-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from a designated facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all the fugitive emissions components in a designated facility using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) You must inspect all covers and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416c(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(C) You must conduct a visual inspection of all covers and closed vent systems to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416c(a)(1)(ii), § 60.5416c(a)(2)(iii), or § 60.5416c(a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(iii) If you use an alternative test method with an area-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from a designated facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all the fugitive emissions components located within a 4-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) If the confirmed detection occurred in the portion of a site that contains a storage vessel or a closed vent system, you must inspect all covers and all closed vent systems that are connected to all storage vessels and closed vent systems that are within a 2-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection (i.e., you must inspect the whole system that is connected to the portion of the system in the radius of the detected event, not just the portion of the system that falls within the radius of the detected event).
(1) You must inspect the cover(s) and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416c(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(2) You must conduct a visual inspection of the closed vent system(s) and cover(s) to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416c(a)(1)(ii), § 60.5416c(a)(2)(iii), or § 60.5416c(a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(iv) If you use an alternative test method with a component-level spatial resolution to conduct a periodic screening event and the results of the periodic screening event indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from a designated facility, you must take the actions listed in paragraphs (b)(5)(iv)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) You must conduct a monitoring survey of all the fugitive emissions components located within a 1-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection using either OGI or EPA Method 21 to appendix A-7 of this part. You must follow the procedures in your monitoring plan when conducting the survey.
(B) If the confirmed detection occurred in the portion of a site that contains a storage vessel or a closed vent system, you must inspect all covers and all closed vent systems that are connected to all storage vessels and closed vent systems that are within a 0.5-meter radius of the location of the periodic screening's confirmed detection (i.e., you must inspect the whole system that is connected to the portion of the system in the radius of the detected event, not just the portion of the system that falls within the radius of the detected event).
(1) You must inspect the cover(s) and closed vent system(s) with OGI or Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5416c(b)(1) through (4), as applicable.
(2) You must conduct a visual inspection of the closed vent system(s) and cover(s) to identify if there are any defects, as defined in § 60.5416c(a)(1)(ii), § 60.5416c(a)(2)(iii), or § 60.5416c(a)(3)(i), as applicable.
(v) You must repair all sources of fugitive emissions in accordance with § 60.5397c(h) and all emissions or defects of covers and closed vent systems in accordance with § 60.5416c(b)(4), except as specified in this paragraph (b)(5)(v). Except as allowed by §§ 60.5397c(h)(3) and 60.5416c(b)(5), all repairs must be completed, including the resurvey verifying the repair, within 30 days of receiving the results of the periodic screening in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section.
(vi) If the results of the periodic screening event in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section indicate a confirmed detection at a designated facility, and the ground-based monitoring survey and inspections required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section demonstrate the confirmed detection was caused by a failure of a control device used to demonstrate continuous compliance under this subpart, you must initiate an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and other contributing cause(s) of such failure within 24 hours of receiving the results of the monitoring survey and/or inspection. As part of the investigation, you must determine if the control device is operating in compliance with the applicable requirements of §§ 60.5415c and 60.5417c, and if not, what actions are necessary to bring the control device into compliance with those requirements as soon as possible and prevent future failures of the control device from the same underlying cause(s).
(vii) If the results of the inspections required in paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section indicate that there is an emission or defect in your cover or closed vent system, you must perform an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and other contributing cause(s) of emissions from your cover or closed vent system within 5 days of completing the inspection required by paragraphs (b)(5)(ii) through (iv) of this section. The investigative analysis must include a determination as to whether the system was operated outside of the engineering design analysis and whether updates are necessary for the cover or closed vent system to prevent future emissions from the cover and closed vent system.
(6) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(3) through (c)(6), (c)(13) and (c)(14) and § 60.5424c(c).
(7) You must submit reports as specified in § 60.5424c.
(c) Continuous Monitoring. You may choose to demonstrate compliance for your fugitive emissions components designated facility and compliance with continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for your covers and closed vent systems through continuous monitoring using a technology approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d). If you choose to demonstrate compliance using continuous monitoring, you must comply and develop a monitoring plan consistent with the requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (9) of this section and comply with the recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 60.5424c.
(1) For the purpose of this section, continuous monitoring means the ability of a methane monitoring system to determine and record a valid methane mass emissions rate or equivalent of designated facilities at least once for every 12-hour block.
(i) The detection threshold of the system must be such that it can detect at least 0.40 kg/hr (0.88 lb/hr) of methane.
(ii) The health of the devices used within the continuous monitoring system must be confirmed for power and function at least twice every six-hour block.
(iii) The continuous monitoring system must transmit all applicable valid data at least once every 24-hours. The continuous monitoring system must transmit all valid data collected, including health checks required in paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section.
(iv) The continuous monitoring system must continuously collect data as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section, except as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section:
(A) The rolling 12-month average operational downtime of the continuous monitoring system must be less than or equal to 10 percent.
(B) Operational downtime of the continuous monitoring system is defined as a period of time for which any monitor fails to collect or transmit data as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section or any monitor is out-of-control as specified in paragraph (c)(1)(iv)(C) of this section.
(C) A monitor is out-of-control if it fails ongoing quality assurance checks, as specified in the alternative test method approved under § 60.5398b(d), or if the monitor output is outside of range. The beginning of the out-of-control period is defined as the time of the failure of the quality assurance check. The end of the out-of-control period is defined as the time when either the monitor passes a subsequent quality assurance check, or a new monitor is installed. The out-of-control period for a monitor outside of range starts at the time when the monitor first reads outside of range and ends when the monitor reads within range again.
(D) The downtime for the continuous monitoring system must be calculated each calendar month. Once 12 months of data are available, at the end of each calendar month, you must calculate the 12-month average by averaging that month with the previous 11 calendar months. You must determine the rolling 12-month average by recalculating the 12-month average at the end of each month.
(2) You must develop a monitoring plan that covers the collection of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems for each site where continuous monitoring will be used to demonstrate compliance. At a minimum, the monitoring plan must contain the information specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (xii) of this section.
(i) Identification of each site to be monitored through continuous monitoring, including latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least four decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Identification of the approved alternative test method(s) approved under § 60.5398b(d) used for the continuous monitoring, including the detection principle; the manufacturer, make, and model; instrument manual, if applicable; and the manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.
(iii) If the continuous monitoring system is administered through a third-party provider, contact information where the provider can be reached 24 hours a day.
(iv) Number and location of monitors. If the continuous monitoring system uses open path technology, you must identify the location of any reflectors used. These locations should be identified by latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of at least five decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(v) Discussion of system calibration requirements, including but not limited to, the calibration procedures and calibration schedule for the detection systems and meteorology systems.
(vi) Identification of critical components and infrastructure (e.g., power, data systems) and procedures for their repairs.
(vii) Procedures for out-of-control periods.
(viii) Procedures for establishing baseline emissions, including the identification of any sources with methane emissions not subject to this subpart. The procedures for establishing the baseline emissions must account for variability in the operation of the site. Operation of the site during the development of the baseline emissions must represent the site's expected annual production or throughput.
(ix) Procedures for determining when a fugitive emissions event is detected by the continuous monitoring technology.
(x) Procedures and timeframes for identifying and repairing fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems from which emissions are detected.
(xi) Procedures and timeframes for verifying repairs for fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems.
(xii) Records that will be kept and the length of time records will be kept.
(3) You must install and begin conducting monitoring with your continuous monitoring system according to the timeframes specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Within 120 days of the effective date of your state or Tribal plan for each fugitive emissions components designated facility and storage vessel designated facility located at a well site.
(ii) No later than the final date by which the next monitoring survey required by § 60.5397c(g)(1)(i) through (v) would have been required to be conducted if you were previously complying with the requirements in § 60.5397c and § 60.5416c.
(4) You are subject to the following action-levels as specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section for any designated facilities located at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station.
(i) For designated facilities located at a wellhead only well site, the action levels are as follows.
(A) The 90-day rolling average action-level is 1.2 kg/hr (2.6 lbs/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(B) The 7-day rolling average action level is 15 kg/hr (34 lbs/hr) of methane over site-specific baseline emissions.
(ii) For designated facilities located at well sites with major production and processing equipment (including small well sites), centralized production facilities, and compressor stations, the action levels are as follows.
(A) The 90-day rolling average action-level is 1.6 kg/hr (3.6 lbs/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(B) The rolling 7-day average action level is 21 kg/hr (46 lbs/hr) of methane over the site-specific baseline emissions.
(5) You must establish site-specific baseline emissions upon initial installation and activation of a continuous monitoring system. You must establish the baseline emissions under the conditions outlined in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section. You must determine the baseline emission rates according to paragraphs (c)(5)(iv) and (v) of this section. The baseline must be established initially and any time there is a major change to the processing equipment at a well site (including small well sites), centralized production facility, or compressor station.
(i) Inspect all fugitive emissions components according to the requirements in § 60.5397c and covers and closed vent systems according to the requirements in § 60.5416c. This includes all fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems, regardless of whether they are regulated by this subpart. Repairs of any fugitive emissions, leaks, or defects found during the inspection must be completed prior to beginning the period in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
(ii) Verify control devices (e.g., flares) on all affected sources are operating in compliance with the applicable requirements of §§ 60.5415c and 60.5417c. You must ensure that all control devices are operating in compliance with the applicable regulations prior to beginning the period in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this section. Verify that all other methane emission sources (e.g., reciprocating engines) located at the site are operating consistent with any applicable regulations. You must ensure that these sources are operating in compliance with the applicable regulations prior to beginning the period in paragraph (c)(5)(iii) of this section.
(iii) Using the alternative test method approved per § 60.5398b(d), record the site-level emission rate from your continuous monitoring system for 30 operating days. You must minimize any activities that are not normal, day-to-day activities during this 30 operating day period. Document any maintenance activities and the period (including the start date and time and end date and time) such activities occurred during the 30 operating day period.
(iv) Determine the site-specific baseline by calculating the mean emission rate (kg/hr of methane) for the 30 operating day period, less any time periods when maintenance activities were conducted.
(v) The site-specific baseline emission rate must be no more than 10 times the applicable 90-day action-level defined in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (c)(4)(ii) of this section.
(6) Calculate the emission rate from your site according to paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (iii) of this section. Compare the emission rate calculated in this paragraph (c)(6) to the appropriate action levels in paragraph (c)(4) of this section to determine whether you have exceeded an action level.
(i) Each calendar day, calculate the daily average mass emission rate in kg/hr of methane from your continuous monitoring system.
(ii) Once the system has been operating for 7 calendar days, at the end of each calendar day calculate the 7-day average mass emission rate by averaging the mass emission rate from that day with the mass emission rate from the previous 6 calendar days. Subtract the site-specific baseline mass emission rate from the 7-day average mass emission rate when comparing the mass emission rate to the applicable action level. Determine the 7-day rolling average by recalculating the 7-day average each calendar day, less the site-specific baseline.
(iii) Once the system has been operating for 90 calendar days, at the end of each calendar day calculate the 90-day average mass emission rate by averaging the mass emission rate from that day with the mass emission rate from the previous 89 calendar days. Subtract the site-specific baseline emission rate from the 90-day average mass emission rate when comparing the mass emission rate to the applicable action level. Determine the 90-day rolling average by recalculating the 90-day average each calendar day, less the site-specific baseline.
(7) Within 5 days of determining that either of your action levels in paragraph (c)(4) of this section has been exceeded, you must initiate an investigative analysis to determine the underlying primary and contributing cause(s) of such exceedance and actions to be taken to reduce the mass emission rate below the applicable action level.
(i) You must complete the investigative analysis and take initial steps to bring the mass emission rate below the action level no later than 5 days after determining there is an exceedance of the action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) or (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section.
(ii) You must complete the investigative analysis and take initial steps to bring the mass emission rate below the action level no later than 30 days after determining there is an exceedance of the action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(A) or (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section.
(8) You must develop a mass emission rate reduction plan if you meet any of the criteria in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iii) of this section. The plan must describe the action(s) completed to date to reduce the mass emission rate below the action level, additional measures that you propose to employ to reduce methane emissions below the action level, and a schedule for completion of these measures. You must submit the plan to the Administrator within 60 days of initially determining there is an exceedance of an action level in paragraph (c)(4) of this section.
(i) If, upon completion of the initial actions required under paragraph (c)(7) of this section, the average mass emission rate for the following 30-day period is not below the applicable action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(A) or (c)(4)(ii)(A) of this section. The beginning of the 30-day period starts on the calendar day following completion of the initial actions in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(ii) If, upon completion of the initial actions required under paragraph (c)(6) of this section, the average mass emission rate for the following 24-hour period is not below the applicable action level in paragraph (c)(4)(i)(B) or (c)(4)(ii)(B) of this section. The average mass emission rate will be the mass emission rate calculated according to paragraph (c)(6)(i) of this section for the calendar day following completion of the initial corrective actions in paragraph (c)(7) of this section.
(iii) All actions needed to reduce the average mass emission rate below the action level require more than 30 days to implement.
(9) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(3) through (c)(6), (c)(13) and (c)(14), and § 60.5424c(e). You must submit the reports as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1), (b)(3) through (9) and § 60.5424c.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62921, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5400c What GHG standards apply to process unit equipment designated facilities?
This section applies to process unit equipment designated facilities located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. You must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (l) of this section to reduce methane emissions from equipment leaks, except as provided in § 60.5402c. As an alternative to the standards in this section, you may comply with the requirements in § 60.5401c.
(a) General standards. You must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (b) through (d) of this section for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service, and connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service, as applicable. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section for each open-ended valve or line. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (f) of this section for each closed vent system and control device used to comply with equipment leak provisions in this section. You must comply with paragraph (g) of this section for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service. You must make repairs as specified in paragraph (h) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (i) of this section. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (j) of this section. You must perform the reporting as specified in paragraph (k) of this section. You must perform the recordkeeping as required in paragraph (l) of this section.
(1) Each piece of equipment is presumed to have the potential to emit methane unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment does not have the potential to emit methane. For a piece of equipment to be considered not to have the potential to emit methane, the methane content of a gaseous stream must be below detection limits using Method 18 of appendix A-6 of this part. Alternatively, if the piece of equipment is in wet gas service, you may choose to determine the methane content of the stream is below the detection limit of the methods described in ASTM E168-16(R2023), E169-16(R2022), or E260-96 (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(2) [Reserved]
(b) Monitoring surveys. You must monitor for leaks using OGI in accordance with appendix K to this part, unless otherwise specified in paragraphs (c) or (d) of this section.
(1) Monitoring surveys must be conducted bimonthly.
(2) Any emissions observed using OGI are defined as a leak.
(c) Additional requirements for pumps in light liquid service. In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, you must conduct weekly visual inspections of all pumps in light liquid service for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, except as specified in paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section. If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, you must follow the procedure specified in either paragraph (c)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Monitor the pump within 5 calendar days using the methods specified in § 60.5406c. A leak is detected if any emissions are observed using OGI, or if an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater is provided using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) Designate the visual indications of liquids dripping as a leak and repair the leak as specified in paragraph (h) of this section.
(3) If any pump is equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a process, fuel gas system, or a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section, it is exempt from the weekly inspection requirements in paragraph (c) of this section.
(4) Any pump that is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection requirements in paragraph (c) of this section, provided that each pump is visually inspected as often as practicable and at least bimonthly.
(d) Additional requirements for pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service. In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, you must monitor each pressure relief device as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) of this section, except as specified in paragraphs (d)(2) and (d)(3) of this section.
(1) You must monitor each pressure relief device within 5 calendar days after each pressure release to detect leaks using the methods specified in § 60.5406c. A leak is detected if any emissions are observed using OGI, or if an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is provided using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) Any pressure relief device that is located in a nonfractionating plant that is monitored only by non-plant personnel may be monitored after a pressure release the next time the monitoring personnel are onsite or within 30 calendar days after a pressure release, whichever is sooner, instead of within 5 calendar days as specified in paragraph (d)(1) of this section. No pressure relief device described in this paragraph may be allowed to operate for more than 30 calendar days after a pressure release without monitoring.
(3) Any pressure relief device that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting leakage through the pressure relief device to a control device as described in paragraph (f) of this section is exempt from the requirements of paragraph (d)(1) of this section.
(e) Open-ended valves or lines. Each open-ended valve or line must be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a second valve, except as provided in paragraphs (e)(4) and (5) of this section. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve must seal the open end of the valve or line at all times except during operations requiring process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line.
(1) If evidence of a leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected.
(2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve must be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is closed before the second valve is closed.
(3) When a double block-and-bleed system is being used, the bleed valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the line between the block valves but shall remain closed at all other times.
(4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would autocatalytically polymerize or would present an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if capped or equipped with a double block-and-bleed system as specified in paragraphs (e) introductory text, (e)(2) and (3) of this section are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(f) Closed vent systems and control devices. Closed vent systems used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5411c and 60.5416c. Control devices used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5412c, 60.5415c(e), and 60.5417c.
(g) Pumps, valves, and connectors in heavy liquid service and pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service. If evidence of a potential leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected and must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (h) of this section.
(h) Repair requirements. When a leak is detected, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (h)(1) through (5) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (h)(6) of this section.
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification tag, marked with the equipment identification number, must be attached to the leaking equipment. The identification tag on equipment may be removed after it has been repaired.
(2) A first attempt at repair must be made as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected. A first attempt at repair is not required if the leak is detected using OGI and the equipment identified as leaking would require elevating the repair personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(i) First attempts at repair for pumps in light liquid or heavy liquid service include, but are not limited to, the practices described in paragraphs (h)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, where practicable.
(A) Tightening the packing gland nuts.
(B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and temperature.
(ii) For each valve where a leak is detected, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(2)(ii)(A) (B), (C) or (D) of this section.
(A) Repack the existing valve with a low-e packing.
(B) Replace the existing valve with a low-e valve; or
(C) Perform a drill and tap repair with a low-e injectable packing.
(D) An owner or operator is not required to utilize a low-e valve or low-e packing to replace or repack a valve if the owner or operator demonstrates that a low-e valve or low-e packing is not technically feasible. Low-e valve or low-e packing that is not suitable for its intended use is considered to be technically infeasible. Factors that may be considered in determining technical infeasibility include: retrofit requirements for installation (e.g., re-piping or space limitation), commercial unavailability for valve type, or certain instrumentation assemblies.
(3) Repair of leaking equipment must be completed within 15 calendar days after detection of each leak, except as provided in paragraphs (h)(4), (5) and (6) of this section.
(4) If the repair for visual indications of liquids dripping for pumps in light liquid service can be made by eliminating visual indications of liquids dripping, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(5) If the repair for AVO or other indication of a leak for open-ended valves or lines; pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service; or pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service can be made by eliminating the AVO, or other indication of a potential leak, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(6) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected is allowed if repair within 15 days is technically infeasible without a process unit shutdown or as specified in paragraphs (h)(6)(i) through (v) of this section. Repair of this equipment shall occur before the end of the next process unit shutdown. Monitoring to verify repair must occur within 15 days after startup of the process unit.
(i) Delay of repair of equipment is allowed for equipment which is isolated from the process, and which does not have the potential to emit methane.
(ii) Delay of repair for valves and connectors is allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section are met.
(A) You must demonstrate that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(B) When repair procedures are conducted, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with paragraph (f) of this section.
(iii) Delay of repair for pumps is allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (h)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section are met.
(A) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(B) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(iv) If delay of repair is required to repack or replace the valve, you may use delay of repair. Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown is allowed for a valve, if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(v) When delay of repair is allowed for a leaking pump, valve, or connector that remains in service, the pump, valve, or connector may be considered to be repaired and no longer subject to delay of repair requirements if two consecutive bimonthly monitoring results show no leak remains.
(i) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5410c(g).
(j) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5415c(i).
(k) Reporting. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (10) through (12), as applicable, and § 60.5422c.
(l) Recordkeeping. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(7) and (9) through (12), as applicable, and § 60.5421c.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62923, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5401c What are the alternative GHG standards for process unit equipment designated facilities?
This section provides alternative standards for process unit equipment designated facilities located at an onshore natural gas processing plant. You may choose to comply with the standards in this section instead of the requirements in § 60.5400c. For purposes of the alternative standards provided in this section, you must comply with the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (m) of this section to reduce methane emissions from equipment leaks, except as provided in § 60.5402c.
(a) General standards. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section for each pump in light liquid service. You must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c) of this section for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section for each open-ended valve or line. You must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section for each closed vent system and control device used to comply with equipment leak provisions in this section. You must comply with paragraph (f) of this section for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service. You must comply with paragraph (g) of this section for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service. You must comply with paragraph (h) of this section for each connector in gas/vapor and light liquid service. You must make repairs as specified in paragraph (i) of this section. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (j) of this section. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards as specified in paragraph (k) of this section. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in paragraph (l) of this section. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as required in paragraph (m) of this section.
(1) Each piece of equipment is presumed to have the potential to emit methane unless an owner or operator demonstrates that the piece of equipment does not have the potential to emit methane. For a piece of equipment to be considered not to have the potential to emit methane, the methane content of a gaseous stream must be below detection limits using Method 18 of appendix A-6 to this part. Alternatively, if the piece of equipment is in wet gas service, you may choose to determine the methane content of the stream is below the detection limit of the methods described in ASTM E168-16(R2023), E169-16(R2022), or E260-96 (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(2) [Reserved]
(b) Pumps in light liquid service. You must monitor each pump in light liquid service monthly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 60.5406c, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) through (6) of this section. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater. A pump that begins operation in light liquid service after the initial startup date for the process unit must be monitored for the first time within 30 days after the end of its startup period, except for a pump that replaces a leaking pump and except as provided in paragraphs (b)(2) through (6) of this section.
(1) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, you must conduct weekly visual inspections of all pumps in light liquid service for indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal. If there are indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal, you must follow the procedure specified in either paragraph (b)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) Monitor the pump within 5 days using the methods specified in § 60.5406c. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 2,000 ppmv or greater.
(ii) Designate the visual indications of liquids dripping as a leak, and repair the leak as specified in paragraph (i) of this section.
(2) Each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system is exempt from the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, provided the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (v) of this section are met.
(i) Each dual mechanical seal system meets the requirements of paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A), (B), or (C) of this section.
(A) Operated with the barrier fluid at a pressure that is at all times greater than the pump stuffing box pressure; or
(B) Equipped with a barrier fluid degassing reservoir that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or connected by a closed vent system to a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section; or
(C) Equipped with a system that purges the barrier fluid into a process stream with zero methane emissions to the atmosphere.
(ii) The barrier fluid system is in heavy liquid service or does not have the potential to emit methane.
(iii) Each barrier fluid system is equipped with a sensor that will detect failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(iv) Each pump is checked according to the requirements in paragraph (b)(1) of this section.
(v) Each sensor meets the requirements in paragraphs (b)(2)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Each sensor as described in paragraph (b)(2)(iii) of this section is checked daily or is equipped with an audible alarm.
(B) You determine, based on design considerations and operating experience, a criterion that indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both.
(C) If the sensor indicates failure of the seal system, the barrier fluid system, or both, based on the criterion established in paragraph (b)(2)(v)(B) of this section, a leak is detected.
(3) Any pump that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(12), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (b), (b)(1), and (b)(2) of this section if the pump:
(i) Has no externally actuated shaft penetrating the pump housing;
(ii) Is demonstrated to be operating with no detectable emissions as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background as measured by the methods specified in § 60.5406c; and
(iii) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(4) If any pump is equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting any leakage from the seal or seals to a process, fuel gas system, or a control device that complies with the requirements of paragraph (e) of this section, it is exempt from paragraphs (b) introductory text and (b)(1) through (3) of this section, and the repair requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.
(5) Any pump that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor pump is exempt from the monitoring and inspection requirements of paragraphs (b) introductory text, (b)(1), and (b)(2)(iv) and (v) of this section if the conditions in paragraph (b)(5)(i) and (ii) are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the pump is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (b) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the pump as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(6) Any pump that is located within the boundary of an unmanned plant site is exempt from the weekly visual inspection requirements in paragraph (b)(1) and (b)(2)(iv) of this section, and the daily requirements of paragraph (b)(2)(v) of this section, provided that each pump is visually inspected as often as practicable and at least monthly.
(c) Pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service. You must monitor each pressure relief device quarterly using the methods specified in § 60.5406c. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater above background.
(1) In addition to the requirements in paragraph (c) of this section, after each pressure release, you must monitor each pressure relief device within 5 calendar days after each pressure release to detect leaks. A leak is detected if an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is provided using the methods specified in § 60.5406c(b).
(2) Any pressure relief device that is located in a nonfractionating plant that is monitored only by non-plant personnel may be monitored after a pressure release the next time the monitoring personnel are onsite, or within 30 calendar days after a pressure release, whichever is sooner, instead of within 5 calendar days as specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(3) No pressure relief device described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section may be allowed to operate for more than 30 calendar days after a pressure release without monitoring.
(4) Any pressure relief device that is routed to a process or fuel gas system or equipped with a closed vent system capable of capturing and transporting leakage through the pressure relief device to a control device as described in paragraph (e) of this section is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (c) introductory text and (c)(1) of this section.
(5) Pressure relief devices equipped with a rupture disk are exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section provided you install a new rupture disk upstream of the pressure relief device as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after each pressure release, except as provided in paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(d) Open-ended valves or lines. Each open-ended valve or line must be equipped with a cap, blind flange, plug, or a second valve, except as provided in paragraphs (d)(4) and (5) of this section. The cap, blind flange, plug, or second valve must seal the open end of the valve or line at all times except during operations requiring process fluid flow through the open-ended valve or line.
(1) If evidence of a leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, a leak is detected and must be repaired in accordance with paragraph (i) of this section. A leak is defined as an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater if Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used.
(2) Each open-ended valve or line equipped with a second valve must be operated in a manner such that the valve on the process fluid end is closed before the second valve is closed.
(3) When a double block-and-bleed system is being used, the bleed valve or line may remain open during operations that require venting the line between the block valves but shall remain closed at all other times.
(4) Open-ended valves or lines in an emergency shutdown system which are designed to open automatically in the event of a process upset are exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (d), and (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
(5) Open-ended valves or lines containing materials which would autocatalytically polymerize or would present an explosion, serious overpressure, or other safety hazard if capped or equipped with a double block-and-bleed system as specified in paragraphs (d) introductory text and (d)(2) and (3) of this section are exempt from the requirements of this section.
(e) Closed vent systems and control devices. Closed vent systems used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5411c and 60.5416c. Control devices used to comply with the equipment leak provisions of this section must comply with the requirements in §§ 60.5412c, 60.5415c(e), and 60.5417c.
(f) Valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service. You must monitor each valve in gas/vapor and in light liquid service quarterly to detect leaks by the methods specified in § 60.5406c, except as provided in paragraphs (f)(3) through (5) of this section.
(1) A valve that begins operation in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service after the initial startup date for the process unit must be monitored for the first time within 90 days after the end of its startup period to ensure proper installation, except for a valve that replaces a leaking valve and except as provided in paragraphs (f)(3) through (5) of this section.
(2) An instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater is a leak. You must repair each leaking valve according to the requirements in paragraph (i) of this section.
(3) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(12), for no detectable emissions, as indicated by an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the valve:
(i) Has no externally actuating mechanism in contact with the process fluid;
(ii) Is operated with emissions less than 500 ppmv above background as determined by the methods specified in § 60.5406c; and
(iii) Is tested for compliance with paragraph (f)(3)(ii) of this section initially upon designation, annually, and at other times requested by the Administrator.
(4) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor valve is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the requirements in paragraphs (f)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the valve is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraph (f) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the valve as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(5) Any valve that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(14), as a difficult-to-monitor valve is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraph (f) of this section if the requirements in paragraph (f)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate that the valve cannot be monitored without elevating the monitoring personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(ii) The process unit within which the valve is located has less than 3.0 percent of its total number of valves designated as difficult-to-monitor.
(iii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the at least once per calendar year.
(g) Pumps, valves, and connectors in heavy liquid service and pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service. If evidence of a potential leak is found at any time by AVO, or any other detection method, you must comply with either paragraph (g)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) You must monitor the equipment within 5 calendar days by the method specified in § 60.5406c and repair any leaks detected according to paragraph (i) of this section. An instrument reading of 10,000 ppmv or greater is defined as a leak.
(2) You must designate the AVO, or other indication of a leak as a leak and repair the leak according to paragraph (i) of this section.
(h) Connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service. You must initially monitor all connectors in the process unit for leaks by the later of either 12 months after the compliance date or 12 months after initial startup. If all connectors in the process unit have been monitored for leaks prior to the compliance date, no initial monitoring is required provided either no process changes have been made since the monitoring or the owner or operator can determine that the results of the monitoring, with or without adjustments, reliably demonstrate compliance despite process changes. If required to monitor because of a process change, you are required to monitor only those connectors involved in the process change.
(1) You must monitor all connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service annually, except as provided in paragraph (e) of this section or paragraph (h)(2) of this section.
(2) Any connector that is designated, as described in § 60.5421c(b)(13), as an unsafe-to-monitor connector is exempt from the requirements of paragraphs (h) and (h)(1) of this section if the requirements of paragraphs (h)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section are met.
(i) You demonstrate the connector is unsafe-to-monitor because monitoring personnel would be exposed to an immediate danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs (h) and (h)(1) of this section; and
(ii) You have a written plan that requires monitoring of the connector as frequently as practicable during safe-to-monitor times, but not more frequently than the periodic monitoring schedule otherwise applicable, and you repair the equipment according to the procedures in paragraph (i) of this section if a leak is detected.
(3) Inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-line connectors.
(i) Any connector that is inaccessible or that is ceramic or ceramic-lined (e.g., porcelain, glass, or glass-lined), is exempt from the monitoring requirements of paragraphs (h) and (h)(1) of this section, from the leak repair requirements of paragraph (i) of this section, and from the recordkeeping and reporting requirements of §§ 60.5421c and 60.5422c. An inaccessible connector is one that meets any of the specifications in paragraphs (h)(3)(i)(A) through (F) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Buried.
(B) Insulated in a manner that prevents access to the connector by a monitor probe.
(C) Obstructed by equipment or piping that prevents access to the connector by a monitor probe.
(D) Unable to be reached from a wheeled scissor-lift or hydraulic-type scaffold that would allow access to connectors up to 7.6 meters (25 feet) above the ground.
(E) Inaccessible because it would require elevating monitoring personnel more than 2 meters (7 feet) above a permanent support surface or would require the erection of scaffold.
(F) Not able to be accessed at any time in a safe manner to perform monitoring. Unsafe access includes, but is not limited to, the use of a wheeled scissor-lift on unstable or uneven terrain, the use of a motorized man-lift basket in areas where an ignition potential exists, or access would require near proximity to hazards such as electrical lines or would risk damage to equipment.
(ii) If any inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-lined connector is observed by AVO, or other means to be leaking, the indications of a leak to the atmosphere by AVO or other means must be eliminated as soon as practicable.
(4) Connectors which are part of an instrumentation systems and inaccessible, ceramic, or ceramic-lined connectors meeting the provisions of paragraph (h)(3) of this section, are not subject to the recordkeeping requirements of § 60.5421c(b)(1).
(i) Repair requirements. When a leak is detected, comply with the requirements of paragraphs (i)(1) through (5) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (i)(6) of this section.
(1) A weatherproof and readily visible identification tag, marked with the equipment identification number, must be attached to the leaking equipment. The identification tag on the equipment may be removed after it has been repaired.
(2) A first attempt at repair must be made as soon as practicable, but no later than 5 calendar days after the leak is detected.
(i) First attempts at repair for pumps in light liquid or heavy liquid service include, but are not limited to, the practices described in paragraphs (i)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, where practicable.
(A) Tightening the packing gland nuts.
(B) Ensuring that the seal flush is operating at design pressure and temperature.
(ii) For each valve where a leak is detected, you must comply with paragraphs (i)(2)(ii)(A), (B) or (C), and (D) of this section.
(A) Repack the existing valve with a low-e packing.
(B) Replace the existing valve with a low-e valve; or
(C) Perform a drill and tap repair with a low-e injectable packing.
(D) An owner or operator is not required to utilize a low-e valve or low-e packing to replace or repack a valve if the owner or operator demonstrates that a low-e valve or low-e packing is not technically feasible. Low-e valve or low-e packing that is not suitable for its intended use is considered to be technically infeasible. Factors that may be considered in determining technical infeasibility include: retrofit requirements for installation (e.g., re-piping or space limitation), commercial unavailability for valve type, or certain instrumentation assemblies.
(3) Repair of leaking equipment must be completed within 15 calendar days after detection of each leak, except as provided in paragraphs (i)(4), (5) and (6) of this section.
(4) If the repair for visual indications of liquids dripping for pumps in light liquid service can be made by eliminating visual indications of liquids dripping, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(5) If the repair for AVO or other indication of a leak for open-ended lines or valves; pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service; or pressure relief devices in light liquid or heavy liquid service can be made by eliminating the AVO, or other indication of a potential leak, you must make the repair within 5 calendar days of detection.
(6) Delay of repair of equipment for which leaks have been detected will be allowed if repair within 15 calendar days is technically infeasible without a process unit shutdown or as specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) through (v) of this section. Repair of this equipment shall occur before the end of the next process unit shutdown. Monitoring to verify repair must occur within 15 calendar days after startup of the process unit.
(i) Delay of repair of equipment will be allowed for equipment which is isolated from the process, and which does not have the potential to emit methane.
(ii) Delay of repair for valves and connectors will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) are met.
(A) You demonstrate that emissions of purged material resulting from immediate repair are greater than the fugitive emissions likely to result from delay of repair, and
(B) When repair procedures are conducted, the purged material is collected and destroyed or recovered in a control device complying with paragraph (e) of this section.
(iii) Delay of repair for pumps will be allowed if the conditions in paragraphs (i)(6)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section are met.
(A) Repair requires the use of a dual mechanical seal system that includes a barrier fluid system, and
(B) Repair is completed as soon as practicable, but not later than 6 months after the leak was detected.
(iv) If delay of repair is required to repack or replace the valve, you may use delay of repair. Delay of repair beyond a process unit shutdown will be allowed for a valve, if valve assembly replacement is necessary during the process unit shutdown, valve assembly supplies have been depleted, and valve assembly supplies had been sufficiently stocked before the supplies were depleted. Delay of repair beyond the next process unit shutdown will not be allowed unless the next process unit shutdown occurs sooner than 6 months after the first process unit shutdown.
(v) When delay of repair is allowed for a leaking pump, valve, or connector that remains in service, the pump, valve, or connector may be considered to be repaired and no longer subject to delay of repair requirements if two consecutive monthly monitoring results show no leak remains.
(j) Initial compliance. You must demonstrate initial compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5410c(g).
(k) Continuous compliance. You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards that apply to equipment leaks at onshore natural gas processing plants as required by § 60.5415c(i).
(l) Reporting. You must perform the reporting requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (10) through (12), as applicable, and § 60.5422c.
(m) Recordkeeping. You must perform the recordkeeping requirements as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(7) and (9) through (12), as applicable, and § 60.5421c.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62923, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5402c What are the exceptions to the GHG standards for process unit equipment designated facilities?
(a) You may comply with the following exceptions to the provisions of §§ 60.5400c(a) and 60.5401c(a), as applicable.
(b) Pumps in light liquid service, pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service, valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service, and connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service that are located at a nonfractionating plant that does not have the design capacity to process 283,200 standard cubic meters per day (scmd) (10 million standard cubic feet per day) or more of field gas may comply with the exceptions specified in paragraphs (b)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) You are exempt from bimonthly OGI monitoring as required under § 60.5400c(b).
(2) You are exempt from the routine Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part monitoring requirements of § 60.5401c(b), (c), (f), and (h), if complying with the alternative standards of § 60.5401c.
(c) Pumps in light liquid service, pressure relief devices in gas/vapor service, valves in gas/vapor and light liquid service, and connectors in gas/vapor service and in light liquid service within a process unit that is located in the Alaskan North Slope are exempt from the monitoring requirements § 60.5400c(b) and (c) and § 60.5401c(b), (c), (f) and (h).
(d) You may use the following provisions instead of § 60.5406c(d):
(1) Equipment is in heavy liquid service if the weight percent evaporated is 10 percent or less at 150 degrees Celsius (302 degrees Fahrenheit) as determined by ASTM D86-96 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(2) Equipment is in light liquid service if the weight percent evaporated is greater than 10 percent at 150 °Celsius (302 °F) as determined by ASTM D86-96 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(e) Equipment that is in vacuum service, except connectors in gas/vapor and light liquid service, is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5400c(b) through (g), if it is identified as required in § 60.5421c(b)(15). Equipment that is in vacuum service is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5401c(b) through (g) if it is identified as required in § 60.5421c(b)(15).
(f) Equipment that you designate as having the potential to emit methane less than 300 hr/yr is excluded from the requirements of § 60.5400c(b) through (g) and § 60.5401c(b) through (h), if it is identified as required in § 60.5421c(b)(16) and it meets any of the conditions specified in paragraphs (f)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) The equipment has the potential to emit methane only during startup and shutdown.
(2) The equipment has the potential to emit methane only during process malfunctions or other emergencies.
(3) The equipment is backup equipment that has the potential to emit methane only when the primary equipment is out of service.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62924, Aug. 1, 2024]
Model Rule—Test Methods and Performance Testing
§ 60.5405c What test methods and procedures must I use for my centrifugal compressor and reciprocating compressor designated facilities?
(a) You must use one of the methods described in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section to screen for emissions or leaks from the reciprocating compressor rod packing when complying with § 60.5393c(b)(1)(iii), (b)(2)(i), or (c)(2)(iv), and from the compressor dry and wet seal vents when complying with § 60.5392c(a)(2)(i)(A).
(1) Optical gas imaging instrument. Use an optical gas imaging instrument for equipment leak detection as specified in either paragraph (a)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. For the purposes of paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section, any visible emissions observed by the optical gas imaging instrument from reciprocating rod packing or compressor dry or wet seal vent is a leak.
(i) Optical gas imaging instrument as specified in appendix K of this part. For reciprocating compressor and centrifugal compressor designated facilities with wet or dry seals located at onshore natural gas processing plants, use an optical gas imaging instrument to screen for emissions from reciprocating rod packing or centrifugal compressor dry or wet seal vent in accordance with the protocol specified in appendix K of this part.
(ii) Optical gas imaging instrument as specified in § 60.5397c of this subpart. For reciprocating compressor and centrifugal compressor designated facilities with wet or dry seals located at centralized production facilities, compressor stations, or other location that is not an onshore natural gas processing plant, use an optical gas imaging instrument to screen for emissions from reciprocating rod packing or centrifugal compressor with wet or dry seals in accordance with the elements of § 60.5397c(c)(7).
(2) Method 21. Use Method 21 in appendix A-7 to this part according to § 60.5406c(b)(1) and (2). For the purposes of this section, an instrument reading of 500 ppmv above background or greater is a leak.
(b) You must determine natural gas volumetric flow rate using a rate meter which meets the requirement in Method 2D in appendix A-1 to this part. Rate meters must be calibrated on an annual basis according to the requirements in Method 2D.
(c) You must use a high-volume sampler to measure emissions of the reciprocating compressor rod packing or centrifugal compressor dry or wet seal vent in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must use a high-volume sampler designed to capture the entirety of the emissions from the applicable vent and measure the entire range of methane concentrations being emitted as well as the total volumetric flow at standard conditions. You must develop a standard operating procedure for this device and document these procedures in the appropriate monitoring plan. In order to get reliable results, persons using this device should be knowledgeable in its operation and the requirements in this section.
(2) This procedure may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This procedure may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this procedure to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this procedure.
(3) The high-volume sampler must include a methane gas sensor(s) which meets the requirements in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The methane sensor(s) must be selective to methane with minimal interference, less than 2.5 percent for the sum of responses to other compounds in the gas matrix. You must document the minimal interference though empirical testing or through data provided by the manufacturer of the sensor.
(ii) The methane sensor(s) must have a measurement range over the entire expected range of concentrations.
(iii) The methane sensor(s) must be capable of taking a measurement once every second, and the data system must be capable of recording these results for each sensor at all times during operation of the sampler.
(4) The high-volume sampler must be designed such that it is capable of sampling sufficient volume in order to capture all emissions from the applicable vent. Your high-volume sampler must include a flow measurement sensor(s) which meets the requirements of paragraphs (c)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) The flow measurement sensor must have a measurement range over the entire expected range of flow rates sampled. If needed multiple sensors may be used to capture the entire range of expected flow rates.
(ii) The flow measurement sensor(s) must be capable of taking a measurement once every second, and the data system must be capable of recording these results for each sensor at all times during operation of the sampler.
(5) You must calibrate your methane sensor(s) according to the procedures in paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) and (B) of this section, and flow measurement sensors must be calibrated according to the procedures in paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section.
(i) For Methane sensor calibration:
(A) Initially and on a semi-annual basis, determine the linearity at four points through the measurement range for each methane sensor using methane gaseous calibration cylinder standards. At each point, the difference between the cylinder value and the sensor reading must be less than 5 percent of the respective calibration gas value. If the sensor does not meet this requirement, perform corrective action on the sensor, and do not use the sampler until these criteria can be met.
(B) Prior to and at the end of each testing day, challenge each sensor at two points, a low point, and a mid-point, using methane gaseous calibration cylinder standards. At each point, the difference between the cylinder value and the sensor reading must be less than 5 percent of the respective calibration gas value. If the sensor does not meet this requirement, perform corrective action on the sensor and do not use the sampler again until these criteria can be met. If the post-test calibration check fails at either point, invalidate the data from all tests performed subsequent to the last passing calibration check.
(ii) Flow measurement sensors must meet the requirements in Method 2D in appendix A-1 to this part. Rate meters must be calibrated on an annual basis according to the requirements in Method 2D. If your flow sensor relies on ancillary temperature and pressure measurements to correct the flow rate to standard conditions, the temperature and pressure sensors must also be calibrated on an annual basis. Standard conditions are defined as 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
(6) You must conduct sampling of the reciprocating compressor rod packing or centrifugal compressor dry or wet seal vent in accordance with the procedures in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) The instrument must be operated consistent with manufacturer recommendations; users are encouraged to develop a standard operating procedure to document the exact procedures used for sampling.
(ii) Identify the rod packing or centrifugal compressor dry or wet seal vent to be measured and record the signal to noise ratio (S/N) of the engine. Collect a background methane sample in parts per million by volume (ppmv) for a minimum of one minute and record the result along with the date and time.
(iii) Approach the vent with the sample hose and adjust the sampler so that you are measuring at the full flow rate. Then, adjust the flow rate to ensure the measured methane concentration is within the calibrated range of the methane sensor and minimum methane concentration is at least 2 ppmv higher than the background concentration. Sample for a period of at least one minute and record the average flow rate in standard cubic feet per minute and the methane sample concentration in ppmv, along with the date and time. Standard conditions are defined as 20 °C (68 °F) and 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
(iv) Calculate the leak rate according to the following equation:
Where:
CH4B = background methane concentration, ppmv
CH4S = methane sample concentration, ppmv
V = Average flow rate of the sampler, scfm
Q = Methane emission rate, scfm
(v) You must collect at least three separate one-minute measurements and determine the average leak rate. The relative percent difference of these three separate samples should be less than 10 percent.
(7) If the measured natural gas flow determined as specified in paragraph (c)(6) of this section exceeds 70.0 percent of the manufacturer's reported maximum sampling flow rate you must either use a temporary or permanent flow meter according to paragraph (b) of this section or use another method meeting the requirements in paragraph (d) of this section to determine the leak or flow rate.
(d) As an alternative to a high-volume sampler, you may use any other method that has been validated in accordance with the procedures specified in Method 301 in appendix A to 40 CFR part 63, subject to Administrator approval, as specified in § 60.8(b).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62924, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5406c What test methods and procedures must I use for my process unit equipment designated facilities?
(a) In conducting the performance tests required in § 60.8, you must use as reference methods and procedures the test methods in appendix A to this part or other methods and procedures as specified in this section, except as provided in § 60.8(b).
(b) You must determine compliance with the standards in § 60.5401c as follows:
(1) Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part shall be used to determine the presence of leaking sources. The instrument shall be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. The following calibration gases shall be used:
(i) Zero air (less than 10 ppmv of hydrocarbon in air); and
(ii) A mixture of methane or n-hexane and air at a concentration no more than 2,000 ppmv greater than the leak definition concentration of the equipment monitored. If the monitoring instrument's design allows for multiple calibration scales, then the lower scale shall be calibrated with a calibration gas that is no higher than 2,000 ppmv above the concentration specified as a leak, and the highest scale shall be calibrated with a calibration gas that is approximately or equal to 10,000 ppmv. If only one scale on an instrument will be used during monitoring, you need not calibrate the scales that will not be used during that day's monitoring.
(iii) Verification that your monitoring equipment meets the requirements specified in Section 6.0 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. For purposes of instrument capability, the leak definition shall be 500 ppmv or greater methane using a FID-based instrument for valves and connectors and 2,000 ppmv methane or greater for pumps. If you wish to use an analyzer other than a FID-based instrument, you must develop a site-specific leak definition that would be equivalent to 500 ppmv methane using a FID-based instrument (e.g., 10.6 eV PID with a specified isobutylene concentration as the leak definition would provide equivalent response to your compound of interest).
(2) The instrument must be calibrated before use each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. At minimum, you must also conduct precision tests at the interval specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 8.1.2, and a calibration drift assessment at the end of each monitoring day. The calibration drift assessment must be conducted as specified in paragraph (b)(2)(i) of this section. Corrective action for drift assessments is specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii) and (iii) of this section.
(i) Check the instrument using the same calibration gas that was used to calibrate the instrument before use. Follow the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, Section 10.1, except do not adjust the meter readout to correspond to the calibration gas value. If multiple scales are used, record the instrument reading for each scale used. Divide the arithmetic difference of the initial and post-test calibration response by the corresponding calibration gas value for each scale and multiply by 100 to express the calibration drift as a percentage.
(ii) If a calibration drift assessment shows a negative drift of more than 10 percent, then all equipment with instrument readings between the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 minus the percent of negative drift) divided by 100 and the fugitive emission definition that was monitored since the last calibration must be re-monitored.
(iii) If any calibration drift assessment shows a positive drift of more than 10 percent from the initial calibration value, then, at the owner/operator's discretion, all equipment with instrument readings above the fugitive emission definition and below the fugitive emission definition multiplied by (100 plus the percent of positive drift) divided by 100 monitored since the last calibration may be re-monitored.
(c) You shall determine compliance with the no detectable emission standards in § 60.5401c(b) and (f) as specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section shall apply.
(2) Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part shall be used to determine the background level. All potential leak interfaces shall be traversed as close to the interface as possible. The arithmetic difference between the maximum concentration indicated by the instrument and the background level is compared with 500 ppmv for determining compliance.
(d) You shall demonstrate that a piece of equipment is in light liquid service by showing that all of the following conditions apply:
(1) The vapor pressure of one or more of the organic components is greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 °C (1.2 in. H2O at68 °F). Standard reference texts or ASTM D2879-83, -96, or -97 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) shall be used to determine the vapor pressures.
(2) The total concentration of the pure organic components having a vapor pressure greater than 0.3 kPa at 20 °C (1.2 in. H2O at 68 °F) is equal to or greater than 20 percent by weight.
(3) The fluid is a liquid at operating conditions.
(e) Samples used in conjunction with paragraphs (d) and (e) of this section shall be representative of the process fluid that is contained in or contacts the equipment, or the gas being combusted in the flare.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62924, Aug. 1, 2024]
Model Rule—Initial Compliance Requirements
§ 60.5410c How do I demonstrate initial compliance with the standards for each of my designated facilities?
(a) Gas well liquids unloading standards for well designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG standards for each gas well liquids unloading operation conducted at your well designated facility as required by § 60.5390c, you must comply with paragraphs (a)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable.
(1) You must submit the initial annual report for your well designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (2).
(2) If you comply by using a liquids unloading technology or technique that does not vent to the atmosphere according to § 60.5390c(a)(1), you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1)(i).
(3) If you comply by using a liquids unloading technology or technique that vents to the atmosphere according to § 60.5390c(a)(2), (b) and (c), you must comply with paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Employ best management practices to minimize venting of methane emissions as specified in § 60.5390c(c) for each gas well liquids unloading operation.
(ii) Maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1)(ii).
(4) If you comply by using § 60.5390c(g), you must comply with paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture all emissions and route all emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after the initial gas well liquids unloading operation or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e), and comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) Maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1)(iii), (c)(7), and (c)(9) through (12), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420c(b)(10) through (12), as applicable.
(b) Associated gas well standards for well designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG standards for each associated gas well as required by § 60.5391c, you must comply with paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) If you comply with the requirements of § 60.5391c(a), you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(2)(i) and (ii), as applicable, and submit the information required by § 60.5420c(b)(3)(i) through (v) in your initial annual report.
(2) If you comply with § 60.5391c(b) because you have demonstrated that annual methane emissions are 40 tons per year or less, you must document the calculation of annual methane emissions determined in accordance with § 60.5391c(e)(1) and submit them in the initial annual report as required by paragraph (b)(5) of this section, and comply with paragraphs (b)(4) of this section.
(3) If you comply with § 60.5391c(b) because you have demonstrated that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) due to technical reasons, document the initial demonstration and certification of the technical reason in accordance with § 60.5391c(b)(2), maintain the documentation in accordance with § 60.5391c(b)(2)(iv), and comply with paragraphs (b)(4) of this section. Submit this documentation in the initial annual report as required by paragraph (b)(5) of this section and comply with paragraph (b)(4) of this section.
(4) If you comply with § 60.5391c(b) or (c), you must comply with paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture the associated gas and route the captured associated gas to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) Maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(2)(ii) and (v) and (c)(7) and (9) through (12), as applicable.
(5) You must submit the initial annual report for your associated gas well at a well designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1), (3), and (10) through (12), as applicable.
(c) Centrifugal compressor designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG standards in § 60.5392c(a)(1) and (2) for your centrifugal compressors (including both wet seal centrifugal compressors and dry seal centrifugal compressors) that require volumetric flow rate measurements, you must comply with paragraphs (c)(1), (6), and (7) of this section. Alternatively, if you comply with the GHG standards for your wet seal and dry seal centrifugal compressor designated facility by reducing methane emissions from each centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system by 95.0 percent in accordance with § 60.5392c(a)(3) and (4), you must achieve initial compliance by complying with paragraphs (c)(2) through (7) of this section. If you comply with the GHG standards for your wet seal and dry seal centrifugal compressor designated facility by routing emissions from the wet seal fluid degassing system through a closed vent system to a process in accordance with § 60.5392c(a)(5), you must achieve initial compliance by complying with paragraphs (c)(2), (4), (6), and (7) of this section.
(1) You must maintain the volumetric flow rates for your centrifugal compressors as specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable. You must conduct your initial annual volumetric measurement as required by § 60.5392c(a)(1).
(i) For your wet seal centrifugal compressors (including self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressors), you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 3 scfm per seal.
(ii) For your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 9 scfm per seal.
(iii) For your dry seal compressor, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 10 scfm per seal.
(2) If you use a control device to reduce emissions to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(4) or route the emissions to a process to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(5), you must equip the wet seal fluid degassing system or dry seal system with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b) and route the captured vapors through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and is routed to a control device or process.
(3) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(4), you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(4) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(4) or comply with § 60.5392c(a)(5) by routing to a process, you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(5) If you use a control device to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(4), you must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(6) You must submit the initial annual report for your centrifugal compressor designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (4) and (b)(10) through (12), as applicable.
(7) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(3) and (c)(7) through (12), as applicable.
(d) Reciprocating compressor designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG standards for each reciprocating compressor designated facility as required by § 60.5393c, you must comply with paragraphs (d)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) If you comply with § 60.5393c(a) by maintaining volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm per cylinder (or a combined cylinder emission flow rate greater than the number of compression cylinders multiplied by 2 scfm) as required by § 60.5393c(a), you must maintain volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm and you must conduct your initial annual volumetric flow rate measurement as required by § 60.5393c(a)(1).
(2) If you comply with § 60.5393c by collecting the methane emissions from your reciprocating compressor rod packing using a rod packing emissions collection system to a process as required by § 60.5393c(d)(1), you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b), route emissions to a process through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c), and you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(3) If you comply with § 60.5393c(d) by collecting emissions from your rod packing emissions collection system by using a control device to reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent as required by § 60.5393c(d)(2), you must equip the reciprocating compressor with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b), route emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c through a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c), and you must conduct the initial inspections required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(4) If you comply with § 60.5393c(d)(2), you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(5) If you comply with § 60.5393c(d)(2), you must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(6) You must submit the initial annual report for your reciprocating compressor as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1), (5), and (10) through (12), as applicable.
(7) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(4) and (7) through (12), as applicable.
(e) Process controller designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with GHG emission standards for your process controller designated facility, you must comply with paragraphs (e)(1) through (5) of this section, as applicable. If you change compliance methods, you must also perform the applicable compliance demonstrations of paragraphs (e)(1) through (3) of this section again for the new compliance method, note the change in compliance method in the annual report required by § 60.5420c(b)(6)(iv), and maintain the records required by paragraph (e)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section, as applicable, for the new compliance method.
(1) For process controller designated facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5394c(a), you must demonstrate that your process controller designated facility does not emit any methane to the atmosphere by meeting the requirements of paragraphs (e)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, you must meet the requirements for closed vent systems specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(ii) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must conduct an initial no identifiable emissions inspection required by § 60.5416c(b).
(2) For each process controller designated facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power, you must demonstrate initial compliance with § 60.5394c(b)(1) and (2) or with § 60.5394c(b)(3), as an alternative to complying with paragraph § 60.5394c(a) by meeting the requirements specified in (e)(2)(i) through (v) of this section for each process controller, as applicable.
(i) For each process controller in the process controller designated facility operating with a bleed rate of less than or equal to 6 scfh, you must maintain records in accordance with § 60.5420c(c)(5)(iii)(A) that demonstrate the process controller is designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(ii) For each process controller in the process controller designated facility operating with a bleed rate greater than 6 scfh, you must maintain records that demonstrate that a controller with a higher bleed rate than 6 scfh is required based on a specific functional need for that controller as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(5)(iii)(B).
(iii) For each intermittent vent process controller in the process controller designated facility you must demonstrate that each intermittent vent controller does not emit to the atmosphere during idle periods by conducting initial monitoring in accordance with § 60.5394c(b)(2)(ii).
(iv) For each process controller designated facility that complies by reducing methane emissions from all controllers in the process controller designated facility by 95.0 percent in accordance with § 60.5394c(b)(3), you must comply with paragraphs (e)(2)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c.
(B) Route all process controller designated facility emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c through a closed vent system that meets the requirements specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(C) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e) and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(D) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(3) For each closed vent system used to comply with § 60.5394c, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (e)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c).
(ii) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(4) You must submit the initial annual report for your process controller designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (6).
(5) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(5).
(f) Pump designated facility. To demonstrate initial compliance with the GHG standards for your pump designated facility as required by § 60.5395c, you must comply with paragraphs (f)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable. If you change compliance methods, you must also perform the applicable compliance demonstrations of paragraphs (f)(1) and (2) of this section again for the new compliance method, note the change in compliance method in the annual report required by § 60.5420c(b)(9)(v), and maintain the records required by paragraph (f)(4) of this section for the new compliance method.
(1) For pump designated facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(a) or (b)(2) by routing emissions to a process, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(ii) and (iv) of this section. For pump designated facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(b)(3), you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from all pumps in the pump designated facility and route all emissions to a process or control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(iii) Conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e), and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(2) Submit the certifications specified in paragraphs (f)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) The certification required by § 60.5395c(b)(3) that there is no vapor recovery unit on site and that there is a control device on site, but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction.
(ii) The certification required by § 60.5395c(b)(4) that there is no control device or process available on site.
(iii) The certification required by § 60.5395c(b)(7)(i) that it is technically infeasible to capture and route the pump designated facility emissions to a process or an existing control device.
(3) You must submit the initial annual report for your pump designated facility as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (9) through (12), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain the records for your pump designated facility as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(7) and (9) through (12), as applicable, and (c)(14).
(g) Process unit equipment designated facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG standards for process unit equipment designated facilities as required by § 60.5400c, you must comply with paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) and (11) through (15) of this section, unless you meet and comply with the exception in § 60.5402c(b), (e), or (f) or meet the exemption in § 60.5402c(c). If you comply with the GHG standards for process unit equipment designated facilities using the alternative standards in § 60.5401c, you must comply with paragraphs (g)(5) through (15) of this section, unless you meet and comply with the exemption in § 60.5402c(b) or (c) or the exception in § 60.5402c(e) or (f).
(1) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service and connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5400c(b).
(2) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400c(c) for each pump in light liquid service.
(3) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400c(d) for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service.
(4) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5400c(e).
(5) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(b).
(6) You must conduct monitoring for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service as required by § 60.5401c(c).
(7) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5401c(d).
(8) You must conduct monitoring for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(f).
(9) You must conduct monitoring for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and each pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(g).
(10) You must conduct monitoring for each connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(h).
(11) For each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir to a process or a control device, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals to a process or a control device, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device to a process or a control device, you must meet the requirements of paragraph (g)(11)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) Reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c or route to a process.
(ii) Install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device and route all emissions to a process or to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c.
(iii) If routing to a control device, conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or by 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e), and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(iv) Conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(v) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(vi) Maintain the records as required by § 60.5420c(c)(7) and (c)(9) through (12), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420c(b)(10) through (12), as applicable.
(12) You must tag and repair each identified leak as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i), as applicable.
(13) You must submit the notice required by § 60.5420c(a)(2).
(14) You must submit the initial semiannual report and subsequent semiannual report as required by § 60.5422c.
(15) You must maintain the records specified by § 60.5421c.
(h) Storage vessel designated facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG standards for each storage vessel designated facility as required by § 60.5396c, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(1) through (9) of this section. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG standards for each storage vessel designated facility that complies by using a floating roof in accordance with § 60.5396c(b)(2), you must comply with paragraph (h)(1) and (10) of this section.
(1) You must determine the potential for methane emissions as specified in § 60.5386c(e)(2).
(2) You must reduce methane emissions by 95.0 percent or greater according to § 60.5396c(a) and as demonstrated by the requirements of § 60.5413c or route to a process.
(3) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must equip each storage vessel in the storage vessel designated facility with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b), install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from the storage vessel designated facility, and route all emissions to a control device that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5412c. If you route emissions to a process, you must equip each storage vessel in the storage vessel affected facility with a cover that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(b), install a closed vent system that meets the requirements of § 60.5411c(a) and (c) to capture all emissions from the storage vessel affected facility, and route all emissions to a process.
(4) If you use a control device to reduce emissions, you must conduct an initial performance test as required in § 60.5413c within 180 days after initial startup, or within 180 days 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), whichever date is later, or install a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e), and you must comply with the continuous compliance requirements of § 60.5415c(e).
(5) You must conduct the initial inspections of the closed vent system and bypasses, if applicable, as required in § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(6) You must install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) through (i), as applicable.
(7) You must maintain the records as required by § 60.5420c(c)(7) through (12), as applicable and submit the reports as required by § 60.5420c(b)(10) through (12), as applicable.
(8) You must submit the initial annual report for your storage vessel designated facility required by § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (7).
(9) You must maintain the records required for your storage vessel designated facility, as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(6) for each storage vessel designated facility.
(10) For each storage vessel designated facility that complies by using a floating roof, you must meet the requirements of § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2) and the relevant monitoring, inspection, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements in subpart Kb of this part. You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(d)(a)(1) or (2) in accordance with § 60.5396c(b)(2) with the initial annual report specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (7).
(i) Fugitive emission components designated facility. To achieve initial compliance with the GHG standards for fugitive emissions components designated facilities as required by § 60.5397c, you must comply with paragraphs (i)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must develop a fugitive emissions monitoring plan as required in § 60.5397c(b), (c), and (d).
(2) You must conduct an initial monitoring survey as required in § 60.5397c(e) and (f).
(3) You must repair each identified source of fugitive emissions for each designated facility as required in § 60.5397c(h).
(4) You must submit the initial annual report for each fugitive emissions components designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (8).
(5) You must maintain the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(13).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62925, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5411c What additional requirements must I meet to determine initial compliance for my covers and closed vent systems?
For each cover or closed vent system at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment designated facilities, you must comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section.
(a) Closed vent system requirements. (1) Reciprocating compressor rod packing, process controllers, and pumps. You must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a process.
(2) Associated gas wells, gas wells where liquids are being unloaded, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressor rod packing, process controllers in Alaska, pumps, storage vessels, and process unit equipment. You must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a process or a control device that meets the requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a) through (d) of this section. For pumps complying with § 60.5395c(b)(3), you must design the closed vent system to capture and route all gases, vapors, and fumes to a control device that meets the requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a) through (d) of this section.
(3) You must design and operate the closed vent system with no identifiable emissions as demonstrated by § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(4) For bypass devices, you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section if the closed vent system contains one or more bypass devices that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or fumes from entering the control device or being routed to a process.
(i) Except as provided in paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section, you must comply with either paragraph (a)(4)(i)(A) or (B) of this section for each bypass device.
(A) You must properly install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a flow indicator at the inlet to the bypass device. The flow indicator must be capable of taking periodic readings as specified in § 60.5416c(a)(4)(i) and sound an alarm, or initiate notification via remote alarm to the nearest field office, when the bypass device is open such that the stream is being, or could be, diverted away from the control device or process, and sent to the atmosphere. You must maintain records of each time the alarm is activated according to § 60.5420c(c)(9).
(B) You must secure the bypass device valve installed at the inlet to the bypass device in the non-diverting position using a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration.
(ii) Low leg drains, high point bleeds, analyzer vents, open-ended valves or lines, and safety devices are not subject to the requirements of paragraph (a)(4)(i) of this section.
(b) Cover requirements for storage vessels, centrifugal compressors, and reciprocating compressors. (1) The cover and all openings on the cover (e.g., access hatches, sampling ports, pressure relief devices and gauge wells) shall form a continuous impermeable barrier over the entire surface area of the liquid in the storage vessel or centrifugal compressor wet seal fluid degassing system, or reciprocating compressor rod packing emissions collection system.
(2) Each cover opening shall be secured in a closed, sealed position (e.g., covered by a gasketed lid or cap) whenever material is in the unit on which the cover is installed except during those times when it is necessary to use an opening as follows:
(i) To add material to, or remove material from the unit (this includes openings necessary to equalize or balance the internal pressure of the unit following changes in the level of the material in the unit);
(ii) To inspect or sample the material in the unit;
(iii) To inspect, maintain, repair, or replace equipment located inside the unit; or
(iv) To vent liquids, gases, or fumes from the unit through a closed vent system designed and operated in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (a) of this section to a control device or to a process.
(3) Each storage vessel thief hatch shall be equipped, maintained, and operated with a weighted mechanism or equivalent, to ensure that the lid remains properly seated and sealed under normal operating conditions, including such times when working, standing/breathing, and flash emissions may be generated. You must select gasket material for the hatch based on composition of the fluid in the storage vessel and weather conditions.
(4) You must design and operate the cover with no identifiable emissions as demonstrated by § 60.5416c(a) and (b), except when operated as provided in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(c) Design requirements. (1) You must conduct an assessment that the closed vent system is of sufficient design and capacity to ensure that all gases, vapors, and fumes from the designated facility are routed to the control device or process and that the control device or process is of sufficient design and capacity to accommodate all emissions from the designated facility. The assessment must be certified by a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer with expertise on the design and operation of the closed vent system in accordance with paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must provide the following certification, signed and dated by a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer: “I certify that the closed vent system design and capacity assessment was prepared under my direction or supervision. I further certify that the closed vent system design and capacity assessment was conducted, and this report was prepared pursuant to the requirements of subpart OOOOc of this part. Based on my professional knowledge and experience, and inquiry of personnel involved in the assessment, the certification submitted herein is true, accurate, and complete.”
(ii) The assessment shall be prepared under the direction or supervision of a qualified professional engineer or an in-house engineer who signs the certification in paragraph (c)(1)(i) of this section.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62928, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5412c What additional requirements must I meet for determining initial compliance of my control devices?
You must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section for each control device used to comply with the emissions standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facility. If you use a carbon adsorption system as a control device to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you also must meet the requirements in paragraph (c) of this section.
(a) Each control device used to meet the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5390c(g) for your well designated facility gas well that unloads liquids; § 60.5391c(b) or (c) for your well designated facility with associated gas; § 60.5392c(a)(4) for your centrifugal compressor designated facility; § 60.5393c(d)(2) for your reciprocating compressor designated facility; § 60.5396c(a)(2) for your storage vessel designated facility; § 60.5394c(b)(3) for your process controller designated facility in Alaska; § 60.5395c(b)(3) for your pumps designated facility; or either § 60.5400c(f) or § 60.5401c(e) for your process equipment designated facility must be installed according to paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section. As an alternative to paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section, you may install a control device model tested under § 60.5413c(d), which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and which meets the initial and continuous compliance requirements in § 60.5413c(e).
(1) Each enclosed combustion device (e.g., thermal vapor incinerator, catalytic vapor incinerator, boiler, or process heater) must be designed and operated in accordance with paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, meet one of the operating limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii) through (v) of this section, and except for boilers and process heaters meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(iii) of this section and catalytic vapor incinerators meeting the requirements of paragraph (a)(1)(v) of this section, meet the operating limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(vi) through (ix) of this section. Alternatively, the enclosed combustion device must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) You must reduce the mass content of methane in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater or reduce the concentration of total organic compounds (TOC) in the exhaust gases at the outlet to the device to a level equal to or less than 275 ppmv as propane on a wet basis corrected to 3 percent oxygen as determined in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(b), with the exceptions noted in § 60.5413c(a).
(ii) For an enclosed combustion device for which you demonstrate during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413c(b) that combustion zone temperature is an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must operate at or above the minimum temperature established during the most recent performance test. During the performance test conducted under § 60.5413c(b), you must continuously record the temperature of the combustion zone and average the temperature for each test run. The established minimum temperature limit is the average of the test run averages.
(iii) For an enclosed combustion device which is a boiler or process heater, you must introduce the vent stream into the flame zone of the boiler or process heater and introduce the vent stream with the primary fuel or use the vent stream as the primary fuel.
(iv) For an enclosed combustion device other than those meeting the operating limits in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii), (iii), and (v) of this section, you must maintain the net heating value (NHV) of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above the applicable limits specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) For enclosed combustion devices that do not use assist gas or pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, 200 British thermal units (Btu) per standard cubic foot (Btu/scf).
(B) For enclosed combustion devices that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, 800 Btu/scf.
(C) For steam-assisted and air-assisted enclosed combustion devices, 300 Btu/scf.
(v) For an enclosed combustion device which is a catalytic vapor incinerator, you must operate the catalytic vapor incinerator at or above the minimum temperature of the catalyst bed inlet and at or above the minimum temperature differential between the catalyst bed inlet and the catalyst bed outlet established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f) and as determined in your performance test conducted in accordance with § 60.5413c(b).
(vi) Unless you have an enclosed combustion device with pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, you must operate each enclosed combustion control device at or below the maximum inlet gas flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f) and as determined in your performance test conducted in accordance with § 60.5413c(b).
(vii) You must operate the combustion control device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f).
(viii) You must install and operate a continuous burning pilot or combustion flame. An alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(ix) You must operate the enclosed combustion device with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test using section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417c(h). Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All inspection, repair, and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection. Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part visual observation as described in this paragraph or be monitored according to § 60.5417c(h).
(2) Each vapor recovery device (e.g., carbon adsorption system or condenser) or other non-destructive control device must be designed and operated to reduce the mass content of methane in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater as determined in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(b). As an alternative to the performance testing requirements of § 60.5413c(b), you may demonstrate initial compliance by conducting a design analysis for vapor recovery devices according to the requirements of § 60.5413c(c). For a condenser, you also must calculate the daily average condenser outlet temperature in accordance with § 60.5417c(e), and you must determine the condenser efficiency for the current operating day using the daily average condenser outlet temperature and the condenser performance curve established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f)(2). You must determine the average TOC emission reduction in accordance with § 60.5415c(e)(1)(ix)(D). For a carbon adsorption system, you also must comply with paragraph (c) of this section.
(3) Each flare must be designed and operated according to the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through (vii) of this section, as applicable. Alternatively, flares must meet the requirements specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) For unassisted flares, you must maintain the NHV of the vent gas sent to the flare at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(ii) For flares that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, you must maintain the NHV of the vent gas sent to the flare at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(iii) For steam-assisted and air-assisted flares, you must maintain the NHV of the vent gas sent to the flare at or above 300 Btu/scf.
(iv) For flares other than pressure-assisted flares, you must determine the maximum flow rate of vent gas to the control system based on the design considerations of the designated facilities to demonstrate compliance with the flare tip velocity limits in § 60.18(b) according to § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iv). The maximum flare tip velocity limits do not apply for pressure-assisted flares.
(v) You must operate the flare at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The minimum inlet gas flow rate is established based on manufacturer recommendations.
(vi) You must operate the flare with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. You must conduct the compliance determination with the visible emission limits using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, or you must monitor the flare according to § 60.5417c(h).
(vii) You must install and operate a continuous burning pilot or combustion flame. An alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot flame is unlit.
(b) You must operate each control device installed on your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facility in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must operate each control device used to comply with this subpart at all times when gases, vapors, and fumes are vented from the designated facility through the closed vent system to the control device. You may vent more than one designated facility to a control device used to comply with this subpart.
(2) For each control device monitored in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5417c(a) through (i), you must demonstrate compliance according to the requirements of § 60.5415c(e), as applicable.
(c) For each carbon adsorption system used as a control device to meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(2) of this section, you must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section. If the carbon adsorption system is a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you also must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(2) of this section.
(1) You must manage the carbon in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) Following the initial startup of the control device, you must replace all carbon in the carbon adsorption system with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413c(c)(2) or (3). You must maintain records identifying the schedule for replacement and records of each carbon replacement as required in § 60.5420c(c)(10).
(ii) You must either regenerate, reactivate, or burn the spent carbon removed from the carbon adsorption system in one of the units specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(ii)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) Regenerate or reactivate the spent carbon in a unit for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 264, subpart X.
(B) Regenerate or reactivate the spent carbon in a unit equipped with an operating organic air emissions control in accordance with an emissions standard for VOC under another subpart in 40 CFR part 63 or this part.
(C) Burn the spent carbon in a hazardous waste incinerator for which the owner or operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE, and has submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j).
(D) Burn the spent carbon in a hazardous waste boiler or industrial furnace for which the owner or operator complies with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE, and has submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j).
(E) Burn the spent carbon in an industrial furnace for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 that implements the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
(F) Burn the spent carbon in an industrial furnace that you have designed and operated in accordance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H.
(2) You must comply with the requirements of paragraph (c)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section for each regenerative-type carbon adsorption system.
(i) You must measure and record the average total regeneration stream mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle to demonstrate compliance with the total regeneration stream flow established in accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2).
(ii) You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the flow continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion, if your continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor.
(iii) You must measure and record the average carbon bed temperature for the duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle and measure the actual carbon bed temperature after regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle. You must maintain the average carbon bed temperature above the temperature limit in established accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2) during the carbon bed steaming cycle and below the carbon bed temperature established in in accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2) after the regeneration cycle.
(d) To demonstrate that a flare or enclosed combustion device reduces methane in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater, as outlined in § 60.8(b), you may submit a request for an alternative test method. At a minimum, the request must follow the requirements outlined in paragraphs (d)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) The alternative method must be capable of demonstrating continuous compliance with a combustion efficiency of 95.0 percent or greater.
(2) The alternative method must be validated according to Method 301 in appendix A to 40 CFR part 63 for each type of control device covered by the alternative test method (e.g., air-assisted flare, unassisted enclosed combustion device) or the alternative test method must contain performance-based procedures and indicators to ensure self-validation.
(3) At a minimum the alternative test method must provide a reading for each successive 15-minute period.
(4) The alternative test method must be capable of documenting periods when the enclosed combustion device or flare operates with visible emissions. If the alternative test method cannot identify periods of visible emissions, you must conduct the inspections required by § 60.5417c(d)(8)(v).
(5) If the alternative test method demonstrates compliance with the metrics specified in paragraphs (d)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section instead of demonstrating continuous compliance with 95.0 percent or greater combustion efficiency, you must still install the pilot or combustion flame monitoring system required by § 60.5417c(d)(8)(i). If the alternative test method demonstrates continuous compliance with a combustion efficiency of 95.0 percent or greater, the requirement in § 60.5417c(d)(8)(i) no longer applies.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62928, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18113, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5413c What are the performance testing procedures for control devices?
This section applies to the performance testing of control devices used to demonstrate compliance with the emissions standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facilities. You must demonstrate that a control device achieves the performance requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(1) or (2) using the performance test methods and procedures specified in this section. For condensers and carbon adsorbers, you may use a design analysis as specified in paragraph (c) of this section in lieu of complying with paragraph (b) of this section. In addition, this section contains the requirements for enclosed combustion device performance tests conducted by the manufacturer applicable to well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facilities.
(a) Performance test exemptions. You are exempt from the requirements to conduct initial and periodic performance tests and design analyses if you use any of the control devices described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (6) of this section. You are exempt from the requirements to conduct an initial performance test if you use a control device described in paragraph (a)(7) of this section.
(1) A flare that is designed and operated in accordance with the requirements in § 60.5412c(a)(3). You must conduct the compliance determination using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part to determine visible emissions or monitor the flare according to § 60.5417c(h). The net heating value of the vent gas must be determined according to § 60.5417c(d)(8)(ii).
(2) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity of 44 megawatts or greater.
(3) A boiler or process heater into which the vent stream is introduced with the primary fuel or is used as the primary fuel.
(4) A boiler or process heater burning hazardous waste for which you have been issued a final permit under 40 CFR part 270 and comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; you have certified compliance with the interim status requirements of 40 CFR part 266, subpart H; you have submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) and comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE; or you comply with 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE, and will submit a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) by the date specified in § 60.5420c(b)(11) for submitting the initial performance test report.
(5) A hazardous waste incinerator for which you have submitted a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j), or for which you will submit a Notification of Compliance under 40 CFR 63.1207(j) by the date specified in § 60.5420c(b)(11) for submitting the initial performance test report, and you comply with the requirements of 40 CFR part 63, subpart EEE.
(6) A control device for which performance test is waived in accordance with § 60.8(b).
(7) A control device whose model can be demonstrated to meet the performance requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(1)(i) through a performance test conducted by the manufacturer, as specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(b) Test methods and procedures. You must use the test methods and procedures specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable, for each performance test conducted to demonstrate that a control device meets the requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(1) or (2). You must conduct the initial and periodic performance tests according to the schedule specified in paragraph (b)(5) of this section. Each performance test must consist of a minimum of 3 test runs. Each run must be at least 1 hour long.
(1) You must use Method 1 or 1A of appendix A-1 to this part, as appropriate, to select the sampling sites. Any references to particulate mentioned in Methods 1 and 1A do not apply to this section.
(i) Sampling sites must be located at the inlet of the first control device and at the outlet of the final control device to determine compliance with a control device percent reduction requirement.
(ii) The sampling site must be located at the outlet of the combustion device to determine compliance with a TOC exhaust gas concentration limit.
(2) You must determine the gas volumetric flow rate using Method 2, 2A, 2C, or 2D of appendix A-2 of this part, as appropriate.
(3) To determine compliance with the control device percent reduction performance requirement in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(i) or (a)(2), you must use Method 18 of appendix A-6 to this part, Method 320 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 63, or ASTM D6348-12e1(incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) to measure methane or Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part to measure TOC, as propane. You must use Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part to convert the Method 25A results to a dry basis. You must use the procedures in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section to calculate percent reduction efficiency.
(i) You must compute the mass rate of methane or TOC using the following equations:
Where:
Ei, Eo = Mass rate of methane or TOC at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, kilograms per hour.
K2 = Constant, 2.494 × 10−6 (parts per million) (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) (kilogram/gram) (minute/hour), where standard temperature (gram-mole per standard cubic meter) is 20° degrees Celsius.
Ci, Co = Concentration of methane of the gas stream as measured by Method 18 of appendix A-6, Method 320 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 63, or ASTM D6348-12e1 or TOC, as propane, of the gas stream as measured by Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry basis, parts per million by volume.
Mp = Molecular weight of methane, if using Method 18 of appendix A-6 to this part, Method 320 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 63, or ASTM D6348-12e1, 16.04 gram/gram-mole. Molecular weight of propane, if using Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part, 44.1 gram/gram-mole.
Qi, Qo = Flow rate of gas stream at the inlet and outlet of the control device, respectively, dry standard cubic meter per minute.
(ii) You must calculate the percent reduction in TOC as follows:
Where:
Rcd = Control efficiency of control device, percent.
Ei = Mass rate of methane or TOC at the inlet to the control device as calculated under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, kilograms per hour.
Eo = Mass rate of methane or TOC at the outlet of the control device, as calculated under paragraph (b)(3)(i) of this section, kilograms per hour.
(iii) If the vent stream entering a boiler or process heater with a design capacity less than 44 megawatts is introduced with the combustion air or as a secondary fuel, you must determine the weight-percent reduction of methane across the device by comparing the methane in all combusted vent streams and primary and secondary fuels with the methane exiting the device, respectively.
(4) You must use Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part to measure TOC, as propane, to determine compliance with the TOC exhaust gas concentration limit specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(i). You must determine the concentration in parts per million by volume on a wet basis and correct it to 3 percent oxygen. You must use the emission rate correction factor for excess air, integrated sampling and analysis procedures of Method 3A or 3B of appendix A-2 to this part, ASTM D6522-20, or ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (both incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) to determine the oxygen concentration. The samples must be taken during the same time that the samples are taken for determining TOC concentration. You must correct the TOC concentration for percent oxygen as follows:
Where:
Cc = TOC concentration, as propane, corrected to 3 percent oxygen, parts per million by volume on a wet basis.
Cm = TOC concentration, as propane, parts per million by volume on a wet basis.
%O2m = Concentration of oxygen, percent by volume as measured, wet.
(5) You must conduct performance tests according to the schedule specified in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) You must conduct an initial performance test within 180 days after initial startup for your designated facility. You must submit the performance test results as required in § 60.5420c(b)(11).
(ii) You must conduct periodic performance tests for all control devices required to conduct initial performance tests. You must conduct the first periodic performance test no later than 60 months after the initial performance test required in paragraph (b)(5)(i) of this section. You must conduct subsequent periodic performance tests at intervals no longer than 60 months following the previous periodic performance test or whenever you desire to establish a new operating limit. If a control device is not operational at the time a performance test is due, you must conduct the performance test no later than 30 calendar days after returning the control device to service. You must submit the periodic performance test results as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(11).
(iii) If the initial performance test was conducted by the manufacturer under paragraph (d) of this section, you must conduct the first periodic performance test no later than 60 months after initial installation and startup of the control device. You must conduct subsequent periodic performance tests at intervals no longer than 60 months following the previous periodic performance test. If a control device is not operational at the time a performance test is due, you must conduct the performance test no later than 30 calendar days after returning the control device to service. You must submit the periodic performance test results as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(11).
(c) Control device design analysis to meet the requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(2). (1) For a condenser, the design analysis must include an analysis of the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity, and temperature and must establish the design outlet organic compound concentration level, design average temperature of the condenser exhaust vent stream and the design average temperatures of the coolant fluid at the condenser inlet and outlet.
(2) For a regenerable carbon adsorption system, the design analysis shall include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity and temperature and shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level, adsorption cycle time, number and capacity of carbon beds, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon beds, design total regeneration stream flow over the period of each complete carbon bed regeneration cycle, design carbon bed temperature after regeneration, design carbon bed regeneration time and design service life of the carbon.
(3) For a nonregenerable carbon adsorption system, such as a carbon canister, the design analysis shall include the vent stream composition, constituent concentrations, flow rate, relative humidity and temperature and shall establish the design exhaust vent stream organic compound concentration level, capacity of the carbon bed, type and working capacity of activated carbon used for the carbon bed and design carbon replacement interval based on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source operating schedule. In addition, these systems shall incorporate dual carbon canisters in case of emission breakthrough occurring in one canister.
(4) If you and the Administrator do not agree on a demonstration of control device performance using a design analysis, then you must perform a performance test in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (b) of this section to resolve the disagreement. The Administrator may choose to have an authorized representative observe the performance test.
(d) Performance testing for combustion control devices—manufacturers' performance test. (1) This paragraph (d) applies to the performance testing of a combustion control device conducted by the device manufacturer. The manufacturer must demonstrate that a specific model of control device achieves the performance requirements in paragraph (d)(11) of this section by conducting a performance test as specified in paragraphs (d)(2) through (10) of this section. You must submit a test report for each combustion control device in accordance with the requirements in paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(2) Performance testing must consist of three 1-hour (or longer) test runs for each of the four firing rate settings specified in paragraphs (d)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section, making a total of 12 test runs per test. Propene (propylene) gas must be used for the testing fuel. All fuel analyses must be performed by an independent third-party laboratory (not affiliated with the control device manufacturer or fuel supplier).
(i) 90-100 percent of maximum design rate (fixed rate).
(ii) 70-100-70 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at 70 percent of the maximum design rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 100 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 100 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10 to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to 70 percent of the maximum design rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(iii) 30-70-30 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at 30 percent of the maximum design rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 70 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 70 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10 to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to 30 percent of the maximum design rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(iv) 0-30-0 percent (ramp up, ramp down). Begin the test at the minimum firing rate. During the first 5 minutes, incrementally ramp the firing rate to 30 percent of the maximum design rate. Hold at 30 percent for 5 minutes. In the 10 to 15-minute time range, incrementally ramp back down to the minimum firing rate. Repeat three more times for a total of 60 minutes of sampling.
(3) All models employing multiple enclosures must be tested simultaneously and with all burners operational. Results must be reported for each enclosure individually and for the average of the emissions from all interconnected combustion enclosures/chambers. Control device operating data must be collected continuously throughout the performance test using an electronic Data Acquisition System. A graphic presentation or strip chart of the control device operating data and emissions test data must be included in the test report in accordance with paragraph (d)(12) of this section. Inlet fuel meter data may be manually recorded provided that all inlet fuel data readings are included in the final report.
(4) Inlet testing must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(4)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) The inlet gas flow metering system must be located in accordance with Method 2A of appendix A-1 to this part (or other approved procedure) to measure inlet gas flow rate at the control device inlet location. You must position the fitting for filling fuel sample containers a minimum of eight pipe diameters upstream of any inlet gas flow monitoring meter.
(ii) Inlet flow rate must be determined using Method 2A of appendix A-1 to this part. Record the start and stop reading for each 60-minute THC test. Record the gas pressure and temperature at 5-minute intervals throughout each 60-minute test.
(5) Inlet gas sampling must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) At the inlet gas sampling location, securely connect a fused silica-coated stainless steel evacuated canister fitted with a flow controller sufficient to fill the canister over a 3-hour period. Filling must be conducted as specified in paragraphs (d)(5)(i)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) Open the canister sampling valve at the beginning of each test run and close the canister at the end of each test run.
(B) Fill one canister across the three test runs such that one composite fuel sample exists for each test condition.
(C) Label the canisters individually and record sample information on a chain of custody form.
(ii) Analyze each inlet gas sample using the methods in paragraphs (d)(5)(ii)(A) through (C) of this section. You must include the results in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(A) Hydrocarbon compounds containing between one and five atoms of carbon plus benzene using ASTM D1945-03(R2010) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(B) Hydrogen (H2), carbon monoxide (CO), carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), oxygen (O2) using ASTM D1945-03(R2010) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(C) Higher heating value using ASTM D3588-98(R2003) or ASTM D4891-89(R2006) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(6) Outlet testing must be conducted in accordance with the criteria in paragraphs (d)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) Sample and flow rate must be measured in accordance with paragraphs (d)(6)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) The outlet sampling location must be a minimum of four equivalent stack diameters downstream from the highest peak flame or any other flow disturbance, and a minimum of one equivalent stack diameter upstream of the exit or any other flow disturbance. A minimum of two sample ports must be used.
(B) Flow rate must be measured using Method 1 of appendix A-1 to this part for determining flow measurement traverse point location, and Method 2 of appendix A-1 to this part for measuring duct velocity. If low flow conditions are encountered (i.e., velocity pressure differentials less than 0.05 inches of water) during the performance test, a more sensitive manometer must be used to obtain an accurate flow profile.
(ii) Molecular weight and excess air must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(7) of this section.
(iii) Carbon monoxide must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(8) of this section.
(iv) THC must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(9) of this section.
(v) Visible emissions must be determined as specified in paragraph (d)(10) of this section.
(7) Molecular weight and excess air determination must be performed as specified in paragraphs (d)(7)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) An integrated bag sample must be collected during the moisture test required by Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part following the procedure specified in (d)(7)(i)(A) and (B) of this section. Analyze the bag sample using a gas chromatograph-thermal conductivity detector (GC-TCD) analysis meeting the criteria in paragraphs (d)(7)(i)(C) and (D) of this section.
(A) Collect the integrated sample throughout the entire test and collect representative volumes from each traverse location.
(B) Purge the sampling line with stack gas before opening the valve and beginning to fill the bag. Clearly label each bag and record sample information on a chain of custody form.
(C) The bag contents must be vigorously mixed prior to the gas chromatograph analysis.
(D) The GC-TCD calibration procedure in Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part must be modified as follows: For the initial calibration, triplicate injections of any single concentration must agree within 5 percent of their mean to be valid. The calibration response factor for a single concentration re-check must be within 10 percent of the original calibration response factor for that concentration. If this criterion is not met, repeat the initial calibration using at least three concentration levels.
(ii) Calculate and report the molecular weight of oxygen, carbon dioxide, methane and nitrogen in the integrated bag sample and include in the test report specified in paragraph (d)(12) of this section. Moisture must be determined using Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part. Traverse both ports with the sampling train required by Method 4 of appendix A-3 to this part during each test run. Ambient air must not be introduced into the integrated bag sample required by Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part during the port change.
(iii) Excess air must be determined using resultant data from the Method 3C tests and Method 3B of appendix A-2 to this part, equation 3B-1, or ANSI/ASME PTC 19.10-1981, Part 10 (manual portion only) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(8) Carbon monoxide must be determined using Method 10 of appendix A-4 of this part. Run the test simultaneously with Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part using the same sampling points. An instrument range of 0-10 parts per million by volume-dry (ppmvd) is recommended.
(9) Total hydrocarbon determination must be performed as specified by in paragraphs (d)(9)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Conduct THC sampling using Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part, except that the option for locating the probe in the center 10 percent of the stack is not allowed. The THC probe must be traversed to 16.7 percent, 50 percent, and 83.3 percent of the stack diameter during each test run.
(ii) A valid test must consist of three Method 25A tests, each no less than 60 minutes in duration.
(iii) A 0 to 10 parts per million by volume-wet (ppmvw) (as propane) measurement range is preferred; as an alternative a 0 to 30 ppmvw (as propane) measurement range may be used.
(iv) Calibration gases must be propane in air and be certified through EPA-600/R-12/531—“EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards,” (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(v) THC measurements must be reported in terms of ppmvw as propane.
(vi) THC results must be corrected to 3 percent CO2, as measured by Method 3C of appendix A-2 to this part. You must use the following equation for this diluent concentration correction:
Where:
Cmeas = The measured concentration of the pollutant.
CO2meas = The measured concentration of the CO2 diluent.
3 = The corrected reference concentration of CO2 diluent.
Ccorr = The corrected concentration of the pollutant.
(vii) Subtraction of methane or ethane from the THC data is not allowed in determining results.
(10) Visible emissions must be determined using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part. The test must be performed continuously during each test run. A digital color photograph of the exhaust point, taken from the position of the observer and annotated with date and time, must be taken once per test run and the 12 photos included in the test report specified in paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(11) For performance test criteria:
(i) The control device model tested must meet the criteria in paragraphs (d)(11)(i)(A) through (D) of this section. These criteria must be reported in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(A) Results from Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part determined under paragraph (d)(10) of this section with no indication of visible emissions.
(B) Average results from Method 25A of appendix A-7 to this part determined under paragraph (d)(9) of this section equal to or less than 10.0 ppmvw THC as propane corrected to 3.0 percent CO2.
(C) Average CO emissions determined under paragraph (d)(8) of this section equal to or less than 10 parts ppmvd, corrected to 3.0 percent CO2.
(D) Excess air determined under paragraph (d)(7) of this section equal to or greater than 150 percent.
(ii) The manufacturer must determine a minimum inlet gas flow rate above which each control device model must be operated to achieve the criteria in paragraph (d)(11)(iii) of this section. The manufacturer must determine a maximum inlet gas flow rate which must not be exceeded for each control device model to achieve the criteria in paragraph (d)(11)(iii) of this section. The minimum and maximum inlet gas flow rate must be included in the test report required by paragraph (d)(12) of this section.
(iii) A manufacturer must demonstrate a destruction efficiency of at least 95.0 percent for THC, as propane. A control device model that demonstrates a destruction efficiency of 95.0 percent for THC, as propane, will meet the control requirement for 95.0 percent destruction of methane required under this subpart.
(12) The owner or operator of a combustion control device model tested under this paragraph (d)(12) must submit the information listed in paragraphs (d)(12)(i) through (vi) of this section for each test run in the test report required by this section in accordance with § 60.5420c(b)(12). Owners or operators who claim that any of the performance test information being submitted is confidential business information (CBI) must submit a complete file including information claimed to be CBI to the OAQPS CBI office. The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov and should include clear CBI markings and be flagged to the attention of the Leader, Measurement Policy Group. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link. If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer and Measurement Policy Group Leader, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, North Carolina 27711. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope. The same file with the CBI omitted must be submitted to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV.
(i) A full schematic of the control device and dimensions of the device components.
(ii) The maximum net heating value of the device.
(iii) The test fuel gas flow range (in both mass and volume). Include the minimum and maximum allowable inlet gas flow rate.
(iv) The air/stream injection/assist ranges, if used.
(v) The test conditions listed in paragraphs (d)(12)(v)(A) through (O) of this section, as applicable for the tested model.
(A) Fuel gas delivery pressure and temperature.
(B) Fuel gas moisture range.
(C) Purge gas usage range.
(D) Condensate (liquid fuel) separation range.
(E) Combustion zone temperature range. This is required for all devices that measure this parameter.
(F) Excess air range.
(G) Flame arrestor(s).
(H) Burner manifold.
(I) Continuous pilot flame indicator.
(J) Pilot flame design fuel and calculated or measured fuel usage.
(K) Tip velocity range.
(L) Momentum flux ratio.
(M) Exit temperature range.
(N) Exit flow rate.
(O) Wind velocity and direction.
(vi) The test report must include all calibration quality assurance/quality control data, calibration gas values, gas cylinder certification, strip charts, or other graphic presentations of the data annotated with test times and calibration values.
(e) Initial and continuous compliance for combustion control devices tested by the manufacturer in accordance with paragraph (d) of this section. This paragraph (e) applies to the demonstration of compliance for a combustion control device tested under the provisions in paragraph (d) of this section. Owners or operators must demonstrate that a control device achieves the performance criteria in paragraph (d)(11) of this section by installing a device tested under paragraph (d) of this section, complying with the criteria specified in paragraphs (e)(1) through (10) of this section, maintaining the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(10) and submitting the report specified in § 60.5420c(b)(10)(v) and (b)(12).
(1) The inlet gas flow rate must be equal to or greater than the minimum inlet gas flow rate and equal to or less than the maximum inlet gas flow rate specified by the manufacturer.
(2) A pilot or combustion flame must be present at all times of operation. An alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(3) Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test conducted according to section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417c(h).
(4) Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All repairs and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection.
(5) Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a visual observation according to Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part as described in paragraph (e)(3) of this section or be monitored according to § 60.5417c(h).
(6) If the owner or operator operates a combustion control device model tested under this section, an electronic copy of the performance test results required by this section shall be submitted via email to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV unless the test results for that model of combustion control device are posted at the following website: https://www.epa.gov/controlling-air-pollution-oil-and-natural-gas-industry.
(7) Ensure that each enclosed combustion device is maintained in a leak free condition.
(8) Operate each control device following the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures, and maintenance schedule to ensure good air pollution control practices for minimizing emissions.
(9) Install and operate the continuous parameter monitoring systems in accordance with § 60.5417c(a) and (c) through (i).
(10) Comply with the applicable NHV limit specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(iv).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62920, Aug. 1, 2024]
Model Rule—Continuous Compliance Requirements
§ 60.5415c How do I demonstrate continuous compliance with the standards for each of my designated facilities?
(a) Gas well liquids unloading standards for well designated facility. For each well liquids unloading operation at your well designated facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5390c by submitting the annual report information specified in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (2) and maintaining the records for each well liquids unloading event that vents to the atmosphere as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(1). For each gas well liquids unloading well designated facility that complies with the requirements of § 60.5390c(g), you must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416c. You also must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section and maintain the reports in § 60.5420c(b)(10)(i) through (iv) and maintain the records in § 60.5420c(c)(7), (9), and (11).
(b) Associated gas well standards for well designated facility. For each associated gas well at your well designated facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5391c by submitting the reports required by § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (3) and maintaining the records specified in § 60.5420c(c)(2). For each associated gas well at your well designated facility that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) or (c), you must route emissions to a control device through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416c. You must also comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section and maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(7), (9) and (11) of this section.
(c) Centrifugal compressor designated facility. For each centrifugal compressor designated facility complying with the volumetric flow rate measurements requirements in § 60.5392c(a)(1) and (2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (c)(1), (3), and (4) of this section. Alternatively, for each centrifugal compressor designated facility complying with § 60.5392c(a)(3) and either § 60.5392c(a)(4) or (5) by routing emissions to a control device or to a process, you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (c)(2) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must maintain volumetric flow rate at or below the volumetric flow rates specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section for your centrifugal compressor, as applicable, and you must conduct the required volumetric flow rate measurement of your dry or wet seal in accordance with § 60.5392c(a)(1) and (2) on or before 8,760 hours of operation after your last volumetric flow rate measurement which demonstrates compliance with the applicable volumetric flow rate.
(i) For your wet seal centrifugal compressors (including self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressors), you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 3 scfm per seal (or in the case of manifolded groups of seals, 3 scfm multiplied by the number of seals).
(ii) For your Alaska North Slope centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 9 scfm per seal (or in the case of manifolded groups of wet seals, 9 scfm multiplied by the number of seals).
(iii) For your dry seal compressor, you must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 10 scfm per seal (or in the case of manifolded groups of wet seals, 10 scfm multiplied by the number of seals).
(2) For each wet seal and dry seal centrifugal compressor designated facility complying by routing emissions to a control device or to a process, you must operate the wet seal emissions collection system and dry seal system to route emissions to a control device or a process through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416c. If you comply with § 60.5392c(a)(4) by using a control device, you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section.
(3) You must submit the annual reports as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1), (4) and (10)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain records as required in § 60.5420c(c)(3) and (7) through (9) and (11), as applicable.
(d) Pump designated facility. To demonstrate continuous compliance with the GHG standards for your pump designated facility as required by § 60.5395c, you must comply with paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) For pump designated facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(a) by routing emissions to a process and for pump designated facilities complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(b)(2) or (3), you must continuously comply with the closed vent system requirements of § 60.5416c. If you comply with § 60.5395c(b)(3), you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section.
(2) You must submit the annual reports for your pump designated facility as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (9) and (b)(10)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(3) You must maintain the records for your pump designated facility as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(7), (9), (11), and (14), as applicable.
(e) Additional continuous compliance requirements for well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controllers in Alaska, storage vessel, process unit equipment, or pump designated facilities. For each associated gas well at your well designated facility, each gas well liquids unloading operation at your well designated facility, each centrifugal compressor designated facility, each reciprocating compressor designated facility, each process controller designated facility in Alaska, each storage vessel designated facility, each process unit equipment designated facility, and each pump designated facility referenced to this paragraph from paragraph (a), (b), (c)(2), (d)(1), (f)(2), (g)(2), (h)(5)(ii)(B), or (i)(12) of this section, you must also install monitoring systems as specified in § 60.5417c, demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraph (e)(1) of this section, maintain the records in paragraph (e)(2) of this section, and comply with the reporting requirements specified in paragraph (e)(3) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate continuous compliance with the control device performance requirements of § 60.5412c(a) using the procedures specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section and conducting the monitoring as required by § 60.5417c. If you use a condenser as the control device to achieve the requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(2), you may demonstrate compliance according to paragraph (e)(1)(ix) of this section. You may switch between compliance with paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section and compliance with paragraph (e)(1)(ix) of this section only after at least 1 year of operation in compliance with the selected approach. You must provide notification of such a change in the compliance method in the next annual report, following the change. If you use an enclosed combustion device or a flare as the control device, you must also conduct the monitoring required in paragraph (e)(1)(x) of this section. If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), you must use the procedures in paragraph (e)(1)(xi) of this section in lieu of the procedures in paragraphs (e)(1)(i) through (viii) of this section, but you must still conduct the monitoring required in paragraph (e)(1)(x) of this section.
(i) You must operate below (or above) the site-specific maximum (or minimum) parameter value established according to the requirements of § 60.5417c(f)(1). For flares, you must operate above the limits specified in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(B) of this section.
(ii) You must calculate the average of the applicable monitored parameter in accordance with § 60.5417c(e).
(iii) Compliance with the operating parameter limit is achieved when the average of the monitoring parameter value calculated under paragraph (e)(1)(ii) of this section is either equal to or greater than the minimum parameter value or equal to or less than the maximum parameter value established under paragraph (e)(1)(i) of this section. When performance testing of a combustion control device is conducted by the device manufacturer as specified in § 60.5413c(d), compliance with the operating parameter limit is achieved when the criteria in § 60.5413c(e) are met.
(iv) You must operate the continuous monitoring system required in § 60.5417c(a) at all times the affected source is operating, except for periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities (including, as applicable, system accuracy audits and required zero and span adjustments). A monitoring system malfunction is any sudden, infrequent, not reasonably preventable failure of the monitoring system to provide valid data. Monitoring system failures that are caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions. You are required to complete monitoring system repairs in response to monitoring system malfunctions and to return the monitoring system to operation as expeditiously as practicable.
(v) You may not use data recorded during monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions, or required monitoring system quality assurance or control activities in calculations used to report emissions or operating levels. You must use all the data collected during all other required data collection periods to assess the operation of the control device and associated control system.
(vi) Failure to collect required data is a deviation of the monitoring requirements.
(vii) If you use an enclosed combustion device to meet the requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(1) and you demonstrate compliance using the test procedures specified in § 60.5413c(b), or you use a flare designed and operated in accordance with § 60.5412c(a)(3), you must comply with the applicable requirements in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) For each enclosed combustion device which is not a catalytic vapor incinerator and for each flare, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(A)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) A pilot or combustion flame must be present at all times of operation. An alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit.
(2) Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period. A visible emissions test conducted according to section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, must be performed at least once every calendar month, separated by at least 15 days between each test. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less. Alternatively, you may conduct visible emissions monitoring according to § 60.5417c(h).
(3) Devices failing the visible emissions test must follow manufacturer's repair instructions, if available, or best combustion engineering practice as outlined in the unit inspection and maintenance plan, to return the unit to compliant operation. All repairs and maintenance activities for each unit must be recorded in a maintenance and repair log and must be available for inspection.
(4) Following return to operation from maintenance or repair activity, each device must pass a Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part visual observation as described in paragraph (e)(1)(vii)(D) of this section or be monitored according to § 60.5417c(h).
(B) For flares, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(B)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) For unassisted flares, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the flare at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(2) If you use a pressure assisted flare, maintain the NHV of gas sent to the flare at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(3) For steam-assisted and air-assisted flares, maintain the NHV of gas sent to the flare at or above 300 Btu/scf.
(4) Unless you use a pressure-assisted flare, maintain the flare tip velocity below the applicable limits in § 60.18(b).
(5) Maintain the total gas flow to the flare above the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The minimum inlet gas flow rate is established based on manufacturer recommendations.
(C) For enclosed combustion devices for which, during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413c(b), the combustion zone temperature is not an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(C)(1) through (4) of this section, as applicable.
(1) Maintain the total gas flow to the enclosed combustion device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate and at or below the maximum inlet flow rate for the enclosed combustion device established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f).
(2) For unassisted enclosed combustion devices, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above 200 Btu/scf.
(3) For enclosed combustion devices that use pressure-assisted burner tips to promote mixing at the burner tip, maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device at or above 800 Btu/scf.
(4) For steam-assisted and air-assisted enclosed combustion devices, maintain the NHV-of gas sent to the flare at or above 300 Btu/scf.
(D) For enclosed combustion devices for which, during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413c(b), the combustion zone temperature is demonstrated to be an indicator of destruction efficiency, you must comply with the requirements in paragraphs (e)(1)(vii)(D)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Maintain the temperature at or above the minimum temperature established during the most recent performance test. The minimum temperature limit established during the most recent performance test is the average temperature recorded during each test run, averaged across the 3 test runs (average of the test run averages).
(2) Maintain the total gas flow to the enclosed combustion device at or above the minimum inlet gas flow rate and at or below the maximum inlet flow rate for the enclosed combustion device established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f).
(E) For catalytic vapor incinerators you must operate the catalytic vapor incinerator at or above the minimum temperature of the catalyst bed inlet and at or above the minimum temperature differential between the catalyst bed inlet and the catalyst bed outlet established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f).
(viii) If you use a carbon adsorption system as the control device to meet the requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(2), you must demonstrate compliance by the procedures in paragraphs (e)(1)(viii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) If you use a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must comply with paragraphs (e)(1)(viii)(A)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must maintain the average regenerative mass flow or volumetric flow to the carbon adsorber during each bed regeneration cycle above the limit established in in accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2).
(2) You must maintain the average carbon bed temperature above the temperature limit established in accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2) during the carbon bed steaming cycle and below the carbon bed temperature established in in accordance with § 60.5413c(c)(2) after the regeneration cycle.
(3) You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion if your continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor.
(4) You must replace all carbon in the carbon adsorption system with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413c(c)(2).
(B) If you use a nonregenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must replace all carbon in the control device with fresh carbon on a regular, predetermined time interval that is no longer than the carbon service life established according to § 60.5413c(c)(3).
(ix) If you use a condenser as the control device to achieve the percent reduction performance requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(2), you must demonstrate compliance using the procedures in paragraphs (e)(1)(ix)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) You must establish a site-specific condenser performance curve according to § 60.5417c(f)(2).
(B) You must calculate the daily average condenser outlet temperature in accordance with § 60.5417c(e).
(C) You must determine the condenser efficiency for the current operating day using the daily average condenser outlet temperature calculated under paragraph (e)(1)(ix)(B) of this section and the condenser performance curve established under paragraph (e)(1)(ix)(A) of this section.
(D) Except as provided in paragraphs (e)(1)(ix)(D)(1) and (2) of this section, at the end of each operating day, you must calculate the 365-day rolling average TOC emission reduction, as appropriate, from the condenser efficiencies as determined in paragraph (e)(1)(ix)(C) of this section.
(1) After the compliance dates specified in § 60.5387c, if you have less than 120 days of data for determining average TOC emission reduction, you must calculate the average TOC emission reduction for the first 120 days of operation after the compliance date. You have demonstrated compliance with the overall 95.0 percent reduction requirement if the 120-day average TOC emission reduction is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(2) After 120 days and no more than 364 days of operation after the compliance date specified in § 60.5387c, you must calculate the average TOC emission reduction as the TOC emission reduction averaged over the number of days between the current day and the applicable compliance date. You have demonstrated compliance with the overall 95.0 percent reduction requirement if the average TOC emission reduction is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(E) If you have data for 365 days or more of operation, you have demonstrated compliance with the TOC emission reduction if the rolling 365-day average TOC emission reduction calculated in paragraph (e)(1)(ix)(D) of this section is equal to or greater than 95.0 percent.
(x) During each inspection conducted using an OGI camera under § 60.5397c and during each periodic screening event or each inspection conducted using an OGI camera under § 60.5398c, you must observe each enclosed combustion device and flare to determine if it is operating properly. You must determine whether there is a flame present and whether any uncontrolled emissions from the control device are visible with the OGI camera or the technique used to conduct the periodic screening event. During each inspection conducted under § 60.5397c using AVO, you must observe each enclosed combustion device and flare to determine if it is operating properly. Visually confirm that the pilot or combustion flame is lit and that the pilot or combustion flame is operating properly.
(xi) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), you must comply with paragraphs (e)(1)(xi)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) You must maintain the combustion efficiency at or above 95.0 percent.
(B) You must calculate the value of the applicable monitored metric(s) in accordance with the approved alternative test method. Compliance with the limit is achieved when the calculated values are within the range specified in paragraph (e)(1)(xi)(A) of this section.
(C) You must conduct monitoring using the alternative test method at all times the affected source is operating, except for periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities (including, as applicable, system accuracy audits and required zero and span adjustments). A monitoring system malfunction is any sudden, infrequent, not reasonably preventable failure of the monitoring system to provide valid data. Monitoring system failures that are caused in part by poor maintenance or careless operation are not malfunctions. You are required to complete monitoring system repairs in response to monitoring system malfunctions and to return the monitoring system to operation as expeditiously as practicable.
(D) You may not use data recorded during monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions, or required monitoring system quality assurance or control activities in calculations used to report values to demonstrate compliance with the limits specified in paragraph (e)(1)(xi)(A) of this section. You must use all the data collected during all other required data collection periods to assess the operation of the control device and associated control system.
(E) Failure to collect required data is a deviation of the monitoring requirements.
(2) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(10) and (12).
(3) You must comply with the reporting requirements in § 60.5420c(b)(10) through (12).
(f) Reciprocating compressor designated facility. For each reciprocating compressor designated facility complying with § 60.5393c(a) through (c), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (f)(1), (3), (5), and (6) of this section. For each reciprocating compressor designated facility complying with § 60.5393c(d)(1) or (2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (f)(2), (5), and (6) of this section. For each reciprocating compressor affected facility complying with § 60.5393c(d)(3), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (f)(3) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must maintain the volumetric flow rate at or below 2 scfm per cylinder (or at or below the combined volumetric flow rate determined by multiplying the number of cylinders by 2 scfm), and you must conduct the required volumetric flow rate measurement of your reciprocating compressor rod packing vents in accordance with § 60.5393c(b) or (c) on or before 8,760 hours of operation after your last volumetric flow rate measurement which demonstrated compliance with the applicable volumetric flow rate.
(2) You must operate the rod packing emissions collection system to route emissions to a control device or to a process through a closed vent system and continuously comply with the cover and closed vent requirements of § 60.5416c. If you comply with § 60.5393c(d) by using a control device, you also must comply with the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section.
(3) You must continuously monitor the number of hours of operation for each reciprocating compressor affected facility since initial startup, since 60 days after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), since the previous flow rate measurement, or since the date of the most recent reciprocating compressor rod packing replacement, whichever date is latest.
(4) You must replace the reciprocating compressor rod packing on or before the total number of hours of operation reaches 8,760 hours.
(5) You must submit the annual reports as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (5) and (b)(10)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(6) You must maintain records as required in § 60.5420c(c)(4), (7) through (9), and (11), as applicable.
(g) Process controller designated facility. To demonstrate continuous compliance with GHG emission standards for your process controller designated facility as required by § 60.5394c, you must comply with the paragraphs (g)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate that your process controller designated facility does not emit any methane to the atmosphere by meeting the requirements of paragraphs (g)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) If you comply by routing the emissions to a process, you must comply with the closed vent system inspection and monitoring requirements of § 60.5416c.
(ii) If you comply by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must conduct the no identifiable emissions inspections required by § 60.5416c(b).
(2) For each process controller designated facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power, and that complies by reducing methane emissions from all controllers in the process controller designated facility by 95.0 percent in accordance with § 60.5494c(b)(3), you must comply with comply with the closed vent requirements of § 60.5416c and the requirements in paragraph (e) of this section for the control device.
(3) You must submit the annual report for your process controller as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1), (6), and (10) through (12), as applicable.
(4) You must maintain the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(5), (7), (9), and (11) for each process controller designated facility, as applicable.
(h) Storage vessel designated facility. For each storage vessel designated facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5396c according to paragraphs (h)(1) through (10) of this section, as applicable.
(1) For each storage vessel designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5396c(a)(2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraphs (h)(5) and (9) and (10) of this section.
(2) For each storage vessel designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5396c(a)(3), you must demonstrate continuous compliance according to paragraph (h)(2)(i), (ii), or (iii) of this section, as applicable, and paragraphs (h)(9) and (10) of this section.
(i) You must maintain the uncontrolled actual methane emissions from the storage vessel designated facility at less than 14 tpy.
(ii) You must comply with paragraph (h)(5) of this section as soon as liquids from the well are routed to the storage vessel designated facility following fracturing or refracturing according to the requirements of § 60.5396c(a)(3)(i).
(iii) You must comply with paragraph (h)(5) of this section within 30 days of the monthly determination according to the requirements of § 60.5396c(a)(3)(ii), where the monthly emissions determination indicates that methane emissions from your storage vessel designated facility increase to 14 tpy or greater and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel designated facility.
(3) For each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility removed from service, you must demonstrate compliance with the requirements of § 60.5396c(c)(1) or (2) by complying with paragraphs (h)(6), (7), (9), and (10) of this section.
(4) For each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility returned to service, you must demonstrate compliance with the requirements of § 60.5396c(c)(3) and (4) by complying with paragraphs (h)(8) through (10) of this section.
(5) For each storage vessel designated facility, you must comply with paragraphs (h)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) You must reduce methane emissions as specified in § 60.5396c(a)(2).
(ii) For each control device installed to meet the requirements of § 60.5396c(a)(2), you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the performance requirements of § 60.5412c for each storage vessel designated facility using the procedure specified in paragraphs (h)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section. When routing emissions to a process, you must demonstrate continuous compliance as specified in paragraph (h)(5)(ii)(A) of this section.
(A) You must comply with § 60.5416c for each cover and closed vent system.
(B) You must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
(6) You must completely empty and degas each storage vessel, such that each storage vessel no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. For a portion of a storage vessel designated facility to be removed from service, you must completely empty and degas the storage vessel(s), such that the storage vessel(s) no longer contains crude oil, condensate, produced water or intermediate hydrocarbon liquids. A storage vessel where liquid is left on walls, as bottom clingage or in pools due to floor irregularity is considered to be completely empty.
(7) You must disconnect the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery by isolating the storage vessel(s) from the tank battery such that the storage vessel(s) is no longer manifolded to the tank battery by liquid or vapor transfer.
(8) You must determine the designated facility status of a storage vessel returned to service as provided in § 60.5386c(e)(5).
(9) You must submit the annual reports as required by § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (7) and (b)(10)(i) through (iv).
(10) You must maintain the records as required by § 60.5420c(c)(6) through (9) and (11), as applicable.
(i) Process unit equipment designated facility. For each process unit equipment designated facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5400c according to paragraphs (i)(1) through (4) and (11) through (15) of this section, unless you meet and comply with the exception in § 60.5402c(b), (e), or (f) or meet the exemption in § 60.5402c(c). Alternatively, if you comply with the GHG standards for process unit designated facilities using the standards in § 60.5401c, you must comply with paragraphs (i)(5) through (15) of this section, unless you meet the exemption in § 60.5402c(b) or (c) or the exception in § 60.5402c(e) and (f).
(1) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service, pressure relief device in gas/vapor service, valve in gas/vapor and light liquid service and connector in gas/vapor and light liquid service as required by § 60.5400c(b).
(2) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400c(c) for each pump in light liquid service.
(3) You must conduct monitoring as required by § 60.5400c(d) for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service.
(4) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5400c(e).
(5) You must conduct monitoring for each pump in light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(b).
(6) You must conduct monitoring for each pressure relief device in gas/vapor service as required by § 60.5401c(c).
(7) You must comply with the equipment requirements for each open-ended valve or line as required by § 60.5401c(d).
(8) You must conduct monitoring for each valve in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(f).
(9) You must conduct monitoring for each pump, valve, and connector in heavy liquid service and each pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(g).
(10) You must conduct monitoring for each connector in gas/vapor or light liquid service as required by § 60.5401c(h).
(11) You must collect emissions and meet the closed vent system requirements as required by § 60.5416c for each pump equipped with a dual mechanical seal system that degasses the barrier fluid reservoir to a process or a control device, each pump which captures and transports leakage from the seal or seals to a process or control device, or each pressure relief device which captures and transports leakage through the pressure relief device to a process or control device.
(12) You must comply with the requirements specified in paragraph (e) of this section.
(13) You must tag and repair each identified leak as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i), as applicable.
(14) You must submit semiannual reports as required by § 60.5422c and the annual reports in § 60.5420c(b)(10)(i) through (iv), as applicable.
(15) You must maintain the records specified by § 60.5420c(c)(7), (9), and (11) as applicable and § 60.5421c.
(j) Continuous compliance. For each fugitive emissions components designated facility, you must demonstrate continuous compliance with the requirements of § 60.5397c(a) according to paragraphs (j)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must conduct periodic monitoring surveys as required in § 60.5397c(e) and (g).
(2) You must repair each identified source of fugitive emissions as required in § 60.5397c(h).
(3) You must submit annual reports for fugitive emissions components designated facilities as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (8).
(4) You must maintain records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(13).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62929, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18113, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5416c What are the initial and continuous cover and closed vent system inspection and monitoring requirements?
For each closed vent system and cover at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment designated facilities, you must comply with the applicable requirements of paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section. Each self-contained natural gas process controller must comply with paragraph (b) of this section.
(a) Inspections for closed vent systems, covers, and bypass devices. If you install a control device or route emissions to a process, you must inspect each closed vent system according to the procedures and schedule specified in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section, inspect each cover according to the procedures and schedule specified in paragraph (a)(3) of this section, and inspect each bypass device according to the procedures of paragraph (a)(4) of this section, except as provided in paragraphs (b)(7) and (8) of this section.
(1) For each closed vent system joint, seam, or other connection that is permanently or semi-permanently sealed (e.g., a welded joint between two sections of hard piping or a bolted and gasketed ducting flange), you must meet the requirements specified in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) Conduct an initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that the closed vent system operates with no identifiable emissions within the first 30 calendar days after routing emissions through the closed vent system.
(ii) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in piping; loose connections; liquid leaks; or broken or missing caps or other closure devices. You must monitor a component or connection using the test methods and procedures in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that it operates with no identifiable emissions following any time the component is repaired or replaced or the connection is unsealed.
(iii) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at the same type of site as specified in § 60.5397c(g). Process unit equipment designated facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
(2) For closed vent system components other than those specified in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a)(2)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Conduct an initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section within the first 30 calendars days after routing emissions through the closed vent system to demonstrate that the closed vent system operates with no identifiable emissions.
(ii) Conduct inspections according to the test methods, procedures, and frequencies specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that the components or connections operate with no identifiable emissions.
(iii) Conduct annual visual inspections for defects that could result in air emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in ductwork; loose connections; liquid leaks; or broken or missing caps or other closure devices. You must monitor a component or connection using the test methods and procedures in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that it operates with no identifiable emissions following any time the component is repaired or replaced or the connection is unsealed.
(iv) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397c(g). Process unit equipment designated facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(2)(iii) of this section.
(3) For each cover, you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) Conduct the inspections specified in paragraphs (a)(3)(ii) through (iv) of this section to identify defects that could result in air emissions and to ensure the cover operates with no identifiable emissions. Defects include, but are not limited to, visible cracks, holes, or gaps in the cover, or between the cover and the separator wall; broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged seals or gaskets on closure devices; and broken or missing hatches, access covers, caps, or other closure devices. In the case where the storage vessel is buried partially or entirely underground, you must inspect only those portions of the cover that extend to or above the ground surface, and those connections that are on such portions of the cover (e.g., fill ports, access hatches, gauge wells, etc.) and can be opened to the atmosphere.
(ii) An initial inspection according to the test methods and procedures specified in paragraph (b) of this section, following installation of the cover to demonstrate that each cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(iii) Conduct AVO inspections in accordance with and at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at the same type of site as specified in § 60.5397b(g). Process unit equipment designated facilities must conduct annual AVO inspections concurrent with the inspections required by paragraph (a)(1)(ii) of this section.
(iv) Inspections according to the test methods, procedures, and schedules specified in paragraph (b) of this section to demonstrate that each cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(4) For each bypass device, except as provided for in § 60.5411c(a)(4)(ii), you must meet the requirements of paragraph (a)(4)(i) or (ii) of this section.
(i) Set the flow indicator to take a reading at least once every 15 minutes at the inlet to the bypass device that could divert the stream away from the control device and to the atmosphere.
(ii) If the bypass device valve installed at the inlet to the bypass device is secured in the non-diverting position using a car-seal or a lock-and-key type configuration, visually inspect the seal or closure mechanism at least once every month to verify that the valve is maintained in the non-diverting position and the vent stream is not diverted through the bypass device.
(b) No identifiable emissions test methods and procedures. If you are required to conduct an inspection of a closed vent system and cover as specified in paragraph (a)(1), (2), or (3) of this section or § 60.5398c(b), you must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1) through (9) of this section. You must meet the requirements of paragraphs (b)(1), (2), (4), and (9) of this section for each self-contained process controller at your process controller designated facility as specified at § 60.5394c(a)(2).
(1) Initial and periodic inspection. You must conduct initial and periodic no identifiable emissions inspections as specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) You must conduct inspections for no identifiable emissions from your closed vent systems and covers at your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, or storage vessel designated facility, using the procedures for conducting OGI inspections in § 60.5397c(c)(7). As an alternative you may conduct inspections in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part. Monitoring must be conducted at the same frequency as specified for fugitive emissions components designated facilities located at the same type of site, as specified in § 60.5397c(g).
(ii) For closed vent systems and covers located at onshore natural gas processing plants, OGI inspections for no identifiable emissions must be conducted initially and bimonthly in accordance with appendix K to this part. As an alternative you must conduct quarterly inspections for no identifiable emissions in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iii) For your self-contained process controller, you must conduct initial and quarterly inspections for no identifiable emissions using the procedures for conducting OGI inspections in § 60.5397c(c)(7). As an alternative you may conduct quarterly inspections in accordance with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(2) OGI inspection. Where OGI is used, the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if no emissions are imaged during the inspection. Emissions imaged by OGI constitute a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an OGI inspection conducted in accordance with this paragraph (b)(2) of this section determines that the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller, as applicable, operates with no identifiable emissions.
(3) AVO inspection. Where AVO inspections are required, the closed vent system or cover is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if no emissions are detected by AVO. Emissions detected by AVO constitute a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an AVO inspection determines that the closed vent system or cover operates with no identifiable emissions.
(4) Method 21 inspection. Where Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used for the inspection, the requirements of paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (vii) of this section apply.
(i) The detection instrument must meet the performance criteria of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, except that the instrument response factor criteria in section 8.1.1 of Method 21 must be for the average composition of the fluid and not for each individual organic compound in the stream.
(ii) You must calibrate the detection instrument before use on each day of its use by the procedures specified in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(iii) Calibration gases must be as specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Zero air (less than 10 parts per million by volume hydrocarbon in air).
(B) A mixture of methane in air at a concentration less than 500 ppmv.
(iv) You may choose to adjust or not adjust the detection instrument readings to account for the background organic concentration level. If you choose to adjust the instrument readings for the background level, you must determine the background level value according to the procedures in Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(v) Your detection instrument must meet the performance criteria specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Except as provided in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(B) of this section, the detection instrument must meet the performance criteria of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part, except the instrument response factor criteria in section 8.1.1 of Method 21 must be for the average composition of the process fluid, not each individual volatile organic compound in the stream. For process streams that contain nitrogen, air, or other inerts that are not organic hazardous air pollutants or volatile organic compounds, you must calculate the average stream response factor on an inert-free basis.
(B) If no instrument is available that will meet the performance criteria specified in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section, you may adjust the instrument readings by multiplying by the average response factor of the process fluid, calculated on an inert-free basis, as described in paragraph (b)(4)(v)(A) of this section.
(vi) You must determine if a potential leak interface operates with no identifiable emissions, as applicable, using the applicable procedure specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vi)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) If you choose not to adjust the detection instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, then you must directly compare the maximum organic concentration value measured by the detection instrument to the applicable value for the potential leak interface as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vii) of this section.
(B) If you choose to adjust the detection instrument readings for the background organic concentration level, you must compare the value of the arithmetic difference between the maximum organic concentration value measured by the instrument and the background organic concentration value as determined in paragraph (b)(4)(iv) of this section with the applicable value for the potential leak interface as specified in paragraph (b)(4)(vii) of this section.
(vii) A closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller is determined to operate with no identifiable emissions if the organic concentration value determined in paragraph (b)(4)(vi) of this section is less than 500 ppmv. An organic concentration value determined in paragraph (b)(4)(vi) of this section of greater than or equal to 500 ppmv constitutes a deviation of the no identifiable emissions standard until an inspection conducted in accordance with this paragraph (b)(4) of this section determines that the closed vent system, cover, or self-contained process controller, as applicable, operates with no identifiable emissions.
(5) Repairs. Whenever emissions or a defect is detected, you must repair the emissions or defect as soon as practicable according to the requirements of paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iii) of this section, except as provided in paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(i) A first attempt at repair must be made no later than 5 calendar days after the emissions or defect is detected.
(ii) Repair must be completed no later than 30 calendar days after the emissions or defect is detected.
(iii) For covers, grease or another substance compatible with the gasket material must be applied to deteriorating or cracked gaskets to improve the seal while awaiting repair.
(6) Delay of repair. Delay of repair of a closed vent system or cover for which emissions or defects have been detected is allowed if the repair is technically infeasible without a shutdown, or if you determine that emissions resulting from immediate repair would be greater than the emissions likely to result from delay of repair. You must complete repair of such equipment by the end of the next shutdown.
(7) Unsafe to inspect requirements. You may designate any parts of the closed vent system or cover as unsafe to inspect if the requirements of paragraphs (b)(7)(i) and (ii) of this section are met. Unsafe to inspect parts are exempt from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(i) You determine that the equipment is unsafe to inspect because inspecting personnel would be exposed to an imminent or potential danger as a consequence of complying with paragraphs (a)(1), (2), or (3) of this section.
(ii) You have a written plan that requires inspection of the equipment as frequently as practicable during safe-to-inspect times.
(8) Difficult to inspect requirements. You may designate any parts of the closed vent system or cover as difficult to inspect if the requirements of paragraphs (b)(8)(i) and (ii) of this section are met. Difficult to inspect parts are exempt from the inspection requirements of paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section.
(i) You determine that the equipment cannot be inspected without elevating the inspecting personnel more than 2 meters above a support surface.
(ii) You have a written plan that requires inspection of the equipment at least once every 5 years.
(9) Records and reports. You must maintain records of all inspection results as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(7) through (9). You must submit the reports as specified in § 60.5420c(b)(10).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62934, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5417c What are the continuous monitoring requirements for my control devices?
You must meet the requirements of this section to demonstrate continuous compliance for each control device used to meet emission standards for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment designated facilities.
(a) For each control device used to comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5391c(b) for well designated facilities, § 60.5392c(a)(3) for centrifugal compressor designated facilities, § 60.5393c(d)(2) for reciprocating compressor designated facilities, § 60.5394c(b)(3) for your process controller designated facility in Alaska, § 60.5395c(b)(1) for your pumps designated facility, § 60.5396c(a)(2) for your storage vessel designated facility, or either § 60.5400c(f) or § 60.5401c(e) for your process equipment designated facility, you must install and operate a continuous parameter monitoring system for each control device as specified in paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section, except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section. If you install and operate a flare in accordance with § 60.5412c(a)(3), you are exempt from the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section. If you operate an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), you must operate the control device as specified in paragraph (i) of this section instead of using the procedures specified in paragraphs (c) through (h) of this section. You must keep records and report in accordance with paragraph (j) of this section.
(b) You are exempt from the monitoring requirements specified in paragraphs (c) through (g) of this section for the control devices listed in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) A boiler or process heater in which all vent streams are introduced with the primary fuel or are used as the primary fuel.
(2) A boiler or process heater with a design heat input capacity equal to or greater than 44 megawatts.
(c) You must meet the specifications and requirements of paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) Except for continuous parameter monitoring systems used to detect the presence of a pilot or combustion flame, each continuous parameter monitoring system must measure data values at least once every hour and record the values for each parameter as required in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) or (ii) of this section. Continuous parameter monitoring systems used to detect the presence of a pilot or combustion flame must record a reading at least once every 5 minutes.
(i) Each measured data value.
(ii) Each block average value for each 1-hour period or shorter periods calculated from all measured data values during each period.
(2) You must prepare a monitoring plan that covers each control device for designated facilities within each company-defined area. The monitoring plan must address the monitoring system design, data collection, and the quality assurance and quality control elements outlined in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) through (v) of this section. You must install, calibrate, operate, and maintain each continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with the procedures in your monitoring plan. Heat sensing monitoring devices that indicate the continuous ignition of a pilot or combustion flame are exempt from the calibration, quality assurance and quality control requirements of this section.
(i) The performance criteria and design specifications for the monitoring system equipment, including the sample interface, detector signal analyzer, and data acquisition and calculations.
(ii) Sampling interface (e.g., thermocouple) location such that the monitoring system will provide representative measurements.
(iii) Equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, or other audit procedures.
(iv) Ongoing operation and maintenance procedures in accordance with provisions in § 60.13(b).
(v) Ongoing recordkeeping procedures in accordance with provisions in § 60.7(f).
(3) You must conduct the continuous parameter monitoring system equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, or other audit procedures specified in the monitoring plan at least once every 12 months.
(4) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with the monitoring plan. Heat sensing monitoring devices that indicate the continuous ignition of a pilot or combustion flame are exempt from the calibration, quality assurance and quality control requirements of this section.
(d) You must install, calibrate, operate, and maintain a device equipped with a continuous recorder to measure the values of operating parameters appropriate for the control device as specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section, as applicable. Instead of complying with the requirements in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section, you may install an organic monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder that measures the concentration level of organic compounds in the exhaust vent stream from the control device to demonstrate compliance with the applicable performance requirement specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1). The monitor must meet the requirements of Performance Specification 8 or 9 of appendix B to this part. You must install, calibrate, and maintain the monitor according to the manufacturer's specifications and the requirements in Performance Specification 8 or 9. You may also request approval from the Administrator to monitor different operating parameters than those specified in paragraphs (d)(1) through (8) of this section in accordance with § 60.13(i).
(1) For an enclosed combustion device that demonstrates during the performance test conducted under § 60.5413c(b) that combustion zone temperature is an accurate indicator of performance, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location representative of the combustion zone temperature. You must also comply with the requirements of paragraphs (d)(8)(i), (iv), and (v) of this section.
(2) For a catalytic vapor incinerator, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The device must be capable of monitoring temperature at two locations and have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install one temperature sensor in the vent stream at the nearest feasible point to the catalyst bed inlet, and you must install a second temperature sensor in the vent stream at the nearest feasible point to the catalyst bed outlet.
(3) For a boiler or process heater, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location representative of the combustion zone temperature.
(4) For a condenser, a temperature monitoring device equipped with a continuous recorder. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater. You must install the temperature sensor at a location in the exhaust vent stream from the condenser.
(5) For a regenerative-type carbon adsorption system, a continuous monitoring system that meets the specifications in paragraphs (d)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section. You also must monitor the design carbon service life established using a design analysis performed as specified in § 60.5413c(c)(2).
(i) The continuous parameter monitoring system must measure and record the average total regeneration stream mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle. The flow sensor must have a measurement sensitivity of 5 percent of the flow rate or 10 cubic feet per minute, whichever is greater. You must check the mechanical connections for leakage at least every month, and you must perform a visual inspection at least every 3 months of all components of the flow continuous parameter monitoring system for physical and operational integrity and all electrical connections for oxidation and galvanic corrosion if your flow continuous parameter monitoring system is not equipped with a redundant flow sensor; and
(ii) The continuous parameter monitoring system must measure and record the average carbon bed temperature for the duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle and measure the actual carbon bed temperature after regeneration and within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle. The temperature monitoring device must have a minimum accuracy of ±1 percent of the temperature being monitored in degrees Celsius, or ±2.5 °C, whichever value is greater.
(6) For a nonregenerative-type carbon adsorption system, you must monitor the design carbon replacement interval established using a design analysis performed as specified in § 60.5413c(c)(3). The design carbon replacement interval must be based on the total carbon working capacity of the control device and source operating schedule.
(7) For a combustion control device whose model is tested under § 60.5413c(d), continuous monitoring systems as specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) through (iv) and (vi) of this section and visible emission observations conducted as specified in paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section.
(8) For an enclosed combustion device, other than those listed in paragraphs (d)(1) through (3) and (7) of this section, or for a flare, continuous monitoring systems as specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section and visible emission observations conducted as specified in paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section.
(i) Continuously monitor at least once every five minutes for the presence of a pilot flame or combustion flame using a device (including, but not limited to, a thermocouple, ultraviolet beam sensor, or infrared sensor) capable of detecting that the pilot or combustion flame is present at all times. An alert must be sent to the nearest control room whenever the pilot or combustion flame is unlit. Continuous monitoring systems used for the presence of a pilot flame or combustion flame are not subject to a minimum accuracy requirement beyond being able to detect the presence or absence of a flame and are exempt from the calibration requirements of this section.
(ii) Except as provided in this paragraph (d)(8)(ii) and paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section, use one of the following methods to continuously determine the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare at standard conditions. Except for pressure assisted flares and pressure assisted enclosed combustion devices, if the inlet gas stream to the flare or enclosed combustion device does not include streams from processes or equipment where inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream are added (e.g., vent streams from acid gas removal (AGR) system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers without water removal, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams containing water or CO2 used for enhanced oil recovery, vent streams from storage vessels with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV, vent streams from gas plants that receive acid gas from sweetening units, and vent streams from nitrogen removal units (NRU)), the NHV of the inlet stream is considered to be sufficiently above the minimum required NHV for the inlet gas, and you are not required to conduct the continuous monitoring in this paragraph (d)(8)(ii) or the demonstration in paragraph (d)(8)(iii) of this section, but you must submit the report in § 60.5420c(b)(10)(v)(I) and maintain the record in § 60.5420c(c)(10)(vi) indicating that the flare or enclosed combustion device does not receive inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream.
(A) A calorimeter with a minimum accuracy of ±2 percent of span.
(B) A gas chromatograph that meets the requirements in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(B)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You must follow the procedure in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B to this part, except that a single daily mid-level calibration check can be used (rather than triplicate analysis), the multi-point calibration can be conducted quarterly (rather than monthly), and the sampling line temperature must be maintained at a minimum temperature of 60 °C (rather than 120 °C). Calibration gas cylinders must be certified to an accuracy of 2 percent and traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards.
(2) You must meet the accuracy requirements in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B to this part.
(3) You must use a calibration gas or multiple gases that includes the compounds that are reasonably expected to be present in the flare gas stream. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. You may only use the compounds used to calibrate the gas chromatograph in the calculation of the vent gas NHV.
(4) In lieu of the calibration gas described in paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(B)(3) of this section, you may use a surrogate calibration gas consisting of hydrogen and C1 through C5 normal hydrocarbons. All of the calibration gases may be combined in one cylinder. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. Use the response factor for the nearest normal hydrocarbon (i.e., n-alkane) in the calibration mixture to quantify unknown components detected in the analysis. Use the response factor for n-pentane to quantify unknown components detected in the analysis that elute after n-pentane.
(5) To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use any published values for the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere and use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(C) A mass spectrometer that meets the requirements in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(C)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must meet applicable requirements in Performance Specification 9 of appendix B of this part for continuous monitoring system acceptance including, but not limited to, performing an initial multi-point calibration check at three concentrations following the procedure in Section 10.1. A single daily mid-level calibration check can be used (rather than triplicate analysis), the multi-point calibration can be conducted quarterly (rather than monthly), and the sampling line temperature must be maintained at a minimum temperature of 60 °C (rather than 120 °C). Calibration gas cylinders must be certified to an accuracy of 2 percent and traceable to NIST standards.
(2) The average instrument calibration error (CE) for each calibration compound at any calibration concentration must not differ by more than 10 percent from the certified cylinder gas value. The CE for each component in the calibration blend must be calculated using the following equation:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(C)(2)
Where:
Cm = Average instrument response (ppm).
Ca = Certified cylinder gas value (ppm).
(3) You must use a calibration gas or multiple gases that includes the compounds that are reasonably expected to be present in the flare gas stream. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. You may only use the compounds used to calibrate the mass spectrometer in the calculation of the vent gas NHV.
(4) In lieu of the calibration gas described in paragraph (d)(8)(ii)(C)(3) of this section, you may use a surrogate calibration gas consisting of hydrogen and C1 through C5 normal hydrocarbons. All of the calibration gases may be combined in one cylinder. If multiple calibration gases are necessary to cover all compounds, you must calibrate the instrument on all of the gases. For unknown gas components that have similar analytical mass fragments to calibration compounds, you may report the unknowns as an increase in the overlapped calibration gas compound. For unknown compounds that produce mass fragments that do not overlap calibration compounds, you may use the response factor for the nearest molecular weight hydrocarbon in the calibration mix to quantify the unknown component. You may use the response factor for n-pentane to quantify any unknown components detected with a higher molecular weight than n-pentane.
(5) You must perform an initial calibration to identify mass fragment overlap and response factors for the target compounds.
(6) To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use any published value for the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(D) A grab sampling system capable of collecting an evacuated canister sample for subsequent compositional analysis at least once every eight hours. Subsequent compositional analysis of the samples must be performed according to ASTM D1945-14 (R2019) or alternatively GPA 2261-19 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). To determine the NHV of the vent gas, determine the product of the volume fraction of the individual component in the vent gas and the net heating value of that individual component. Sum the products for all components in the vent gas to determine the NHV for the vent gas. For the net heating value of each individual component, use the net heating value per mole at 25 °C and 1 atmosphere use 20 °C as the standard temperature for determining the volume corresponding to one mole of vent gas.
(iii) As an alternative to the continuous composition monitoring requirements in paragraph (d)(8)(ii) of this section, a sampling demonstration may be used as specified in this paragraph. Flares or enclosed combustion devices that are not required to monitor flare gas composition because the inlet gas streams to the flare or enclosed combustion device does not include streams from processes or equipment where inert gas or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream are added (e.g., vent streams from acid gas removal (AGR) system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers without water removal, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams containing water or CO2 used for enhanced oil recovery, vent streams from storage vessels with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV, vent streams from gas plants that receive acid gas from sweetening units, and vent streams from nitrogen removal units (NRU)), are not required to conduct sampling demonstrations specified in this paragraph. For flare or enclosed combustion device, if you demonstrate according to the methods described in paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (F) of this section that the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare consistently exceeds the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B) or (C), continuous monitoring of the NHV is not required, but you must conduct the ongoing sampling in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(G) of this section. For an unassisted or pressure-assisted flare or enclosed combustion device, in lieu of conducting the demonstration outlined in paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section, you may conduct the demonstration outlined in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(H) of this section, but you must still comply with paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(E) through (G) of this section.
(A) Continuously monitor the inlet stream which is routed to the flare or enclosed combustor for 14 operating days or collect a sample of the inlet gas which is routed to the enclosed combustion device or flare twice daily to determine the average NHV of the gas stream for 14 operating days with no sampling day to be spaced more than 3 operating days apart from the previous sampling day. If you do not continuously monitor the NHV, the minimum time of collection for each individual sample be at least one hour when technically feasible. When it is not technically feasible to collect individual samples for at least one hour (e.g., low or intermittent flow), the collection time must be as long as possible up to one hour. For samples taken during low or intermittent flow events, the collection time and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample must be documented and reported with the NHV sampling results. Samples must be separated by at least 6 hours. If inlet gas flow is intermittent such that there are not at least 28 samples over the 14 operating day period, you must continue to collect samples of the inlet gas beyond the 14 operating day period until you collect a minimum of 28 samples.
(B) If you collect samples twice per day, count the number of samples where the NHV value is less than 1.2 times the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B) or (C) (i.e., values that are less than 240, 360, or 960 Btu/scf, as applicable) during the sample collection period in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section.
(C) If you continuously sample the inlet stream for 14 days, count the number of hourly block average (e.g., noon to 1 p.m., 1 p.m. to 2 p.m., etc.) NHV values that are less than the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B) or (C), (i.e., values that are less than 200, 300, or 800 Btu/scf, as applicable), during the sample collection period in paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section.
(D) If there are no samples counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(B) of this section or there are no hourly values counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(C) of this section, the gas stream is considered to consistently exceed the applicable NHV operating limit and on-going continuous monitoring is not required.
(E) If process operations are revised that could reduce the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare, such as the removal or addition of process equipment, and at any time the Administrator requires, re-evaluation of the gas stream must be performed according to paragraphs (d)(8)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days of the revisions to process operations to ensure the gas stream still consistently exceeds the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B) or (C), or this paragraph (d)(8)(iii). If any of the samples counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(B) of this section or any hourly values counted under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(C) of this section are less than the limits in the respective paragraph you must conduct the continuous monitoring required by one of the options specified in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days of the re-evaluation of the gas stream.
(F) When collecting samples under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section, the owner or operator must account for any sources of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream (e.g., vent streams from AGR system amine regenerator still columns, vent streams from glycol dehydrator unit reboilers, vent streams from compressors in acid gas service, vent streams from enhanced oil recovery facilities, or vent streams from storage vessel with high water content where the owner or operator has determined that the vent stream could cause the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare to not meet the minimum NHV) that can be sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare. The owner or operator must document in the report in § 60.5420c(b)(10)(v)(I) and the records in § 60.5420c(c)(10)(vi) must note the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, and whether the sampling included periods where the highest percentage of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream were sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare. If the introduction of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream is intermittent and does not occur during the initial demonstration, the introduction of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream will be considered a revision to process operations that triggers a re-evaluation under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(E) of this section. If conditions at the site did not allow sampling during periods where the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream was at the highest percentage possible, increasing the percentage of inerts will be considered a revision to process operations that triggers a re-evaluation under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(E).
(G) You must collect three samples of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare at least once every 5 years. The minimum time of collection for each individual sample must be at least one hour when technically feasible. When it is not technically feasible to collect individual samples for at least one hour (e.g., low or intermittent flow), the collection time must be as long as possible up to one hour. For samples taken during low or intermittent flow events, the collection time and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample must be documented and reported with the NHV sampling results. The samples must be taken during the period with the lowest expected NHV (i.e., the period with the highest percentage of inerts or other vent gas streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream). The first set of periodic samples must be taken, or continuous monitoring commenced, no later than 60 calendar months following the last sample taken under paragraph (d)(8)(iii)(A) of this section. Subsequent periodic samples must be taken, or continuous monitoring commenced, no later than 60 calendar months following the previous sample. If any sample has an NHV value less than 1.2 times the applicable operating limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B) or (C) (i.e., values that are less than 240, 360, or 960 Btu/scf, as applicable), you must conduct the continuous monitoring required by one of the options in paragraphs (d)(8)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section within 60 days or receipt of the last sample.
(H) You may request an alternative test method under § 60.5412c(d) to demonstrate that the flare or enclosed combustion device reduces methane and VOC in the gases vented to the device by 95.0 percent by weight or greater. You must measure data values at the frequency specified in the alternative test method and conduct the quality assurance and quality control requirements outlined in the alternative test method at the frequency outlined in the alternative test method. You must monitor the combustion efficiency of the flare continuously for 14 days. If there are no values of the combustion efficiency measured by the alternative test method that are less than 95.0 percent, the gas stream is considered to consistently exceed the applicable NHV operating limit, and you are not required to continuously monitor the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion device.
(iv) Except as noted in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section, a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the flow of gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare. You may use direct flow meters or other parameter monitoring systems combined with engineering calculations, such as inlet line pressure, line size, and burner nozzle dimensions, to satisfy this requirement. The monitoring instrument must have an accuracy of ±10 percent or better at the maximum expected flow rate.
(A) Pressure-assisted flares and pressure-assisted enclosed combustion devices are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(B) Flares are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(B)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the flare and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the flare cannot cause the flare tip velocity to exceed the maximum tip velocity as specified in the applicable provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter. You must use the minimum expected value of the NHV of the inlet gas to the flare or enclosed combustion based on previous sampling results or process knowledge of the streams sent to the enclosed flare of combustion device in your demonstration. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to increase the maximum flow rate to the flare, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the flare is compliant with the applicable maximum flare tip velocity provisions in § 60.18(c) and (f) of this chapter.
(2) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(C) Enclosed combustion devices are not required to have a continuous parameter monitoring system for measuring the inlet flow of gas to the device if you meet the conditions in paragraphs (d)(8)(iv)(C)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) You must demonstrate, based on the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to the enclosed combustion device and applicable engineering calculations for the manifolded closed vent system, that the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustion device cannot cause the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section to be exceeded. If there are changes to the process or control device that can be reasonably expected to impact the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustion device, you must conduct a new demonstration to determine whether the maximum flow rate to the enclosed combustor is less than the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with paragraph (f)(1) of this section.
(2) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a backpressure regulator valve calibrated to open at the minimum pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate. The set point must be consistent with manufacturer specifications for minimum flow or pressure and must be supported by an engineering evaluation. At least annually, you must confirm that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications and that the valve fully closes when not in the open position.
(v) Conduct inspections monthly and at other times as requested by the Administrator to monitor for visible emissions from the combustion device using section 11 of Method 22 of appendix A to this part or conduct visible emissions monitoring according to paragraph (h) of this section. The observation period shall be 15 minutes or once the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute. Devices must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period.
(e) Calculate the value of the applicable monitored parameter in accordance with paragraphs (e)(1) through (4) of this section.
(1) You must calculate the daily average value for condenser outlet temperature for each operating day, using the data recorded by the monitoring system. If the emissions unit operation is continuous, the operating day is a 24-hour period. If the emissions unit operation is not continuous, the operating day is the total number of hours of control device operation per 24-hour period. Valid data points must be available for 75 percent of the operating hours in an operating day to compute the daily average.
(2) You must use the 5-minute readings from the heat sensing devices to assess the presence of a pilot or combustion flame.
(3) You must use the regeneration cycle time (i.e., duration of the carbon bed steaming cycle) for each regenerative-type carbon adsorption system to calculate the average parameter to compare with the maximum steam mass flow or volumetric flow during each carbon bed regeneration cycle and the maximum carbon bed temperature during the steaming cycle. The carbon bed temperature after the regeneration cycle should not be averaged; you must use the carbon bed temperature measured within 15 minutes of completing the cooling cycle to compare with the minimum carbon bed temperature after the regeneration cycle.
(4) For all operating parameters others than those described in paragraphs (e)(1) through (3) of this section, you must calculate the 3-hour rolling average of each monitored parameter. For each operating hour, calculate the hourly value of the operating parameter from your continuous monitoring system. Average the three most recent hours of data to determine the 3-hour average. Determine the 3-hour rolling average by recalculating the 3-hour average each hour.
(f) For each operating parameter monitor installed in accordance with the requirements of paragraph (d) of this section, you must comply with paragraph (f)(1) of this section for all control devices. When condensers are installed, you must also comply with paragraph (f)(2) of this section.
(1) You must establish a minimum operating parameter value or a maximum operating parameter value, as appropriate for the control device, to define the conditions at which the control device must be operated to continuously achieve the applicable performance requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(1) or (2). You must establish each minimum or maximum operating parameter value as specified in paragraphs (f)(1)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) If you conduct performance tests in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(b) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1) or (2), then you must establish the minimum operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value based on values measured during the performance test and supplemented, as necessary, by a condenser or carbon adsorption system design analysis or control device manufacturer recommendations or a combination of both. If you operate an enclosed combustion device, you must establish the maximum inlet flow rate based on values measured during the performance test and you may establish the minimum inlet flow rate based on control device manufacturer recommendations.
(ii) If you use a condenser or carbon adsorption system design analysis in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(c) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(2), then you must establish the minimum operating parameter value or the maximum operating parameter value based on the design analysis and supplemented, as necessary, by the manufacturer's recommendations.
(iii) If you operate a control device where the performance test requirement was met under § 60.5413c(d) to demonstrate that the control device achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1), then your control device inlet gas flow rate must be equal to or greater than the minimum inlet gas flow rate and equal to or less than the maximum inlet gas flow rate determined by the manufacturer.
(iv) If you operate an enclosed combustion device where the combustion zone temperature is not an indicator of destruction efficiency or a control device where the performance test requirement was met under § 60.5413c(d), you must maintain the NHV of the gas sent to the enclosed combustion device above the applicable limits specified in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(iv)(A) through (C).
(2) If you use a condenser as specified in paragraph (d)(1)(v) of this section, you must establish a condenser performance curve showing the relationship between condenser outlet temperature and condenser control efficiency, according to the requirements of paragraphs (f)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) If you conduct a performance test in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(b) to demonstrate that the condenser achieves the applicable performance requirements of § 60.5412c(a)(2), then the condenser performance curve must be based on values measured during the performance test and supplemented as necessary by control device design analysis, or control device manufacturer's recommendations, or a combination or both.
(ii) If you use a control device design analysis in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5413c(c)(1) to demonstrate that the condenser achieves the applicable performance requirements specified in § 60.5412c(a)(2), then the condenser performance curve must be based on the condenser design analysis and supplemented, as necessary, by the control device manufacturer's recommendations.
(g) A deviation for a control device is determined to have occurred when the monitoring data or lack of monitoring data result in any one of the criteria specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (7) of this section being met. If you monitor multiple operating parameters for the same control device during the same operating day and more than one of these operating parameters meets a deviation criterion specified in paragraphs (g)(1) through (7) of this section, then a single excursion is determined to have occurred for the control device for that operating day.
(1) A deviation occurs when the average value of a monitored operating parameter determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section is less than the minimum operating parameter limit (and, if applicable, greater than the maximum operating parameter limit) established in paragraph (f)(1) of this section; for flares, when the average value of a monitored operating parameter determined in accordance with paragraph (e) of this section is below the applicable limits specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B)(1) through (3) and (5) or above the limit specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(vii)(B)(4); or for each flare or enclosed combustion device except for boilers and process heaters meeting the requirements in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(iii) and catalytic vapor incinerators meeting the requirements in § 60.5412c(a)(1)(v), when the heat sensing device indicates that there is no pilot or combustion flame present for any time period. If you use a backpressure regulator valve to maintain the inlet gas flow to an enclosed combustion device or flare above the minimum value, a deviation occurs if the annual inspection finds that the backpressure regulator valve set point is not set correctly or indicates that the backpressure regulator valve does not fully close when not in the open position.
(2) If you are subject to § 60.5412c(a)(2), a deviation occurs when the 365-day average condenser efficiency calculated according to the requirements specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(ix)(D) is less than 95.0 percent.
(3) If you are subject to § 60.5412c(a)(2) and you have less than 365 days of data, a deviation occurs when the average condenser efficiency calculated according to the procedures specified in § 60.5415c(e)(1)(ix)(D)(1) or (2) is less than 95.0 percent.
(4) A deviation occurs when the monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours in a day.
(5) If the closed vent system contains one or more bypass devices that could be used to divert all or a portion of the gases, vapors, or fumes from entering the control device, a deviation occurs when the requirements of paragraph (g)(5)(i) or (ii) of this section are met.
(i) For each bypass line subject to § 60.5411c(a)(4)(i)(A), the flow indicator indicates that flow has been detected and that the stream has been diverted away from the control device to the atmosphere.
(ii) For each bypass line subject to § 60.5411c(a)(4)(i)(B), if the seal or closure mechanism has been broken, the bypass line valve position has changed, the key for the lock-and-key type lock has been checked out, or the car-seal has broken.
(6) For a combustion control device whose model is tested under § 60.5413c(d), a deviation occurs when the conditions of paragraph (g)(4), (5), or (6)(i) through (v) of this section are met.
(i) The hourly inlet gas flow rate is less than the minimum inlet gas flow rate or greater than the maximum inlet gas flow rate determined by the manufacturer. If you use a backpressure regulator valve to maintain the inlet gas flow above the minimum value, a deviation occurs if the annual inspection finds that the backpressure regulator valve set point is not set correctly or indicates that the backpressure regulator valve does not fully close when not in the open position.
(ii) Results of the monthly visible emissions test conducted under § 60.5413c(e)(3) or monitoring under paragraph (h) of this section indicate visible emissions exceed 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(iii) There is no indication of the presence of a pilot or combustion flame for any 5-minute time period.
(iv) The control device is not maintained in a leak free condition.
(v) The control device is not operated in accordance with the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures and maintenance schedule.
(7) For an enclosed combustion device or flare subject to paragraph (d)(8) of this section, a deviation occurs when any of the conditions described by paragraph (g)(1), (4), or (5) of this section are met or when the results of the visible emissions monitoring conducted under paragraph (d)(8)(v) or (h) of this section exceed 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(h) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, in lieu of conducting a visible emissions observation using Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, you may use a video surveillance camera to continuously monitor and record the flare flame according to the requirements in paragraphs (h)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must provide real-time high-definition video surveillance camera output (i.e., at least 720p) at a frame rate of at least 15 frames per second to the control room or other continuously manned location where the camera images may be viewed at the same resolution at any time.
(2) You must record at least one frame every 15 seconds with date and time stamp.
(3) The camera must be located at a reasonable distance above the flare flame at an angle suitable for visual emissions observations. The position of the camera should be such that the sun is not in the field of view.
(4) The camera must be located no more than 400 m (0.25 miles) from the emission source.
(5) Operators must look at the video feed at least once daily for an observation period of at least 1 minute to determine if visible emissions are present. If visible emissions are present during a daily observation, the operator must observe the video feed for 15 minutes or until the amount of time visible emissions is present has exceeded 1 minute, whichever time period is less.
(6) Enclosed combustion devices and flares must be operated with no visible emissions, except for periods not to exceed a total of 1 minute during any 15-minute period.
(i) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), you must comply with paragraphs (i)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) You must measure data values at the frequency specified in the alternative test method.
(2) You must prepare a monitoring plan that covers each control device for designated facilities within each company-defined area. The monitoring plan must address the monitoring system design, data collection, and the quality assurance and quality control elements outlined in the alternative test method and in paragraphs (i)(2)(i) through (iii) of this section. You must operate and maintain each monitoring system in accordance with the procedures in your monitoring plan.
(i) The performance criteria and design specifications for the monitoring system equipment.
(ii) Location of monitoring system in relation to the monitored control device.
(iii) Ongoing reporting and recordkeeping procedures.
(3) You must conduct the quality assurance and quality control requirements outlined in the alternative test method at the frequency outlined in the alternative test method.
(4) If required by § 60.5412c(d)(4), you must conduct the inspections required by paragraph (d)(8)(v) of this section.
(5) If required by § 60.5412c(d)(5), you must install the pilot or combustion flame monitoring system required by paragraph (d)(8)(i) of this section.
(6) A deviation for the control device is determined to have occurred when the monitoring data or lack of monitoring data result in any one of the criteria specified in paragraphs (i)(6)(i) through (v) of this section being met.
(i) A deviation occurs if the combustion efficiency is less than 95.0 percent.
(ii) A deviation occurs when the monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours in a day.
(iii) A deviation occurs when any of the conditions described by paragraph (g)(5) of this section are met.
(iv) If required by paragraph (i)(4) of this section to conduct visible emissions inspections, a deviation occurs when the results of the visible emissions monitoring conducted under paragraph (d)(8)(v) or (h) of this section exceeds 1 minute in any 15-minute period.
(v) If required by paragraph (i)(5) of this section to install a pilot or combustion flame monitoring system, a deviation occurs when there is no indication of the presence of a pilot or combustion flame for any 5-minute period.
(j) You must submit annual reports for control devices as required in § 60.5420c(b)(1) and (10). You must maintain records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(10).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62934, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18115, Apr. 9, 2026]
Model Rule—Recordkeeping and Reporting
§ 60.5420c What are my notification, reporting, and recordkeeping requirements?
(a) Notifications. You must submit notifications according to paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section if you own or operate one or more of the designated facilities specified in § 60.5386c for which you commenced construction, modification, or reconstruction on or before December 6, 2022. You must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(3) of this section if you undertake well closure activities as specified in § 60.5397c(l).
(1) Notification of compliance report. For each designated facility subject to the requirements specified under this subpart, an owner or operator is required to submit a statement of compliance with the applicable requirements of this subpart on or before 60 days after the state plan compliance date. Where a designated facility's compliance status is consistent with what was specified in the final compliance plan increment of progress report, the notification of compliance report would include a statement indicating that compliance is consistent with what was specified in the designated facility's final compliance plan. Where a designated facility's compliance status differs from what was specified in the final compliance plan increment of progress report, the notification of compliance report would indicate how the designated facility's status differs from what was stated in the final compliance plan.
(2) Notifications. If you own or operate a process unit equipment designated facility located at an onshore natural gas processing plant, you must submit the notifications required in §§ 60.7(a)(1), (3), and (4) and 60.15(d). If you own or operate a well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, collection of fugitive emissions components at a well site, or collection of fugitive emissions components at a compressor station designated facility, you are not required to submit the notifications required in §§ 60.7(a)(1), (3), and (4) and 60.15(d).
(3) Notification to Administrator. An owner or operator who commences well closure activities must submit the following notices to the Administrator according to the schedule in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section. The notification shall include contact information for the owner or operator; the United States Well Number; the latitude and longitude coordinates for each well at the well site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983. You must submit notifications in portable document format (PDF) following the procedures specified in paragraph (d) of this section.
(i) You must submit a well closure plan to the Administrator within 30 days of the cessation of production from all wells located at the well site.
(ii) You must submit a notification of the intent to close a well site 60 days before you begin well closure activities.
(b) Reporting requirements. You must submit annual reports containing the information specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (13) of this section following the procedure specified in paragraph (b)(14) of this section. You must submit performance test reports as specified in paragraph (b)(11) or (12) of this section, if applicable. The initial annual report is due no later than 90 days after the end of the initial compliance period as determined according to § 60.5410c. Subsequent annual reports are due no later than the same date each year as the initial annual report. If you own or operate more than one designated facility, you may submit one report for multiple designated facilities provided the report contains all of the information required as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (13) of this section. Annual reports may coincide with title V reports as long as all the required elements of the annual report are included. You may arrange with the Administrator a common schedule on which reports required by this part may be submitted as long as the schedule does not extend the reporting period. You must submit the information in paragraph (b)(1)(v) of this section, as applicable, for your well designated facility which undergoes a change of ownership during the reporting period, regardless of whether reporting under paragraphs (b)(2) and (3) of this section is required for the well designated facility.
(1) The general information specified in paragraphs (b)(1)(i) through (v) of this section is required for all reports.
(i) The company name, facility site name associated with the designated facility, U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the designated facility, if applicable, and address of the designated facility. If an address is not available for the site, include a description of the site location and provide the latitude and longitude coordinates of the site in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) An identification of each designated facility being included in the annual report.
(iii) Beginning and ending dates of the reporting period.
(iv) A certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete. If your report is submitted via CEDRI, the certifier's electronic signature during the submission process replaces the requirement in this paragraph (b)(1)(iv).
(v) Identification of each well designated facility for which ownership changed due to sale or transfer of ownership including the United States Well Number; the latitude and longitude coordinates of the well designated facility in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983; and the information in paragraph (b)(1)(v)(A) or (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) The name and contact information, including the phone number, email address, and mailing address, of the owner or operator to which you sold or transferred ownership of the well designated facility identified in this paragraph (b)(1)(v) .
(B) The name and contact information, including the phone number, email address, and mailing address, of the owner or operator from whom you acquired the well designated facility identified in this paragraph (b)(1)(v).
(2) For each well designated facility that is subject to § 60.5390c(a)(1) or (2), your annual report is required to include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each well designated facility where all gas well liquids unloading operations comply with § 60.5390c(a)(1), your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(A) through (C) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Identification of each well designated facility (U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the well designated facility) that conducts a gas well liquid unloading operation during the reporting period using a method that does not vent to the atmosphere and the technology or technique used. If more than one non-venting technology or technique is used, you must identify all of the differing non-venting liquids unloading methods used during the reporting period.
(B) Number of gas well liquids unloading operations conducted during the year where the well designated facility identified in paragraph (b)(2)(i)(A) of this section had unplanned venting to the atmosphere and best management practices were conducted according to your best management practice plan, as required by § 60.5390c(c). If no venting events occurred, the number would be zero. Other reported information required to be submitted where unplanned venting occurs is specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(i)(B)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Log of best management practice plan steps used during the unplanned venting to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(2) The number of liquids unloading events during the year where deviations from your best management practice plan occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, documentation of why best management practice plan steps were not followed, and what steps, in lieu of your best management practice plan steps, were followed to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(C) The number of liquids unloading events where unplanned emissions are vented to the atmosphere during a gas well liquids unloading operation where you complied with best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(ii) For each well designated facility where all gas well liquids unloading operations comply with § 60.5390c(b) and (c) best management practices, your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(2)(ii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well designated facility that conducts a gas well liquids unloading during the reporting period.
(B) Number of liquids unloading events conducted during the reporting period.
(C) Log of best management practice plan steps used during the reporting period to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(D) The number of liquids unloading events during the year that best management practices were conducted according to your best management practice plan.
(E) The number of liquids unloading events during the year where deviations from your best management practice plan occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, documentation of why best management practice plan steps were not followed, and what steps, in lieu of your best management practice plan steps, were followed to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(3) For each associated gas well at your well designated facility that is subject to § 60.5391c, your annual report is required to include the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i) through (v) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each associated gas well at your well designated facility that complies with § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) your annual report is required to include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) An identification of each existing associated gas well that complies with § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4).
(B) The information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(i)(B)(1) through (4) of this section for each incident when the associated gas was temporarily routed to a flare or control device in accordance with § 60.5391c(c).
(1) The reason in § 60.5391c(c)(1), (2), (3), or (4) for each incident.
(2) The start date and time of each incident of routing associated gas to the flare or control device, along with the total duration in hours of each incident.
(3) Documentation that all CVS requirements specified in § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and all applicable flare or control device requirements specified in § 60.5412c were met during each period when the associated gas is routed to the flare or control device.
(4) For each instance where you route associated gas to a flare or control device beyond 72 hours due to “exigent circumstances” according to § 60.5391c(c)(1) or (2), you must include the record information specified in paragraph (c)(2)(vi) of this section in your annual report.
(ii) For all instances where you temporarily vent the associated gas in accordance with § 60.5391c(d), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section. This information is required to be reported if you are routinely complying with § 60.5391c(a) or (b) or temporarily complying with § 60.5391c(c). In addition to this information for each incident, you must report the cumulative duration in hours of venting incidents and the cumulative VOC and methane emissions in pounds for all incidents in the calendar year.
(A) The reason in § 60.5391c(d)(1), (2), or (3) for each incident.
(B) The start date and time of each incident of venting the associated gas, along with the total duration in hours of each incident.
(C) The methane emissions in pounds that were emitted during each incident.
(D) The total duration of venting for all incidents in the year, along with the cumulative methane emissions in pounds that were emitted.
(iii) For each associated gas well at your well designated facility that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) by routing your associated gas to a control device that reduces methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent, your annual report must include the information specified in paragraphs (b)(3)(iii)(A) through (C), and paragraph (D) or (E) of this section. The information in paragraphs (b)(3)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section is only required in the initial annual report.
(A) Identification of the associated gas well using the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section.
(B) The information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(C) Identification of each instance when associated gas was vented and not routed to a control device that reduces methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent in accordance with paragraph (b)(3)(ii) of this section.
(D) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) because it has demonstrated that annual methane emissions are 40 tons per year or less, provide records of the calculation of annual methane emissions determined in accordance with § 60.5391c(e)(1).
(E) For each associated gas well facility that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) because it has demonstrated that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) due to technical reasons, provide each annual demonstration and certification of the technical reason that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5391c(a)(1) through (4) in accordance with § 60.5391c(b)(2)(i) through (iii).
(iv) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(v) For each deviation recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(2)(vi) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(4) For each centrifugal compressor that is a designated facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (ix) of this section, as applicable.
(i) An identification of each centrifugal compressor.
(ii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iii) If complying with § 60.5392c(a)(1) and (2) wet and dry seal centrifugal compressor requirements, the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, as applicable, which have elapsed prior to conducting your volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening.
(iv) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric emissions measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(v) If required to comply with § 60.5392c(a)(5), the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vi) If complying with § 60.5392c(a)(4) with a control device, identification of the centrifugal compressor with the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section.
(vii) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(viii) Number and type of seals on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(ix) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any seals that have been placed on delay of repair.
(5) For each reciprocating compressor designated facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (vii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) The cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, or since the previous reciprocating compressor rod packing replacement, as applicable, which have elapsed prior to conducting your volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening. Alternatively, a statement that emissions from the rod packing are being routed to a process or control device through a closed vent system.
(ii) If applicable, for each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(4)(i) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, duration of the deviation in hours and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iii) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(iv) If complying with § 60.5393c(d)(1) or (2), the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (v) of this section.
(v) Number and type of rod packing replacements/repairs on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(vi) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any rod packing replacements/repairs that have been placed on delay of repair.
(vii) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(6) For each process controller designated facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(i) through (iii) of this section in your initial annual report and in subsequent annual reports for each process controller designated facility that is constructed, modified, or reconstructed during the reporting period. Each annual report must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(iv) through (x) of this section for each process controller designated facility.
(i) An identification of each existing process controller that is driven by natural gas, as required by § 60.5394c(d), that allows traceability to the records required in paragraph (c)(5)(i) of this section.
(ii) For each process controller in the designated facility complying with § 60.5394c(a), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5394c(a)(1) by routing the emissions to a process.
(B) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5394c(a)(2) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller.
(iii) For each process controller designated facility located at a site in Alaska that does not have access to electrical power and that complies with § 60.5394c(b), you must report the information specified in paragraph (b)(6)(iii)(A), (B), or (C) of this section, as applicable.
(A) For each process controller complying with § 60.5394c(b)(1) process controller bleed rate requirements, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(iii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) The identification of process controllers designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(2) Where necessary to meet a functional need, the identification and demonstration of why it is necessary to use a process controller with a natural gas bleed rate greater than 6 scfh.
(B) An identification of each intermittent vent process controller complying with the requirements in paragraph § 60.5394c(b)(2).
(C) An identification of each process controller complying with the requirements in § 60.5394c(b) by routing emissions to a control device in accordance with § 60.5394c(b)(3).
(iv) Identification of each process controller which changes its method of compliance during the reporting period and the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(v) through (ix) of this section for the new method of compliance.
(v) For each process controller in the designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5394c(a) by routing the emissions to a process, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vi) For each process controller in the designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5394c(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(vi)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416c(b); and
(B) Each defect or leak identified during each natural gas-driven-self-contained process controller system inspection, and the date of repair or date of anticipated repair if repair is delayed.
(vii) For each process controller in the designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5394c(b)(2), you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(vii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Dates and results of the intermittent vent process controller monitoring required by § 60.5394c(b)(2)(ii).
(B) For each instance in which monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from an intermittent vent controller during idle periods, the date of repair or replacement or the date of anticipated repair or replacement if the repair or replacement is delayed, and the date and results of the re-survey after repair or replacement.
(viii) For each process controller designated facility complying with § 60.5394c(b)(3) by routing emissions to a control device, you must report the information specified in paragraph (b)(10) of this section.
(ix) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(x) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(6)(ii)(B) and (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(7) For each storage vessel designated facility, the information in paragraphs (b)(7)(i) through (x) of this section.
(i) An identification, including the location, of each existing storage vessel designated facility. The location of the storage vessel designated facility shall be in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(ii) Documentation of the methane emission rate determination according to § 60.5386c(e)(1) for each tank battery that became a designated facility during the reporting period or is returned to service during the reporting period.
(iii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period and recorded as specified in paragraph (c)(6)(iii) of this section, the date and time the deviation began, duration of the deviation in hours and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(iv) For each storage vessel designated facility complying with § 60.5396c(a)(2) with a control device, report the identification of the storage vessel designated facility with the control device and the information in paragraph (b)(10)(v) of this section.
(v) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(vi) If required to comply with § 60.5396c(b)(1), the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) You must identify each storage vessel designated facility that is removed from service during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5396c(c)(1)(ii), including the date the storage vessel designated facility was removed from service. You must identify each storage vessel that that is removed from service from a storage vessel designated facility during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5396c(c)(2)(iii), including identifying the impacted storage vessel designated facility and the date each storage vessel was removed from service.
(viii) You must identify each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility returned to service during the reporting period as specified in § 60.5396c(c)(4), including the date the storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility was returned to service.
(ix) You must identify each storage vessel designated facility that no longer complies with § 60.5396c(a)(3) and instead complies with § 60.5396c(a)(2). You must identify whether the change in the method of compliance was due to fracturing or refracturing or whether the change was due to an increase in the monthly emissions determination. If the change was due to an increase in the monthly emissions determination, you must provide documentation of the emissions rate. You must identify the date that you complied with § 60.5396c(a)(2) and must submit the information in (b)(7)(iii) through (vii) of this section.
(x) You must submit a statement that you are complying with § 60.112b(a)(1) or (2), if applicable, in your initial annual report.
(8) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility, report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section, as applicable.
(i)(A) Designation of the type of site (i.e., well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station) at which the fugitive emissions components designated facility is located.
(B) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site or centralized production facility that became a designated facility during the reporting period, you must include the date of the startup of production or the date of the first day of production after modification. For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a compressor station that became a designated facility during the reporting period, you must include the date of startup or the date of modification.
(C) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site, you must specify what type of well site it is (i.e., single wellhead only well site, small wellsite, multi-wellhead only well site, or a well site with major production and processing equipment).
(D) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site where during the reporting period you complete the removal of all major production and processing equipment such that the well site contains only one or more wellheads, you must include the date of the change to status as a wellhead only well site.
(E) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site where you previously reported under paragraph (b)(8)(i)(D) of this section the removal of all major production and processing equipment and during the reporting period major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site, the date that the first piece of major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site.
(F) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site where during the reporting period you undertake well closure requirements, the date of the cessation of production from all wells at the well site, the date you began well closure activities at the well site, and the dates of the notifications submitted in accordance with paragraph (a)(3) of this section.
(ii) For each fugitive emissions monitoring survey performed during the annual reporting period, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(8)(ii)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) Date of the survey.
(B) Monitoring instrument or, if the survey was conducted by visual, audible, or olfactory methods, notation that AVO was used.
(C) Any deviations from the monitoring plan elements under § 60.5397c(c)(1), (2), (7), and (8) or (d) or a statement that there were no deviations from these elements of the monitoring plan.
(D) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(E) Number and type of fugitive emissions components that were not repaired as required in § 60.5397c(h).
(F) Number and type of fugitive emission components (including designation as difficult-to-monitor or unsafe-to-monitor, if applicable) on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(G) Date of planned shutdown(s) that occurred during the reporting period if there are any components that have been placed on delay of repair.
(iii) For well closure activities which occurred during the reporting period, the information in paragraphs (b)(8)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) A status report with dates for the well closure activities schedule developed in the well closure plan. If all steps in the well closure plan are completed in the reporting period, the date that all activities are completed.
(B) If an OGI survey is conducted during the reporting period, the information in paragraphs (b)(8)(iii)(B)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Date of the OGI survey.
(2) Monitoring instrument used.
(3) A statement that no fugitive emissions were found, or if fugitive emissions were found, a description of the steps taken to eliminate those emissions, the date of the resurvey, the results of the resurvey, and the date of the final resurvey which detected no emissions.
(iv) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(9) For each pump designated facility, the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(i) through (iv) of this section in your initial annual report. Each annual report must contain the information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(v) through (ix) of this section for each pump designated facility.
(i) The identification of each of your pumps that are driven by natural gas, as required by § 60.5395c(a) that allows traceability to the records required by paragraph (c)(14)(i) of this section.
(ii) For each pump designated facility for which there is a control device on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction, the certification that there is a control device available on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction required under § 60.5395c(b)(5). You must also report the emissions reduction percentage the control device is designed to achieve.
(iii) For each pump designated facility for which there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site, the certification required under § 60.5395c(b)(6) that there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site.
(iv) For each pump designated facility for which it is technically infeasible to route the emissions to a process or control device, the certification of technically infeasibility required under § 60.5395c(b)(7).
(v) For any pump designated facility which has previously reported as required under paragraphs (b)(9)(i) through (iv) of this section and for which a change in the reported condition has occurred during the reporting period, provide the identification of the pump designated facility and the date that the pump designated facility meets one of the change conditions described in paragraphs (b)(9)(v)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) If you install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must report that a control device or vapor recovery unit has been added to the site and that the pump designated facility now is required to comply with § 60.5395c(b)(1) or (3), as applicable.
(B) If your pump designated facility previously complied with § 60.5395c(b)(1) or (3), as applicable, by routing emissions to a process or a control device and the process or control device is subsequently removed from the site or is no longer available such that there is no ability to route the emissions to a process or control device at the location, or that it is not technically feasible to capture and route the emissions to another control device or process located on site, report that you are no longer complying with the applicable requirements of § 60.5395c(b)(1) or (3) and submit the information provided in paragraph (b)(9)(v)(B)(1) or (2) of this section.
(1) Certification that there is no control device or vapor recovery unit on site.
(2) Certification of the engineering assessment that it is technically infeasible to capture and route the emissions to another control device or process located on site.
(C) If any pump affected facility or individual natural gas-driven pump changes its method of compliance during the reporting period other than for the reasons specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(v)(A) and (B) of this section, identify the new compliance method for each natural gas-driven pump within the affected facility which changes its method of compliance during the reporting period and provide the applicable information specified in paragraphs (b)(9)(ii) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section for the new method of compliance.
(vi) For each pump designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(a) or (b)(2) by routing the emissions to a process, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(vii) For each pump designated facility complying with the requirements of § 60.5395c(b)(3) by routing the emissions to a control device, you must report the information required under paragraph (b)(10) of this section.
(viii) For each deviation that occurred during the reporting period, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and a description of the deviation. If no deviations occurred during the reporting period, you must include a statement that no deviations occurred during the reporting period.
(ix) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(10) For each well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facility which uses a closed vent system routed to a control device to meet the emissions reduction standard, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (v) of this section. For each centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, or process unit equipment which uses a closed vent system to route to a process, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iv) of this section. For each centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, and storage vessel equipped with a cover, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) and (ii).
(i) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416c(a) and (b).
(ii) Each defect or emissions identified during each inspection and the date of repair or the date of anticipated repair if the repair is delayed.
(iii) Date and time of each bypass alarm or each instance the key is checked out if you are subject to the bypass requirements of § 60.5416c(a)(4).
(iv) You must submit the certification signed by the qualified professional engineer or in-house engineer according to § 60.5411c(c) for each closed vent system routing to a control device or process in the reporting year in which the certification is signed.
(v) If you comply with the emissions standard for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, storage vessel, process controller, pump, or process unit equipment designated facility with a control device, the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(v)(A) through (L) of this section, unless you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d). If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), the information in paragraphs (b)(10)(v)(A) through (C) and (L) through (P) of this section.
(A) Identification of the control device.
(B) Make, model, and date of installation of the control device.
(C) Identification of the designated facility controlled by the device.
(D) For each continuous parameter monitoring system used to demonstrate compliance for the control device, a unique continuous parameter monitoring system identifier and the make, model number, and date of last calibration check of the continuous parameter monitoring system.
(E) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417c(g)(1) through (3) or (5) through (7) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, the type of the deviation (e.g., NHV operating limit, lack of pilot or combustion flame, condenser efficiency, bypass line flow, visible emissions), and cause of the deviation.
(F) For each instance where there is a deviation of the continuous parameter monitoring system in accordance with § 60.5417c(g)(4) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and cause of the deviation.
(G) For each visible emissions test following return to operation from a maintenance or repair activity, the date of the visible emissions test or observation of the video surveillance output, the length of the observation in minutes, and the number of minutes for which visible emissions were present.
(H) If a performance test was conducted on the control device during the reporting period, provide the date the performance test was conducted. Submit the performance test report following the procedures specified in paragraph (b)(11) of this section.
(I) An indication of whether the enclosed combustion device or flare receives inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, and if so, a description of the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams. If a demonstration of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare was conducted during the reporting period in accordance with § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iii), an indication of whether this is a re-evaluation of vent gas NHV and the reason for the re-evaluation; the applicable required minimum vent gas NHV; if twice daily samples of the vent stream were taken, the number of samples with NHV values that are less than 1.2 times the applicable required minimum NHV, an indication of whether full one hour samples were collected or if shorter sampling times and, if shorter sampling times were used, the collection time(s) used and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample; if continuous NHV sampling of the vent stream was conducted, the number of hourly block average NHV values that are less than the required minimum vent gas NHV; if continuous combustion efficiency monitoring was conducted using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), the number of values of the combustion efficiency that were less than 95.0 percent; the resulting determination of whether continuous NHV monitoring is required or not in accordance with § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iii)(D), (E), or (H); and if the enclosed combustion device or flare received inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, whether the sampling included periods where the highest percentage of inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream were sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare.
(J) If a demonstration was conducted in accordance with § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iv) that the maximum potential pressure of units manifolded to an enclosed combustion device or flare cannot cause the maximum inlet flow rate established in accordance with § 60.5417c(f)(1) or a flare tip velocity limit of 18.3 meter/second (60 feet/second) to be exceeded, an indication of whether this is a re-evaluation of the gas flow and the reason for the re-evaluation; the demonstration conducted; and applicable engineering calculations.
(K) For each periodic sampling event conducted under § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iii)(G), provide the date of the sampling, the required minimum vent gas NHV, and the NHV value for each vent gas sample.
(L) For each flare and enclosed combustion device, provide the date each device is observed with OGI in accordance with § 60.5415c(e)(1)(x) and whether uncombusted emissions were present. Provide the date each device was visibly observed during an AVO inspection in accordance with § 60.5415c(e)(1)(x), whether the pilot or combustion flame was lit at the time of observation, and whether the device was found to be operating properly.
(M) An identification of the alternative test method used.
(N) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417c(i)(6)(i) or (iii) through (v) include the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, the type of the deviation (e.g., destruction efficiency below 95 percent, lack of pilot or combustion flame, visible emissions), and cause of the deviation.
(O) For each instance where there is a deviation of the data availability in accordance with § 60.5417c(i)(6)(ii) include the date of each operating day when monitoring data are not available for at least 75 percent of the operating hours.
(P) If no deviations occurred under paragraph (b)(10)(v)(N) or (O) of this section, a statement that there were no deviations for the control device during the annual report period.
(Q) Any additional information required to be reported as specified by the Administrator as part of the alternative test method approval under § 60.5412c(d).
(11) Within 60 days after the date of completing each performance test (see § 60.8) required by this subpart, except testing conducted by the manufacturer as specified in § 60.5413c(d), you must submit the results of the performance test following the procedures specified in paragraph (d) of this section. Data collected using test methods that are supported by the EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) as listed on the EPA's ERT website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/electronic-reporting-tool-ert) at the time of the test must be submitted in a file format generated using the EPA's ERT. Alternatively, you may submit an electronic file consistent with the extensible markup language (XML) schema listed on the EPA's ERT website. Data collected using test methods that are not supported by the EPA's ERT as listed on the EPA's ERT website at the time of the test must be included as an attachment in the ERT or alternate electronic file.
(12) For combustion control devices tested by the manufacturer in accordance with § 60.5413c(d), an electronic copy of the performance test results required by § 60.5413c(d) shall be submitted via email to Oil_and_Gas_PT@EPA.GOV unless the test results for that model of combustion control device are posted at the following website: https://www.epa.gov/controlling-air-pollution-oil-and-natural-gas-industry.
(13) If you had a super-emitter event during the reporting period, the start date of the super-emitter event, the duration of the super-emitter event in hours, and the designated facility associated with the super-emitter event, if applicable.
(14) You must submit your annual report using the appropriate electronic report template on the Compliance and Emissions Data Reporting Interface (CEDRI) website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in paragraph (d) of this section. If the reporting form specific to this subpart is not available on the CEDRI website at the time that the report is due, you must submit the report to the Administrator at the appropriate address listed in § 60.4. Once the form has been available on the CEDRI website for at least 90 calendar days, you must begin submitting all subsequent reports via CEDRI. The date reporting forms become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted by the deadline specified in this subpart, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(c) Recordkeeping requirements. You must maintain the records identified as specified in § 60.7(f) and in paragraphs (c)(1) through (14) of this section. All records required by this subpart must be maintained either onsite or at the nearest local field office for at least 5 years. Any records required to be maintained by this subpart that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(1) For each gas well liquids unloading operation at your well designated facility that is subject to § 60.5390c(a)(1) or (2), the records of each gas well liquids unloading operation conducted during the reporting period, including the information specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each gas well liquids unloading operation that complies with § 60.5390c(a)(1) by performing all liquids unloading events without venting of methane emissions to the atmosphere, comply with the recordkeeping requirements specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well (i.e., U.S. Well ID or U.S. Well ID associated with the well designated facility) that conducts a gas well liquids unloading operation during the reporting period without venting of methane emissions and the non-venting gas well liquids unloading method used. If more than one non-venting method is used, you must maintain records of all the differing non-venting liquids unloading methods used at the well designated facility complying with § 60.5390c(a)(1).
(B) Number of events where unplanned emissions are vented to the atmosphere during a gas well liquids unloading operation where you complied with best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(ii) For each gas well liquids unloading operation that complies with § 60.5390c(b) and (c) best management practices, maintain records documenting information specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Identification of each well designated facility that conducts liquids unloading during the reporting period that employs best management practices to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(B) Documentation of your best management practice plan developed under paragraph § 60.5390c(c). You may update your best management practice plan to include additional steps which meet the criteria in § 60.5390c(c).
(C) A log of each best management practice plan step taken to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible for each gas well liquids unloading event.
(D) Documentation of each gas well liquids unloading event where deviations from your best management practice plan steps occurred, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, documentation of best management practice plans steps were not followed, and the steps taken in lieu of your best management practice plan steps during those events to minimize emissions to the maximum extent possible.
(iii) For each well designated facility that reduces methane emissions from well designated facility gas wells that unload liquids by 95.0 percent by routing emissions to a control device through closed vent system under § 60.5390c(g), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(1)(iii)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified paragraph in (c)(7) of this section.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(2) For each associated gas well, you must maintain the applicable records specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i) or (ii) and (iii), (iv), (v), (vi) and (vii) of this section, as applicable.
(i) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) Documentation of the specific method(s) in § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) that was used.
(B) For instances where you temporarily route the associated gas to a flare or control device in accordance with § 60.5391c(c), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(i)(B)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) The reason in § 60.5391c(c)(1), (2), (3), or (4) for each incident.
(2) The date of each incident, along with the times when routing the associated gas to the flare or control device started and ended, along with the total duration of each incident.
(3) Documentation that all CVS requirements specified in § 60.5411c(a) and (c) and all applicable flare or control device requirements specified in § 60.5412c are met during each period when the associated gas is routed to the flare or control device.
(ii) For instances where you temporarily vent the associated gas in accordance with § 60.5391c(d), you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(ii)(A) through (D) of this section. These records are required if you are routinely complying with § 60.5391c(a) or § 60.5391c(b) or temporarily complying with § 60.5391c(c).
(A) The reason in § 60.5391c(d)(1), (2), or (3) for each incident.
(B) The date of each incident, along with the times when venting the associated gas started and ended, along with the total duration of each incident.
(C) The methane emissions that were emitted during each incident.
(D) The cumulative duration of venting incidents and methane emissions for all incidents in each calendar year.
(iii) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) because it has demonstrated that annual methane emissions are 40 tons per year or less at the initial compliance date, maintain records of the calculation of annual methane emissions determined in accordance with § 60.5391c(e)(1).
(iv) For each associated gas well at your well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) because it has demonstrated that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5391c(a)(1), (2), (3), or (4) due to technical reasons, records of each annual demonstration and certification of the technical reason that it is not feasible to comply with § 60.5391c(a)(1) through (4) in accordance with § 60.5391c(b)(2)(i) through (iii), as well as the records required by paragraph (c)(2)(v) of this section.
(v) For each associated gas well that complies with the requirements of § 60.5391c(b) by routing your associated gas to a flare or control device that achieves a 95.0 reduction in methane emissions, the records in paragraphs (c)(2)(v)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) Identification of each instance when associated gas was vented and not routed to a control device that reduces methane emissions by at least 95.0 percent in accordance with paragraph (c)(2)(iii) of this section.
(B) If you comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5391c with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(C) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(7) of this section, you must maintain records of the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(vi) For each instance where you route associated gas to a flare or control device for beyond 72 hours due to an “exigent circumstance” according to § 60.5391c(c)(1) or (2), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(2)(vi)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) A written description of the “exigent circumstance” requiring the need to flare or route to a control device beyond 72 hours.
(B) A description of steps taken to resolve the need for temporary flaring/routing to a control device;
(C) The dates and times an identified “exigent circumstance” started and ended (e.g., when owners or operators are able to access site, when personnel and/or equipment are available) and the total duration of each “exigent circumstance”; and
(D) The dates and times temporary flaring/routing to a control device started and ended and the total duration of temporary flaring/routing to a control device due to the identified “exigent circumstance.”
(vii) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(3) For each centrifugal compressor designated facility, you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) For each centrifugal compressor designated facility, you must maintain records of deviations in cases where the centrifugal compressor was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5392c, including a description of each deviation, the date and time each deviation began and the duration of each deviation.
(ii) For each wet seal compressor complying with the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5392c(a)(3) and (4), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(3)(ii)(A) through (E) of this section. For each wet seal compressor complying with the alternative standard in § 60.5392c(a)(3) and (5) by routing the closed vent system to a process, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(3)(ii)(B) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5392c(a)(3) and (4) with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(7) of this section, you must maintain records of the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must maintain the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(iii) For each centrifugal compressor designated facility using dry seals or wet seals and each self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor and complying with the standard in § 60.5392c(a)(1) and (2), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(iii)(A) through (H) of this section.
(A) Records of the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, as applicable.
(B) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(C) Records for all flow meters, composition analyzers and pressure gauges used to measure volumetric flow rates as specified in paragraphs (c)(3)(iii)(C)(1) through (6) of this section.
(1) Description of standard method published by a consensus-based standards organization or industry standard practice.
(2) Records of volumetric flow rate emissions calculations conducted according to § 60.5392c(a)(2), as applicable.
(3) Records of manufacturer operating procedures and measurement methods.
(4) Records of manufacturer's recommended procedures or an appropriate industry consensus standard method for calibration and results of calibration, recalibration and accuracy checks.
(5) Records which demonstrate that measurements at the remote location(s) can, when appropriate correction factors are applied, reliably and accurately represent the actual temperature or total pressure at the flow meter under all expected ambient conditions. You must include the date of the demonstration, the data from the demonstration, the mathematical correlation(s) between the remote readings and actual flow meter conditions derived from the data, and any supporting engineering calculations. If adjustments were made to the mathematical relationships, a record and description of such adjustments.
(6) Record of each initial calibration or a recalibration which failed to meet the required accuracy specification and the date of the successful recalibration.
(D) Date when performance-based volumetric flow rate is exceeded.
(E) The date of successful repair of the compressor seal, including follow-up performance-based volumetric flow rate measurement to confirm successful repair.
(F) Identification of each compressor seal placed on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(G) For each compressor seal or part needed for repair placed on delay of repair because of replacement seal or part unavailability, the operator must document: the date the seal or part was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement seal or part was ordered, the anticipated seal or part delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the seal or part.
(H) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any seals or parts that have been placed on delay of repair.
(4) For each reciprocating compressor designated facility, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) through (x) and (c)(7) through (12) of this section, as applicable. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(i) For each reciprocating compressor designated facility, you must maintain records of deviations in cases where the reciprocating compressor was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5393c, including a description of each deviation, the date and time each deviation began and the duration of each deviation in hours.
(ii) Records of the date of installation of a rod packing emissions collection system and closed vent system as specified in § 60.5393c(d), where applicable.
(iii) Records of the cumulative number of hours of operation since initial startup, since 36 months after the state plan submittal deadline (as specified in § 60.5362c(c)), or since the previous volumetric flow rate measurement, as applicable. Alternatively, a record that emissions from the rod packing are being routed to a process through a closed vent system.
(iv) A description of the method used and the results of the volumetric flow rate measurement or emissions screening, as applicable.
(v) Records for all flow meters, composition analyzers and pressure gauges used to measure volumetric flow rates as specified in paragraphs (c)(4)(v)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) Description of standard method published by a consensus-based standards organization or industry standard practice.
(B) Records of volumetric flow rate calculations conducted according to § 60.5393c(b) or (c), as applicable.
(C) Records of manufacturer's operating procedures and measurement methods.
(D) Records of manufacturer's recommended procedures or an appropriate industry consensus standard method for calibration and results of calibration, recalibration and accuracy checks.
(E) Records which demonstrate that measurements at the remote location(s) can, when appropriate correction factors are applied, reliably and accurately represent the actual temperature or total pressure at the flow meter under all expected ambient conditions. You must include the date of the demonstration, the data from the demonstration, the mathematical correlation(s) between the remote readings and actual flow meter conditions derived from the data, and any supporting engineering calculations. If adjustments were made to the mathematical relationships, a record and description of such adjustments.
(F) Record of each initial calibration or a recalibration which failed to meet the required accuracy specification and the date of the successful recalibration.
(vi) Date when performance-based volumetric flow rate is exceeded.
(vii) The date of successful replacement or repair of reciprocating compressor rod packing, including follow-up performance-based volumetric flow rate measurement to confirm successful repair.
(viii) Identification of each reciprocating compressor placed on delay of repair because of rod packing or part unavailability and explanation for each delay of repair.
(ix) For each reciprocating compressor that is placed on delay of repair because of replacement rod packing or part unavailability, the operator must document: the date the rod packing or part was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement rod packing or part was ordered, the anticipated rod packing or part delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the rod packing or part.
(x) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any reciprocating compressors that have been placed on delay of repair due to the unavailability of rod packing or parts to conduct repairs.
(5) For each process controller designated facility, you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) Records identifying each process controller that is driven by natural gas and that does not function as an emergency shutdown device.
(ii) For each process controller designated facility complying with § 60.5394c(a), you must maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section, as applicable.
(A) If you are complying with § 60.5394c(a) by routing process controller vapors to a process through a closed vent system, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(ii)(A)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) An identification of all the natural gas-driven process controllers in the process controller designated facility for which you collect and route vapors to a process through a closed vent system.
(2) The records specified in paragraphs (c)(7), (9), and (11) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(B) If you are complying with § 60.5394c(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller, you must report the information specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(ii)(B)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) An identification of each process controller complying with § 60.5394c(a) by using a self-contained natural gas-driven process controller;
(2) Dates of each inspection required under § 60.5416c(b); and
(3) Each defect or leak identified during each natural gas-driven-self-contained process controller system inspection, and date of repair or date of anticipated repair if repair is delayed.
(iii) For each process controller designated facility complying with § 60.5394c(b)(1) process controller bleed rate requirements, you must maintain records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(iii)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) The identification of process controllers designed and operated to achieve a bleed rate less than or equal to 6 scfh and records of the manufacturer's specifications indicating that the process controller is designed with a natural gas bleed rate of less than or equal to 6 scfh.
(B) Where necessary to meet a functional need, the identification of the process controller and demonstration of why it is necessary to use a process controller with a natural gas bleed rate greater than 6 scfh.
(iv) For each intermittent vent process controller in the designated facility complying with the requirements in § 60.5394c(b)(2), you must keep records of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(iv)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) The identification of each intermittent vent process controller.
(B) Dates and results of the intermittent vent process controller monitoring required by § 60.5394c(b)(2)(ii).
(C) For each instance in which monitoring identifies emissions to the atmosphere from an intermittent vent controller during idle periods, the date of repair or replacement, or the date of anticipated repair or replacement if the repair or replacement is delayed and the date and results of the re-survey after repair or replacement.
(v) For each process controller designated facility complying with § 60.5394c(b)(3), you must maintain the records specified in paragraphs (c)(5)(v)(A) and (B) of this section.
(A) An identification of each process controller for which emissions are routed to a control device.
(B) Records specified in paragraphs (c)(7) and (9) through (12) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(7) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(vi) Records of each change in compliance method, including identification of each natural gas-driven process controller which changes its method of compliance, the new method of compliance, and the date of the change in compliance method.
(vii) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(6) For each storage vessel designated facility, you must maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) You must maintain records of the identification and location in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983 of each storage vessel designated facility.
(ii) Records of each methane emissions determination for each storage vessel designated facility made under § 60.5386c(e) including identification of the model or calculation methodology used to calculate the methane emission rate.
(iii) For each instance where the storage vessel was not operated in compliance with the requirements specified in § 60.5396c, a description of the deviation, the date and time each deviation began, and the duration of the deviation.
(iv) If complying with the emissions reduction standard in § 60.5396c(a)(1), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(6)(iv)(A) through (E) of this section.
(A) If you comply with the emission reduction standard with a control device, the information for each control device in paragraph (c)(10) of this section.
(B) Records of the closed vent system inspection as specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(C) Records of the cover inspections as specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(8) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(D) If applicable, the records of bypass monitoring as specified in paragraph (c)(9) of this section.
(E) Records of the closed vent system assessment as specified in paragraph (c)(11) of this section.
(v) For storage vessels that are skid-mounted or permanently attached to something that is mobile (such as trucks, railcars, barges, or ships), records indicating the number of consecutive days that the vessel is located at a site in the crude oil and natural gas source category. If a storage vessel is removed from a site and, within 30 days, is either returned to the site or replaced by another storage vessel at the site to serve the same or similar function, then the entire period since the original storage vessel was first located at the site, including the days when the storage vessel was removed, will be added to the count towards the number of consecutive days.
(vi) Records of the date that each storage vessel designated facility or portion of a storage vessel designated facility is removed from service and returned to service, as applicable.
(vii) Records of the date that liquids from the well following fracturing or refracturing are routed to the storage vessel designated facility; or the date that you comply with paragraph § 60.5396c(a)(2), following a monthly emissions determination which indicates that methane emissions increase to 14 tpy or greater and the increase is not associated with fracturing or refracturing of a well feeding the storage vessel designated facility, and records of the methane emissions rate and the model or calculation methodology used to calculate the methane emission rate.
(7) Records of each closed vent system inspection required under § 60.5416c(a)(1) and (2) and (b) for your well, centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, process controller, pump, storage vessel, and process unit equipment designated facility as required in paragraphs (c)(7)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A record of each closed vent system inspection or no identifiable emissions monitoring survey. You must include an identification number for each closed vent system (or other unique identification description selected by you), the date of the inspection, and the method used to conduct the inspection (i.e., visual, AVO, OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part).
(ii) For each defect or emissions detected during inspections required by § 60.5416c(a)(1) and (2), or (b) you must record the location of the defect or emissions; a description of the defect; the maximum concentration reading obtained if using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part; the indication of emissions detected by AVO if using AVO; the date of detection; the date of each attempt to repair the emissions or defect; the corrective action taken during each attempt to repair the defect; and the date the repair to correct the defect or emissions is completed.
(iii) If repair of the defect is delayed as described in § 60.5416c(b)(6), you must record the reason for the delay and the date you expect to complete the repair.
(iv) Parts of the closed vent system designated as unsafe to inspect as described in § 60.5416c(b)(7) or difficult to inspect as described in § 60.5416c(b)(8), the reason for the designation, and written plan for inspection of that part of the closed vent system.
(8) A record of each cover inspection required under § 60.5416c(a)(3) for your centrifugal compressor, reciprocating compressor, or storage vessel as required in paragraphs (c)(8)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) A record of each cover inspection. You must include an identification number for each cover (or other unique identification description selected by you), the date of the inspection, and the method used to conduct the inspection (i.e., AVO, OGI, Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part).
(ii) For each defect detected during the inspection you must record the location of the defect; a description of the defect; the date of detection; the maximum concentration reading obtained if using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part; the indication of emissions detected by AVO if using AVO; the date of each attempt to repair the defect; the corrective action taken during each attempt to repair the defect; and the date the repair to correct the defect is completed.
(iii) If repair of the defect is delayed as described in § 60.5416c(b)(5), you must record the reason for the delay and the date you expect to complete the repair.
(iv) Parts of the cover designated as unsafe to inspect as described in § 60.5416c(b)(7) or difficult to inspect as described in § 60.5416c(b)(8), the reason for the designation, and written plan for inspection of that part of the cover.
(9) For each bypass subject to the bypass requirements of § 60.5416c(a)(4), you must maintain a record of the following, as applicable: readings from the flow indicator; each inspection of the seal or closure mechanism; the date and time of each instance the key is checked out; date and time of each instance the alarm is sounded.
(10) Records for each control device used to comply with the emission reduction standard in § 60.5391c(b) for associated gas wells, § 60.5392c(a)(4) for centrifugal compressor designated facilities, § 60.5393c(d)(2) for reciprocating compressor designated facilities, § 60.5394c(b)(3) for your process controller designated facility in Alaska, § 60.5395c(b)(3) for your pump designated facility, § 60.5396c(a)(2) for your storage vessel designated facility, § 60.5390c(g) for well designated facility gas well liquids unloading, or § 60.5400c(f) or 60.5401c(e) for your process equipment designated facility, as required in paragraphs (c)(10)(i) through (viii) of this section. If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), keep records of the information in paragraph (c)(10)(ix) of this section, in lieu of the records required by paragraphs (c)(10)(i) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section.
(i) For a control device tested under § 60.5413c(d) which meets the criteria in § 60.5413c(d)(11) and (e), keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(10)(i)(A) through (E) of this section, in addition to the records in paragraphs (c)(10)(ii) through (ix) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Serial number of purchased device and copy of purchase order.
(B) Location of the designated facility associated with the control device in latitude and longitude coordinates in decimal degrees to an accuracy and precision of five (5) decimals of a degree using the North American Datum of 1983.
(C) Minimum and maximum inlet gas flow rate specified by the manufacturer.
(D) Records of the maintenance and repair log as specified in § 60.5413c(e)(4), for all inspection, repair, and maintenance activities for each control device failing the visible emissions test.
(E) Records of the manufacturer's written operating instructions, procedures, and maintenance schedule to ensure good air pollution control practices for minimizing emissions.
(ii) For all control devices, keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(10)(ii)(A) through (G) of this section, as applicable.
(A) Make, model, and date of installation of the control device, and identification of the designated facility controlled by the device.
(B) Records of deviations in accordance with § 60.5417c(g)(1) through (7), including a description of the deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and the cause of the deviation.
(C) The monitoring plan required by § 60.5417c(c)(2).
(D) Make and model number of each continuous parameter monitoring system.
(E) Records of minimum and maximum operating parameter values, continuous parameter monitoring system data (including records that the pilot or combustion flame is present at all times), calculated averages of continuous parameter monitoring system data, and results of all compliance calculations.
(F) Records of continuous parameter monitoring system equipment performance checks, system accuracy audits, performance evaluations, or other audit procedures and results of all inspections specified in the monitoring plan in accordance with § 60.5417c(c)(2). Records of calibration gas cylinders, if applicable.
(G) Periods of monitoring system malfunctions, repairs associated with monitoring system malfunctions and required monitoring system quality assurance or quality control activities. Records of repairs on the monitoring system.
(iii) For each carbon adsorption system, records of the schedule for carbon replacement as determined by the design analysis requirements of § 60.5413c(c)(2) and (3) and records of each carbon replacement as specified in §§ 60.5412c(c)(1) and 60.5415c(e)(1)(viii).
(iv) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, records of visible emissions observations as specified in paragraph (c)(10)(iv)(A) or (B) of this section.
(A) Records of observations with Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part, including observations required following return to operation from a maintenance or repair activity, which include: company, location, company representative (name of the person performing the observation), sky conditions, process unit (type of control device), clock start time, observation period duration (in minutes and seconds), accumulated emission time (in minutes and seconds), and clock end time. You may create your own form including the above information or use Figure 22-1 in Method 22 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(B) If you monitor visible emissions with a video surveillance camera, location of the camera and distance to emission source, records of the video surveillance output, and documentation that an operator looked at the feed daily, including the date and start time of observation, the length of observation, and length of time visible emissions were present.
(v) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, video of the OGI inspection conducted in accordance with § 60.5415c(e)(1)(x). Records documenting each enclosed combustion device and flare was visibly observed during each inspection conducted under § 60.5397c using AVO in accordance with § 60.5415c(e)(1)(x).
(vi) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, an indication of whether the enclosed combustion device or flare receives inert gases or other vent streams which may lower the NHV of the combined stream, and if so, a description of the operating scenario(s) which may lower the NHV of the combined stream through the introduction of inert gases or other vent gas streams. Records of each demonstration of the NHV of the inlet gas to the enclosed combustion device or flare conducted in accordance with § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iii), including the sampling approach used (continuous NHV, twice daily sampling, alternative method), the date, time and results of each analysis, and, if shorter sampling times were used with twice daily sampling, the collection time(s) used and the reason for not obtaining a full one hour sample. For each re-evaluation of the NHV of the inlet gas, records of process changes and explanation of the conditions that led to the need to re-evaluation the NHV of the inlet gas. For each demonstration where the enclosed combustion device or flare received inert gases, record the highest percentage of inert gases that can be sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare and the highest percent of inert gases sent to the enclosed combustion device or flare during the NHV demonstration. Records of periodic sampling conducted under § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iii)(G).
(vii) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, if you use a backpressure regulator valve, the make and model of the valve, date of installation, and record of inlet flow rating. Maintain records of the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications that identify the pressure set point corresponding to the minimum inlet gas flow rate, the annual confirmation that the backpressure regulator valve set point is correct and consistent with the engineering evaluation and manufacturer specifications, and the annual confirmation that the backpressure regulator valve fully closes when not in open position.
(viii) For enclosed combustion devices and flares, records of each demonstration required under § 60.5417c(d)(8)(iv).
(ix) If you use an enclosed combustion device or flare using an alternative test method approved under § 60.5412c(d), keep records of the information in paragraphs (c)(10)(ix)(A) through (H) of this section, in lieu of the records required by paragraphs (c)(10)(i) through (iv) and (vi) through (viii) of this section.
(A) An identification of the alternative test method used.
(B) Data recorded at the intervals required by the alternative test method.
(C) Monitoring plan required by § 60.5417c(i)(2).
(D) Quality assurance and quality control activities conducted in accordance with the alternative test method.
(E) If required by § 60.5412c(d)(4) to conduct visible emissions observations, records required by paragraph (c)(10)(iv) of this section.
(F) If required by § 60.5412c(d)(5) to conduct pilot or combustion flame monitoring, record indicating the presence of a pilot or combustion flame and periods when the pilot or combustion flame is absent.
(G) For each instance where there is a deviation of the control device in accordance with § 60.5417c(i)(6)(i) through (v), the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation in hours, and cause of the deviation.
(H) Any additional information required to be recorded as specified by the Administrator as part of the alternative test method approval under § 60.5412c(d).
(11) For each closed vent system routing to a control device or process, the records of the assessment conducted according to § 60.5411c(c):
(i) A copy of the assessment conducted according to § 60.5411c(c)(1); and
(ii) A copy of the certification according to § 60.5411c(c)(1)(i) and (ii).
(12) A copy of each performance test submitted under paragraph (b)(11) or (12) of this section.
(13) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility, maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(13)(i) through (vii) of this section.
(i) The date of the startup of production or the date of the first day of production after modification for the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site and the date of startup or the date of modification for the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a compressor station.
(ii) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site, you must maintain records specifying what type of well site it is (i.e., single wellhead only well site, small wellsite, multi-wellhead only well site, or a well site with major production and processing equipment).
(iii) For the fugitive emissions components designated facility at a well site where you complete the removal of all major production and processing equipment such that the well site contains only one or more wellheads, record the date the well site completes the removal of all major production and processing equipment from the well site, and, if the well site is still producing, record the well ID or separate tank battery ID receiving the production from the well site. If major production and processing equipment is subsequently added back to the well site, record the date that the first piece of major production and processing equipment is added back to the well site.
(iv) The fugitive emissions monitoring plan as required in § 60.5397c(b) through (d).
(v) The records of each monitoring survey as specified in paragraphs (c)(13)(v)(A) through (I) of this section.
(A) Date of the survey.
(B) Beginning and end time of the survey.
(C) Name of operator(s), training, and experience of the operator(s) performing the survey.
(D) Monitoring instrument or method used.
(E) Fugitive emissions component identification when Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used to perform the monitoring survey.
(F) Ambient temperature, sky conditions, and maximum wind speed at the time of the survey. For compressor stations, operating mode of each compressor (i.e., operating, standby pressurized, and not operating-depressurized modes) at the station at the time of the survey.
(G) Any deviations from the monitoring plan or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(H) Records of calibrations for the instrument used during the monitoring survey.
(I) Documentation of each fugitive emission detected during the monitoring survey, including the information specified in paragraphs (c)(13)(v)(I)(1) through (9) of this section.
(1) Location of each fugitive emission identified.
(2) Type of fugitive emissions component, including designation as difficult-to-monitor or unsafe-to-monitor, if applicable.
(3) If Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used for detection, record the component ID and instrument reading.
(4) For each repair that cannot be made during the monitoring survey when the fugitive emissions are initially found, a digital photograph or video must be taken of that component or the component must be tagged for identification purposes. The digital photograph must include the date that the photograph was taken and must clearly identify the component by location within the site (e.g., the latitude and longitude of the component or by other descriptive landmarks visible in the picture). The digital photograph or identification (e.g., tag) may be removed after the repair is completed, including verification of repair with the resurvey.
(5) The date of first attempt at repair of the fugitive emissions component(s).
(6) The date of successful repair of the fugitive emissions component, including the resurvey to verify repair and instrument used for the resurvey.
(7) Identification of each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair and explanation for each delay of repair.
(8) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(9) Date of planned shutdowns that occur while there are any components that have been placed on delay of repair.
(vi) For well closure activities, you must maintain the information specified in paragraphs (c)(13)(vi)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) The well closure plan developed in accordance with § 60.5397c(l) and the date the plan was submitted.
(B) The notification of the intent to close the well site and the date the notification was submitted.
(C) The date of the cessation of production from all wells at the well site.
(D) The date you began well closure activities at the well site.
(E) Each status report for the well closure activities reported in paragraph (b)(8)(iv)(A) of this section.
(F) Each OGI survey reported in paragraph (b)(8)(iv)(B) of this section including the date, the monitoring instrument used, and the results of the survey or resurvey.
(G) The final OGI survey video demonstrating the closure of all wells at the site. The video must include the date that the video was taken and must identify the well site location by latitude and longitude.
(vii) If you comply with an alternative GHG standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraphs (c)(13)(iv) and (v) of this section, you must maintain the records specified in § 60.5424c.
(14) For each pump designated facility, you must maintain the records identified in paragraphs (c)(14)(i) through (ix) of this section, as applicable.
(i) Identification of each pump that is driven by natural gas and that is in operation 90 days or more per calendar year.
(ii) If you are complying with § 60.5395c(a) or (b)(1) by routing pump vapors to a process through a closed vent system, identification of all the natural gas-driven pumps in the pump designated facility for which you collect and route vapors to a process through a closed vent system and the records specified in paragraphs (c)(7), (9), and (11) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(7) of this section, you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(iii) If you are complying with § 60.5395c(b)(1) by routing pump vapors to control device achieving a 95.0 percent reduction in methane emissions, you must keep the records specified in paragraphs (c)(7) and (9) through (12) of this section. If you comply with an alternative GHG and VOC standard under § 60.5398c, in lieu of the information specified in paragraph (c)(7), you must provide the information specified in § 60.5424c.
(iv) If you are complying with § 60.5395c(b)(3) by routing pump vapors to a control device achieving less than a 95.0 percent reduction in methane emissions, you must maintain records of the certification that there is a control device on site but it does not achieve a 95.0 percent emissions reduction and a record of the design evaluation or manufacturer's specifications which indicate the percentage reduction the control device is designed to achieve.
(v) If you have less than three natural gas-driven diaphragm pumps in the pump designated facility, and you do not have a vapor recovery unit or control device installed on site by the compliance date, you must retain a record of your certification required under § 60.5395c(b)(4), certifying that there is no vapor recovery unit or control device on site. If you subsequently install a control device or vapor recovery unit, you must maintain the records required under paragraphs (c)(14)(ii) and (iii) or (iv) of this section, as applicable.
(vi) If you determine, through an engineering assessment, that it is technically infeasible to route the pump designated facility emissions to a process or control device, you must retain records of your demonstration and certification that it is technically infeasible as required under § 60.5395c(b)(7).
(vii) If the pump is routed to a process or control device that is subsequently removed from the location or is no longer available such that there is no option to route to a process or control device, you are required to retain records of this change and the records required under paragraph (c)(14)(vi) of this section.
(viii) Records of each change in compliance method, including identification of each natural gas-driven pump which changes its method of compliance, the new method of compliance, and the date of the change in compliance method.
(ix) Records of each deviation, the date and time the deviation began, the duration of the deviation, and a description of the deviation.
(d) Electronic reporting. If you are required to submit notifications or reports following the procedure specified in this paragraph (d), you must submit notifications or reports to the EPA via CEDRI, which can be accessed through the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (https://cdx.epa.gov/). The EPA will make all the information submitted through CEDRI available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use CEDRI to submit information you claim as CBI. Although we do not expect persons to assert a claim of CBI, if you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in the report or notification, you must submit a complete file in the format specified in this subpart, including information claimed to be CBI, to the EPA following the procedures in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section. Clearly mark the part or all of the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using CEDRI cannot later be claimed CBI. Furthermore, under CAA section 114(c), emissions data is not entitled to confidential treatment, and the EPA is required to make emissions data available to the public. Thus, emissions data will not be protected as CBI and will be made publicly available. You must submit the same file submitted to the CBI office with the CBI omitted to the EPA via the EPA's CDX as described in this paragraph (d).
(1) The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov, and as described above, should include clear CBI markings. ERT files should be flagged to the attention of the Group Leader, Measurement Policy Group; all other files should be flagged to the attention of the Oil and Natural Gas Sector Lead. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link.
(2) If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA, Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, RTP, NC 27711. ERT files should be sent to the secondary attention of the Group Leader, Measurement Policy Group, and all other files should be sent to the secondary attention of the Oil and Natural Gas Sector Lead. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(e) Claims of EPA system outage. If you are required to electronically submit a notification or report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of EPA system outage for failure to timely comply with that requirement. To assert a claim of EPA system outage, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must have been or will be precluded from accessing CEDRI and submitting a required report within the time prescribed due to an outage of either the EPA's CEDRI or CDX systems.
(2) The outage must have occurred within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date that the submission is due.
(3) The outage may be planned or unplanned.
(4) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(5) You must provide to the Administrator a written description identifying:
(i) The date(s) and time(s) when CDX or CEDRI was accessed and the system was unavailable;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to EPA system outage;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(6) The decision to accept the claim of EPA system outage and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(7) In any circumstance, the report must be submitted electronically as soon as possible after the outage is resolved.
(f) Claims of force majeure. If you are required to electronically submit a report or notification through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of force majeure for failure to timely comply with that requirement. To assert a claim of force majeure, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (f)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You may submit a claim if a force majeure event is about to occur, occurs, or has occurred or there are lingering effects from such an event within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date the submission is due. For the purposes of this section, a force majeure event is defined as an event that will be or has been caused by circumstances beyond the control of the designated facility, its contractors, or any entity controlled by the designated facility that prevents you from complying with the requirement to submit a report electronically within the time period prescribed. Examples of such events are acts of nature (e.g., hurricanes, earthquakes, or floods), acts of war or terrorism, or equipment failure or safety hazard beyond the control of the designated facility (e.g., large scale power outage).
(2) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(3) You must provide to the Administrator:
(i) A written description of the force majeure event;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to the force majeure event;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(4) The decision to accept the claim of force majeure and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(5) In any circumstance, the reporting must occur as soon as possible after the force majeure event occurs.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62935, Aug. 1, 2024; 91 FR 18119, Apr. 9, 2026]
§ 60.5421c What are my additional recordkeeping requirements for process unit equipment designated facilities?
You must maintain a record of each equipment leak monitoring inspection and each leak identified under § 60.5400c and § 60.5401c as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (17) of this section. The record must be maintained either onsite or at the nearest local field office for at least 5 years. Any records required to be maintained that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(a) You may comply with the recordkeeping requirements for multiple process unit equipment designated facilities in one recordkeeping system if the system identifies each record by each facility.
(b) You must maintain the monitoring inspection records specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (17) of this section.
(1) Note that connectors need not be individually identified if all connectors in a designated area or length of pipe subject to the provisions of this subpart are identified as a group, and the number of connectors subject is indicated.
(2) Date and start and end times of the monitoring inspection.
(3) Inspector name.
(4) Leak determination method used for the monitoring inspection (i.e., OGI, Method 21, or AVO).
(5) Monitoring instrument identification (OGI and Method 21 only).
(6) Type of equipment monitored.
(7) Process unit identification.
(8) The records specified in Section 12 of appendix K to this part, for each monitoring inspection conducted with OGI.
(9) The records in paragraph (b)(9)(i) through (vii) of this section, for each monitoring inspection conducted with Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(i) Instrument reading.
(ii) Date and time of instrument calibration and initials of operator performing the calibration.
(iii) Calibration gas cylinder identification, certification date, and certified concentration.
(iv) Instrument scale used.
(v) A description of any corrective action taken if the meter readout could not be adjusted to correspond to the calibration gas value in accordance with section 10.1 of Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(vi) Results of the daily calibration drift assessment.
(vii) If you make your own calibration gas, a description of the procedure used.
(10) For visual inspections of pumps in light liquid service, keep the records specified in paragraphs (b)(10)(i) through (iii) of this section, for each monitored equipment:
(i) Date of inspection.
(ii) Inspector name.
(iii) Result of inspection (i.e., visual indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal or no visual indications of liquids dripping from the pump seal).
(11) For each leak detected, the records specified in paragraphs (b)(11)(i) through (v) of this section:
(i) The instrument and operator identification numbers and the process unit and equipment identification numbers. For leaks identified via visual, olfactory, audible methods, enter the specific sensory method for instrument identification number.
(ii) The date the leak was detected.
(iii) For each attempt to repair the leak, record:
(A) The date.
(B) The repair method applied.
(C) Indication of whether a leak was still detected following each attempt to repair the leak.
(vi) The date of successful repair of the leak and the method of monitoring used to confirm the repair, as specified in paragraph (b)(11)(vi)(A) through (C) of this section.
(A) If Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part is used to confirm the repair, maintain a record of the maximum instrument reading measured by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
(B) If OGI conducted in accordance with appendix K to this part is used to confirm the repair, maintain a record of video footage of the repair confirmation.
(C) If the leak is repaired by eliminating AVO indications of a leak, maintain a record of the specific sensory method used to confirm that the evidence of the leak is eliminated.
(v) For each repair delayed beyond 15 calendar days after detection of the leak, record:
(A) “Repair delayed” and the reason for the delay.
(B) The signature of the certifying official who made the decision that repair could not be completed without a process shutdown.
(C) The expected date of successful repair of the leak.
(D) Dates of process unit shutdowns that occur while the equipment is unrepaired.
(12) A list of identification numbers for equipment that are designated for no detectable emissions complying with the provisions of § 60.5401c.
(13) A list of identification numbers for valves, pumps, and connectors that are designated as unsafe-to-monitor, an explanation for each valve, pump, or connector stating why the valve, pump, or connector is unsafe-to-monitor, and the plan for monitoring each valve, pump, or connector.
(14) A list of identification numbers for valves that are designated as difficult-to-monitor, an explanation for each valve stating why the valve is difficult-to-monitor, and the schedule for monitoring each valve.
(15) A list of identification numbers for equipment that is in vacuum service.
(16) A list of identification numbers for equipment you designate as having the potential to emit methane less than 300 hr/yr.
(17) A list of identification numbers for valves where it was infeasible to replace leaking valves with low-e valves or repack existing valves with low-e packing technology, including the reasoning for why it was infeasible.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62948, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5422c What are my additional reporting requirements for process unit equipment designated facilities?
(a) You must submit semiannual reports using the appropriate electronic report template on the CEDRI website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in § 60.5420c(d). If the reporting form specific to this subpart is not available on the CEDRI website at the time that the report is due, submit the report to the Administrator at the appropriate address listed in § 60.4. Once the form has been available on the CEDRI website for at least 90 calendar days, you must begin submitting all subsequent reports via CEDRI. The date reporting forms become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted within 45 days after the end of the semiannual reporting period, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(b) The initial semiannual report must include the following information:
(1) The general information specified in paragraph (c)(1) of this section.
(2) For each process unit:
(i) Process unit identification.
(ii) Number of valves subject to the monitoring requirements of § 60.5400c(b) and § 60.5401c(f).
(iii) Number of pumps subject to the monitoring requirements of § 60.5400c(b) and § 60.5401c(b).
(iv) Number of connectors subject to the monitoring requirements of § 60.5400c(b) and § 60.5401c(h).
(v) Number of pressure relief devices subject to the monitoring requirements of § 60.5400c(b) and § 60.5401c(c).
(vi) The information in paragraphs (c)(3) and (4) of this section.
(c) All subsequent semiannual reports must include the following information:
(1) The general information specified in paragraphs (c)(1)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The company name, facility site name, and address of the designated facility.
(ii) Beginning and ending dates of the reporting period.
(iii) A certification by a certifying official of truth, accuracy, and completeness. This certification shall state that, based on information and belief formed after reasonable inquiry, the statements and information in the document are true, accurate, and complete. If your report is submitted via CEDRI, the certifier's electronic signature during the submission process replaces the requirement in this paragraph (c)(1)(iii).
(2) Process unit identification for each process unit.
(3) For each month during the semiannual reporting period for each process unit report:
(i) Number of valves for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400c(b) or § 60.5401c(f).
(ii) Number of valves for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i) and the number of instances where it was technically infeasible to replace leaking valves with low-e valves or repack existing valves with low-e packing technology, including the reasoning for why it was technically infeasible.
(iii) Number of pumps for which leaks were detected as described § 60.5400c(b) or § 60.5401c(b).
(iv) Number of pumps for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i).
(v) Number of connectors for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400c(b) or § 60.5401c(h).
(vi) Number of connectors for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i).
(vii) Number of pressure relief devices for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400c(b) or § 60.5401c(c).
(viii) Number of pressure relief devices for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i).
(ix) Number of open-ended valves or lines for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400c(e) of § 60.5401c(d).
(x) Number of open-ended valves or lines for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i).
(xi) Number of pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service or pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service for which leaks were detected as described in § 60.5400c(g) or § 60.5401c(g).
(xii) Number of pumps, valves, or connectors in heavy liquid service or pressure relief device in light liquid or heavy liquid service for which leaks were not repaired as required in § 60.5400c(h) or § 60.5401c(i).
(xiii) The facts that explain each delay of repair and, where appropriate, why a process unit shutdown was technically infeasible.
(4) Dates of process unit shutdowns which occurred within the semiannual reporting period.
(5) Revisions to items reported according to paragraph (b) of this section if changes have occurred since the initial report or subsequent revisions to the initial report.
§ 60.5424c What are my additional recordkeeping and reporting requirements if I comply with the alternative GHG standards for fugitive emissions components designated facilities and covers and closed vent systems?
This section provides notification, reporting, and recordkeeping requirements for owners and operators who choose to comply with an alternative GHG standard as specified in § 60.5398c for fugitive emissions components designated facilities and the alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems. You must submit an annual report in accordance with the schedule in § 60.5420c(b) which includes the information in paragraphs (a)(1), (b), and (d) of this section, as applicable. You must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(2) of this section and maintain the records in paragraphs (c) and (e) of this section, as applicable.
(a) Notifications. If you choose to comply with an alternative GHG standard as specified in § 60.5398c for fugitive emissions components designated facilities and the alternative continuous inspection and monitoring requirements for covers and closed vent systems, you must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(1) of this section. If you are required by § 60.5398c(c)(8) to develop a mass emission rate reduction plan, you must submit the notification in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(1) A notification to the Administrator of adoption of the alternative standards in the annual report required by § 60.5420c(b)(3) through (10).
(2) A notification, which includes the submittal of the mass emission rate reduction plan required by § 60.5398c(c)(8). You must submit the mass emission rate reduction plan to the Administrator within 60 days of the initial exceedance of the action level.
(b) If you comply with the periodic screening requirements of § 60.5398c(b), you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(1) through (6) of this section in the annual report required by § 60.5420c(b)(3) through (10).
(1) Date of each periodic screening during the reporting period and date that results of the periodic screening were received.
(2) Alternative test method and technology used for each screening and the spatial resolution of the technology (i.e., facility-level, area-level, or component level).
(3) Any deviations from the monitoring plan developed under § 60.5398c(b)(1) or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(4) Results from each periodic screening during the reporting period. If the results of the periodic screening indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from a designated facility, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(4)(i) through (iv) of this section.
(i) The date that the monitoring survey of your entire or the required portion of your fugitive emissions components designated facility was conducted.
(ii) The date that you completed the instrument inspections of all required covers and closed vent systems(s).
(iii) The date that you conducted the visual inspection for emissions of all required closed vent systems and covers.
(iv) For each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components designated facility and all emissions or defects of each cover and closed vent system, you must submit the information in paragraphs (b)(4)(iv)(A) through (D) of this section.
(A) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(B) Each emission or defect identified during the inspection for each cover and closed vent system.
(C) Date of repair for each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components designated facility or each emission or defect for each cover and closed vent system.
(D) Number and type of fugitive emission components and identification of each cover or closed vent system placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(5) The information in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section if you are required to conduct OGI surveys in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(1)(i) or if you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(1)(iv).
(i) The date of the OGI survey.
(ii) Number and type of components for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(iii) Number and type of fugitive emissions components that were not repaired as required in § 60.5397c(h).
(iv) Number and type of fugitive emission components placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(6) Any additional information regarding the performance of the periodic screening technology as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
(c) If you comply with the periodic screening requirements of § 60.5398c(b), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(1) through (11) of this section in addition to the records as specified in § 60.5420c(c)(2) through (8) and (c)(13) and (14).
(1) The monitoring plan as required in § 60.5398c(b)(2).
(2) Date of each periodic screening and date that results of the periodic screening were received.
(3) Name of screening operator.
(4) Alternative test method and technology used for screening, as well as the aggregate detection threshold for the technology and the spatial resolution of the technology (i.e., facility-level, area-level, or component-level).
(5) Records of calibrations for technology used during the screening, if calibration is required by the alternative test method approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d).
(6) Results from periodic screening. If the results of the periodic screening indicate a confirmed detection of emissions from a designated facility, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(6)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) The date of the inspection of the fugitive emissions components and inspection of covers and closed vent system, as specified in § 60.5398c(b)(5).
(ii) Name of operator(s) performing the survey or inspection.
(iii) For surveys and instrument inspections, identification of the monitoring instrument(s) used.
(iv) Records of calibrations for the instrument(s) used during the survey or instrument inspection, as applicable.
(v) For each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components designated facility and each leak or defect for each cover and closed vent system inspection, you must maintain the records in paragraphs (c)(6)(v)(A) through (F) of this section.
(A) The location of the fugitive emissions identified using a unique identifier for the source of the emissions and the type of fugitive emissions component.
(B) The location of the emission or defect from a cover or closed vent system using a unique identifier for the source of the emission or defect.
(C) If a defect of a closed vent system, cover, or control device is identified, a description of the defect.
(D) The date of repair for each fugitive emission from a fugitive emissions components designated facility or each emission or defect for each cover and closed vent system.
(E) Number and type of fugitive emission components and identification of each cover or closed vent system placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(F) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(7) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(5)(vi) and (vii), as applicable.
(8) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken as a result of the investigative analysis and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(5)(vi) and (vii), as applicable.
(9) The information in paragraphs (c)(9)(i) through (vii) of this section if you are required to conduct OGI surveys in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(1)(i) or if you replace a periodic screening event with an OGI survey in accordance with § 60.5398c(b)(1)(iv).
(i) The date of the OGI survey.
(ii) Location of each fugitive emission identified.
(iii) Type of fugitive emissions component for which fugitive emissions were detected.
(iv) The date of first attempt at repair of the fugitive emissions component(s).
(v) The date of successful repair of the fugitive emissions component(s), including the resurvey to verify the repair.
(vi) Identification of each fugitive emissions component placed on delay of repair and an explanation for each delay of repair.
(vii) For each fugitive emission component placed on delay of repair for reason of replacement component unavailability, the operator must document: the date the component was added to the delay of repair list, the date the replacement fugitive component or part thereof was ordered, the anticipated component delivery date (including any estimated shipment or delivery date provided by the vendor), and the actual arrival date of the component.
(10) Any deviations from the monitoring plan or a statement that there were no deviations from the monitoring plan.
(11) All records required by the alternative approved in accordance with § 60.5398b(d).
(d) If you comply with the continuous monitoring system requirements of § 60.5398c(c), you must submit the information in paragraphs (d)(1) through (6) of this section in the annual report required by § 60.5420c(b)(3) through (10).
(1) The start date and end date for each period where the emissions rate determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(6) exceeded one of the action levels determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(4). Include which action level was exceeded (the 7-day or 90-day rolling average), the numerical value of the action level, and the mass emission rate calculated by the continuous monitoring system in the report.
(2) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(7), as applicable.
(3) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken to reduce the mass emission rate and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(7), as applicable.
(4) If there are no instances reported under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, report your numerical action levels and the highest 7-day rolling average and highest 90-day rolling average determined by your continuous monitoring system during the reporting period.
(5) The start date for each instance where the 12-month rolling average operational downtime of the system exceeded 10 percent and the value of the 12-month rolling average operational downtime during the period. If there were no instances during the reporting period where the 12-month rolling average operational downtime of the system exceeded 10 percent, report the highest value of the 12-month rolling average operational downtime during the reporting period.
(6) Any additional information regarding the performance of the continuous monitoring system as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
(e) If you comply with the continuous monitoring system requirements of § 60.5398c(c), you must maintain the records in paragraphs (e)(1) through (15) of this section.
(1) The monitoring plan required by § 60.5398c(c)(2).
(2) Date of commencement of continuous monitoring with your continuous monitoring system.
(3) The detection threshold of the continuous monitoring system.
(4) The results of checks for power and function in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(1)(ii).
(5) The beginning and end of each period of operational downtime for the system.
(6) Each rolling 12-month average operational downtime for the system, calculated in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(1)(iv)(D).
(7) The 7-day rolling average and 90-day rolling average action levels for the site determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(4).
(8) The information in paragraphs (e)(8)(i) through (v) of this section each time you establish site-specific baseline emissions in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(5).
(i) Records of inspections of fugitive emissions components, covers, and closed vent systems required by § 60.5398c(c)(5)(i), including the date of inspection, location of each emission or defect identified, date of successful repair of each fugitive emissions component, cover, or closed vent system.
(ii) Records of inspections of control devices required by § 60.5398c(c)(5)(ii), including the date of the inspection and the results of the inspection.
(iii) The start date and time and end date and time of any maintenance activities that occurred during the 30 operating day period.
(iv) The site-level emission rate for each day during the 30 operating day period.
(v) The calculated site-specific baseline emission rate.
(9) Each methane mass emission rate reading determined by the system.
(10) Each daily, 7-day, and 90-day average mass emission rate which was determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(6). If you exceed the 90-day action level, you must also keep records of the 30-day average mass emission rate following completion of the initial actions to reduce the average mass emission rate, in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(8)(i).
(11) The results of each comparison of the emissions rate determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(6) to the action level determined in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(4).
(12) The date the investigative analysis was initiated, and the result of the investigative analysis conducted in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(7), as applicable.
(13) Dates of implementation and completion of action(s) taken to reduce the mass emission rate below the action level and a description of the action(s) taken in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(7), as applicable.
(14) Each mass emission rate reduction plan developed in accordance with § 60.5398c(c)(8), as applicable. You must keep records of the actions taken in accordance with the plan and the date such actions are taken.
(15) Any additional information regarding the performance of the continuous monitoring technology as specified by the Administrator, as part of the alternative test method approval described in § 60.5398b(d).
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62948, Aug. 1, 2024]
§ 60.5425c What parts of the General Provisions apply to me?
Table 4 to this subpart shows which parts of the General Provisions in §§ 60.1 through 60.19 apply to you.
Model Rule—Definitions
§ 60.5430c What definitions apply to this subpart?
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein shall have the meaning given them in the Act or in subpart A of this part; and the following terms shall have the specific meanings given them.
Access to electrical power means commercial line power is available onsite, with sufficient capacity to support the required power loading of onsite equipment, and which provides reliable and consistent power.
Acid gas means a gas stream of hydrogen sulfide (H2S) and carbon dioxide (CO2) that has been separated from sour natural gas by a sweetening unit.
Alaskan North Slope means the approximately 69,000 square-mile area extending from the Brooks Range to the Arctic Ocean.
API Gravity means the weight per unit volume of hydrocarbon liquids as measured by a system recommended by the American Petroleum Institute (API) and is expressed in degrees.
Artificial lift equipment means mechanical pumps including, but not limited to, rod pumps and electric submersible pumps used to flowback fluids from a well.
Associated gas means the natural gas from wells operated primarily for oil production that is released from the liquid hydrocarbon during the initial stage of separation after the wellhead. Associated gas production begins at the startup of production after the flow back period ends. Gas from wildcat or delineation wells is not associated gas.
Average aggregate detection threshold means:
(1) For the purposes of § 60.5398c, the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment (e.g., a singular flight that surveys multiple well sites, centralized production facility, and/or compressor stations) of a technology; and
(2) For the purposes of § 60.5388c, the average of all site-level detection thresholds from a single deployment in the same basin and field.
Bleed rate means the rate in standard cubic feet per hour at which natural gas is continuously vented (bleeds) from a process controller.
Capital expenditure means, as an alternative to the definition in § 60.2, an expenditure for a physical or operational change to an existing facility that:
(1) Exceeds P, the product of the facility's replacement cost, R, and an adjusted annual asset guideline repair allowance, A, as reflected by the following equation: P = R × A, where:
(i) The adjusted annual asset guideline repair allowance, A, is the product of the percent of the replacement cost, Y, and the applicable basic annual asset guideline repair allowance, B, divided by 100 as reflected by the following equation: A = Y × (B ÷ 100);
(ii) The percent Y is determined from the following equation: Y = (CPI of date of construction/most recently available CPI of date of project), where the “CPI-U, U.S. city average, all items” must be used for each CPI value; and
(iii) The applicable basic annual asset guideline repair allowance, B, is 4.5.
(2) [Reserved]
Centralized production facility means one or more storage vessels and all equipment at a single surface site used to gather, for the purpose of sale or processing to sell, crude oil, condensate, produced water, or intermediate hydrocarbon liquid from one or more offsite natural gas or oil production wells. This equipment includes, but is not limited to, equipment used for storage, separation, treating, dehydration, artificial lift, combustion, compression, pumping, metering, monitoring, and flowline. Process vessels and process tanks are not considered storage vessels or storage tanks. A centralized production facility is located upstream of the natural gas processing plant or the crude oil pipeline breakout station and is a part of producing operations.
Centrifugal compressor means any machine for raising the pressure of a natural gas by drawing in low pressure natural gas and discharging significantly higher-pressure natural gas by means of mechanical rotating vanes or impellers. Screw, sliding vane, and liquid ring compressors are not centrifugal compressors for the purposes of this subpart.
Centrifugal compressor equipped with sour seal oil separator and capture system means a wet seal centrifugal compressor system which has an intermediate closed process that degasses most of the gas entrained in the sour seal oil and sends that gas to either another process or combustion device (i.e., degassed emissions are recovered). The de-gas emissions are routed back to a process or combustion device directly from the intermediate closed degassing process; after the intermediate closed process the oil is ultimately recycled for recirculation in the seals to the lube oil tank where any small amount of residual gas is released through a vent.
Certifying official means one of the following:
(1) For a corporation: A president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or decision-making functions for the corporation, or a duly authorized representative of such person if the representative is responsible for the overall operation of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating facilities with a designated facility subject to this subpart and either:
(i) The facilities employ more than 250 persons or have gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding $25 million (in second quarter 1980 dollars); or
(ii) The Administrator is notified of such delegation of authority prior to the exercise of that authority. The Administrator reserves the right to evaluate such delegation;
(2) For a partnership (including but not limited to general partnerships, limited partnerships, and limited liability partnerships) or sole proprietorship: A general partner or the proprietor, respectively. If a general partner is a corporation, the provisions of paragraph (1) of this definition apply;
(3) For a municipality, State, Federal, or other public agency: Either a principal executive officer or ranking elected official. For the purposes of this part, a principal executive officer of a Federal agency includes the chief executive officer having responsibility for the overall operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency (e.g., a Regional Administrator of EPA); or
(4) For designated facilities:
(i) The designated representative in so far as actions, standards, requirements, or prohibitions under title IV of the CAA or the regulations promulgated thereunder are concerned; or
(ii) The designated representative for any other purposes under this part.
Closed vent system means a system that is not open to the atmosphere and that is composed of hard-piping, ductwork, connections, and, if necessary, flow-inducing devices that transport gas or vapor from a piece or pieces of equipment to a control device or back to a process.
Coil tubing cleanout means the process where an operator runs a string of coil tubing to the packed proppant within a well and jets the well to dislodge the proppant and provide sufficient lift energy to flow it to the surface. Coil tubing cleanout includes mechanical methods to remove solids and/or debris from a wellbore.
Collection system means any infrastructure that conveys gas or liquids from the well site to another location for treatment, storage, processing, recycling, disposal, or other handling.
Completion combustion device means any ignition device, installed horizontally or vertically, used in exploration and production operations to combust otherwise vented emissions from completions. Completion combustion devices include pit flares.
Compressor mode means the operational and pressurized status of a compressor. For both centrifugal compressors and reciprocating compressors, “mode” refers to either: Operating-mode, standby-pressurized-mode, or not-operating-depressurized-mode.
Compressor station means any permanent combination of one or more compressors that move natural gas at increased pressure through gathering or transmission pipelines, or into or out of storage. This includes, but is not limited to, gathering and boosting stations and transmission compressor stations. The combination of one or more compressors located at a well site, centralized production facility, or an onshore natural gas processing plant, is not a compressor station for purposes of § 60.5386c(e) and § 60.5397c.
Condensate means hydrocarbon liquid separated from natural gas that condenses due to changes in the temperature, pressure, or both, and remains liquid at standard conditions.
Connector means flanged, screwed, or other joined fittings used to connect two pipe lines or a pipe line and a piece of process equipment or that close an opening in a pipe that could be connected to another pipe. Joined fittings welded completely around the circumference of the interface are not considered connectors for the purpose of this regulation.
Continuous bleed means a continuous flow of pneumatic supply natural gas to a process controller.
Crude oil and natural gas source category means:
(1) Crude oil production, which includes the well and extends to the point of custody transfer to the crude oil transmission pipeline or any other forms of transportation; and
(2) Natural gas production, processing, transmission, and storage, which include the well and extend to, but do not include, the local distribution company custody transfer station.
Custody meter means the meter where natural gas or hydrocarbon liquids are measured for sales, transfers, and/or royalty determination.
Custody meter assembly means an assembly of fugitive emissions components, including the custody meter, valves, flanges, and connectors necessary for the proper operation of the custody meter.
Custody transfer means the transfer of crude oil or natural gas after processing and/or treatment in the producing operations, or from storage vessels or automatic transfer facilities or other such equipment, including product loading racks, to pipelines or any other forms of transportation.
Dehydrator means a device in which an absorbent directly contacts a natural gas stream and absorbs water in a contact tower or adsorption column (absorber).
Delineation well means a well drilled in order to determine the boundary of a field or producing reservoir.
Deviation means any instance in which a designated source subject to this subpart, or an owner or operator of such a source:
(1) Fails to meet any requirement or obligation established by this subpart including, but not limited to, any emission limit, operating limit, or work practice standard;
(2) Fails to meet any term or condition that is adopted to implement an applicable requirement in this subpart and that is included in the operating permit for any designated source required to obtain such a permit; or
(3) Fails to meet any emission limit, operating limit, or work practice standard of this subpart during startup, shutdown, or malfunction, regardless of whether or not such failure is permitted by this subpart.
Distance piece means an open or enclosed casing through which the piston rod travels, separating the compressor cylinder from the crankcase.
Double block and bleed system means two block valves connected in series with a bleed valve or line that can vent the line between the two block valves.
Duct work means a conveyance system such as those commonly used for heating and ventilation systems. It is often made of sheet metal and often has sections connected by screw or crimping. Hard-piping is not ductwork.
Emergency shutdown device means a device which functions exclusively to protect personnel and/or prevent physical damage to equipment by shutting down equipment or gas flow during unsafe conditions resulting from an unexpected event, such as a pipe break or fire. For the purposes of this subpart, an emergency shutdown device is not used for routine control of operating conditions.
Equipment, as used in the standards and requirements of this subpart relative to the process unit equipment designated facility at onshore natural gas processing plants, means each pump, pressure relief device, open-ended valve or line, valve, and flange or other connector that has the potential to emit methane and any device or system required by those same standards and requirements of this subpart.
Field gas means feedstock gas entering the natural gas processing plant.
Field gas gathering means the system used transport field gas from a field to the main pipeline in the area.
First attempt at repair means an action taken for the purpose of stopping or reducing fugitive emissions to the atmosphere. First attempts at repair include, but are not limited to, the following practices where practicable and appropriate: Tightening bonnet bolts; replacing bonnet bolts; tightening packing gland nuts; or injecting lubricant into lubricated packing.
Flare means a thermal oxidation system using an open (without enclosure) flame. Completion combustion devices as defined in this section are not considered flares.
Flow line means a pipeline used to transport oil and/or gas to a processing facility or a mainline pipeline.
Flowback means the process of allowing fluids and entrained solids to flow from a well following a treatment, either in preparation for a subsequent phase of treatment or in preparation for cleanup and returning the well to production. The term flowback also means the fluids and entrained solids that emerge from a well during the flowback process. The flowback period begins when material introduced into the well during the treatment returns to the surface following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing. The flowback period ends when either the well is shut in and permanently disconnected from the flowback equipment or at the startup of production. The flowback period includes the initial flowback stage and the separation flowback stage. Screenouts, coil tubing cleanouts, and plug drill-outs are not considered part of the flowback process.
Fuel gas means gases that are combusted to derive useful work or heat.
Fuel gas system means the offsite and onsite piping and flow and pressure control system that gathers gaseous stream(s) generated by onsite operations, may blend them with other sources of gas, and transports the gaseous stream for use as fuel gas in combustion devices or in-process combustion equipment, such as furnaces and gas turbines, either singly or in combination.
Fugitive emissions means, for the purposes of § 60.5397c, any indication of emissions observed from a fugitive emissions component using AVO, an indication of visible emissions observed from an OGI instrument, or an instrument reading of 500 ppmv or greater using Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
Fugitive emissions component means any component that has the potential to emit fugitive emissions of methane at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station, such as valves (including separator dump valves), connectors, pressure relief devices, open-ended lines, flanges, covers and closed vent systems not subject to § 60.5411c, thief hatches or other openings on a storage vessel not subject to § 60.5396c, compressors, instruments, meters, and yard piping.
Gas to oil ratio (GOR) means the ratio of the volume of gas at standard temperature and pressure that is produced from a volume of oil when depressurized to standard temperature and pressure.
Hard-piping means pipe or tubing that is manufactured and properly installed using good engineering judgment and standards such as ASME B31.3, Process Piping (available from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers, P.O. Box 2300, Fairfield, NJ 07007-2300).
Hydraulic fracturing means the process of directing pressurized fluids containing any combination of water, proppant, and any added chemicals to penetrate tight formations, such as shale or coal formations, that subsequently require high rate, extended flowback to expel fracture fluids and solids during completions.
Hydraulic refracturing means conducting a subsequent hydraulic fracturing operation at a well that has previously undergone a hydraulic fracturing operation.
In gas/vapor service means that the piece of equipment contains process fluid that is in the gaseous state at operating conditions.
In heavy liquid service means that the piece of equipment is not in gas/vapor service or in light liquid service.
In light liquid service means that the piece of equipment contains a liquid that meets the conditions specified in § 60.5402c(d)(2) or § 60.5406c.
In vacuum service means that equipment is operating at an internal pressure which is at least 5 kilopascals (kPa) (0.7 psia) below ambient pressure.
In wet gas service means that a compressor or piece of equipment contains or contacts the field gas before the extraction step at a gas processing plant process unit.
Initial calibration value, as used in the standards and requirements of this subpart relative to the process unit equipment designated facility at onshore natural gas processing plants, means the concentration measured during the initial calibration at the beginning of each day required in § 60.5406c, or the most recent calibration if the instrument is recalibrated during the day (i.e., the calibration is adjusted) after a calibration drift assessment.
Initial flowback stage means the period during a well completion operation which begins at the onset of flowback and ends at the separation flowback stage.
Intermediate hydrocarbon liquid means any naturally occurring, unrefined petroleum liquid.
Intermittent vent natural gas-driven process controller means a process controller that is not designed to have a continuous bleed rate but is instead designed to only release natural gas to the atmosphere as part of the actuation cycle.
Liquefied natural gas unit means a unit used to cool natural gas to the point at which it is condensed into a liquid which is colorless, odorless, non-corrosive and non-toxic.
Liquid collection system means tankage and/or lines at a well site to contain liquids from one or more wells or to convey liquids to another site.
Liquids dripping means any visible leakage from the seal, including spraying, misting, clouding, and ice formation.
Liquids unloading means the unloading of liquids that have accumulated over time in gas wells, which are impeding or halting production. Routine well maintenance activities, including workovers, screenouts, coil tubing cleanouts, or any other activity that requires a rig or other machinery are not considered liquids unloading.
Local distribution company (LDC) custody transfer station means a metering station where the LDC receives a natural gas supply from an upstream supplier, which may be an interstate transmission pipeline or a local natural gas producer, for delivery to customers through the LDC's intrastate transmission or distribution lines.
Low-e valve means a valve (including its specific packing assembly) for which the manufacturer has issued a written warranty or performance guarantee that it will not emit fugitives at greater than 100 ppm in the first five years. A valve may qualify as a low-e valve if it is as an extension of another valve that has qualified as a low-e valve.
Low-e packing means a valve packing product for which the manufacturer has issued a written warranty or performance guarantee that it will not emit fugitives at greater than 100 ppm in the first five years. Low-e injectable packing is a type of low-e packing product for which the manufacturer has also issued a written warranty or performance guarantee and that can be injected into a valve during a “drill-and-tap” repair of the valve.
Major production and processing equipment means reciprocating or centrifugal compressors, glycol dehydrators, heater/treaters, separators, control devices, natural gas-driven process controllers, natural gas-driven pumps, and storage vessels or tank batteries collecting crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids, or produced water, for the purpose of determining whether a well site is a wellhead only well site.
Maximum average daily throughput means the following:
(1) The earliest calculation of daily average throughput, determined as described in paragraph (2) or (3) of this definition, to a tank battery over the days that production is routed to that tank battery during the 30-day PTE evaluation period employing generally accepted methods specified in § 60.5386c(e)(2).
(2) If throughput to the tank battery is measured on a daily basis (e.g., via level gauge automation or daily manual gauging), the maximum average daily throughput is the average of all daily throughputs for days on which throughput was routed to the tank battery during the 30-day evaluation period; or
(3) If throughput to the tank battery is not measured on a daily basis (e.g., via manual gauging at the start and end of loadouts), the maximum average daily throughput is the highest, of the average daily throughputs, determined for any production period to that tank battery during the 30-day evaluation period, as determined by averaging total throughput to that tank battery over each production period. A production period begins when production begins to be routed to a tank battery and ends either when throughput is routed away from that tank battery or when a loadout occurs from that tank battery, whichever happens first. Regardless of the determination methodology, operators must not include days during which throughput is not routed to the tank battery when calculating maximum average daily throughput for that tank battery.
Multi-wellhead only well site means a well site that contains two or more wellheads and no major production and processing equipment.
Natural gas-driven diaphragm pump means a positive displacement pump powered by pressurized natural gas that uses the reciprocating action of flexible diaphragms in conjunction with check valves to pump a fluid. A pump in which a fluid is displaced by a piston driven by a diaphragm is not considered a diaphragm pump for purposes of this subpart. A lean glycol circulation pump that relies on energy exchange with the rich glycol from the contactor is not considered a diaphragm pump.
Natural gas-driven piston pump means a positive displacement pump powered by pressurized natural gas that moves and pressurizes fluid by using one or more reciprocating pistons. A pump in which a fluid is displaced by a piston driven by a diaphragm is considered a piston pump for purposes of this subpart. A lean glycol circulation pump that relies on energy exchange with the rich glycol from the contactor is not considered a piston pump.
Natural gas-driven process controller means a process controller powered by pressurized natural gas.
Natural gas liquids means the hydrocarbons, such as ethane, propane, butane, and pentane that are extracted from field gas.
Natural gas processing plant (gas plant) means any processing site engaged in the extraction of natural gas liquids from field gas, fractionation of mixed natural gas liquids to natural gas products, or both. A Joule-Thompson valve, a dew point depression valve, or an isolated or standalone Joule-Thompson skid is not a natural gas processing plant.
Natural gas transmission means the pipelines used for the long-distance transport of natural gas (excluding processing). Specific equipment used in natural gas transmission includes the land, mains, valves, meters, boosters, regulators, storage vessels, dehydrators, compressors, and their driving units and appurtenances, and equipment used for transporting gas from a production plant, delivery point of purchased gas, gathering system, storage area, or other wholesale source of gas to one or more distribution area(s).
No detectable emissions means, for the purposes of §§ 60.5401c and 60.5406c, that the equipment is operating with an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part.
No identifiable emissions means, for the purposes of covers, closed vent systems, and self-contained natural gas-driven process controllers and as determined according to the provisions of § 60.5416c, that no emissions are detected by AVO means when inspections are conducted by AVO; no emissions are imaged with an OGI camera when inspections are conducted with OGI; and equipment is operating with an instrument reading of less than 500 ppmv above background, as determined by Method 21 of appendix A-7 to this part when inspections are conducted with Method 21.
Nonfractionating plant means any gas plant that does not fractionate mixed natural gas liquids into natural gas products.
Non-natural gas-driven process controller means an instrument that is actuated using other sources of power than pressurized natural gas; examples include solar, electric, and instrument air.
Onshore means all facilities except those that are located in the territorial seas or on the outer continental shelf.
Open-ended valve or line or open-ended vent line means any valves, except safety relief valves, having one side of the valve seat in contact with process fluid and one side open to the atmosphere, either directly or through open piping.
Plug drill-out means the removal of a plug (or plugs) that was used to isolate different sections of the well.
Process controller means an automated instrument used for maintaining a process condition such as liquid level, pressure, delta-pressure and temperature.
Pressure release means the emission of materials resulting from system pressure being greater than set pressure of the pressure relief device.
Pressure vessel means a storage vessel that is used to store liquids or gases and is designed not to vent to the atmosphere as a result of compression of the vapor headspace in the pressure vessel during filling of the pressure vessel to its design capacity.
Pressurized mode means when the compressor contains natural gas that is maintained at a pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure.
Process improvement means routine changes made for safety and occupational health requirements, for energy savings, for better utility, for ease of maintenance and operation, for correction of design deficiencies, for bottleneck removal, for changing product requirements, or for environmental control.
Process unit means components assembled for the extraction of natural gas liquids from field gas, the fractionation of the liquids into natural gas products, or other operations associated with the processing of natural gas products. A process unit can operate independently if supplied with sufficient feed or raw materials and sufficient storage facilities for the products.
Process unit shutdown means a work practice or operational procedure that stops production from a process unit or part of a process unit during which it is technically feasible to clear process material from a process unit or part of a process unit consistent with safety constraints and during which repairs can be accomplished. The following are not considered process unit shutdowns:
(1) An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure that stops production from a process unit or part of a process unit for less than 24 hours.
(2) An unscheduled work practice or operational procedure that would stop production from a process unit or part of a process unit for a shorter period of time than would be required to clear the process unit or part of the process unit of materials and start up the unit, and would result in greater emissions than delay of repair of leaking components until the next scheduled process unit shutdown.
(3) The use of spare equipment and technically feasible bypassing of equipment without stopping production.
Produced water means water that is extracted from the earth from an oil or natural gas production well, or that is separated from crude oil, condensate, or natural gas after extraction.
Qualified Professional Engineer means an individual who is licensed by a state as a Professional Engineer to practice one or more disciplines of engineering and who is qualified by education, technical knowledge and experience to make the specific technical certifications required under this subpart. Professional engineers making these certifications must be currently licensed in at least one state in which the certifying official is located.
Quarter means a 3-month period. For purposes of standards for process unit equipment designated facilities at onshore natural gas processing plants, the first quarter concludes on the last day of the last full month during the 180 days following initial startup.
Reciprocating compressor means a piece of equipment that increases the pressure of a process gas by positive displacement, employing linear movement of the driveshaft.
Reciprocating compressor rod packing means a series of flexible rings in machined metal cups that fit around the reciprocating compressor piston rod to create a seal limiting the amount of compressed natural gas that escapes to the atmosphere, or other mechanism that provides the same function.
Recovered gas means gas recovered through the separation process during flowback.
Recovered liquids means any crude oil, condensate or produced water recovered through the separation process during flowback.
Reduced emissions completion means a well completion following fracturing or refracturing where gas flowback that is otherwise vented is captured, cleaned, and routed to the gas flow line or collection system, re-injected into the well or another well, used as an onsite fuel source, or used for other useful purpose that a purchased fuel or raw material would serve, with no direct release to the atmosphere.
Reduced sulfur compounds means H2S, carbonyl sulfide (COS), and carbon disulfide (CS2).
Removed from service means that a storage vessel designated facility has been physically isolated and disconnected from the process for a purpose other than maintenance in accordance with § 60.5396c(c)(1).
Repaired means the following:
(1) For the purposes of fugitive emissions components designated facilities, that fugitive emissions components are adjusted, replaced, or otherwise altered, in order to eliminate fugitive emissions as defined in § 60.5397c and resurveyed as specified in § 60.5397c(h)(4) and it is verified that emissions from the fugitive emissions components are below the applicable fugitive emissions definition.
(2) For the purposes of process unit equipment designated facilities, that equipment is adjusted, or otherwise altered, in order to eliminate a leak as defined in §§ 60.5400c and 60.5401c and is re-monitored as specified in § 60.5400c(b) introductory text or § 60.5406c, respectively, to verify that emissions from the equipment are below the applicable leak definition. Pumps in light liquid service subject to § 60.5400c(c)(2) or § 60.5401c(b)(1)(ii) are not subject to re-monitoring.
Replacement cost means the capital needed to purchase all the depreciable components in a facility.
Returned to service means that a storage vessel designated facility that was removed from service has been:
(1) Reconnected to the original source of liquids or has been used to replace any storage vessel designated facility; or
(2) Installed in any location covered by this subpart and introduced with crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids or produced water.
Routed to a process or route to a process means the emissions are conveyed via a closed vent system to any enclosed portion of a process that is operational where the emissions are predominantly recycled and/or consumed in the same manner as a material that fulfills the same function in the process and/or transformed by chemical reaction into materials that are not regulated materials and/or incorporated into a product; and/or recovered.
Salable quality gas means natural gas that meets the flow line or collection system operator specifications, regardless of whether such gas is sold.
Screenout means an attempt to clear proppant from the wellbore to dislodge the proppant out of the well.
Self-contained process controller means a natural gas-driven process controller that releases gas into the downstream piping and not to the atmosphere, resulting in zero methane emissions.
Self-contained wet seal centrifugal compressor means:
(1) A wet seal centrifugal compressor system that is a closed process that ports the degassing emissions into the natural gas line at the compressor suction (i.e., degassed emissions are recovered) or which has an intermediate closed process that degasses most of the gas entrained in the seal oil and sends that gas to another process. The de-gas emissions are routed back to suction or process directly from the closed or intermediate closed degassing process; after the closed or intermediate closed degassing process the oil is ultimately recycled for recirculation in the seals to the lube oil tank where any small amount of residual gas is released through a vent.
(2) A wet seal centrifugal compressor equipped with mechanical wet seals, where (1) a differential pressure is maintained on the system and there is no off gassing of the lube oil, and (2) the mechanical seal is integrated into the compressor housing.
Sensor means a device that measures a physical quantity or the change in a physical quantity such as temperature, pressure, flow rate, pH, or liquid level.
Separation flowback stage means the period during a well completion operation when it is technically feasible for a separator to function. The separation flowback stage ends either at the startup of production, or when the well is shut in and permanently disconnected from the flowback equipment.
Separator dump valve means, for purposes of the fugitive emission standards in §§ 60.5397c and 60.5398c, a liquid-control valve in a separator that controls the liquid level within the separator vessel.
Single wellhead only well site means a wellhead only well site that contains only one wellhead and no major production and processing equipment.
Small well site means, for purposes of the fugitive emissions standards in §§ 60.5397c and 60.5398c, a well site that contains a single wellhead, no more than one piece of certain major production and processing equipment, and associated meters and yard piping. Small well sites cannot include any controlled storage vessels (or controlled tank batteries), control devices, or natural gas-driven process controllers, or natural gas-driven pumps.
Startup of production means the beginning of initial flow following the end of flowback when there is continuous recovery of salable quality gas and separation and recovery of any crude oil, condensate, or produced water, except as otherwise provided in this definition. For the purposes of the fugitive monitoring requirements of § 60.5397c, startup of production means the beginning of the continuous recovery of salable quality gas and separation and recovery of any crude oil, condensate, or produced water.
Storage vessel means a tank or other vessel that contains an accumulation of crude oil, condensate, intermediate hydrocarbon liquids, or produced water, and that is constructed primarily of nonearthen materials (such as wood, concrete, steel, fiberglass, or plastic) which provide structural support. A well completion vessel that receives recovered liquids from a well after startup of production following flowback for a period which exceeds 60 days is considered a storage vessel under this subpart. A tank or other vessel shall not be considered a storage vessel if it has been removed from service in accordance with the requirements of § 60.5396c(c)(1) until such time as such tank or other vessel has been returned to service. For the purposes of this subpart, the following are not considered storage vessels:
(1) Vessels that are skid-mounted or permanently attached to something that is mobile (such as trucks, railcars, barges or ships), and are intended to be located at a site for less than 180 consecutive days. If you do not keep or are not able to produce records, as required by § 60.5420c(c)(6)(v), showing that the vessel has been located at a site for less than 180 consecutive days, the vessel described herein is considered to be a storage vessel from the date the original vessel was first located at the site. This exclusion does not apply to a well completion vessel as described above.
(2) Process vessels such as surge control vessels, bottoms receivers or knockout vessels.
(3) Pressure vessels designed to operate in excess of 204.9 kilopascals and without emissions to the atmosphere.
Sulfur production rate means the rate of liquid sulfur accumulation from the sulfur recovery unit.
Sulfur recovery unit means a process device that recovers element sulfur from acid gas.
Surface site means any combination of one or more graded pad sites, gravel pad sites, foundations, platforms, or the immediate physical location upon which equipment is physically affixed.
Sweetening unit means a process device that removes hydrogen sulfide and/or carbon dioxide from the sour natural gas stream.
Tank battery means a group of all storage vessels that are manifolded together for liquid transfer. A tank battery may consist of a single storage vessel if only one storage vessel is present.
Total Reduced Sulfur (TRS) means the sum of the sulfur compounds hydrogen sulfide, methyl mercaptan, dimethyl sulfide, and dimethyl disulfide as measured by Method 16 of appendix A-6 to this part.
Total SO2 equivalents means the sum of volumetric or mass concentrations of the sulfur compounds obtained by adding the quantity existing as SO2 to the quantity of SO2 that would be obtained if all reduced sulfur compounds were converted to SO2 (ppmv or kg/dscm (lb/dscf)).
UIC Class I oilfield disposal well means a well with a UIC Class I permit that meets the definition in 40 CFR 144.6(a)(2) and receives eligible fluids from oil and natural gas exploration and production operations.
UIC Class II oilfield disposal well means a well with a UIC Class II permit where wastewater resulting from oil and natural gas production operations is injected into underground porous rock formations not productive of oil or gas, and sealed above and below by unbroken, impermeable strata.
Underground storage vessel means a storage vessel stored below ground.
Well means a hole drilled for the purpose of producing oil or natural gas, or a well into which fluids are injected.
Well completion means the process that allows for the flowback of petroleum or natural gas from newly drilled wells to expel drilling and reservoir fluids and tests the reservoir flow characteristics, which may vent produced hydrocarbons to the atmosphere via an open pit or tank.
Well completion operation means any well completion with hydraulic fracturing or refracturing occurring at a well completion designated facility.
Well completion vessel means a vessel that contains flowback during a well completion operation following hydraulic fracturing or refracturing. A well completion vessel may be a lined earthen pit, a tank or other vessel that is skid-mounted or portable. A well completion vessel that receives recovered liquids from a well after startup of production following flowback for a period which exceeds 60 days is considered a storage vessel under this subpart.
Well site means one or more surface sites that are constructed for the drilling and subsequent operation of any oil well, natural gas well, or injection well. For the purposes of the fugitive emissions standards at § 60.5397c, a well site does not include:
(1) UIC Class II oilfield disposal wells and disposal facilities;
(2) UIC Class I oilfield disposal wells; and
(3) The flange immediately upstream of the custody meter assembly and equipment, including fugitive emissions components, located downstream of this flange.
Wellhead means the piping, casing, tubing and connected valves protruding above the earth's surface for an oil and/or natural gas well. The wellhead ends where the flow line connects to a wellhead valve. The wellhead does not include other equipment at the well site except for any conveyance through which gas is vented to the atmosphere.
Wellhead only well site means, for the purposes of the fugitive emissions standards at § 60.5397c and the standards in § 60.5398c, a well site that contains one or more wellheads and no major production and processing equipment.
Wildcat well means a well outside known fields or the first well drilled in an oil or gas field where no other oil and gas production exists.
Yard piping means hard-piping at a well site, centralized production facility, or compressor station that is not part of a closed vent system.
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62948, Aug. 1, 2024]
§§ 60.5431c-60.5439c [Reserved]
Table 1 to Subpart OOOOc of Part 60—Designated Facility Presumptive Standards and Regulated Entity Compliance Dates
| Designated facility | Model rule presumptive standards section | Regulated entity compliance dates |
|---|---|---|
| Wells | a. Gas wells liquids unloading events—§ 60.5390c b. Associated gas wells—§ 60.5391c |
36 months after the state plan submittal deadline specified in § 60.5362c(c). |
| Centrifugal Compressors | § 60.5392c | |
| Reciprocating Compressors | § 60.5393c | |
| Process Controllers | § 60.5394c | |
| Pumps | § 60.5395c | |
| Storage Vessels | § 60.5396c | |
| Fugitive Emissions Components | a. Primary standards—§ 60.5397c b. Alternative standards for fugitive emissions components and covers and closed vent systems—§ 60.5398c |
|
| Super Emitter Events | § 60.5388c | |
| Process Unit Equipment | a. Onshore natural gas processing plants—§ 60.5400c b. Process unit equipment alternative standards—§ 60.5401c c. Process unit equipment requirement exceptions—§ 60.5402c |
[89 FR 62948, Aug. 1, 2024]
Table 2 to Subpart OOOOc of Part 60—Alternative Technology Periodic Screening Frequency at Well Sites, Centralized Production Facilities, and Compressor Stations Subject to AVO Inspections With Quarterly OGI or EPA Method 21 Monitoring
| Minimum screening frequency | Minimum detection threshold of screening technology * (kg/hr) |
|---|---|
| Quarterly | ≤1 |
| Bimonthly | ≤2 |
| Bimonthly + Annual OGI | ≤10 |
| Monthly | ≤5 |
| Monthly + Annual OGI | ≤15 |
| * Based on a probability of detection of 90%. |
Table 3 to Subpart OOOOc of Part 60—Alternative Technology Periodic Screening Frequency at Well Sites and Centralized Production Facilities Subject to AVO Inspections and/or Semiannual OGI or EPA Method 21 Monitoring
| Minimum screening frequency | Minimum detection threshold of screening technology * (kg/hr) |
|---|---|
| Semiannual | ≤1 |
| Triannual | ≤2 |
| Triannual + Annual OGI | ≤10 |
| Quarterly | ≤5 |
| Quarterly + Annual OGI | ≤15 |
| Bimonthly | ≤15 |
| * Based on a probability of detection of 90%. |
Table 4 to Subpart OOOOc of Part 60—Applicability of General Provisions to Subpart OOOOc
| General provisions citation |
Subject of citation | Applies to subpart? |
Explanation |
|---|---|---|---|
| § 60.1 | General applicability of the General Provisions | Yes | |
| § 60.2 | Definitions | Yes | Additional terms defined in § 60.5430c. |
| § 60.3 | Units and abbreviations | Yes | |
| § 60.4 | Address | Yes | |
| § 60.5 | Determination of construction or modification | Yes | |
| § 60.6 | Review of plans | Yes | |
| § 60.7 | Notification and record keeping | Yes | Except that § 60.7 only applies as specified in §§ 60.5417c(c) and 60.5420c(a). |
| § 60.8 | Performance tests | Yes | Except that the format and submittal of performance test reports is described in § 60.5420c(b) and (d). Performance testing is required for control devices used on wells, storage vessels, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressors, process controllers, and pumps, as applicable, except that performance testing is not required for a control device used solely on pump(s). |
| § 60.9 | Availability of information | Yes | |
| § 60.10 | State authority | Yes | |
| § 60.11 | Compliance with standards and maintenance requirements | No | Requirements are specified in subpart OOOOc. |
| § 60.12 | Circumvention | Yes | |
| § 60.13 | Monitoring requirements | Yes | Continuous monitors are required for storage vessels. |
| § 60.14 | Modification | Yes | To the extent any provision in § 60.14 conflicts with specific provisions in subpart OOOOc, it is superseded by subpart OOOOc provisions. |
| § 60.15 | Reconstruction | Yes | Except that § 60.15(d) does not apply to wells (i.e., well completions, well liquids unloading, associated gas wells), process controllers, pumps, centrifugal compressors, reciprocating compressors, storage vessels, or fugitive emissions components designated facilities. |
| § 60.16 | Priority list | Yes | |
| § 60.17 | Incorporations by reference | Yes | |
| § 60.18 | General control device and work practice requirements | Yes | |
| § 60.19 | General notification and reporting requirement | Yes |
[89 FR 17043, Mar. 8, 2024, as amended at 89 FR 62949, Aug. 1, 2024]
Subpart PPPP [Reserved]
Subpart QQQQ—Standards of Performance for New Residential Hydronic Heaters and Forced-Air Furnaces
80 FR 13715, Mar. 16, 2015, unless otherwise noted.
§ 60.5472 Am I subject to this subpart?
(a) You are subject to this subpart if you manufacture, sell, offer for sale, import for sale, distribute, offer to distribute, introduce or deliver for introduction into commerce in the United States, or install or operate a residential hydronic heater, forced-air furnace or other central heater manufactured on or after May 15, 2015, except as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(b) Each residential hydronic heater, forced-air furnace or other central heater must comply with the provisions of this subpart unless exempted under paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(3) of this section. These exemptions are determined by rule applicability and do not require additional EPA notification or public notice.
(1) Affected residential hydronic heaters, forced-air furnaces or other central heaters manufactured in the United States for export are exempt from the applicable emission limits of § 60.5474 and the requirements of § 60.5475.
(2) Affected residential hydronic heaters, forced-air furnaces or other central heaters used for research and development purposes that are never offered for sale or sold and that are not used to provide heat are exempt from the applicable emission limits of § 60.5474 and the requirements of § 60.5475. No more than 12 affected residential central heaters manufactured per model line may be exempted for this purpose.
(3) Appliances that do not burn wood or wood pellets or wood chips (such as coal-only central heaters that meet the definition in § 60.5473 or corn-only central heaters) are exempt from the applicable emission limits of § 60.5474 and the requirements of § 60.5475 provided that all advertising and warranties clearly denote that wood burning is prohibited in these appliances.
(c) The following are not affected central heaters and are not subject to this subpart:
(1) Residential wood heaters subject to subpart AAA of this part.
(2) Residential masonry heaters as defined in § 60.5473.
§ 60.5473 What definitions must I know?
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein have the same meaning given them in the Clean Air Act and subpart A of this part.
Approved test laboratory means a test laboratory that is approved for central heater certification testing under § 60.5477 or is an independent third-party test laboratory that is accredited under ISO-IEC Standard 17025 to perform testing using the test methods specified in § 60.5476 by an accreditation body that is a full member signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement and approved by the EPA for conducting testing under this subpart.
Catalytic combustor means a device coated with a noble metal used in a wood heater to lower the temperature required for combustion.
Central heater means a fuel-burning device designed to burn wood or wood pellet fuel that warms spaces other than the space where the device is located, by the distribution of air heated by the furnace through ducts or liquid heated in the device and distributed typically through pipes. Unless otherwise specified, these devices include, but are not limited to, residential forced-air furnaces (small and large) and residential hydronic heaters.
Chip wood fuel means wood chipped into small pieces that are uniform in size, shape, moisture, density and energy content.
Coal-only hydronic heater or forced-air furnace means an enclosed, coal-burning appliance capable of space heating or domestic water heating that has all of the following characteristics:
(1) Installation instructions, owner's manual and marketing information that state that the use of wood in the appliance, except for coal ignition purposes, is prohibited by law; and
(2) The model is listed by a nationally recognized safety-testing laboratory for coal use only, except for coal ignition purposes.
Commercial owner means any person who owns or controls a residential hydronic heater, forced-air furnace or other affected central heater in the course of the business of the manufacture, importation, distribution, or sale of the unit.
Large residential forced-air furnace means a residential forced-air furnace that is capable of a heat output of 65,000 BTU per hour or greater.
Manufactured means completed and ready for shipment (whether or not assembled or packaged) for purposes of determining the date of manufacture.
Manufacturer means any entity that constructs or imports into the United States a central heater.
Model line means all central heaters offered for sale by a single manufacturer that are similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in this section.
Particulate matter (PM) means total particulate matter including coarse particulate (PM10) and fine particulate (PM2.5).
Pellet fuel means refined and densified solid wood shaped into small pellets or briquettes that are uniform in size, shape, moisture, density and energy content.
Representative affected wood or central heater means an individual heater that is similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in this section to other heaters within the model line it represents.
Residential forced-air furnace means a fuel burning device designed to burn wood or wood pellet fuel that warms spaces other than the space where the furnace is located, by the distribution of air heated by the furnace through ducts.
Residential hydronic heater means a fuel burning device designed to burn wood or wood pellet fuel for the purpose of heating building space and/or water through the distribution, typically through pipes, of a fluid heated in the device, typically water or a water and antifreeze mixture.
Residential masonry heater means a factory-built or site-built wood-burning device in which the heat from intermittent fires burned rapidly in the firebox is stored in the refractory mass for slow release to building spaces. Masonry heaters are site-built (using local materials or a combination of local materials and manufactured components) or site-assembled (using factory-built components), solid fuel-burning heating appliances constructed mainly of refractory materials (e.g., masonry materials or soapstone. They typically have an interior construction consisting of a firebox and heat exchange channels built from refractory components, through which flue gases are routed. ASTM E1602 “Standard Guide for Construction of Solid Fuel Burning Masonry Heaters” provides design and construction information for the range of masonry heaters most commonly built in the United States. The site-assembled models are generally listed to UL-1482.
Sale means the transfer of ownership or control, except that a transfer of control of an affected central heater for research and development purposes within the scope of § 60.5472(b)(2) is not a sale.
Similar in all material respects that would affect emissions means that the construction materials, exhaust and inlet air system, and other design features are within the allowed tolerances for components identified in § 60.5475(k).
Small residential forced-air furnace means a residential forced-air furnace that is only capable of a maximum heat output of less than 65,000 BTU per hour.
Sold at retail means the sale by a commercial owner of a central heater to the ultimate purchaser/user or noncommercial purchaser.
Third-party certifier (sometimes called third-party certifying body or product certifying body) means an independent third party that is accredited under ISO-IEC Standards 17025 and 17065 to perform certifications, inspections and audits by an accreditation body that is a full member signatory to the International Laboratory Accreditation Cooperation Mutual Recognition Arrangement and approved by the EPA for conducting certifications, inspections and audits under this subpart.
Unseasoned wood means wood with an average moisture content of 20 percent or more.
Valid certification test means a test that meets the following criteria:
(1) The Administrator was notified about the test in accordance with § 60.5476(h);
(2) The test was conducted by an approved test laboratory as defined in this section;
(3) The test was conducted on a central heater similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in this section to other central heaters of the model line that is to be certified; and
(4) The test was conducted in accordance with the test methods and procedures specified in § 60.5476.
Wood heater under this subpart means an enclosed, wood burning-appliance capable of and intended for residential central heating or central heating and domestic water heating. Unless otherwise specified, these devices include, but are not limited to, hydronic heaters and forced-air furnaces.
§ 60.5474 What standards and requirements must I meet and by when?
(a) Standards. Unless exempted under § 60.5472, no person is permitted to:
(1) On or after May 15, 2015, manufacture, import into the United States or sell at retail a residential hydronic heater unless it has been certified to meet the 2015 particulate matter emission limits in paragraph (b)(1) of this section, except that a residential hydronic heater that was manufactured on or before May 15, 2015 may be imported into the United States and/or sold at retail on or before December 31, 2015.
(2) On or after May 15, 2020 manufacture or sell at retail a residential hydronic heater unless it has been certified to meet the 2020 particulate matter emission limit in paragraph (b)(2) or (b)(3) of this section.
(3) On or after May 15, 2015, manufacture or sell at retail a residential forced-air furnace unless it complies with the work practice and operating standards in paragraphs (d), (e), (f) and (g) of this section and the owner's manual requirements in appendix I.
(4) On or after May 16, 2016, manufacture or sell at retail a small residential forced-air furnace unless it has been certified to meet the 2016 particulate matter emission limits in paragraph (b)(4) of this section
(5) On or after May 15, 2017 manufacture or sell at retail a large forced-air furnace unless it has been certified to meet the 2017 particulate matter emission limits in paragraph (b)(5) of this section.
(6) On or after May 15, 2020 manufacture or sell at retail a small or large residential forced-air furnace unless it has been certified to meet the 2020 particulate matter emission limit in paragraph (b)(6) of this section.
(b)(1) 2015 residential hydronic heater particulate matter emission limit: A weighted average of 0.32 lb/mmBtu (0.137 g/MJ) heat output and a maximum per individual burn rate of 18.0 g/hr (0.041 lb/hr) as determined by the test methods and procedures in § 60.5476 or an alternative crib wood or cord wood test method approved by the Administrator.
(2) 2020 residential hydronic heater particulate matter emission limit: 0.10 lb/mmBtu (0.043 g/MJ) heat output per individual burn rate as determined by the crib wood test methods and procedures in § 60.5476 or an alternative crib wood test method approved by the Administrator.
(3) 2020 residential hydronic heater cord wood alternative compliance option for particulate matter emission limit: 0.15 lb/mmBtu (0.064 g/MJ) heat output per individual burn rate as determined by the cord wood test methods and procedures in § 60.5476 or an alternative cord wood test method approved by the Administrator.
(4) 2016 small forced-air furnace particulate matter emission limit: A weighted average of 0.93 lb/mmBtu (0.40 g/MJ) heat output as determined by the test methods and procedures in § 60.5476.
(5) 2017 large forced-air furnace particulate matter emission limit: A weighted average of 0.93 lb/mmBtu (0.40 g/MJ) heat output as determined by the test methods and procedures in § 60.5476.
(6) 2020 forced-air furnace particulate matter emission limit: 0.15 lb/mmBtu (0.064 g/MJ) heat output per individual burn rate as determined by the cord wood test methods and procedures in § 60.5476 or cord wood test methods approved by the Administrator.
(c) [Reserved]
(d) Chip wood fuel requirements. Operators of wood central heaters, including hydronic heaters and forced-air furnaces, that are certified to burn chip wood fuels may only burn wood chips that have been specified in the owner's manual. The chip wood fuel must meet the following minimum requirements:
(1) Moisture content: Less than 35 percent,
(2) Inorganic fines: Less than or equal to 1 percent;
(3) Chlorides: Less than or equal to 300 parts per million by weight;
(4) Ash content: No more than 2 percent;
(5) No demolition or construction waste; and
(6) Trace metals: Less than 100 mg/kg.
(e) Pellet fuel requirements. Operators of wood central heaters, including outdoor residential hydronic heaters, indoor residential hydronic heaters, and residential forced-air furnaces, that are certified to burn pellet fuels may burn only pellets that have been specified in the owner's manual and graded under a licensing agreement with a third-party organization approved by the EPA (including a certification by the third-party organization that the pellets do not contain, and are not manufactured from, any of the prohibited fuels in paragraph (f) of this section). The Pellet Fuels Institute, ENplus, and CANplus are initially deemed to be approved third-party organizations for this purpose, and additional organizations may apply to the Administrator for approval.
(f) Prohibited fuel types. No person is permitted to burn any of the following materials in an outdoor residential hydronic heater, indoor residential hydronic heater, residential forced-air furnace or other affected central heater:
(1) Residential or commercial garbage;
(2) Lawn clippings or yard waste;
(3) Materials containing rubber, including tires;
(4) Materials containing plastic;
(5) Waste petroleum products, paints or paint thinners, or asphalt products;
(6) Materials containing asbestos;
(7) Construction or demolition debris;
(8) Paper products; cardboard, plywood or particleboard. The prohibition against burning these materials does not prohibit the use of fire starters made from paper, cardboard, saw dust, wax and similar substances for the purpose of starting a fire in an affected central heater;
(9) Railroad ties or pressure treated lumber;
(10) Manure or animal remains;
(11) Salt water driftwood or other or other previously salt water saturated materials;
(12) Unseasoned wood;
(13) Any materials that are not included in the warranty and owner's manual for the subject heater or furnace; or
(14) Any materials that were not included in the certification tests for the subject heater or furnace.
(g) Operation of affected wood heaters. A user must operate an outdoor residential hydronic heater, indoor residential hydronic heater, residential forced-air furnace or other affected central heater in a manner consistent with the owner's manual. The owner's manual must clearly specify that operation in a manner inconsistent with the owner's manual would void the warranty.
(h) Temperature sensor requirement. An affected wood heater equipped with a catalytic combustor must be equipped with a temperature sensor that can monitor combustor gas stream temperatures within or immediately downstream [within 2.54 centimeters (1 inch)] of the catalytic combustor surface.
[80 FR 13715, Mar. 16, 2015, as amended at 85 FR 18455, Apr. 2, 2020; 88 FR 18402, Mar. 29, 2023]
§ 60.5475 What compliance and certification requirements must I meet and by when?
(a) Certification requirement. (1) Each affected residential hydronic heater, forced-air furnace and other central heater must be certified to be in compliance with the applicable emission standards and other requirements of this subpart. For each model line manufactured or sold by a single entity, e.g., company or manufacturer, compliance with applicable emission standards of § 60.5474 must be determined based on testing of representative affected central heaters within the model line. If one entity licenses a model line to another entity, each entity's model line must be certified. If an entity intends to change the name of the entity or the name of the model, the manufacturer must apply for a new certification 60 days before making the change.
(2) The manufacturer of each model line must submit the information required in paragraph (b) of this section and follow either the certification process in paragraphs (c) through (e) of this section (for forced-air furnaces) or the certification procedure specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
(3) Models qualified as meeting the Phase 2 emission levels under the 2011 EPA hydronic heater partnership agreement are automatically deemed to have a certificate of compliance for the 2015 particulate matter emission standards and be valid until the effective date for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards.
(4) Models certified by the New York State Department of Environment and Conservation to meet the emission levels in § 60.5474(b) are automatically deemed to have a certificate of compliance for the 2015 particulate matter emission standards and be valid until the effective date for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards.
(5) Models approved by the New York State Energy Research and Development Authority under the Renewable Heat New York (RHNY) Biomass Boiler Program are automatically deemed to have a certificate of compliance for the 2015 particulate matter emission standards and be valid until the effective date for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards provided that they comply with the thermal storage requirements in the RHNY program.
(6) Small forced-air furnace models that are certified under CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), by an EPA approved third-party certifier, to meet the 2016 particulate matter emission level will be automatically deemed to have a certificate of compliance for the 2016 particulate matter emission standards and be valid until the effective date for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards.
(7) Large forced-air furnace models that are certified under CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17), by an EPA approved third-party certifier, to meet the 2017 particulate matter emission level will be automatically deemed to have a certificate of compliance for the 2017 particulate matter emission standards and be valid until the effective date of the 2020 particulate matter emission standards.
(b) Application for a certificate of compliance. Any manufacturer of an affected residential hydronic heater or forced-air furnace or other central heater must apply to the Administrator for a certificate of compliance for each model line. The application must be submitted to: WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov. The application must be signed by a responsible representative of the manufacturer or an authorized representative and must contain the following:
(1) The model name and/or design number. The model name and/or design number must clearly distinguish one model from another. The name and/or design number cannot include the EPA symbol or logo or name or derivatives such as “EPA.”
(2) Engineering drawings and specifications of components that may affect emissions (including specifications for each component listed in paragraph (k) of this section). Manufacturers may use assembly or design drawings that have been prepared for other purposes, but must designate on the drawings the dimensions of each component listed in paragraph (k) of this section. Manufacturers must identify dimensions of components listed in paragraph (k)(2) of this section that are different from those specified in that paragraph, and show that such differences cannot reasonably be anticipated to cause central heaters in the model line to exceed the applicable emission limits. The drawings must identify how the emission critical parts, such as air tubes and catalyst, can be readily inspected and replaced.
(3) A statement whether the firebox or any firebox component (including the materials listed in paragraph (k)(3) of this section) will be composed of material different from the material used for the firebox or firebox component in the central heater on which certification testing was performed and a description of any such differences and demonstration that any such differences may not reasonably be anticipated to adversely affect emissions or efficiency.
(4) Clear identification of any claimed confidential business information (CBI). Submit such information under separate cover to the EPA CBI Office; Attn: Residential Wood Heater Compliance Program Lead, 1200 Pennsylvania Ave. NW., Washington, DC 20004. Note that all emissions data, including all information necessary to determine emission rates in the format of the standard, cannot be claimed as CBI.
(5) All documentation pertaining to a valid certification test, including the complete test report and, for all test runs: Raw data sheets, laboratory technician notes, calculations and test results. Documentation must include the items specified in the applicable test methods. Documentation must include discussion of each test run and its appropriateness and validity, and must include detailed discussion of all anomalies, whether all burn rate categories were achieved, any data not used in the calculations and, for any test runs not completed, the data collected during the test run and the reason(s) that the test run was not completed. The documentation must show that the burn rate for the low burn rate category is no greater than the rate that an operator can achieve in home use and no greater than is advertised by the manufacturer or retailer. The test report must include a summary table that clearly presents the individual and overall emission rates, efficiencies and heat outputs. Submit the test report and all associated required information according to the procedures for electronic reporting specified in § 60.5479(f).
(6) A copy of the warranties for the model line, which must include a statement that the warranties are void if the unit is used to burn materials for which the unit is not certified by the EPA and void if not operated according to the owner's manual.
(7) A statement that the manufacturer will conduct a quality assurance program for the model line that satisfies the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section.
(8) A statement describing how the tested unit was sealed by the laboratory after the completion of certification testing and asserting that such unit will be stored by the manufacturer in the sealed state until 5 years after the certification test.
(9) Statements that the central heater manufactured under this certificate will be—
(i) Similar in all material respects that would affect emissions as defined in this subpart to the central heater submitted for certification testing, and
(ii) Labeled as prescribed in § 60.5478.
(iii) Accompanied by an owner's manual that meets the requirements in § 60.5478. In addition, a copy of the owner's manual must be submitted to the EPA and be available to the public on the manufacturer's Web site.
(10) A statement that the manufacturer has entered into contracts with an approved laboratory and an approved third-party certifier that satisfy the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section.
(11) A statement that the approved laboratory and approved third-party certifier are allowed to submit information on behalf of the manufacturer, including any claimed to be CBI.
(12) A statement that the manufacturer will place a copy of the certification test report and summary on the manufacturer's Web site available to the public within 30 days after the Administrator issues a certificate of compliance.
(13) A statement of acknowledgment that the certificate of compliance cannot be transferred to another manufacturer or model line without written approval by the Administrator.
(14) A statement acknowledging that it is unlawful to sell, distribute, or offer to sell or distribute an affected wood heater without a valid certificate of compliance.
(15) Contact information for the responsible representative of the manufacturer and all authorized representatives, including name, affiliation, physical address, telephone number and email address.
(c) Administrator approval process. (1) The Administrator may issue a certificate of compliance for a model line if the Administrator determines, based on all information submitted by the applicant and any other relevant information available, that:
(i) A valid certification test demonstrates that the representative affected central heater complies with the applicable emission standards in § 60.5474;
(ii) Any tolerances or materials for components listed in paragraph (k)(2) or (3) of this section that are different from those specified in those paragraphs may not reasonably be anticipated to cause central heaters in the model line to exceed the applicable emission limits; and
(iii) The requirements of paragraph (b) of this section have been met.
(2) The Administrator will deny certification if the Administrator determines that the criteria in paragraph (c)(1) of this section have not been satisfied. Upon denying certification under this paragraph, the Administrator will give written notice to the manufacturer setting forth the basis for this determination.
(d) Level of compliance certification. The Administrator will issue the certificate of compliance for the most stringent particulate matter emission standard that the tested representative central heater meets under § 60.5474.
(e) Conditional, temporary certificate of compliance. A conditional, temporary certificate of compliance with the Step 1 p.m. emission standards may be granted by the Administrator until May 16, 2016 for small or large forced-air furnaces based on the manufacturer's submittal of a complete certification application meeting all requirements in § 60.5475(b). The application must include the full test report by an EPA-approved laboratory and all required compliance statements by the manufacturer with the exception of a certificate of conformity by an EPA approved third-party certifier. The conditional, temporary approval would allow early marketing of forced-air furnaces as having a conditional, temporary certificate of compliance with the Step 1 p.m. emission standards until May 16, 2016 or until the Administrator completes the review of the application, whichever is earlier.
(f) Third-party certifier-based application process. (1) Any manufacturer of an affected central heater must apply to the Administrator for a certificate of compliance for each model line. The manufacturer must meet the following requirements:
(i) The manufacturer must contract with a third-party certifier for certification services. The contract must include regular (at least annual) unannounced audits under ISO-IEC Standard 17065 to ensure that the manufacturer's quality assurance plan is being implemented. The contract must also include a report for each audit under ISO-IEC Standard 17065 that fully documents the results of the audit. The contract must include authorization and requirement for the third-party certifier to submit all such reports to the Administrator and the manufacturer within 30 days of the audit. The audit report must identify deviations from the manufacturer's quality assurance plan and specify the corrective actions that need to be taken to address each identified deficiency.
(ii) The manufacturer must submit the materials specified in paragraph (b) of this section and a quality assurance plan that meets the requirements of paragraph (m) of this section to the third-party certifier. The quality assurance plan must ensure that units within a model line will be similar in all material respects that would affect emissions to the wood heater submitted for certification testing, and it must include design drawings for the model line.
(iii) The manufacturer must apply to the third-party certifier for a certification of conformity with the applicable requirements of this subpart for the model line.
(A) After testing by an approved test laboratory is complete, certification of conformity with the emission standards in § 60.5474 must be performed by the manufacturer's contracted third-party certifier.
(B) The third-party certifier may certify conformity if the emission tests have been conducted per the appropriate guidelines: The test report is complete and accurate; the instrumentation used for the test was properly calibrated; the test report shows that the representative affected central heater meets the applicable emission limits specified in § 60.5474; and the quality assurance plan is adequate to ensure that units within the model line will be similar in all material respects that would affect emissions to the central heater submitted for certification testing, and that the affected heaters would meet all applicable requirements of this subpart.
(iv) The manufacturer must then submit to the Administrator an application for a certificate of compliance that includes the certification of conformity, quality assurance plan, test report and all supporting documentation specified in paragraph (b) of this section.
(v) The submission also must include a statement signed by a responsible official of the manufacturer or authorized representative that the manufacturer has complied with and will continue to comply with all requirements of this subpart for certificate of compliance and that the manufacturer remains responsible for compliance regardless of any error by the test laboratory or third-party certifier.
(2) The Administrator will issue to the manufacturer a certificate of compliance for a model line if it is determined, based on all of the information submitted in the application for certification and any other relevant information, that:
(i) A valid certification of conformity has demonstrated that the representative affected central heater complies with the applicable emission standards in § 60.5474;
(ii) Any tolerances or materials for components listed in paragraph (k)(2) or (3) of this section that are different from those specified in those paragraphs may not be reasonably anticipated to cause central heaters in the model line to exceed the applicable emission limits;
(iii) The requirements of paragraphs (b) of this section have been met; and
(iv) A valid certificate of conformity for the model line has been prepared and submitted.
(3) The Administrator will deny certification if the Administrator determines that the criteria in paragraph (f)(2) of this section have not been satisfied. Upon denying certification under this paragraph, the Administrator will give written notice to the manufacturer setting forth the basis for the determination.
(g) Waiver from submitting test results. An applicant for certification may apply for a potential waiver of the requirement to submit the results of a certification test pursuant to paragraph (b) of this section, if the central heater meets either of the following conditions:
(1) The central heaters of the model line are similar in all material respects that would affect emissions, as defined in § 60.5473 and paragraph (k) of this section, to another model line that has already been issued a certificate of compliance. A manufacturer that seeks a waiver of certification testing must identify the model line that has been certified, and must submit a copy of an agreement with the owner of the design permitting the applicant to produce central heaters of that design.
(2) The manufacturer has previously conducted a valid certification test to demonstrate that the central heaters of the model line meet the applicable standard specified in § 60.5474.
(h) Certification period. Unless revoked sooner by the Administrator, a certificate of compliance will be valid for 5 years from the date of issuance or until a more stringent standard comes into effect, whichever is sooner.
(i) Renewal of certification. (1) The manufacturer must renew a model line's certificate of compliance or recertify the model line every 5 years, or the manufacturer may choose to no longer manufacture or sell that model line after the expiration date. If the manufacturer chooses to no longer manufacture that model line, then the manufacturer must submit a statement to the Administrator to that effect.
(2) A manufacturer of an affected residential hydronic heater or forced-air furnace or other central heater may apply to the Administrator for potential renewal of its certificate of compliance by submitting the material specified in paragraph (b) and following the procedures specified in paragraph (f) of this section, or by affirming in writing that the central heaters in the model line continue to be similar in all material respects that would affect emissions to the representative central heater submitted for testing on which the original certificate of compliance was based and requesting a potential waiver from certification testing. The application must include a copy of the review of the draft application and approval by the third-party certifier.
(3) If the Administrator grants a renewal of certification, the Administrator will give written notice to the manufacturer setting forth the basis for the determination and issue a certification renewal.
(4) If the Administrator denies the request for a renewal of certification, the Administrator will give written notice to the manufacturer setting forth the basis for the determination.
(5) If the Administrator denies the request for a renewal of certification, the manufacturer and retailer must not manufacture or sell the previously-certified central heaters after the expiration date of the certificate of compliance.
(j) [Reserved]
(k) Recertification. (1) The manufacturer must recertify a model line whenever any change is made in the design submitted pursuant to paragraph (k)(2) of this section that affects or is presumed to affect the particulate matter emission rate for that model line. The manufacturer of an affected central heater must apply to the Administrator for potential recertification by submitting the material specified in paragraph (b) of this section and following the procedures specified in paragraph (f) of this section or by affirming in writing that the change will not cause the central heaters in the model line to exceed applicable emission limits and requesting a waiver from certification testing. The application for recertification must be reviewed and approved by the contracted third-party certifier and a copy of the review and approval must be included. The Administrator may waive this requirement upon written request by the manufacturer, if the manufacturer presents adequate rationale and the Administrator determines that the change may not reasonably be anticipated to cause central heaters in the model line to exceed the applicable emission limits. The granting of such a waiver does not relieve the manufacturer of any compliance obligations under this subpart.
(2) Any change in the design tolerances of any of the following components (where such components are applicable) is presumed to affect particulate matter and carbon monoxide emissions and efficiency if that change exceeds ±0.64 cm (±1/4 inch) for any linear dimension and ±5 percent for any cross-sectional area relating to air introduction systems and catalyst bypass gaps unless other dimensions and cross-sectional areas are previously approved by the Administrator under paragraph (c)(1)(ii) of this section:
(i) Firebox: Dimensions;
(ii) Air introduction systems: Cross-sectional area of restrictive air inlets and outlets, location and method of control;
(iii) Baffles: Dimensions and locations;
(iv) Refractory/insulation: Dimensions and location;
(v) Catalyst: Dimensions and location;
(vi) Catalyst bypass mechanism and catalyst bypass gap tolerances (when bypass mechanism is in closed position): Dimensions, cross-sectional area, and location;
(vii) Flue gas exit: Dimensions and location;
(viii) Door and catalyst bypass gaskets: Dimensions and fit;
(ix) Outer thermal shielding and thermal coverings: Dimensions and location;
(x) Fuel feed system: For central heaters that are designed primarily to burn wood pellet fuel or wood chips and other central heaters equipped with a fuel feed system, the fuel feed rate, auger motor design and power rating, and the angle of the auger to the firebox; and
(xi) Forced air combustion system: For central heaters so equipped, the location and horsepower of blower motors and the fan blade size.
(3) Any change in the materials used for the following components is presumed to affect particulate matter emissions and efficiency:
(i) Refractory/insulation; or
(ii) Door and catalyst bypass gaskets.
(4) A change in the make, model, or composition of a catalyst is presumed to affect particulate matter and carbon monoxide emissions and efficiency, unless the change has been requested by the central heater manufacturer and has been approved in advance by the Administrator, based on test data that demonstrate that the replacement catalyst is equivalent to or better than the original catalyst in terms of particulate matter emission reduction.
(l) Criteria for revocation of certification. (1) The Administrator may revoke certification of a product line if it is determined that the central heaters being manufactured or sold in that model line do not comply with the requirements of this subpart. Such a determination will be based on all available evidence, including but not limited to:
(i) Test data from retesting of the original unit on which the certification test was conducted on a unit that is similar in all material respects that would affect emissions;
(ii) A finding that the certification test was not valid. The finding will be based on problems or irregularities with the certification test or its documentation, but may be supplemented by other information;
(iii) A finding that the labeling of the central heater model line or the owner's manual or the associated marketing information does not comply with the requirements of § 60.5478;
(iv) Failure by the manufacturer to comply with the reporting and recordkeeping requirements of § 60.5479;
(v) Physical examination showing that a significant percentage (as defined in the quality assurance plan approved pursuant to paragraph (m) of this section, but no larger than 1 percent) of production units inspected is not similar in all material respects that would affect emissions to the representative affected central heater submitted for certification testing; or
(vi) Failure of the manufacturer to conduct a quality assurance program in conformity with paragraph (m).
(vii) Failure of the approved laboratory to test the central heater using the methods specified in § 60.5476.
(2) Revocation of certification under this paragraph (l) of this section will not take effect until the manufacturer concerned has been given written notice by the Administrator setting forth the basis for the proposed determination and an opportunity to request a hearing under § 60.5481.
(m) Quality assurance program. On or after May 16, 2016, for each certified model line, the manufacturer must conduct a quality assurance program that satisfies the requirements of paragraphs (m)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) The manufacturer must prepare and operate according to a quality assurance plan for each certified model line that includes specific inspection and testing requirements for ensuring that all units within a model line are similar in all material respects that would affect emissions to the central heater submitted for certification testing and meet the emissions standards in § 60.5474.
(2) The quality assurance plan must be approved by the third-party certifier as part of the certification of conformity process specified in paragraph (f) of this section.
(3) The quality assurance plan must include regular (at least annual) unannounced audits by the third-party certifier under ISO-IEC Standard 17065 to ensure that the manufacturer's quality assurance plan is being implemented.
(4) The quality assurance plan must include a report for each audit under ISO-IEC Standard 17065 that fully documents the results of the audit. The third-party certifier must be authorized and required to submit all such reports to the Administrator within 30 days of the audit. The audit report must identify deviations from the manufacturer's quality assurance plan and specify the corrective actions that need to be taken to address each identified deficiency.
(5) Within 30 days after receiving each audit report, the manufacturer must report to the third-party certifier and to the Administrator its corrective actions and responses to any deficiencies identified in the audit report. No such report is required if an audit report did not identify any deficiencies.
(n) EPA compliance audit testing. (1)(i) The Administrator may select by written notice central heaters or model lines for compliance audit testing to determine compliance with the emission standards in § 60.5474.
(ii) The Administrator will transmit a written notification of the selected central heaters or model line(s) to the manufacturer, which will include the name and address of the laboratory selected to perform the audit test and the model name and serial number of the central heater(s) or central heater model line(s) selected to undergo audit testing.
(2)(i) The Administrator may test, or direct the manufacturer to have tested, the central heater(s) from the model line(s) selected under paragraph (n)(1)(i) of this section in a laboratory approved under § 60.5477. The Administrator may select any approved test laboratory or federal laboratory for this audit testing.
(ii) The expense of the compliance audit test is the responsibility of the central heater manufacturer.
(iii) The test must be conducted using the same test method used to obtain certification. If the certification test consisted of more than one particulate matter sampling test method, the Administrator may direct the manufacturer and test laboratory as to which of these methods to use for the purpose of audit testing. The Administrator will notify the manufacturer at least 30 days prior to any test under this paragraph, and allow the manufacturer and/or his authorized representatives to observe the test.
(3) Revocation of certification. (i) If emissions from a central heater tested under paragraph (n)(2) of this section exceed the applicable emission standard by more than 50 percent using the same test method used to obtain certification, the Administrator will notify the manufacturer that certification for that model line is suspended effective 72 hours from the receipt of the notice, unless the suspension notice is withdrawn by the Administrator. The suspension will remain in effect until withdrawn by the Administrator, or the date 30 days from its effective date if a revocation notice under paragraph (n)(3)(ii) of this section is not issued within that period, or the date of final agency action on revocation, whichever occurs earliest.
(ii)(A) If emissions from a central heater tested under paragraph (n)(2) of this section exceed the applicable emission limit, the Administrator will notify the manufacturer that certification is revoked for that model line.
(B) A notice under paragraph (n)(3)(ii)(A) of this section will become final and effective 60 days after the date of written notification to the manufacturer, unless it is withdrawn, a hearing is requested under § 60.5481(a)(2), or the deadline for requesting a hearing is extended.
(C) The Administrator may extend the deadline for requesting a hearing for up to 60 days for good cause.
(D) A manufacturer may extend the deadline for requesting a hearing for up to 6 months, by agreeing to a voluntary suspension of certification.
(iii) Any notification under paragraph (n)(3)(i) or (ii) of this section will include a copy of a preliminary test report from the approved test laboratory or federal test laboratory. The test laboratory must provide a preliminary test report to the Administrator within 14 days of the completion of testing, if a central heater exceeds the applicable emission limit in § 60.5474. The test laboratory must provide the Administrator and the manufacturer, within 30 days of the completion of testing, all documentation pertaining to the test, including the complete test report and raw data sheets, laboratory technician notes, and test results for all test runs.
(iv) Upon receiving notification of a test failure under paragraph (n)(3)(ii) of this section, the manufacturer may request that up to four additional central heaters from the same model line be tested at the manufacturer's expense, at the test laboratory that performed the emissions test for the Administrator.
(v) Whether or not the manufacturer proceeds under paragraph (n)(3)(iv) of this section, the manufacturer may submit any relevant information to the Administrator, including any other test data generated pursuant to this subpart. The manufacturer must bear the expense of any additional testing.
(vi) The Administrator will withdraw any notice issued under paragraph (n)(3)(ii) of this section if tests under paragraph (n)(3)(iv) of this section show either—
(A) That exactly four additional central heaters were tested for the manufacturer and all four met the applicable emission limits; or
(B) That exactly two additional central heaters were tested for the manufacturer and each of them met the applicable emission limits and the average emissions of all three tested heaters (the original audit heater and the two additional heaters) met the applicable emission limits.
(vii) If the Administrator withdraws a notice pursuant to paragraph (n)(3)(vi) of this section, the Administrator will revise the certification values for the model line based on the test data and other relevant information. The manufacturer must then revise the labels and marketing information accordingly.
(viii) The Administrator may withdraw any proposed revocation, if the Administrator finds that an audit test failure has been rebutted by information submitted by the manufacturer under paragraph (n)(3)(iv) of this section and/or (n)(3)(v) of this section or by any other relevant information available to the Administrator.
§ 60.5476 What test methods and procedures must I use to determine compliance with the standards and requirements for certification?
Test methods and procedures specified in this section or in appendices of this part, except as provided under § 60.8(b), must be used to determine compliance with the standards and requirements for certification under §§ 60.5474 and 60.5475 and for reporting carbon monoxide emissions and efficiency. The EPA will post all approved alternative test methods on the EPA Web site. The manufacturer or the manufacturer's authorized representative must submit a summary and the full test report with all supporting information, including detailed discussion of all anomalies, whether all burn rate categories were properly achieved, any data not used in the calculations and, for any test runs not completed, the data that were collected and the reason that the test run was not completed. The burn rate for the low burn rate category must be no greater than the rate that an operator can achieve in home use and no greater than is advertised by the manufacturer or retailer.
(a) Canadian Standards Administration (CSA) Method B415.1-10, sections 13.7-13.10 (IBR, see § 60.17), must be used to measure the thermal efficiency and CO emissions of outdoor and indoor residential hydronic heaters and forced-air furnaces, except that the burn rates specified in Method 28WHH must be used for hydronic heaters.
(b) Testing conducted with continuously fed biomass as the fuel(s) must be conducted according to the relevant section of the ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17) or adaptations approved by EPA. The EPA will post all approved alternative test methods on the EPA Web site.
(c)(1) For outdoor and indoor residential hydronic heaters to be tested under the 2015 particulate matter emission standards in § 60.5474(b)(1), the manufacturer must have an EPA-approved test laboratory use:
(i) Method 28WHH;
(ii) Method 28WHH PTS;
(iii) ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17) (using crib wood); or
(iv) EN 303-5 (IBR, see § 60.17), only for units sold with thermal storage.
(2) For outdoor and indoor residential hydronic heaters to be tested under the 2020 particulate matter emission standards in § 60.5474(b)(2), the manufacturer must have an EPA-approved test laboratory use:
(i) Method 28WHH;
(ii) Method 28WHH PTS; or
(iii) ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17) (using crib wood).
(3) If the heater is equipped with full or partial heat storage, the manufacturer, retailer and installer must not sell or install the heater with less heat storage capacity than is used in the certification test.
(4) The manufacturer and approved laboratory must make the following adjustments to the methods listed in paragraphs (a), (c)(1) and (2) of this section:
(i) For ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17), the burn rate categories specified in Method 28WHH must be used;
(ii) For EN 303-5 (IBR, see § 60.17), the organic compounds must be included as part of the PM.
(iii) For ASTM 2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17) Appendix A1 for full thermal storage certification tests, the test must use the large scale as required in the test method unless the manufacturer requests a variance, in advance of testing, contingent upon measuring flue gas temperature, oxygen and CO, using a simple electronic spreadsheet calculator to estimate efficiency and conducting a comparison to the delivered efficiency to determine if a more detailed examination should be made.
(d)(1) For hydronic heaters subject to the 2020 cord wood alternative compliance option specified in § 60.5474(b)(3), the manufacturers must have the approved laboratory conduct cord wood testing using the test methods listed below:
(i) Method 28WHH;
(ii) Method 28WHH PTS; or
(iii) ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17) (using cord wood).
(2) If the heater is equipped with full or partial heat storage, the manufacturer, retailer and installer must not sell or install the heater with less heat storage capacity than is used in the certification test.
(3) The manufacturer and approved laboratory must make the following adjustments to the methods listed in (d)(1) of this section:
(i) For ASTM E2618-13 (IBR, see § 60.17), use the burn rate categories specified in Method 28WHH;
(ii) For all methods, report the results separately per burn rate category.
(e) For forced-air furnaces, use CSA Method B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17) to measure the heat output (mmBtu/hr) and particulate matter emission rate (lb/mmBtu heat output), except use the burn rate categories in Method 28WHH for the 2020 particulate matter emission standards. For the 2020 particulate matter emission standards, report the particulate matter, efficiency and CO emission results separately per burn rate category.
(f) For affected wood heaters subject to the particulate matter emission standards, particulate matter emission concentrations must be measured with ASTM E2515-11 (IBR, see § 60.17) with the following exceptions, eliminate section 9.6.5.1 of ASTM E2515-11 and perform the post-test leak checks as described in paragraph (f)(1) of this section. Additionally, if a component change of either sampling train is needed during sampling, then perform the leak check specified in paragraph (f)(2) of this section. Four-inch filters and Teflon membrane filters or Teflon-coated glass fiber filters may be used in ASTM E2515-11. For all tests conducted using ASTM 2515-11, with the exceptions described in paragraphs (f)(1) and (2) of this section, the manufacturer and approved test laboratory must also measure the first hour of particulate matter emissions for each test run by sampling with a third, identical and independent sampling train operated concurrently with the first hour of PM paired train compliance testing. The manufacturer and approved test laboratory must report the test results for this third train separately as the first hour emissions.
(1) Post-test leak check. A leak check of each sampling train is mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run before sample recovery. The leak check must be performed in accordance with the procedures of ASTM E2515-11, section 9.6.4.1 (IBR, see § 60.17), except that it must be conducted at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.0003 m 3/min (0.01 cfm) or 4% of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the leak check results are acceptable. If a higher leakage rate is obtained, the sampling run is invalid.
(2) Leak checks during sample run. If, during a sampling run, a component (e.g., filter assembly) change becomes necessary, a leak check must be conducted immediately before the change is made. Record the sample volume before and after the leak test. The sample volume collected during any leak checks must not be included in the total sample volume for the test run. The leak check must be done according to the procedure outlined in ASTM E2515-11, section 9.6.4.1 (IBR, see § 60.17), except that it must be done at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that point in the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.0003 m 3/min (0.01 cfm) or 4% of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the leak check results are acceptable. If a higher leakage rate is obtained, the sampling run is invalid.
(g) Douglas fir may be used in ASTM E2618-13 and CSA B415.1-10 (IBR, see § 60.17).
(h) The manufacturer of an affected central heater model line must notify the Administrator of the date that certification testing is to begin, by email, to WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov. This notice must be at least 30 days before the start of testing. The notification of testing must include the manufacturer's name and physical and email addresses, the approved test laboratory's name and physical and email addresses, third-party certifier name, the model name and number (or, if unavailable, some other way to distinguish between models), and the dates of testing. The laboratory may substitute certification testing of another affected central heater on the original date in order to ensure regular laboratory testing operations.
(i) The approved test laboratory must allow the manufacturer, the manufacturer's approved third-party certifier, the EPA and delegated state regulatory agencies to observe certification testing. However, manufacturers must not involve themselves in the conduct of the test after the pretest burn has begun. Communications between the manufacturer and laboratory or third-party certifier personnel regarding operation of the central heater must be limited to written communications transmitted prior to the first pretest burn of the certification test series. During certification tests, the manufacturer may communicate with the third-party certifier, and only in writing to notify them that the manufacturer has observed a deviation from proper test procedures by the laboratory. All communications must be included in the test documentation required to be submitted pursuant to § 60.5475(b)(5) and must be consistent with instructions provided in the owner's manual required under § 60.5478(f).
[80 FR 13715, Mar. 16, 2015, as amended at 85 FR 63410, Oct. 7, 2020; 88 FR 18402, Mar. 29, 2023]
§ 60.5477 What procedures must I use for EPA approval of a test laboratory or EPA approval of a third-party certifier?
(a) Test laboratory approval. (1) A laboratory must apply to the Administrator for approval to test under this rule by submitting documentation that the laboratory is accredited by a nationally recognized accrediting entity under ISO-IEC Standard 17025 to perform testing using the test methods specified under § 60.5476. Laboratories accredited by EPA prior to May 15, 2015 may have until May 15, 2018 to submit documentation that they have accreditation under ISO-IEC Standard 17025 to perform testing using the test methods specified under § 60.5476. ISO accreditation is required for all other laboratories performing hydronic heater testing beginning on May 15, 2015, and performing forced-air furnace testing beginning on November 16, 2015.
(2) As part of the application, the test laboratory must:
(i) Agree to participate biennially in an independently operated proficiency testing program with no direct ties to the laboratories participating;
(ii) Agree to allow the Administrator, regulatory agencies and certifying bodies access to observe certification testing;
(iii) Agree to comply with calibration, reporting and recordkeeping requirements that affect testing laboratories; and
(iv) Agree to perform a compliance audit test at the manufacturer's expense at the testing cost normally charged to such manufacturer if the laboratory is selected by the Administrator to conduct the compliance audit test of the manufacturer's model line. The test laboratory must provide a preliminary audit test report to the Administrator within 14 days of the completion of testing, if a central heater exceeds the applicable emission limit in § 60.5474. The test laboratory must provide the Administrator and the manufacturer, within 30 days of the completion of audit testing, all documentation pertaining to the test, including the complete test report and raw data sheets, laboratory technician notes, and test results for all test runs.
(v) Have no conflict of interest and receive no financial benefit from the outcome of certification testing conducted pursuant to § 60.5475.
(vi) Agree to not perform initial certification tests on any models manufactured by a manufacturer for which the laboratory has conducted research and development design services within the last 5 years.
(vii) Agree to seal any wood heater on which it performed certification tests, immediately upon completion or suspension of certification testing, by using a laboratory-specific seal.
(viii) Agree to immediately notify the Administrator of any suspended tests through email and in writing, giving the date suspended, the reason(s) why, and the projected date for restarting. The laboratory must submit the operation and test data obtained, even if the test is not completed.
(3) If the EPA approves the laboratory, the Administrator will provide the test laboratory with a certificate of approval for testing under this rule. If the EPA does not approve the laboratory, the Administrator will give written notice to the laboratory setting forth the basis for the determination.
(b) Revocation of test laboratory approval. (1) The Administrator may revoke the EPA laboratory approval if it is determined that the laboratory:
(i) Is no longer accredited by the accreditation body;
(ii) Does not follow required procedures or practices;
(iii) Has falsified data or otherwise misrepresented emission data;
(iv) Failed to participate in a proficiency testing program, in accordance with its commitment under paragraph (a)(2)(i) of this section; or
(v) Failed to seal the central heater in accordance with paragraph (a)(2)(vii) of this section.
(2) Revocation of approval under this paragraph (b) will not take effect until the laboratory concerned has been given written notice by the Administrator setting forth the basis for the proposed determination and an opportunity for a hearing under § 60.5481. However, if revocation is ultimately upheld, all tests conducted by the laboratory after written notice was given will, at the discretion of the Administrator, be declared invalid.
(c) Period of test laboratory approval. (1) With the exception of laboratories meeting the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this section, and unless revoked sooner, a certificate of approval for testing under this rule is valid for 5 years from the date of issuance.
(2) Laboratories accredited by the EPA by May 15, 2015, under the provisions of § 60.535 as in effect prior to that date may continue to be EPA accredited and deemed EPA approved for testing under this subpart until May 15, 2018, at which time the EPA accreditation and approval ends unless the laboratory has obtained accreditation under § 60.5477 as in effect on that date.
(d) Third-party certifier approval. (1) A Third-party certifier may apply to the Administrator for approval to be an EPA-approved third-party certifier by submitting credentials demonstrating that it has been accredited by a nationally recognized accrediting entity to perform certifications and inspections under ISO-IEC Standard 17025, ISO-IEC Standard 17065 and ISO-IEC Standard 17020.
(2) As part of the application, the third-party certifier must:
(i) Agree to offer to contract with central heater manufacturers to perform third-party certification activities according to the requirements set out in this subpart.
(ii) Agree to periodically conduct audits as described in § 60.5475(m) and the manufacturer's quality assurance program;
(iii) Agree to comply with reporting and recordkeeping requirements that affect approved central heater testing laboratories and third-party certifiers;
(iv) Have no conflict of interest and receive no financial benefit from the outcome of certification testing conducted pursuant to § 60.5475;
(v) Agree to make available to the Administrator supporting documentation for each central heater certification and audit; and
(vi) Agree to not perform initial certification reviews on any models manufactured by a manufacturer for which the third-party certifier has conducted research and development design services within the last 5 years.
(3) If approved, the Administrator will provide the third-party certifier with a certificate of approval. The approval will expire 5 years after being issued unless renewed by the third-party certifier. If the EPA denies the approval, the Administrator will give written notice to the third-party certifier for the basis for the determination.
(e) Revocation of third-party certifier approval. (1) The Administrator will revoke the third-party certifier's EPA approval if it is determined that the certifier:
(i) Is no longer accredited by the accreditation body;
(ii) Does not follow required procedures or practices; or
(iii) Has falsified certification data or otherwise misrepresented emission data.
(2) Revocation of approval under this paragraph (e) will not take effect until the certifier concerned is given written notice by the Administrator setting forth the basis for the proposed determination and an opportunity for a hearing under § 60.5481. However, if revocation is upheld, all certifications by the certifier after written notice was given will, at the discretion of the Administrator, be declared invalid.
§ 60.5478 What requirements must I meet for permanent labels, temporary labels (hangtags), and owner's manuals?
(a) General permanent label requirements. (1) Each affected central heater manufactured or sold on or after the date the applicable standards come into effect as specified in § 60.5474, must have a permanent label affixed to it that meets the requirements of this section.
(2) The permanent label must contain the following information:
(i) Month and year of manufacture of the individual unit;
(ii) Model name and number;
(iii) Certification test emission value, test method, and standard met; and
(iv) Serial number.
(3) The permanent label must:
(i) Be affixed in a readily visible or accessible location in such a manner that it can be easily viewed before and after the appliance is installed (a easily removable façade can be used for aesthetic purposes);
(ii) Be at least 8.9 cm long and 5.1 cm wide (3 1/2 inches long and 2 inches wide);
(iii) Be made of a material expected to last the lifetime of the central heater;
(iv) Present the required information in a manner so that it is likely to remain legible for the lifetime of the central heater; and
(v) Be affixed in such a manner that it cannot be removed without damage to the label.
(4) The permanent label may be combined with any other label, as long as the required information is displayed, the integrity of the permanent label is not compromised, and the permanent label meets the requirements of § 60.5478(a)(3).
(5) Any label statement under paragraph (b) of this section constitutes a representation by the manufacturer as to any central heater that bears it:
(i) That a certification of compliance was in effect at the time the central heater left the possession of the manufacturer;
(ii) That the manufacturer was, at the time the label was affixed, conducting a quality assurance program in conformity with § 60.5475(m); and
(iii) That all the central heaters individually tested for emissions by the manufacturer under its quality assurance program pursuant to § 60.5475(m) met the applicable emissions limit.
(b) Permanent label requirements for central heaters. If a central heater belongs to a model line certified under § 60.5475, and no unit in the model line has been found to exceed the applicable emission limits or tolerances through quality assurance testing, one of the following statements, as appropriate, must appear on the permanent label:
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Certified to comply with the 2015 particulate emission standards. Not approved for sale after May 15, 2020” or
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Certified to comply with the 2016 particulate emission standards. Not approved for sale after May 15, 2020” or
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Certified to comply with the 2017 particulate emission standards. Not approved for sale after May 15, 2020” or
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Certified to comply with the 2020 particulate emission standards using crib wood.” or
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Certified to comply with the 2020 particulate emission standards using cord wood.”
(c) Additional permanent label content. The permanent label for all certified central heaters must also contain the following statement on the permanent label:
“This appliance needs periodic inspection and repair for proper operation. Consult owner's manual for further information. It is against federal regulations to operate this appliance in a manner inconsistent with operating instructions in the owner's manual.”
(d) Permanent label requirements for affected wood heaters with exemptions under § 60.5472(b). (1) If an affected central heater is manufactured in the United States for export as provided in § 60.5472(b)(1), the following statement must appear on the permanent label:
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Export appliance. May not be sold or operated in the United States.”
(2) If an affected central heater is manufactured for use for research and development purposes as provided in § 60.5472(b)(2), the following statement must appear on the permanent label:
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY Not certified. Research Appliance. Not approved for sale or for operation other than for research.”
(3) If an affected central heater is a non wood-burning central heater exclusively as provided in § 60.5472(b)(3), the following statement must appear on the permanent label:
“U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY This appliance is not certified for wood burning. Use of any wood fuel is a violation of federal regulations.”
(e) Temporary label (hangtag) voluntary options. (1) Each model line certified to meet the 2020 particulate emission standards prior to May 15, 2020 may display the hangtags specified in section 3 of appendix I of this part. The electronic template will be provided by the Administrator upon approval of the certification.
(2) The hangtags in paragraph (e)(1) of this section end upon May 15, 2020.
(3) Each model certified to meet the 2020 Cord Wood Alternative Compliance Option may display the cord wood temporary label specified in section 3 of appendix I of this part. The electronic template will be provided by the Administrator upon approval of the certification.
(f) Owner's manual requirements. (1) Each affected central heater offered for sale by a commercial owner must be accompanied by an owner's manual that must contain the information listed in paragraph (f)(2) of this section (pertaining to installation), and paragraph (f)(3) of this section (pertaining to operation and maintenance). Such information must be adequate to enable consumers to achieve optimal emissions performance. Such information must be consistent with the operating instructions provided by the manufacturer to the approved test laboratory for operating the central heater during certification testing, except for details of the certification test that would not be relevant to the ultimate user. The commercial owner must also make current and historical owner's manuals available on the company Web site and upon request to the EPA.
(2) Guidance on proper installation information, including stack height, heater location and achieving proper draft.
(3) Proper operation and maintenance information, including minimizing visible emissions.
(i) Fuel loading and re-loading procedures, recommendations on fuel selection and warnings on what fuels not to use, such as unseasoned wood, treated wood, colored paper, cardboard, solvents, trash and garbage;
(ii) Fire starting procedures;
(iii) Proper use of air controls, including how to establish good combustion and how to ensure good combustion at the lowest burn rate for which the heater is warranted;
(iv) Ash removal procedures;
(v) Instructions for replacement of gaskets and other parts that are critical to the emissions performance of the unit and other maintenance and repair instructions;
(vi) For catalytic models, information on the following pertaining to the catalytic combustor: Procedures for achieving and maintaining catalyst activity, maintenance procedures, procedures for determining deterioration or failure, procedures for replacement and information on how to exercise warranty rights;
(vii) For catalytic models, the following statement—
“This wood heater contains a catalytic combustor, which needs periodic inspection and replacement for proper operation. It is against federal regulations to operate this wood heater in a manner inconsistent with operating instructions in this manual, or if the catalytic element is deactivated or removed”; and
(viii) For noncatalytic models, the following statement—
“This wood heater needs periodic inspection and repair for proper operation. It is against federal regulations to operate this wood heater in a manner inconsistent with operating instructions in this manual.”
(4) Any manufacturer using the EPA-recommended language contained in appendix I of this part to satisfy any requirement of this paragraph (f) will be considered to be in compliance with that requirement, provided that the particular model language is printed in full, with only such changes as are necessary to ensure accuracy for the particular model line.
(g) Central heaters that are affected by this subpart, but that have been owned and operated by a noncommercial owner, are not subject to paragraphs (e) and (f) of this section when offered for resale.
§ 60.5479 What records must I keep and what reports must I submit?
(a)(1) Each manufacturer who holds a certificate of compliance pursuant to § 60.5475(a)(2) for a model line must maintain records containing the information required by paragraphs (a)(2) through (4) of this section with respect to that model line for at least 5 years.
(2) All documentation pertaining to the certification test used to obtain certification, including the full test report and raw data sheets, laboratory technician notes, calculations, and the test results for all test runs, and discussions of the appropriateness and validity of all test runs, including runs attempted but not completed. The retained certification test documentation must include, as applicable, detailed discussions of all anomalies, whether all burn rate categories were properly achieved, any data not used in the calculations and, for any test runs not completed, the data that were collected and the reason that the test run was not completed. The retained certification test also must include documentation that the burn rate for the low burn category was no greater than the rate that an operator can achieve in home use and no greater than is advertised by the manufacturer or retailer.
(3) Results of the quality assurance program inspections required pursuant to § 60.5475(m).
(4) For emissions tests conducted pursuant to the quality assurance program required by § 60.5475(m), all test reports, data sheets, laboratory technician notes, calculations, and test results for all test runs, the corrective actions taken, if any, and any follow-up actions such as additional testing.
(b) Each approved test laboratory and third-party certifier must maintain records consisting of all documentation pertaining to each certification test, quality assurance program inspection and audit test, including the full test report and raw data sheets, technician notes, calculations, the test results for all test runs. Each approved test laboratory must submit accreditation credentials and all proficiency test results to the Administrator. Each third-party certifier must submit each certification test, quality assurance program inspection report and ISO-IEC accreditation credentials to the Administrator.
(c) Each manufacturer must retain each central heater upon which certification tests were performed and certification granted under § 60.5475(a)(2) at the manufacturer's facility for 5 years after the certification test. Each central heater must remain sealed and unaltered. Any such central heater must be made available upon request to the Administrator for inspection and testing.
(d) Each manufacturer of an affected central heater model line certified pursuant to § 60.5475(a)(2) must submit a report to the Administrator every 2 years following issuance of a certificate of compliance for each model line. This report must include the sales for each model by state and certify that no changes in the design or manufacture of the model line have been made that require recertification pursuant to § 60.5475(k).
(e)(1) Unless otherwise specified, all records required under this section must be maintained by the manufacturer, commercial owner of the affected central heater, approved test laboratory or third-party certifier for a period of no less than 5 years.
(2) Unless otherwise specified, all reports to the Administrator required under this subpart must be made to: WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov.
(f) Within 60 days after the date of completing each performance test (e.g., initial certification test, tests conducted for quality assurance and tests for renewal or recertification), each manufacturer must submit performance test data electronically to WoodHeaterReports@epa.gov. Owners or operators who claim that some of the information being submitted for performance tests is CBI (e.g., design drawings) must submit a complete file, including information claimed to be CBI on a compact disk or other commonly used electronic storage media (including, but not limited to, flash drives), by mail, and the same file with the CBI omitted, electronically. The compact disk must be clearly marked as CBI and mailed to U.S. EPA, OECA CBI Office, Attention: Residential Wood Heater Compliance Program, Washington, DC 20004. Emission data and all information necessary to determine compliance, except sensitive engineering drawings and sensitive detailed material specifications, cannot be claimed as CBI.
(g) Within 30 days of receiving a certification of compliance for a model line, the manufacturer must make the full non-CBI test report and the summary of the test report available on the manufacturer's Web site.
(h) Each manufacturer who uses the exemption for R&D heaters under § 60.5472(b)(2) must maintain records for at least 5 years documenting where the heaters were located, that the heaters were never offered for sale or sold and that the heaters were not used for the purpose of heating.
§ 60.5480 What activities are prohibited under this subpart?
(a) No person is permitted to advertise for sale, offer for sale, sell or operate an affected residential hydronic heater or forced-air furnace or other central heater that does not have affixed to it a permanent label pursuant to § 60.5478(b) through (d), as applicable.
(b) No person is permitted to advertise for sale, offer for sale, or sell an affected central heater labeled under § 60.5478(d)(1) except for export. No person is permitted to operate an affected central heater in the United States if it is labeled under § 60.5478(d)(1).
(c)(1) No commercial owner is permitted to advertise for sale, offer for sale, or sell an affected central heater permanently labeled under § 60.5478(b) unless:
(i) The affected appliance has been certified to comply with the particulate emission standards pursuant to § 60.5474 as applicable; and
(ii) The commercial owner provides any purchaser or transferee with an owner's manual that meets the requirements of § 60.5478(f), a copy of the warranty and a moisture meter.
(2) A commercial owner other than a manufacturer complies with the requirements of paragraph (c)(1) of this section if the commercial owner:
(i) Receives the required documentation from the manufacturer or a previous commercial owner; and
(ii) Provides that documentation unaltered to any person to whom the central heater that it covers is sold or transferred.
(d)(1) In any case in which the Administrator revokes a certificate of compliance either for the knowing submission of false or inaccurate information or other fraudulent acts, or based on a finding under § 60.5475(l)(1)(ii) that the certification test was not valid, the Administrator may give notice of that revocation and the grounds for it to all commercial owners.
(2) On and after the date of receipt of the notice given under paragraph (d)(1) of this section, no commercial owner is permitted to sell any central heater covered by the revoked certificate (other than to the manufacturer) unless the model line has been recertified in accordance with this subpart.
(e) No person is permitted to install or operate an affected central heater except in a manner consistent with the instructions on its permanent label and in the owner's manual pursuant to § 60.5478(f), including only using fuels for which the unit is certified.
(f) No person is permitted to operate, sell or offer for sale an affected central heater that was originally equipped with a catalytic combustor if the catalytic element is deactivated or removed.
(g) No person is permitted to operate, sell or offer for sale an affected central heater that has been physically altered to exceed the tolerance limits of its certificate of compliance, pursuant to § 60.5475(k).
(h) No person is permitted to alter, deface, or remove any permanent label required to be affixed pursuant to § 60.5478(a) through (d), as applicable.
(i) If a temporary label is affixed to the central heater, retailers may not sell or offer for sale that central heater unless the temporary label affixed is in accordance with § 60.5478(e), as applicable.
§ 60.5481 What hearing and appeal procedures apply to me?
(a)(1) The affected manufacturer, laboratory or third-party certifier may request a hearing under this section within 30 days following receipt of the required notification in any case where the Administrator—
(i) Denies an application for a certificate of compliance under § 60.5475 (a)(2);
(ii) Denies an application for a renewal of certification under § 60.5475(i);
(iii) Issues a notice of revocation of certification under § 60.5475(l);
(iv) Denies an application for laboratory approval under § 60.5477(a);
(v) Issues a notice of revocation of laboratory approval under § 60.5477(b).
(vi) Denies an application for third-party certifier approval under § 60.5477(d); or
(vii) Issues a notice of revocation of third-party certifier approval under § 60.5477(e).
(2) In any case where the Administrator issues a notice of revocation under § 60.5475(n)(3)(ii), the manufacturer may request a hearing under this section with the time limits set out in § 60.5475(n)(3)(ii).
(b) Any hearing request must be in writing, must be signed by an authorized representative of the petitioning manufacturer or laboratory, and must include a statement setting forth with particularity the petitioner's objection to the Administrator's determination or proposed determination.
(c)(1) Upon receipt of a request for a hearing under paragraph (a) of this section, the Administrator will request the Chief Administrative Law Judge to designate an Administrative Law Judge as Presiding Officer for the hearing. If the Chief Administrative Law Judge replies that no Administrative Law Judge is available to perform this function, the Administrator will designate a Presiding Officer who has not had any prior responsibility for the matter under review, and who is not subject to the direct control or supervision of someone who has had such responsibility.
(2) The hearing will commence as soon as practicable at a time and place fixed by the Presiding Officer.
(3)(i) A motion for leave to intervene in any proceeding conducted under this section must set forth the grounds for the proposed intervention, the position and interest of the movant and the likely impact that intervention will have on the expeditious progress of the proceeding. Any person already a party to the proceeding may file an answer to a motion to intervene, making specific reference to the factors set forth in the foregoing sentence and paragraph (c)(3)(iii) of this section within 10 days after service of the motion for leave to intervene.
(ii) A motion for leave to intervene in a proceeding must ordinarily be filed before the first prehearing conference or, in the absence of a prehearing conference, prior to the setting of a time and place for a hearing. Any motion filed after that time must include, in addition to the information set forth in paragraph (c)(3)(i) of this section, a statement of good cause for the failure to file in a timely manner. The intervener shall be bound by any agreements, arrangements and other matters previously made in the proceeding.
(iii) A motion for leave to intervene may be granted only if the movant demonstrates that his presence in the proceeding would not unduly prolong or otherwise prejudice the adjudication of the rights of the original parties, and that movant may be adversely affected by a final order. The intervener will become a full party to the proceeding upon the granting of leave to intervene.
(iv) Persons not parties to the proceeding may move for leave to file amicus curiae briefs. The movant must state his interest and the reasons why the proposed amicus brief is desirable. If the motion is granted, the Presiding Officer or Administrator will issue an order setting the time for filing such brief. An amicus curia may participate in any briefing after his motion is granted, and will be served with all briefs, reply briefs, motions, and orders relating to issues to be briefed.
(4) In computing any period of time prescribed or allowed in this subpart, the day of the event from which the designated period begins to run will not be included. Saturdays, Sundays, and federal legal holidays will be included. When a stated time expires on a Saturday, Sunday or legal holiday, the stated time period will be extended to include the next business day.
(d)(1) Upon his appointment the Presiding Officer must establish a hearing file. The file will consist of the notice issued by the Administrator under § 60.5475(c)(2), § 60.5475(f)(3), § 60.5475(i)(4), § 60.5475(l)(2), § 60.5475(n)(3)(ii)(A), § 60.5477(a)(3), § 60.5477(b)(2), § 60.5477(d)(3) or § 60.5477(e)(2), together with any accompanying material, the request for a hearing and the supporting data submitted therewith, and all documents relating to the request for certification or approval, or the proposed revocation of either.
(2) The hearing file must be available for inspection by any party, to the extent authorized by law, at the office of the Presiding Officer, or other place designated by him.
(e) Any party may appear in person, or may be represented by counsel or by any other duly authorized representative.
(f)(1) The Presiding Officer, upon the request of any party, or at his discretion, may order a prehearing conference at a time and place specified by him to consider the following:
(i) Simplification of the issues;
(ii) Stipulations, admissions of fact, and the introduction of documents;
(iii) Limitation of the number of expert witnesses;
(iv) Possibility of agreement disposing of all or any of the issues in dispute; and
(v) Such other matters as may aid in the disposition of the hearing, including such additional tests as may be agreed upon by the parties.
(2) The results of the conference must be reduced to writing by the Presiding Officer and made part of the record.
(g)(1) Hearings shall be conducted by the Presiding Officer in an informal but orderly and expeditious manner. The parties may offer oral or written evidence, subject to the exclusion by the Presiding Officer of irrelevant, immaterial and repetitious evidence.
(2) Witnesses will not be required to testify under oath. However, the Presiding Officer will call to the attention of witnesses that their statements may be subject to penalties under title 18 U.S.C. 1001 for knowingly making false statements or representations or using false documents in any matter within the jurisdiction of any department or agency of the United States.
(3) Any witness may be examined or cross-examined by the Presiding Officer, the parties, or their representatives.
(4) Hearings must be recorded verbatim. Copies of transcripts of proceedings may be purchased by the applicant from the reporter.
(5) All written statements, charts, tabulations and similar data offered in evidence at the hearings must, upon a showing satisfactory to the Presiding Officer of their authenticity, relevancy and materiality, be received in evidence and will constitute a part of the record.
(h)(1) The Presiding Officer will make an initial decision which must include written findings and conclusions and the reasons or basis therefor on all the material issues of fact, law, or discretion presented on the record. The findings, conclusions and written decision must be provided to the parties and made a part of the record. The initial decision will become the decision of the Administrator without further proceedings unless there is an appeal to the Administrator or motion for review by the Administrator. Except as provided in paragraph (h)(3) of this section, any such appeal must be taken within 20 days of the date the initial decision was filed.
(2) On appeal from or review of the initial decision the Administrator will have all the powers which he would have in making the initial decision including the discretion to require or allow briefs, oral argument, the taking of additional evidence or the remanding to the Presiding Officer for additional proceedings. The decision by the Administrator must include written findings and conclusions and the reasons or basis therefor on all the material issues of fact, law, or discretion presented on the appeal or considered in the review.
(3) In any hearing requested under paragraph (a)(2) of this section the Presiding Officer must render the initial decision within 60 days of that request. Any appeal to the Administrator must be taken within 10 days of the initial decision, and the Administrator must render a decision in that appeal within 30 days of the filing of the appeal.
§ 60.5482 Who implements and enforces this subpart?
(a) Under section 111(c) of the Clean Air Act, the Administrator may delegate the following implementation and enforcement authority to a state, local or tribal authority upon request:
(1) Enforcement of prohibitions on the installation and operation of affected central heaters in a manner inconsistent with the installation and owner's manual;
(2) Enforcement of prohibitions on operation of catalytic central heaters where the catalyst has been deactivated or removed;
(3) Enforcement of prohibitions on advertisement and/or sale of uncertified model lines;
(4) Enforcement of prohibitions on advertisement and/or sale of affected central heaters that do not have required permanent label;
(5) Enforcement of proper labeling of affected central heaters;
(6) Enforcement of compliance with other labeling requirements for affected central heaters.
(7) Enforcement of certification testing procedures;
(8) Enforcement of requirements for sealing of the tested central heaters and meeting parameter limits; and
(9) Enforcement of compliance requirements of EPA-approved laboratories.
(b) Delegations shall not include:
(1) Decisions on certification;
(2) Revocation of certification;
(3) Establishment or revision of standards;
(4) Establishment or revision of test methods;
(5) Laboratory and third-party certifier approvals and revocations;
(6) Enforcing provisions governing content of owner's manuals; and
(7) Hearings and appeals procedures.
(c) Nothing in these delegations will prohibit the Administrator from enforcing any applicable requirements.
(d) Nothing in these delegations will limit delegated entities from using their authority under section 116 of the Clean Air Act to adopt or enforce more restrictive requirements.
§ 60.5483 What parts of the General Provisions do not apply to me?
The following provisions of subpart A of part 60 do not apply to this subpart:
(a) Section 60.7;
(b) Section 60.8(a), (c), (d), (e), (f)(1), and (g);
(c) Section 60.15(d).
[80 FR 13715, Mar. 16, 2015, as amended at 88 FR 18403, Mar. 29, 2023]
Subpart TTTT—Standards of Performance for Greenhouse Gas Emissions for Electric Generating Units
80 FR 64648, Oct. 23, 2015, unless otherwise noted.
Applicability
§ 60.5508 What is the purpose of this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58996, Sept. 17, 2026.
This subpart establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from a steam generating unit or an integrated gasification combined cycle (IGCC) facility that commences construction after January 8, 2014, commences reconstruction after June 18, 2014, or commences modification after January 8, 2014, but on or before May 23, 2023. This subpart also establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of GHG emissions from a stationary combustion turbine that commences construction after January 8, 2014, but on or before May 23, 2023, or commences reconstruction after June 18, 2014, but on or before May 23, 2023. An affected steam generating unit, IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine shall, for the purposes of this subpart, be referred to as an affected electric generating unit (EGU).
[89 FR 40028, May 9, 2024]
§ 60.5509 What are my general requirements for complying with this subpart?
(a) Except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section, the GHG standards included in this subpart apply to any steam generating unit or IGCC that commenced construction after January 8, 2014, or commenced modification or reconstruction after June 18, 2014, that meets the relevant applicability conditions in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. The GHG standards included in this subpart also apply to any stationary combustion turbine that commenced construction after January 8, 2014, but on or before May 23, 2023, or commenced reconstruction after June 18, 2014, but on or before May 23, 2023, that meets the relevant applicability conditions in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Has a base load rating greater than 260 gigajoules per hour (GJ/h) (250 million British thermal units per hour (MMBtu/h)) of fossil fuel (either alone or in combination with any other fuel); and
(2) Serves a generator or generators capable of selling greater than 25 megawatts (MW) of electricity to a utility power distribution system.
(b) You are not subject to the requirements of this subpart if your affected EGU meets any of the conditions specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (10) of this section.
(1) Your EGU is a steam generating unit or IGCC whose annual net-electric sales have never exceeded one-third of its potential electric output or 219,000 megawatt-hour (MWh), whichever is greater, and is currently subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting annual net-electric sales to no more than one-third of its potential electric output or 219,000 MWh, whichever is greater.
(2) Your EGU is capable of deriving 50 percent or more of the heat input from non-fossil fuel at the base load rating and is also subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting the annual capacity factor for all fossil fuels combined of 10 percent (0.10) or less.
(3) Your EGU is a combined heat and power unit that is subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting annual net-electric sales to no more than either 219,000 MWh or the product of the design efficiency and the potential electric output, whichever is greater.
(4) Your EGU serves a generator along with other steam generating unit(s), IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine(s) where the effective generation capacity (determined based on a prorated output of the base load rating of each steam generating unit, IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine) is 25 MW or less.
(5) Your EGU is a municipal waste combustor that is subject to subpart Eb of this part.
(6) Your EGU is a commercial or industrial solid waste incineration unit that is subject to subpart CCCC of this part.
(7) Your EGU is a steam generating unit or IGCC that undergoes a modification resulting in an hourly increase in CO2 emissions (mass per hour) of 10 percent or less (2 significant figures). Modified units that are not subject to the requirements of this subpart pursuant to this paragraph (b)(7) continue to be existing units under section 111 with respect to CO2 emissions standards.
(8) Your EGU is a stationary combustion turbine that is not capable of combusting natural gas (e.g., not connected to a natural gas pipeline).
(9) Your EGU derives greater than 50 percent of the heat input from an industrial process that does not produce any electrical or mechanical output or useful thermal output that is used outside the affected EGU.
(10) Your EGU is subject to subpart TTTTa of this part.
[89 FR 40028, May 9, 2024]
Emission Standards
§ 60.5515 Which pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
(a) The pollutants regulated by this subpart are greenhouse gases. The greenhouse gas standard in this subpart is in the form of a limitation on emission of carbon dioxide.
(b) PSD and title V thresholds for greenhouse gases. (1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in § 51.166(b)(48) of this chapter and in any SIP approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, § 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in § 52.21(b)(49) of this chapter.
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to greenhouse gas emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to greenhouse gas emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2.
§ 60.5520 What CO2 emissions standard must I meet?
(a) For each affected EGU subject to this subpart, you must not discharge from the affected EGU any gases that contain CO2 in excess of the applicable CO2 emission standard specified in table 1 or 2 to this subpart, consistent with paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, as applicable.
(b) Except as specified in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, you must comply with the applicable gross or net energy output standard, and your operating permit must include monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting methodologies based on the applicable gross or net energy output standard. For the remainder of this subpart (for sources that do not qualify under paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section), where the term “gross or net energy output” is used, the term that applies to you is “gross energy output.”
(c) As an alternate to meeting the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, an owner or operator of a stationary combustion turbine may petition the Administrator in writing to comply with the alternate applicable net energy output standard. If the Administrator grants the petition, beginning on the date the Administrator grants the petition, the affected EGU must comply with the applicable net energy output-based standard included in this subpart. Your operating permit must include monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting methodologies based on the applicable net energy output standard. For the remainder of this subpart, where the term “gross or net energy output” is used, the term that applies to you is “net energy output.” Owners or operators complying with the net output-based standard must petition the Administrator to switch back to complying with the gross energy output-based standard.
(d) Owners or operators of a stationary combustion turbine that maintain records of electric sales to demonstrate that the stationary combustion turbine is subject to a heat input-based standard in table 2 to this subpart that are only permitted to burn one or more uniform fuels, as described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, are only subject to the monitoring requirements in paragraph (d)(1). Owners or operators of all other stationary combustion turbines that maintain records of electric sales to demonstrate that the stationary combustion turbines are subject to a heat input-based standard in table 2 are only subject to the requirements in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(1) Owners or operators of stationary combustion turbines that are only permitted to burn fuels with a consistent chemical composition (i.e., uniform fuels) that result in a consistent emission rate of 69 kilograms per gigajoule (kg/GJ) (160 lb CO2/MMBtu) or less are not subject to any monitoring or reporting requirements under this subpart. These fuels include, but are not limited to hydrogen, natural gas, methane, butane, butylene, ethane, ethylene, propane, naphtha, propylene, jet fuel kerosene, No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2 fuel oil, and biodiesel. Stationary combustion turbines qualifying under this paragraph are only required to maintain purchase records for permitted fuels.
(2) Owners or operators of stationary combustion turbines permitted to burn fuels that do not have a consistent chemical composition or that do not have an emission rate of 69 kg/GJ (160 lb CO2/MMBtu) or less (e.g., non-uniform fuels such as residual oil and non-jet fuel kerosene) must follow the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements necessary to complete the heat input-based calculations under this subpart.
[89 FR 40029, May 9, 2024]
General Compliance Requirements
§ 60.5525 What are my general requirements for complying with this subpart?
Combustion turbines qualifying under § 60.5520(d)(1) are not subject to any requirements in this section other than the requirement to maintain fuel purchase records for permitted fuel(s). For all other affected sources, compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard of this subpart shall be determined on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis. See table 1 or 2 to this subpart for the applicable CO2 emission standards.
(a) You must be in compliance with the emission standards in this subpart that apply to your affected EGU at all times. However, you must determine compliance with the emission standards only at the end of the applicable operating month, as provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(1) For each affected EGU subject to a CO2 emissions standard based on a 12-operating-month rolling average, you must determine compliance monthly by calculating the average CO2 emissions rate for the affected EGU at the end of the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month period.
(2) Consistent with § 60.5520(d)(2), if your affected stationary combustion turbine is subject to an input-based CO2 emissions standard, you must determine the total heat input in GJ or MMBtu from natural gas (HTIPng) and the total heat input from all other fuels combined (HTIPo) using one of the methods under § 60.5535(d)(2). You must then use the following equation to determine the applicable emissions standard during the compliance period:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)(2)
Where:
CO2 emission standard = the emission standard during the compliance period in units of kg/GJ (or lb/MMBtu).
HTIPng = the heat input in GJ (or MMBtu) from natural gas.
HTIPo = the heat input in GJ (or MMBtu) from all fuels other than natural gas.
50 = allowable emission rate in kg/GJ for heat input derived from natural gas (use 120 if electing to demonstrate compliance using lb CO2/MMBtu).
69 = allowable emission rate in kg/GJ for heat input derived from all fuels other than natural gas (use 160 if electing to demonstrate compliance using lb CO2/MMBtu).
(b) At all times you must operate and maintain each affected EGU, including associated equipment and monitors, in a manner consistent with safety and good air pollution control practice. The Administrator will determine if you are using consistent operation and maintenance procedures based on information available to the Administrator that may include, but is not limited to, fuel use records, monitoring results, review of operation and maintenance procedures and records, review of reports required by this subpart, and inspection of the EGU.
(c) Within 30 days after the end of the initial compliance period (i.e., no more than 30 days after the first 12-operating-month compliance period), you must make an initial compliance determination for your affected EGU(s) with respect to the applicable emissions standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart, in accordance with the requirements in this subpart. The first operating month included in the initial 12-operating-month compliance period shall be determined as follows:
(1) For an affected EGU that commences commercial operation (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2) on or after October 23, 2015, the first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580) after the calendar month in which emissions reporting is required to begin under:
(i) Section 60.5555(c)(3)(i), for units subject to the Acid Rain Program; or
(ii) Section 60.5555(c)(3)(ii)(A), for units that are not in the Acid Rain Program.
(2) For an affected EGU that has commenced commercial operation (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2) prior to October 23, 2015:
(i) If the date on which emissions reporting is required to begin under 40 CFR 75.64(a) has passed prior to October 23, 2015, emissions reporting shall begin according to § 60.5555(c)(3)(i) (for Acid Rain program units), or according to § 60.5555(c)(3)(ii)(B) (for units that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program). The first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580) after the calendar month in which the rule becomes effective; or
(ii) If the date on which emissions reporting is required to begin under 40 CFR 75.64(a) occurs on or after October 23, 2015, then the first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580) after the calendar month in which emissions reporting is required to begin under § 60.5555(c)(3)(ii)(A).
(3) For a modified or reconstructed EGU that becomes subject to this subpart, the first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580) after the calendar month in which emissions reporting is required to begin under § 60.5555(c)(3)(iii).
(4) Electric sales by your affected facility generated when it operated during a system emergency as defined in § 60.5580 are excluded for applicability with the base load standard if you can sufficiently provide the documentation listed in § 60.5560(i).
[89 FR 40029, May 9, 2024]
Monitoring and Compliance Determination Procedures
§ 60.5535 How do I monitor and collect data to demonstrate compliance?
(a) Combustion turbines qualifying under § 60.5520(d)(1) are not subject to any requirements in this section other than the requirement to maintain fuel purchase records for permitted fuel(s). If your combustion turbine uses non-uniform fuels as specified under § 60.5520(d)(2), you must monitor heat input in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, and you must monitor CO2 emissions in accordance with either paragraph (b), (c)(2), or (c)(5) of this section. For all other affected sources, you must prepare a monitoring plan to quantify the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h), in accordance with the applicable provisions in 40 CFR 75.53(g) and (h). The electronic portion of the monitoring plan must be submitted using the ECMPS Client Tool and must be in place prior to reporting emissions data and/or the results of monitoring system certification tests under this subpart. The monitoring plan must be updated as necessary. Monitoring plan submittals must be made by the Designated Representative (DR), the Alternate DR, or a delegated agent of the DR (see § 60.5555(d) and (e)).
(b) You must determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions in kg from your affected EGU(s) according to paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section, or, if applicable, as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) For an affected EGU that combusts coal you must, and for all other affected EGUs you may, install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a CO2 continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) to directly measure and record hourly average CO2 concentrations in the affected EGU exhaust gases emitted to the atmosphere, and a flow monitoring system to measure hourly average stack gas flow rates, according to 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(i). As an alternative to direct measurement of CO2 concentration, provided that your EGU does not use carbon separation (e.g., carbon capture and storage), you may use data from a certified oxygen (O2) monitor to calculate hourly average CO2 concentrations, in accordance with 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(iii). If you measure CO2 concentration on a dry basis, you must also install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a continuous moisture monitoring system, according to 40 CFR 75.11(b). Alternatively, you may either use an appropriate fuel-specific default moisture value from 40 CFR 75.11(b) or submit a petition to the Administrator under 40 CFR 75.66 for a site-specific default moisture value.
(2) For each continuous monitoring system that you use to determine the CO2 mass emissions, you must meet the applicable certification and quality assurance procedures in 40 CFR 75.20 and appendices A and B to 40 CFR part 75.
(3) You must use only unadjusted exhaust gas volumetric flow rates to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions rate from the affected EGU; you must not apply the bias adjustment factors described in Section 7.6.5 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 75 to the exhaust gas flow rate data.
(4) You must select an appropriate reference method to setup (characterize) the flow monitor and to perform the on-going RATAs, in accordance with 40 CFR part 75. If you use a Type-S pitot tube or a pitot tube assembly for the flow RATAs, you must calibrate the pitot tube or pitot tube assembly; you may not use the 0.84 default Type-S pitot tube coefficient specified in Method 2.
(5) Calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions (kg) as described in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section. Perform this calculation only for “valid operating hours”, as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1).
(i) Begin with the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h), obtained either from equation F-11 in appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a wet basis), or by following the procedure in section 4.2 of appendix F to part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a dry basis).
(ii) Next, multiply each hourly CO2 mass emission rate by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2.
(iii) Finally, multiply the result from paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section by 907.2 to convert it from tons of CO2 to kg. Round off to the nearest kg.
(iv) The hourly CO2 tons/h values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under 40 CFR 75.57(e) and must be reported electronically under 40 CFR 75.64(a)(6). You must use these data to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(c) If your affected EGU exclusively combusts liquid fuel and/or gaseous fuel, as an alternative to complying with paragraph (b) of this section, you may determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions according to paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section. If you use non-uniform fuels as specified in § 60.5520(d)(2), you may determine CO2 mass emissions during the compliance period according to paragraph (c)(5) of this section.
(1) If you are subject to an output-based standard and you do not install CEMS in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, you must implement the applicable procedures in appendix D to part 75 of this chapter to determine hourly EGU heat input rates (MMBtu/h), based on hourly measurements of fuel flow rate and periodic determinations of the gross calorific value (GCV) of each fuel combusted.
(2) For each measured hourly heat input rate, use Equation G-4 in appendix G to part 75 of this chapter to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h). You may determine site-specific carbon-based F-factors (Fc) using Equation F-7b in section 3.3.6 of appendix F to part 75 of this chapter, and you may use these Fc values in the emissions calculations instead of using the default Fc values in the Equation G-4 nomenclature.
(3) For each “valid operating hour” (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1), multiply the hourly tons/h CO2 mass emission rate from paragraph (c)(2) of this section by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2. Then, multiply the result by 907.2 to convert from tons of CO2 to kg. Round off to the nearest two significant figures.
(4) The hourly CO2 tons/h values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under § 75.57(e) of this chapter and must be reported electronically under § 75.64(a)(6) of this chapter. You must use these data to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(5) If you operate a combustion turbine firing non-uniform fuels, as an alternative to following paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section, you may determine CO2 emissions during the compliance period using one of the following methods:
(i) Units firing fuel gas may determine the heat input during the compliance period following the procedure under § 60.107a(d) and convert this heat input to CO2 emissions using Equation G-4 in appendix G to part 75 of this chapter.
(ii) You may use the procedure for determining CO2 emissions during the compliance period based on the use of the Tier 3 methodology under § 98.33(a)(3) of this chapter.
(d) Consistent with § 60.5520, you must determine the basis of the emissions standard that applies to your affected source in accordance with either paragraph (d)(1) or (2) of this section, as applicable:
(1) If you operate a source subject to an emissions standard established on an output basis (e.g., lb of CO2 per gross or net MWh of energy output), you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a sufficient number of watt meters to continuously measure and record the hourly gross electric output or net electric output, as applicable, from the affected EGU(s). These measurements must be performed using 0.2 class electricity metering instrumentation and calibration procedures as specified under ANSI No. C12.20-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). For a combined heat and power (CHP) EGU, as defined in § 60.5580, you must also install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to continuously (i.e., hour-by-hour) determine and record the total useful thermal output. For process steam applications, you will need to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to continuously determine and record the hourly steam flow rate, temperature, and pressure. Your plan shall ensure that you install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to record each component of the determination, hour-by-hour.
(2) If you operate a source subject to an emissions standard established on a heat-input basis (e.g., lb CO2/MMBtu) and your affected source uses non-uniform heating value fuels as delineated under § 60.5520(d), you must determine the total heat input for each fuel fired during the compliance period in accordance with one of the following procedures:
(i) Appendix D to part 75 of this chapter;
(ii) The procedures for monitoring heat input under § 60.107a(d);
(iii) If you monitor CO2 emissions in accordance with the Tier 3 methodology under § 98.33(a)(3) of this chapter, you may convert your CO2 emissions to heat input using the appropriate emission factor in table C-1 of part 98 of this chapter. If your fuel is not listed in table C-1, you must determine a fuel-specific carbon-based F-factor (Fc) in accordance with section 12.3.2 of EPA Method 19 of appendix A-7 to this part, and you must convert your CO2 emissions to heat input using Equation G-4 in appendix G to part 75 of this chapter.
(e) Consistent with § 60.5520, if two or more affected EGUs serve a common electric generator, you must apportion the combined hourly gross or net energy output to the individual affected EGUs according to the fraction of the total steam load and/or direct mechanical energy contributed by each EGU to the electric generator. Alternatively, if the EGUs are identical, you may apportion the combined hourly gross or net electrical load to the individual EGUs according to the fraction of the total heat input contributed by each EGU. You may also elect to develop, demonstrate, and provide information satisfactory to the Administrator on alternate methods to apportion the gross energy output. The Administrator may approve such alternate methods for apportioning the gross energy output whenever the demonstration ensures accurate estimation of emissions regulated under this part.
(f) In accordance with §§ 60.13(g) and 60.5520, if two or more affected EGUs that implement the continuous emission monitoring provisions in paragraph (b) of this section share a common exhaust gas stack you must monitor hourly CO2 mass emissions in accordance with one of the following procedures:
(1) If the EGUs are subject to the same emissions standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart, you may monitor the hourly CO2 mass emissions at the common stack in lieu of monitoring each EGU separately. If you choose this option, the hourly gross or net energy output (electric, thermal, and/or mechanical, as applicable) must be the sum of the hourly loads for the individual affected EGUs and you must express the operating time as “stack operating hours” (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2). If you attain compliance with the applicable emissions standard in § 60.5520 at the common stack, each affected EGU sharing the stack is in compliance.
(2) As an alternative, or if the EGUs are subject to different emission standards in table 1 or 2 to this subpart, you must either:
(i) Monitor each EGU separately by measuring the hourly CO2 mass emissions prior to mixing in the common stack or
(ii) Apportion the CO2 mass emissions based on the unit's load contribution to the total load associated with the common stack and the appropriate F-factors. You may also elect to develop, demonstrate, and provide information satisfactory to the Administrator on alternate methods to apportion the CO2 emissions. The Administrator may approve such alternate methods for apportioning the CO2 emissions whenever the demonstration ensures accurate estimation of emissions regulated under this part.
(g) In accordance with §§ 60.13(g) and 60.5520 if the exhaust gases from an affected EGU that implements the continuous emission monitoring provisions in paragraph (b) of this section are emitted to the atmosphere through multiple stacks (or if the exhaust gases are routed to a common stack through multiple ducts and you elect to monitor in the ducts), you must monitor the hourly CO2 mass emissions and the “stack operating time” (as defined in § 72.2 of this chapter) at each stack or duct separately. In this case, you must determine compliance with the applicable emissions standard in Table 1 or 2 of this subpart by summing the CO2 mass emissions measured at the individual stacks or ducts and dividing by the total gross or net energy output for the affected EGU.
[80 FR 64648, Oct. 23, 2015, as amended at 89 FR 40030, May 9, 2024]
§ 60.5540 How do I demonstrate compliance with my CO2 emissions standard and determine excess emissions?
(a) In accordance with § 60.5520, if you are subject to an output-based emission standard or you burn non-uniform fuels as specified in § 60.5520(d)(2), you must demonstrate compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart as required in this section. For the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month rolling average compliance period, you must follow the procedures in paragraphs (a)(1) through (8) of this section to calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for your affected EGU(s) in units of the applicable emissions standard (e.g., either kg/MWh or kg/GJ). You must use the hourly CO2 mass emissions calculated under § 60.5535(b) or (c), as applicable, and either the generating load data from § 60.5535(d)(1) for output-based calculations or the heat input data from § 60.5535(d)(2) for heat-input-based calculations. Combustion turbines firing non-uniform fuels that contain CO2 prior to combustion (e.g., blast furnace gas or landfill gas) may sample the fuel stream to determine the quantity of CO2 present in the fuel prior to combustion and exclude this portion of the CO2 mass emissions from compliance determinations.
(1) Each compliance period shall include only “valid operating hours” in the compliance period, i.e., operating hours for which:
(i) “Valid data” (as defined in § 60.5580) are obtained for all of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions (kg) and, if a heat input-based standard applies, all the parameters used to determine total heat input for the hour are also obtained; and
(ii) The corresponding hourly gross or net energy output value is also valid data (Note: For hours with no useful output, zero is considered to be a valid value).
(2) You must exclude operating hours in which:
(i) The substitute data provisions of 40 CFR 75 are applied for any of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions or, if a heat input-based standard applies, for any parameters used to determine the hourly heat input;
(ii) An exceedance of the full-scale range of a continuous emission monitoring system occurs for any of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions or, if applicable, to determine the hourly heat input; or
(iii) The total gross or net energy output (Pgross/net) or, if applicable, the total heat input is unavailable.
(3) For each compliance period, at least 95 percent of the operating hours in the compliance period must be valid operating hours, as defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(4) You must calculate the total CO2 mass emissions by summing the valid hourly CO2 mass emissions values from § 60.5535 for all of the valid operating hours in the compliance period.
(5) For each valid operating hour of the compliance period that was used in paragraph (a)(4) of this section to calculate the total CO2 mass emissions, you must determine Pgross/net (the corresponding hourly gross or net energy output in MWh) according to the procedures in paragraphs (a)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section, as appropriate for the type of affected EGU(s). For an operating hour in which a valid CO2 mass emissions value is determined according to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, if there is no gross or net electrical output, but there is mechanical or useful thermal output, you must still determine the gross or net energy output for that hour. In addition, for an operating hour in which a valid CO2 mass emissions value is determined according to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, but there is no (i.e., zero) gross electrical, mechanical, or useful thermal output, you must use that hour in the compliance determination. For hours or partial hours where the gross electric output is equal to or less than the auxiliary loads, net electric output shall be counted as zero for this calculation.
(i) Calculate Pgross/net for your affected EGU using the following equation. All terms in the equation must be expressed in units of MWh. To convert each hourly gross or net energy output (consistent with § 60.5520) value reported under 40 CFR part 75 to MWh, multiply by the corresponding EGU or stack operating time.
Equation 1 to paragraph (a)(5)(i)
Where:
Pgross/net = In accordance with § 60.5520, gross or net energy output of your affected EGU for each valid operating hour (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1)) in MWh.
(Pe)ST = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of steam turbines in MWh.
(Pe)CT = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of stationary combustion turbine(s) in MWh.
(Pe)IE = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of your affected EGU's integrated equipment that provides electricity or mechanical energy to the affected EGU or auxiliary equipment in MWh.
(Pe)FW = Electric energy used to power boiler feedwater pumps at steam generating units in MWh. Not applicable to stationary combustion turbines, IGCC EGUs, or EGUs complying with a net energy output based standard.
(Pe)A = Electric energy used for any auxiliary loads in MWh. Not applicable for determining Pgross.
(Pt)PS = Useful thermal output of steam (measured relative to standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP) conditions, as applicable) that is used for applications that do not generate additional electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU. This is calculated using the equation specified in paragraph (a)(5)(ii) of this section in MWh.
(Pt)HR = Non steam useful thermal output (measured relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from heat recovery that is used for applications other than steam generation or performance enhancement of the affected EGU in MWh.
(Pt)IE = Useful thermal output (relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from any integrated equipment is used for applications that do not generate additional steam, electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU in MWh.
TDF = Electric Transmission and Distribution Factor of 0.95 for a combined heat and power affected EGU where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, or 1.0 for all other affected EGUs.
(ii) If applicable to your affected EGU (for example, for combined heat and power), you must calculate (Pt)PS using the following equation:
Equation 2 to Paragraph (a)(5)(ii)
Where:
Qm = Measured useful thermal output flow in kg (lb) for the operating hour.
H = Enthalpy of the useful thermal output at measured temperature and pressure (relative to SATP conditions or the energy in the condensate return line, as applicable) in Joules per kilogram (J/kg) (or Btu/lb).
CF = Conversion factor of 3.6 × 10 9 J/MWh or 3.413 × 10 6 Btu/MWh.
(6) Sources complying with energy output-based standards must calculate the basis (i.e., denominator) of their actual 12-operating month emission rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section. Sources complying with heat input based standards must calculate the basis of their actual 12-operating month emission rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this section.
(i) In accordance with § 60.5520 if you are subject to an output-based standard, you must calculate the total gross or net energy output for the affected EGU's compliance period by summing the hourly gross or net energy output values for the affected EGU that you determined under paragraph (a)(5) of this section for all of the valid operating hours in the applicable compliance period.
(ii) If you are subject to a heat input-based standard, you must calculate the total heat input for each fuel fired during the compliance period. The calculation of total heat input for each individual fuel must include all valid operating hours and must also be consistent with any fuel-specific procedures specified within your selected monitoring option under § 60.5535(d)(2).
(7) If you are subject to an output-based standard, you must calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for the affected EGU(s) (kg/MWh) by dividing the total CO2 mass emissions value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(4) of this section by the total gross or net energy output value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section. Round off the result to two significant figures if the calculated value is less than 1,000; round the result to three significant figures if the calculated value is greater than 1,000. If you are subject to a heat input-based standard, you must calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for the affected EGU(s) (kg/GJ or lb/MMBtu) by dividing the total CO2 mass emissions value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(4) of this section by the total heat input calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this section. Round off the result to two significant figures.
(b) In accordance with § 60.5520, to demonstrate compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard, for the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month compliance period, the CO2 mass emissions rate for your affected EGU must be determined according to the procedures specified in paragraph (a)(1) through (8) of this section and must be less than or equal to the applicable CO2 emissions standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart, or the emissions standard calculated in accordance with § 60.5525(a)(2).
[89 FR 40031, May 9, 2024]
Notification, Reports, and Records
§ 60.5550 What notifications must I submit and when?
(a) You must prepare and submit the notifications specified in §§ 60.7(a)(1) and (3) and 60.19, as applicable to your affected EGU(s) (see table 3 of this subpart).
(b) You must prepare and submit notifications specified in § 75.61 of this chapter, as applicable, to your affected EGUs.
§ 60.5555 What reports must I submit and when?
(a) You must prepare and submit reports according to paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section, as applicable.
(1) For affected EGUs that are required by § 60.5525 to conduct initial and on-going compliance determinations on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, you must submit electronic quarterly reports as follows. After you have accumulated the first 12-operating months for the affected EGU, you must submit a report for the calendar quarter that includes the twelfth operating month no later than 30 days after the end of that quarter. Thereafter, you must submit a report for each subsequent calendar quarter, no later than 30 days after the end of the quarter.
(2) In each quarterly report you must include the following information, as applicable:
(i) Each rolling average CO2 mass emissions rate for which the last (twelfth) operating month in a 12-operating-month compliance period falls within the calendar quarter. You must calculate each average CO2 mass emissions rate for the compliance period according to the procedures in § 60.5540. You must report the dates (month and year) of the first and twelfth operating months in each compliance period for which you performed a CO2 mass emissions rate calculation. If there are no compliance periods that end in the quarter, you must include a statement to that effect;
(ii) If one or more compliance periods end in the quarter, you must identify each operating month in the calendar quarter where your EGU violated the applicable CO2 emission standard;
(iii) If one or more compliance periods end in the quarter and there are no violations for the affected EGU, you must include a statement indicating this in the report;
(iv) The percentage of valid operating hours in each 12-operating-month compliance period described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section (i.e., the total number of valid operating hours (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1)) in that period divided by the total number of operating hours in that period, multiplied by 100 percent);
(v) Consistent with § 60.5520, the CO2 emissions standard (as identified in table 1 or 2 to this subpart) with which your affected EGU must comply; and
(vi) Consistent with § 60.5520, an indication whether or not the hourly gross or net energy output (Pgross/net) values used in the compliance determinations are based solely upon gross electrical load.
(3) In the final quarterly report of each calendar year, you must include the following:
(i) Consistent with § 60.5520, gross energy output or net energy output sold to an electric grid, as applicable to the units of your emission standard, over the four quarters of the calendar year; and
(ii) The potential electric output of the EGU.
(b) You must submit all electronic reports required under paragraph (a) of this section using the Emissions Collection and Monitoring Plan System (ECMPS) Client Tool provided by the Clean Air Markets Division in the Office of Atmospheric Programs of EPA.
(c)(1) For affected EGUs under this subpart that are also subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must meet all applicable reporting requirements and submit reports as required under subpart G of part 75 of this chapter.
(2) For affected EGUs under this subpart that are not in the Acid Rain Program, you must also meet the reporting requirements and submit reports as required under subpart G of part 75 of this chapter, to the extent that those requirements and reports provide applicable data for the compliance demonstrations required under this subpart.
(3)(i) For all newly-constructed affected EGUs under this subpart that are also subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must begin submitting the quarterly electronic emissions reports described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section in accordance with § 75.64(a) of this chapter, i.e., beginning with data recorded on and after the earlier of:
(A) The date of provisional certification, as defined in § 75.20(a)(3) of this chapter; or
(B) 180 days after the date on which the EGU commences commercial operation (as defined in § 72.2 of this chapter).
(ii) For newly-constructed affected EGUs under this subpart that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must begin submitting the quarterly electronic reports described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, beginning with data recorded on and after:
(A) The date on which reporting is required to begin under § 75.64(a) of this chapter, if that date occurs on or after October 23, 2015; or
(B) October 23, 2015, if the date on which reporting would ordinarily be required to begin under § 75.64(a) of this chapter has passed prior to October 23, 2015.
(iii) For reconstructed or modified units, reporting of emissions data shall begin at the date on which the EGU becomes an affected unit under this subpart, provided that the ECMPS Client Tool is able to receive and process net energy output data on that date. Otherwise, emissions data reporting shall be on a gross energy output basis until the date that the Client Tool is first able to receive and process net energy output data.
(4) If any required monitoring system has not been provisionally certified by the applicable date on which emissions data reporting is required to begin under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the maximum (or in some cases, minimum) potential value for the parameter measured by the monitoring system shall be reported until the required certification testing is successfully completed, in accordance with § 75.4(j) of this chapter, § 75.37(b) of this chapter, or section 2.4 of appendix D to part 75 of this chapter (as applicable). Operating hours in which CO2 mass emission rates are calculated using maximum potential values are not “valid operating hours” (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1)), and shall not be used in the compliance determinations under § 60.5540.
(d) For affected EGUs subject to the Acid Rain Program, the reports required under paragraphs (a) and (c)(1) of this section shall be submitted by:
(1) The person appointed as the Designated Representative (DR) under § 72.20 of this chapter; or
(2) The person appointed as the Alternate Designated Representative (ADR) under § 72.22 of this chapter; or
(3) A person (or persons) authorized by the DR or ADR under § 72.26 of this chapter to make the required submissions.
(e) For affected EGUs that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, the owner or operator shall appoint a DR and (optionally) an ADR to submit the reports required under paragraphs (a) and (c)(2) of this section. The DR and ADR must register with the Clean Air Markets Division (CAMD) Business System. The DR may delegate the authority to make the required submissions to one or more persons.
(f) If your affected EGU captures CO2 to meet the applicable emissions standard, you must report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart PP, and either:
(1) Report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs on-site;
(2) Transfer the captured CO2 to an EGU or facility that reports in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs off-site; or
(3) Transfer the captured CO2 to a facility that has received an innovative technology waiver from EPA pursuant to paragraph (g) of this section.
(g) Any person may request the Administrator to issue a waiver of the requirement that captured CO2 from an affected EGU be transferred to a facility reporting under 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV. To receive a waiver, the applicant must demonstrate to the Administrator that its technology will store captured CO2 as effectively as geologic sequestration, and that the proposed technology will not cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare, or safety. In making this determination, the Administrator shall consider (among other factors) operating history of the technology, whether the technology will increase emissions or other releases of any pollutant other than CO2, and permanence of the CO2 storage. The Administrator may test the system or require the applicant to perform any tests considered by the Administrator to be necessary to show the technology's effectiveness, safety, and ability to store captured CO2 without release. The Administrator may grant conditional approval of a technology, with the approval conditioned on monitoring and reporting of operations. The Administrator may also withdraw approval of the waiver on evidence of releases of CO2 or other pollutants. The Administrator will provide notice to the public of any application under this provision and provide public notice of any proposed action on a petition before the Administrator takes final action.
[80 FR 64648, Oct. 23, 2015, as amended at 89 FR 40033, May 9, 2024]
§ 60.5560 What records must I maintain?
(a) You must maintain records of the information you used to demonstrate compliance with this subpart as specified in § 60.7(b) and (f).
(b)(1) For affected EGUs subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must follow the applicable recordkeeping requirements and maintain records as required under subpart F of part 75 of this chapter.
(2) For affected EGUs that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must also follow the recordkeeping requirements and maintain records as required under subpart F of part 75 of this chapter, to the extent that those records provide applicable data for the compliance determinations required under this subpart. Regardless of the prior sentence, at a minimum, the following records must be kept, as applicable to the types of continuous monitoring systems used to demonstrate compliance under this subpart:
(i) Monitoring plan records under § 75.53(g) and (h) of this chapter;
(ii) Operating parameter records under § 75.57(b)(1) through (4) of this chapter;
(iii) The records under § 75.57(c)(2) of this chapter, for stack gas volumetric flow rate;
(iv) The records under § 75.57(c)(3) of this chapter for continuous moisture monitoring systems;
(v) The records under § 75.57(e)(1) of this chapter, except for paragraph (e)(1)(x), for CO2 concentration monitoring systems or O2 monitors used to calculate CO2 concentration;
(vi) The records under § 75.58(c)(1) of this chapter, specifically paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), and (viii) through (xiv), for oil flow meters;
(vii) The records under § 75.58(c)(4) of this chapter, specifically paragraphs (c)(4)(i), (ii), (iv), (v), and (vii) through (xi), for gas flow meters;
(viii) The quality-assurance records under § 75.59(a) of this chapter, specifically paragraphs (a)(1) through (12) and (15), for CEMS;
(ix) The quality-assurance records under § 75.59(a) of this chapter, specifically paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), for fuel flow meters; and
(x) Records of data acquisition and handling system (DAHS) verification under § 75.59(e) of this chapter.
(c) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine the hourly and total CO2 mass emissions (tons) for:
(1) Each operating month (for all affected EGUs); and
(2) Each compliance period, including, each 12-operating-month compliance period.
(d) Consistent with § 60.5520, you must keep records of the applicable data recorded and calculations performed that you used to determine your affected EGU's gross or net energy output for each operating month.
(e) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine the percentage of valid CO2 mass emission rates in each compliance period.
(f) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to assess compliance with each applicable CO2 mass emissions standard in Table 1 or 2 of this subpart.
(g) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine any site-specific carbon-based F-factors you used in the emissions calculations (if applicable).
(h) For stationary combustion turbines, you must keep records of electric sales to determine the applicable subcategory.
(i) You must keep the records listed in paragraphs (i)(1) through (3) of this section to demonstrate that your affected facility operated during a system emergency.
(1) Documentation that the system emergency to which the affected EGU was responding was in effect from the entity issuing the alert, and documentation of the exact duration of the event;
(2) Documentation from the entity issuing the alert that the system emergency included the affected source/region where the affected facility was located, and
(3) Documentation that the affected facility was instructed to increase output beyond the planned day-ahead or other near-term expected output and/or was asked to remain in operation outside its scheduled dispatch during emergency conditions from a Reliability Coordinator, Balancing Authority, or Independent System Operator/Regional Transmission Organization.
[80 FR 64648, Oct. 23, 2015, as amended at 89 FR 40033, May 9, 2024]
§ 60.5565 In what form and how long must I keep my records?
(a) Your records must be in a form suitable and readily available for expeditious review.
(b) You must maintain each record for 3 years after the date of conclusion of each compliance period.
(c) You must maintain each record on site for at least 2 years after the date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, report, or record, according to § 60.7. Records that are accessible from a central location by a computer or other means that instantly provide access at the site meet this requirement. You may maintain the records off site for the remaining year(s) as required by this subpart.
Other Requirements and Information
§ 60.5570 What parts of the general provisions apply to my affected EGU?
Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, certain parts of the general provisions in §§ 60.1 through 60.19, listed in table 3 to this subpart, do not apply to your affected EGU.
§ 60.5575 Who implements and enforces this subpart?
(a) This subpart can be implemented and enforced by the EPA, or a delegated authority such as your state, local, or tribal agency. If the Administrator has delegated authority to your state, local, or tribal agency, then that agency (as well as the EPA) has the authority to implement and enforce this subpart. You should contact your EPA Regional Office to find out if this subpart is delegated to your state, local, or tribal agency.
(b) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority of this subpart to a state, local, or tribal agency, the Administrator retains the authorities listed in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section and does not transfer them to the state, local, or tribal agency. In addition, the EPA retains oversight of this subpart and can take enforcement actions, as appropriate.
(1) Approval of alternatives to the emission standards.
(2) Approval of major alternatives to test methods.
(3) Approval of major alternatives to monitoring.
(4) Approval of major alternatives to recordkeeping and reporting.
(5) Performance test and data reduction waivers under § 60.8(b).
§ 60.5580 What definitions apply to this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58996, Sept. 17, 2026.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein will have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act and in subpart A (general provisions of this part).
Annual capacity factor means the ratio between the actual heat input to an EGU during a calendar year and the potential heat input to the EGU had it been operated for 8,760 hours during a calendar year at the base load rating. Actual and potential heat input derived from non-combustion sources (e.g., solar thermal) are not included when calculating the annual capacity factor.
Base load rating means the maximum amount of heat input (fuel) that an EGU can combust on a steady state basis plus the maximum amount of heat input derived from non-combustion source (e.g., solar thermal), as determined by the physical design and characteristics of the EGU at International Organization for Standardization (ISO) conditions. For a stationary combustion turbine, base load rating includes the heat input from duct burners.
Coal means all solid fuels classified as anthracite, bituminous, subbituminous, or lignite by ASTM International in ASTM D388-99R04 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), coal refuse, and petroleum coke. Synthetic fuels derived from coal for the purpose of creating useful heat, including, but not limited to, solvent-refined coal, gasified coal (not meeting the definition of natural gas), coal-oil mixtures, and coal-water mixtures are included in this definition for the purposes of this subpart.
Combined cycle unit means a stationary combustion turbine from which the heat from the turbine exhaust gases is recovered by a heat recovery steam generating unit (HRSG) to generate additional electricity.
Combined heat and power unit or CHP unit, (also known as “cogeneration”) means an electric generating unit that simultaneously produces both electric (or mechanical) and useful thermal output from the same primary energy source.
Design efficiency means the rated overall net efficiency (e.g., electric plus useful thermal output) on a lower heating value basis at the base load rating, at ISO conditions, and at the maximum useful thermal output (e.g., CHP unit with condensing steam turbines would determine the design efficiency at the maximum level of extraction and/or bypass). Design efficiency shall be determined using one of the following methods: ASME PTC 22-2014, ASME PTC 46-1996, ISO 2314:2009(E) (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), or an alternative approved by the Administrator.
Distillate oil means fuel oils that comply with the specifications for fuel oil numbers 1 and 2, as defined in ASTM D396-98 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); diesel fuel oil numbers 1 and 2, as defined in ASTM D975-08a (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); kerosene, as defined in ASTM D3699-08 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); biodiesel as defined in ASTM D6751-11b (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); or biodiesel blends as defined in ASTM D7467-10 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
Electric Generating units or EGU means any steam generating unit, IGCC unit, or stationary combustion turbine that is subject to this rule (i.e., meets the applicability criteria)
Fossil fuel means natural gas, petroleum, coal, and any form of solid, liquid, or gaseous fuel derived from such material for the purpose of creating useful heat.
Gaseous fuel means any fuel that is present as a gas at ISO conditions and includes, but is not limited to, natural gas, refinery fuel gas, process gas, coke-oven gas, synthetic gas, and gasified coal.
Gross energy output means:
(1) For stationary combustion turbines and IGCC, the gross electric or direct mechanical output from both the EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
(2) For steam generating units, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU(s) (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output;
(3) For combined heat and power facilities where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps (the electric auxiliary load of boiler feedwater pumps is not applicable to IGCC facilities), that difference divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
Heat recovery steam generating unit (HRSG) means an EGU in which hot exhaust gases from the combustion turbine engine are routed in order to extract heat from the gases and generate useful output. Heat recovery steam generating units can be used with or without duct burners.
Integrated gasification combined cycle facility or IGCC means a combined cycle facility that is designed to burn fuels containing 50 percent (by heat input) or more solid-derived fuel not meeting the definition of natural gas, plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the affected EGU or auxiliary equipment. The Administrator may waive the 50 percent solid-derived fuel requirement during periods of the gasification system construction, startup and commissioning, shutdown, or repair. No solid fuel is directly burned in the EGU during operation.
ISO conditions means 288 Kelvin (15 °C, 59 °F), 60 percent relative humidity and 101.3 kilopascals (14.69 psi, 1 atm) pressure.
Liquid fuel means any fuel that is present as a liquid at ISO conditions and includes, but is not limited to, distillate oil and residual oil.
Mechanical output means the useful mechanical energy that is not used to operate the affected EGU(s), generate electricity and/or thermal energy, or to enhance the performance of the affected EGU. Mechanical energy measured in horsepower hour should be converted into MWh by multiplying it by 745.7 then dividing by 1,000,000.
Natural gas means a fluid mixture of hydrocarbons (e.g., methane, ethane, or propane), composed of at least 70 percent methane by volume or that has a gross calorific value between 35 and 41 megajoules (MJ) per dry standard cubic meter (950 and 1,100 Btu per dry standard cubic foot), that maintains a gaseous state under ISO conditions. Finally, natural gas does not include the following gaseous fuels: Landfill gas, digester gas, refinery gas, sour gas, blast furnace gas, coal-derived gas, producer gas, coke oven gas, or any gaseous fuel produced in a process which might result in highly variable CO2 content or heating value.
Net-electric output means the amount of gross generation the generator(s) produces (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)), as measured at the generator terminals, less the electricity used to operate the plant (i.e., auxiliary loads); such uses include fuel handling equipment, pumps, fans, pollution control equipment, other electricity needs, and transformer losses as measured at the transmission side of the step up transformer (e.g., the point of sale).
Net-electric sales means:
(1) The gross electric sales to the utility power distribution system minus purchased power; or
(2) For combined heat and power facilities, where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating month basis, the gross electric sales to the utility power distribution system minus purchased power of the thermal host facility or facilities.
(3) Electricity supplied to other facilities that produce electricity to offset auxiliary loads are included when calculating net-electric sales.
(4) Electric sales during a system emergency are not included when calculating net-electric sales.
Net energy output means:
(1) The net electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output; or
(2) For combined heat and power facilities where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, the net electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
Operating month means a calendar month during which any fuel is combusted in the affected EGU at any time.
Petroleum means crude oil or a fuel derived from crude oil, including, but not limited to, distillate and residual oil.
Potential electric output means 33 percent or the base load rating design efficiency at the maximum electric production rate (e.g., CHP units with condensing steam turbines will operate at maximum electric production), whichever is greater, multiplied by the base load rating (expressed in MMBtu/h) of the EGU, multiplied by 10 6 Btu/MMBtu, divided by 3,413 Btu/KWh, divided by 1,000 kWh/MWh, and multiplied by 8,760 h/yr (e.g., a 35 percent efficient affected EGU with a 100 MW (341 MMBtu/h) fossil fuel heat input capacity would have a 306,000 MWh 12-month potential electric output capacity).
Solid fuel means any fuel that has a definite shape and volume, has no tendency to flow or disperse under moderate stress, and is not liquid or gaseous at ISO conditions. This includes, but is not limited to, coal, biomass, and pulverized solid fuels.
Standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP) conditions means 298.15 Kelvin (25 °C, 77 °F) and 100.0 kilopascals (14.504 psi, 0.987 atm) pressure. The enthalpy of water at SATP conditions is 50 Btu/lb.
Stationary combustion turbine means all equipment including, but not limited to, the turbine engine, the fuel, air, lubrication and exhaust gas systems, control systems (except emissions control equipment), heat recovery system, fuel compressor, heater, and/or pump, post-combustion emission control technology, and any ancillary components and sub-components comprising any simple cycle stationary combustion turbine, any combined cycle combustion turbine, and any combined heat and power combustion turbine based system plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the combustion turbine engine, heat recovery system or auxiliary equipment. Stationary means that the combustion turbine is not self-propelled or intended to be propelled while performing its function. It may, however, be mounted on a vehicle for portability. A stationary combustion turbine that burns any solid fuel directly is considered a steam generating unit.
Steam generating unit means any furnace, boiler, or other device used for combusting fuel and producing steam (nuclear steam generators are not included) plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the affected EGU(s) or auxiliary equipment.
System emergency means periods when the Reliability Coordinator has declared an Energy Emergency Alert level 2 or 3 as defined by NERC Reliability Standard EOP-011-2 or its successor.
Useful thermal output means the thermal energy made available for use in any heating application (e.g., steam delivered to an industrial process for a heating application, including thermal cooling applications) that is not used for electric generation, mechanical output at the affected EGU, to directly enhance the performance of the affected EGU (e.g., economizer output is not useful thermal output, but thermal energy used to reduce fuel moisture is considered useful thermal output), or to supply energy to a pollution control device at the affected EGU. Useful thermal output for affected EGU(s) with no condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) or where measuring the energy in the condensate (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) would not meaningfully impact the emission rate calculation is measured against the energy in the thermal output at SATP conditions. Affected EGU(s) with meaningful energy in the condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU) must measure the energy in the condensate and subtract that energy relative to SATP conditions from the measured thermal output.
Valid data means quality-assured data generated by continuous monitoring systems that are installed, operated, and maintained according to part 75 of this chapter. For CEMS, the initial certification requirements in § 75.20 of this chapter and appendix A to part 75 of this chapter must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart; for on-going quality assurance, the daily, quarterly, and semiannual/annual test requirements in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 of appendix B to part 75 of this chapter must be met and the data validation criteria in sections 2.1.5, 2.2.3, and 2.3.2 of appendix B to part 75 of this chapter apply. For fuel flow meters, the initial certification requirements in section 2.1.5 of appendix D to part 75 of this chapter must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart (except for qualifying commercial billing meters under section 2.1.4.2 of appendix D to part 75), and for on-going quality assurance, the provisions in section 2.1.6 of appendix D to part 75 apply (except for qualifying commercial billing meters).
Violation means a specified averaging period over which the CO2 emissions rate is higher than the applicable emissions standard located in table 1 or 2 of this subpart.
[80 FR 64648, Oct. 23, 2015, as amended at 89 FR 40033, May 9, 2024]
Table 1 to Subpart TTTT of Part 60—CO2 Emission Standards for Affected Steam Generating Units and Integrated Gasification Combined Cycle Facilities That Commenced Construction After January 8, 2014, and Reconstruction or Modification After June 18, 2014
| Affected EGU | CO2 Emission standard |
|---|---|
| Newly constructed steam generating unit or integrated gasification combined cycle (IGCC) | 640 kg CO2/MWh of gross energy output (1,400 lb CO2/MWh-gross). |
| Reconstructed steam generating unit or IGCC that has base load rating of 2,100 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h) or less | 910 kg CO2/MWh of gross energy output (2,000 lb CO2/MWh-gross). |
| Reconstructed steam generating unit or IGCC that has a base load rating greater than 2,100 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h) | 820 kg CO2/MWh of gross energy output (1,800 lb CO2/MWh-gross). |
| Modified steam generating unit or IGCC | A unit-specific emission limit determined by the unit's best historical annual CO2 emission rate (from 2002 to the date of the modification); the emission limit will be no lower than: |
| (1) 820 kg CO2/MWh of gross energy output (1,800 lb CO2/MWh-gross) for units with a base load rating greater than 2,100 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h); or | |
| (2) 910 kg CO2/MWh of gross energy output (2,000 lb CO2/MWh-gross) for units with a base load rating of 2,100 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h) or less. |
[89 FR 40034, May 9, 2024]
Table 2 to Subpart TTTT of Part 60—CO2 Emission Standards for Affected Stationary Combustion Turbines That Commenced Construction After January 8, 2014, and Reconstruction After June 18, 2014 (Net Energy Output-Based Standards Applicable as Approved by the Administrator)
| Affected EGU | CO2 Emission standard |
|---|---|
| Newly constructed or reconstructed stationary combustion turbine that supplies more than its design efficiency or 50 percent, whichever is less, times its potential electric output as net-electric sales on both a 12-operating month and a 3-year rolling average basis and combusts more than 90% natural gas on a heat input basis on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis | 450 kg CO2/MWh (1,000 lb CO2/MWh) of gross energy output; or 470 kg CO2/MWh (1,030 lb CO2/MWh) of net energy output. |
| Newly constructed or reconstructed stationary combustion turbine that supplies its design efficiency or 50 percent, whichever is less, times its potential electric output or less as net-electric sales on either a 12-operating month or a 3-year rolling average basis and combusts more than 90% natural gas on a heat input basis on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis] | 50 kg CO2/GJ (120 lb CO2/MMBtu) of heat input. |
| Newly constructed and reconstructed stationary combustion turbine that combusts 90% or less natural gas on a heat input basis on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis | Between 50 to 69 kg CO2/GJ (120 to 160 lb CO2/MMBtu) of heat input as determined by the procedures in § 60.5525. |
[89 FR 40034, May 9, 2024]
Table 3 to Subpart TTTT of Part 60—Applicability of Subpart A of Part 60 (General Provisions) to Subpart TTTT
| General provisions citation | Subject of citation | Applies to subpart TTTT | Explanation |
|---|---|---|---|
| § 60.1 | Applicability | Yes | |
| § 60.2 | Definitions | Yes | Additional terms defined in § 60.5580. |
| § 60.3 | Units and Abbreviations | Yes | |
| § 60.4 | Address | Yes | Does not apply to information reported electronically through ECMPS. Duplicate submittals are not required. |
| § 60.5 | Determination of construction or modification | Yes | |
| § 60.6 | Review of plans | Yes | |
| § 60.7 | Notification and Recordkeeping | Yes | Only the requirements to submit the notifications in § 60.7(a)(1) and (3) and to keep records of malfunctions in § 60.7(b), if applicable. |
| § 60.8(a) | Performance tests | No | |
| § 60.8(b) | Performance test method alternatives | Yes | Administrator can approve alternate methods |
| § 60.8(c)-(f) | Conducting performance tests | No | |
| § 60.9 | Availability of Information | Yes | |
| § 60.10 | State authority | Yes | |
| § 60.11 | Compliance with standards and maintenance requirements | No. | |
| § 60.12 | Circumvention | Yes | |
| § 60.13 (a)-(h), (j) | Monitoring requirements | No | All monitoring is done according to part 75. |
| § 60.13 (i) | Monitoring requirements | Yes | Administrator can approve alternative monitoring procedures or requirements |
| § 60.14 | Modification | Yes (steam generating units and IGCC facilities) No (stationary combustion turbines) |
|
| § 60.15 | Reconstruction | Yes | |
| § 60.16 | Priority list | No | |
| § 60.17 | Incorporations by reference | Yes | |
| § 60.18 | General control device requirements | No | |
| § 60.19 | General notification and reporting requirements | Yes | Does not apply to notifications under § 75.61 or to information reported through ECMPS. |
[89 FR 40035, May 9, 2024]
Subpart TTTTa—Standards of Performance for Greenhouse Gas Emissions for Modified Coal-Fired Steam Electric Generating Units and New Construction and Reconstruction Stationary Combustion Turbine Electric Generating Units
89 FR 40035, May 9, 2024, unless otherwise noted.
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58996, Sept. 17, 2026.
Applicability
§ 60.5508a What is the purpose of this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58996, Sept. 17, 2026.
This subpart establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from a coal-fired steam generating unit or integrated gasification combined cycle facility (IGCC) that commences modification after May 23, 2023. This subpart also establishes emission standards and compliance schedules for the control of GHG emissions from a stationary combustion turbine that commences construction or reconstruction after May 23, 2023. An affected coal-fired steam generating unit, IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine shall, for the purposes of this subpart, be referred to as an affected electric generating unit (EGU).
§ 60.5509a Am I subject to this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58996, Sept. 17, 2026.
(a) Except as provided for in paragraph (b) of this section, the GHG standards included in this subpart apply to any steam generating unit or IGCC that combusts coal and that commences modification after May 23, 2023, that meets the relevant applicability conditions in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section. The GHG standards included in this subpart also apply to any stationary combustion turbine that commences construction or reconstruction after May 23, 2023, that meets the relevant applicability conditions in paragraphs (a)(1) and (2) of this section.
(1) Has a base load rating greater than 260 gigajoules per hour (GJ/h) (250 million British thermal units per hour (MMBtu/h)) of fossil fuel (either alone or in combination with any other fuel); and
(2) Serves a generator or generators capable of selling greater than 25 megawatts (MW) of electricity to a utility power distribution system.
(b) You are not subject to the requirements of this subpart if your affected EGU meets any of the conditions specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (8) of this section.
(1) Your EGU is a steam generating unit or IGCC whose annual net-electric sales have never exceeded one-third of its potential electric output or 219,000 megawatt-hour (MWh), whichever is greater, and is currently subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting annual net-electric sales to no more than one-third of its potential electric output or 219,000 MWh, whichever is greater.
(2) Your EGU is capable of deriving 50 percent or more of the heat input from non-fossil fuel at the base load rating and is also subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting the annual capacity factor for all fossil fuels combined of 10 percent (0.10) or less.
(3) Your EGU is a combined heat and power unit that is subject to a federally enforceable permit condition limiting annual net-electric sales to no more than either 219,000 MWh or the product of the design efficiency and the potential electric output, whichever is greater.
(4) Your EGU serves a generator along with other steam generating unit(s), IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine(s) where the effective generation capacity (determined based on a prorated output of the base load rating of each steam generating unit, IGCC, or stationary combustion turbine) is 25 MW or less.
(5) Your EGU is a municipal waste combustor that is subject to subpart Eb of this part.
(6) Your EGU is a commercial or industrial solid waste incineration unit that is subject to subpart CCCC of this part.
(7) Your EGU is a steam generating unit or IGCC that undergoes a modification resulting in an hourly increase in CO2 emissions (mass per hour) of 10 percent or less (2 significant figures). Modified units that are not subject to the requirements of this subpart pursuant to this subsection continue to be existing units under section 111 with respect to CO2 emissions standards.
(8) Your EGU derives greater than 50 percent of the heat input from an industrial process that does not produce any electrical or mechanical output or useful thermal output that is used outside the affected EGU.
Emission Standards
§ 60.5515a Which pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
(a) The pollutants regulated by this subpart are greenhouse gases. The greenhouse gas standard in this subpart is in the form of a limitation on emission of carbon dioxide.
(b) PSD and Title V thresholds for greenhouse gases.
(1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48) and in any SIP approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(49).
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to greenhouse gas emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to greenhouse gas emissions from affected facilities, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2.
§ 60.5520a What CO2 emissions standard must I meet?
(a) For each affected EGU subject to this subpart, you must not discharge from the affected EGU any gases that contain CO2 in excess of the applicable CO2 emission standard specified in table 1 to this subpart, consistent with paragraphs (b), (c), and (d) of this section, as applicable.
(b) Except as specified in paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, you must comply with the applicable gross or net energy output standard, and your operating permit must include monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting methodologies based on the applicable gross or net energy output standard. For the remainder of this subpart (for sources that do not qualify under paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section), where the term “gross or net energy output” is used, the term that applies to you is “gross energy output.”
(c) As an alternative to meeting the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section, an owner or operator of a stationary combustion turbine may petition the Administrator in writing to comply with the alternate applicable net energy output standard. If the Administrator grants the petition, beginning on the date the Administrator grants the petition, the affected EGU must comply with the applicable net energy output-based standard included in this subpart. Your operating permit must include monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting methodologies based on the applicable net energy output standard. For the remainder of this subpart, where the term “gross or net energy output” is used, the term that applies to you is “net energy output.” Owners or operators complying with the net output-based standard must petition the Administrator to switch back to complying with the gross energy output-based standard.
(d) Owners or operators of a stationary combustion turbine that maintain records of electric sales to demonstrate that the stationary combustion turbine is subject to a heat input-based standard in table 1 to this subpart that are only permitted to burn one or more uniform fuels, as described in paragraph (d)(1) of this section, are only subject to the monitoring requirements in paragraph (d)(1). Owners or operators of all other stationary combustion turbines that maintain records of electric sales to demonstrate that the stationary combustion turbines are subject to a heat input-based standard in table 1 are only subject to the requirements in paragraph (d)(2) of this section.
(1) Owners or operators of stationary combustion turbines that are only permitted to burn fuels with a consistent chemical composition (i.e., uniform fuels) that result in a consistent emission rate of 69 kilograms per gigajoule (kg/GJ) (160 lb CO2/MMBtu) or less are not subject to any monitoring or reporting requirements under this subpart. These fuels include, but are not limited to hydrogen, natural gas, methane, butane, butylene, ethane, ethylene, propane, naphtha, propylene, jet fuel, kerosene, No. 1 fuel oil, No. 2 fuel oil, and biodiesel. Stationary combustion turbines qualifying under this paragraph are only required to maintain purchase records for permitted fuels.
(2) Owners or operators of stationary combustion turbines permitted to burn fuels that do not have a consistent chemical composition or that do not have an emission rate of 69 kg/GJ (160 lb CO2/MMBtu) or less (e.g., non-uniform fuels such as residual oil and non-jet fuel kerosene) must follow the monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements necessary to complete the heat input-based calculations under this subpart.
§ 60.5525a What are my general requirements for complying with this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58997, Sept. 17, 2026.
Combustion turbines qualifying under § 60.5520a(d)(1) are not subject to any requirements in this section other than the requirement to maintain fuel purchase records for permitted fuel(s). For all other affected sources, compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard of this subpart shall be determined on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis. See table 1 to this subpart for the applicable CO2 emission standards.
(a) You must be in compliance with the emission standards in this subpart that apply to your affected EGU at all times. However, you must determine compliance with the emission standards only at the end of the applicable operating month, as provided in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(1) For each affected EGU subject to a CO2 emissions standard based on a 12-operating-month rolling average, you must determine compliance monthly by calculating the average CO2 emissions rate for the affected EGU at the end of the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month period.
(2) Consistent with § 60.5520a(d)(2), if your affected stationary combustion turbine is subject to an input-based CO2 emissions standard, you must determine the total heat input in GJ or MMBtu from natural gas (HTIPng) and the total heat input from all other fuels combined (HTIPo) using one of the methods under § 60.5535a(d)(2). You must then use the following equation to determine the applicable emissions standard during the compliance period:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)(2)
Where:
CO2 emission standard = the emission standard during the compliance period in units of kg/GJ (or lb/MMBtu).
HTIPng = the heat input in GJ (or MMBtu) from natural gas.
HTIPo = the heat input in GJ (or MMBtu) from all fuels other than natural gas.
50 = allowable emission rate in lb kg/GJ for heat input derived from natural gas (use 120 if electing to demonstrate compliance using lb CO2/MMBtu).
69 = allowable emission rate in lb kg/GJ for heat input derived from all fuels other than natural gas (use 160 if electing to demonstrate compliance using lb CO2/MMBtu).
(3) Owners/operators of a base load combustion turbine with a base load rating of less than 2,110 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h) and/or an intermediate or base load combustion turbine burning fuels other than natural gas may elect to determine a site-specific emissions rate using one of the following equations. Combustion turbines co-firing hydrogen are not required to use the fuel adjustment parameter.
(i) For base load combustion turbines:
Equation 2 to Paragraph (a)(3)(i)
Where:
CO2 emission standard = the emission standard during the compliance period in units of kg/MWh (or lb/MWh)
BLERL = Base load emissions standard for natural gas-fired combustion turbines with base load ratings greater than 2,110 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h). 360 kg CO2/MWh-gross (800 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 370 kg CO2/MWh-net (820 lb CO2/MWh-net); 43 kg CO2/MWh-gross (100 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 42 kg CO2/MWh-net (97 lb CO2/MWh-net); as applicable
BLERS = Base load emissions standard for natural gas-fired combustion turbines with a base load rating of 260 GJ/h (250 MMBtu/h). 410 kg CO2/MWh-gross (900 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 420 kg CO2/MWh-net (920 lb CO2/MWh-net); 49 kg CO2/MWh-gross (108 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 50 kg CO2/MWh-net (110 lb CO2/MWh-net); as applicable
BLRL = Minimum base load rating of large combustion turbines 2,110 GJ/h (2,000 MMBtu/h)
BLRS = Base load rating of smallest combustion turbine 260 GJ/h (250 MMBtu/h)
BLRA = Base load rating of the actual combustion turbine in GJ/h (or MMBtu/h)
HIERA = Heat input-based emissions rate of the actual fuel burned in the combustion turbine (lb CO2/MMBtu). Not to exceed 69 kg/GJ (160 lb CO2/MMBtu)
HIERNG = Heat input-based emissions rate of natural gas 50 kg/GJ (120 lb CO2/MMBtu)
(ii) For intermediate load combustion turbines:
Equation 3 to Paragraph (a)(3)(ii)
Where:
CO2 emission standard = the emission standard during the compliance period in units of kg/MWh (or lb/MWh)
ILER = Intermediate load emissions rate for natural gas-fired combustion turbines. 520 kg/MWh-gross (1,150 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 530 kg CO2/MWh-net (1,160 lb CO2/MWh-net) or 450 kg/MWh-gross (1,100 lb CO2/MWh-gross) or 460 kg CO2/MWh-net (1,110 lb CO2/MWh-net) as applicable
HIERA = Heat input-based emissions rate of the actual fuel burned in the combustion turbine (lb CO2/MMBtu). Not to exceed 69 kg/GJ (160 lb CO2/MMBtu)
HIERNG = Heat input-based emissions rate of natural gas 50 kg/GJ (120 lb CO2/MMBtu)
(b) At all times you must operate and maintain each affected EGU, including associated equipment and monitors, in a manner consistent with safety and good air pollution control practice. The Administrator will determine if you are using consistent operation and maintenance procedures based on information available to the Administrator that may include, but is not limited to, fuel use records, monitoring results, review of operation and maintenance procedures and records, review of reports required by this subpart, and inspection of the EGU.
(c) Within 30 days after the end of the initial compliance period (i.e., no more than 30 days after the first 12-operating-month compliance period), you must make an initial compliance determination for your affected EGU(s) with respect to the applicable emissions standard in table 1 to this subpart, in accordance with the requirements in this subpart. The first operating month included in the initial 12-operating-month compliance period shall be determined as follows:
(1) For an affected EGU that commences commercial operation (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), the first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580a) after the calendar month in which emissions reporting is required to begin under:
(i) Section 60.5555a(c)(3)(i), for units subject to the Acid Rain Program; or
(ii) Section 60.5555a(c)(3)(ii), for units that are not in the Acid Rain Program.
(2) For a modified or reconstructed EGU that becomes subject to this subpart, the first month of the initial compliance period shall be the first operating month (as defined in § 60.5580a) after the calendar month in which emissions reporting is required to begin under § 60.5555a(c)(3)(iii).
(3) Emissions of CO2 emitted by your affected facility and the output of the affected facility generated when it operated during a system emergency as defined in § 60.5580a are excluded for both applicability and compliance with the relevant standards of performance if you can sufficiently provide the documentation listed in § 60.5560a(i). The relevant standard of performance for affected EGUs that operate during a system emergency depends on the subcategory, as described in paragraphs (c)(3)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) For intermediate and base load combustion turbines that operate during a system emergency, you comply with the standard for low load combustion turbines specified in table 1 to this subpart.
(ii) For modified steam generating units, you must not discharge from the affected EGU any gases that contain CO2 in excess of 230 lb CO2/MMBtu.
Monitoring and Compliance Determination Procedures
§ 60.5535a How do I monitor and collect data to demonstrate compliance?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58997, Sept. 17, 2026.
(a) Combustion turbines qualifying under § 60.5520a(d)(1) are not subject to any requirements in this section other than the requirement to maintain fuel purchase records for permitted fuel(s). If your combustion turbine uses non-uniform fuels as specified under § 60.5520a(d)(2), you must monitor heat input in accordance with paragraph (c)(1) of this section, and you must monitor CO2 emissions in accordance with either paragraph (b), (c)(2), or (c)(5) of this section. For all other affected sources, you must prepare a monitoring plan to quantify the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h), in accordance with the applicable provisions in 40 CFR 75.53(g) and (h). The electronic portion of the monitoring plan must be submitted using the ECMPS Client Tool and must be in place prior to reporting emissions data and/or the results of monitoring system certification tests under this subpart. The monitoring plan must be updated as necessary. Monitoring plan submittals must be made by the Designated Representative (DR), the Alternate DR, or a delegated agent of the DR (see § 60.5555a(d) and (e)).
(b) You must determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions in kg from your affected EGU(s) according to paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section, or, if applicable, as provided in paragraph (c) of this section.
(1) For an affected EGU that combusts coal you must, and for all other affected EGUs you may, install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a CO2 continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS) to directly measure and record hourly average CO2 concentrations in the affected EGU exhaust gases emitted to the atmosphere, and a flow monitoring system to measure hourly average stack gas flow rates, according to 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(i). As an alternative to direct measurement of CO2 concentration, provided that your EGU does not use carbon separation (e.g., carbon capture and storage), you may use data from a certified oxygen (O2) monitor to calculate hourly average CO2 concentrations, in accordance with 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(iii). If you measure CO2 concentration on a dry basis, you must also install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a continuous moisture monitoring system, according to 40 CFR 75.11(b). Alternatively, you may either use an appropriate fuel-specific default moisture value from 40 CFR 75.11(b) or submit a petition to the Administrator under 40 CFR 75.66 for a site-specific default moisture value.
(2) For each continuous monitoring system that you use to determine the CO2 mass emissions, you must meet the applicable certification and quality assurance procedures in 40 CFR 75.20 and appendices A and B to 40 CFR part 75.
(3) You must use only unadjusted exhaust gas volumetric flow rates to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions rate from the affected EGU; you must not apply the bias adjustment factors described in Section 7.6.5 of appendix A to 40 CFR part 75 to the exhaust gas flow rate data.
(4) You must select an appropriate reference method to setup (characterize) the flow monitor and to perform the on-going RATAs, in accordance with 40 CFR part 75. If you use a Type-S pitot tube or a pitot tube assembly for the flow RATAs, you must calibrate the pitot tube or pitot tube assembly; you may not use the 0.84 default Type-S pitot tube coefficient specified in Method 2.
(5) Calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions (kg) as described in paragraphs (b)(5)(i) through (iv) of this section. Perform this calculation only for “valid operating hours”, as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1).
(i) Begin with the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h), obtained either from Equation F-11 in appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a wet basis), or by following the procedure in section 4.2 of appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a dry basis).
(ii) Next, multiply each hourly CO2 mass emission rate by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2.
(iii) Finally, multiply the result from paragraph (b)(5)(ii) of this section by 907.2 to convert it from tons of CO2 to kg. Round off to the nearest kg.
(iv) The hourly CO2 tons/h values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under 40 CFR 75.57(e) and must be reported electronically under 40 CFR 75.64(a)(6). You must use these data to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(c) If your affected EGU exclusively combusts liquid fuel and/or gaseous fuel, as an alternative to complying with paragraph (b) of this section, you may determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions according to paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section. If you use non-uniform fuels as specified in § 60.5520a(d)(2), you may determine CO2 mass emissions during the compliance period according to paragraph (c)(5) of this section.
(1) If you are subject to an output-based standard and you do not install CEMS in accordance with paragraph (b) of this section, you must implement the applicable procedures in appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 to determine hourly EGU heat input rates (MMBtu/h), based on hourly measurements of fuel flow rate and periodic determinations of the gross calorific value (GCV) of each fuel combusted.
(2) For each measured hourly heat input rate, use Equation G-4 in appendix G to 40 CFR part 75 to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/h). You may determine site-specific carbon-based F-factors (Fc) using Equation F-7b in section 3.3.6 of appendix F to 40 CFR part 75, and you may use these Fc values in the emissions calculations instead of using the default Fc values in the Equation G-4 nomenclature.
(3) For each “valid operating hour” (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1), multiply the hourly tons/h CO2 mass emission rate from paragraph (c)(2) of this section by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2. Then, multiply the result by 907.2 to convert from tons of CO2 to kg. Round off to the nearest two significant figures.
(4) The hourly CO2 tons/h values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under 40 CFR 75.57(e) and must be reported electronically under 40 CFR 75.64(a)(6). You must use these data to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(5) If you operate a combustion turbine firing non-uniform fuels, as an alternative to following paragraphs (c)(1) through (4) of this section, you may determine CO2 emissions during the compliance period using one of the following methods:
(i) Units firing fuel gas may determine the heat input during the compliance period following the procedure under § 60.107a(d) and convert this heat input to CO2 emissions using Equation G-4 in appendix G to 40 CFR part 75.
(ii) You may use the procedure for determining CO2 emissions during the compliance period based on the use of the Tier 3 methodology under 40 CFR 98.33(a)(3).
(d) Consistent with § 60.5520a, you must determine the basis of the emissions standard that applies to your affected source in accordance with either paragraph (d)(1) or (2) of this section, as applicable:
(1) If you operate a source subject to an emissions standard established on an output basis (e.g., lb CO2 per gross or net MWh of energy output), you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a sufficient number of watt meters to continuously measure and record the hourly gross electric output or net electric output, as applicable, from the affected EGU(s). These measurements must be performed using 0.2 class electricity metering instrumentation and calibration procedures as specified under ANSI No. C12.20-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). For a combined heat and power (CHP) EGU, as defined in § 60.5580a, you must also install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to continuously (i.e., hour-by-hour) determine and record the total useful thermal output. For process steam applications, you will need to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to continuously determine and record the hourly steam flow rate, temperature, and pressure. Your plan shall ensure that you install, calibrate, maintain, and operate meters to record each component of the determination, hour-by-hour.
(2) If you operate a source subject to an emissions standard established on a heat-input basis (e.g., lb CO2/MMBtu) and your affected source uses non-uniform heating value fuels as delineated under § 60.5520a(d), you must determine the total heat input for each fuel fired during the compliance period in accordance with one of the following procedures:
(i) Appendix D to 40 CFR part 75;
(ii) The procedures for monitoring heat input under § 60.107a(d);
(iii) If you monitor CO2 emissions in accordance with the Tier 3 methodology under 40 CFR 98.33(a)(3), you may convert your CO2 emissions to heat input using the appropriate emission factor in table C-1 of 40 CFR part 98. If your fuel is not listed in table C-1, you must determine a fuel-specific carbon-based F-factor (Fc) in accordance with section 12.3.2 of EPA Method 19 of appendix A-7 to this part, and you must convert your CO2 emissions to heat input using Equation G-4 in appendix G to 40 CFR part 75.
(e) Consistent with § 60.5520a, if two or more affected EGUs serve a common electric generator, you must apportion the combined hourly gross or net energy output to the individual affected EGUs according to the fraction of the total steam load and/or direct mechanical energy contributed by each EGU to the electric generator. Alternatively, if the EGUs are identical, you may apportion the combined hourly gross or net electrical load to the individual EGUs according to the fraction of the total heat input contributed by each EGU. You may also elect to develop, demonstrate, and provide information satisfactory to the Administrator on alternate methods to apportion the gross or net energy output. The Administrator may approve such alternate methods for apportioning the gross or net energy output whenever the demonstration ensures accurate estimation of emissions regulated under this part.
(f) In accordance with §§ 60.13(g) and 60.5520a, if two or more affected EGUs that implement the continuous emission monitoring provisions in paragraph (b) of this section share a common exhaust gas stack you must monitor hourly CO2 mass emissions in accordance with one of the following procedures:
(1) If the EGUs are subject to the same emissions standard in table 1 to this subpart, you may monitor the hourly CO2 mass emissions at the common stack in lieu of monitoring each EGU separately. If you choose this option, the hourly gross or net energy output (electric, thermal, and/or mechanical, as applicable) must be the sum of the hourly loads for the individual affected EGUs and you must express the operating time as “stack operating hours” (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2). If you attain compliance with the applicable emissions standard in § 60.5520a at the common stack, each affected EGU sharing the stack is in compliance; or
(2) As an alternative to the requirements in paragraph (f)(1) of this section, or if the EGUs are subject to different emission standards in table 1 to this subpart, you must either:
(i) Monitor each EGU separately by measuring the hourly CO2 mass emissions prior to mixing in the common stack or
(ii) Apportion the CO2 mass emissions based on the unit's load contribution to the total load associated with the common stack and the appropriate F-factors. You may also elect to develop, demonstrate, and provide information satisfactory to the Administrator on alternate methods to apportion the CO2 emissions. The Administrator may approve such alternate methods for apportioning the CO2 emissions whenever the demonstration ensures accurate estimation of emissions regulated under this part.
(g) In accordance with §§ 60.13(g) and 60.5520a if the exhaust gases from an affected EGU that implements the continuous emission monitoring provisions in paragraph (b) of this section are emitted to the atmosphere through multiple stacks (or if the exhaust gases are routed to a common stack through multiple ducts and you elect to monitor in the ducts), you must monitor the hourly CO2 mass emissions and the “stack operating time” (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2) at each stack or duct separately. In this case, you must determine compliance with the applicable emissions standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart by summing the CO2 mass emissions measured at the individual stacks or ducts and dividing by the total gross or net energy output for the affected EGU.
§ 60.5540a How do I demonstrate compliance with my CO2 emissions standard and determine excess emissions?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58998, Sept. 17, 2026.
(a) In accordance with § 60.5520a, if you are subject to an output-based emission standard or you burn non-uniform fuels as specified in § 60.5520a(d)(2), you must demonstrate compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard in table 1 to this subpart as required in this section. For the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month rolling average compliance period, you must follow the procedures in paragraphs (a)(1) through (8) of this section to calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for your affected EGU(s) in units of the applicable emissions standard (e.g., either kg/MWh or kg/GJ). You must use the hourly CO2 mass emissions calculated under § 60.5535a(b) or (c), as applicable, and either the generating load data from § 60.5535a(d)(1) for output-based calculations or the heat input data from § 60.5535a(d)(2) for heat-input-based calculations. Combustion turbines firing non-uniform fuels that contain CO2 prior to combustion (e.g., blast furnace gas or landfill gas) may sample the fuel stream to determine the quantity of CO2 present in the fuel prior to combustion and exclude this portion of the CO2 mass emissions from compliance determinations.
(1) Each compliance period shall include only “valid operating hours” in the compliance period, i.e., operating hours for which:
(i) “Valid data” (as defined in § 60.5580a) are obtained for all of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions (kg) and, if a heat input-based standard applies, all the parameters used to determine total heat input for the hour are also obtained; and
(ii) The corresponding hourly gross or net energy output value is also valid data (Note: For hours with no useful output, zero is considered to be a valid value).
(2) You must exclude operating hours in which:
(i) The substitute data provisions of part 75 of this chapter are applied for any of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions or, if a heat input-based standard applies, for any parameters used to determine the hourly heat input;
(ii) An exceedance of the full-scale range of a continuous emission monitoring system occurs for any of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions or, if applicable, to determine the hourly heat input; or
(iii) The total gross or net energy output (Pgross/net) or, if applicable, the total heat input is unavailable.
(3) For each compliance period, at least 95 percent of the operating hours in the compliance period must be valid operating hours, as defined in paragraph (a)(1) of this section.
(4) You must calculate the total CO2 mass emissions by summing the valid hourly CO2 mass emissions values from § 60.5535a for all of the valid operating hours in the compliance period.
(5) For each valid operating hour of the compliance period that was used in paragraph (a)(4) of this section to calculate the total CO2 mass emissions, you must determine Pgross/net (the corresponding hourly gross or net energy output in MWh) according to the procedures in paragraphs (a)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section, as appropriate for the type of affected EGU(s). For an operating hour in which a valid CO2 mass emissions value is determined according to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, if there is no gross or net electrical output, but there is mechanical or useful thermal output, you must still determine the gross or net energy output for that hour. In addition, for an operating hour in which a valid CO2 mass emissions value is determined according to paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section, but there is no (i.e., zero) gross electrical, mechanical, or useful thermal output, you must use that hour in the compliance determination. For hours or partial hours where the gross electric output is equal to or less than the auxiliary loads, net electric output shall be counted as zero for this calculation.
(i) Calculate Pgross/net for your affected EGU using the following equation. All terms in the equation must be expressed in units of MWh. To convert each hourly gross or net energy output (consistent with § 60.5520a) value reported under part 75 of this chapter to MWh, multiply by the corresponding EGU or stack operating time.
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)(5)(i)
Where:
Pgross/net = In accordance with § 60.5520a, gross or net energy output of your affected EGU for each valid operating hour (as defined in § 60.5540a(a)(1)) in MWh.
(Pe)ST = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of steam turbines in MWh.
(Pe)CT = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of stationary combustion turbine(s) in MWh.
(Pe)IE = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of your affected EGU's integrated equipment that provides electricity or mechanical energy to the affected EGU or auxiliary equipment in MWh.
(Pe)FW = Electric energy used to power boiler feedwater pumps at steam generating units in MWh. Not applicable to stationary combustion turbines, IGCC EGUs, or EGUs complying with a net energy output based standard.
(Pe)A = Electric energy used for any auxiliary loads in MWh. Not applicable for determining Pgross.
(Pt)PS = Useful thermal output of steam (measured relative to standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP) conditions, as applicable) that is used for applications that do not generate additional electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU. This is calculated using the equation specified in paragraph (a)(5)(ii) of this section in MWh.
(Pt)HR = Non steam useful thermal output (measured relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from heat recovery that is used for applications other than steam generation or performance enhancement of the affected EGU in MWh.
(Pt)IE = Useful thermal output (relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from any integrated equipment is used for applications that do not generate additional steam, electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU in MWh.
TDF = Electric Transmission and Distribution Factor of 0.95 for a combined heat and power affected EGU where at least on an annual basis 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, or 1.0 for all other affected EGUs.
(ii) If applicable to your affected EGU (for example, for combined heat and power), you must calculate (Pt)PS using the following equation:
Equation 2 to Paragraph (a)(5)(ii)
Where:
Qm = Measured useful thermal output flow in kg (lb) for the operating hour.
H = Enthalpy of the useful thermal output at measured temperature and pressure (relative to SATP conditions or the energy in the condensate return line, as applicable) in Joules per kilogram (J/kg) (or Btu/lb).
CF = Conversion factor of 3.6 × 10 9 J/MWh or 3.413 × 10 6 Btu/MWh.
(6) Sources complying with energy output-based standards must calculate the basis (i.e., denominator) of their actual annual emission rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section. Sources complying with heat input based standards must calculate the basis of their actual annual emission rate in accordance with paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this section.
(i) In accordance with § 60.5520a if you are subject to an output-based standard, you must calculate the total gross or net energy output for the affected EGU's compliance period by summing the hourly gross or net energy output values for the affected EGU that you determined under paragraph (a)(5) of this section for all of the valid operating hours in the applicable compliance period.
(ii) If you are subject to a heat input-based standard, you must calculate the total heat input for each fuel fired during the compliance period. The calculation of total heat input for each individual fuel must include all valid operating hours and must also be consistent with any fuel-specific procedures specified within your selected monitoring option under § 60.5535(d)(2).
(7) If you are subject to an output-based standard, you must calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for the affected EGU(s) (kg/MWh) by dividing the total CO2 mass emissions value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(4) of this section by the total gross or net energy output value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section. Round off the result to two significant figures if the calculated value is less than 1,000; round the result to three significant figures if the calculated value is greater than 1,000. If you are subject to a heat input-based standard, you must calculate the CO2 mass emissions rate for the affected EGU(s) (kg/GJ or lb/MMBtu) by dividing the total CO2 mass emissions value calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(4) of this section by the total heat input calculated according to the procedures in paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this section. Round off the result to two significant figures.
(8) You may exclude CO2 mass emissions and output generated from your affected EGU from your calculations for hours during which the affected EGU operated during a system emergency, as defined in § 60.5580a, if you can provide the information listed in § 60.5560a(i). While operating during a system emergency, your compliance determination depends on your subcategory or unit type, as listed in paragraphs (a)(8)(i) through (ii) of this section.
(i) For affected EGUs in the intermediate or base load subcategory, your CO2 emission standard while operating during a system emergency is the applicable emission standard for low load combustion turbines.
(ii) For affected modified steam generating units, your CO2 emission standard while operating during a system emergency is 230 lb CO2/MMBtu.
(b) In accordance with § 60.5520a, to demonstrate compliance with the applicable CO2 emission standard, for the initial and each subsequent 12-operating-month compliance period, the CO2 mass emissions rate for your affected EGU must be determined according to the procedures specified in paragraph (a)(1) through (8) of this section and must be less than or equal to the applicable CO2 emissions standard in table 1 to this subpart, or the emissions standard calculated in accordance with § 60.5525a(a)(2).
(c) If you are the owner or operator of a new or reconstructed stationary combustion turbine operating in the base load subcategory, are installing add-on controls, and are unable to comply with the applicable Phase 2 CO2 emission standard specified in table 1 to this subpart due to circumstances beyond your control, you may request a compliance date extension of no longer than one year beyond the effective date of January 1, 2032, and may only receive an extension once. The extension request must contain a demonstration of necessity that includes the following:
(1) A demonstration that your affected EGU cannot meet its compliance date due to circumstances beyond your control and you have taken all steps reasonably possible to install the controls necessary for compliance by the effective date up to the point of the delay. The demonstration shall:
(i) Identify each affected unit for which you are seeking the compliance extension;
(ii) Identify and describe the controls to be installed at each affected unit to comply with the applicable CO2 emission standard in table 1 to this subpart;
(iii) Describe and demonstrate all progress towards installing the controls and that you have acted consistently with achieving timely compliance, including;
(A) Any and all contract(s) entered into for the installation of the identified controls or an explanation as to why no contract is necessary or obtainable;
(B) Any permit(s) obtained for the installation of the identified controls or, where a required permit has not yet been issued, a copy of the permit application submitted to the permitting authority and a statement from the permit authority identifying its anticipated timeframe for issuance of such permit(s).
(iv) Identify the circumstances that are entirely beyond your control and that necessitate additional time to install the identified controls. This may include:
(A) Information gathered from control technology vendors or engineering firms demonstrating that the necessary controls cannot be installed or started up by the applicable compliance date listed in table 1 to this subpart;
(B) Documentation of any permit delays; or
(C) Documentation of delays in construction or permitting of infrastructure (e.g., CO2 pipelines) that is necessary for implementation of the control technology;
(v) Identify a proposed compliance date no later than one year after the applicable compliance date listed in table 1 to this subpart.
(2) The Administrator is charged with approving or disapproving a compliance date extension request based on his or her written determination that your affected EGU has or has not made each of the necessary demonstrations and provided all of the necessary documentation according to paragraph (c)(1) of this section. The following must be included:
(i) All documentation required as part of this extension must be submitted by you to the Administrator no later than 6 months prior to the applicable effective date for your affected EGU.
(ii) You must notify the Administrator of the compliance date extension request at the time of the submission of the request.
Notification, Reports, and Records
§ 60.5550a What notifications must I submit and when?
(a) You must prepare and submit the notifications specified in §§ 60.7(a)(1) and (3) and 60.19, as applicable to your affected EGU(s) (see table 3 to this subpart).
(b) You must prepare and submit notifications specified in 40 CFR 75.61, as applicable, to your affected EGUs.
§ 60.5555a What reports must I submit and when?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58998, Sept. 17, 2026.
(a) You must prepare and submit reports according to paragraphs (a) through (d) of this section, as applicable.
(1) For affected EGUs that are required by § 60.5525a to conduct initial and on-going compliance determinations on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, you must submit electronic quarterly reports as follows. After you have accumulated the first 12-operating months for the affected EGU, you must submit a report for the calendar quarter that includes the twelfth operating month no later than 30 days after the end of that quarter. Thereafter, you must submit a report for each subsequent calendar quarter, no later than 30 days after the end of the quarter.
(2) In each quarterly report you must include the following information, as applicable:
(i) Each rolling average CO2 mass emissions rate for which the last (twelfth) operating month in a 12-operating-month compliance period falls within the calendar quarter. You must calculate each average CO2 mass emissions rate for the compliance period according to the procedures in § 60.5540a. You must report the dates (month and year) of the first and twelfth operating months in each compliance period for which you performed a CO2 mass emissions rate calculation. If there are no compliance periods that end in the quarter, you must include a statement to that effect;
(ii) If one or more compliance periods end in the quarter, you must identify each operating month in the calendar quarter where your EGU violated the applicable CO2 emission standard;
(iii) If one or more compliance periods end in the quarter and there are no violations for the affected EGU, you must include a statement indicating this in the report;
(iv) The percentage of valid operating hours in each 12-operating-month compliance period described in paragraph (a)(1) of this section (i.e., the total number of valid operating hours (as defined in § 60.5540a(a)(1)) in that period divided by the total number of operating hours in that period, multiplied by 100 percent);
(v) Consistent with § 60.5520a, the CO2 emissions standard (as identified in table 1 or 2 to this subpart) with which your affected EGU must comply; and
(vi) Consistent with § 60.5520a, an indication whether or not the hourly gross or net energy output (Pgross/net) values used in the compliance determinations are based solely upon gross electrical load.
(3) In the final quarterly report of each calendar year, you must include the following:
(i) Consistent with § 60.5520a, gross energy output or net energy output sold to an electric grid, as applicable to the units of your emission standard, over the four quarters of the calendar year; and
(ii) The potential electric output of the EGU.
(b) You must submit all electronic reports required under paragraph (a) of this section using the Emissions Collection and Monitoring Plan System (ECMPS) Client Tool provided by the Clean Air Markets Division in the Office of Atmospheric Programs of EPA.
(c)(1) For affected EGUs under this subpart that are also subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must meet all applicable reporting requirements and submit reports as required under subpart G of part 75 of this chapter.
(2) For affected EGUs under this subpart that are not in the Acid Rain Program, you must also meet the reporting requirements and submit reports as required under subpart G of part 75 of this chapter, to the extent that those requirements and reports provide applicable data for the compliance demonstrations required under this subpart.
(3)(i) For all newly-constructed affected EGUs under this subpart that are also subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must begin submitting the quarterly electronic emissions reports described in paragraph (c)(1) of this section in accordance with 40 CFR 75.64(a), i.e., beginning with data recorded on and after the earlier of:
(A) The date of provisional certification, as defined in 40 CFR 75.20(a)(3); or
(B) 180 days after the date on which the EGU commences commercial operation (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2).
(ii) For newly-constructed affected EGUs under this subpart that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must begin submitting the quarterly electronic reports described in paragraph (c)(2) of this section, beginning with data recorded on and after the date on which reporting is required to begin under 40 CFR 75.64(a), if that date occurs on or after May 23, 2023.
(iii) For reconstructed or modified units, reporting of emissions data shall begin at the date on which the EGU becomes an affected unit under this subpart, provided that the ECMPS Client Tool is able to receive and process net energy output data on that date. Otherwise, emissions data reporting shall be on a gross energy output basis until the date that the Client Tool is first able to receive and process net energy output data.
(4) If any required monitoring system has not been provisionally certified by the applicable date on which emissions data reporting is required to begin under paragraph (c)(3) of this section, the maximum (or in some cases, minimum) potential value for the parameter measured by the monitoring system shall be reported until the required certification testing is successfully completed, in accordance with 40 CFR 75.4(j), 40 CFR 75.37(b), or section 2.4 of appendix D to part 75 of this chapter (as applicable). Operating hours in which CO2 mass emission rates are calculated using maximum potential values are not “valid operating hours” (as defined in § 60.5540(a)(1)), and shall not be used in the compliance determinations under § 60.5540.
(d) For affected EGUs subject to the Acid Rain Program, the reports required under paragraphs (a) and (c)(1) of this section shall be submitted by:
(1) The person appointed as the Designated Representative (DR) under 40 CFR 72.20; or
(2) The person appointed as the Alternate Designated Representative (ADR) under 40 CFR 72.22; or
(3) A person (or persons) authorized by the DR or ADR under 40 CFR 72.26 to make the required submissions.
(e) For affected EGUs that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, the owner or operator shall appoint a DR and (optionally) an ADR to submit the reports required under paragraphs (a) and (c)(2) of this section. The DR and ADR must register with the Clean Air Markets Division (CAMD) Business System. The DR may delegate the authority to make the required submissions to one or more persons.
(f) If your affected EGU captures CO2 to meet the applicable emission standard, you must report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart PP, and either:
(1) Report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs on-site;
(2) Transfer the captured CO2 to a facility that reports in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs off-site; or
(3) Transfer the captured CO2 to a facility that has received an innovative technology waiver from EPA pursuant to paragraph (g) of this section.
(g) Any person may request the Administrator to issue a waiver of the requirement that captured CO2 from an affected EGU be transferred to a facility reporting under 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV. To receive a waiver, the applicant must demonstrate to the Administrator that its technology will store captured CO2 as effectively as geologic sequestration, and that the proposed technology will not cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare, or safety. In making this determination, the Administrator shall consider (among other factors) operating history of the technology, whether the technology will increase emissions or other releases of any pollutant other than CO2, and permanence of the CO2 storage. The Administrator may test the system, or require the applicant to perform any tests considered by the Administrator to be necessary to show the technology's effectiveness, safety, and ability to store captured CO2 without release. The Administrator may grant conditional approval of a technology, with the approval conditioned on monitoring and reporting of operations. The Administrator may also withdraw approval of the waiver on evidence of releases of CO2 or other pollutants. The Administrator will provide notice to the public of any application under this provision and provide public notice of any proposed action on a petition before the Administrator takes final action.
§ 60.5560a What records must I maintain?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58998, Sept. 17, 2026.
(a) You must maintain records of the information you used to demonstrate compliance with this subpart as specified in § 60.7(b) and (f).
(b)(1) For affected EGUs subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must follow the applicable recordkeeping requirements and maintain records as required under subpart F of part 75 of this chapter.
(2) For affected EGUs that are not subject to the Acid Rain Program, you must also follow the recordkeeping requirements and maintain records as required under subpart F of part 75 of this chapter, to the extent that those records provide applicable data for the compliance determinations required under this subpart. Regardless of the prior sentence, at a minimum, the following records must be kept, as applicable to the types of continuous monitoring systems used to demonstrate compliance under this subpart:
(i) Monitoring plan records under 40 CFR 75.53(g) and (h);
(ii) Operating parameter records under 40 CFR 75.57(b)(1) through (4);
(iii) The records under 40 CFR 75.57(c)(2), for stack gas volumetric flow rate;
(iv) The records under 40 CFR 75.57(c)(3) for continuous moisture monitoring systems;
(v) The records under 40 CFR 75.57(e)(1), except for paragraph (e)(1)(x), for CO2 concentration monitoring systems or O2 monitors used to calculate CO2 concentration;
(vi) The records under 40 CFR 75.58(c)(1), specifically paragraphs (c)(1)(i), (ii), and (viii) through (xiv), for oil flow meters;
(vii) The records under 40 CFR 75.58(c)(4), specifically paragraphs (c)(4)(i), (ii), (iv), (v), and (vii) through (xi), for gas flow meters;
(viii) The quality-assurance records under 40 CFR 75.59(a), specifically paragraphs (a)(1) through (12) and (15), for CEMS;
(ix) The quality-assurance records under 40 CFR 75.59(a), specifically paragraphs (b)(1) through (4), for fuel flow meters; and
(x) Records of data acquisition and handling system (DAHS) verification under 40 CFR 75.59(e).
(c) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine the hourly and total CO2 mass emissions (tons) for:
(1) Each operating month (for all affected EGUs); and
(2) Each compliance period, including, each 12-operating-month compliance period.
(d) Consistent with § 60.5520a, you must keep records of the applicable data recorded and calculations performed that you used to determine your affected EGU's gross or net energy output for each operating month.
(e) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine the percentage of valid CO2 mass emission rates in each compliance period.
(f) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to assess compliance with each applicable CO2 mass emissions standard in table 1 or 2 to this subpart.
(g) You must keep records of the calculations you performed to determine any site-specific carbon-based F-factors you used in the emissions calculations (if applicable).
(h) For stationary combustion turbines, you must keep records of electric sales to determine the applicable subcategory.
(i) You must keep the records listed in paragraphs (i)(1) through (3) of this section to demonstrate that your affected facility operated during a system emergency.
(1) Documentation that the system emergency to which the affected EGU was responding was in effect from the entity issuing the alert and documentation of the exact duration of the system emergency;
(2) Documentation from the entity issuing the alert that the system emergency included the affected source/region where the affected facility was located; and
(3) Documentation that the affected facility was instructed to increase output beyond the planned day-ahead or other near-term expected output and/or was asked to remain in operation outside its scheduled dispatch during emergency conditions from a Reliability Coordinator, Balancing Authority, or Independent System Operator/Regional Transmission Organization.
§ 60.5565a In what form and how long must I keep my records?
(a) Your records must be in a form suitable and readily available for expeditious review.
(b) You must maintain each record for 5 years after the date of conclusion of each compliance period.
(c) You must maintain each record on site for at least 2 years after the date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, report, or record, according to § 60.7. Records that are accessible from a central location by a computer or other means that instantly provide access at the site meet this requirement. You may maintain the records off site for the remaining year(s) as required by this subpart.
Other Requirements and Information
§ 60.5570a What parts of the general provisions apply to my affected EGU?
Notwithstanding any other provision of this chapter, certain parts of the general provisions in §§ 60.1 through 60.19, listed in table 3 to this subpart, do not apply to your affected EGU.
§ 60.5575a Who implements and enforces this subpart?
(a) This subpart can be implemented and enforced by the EPA, or a delegated authority such as your state, local, or Tribal agency. If the Administrator has delegated authority to your state, local, or Tribal agency, then that agency (as well as the EPA) has the authority to implement and enforce this subpart. You should contact your EPA Regional Office to find out if this subpart is delegated to your state, local, or Tribal agency.
(b) In delegating implementation and enforcement authority of this subpart to a state, local, or Tribal agency, the Administrator retains the authorities listed in paragraphs (b)(1) through (5) of this section and does not transfer them to the state, local, or Tribal agency. In addition, the EPA retains oversight of this subpart and can take enforcement actions, as appropriate.
(1) Approval of alternatives to the emission standards.
(2) Approval of major alternatives to test methods.
(3) Approval of major alternatives to monitoring.
(4) Approval of major alternatives to recordkeeping and reporting.
(5) Performance test and data reduction waivers under § 60.8(b).
§ 60.5580a What definitions apply to this subpart?
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58998, Sept. 17, 2026.
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein will have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act and in subpart A (general provisions) of this part.
Annual capacity factor means the ratio between the actual heat input to an EGU during a calendar year and the potential heat input to the EGU had it been operated for 8,760 hours during a calendar year at the base load rating. Actual and potential heat input derived from non-combustion sources (e.g., solar thermal) are not included when calculating the annual capacity factor.
Base load combustion turbine means a stationary combustion turbine that supplies more than 40 percent of its potential electric output as net-electric sales on both a 12-operating month and a 3-year rolling average basis.
Base load rating means the maximum amount of heat input (fuel) that an EGU can combust on a steady state basis plus the maximum amount of heat input derived from non-combustion source (e.g., solar thermal), as determined by the physical design and characteristics of the EGU at International Organization for Standardization (ISO) conditions. For a stationary combustion turbine, base load rating includes the heat input from duct burners.
Coal means all solid fuels classified as anthracite, bituminous, subbituminous, or lignite in ASTM D388-99R04 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), coal refuse, and petroleum coke. Synthetic fuels derived from coal for the purpose of creating useful heat, including, but not limited to, solvent-refined coal, gasified coal (not meeting the definition of natural gas), coal-oil mixtures, and coal-water mixtures are included in this definition for the purposes of this subpart.
Coal-fired Electric Generating Unit means a steam generating unit or integrated gasification combined cycle unit that combusts coal on or after the date of modification or at any point after December 31, 2029.
Combined cycle unit means a stationary combustion turbine from which the heat from the turbine exhaust gases is recovered by a heat recovery steam generating unit (HRSG) to generate additional electricity.
Combined heat and power unit or CHP unit, (also known as “cogeneration”) means an electric generating unit that simultaneously produces both electric (or mechanical) and useful thermal output from the same primary energy source.
Design efficiency means the rated overall net efficiency (e.g., electric plus useful thermal output) on a higher heating value basis at the base load rating, at ISO conditions, and at the maximum useful thermal output (e.g., CHP unit with condensing steam turbines would determine the design efficiency at the maximum level of extraction and/or bypass). Design efficiency shall be determined using one of the following methods: ASME PTC 22-2014, ASME PTC 46-1996, ISO 2314:2009 (E) (all incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), or an alternative approved by the Administrator. When determining the design efficiency, the output of integrated equipment and energy storage are included.
Distillate oil means fuel oils that comply with the specifications for fuel oil numbers 1 and 2, as defined in ASTM D396-98 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); diesel fuel oil numbers 1 and 2, as defined in ASTM D975-08a (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); kerosene, as defined in ASTM D3699-08 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); biodiesel as defined in ASTM D6751-11b (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17); or biodiesel blends as defined in ASTM D7467-10 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
Electric Generating units or EGU means any steam generating unit, IGCC unit, or stationary combustion turbine that is subject to this rule (i.e., meets the applicability criteria).
Fossil fuel means natural gas, petroleum, coal, and any form of solid, liquid, or gaseous fuel derived from such material for the purpose of creating useful heat.
Gaseous fuel means any fuel that is present as a gas at ISO conditions and includes, but is not limited to, natural gas, refinery fuel gas, process gas, coke-oven gas, synthetic gas, and gasified coal.
Gross energy output means:
(1) For stationary combustion turbines and IGCC, the gross electric or direct mechanical output from both the EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
(2) For steam generating units, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU(s) (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output;
(3) For combined heat and power facilities, where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps (the electric auxiliary load of boiler feedwater pumps is not applicable to IGCC facilities), that difference divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
Heat recovery steam generating unit (HRSG) means an EGU in which hot exhaust gases from the combustion turbine engine are routed in order to extract heat from the gases and generate useful output. Heat recovery steam generating units can be used with or without duct burners.
Integrated gasification combined cycle facility or IGCC means a combined cycle facility that is designed to burn fuels containing 50 percent (by heat input) or more solid-derived fuel not meeting the definition of natural gas, plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the affected EGU or auxiliary equipment. The Administrator may waive the 50 percent solid-derived fuel requirement during periods of the gasification system construction, startup and commissioning, shutdown, or repair. No solid fuel is directly burned in the EGU during operation.
Intermediate load combustion turbine means a stationary combustion turbine that supplies more than 20 percent but less than or equal to 40 percent of its potential electric output as net-electric sales on both a 12-operating month and a 3-year rolling average basis.
ISO conditions means 288 Kelvin (15 °C, 59 °F), 60 percent relative humidity and 101.3 kilopascals (14.69 psi, 1 atm) pressure.
Liquid fuel means any fuel that is present as a liquid at ISO conditions and includes, but is not limited to, distillate oil and residual oil.
Low load combustion turbine means a stationary combustion turbine that supplies 20 percent or less of its potential electric output as net-electric sales on both a 12-operating month and a 3-year rolling average basis.
Mechanical output means the useful mechanical energy that is not used to operate the affected EGU(s), generate electricity and/or thermal energy, or to enhance the performance of the affected EGU. Mechanical energy measured in horsepower hour should be converted into MWh by multiplying it by 745.7 then dividing by 1,000,000.
Natural gas means a fluid mixture of hydrocarbons (e.g., methane, ethane, or propane), composed of at least 70 percent methane by volume or that has a gross calorific value between 35 and 41 megajoules (MJ) per dry standard cubic meter (950 and 1,100 Btu per dry standard cubic foot), that maintains a gaseous state under ISO conditions. Finally, natural gas does not include the following gaseous fuels: Landfill gas, digester gas, refinery gas, sour gas, blast furnace gas, coal-derived gas, producer gas, coke oven gas, or any gaseous fuel produced in a process which might result in highly variable CO2 content or heating value.
Net-electric output means the amount of gross generation the generator(s) produces (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)), as measured at the generator terminals, less the electricity used to operate the plant (i.e., auxiliary loads); such uses include fuel handling equipment, pumps, fans, pollution control equipment, other electricity needs, and transformer losses as measured at the transmission side of the step up transformer (e.g., the point of sale).
Net-electric sales means:
(1) The gross electric sales to the utility power distribution system minus purchased power; or
(2) For combined heat and power facilities, where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating month basis, the gross electric sales to the utility power distribution system minus the applicable percentage of purchased power of the thermal host facility or facilities. The applicable percentage of purchase power for CHP facilities is determined based on the percentage of the total thermal load of the host facility supplied to the host facility by the CHP facility. For example, if a CHP facility serves 50 percent of a thermal host's thermal demand, the owner/operator of the CHP facility would subtract 50 percent of the thermal host's electric purchased power when calculating net-electric sales.
(3) Electricity supplied to other facilities that produce electricity to offset auxiliary loads are included when calculating net-electric sales.
(4) Electric sales during a system emergency are not included when calculating net-electric sales.
Net energy output means:
(1) The net electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output; or
(2) For combined heat and power facilities, where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, the net electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
Operating month means a calendar month during which any fuel is combusted in the affected EGU at any time.
Petroleum means crude oil or a fuel derived from crude oil, including, but not limited to, distillate and residual oil.
Potential electric output means the base load rating design efficiency at the maximum electric production rate (e.g., CHP units with condensing steam turbines will operate at maximum electric production) multiplied by the base load rating (expressed in MMBtu/h) of the EGU, multiplied by 10 6 Btu/MMBtu, divided by 3,413 Btu/KWh, divided by 1,000 kWh/MWh, and multiplied by 8,760 h/yr (e.g., a 35 percent efficient affected EGU with a 100 MW (341 MMBtu/h) fossil fuel heat input capacity would have a 306,000 MWh 12-month potential electric output capacity).
Solid fuel means any fuel that has a definite shape and volume, has no tendency to flow or disperse under moderate stress, and is not liquid or gaseous at ISO conditions. This includes, but is not limited to, coal, biomass, and pulverized solid fuels.
Standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP) conditions means 298.15 Kelvin (25 °C, 77 °F) and 100.0 kilopascals (14.504 psi, 0.987 atm) pressure. The enthalpy of water at SATP conditions is 50 Btu/lb.
Stationary combustion turbine means all equipment including, but not limited to, the turbine engine, the fuel, air, lubrication and exhaust gas systems, control systems (except emissions control equipment), heat recovery system, fuel compressor, heater, and/or pump, post-combustion emission control technology, and any ancillary components and sub-components comprising any simple cycle stationary combustion turbine, any combined cycle combustion turbine, and any combined heat and power combustion turbine based system plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the combustion turbine engine, (e.g., onsite photovoltaics), integrated energy storage (e.g., onsite batteries), heat recovery system, or auxiliary equipment. Stationary means that the combustion turbine is not self-propelled or intended to be propelled while performing its function. It may, however, be mounted on a vehicle for portability. A stationary combustion turbine that burns any solid fuel directly is considered a steam generating unit.
Steam generating unit means any furnace, boiler, or other device used for combusting fuel and producing steam (nuclear steam generators are not included) plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the affected EGU(s) or auxiliary equipment.
System emergency means periods when the Reliability Coordinator has declared an Energy Emergency Alert level 2 or 3 as defined by NERC Reliability Standard EOP-011-2 or its successor.
Useful thermal output means the thermal energy made available for use in any heating application (e.g., steam delivered to an industrial process for a heating application, including thermal cooling applications) that is not used for electric generation, mechanical output at the affected EGU, to directly enhance the performance of the affected EGU (e.g., economizer output is not useful thermal output, but thermal energy used to reduce fuel moisture is considered useful thermal output), or to supply energy to a pollution control device at the affected EGU. Useful thermal output for affected EGU(s) with no condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) or where measuring the energy in the condensate (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) would not meaningfully impact the emission rate calculation is measured against the energy in the thermal output at SATP conditions. Affected EGU(s) with meaningful energy in the condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU) must measure the energy in the condensate and subtract that energy relative to SATP conditions from the measured thermal output.
Valid data means quality-assured data generated by continuous monitoring systems that are installed, operated, and maintained according to part 75 of this chapter. For CEMS, the initial certification requirements in 40 CFR 75.20 and appendix A to 40 CFR part 75 must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart; for on-going quality assurance, the daily, quarterly, and semiannual/annual test requirements in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 of appendix B to 40 CFR part 75 must be met and the data validation criteria in sections 2.1.5, 2.2.3, and 2.3.2 of appendix B to 40 CFR part 75. For fuel flow meters, the initial certification requirements in section 2.1.5 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart (except for qualifying commercial billing meters under section 2.1.4.2 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75), and for on-going quality assurance, the provisions in section 2.1.6 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 apply (except for qualifying commercial billing meters).
Violation means a specified averaging period over which the CO2 emissions rate is higher than the applicable emissions standard located in table 1 to this subpart.
Table 1 to Subpart TTTTa of Part 60—CO2 Emission Standards for Affected Stationary Combustion Turbines That Commenced Construction or Reconstruction After May 23, 2023 (Gross or Net Energy Output-Based Standards Applicable as Approved by the Administrator)
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58999, Sept. 17, 2026.
| Affected EGU category | CO2 emission standard |
|---|---|
| Base load combustion turbines | For 12-operating month averages beginning before January 2032, 360 to 560 kg CO2/MWh (800 to 1,250 lb CO2/MWh) of gross energy output; or 370 to 570 kg CO2/MWh (820 to 1,280 lb CO2/MWh) of net energy output as determined by the procedures in § 60.5525a. |
| For 12-operating month averages beginning after December 2031, 43 to 67 kg CO2/MWh (100 to 150 lb CO2/MWh) of gross energy output; or 42 to 64 kg CO2/MWh (97 to 139 lb CO2/MWh) of net energy output as determined by the procedures in § 60.5525a. | |
| Intermediate load combustion turbines | 530 to 710 kg CO2/MWh (1,170 to 1,560 lb CO2/MWh) of gross energy output; or 540 to 700 kg CO2/MWh (1,190 to 1,590 lb CO2/MWh) of net energy output as determined by the procedures in § 60.5525a. |
| Low load combustion turbines | Between 50 to 69 kg CO2/GJ (120 to 160 lb CO2/MMBtu) of heat input as determined by the procedures in § 60.5525a. |
Table 2 to Subpart TTTTa of Part 60—CO2 Emission Standards for Affected Steam Generating Units or IGCC That Commenced Modification After May 23, 2023
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58999, Sept. 17, 2026.
| Affected EGU | CO2 Emission standard |
|---|---|
| Modified coal-fired steam generating unit | A unit-specific emissions standard determined by an 88.4 percent reduction in the unit's best historical annual CO2 emission rate (from 2002 to the date of the modification). |
Table 3 to Subpart TTTTa of Part 60—Applicability of Subpart A of Part 60 (General Provisions) to Subpart TTTTa
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 58999, Sept. 17, 2026.
| General provisions citation | Subject of citation | Applies to subpart TTTTa | Explanation |
|---|---|---|---|
| § 60.1 | Applicability | Yes. | |
| § 60.2 | Definitions | Yes | Additional terms defined in § 60.5580a. |
| § 60.3 | Units and Abbreviations | Yes. | |
| § 60.4 | Address | Yes | Does not apply to information reported electronically through ECMPS. Duplicate submittals are not required. |
| § 60.5 | Determination of construction or modification | Yes. | |
| § 60.6 | Review of plans | Yes. | |
| § 60.7 | Notification and Recordkeeping | Yes | Only the requirements to submit the notifications in § 60.7(a)(1) and (3) and to keep records of malfunctions in § 60.7(b), if applicable. |
| § 60.8(a) | Performance tests | No. | |
| § 60.8(b) | Performance test method alternatives | Yes | Administrator can approve alternate methods. |
| § 60.8(c)-(f) | Conducting performance tests | No. | |
| § 60.9 | Availability of Information | Yes. | |
| § 60.10 | State authority | Yes. | |
| § 60.11 | Compliance with standards and maintenance requirements | No. | |
| § 60.12 | Circumvention | Yes. | |
| § 60.13 (a)-(h), (j) | Monitoring requirements | No | All monitoring is done according to part 75. |
| § 60.13 (i) | Monitoring requirements | Yes | Administrator can approve alternative monitoring procedures or requirements. |
| § 60.14 | Modification | Yes (steam generating units and IGCC facilities) No (stationary combustion turbines). | |
| § 60.15 | Reconstruction | Yes. | |
| § 60.16 | Priority list | No. | |
| § 60.17 | Incorporations by reference | Yes. | |
| § 60.18 | General control device requirements | No. | |
| § 60.19 | General notification and reporting requirements | Yes | Does not apply to notifications under § 75.61 or to information reported through ECMPS. |
Subpart UUUUa [Reserved]
Subpart UUUUb—Emission Guidelines for Greenhouse Gas Emissions for Electric Utility Generating Units
89 FR 40047, May 9, 2024, unless otherwise noted.
Link to an amendment published at 91 FR 59000, Sept. 17, 2026.
Introduction
§ 60.5700b What is the purpose of this subpart?
This subpart establishes emission guidelines and approval criteria for State plans that establish standards of performance limiting greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions from an affected steam generating unit. An affected steam generating unit shall, for the purposes of this subpart, be referred to as an affected EGU. These emission guidelines are developed in accordance with section 111(d) of the Clean Air Act and subpart Ba of this part. State plans under the emission guidelines in this subpart are also subject to the requirements of subpart Ba. To the extent any requirement of this subpart is inconsistent with the requirements of subparts A or Ba of this part, the requirements of this subpart shall apply.
§ 60.5705b Which pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
(a) The pollutants regulated by this subpart are greenhouse gases (GHG). The emission guidelines for greenhouse gases established in this subpart are expressed as carbon dioxide (CO2) emission performance rates.
(b) PSD and Title V Thresholds for Greenhouse Gases.
(1) For the purposes of 40 CFR 51.166(b)(49)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the State plan, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48) and in any State Implementation Plan (SIP) approved by the EPA that is interpreted to incorporate, or specifically incorporates, 40 CFR 51.166(b)(48).
(2) For the purposes of 40 CFR 52.21(b)(50)(ii), with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the State plan, the “pollutant that is subject to the standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is subject to regulation under the Act as defined in 40 CFR 52.21(b)(49).
(3) For the purposes of 40 CFR 70.2, with respect to greenhouse gas emissions from facilities regulated in the State plan, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 70.2.
(4) For the purposes of 40 CFR 71.2, with respect to GHG emissions from facilities regulated in the State plan, the “pollutant that is subject to any standard promulgated under section 111 of the Act” shall be considered to be the pollutant that otherwise is “subject to regulation” as defined in 40 CFR 71.2.
§ 60.5710b Am I affected by this subpart?
(a) If you are the Governor of a State in the contiguous United States with one or more affected EGUs that must be addressed in your State plan as indicated in § 60.5845b, you must submit a State plan to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) that implements the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. If you are the Governor of a State in the contiguous United States with no affected EGUs, or if all EGUs in your State are excluded from being affected EGUs per § 60.5850b, you must submit a negative declaration letter in place of the State plan.
(b) If you are a coal-fired steam generating unit that has demonstrated that it plans to permanently cease operation prior to January 1, 2032, consistent with § 60.5740b(a)(9)(ii), and that would be an affected EGU under these emissions guidelines but for § 60.5850b(k), you must comply with § 60.5876b.
§ 60.5715b What is the review and approval process for my State plan?
(a) The EPA will determine the completeness of your State plan submission according to § 60.27a(g). The timeline for completeness determinations is provided in § 60.27a(g)(1).
(b) The EPA will act on your State plan submission according to § 60.27a. The Administrator will have 12 months after the date the final State plan or State plan revision (as allowed under § 60.5790b) is found to be complete to fully approve, partially approve, conditionally approve, partially disapprove, and/or fully disapprove such State plan or revision or each portion thereof.
§ 60.5720b What if I do not submit a State plan or my State plan is not approvable?
(a) If you do not submit an approvable State plan the EPA will develop a Federal plan for your State according to § 60.27a. The Federal plan will implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. Owners and operators of affected EGUs not covered by an approved State plan must comply with a Federal plan implemented by the EPA for the State.
(b) After a Federal plan has been implemented in your State, it will be withdrawn when your State submits, and the EPA approves, a State plan replacing the relevant portion(s) of the Federal plan.
§ 60.5725b In lieu of a State plan submittal, are there other acceptable option(s) for a State to meet its CAA section 111(d) obligations?
A State may meet its CAA section 111(d) obligations only by submitting a State plan or a negative declaration letter (if applicable).
§ 60.5730b Is there an approval process for a negative declaration letter?
No. The EPA has no formal review process for negative declaration letters. Once your negative declaration letter has been received, consistent with the electronic submission requirements in § 60.5875b, the EPA will place a copy in the public docket and publish a notice in the Federal Register. If, at a later date, an affected EGU for which construction commenced on or before January 8, 2014, reconstruction on or before June 18, 2014, or modification on or before May 23, 2023, is found in your State, you will be found to have failed to submit a State plan as required, and a Federal plan implementing the emission guidelines contained in this subpart, when promulgated by the EPA, will apply to that affected EGU until you submit, and the EPA approves, a State plan.
State Plan Requirements
§ 60.5740b What must I include in my federally enforceable State plan?
(a) You must include the components described in paragraphs (a)(1) through (13) of this section in your State plan submittal. The final State plan must meet the requirements and include the information required under § 60.5775b and must also meet any administrative and technical completeness criteria listed in § 60.27a(g)(2) and (3) that are not otherwise specifically enumerated here.
(1) Identification of affected EGUs. Consistent with § 60.25a(a), you must identify the affected EGUs covered by your State plan and all affected EGUs in your State that meet the applicability criteria in § 60.5845b. You must also identify the subcategory into which you have classified each affected EGU. States must subcategorize affected EGUs into one of the following subcategories:
(i) Long-term coal-fired steam generating units, consisting of coal-fired steam generating units that are not medium-term coal-fired steam generating units and do not plan to permanently cease operation before January 1, 2039.
(ii) Medium-term coal-fired steam generating units, consisting of coal-fired steam generating units that have elected to commit to permanently cease operations by a date after December 31, 2031, and before January 1, 2039.
(iii) Base load oil-fired steam generating units, consisting of oil-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor greater than or equal to 45 percent.
(iv) Intermediate load oil-fired steam generating units, consisting of oil-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor greater than or equal to 8 percent and less than 45 percent.
(v) Low load oil-fired steam generating units, consisting of oil-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor less than 8 percent.
(vi) Base load natural gas-fired steam generating units, consisting of natural gas-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor greater than or equal to 45 percent.
(vii) Intermediate load natural gas-fired steam generating units, consisting of natural gas-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor greater than or equal to 8 percent and less than 45 percent.
(viii) Low load natural gas-fired steam generating units, consisting of natural gas-fired steam generating units with an annual capacity factor less than 8 percent.
(2) Inventory of Data from Affected EGUs. You must include an inventory of the following data from the affected EGUs:
(i) The nameplate capacity of the affected EGU, as defined in § 60.5880b.
(ii) The base load rating of the affected EGU, as defined in § 60.5880b.
(iii) The data within the continuous 5-year period immediately prior to May 9, 2024 including:
(A) The sum of the CO2 emissions during each quarter in the 5-year period.
(B) For affected EGUs in all subcategories except the low load natural gas- and oil-fired subcategories, the sum of the gross energy output during each quarter in the 5-year period; for affected EGUs in the low load natural gas- and oil-fired subcategories, the sum of the heat input during each quarter in the 5-year period.
(C) The heat input for each fuel type combusted during each quarter in the 5-year period.
(D) The start date and end date of the most representative continuous 8-quarter period used to determine the baseline of emission performance under § 60.5775b(d), the sum of the CO2 mass emissions during that period, the sum of the gross energy output or, for affected EGUs in the low load natural gas-fired subcategory or low load oil-fired subcategory, the sum of the heat input during that period, and sum of the heat input for each fuel type combusted during that period.
(3) Standards of Performance. You must include all standards of performance for each affected EGU according to § 60.5775b. Standards of performance must be established at a level of performance that does not exceed the level calculated through the use of the methods described in § 60.5775b(b), unless a State establishes a standard of performance pursuant to § 60.5775b(e).
(4) Requirements related to Subcategory Applicability. (i) You must include the following enforceable requirements to establish an affected EGU's applicability for each of the following subcategories:
(A) For medium-term coal-fired steam generating units, you must include a requirement to permanently cease operations by a date after December 31, 2031, and before January 1, 2039.
(B) For steam generating units that meet the definition of natural gas- or oil-fired, and that either retain the capability to fire coal after May 9, 2024, that fired any coal during the 5-year period prior to that date, or that will fire any coal after that date and before January 1, 2030, you must include a requirement to remove the capability to fire coal before January 1, 2030.
(C) For each affected EGU, you must also estimate coal, oil, and natural gas usage by heat input for the first 3 calendar years after January 1, 2030.
(D) For affected EGUs that plan to permanently cease operation, you must include a requirement that each such affected EGU comply with applicable State and Federal requirements for permanently ceasing operation, including removal from its respective State's air emissions inventory and amending or revoking all applicable permits to reflect the permanent shutdown status of the EGU.
(5) Increments of Progress. You must include in your State plan legally enforceable increments of progress as required elements for affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit and medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategories.
(i) For affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory using carbon capture to meet their applicable standard of performance and affected EGUs in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory using natural gas co-firing to meet their applicable standard of performance, State plans must assign calendar-date deadlines to each of the increments of progress described in subsection (a)(5)(i) and meet the website reporting obligations of subsection (a)(5)(iii):
(A) Submittal of a final control plan for the affected EGU to the appropriate air pollution control agency. The final control plan must be consistent with the subcategory declaration for each affected EGU in the State plan.
(1) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, the final control plan must include supporting analysis for the affected EGU's control strategy, including a feasibility and/or front-end engineering and design (FEED) study.
(2) For each affected unit in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, the final control plan must include supporting analysis for the affected EGU's control strategy, including the design basis for modifications at the facility, the anticipated timeline to achieve full compliance, and the benchmarks the facility anticipates along the way.
(B) Completion of awarding of contracts. The owner or operator of an affected EGU can demonstrate compliance with this increment of progress by submitting sufficient evidence that the appropriate contracts have been awarded.
(1) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, awarding of contracts for emission control systems or for process modifications, or issuance of orders for the purchase of component parts to accomplish emission control or process modification.
(2) For each affected unit in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, awarding of contracts for boiler modifications, or issuance of orders for the purchase of component parts to accomplish boiler modifications.
(C) Initiation of on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change.
(1) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, initiation of on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change required to achieve 90 percent carbon capture on an annual basis.
(2) For each affected unit in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, initiation of on-site construction or installation of any boiler modifications necessary to enable natural gas co-firing at a level of 40 percent on an annual average basis.
(D) Completion of on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change.
(1) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, completion of on-site construction or installation of emission control equipment or process change required to achieve 90 percent carbon capture on an annual basis.
(2) For each affected unit in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, completion of on-site construction of any boiler modifications necessary to enable natural gas co-firing at a level of 40 percent on an annual average basis.
(E) Commencement of permitting actions related to pipeline construction. The owner or operator of an affected EGU must demonstrate that they have commenced permitting actions by a date specified in the State plan. Evidence in support of the demonstration must include pipeline planning and design documentation that informed the permitting process, a complete list of pipeline-related permitting applications, including the nature of the permit sought and the authority to which each permit application was submitted, an attestation that the list of pipeline-related permits is complete with respect to the authorizations required to operate each affected unit at full compliance with the standard of performance, and a timeline to complete all pipeline permitting activities.
(1) For affected units in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, this increment of progress applies to each affected EGU that adopts CCS to meet the standard of performance and ensure timely completion of CCS-related pipeline infrastructure.
(2) For affected units in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, this increment of progress applies to each affected EGU that adopts natural gas co-firing to meet the standard of performance and ensures timely completion of any pipeline infrastructure needed to transport natural gas to designated facilities.
(F) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, a report identifying the geographic location where CO2 will be injected underground, how the CO2 will be transported from the capture location to the storage location, and the regulatory requirements associated with the sequestration activities, as well as an anticipated timeline for completing related permitting activities.
(G) Compliance with the standard of performance as follows:
(1) For each affected unit in the medium-term coal-fired subcategory, by January 1, 2030.
(2) For each affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating subcategory, by January 1, 2032.
(ii) For any affected unit in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory that will meet its applicable standard of performance using a control other than CCS or in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory that will meet its applicable standard of performance using a control other than natural gas co-firing:
(A) The State plan must include appropriate increments of progress consistent with 40 CFR 60.21a(h) specific to the affected unit's control strategy.
(1) The increment of progress corresponding to 40 CFR 60.21a(h)(1) must be assigned the earliest calendar date among the increments.
(2) The increment of progress corresponding to 40 CFR 60.21a(h)(5) must be assigned calendar dates as follows: for affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired steam generating subcategory, no later than January 1, 2032; and for affected EGUs in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating subcategory, no later than January 1, 2030.
(iii) The owner or operator of the affected EGU must post within 30 business days of the State plan submittal a description of the activities or actions that constitute the increments of progress and the schedule for achieving the increments of progress on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website required by § 60.5740b(a)(10). As the calendar dates for each increment of progress occurs, the owner or operator of the affected EGU must post within 30 business days any documentation necessary to demonstrate that each increment of progress has been met on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website required by § 60.5740b(a)(10).
(iv) You must include in your State plan a requirement that the owner or operator of each affected EGU shall report to the State regulatory agency any deviation from any federally enforceable State plan increment of progress within 30 business days after the owner or operator of the affected EGU knew or should have known of the event. This report must explain the cause or causes of the deviation and describe all measures taken or to be taken by the owner or operator of the EGU to cure the reported deviation and to prevent such deviations in the future, including the timeframes in which the owner or operator intends to cure the deviation. You must also include in your State plan a requirement that the owner or operator of the affected EGU to post a report of any deviation from any federally enforceable increment of progress on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website required by § 60.5740b(a)(10) within 30 business days.
(6) Reporting Obligations and Milestones for Affected EGUs that Have Demonstrated They Plan to Permanently Cease Operations. You must include in your State plan legally enforceable reporting obligations and milestones for affected EGUs in the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit (§ 60.5740b(a)(1)(ii)) subcategory, and for affected EGUs that invoke RULOF based on a unit's remaining useful life according to paragraphs (a)(6)(i) through (v) of this section:
(i) Five years before the date the affected EGU permanently ceases operations (either the date used to determine the applicable subcategory under these emission guidelines or the date used to invoke RULOF based on remaining useful life) or 60 days after State plan submission, whichever is later, the owner or operator of the affected EGU must submit an Initial Milestone Report to the applicable air pollution control agency that includes the information in paragraphs (a)(6)(i)(A) through (D) of this section:
(A) A summary of the process steps required for the affected EGU to permanently cease operations by the date included in the State plan, including the approximate timing and duration of each step and any notification requirements associated with deactivation of the unit.
(B) A list of key milestones that will be used to assess whether each process step has been met, and calendar day deadlines for each milestone. These milestones must include at least the initial notice to the relevant reliability authority or authorities of an EGU's deactivation date and submittal of an official retirement filing with the EGU's relevant reliability authority or authorities.
(C) An analysis of how the process steps, milestones, and associated timelines included in the Milestone Report compare to the timelines of similar EGUs within the State that have permanently ceased operations within the 10 years prior to the date of promulgation of these emission guidelines.
(D) Supporting regulatory documents, which include those listed in paragraphs (a)(6)(i)(D)(1) through (3) of this section:
(1) Any correspondence and official filings with the relevant Regional Transmission Organization (RTO), Independent System Operator, Balancing Authority, Public Utilities Commission (PUC), or other applicable authority;
(2) Any deactivation-related reliability assessments conducted by the RTO or Independent System Operator;
(3) Any filings with the United States Securities and Exchange Commission or notices to investors, including but not limited to, those listed in paragraphs (a)(6)(i)(D)(3)(i) through (v) of this section.
(i) References in forms 10-K and 10-Q, in which the plans for the EGU are mentioned;
(ii) Any integrated resource plans and PUC orders approving the EGU's deactivation;
(iii) Any reliability analyses developed by the RTO, Independent System Operator, or relevant reliability authority in response to the EGU's deactivation notification;
(iv) Any notification from a relevant reliability authority that the EGU may be needed for reliability purposes notwithstanding the EGU's intent to deactivate; and
(v) Any notification to or from an RTO, Independent System Operator, or Balancing Authority altering the timing of deactivation for the EGU.
(ii) For each of the remaining years prior to the date by which an affected EGU has committed to permanently cease operations that is included in the State plan, the owner or operator of the affected EGU must submit an annual Milestone Status Report that includes the information in paragraphs (a)(6)(ii)(A) and (B) of this section:
(A) Progress toward meeting all milestones identified in the Initial Milestone Report, described in § 60.5740b(a)(6)(i); and
(B) Supporting regulatory documents and relevant SEC filings, including correspondence and official filings with the relevant RTO, Independent System Operator, Balancing Authority, PUC, or other applicable authority to demonstrate compliance with or progress toward all milestones.
(iii) No later than six months from the date the affected EGU permanently ceases operations (either the date used to determine the applicable subcategory under these emission guidelines or the date used to invoke RULOF based on remaining useful life), the owner or operator of the affected EGU must submit a Final Milestone Status Report. This report must document any actions that the EGU has taken subsequent to ceasing operation to ensure that such cessation is permanent, including any regulatory filings with applicable authorities or decommissioning plans.
(iv) The owner or operator of the affected EGU must post their Initial Milestone Report, as described in paragraph (a)(6)(i) of this section; annual Milestone Status Reports, as described in paragraph (a)(6)(ii) of this section; and Final Milestone Status Report, as described in paragraph (a)(6)(iii) of this section; including the schedule for achieving milestones and any documentation necessary to demonstrate that milestones have been achieved, on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website required by paragraph (a)(10) of this section within 30 business days of being filed.
(v) You must include in your State plan a requirement that the owner or operator of each affected EGU shall report to the State regulatory agency any deviation from any federally enforceable State plan reporting milestone within 30 business days after the owner or operator of the affected EGU knew or should have known of the event. This report must explain the cause or causes of the deviation and describe all measures taken or to be taken by the owner or operator of the EGU to cure the reported deviation and to prevent such deviations in the future, including the timeframes in which the owner or operator intends to cure the deviation. You must also include in your State plan a requirement that the owner or operator of the affected EGU to post a report of any deviation from any federally enforceable reporting milestone on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website required by § 60.5740b(a)(10) within 30 business days.
(7) Identification of applicable monitoring, reporting, and recordkeeping requirements for each affected EGU. You must include in your State plan all applicable monitoring, reporting and recordkeeping requirements, including initial and ongoing quality assurance and quality control procedures, for each affected EGU and the requirements must be consistent with or no less stringent than the requirements specified in § 60.5860b.
(8) State reporting. You must include in your State plan a description of the process, contents, and schedule for State reporting to the EPA about State plan implementation and progress.
(9) Specific requirements for existing coal-fired steam generating EGUs. Your State plan must include the requirements in paragraphs (a)(9)(i) through (iii) of this section specifically for existing coal-fired steam generating EGUs:
(i) Your State plan must require that any existing coal-fired steam-generating EGU shall operate only subject to a standard of performance pursuant to § 60.5775b or under an exemption of applicability provided under § 60.5850b (including any extension of the date by which an EGU has committed to cease operating pursuant to the reliability assurance mechanism, described in paragraph (a)(13) of this section).
(ii) You must include a list of the coal-fired steam generating EGUs that are existing sources at the time of State plan submission and that plan to permanently cease operation before January 1, 2032, and the calendar dates by which they have committed to cease operating.
(iii) The State plan must provide that an existing coal-fired steam generating EGU operating past the date listed in the State plan pursuant to paragraph (a)(9)(ii) of this section is in violation of that State plan, except to the extent the existing coal-fired steam generating EGU has received an extension of its date for ceasing operation pursuant to the reliability assurance mechanism, described in paragraph (a)(13) of this section.
(10) Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs Websites. You must require in your State plan that owners or operators of affected EGUs establish a publicly accessible “Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs Website” and that they post relevant documents to this website. You must require in your State plan that owners or operators of affected EGUs post their subcategory designations and compliance schedules as well as any emissions data and other information needed to demonstrate compliance with a standard of performance to this website in a timely manner. This information includes, but is not limited to, emissions data and other information relevant to determining compliance with applicable standards of performance, information relevant to the designation and determination of compliance with increments of progress and reporting obligations including milestones for affected EGUs that plan to permanently cease operations, and any extension requests made and granted pursuant to the compliance date extension mechanism or the reliability assurance mechanism. Data should be available in a readily downloadable format. In addition, you must establish a website that displays the links to these websites for all affected EGUs in your State plan.
(11) Compliance Date Extension. You may include in your State plan provisions allowing for a compliance date extension for owners or operators of affected EGU(s) that are installing add-on controls and that are unable to meet the applicable standard of performance by the compliance date specified in § 60.5740b(a)(4)(i) due to circumstances beyond the owner or operator's control. Such provisions may allow an owner or operator of an affected EGU to request an extension of no longer than one year from the specified compliance date and may only allow the owner or operator to receive an extension once. The optional State plan mechanism must provide that an extension request contains a demonstration of necessity that includes the following:
(i) A demonstration that the owner or operator of the affected EGU cannot meet its compliance date due to circumstances beyond the owner or operator's control and that the owner or operator has met all relevant increments of progress and otherwise taken all steps reasonably possible to install the controls necessary for compliance by the specified compliance date up to the point of the delay. The demonstration shall:
(A) Identify each affected unit for which the owner or operator is seeking the compliance extension;
(B) Identify and describe the controls to be installed at each affected unit to comply with the applicable standard of performance pursuant to § 60.5775b;
(C) Describe and demonstrate all progress towards installing the controls and that the owner or operator has itself acted consistent with achieving timely compliance, including:
(1) Any and all contract(s) entered into for the installation of the identified controls or an explanation as to why no contract is necessary or obtainable; and
(2) Any permit(s) obtained for the installation of the identified controls or, where a required permit has not yet been issued, a copy of the permit application submitted to the permitting authority and a statement from the permit authority identifying its anticipated timeframe for issuance of such permit(s).
(D) Identify the circumstances that are entirely beyond the owner or operator's control and that necessitate additional time to install the identified controls. This may include:
(1) Information gathered from control technology vendors or engineering firms demonstrating that the necessary controls cannot be installed or started up by the applicable compliance date listed in § 60.5740b(a)(4)(i);
(2) Documentation of any permit delays; or
(3) Documentation of delays in construction or permitting of infrastructure (e.g., CO2 pipelines) that is necessary for implementation of the control technology;
(E) Identify a proposed compliance date no later than one year after the applicable compliance date listed in § 60.5740b(a)(4)(i) and, if necessary, updated calendar dates for the increments of progress that have not yet been met.
(ii) The State air pollution control agency is charged with approving or disapproving a compliance date extension request based on its written determination that the affected EGU has or has not made each of the necessary demonstrations and provided all of the necessary documentation according to paragraphs (a)(11)(i)(A) through (E) of this section. The following provisions for approval must be included in the mechanism:
(A) All documentation required as part of this extension must be submitted by the owner or operator of the affected EGU to the State air pollution control agency no later than 6 months prior to the applicable compliance date for that affected EGU.
(B) The owner or operator of the affected EGU must notify the relevant EPA Regional Administrator of their compliance date extension request at the time of the submission of the request.
(C) The owner or operator of the affected EGU must post their application for the compliance date extension request to the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website, described in § 60.5740b(a)(10), when they submit the request to the State air pollution control agency.
(D) The owner or operator of the affected EGU must post the State's determination on the compliance date extension request to the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website, described in § 60.5740b(a)(10), upon receipt of the determination and, if the request is approved, update the information on the website related to the compliance date and increments of progress dates within 30 days of the receipt of the State's approval.
(12) Short-Term Reliability Mechanism. You may include in your State plan provisions for a short-term reliability mechanism for affected EGUs in your State that operate during a system emergency, as defined in § 60.5880b. Such a mechanism must include the components listed in paragraphs (a)(12)(i) through (vi) of this section.
(i) A requirement that the short-term reliability mechanism is available only during system emergencies as defined in § 60.5880b. The State plan must identify the entity or entities that are authorized to issue system emergencies for the State.
(ii) A provision that, for the duration of a documented system emergency, an impacted affected EGU may comply with an emission limitation corresponding to its baseline emission performance rate, as calculated under § 60.5775b(d), in lieu of its otherwise applicable standard of performance. The State plan must clearly identify the alternative emission limitation that corresponds to the affected EGU's baseline emission rate and include it as an enforceable emission limitation that may be applied only during periods of system emergency.
(iii) A requirement that an affected EGU impacted by the system emergency and complying with an alternative emission limitation must provide documentation, as part of its compliance demonstration, of the system emergency according to (a)(12)(iii)(A) through (D) of this section and that it was impacted by that system emergency.
(A) Documentation that the system emergency was in effect from the entity issuing the system emergency and documentation of the exact duration of the event;
(B) Documentation from the entity issuing the system emergency that the system emergency included the affected source/region where the unit was located;
(C) Documentation that the source was instructed to increase output beyond the planned day-ahead or other near-term expected output and/or was asked to remain in operation outside of its scheduled dispatch during emergency conditions from a Reliability Coordinator, Balancing Authority, or Independent System Operator/RTO; and
(D) Data collected during the event including the sum of the CO2 emissions, the sum of the gross energy output, and the resulting CO2 emissions performance rate.
(iv) A requirement to document the hours an affected EGU operated under a system emergency and the enforceable emission limitation, whether the applicable standard of performance or the alternative emission limitation, under which that affected EGU operated during those hours.
(v) A provision that, for the purpose of demonstrating compliance with the applicable standard of performance, the affected EGU would comply with its baseline emissions rate as calculated under § 60.5775b(d) in lieu of its otherwise applicable standard of performance for the hours of operation that correspond to the duration of the event.
(vi) The inclusion of provisions defining the short-term reliability mechanism must be part of the public comment process as part of the State plan's development.
(13) Reliability Assurance Mechanism. You may include provisions for a reliability assurance mechanism in your State plan. If included, such provisions would allow for one extension, not to exceed 12-months of the date by which an affected EGU has committed to permanently cease operations based on a demonstration consistent with this paragraph (a)(13) that operation of the affected EGU is necessary for electric grid reliability.
(i) The State plan must require that the reliability assurance mechanism would only be appliable to the following EGUs which, for the purpose of this paragraph (a)(13), are collectively referred to as “eligible EGUs”:
(A) Coal-fired steam generating units that are exempt from these emission guidelines pursuant to § 60.5850b(k),
(B) Affected EGUs in the medium-term coal-fired steam-generating subcategory that have enforceable commitments to permanently cease operation before January 1, 2039, in the State plan, and
(C) Affected EGUs that have enforceable dates to permanently cease operation included in the State plan pursuant to § 60.24a(g).
(ii)The date from which an extension would run is the date included in the State plan by which an eligible EGU has committed to permanently cease operation.
(iii) The State plan must provide that an extension is only available to owners or operators of affected EGUs that have satisfied all applicable increments of progress and reporting obligations and milestones in paragraphs (a)(5) and (6) of this section. This includes requiring that the owner or operator of an affected EGU has posted all information relevant to such increments of progress and reporting obligations and milestones on the Carbon Pollution Standards for EGUs website, described in § 60.5740b(a)(10).
(iv) The State plan must provide that any applicable standard of performance for an affected EGU must remain in place during the duration of an extension provided under this mechanism.
(v) The State plan may provide for requests for an extension of up to 12 months without a State plan revision.
(A) For an extension of 6 months or less, the owner or operator of the eligible EGU requesting the extension must submit the information in paragraph (a)(13)(vi) to the applicable EPA Regional Administrator to review and approve or disapprove the extension request.
(B) For an extension of more than 6 months and up to 12 months, the owner or operator of the eligible EGU requesting the extension must submit the information in paragraph (a)(13)(vii) to the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (through a process and at an office of the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission's designation) and to the applicable EPA Regional Administrator to review and approve or disapprove the extension request.
(vi) The State plan must require that to apply for an extension for 6 months or less, described in paragraph (a)(13)(v)(A) of this section, the owner or operator of an eligible EGU must submit a complete written application that includes the information listed in paragraphs (a)(13)(vi)(A) through (D) of this section no less than 30 days prior to the cease operation date, but no earlier than 12 months prior to the cease operation date.
(A) An analysis of the reliability risk that clearly demonstrates that the eligible EGU is critical to maintaining electric reliability. The analysis must include a projection of the length of time that the EGU is expected to be reliability-critical and the length of the requested extension must be no longer than this period or 6 months, whichever is shorter. In order to show an approvable reliability need, the analysis must clearly demonstrate that an eligible EGU ceasing operation by the date listed in the State plan would cause one or more of the conditions listed in paragraphs (a)(13)(vi)(A)(1) or (2) of this section. An eligible EGU that has received a Reliability Must Run designation, or equivalent from a Reliability Coordinator or Balancing Authority, would fulfill those conditions.
(1) Result in noncompliance with at least one of the mandatory reliability standards approved by FERC; or
(2) Would cause the loss of load expectation to increase beyond the level targeted by regional system planners as part of their established procedures for that particular region; specifically, this requires a clear demonstration that the eligible EGU would be needed to maintain the targeted level of resource adequacy.
(B) Certification from the relevant reliability planning authority that the claims of reliability risk are accurate and that the identified reliability problem both exists and requires the specific relief requested. This certification must be accompanied by a written analysis by the relevant planning authority consistent with paragraph (a)(13)(vi)(A) of this section, confirming the asserted reliability risk if the eligible EGU was not in operation. The information from the relevant reliability planning authority must also include any related system-wide or regional analysis and a substantiation of the length of time that the eligible EGU is expected to be reliability critical.
(C) Copies of any written comments from third parties regarding the extension.
(D) Demonstration from the owner or operator of the eligible EGU, grid operator, and other relevant entities of a plan, including appropriate actions to bring on new capacity or transmission, to resolve the underlying reliability issue is leading to the need to employ this reliability assurance mechanism, including the steps and timeframes for implementing measures to rectify the underlying reliability issue.
(E) Any other information requested by the applicable EPA Regional Administrator or the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission.
(vii) The State plan must require that to apply for an extension longer than 6 months but up to 12 months, described in paragraph (a)(13)(v)(B) of this section, the owner or operator of an eligible EGU must submit a complete written application that includes the information listed in (a)(13)(vi)(A) through (E) of this section, except that the period of time under (a)(13)(vi)(A) would be 12 months. For requests for extensions longer than 6 months, this application must be submitted to the EPA Regional Administrator no less than 45 days prior to the date for ceasing operation listed in the State plan, but no earlier than 12 months prior to that date.
(viii) The State plan must provide that extensions will only be granted for the period of time that is substantiated by the reliability need and the submitted analysis and documentation, and shall not exceed 12 months in total.
(ix) The State plan must provide that the reliability assurance mechanism shall not be used more than once to extend an eligible EGU's planned cease operation date.
(x) The EPA Regional Administrator may reject the application if the submission is incomplete with respect to the requirements listed in paragraphs (a)(13)(vi)(A) through (E) of this section or if the submission does not adequately support the asserted reliability risk or the period of time for which the eligible EGU is anticipated to be reliability critical.
(b) [Reserved]
§ 60.5775b What standards of performance must I include in my State plan?
(a) For each affected EGU, your State plan must include the standard of performance that applies for the affected EGU. A standard of performance for an affected EGU may take the following forms:
(1) A rate-based standard of performance for an individual affected EGU that does not exceed the level calculated through the use of the methods described in § 60.5775b(c) and (d).
(2) A standard of performance in an alternate form, which may apply for affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory or the medium-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, as provided for in § 60.5775b(e).
(b) Standard(s) of performance for affected EGUs included under your State plan must be demonstrated to be quantifiable, verifiable, non-duplicative, permanent, and enforceable with respect to each affected EGU. The State plan submittal must include the methods by which each standard of performance meets each of the following requirements:
(1) An affected EGU's standard of performance is quantifiable if it can be reliably measured in a manner that can be replicated.
(2) An affected EGU's standard of performance is verifiable if adequate monitoring, recordkeeping and reporting requirements are in place to enable the State and the Administrator to independently evaluate, measure, and verify compliance with the standard of performance.
(3) An affected EGU's standard of performance is non-duplicative with respect to a State plan if it is not already incorporated as an standard of performance in the State plan.
(4) An affected EGU's standard of performance is permanent if the standard of performance must be met continuously unless it is replaced by another standard of performance in an approved State plan revision.
(5) An affected EGU's standard of performance is enforceable if:
(i) A technically accurate limitation or requirement, and the time period for the limitation or requirement, are specified;
(ii) Compliance requirements are clearly defined;
(iii) The affected EGUs are responsible for compliance and liable for violations identified;
(iv) Each compliance activity or measure is enforceable as a practical matter, as defined by 40 CFR 49.167; and
(v) The Administrator, the State, and third parties maintain the ability to enforce against violations (including if an affected EGU does not meet its standard of performance based on its emissions) and secure appropriate corrective actions: in the case of the Administrator, pursuant to CAA sections 113(a)-(h); in the case of a State, pursuant to its State plan, State law or CAA section 304, as applicable; and in the case of third parties, pursuant to CAA section 304.
(c) Methodology for establishing presumptively approvable standards of performance, for affected EGUs in each subcategory.
(1) Long-term coal-fired steam generating units
(i) BSER is CCS with 90 percent capture of CO2.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is 88.4 percent reduction in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an emission rate limit defined by an 88.4 percent reduction in annual emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross) from the unit-specific baseline.
(2) Medium-term coal-fired steam generating units
(i) BSER is natural gas co-firing at 40 percent of the heat input to the unit.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is a 16 percent reduction in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an emission rate limit defined by a 16 percent reduction in annual emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross) from the unit-specific baseline.
(iv) For units in this subcategory that have an amount of co-firing that is reflected in the baseline operation, States must account for such preexisting co-firing in adjusting the degree of emission limitation (e.g., for an EGU co-fires natural gas at a level of 10 percent of the total annual heat input during the applicable 8-quarter baseline period, the corresponding degree of emission limitation would be adjusted to 12 percent to reflect the preexisting level of natural gas co-firing).
(3) Base load oil-fired steam generating units.
(i) BSER is routine methods of operation and maintenance.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is a 0 percent increase in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 1,400 lb CO2/MWh-gross.
(4) Intermediate load oil-fired steam generating units.
(i) BSER is routine methods of operation and maintenance.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is a 0 percent increase in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 1,600 lb CO2/MWh-gross.
(5) Low load oil-fired steam generating units.
(i) BSER is uniform fuels.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is 170 lb CO2/MMBtu.
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 170 lb CO2/MMBtu.
(6) Base load natural gas-fired steam generating units.
(i) BSER is routine methods of operation and maintenance.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is a 0 percent increase in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 1,400 lb CO2/MWh-gross.
(7) Intermediate load natural gas-fired steam generating units.
(i) BSER is routine methods of operation and maintenance.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is a 0 percent increase in emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 1,600 lb CO2/MWh-gross.
(8) Low load natural gas-fired steam generating.
(i) BSER is uniform fuels.
(ii) Degree of emission limitation is 130 lb CO2/MMBtu.
(iii) Presumptively approvable standard of performance is an annual emission rate limit of 130 lb CO2/MMBtu.
(d) Methodology for establishing the unit-specific baseline of emission performance.
(1) A State shall use the CO2 mass emissions and corresponding electricity generation or, for affected EGUs in the low load oil- or natural gas-fired subcategory, heat input data for a given affected EGU from the most representative continuous 8-quarter period from 40 CFR part 75 reporting within the 5-year period immediately prior to May 9, 2024.
(2) For the continuous 8 quarters of data, a State shall divide the total CO2 emissions (in the form of pounds) over that continuous time period by either the total gross electricity generation (in the form of MWh) or, for affected EGUs in the low load oil- or natural gas-fired subcategory, total heat input (in the form of MMBtu) over that same time period to calculate baseline CO2 emission performance in lb CO2 per MWh or lb CO2 per MMBtu.
(e) Your State plan may include a standard of performance in an alternate form that differs from the presumptively approvable standard of performance specified in § 60.5775b(a)(1), as follows:
(1) An aggregate rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that applies for a group of affected EGUs that share the same owner or operator, as calculated on a gross generation weighted average basis, provided the standard of performance meets the requirements of paragraph (f) of this section.
(2) A mass-based standard of performance in the form of an annual limit on allowable mass CO2 emissions for an individual affected EGU, provided the standard of performance meets the requirements of paragraph (g) of this section.
(3) A rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) implemented through a rate-based emission trading program, such that an affected EGU must meet the specified lb CO2/MWh-gross rate that applies for the affected EGU, and where an affected EGU may surrender compliance instruments denoted in 1 short ton of CO2 to adjust its reported lb CO2/MWh-gross rate for the purpose of demonstrating compliance, provided the standard of performance meets the requirements of paragraph (h) of this section.
(4) A mass-based standard of performance in the form of an annual CO2 budget implemented through a mass-based CO2 emission trading program, where an affected EGU must surrender CO2 allowances in an amount equal to its reported mass CO2 emissions, provided the standard of performance meets the requirements of paragraph (i) of this section.
(f) Where your State plan includes a standard of performance in the form of an aggregate rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that applies for a group of affected EGUs that share the same owner or operator, as calculated on a gross generation weighted average basis, your State plan must include:
(1) The presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section, to each of the affected EGUs that form the group.
(2) Documentation of any assumptions underlying the calculation of the aggregate rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross).
(3) The process for calculating the aggregate gross generation weighted average emission rate (lb CO2/MWh-gross) at the end of each compliance period, based on the reported emissions (lb CO2) and utilization (MWh-gross) of each of the affected EGUs that form the group.
(4) Measures to implement and enforce the annual aggregate rate-based standard of performance, including the basis for determining owner or operator compliance with the aggregate standard of performance and provisions to address any changes to owners or operators in the course of implementation.
(5) A demonstration of how the application of the aggregate rate-based standard of performance will achieve equivalent or better emission reduction as would be achieved through the application of a rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(g) Where your State plan includes a standard of performance in the form of an annual limit on allowable mass CO2 emissions for an individual affected EGU, your State plan must include:
(1) The presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply to the affected EGU under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(2) The utilization level used to calculate the mass CO2 limit, by multiplying the assumed utilization level (MWh-gross) by the presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross), including the underlying data used for the calculation and documentation of any assumptions underlying this calculation.
(3) Measures to implement and enforce the annual limit on mass CO2 emissions, including provisions that address assurance of achievement of equivalent emission performance.
(4) A demonstration of how the application of the mass CO2 limit for the affected EGU will achieve equivalent or better emission reduction as would be achieved through the application of a rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(5) The backstop rate-based emission rate requirement (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that will also be applied to the affected EGU on an annual basis.
(6) For affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired steam generating unit subcategory, in lieu of paragraphs (g)(2), (4), and (5) of this section, you may include a presumptively approvable mass CO2 limit based on the product of the rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) under paragraph (a)(1) of this section multiplied by a level of utilization (MWh-gross) corresponding to an annual capacity factor of 80 percent for the individual affected EGU with a backstop rate-based emission rate requirement equivalent to a reduction in baseline emission performance of 80 percent on an annual calendar-year basis.
(h) Where your State plan includes a standard of performance in the form of a rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) implemented through a rate-based emission trading program, your State plan must include:
(1) The presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that applies to each of the affected EGUs participating in the rate-based emission trading program under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(2) Measures to implement and enforce the rate-based emission trading program, including the basis for awarding compliance instruments (denoted in 1 ton of CO2) to an affected EGU that performs better on an annual basis than its rate-based standard of performance, and the process for demonstration of compliance that includes the surrender of such compliance instruments by an affected EGU that exceeds its rate-based standard of performance.
(3) A demonstration of how the use of the rate-based emission trading program will achieve equivalent or better emission reduction as would be achieved through the application of a rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply pursuant to paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(i) Where your State plan includes a mass-based standard of performance implemented through a mass-based CO2 emission trading program, where an affected EGU must surrender CO2 allowances in an amount equal to its reported mass CO2 emissions, your State plan must include:
(1) The presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply to each affected EGU participating in the trading program under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(2) The calculation of the mass CO2 budget contribution for each participating affected EGU, determined by multiplying the assumed utilization level (MWh-gross) of the affected EGU by its presumptively approvable rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross), including the underlying data used for the calculation and documentation of any assumptions underlying this calculation.
(3) Measures to implement and enforce the annual budget of the mass-based CO2 emission trading program, including provisions that address assurance of achievement of equivalent emission performance.
(4) A demonstration of how the application of the CO2 emission budget for the group of participating affected EGUs will achieve equivalent or better emission performance as would be achieved through the application of a rate-based standard of performance (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that would apply to each participating affected EGU under paragraph (a)(1) of this section, and as determined in accordance with paragraphs (c) and (d) of this section.
(5) The backstop rate-based emission rate requirement (lb CO2/MWh-gross) that will also be applied to each participating affected EGU on an annual basis.
(j) In order to use the provisions of § 60.24a(e) through (h) to apply a less stringent standard of performance or longer compliance schedule to an affected EGU based on consideration of electric grid reliability, including resource adequacy, under these emission guidelines, a State must provide the following with its State plan submission:
(1) An analysis of the reliability risk clearly demonstrating that the particular affected EGU is critical to maintaining electric reliability such that requiring it to comply with the applicable requirements under paragraph (c) of this section or § 60.5780b would trigger non-compliance with at least one of the mandatory reliability standards approved by the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission or would cause the loss of load expectation to increase beyond the level targeted by regional system planners as part of their established procedures for that particular region; specifically, a clear demonstration is required that the particular affected EGU would be needed to maintain the targeted level of resource adequacy. The analysis must also include a projection of the period of time for which the particular affected EGU is expected to be reliability critical and substantiate the basis for applying a less stringent standard of performance or longer compliance schedule consistent with 40 CFR 60.24a(e).
(2) An analysis by the relevant reliability planning authority that corroborates the asserted reliability risk identified in the analysis under paragraph (j)(1) of this section and confirms that requiring the particular affected EGU to comply with its applicable requirements under paragraph (c) of this section or § 60.5780b would trigger non-compliance with at least one of the mandatory reliability standards approved by the Federal Energy Regulatory Commission or would cause the loss of load expectation to increase beyond the level targeted by regional system planners as part of their established procedures for that particular region, and also confirms the period of time for which the EGU is projected to be reliability critical.
(3) A certification from the relevant reliability planning authority that the claims of reliability risk are accurate and that the identified reliability problem both exists and requires the specific relief requested.
§ 60.5780b What compliance dates and compliance periods must I include in my State plan?
(a) The State plan must include the following compliance dates:
(1) For affected EGUs in the long-term coal-fired subcategory, the State plan must require compliance with the applicable standards of performance starting no later than January 1, 2032, unless the State has applied a later compliance date pursuant to § 60.24a(e) through (h).
(2) For affected EGUs in the medium-term coal-fired subcategory, the base load oil-fired subcategory, the intermediate load oil-fired steam generating subcategory, the low load oil-fired subcategory, the base load natural gas-fired subcategory, the intermediate load natural gas-fired subcategory, and the low load natural gas-fired subcategory, the State plan must require compliance with the applicable standards of performance starting no later than January 1, 2030, unless State has applied a later compliance date pursuant to § 60.24a(e) through (h).
(b) The State plan must require affected EGUs to achieve compliance with their applicable standards of performance for each compliance period as defined in § 60.5880b.
§ 60.5785b What are the timing requirements for submitting my State plan?
(a) You must submit a State plan or a negative declaration letter with the information required under § 60.5740b by May 11, 2026.
(b) You must submit all information required under paragraph (a) of this section according to the electronic reporting requirements in § 60.5875b.
§ 60.5790b What is the procedure for revising my State plan?
EPA-approved State plans can be revised only with approval by the Administrator. The Administrator will approve a State plan revision if it is satisfactory with respect to the applicable requirements of this subpart and all applicable requirements of subpart Ba of this part. If one (or more) of State plan elements in § 60.5740b require revision, the State must submit a State plan revision pursuant to § 60.28a.
§ 60.5795b Commitment to review emission guidelines for coal-fired affected EGUs
EPA will review and, if appropriate, revise these emission guidelines as they apply to coal-fired steam generating affected EGUs by January 1, 2041. Notwithstanding this commitment, EPA need not review these emission guidelines if the Administrator determines that such review is not appropriate in light of readily available information on their continued appropriateness.
Applicability of State Plans to Affected EGUs
§ 60.5840b Does this subpart directly affect EGU owners or operators in my State?
(a) This subpart does not directly affect EGU owners or operators in your State, except as provided in § 60.5710b(b). However, affected EGU owners or operators must comply with the State plan that a State develops to implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart.
(b) If a State does not submit a State plan to implement and enforce the standards of performance contained in this subpart by May 11, 2026, or the EPA disapproves State plan, the EPA will implement and enforce a Federal plan, as provided in § 60.5720b, applicable to each affected EGU within the State.
§ 60.5845b What affected EGUs must I address in my State plan?
(a) The EGUs that must be addressed by your State plan are:
(1) Any affected EGUs that were in operation or had commenced construction on or before January 8, 2014;
(2) Coal-fired steam generating units that commenced a modification on or before May 23, 2023.
(b) An affected EGU is a steam generating unit that meets the relevant applicability conditions specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (2) of this section, as applicable, except as provided in § 60.5850b.
(1) Serves a generator capable of selling greater than 25 MW to a utility power distribution system; and
(2) Has a base load rating (i.e., design heat input capacity) greater than 260 GJ/hr (250 MMBtu/hr) heat input of fossil fuel (either alone or in combination with any other fuel).
§ 60.5850b What EGUs are excluded from being affected EGUs?
EGUs that are excluded from being affected EGUs are:
(a) New or reconstructed steam generating units that are subject to subpart TTTT of this part as a result of commencing construction after the subpart TTTT applicability date;
(b) Modified natural gas- or oil-fired steam generating units that are subject to subpart TTTT of this part as a result of commencing modification after the subpart TTTT applicability date;
(c) Modified coal-fired steam generating units that are subject to subpart TTTTa of this part as a result of commencing modification after the subpart TTTTa applicability date;
(d) EGUs subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting net-electric sales to one-third or less of their potential electric output or 219,000 MWh or less on an annual basis and annual net-electric sales have never exceeded one-third or less of their potential electric output or 219,000 MWh;
(e) Non-fossil fuel units (i.e., units that are capable of deriving at least 50 percent of heat input from non-fossil fuel at the base load rating) that are subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting fossil fuel use to 10 percent or less of the annual capacity factor;
(f) CHP units that are subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting annual net-electric sales to no more than either 219,000 MWh or the product of the design efficiency and the potential electric output, whichever is greater;
(g) Units that serve a generator along with other EGUs, where the effective generation capacity (determined based on a prorated output of the base load rating of each EGU) is 25 MW or less;
(h) Municipal waste combustor units subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart Eb;
(i) Commercial or industrial solid waste incineration units that are subject to 40 CFR part 60, subpart CCCC; or
(j) EGUs that derive greater than 50 percent of the heat input from an industrial process that does not produce any electrical or mechanical output or useful thermal output that is used outside the affected EGU.
(k) Existing coal-fired steam generating units that have demonstrated that they plan to permanently cease operations before January 1, 2032, pursuant to § 60.5740b(a)(9)(ii).
Recordkeeping and Reporting Requirements
§ 60.5860b What applicable monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements do I need to include in my State plan for affected EGUs?
(a) Your State plan must include monitoring for affected EGUs that is no less stringent than what is described in (a)(1) through (9) of this section.
(1) The owner or operator of an affected EGU (or group of affected EGUs that share a monitored common stack) that is required to meet standards of performance must prepare a monitoring plan in accordance with the applicable provisions in 40 CFR 75.53(g) and (h), unless such a plan is already in place under another program that requires CO2 mass emissions to be monitored and reported according to 40 CFR part 75.
(2) For rate-based standards of performance, only “valid operating hours,”, i.e., full or partial unit (or stack) operating hours for which:
(i) “Valid data” (as defined in § 60.5880b) are obtained for all of the parameters used to determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions (lbs). For the purposes of this subpart, substitute data recorded under part 75 of this chapter are not considered to be valid data; data obtained from flow monitoring bias adjustments are not considered to be valid data; and data provided or not provided from monitoring instruments that have not met the required frequency for relative accuracy audit testing are not considered to be valid data and
(ii) The corresponding hourly gross energy output value is also valid data (Note: For operating hours with no useful output, zero is considered to be a valid value).
(3) For rate-based standards of performance, the owner or operator of an affected EGU must measure and report the hourly CO2 mass emissions (lbs) from each affected unit using the procedures in paragraphs (a)(3)(i) through (vi) of this section, except as otherwise provided in paragraph (a)(4) of this section.
(i) The owner or operator of an affected EGU must install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a CO2 continuous emissions monitoring system (CEMS) to directly measure and record CO2 concentrations in the affected EGU exhaust gases emitted to the atmosphere and an exhaust gas flow rate monitoring system according to 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(i). As an alternative to direct measurement of CO2 concentration, provided that the affected EGU does not use carbon separation (e.g., carbon capture and storage (CCS)), the owner or operator of an affected EGU may use data from a certified oxygen (O2) monitor to calculate hourly average CO2 concentrations, in accordance with 40 CFR 75.10(a)(3)(iii). However, when an O2 monitor is used this way, it only quantifies the combustion CO2; therefore, if the EGU is equipped with emission controls that produce non-combustion CO2 (e.g., from sorbent injection), this additional CO2 must be accounted for, in accordance with section 3 of appendix G to part 75 of this chapter. If CO2 concentration is measured on a dry basis, the owner or operator of the affected EGU must also install, certify, operate, maintain, and calibrate a continuous moisture monitoring system, according to 40 CFR 75.11(b). Alternatively, the owner or operator of an affected EGU may either use an appropriate fuel-specific default moisture value from 40 CFR 75.11(b) or submit a petition to the Administrator under 40 CFR 75.66 for a site-specific default moisture value.
(ii) For each “valid operating hour” (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section), calculate the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/hr), either from Equation F-11 in appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a wet basis), or by following the procedure in section 4.2 of appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 (if CO2 concentration is measured on a dry basis).
(iii) Next, multiply each hourly CO2 mass emission rate by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2. Multiply the result by 2,000 lbs/ton to convert it to lbs.
(iv) The hourly CO2 tons/hr values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under 40 CFR 75.57(e) and must be reported electronically under 40 CFR 75.64(a)(6), if required by a State plan. The owner or operator must use these data, or equivalent data, to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(v) Sum all of the hourly CO2 mass emissions values from paragraph (a)(3)(ii) of this section.
(vi) For each continuous monitoring system used to determine the CO2 mass emissions from an affected EGU, the monitoring system must meet the applicable certification and quality assurance procedures in 40 CFR 75.20 and appendices A and B to 40 CFR part.
(4) The owner or operator of an affected EGU that exclusively combusts liquid fuel and/or gaseous fuel may, as an alternative to complying with paragraph (a)(3) of this section, determine the hourly CO2 mass emissions according to paragraphs (a)(4)(i) through (a)(4)(vi) of this section.
(i) Implement the applicable procedures in appendix D to part 75 of this chapter to determine hourly EGU heat input rates (MMBtu/hr), based on hourly measurements of fuel flow rate and periodic determinations of the gross calorific value (GCV) of each fuel combusted. The fuel flow meter(s) used to measure the hourly fuel flow rates must meet the applicable certification and quality-assurance requirements in sections 2.1.5 and 2.1.6 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 (except for qualifying commercial billing meters). The fuel GCV must be determined in accordance with section 2.2 or 2.3 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75, as applicable.
(ii) For each measured hourly heat input rate, use Equation G-4 in appendix G to 40 CFR part 75 to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emission rate (tons/hr).
(iii) For each “valid operating hour” (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section), multiply the hourly tons/hr CO2 mass emission rate from paragraph (a)(4)(ii) of this section by the EGU or stack operating time in hours (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2), to convert it to tons of CO2. Then, multiply the result by 2,000 lbs/ton to convert it to lbs.
(iv) The hourly CO2 tons/hr values and EGU (or stack) operating times used to calculate CO2 mass emissions are required to be recorded under 40 CFR 75.57(e) and must be reported electronically under 40 CFR 75.64(a)(6), if required by a State plan. You must use these data, or equivalent data, to calculate the hourly CO2 mass emissions.
(v) Sum all of the hourly CO2 mass emissions values (lb) from paragraph (a)(4)(iii) of this section.
(vi) The owner or operator of an affected EGU may determine site-specific carbon-based F-factors (Fc) using Equation F-7b in section 3.3.6 of appendix F to 40 CFR part 75 and may use these Fc values in the emissions calculations instead of using the default Fc values in the Equation G-4 nomenclature.
(5) For rate-based standards, the owner or operator of an affected EGU (or group of affected units that share a monitored common stack) must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a sufficient number of watt meters to continuously measure and record on an hourly basis gross electric output. Measurements must be performed using 0.2 accuracy class electricity metering instrumentation and calibration procedures as specified under ANSI No. C12.20-2010 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). Further, the owner or operator of an affected EGU that is a combined heat and power facility must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate equipment to continuously measure and record on an hourly basis useful thermal output and, if applicable, mechanical output, which are used with gross electric output to determine gross energy output. The owner or operator must use the following procedures to calculate gross energy output, as appropriate for the type of affected EGU(s).
(i) Determine Pgross/net the hourly gross or net energy output in MWh. For rate-based standards, perform this calculation only for valid operating hours (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section). For mass-based standards, perform this calculation for all unit (or stack) operating hours, i.e., full or partial hours in which any fuel is combusted.
(ii) If there is no net electrical output, but there is mechanical or useful thermal output, either for a particular valid operating hour (for rate-based applications), or for a particular operating hour (for mass-based applications), the owner or operator of the affected EGU must still determine the net energy output for that hour.
(iii) For rate-based applications, if there is no (i.e., zero) gross electrical, mechanical, or useful thermal output for a particular valid operating hour, that hour must be used in the compliance determination. For hours or partial hours where the gross electric output is equal to or less than the auxiliary loads, net electric output shall be counted as zero for this calculation.
(iv) Calculate Pgross/net for your affected EGU (or group of affected EGUs that share a monitored common stack) using the following equation. All terms in the equation must be expressed in units of MWh. To convert each hourly gross or net energy output value reported under 40 CFR part 75 to MWh, multiply by the corresponding EGU or stack operating time.
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)(5)(iv)
Where:
PGROSS/NET = Gross or net energy output of your affected EGU for each valid operating hour (as defined in 60.5860b(a)(2)) in MWh.
(PE)ST = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of steam turbines in MWh.
(PE)CT = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of stationary combustion turbine(s) in MWh.
(PE)IE = Electric energy output plus mechanical energy output (if any) of your affected egu's integrated equipment that provides electricity or mechanical energy to the affected EGU or auxiliary equipment in MWh.
(PE)A = Electric energy used for any auxiliary loads in MWh.
(PT)PS = Useful thermal output of steam (measured relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) that is used for applications that do not generate additional electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU. This is calculated using the equation specified in paragraph (a)(5)(V) of this section in MWh.
(PT)HR = Non-steam useful thermal output (measured relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from heat recovery that is used for applications other than steam generation or performance enhancement of the affected EGU in MWh.
(PT)IE = Useful thermal output (relative to SATP conditions, as applicable) from any integrated equipment is used for applications that do not generate additional steam, electricity, produce mechanical energy output, or enhance the performance of the affected EGU in MWh.
TDF = Electric transmission and distribution factor of 0.95 for a combined heat and power affected egu where at least on an annual basis 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consist of useful thermal output on a 12-operating month rolling average basis, or 1.0 for all other affected EGUs.
(v) If applicable to your affected EGU (for example, for combined heat and power), you must calculate (Pt)PS using the following equation:
Equation 2 to Paragraph (a)(5)(v)
Where:
QM = Measured steam flow in kilograms (KG) (or pounds (LBS)) for the operating hour.
H = Enthalpy of the steam at measured temperature and pressure (relative to SATP conditions or the energy in the condensate return line, as applicable) in joules per kilogram (J/KG) (or BTU/LB).
CF = Conversion factor of 3.6 × 10 9 J/MWH or 3.413 × 10 6 BTU/MWh.
(vi) For rate-based standards, sum all of the values of Pgross/net for the valid operating hours (as defined in paragraph (a)(2) of this section). Then, divide the total CO2 mass emissions for the valid operating hours from paragraph (a)(3)(v) or (a)(4)(v) of this section, as applicable, by the sum of the Pgross/net values for the valid operating hours to determine the CO2 emissions rate (lb/gross or net MWh).
(6) In accordance with § 60.13(g), if two or more affected EGUs implementing the continuous emissions monitoring provisions in paragraph (a)(3) of this section share a common exhaust gas stack and are subject to the same emissions standard, the owner or operator may monitor the hourly CO2 mass emissions at the common stack in lieu of monitoring each EGU separately. If an owner or operator of an affected EGU chooses this option, the hourly gross or net electric output for the common stack must be the sum of the hourly gross or net electric output of the individual affected EGUs and the operating time must be expressed as “stack operating hours” (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2).
(7) In accordance with § 60.13(g), if the exhaust gases from an affected EGU implementing the continuous emissions monitoring provisions in paragraph (a)(3) of this section are emitted to the atmosphere through multiple stacks (or if the exhaust gases are routed to a common stack through multiple ducts and you elect to monitor in the ducts), the hourly CO2 mass emissions and the “stack operating time” (as defined in 40 CFR 72.2) at each stack or duct must be monitored separately. In this case, the owner or operator of an affected EGU must determine compliance with an applicable emissions standard by summing the CO2 mass emissions measured at the individual stacks or ducts and dividing by the gross or net energy output for the affected EGU.
(8) Consistent with § 60.5775b, if two or more affected EGUs serve a common electric generator, you must apportion the combined hourly gross or net energy output to the individual affected EGUs according to the fraction of the total steam load contributed by each EGU. Alternatively, if the EGUs are identical, you may apportion the combined hourly gross or net electrical load to the individual EGUs according to the fraction of the total heat input contributed by each EGU.
(9) The owner or operator of an affected EGU must measure and report monthly fuel usage for each affected source subject to standards of performance with the information in paragraphs (a)(9)(i) through (iii) of this section:
(i) The calendar month during which the fuel was used;
(ii) Each type of fuel used during the calendar month of the compliance period; and
(iii) Quantity of each type of fuel combusted in each calendar month in the compliance period with units of measure.
(b) Your State plan must require the owner or operator of each affected EGU covered by your State plan to maintain the records, for at least 5 years following the date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, report, or record.
(1) The owner or operator of an affected EGU must maintain each record on site for at least 2 years after the date of each occurrence, measurement, maintenance, corrective action, report, or record, whichever is latest, according to § 60.7. The owner or operator of an affected EGU may maintain the records off site and electronically for the remaining year(s).
(2) The owner or operator of an affected EGU must keep all of the following records, in a form suitable and readily available for expeditious review:
(i) All documents, data files, and calculations and methods used to demonstrate compliance with an affected EGU's standard of performance under § 60.5775b.
(ii) Copies of all reports submitted to the State under paragraph (b) of this section.
(iii) Data that are required to be recorded by 40 CFR part 75 subpart F.
(c) Your State plan must require the owner or operator of an affected EGU covered by your State plan to include in a report submitted to you the information in paragraphs (c)(1) through (3) of this section.
(1) Owners or operators of an affected EGU must include in the report all hourly CO2 emissions, for each affected EGU (or group of affected EGUs that share a monitored common stack).
(2) For rate-based standards, each report must include:
(i) The hourly CO2 mass emission rate values (tons/hr) and unit (or stack) operating times, (as monitored and reported according to part 75 of this chapter), for each valid operating hour;
(ii) The gross or net electric output and the gross or net energy output (Pgross/net) values for each valid operating hour;
(iii) The calculated CO2 mass emissions (lb) for each valid operating hour;
(iv) The sum of the hourly gross or net energy output values and the sum of the hourly CO2 mass emissions values, for all of the valid operating hours; and
(v) The calculated CO2 mass emission rate (lbs/gross or net MWh).
(3) For each affected EGU the report must also include the applicable standard of performance and demonstration that it met the standard of performance. An owner or operator must also include in the report the affected EGU's calculated emission performance as a CO2 emission rate in units of the standard of performance.
(d) The owner or operator of an affected EGU must follow any additional requirements for monitoring, recordkeeping and reporting in a State plan that are required under § 60.5740b if applicable.
(e) If an affected EGU captures CO2 to meet the applicable standard of performance, the owner or operator must report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98 subpart PP and either:
(1) Report in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs on-site;
(2) Transfer the captured CO2 to a facility that reports in accordance with the requirements of 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV, if injection occurs off-site; or
(3) Transfer the captured CO2 to a facility that has received an innovative technology waiver from the EPA pursuant to paragraph (f) of this section.
(f) Any person may request the Administrator to issue a waiver of the requirement that captured CO2 from an affected EGU be transferred to a facility reporting under 40 CFR part 98, subpart RR, or subpart VV. To receive a waiver, the applicant must demonstrate to the Administrator that its technology will store captured CO2 as effectively as geologic sequestration, and that the proposed technology will not cause or contribute to an unreasonable risk to public health, welfare, or safety. In making this determination, the Administrator shall consider (among other factors) operating history of the technology, whether the technology will increase emissions or other releases of any pollutant other than CO2, and permanence of the CO2 storage. The Administrator may test the system or require the applicant to perform any tests considered by the Administrator to be necessary to show the technology's effectiveness, safety, and ability to store captured CO2 without release. The Administrator may grant conditional approval of a technology, with the approval conditioned on monitoring and reporting of operations. The Administrator may also withdraw approval of the waiver on evidence of releases of CO2 or other pollutants. The Administrator will provide notice to the public of any application under this provision and provide public notice of any proposed action on a petition before the Administrator takes final action.
§ 60.5865b What are my recordkeeping requirements?
(a) You must keep records of all information relied upon in support of any demonstration of State plan components, State plan requirements, supporting documentation, and the status of meeting the State plan requirements defined in the State plan.
(b) You must keep records of all data submitted by the owner or operator of each affected EGU that are used to determine compliance with each affected EGU emissions standard or requirements in an approved State plan, consistent with the affected EGU requirements listed in § 60.5860b.
(c) If your State has a requirement for all hourly CO2 emissions and gross generation or heat input information to be used to calculate compliance with an annual emissions standard for affected EGUs, any information that is submitted by the owners or operators of affected EGUs to the EPA electronically pursuant to requirements in 40 CFR part 75 meets the recordkeeping requirement of this section and you are not required to keep records of information that would be in duplicate of paragraph (b) of this section.
(d) You must keep records for a minimum of 10 years from the date the record is used to determine compliance with an emissions standard or State plan requirement. Each record must be in a form suitable and readily available for expeditious review.
(e) If your State plan includes provisions for the compliance date extension, described in § 60.5740b(a)(11), you must keep records of the information required in § 60.5740b(a)(11)(i) from affected EGUs that use the compliance date extension.
(f) If your State plan includes provisions for the short-term reliability mechanism, as described in § 60.5740b(a)(12), you must keep records of the information required in § 60.5740b(a)(12)(iii) from affected EGUs that use the short-term reliability mechanism.
(g) If your State plan includes provisions for the reliability assurance mechanism, described in § 60.5740b(a)(13), you must keep records of the information required in § 60.5740b(a)(13)(vi) from affected EGUs that use the reliability assurance mechanism.
§ 60.5870b What are my reporting and notification requirements?
(a) In lieu of the annual report required under § 60.25(e) and (f), you must report the information in paragraph (b) of this section.
(b) You must submit an annual report to the EPA that must include the information in paragraphs (b)(1) through (10) of this section. For each calendar year reporting period the report must be submitted by March 1 of the following year.
(1) The report must include the emissions performance achieved by each affected EGU during the reporting period and identification of whether each affected EGU is in compliance with its standard of performance during the compliance period, as specified in the State plan.
(2) The report must include, for each affected EGU, a comparison of the CO2 standard of performance in the State plan versus the actual CO2 emission performance achieved.
(3) The report must include, for each affected EGU, the sum of the CO2 emissions, the sum of the gross energy output, and the sum of the heat input for each fuel type.
(4) Enforcement actions initiated against affected EGUs during the reporting period, under any standard of performance or compliance schedule of the State plan.
(5) Identification of the achievement of any increment of progress required by the applicable State plan during the reporting period.
(6) Identification of designated facilities that have ceased operation during the reporting period.
(7) Submission of emission inventory data as described in paragraph (a) of this section for designated facilities that were not in operation at the time of State plan development but began operation during the reporting period.
(8) Submission of additional data as necessary to update the information submitted under paragraph (a) of this section or in previous progress reports.
(9) Submission of copies of technical reports on all performance testing on designated facilities conducted under paragraph (b)(2) of this section, complete with concurrently recorded process data.
(10) The report must include all other required information, as specified in your State plan according to § 60.5740b.
(c) If you include provisions for the compliance date extension, described in § 60.5740b(a)(11), in your State plan, you must report to the EPA the information listed in § 60.5740b(a)(11)(i).
(d) If you include provisions for the short-term reliability mechanism, described in § 60.5740b(a)(12), in your State plan, you must report to the EPA the following information for each event, listed in § 60.5740b(a)(12)(iii).
(e) If you include provisions for the reliability assurance mechanism, described in § 60.5740b(a)(13) in your State plan, you must report to the EPA the information listed in § 60.5740b(a)(13)(vi).
§ 60.5875b How do I submit information required by these emission guidelines to the EPA?
(a) You must submit to the EPA the information required by these emission guidelines following the procedures in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section.
(b) All State plan submittals, supporting materials that are part of a State plan submittal, any State plan revisions, and all State reports required to be submitted to the EPA by the State plan must be reported through the EPA's State Plan Electronic Collection System (SPeCS). SPeCS is a web accessible electronic system accessed at the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (http://www.epa.gov/cdx/). States that claim that a State plan submittal or supporting documentation includes confidential business information (CBI) must submit that information on a compact disc, flash drive, or other commonly used electronic storage media to the EPA. The electronic media must be clearly marked as CBI and mailed to U.S. EPA/OAQPS/CORE CBI Office, Attention: State and Local Programs Group, MD C539-01, 4930 Old Page Rd., Durham, NC 27703.
(c) Only a submittal by the Governor or the Governor's designee by an electronic submission through SPeCS shall be considered an official submittal to the EPA under this subpart. If the Governor wishes to designate another responsible official the authority to submit a State plan, the EPA must be notified via letter from the Governor prior to the May 11, 2026, deadline for State plan submittal so that the official will have the ability to submit the initial or final State plan submittal in the SPeCS. If the Governor has previously delegated authority to make CAA submittals on the Governor's behalf, a State may submit documentation of the delegation in lieu of a letter from the Governor. The letter or documentation must identify the designee to whom authority is being designated and must include the name and contact information for the designee and also identify the State plan preparers who will need access to SPeCS. A State may also submit the names of the State plan preparers via a separate letter prior to the designation letter from the Governor in order to expedite the State plan administrative process. Required contact information for the designee and preparers includes the person's title, organization, and email address.
(d) The submission of the information by the authorized official must be in a non-editable format. In addition to the non-editable version all State plan components designated as federally enforceable must also be submitted in an editable version. Following initial State plan approval, States must provide the EPA with an editable copy of any submitted revision to existing approved federally enforceable State plan components, including State plan backstop measures. The editable copy of any such submitted State plan revision must indicate the changes made at the State level, if any, to the existing approved federally enforceable State plan components, using a mechanism such as redline/strikethrough. These changes are not part of the State plan until formal approval by the EPA.
(e) You must provide the EPA with non-editable and editable copies of any submitted revision to existing approved federally enforceable State plan components. The editable copy of any such submitted State plan revision must indicate the changes made at the State level, if any, to the existing approved federally enforceable State plan components, using a mechanism such as redline/strikethrough. These changes are not part of the State plan until formal approval by the EPA.
§ 60.5876b What are the recordkeeping and reporting requirements for EGUs that have committed to permanently cease operations by January 1, 2032?
(a) If you are the owner or operator of an EGU that has committed to permanently cease operations by January 1, 2032, you must maintain records for and submit the reports listed in paragraphs (a)(1) through (3) of this section according to the electronic reporting requirements in paragraph (b) of this section.
(1) Five years before any planned date to permanently cease operations or by the date upon which the State plan is submitted, whichever is later, the owner or operator of the EGU must submit an initial report to the EPA that includes the information in paragraphs (a)(1)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A summary of the process steps required for the EGU to permanently cease operation by the date included in the State plan, including the approximate timing and duration of each step and any notification requirements associated with deactivation of the unit. These process steps may include, e.g., initial notice to the relevant reliability authority of the deactivation date and submittal of an official retirement filing (or equivalent filing) made to the EGU's relevant reliability authority.
(ii) Supporting regulatory documents, which include those listed in paragraphs (a)(1)(ii)(A) through (G) of this section:
(A) Correspondence and official filings with the relevant regional RTO, Independent System Operator, Balancing Authority, PUC, or other applicable authority;
(B) Any deactivation-related reliability assessments conducted by the RTO or Independent System Operator;
(C) Any filings pertaining to the affected EGU with the SEC or notices to investors, including but not limited to references in forms 10-K and 10-Q, in which plans for the EGU are mentioned;
(D) Any integrated resource plans and PUC orders approving the EGU's deactivation;
(E) Any reliability analyses developed by the RTO, Independent System Operator, or relevant reliability authority in response to the EGU's deactivation notification;
(F) Any notification from a relevant reliability authority that the EGU may be needed for reliability purposes notwithstanding the EGU's intent to deactivate; and
(G) Any notification to or from an RTO, Independent System Operator, or relevant reliability authority altering the timing of deactivation of the EGU.
(2) For each of the remaining years prior to the date by which an EGU has committed to permanently cease operations, the owner or operator of the EGU must submit an annual status report to the EPA that includes the information listed in paragraphs (a)(2)(i) and (ii) of this section:
(i) Progress on each of the identified process steps identified in the initial report as described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section; and
(ii) Supporting regulatory documents, including correspondence and official filings with the relevant RTO, Independent System Operator, Balancing Authority, PUC, or other applicable authority to demonstrate progress toward all steps described in paragraph (a)(1)(i) of this section.
(3) The owner or operator must submit a final report to the EPA no later than 6 months following its committed closure date. This report must document any actions that the EGU has taken subsequent to ceasing operation to ensure that such cessation is permanent, including any regulatory filings with applicable authorities or decommissioning plans.
(b) Beginning November 12, 2024, if you are the owner or operator of an EGU that has committed to permanently cease operations by January 1, 2032, you must submit all the information required in paragraph (a) of this section in a Permanent Cessation of Operation report in PDF format following the procedures specified in paragraph (c) of this section.
(c) If you are required to submit notifications or reports following the procedure specified in this paragraph (c), you must submit notifications or reports to the EPA via the Compliance and Emissions Data Reporting Interface (CEDRI), which can be accessed through the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (https://cdx.epa.gov/). The EPA will make all the information submitted through CEDRI available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use CEDRI to submit information you claim as CBI. Although we do not expect persons to assert a claim of CBI, if you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in the report or notification, you must submit a complete file in the format specified in this subpart, including information claimed to be CBI, to the EPA following the procedures in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section. Clearly mark the part or all of the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using CEDRI cannot later be claimed CBI. Furthermore, under CAA section 114(c), emissions data is not entitled to confidential treatment, and the EPA is required to make emissions data available to the public. Thus, emissions data will not be protected as CBI and will be made publicly available. You must submit the same file submitted to the CBI office with the CBI omitted to the EPA via the EPA's CDX as described earlier in this paragraph (c).
(1) The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqpscbi@epa.gov, and as described above, should include clear CBI markings and be flagged to the attention of the Emission Guidelines for Greenhouse Gas Emissions for Electric Utility Generating Units Sector Lead. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqpscbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link.
(2) If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: U.S. EPA Attn: OAQPS Document Control Officer, Mail Drop: C404-02, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive P.O. Box 12055, RTP, NC 27711. All other files should also be sent to the attention of the Greenhouse Gas Emissions for Electric Utility Generating Units Sector Lead. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(d) Any records required to be maintained by this subpart that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(e) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of EPA system outage for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of EPA system outage, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must have been or will be precluded from accessing CEDRI and submitting a required report within the time prescribed due to an outage of either the EPA's CEDRI or CDX systems.
(2) The outage must have occurred within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date that the submission is due.
(3) The outage may be planned or unplanned.
(4) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(5) You must provide to the Administrator a written description identifying:
(i) The date(s) and time(s) when CDX or CEDRI was accessed and the system was unavailable;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to EPA system outage;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(6) The decision to accept the claim of EPA system outage and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(7) In any circumstance, the report must be submitted electronically as soon as possible after the outage is resolved.
(f) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of force majeure for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of force majeure, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs(f)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You may submit a claim if a force majeure event is about to occur, occurs, or has occurred or there are lingering effects from such an event within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date the submission is due. For the purposes of this section, a force majeure event is defined as an event that will be or has been caused by circumstances beyond the control of the affected facility, its contractors, or any entity controlled by the affected facility that prevents you from complying with the requirement to submit a report electronically within the time period prescribed. Examples of such events are acts of nature (e.g., hurricanes, earthquakes, or floods), acts of war or terrorism, or equipment failure or safety hazard beyond the control of the affected facility (e.g., large scale power outage).
(2) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(3) You must provide to the Administrator:
(i) A written description of the force majeure event;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to the force majeure event;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(4) The decision to accept the claim of force majeure and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(5) In any circumstance, the reporting must occur as soon as possible after the force majeure event occurs.
(g) Alternatives to any electronic reporting required by this subpart must be approved by the Administrator.
Definitions
§ 60.5880b What definitions apply to this subpart?
As used in this subpart, all terms not defined herein will have the meaning given them in the Clean Air Act and in subparts A, Ba, TTTT, and TTTTa, of this part.
Affected electric generating unit or Affected EGU means a steam generating unit that meets the relevant applicability conditions in section § 60.5845b.
Annual capacity factor means the ratio between the actual heat input to an EGU during a calendar year and the potential heat input to the EGU had it been operated for 8,760 hours during a calendar year at the base load rating.
Base load rating means the maximum amount of heat input (fuel) that an EGU can combust on a steady-state basis, as determined by the physical design and characteristics of the EGU at ISO conditions, as defined below. For a stationary combustion turbine or IGCC, base load rating includes the heat input from duct burners.
Coal-fired steam generating unit means an electric utility steam generating unit or IGCC unit that meets the definition of “fossil fuel-fired” and that burns coal for more than 10.0 percent of the average annual heat input during any continuous 3-calendar-year period after December 31, 2029, or for more than 15.0 percent of the annual heat input during any one calendar year after December 31, 2029, or that retains the capability to fire coal after December 31, 2029.
Combined cycle unit means a stationary combustion turbine from which the heat from the turbine exhaust gases is recovered by a heat recovery steam generating unit to generate additional electricity.
Combined heat and power unit or CHP unit, (also known as “cogeneration”) means an electric generating unit that uses a steam-generating unit or stationary combustion turbine to simultaneously produce both electric (or mechanical) and useful thermal output from the same primary energy source.
Compliance period means an annual (calendar year) period for an affected EGU to comply with a standard of performance.
Derate means a decrease in the available capacity of an electric generating unit, due to a system or equipment modification or to discounting a portion of a generating unit's capacity for planning purposes.
Fossil fuel means natural gas, petroleum, coal, and any form of solid fuel, liquid fuel, or gaseous fuel derived from such material for the purpose of creating useful heat.
Gross energy output means:
(1) For stationary combustion turbines and IGCC, the gross electric or direct mechanical output from both the EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
(2) For steam generating units, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU(s) (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output;
(3) For combined heat and power facilities where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating-month rolling average basis, the gross electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)) minus any electricity used to power the feedwater pumps (the electric auxiliary load of boiler feedwater pumps is not applicable to IGCC facilities), that difference divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output.
Heat recovery steam generating unit (HRSG) means a unit in which hot exhaust gases from the combustion turbine engine are routed in order to extract heat from the gases and generate useful output. Heat recovery steam generating units can be used with or without duct burners.
Integrated gasification combined cycle facility or IGCC means a combined cycle facility that is designed to burn fuels containing 50 percent (by heat input) or more solid-derived fuel not meeting the definition of natural gas plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to either the affected facility or auxiliary equipment. The Administrator may waive the 50 percent solid-derived fuel requirement during periods of the gasification system construction, startup and commissioning, shutdown, or repair. No solid fuel is directly burned in the unit during operation.
ISO conditions means 288 Kelvin (15 °C, 59 °F), 60 percent relative humidity and 101.3 kilopascals (14.69 psi, 1 atm) pressure.
Mechanical output means the useful mechanical energy that is not used to operate the affected facility, generate electricity and/or thermal output, or to enhance the performance of the affected facility. Mechanical energy measured in horsepower hour must be converted into MWh by multiplying it by 745.7 then dividing by 1,000,000.
Nameplate capacity means, starting from the initial installation, the maximum electrical generating output that a generator, prime mover, or other electric power production equipment under specific conditions designated by the manufacturer is capable of producing (in MWe, rounded to the nearest tenth) on a steady-state basis and during continuous operation (when not restricted by seasonal or other deratings) as of such installation as specified by the manufacturer of the equipment, or starting from the completion of any subsequent physical change resulting in an increase in the maximum electrical generating output that the equipment is capable of producing on a steady-state basis and during continuous operation (when not restricted by seasonal or other deratings), such increased maximum amount (in MWe, rounded to the nearest tenth) as of such completion as specified by the person conducting the physical change.
Natural gas means a fluid mixture of hydrocarbons (e.g., methane, ethane, or propane), composed of at least 70 percent methane by volume or that has a gross calorific value between 35 and 41 megajoules (MJ) per dry standard cubic meter (950 and 1,100 Btu per dry standard cubic foot), that maintains a gaseous state under ISO conditions. Finally, natural gas does not include the following gaseous fuels: Landfill gas, digester gas, refinery gas, sour gas, blast furnace gas, coal-derived gas, producer gas, coke oven gas, or any gaseous fuel produced in a process which might result in highly variable CO2 content or heating value.
Natural gas-fired steam generating unit means an electric utility steam generating unit meeting the definition of “fossil fuel-fired,” that is not a coal-fired or oil-fired steam generating unit, that no longer retains the capability to fire coal after December 31, 2029, and that burns natural gas for more than 10.0 percent of the average annual heat input during any continuous 3-calendar-year period after December 31, 2029, or for more than 15.0 percent of the annual heat input during any calendar year after December 31, 2029.
Net electric output means the amount of gross generation the generator(s) produce (including, but not limited to, output from steam turbine(s), combustion turbine(s), and gas expander(s)), as measured at the generator terminals, less the electricity used to operate the plant (i.e., auxiliary loads); such uses include fuel handling equipment, pumps, fans, pollution control equipment, other electricity needs, and transformer losses as measured at the transmission side of the step up transformer (e.g., the point of sale).
Net energy output means:
(1) The net electric or mechanical output from the affected facility, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output measured relative to standard ambient temperature and pressure conditions that is not used to generate additional electric or mechanical output or to enhance the performance of the unit (e.g., steam delivered to an industrial process for a heating application).
(2) For combined heat and power facilities where at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of electric or direct mechanical output and at least 20.0 percent of the total gross or net energy output consists of useful thermal output on a 12-operating month rolling average basis, the net electric or mechanical output from the affected EGU divided by 0.95, plus 100 percent of the useful thermal output; (e.g., steam delivered to an industrial process for a heating application).
Oil-fired steam generating unit means an electric utility steam generating unit meeting the definition of “fossil fuel-fired” that is not a coal-fired steam generating unit, that no longer retains the capability to fire coal after December 31, 2029, and that burns oil for more than 10.0 percent of the average annual heat input during any continuous 3-calendar-year period after December 31, 2029, or for more than 15.0 percent of the annual heat input during any one calendar year after December 31, 2029.
Standard ambient temperature and pressure (SATP) conditions means 298.15 Kelvin (25 °C, 77 °F) and 100.0 kilopascals (14.504 psi, 0.987 atm) pressure. The enthalpy of water at SATP conditions is 50 Btu/lb.
State agent means an entity acting on behalf of the State, with the legal authority of the State.
Stationary combustion turbine means all equipment including, but not limited to, the turbine engine, the fuel, air, lubrication and exhaust gas systems, control systems (except emissions control equipment), heat recovery system, fuel compressor, heater, and/or pump, post-combustion emission control technology, and any ancillary components and sub-components comprising any simple cycle stationary combustion turbine, any combined cycle combustion turbine, and any combined heat and power combustion turbine based system plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the combustion turbine engine, heat recovery system, or auxiliary equipment. Stationary means that the combustion turbine is not self-propelled or intended to be propelled while performing its function. It may, however, be mounted on a vehicle for portability. A stationary combustion turbine that burns any solid fuel directly is considered a steam generating unit.
Steam generating unit means any furnace, boiler, or other device used for combusting fuel and producing steam (nuclear steam generators are not included) plus any integrated equipment that provides electricity or useful thermal output to the affected facility or auxiliary equipment.
System Emergency means periods when the Reliability Coordinator has declared an Energy Emergency Alert level 2 or 3 as defined by NERC Reliability Standard EOP-011-2, or its successor.
Uprate means an increase in available electric generating unit power capacity due to a system or equipment modification.
Useful thermal output means the thermal energy made available for use in any heating application (e.g., steam delivered to an industrial process for a heating application, including thermal cooling applications) that is not used for electric generation, mechanical output at the affected EGU, to directly enhance the performance of the affected EGU (e.g., economizer output is not useful thermal output, but thermal energy used to reduce fuel moisture is considered useful thermal output), or to supply energy to a pollution control device at the affected EGU. Useful thermal output for affected EGU(s) with no condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) or where measuring the energy in the condensate (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU(s)) would not meaningfully impact the emission rate calculation is measured against the energy in the thermal output at SATP conditions. Affected EGU(s) with meaningful energy in the condensate return (or other thermal energy input to the affected EGU) must measure the energy in the condensate and subtract that energy relative to SATP conditions from the measured thermal output.
Valid data means quality-assured data generated by continuous monitoring systems that are installed, operated, and maintained according to 40 CFR part 75. For CEMS, the initial certification requirements in 40 CFR 75.20 and appendix A to 40 CFR part 75 must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart; for on-going quality assurance, the daily, quarterly, and semiannual/annual test requirements in sections 2.1, 2.2, and 2.3 of appendix B to 40 CFR part 75 must be met and the data validation criteria in sections 2.1.4, 2.2.3, and 2.3.2 of appendix B to 40 CFR part 75 apply. For fuel flow meters, the initial certification requirements in section 2.1.5 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 must be met before quality-assured data are reported under this subpart (except for qualifying commercial billing meters under section 2.1.4.2 of appendix D), and for on-going quality assurance, the provisions in section 2.1.6 of appendix D to 40 CFR part 75 apply (except for qualifying commercial billing meters).
Waste-to-Energy means a process or unit (e.g., solid waste incineration unit) that recovers energy from the conversion or combustion of waste stream materials, such as municipal solid waste, to generate electricity and/or heat.
Subpart VVVV—Standards of Performance for Large Municipal Waste Combustors
91 FR 11833, Mar. 10, 2026, unless otherwise noted.
Introduction
§ 60.5680 What does this subpart do?
This subpart establishes new source performance standards for municipal waste combustors with a combustion capacity greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste.
§ 60.5685 When does this subpart become effective?
This subpart takes effect May 11, 2026. Some of the requirements in this subpart apply to municipal waste combustor planning and must be completed before construction is commenced on the municipal waste combustor. In particular, the preconstruction requirements in §§ 60.5730 through 60.5830 must be completed prior to commencing construction. Other requirements (such as the emission limits) apply when the municipal waste combustor begins operation.
Applicability
§ 60.5690 Does this subpart apply to my municipal waste combustor?
Yes, if your municipal waste combustor meets both of the following criteria:
(a) Your municipal waste combustor is a new municipal waste combustor.
(b) Your municipal waste combustor has the capacity to combust greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste.
§ 60.5695 What is a new municipal waste combustor?
(a) A new municipal waste combustor meets either of two criteria:
(1) Commenced construction after January 23, 2024.
(2) Commenced reconstruction or modification after September 10, 2026.
(b) This subpart does not apply to your municipal waste combustor if you make physical or operational changes to an existing municipal waste combustor primarily to comply with the emission guidelines in subpart WWWW of this part. Such changes do not qualify as reconstruction or modification under this subpart.
§ 60.5700 Does this subpart allow any exemptions?
(a) Municipal waste combustors that combust less than 11 tons per day. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following four requirements:
(1) Your municipal waste combustor that is capable of combusting more than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste is subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting the maximum amount of municipal solid waste that may be combusted in the unit to less than or equal to 11 tons per day.
(2) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit the notification and copy of the federally enforceable permit required by (a)(2) and (3) of this section as a portable document format (PDF) file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(3) You provide the Administrator with a copy of the federally enforceable permit that limits the firing of municipal solid waste to less than 11 tons per day. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit the notification and copy of the federally enforceable permit required by (a)(2) and (3) of this section as a portable document format (PDF) file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(4) You keep daily records of the amount of municipal solid waste combusted.
(b) Small power production facilities. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following four requirements:
(1) Your unit qualifies as a small power production facility under section 3(17)(C) of the Federal Power Act (16 U.S.C. 796(17)(C)).
(2) Your unit combusts homogeneous waste (such as automotive tires or used oil, but excluding refuse-derived fuel) to produce electricity.
(3) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit this notification as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(4) You provide the Administrator with data documenting that the unit qualifies for this exemption.
(c) Cogeneration facilities. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following four requirements:
(1) Your unit qualifies as a cogeneration facility under section 3(18)(B) of the Federal Power Act (16 U.S.C. 796(18)(B)).
(2) Your unit combusts homogeneous waste (such as automotive tires or used oil but excluding refuse-derived fuel) to produce electricity and steam or other forms of useful energy (such as heat) used for industrial, commercial, heating, or cooling purposes.
(3) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit this notification as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(4) You provide the Administrator with documentation that the unit qualifies for this exemption.
(d) Municipal waste combustors that combust only tires. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following three requirements:
(1) Your municipal waste combustor combusts a single-item waste stream of tires.
(2) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption.
(3) You provide the Administrator with data documenting that the unit qualifies for this exemption. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit the notification and data required under (d)(2) and (3) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(e) Hazardous waste combustion units. You are exempt from this subpart if you get a permit for your unit under section 3005 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act.
(f) Materials recovery units. You are exempt from this subpart if your unit combusts waste primarily to recover metals. Primary and secondary smelters qualify for the exemption.
(g) Co-fired combustors. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following four requirements:
(1) Your municipal waste combustor is a co-fired combustor as defined under § 60.6145.
(2) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption.
(3) You provide the Administrator with a copy of the federally enforceable permit (specified in the definition of cofired combustor in § 60.6145). Beginning September 10, 2026, you submit the notification and copy of the federally enforceable permit required under (g)(2) and (3) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(4) You record the weights, each quarter, of municipal solid waste and of all other fuels combusted.
(h) Plastics/rubber recycling units. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet each of the following five requirements:
(1) Your pyrolysis/combustion unit is an integrated part of a plastics/rubber recycling unit as defined under “Definitions” (§ 60.6145).
(2) You notify the Administrator that the unit qualifies for this exemption. Beginning September 10, 2026, you must submit this notification as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(3) You keep and maintain records of the weights, each calendar quarter, of plastics, rubber, and rubber tires processed.
(4) You keep and maintain records of the weights, each calendar quarter, of chemical plant feed stocks and petroleum refinery feedstocks produced and marketed.
(5) You keep and maintain records of the name and address of the purchaser of those feed stocks.
(i) Units that combust fuels made from products of plastics/rubber recycling plants. You are exempt from this subpart if you meet two requirements:
(1) Your unit combusts gasoline, diesel fuel, jet fuel, fuel oils, residual oil, refinery gas, petroleum coke, liquified petroleum gas, propane, or butane produced by chemical plants or petroleum refineries that use feedstocks produced by plastics/rubber recycling units.
(2) Your unit does not combust any other municipal solid waste.
(j) Cement kilns. You are exempt from this subpart if your cement kiln combusts municipal solid waste.
(k) Air curtain incinerators. If your air curtain incinerator (see § 60.6145 for definition) combusts 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, you must meet only the requirements under “Air Curtain Incinerators That Burn 100 Percent Wood Waste, Clean Lumber, and Yard Waste” (§§ 60.6115 through 60.6135). If your air curtain incinerator combusts municipal solid waste other than 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, you are subject to all provisions of this subpart.
§ 60.5705 Do other new source performance standards also apply to my municipal waste combustor?
If this subpart VVVV applies to your municipal waste combustor, then subparts Db, E, Ea, or Eb of this part do not apply to your municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.5710 What authorities to enforce these federal new source performance standards can the Administrator delegate to a state agency?
(a) The U.S. EPA Administrator retains the following authorities which are not transferred to a state:
(1) Approval of exemption claims in § 60.5700(a), (b), (c), (d), (g), and (h).
(2) Enforceability under federal law of the federally enforceable (as defined in § 60.6145) permits specified in § 60.5700(a) and (g).
(3) Determination of compliance with the siting requirements as specified in § 60.5790.
(4) Acceptance of relationship between carbon dioxide and oxygen as part of initial and annual performance tests as specified in §§ 60.6080(g) and 60.6090(k).
(5) Approval of other monitoring systems used to obtain emissions data when data is not obtained by CEMS as specified in §§ 60.5955 and 60.5985(g)(11).
(6) Approval of a site-specific monitoring plan for the continuous emission monitoring system specified in § 60.5985(c) and (d) or the continuous automated sampling system specified in § 60.5985(g)(10) and (h) of this section.
(7) Approval of major alternatives to test methods.
(8) Approval of major alternatives to monitoring.
(9) Waiver of recordkeeping.
(10) Performance test and data reduction waivers under § 60.8(b).
(11) Approval of an alternative to any electronic reporting to the EPA required by this subpart.
(b) The Administrator can delegate all other authorities in all other sections of this subpart to the state for direct state enforcement.
§ 60.5715 How are these new source performance standards structured?
These new source performance standards contain five major components:
(a) Preconstruction requirements.
(1) Materials separation plan.
(2) Siting analysis.
(b) Good combustion practices.
(1) Operator training.
(2) Operator certification.
(3) Operating requirements.
(c) Emission limits.
(d) Monitoring and stack testing.
(e) Recordkeeping and reporting.
§ 60.5720 Do all five components of these new source performance standards apply at the same time?
No, you must meet the preconstruction requirements before you commence construction of the municipal waste combustor. After the municipal waste combustor begins operation, you must meet all of the good combustion practices, emission limits, monitoring, stack testing, and most recordkeeping and reporting requirements.
§ 60.5725 Are there different subcategories of municipal waste combustors within this subpart?
The requirements for new municipal waste combustors of all types are identical except that carbon monoxide emissions limits are set separately for mass burn, modular, and refuse-derived fuel combustor types (see Table 1 to Subpart VVVV).
Preconstruction Requirements: Materials Separation Plan
§ 60.5730 Who must submit a materials separation plan?
(a) You must prepare a materials separation plan for your municipal waste combustor if you commence construction of a new large municipal waste combustor after January 23, 2024.
(b) You must prepare a materials separation plan if you are required to submit an initial application for a construction permit, under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or part 52, as applicable, for the reconstruction or modification of your municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.5735 What is a materials separation plan?
The plan identifies a goal and an approach for separating certain components of municipal solid waste for a given service area prior to waste combustion and making them available for recycling.
§ 60.5740 What steps must I complete for my materials separation plan?
(a) For your materials separation plan, you must complete all of the following nine steps:
(1) Prepare a draft materials separation plan.
(2) Make your draft plan available to the public.
(3) Hold a public meeting on your draft plan.
(4) Prepare responses to public comments received during the public comment period on your draft plan.
(5) Prepare a revised materials separation plan.
(6) Discuss the revised plan at the public meeting for review of the siting analysis.
(7) Prepare responses to public comments received on your revised plan.
(8) Prepare a final materials separation plan.
(9) Submit the final materials separation plan.
(b) You may use analyses conducted under the requirements of 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or part 52, to comply with some of the materials separation requirements of this subpart.
§ 60.5745 What must I include in my draft materials separation plan?
(a) You must prepare and submit a draft materials separation plan for your municipal waste combustor and its service area.
(b) Your draft materials separation plan must identify a goal and an approach for separating certain components of municipal solid waste for a given service area prior to waste combustion and making them available for recycling. A materials separation plan may include such elements as drop off facilities, buy-back or deposit-return incentives, programs for curbside pickup, and centralized systems for mechanical separation.
(c) Your materials separation plan may include different goals or approaches for different subareas in the service area.
(d) Your materials separation plan may exclude materials separation activities for certain subareas or, if warranted, the entire service area.
§ 60.5750 How do I make my draft materials separation plan available to the public?
(a) Distribute your draft materials separation plan to the principal public libraries in the area where you will construct the municipal waste combustor.
(b) Publish a notice of a public meeting in the principal newspapers that serve two areas:
(1) The area where you will construct the municipal waste combustor.
(2) The areas where the waste that your municipal waste combustor combusts will be collected.
(c) Include six items in your notice of the public meeting:
(1) The date of the public meeting.
(2) The time of the public meeting.
(3) The location of the public meeting.
(4) The location of the public libraries where the public can find your materials separation plan. Include the normal business hours of each library.
(5) An agenda of the topics that will be discussed at the public meeting.
(6) The beginning and ending dates of the public comment period on your draft materials separation plan.
§ 60.5755 When must I accept comments on the materials separation plan?
(a) You must accept verbal comments at the public meeting.
(b) You must accept written comments any time during the period that begins on the date the document is distributed to the principal public libraries and ends 30 days after the date of the public meeting.
§ 60.5760 Where and when must I hold a public meeting on my draft materials separation plan?
(a) You must hold a public meeting and accept comments on your draft materials separation plan.
(b) You must hold the public meeting in the county where you will construct the municipal waste combustor.
(c) You must schedule the public meeting to occur 30 days or more after you make your draft materials separation plan available to the public.
(d) You may combine the public meeting with any other public meeting required as part of any other federal, state, or local permit review. However, you may not combine it with the public meeting required for the siting analysis under “Preconstruction Requirements: Siting Analysis” (§ 60.5820).
(e) You are encouraged to address eight topics at the public meeting for your draft materials separation plan:
(1) Expected size of the service area for your municipal waste combustor.
(2) Amount of waste generation (waste collection) anticipated in the service area.
(3) Types and estimated amounts of materials proposed for separation.
(4) Methods proposed for materials separation.
(5) Amount of residual waste for disposal.
(6) Alternate disposal methods for handling the residual waste.
(7) Where your responses to public comments on the draft materials separation plan will be available for inspection.
(8) Where your revised materials separation plan will be available for inspection.
(f) You must prepare a transcript of the public meeting on your draft materials separation plan.
§ 60.5765 What must I do with any public comments I receive during the public comment period on my draft materials separation plan?
You must do all of the following three steps:
(a) Prepare written responses to any public comments you received during the public comment period. Summarize the responses to public comments in a document that is separate from your revised materials separation plan.
(b) Make the comment response document available to the public (including distribution of the document at least to the principal public libraries used to announce the public meeting) in the service area where you will construct your municipal waste combustor.
(c) Prepare a revised materials separation plan for the municipal waste combustor that includes, as appropriate, changes made in response to any public comments you received during the public comment period.
§ 60.5770 What must I do with my revised materials separation plan?
You must do the following two tasks:
(a) As specified under “Reporting” (§ 60.6055), submit copies of all of the following five items to the Administrator on or before the date you submit the application for a construction permit under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or 40 CFR part 52. (If you are not required to submit an application for a construction permit under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or 40 CFR part 52, submit copies of the five items to the Administrator by the date of your notice of construction under § 60.6060):
(1) Your draft materials separation plan.
(2) Your revised materials separation plan.
(3) Your notice of the public meeting for your draft materials separation plan.
(4) A transcript of the public meeting on your draft materials separation plan.
(5) The document that summarizes your responses to the public comments you received during the public comment period on your draft materials separation plan.
(b) Make your revised materials separation plan available to the public as part of the distribution of the siting analysis procedures under “Preconstruction Requirements: Siting Analysis” (§ 60.5810).
§ 60.5775 What must I include in the public meeting on my revised materials separation plan and siting analysis?
As part of the public meeting for review of the siting analysis, as specified under “Preconstruction Requirements: Siting Analysis” (§ 60.5820), you must discuss the two following areas:
(a) How the revised materials separation plan has changed from your draft materials separation plan discussed at the first public meeting (§ 60.5760).
(b) Questions about your revised materials separation plan.
§ 60.5780 What must I do with any public comments I receive on my revised materials separation plan?
(a) If you receive any comments on the revised materials separation plan, you must prepare written responses to any public comments and include them in the document that summarizes your responses to public comments on the siting analysis.
(b) Prepare a final materials separation plan that includes, as appropriate, changes made in response to any public comments you received on your revised materials separation plan.
§ 60.5785 How do I submit my final materials separation plan?
As specified under “Reporting” (§ 60.6060), submit your final materials separation plan to the Administrator as part of the initial notice of construction for the municipal waste combustor.
Preconstruction Requirements: Siting Analysis
§ 60.5790 Who must submit a siting analysis?
(a) You must prepare a siting analysis if you commence construction of a large municipal waste combustor after January 23, 2024.
(b) You must prepare a siting analysis if you are required to submit an initial application for a construction permit, under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or 40 CFR part 52, as applicable, for the reconstruction or modification of your municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.5795 What is a siting analysis?
The siting analysis addresses how your municipal waste combustor affects ambient air quality, visibility, soils, vegetation, and other relevant factors. The analysis shall consider air pollution control alternatives that minimize, on a site-specific basis, to the maximum extent practicable, potential risks to the public health or the environment.
§ 60.5800 What steps must I complete for my siting analysis?
(a) For your siting analysis, you must complete all of the following five steps:
(1) Prepare an analysis.
(2) Make your analysis available to the public.
(3) Hold a public meeting on your analysis.
(4) Prepare responses to public comments received on your analysis.
(5) Submit your analysis.
(b) If you commence construction after January 23, 2024, you must prepare a siting analysis according to the requirements of 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or 40 CFR part 52, as applicable, and must submit the siting analysis as part of the initial notification of construction. You may use analyses conducted under the requirements of 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or part 52 to comply with some of the siting analysis requirements of this subpart.
§ 60.5805 What must I include in my siting analysis?
(a) Include an analysis of how your municipal waste combustor affects the following four areas:
(1) Ambient air quality.
(2) Visibility.
(3) Soils.
(4) Vegetation.
(b) Include an analysis of air pollution control alternatives that minimize, on a site-specific basis, the potential risks to the public health and the environment to the maximum extent practicable.
§ 60.5810 How do I make my siting analysis available to the public?
(a) Distribute your siting analysis and revised materials separation plan to the principal public libraries in the area where you will construct your municipal waste combustor.
(b) Publish a notice of a public meeting in the principal newspapers that serve the following two areas:
(1) The area where you will construct your municipal waste combustor.
(2) The areas where the waste that your municipal waste combustor combusts will be collected.
(c) Include six items in your notice of the public meeting:
(1) The date of the public meeting.
(2) The time of the public meeting.
(3) The location of the public meeting.
(4) The location of the public libraries where the public can find your siting analysis and revised materials separation plan. Include the normal business hours of each library.
(5) An agenda of the topics that will be discussed at the public meeting.
(6) The beginning and ending dates of the public comment period on your siting analysis and revised materials separation plan.
§ 60.5815 When must I accept comments on the siting analysis and revised materials separation plan?
(a) You must accept verbal comments at the public meeting.
(b) You must accept written comments anytime during the period that begins on the date the document is distributed to the principal public libraries and ends 30 days after the date of the public meeting.
§ 60.5820 Where and when must I hold a public meeting on the siting analysis?
(a) You must hold a public meeting to discuss and accept comments on your siting analysis and your revised materials separation plan.
(b) You must hold the public meeting in the county where you will construct your municipal waste combustor.
(c) You must schedule the public meeting to occur 30 days or more after you make your siting analysis and revised materials separation plan available to the public.
(d) You must prepare a transcript of the public meeting on your siting analysis.
§ 60.5825 What must I do with any public comments I receive during the public comment period on my siting analysis?
If you receive any comments on the siting analysis, you must do the following three things:
(a) Prepare written responses to any public comments on your siting analysis and the revised materials separation plan you received during the public comment period. Summarize the responses to public comments in a document that is separate from your materials separation plan and siting analysis.
(b) Make the document summarizing responses to public comments available to the public in the service area where you will construct your municipal waste combustor. You must distribute the document to all public libraries in the service area where the affected facility is to be located, including the public libraries used to announce the meeting.
(c) Prepare a final siting analysis for the municipal waste combustor that includes, as appropriate, changes made in response to any public comments you received during the public comment period.
§ 60.5830 How do I submit my siting analysis?
As specified under “Reporting” (§ 60.6060), submit all four of the following items as part of the notice of construction:
(a) Your final siting analysis.
(b) Your notice of the public meeting on your siting analysis.
(c) A transcript of the public meeting on your siting analysis.
(d) The document that summarizes your responses to the public comments you received during the public comment period.
Good Combustion Practices: Operator Training
§ 60.5835 What types of training must I do?
There are two types of required training:
(a) Training of operators of municipal waste combustors using the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) or a state-approved training course.
(b) Training of plant personnel using a site-specific training course.
§ 60.5840 Who must complete the operator training course? By when?
(a) Three types of employees must complete the EPA or state-approved operator training course:
(1) Chief facility operators.
(2) Shift supervisors.
(3) Control room operators.
(b) Those employees must complete the operator training course by the later of three dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor initial startup.
(2) September 10, 2026.
(3) The date before an employee assumes responsibilities that affect operation of the municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.5845 Who must complete the site-specific training course?
All employees with responsibilities that affect how a municipal waste combustor operates must complete the site-specific training course, this includes at least six types of employees:
(a) Chief facility operators.
(b) Shift supervisors.
(c) Control room operators.
(d) Ash handlers.
(e) Maintenance personnel.
(f) Crane or load handlers.
§ 60.5850 What site-specific training must I provide?
For site-specific training, you must do all of the following four things:
(a) For training at a particular facility, develop a site-specific operating manual for that facility by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor initial startup.
(2) September 10, 2026.
(b) Establish a training program to review the site-specific operating manual with people whose responsibilities affect the operation of your municipal waste combustor. Complete the initial review by the later of three dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor initial startup.
(2) September 10, 2026.
(3) The date prior to the date an employee assumes responsibilities that affect operation of the municipal waste combustor.
(c) Update your manual annually.
(d) Following the initial review, review your operating manual with staff annually.
§ 60.5855 What information must I include in the site-specific operating manual?
You must include all of the following 11 items in the operating manual for your facility:
(a) A summary of all applicable standards in this subpart.
(b) A description of the basic combustion theory that applies to a municipal waste combustor.
(c) Procedures for receiving, handling, and feeding municipal solid waste.
(d) Procedures to be followed during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction of the municipal waste combustor.
(e) Procedures for maintaining a proper level of combustion air supply.
(f) Procedures for operating the municipal waste combustor in compliance with the standards contained in this subpart.
(g) Procedures for responding to periodic upset or off-specification conditions.
(h) Procedures for minimizing carryover of particulate matter.
(i) Procedures for handling ash.
(j) Procedures for monitoring emissions from the municipal waste combustor.
(k) Procedures for recordkeeping and reporting.
§ 60.5860 Where must I keep the site-specific operating manual?
You must keep your operating manual in a readily accessible location at your facility. It must be available for review or inspection for all persons required to undergo training as specified in § 60.5850. The operating manual and records of training as specified in § 60.6035 shall be available for inspection by the EPA or its delegated enforcement agency upon request.
Good Combustion Practices: Operator Certification
§ 60.5865 What types of operator certification must the chief facility operator and shift supervisor obtain and by when must they obtain it?
(a) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must obtain and keep a current provisional operator certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (QRO-1-2005) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17) or a current provisional operator certification from your state certification program, by the later of three dates:
(1) Six months after the municipal waste combustor initial startup.
(2) September 10, 2026.
(3) Six months after they transfer to the municipal waste combustor or 6 months after they are hired to work at the municipal waste combustor.
(b) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must obtain and maintain a current provisional certification, and must complete the full certification or be scheduled to take the full certification exam, by the later of three dates:
(1) Six months after the municipal waste combustor initial startup.
(2) September 10, 2026.
(3) For a provisionally certified operator who is newly promoted or recently transferred to a shift supervisor position or a chief facility operator position, a full certification exam must be completed within 6 months after they transfer to the municipal waste combustor or 6 months after they are hired to work at the municipal waste combustor.
(c) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must take one of three actions:
(1) Obtain and maintain a current provisional operator certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or a state certification program in your state.
(2) Schedule a full certification exam with the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (QRO-1-2005) (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(3) Schedule a full certification exam with your state certification program.
§ 60.5870 After the required date for operator certification, who may operate the municipal waste combustor?
After the required date for full or provisional certifications, you must not operate your municipal waste combustor unless one of four employees is on duty:
(a) A fully certified chief facility operator.
(b) A fully certified shift supervisor.
(c) A provisionally certified chief facility operator or a provisionally certified shift supervisor who is scheduled to take the full certification exam specified in § 60.5865.
§ 60.5875 What if all the certified operators must be temporarily offsite?
If the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor both are unavailable, a provisionally certified control room operator at the municipal waste combustor may fulfill the certified operator requirement. Depending on the length of time that a certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are away, you must meet one of the three following criteria:
(a) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are both offsite for 12 hours or less, and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform the duties of the certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor.
(b) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 12 hours, but for 2 weeks or less, and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform those duties without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator. However, you must record the period when the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite and include that information in the annual report as specified under § 60.6090(l).
(c) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 2 weeks, and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform those duties without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator. However, you must take the following two actions:
(1) Notify the Administrator in writing. In the notice, state what caused the absence and what you are doing to ensure that a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor is onsite as expeditiously as practicable. Beginning September 10, 2026, submit this notification as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(2) Submit a status report and corrective action summary to the Administrator every 4 weeks following the initial notification. If the Administrator notifies you that your status report or corrective action summary is disapproved, the municipal waste combustor may continue operation for 90 days, but then must cease operation. If corrective actions are taken in the 90-day period such that the Administrator withdraws the disapproval, municipal waste combustor operation may continue. Beginning September 10, 2026, submit this status report as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6065(d).
(d) A provisionally certified operator who is newly promoted or recently transferred to a shift supervisor position or a chief facility operator position at the municipal waste combustor may perform the duties of the certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator for up to 6 months before taking the ASME QRO certification exam as specified in § 60.5865.
Good Combustion Practices: Operating Requirements
§ 60.5880 What are the operating practice requirements for my municipal waste combustor?
(a) You must meet the carbon monoxide emission limits specified in Table 1 to Subpart VVVV within 60 days of your municipal waste combustor reaching the maximum load level at which it will operate, but no later than 180 days after its initial startup.
(b) You must not operate your municipal waste combustor at loads greater than 110 percent of the maximum demonstrated load of the municipal waste combustor (4-hour block average), as specified under “Definitions” (§ 60.6145) except as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section. The averaging time is specified under § 60.5995.
(1) During the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the municipal waste combustor load limit is not applicable if the provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section are met.
(2) The Administrator may waive in writing the municipal waste combustor load limit for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. The municipal waste combustor load limit continues to apply, and remains enforceable, until and unless the Administrator grants the waiver.
(c) You must not operate your municipal waste combustor so that the temperature measured at the inlet of the particulate matter control device exceeds 17 °C above the maximum demonstrated temperature of the particulate matter control device (4-hour block average), as specified under “Definitions” (§ 60.6145) except as specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section. The averaging time is specified under § 60.6000. The requirements specified in this paragraph apply to each particulate matter control device used.
(1) During the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the particulate matter control device temperature limitations are not applicable if the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this section are met.
(2) The Administrator may waive in writing the particulate matter control device temperature limits for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. The temperature limits continue to apply, and remain enforceable, until and unless the Administrator grants the waiver.
(d) If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must meet the requirements for activated carbon injection rate during dioxins/furans or mercury testing as specified in § 60.6005.
§ 60.5885 What happens to the operating requirements during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction?
The operating requirements under this subpart apply at all times including periods of municipal waste combustor warmup, startup, shutdown, and malfunction. Monitoring data cannot be dismissed or excluded from compliance calculations during periods of startup, shutdown, or malfunction, but must be recorded and reported in accordance with the provisions of § 60.6045(e). The provisions applicable to periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction of § 60.8(c) of subpart A of this part do not apply.
Emission Limits
§ 60.5890 What pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
Eleven pollutants, in four groupings, are regulated:
(a) Organics. Dioxins/furans.
(b) Metals.
(1) Cadmium.
(2) Lead.
(3) Mercury.
(4) Opacity.
(5) Particulate matter.
(c) Acid gases.
(1) Hydrogen chloride.
(2) Nitrogen oxides.
(3) Sulfur dioxide.
(d) Other.
(1) Carbon monoxide.
(2) Fugitive ash.
§ 60.5895 What emission limits must I meet? By when?
(a) You must meet the emission limits specified in Table 1 and Table 2 to Subpart VVVV. You must meet the limits 60 days after your municipal waste combustor reaches the maximum load level but no later than 180 days after its initial startup.
(b) The visible emissions of combustion ash discharged to the atmosphere from an ash conveying system (including conveyor transfer points) must not exceed 5 percent of the observation period (i.e., 9 minutes per 3-hour period), as determined by EPA Reference Method 22 observations as specified in § 60.5975(a). You must meet the limits 60 days after your municipal waste combustor reaches the maximum load level but no later than 180 days after its initial startup. This visible emission limit does not cover visible emissions discharged inside buildings or enclosures of ash conveying systems; however, the visible emission limit does cover visible emissions discharged to the atmosphere from buildings or enclosures of ash conveying systems. This visible emissions limit does not apply to visible emissions that occur during repair and maintenance of the combustion ash conveying systems while the municipal waste combustor is not operating.
§ 60.5900 What happens to the emission limits during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction?
(a) The emission limits of this subpart apply at all times including periods of warmup, startup, shutdown, and malfunction. The provisions applicable to periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction of § 60.11(c) of subpart A of this part do not apply.
Continuous Emission Monitoring
§ 60.5905 What types of continuous emission monitoring must I perform?
To continuously monitor emissions, you must perform all of the following four tasks:
(a) Install continuous emission monitoring systems for certain gaseous pollutants.
(b) Make sure your continuous emission monitoring systems are operating correctly.
(c) Make sure you obtain the minimum amount of monitoring data.
(d) Install a continuous opacity monitoring system for measuring opacity.
§ 60.5910 What continuous emission monitoring systems must I install for gaseous pollutants?
(a) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emission monitoring systems for oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide, and nitrogen oxides to demonstrate compliance with the emission limits specified in Tables 1 and 2 to Subpart VVVV. Install the continuous emission monitoring systems for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, and oxygen (or carbon dioxide) at the outlet of the air pollution control device.
(b) If you elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride in lieu of performance testing, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emissions monitoring systems for monitoring the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions discharged to the atmosphere and continuous emissions monitoring systems for oxygen (or carbon dioxide) at the outlet of the air pollution control device.
(c) You must install, evaluate, and operate each continuous emission monitoring system according to the “Monitoring Requirements” in § 60.13.
(d) You must monitor the oxygen (or carbon dioxide) concentration at each location where you monitor carbon monoxide, sulfur dioxide, and nitrogen oxides. If you elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must monitor the oxygen (or carbon dioxide) concentration at each location where you monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride.
(e) You may choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas. If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide, then an oxygen monitor is not required, and you must follow the requirements in § 60.5930.
§ 60.5915 How are the data from the continuous emission monitoring systems used?
(a) You must use data from the continuous emission monitoring systems for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide to demonstrate continuous compliance with the emission limits specified in Tables 1 and 2 to Subpart VVVV. To demonstrate compliance for dioxins/furans, cadmium, lead, mercury, particulate matter, opacity, hydrogen chloride, and fugitive ash, see § 60.5965.
(b) You may elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride to demonstrate continuous compliance with the emission limits specified in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV.
(c) For pollutants that you continuously monitor as described in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, you may request that compliance with the emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.5930.
(d) For pollutants that you continuously monitor as described in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, demonstrate compliance with the emission limits in Tables 1 and 2 to Subpart VVVV by using the continuous emission monitoring system specified § 60.5910 to collect the minimum amount of monitoring data specified in § 60.5935 and calculating the average emission concentration as specified in § 60.5940 and Table 4 to Subpart VVVV, as applicable.
§ 60.5920 How do I make sure my continuous emission monitoring systems are operating correctly?
(a) Conduct initial, daily, quarterly, and annual evaluations of your continuous emission monitoring systems that measure oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide and your continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate.
(b) Complete your initial evaluation of the continuous emission monitoring systems within 60 days after your municipal waste combustor reaches the maximum load level at which it will operate, but no later than 180 days after the initial startup of your municipal waste combustor, as specified under § 60.8 of subpart A of this part, or, for pollutants for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions and for which you previously determined compliance by conducting a performance test, within 180 days of notification of the Administrator of use of the continuous monitoring system, whichever is later.
(c) For initial and annual evaluations, you must collect data concurrently (or within 30 to 60 minutes) from: your oxygen (or carbon dioxide) continuous emission monitoring system; your sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide continuous emission monitoring systems, as appropriate; your continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate; and the appropriate test methods specified in Tables 3 and 4 to Subpart VVVV. Collect the data during each initial and annual evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems following the applicable performance specifications in Table 3 to Subpart VVVV
(d) For continuous emission monitoring systems that measure oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide, follow the quality assurance procedures in Procedure 1 of appendix F of this part for each continuous emission monitoring system. The procedures include annual relative accuracy test audit, daily calibration drift, and quarterly accuracy determinations. For continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate, follow the quality assurance procedures of the applicable procedures of appendix F as specified in Table 3 to Subpart VVVV or the site-specific monitoring plan.
§ 60.5925 What is my schedule for evaluating continuous emission monitoring systems?
(a) Conduct annual relative accuracy test audits of your continuous emission monitoring systems no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous performance test; you must complete five relative accuracy test audits in each 5-year calendar period.
(b) Evaluate your continuous emission monitoring systems daily and quarterly as specified in procedure 1 in appendix F of this part.
§ 60.5930 What must I do if I choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas?
You must establish the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide during the initial evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems. You may reestablish the relationship during annual performance compliance tests. To establish the relationship, use three procedures:
(a) Use EPA Reference Method 3, 3A or 3B in appendix A of this part, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), as applicable, to determine oxygen concentration at the location of your carbon dioxide monitor.
(b) Conduct at least three test runs for oxygen. Make sure each test run represents a 1-hour average and that sampling continues for at least 30 minutes in each hour.
(c) Use the fuel-factor equation in EPA Reference Method 3B in appendix A of this part to determine the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide.
§ 60.5935 What is the minimum amount of monitoring data I must collect with my continuous emission monitoring systems?
(a) Where continuous emission monitoring systems are required, obtain 1-hour arithmetic averages. Make sure the averages for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide, and, if you elect to continuously monitor emissions, the averages for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, are in the units specified in Tables 1 and 2 to Subpart VVVV at 7 percent oxygen (or the equivalent carbon dioxide level). Use the 1-hour averages of oxygen (or carbon dioxide) data from your continuous emission monitoring system to determine the actual oxygen (or carbon dioxide) level and to calculate emissions at 7 percent oxygen (or the equivalent carbon dioxide level). The 1-hour arithmetic averages shall be calculated using the data points required under § 60.13(e)(2) of subpart A of this part. Do not correct CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, to 7 percent oxygen. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown are used as measured.
(b) Obtain at least two data points per hour in order to calculate a valid 1-hour arithmetic average.
(c) Valid continuous monitoring system hourly averages shall be obtained for all times the affected facility is operated except as specified in § 60.13(e).
(d) If you do not obtain the minimum data required in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, you must still use all valid data from the continuous emission monitoring systems in calculating emission concentrations in accordance with § 60.5940.
§ 60.5940 How do I convert my 1-hour arithmetic averages into the appropriate averaging times and units?
(a) Use equation 1 in § 60.6140(a) to calculate emissions at 7 percent oxygen.
(b) Use the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV to calculate the 24-hr daily geometric average concentrations and percent reductions of sulfur dioxide emissions and the 24-hr daily arithmetic average for concentrations of nitrogen oxides.
(c) Calculate the 4-hour block or 24-hour daily arithmetic averages specified in Table 1 to Subpart VVVV (as applicable) from 1-hour arithmetic averages expressed in parts per million by volume corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis) for concentrations of carbon monoxide. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen, and are used as measured.
(d) If you elect to continuously monitor emissions of particulate matter, mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride, use EPA Reference Method 19, section 12.4.1, in appendix A of this part, to calculate a 24-hour daily block arithmetic average for emission concentrations.
§ 60.5945 What is required for my continuous opacity monitoring system and how are the data used?
(a) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous opacity monitoring system.
(b) Install, evaluate, and operate each continuous opacity monitoring system according to § 60.13.
(c) The output of the continuous opacity monitoring system shall be recorded on a 6-minute average basis.
(d) Complete an initial evaluation of your continuous opacity monitoring system according to Performance Specification 1 in appendix B of this part. Complete the evaluation no later than 180 days after the date of the initial startup of the municipal waste combustor, as specified under § 60.8.
(e) Follow Table 4 to Subpart VVVV to establish the procedures and test methods to determine compliance with the opacity limit in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV. The data obtained from your continuous opacity monitoring system are not used to determine compliance with the opacity limit.
§ 60.5950 What additional requirements must I meet for the operation of my continuous emission monitoring systems and continuous opacity monitoring system?
(a) Use the required span values and applicable performance specifications in Table 3 to Subpart VVVV.
(b) For continuous emission monitoring systems measuring carbon monoxide, if your municipal waste combustor is subject to the 100 parts per million dry volume carbon monoxide standard, the relative accuracy criterion of 5 parts per million dry volume is calculated as the absolute value of the mean difference between the reference method and continuous emission monitoring systems.
§ 60.5955 What must I do if any of my continuous emission monitoring systems are temporarily unavailable to meet the data collection requirements?
(a) When you are unable to obtain emissions of particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, or nitrogen oxides because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator or EPA Reference Method 19 and provide, as necessary, valid emissions data for all times that the municipal waste combustor is operated.
(b) If you are unable to obtain emissions of carbon monoxide emissions because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator or EPA Reference Method 10 and provide, as necessary, valid emissions data for all times that the municipal waste combustor is operated.
(c) If you elect to continuously monitor mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride and you are unable to obtain emissions data because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator.
Stack Testing
§ 60.5960 What types of stack tests must I conduct?
Conduct initial and annual stack tests to measure the emission levels of particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, dioxins/furans, and fugitive ash in accordance with the methods specified in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV.
§ 60.5965 How are the stack test data used?
You must use results of stack tests for particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, dioxins/furans, and fugitive ash to demonstrate compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV. When calculating total dioxins/furans, zero may be used for congeners that are below the estimated detection limit (EDL). For estimated maximum possible concentration (EMPC) results, zero may be used when the EMPC is below the EDL, otherwise the EMPC must be used in determining total dioxins/furans. To demonstrate compliance for carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, and sulfur dioxide, see § 60.5910.
§ 60.5970 What schedule must I follow for the stack testing?
(a) Conduct initial stack tests for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and each of the pollutants listed in § 60.5960 within 60 days after your municipal waste combustor reaches the maximum load level at which it will operate, but no later than 180 days after its initial startup.
(b) Conduct annual stack tests for the each of the pollutants listed in § 60.5960 after the initial stack test. Conduct each annual stack test no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous performance test, except as specified in § 60.5985 of this section. You must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period.
§ 60.5975 What procedures and test methods must I use to stack test?
(a) Follow Table 4 to Subpart VVVV to establish the procedures and test methods, and other specific testing requirements for the different pollutants.
(b) Stack tests for all the pollutants must consist of at least three test runs, as specified in § 60.8, conducted under representative full load operating conditions. For particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, and dioxins/furans use the arithmetic average of the pollutant emission concentrations from the three test runs to determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV. For fugitive ash, use the arithmetic average duration of visible emissions per hour as calculated from three 1-hr observations to determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV.
(c) Obtain an oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement at the same time as your pollutant measurements to determine diluent gas levels, as specified in § 60.5910.
(d) You may request that compliance with emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.5930.
(e) Use equation 1 in § 60.6140(a) to calculate emission levels at 7 percent oxygen (or an equivalent carbon dioxide basis). See the individual test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV for other required equations.
§ 60.5980 May I conduct stack testing less often?
(a) For annual performance stack tests for dioxins/furans, you may conduct annual stack tests on an alternate performance testing schedule for the purposes of evaluating system performance to establish new operating parameter levels, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. You may test one unit for dioxins/furans and apply the dioxins/furans operating parameters to similarly designed and equipped units on site if you meet both of the following conditions. First, you have multiple municipal waste combustors onsite that are subject to this subpart. Second, all those municipal waste combustors have demonstrated levels of dioxins/furans emissions less than or equal to 5.5 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) for 2 consecutive years. In that case, you may choose to conduct annual stack tests on only one municipal waste combustor per year at your facility. The provision only applies to performance stack testing for dioxins/furans emissions. You must meet the requirements in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section.
(b) At a minimum, you must conduct a performance test for dioxins/furans emissions for one municipal waste combustor on an annual basis (no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 months following the previous performance test), and you must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period. Each year a different municipal waste combustor must be tested, and the municipal waste combustors must be tested in sequence (e.g., unit 1, unit 2, unit 3, as applicable).
(1) If each annual performance test continues to indicate a dioxins/furans emission level less than or equal to 5.5 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass), you may continue to conduct a performance test on only one municipal waste combustor per year.
(2) If any annual performance test indicates a dioxins/furans emission level greater than 5.5 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass), you must conduct all subsequent annual performance tests on all municipal waste combustors. You must continue to conduct performance tests on all units annually until you can demonstrate dioxins/furans emission level less than or equal to 5.5 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) through performance tests for all units subject to this subpart for 2 consecutive years.
(c) Upon meeting the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section for one affected facility, you may elect to apply the average carbon mass feed rate and associated carbon injection system operating parameter levels for dioxins/furans as established in § 60.6005 to similarly designed and equipped units on site.
(d) Upon testing each subsequent unit in accordance with the testing schedule established in paragraph (b) of this section, the dioxins/furans and mercury emissions of the subsequent unit must not exceed the dioxins/furans and mercury emissions measured in the most recent test of that unit prior to the revised operating parameter limits.
(e) If you follow the performance testing schedule specified in paragraph (b) of this section and apply the carbon injection system operating parameters to similarly designed and equipped units on site, you must follow the procedures specified in § 60.6090(j) for reporting, including the procedures specified in § 60.6090(i) for reporting the selection of this schedule.
§ 60.5985 May I conduct continuous monitoring or sampling in lieu of stack testing?
(a) In lieu of conducting performance stack tests according to the requirements of § 60.5960 to demonstrate continuous compliance for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you may install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emissions monitoring systems for monitoring emissions according to the requirements of § 60.5905 through § 60.5955. If you elect to continuously monitor emissions instead of conducting performance testing, you are not required to complete annual performance testing as specified in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV. If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter emissions, you are not required to continuously monitor opacity as specified in § 60.5905(d) and § 60.5945.
(b) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must also meet the following requirements:
(1) Notify the Administrator one month before starting use of the system.
(2) Notify the Administrator one month before stopping use of the system.
(c) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, develop and submit for approval by EPA, a site-specific mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride monitoring plan that addresses the elements and requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) Installation of the continuous emission monitoring system sampling probe or other interface at a measurement location relative to each municipal waste combustor such that the measurement is representative of control of the exhaust emissions (e.g., on or downstream of the last control device).
(2) Performance and equipment specifications for the sample interface, the pollutant concentration analyzer, and the data collection and reduction system.
(3) Performance evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria (e.g., calibrations).
(4) Provisions for periods when the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control, including the requirements described in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section:
(i) A continuous emission monitoring system is out of control if either of the following conditions are met: the zero (low-level), mid-level (if applicable), or high-level calibration drift exceeds two times the applicable calibration drift specification in the applicable performance specification or in the relevant standard; or the continuous emission monitoring system fails a performance test audit (e.g., cylinder gas audit), relative accuracy audit, relative accuracy test audit, or linearity test audit.
(ii) When the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control, you must take corrective action and repeat all necessary tests that indicate that the system is out of control until the performance requirements are within the applicable limits. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the hour you conduct a performance check (e.g., calibration drift) that indicates an exceedance of the performance requirements established under this part. The end of the out-of-control period is the hour following the completion of corrective action and your successful demonstration that the system is within the allowable limits. You may not use recorded data from the period the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control in data averages and calculations or to meet any data availability requirements.
(iii) You must submit all information concerning out-of-control periods for your continuous emission monitoring system, including start and end dates and hours and descriptions of corrective actions taken, in the annual or semiannual compliance reports required in § 60.6105(d).
(5) Ongoing data quality assurance procedures for continuous emission monitoring systems as described in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A continuous emission monitoring system quality control program. You must develop and submit to EPA for approval, upon request, a site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous emission monitoring system performance evaluation required under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section. In addition, each quality control program shall include, at a minimum, a written protocol that describes procedures for each of the operations described in paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) through (c)(5)(i)(F) of this section.
(A) Initial and any subsequent calibration of the continuous emission monitoring system;
(B) Determination and adjustment of the calibration drift of the continuous emission monitoring system;
(C) Preventive maintenance of the continuous emission monitoring system, including spare parts inventory;
(D) Data recording, calculations, and reporting;
(E) Accuracy audit procedures, including sampling and analysis methods; and
(F) Program of corrective action for a malfunctioning continuous emission monitoring system.
(ii) Your performance evaluation test plan must include the evaluation program objectives, an evaluation program summary, the performance evaluation schedule, data quality objectives, and both an internal and external quality assurance program. Data quality objectives are the pre-evaluation expectations of precision, accuracy, and completeness of data. The internal quality assurance program must include, at a minimum, the activities planned by routine operators and analysts to provide an assessment of continuous emission monitoring system performance, for example, plans for relative accuracy testing using the appropriate reference method in § 60.5920(c). The external quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, systems audits that include the opportunity for on-site evaluation by the Administrator of instrument calibration, data validation, sample logging, and documentation of quality control data and field maintenance activities.
(6) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous emission monitoring system in accordance with the site-specific monitoring plan.
(7) You must operate and maintain the continuous emission monitoring system in continuous operation according to the site-specific monitoring plan and procedures 5 and 6 of appendix F of this part.
(d) You may use a continuous emission monitoring system for mercury or hydrogen chloride following the date of approval of the site-specific monitoring plan required in paragraph (c) of this section. You may use a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium or lead following the date a final performance specification applicable to a cadmium or lead monitor is published in the Federal Register and the date of approval of the site-specific monitoring plan required in paragraph (c) of this section.
(e) In lieu of conducting performance stack tests according to the requirements of § 60.5960 to demonstrate continuous compliance for mercury or dioxins/furans, you may install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for monitoring mercury or dioxins/furans emissions and record the output of the system. For dioxins/furans emissions, you must also analyze the sample using EPA Method 23.
(f) You may use a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans following the date a final performance specification applicable to dioxins/furans from monitors is published in the Federal Register or the date of approval of a site-specific monitoring plan.
(g) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must meet the following requirements:
(1) Notify the Administrator one month before starting use of the system.
(2) Notify the Administrator one month before stopping use of the system.
(3) Complete your initial performance evaluation of the continuous automated sampling system no later than 180 days after the date of initial startup of your municipal waste combustor, as specified under § 60.8 of subpart A of this part, or, if you previously determined compliance by conducting a performance test, within 180 days of notification to the Administrator of use of the continuous automated sampling system, whichever is later.
(4) You may request that compliance with the emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.5930.
(5) Conduct an initial performance test for emissions as required under § 60.8 of subpart A of this part. Determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV using the continuous automated sampling system specified in paragraph (e) of this section to collect integrated samples and analyze emissions for the following time periods:
(i) For dioxins/furans, collect an integrated sample over each 2-week period. Analyze the collected samples using Method 23.
(ii) For mercury, collect an integrated sample over each 24-hour daily period. Analyze the sample according to the applicable final performance specification or the approved site-specific monitoring plan required by paragraph (h) of this section.
(6) Determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV based on 2-week emission concentrations for dioxins/furans and on the 24-hour daily emission concentrations for mercury using samples collected at the system outlet. For mercury percent reductions, also use the corresponding 24-hour daily emission concentration samples collected at the system inlet. The emission concentrations shall be expressed in nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) for dioxins/furans and micrograms per dry standard cubic meter for mercury, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis). Do not correct CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown to 7 percent oxygen. CEMs data during warmup, startup, and shutdown are used as measured.
(7) Beginning on the date two years after the final performance specification for continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans is published in the Federal Register or on the date two years after approval of a site-specific monitoring plan, you must operate your continuous automated sampling system and collect emissions for all times that your municipal waste combustor is operating.
(8) Use all valid data in calculating emission concentrations.
(9) For mercury, operate the continuous automated sampling system according to Performance Specification 12B in appendix B of this part or, for mercury or dioxins/furans, the approved site-specific monitoring plan.
(10) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, develop and implement a site-specific monitoring plan as specified in paragraph (h) of this section. If you rely on a performance specification, you may refer to that document in addressing the applicable procedures and criteria. For mercury, you must incorporate procedure 5 of appendix F to this part into the site-specific monitoring plan.
(11) When you are unable to obtain emissions data because of continuous automated sampling system breakdowns, repairs, quality assurance checks, or adjustments, you must obtain parametric monitoring data by using other monitoring systems as approved by EPA.
(h) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, develop and submit for approval by EPA a site-specific monitoring plan that has sufficient detail to assure the validity of the continuous automated sampling system data and that addresses the elements and requirements in paragraphs (h)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) Installation of the continuous automated sampling system sampling probe or other interface at a measurement location relative to each municipal waste combustor such that the measurement is representative of control of the exhaust emissions (e.g., on or downstream of the last control device).
(2) Performance and equipment specifications for the sample interface, the pollutant concentration analytical method, and the data collection system.
(3) Performance evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria.
(4) Provisions for periods when the continuous automated sampling system is malfunctioning or is out of control, including the requirements described in paragraphs (h)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The site-specific monitoring plan must identify criteria for determining that the continuous automated sampling system is out of control, including periods when the sampling system is not collecting a representative sample or is malfunctioning, or when the analytical method does not meet site-specific quality criteria established in paragraph (h)(5) of this section.
(ii) When the continuous automated sampling system is out of control, take corrective action and repeat all necessary tests that indicate that the system is out of control until the performance requirements are within the applicable limits. The out-of-control period includes all hours that the sampling system was not collecting a representative sample or was malfunctioning, or hours represented by a sample for which the analysis did not meet the relevant quality criteria. You may not use emissions data from the period the continuous automated sampling system is out-of-control period to determine compliance with the emission limits or to meet any data availability requirements.
(iii) You must submit all information concerning out-of-control periods for your continuous automated sampling system, including start and end dates and hours, estimates of emissions during the out-of-control period and the basis of the estimate, and descriptions of corrective actions taken, in the annual or semiannual compliance reports required in § 60.6105(d).
(5) Ongoing data quality assurance procedures for continuous automated sampling systems as described in paragraphs (h)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A continuous automated sampling system and analysis quality control program. You must develop and submit to EPA for approval, upon request, a site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous automated sampling system performance evaluation required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section. In addition, each quality control program shall include, at a minimum, a written protocol that describes procedures for each of the operations described in paragraphs (h)(5)(i)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) Correct placement, installation of the continuous automated sampling system such that the system is collecting a representative sample of gas;
(B) Initial and subsequent calibration of flow such that the sample collection rate of the continuous automated sampling system is known and verifiable;
(C) Procedures to assure representative (e.g., proportional or isokinetic) sampling;
(D) Preventive maintenance of the continuous automated sampling system, including spare parts inventory and procedures for cleaning equipment, replacing sample collection media, or other servicing at the end of each sample collection period;
(E) Data recording and reporting, including an automated indicator and recording device to show when the continuous automated monitoring system is operating and collecting data and when it is not collecting data;
(F) Accuracy audit procedures for analytical methods; and
(G) Program of corrective action for a malfunctioning continuous automated sampling system.
(ii) Your performance evaluation test plan must include the evaluation program objectives, an evaluation program summary, the performance evaluation schedule, data quality objectives, and both an internal and external quality assurance program. Data quality objectives are the pre-evaluation expectations of precision, accuracy, and completeness of data. The internal quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, the activities planned by routine operators and analysts to provide an assessment of continuous automated sampling system performance, for example, plans for relative accuracy testing using the appropriate reference method in paragraph (g)(3) of this section, and an assessment of quality of analysis results. The external quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, systems audits that include the opportunity for on-site evaluation by the Administrator of instrument calibration, data validation, sample logging, and documentation of quality control data and field maintenance activities.
(6) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous automated sampling system in accordance with the site-specific monitoring plan.
(7) You must operate and maintain the continuous automated sampling system in continuous operation according to the site-specific monitoring plan.
Other Monitoring Requirements
§ 60.5990 Must I meet other requirements for continuous monitoring?
You must also monitor all the following three operating parameters:
(a) Load level of each municipal waste combustor.
(b) Temperature of flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter air pollution control device.
(c) Carbon feed rate if activated carbon is used to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
§ 60.5995 How do I monitor the load of my municipal waste combustor?
(a) If your municipal waste combustor generates steam, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a steam flowmeter or a feed water flowmeter and meet all the following five requirements:
(1) Continuously measure and record the measurements of steam (or feed water) flow in kilograms (or pounds) per hour.
(2) Calculate your steam (or feed water) flow in 4-hour block arithmetic averages.
(3) Calculate the steam (or feed water) flow rate using the method in “American Society of Mechanical Engineers Power Test Codes: Test Code for Steam Generating Units, Power Test Code 4.1—1964 (R1991),” section 4 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(4) Design, construct, install, calibrate, and use nozzles or orifices for flow rate measurements, using the recommendations in “American Society of Mechanical Engineers Interim Supplement 19.5 on Instruments and Apparatus: Application, part II of Fluid Meters,” 6th Edition (1971), chapter 4 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17).
(5) Before each dioxins/furans performance stack test, or at least once a year, calibrate all signal conversion elements associated with steam (or feed water) flow measurements according to the manufacturer instructions. Measurement devices such as flow nozzles and orifices are not required to be recalibrated after they are installed.
(b) Determine the maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load during the initial performance test for dioxins/furans and each subsequent performance test specified in § 60.5970 during which you achieve compliance with the dioxins/furans emission limit in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV. The maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load is the highest 4-hour arithmetic average load achieved during four consecutive hours during the most recent test. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.5980, you may apply the same maximum municipal waste combustor load from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
§ 60.6000 How do I monitor the temperature of flue gases at the inlet of my particulate matter control device?
(a) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a device to continuously measure the temperature of the flue gas stream at the inlet of each particulate matter control device.
(b) Calculate the temperature of the flue gas stream in 4-hour block arithmetic averages.
(c) Determine the maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature for each particulate matter control device during the initial performance test for dioxins/furans and each subsequent performance test specified in § 60.5970 during which you achieve compliance with the dioxins/furans emission limit. The maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature is the highest 4-hour arithmetic average temperature achieved at the particulate matter control device inlet during four consecutive hours during the most recent test. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.5980, you may apply the same maximum particulate matter control device temperature from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
§ 60.6005 How do I monitor the injection rate of activated carbon?
If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must meet three requirements:
(a) Select a carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that can be used to calculate carbon feed rate (for example, screw feeder speed, hopper volume, or hopper refill frequency).
(b) During the initial and each subsequent dioxins/furans and mercury performance stack test specified in § 60.5970, estimate an average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. You must determine an average operating parameter level that correlates to the carbon feed rate and establish a relationship between the operating parameter(s) and the carbon feed rate in order to estimate the average carbon feed rate. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.5980, you may apply the same estimated average carbon mass feed rate from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
(c) Continuously monitor the selected carbon injection operating parameter(s) (as specified in paragraph (b) of this section) during all periods when the municipal waste combustor is operating and combusting waste, and calculate the 8-hour block average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour, based on the selected operating parameter. The 8-hour block average must equal or exceed the level(s) documented during the performance tests specified under paragraph (b) of this section, except that during the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the limit for average mass carbon feed rate may be waived following permission of the Administrator if the tests are for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions.
(d) You must estimate the total carbon usage of the facility (kilograms or pounds) for each calendar quarter using two independent methods:
(1) The weight of carbon delivered to the facility.
(2) Estimate the average carbon mass feed rate in kilograms per hour or pounds per hour for each hour of operation for each municipal waste combustor, based on the selected carbon injection operating parameter(s) specified in paragraph (b) of this section, and as specified in equation 2 to § 60.6140.
(e) Use pneumatic injection pressure or another carbon injection system operational indicator for additional verification of proper carbon injection system operation. The operational indicator must provide an instantaneous visual and/or audible alarm to alert the operator of a potential interruption in the carbon feed that would not normally be indicated by direct monitoring of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., continuous weight loss feeder) or monitoring of the carbon system operating parameter(s) that are the indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed). The carbon injection system operational indicator used to provide additional verification of carbon injection system operation, including basis for selecting the indicator and operator response to the indicator alarm, shall be included in the site-specific operating manual required under § 60.5855 of this subpart.
§ 60.6010 What is the minimum amount of monitoring data I must collect with my continuous parameter monitoring systems?
(a) Where continuous parameter monitoring systems are used, obtain 1-hour arithmetic averages for all the following three parameters:
(1) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(2) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter control device.
(3) Carbon feed rate if activated carbon is used to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
(b) Obtain at least two data points per hour in order to calculate a valid 1-hour arithmetic average.
(c) Obtain valid 1-hour arithmetic averages for at least 75 percent of the operating hours per day for 90 percent of the operating days per calendar quarter.
§ 60.6015 What requirements must I meet for estimating my municipal waste combustor capacity?
(a) You must calculate the capacity for each continuous municipal waste combustor (e.g., capable of combusting continuously for a 24-hour period) based on 24 hours of operation at the maximum charging rate. You must determine the maximum charging rate differently for combustors that are designed based on heat capacity and for combustors that are not designed based on heat capacity.
(1) For combustors that are designed based on heat capacity, calculate the maximum charging rate based on the maximum design heat input capacity of the unit and a heating value of 12,800 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing refuse-derived fuel, or a heating value of 10,500 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing municipal solid waste that is not refuse-derived fuel.
(2) For combustors that are not designed based on heat capacity, the maximum charging rate is the maximum design charging rate.
(b) You must calculate the capacity for each batch feed municipal waste combustor based on the maximum design amount of municipal solid waste that can be charged per batch multiplied by the maximum number of batches that could be processed in a 24-hour period.
(1) You must calculate the maximum number of batches that could be processed in a 24-hour period by dividing 24 hours by the design number of hours required to process one batch of municipal solid waste. The maximum number of batches may include a fraction (e.g., if one batch requires 16 hours, then 24/16, or 1.5 batches, could be combusted in a 24-hour period).
(2) For batch combustors that are designed based on heat capacity, calculate the municipal waste combustor capacity in megagrams per day, based on the design heating value of 12,800 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing refuse-derived fuel or a heating value of 10,500 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing municipal solid waste that is not refuse-derived fuel.
Recordkeeping
§ 60.6020 What records must I keep?
You must keep all the following five types of records:
(a) Notification of construction, materials separation plan, and siting analysis.
(b) Operator training and certification.
(c) Stack tests.
(d) Continuously monitored pollutants and parameters.
(e) Carbon feed rate.
§ 60.6025 Where must I keep my records and for how long?
(a) Keep all records onsite in paper copy or electronic format unless the Administrator approves another format. Any records required to be maintained by this subpart that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(b) Keep all records on each municipal waste combustor for at least 5 years.
(c) Make all records available for submittal to the Administrator, or for onsite review by an inspector.
§ 60.6030 What records must I keep for the materials separation plan and siting analysis?
You must keep records of all the following five items:
(a) The date of each record.
(b) The final materials separation plan.
(c) The final siting analysis.
(d) A record of the location and date of the public meetings.
(e) Your responses to the public comments received during the public comment periods for the materials separation plan and siting analysis.
§ 60.6035 What records must I keep for operator training and certification?
You must keep records of all the following six items:
(a) Records of provisional certifications. Include three items:
(1) Names of the municipal waste combustor chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who are provisionally certified by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or an equivalent state-approved certification program.
(2) Dates of the initial and renewal provisional certifications.
(3) Documentation showing current provisional certifications.
(b) Records of full certifications. Include three items:
(1) Names of the chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who are fully certified by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or an equivalent state-approved certification program.
(2) Dates of initial and renewal full certifications.
(3) Documentation showing current full certifications.
(c) Records showing completion of the operator training course. Include three items:
(1) Names of the chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who have completed the EPA or state municipal waste combustion operator training course.
(2) Dates of completion of the operator training course.
(3) Documentation showing completion of the operator training course.
(d) Records of reviews for site-specific operating manuals. Include all the following three items:
(1) Names of persons who have reviewed the operating manual.
(2) Date of the initial review.
(3) Dates of subsequent annual reviews.
(e) Records of when a certified operator is temporarily offsite. Include two main items:
(1) If the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 12 hours, but for 2 weeks or less, and no other certified operator is onsite, record the dates that the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor were offsite.
(2) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 2 weeks and no other certified operator is onsite, keep records of all the following four items:
(i) Time of day that all certified persons are offsite.
(ii) The conditions that cause those people to be offsite.
(iii) The corrective actions you are taking to ensure a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor is onsite as soon as practicable.
(iv) Copies of the written reports submitted every 4 weeks that summarize the actions taken to ensure that a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor will be onsite as soon as practicable.
(f) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
§ 60.6040 What records must I keep for stack tests?
For stack tests required under § 60.5960, you must keep records of all the following four items:
(a) The results of the initial and annual performance stack tests for eight pollutants or parameters recorded in the appropriate units of measure specified in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV:
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead.
(4) Mercury.
(5) Opacity.
(6) Particulate matter.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(b) Test reports including supporting calculations that document the results of all stack tests.
(c) The maximum demonstrated load of your municipal waste combustor and maximum temperature at the inlet of your particulate matter control device during all stack tests for dioxins/furans emissions.
(d) The calendar date of each record.
§ 60.6045 What records must I keep for continuously monitored pollutants or parameters?
You must keep records of all the following eight items:
(a) Records of monitoring data. Document all the following eight parameters measured using continuous monitoring systems:
(1) All 6-minute average levels of opacity.
(2) All 1-hour average concentrations of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(3) All 1-hour average concentrations of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(4) All 1-hour average concentrations of carbon monoxide emissions.
(5) All 1-hour average load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(6) All 1-hour average flue gas temperatures at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(7) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 1-hour average concentrations of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(8) If you monitor emissions with a CEMS, you must indicate which data are CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown.
(b) Records of average concentrations. Document seven parameters:
(1) All 24-hour daily block geometric average concentrations and percent reductions of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) All 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentrations of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) All 4-hour block or 24-hour daily block arithmetic average concentrations of carbon monoxide emissions, as applicable.
(4) All 4-hour block arithmetic average load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) All 4-hour block arithmetic average flue gas temperatures at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentrations and percent reductions, as appropriate, of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(7) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system to monitor mercury or dioxins/furans instead of conducting performance testing, all integrated 24-hour mercury concentrations (or percent reductions) or all integrated 2-week dioxins/furans concentrations.
(c) Records of exceedances. Document all the following three items:
(1) Calendar dates whenever any of the seven pollutant or parameter levels recorded in paragraph (b) of this section or the opacity level recorded in paragraph (a)(1) of this section did not meet the emission limits or operating levels specified in this subpart.
(2) Reasons you exceeded the applicable emission limits or operating levels.
(3) Corrective actions you took, or are taking, to meet the emission limits or operating levels.
(d) Records of minimum data. Document three items:
(1) Calendar dates for which you did not collect the minimum amount of data required under §§ 60.5935 and 60.6010. Record the dates for the following types of pollutants and parameters:
(i) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(ii) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(iii) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(iv) Load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(v) Temperatures of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(vi) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance tests, the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vii) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, dates and times when the sampling systems were not operating or were not collecting a valid sample.
(2) Reasons you did not collect the minimum data.
(3) Corrective actions you took, or are taking, to obtain the required amount of data.
(e) Records of exclusions. Document each time you have excluded data from your calculation of averages for any of the following pollutants or parameters and the reasons the data were excluded:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperatures of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or who elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, instead of conducting performance tests:
(i) Particulate matter emissions data.
(ii) Cadmium emissions data.
(iii) Lead emissions data.
(iv) Mercury emissions data.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions data.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions data.
(f) Records of drift and accuracy. Document the results of your daily drift tests and quarterly accuracy determinations according to the following:
(1) For sulfur dioxides, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxides, according to Procedure 1 of appendix F of this part. Keep the records for the sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide continuous emissions monitoring systems.
(2) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter instead of conducting performance testing, according to Procedure 2, appendix F of this part. Keep the records for the particulate matter continuous emissions monitoring systems.
(3) If you elect to continuously monitor cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride instead of conducting performance testing, maintain the results of all quality evaluations, including daily drift tests and periodic accuracy determinations, specified in the approved site-specific performance evaluation test plan or as specified in Procedures 5 and 6 of appendix F of this part, as applicable.
(4) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the results of all quality evaluations specified in the approved site-specific performance evaluation test plan or Procedure 5 of appendix F of this part, as applicable.
(g) Records of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide. If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, document the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.5930.
(h) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
(i) Time system. All continuous monitoring systems data must be recorded using “local time” for the location where the municipal waste combustor is located, unless the Administrator approves an alternative time system.
(j) Additional recordkeeping for continuous cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride monitoring systems. In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (i) of this section, if you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must maintain the following additional records:
(1) All required continuous emission monitoring measurements (including monitoring data recorded during unavoidable continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns and out-of-control periods).
(2) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous emission monitoring system was inoperative except for zero (low-level) and high-level checks.
(3) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous emission monitoring system was out of control, as defined in § 60.5985.
(4) The date and time of commencement and completion of each period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) The date and time of commencement and completion of each time period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances, that occurs during periods other than warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(6) The nature and cause of any malfunction (if known).
(7) The corrective action taken to correct any malfunction or preventive measures adopted to prevent further malfunctions.
(8) The nature of the repairs or adjustments to the continuous emission monitoring system that was inoperative or out of control.
(9) All procedures that are part of a quality control program developed and implemented for the continuous emission monitoring system.
(10) When more than one continuous emission monitoring system is used to measure the emissions from one municipal waste combustor (e.g., multiple breechings, multiple outlets), record the results as required for each continuous emission monitoring system.
(k) Additional recordkeeping for continuous automated sampling systems. If you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must maintain the following additional records:
(1) All required 24-hour integrated mercury concentration (or percent reduction) or 2-week integrated dioxins/furans concentration data (including any data obtained during unavoidable system breakdowns and out-of-control periods).
(2) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous automated sampling system was inoperative.
(3) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous automated sampling system was out of control.
(4) The date and time of commencement and completion of each period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) The date and time of commencement and completion of each time period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during periods other than warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(6) The nature and cause of any malfunction (if known).
(7) The corrective action taken to correct any malfunction or preventive measures adopted to prevent further malfunctions.
(8) The nature of the repairs or adjustments to the continuous automated sampling system that was inoperative or out of control.
(9) All procedures that are part of a quality control program developed and implemented for the continuous automated sampling system.
(10) When more than one continuous automated sampling system is used to measure the emissions from one municipal waste combustor (e.g., multiple breechings, multiple outlets), record the results as required for each system.
§ 60.6050 What records must I keep for municipal waste combustors that use activated carbon?
For municipal waste combustors that use activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must keep records of all the following five items:
(a) Records of average carbon feed rate. Document five items:
(1) Average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour during all stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting calculations in the records.
(2) For the operating parameter chosen to monitor carbon feed rate, average operating level during all stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting data that document the relationship between the operating parameter and the carbon feed rate.
(3) Average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour estimated for each hour of operation. Include supporting calculations in the records.
(4) Total carbon usage for each calendar quarter as estimated in § 60.6005(d). Include supporting calculations in the records.
(5) Carbon injection system operating parameter data for the parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed).
(b) Records of low carbon feed rates. Document three items:
(1) The calendar dates when the average carbon feed rate was less than the average hourly carbon feed rates determined during the most recent stack test for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
(2) Reasons for the low carbon feed rates.
(3) Corrective actions you took, or are taking, to meet the average carbon feed rate requirement.
(c) Records of carbon injection system operating parameter indicators. Document three items:
(1) Calendar dates for which the carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed) recorded are below the level(s) estimated during the performance tests.
(2) Reasons for the occurrences.
(3) Corrective actions you took or are taking to meet the levels estimated during the performance tests.
(d) Records of exclusions. Document each time you have excluded data from your calculation of average carbon feed rates and the reasons the data were excluded.
(e) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
Reporting
§ 60.6055 What reports must I submit before I submit my notice of construction?
You must submit all the following five items on or before the date that the application for a construction permit is submitted under 40 CFR part 51, subpart I, or 40 CFR part 52, as applicable:
(a) Your preliminary draft materials separation plan, as specified in § 60.5745.
(b) Your revised materials separation plan, as specified in § 60.5765(c).
(c) Your notice of the initial public meeting for your draft materials separation plan, as specified in § 60.5750(b).
(d) A transcript of the initial public meeting, as specified in § 60.5760(f).
(e) A copy of the document that summarizes your responses to the public comments you received during the initial public comment period, as specified in § 60.5765(a).
§ 60.6060 What must I include in my notice of construction?
(a) Include all the following ten items:
(1) A statement of your intent to construct the municipal waste combustor.
(2) The planned initial startup date of your municipal waste combustor.
(3) The types of fuels you plan to combust in your municipal waste combustor.
(4) The capacity of your municipal waste combustor including supporting capacity calculations, as specified in § 60.6015.
(5) Your siting analysis, as specified in § 60.5805.
(6) Your final materials separation plan, as specified in § 60.5785.
(7) Your notice of the second public meeting (siting analysis meeting), as specified in § 60.5810(b).
(8) A transcript of the second public meeting, as specified in § 60.5820(d).
(9) A copy of the document that summarizes your responses to the public comments you received during the second public comment period, as specified in § 60.5825(a).
(10) Your final siting analysis, as specified in § 60.5825(c).
(b) Submit your notice of construction no later than 30 days after you commence construction, reconstruction, or modification of your municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.6065 What reports must I submit after I submit my notice of construction and in what form?
(a) Submit an initial report and annual reports, plus semiannual reports for any emission or parameter level that does not meet the limits specified in this subpart.
(b) Within 60 days after the date of completing each performance test or continuous emissions monitoring systems (CEMS) performance evaluation that includes a relative accuracy test audit (RATA), you must submit the results following the procedures specified in paragraph (d) of this section. Data collected using test methods and performance evaluations of CEMS measuring RATA pollutants that are supported by the EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) as listed on the EPA's ERT website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/electronic-reporting-tool-ert) at the time of the test or performance evaluation must be submitted in a file format generated using the EPA's ERT. Alternatively, you may submit an electronic file consistent with the extensible markup language (XML) schema listed on the EPA's ERT website. Data collected using test methods and performance evaluations of CEMS measuring RATA pollutants that are not supported by the EPA's ERT as listed on the EPA's ERT website at the time of the test or performance evaluation must be included as an attachment in the ERT or an alternate electronic file.
(c) For the semiannual and annual reports specified under paragraph (a) of this section, beginning on March 10, 2027 or once the report template for this subpart has been available on the Compliance and Emissions Data Reporting Interface (CEDRI) website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/cedri) for one year, whichever date is later, submit all subsequent reports using the appropriate electronic report template on the CEDRI website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in paragraph (d) of this section. The date report templates become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted by the deadline specified in this subpart, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(d) If you are required to submit notifications or reports following the procedure specified in this paragraph (d), you must submit notifications or reports to the EPA via the CEDRI website, which can be accessed through the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (https://cdx.epa.gov/). The EPA will make all the information submitted through CEDRI available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use CEDRI to submit information you claim as CBI. Although we do not expect persons to assert a claim of CBI, if you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in the report or notification, you must submit a complete file in the format specified in this subpart, including information claimed to be CBI, to the EPA following the procedures in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section. Clearly mark the part or all of the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using CEDRI cannot later be claimed CBI. Furthermore, under CAA section 114(c), emissions data is not entitled to confidential treatment, and the EPA is required to make emissions data available to the public. Thus, emissions data will not be protected as CBI and will be made publicly available. You must submit the same file submitted to the CBI office with the CBI omitted to the EPA via the EPA's CDX as described earlier in this paragraph (d).
(1) The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqps_cbi@epa.gov, and as described above, should include clear CBI markings. ERT files should be flagged to the attention of the Branch Manager, Measurement Strategies Branch; all other files should be flagged to the attention of the Large Municipal Waste Combustor Sector Lead. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqps_cbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link.
(2) If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: OAQPS Document Control Officer (C404-02), OAQPS, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. ERT files should be sent to the attention of the Branch Manager, Measurement Strategies Branch, and all other files should be sent to the attention of the Large Municipal Waste Combustor Sector Lead. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(e) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of EPA system outage for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of EPA system outage, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must have been or will be precluded from accessing CEDRI and submitting a required report within the time prescribed due to an outage of either the EPA's CEDRI or CDX systems.
(2) The outage must have occurred within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date that the submission is due.
(3) The outage may be planned or unplanned.
(4) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(5) You must provide to the Administrator a written description identifying:
(i) The date(s) and time(s) when CDX or CEDRI was accessed and the system was unavailable;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to EPA system outage;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(6) The decision to accept the claim of EPA system outage and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(7) In any circumstance, the report must be submitted electronically as soon as possible after the outage is resolved.
(f) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of force majeure for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of force majeure, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (f)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You may submit a claim if a force majeure event is about to occur, occurs, or has occurred or there are lingering effects from such an event within the period of time beginning 5 business days prior to the date the submission is due. For the purposes of this section, a force majeure event is defined as an event that will be or has been caused by circumstances beyond the control of the affected facility, its contractors, or any entity controlled by the affected facility that prevents you from complying with the requirement to submit a report electronically within the time period prescribed. Examples of such events are acts of nature (e.g., hurricanes, earthquakes, or floods), acts of war or terrorism, or equipment failure or safety hazard beyond the control of the affected facility (e.g., large scale power outage).
(2) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(3) You must provide to the Administrator:
(i) A written description of the force majeure event;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to the force majeure event;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(4) The decision to accept the claim of force majeure and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(5) In any circumstance, the reporting must occur as soon as possible after the force majeure event occurs.
(g) Keep a copy of all reports required by §§ 60.6080, 60.6090, and 60.6105 onsite for 5 years.
(h) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride or to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions instead of conducting performance tests, you must notify the Administrator one month prior to starting or stopping use of the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, and dioxins/furans continuous emission monitoring systems or continuous automated sampling systems.
(i) If you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must also submit to EPA for approval, the site-specific monitoring plan, including the site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous emission monitoring system or the continuous automated sampling system. You must maintain copies of the site-specific monitoring plan on record for the life of the municipal waste combustor to be made available for inspection, upon request, by the Administrator. If the site-specific monitoring plan is revised and approved, you must maintain the previous (i.e., superseded) versions of the plan on record to be made available for inspection, upon request, by the Administrator, for a period of 5 years after each revision to the plan.
§ 60.6070 What are the appropriate units of measurement for reporting my data?
See Tables 1 and 2 to Subpart VVVV for appropriate units of measurement.
§ 60.6075 When must I submit the initial performance test report?
As specified in § 60.8(a), submit your initial performance test report within 60 days after your municipal waste combustor reaches the maximum load level at which it will operate, but no later than 180 days after its initial startup.
§ 60.6080 What must I include in my initial performance test report?
You must include seven items:
(a) The emission levels measured on the date of the initial evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems for all of the following pollutants or parameters as recorded in accordance with § 60.6045(b).
(1) The 24-hour daily block geometric average concentration or percent reduction of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) The 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentration of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) The 4-hour block or 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentration of carbon monoxide emissions, as applicable.
(4) The 4-hour block arithmetic average load level of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) The 4-hour block arithmetic average flue gas temperature at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 1-hour average concentrations of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(7) If you monitor emissions with a CEMS, you must indicate which data are CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown.
(b) The results of the initial performance stack tests for eight pollutants or parameters (use appropriate units as specified in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV):
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead.
(4) Mercury.
(5) Opacity.
(6) Particulate matter.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(c) The test report that documents the initial stack tests including supporting calculations.
(d) The initial performance evaluation of your continuous emissions monitoring systems. Use the applicable performance specifications in appendix B of this part in conducting the evaluation.
(e) The maximum demonstrated load of your municipal waste combustor and the maximum demonstrated temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device. Use values established during your initial stack test for dioxins/furans emissions and include supporting calculations.
(f) If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, the average carbon mass feed rates that you recorded during the stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting calculations as specified in § 60.6050(a)(1) and (2).
(g) If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, documentation of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.5930.
§ 60.6085 When must I submit the annual report?
Submit the annual report no later than February 1 of each year that follows the calendar year in which you collected the data. If you have an operating permit for any unit under title V of the Clean Air Act (CAA), you must submit semiannual reports. Parts 70 and 71 of this chapter contain program requirements for permits.
§ 60.6090 What must I include in my annual report?
Summarize data collected for all pollutants and parameters regulated under this subpart. Your summary must include twelve items:
(a) A list of the results achieved during the annual stack test, using appropriate units, for eight pollutants, as recorded under § 60.6040(a):
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead.
(4) Mercury.
(5) Particulate matter.
(6) Opacity.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(b) List of the highest average levels recorded, in the appropriate units for the following pollutants or parameters:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device (4-hour block average).
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(c) For continuously monitored pollutants identified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) and (b)(6) of this section, a list of the block averages recorded during all operations for the reporting year, identifying measurements recorded during periods of warmup, startup, and shutdown as defined in this subpart.
(d) The highest 6-minute opacity level measured. Base the value on all 6-minute average opacity levels recorded by your continuous opacity monitoring system (§ 60.6045(a)(1)).
(e) The total number of hours per calendar quarter and hours per calendar year that you did not obtain valid data for the following pollutants or parameters. For each continuously monitored pollutant or parameter, the hours of valid emissions data per calendar quarter and per calendar year expressed as a percent of the hours per calendar quarter or year that the municipal waste combustor was operating and combusting municipal solid waste. Include data on:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(7) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the total number of hours per calendar quarter and hours per calendar year that the sampling systems were not operating or were not collecting a valid sample. Include the number of hours during which the continuous automated sampling system was operating and collecting a valid sample as a percent of hours per calendar quarter or year that the municipal waste combustor was operating and combusting municipal solid waste.
(f) The total number of hours you have excluded data from the calculation of average levels (include the reasons for excluding it). Include data for the following pollutants or parameters:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(7) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the total number of hours that the data for mercury and dioxins/furans were excluded from the calculation of average emission concentrations or parameters.
(g) A summary of the data in paragraphs (a) through (f), excluding (c), of this section from the year preceding the reporting year which gives the Administrator a summary of the performance of the municipal waste combustor over a 2-year period.
(h) A summary of any emission or parameter level, including the information specified in paragraphs (a) through (g) of this section, that did not meet the limits specified in this subpart.
(i) A notice of your intent to begin a reduced stack testing schedule for dioxins/furans emissions during the following calendar year, if you are eligible for alternative scheduling (§ 60.5980(a) or (b)).
(j) A notice of your intent to apply the average carbon mass feed rate and associated carbon injection system operating parameter levels to similarly designed and equipped units on site. (§ 60.5980(c)).
(k) If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, documentation of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.5930.
(l) Documentation of periods when all certified chief facility operators and certified shift supervisors are offsite for more than 12 hours.
§ 60.6095 What must I do if I am out of compliance with the requirements of this subpart?
You must submit a semiannual report on any recorded emission or parameter level that does not meet the requirements specified in this subpart.
§ 60.6100 If a semiannual report is required, when must I submit it?
(a) For data collected during the first half of a calendar year, submit your semiannual report by August 1 of that year.
(b) For data you collected during the second half of the calendar year, submit your semiannual report by February 1 of the following year.
§ 60.6105 What must I include in the semiannual out-of-compliance reports?
You must include all of the following items in the semiannual report:
(a) For any of the pollutants or parameters listed in paragraphs (a)(1)-(8) of this section that exceeded the limits specified in this subpart, include the calendar date they exceeded the limits, the reasons for exceeding the limits, and your corrective actions. You must also include the averaged and recorded data for that date:
(1) Concentration of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Concentration of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Concentration of carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) Average 6-minute opacity level. The data obtained from your continuous opacity monitoring system are not used to determine compliance with the limit on opacity emissions.
(7) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Concentration of particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Concentration of cadmium emissions.
(iii) Concentration of lead emissions.
(iv) Concentration of mercury emissions.
(v) Concentration of hydrogen chloride emissions.
(8) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system to monitor mercury or dioxins/furans instead of conducting performance testing, the integrated 24-hour mercury concentrations (or percent reductions) or the integrated 2-week dioxins/furans concentration.
(b) If the results of your annual stack tests (as recorded in § 60.6040(a)) show emissions above the limits specified in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV for dioxins/furans, cadmium, lead, mercury, particulate matter, opacity, hydrogen chloride, and fugitive ash, include a copy of the test report that documents the emission levels and your corrective actions. The semiannual report shall contain a statement indicating that pollutant levels were exceeded during the performance test and list which pollutant limits were exceeded and a copy of the performance test is no longer required.
(c) For municipal waste combustors that apply activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, include documentation of all dates when the carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed) are below the levels established during the most recent mercury and dioxins/furans stack test (as specified in § 60.6050(a)). Include four items:
(1) The average carbon mass feed rate (in kilograms per hour or pounds per hour) estimated for each hour of operation.
(2) Reasons for occurrences of low carbon feed rates.
(3) The corrective actions you have taken to meet the carbon feed rate requirement.
(4) The calendar date.
(d) If you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, submit information concerning all out-of-control periods for each continuous emission monitoring system or each continuous automated sampling system, including start and end dates and hours and descriptions of corrective actions taken.
§ 60.6110 Can reporting dates be changed?
(a) If the Administrator agrees, you may change the semiannual or annual reporting dates.
(b) See § 60.19(c) for procedures to seek approval to change your reporting date.
Air Curtain Incinerators That Burn 100 Percent Wood Waste, Clean Lumber, and/or Yard Waste
§ 60.6115 What is an air curtain incinerator?
An air curtain incinerator operates by forcefully projecting a curtain of air across an open chamber or pit in which combustion occurs. Incinerators of that type can be constructed above or below ground and with or without refractory walls and floor.
§ 60.6120 What is yard waste?
Yard waste is grass, grass clippings, bushes, shrubs, and clippings from bushes and shrubs. They come from residential, commercial/retail, institutional, or industrial sources as part of maintaining yards or other private or public lands. Yard waste does not include two items:
(a) Construction, renovation, and demolition wastes that are exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in § 60.6145.
(b) Clean wood that is exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in § 60.6145.
§ 60.6125 What are the emission limits for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
If your air curtain incinerator with a capacity to combust greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste combusts a fuel feed stream of 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, and no other municipal solid waste materials, you must meet only the emission limits in this section.
(a) Within 60 days after your air curtain incinerator reaches the maximum load level at which it will operate, but no later than 180 days after its initial startup, you must meet two limits:
(1) The opacity limit is 10 percent (6-minute average) except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(2) The opacity limit is 35 percent (6-minute average) during the startup period that is within the first 30 minutes of operation.
§ 60.6130 How must I monitor opacity for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
(a) Use the procedures specified in to Subpart VVVV to determine compliance with the opacity limit for air curtain incinerators under § 60.6125.
(b) Conduct an initial test for opacity as specified in § 60.8 of subpart A of this part.
(c) After the initial test for opacity, conduct annual tests (no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous test). You must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period.
§ 60.6135 What are the recordkeeping and reporting requirements for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
(a) Provide a notice of construction that includes four items:
(1) Your intent to construct the air curtain incinerator.
(2) Your planned initial startup date.
(3) Types of fuels you plan to combust in your air curtain incinerator.
(4) The capacity of your incinerator, including supporting capacity calculations, as specified in § 60.6015.
(b) Keep records of results of the initial opacity performance test and all subsequent opacity performance tests onsite in either paper copy or electronic format unless the Administrator approves another format.
(c) Keep all records for each incinerator for at least 5 years.
(d) Make all records available for submittal to the Administrator or for onsite review by an inspector.
(e) Submit the results (each 6-minute average) of the initial opacity performance test and all subsequent annual opacity performance tests by February 1 of the year following the year of the opacity emission test.
(f) Submit reports in either paper copy or electronic format on or before the applicable submittal date.
(g) If the Administrator agrees, you may change the annual reporting dates (see § 60.19(c)).
(h) Keep a copy of all reports onsite for a period of 5 years.
Equations
§ 60.6140 What equations must I use?
(a) Concentration correction to 7 percent oxygen. Correct any pollutant concentration to 7 percent oxygen using equation 1 of this section:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)
Where:
C7% = concentration corrected to 7 percent oxygen.
Cunc = uncorrected pollutant concentration.
CO2 = concentration of oxygen (percent).
(b) Quarterly carbon usage. If you use activated carbon to comply with the dioxins/furans or mercury limits, calculate the required quarterly usage of carbon using equation 2 of this section for facility basis or equation 3 of this section for unit basis:
(1) Facility basis.
Equation 2 to Paragraph (b)(1)
Where:
C = required quarterly carbon usage for the facility in kilograms (or pounds).
fi = required carbon feed rate for the municipal waste combustor in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. That is the average carbon feed rate during the most recent mercury or dioxins/furans stack tests (whichever has a higher feed rate).
hi = number of hours the municipal waste combustor was in operation during the calendar quarter (hours).
n = number of municipal waste combustors, i, located at your plant.
(2) Unit basis.
Equation 3 to Paragraph (b)(2)
Where:
C = required quarterly carbon usage for the unit in kilograms (or pounds).
f = required carbon feed rate for the municipal waste combustor in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. That is the average carbon feed rate during the most recent mercury or dioxins/furans stack tests (whichever has a higher feed rate).
h = number of hours the municipal waste combustor was in operation during the calendar quarter (hours).
(c) Percent Reduction. If you opt to comply with the alternative percent reduction standards for hydrogen chloride, mercury or sulfur dioxide, use the following equation to calculate the percent reduction:
Equation 4 to Paragraph (c)
Where:
%P(HCl, Hg, SO2) = percent reduction of pollutant being measured, either hydrogen chloride, mercury or sulfur dioxide.
Ei = emission concentration of measured pollutant at inlet to the applicable control device, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis).
Eo = emission concentration of measured pollutant at the outlet of the applicable control device, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis).
Definitions
§ 60.6145 What definitions apply to this subpart?
Terms used but not defined in this section are defined in the CAA and in subparts A and B of this part.
Administrator means:
(1) For approved and effective state plans, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency that is delegated the authority to perform the specified task;
(2) For federal plans, the Administrator of the EPA, an employee of the EPA, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency to whom the authority has been delegated by the Administrator of the EPA to perform the specified task; and
(3) For NSPS, the Administrator of the EPA, an employee of the EPA, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency to whom the authority has been delegated by the Administrator of the EPA to perform the specified task.
Air curtain incinerator means an incinerator that operates by forcefully projecting a curtain of air across an open chamber or pit in which burning occurs. Incinerators of that type can be constructed above or below ground and with or without refractory walls and floor.
Batch municipal waste combustor means a municipal waste combustor designed so it cannot combust municipal solid waste continuously 24 hours per day because the design does not allow waste to be fed to the unit or ash to be removed during combustion.
Bubbling fluidized bed combustor means a fluidized bed combustor in which the majority of the bed material remains in a fluidized state in the primary combustion zone.
Calendar quarter means a consecutive 3-month period (nonoverlapping) beginning on January 1, April 1, July 1, and October 1.
Calendar year means the period including 365 days starting January 1 and ending on December 31.
CEMS means continuous emissions monitoring system.
CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown means CEMS data collected during periods of operation defined within this subpart as warmup, startup or shutdown.
Chief facility operator means the person in direct charge and control of the operation of a municipal waste combustor and who is responsible for daily onsite supervision, technical direction, management, and overall performance of the facility.
Circulating fluidized bed combustor means a fluidized bed combustor in which the majority of the fluidized bed material is carried out of the primary combustion zone and is transported back to the primary zone through a recirculation loop.
Clean wood means untreated wood or untreated wood products including clean or untreated lumber (as defined in this subpart), tree stumps (whole or chipped), and tree limbs (whole or chipped). Clean wood does not include yard waste, which is defined elsewhere in this section, wood products that have been painted, pigment-stained, or pressure-treated by compounds such as chromate copper arsenate, pentachlorophenol, and creosote, or construction, renovation, and demolition wastes (including but not limited to railroad ties and telephone poles), which are exempt from the definition of municipal solid waste in this section.
Cofired combustor means a unit combusting municipal solid waste with nonmunicipal solid waste fuel (e.g., coal, industrial process waste) and subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting the unit to combusting a fuel feed stream, 30 percent or less of the weight of which is comprised, in aggregate, of municipal solid waste as measured on a calendar quarter basis.
Continuous automated sampling system means the total equipment and procedures for automated sample collection and sample recovery/analysis to determine a pollutant concentration or emission rate by collecting a single or multiple integrated sample(s) of the pollutant (or diluent gas) for subsequent on-or off-site analysis; integrated sample(s) collected are representative of the emissions for the sample time as specified by the applicable requirement.
Continuous emission monitoring system means a monitoring system that continuously measures the emissions of a pollutant from an affected facility.
Digital camera opacity technique conditions mean the following four conditions that must be followed if ASTM D7520-16, “Standard Test Method for Determining the Opacity of a Plume in the Outdoor Ambient Atmosphere” is used as an alternative to EPA Method 9:
(1) During the digital camera opacity technique (DCOT) certification procedure outlined in Section 9.2 of ASTM D7520-16, you or the DCOT vendor must present the plumes in front of various backgrounds of color and contrast representing conditions anticipated during field use such as blue sky, trees, and mixed backgrounds (clouds and/or a sparse tree stand).
(2) You must also have standard operating procedures in place including daily or other frequency quality checks to ensure the equipment is within manufacturing specifications as outlined in Section 8.1 of ASTM D7520-16.
(3) You must follow the record keeping procedures outlined in 40 CFR 63.10(b)(1) for the DCOT certification, compliance report, data sheets, and all raw unaltered JPEGs used for opacity and certification determination.
(4) You or the DCOT vendor must have a minimum of 4 independent technology users apply the software to determine the visible opacity of the 300 certification plumes. For each set of 25 plumes, the user may not exceed 15 percent opacity of anyone reading and the average error must not exceed 7.5 percent opacity.
Dioxins/furans mean tetra- through octa- chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans. For the purposes of this subpart, dioxins/furans emission limits are expressed on a total mass basis.
EPA means the Administrator of the U.S. EPA or employee of the U.S. EPA who is delegated to perform the specified task.
Federally enforceable means all limitations and conditions that are enforceable by EPA including the requirements of 40 CFR part 60, 40 CFR part 61, and 40 CFR part 63, requirements within any applicable state implementation plan, and any permit requirements established under 40 CFR 52.21 or under 40 CFR 51.165 and 40 CFR 51.166.
First half of the calendar year means the period starting on January 1 and ending on June 30 in any year.
Four-hour block average or 4-hour block average means the average of all hourly emission concentrations when the affected facility is operating and combusting municipal solid waste measured over 4-hour periods from:
(1) 12:00 midnight to 4:00 a.m.
(2) 4:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m.
(3) 8:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon.
(4) 12:00 noon to 4:00 p.m.
(5) 4:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m.
(6) 8:00 p.m. to 12:00 midnight.
Mass burn refractory municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a refractory wall furnace. Unless otherwise specified, this includes combustors with a cylindrical rotary refractory wall furnace.
Mass burn rotary waterwall municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a cylindrical rotary waterwall furnace or on a tumbling-tile grate.
Mass burn waterwall municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a waterwall furnace.
Materials separation plan means a plan that identifies both a goal and an approach for separating certain components of municipal solid waste for a given service area in order to make the separated materials available for recycling. A materials separation plan may include elements such as dropoff facilities, buy-back or deposit-return incentives, curbside pickup programs, or centralized mechanical separation systems. A materials separation plan may include different goals or approaches for different subareas in the service area, and may include no materials separation activities for certain subareas or, if warranted, an entire service area.
Maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load means the highest 4-hour arithmetic average municipal waste combustor load achieved during four consecutive hours during the most recent dioxins/furans performance test demonstrating compliance with the applicable limit for municipal waste combustor organics specified under § 60.52b.
Maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature means the highest 4-hour arithmetic average flue gas temperature measured at the particulate matter control device inlet during four consecutive hours during the most recent dioxins/furans performance test demonstrating compliance with the applicable limit for municipal waste combustor organics specified under § 60.52b.
Modification or modified municipal waste combustor means a municipal waste combustor you have changed after September 10, 2026 and that meets one of two criteria:
(1) The cumulative cost of the changes over the life of the unit exceeds 50 percent of the original cost of construction and installation the unit (not including the cost of any land purchased in connection with such construction or installation) updated to current costs.
(2) Any physical change in the municipal waste combustor or change in the method of operating the municipal waste combustor that increases the amount of any air pollutant emitted by the unit for which standards have been established under section 129 or section 111 of the CAA. Increases in the amount of any air pollutant emitted by the municipal waste combustor are determined when the municipal waste combustor operates at 100 percent of its physical load capability and are measured downstream of all air pollution control devices. Load restrictions based on permits or other nonphysical operational restrictions cannot be considered in the determination.
Modular excess-air municipal waste combustor means a combustor that combusts municipal solid waste, is not field-erected, and has multiple combustion chambers, all of which are designed to operate at conditions with combustion air amounts in excess of theoretical air requirements.
Modular starved-air municipal waste combustor means a combustor that combusts municipal solid waste, is not field-erected, and has multiple combustion chambers in which the primary combustion chamber is designed to operate at substoichiometric conditions.
Municipal solid waste or municipal-type solid waste or MSW means household, commercial/retail, or institutional waste. Household waste includes material discarded by single and multiple residential dwellings, hotels, motels, and other similar permanent or temporary housing establishments or facilities. Commercial/retail waste includes material discarded by stores, offices, restaurants, warehouses, nonmanufacturing activities at industrial facilities, and other similar establishments or facilities. Institutional waste includes materials discarded by schools, nonmedical waste discarded by hospitals, material discarded by nonmanufacturing activities at prisons and government facilities, and material discarded by other similar establishments or facilities. Household, commercial/retail, and institutional waste does not include used oil; sewage sludge; wood pallets; construction, renovation, and demolition wastes (which includes but is not limited to railroad ties and telephone poles); clean wood; industrial process or manufacturing wastes; medical waste; or motor vehicles (including motor vehicle parts or vehicle fluff). Household, commercial/retail, and institutional wastes include:
(1) Yard waste;
(2) Refuse-derived fuel; and
(3) Motor vehicle maintenance materials limited to vehicle batteries and tires except as specified in § 60.5700(d).
Municipal waste combustor, or MWC, means any setting or equipment that combusts solid, liquid, or gasified municipal solid waste including, but not limited to, field-erected combustion units (with or without heat recovery), modular incinerators (starved-air or excess-air), boilers (i.e., steam generating units), furnaces (whether suspension-fired, grate-fired, mass-fired, air curtain incinerators, or fluidized bed-fired), and pyrolysis/combustion units. Two criteria further define municipal waste combustors:
(1) Municipal waste combustors do not include pyrolysis or combustion units located at a plastics or rubber recycling unit as specified under Applicability (§ 60.5700(h) and (i)). Municipal waste combustors also do not include cement kilns firing municipal solid waste as specified under Applicability (§ 60.5700(j)). Municipal waste combustors also do not include internal combustion engines, gas turbines, or other combustion devices that combust landfill gases collected by landfill gas collection systems.
(2) The boundaries of a municipal waste combustor are defined as follows. The municipal waste combustor includes, but is not limited to, the municipal solid waste fuel feed system, grate system, flue gas system, bottom ash system, and the combustor water system. The municipal waste combustor boundary starts at the municipal solid waste pit or hopper and extends through three areas:
(i) The combustor flue gas system, which ends immediately following the heat recovery equipment or, if there is no heat recovery equipment, immediately following the combustion chamber.
(ii) The combustor bottom ash system, which ends at the truck loading station or similar ash handling equipment that transfers the ash to final disposal. It includes all ash handling systems connected to the bottom ash handling system.
(iii) The combustor water system, which starts at the feed water pump and ends at the piping that exits the steam drum or superheater.
(3) The municipal waste combustor does not include air pollution control equipment, the stack, water treatment equipment, or the turbine-generator set.
Municipal waste combustor capacity means the maximum charging rate of a municipal waste combustor expressed in tons per day of municipal solid waste combusted, calculated according to the procedures under § 60.6015. Section 60.6015 includes procedures for determining municipal waste combustor capacity for continuous and batch feed municipal waste combustors.
Municipal waste combustor load means the steam load of the municipal waste combustor measured as specified in § 60.5995.
Particulate matter means total particulate matter emitted from municipal waste combustors as measured using EPA Reference Method 5 (see § 60.5975)
Plastics/rubber recycling unit means an integrated processing unit for which plastics, rubber, or rubber tires are the only feed materials (incidental contaminants may be in the feed materials). The feed materials are processed into a chemical plant feedstock or petroleum refinery feedstock, where the feedstock is marketed to and used by a chemical plant or petroleum refinery as input feedstock. The following three criteria further define a plastics/rubber recycling unit:
(1) Each calendar quarter, the combined weight of the chemical plant feedstock and petroleum refinery feedstock that a plastics/rubber recycling unit produces must be more than 70 percent of the combined weight of the plastics, rubber, and rubber tires that the plastics/rubber recycling unit processes.
(2) The plastics, rubber, or rubber tires fed to the plastics/rubber recycling unit may originate from separating or diverting plastics, rubber, or rubber tires from MSW or industrial solid waste. The feed materials may include manufacturing scraps, trimmings, and off-specification plastics, rubber, and rubber tire discards.
(3) The plastics, rubber, and rubber tires fed to the plastics/rubber recycling unit may contain incidental contaminants (e.g., paper labels on plastic bottles, metal rings on plastic bottle caps).
Pulverized coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor means a combustor that fires coal and refuse-derived fuel simultaneously, in which pulverized coal is introduced into an air stream that carries the coal to the combustion chamber of the unit where it is fired in suspension. This includes both conventional pulverized coal and micropulverized coal.
Pyrolysis/combustion unit means a unit that produces gases, liquids, or solids by heating municipal solid waste. The gases, liquids, or solids produced are combusted and the emissions vented to the atmosphere.
Reconstruction means rebuilding a municipal waste combustor for which the reconstruction commenced after September 10, 2026 and the cumulative costs of the construction over the life of the unit exceed 50 percent of the original cost of construction and installation of the unit (not including any cost of land purchased in connection with such construction or installation) updated to current costs (current dollars).
Refractory unit or refractory wall furnace means a combustion unit that has no energy recovery (e.g., via a waterwall) in the furnace (i.e., radiant heat transfer section) of the combustor.
Refuse-derived fuel means a type of municipal solid waste produced by processing municipal solid waste through shredding and size classification. This includes all classes of refuse-derived fuel including two fuels:
(1) Low-density fluff refuse-derived fuel through densified refuse-derived fuel.
(2) Pelletized refuse-derived fuel.
Refuse-derived fuel stoker means a steam generating unit that combusts refuse-derived fuel in a semi suspension firing mode using air-fed distributors.
Same location means the same or contiguous properties under common ownership or control, including those separated only by a street, road, highway, or other public right-of-way. Common ownership or control includes properties that are owned, leased, or operated by the same entity, parent entity, subsidiary, subdivision, or any combination thereof. Entities may include a municipality, other governmental unit, or any quasi-governmental authority (e.g., a public utility district or regional authority for waste disposal).
Second half of the calendar year means the period that starting July 1 and ending on December 31 in any year.
Shift supervisor means the person who is in direct charge and control of operating a municipal waste combustor and who is responsible for onsite supervision, technical direction, management, and overall performance of the municipal waste combustor during an assigned shift.
Shutdown means the period of time following cessation of charging waste to the combustion grate prior to entering a period where the municipal waste combustor is not operating. Shutdown may be claimed for up to three hours of operation per occurrence.
Spreader stoker coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor means a combustor that combusts coal and refuse-derived fuel simultaneously, in which coal is introduced to the combustion zone by a mechanism that throws the fuel onto a grate from above. Combustion takes place both in suspension and on the grate.
Standard conditions means a temperature of 20 °C and a pressure of 101.3 kilopascals.
Startup means the period of time after warmup when waste is introduced to the combustion grate but prior to steady state operation. Startup may be claimed for up to three hours of operation per occurrence.
Total mass dioxins/furans or total mass means the total mass of tetra-through octa- chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans as determined using EPA Reference Method 23 and the procedures specified in § 60.5975
Tumbling-tile means a grate tile hinged at one end and attached to a ram at the other end. When the ram extends, the grate tile rotates around the hinged end.
Twenty-four hour daily average or 24-hour daily average means either the arithmetic mean or geometric mean (as specified) of all hourly emission concentrations when the affected facility operates and combusts municipal solid waste measured over a 24-hour period between 12:00 midnight and the following midnight.
Untreated lumber or clean lumber means wood or wood products that have been cut or shaped and include wet, air-dried, and kiln-dried wood products. Untreated lumber does not include wood products that have been painted, pigment-stained, or “pressure-treated”. Pressure-treating compounds include, but are not limited to, chromate copper arsenate, pentachlorophenol, and creosote.
Warmup means the period of time during the first hours of a municipal waste combustor operation from a cold start until waste is fed to the combustor and has no time constraints. No waste is introduced to the combustion grate during warmup.
Waterwall furnace means a combustion unit having energy (heat) recovery in the furnace (i.e., radiant heat transfer section) of the combustor.
Yard waste means grass, grass clippings, bushes, shrubs, and clippings from bushes and shrubs. They come from residential, commercial/retail, institutional, or industrial sources as part of maintaining yards or other private or public lands. Yard waste does not include two items:
(1) Construction, renovation, and demolition wastes that are exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in this section.
(2) Clean wood that is exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in this section.
Table 1 to Subpart VVVV—Large Municipal Waste Combustor Carbon Monoxide Limits
| Municipal waste combustor technology |
New large municipal waste combustors |
|
|---|---|---|
| Carbon monoxide emission limit (parts per million by volume) a |
Averaging time (hours) b |
|
| Mass burn waterwall | 76 | 4 |
| Mass burn refractory | 76 | 4 |
| Mass burn rotary waterwall | 76 | 24 |
| Modular starved air | 50 | 4 |
| Modular excess air | 50 | 4 |
| Refuse-derived fuel stoker | 100 | 24 |
| Bubbling fluidized bed combustor | 100 | 4 |
| Circulating fluidized bed combustor | 100 | 4 |
| Pulverized coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor | 100 | 4 |
| Spreader stoker coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor | 100 | 24 |
| a Measured at the combustor outlet in conjunction with a measurement of oxygen concentration, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis). CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen, and are used as measured. The averaging times are specified in greater detail in § 60.5940(b). | ||
| b Averaging times are 4-hour or 24-hour block arithmetic averages. |
Table 2 to Subpart VVVV—Emission Limitations for New Large Municipal Waste Combustors
| For the air pollutant | If your affected facility is a new large municipal waste combustor, you must meet this
emission limit, corrected to 7 percent oxygen a |
|---|---|
| Particulate matter | 5.1 mg/dscm. |
| Opacity | 10 percent opacity (6-minute block average). |
| Cadmium | 2.3 ug/dscm. |
| Lead | 23 ug/dscm. |
| Mercury | 32 ug/dscm or 85 percent reduction by weight. |
| Sulfur dioxide | 14 parts per million by volume dry basis or 79 percent reduction by weight or volume (daily 24-hour geometric average). |
| Hydrogen chloride | 7.2 parts per million by volume dry basis or 98 percent reduction by weight or volume. |
| Dioxins/furans | 11 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass). |
| Nitrogen oxides | 50 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hour arithmetic average). |
| a Measured at the combustor outlet in conjunction with a measurement of oxygen concentration. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen, and are used as measured. The averaging times are specified in greater detail in § 60.5940. |
Table 3 to Subpart VVVV of Part 60—Requirements for Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems (CEMS)
| For the following pollutants |
Use the following span values for your CEMS |
Use the following performance specifications for your CEMS |
During each relative accuracy test run, use the following methods to collect concurrent data |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Particulate Matter | For operation and correlation test, P.S. 11 in appendix B of this part and procedure 2 of appendix F to this part. | Follow the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV. | |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations, daily calibration drift tests, and each response correlation audit or relative response audit, procedure 2 of appendix F to this part | |||
| 2. Nitrogen Oxides | Control device outlet: 125 percent of the maximum estimated hourly nitrogen oxides emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part
For relative accuracy, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 7, 7A, 7C, 7D, or 7E in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part | |||
| 3. Sulfur Dioxide | Control device outlet: 50 percent of the maximum estimated hourly sulfur dioxide emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part
For relative accuracy audit, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 6, 6A, or 6C in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part | |||
| 4. Carbon Monoxide | 125 percent of the maximum estimated hourly carbon with monoxide emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 4A in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part
For relative accuracy audit, P.S. 4A in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 10, 10A, or 10B in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part | |||
| 5. Oxygen or Carbon Dioxide | 25 percent oxygen or 20 percent carbon dioxide | P.S. 3 in appendix B of this part | Method 3A, or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or, as an alternative for oxygen or carbon dioxide correction, the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. |
| 6. Mercury | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, P.S. 12A in appendix B of this part and procedure 5 of appendix F of this part, or the approved site-specific monitoring plan | Follow the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV. |
| For relative accuracy audit, daily calibration, weekly system integrity check, quarterly audit, procedure 5 of appendix F of this part | |||
| 7. Hydrogen chloride | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, P.S. 18 in appendix B of this part and procedure 6 of appendix F of this part or the approved site-specific monitoring plan | Follow the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV, except you may also use Methods 320 or 321 of appendix A to part 63. |
| For relative accuracy audit, daily calibration, quarterly audit, and other applicable quality assurance/quality control checks procedure 6 of appendix F of this part | |||
| 8. Cadmium or Lead | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, the approved site-specific monitoring plan | Follow the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart VVVV. |
Table 4 to Subpart VVVV—Performance Test Requirements for Compliance With Emissions Limits under § 60.5895
| To determine compliance with the . . . | You must conduct a performance test to . . . | Using . . . |
|---|---|---|
| Particulate matter emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the particulate matter emission concentration to determine compliance with the particulate matter emission limit | Method 5 in appendix A-3 to part 60 of this chapter.
Collect a minimum sample volume of 1.7 cubic meters. The probe and filter holder heating systems in the sample train shall be set to provide a gas temperature no greater than 160 °C. An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 5 run. |
|
| Opacity emission limits | Determine compliance with the opacity limit in Table 2 to Subpart VVVV | Method 9 of appendix A-4 of part 60 to this chapter, except as provided under § 60.11(e) of subpart A of this part, or as an alternative ASTM D7520-16 provided the digital camera opacity technique conditions, as defined in this subpart, are met. |
| Cadmium or lead emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the cadmium or lead emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits | Method 29 in appendix A-8 to part 60 of this chapter. An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 29 test run for cadmium and lead required. | |
| Mercury emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the mercury emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits | Method 29 in appendix A-8 to part 60 of this chapter or as an alternative ASTM D6784-24. Collect a minimum sample volume of 1.7 cubic meters.
An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 29 test run for mercury required. |
|
| Sulfur dioxide emission limits | Calculate the 24-hr daily geometric average sulfur dioxide emission concentration | Method 19, section 12.4.3, in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| Hydrogen chloride emission limits | Measure the hydrogen chloride emission concentration | Method 26 or 26A in appendix A-8 of part 60 to this chapter, as applicable. The minimum sampling time shall be 1 hour. An oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 26 or 26A test run for hydrogen chloride. |
| Dioxins/furans emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the dioxins/furans emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits | Method 23 in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. The minimum sampling time shall be 4 hours. An oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 23 test run for dioxins/furans. | |
| Nitrogen oxides emission limits | Determine the daily arithmetic average nitrogen oxides emission concentration | Method 19, section 12.4.1, in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| Fugitive ash emission limits | Measure fugitive ash emissions | Method 22 in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. The minimum observation time shall be a series of three 1-hour observations. The observation period shall include times when the facility is transferring ash from the municipal waste combustor to the area where ash is stored or loaded into containers or trucks. |
| Opacity limit for air curtain incinerators under § 60.6125 | Determine compliance with the opacity limit in § 60.6125 | Method 9 of appendix A-4 of part 60 to this chapter, or as an alternative ASTM D7520-16 provided the digital camera opacity technique conditions, as defined in this subpart, are met. |
Subpart WWWW—Emission Guidelines and Compliance Times for Large Municipal Waste Combustors Constructed on or Before January 23, 2024
91 FR 11860, Mar. 10, 2026, unless otherwise noted.
Introduction
§ 60.6250 What is the purpose of this subpart?
This subpart establishes emission guidelines and compliance schedules for the control of emissions from existing large municipal waste combustors. The pollutants addressed by the emission guidelines are listed in Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW. The emission guidelines are developed in accordance with sections 111(d) and 129 of the Clean Air Act (CAA) and subpart B of this part.
§ 60.6255 Am I affected by this subpart? What authorities does the EPA Administrator retain?
(a) If you are the Administrator of an air quality program in a state or United States protectorate with one or more existing large municipal waste combustors that commenced construction on or before January 23, 2024, you must submit a state plan to the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) that implements the emission guidelines contained in this subpart.
(b) You must submit the state plan to EPA by March 10, 2027.
(c) You must submit a state plan that meets the requirements of this subpart and contains the more stringent emission limit for the respective pollutant in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW or the limits specified in § 60.52b of subpart Eb of this part to EPA by March 10, 2027 for large municipal waste combustors that commenced construction after September 20, 1994, but no later than January 23, 2024, or commenced modification or reconstruction after June 19, 1996 but no later than September 10, 2026.
(d) The following authorities are retained by EPA and not transferred to the state upon delegation of authority to the state to implement an approved state plan:
(1) Approval of exemption claims in § 60.6305(a), (b), (c), (d), and (g);
(2) Approval of major alternatives to test methods;
(3) Approval of major alternatives to monitoring;
(4) Waiver of recordkeeping;
(5) Performance test and data reduction waivers under § 60.8(b);
(6) Approval of an alternative to any electronic reporting to the EPA required by this subpart.
§ 60.6260 Is a state plan required for all states?
No, you are not required to submit a state plan if there are no existing large municipal waste combustors in your state and you submit a negative declaration letter in place of the state plan.
§ 60.6265 What must I include in my state plan?
(a) Include nine items:
(1) Inventory of affected municipal waste combustors, including those that have ceased operation but have not been dismantled.
(2) Inventory of emissions from affected municipal waste combustors in your state.
(3) Compliance schedules for each affected municipal waste combustor.
(4) Good combustion practices and emission limits for affected municipal waste combustors that are at least as protective as the emission guidelines contained in this subpart.
(5) Stack testing, continuous emission monitoring, recordkeeping, and reporting requirements.
(6) Certification that the hearing on the state plan was held, a list of witnesses and their organizational affiliations, if any, appearing at the hearing, and a brief written summary of each presentation or written submission.
(7) Provision for state progress reports to EPA.
(8) Identification of enforceable state mechanisms that you selected for implementing the emission guidelines of this subpart.
(9) Demonstration of your state's legal authority to carry out the CAA sections 111(d) and 129 state plan.
(b) Your state plan can deviate from the format and content of the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. However, if your state plan does deviate, you must demonstrate that your state plan is as protective as the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. Your state plan must address regulatory applicability, increments of progress for retrofit, operator training and certification, operating practice, emission limits, continuous emission monitoring, stack testing, recordkeeping, reporting, and air curtain incinerator requirements.
(c) For approval, your state plan must include the monitoring, recordkeeping and reporting requirements in § 60.6460 through § 60.6650 of this part, as applicable, except as provided for under § 60.24(b)(1) of subpart B of this part and paragraph (d) of this section.
(d) For approval, your state plan must include the alternative performance testing schedule for dioxins/furans specified in § 60.6535 of this section, as applicable, for those municipal waste combustors that achieve a dioxins/furans emission level less than or equal to 7 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter total mass, corrected to 7 percent oxygen.
(e) Follow the requirements of subpart B of this part in your state plan.
§ 60.6270 Is there an approval process for my state plan?
The EPA will review your state plan according to § 60.27.
§ 60.6275 What if my state plan is not approvable?
If you do not submit an approvable state plan (or a negative declaration letter), EPA will develop a federal plan, according to § 60.27 to implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. Owners and operators of municipal waste combustors not covered by an approved and currently effective state plan must comply with the federal plan. The federal plan is an interim action and, by its own terms, will cease to apply when your state plan is approved and becomes effective.
§ 60.6280 Is there an approval process for a negative declaration letter?
No, the EPA has no formal review process for negative declaration letters. Once your negative declaration letter has been received, EPA will place a copy in the public docket and publish a notice in the Federal Register. If, at a later date, an existing large municipal waste combustor is identified in your state, the federal plan implementing the emission guidelines contained in this subpart will automatically apply to that municipal waste combustor until your state plan is approved.
§ 60.6285 What compliance schedule must I include in my state plan?
(a) Your state plan must include compliance schedules that require large municipal waste combustors to achieve final compliance or cease operation as expeditiously as practicable but not later than the earlier of two dates:
(1) [March 10, 2031.
(2) Within 1 year after the effective date of state plan approval, but no later than 3 years after the effective date of state plan approval, as specified in paragraphs (b) and (c) of this section.
(b) For compliance schedules longer than 1 year but less than 3 years after the effective date of state plan approval, or if a permit modification is required, more than 1 year but less than 3 years following the date of issuance of a revised construction or operation permit, state plans must include dates for enforceable increments of progress as specified in § 60.6340.
(c) For compliance schedules that allow designated facilities longer than 1 year but up to 3 years after the effective date of state plan approval to close, the state plan must require a closure agreement. The closure agreement must include the date of facility closure.
(d) The owner or operator of a municipal waste combustor who is planning an extensive emission control system upgrade may petition the Administrator for a longer compliance schedule than the schedule in paragraph (a)(1) of this section but must demonstrate to the satisfaction of the Administrator the need for the additional time. If approved, the compliance schedule may exceed the schedule in paragraph (a)(1) of this section, but cannot exceed March 10, 2031.
§ 60.6290 Are there any state plan requirements for this subpart that supersede the requirements specified in subpart B?
Subpart B of this part establishes general requirements for developing and processing CAA section 111(d) plans. This subpart applies instead of the requirements in subpart B of this part, for three items:
(a) Option for case-by-case less stringent emission standards and longer compliance schedules. State plans developed to implement this subpart must be as protective as the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. State plans must require all municipal waste combustors to comply no later than March 10, 2031. That requirement applies instead of the option for case-by-case less stringent emission standards and longer compliance schedules in § 60.24(e) and (f).
(b) Increments of progress requirements. A state plan that allows more than 1 year but less than 3 years following the date of issuance of a revised construction or operation permit, if a permit modification is required, or more than 1 year but less than 3 years following approval of the state plan, if a permit modification is not required, must include measurable and enforceable incremental steps of progress towards compliance. Suggested measurable and enforceable activities are specified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (b)(10) of this section. This requirement applies instead of the requirement of § 60.24(d) that would require a state plan to include all five increments of progress for all municipal waste combustors.
(1) Date for obtaining services of an architectural and engineering firm regarding the air pollution control device(s);
(2) Date for obtaining design drawings of the air pollution control device(s);
(3) Date for submittal of permit modifications, if necessary;
(4) Date for submittal of the final control plan to the Administrator [§ 60.21 (h)(1) of subpart B of this part.];
(5) Date for ordering the air pollution control device(s);
(6) Date for obtaining the major components of the air pollution control device(s);
(7) Date for initiation of site preparation for installation of the air pollution control device(s);
(8) Date for initiation of installation of the air pollution control device(s);
(9) Date for initial startup of the air pollution control device(s); and
(10) Date for initial performance test(s) of the air pollution control device(s).
(c) Date of submittal of state plan. Each state in which a designated facility is located shall submit to EPA a plan to implement and enforce all provisions of this subpart no later than March 10, 2027. This requirement is in accordance with section 129(b)(2) of the Clean Air Act and applies instead of the schedule required in § 60.23(a)(1) of subpart B of this part.
§ 60.6295 Does this subpart directly affect municipal waste combustor owners and operators in my state?
(a) No, this subpart does not directly affect large municipal waste combustor owners and operators in your state. However, large municipal waste combustor owners and operators must comply with the state plan you develop to implement the emission guidelines contained in this subpart. Some states may incorporate the emission guidelines contained in this subpart into their state plans by direct incorporation by reference. Others may include the model rule text directly in their state plan.
(b) All municipal waste combustors must be in compliance with the requirements established in this subpart by March 10, 2031, whether the municipal waste combustor is regulated under a state or federal plan.
Applicability of State Plans
§ 60.6300 What municipal waste combustors must I address in my state plan?
(a) Your state plan must address all existing large municipal waste combustors in your state that meet two criteria:
(1) The municipal waste combustor has the capacity to combust greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste.
(2) The municipal waste combustor commenced construction on or before January 23, 2024.
(b) If an owner or operator of a municipal waste combustor makes changes that meet the definition of modification or reconstruction after September 10, 2026 for subpart VVVV of this part, the municipal waste combustor becomes subject to subpart VVVV of this part and the state plan no longer applies to that unit.
(c) If an owner or operator of a municipal waste combustor makes physical or operational changes to an existing municipal waste combustor primarily to comply with your state plan, subpart VVVV of this part (Standards of Performance for Large Municipal Waste Combustors) does not apply to that unit. Such changes do not constitute modifications or reconstructions under subpart VVVV of this part.
(d) If an owner or operator of a municipal waste combustor meets the applicability requirements of this section, the unit is not subject to subparts Db or E of this part.
§ 60.6305 Are any large municipal waste combustors exempt from my state plan?
(a) Small municipal waste combustors that combust less than 11 tons per day. Units are exempt from your state plan if five requirements are met:
(1) The municipal waste combustor is subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting the amount of municipal solid waste combusted to less than 11 tons per day.
(2) You are notified by the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(3) You receive from the owner or operator of the unit a copy of the federally enforceable permit.
(4) The owner or operator of the unit keeps daily records of the amount of municipal solid waste combusted.
(5) The owner or operator of the unit submits the notification and data required by (a)(2) and (3) of this section as a portable document format (PDF) file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(b) Small power production units. Units are exempt from your state plan if five requirements are met:
(1) The unit qualifies as a small power production facility under section 3(17)(C) of the Federal Power Act (16 U.S.C. 796(17)(C)).
(2) The unit combusts homogeneous waste (such as automotive tires or used oil, but excluding refuse-derived fuel) to produce electricity.
(3) You are notified by the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(4) You receive documentation from the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(5) The owner or operator of the unit submits the notification and data required by (b)(3) and (4) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(c) Cogeneration units. Units are exempt from your state plan if five requirements are met:
(1) The unit qualifies as a cogeneration facility under section 3(18)(B) of the Federal Power Act (16 U.S.C. 796(18)(B)).
(2) The unit combusts homogeneous waste (such as automotive tires or used oil, but excluding refuse-derived fuel) to produce electricity and steam or other forms of energy used for industrial, commercial, heating, or cooling purposes.
(3) You are notified by the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(4) You receive documentation from the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(5) The owner or operator of the unit submits the notification and data required by (c)(3) and (4) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(d) Municipal waste combustors that combust only tires. Units are exempt from your state plan if four requirements are met:
(1) The municipal waste combustor combusts a single-item waste stream of tires.
(2) You are notified by the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(3) You receive documentation from the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(4) The owner or operator of the unit submits the notification and data required by (d)(2) and (3) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(e) Hazardous waste combustion units. Units are exempt from your state plan if the units have received a permit under section 3005 of the Solid Waste Disposal Act.
(f) Materials recovery units. Units are exempt from your state plan if the units combust waste mainly to recover metals. Primary and secondary smelters may qualify for the exemption.
(g) Co-fired units. Units are exempt from your state plan if five requirements are met:
(1) The unit is a co-fired combustor as defined under § 60.6685 and has a federally enforceable permit limiting municipal solid waste combustion to 30 percent of the total fuel input by weight.
(2) You are notified by the owner or operator that the unit qualifies for the exemption.
(3) You receive from the owner or operator of the unit a copy of the federally enforceable permit.
(4) The owner or operator records the weights, each quarter, of municipal solid waste and of all other fuels combusted.
(5) The owner or operator of the unit submits the notification and data required by (g)(2) and (3) of this section as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(h) Plastics/rubber recycling units. Units are exempt from your state plan if five requirements are met:
(1) The pyrolysis/combustion unit is an integrated part of a plastics/rubber recycling unit as defined under “Definitions” (§ 60.6685).
(2) The owner or operator of the unit records the weight, each quarter, of plastics, rubber, and rubber tires processed.
(3) The owner or operator of the unit records the weight, each quarter, of feed stocks produced and marketed from chemical plants and petroleum refineries.
(4) The owner or operator of the unit keeps the name and address of the purchaser of the feed stocks.
(5) The owner or operator of the unit submits a notification that the pyrolysis/combustion is not subject to this subpart as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(i) Units that combust fuels made from products of plastics/rubber recycling plants. Units are exempt from your state plan if two requirements are met:
(1) The unit combusts gasoline, diesel fuel, jet fuel, fuel oils, residual oil, refinery gas, petroleum coke, liquified petroleum gas, propane, or butane produced by chemical plants or petroleum refineries that use feed stocks produced by plastics/rubber recycling units.
(2) The unit does not combust any other municipal solid waste.
(j) Cement kilns. Cement kilns that combust municipal solid waste are exempt from your state plan.
(k) Air curtain incinerators. If an air curtain incinerator (see § 60.6685 for definition) meets the capacity specifications in § 60.6300(a) and combusts a fuel stream composed of 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, then the unit must only meet the opacity standard, testing procedures, and the reporting and recordkeeping requirements under “Model Rule—Air Curtain Incinerators That Burn 100 Percent Yard Waste” (§§ 60.6655 through 60.6675). If an air curtain incinerator meets the capacity specifications in § 60.6300(a) and combusts municipal solid waste other than 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, the unit is subject to all requirements of this subpart.
§ 60.6310 What subcategories of large municipal waste combustors must I include in my state plan?
(a) This subpart specifies different requirements for different subcategories of municipal waste combustors. You must use those same subcategories in your state plan. Those subcategories are based on the municipal waste combustor type as follows (see § 60.6685 for definitions):
(1) Mass burn refractory.
(2) Mass burn rotary waterwall.
(3) Mass burn waterwall.
(4) Modular starved air.
(5) Modular excess air.
(6) Refuse-derived fuel stoker.
(7) Bubbling fluidized bed combustor.
(8) Circulating fluidized bed combustor.
(9) Pulverized coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor.
(10) Spreader stoker coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor.
(b) The requirements for municipal waste combustors of all types are identical except that carbon monoxide emissions limits are set separately for mass burn, modular, and refuse-derived fuel combustor types (see Table 2 to Subpart WWWW).
Use of Model Rule
§ 60.6315 What is the “model rule” in this subpart?
(a) The model rule is the portion of the emission guidelines (§§ 60.6330 through 60.6680) that addresses the regulatory requirements applicable to large municipal waste combustors. The model rule provides the requirements in a regulation format.
(b) In the model rule, “you” means the owner or operator of a large municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.6320 How does the model rule relate to the required elements of my state plan?
The model rule may be used to satisfy the state plan requirements specified in § 60.6265(a)(4) and (5). Alternative language may be used in your state plan, but only if you can demonstrate that the alternative language is as protective as the model rule.
§ 60.6325 What are the principal components of the model rule?
The model rule contains five major components:
(a) Increments of progress toward compliance.
(b) Good combustion practices:
(1) Operator training.
(2) Operator certification.
(3) Operating requirements.
(c) Emission limits.
(d) Monitoring and stack testing.
(e) Recordkeeping and reporting.
Model Rule—Increments or Progress
§ 60.6330 What are my requirements for meeting increments of progress and achieving final compliance?
If you plan to achieve compliance more than 1 year but less than 3 years following the effective date of state plan approval and a permit modification is not required, or more than 1 year but less than 3 years following the date of issuance of a revised construction or operation permit if a permit modification is required, you must meet five increments of progress:
(a) Submit a final control plan.
(b) Submit a notification of retrofit contract award.
(c) Initiate onsite construction.
(d) Complete onsite construction.
(e) Achieve final compliance.
§ 60.6335 When must I complete each increment of progress?
Table 1 to Subpart WWWW specifies compliance dates for each of the increments of progress.
§ 60.6340 What must I include in the notifications of achievement of my increments of progress?
Your notification of achievement of increments of progress must include three items:
(a) Notification that the increment of progress has been achieved.
(b) Any items required to be submitted with the increment of progress (§§ 60.6355 through 60.6375).
(c) The notification must be signed by the owner or operator of the municipal waste combustor.
§ 60.6345 When must I submit the notifications of achievement of increments of progress?
Notifications of the achievement of increments of progress must be postmarked no later than 10 days after the compliance date for the increment.
§ 60.6350 What if I do not meet an increment of progress?
If you fail to meet an increment of progress, you must submit a notification to the Administrator postmarked within 10 business days after the specified date in Table 1 to Subpart WWWW for achieving that increment of progress. The notification must inform the Administrator that you did not meet the increment. You must include in the notification an explanation of why the increment of progress was not met and your plan for meeting the increment as expeditiously as possible. You must continue to submit reports each subsequent month until the increment of progress is met.
§ 60.6355 How do I comply with the increment of progress for submittal of a control plan?
For your control plan increment of progress, you must complete two items:
(a) Submit the final control plan, including a description of the devices for air pollution control and process changes that you will use to comply with the emission limits and other requirements of this subpart.
(b) You must maintain an onsite copy of the final control plan.
§ 60.6360 How do I comply with the increment of progress for awarding contracts?
You must submit a signed copy of the contracts awarded to initiate onsite construction, initiate onsite installation of emission control equipment, and incorporate process changes. Submit the copy of the contracts with the notification that the increment of progress has been achieved. You do not need to include documents incorporated by reference or the attachments to the contracts.
§ 60.6365 How do I comply with the increment of progress for initiating onsite construction?
You must initiate onsite construction and installation of emission control equipment and initiate the process changes outlined in the final control plan.
§ 60.6370 How do I comply with the increment of progress for completing onsite construction?
You must complete onsite construction and installation of emission control equipment and complete process changes outlined in the final control plan.
§ 60.6375 How do I comply with the increment of progress for achieving final compliance?
For the final compliance increment of progress, you must complete two items:
(a) Complete all process changes and complete retrofit construction as specified in the final control plan.
(b) Connect the air pollution control equipment with the municipal waste combustor identified in the final control plan and complete process changes to the municipal waste combustor so that if the affected municipal waste combustor is brought online, all necessary process changes and air pollution control equipment are operating as designed.
§ 60.6380 What must I do if I close my municipal waste combustor and then restart my municipal waste combustor?
(a) If you close your municipal waste combustor but will reopen it prior to the final compliance date in your state plan, you must meet the increments of progress specified in § 60.6380.
(b) If you close your municipal waste combustor but will restart it after your final compliance date, you must complete emission control retrofit and meet the emission limits and good combustion practices on the date your municipal waste combustor restarts operation.
§ 60.6385 What must I do if I plan to permanently close my municipal waste combustor and not restart it?
(a) If you plan to close your municipal waste combustor rather than comply with the state plan, you must submit a closure notification, including the date of closure, to the Administrator by the date your final control plan is due.
(b) If the closure date is later than 1 year but up to 3 years after the effective date of state plan approval, you must enter into a legally binding closure agreement with the Administrator by the date your final control plan is due. The agreement must specify the date by which operation will cease.
Model Rule—Good Combustion Practices: Operator Training
§ 60.6390 What types of training must I do?
There are two types of required training:
(a) Training of operators of municipal waste combustors using the EPA or a state-approved training course.
(b) Training of plant personnel using a site-specific training course.
§ 60.6395 Who must complete the operator training course? By when?
(a) Three types of employees must complete the EPA or state-approved operator training course:
(1) Chief facility operators.
(2) Shift supervisors.
(3) Control room operators.
(b) Those employees must complete the operator training course by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor starts up.
(2) The date before an employee assumes responsibilities that affect operation of the municipal waste combustor.
(c) The requirement in paragraph (a) of this section does not apply to chief facility operators, shift supervisors, and control room operators who have obtained full certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers on or before the effective date of state plan approval.
(d) You may request that the EPA Administrator waive the requirement in paragraph (a) of this section for chief facility operators, shift supervisors, and control room operators who have obtained provisional certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers on or before the effective date of state plan approval.
§ 60.6400 Who must complete the site-specific training course?
All employees with responsibilities that affect how a municipal waste combustor operates must complete the site-specific training course. Include at least six types of employees:
(a) Chief facility operators.
(b) Shift supervisors.
(c) Control room operators.
(d) Ash handlers.
(e) Maintenance personnel.
(f) Crane or load handlers.
§ 60.6405 What site-specific training must I provide?
For site-specific training, you must do four things:
(a) For training at a particular facility, develop a site-specific operating manual for that facility by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor starts up.
(2) The date prior to the date an employee assumes responsibilities that affect operation of the municipal waste combustor.
(b) Establish a training program to review the site-specific operating manual with people whose responsibilities affect the operation of your municipal waste combustor. Complete the initial review by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after your municipal waste combustor starts up.
(2) The date prior to the date an employee assumes responsibilities that affect operation of the municipal waste combustor.
(c) Update your manual annually.
(d) Following the initial review, review your operating manual with staff annually.
§ 60.6410 What information must I include in the site-specific operating manual?
You must include 11 items in the operating manual for your facility:
(a) A summary of all applicable standards in this subpart.
(b) A description of the basic combustion theory that applies to a municipal waste combustor.
(c) Procedures for receiving, handling, and feeding municipal solid waste.
(d) Procedures to be followed during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction of the municipal waste combustor.
(e) Procedures for maintaining a proper level of combustion air supply.
(f) Procedures for operating the municipal waste combustor in compliance with the standards contained in this subpart.
(g) Procedures for responding to periodic upset or off-specification conditions.
(h) Procedures for minimizing carryover of particulate matter.
(i) Procedures for handling ash.
(j) Procedures for monitoring emissions from the municipal waste combustor.
(k) Procedures for recordkeeping and reporting.
§ 60.6415 Where must I keep the site-specific operating manual?
You must keep your operating manual in a readily accessible location at your facility. It must be available for review or inspection for all persons required to undergo training as specified in § 60.6395. The operating manual and records of training as specified in § 60.6585 shall be available for inspection by the EPA or its delegated enforcement agency upon request.
Model Rule—Good Combustion Practices: Operator Certification
§ 60.6420 What types of operator certification must the chief facility operator and shift supervisor obtain and by when must they obtain it?
(a) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must obtain and keep a current provisional operator certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (QRO-1-2005) (incorporated by reference in § 60.17 of subpart A of this part) or a current provisional operator certification from your state certification program by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after the municipal waste combustor starts up.
(2) Six months after they transfer to the municipal waste combustor or 6 months after they are hired to work at the municipal waste combustor.
(b) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must obtain and maintain a provisional certification, and must complete the full certification or be scheduled to take the full certification exam, by the later of two dates:
(1) Six months after the municipal waste combustor starts up.
(2) For a provisionally certified operator who is newly promoted or recently transferred to a shift supervisor position or a chief facility operator position, a full certification exam must be completed within six months after they transfer to the municipal waste combustor or 6 months after they are hired to work at the municipal waste combustor.
(c) Each chief facility operator and shift supervisor must take one of three actions:
(1) Obtain and maintain a current provisional operator certification from the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or a state certification program in your state.
(2) Schedule a full certification exam with the American Society of Mechanical Engineers (QRO-1-2005) (incorporated by reference in § 60.17 of subpart A of this part).
(3) Schedule a full certification exam with your state certification program.
§ 60.6425 After the required date for operator certification, who may operate the municipal waste combustor?
After the required date for full or provisional certification, you must not operate your municipal waste combustor unless one of four employees is on duty:
(a) A fully certified chief facility operator.
(b) A fully certified shift supervisor.
(c) A provisionally certified chief facility operator or a provisionally certified shift supervisor who is scheduled to take the full certification exam specified in § 60.6420.
§ 60.6430 What if all the certified operators must be temporarily offsite?
If the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor both are unavailable, a provisionally certified control room operator at the municipal waste combustor may fulfill the certified operator requirement. Depending on the length of time that a certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are away, you must meet one of three criteria:
(a) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are both offsite for 12 hours or less and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform the duties of the certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor.
(b) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 12 hours, but for 2 weeks or less, and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform those duties without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator. However, you must record the periods when the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite and include the information in the annual report as specified under § 60.6630(l).
(c) When the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 2 weeks, and no other certified operator is onsite, the provisionally certified control room operator may perform those duties without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator. However, you must take two actions:
(1) Notify the Administrator in writing. In the notice, state what caused the absence and what you are doing to ensure that a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor is onsite. as expeditiously as practicable. Submit this notification as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(2) Submit a status report and corrective action summary to the Administrator every 4 weeks following the initial notification. If the Administrator notifies you that your status report or corrective action summary is disapproved, the municipal waste combustor may continue operation for 90 days, but then must cease operation. If corrective actions are taken in the 90-day period such that the Administrator withdraws the disapproval, municipal waste combustor operation may continue. Submit this status report as a PDF file electronically according to § 60.6605(e).
(d) A provisionally certified operator who is newly promoted or recently transferred to a shift supervisor position or a chief facility operator position at the municipal waste combustor may perform the duties of the certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor without notice to, or approval by, the Administrator for up to six months before taking the ASME QRO certification exam as specified in § 60.6420.
Model Rule—Good Combustion Practices: Operating Requirements
§ 60.6435 What are the operating practice requirements for my municipal waste combustor?
(a) You must meet the carbon monoxide emission limits specified in Table 2 to Subpart WWWW no later than March 10, 2031.
(b) You must not operate your municipal waste combustor at loads greater than 110 percent of the maximum demonstrated load of the municipal waste combustor (4-hour block average), as specified under “Definitions” (§ 60.6685), except as specified in paragraphs (b)(1) and (2) of this section. The averaging time is specified under § 60.6550.
(1) During the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the municipal waste combustor load limit is not applicable if the provisions of paragraph (b)(2) of this section are met.
(2) The Administrator may waive in writing the municipal waste combustor load limit for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. The municipal waste combustor load limit continues to apply, and remains enforceable, until and unless the Administrator grants the waiver.
(c) You must not operate your municipal waste combustor so that the temperature measured at the inlet of the particulate matter control device exceeds 17 °C above the maximum demonstrated temperature of the particulate matter control device (4-hour block average), as specified under “Definitions” (§ 60.6685), except as specified in paragraphs (c)(1) and (2) of this section. The averaging time is specified under § 60.6555. The requirements specified in this paragraph apply to each particulate matter control device used.
(1) During the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the particulate matter control device temperature limitations are not applicable if the provisions of paragraph (c)(2) of this section are met.
(2) The Administrator may waive in writing the particulate matter control device temperature limits for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. The temperature limits continue to apply, and remain enforceable, until and unless the Administrator grants the waiver.
(d) If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must meet the requirements for activated carbon injection rate during dioxins/furans or mercury testing as specified in § 60.6560.
§ 60.6440 What happens to the operating requirements during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction?
The operating requirements under this subpart apply at all times including periods of municipal waste combustor warmup, startup, shutdown, and malfunction. Monitoring data cannot be dismissed or excluded from compliance calculations during periods of startup, shutdown, or malfunction, but must be recorded and reported in accordance with the provisions of § 60.6595(e).
Model Rule—Emission Limits
§ 60.6445 What pollutants are regulated by this subpart?
Eleven pollutants, in four groupings, are regulated:
(a) Organics. Dioxins/furans.
(b) Metals.
(1) Cadmium.
(2) Lead.
(3) Mercury.
(4) Opacity.
(5) Particulate matter.
(c) Acid gases.
(1) Hydrogen chloride.
(2) Nitrogen oxides.
(3) Sulfur dioxide.
(d) Other.
(1) Carbon monoxide.
(2) Fugitive ash.
§ 60.6450 What emission limits must I meet? By when?
(a) You must meet the emission limits specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW. You must meet the limits no later than March 10, 2031.
(b) The visible emissions of combustion ash discharged to the atmosphere from an ash conveying system (including conveyor transfer points) must not exceed 5 percent of the observation period (i.e., 9 minutes per 3-hour period), as determined by EPA Reference Method 22 observations as specified in § 60.6530(a). You must meet the limits no later than March 10, 2031. This visible emission limit does not cover visible emissions discharged inside buildings or enclosures of ash conveying systems; however, the visible emission limit does cover visible emissions discharged to the atmosphere from buildings or enclosures of ash conveying systems. This visible emissions limit does not apply to visible emissions that occur during repair and maintenance of the combustion ash conveying systems while the municipal waste combustor is not operating.
§ 60.6455 What happens to the emission limits during periods of startup, shutdown, and malfunction?
The emission limits under this subpart apply at all times including periods of municipal waste combustor warmup, startup, shutdown, and malfunction. Monitoring data cannot be dismissed or excluded from compliance calculations during periods of startup, shutdown, or malfunction, but must be recorded and reported in accordance with the provisions of § 60.6595(e).
Model Rule—Continuous Emission Monitoring
§ 60.6460 What types of continuous emission monitoring must I perform?
To continuously monitor emissions, you must perform four tasks:
(a) Install continuous emission monitoring systems for certain gaseous pollutants.
(b) Make sure your continuous emission monitoring systems are operating correctly.
(c) Make sure you obtain the minimum amount of monitoring data.
(d) Install a continuous opacity monitoring system.
§ 60.6465 What continuous emission monitoring systems must I install for gaseous pollutants?
(a) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emission monitoring systems for oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, carbon monoxide, and nitrogen oxides to demonstrate compliance with the emission limits specified in Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW. Install the continuous emission monitoring systems for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, carbon monoxide, and oxygen (or carbon dioxide) at the outlet of the air pollution control device.
(b) If you elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride in lieu of performance testing, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emissions monitoring systems for monitoring the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions discharged to the atmosphere and continuous emissions monitoring systems for oxygen (or carbon dioxide) at the outlet of the air pollution control device.
(c) You must install, evaluate, and operate each continuous emission monitoring system according to the “Monitoring Requirements” in § 60.13.
(d) You must monitor the oxygen (or carbon dioxide) concentration at each location where you monitor carbon monoxide, sulfur dioxide, and nitrogen oxides. If you elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must monitor the oxygen (or carbon dioxide) concentration at each location where you monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride.
(e) You may choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas. If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide, then an oxygen monitor is not required and you must follow the requirements in § 60.6485.
§ 60.6470 How are the data from the continuous emission monitoring systems used?
(a) You must use data from the continuous emission monitoring systems for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide to demonstrate continuous compliance with the applicable emission limits specified in Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW. To demonstrate compliance for dioxins/furans, cadmium, lead, mercury, particulate matter, opacity, hydrogen chloride, and fugitive ash, see § 60.6520.
(b) You may elect to continuously monitor emissions for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride to demonstrate continuous compliance with the emission limits specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW.
(c) For pollutants that you continuously monitor as described in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, you may request that compliance with the emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.6485.
(d) For pollutants that you continuously monitor as described in paragraphs (a) and (b) of this section, demonstrate compliance with the emission limits in Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW by using the continuous emission monitoring system specified § 60.6465 to collect the minimum amount of monitoring data specified in § 60.6490 and calculating the average emission concentration as specified in § 60.6495 and Table 5 to Subpart WWWW, as applicable.
§ 60.6475 How do I make sure my continuous emission monitoring systems are operating correctly?
(a) Conduct initial, daily, quarterly, and annual evaluations of your continuous emission monitoring systems that measure oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide and your continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate.
(b) Complete your initial evaluation of the continuous emission monitoring systems no later than 180 days after your final compliance date, or, for pollutants for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions and for which you previously determined compliance by conducting a performance test, within 180 days of notification of the Administrator of use of the continuous monitoring system, whichever is later.
(c) For initial and annual evaluations, you must collect data concurrently (or within 30 to 60 minutes) from your oxygen (or carbon dioxide) continuous emission monitoring system, your sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide continuous emission monitoring systems, as appropriate, from continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate, and the appropriate test methods specified in Tables 4 and 5 to Subpart WWWW. Collect the data during each initial and annual evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems following the applicable performance specifications in Table 4 to Subpart WWWW.
(d) For continuous emission monitoring systems that measure oxygen (or carbon dioxide), sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide, follow the quality assurance procedures in Procedure 1 of appendix F of this part for each continuous emission monitoring system. The procedures include annual relative accuracy test audit, daily calibration drift, and quarterly accuracy determinations. For continuous emission monitoring systems for any pollutants (particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride) for which you elect to continuously monitor emissions, as appropriate, follow the quality assurance procedures of the applicable procedures of appendix F as specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW or the site-specific monitoring plan.
§ 60.6480 What is my schedule for evaluating continuous emission monitoring systems?
(a) Conduct annual relative accuracy test audits of your continuous emission monitoring systems no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous performance test; you must complete five relative accuracy test audits in each 5-year calendar period.
(b) Evaluate your continuous emission monitoring systems daily and quarterly as specified in procedure 1 in appendix F of this part.
§ 60.6485 What must I do if I choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas?
You must establish the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide during the initial evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems. You may reestablish the relationship during annual performance compliance tests. To establish the relationship use three procedures:
(a) Use EPA Reference Method 3A or 3B in appendix A of this part, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10, as applicable, to determine oxygen concentration at the location of your carbon dioxide monitor.
(b) Conduct at least three test runs for oxygen. Make sure each test run represents a 1-hour average and that sampling continues for at least 30 minutes in each hour.
(c) Use the fuel-factor equation in EPA Reference Method 3B in appendix A of this part to determine the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide.
§ 60.6490 What is the minimum amount of monitoring data I must collect with my continuous emission monitoring systems?
(a) Where continuous emission monitoring systems are required, obtain 1-hour arithmetic averages. Make sure the averages for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide, and, if you elect to continuously monitor emissions, the averages for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, are in the units specified in Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW at 7 percent oxygen (or the equivalent carbon dioxide level). Use the 1-hour averages of oxygen (or carbon dioxide) data from your continuous emission monitoring system to determine the actual oxygen (or carbon dioxide) level and to calculate emissions at 7 percent oxygen (or the equivalent carbon dioxide level). The 1-hour arithmetic averages shall be calculated using the data points required under § 60.13(e)(2) of subpart A of this part. Do not correct CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, to 7 percent oxygen. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown are used as measured.
(b) Obtain at least two data points per hour in order to calculate a valid 1-hour arithmetic average.
(c) Valid continuous monitoring system hourly averages shall be obtained for all times the affected facility is operated except as specified in § 60.13(e).
(d) If you do not obtain the minimum data required in paragraphs (a) through (c) of this section, you must still use all valid data from the continuous emission monitoring systems in calculating emission concentrations in accordance with § 60.6495.
§ 60.6495 How do I convert my 1-hour arithmetic averages into appropriate averaging times and units?
(a) Use equation 1 in § 60.6680(a) to calculate emissions at 7 percent oxygen.
(b) Use the test methods in Table 4 to Subpart WWWW to calculate the 24-hr daily geometric average concentrations and percent reductions of sulfur dioxide emissions and the 24-hr daily arithmetic average for concentrations of nitrogen oxides.
(c) Calculate the 4-hour block or 24-hour daily arithmetic averages specified in Table 2 to Subpart WWWW (as applicable) from 1-hour arithmetic averages expressed in parts per million by volume corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis) for concentrations of carbon monoxide. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen, and are used as measured.
(d) If you elect to continuously monitor emissions of particulate matter, mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride, use EPA Reference Method 19, section 12.4.1, in appendix A of this part, to calculate a 24-hour daily block arithmetic average for emission concentrations.
§ 60.6500 What is required for my continuous opacity monitoring system and how are the data used?
(a) Install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous opacity monitoring system.
(b) Install, evaluate, and operate each continuous opacity monitoring system according to § 60.13.
(c) The output of the continuous opacity monitoring system shall be recorded on a 6-minute average basis.
(d) Complete an initial evaluation of your continuous opacity monitoring system according to Performance Specification 1 in appendix B of this part. Complete the evaluation no later than 180 days after your final compliance date.
(e) Follow Table 4 to Subpart WWWW to establish the procedures and test methods to determine compliance with the opacity limit in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW. The data obtained from your continuous opacity monitoring system are not used to determine compliance with the opacity limit.
§ 60.6505 What additional requirements must I meet for the operation of my continuous emission monitoring systems and continuous opacity monitoring system?
(a) Use the required span values and applicable performance specifications in Table 4 to Subpart WWWW.
(b) For continuous emission monitoring systems measuring carbon monoxide, if your municipal waste combustor is subject to the 100 parts per million dry volume carbon monoxide standard, the relative accuracy criterion of 5 parts per million dry volume is calculated as the absolute value of the mean difference between the reference method and continuous emission monitoring systems.
§ 60.6510 What must I do if any of my continuous emission monitoring systems are temporarily unavailable to meet the data collection requirements?
(a) When you are unable to obtain emissions of particulate matter, sulfur dioxide, or nitrogen oxides because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator or EPA Reference Method 19 and provide, as necessary, valid emissions data for all times that the municipal waste combustor is operated.
(b) If you are unable to obtain emissions of carbon monoxide emissions because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator or EPA Reference Method 10 and provide, as necessary, valid emissions data for all times that the municipal waste combustor is operated.
(c) If you elect to continuously monitor mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride and you are unable to obtain emissions data because of continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns, repairs, calibration checks, and zero and span adjustments, you must obtain emissions data by using other monitoring systems as approved by the Administrator.
Model Rule—Stack Testing
§ 60.6515 What types of stack tests must I conduct?
Conduct initial and annual stack tests to measure the emission levels of particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, dioxins/furans, and fugitive ash in accordance with the methods specified in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW.
§ 60.6520 How are the stack test data used?
You must use results of stack tests for particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, dioxins/furans, and fugitive ash to demonstrate compliance with the applicable emission limits in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW. When calculating total dioxins/furans, zero may be used for congeners that are below the estimated detection limit (EDL). For estimated maximum possible concentration (EMPC) results, zero may be used when the EMPC is below the EDL, otherwise the EMPC must be used in determining total dioxins/furans. To demonstrate compliance for carbon monoxide, nitrogen oxides, and sulfur dioxide, see § 60.6470.
§ 60.6525 What schedule must I follow for the stack testing?
(a) Conduct initial stack tests for sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and each of the pollutants listed in § 60.6515 by 180 days after your final compliance date.
(b) Conduct annual stack tests for each of the pollutants listed in § 60.6515 after the initial stack test. Conduct each annual stack test no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous performance test, except as specified in § 60.6540 of this section. You must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period.
§ 60.6530 What procedures and test methods must I use to stack test?
(a) Follow Table 5 to Subpart WWWW to establish the procedures and test methods, and other specific testing requirements for the different pollutants.
(b) Stack tests for all the pollutants must consist of at least three test runs, as specified in § 60.8, conducted under representative full load operating conditions. For particulate matter, opacity, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, and dioxins/furans, use the arithmetic average of the pollutant emission concentrations from the three test runs to determine compliance with the applicable emission limits in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW. For fugitive ash, use the average duration of visible emissions per hour as calculated from three 1-hr observations to determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart WWWW.
(c) Obtain an oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement at the same time as your pollutant measurements to determine diluent gas levels, as specified in § 60.6465.
(d) You may request that compliance with emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.6485.
(e) Use equation 1 in § 60.6680(a) to calculate emission levels at 7 percent oxygen (or an equivalent carbon dioxide basis). See the individual test methods in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW for other required equations.
§ 60.6535 May I conduct stack testing less often?
(a) For annual performance stack tests for dioxins/furans, you may conduct annual stack tests on an alternate performance testing schedule for the purposes of evaluating system performance to establish new operating parameter levels, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions. You may test one unit for dioxins/furans and apply the dioxins/furans operating parameters to similarly designed and equipped units on site if you meet the following conditions. First, you have multiple municipal waste combustors onsite that are subject to this subpart. Second, all those municipal waste combustors have demonstrated levels of dioxins/furans emissions less than or equal to 7 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) for 2 consecutive years. In that case, you may choose to conduct annual stack tests on only one municipal waste combustor per year at your plant. The provision only applies to performance testing for dioxins/furans emissions. You must meet the requirements in paragraphs (b) through (e) of this section.
(b) At a minimum, you must conduct a performance test for dioxins/furans emissions for one municipal waste combustor on an annual basis (no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 months following the previous performance test), and you must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period. Each year a different municipal waste combustor must be tested, and the municipal waste combustor must be tested in sequence (e.g., unit 1, unit 2, unit 3, as applicable).
(1) If each annual performance test continues to indicate a dioxins/furans emission level less than or equal to 7 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass), you may continue to conduct a performance test on only one municipal waste combustor per year.
(2) If any annual performance test indicates a dioxins/furans emission level greater than 3.6 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass), you must conduct all subsequent annual performance tests on all municipal waste combustor. You must continue to conduct performance tests on all units annually until you can demonstrate dioxins/furans emission level less than or equal to 7 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) through performance tests for all units subject to this subpart for 2 consecutive years.
(c) Upon meeting the requirements in paragraph (b) of this section for one affected facility, you may elect to apply the average carbon mass feed rate and associated carbon injection system operating parameter levels for dioxins/furans as established in § 60.6560 to similarly designed and equipped units on site.
(d) Upon testing each subsequent unit in accordance with the testing schedule established in paragraph (b) of this section, the dioxins/furans and mercury emissions of the subsequent unit must not exceed the dioxins/furans and mercury emissions measured in the most recent test of that unit prior to the revised operating parameter levels.
(e) If you follow the performance testing schedule specified in paragraph (b) of this section and apply the carbon injection system operating parameters to similarly designed and equipped units on site, you must follow the procedures specified in § 60.6630(j) for reporting, including the procedures specified in § 60.6630(i) for reporting the selection of this schedule.
§ 60.6540 May I conduct continuous monitoring or sampling in lieu of stack testing?
(a) In lieu of conducting performance stack tests according to the requirements of § 60.6515 to demonstrate continuous compliance for particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you may install, calibrate, maintain, and operate continuous emissions monitoring systems for monitoring emissions according to the requirements of § 60.6460 through § 60.6510. If you elect to continuously monitor emissions instead of conducting performance testing, you are not required to complete annual performance testing as specified in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW. If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter emissions, you are not required to continuously monitor opacity as specified in § 60.6460(d) and § 60.6500.
(b) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must also meet the following requirements:
(1) Notify the Administrator one month before starting use of the system.
(2) Notify the Administrator one month before stopping use of the system.
(c) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, develop and submit for approval by EPA, a site-specific mercury, cadmium, lead, or hydrogen chloride monitoring plan that addresses the elements and requirements in paragraphs (c)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) Installation of the continuous emission monitoring system sampling probe or other interface at a measurement location relative to each municipal waste combustor such that the measurement is representative of control of the exhaust emissions (e.g., on or downstream of the last control device).
(2) Performance and equipment specifications for the sample interface, the pollutant concentration analyzer, and the data collection and reduction system.
(3) Performance evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria (e.g., calibrations).
(4) Provisions for periods when the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control, including the requirements described in paragraphs (c)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section:
(i) A continuous emission monitoring system is out of control if either of the following conditions are met: the zero (low-level), mid-level (if applicable), or high-level calibration drift exceeds two times the applicable calibration drift specification in the applicable performance specification or in the relevant standard; or the continuous emission monitoring system fails a performance test audit (e.g., cylinder gas audit), relative accuracy audit, relative accuracy test audit, or linearity test audit.
(ii) When the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control, take corrective action and repeat all necessary tests that indicate that the system is out of control until the performance requirements are within the applicable limits. The beginning of the out-of-control period is the hour you conduct a performance check (e.g., calibration drift) that indicates an exceedance of the performance requirements established under this part. The end of the out-of-control period is the hour following the completion of corrective action and your successful demonstration that the system is within the allowable limits. You may not use recorded data from the period the continuous emission monitoring system is out of control in data averages and calculations or to meet any data availability requirements.
(iii) You must submit all information concerning out-of-control periods for your continuous emission monitoring system, including start and end dates and hours and descriptions of corrective actions taken, in the annual or semiannual compliance reports required in § 60.6645(d).
(5) Ongoing data quality assurance procedures for continuous emission monitoring systems as described in paragraphs (c)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A continuous emission monitoring system quality control program. You must develop and, upon request, submit to EPA for approval a site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous emission monitoring system performance evaluation required under paragraph (c)(5)(ii) of this section. In addition, each quality control program shall include, at a minimum, a written protocol that describes procedures for each of the operations described in paragraphs (c)(5)(i)(A) through (c)(5)(i)(F) of this section.
(A) Initial and any subsequent calibration of the continuous emission monitoring system;
(B) Determination and adjustment of the calibration drift of the continuous emission monitoring system;
(C) Preventive maintenance of the continuous emission monitoring system, including spare parts inventory;
(D) Data recording, calculations, and reporting;
(E) Accuracy audit procedures, including sampling and analysis methods; and
(F) Program of corrective action for a malfunctioning continuous emission monitoring system.
(ii) Your performance evaluation test plan must include the evaluation program objectives, an evaluation program summary, the performance evaluation schedule, data quality objectives, and both an internal and external quality assurance program. Data quality objectives are the pre-evaluation expectations of precision, accuracy, and completeness of data. The internal quality assurance program must include, at a minimum, the activities planned by routine operators and analysts to provide an assessment of continuous emission monitoring system performance, for example, plans for relative accuracy testing using the appropriate reference method in § 60.6475(c). The external quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, systems audits that include the opportunity for on-site evaluation by the Administrator of instrument calibration, data validation, sample logging, and documentation of quality control data and field maintenance activities.
(6) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous emission monitoring system in accordance with the site-specific monitoring plan.
(7) You must operate and maintain the continuous emission monitoring system in continuous operation according to the site-specific monitoring plan and procedures 5 and 6 of appendix F of this part.
(d) You may use a continuous emission monitoring system for mercury or hydrogen chloride following the date of approval of the site-specific monitoring plan required in paragraph (c) of this section. You may use a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium or lead following the date a final performance specification applicable to a cadmium or lead monitor is published in the Federal Register and the date of approval of the site-specific monitoring plan required in paragraph (c) of this section.
(e) In lieu of conducting performance stack tests according to the requirements of § 60.6515 to demonstrate continuous compliance for mercury or dioxins/furans, you may install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for monitoring mercury or dioxins/furans emissions and record the output of the system. For dioxins/furans emissions, you must also analyze the sample using EPA Method 23.
(f) You may use a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans following the date a final performance specification applicable to dioxins/furans from monitors is published in the Federal Register or the date of approval of a site-specific monitoring plan.
(g) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must meet the following requirements:
(1) Notify the Administrator one month before starting use of the system.
(2) Notify the Administrator one month before stopping use of the system.
(3) Complete your initial performance evaluation of the continuous automated sampling system no later than 180 days after your final compliance date, or, if you previously determined compliance by conducting a performance test, within 180 days of notification to the Administrator of use of the continuous automated sampling system, whichever is later.
(4) You may request that compliance with the emission limits be determined using carbon dioxide measurements corrected to an equivalent of 7 percent oxygen. The relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide levels for the affected facility shall be established as specified in § 60.6485.
(5) Conduct an initial performance test for emissions as required under § 60.8 of subpart A of this part. Determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart WWWW using the continuous automated sampling system specified in paragraph (e) of this section to collect integrated samples and analyze emissions for the following time periods:
(i) For dioxins/furans, collect an integrated sample over each 2-week period. Analyze the collected samples using Method 23.
(ii) For mercury, collect an integrated sample over each 24-hour daily period. Analyze the sample according to the applicable final performance specification or the approved site-specific monitoring plan required by paragraph (h) of this section.
(6) Determine compliance with the emission limits in Table 2 to Subpart WWWW based on 2-week emission concentrations for dioxins/furans and on the 24-hour daily emission concentrations for mercury using samples collected at the system outlet. For mercury percent reductions, also use the corresponding 24-hour daily emission concentration samples collected at the system inlet. The emission concentrations shall be expressed in nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass) for dioxins/furans and micrograms per dry standard cubic meter for mercury, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis). Do not correct CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown to 7 percent oxygen. CEMs data during warmup, startup, and shutdown are used as measured.
(7) Beginning on the date two years after the respective final performance specification for continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans is published in the Federal Register or on the date two years after approval of a site-specific monitoring plan, you must operate your continuous automated sampling system and collect emissions for all times that your municipal waste combustor is operating.
(8) Use all valid data in calculating emission concentrations.
(9) For mercury, operate the continuous automated sampling system according to Performance Specification 12B in appendix B of this part or, for mercury or dioxins/furans, the approved site-specific monitoring plan.
(10) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, develop and implement a site-specific monitoring plan as specified in paragraph (h) of this section. If you rely on a performance specification, you may refer to that document in addressing the applicable procedures and criteria. For mercury, you must incorporate procedure 5 of appendix F to this part into the site-specific monitoring plan.
(11) When you are unable to obtain emissions data because of continuous automated sampling system breakdowns, repairs, quality assurance checks, or adjustments, you must obtain parametric monitoring data by using other monitoring systems as approved by EPA.
(h) If you elect to install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, develop and submit for approval by EPA a site-specific monitoring plan that has sufficient detail to assure the validity of the continuous automated sampling system data and that addresses the elements and requirements in paragraphs (h)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) Installation of the continuous automated sampling system sampling probe or other interface at a measurement location relative to each municipal waste combustor such that the measurement is representative of control of the exhaust emissions (e.g., on or downstream of the last control device).
(2) Performance and equipment specifications for the sample interface, the pollutant concentration analytical method, and the data collection system.
(3) Performance evaluation procedures and acceptance criteria.
(4) Provisions for periods when the continuous automated sampling system is malfunctioning or is out of control, including the requirements described in paragraphs (h)(4)(i) through (iii) of this section.
(i) The site-specific monitoring plan must identify criteria for determining that the continuous automated sampling system is out of control, including periods when the sampling system is not collecting a representative sample or is malfunctioning, or when the analytical method does not meet site-specific quality criteria established in paragraph (h)(5) of this section.
(ii) When the continuous automated sampling system is out of control, take corrective action and repeat all necessary tests that indicate that the system is out of control until the performance requirements are within the applicable limits. The out-of-control period includes all hours that the sampling system was not collecting a representative sample or was malfunctioning, or hours represented by a sample for which the analysis did not meet the relevant quality criteria. You may not use emissions data from the period the continuous automated sampling system is out-of-control period to determine compliance with the emission limits or to meet any data availability requirements.
(iii) You must submit all information concerning out-of-control periods for your continuous automated sampling system, including start and end dates and hours, estimates of emissions during the out-of-control period and the basis of the estimate, and descriptions of corrective actions taken, in the annual or semiannual compliance reports required in § 60.6645(d).
(5) Ongoing data quality assurance procedures for continuous automated sampling systems as described in paragraphs (h)(5)(i) and (ii) of this section.
(i) A continuous automated sampling system and analysis quality control program. You must develop and submit to EPA for approval, upon request, a site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous automated sampling system performance evaluation required in paragraph (h)(5)(ii) of this section. In addition, each quality control program shall include, at a minimum, a written protocol that describes procedures for each of the operations described in paragraphs (h)(5)(i)(A) through (G) of this section.
(A) Correct placement, installation of the continuous automated sampling system such that the system is collecting a representative sample of gas;
(B) Initial and subsequent calibration of flow such that the sample collection rate of the continuous automated sampling system is known and verifiable;
(C) Procedures to assure representative (e.g., proportional or isokinetic) sampling;
(D) Preventive maintenance of the continuous automated sampling system, including spare parts inventory and procedures for cleaning equipment, replacing sample collection media, or other servicing at the end of each sample collection period;
(E) Data recording and reporting, including an automated indicator and recording device to show when the continuous automated monitoring system is operating and collecting data and when it is not collecting data;
(F) Accuracy audit procedures for analytical methods; and
(G) Program of corrective action for a malfunctioning continuous automated sampling system.
(ii) Your performance evaluation test plan must include the evaluation program objectives, an evaluation program summary, the performance evaluation schedule, data quality objectives, and both an internal and external quality assurance program. Data quality objectives are the pre-evaluation expectations of precision, accuracy, and completeness of data. The internal quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, the activities planned by routine operators and analysts to provide an assessment of continuous automated sampling system performance, for example, plans for relative accuracy testing using the appropriate reference method in paragraph (h)(3) of this section, and an assessment of quality of analysis results. The external quality assurance program shall include, at a minimum, systems audits that include the opportunity for on-site evaluation by the Administrator of instrument calibration, data validation, sample logging, and documentation of quality control data and field maintenance activities.
(6) You must conduct a performance evaluation of each continuous automated sampling system in accordance with the site-specific monitoring plan.
(7) You must operate and maintain the continuous automated sampling system in continuous operation according to the site-specific monitoring plan.
Model Rule—Other Monitoring Requirements
§ 60.6545 Must I meet other requirements for continuous monitoring?
You must also monitor all the following three operating parameters:
(a) Load level of each municipal waste combustor.
(b) Temperature of flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter air pollution control device.
(c) Carbon feed rate if activated carbon is used to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
§ 60.6550 How do I monitor the load of my municipal waste combustor?
(a) If your municipal waste combustor generates steam, you must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a steam flowmeter or a feed water flowmeter and meet all the following five requirements:
(1) Continuously measure and record the measurements of steam (or feed water) flow in kilograms (or pounds) per hour.
(2) Calculate your steam (or feed water) flow in 4-hour block arithmetic averages.
(3) Calculate the steam (or feed water) flow rate using the method in “American Society of Mechanical Engineers Power Test Codes: Test Code for Steam Generating Units, Power Test Code 4.1—1964 (R1991),” section 4 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17 of subpart A of this part).
(4) Design, construct, install, calibrate, and use nozzles or orifices for flow rate measurements, using the recommendations in “American Society of Mechanical Engineers Interim Supplement 19.5 on Instruments and Apparatus: Application, part II of Fluid Meters,” 6th Edition (1971), chapter 4 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17 of subpart A of this part).
(5) Before each dioxins/furans performance stack test, or at least once a year, calibrate all signal conversion elements associated with steam (or feed water) flow measurements according to the manufacturer instructions. Measurement devices such as flow nozzles and orifices are not required to be recalibrated after they are installed.
(b) Determine the maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load during the initial performance test for dioxins/furans and each subsequent performance test specified in § 60.6525 during which you achieve compliance with the dioxins/furans emission limit in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW. The maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load is the highest 4-hour arithmetic average load achieved during four consecutive hours during the most recent test. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.6535, you may apply the same maximum municipal waste combustor load from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
§ 60.6555 How do I monitor the temperature of flue gases at the inlet of my particulate matter control device?
(a) You must install, calibrate, maintain, and operate a device to continuously measure the temperature of the flue gas stream at the inlet of each particulate matter control device.
(b) Calculate the temperature of the flue gas stream in 4-hour block arithmetic averages.
(c) Determine the maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature for each particulate matter control device during the initial performance test for dioxins/furans and each subsequent performance test specified in § 60.6525 during which you achieve compliance with the dioxins/furans emission limit. The maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature is the highest 4-hour arithmetic average temperature achieved at the particulate matter control device inlet during four consecutive hours during the most recent test. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.6535, you may apply the same maximum particulate matter control device temperature from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
§ 60.6560 How do I monitor the injection rate of activated carbon?
If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must meet three requirements:
(a) Select a carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that can be used to calculate carbon feed rate (for example, screw feeder speed, hopper volume, or hopper refill frequency).
(b) During the initial and each subsequent dioxins/furans and mercury performance stack test specified in § 60.6525, estimate an average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. You must determine an average operating parameter level that correlates to the carbon feed rate and establish a relationship between the operating parameter(s) and the carbon feed rate in order to estimate the average carbon feed rate. If a subsequent dioxins/furans performance test is being performed on only one municipal waste combustor as specified in § 60.6535, you may apply the same estimated average carbon mass feed rate from the tested facility for all the similarly designed and operated municipal waste combustors.
(c) Continuously monitor the selected carbon injection operating parameter(s) (as specified in paragraph (b) of this section) during all periods when the municipal waste combustor is operating and combusting waste and calculate the 8-hour block average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour, based on the selected operating parameter. The 8-hour block average must equal or exceed the level(s) documented during the performance tests specified under paragraph (b) of this section, except that during the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test and the 2 weeks preceding the annual dioxins/furans or mercury performance test, the limit for average mass carbon feed rate may be waived following permission of the Administrator if the tests are for the purpose of evaluating system performance, testing new technology or control technologies, diagnostic testing, or related activities for the purpose of improving facility performance or advancing the state-of-the-art for controlling facility emissions.
(d) You must estimate the total carbon usage of the facility (kilograms or pounds) for each calendar quarter using two independent methods:
(1) The weight of carbon delivered to the facility.
(2) Estimate the average carbon mass feed rate in kilograms per hour or pounds per hour for each hour of operation for each municipal waste combustor, based on the selected carbon injection operating parameter(s) specified in paragraph (b) of this section, and as specified in equation 2 to § 60.6680.
(e) Use pneumatic injection pressure or another carbon injection system operational indicator for additional verification of proper carbon injection system operation. The operational indicator must provide an instantaneous visual and/or audible alarm to alert the operator of a potential interruption in the carbon feed that would not normally be indicated by direct monitoring of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., continuous weight loss feeder) or monitoring of the carbon system operating parameter(s) that are the indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed). The carbon injection system operational indicator used to provide additional verification of carbon injection system operation, including basis for selecting the indicator and operator response to the indicator alarm, shall be included in the site-specific operating manual required under § 60.6410 of this subpart.
§ 60.6565 What is the minimum amount of monitoring data I must collect with my continuous parameter monitoring systems?
(a) Where continuous parameter monitoring systems are used, obtain 1-hour arithmetic averages for all the following three parameters:
(1) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(2) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter control device.
(3) Carbon feed rate if activated carbon is used to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
(b) Obtain at least two data points per hour in order to calculate a valid 1-hour arithmetic average.
(c) Obtain valid 1-hour arithmetic averages for at least 75 percent of the operating hours per day for 90 percent of the operating days per calendar quarter.
§ 60.6570 What requirements must I meet for estimating my municipal waste combustor capacity?
(a) You must calculate the capacity for each continuous municipal waste combustor (e.g., capable of combusting continuously for a 24-hour period) based on 24 hours of operation at the maximum charging rate. You must determine the maximum charging rate separately for combustors that are designed based on heat capacity and for combustors that are not designed based on heat capacity.
(1) For combustors that are designed based on heat capacity, calculate the maximum charging rate based on the maximum design heat input capacity of the unit and a heating value of 12,800 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing refuse-derived fuel or a heating value of 10,500 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing municipal solid waste that is not refuse-derived fuel.
(2) For combustors that are not designed based on heat capacity, the maximum charging rate is the maximum design charging rate.
(b) You must calculate the capacity for each batch feed municipal waste combustor based on the maximum design amount of municipal solid waste that can be charged per batch multiplied by the maximum number of batches that could be processed in a 24-hour period.
(1) You must calculate the maximum number of batches that could be processed in a 24-hour period by dividing 24 hours by the design number of hours required to process one batch of municipal solid waste. The maximum number of batches may include a fraction (e.g., if one batch requires 16 hours, then 24/16, or 1.5 batches, could be combusted in a 24-hour period).
(2) For batch combustors that are designed based on heat capacity, calculate the municipal waste combustor capacity in megagrams per day, based on the design heating value of 12,800 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing refuse-derived fuel, or a heating value of 10,500 kilojoules per kilogram for combustors firing municipal solid waste that is not refuse-derived fuel.
Model Rule—Recordkeeping
§ 60.6575 What records must I keep?
You must keep all the following four types of records:
(a) Operator training and certification.
(b) Stack tests.
(c) Continuously monitored pollutants and parameters.
(d) Carbon feed rate.
§ 60.6580 Where must I keep my records and for how long?
(a) Keep all records onsite in paper copy or electronic format unless the Administrator approves another format. Any records required to be maintained by this subpart that are submitted electronically via the EPA's CEDRI may be maintained in electronic format. This ability to maintain electronic copies does not affect the requirement for facilities to make records, data, and reports available upon request to a delegated air agency or the EPA as part of an on-site compliance evaluation.
(b) Keep all records on each municipal waste combustor for at least 5 years.
(c) Make all records available for submittal to the Administrator, or for onsite review by an inspector.
§ 60.6585 What records must I keep for operator training and certification?
You must keep records of all the following six items:
(a) Records of provisional certifications. Include three items:
(1) Names of the municipal waste combustor chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who are provisionally certified by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or an equivalent state-approved certification program.
(2) Dates of the initial and renewal provisional certifications.
(3) Documentation showing current provisional certifications.
(b) Records of full certifications. Include three items:
(1) Names of the chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who are fully certified by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or an equivalent state-approved certification program.
(2) Dates of initial and renewal full certifications.
(3) Documentation showing current full certifications.
(c) Records showing completion of the operator training course. Include all the following three items:
(1) Names of the chief facility operator, shift supervisors, and control room operators who have completed the EPA or state municipal waste combustion operator training course.
(2) Dates of completion of the operator training course.
(3) Documentation showing completion of operator training course.
(d) Records of reviews for site-specific operating manuals. Include three items:
(1) Names of persons who have reviewed the operating manual.
(2) Date of the initial review.
(3) Dates of subsequent annual reviews.
(e) Records of when a certified operator is temporarily offsite. Include two main items:
(1) If the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor are offsite for more than 12 hours, but for 2 weeks or less, and no other certified operator is onsite, record the dates that the certified chief facility operator and certified shift supervisor were offsite.
(2) When all certified chief facility operators and certified shift supervisors are offsite for more than 2 weeks and no other certified operator is onsite, keep records of four items:
(i) Time of day that all certified persons are offsite.
(ii) The conditions that cause those people to be offsite.
(iii) The corrective actions you are taking to ensure a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor is onsite as soon as practicable.
(iv) Copies of the written reports submitted every 4 weeks that summarize the actions taken to ensure that a certified chief facility operator or certified shift supervisor will be onsite as soon as practicable.
(f) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
§ 60.6590 What records must I keep for stack tests?
For stack tests required under § 60.6515, you must keep records of all the following four items:
(a) The results of the stack tests for eight pollutants or parameters recorded in the appropriate units of measure specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW:
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead.
(4) Mercury.
(5) Opacity.
(6) Particulate matter.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(b) Test reports including supporting calculations that document the results of all stack tests.
(c) The maximum demonstrated load of your municipal waste combustors and maximum temperature at the inlet of your particulate matter control device during all stack tests for dioxins/furans emissions.
(d) The calendar date of each record.
§ 60.6595 What records must I keep for continuously monitored pollutants or parameters?
You must keep records of all the following eight items.
(a) Records of monitoring data. Document all the following eight parameters measured using continuous monitoring systems:
(1) All 6-minute average levels of opacity.
(2) All 1-hour average concentrations of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(3) All 1-hour average concentrations of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(4) All 1-hour average concentrations of carbon monoxide emissions.
(5) All 1-hour average load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(6) All 1-hour average flue gas temperatures at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(7) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 1-hour average concentrations of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(8) If you monitor emissions with a CEMS, you must indicate which data are CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown.
(b) Records of average concentrations. Document seven parameters:
(1) All 24-hour daily block geometric average concentrations and percent reductions of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) All 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentrations of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) All 4-hour block or 24-hour daily block arithmetic average concentrations of carbon monoxide emissions, as applicable.
(4) All 4-hour block arithmetic average load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) All 4-hour block arithmetic average flue gas temperatures at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentrations and percent reductions, as appropriate, of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(7) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system to monitor mercury or dioxins/furans instead of conducting performance testing, all integrated 24-hour mercury concentrations (or percent reductions) or all integrated 2-week dioxins/furans concentrations.
(c) Records of exceedances. Document all the following three items:
(1) Calendar dates whenever any of the seven pollutant or parameter levels recorded in paragraph (b) of this section or the opacity level recorded in paragraph (a)(1) of this section did not meet the emission limits or operating levels specified in this subpart.
(2) Reasons you exceeded the applicable emission limits or operating levels.
(3) Corrective actions you took, or are taking, to meet the emission limits or operating levels.
(d) Records of minimum data. Document three items:
(1) Calendar dates for which you did not collect the minimum amount of data required under §§ 60.6490 and 60.6565. Record those dates for the following types of pollutants and parameters:
(i) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(ii) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(iii) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(iv) Load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(v) Temperatures of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(vi) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance tests, the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vii) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, dates and times when the sampling systems were not operating or were not collecting a valid sample.
(2) Reasons you did not collect the minimum data.
(3) Corrective actions you took or are taking to obtain the required amount of data.
(e) Records of exclusions. Document each time you have excluded data from your calculation of averages for any of the following pollutants or parameters and the reasons the data were excluded:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load levels of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperatures of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or to elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, instead of conducting performance tests:
(i) Particulate matter emissions data.
(ii) Cadmium emissions data.
(iii) Lead emissions data.
(iv) Mercury emissions data.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions data.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions data.
(f) Records of drift and accuracy. Document the results of your daily drift tests and quarterly accuracy determinations according to the following:
(1) For sulfur dioxides, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxides, according to Procedure 1 of appendix F of this part. Keep the records for the sulfur dioxide, nitrogen oxides, and carbon monoxide continuous emissions monitoring systems.
(2) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter instead of conducting performance testing, according to Procedure 2, appendix F of this part. Keep the records for the particulate matter continuous emissions monitoring systems.
(3) If you elect to continuously monitor cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride instead of conducting performance testing, maintain the results of all quality evaluations, including daily drift tests and periodic accuracy determinations, specified in the approved site-specific performance evaluation test plan or as specified in Procedures 5 and 6 of appendix F of this part, as applicable.
(4) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the results of all quality evaluations specified in the approved site-specific performance evaluation test plan or Procedure 5 of appendix F of this part, as applicable.
(g) Records of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide. If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, document the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.6485.
(h) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
(i) Time system. All continuous monitoring systems data must be recorded using “local time” for the location where the municipal waste combustor is located, unless the Administrator approves an alternative time system.
(j) Additional recordkeeping for continuous cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride monitoring systems. In addition to the requirements of paragraphs (a) through (i), if you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, you must maintain the following additional records:
(1) All required continuous emission monitoring measurements (including monitoring data recorded during unavoidable continuous emission monitoring system breakdowns and out-of-control periods).
(2) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous emission monitoring system was inoperative except for zero (low-level) and high-level checks.
(3) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous emission monitoring system was out of control, as defined in § 60.6540.
(4) The date and time of commencement and completion of each period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) The date and time of commencement and completion of each time period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances, that occurs during periods other than warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(6) The nature and cause of any malfunction (if known).
(7) The corrective action taken to correct any malfunction or preventive measures adopted to prevent further malfunctions.
(8) The nature of the repairs or adjustments to the continuous emission monitoring system that was inoperative or out of control.
(9) All procedures that are part of a quality control program developed and implemented for the continuous emission monitoring system.
(10) When more than one continuous emission monitoring system is used to measure the emissions from one municipal waste combustor (e.g., multiple breechings, multiple outlets), record the results as required for each continuous emission monitoring system.
(k) Additional recordkeeping for continuous automated sampling systems. If you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must maintain the following additional records:
(1) All required 24-hour integrated mercury concentration (or percent reduction) or 2-week integrated dioxins/furans concentration data (including any data obtained during unavoidable system breakdowns and out-of-control periods).
(2) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous automated sampling system was inoperative.
(3) The date and time identifying each period during which the continuous automated sampling system was out of control.
(4) The date and time of commencement and completion of each period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) The date and time of commencement and completion of each time period of excess emissions and parameter monitoring exceedances that occurs during periods other than warmups, startups, shutdowns, and malfunctions of the municipal waste combustor.
(6) The nature and cause of any malfunction (if known).
(7) The corrective action taken to correct any malfunction or preventive measures adopted to prevent further malfunctions.
(8) The nature of the repairs or adjustments to the continuous automated sampling system that was inoperative or out of control.
(9) All procedures that are part of a quality control program developed and implemented for the continuous automated sampling system.
(10) When more than one continuous automated sampling system is used to measure the emissions from one municipal waste combustor (e.g., multiple breechings, multiple outlets), record the results as required for each system.
§ 60.6600 What records must I keep for municipal waste combustors that use activated carbon?
For municipal waste combustors that use activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, you must keep records of all of the following five items:
(a) Records of average carbon feed rate. Document five items:
(1) Average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour during all stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting calculations in the records.
(2) For the operating parameter chosen to monitor carbon feed rate, average operating level during all stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting data that document the relationship between the operating parameter and the carbon feed rate.
(3) Average carbon feed rate in kilograms (or pounds) per hour estimated for each hour of operation. Include supporting calculations in the records.
(4) Total carbon usage for each calendar quarter as estimated in § 60.6560(d). Include supporting calculations in the records.
(5) Carbon injection system operating parameter data for the parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed).
(b) Records of low carbon feed rates. Document three items:
(1) The calendar dates when the average carbon feed rate was less than the average hourly carbon feed rates determined during the most recent stack test for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions.
(2) Reasons for the low carbon feed rates.
(3) Corrective actions you took or are taking to meet the average carbon feed rate requirement.
(c) Records of carbon injection system operating parameter indicators. Document three items:
(1) Calendar dates for which the carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed) recorded are below the level(s) estimated during the performance tests.
(2) Reasons for the occurrences.
(3) Corrective actions you took or are taking to meet the levels estimated during the performance tests.
(d) Records of exclusions. Document each time you have excluded data from your calculation of average carbon feed rates and the reasons the data were excluded.
(e) Records of calendar dates. Include the calendar date on each record.
Model Rule—Reporting
§ 60.6605 What reports must I submit and in what form?
(a) Submit an initial report and annual reports, plus semiannual reports for any emission or parameter level that does not meet the limits specified in this subpart.
(b) Within 60 days after the date of completing each performance test or continuous emissions monitoring systems (CEMS) performance evaluation that includes a relative accuracy test audit (RATA), you must submit the results following the procedures specified in paragraph (e) of this section. Data collected using test methods and performance evaluations of CEMS measuring RATA pollutants that are supported by the EPA's Electronic Reporting Tool (ERT) as listed on the EPA's ERT website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/electronic-reporting-tool-ert) at the time of the test or performance evaluation must be submitted in a file format generated using the EPA's ERT. Alternatively, you may submit an electronic file consistent with the extensible markup language (XML) schema listed on the EPA's ERT website. Data collected using test methods and performance evaluations of CEMS measuring RATA pollutants that are not supported by the EPA's ERT as listed on the EPA's ERT website at the time of the test or performance evaluation must be included as an attachment in the ERT or an alternate electronic file.
(c) For the semiannual and annual reports specified under paragraph (a) of this section, beginning on March 10, 2027 or once the report template for this subpart has been available on the Compliance and Emissions Data Reporting Interface (CEDRI) website (https://www.epa.gov/electronic-reporting-air-emissions/cedri) for one year, whichever date is later, submit all subsequent reports using the appropriate electronic report template on the CEDRI website for this subpart and following the procedure specified in paragraph (e) of this section. The date report templates become available will be listed on the CEDRI website. Unless the Administrator or delegated state agency or other authority has approved a different schedule for submission of reports, the report must be submitted by the deadline specified in this subpart, regardless of the method in which the report is submitted.
(d) If you are required to submit notifications or reports following the procedure specified in this paragraph (d), you must submit notifications or reports to the EPA via the CEDRI, which can be accessed through the EPA's Central Data Exchange (CDX) (https://cdx.epa.gov/). The EPA will make all the information submitted through CEDRI available to the public without further notice to you. Do not use CEDRI to submit information you claim as CBI. Although we do not expect persons to assert a claim of CBI, if you wish to assert a CBI claim for some of the information in the report or notification, you must submit a complete file in the format specified in this subpart, including information claimed to be CBI, to the EPA following the procedures in paragraphs (d)(1) and (2) of this section. Clearly mark the part or all of the information that you claim to be CBI. Information not marked as CBI may be authorized for public release without prior notice. Information marked as CBI will not be disclosed except in accordance with procedures set forth in 40 CFR part 2. All CBI claims must be asserted at the time of submission. Anything submitted using CEDRI cannot later be claimed CBI. Furthermore, under CAA section 114(c), emissions data is not entitled to confidential treatment, and the EPA is required to make emissions data available to the public. Thus, emissions data will not be protected as CBI and will be made publicly available. You must submit the same file submitted to the CBI office with the CBI omitted to the EPA via the EPA's CDX as described earlier in this paragraph (d).
(1) The preferred method to receive CBI is for it to be transmitted electronically using email attachments, File Transfer Protocol, or other online file sharing services. Electronic submissions must be transmitted directly to the OAQPS CBI Office at the email address oaqps_cbi@epa.gov, and as described above, should include clear CBI markings. ERT files should be flagged to the attention of the Branch Manager, Measurement Strategies Branch; all other files should be flagged to the attention of the Large Municipal Waste Combustor Sector Lead. If assistance is needed with submitting large electronic files that exceed the file size limit for email attachments, and if you do not have your own file sharing service, please email oaqps_cbi@epa.gov to request a file transfer link.
(2) If you cannot transmit the file electronically, you may send CBI information through the postal service to the following address: OAQPS Document Control Officer (C404-02), OAQPS, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 109 T.W. Alexander Drive, P.O. Box 12055, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711. ERT files should be sent to the attention of the Branch Manager, Measurement Strategies Branch, and all other files should be sent to the attention of the Large Municipal Waste Combustor Sector Lead. The mailed CBI material should be double wrapped and clearly marked. Any CBI markings should not show through the outer envelope.
(e) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of EPA system outage for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of EPA system outage, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (e)(1) through (7) of this section.
(1) You must have been or will be precluded from accessing CEDRI and submitting a required report within the time prescribed due to an outage of either the EPA's CEDRI or CDX systems.
(2) The outage must have occurred within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date that the submission is due.
(3) The outage may be planned or unplanned.
(4) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(5) You must provide to the Administrator a written description identifying:
(i) The date(s) and time(s) when CDX or CEDRI was accessed and the system was unavailable;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to EPA system outage;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(6) The decision to accept the claim of EPA system outage and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(7) In any circumstance, the report must be submitted electronically as soon as possible after the outage is resolved.
(f) If you are required to electronically submit a report through CEDRI in the EPA's CDX, you may assert a claim of force majeure for failure to timely comply with that reporting requirement. To assert a claim of force majeure, you must meet the requirements outlined in paragraphs (f)(1) through (5) of this section.
(1) You may submit a claim if a force majeure event is about to occur, occurs, or has occurred or there are lingering effects from such an event within the period of time beginning five business days prior to the date the submission is due. For the purposes of this section, a force majeure event is defined as an event that will be or has been caused by circumstances beyond the control of the affected facility, its contractors, or any entity controlled by the affected facility that prevents you from complying with the requirement to submit a report electronically within the time period prescribed. Examples of such events are acts of nature (e.g., hurricanes, earthquakes, or floods), acts of war or terrorism, or equipment failure or safety hazard beyond the control of the affected facility (e.g., large scale power outage).
(2) You must submit notification to the Administrator in writing as soon as possible following the date you first knew, or through due diligence should have known, that the event may cause or has caused a delay in reporting.
(3) You must provide to the Administrator:
(i) A written description of the force majeure event;
(ii) A rationale for attributing the delay in reporting beyond the regulatory deadline to the force majeure event;
(iii) A description of measures taken or to be taken to minimize the delay in reporting; and
(iv) The date by which you propose to report, or if you have already met the reporting requirement at the time of the notification, the date you reported.
(4) The decision to accept the claim of force majeure and allow an extension to the reporting deadline is solely within the discretion of the Administrator.
(5) In any circumstance, the reporting must occur as soon as possible after the force majeure event occurs.
(g) Keep a copy of all reports required by §§ 60.6615, 60.6625, and 60.6640 onsite for 5 years.
(h) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride or to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury emissions instead of conducting performance tests, notify the Administrator one month prior to starting or stopping use of the particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, and dioxins/furans continuous emission monitoring systems or continuous automated sampling systems.
(i) If you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, you must also submit to EPA for approval, the site-specific monitoring plan, including the site-specific performance evaluation test plan for the continuous emission monitoring system or the continuous automated sampling system. You must maintain copies of the site-specific monitoring plan on record for the life of the municipal waste combustor to be made available for inspection, upon request, by the Administrator. If the site-specific monitoring plan is revised and approved, you must maintain the previous (i.e., superseded) versions of the plan on record to be made available for inspection, upon request, by the Administrator, for a period of 5 years after each revision to the plan.
§ 60.6610 What are the appropriate units of measurement for reporting my data?
See Tables 2 and 3 to Subpart WWWW for appropriate units of measurement.
§ 60.6615 When must I submit the initial performance test report?
As specified in § 60.8(a), submit your initial report by 180 days after your final compliance date.
§ 60.6620 What must I include in my initial performance test report?
You must include seven items:
(a) The emission levels measured on the date of the initial evaluation of your continuous emission monitoring systems for all of the following pollutants or parameters as recorded in accordance with § 60.6595(b).
(1) The 24-hour daily block geometric average concentration or percent reduction of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) The 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentration of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) The 4-hour block or 24-hour daily arithmetic average concentration of carbon monoxide emissions, as applicable.
(4) The 4-hour block arithmetic average load level of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) The 4-hour block arithmetic average flue gas temperature at the inlet of the particulate matter control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing, all 1-hour average concentrations of particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions.
(7) If you monitor emissions with a CEMS, you must indicate which data are CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown.
(b) The results of the initial performance stack tests for eight pollutants or parameters (use appropriate units as specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW):
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead.
(4) Mercury.
(5) Opacity.
(6) Particulate matter.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(c) The test report that documents the initial stack tests including supporting calculations.
(d) The initial performance evaluation of your continuous emissions monitoring systems. Use the applicable performance specifications in appendix B of this part in conducting the evaluation.
(e) The maximum demonstrated load of your municipal waste combustor and the maximum demonstrated temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter control device. Use values established during your initial stack test for dioxins/furans emissions and include supporting calculations.
(f) If your municipal waste combustor uses activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, the average carbon mass feed rates that you recorded during the stack tests for dioxins/furans and mercury emissions. Include supporting calculations as specified in § 60.6660(a)(1) and (2).
(g) If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, documentation of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.6485.
§ 60.6625 When must I submit the annual report?
Submit the annual report no later than February 1 of each year that follows the calendar year in which you collected the data. If you have an operating permit for any unit under title V of the CAA you must submit semiannual reports. Parts 70 and 71 of this chapter contain program requirements for permits.
§ 60.6630 What must I include in my annual report?
Summarize data collected for all pollutants and parameters regulated under this subpart. Your summary must include twelve items:
(a) A list of the results achieved during the annual stack test, using appropriate units, for eight pollutants, as recorded under § 60.6590(a):
(1) Dioxins/furans.
(2) Cadmium.
(3) Lead
(4) Mercury.
(5) Particulate Matter.
(6) Opacity.
(7) Hydrogen chloride.
(8) Fugitive ash.
(b) List of the highest average levels recorded, in the appropriate units, for the following pollutants or parameters:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device (4-hour block average).
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(c) For continuously monitored pollutants identified in paragraphs (b)(1) through (3) and (b)(6) of this section, a list of the block averages recorded during all operations for the reporting year, identifying measurements recorded during periods of warmup, startup, and shutdown as defined in this subpart.
(d) The highest 6-minute opacity level measured. Base the value on all 6-minute average opacity levels recorded by your continuous opacity monitoring system (§ 60.6595(a)(1)).
(e) The total number of hours per calendar quarter and hours per calendar year that you did not obtain valid data for the following pollutants or parameters. For each continuously monitored pollutant or parameter, the hours of valid emissions data per calendar quarter and per calendar year expressed as a percent of the hours per calendar quarter or year that the municipal waste combustor was operating and combusting municipal solid waste. Include data on:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(7) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the total number of hours per calendar quarter and hours per calendar year that the sampling systems were not operating or were not collecting a valid sample. Include the number of hours during which the continuous automated sampling system was operating and collecting a valid sample as a percent of hours per calendar quarter or year that the municipal waste combustor was operating and combusting municipal solid waste.
(f) The total number of hours you have excluded data from the calculation of average levels (include the reasons for excluding it). Include data for the following pollutants or parameters:
(1) Sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of the municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of the particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, hydrogen chloride, or dioxins/furans emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Cadmium emissions.
(iii) Lead emissions.
(iv) Mercury emissions.
(v) Hydrogen chloride emissions.
(vi) Dioxins/furans emissions.
(7) If you elect to use continuous automated sampling systems for dioxins/furans or mercury, the total number of hours that the data for mercury and dioxins/furans were excluded from the calculation of average emission concentrations or parameters.
(g) A summary of the data in paragraphs (a) through (g), excluding (c), of this section from the year preceding the reporting year which gives the Administrator a summary of the performance of the municipal waste combustor over a 2-year period.
(h) A summary of any emission or parameter level, including the information specified in paragraphs (a) through (f) of this section, that did not meet the limits specified in this subpart.
(i) A notice of your intent to begin a reduced stack testing schedule for dioxins/furans emissions during the following calendar year if you are eligible for alternative scheduling (§ 60.6535(a) or (b)).
(j) A notice of your intent to apply the average carbon mass feed rate and associated carbon injection system operating parameter levels to similarly designed and equipped units on site. (§ 60.6535(c)).
(k) If you choose to monitor carbon dioxide instead of oxygen as a diluent gas, documentation of the relationship between oxygen and carbon dioxide, as specified in § 60.6485.
(l) Documentation of periods when all certified chief facility operators and certified shift supervisors are offsite for more than 12 hours.
§ 60.6635 What must I do if I am out of compliance with the requirements of this subpart?
You must submit a semiannual report on any recorded emission or parameter level that does not meet the requirements specified in this subpart.
§ 60.6640 If a semiannual report is required, when must I submit it?
(a) For data collected during the first half of a calendar year, submit your semiannual report by August 1 of that year.
(b) For data you collected during the second half of the calendar year, submit your semiannual report by February 1 of the following year.
§ 60.6645 What must I include in the semiannual out-of-compliance reports?
You must include all of the following three items in the semiannual report:
(a) For any of the pollutants or parameters listed in paragraphs (a)(1)-(8) of this section that exceeded the limits specified in this subpart, include the calendar date they exceeded the limits, the reasons for exceeding the limits, and your corrective actions. You must also include the averaged and recorded data for that date:
(1) Concentration of sulfur dioxide emissions.
(2) Concentration of nitrogen oxides emissions.
(3) Concentration of carbon monoxide emissions.
(4) Load level of your municipal waste combustor.
(5) Temperature of the flue gases at the inlet of your particulate matter air pollution control device.
(6) Average 6-minute opacity level. The data obtained from your continuous opacity monitoring system are not used to determine compliance with the limit on opacity emissions.
(7) If you elect to continuously monitor particulate matter, cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride emissions instead of conducting performance testing:
(i) Concentration of particulate matter emissions.
(ii) Concentration of cadmium emissions.
(iii) Concentration of lead emissions.
(iv) Concentration of mercury emissions.
(v) Concentration of hydrogen chloride emissions.
(8) If you elect to use a continuous automated sampling system to monitor mercury or dioxins/furans instead of conducting performance testing, the integrated 24-hour mercury concentrations (or percent reductions) or the integrated 2-week dioxins/furans concentration.
(b) If the results of your annual stack tests (as recorded in § 60.6590(a)) show emissions above the limits specified in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW as applicable for dioxins/furans, cadmium, lead, mercury, particulate matter, opacity, hydrogen chloride, and fugitive ash, include a copy of the test report that documents the emission levels and your corrective actions. The semiannual report shall contain a statement indicating that pollutant levels were exceeded during the performance test and list the pollutants whose limits were exceeded and a copy of the performance test is no longer required.
(c) For municipal waste combustors that apply activated carbon to control dioxins/furans or mercury emissions, include documentation of all dates when the carbon injection system operating parameter(s) that are the primary indicator(s) of carbon mass feed rate (e.g., screw feeder speed) are below the levels established during the most recent mercury and dioxins/furans stack test (as specified in § 60.6600(a)(1)). Include four items:
(1) The average carbon mass feed rate (in kilograms per hour or pounds per hour) estimated for each hour of operation.
(2) Reasons for occurrences of low carbon feed rates.
(3) The corrective actions you have taken to meet the carbon feed rate requirement.
(4) The calendar date.
(d) If you elect to install a continuous emission monitoring system for cadmium, lead, mercury, or hydrogen chloride, or you elect to install a continuous automated sampling system for dioxins/furans or mercury, submit information concerning all out-of-control periods for each continuous emission monitoring system or each continuous automated sampling system, including start and end dates and hours and descriptions of corrective actions taken.
§ 60.6650 Can reporting dates be changed?
(a) If the Administrator agrees, you may change the semiannual or annual reporting dates.
(b) See § 60.19(c) for procedures to seek approval to change your reporting date.
Model Rule—Air Curtain Incinerators That Burn 100 Percent Wood Waste, Clean Lumber, and Yard Waste
§ 60.6655 What is an air curtain incinerator?
An air curtain incinerator operates by forcefully projecting a curtain of air across an open chamber or open pit in which combustion occurs. Incinerators of that type can be constructed above or below ground and with or without refractory walls and floor.
§ 60.6660 What is yard waste?
Yard waste is grass, grass clippings, bushes, shrubs, and clippings from bushes and shrubs. They come from residential, commercial/retail, institutional, or industrial sources as part of maintaining yards or other private or public lands. Yard waste does not include two items:
(a) Construction, renovation, and demolition wastes that are exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in § 60.6685.
(b) Clean wood that is exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in § 60.6685.
§ 60.6665 What are the emission limits for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
If your air curtain incinerator with a capacity to combust greater than 250 tons per day of municipal solid waste combusts a fuel feed stream of 100 percent wood waste, 100 percent clean lumber, 100 percent yard waste, or a 100 percent mixture of only wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste, and no other municipal solid waste materials, you must only meet the emission limits in this section.
(a) By 180 days after your final compliance date, you must meet two limits:
(1) The opacity limit is 10 percent (6-minute average) except as provided in paragraph (a)(2) of this section.
(2) The opacity limit is 35 percent (6-minute average) during the startup period that is within the first 30 minutes of operation.
(b) Reserved
§ 60.6670 How must I monitor opacity for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
(a) Use the procedures specified in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW to determine compliance with the opacity limit for air curtain incinerators under § 60.6665.
(b) Conduct an initial test for opacity as specified in § 60.8 of subpart A of this part.
(c) After the initial test for opacity, conduct annual tests (no less than 9 calendar months and no more than 15 calendar months following the previous test). You must complete five performance tests in each 5-year calendar period.
§ 60.6675 What are the recordkeeping and reporting requirements for air curtain incinerators that burn 100 percent wood waste, clean lumber, and/or yard waste?
(a) Provide a notice of construction that includes four items:
(1) Your intent to construct the air curtain incinerator.
(2) Your planned initial startup date.
(3) Types of fuels you plan to combust in your air curtain incinerator.
(4) The capacity of your incinerator, including supporting capacity calculations, as specified in § 60.6570.
(b) Keep records of results of the initial opacity performance test and all subsequent opacity performance tests onsite in either paper copy or electronic format unless the Administrator approves another format.
(c) Keep all records for each incinerator for at least 5 years.
(d) Make all records available for submittal to the Administrator or for onsite review by an inspector.
(e) Submit the results (each 6-minute average) of the initial opacity performance test and all subsequent opacity performance tests by February 1 of the year following the year of the opacity emission test.
(f) Submit reports in either paper copy or electronic format on or before the applicable submittal date.
(g) If the Administrator agrees, you may change the annual reporting dates (see § 60.19(c)).
(h) Keep a copy of all reports onsite for a period of 5 years.
Equations
§ 60.6680 What equations must I use?
(a) Concentration correction to 7 percent oxygen. Correct any pollutant concentration to 7 percent oxygen using equation 1 of this section:
Equation 1 to Paragraph (a)
Where:
C7% = concentration corrected to 7 percent oxygen.
Cunc = uncorrected pollutant concentration.
CO2 = concentration of oxygen (percent).
(b) Quarterly carbon usage. If you use activated carbon to comply with the dioxins/furans or mercury limits, calculate the required quarterly usage of carbon using equation 2 of this section for facility basis or equation 3 of this section for unit basis:
(1) Plant basis.
Equation 2 to Paragraph (b)(1)
Where:
C = required quarterly carbon usage for the facility in kilograms (or pounds).
fi = required carbon feed rate for the municipal waste combustor in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. That is the average carbon feed rate during the most recent mercury or dioxins/furans stack tests (whichever has a higher feed rate).
hi = number of hours the municipal waste combustor was in operation during the calendar quarter (hours).
n = number of municipal waste combustors, i, located at your plant.
(2) Unit basis.
Equation 3 to Paragraph (b)(2)
Where:
C = required quarterly carbon usage for the unit in kilograms (or pounds).
f = required carbon feed rate for the municipal waste combustor in kilograms (or pounds) per hour. That is the average carbon feed rate during the most recent mercury or dioxins/furans stack tests (whichever has a higher feed rate).
H = number of hours the municipal waste combustor was in operation during the calendar quarter (hours).
(c) Percent Reduction. If you opt to comply with the alternative percent reduction standards for hydrogen chloride, mercury or sulfur dioxide, use the following equation to calculate the percent reduction:
Equation 4 to Paragraph (c)
Where:
%P(HCl, Hg, SO2) = percent reduction of pollutant being measured, either hydrogen chloride, mercury or sulfur dioxide
Ei = emission concentration of measured pollutant at inlet to the applicable control device, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis)
Eo = emission concentration of measured pollutant at the outlet of the applicable control device, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis)
Definitions
§ 60.6685 What definitions apply to this subpart?
Terms used but not defined in this section are defined in the CAA and in subparts A and Ba of this part.
Administrator means:
(1) For approved and effective state plans, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency that is delegated the authority to perform the specified task;
(2) For federal plans, the Administrator of the EPA, an employee of the EPA, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency to whom the authority has been delegated by the Administrator of the EPA to perform the specified task; and
(3) For NSPS, the Administrator of the EPA, an employee of the EPA, the Director of the state air pollution control agency, or employee of the state air pollution control agency to whom the authority has been delegated by the Administrator of the EPA to perform the specified task.
Air curtain incinerator means an incinerator that operates by forcefully projecting a curtain of air across an open chamber or pit in which burning occurs. Incinerators of that type can be constructed above or below ground and with or without refractory walls and floor.
Batch municipal waste combustor means a municipal waste combustor designed so it cannot combust municipal solid waste continuously 24 hours per day because the design does not allow waste to be fed to the unit or ash to be removed during combustion.
Bubbling fluidized bed combustor means a fluidized bed combustor in which the majority of the bed material remains in a fluidized state in the primary combustion zone.
Calendar quarter means a consecutive 3-month period (nonoverlapping) beginning on January 1, April 1, July 1, and October 1.
Calendar year means the period including 365 days starting January 1 and ending on December 31.
CEMS means continuous emissions monitoring system.
CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown means CEMS data collected during periods of operation defined within this subpart as warmup, startup or shutdown.
Chief facility operator means the person in direct charge and control of the operation of a municipal waste combustor and who is responsible for daily onsite supervision, technical direction, management, and overall performance of the facility.
Circulating fluidized bed combustor means a fluidized bed combustor in which the majority of the fluidized bed material is carried out of the primary combustion zone and is transported back to the primary zone through a recirculation loop.
Clean wood means untreated wood or untreated wood products including clean or untreated lumber (as defined in this subpart), tree stumps (whole or chipped), and tree limbs (whole or chipped). Clean wood does not include yard waste, which is defined elsewhere in this section, wood products that have been painted, pigment-stained, or pressure-treated by compounds such as chromate copper arsenate, pentachlorophenol, and creosote, or construction, renovation, and demolition wastes (including but not limited to railroad ties and telephone poles), which are exempt from the definition of municipal solid waste in this section.
Cofired combustor means a unit combusting municipal solid waste with nonmunicipal solid waste fuel (e.g., coal, industrial process waste) and subject to a federally enforceable permit limiting the unit to combusting a fuel feed stream, 30 percent or less of the weight of which is comprised, in aggregate, of municipal solid waste as measured on a calendar quarter basis.
Continuous automated sampling system means the total equipment and procedures for automated sample collection and sample recovery/analysis to determine a pollutant concentration or emission rate by collecting a single or multiple integrated sample(s) of the pollutant (or diluent gas) for subsequent on-or off-site analysis; integrated sample(s) collected are representative of the emissions for the sample time as specified by the applicable requirement.
Continuous emission monitoring system means a monitoring system that continuously measures the emissions of a pollutant from an affected facility.
Dioxins/furans mean tetra- through octa- chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans. For the purposes of this subpart, dioxins/furans emission limits are expressed on a total mass basis.
Digital camera opacity technique conditions mean the following four conditions that must be followed if ASTM D7520-16, “Standard Test Method for Determining the Opacity of a Plume in the Outdoor Ambient Atmosphere” (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17), is used as an alternative to EPA Method 9:
(1) During the digital camera opacity technique (DCOT) certification procedure outlined in section 9.2 of ASTM D7520-16, you or the DCOT vendor must present the plumes in front of various backgrounds of color and contrast representing conditions anticipated during field use such as blue sky, trees, and mixed backgrounds (clouds and/or a sparse tree stand).
(2) You must also have standard operating procedures in place including daily or other frequency quality checks to ensure the equipment is within manufacturing specifications as outlined in section 8.1 of ASTM D7520-16.
(3) You must follow the record keeping procedures outlined in 40 CFR 63.10(b)(1) for the DCOT certification, compliance report, data sheets, and all raw unaltered JPEGs used for opacity and certification determination.
(4) You or the DCOT vendor must have a minimum of 4 independent technology users apply the software to determine the visible opacity of the 300 certification plumes. For each set of 25 plumes, the user may not exceed 15 percent opacity of anyone reading and the average error must not exceed 7.5 percent opacity.
EPA means the Administrator of the U.S. EPA or employee of the U.S. EPA who is delegated to perform the specified task.
Federally enforceable means all limitations and conditions that are enforceable by EPA including the requirements of 40 CFR part 60, 40 CFR part 61, and 40 CFR part 63, requirements within any applicable state implementation plan, and any permit requirements established under 40 CFR 52.21 or under 40 CFR 51.165 and 40 CFR 51.166.
First half of the calendar year means the period starting on January 1 and ending on June 30 in any year.
Four-hour block average or 4-hour block average means the average of all hourly emission concentrations when the affected facility is operating and combusting municipal solid waste measured over 4-hour periods from:
(1) 12:00 midnight to 4:00 a.m.
(2) 4:00 a.m. to 8:00 a.m.
(3) 8:00 a.m. to 12:00 noon.
(4) 12:00 noon to 4:00 p.m.
(5) 4:00 p.m. to 8:00 p.m.
(6) 8:00 p.m. to 12:00 midnight.
Mass burn refractory municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a refractory wall furnace. Unless otherwise specified, this includes combustors with a cylindrical rotary refractory wall furnace.
Mass burn rotary waterwall municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a cylindrical rotary waterwall furnace or on a tumbling-tile grate.
Mass burn waterwall municipal waste combustor means a field-erected combustor that combusts municipal solid waste in a waterwall furnace.
Materials separation plan means a plan that identifies both a goal and an approach for separating certain components of municipal solid waste for a given service area in order to make the separated materials available for recycling. A materials separation plan may include elements such as dropoff facilities, buy-back or deposit-return incentives, curbside pickup programs, or centralized mechanical separation systems. A materials separation plan may include different goals or approaches for different subareas in the service area, and may include no materials separation activities for certain subareas or, if warranted, an entire service area.
Maximum demonstrated municipal waste combustor load means the highest 4-hour arithmetic average municipal waste combustor load achieved during four consecutive hours during the most recent dioxins/furans performance test demonstrating compliance with the applicable limit for municipal waste combustor organics specified under § 60.6450.
Maximum demonstrated particulate matter control device temperature means the highest 4-hour arithmetic average flue gas temperature measured at the particulate matter control device inlet during four consecutive hours during the most recent dioxins/furans performance test demonstrating compliance with the applicable limit for municipal waste combustor organics specified under § 60.6450.
Modification or modified municipal waste combustor means a municipal waste combustor you have changed after September 10, 2026 and that meets one of two criteria:
(1) The cumulative cost of the changes over the life of the unit exceeds 50 percent of the original cost of construction and installation the unit (not including the cost of any land purchased in connection with such construction or installation) updated to current costs.
(2) Any physical change in the municipal waste combustor or change in the method of operating the municipal waste combustor that increases the amount of any air pollutant emitted by the unit for which standards have been established under section 129 or section 111 of the CAA. Increases in the amount of any air pollutant emitted by the municipal waste combustor are determined when the municipal waste combustor operates at 100 percent of its physical load capability and are measured downstream of all air pollution control devices. Load restrictions based on permits or other nonphysical operational restrictions cannot be considered in the determination.
Modular excess-air municipal waste combustor means a combustor that combusts municipal solid waste, is not field-erected, and has multiple combustion chambers, all of which are designed to operate at conditions with combustion air amounts in excess of theoretical air requirements.
Modular starved-air municipal waste combustor means a combustor that combusts municipal solid waste, is not field-erected, and has multiple combustion chambers in which the primary combustion chamber is designed to operate at substoichiometric conditions.
Municipal solid waste or municipal-type solid waste or MSW means household, commercial/retail, or institutional waste. Household waste includes material discarded by single and multiple residential dwellings, hotels, motels, and other similar permanent or temporary housing establishments or facilities. Commercial/retail waste includes material discarded by stores, offices, restaurants, warehouses, nonmanufacturing activities at industrial facilities, and other similar establishments or facilities. Institutional waste includes materials discarded by schools, nonmedical waste discarded by hospitals, material discarded by nonmanufacturing activities at prisons and government facilities, and material discarded by other similar establishments or facilities. Household, commercial/retail, and institutional waste does not include used oil; sewage sludge; wood pallets; construction, renovation, and demolition wastes (which includes but is not limited to railroad ties and telephone poles); clean wood; industrial process or manufacturing wastes; medical waste; or motor vehicles (including motor vehicle parts or vehicle fluff). Household, commercial/retail, and institutional wastes include:
(1) Yard waste;
(2) Refuse-derived fuel; and
(3) Motor vehicle maintenance materials limited to vehicle batteries and tires except as specified in § 60.6305(d).
Municipal waste combustor, or MWC, means any setting or equipment that combusts solid, liquid, or gasified municipal solid waste including, but not limited to, field-erected combustion units (with or without heat recovery), modular incinerators (starved-air or excess-air), boilers (i.e., steam generating units), furnaces (whether suspension-fired, grate-fired, mass-fired, air curtain incinerators, or fluidized bed-fired), and pyrolysis/combustion units. Two criteria further define municipal waste combustors:
(1) Municipal waste combustors do not include pyrolysis or combustion units located at a plastics or rubber recycling unit as specified under Applicability (§ 60.6305(h) and (i)). Municipal waste combustors also do not include cement kilns firing municipal solid waste as specified under Applicability (§ 60.6305(j)). Municipal waste combustors also do not include internal combustion engines, gas turbines, or other combustion devices that combust landfill gases collected by landfill gas collection systems.
(2) The boundaries of a municipal waste combustor are defined as follows. The municipal waste combustor includes, but is not limited to, the municipal solid waste fuel feed system, grate system, flue gas system, bottom ash system, and the combustor water system. The municipal waste combustor boundary starts at the municipal solid waste pit or hopper and extends through three areas:
(i) The combustor flue gas system, which ends immediately following the heat recovery equipment or, if there is no heat recovery equipment, immediately following the combustion chamber.
(ii) The combustor bottom ash system, which ends at the truck loading station or similar ash handling equipment that transfers the ash to final disposal. It includes all ash handling systems connected to the bottom ash handling system.
(iii) The combustor water system, which starts at the feed water pump and ends at the piping that exits the steam drum or superheater.
(3) The municipal waste combustor does not include air pollution control equipment, the stack, water treatment equipment, or the turbine-generator set.
Municipal waste combustor capacity means the maximum charging rate of a municipal waste combustor expressed in tons per day of municipal solid waste combusted, calculated according to the procedures under § 60.6570. Section 60.6570 includes procedures for determining municipal waste combustor capacity for continuous and batch feed municipal waste combustors.
Municipal waste combustor load means the steam load of the municipal waste combustor measured as specified in § 60.6550.
Particulate matter means total particulate matter emitted from municipal waste combustors as measured using EPA Reference Method 5 (see § 60.6530)
Plastics/rubber recycling unit means an integrated processing unit for which plastics, rubber, or rubber tires are the only feed materials (incidental contaminants may be in the feed materials). The feed materials are processed into a chemical plant feedstock or petroleum refinery feedstock, where the feedstock is marketed to and used by a chemical plant or petroleum refinery as input feedstock. The following three criteria further define a plastics/rubber recycling unit:
(1) Each calendar quarter, the combined weight of the chemical plant feedstock and petroleum refinery feedstock that a plastics/rubber recycling unit produces must be more than 70 percent of the combined weight of the plastics, rubber, and rubber tires that the plastics/rubber recycling unit processes.
(2) The plastics, rubber, or rubber tires fed to the plastics/rubber recycling unit may originate from separating or diverting plastics, rubber, or rubber tires from MSW or industrial solid waste. The feed materials may include manufacturing scraps, trimmings, and off-specification plastics, rubber, and rubber tire discards.
(3) The plastics, rubber, and rubber tires fed to the plastics/rubber recycling unit may contain incidental contaminants (e.g., paper labels on plastic bottles, metal rings on plastic bottle caps).
Pulverized coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor means a combustor that fires coal and refuse-derived fuel simultaneously, in which pulverized coal is introduced into an air stream that carries the coal to the combustion chamber of the unit where it is fired in suspension. This includes both conventional pulverized coal and micropulverized coal.
Pyrolysis/combustion unit means a unit that produces gases, liquids, or solids by heating municipal solid waste. The gases, liquids, or solids produced are combusted and the emissions vented to the atmosphere.
Reconstruction means rebuilding a municipal waste combustor for which the reconstruction commenced after September 10, 2026 and the cumulative costs of the construction over the life of the unit exceed 50 percent of the original cost of construction and installation of the unit (not including any cost of land purchased in connection with such construction or installation) updated to current costs (current dollars).
Refractory unit or refractory wall furnace means a combustion unit that has no energy recovery (e.g., via a waterwall) in the furnace (i.e., radiant heat transfer section) of the combustor.
Refuse-derived fuel means a type of municipal solid waste produced by processing municipal solid waste through shredding and size classification. This includes all classes of refuse-derived fuel including two fuels:
(1) Low-density fluff refuse-derived fuel through densified refuse-derived fuel.
(2) Pelletized refuse-derived fuel.
Refuse-derived fuel stoker means a steam generating unit that combusts refuse-derived fuel in a semisuspension firing mode using air-fed distributors.
Same location means the same or contiguous properties under common ownership or control, including those separated only by a street, road, highway, or other public right-of-way. Common ownership or control includes properties that are owned, leased, or operated by the same entity, parent entity, subsidiary, subdivision, or any combination thereof. Entities may include a municipality, other governmental unit, or any quasi-governmental authority (e.g., a public utility district or regional authority for waste disposal).
Second half of the calendar year means the period starting July 1 and ending on December 31 in any year.
Semi-suspension refuse-derived fuel-fired combustor/wet refuse-derived fuel process conversion means a combustion unit that was converted from a wet refuse-derived fuel process to a dry refuse-derived fuel process, and because of constraints in the design of the system, includes a low furnace height (less than 60 feet between the grate and the roof) and a high waste capacity-to-undergrate air zone ratio (greater than 300 tons of waste per day (tpd) fuel per each undergrate air zone).
Shift supervisor means the person who is in direct charge and control of operating a municipal waste combustor and who is responsible for onsite supervision, technical direction, management, and overall performance of the municipal waste combustor during an assigned shift.
Shutdown means the period of time following cessation of charging waste to the combustion grate prior to entering a period where the municipal waste combustor is not operating. Shutdown may be claimed for up to three hours of operation per occurrence.
Spreader stoker coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor means a combustor that combusts coal and refuse-derived fuel simultaneously, in which coal is introduced to the combustion zone by a mechanism that throws the fuel onto a grate from above. Combustion takes place both in suspension and on the grate.
Spreader stoker fixed floor refuse-derived fuel-fired combustor/100 percent coal capable means a spreader stoker type combustor with a fixed floor grate design that typically fires 100 percent refuse-derived fuel but is equipped to burn 100 percent coal instead of refuse-derived fuel to fulfill 100 percent steam or energy demand.
Standard conditions means a temperature of 20 °C and a pressure of 101.3 kilopascals.
Startup means the period of time after warmup when waste is introduced to the combustion grate but prior to steady state operation. Startup may be claimed for up to three hours of operation per occurrence.
Total mass dioxins/furans or total mass means the total mass of tetra-through octa-chlorinated dibenzo-p-dioxins and dibenzofurans as determined using EPA Reference Method 23 and the procedures specified in § 60.6530.
Tumbling-tile means a grate tile hinged at one end and attached to a ram at the other end. When the ram extends, the grate tile rotates around the hinged end.
Twenty-four hour daily average or 24-hour daily average means either the arithmetic mean or geometric mean (as specified) of all hourly emission concentrations when the affected facility operates and combusts municipal solid waste measured over a 24-hour period between 12:00 midnight and the following midnight.
Untreated lumber or clean lumber means wood or wood products that have been cut or shaped and include wet, air-dried, and kiln-dried wood products. Untreated lumber does not include wood products that have been painted, pigment-stained, or “pressure-treated”. Pressure-treating compounds include, but are not limited to, chromate copper arsenate, pentachlorophenol, and creosote.
Warmup means the period of time during the first hours of a municipal waste combustor operation from a cold start until waste is fed to the combustor and has no time constraints. No waste is introduced to the combustion grate during warmup.
Waterwall furnace means a combustion unit having energy (heat) recovery in the furnace (i.e., radiant heat transfer section) of the combustor.
Yard waste means grass, grass clippings, bushes, shrubs, and clippings from bushes and shrubs. They come from residential, commercial/retail, institutional, or industrial sources as part of maintaining yards or other private or public lands. Yard waste does not include two items:
(1) Construction, renovation, and demolition wastes that are exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in this section.
(2) Clean wood that is exempt from the definition of “municipal solid waste” in this section.
Table 1 to Subpart WWWW of Part 60—Model Rule—Compliance Schedules and Increments of Progress
| Affected units | Increment 1 (submit final control plan) |
Increment 2 (award contracts) |
Increment 3 (begin onsite construction) |
Increment 4 (complete onsite construction) |
Increment 5 (final compliance) |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1. All municipal waste combustors.a | (Dates to be specified in state plan) | (Dates to be specified in state plan) | (Dates to be specified in state plan) | (Dates to be specified in state plan) | (Dates to be specified in state plan).b |
| a Plant specific schedules can be used at the discretion of the state. | |||||
| b The date can be no later than 3 years after the effective date of state plan approval or March 10, 2031. |
Table 2 to Subpart WWWW—Municipal Waste Combustor Carbon Monoxide Guidelines
| Municipal waste combustor technology | The following emission limits and averaging times apply . . . | |
|---|---|---|
| Carbon monoxide emission limit (parts per million by volume) a |
Averaging time (hours) b |
|
| Mass burn waterwall | 100 | 4 |
| Mass burn refractory | 100 | 4 |
| Mass burn rotary refractory | 110 | 24 |
| Mass burn rotary waterwall | 110 | 24 |
| Modular starved air | 50 | 4 |
| Modular excess air | 50 | 4 |
| Refuse-derived fuel stoker | 110 | 24 |
| Fluidized bed, mixed fuel (wood/refuse-derived fuel) | 110 | 24 |
| Bubbling fluidized bed combustor | 100 | 4 |
| Circulating fluidized bed combustor | 100 | 4 |
| Pulverized coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor | 110 | 4 |
| Spreader stoker coal/refuse-derived fuel mixed fuel-fired combustor | 110 | 24 |
| Semi-suspension refuse-derived fuel-fired combustor/wet refuse-derived fuel process conversion | 250 | c 24 |
| Spreader stoker fixed floor refuse-derived fuel-fired combustor/100 percent coal capable | 250 | c 24 |
| a Measured at the combustor outlet in conjunction with a measurement of oxygen concentration, corrected to 7 percent oxygen (dry basis). Calculated as an arithmetic average. CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen, and are used as measured. The averaging times are specified in greater detail in § 60.6495(b). | ||
| b Averaging times are 4-hour or 24-hour block arithmetic averages. | ||
| c 24-hour block average, geometric mean. |
Table 3 to Subpart WWWW of Part 60—Model Rule—Emission Limits for Existing Large Municipal Waste Combustors
| For the air pollutant . . . | For this combustor type . . . | You must meet this emission limit, corrected to 7 percent oxygen a . . . |
|---|---|---|
| Particulate matter | All | 20 mg/dscm. |
| Opacity | All | 10 percent opacity (6-minute block average). |
| Cadmium | All | 10 ug/dscm. |
| Lead | All | 68 ug/dscm. |
| Mercury | All | 50 ug/dscm or 85 percent reduction by weight. |
| Sulfur dioxide | All | 22 parts per million by volume dry basis or 75 percent reduction by weight or volume (daily 24-hr geometric average). |
| Nitrogen oxide b | Mass burn waterwall | 205 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hr arithmetic average). |
| Mass burn rotary | 150 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hr arithmetic average). | |
| Refuse-derived fuel stoker | 160 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hr arithmetic average). | |
| Refuse-derived fuel spreader stoker and semi-suspension | 160 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hr arithmetic average). | |
| Refuse-derived fuel fluidized bed | 180 parts per million by volume dry basis (daily 24-hr arithmetic average). | |
| Hydrogen chloride | All | 10 parts per million by volume dry basis or 96 percent reduction by weight or volume. |
| Dioxins/furans | All | 14 nanograms per dry standard cubic meter (total mass). |
| a CEMS data during warmup, startup, and shutdown, as defined in this subpart, are not corrected to 7 percent oxygen and are used as measured. | ||
| b Existing mass burn waterwall units equipped with air-to-air heat exchanger flue gas reheat in advance of a selective catalytic reduction control device are subject to a 50 parts per million by volume dry basis emission limit. |
Table 4 to Subpart WWWW of Part 60—Requirements for Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems (CEMS)
| For the following pollutants | Use the following span values for your CEMS | Use the following performance specifications for your CEMS | During each relative accuracy test run, use the following methods to collect concurrent data |
|---|---|---|---|
| 1. Particulate Matter | For operation and correlation test, P.S. 11 in appendix B of this part and procedure 2 of appendix F to this part | Follow the test methods in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW. | |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations, daily calibration drift tests, and each response correlation audit or relative response audit, procedure 2 of appendix F to this part. | |||
| 2. Nitrogen Oxides | Control device outlet: 125 percent of the maximum estimated hourly nitrogen oxides emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 in appendix F of this part
For relative accuracy audit, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 7, 7A, 7C, 7D, or 7E in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part | |||
| 3. Sulfur Dioxide | Control device outlet: 50 percent of the maximum estimated hourly sulfur dioxide emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part
For relative accuracy audit, P.S. 2 in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 6, 6A, or 6C, in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part. | |||
| 4. Carbon Monoxide | 125 percent of the maximum estimated hourly carbon with monoxide emissions of the municipal waste combustor | For operation, P.S. 4A in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part
For relative accuracy audit, P.S. 4A in appendix B of this part and procedure 1 of appendix F of this part |
Method 10, 10A, or 10B in appendix A-4 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| For quarterly accuracy determinations and daily calibration drift tests, procedure 1 in appendix F of this part. | |||
| 5. Oxygen or Carbon Dioxide | 25 percent oxygen or 20 percent carbon dioxide | P.S. 3 in appendix B of this part | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or, as an alternative for oxygen or carbon dioxide correction, the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. |
| 6. Mercury | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, P.S. 12A in appendix B of this part and procedure 5 of appendix F of this part or the approved site-specific monitoring plan | Follow the test methods in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW. |
| For relative accuracy audit, daily calibration, weekly system integrity check, quarterly audit, procedure 5 of appendix F of this part | |||
| 7. Hydrogen chloride | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, P.S. 18 in appendix B of this part and procedure 6 of appendix F of this part or the approved site-specific monitoring plan
For relative accuracy audit, daily calibration, quarterly audit, and other applicable quality assurance/quality control checks procedure 6 of appendix F of this part |
Follow the test methods in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW, except you may also use Methods 320 or 321 of appendix A to part 63. |
| 8. Cadmium or Lead | Follow the approved site-specific monitoring plan | For operation, the approved site-specific monitoring plan | Follow the test methods in Table 5 to Subpart WWWW. |
Table 5 to Subpart WWWW—Performance Test Requirements for Compliance With Emissions Limits Under § 60.6450
| To determine compliance with the . . . | You must conduct a performance test to . . . | Using . . . |
|---|---|---|
| Particulate matter emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points . . . | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas . . . | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the particulate matter emission concentration to determine compliance with the particulate matter emission limit to part 60 of this chapter . . . | Method 5 in appendix A-3 to part 60 of this chapter.
Collect a minimum sample volume of 1.7 cubic meters. The probe and filter holder heating systems in the sample train shall be set to provide a gas temperature no greater than 160 °C. An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 5 run. |
|
| Opacity emission limits | Determine compliance with the opacity limit in Table 3 to Subpart WWWW . . . | Method 9 of appendix A-4 of part 60 to this chapter, except as provided under § 60.11(e) of subpart A of this part, or as an alternative ASTM D7520-16 provided the digital camera opacity technique conditions, as defined in this subpart, are met. |
| Cadmium or lead emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis . . . | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the cadmium or lead emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits . . . | Method 29 in appendix A-8 to part 60 of this chapter. An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 29 test run for cadmium and lead required. | |
| Mercury emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points . . . | Method 1 in appendix A-1 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis . . . | Method 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative the manual method portion of ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the mercury emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits . . . | Method 29 in appendix A-8 to part 60 of this chapter or as an alternative ASTM D6784-24. Collect a minimum sample volume of 1.7 cubic meters.
An oxygen or carbon dioxide measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 29 test run for mercury required. |
|
| Sulfur dioxide emission limits | Calculate the 24-hr daily geometric average sulfur dioxide emission concentration . . . | Method 19, section 12.4.3, in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| Hydrogen chloride emission limits | Measure the hydrogen chloride emission concentration . . . | Method 26 or 26A in appendix A-8 of part 60 to this chapter, as applicable. The minimum sampling time shall be 1 hour. An oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 26 or 26A test run for hydrogen chloride. |
| Dioxins/furans emission limits | 1. Select sampling ports location and the number of traverse points . . . | |
| 2. Determine oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations of the stack gas for flue gas analysis . . . | Method 3, 3A or 3B in appendix A-2 to part 60 of this chapter, or as an alternative ASME PTC-19-10-1981—part 10. | |
| 3. Measure the dioxins/furans emission concentration to determine compliance with the emission limits . . . | Method 23 in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. The minimum sampling time shall be 4 hours. An oxygen (or carbon dioxide) measurement shall be obtained simultaneously with each Method 23 test run for dioxins/furans. | |
| Nitrogen oxides emission limits | Determine the daily arithmetic average nitrogen oxides emission concentration. | Method 19, section 12.4.1, in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. |
| Fugitive ash emission limits | Measure fugitive ash emissions . . . | Method 22 in appendix A-7 to part 60 of this chapter. The minimum observation time shall be a series of three 1-hour observations. The observation period shall include times when the facility is transferring ash from the municipal waste combustor to the area where ash is stored or loaded into containers or trucks. |
| Opacity limit for air curtain incinerators under § 60.6665 | Determine compliance with the opacity limit in § 60.6665 | Method 9 of appendix A-4 of part 60 to this chapter, or as an alternative ASTM D7520-16 provided the digital camera opacity technique conditions, as defined in this subpart, are met. |
Appendix A-1 to Part 60—Test Methods 1 through 2F
Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources
Method 1A—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources with small stacks or ducts
Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube)
Method 2A—Direct measurement of gas volume through pipes and small ducts
Method 2B—Determination of exhaust gas volume flow rate from gasoline vapor incinerators
Method 2C—Determination of gas velocity and volumetric flow rate in small stacks or ducts (standard pitot tube)
Method 2D—Measurement of gas volume flow rates in small pipes and ducts
Method 2E—Determination of landfill gas production flow rate
Method 2F—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate With Three-Dimensional Probes
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to regulations set forth in this part. Two procedures are presented: a simplified procedure, and an alternative procedure (see section 11.5). The magnitude of cyclonic flow of effluent gas in a stack or duct is the only parameter quantitatively measured in the simplified procedure.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable to gas streams flowing in ducts, stacks, and flues. This method cannot be used when: (1) the flow is cyclonic or swirling; or (2) a stack is smaller than 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m 2 (113 in. 2) in cross-sectional area. The simplified procedure cannot be used when the measurement site is less than two stack or duct diameters downstream or less than a half diameter upstream from a flow disturbance.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 This method is designed to aid in the representative measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate from a stationary source. A measurement site where the effluent stream is flowing in a known direction is selected, and the cross-section of the stack is divided into a number of equal areas. Traverse points are then located within each of these equal areas.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies.
6.1 Apparatus. The apparatus described below is required only when utilizing the alternative site selection procedure described in section 11.5 of this method.
6.1.1 Directional Probe. Any directional probe, such as United Sensor Type DA Three-Dimensional Directional Probe, capable of measuring both the pitch and yaw angles of gas flows is acceptable. Before using the probe, assign an identification number to the directional probe, and permanently mark or engrave the number on the body of the probe. The pressure holes of directional probes are susceptible to plugging when used in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, a procedure for cleaning the pressure holes by “back-purging” with pressurized air is required.
6.1.2 Differential Pressure Gauges. Inclined manometers, U-tube manometers, or other differential pressure gauges (e.g., magnehelic gauges) that meet the specifications described in Method 2, section 6.2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Procedure
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.
11.1.1 Sampling and/or velocity measurements are performed at a site located at least eight stack or duct diameters downstream and two diameters upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend, expansion, or contraction in the stack, or from a visible flame. If necessary, an alternative location may be selected, at a position at least two stack or duct diameters downstream and a half diameter upstream from any flow disturbance.
11.1.2 An alternative procedure is available for determining the acceptability of a measurement location not meeting the criteria above. This procedure described in section 11.5 allows for the determination of gas flow angles at the sampling points and comparison of the measured results with acceptability criteria.
11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.
11.2.1 Particulate Traverses.
11.2.1.1 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion can be met, the minimum number of traverse points shall be: (1) twelve, for circular or rectangular stacks with diameters (or equivalent diameters) greater than 0.61 meter (24 in.); (2) eight, for circular stacks with diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.); and (3) nine, for rectangular stacks with equivalent diameters between 0.30 and 0.61 meter (12 and 24 in.).
11.2.1.2 When the eight- and two-diameter criterion cannot be met, the minimum number of traverse points is determined from Figure 1-1. Before referring to the figure, however, determine the distances from the measurement site to the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances, and divide each distance by the stack diameter or equivalent diameter, to determine the distance in terms of the number of duct diameters. Then, determine from Figure 1-1 the minimum number of traverse points that corresponds:
(1) To the number of duct diameters upstream; and
(2) To the number of diameters downstream. Select the higher of the two minimum numbers of traverse points, or a greater value, so that for circular stacks, the number is a multiple of 4, and for rectangular stacks, the number is one of those shown in Table 1-1.
11.2.2 Velocity (Non-Particulate) Traverses. When velocity or volumetric flow rate is to be determined (but not particulate matter), the same procedure as that used for particulate traverses (Section 11.2.1) is followed, except that Figure 1-2 may be used instead of Figure 1-1.
11.3 Cross-Sectional Layout and Location of Traverse Points.
11.3.1 Circular Stacks.
11.3.1.1 Locate the traverse points on two perpendicular diameters according to Table 1-2 and the example shown in Figure 1-3. Any equation (see examples in References 2 and 3 in section 16.0) that gives the same values as those in Table 1-2 may be used in lieu of Table 1-2.
11.3.1.2 For particulate traverses, one of the diameters must coincide with the plane containing the greatest expected concentration variation (e.g., after bends); one diameter shall be congruent to the direction of the bend. This requirement becomes less critical as the distance from the disturbance increases; therefore, other diameter locations may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
11.3.1.3 In addition, for elliptical stacks having unequal perpendicular diameters, separate traverse points shall be calculated and located along each diameter. To determine the cross-sectional area of the elliptical stack, use the following equation:
Square Area = D1 × D2 × 0.7854
Where: D1 = Stack diameter 1
D2 = Stack diameter 2
11.3.1.4 In addition, for stacks having diameters greater than 0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be within 2.5 centimeters (1.00 in.) of the stack walls; and for stack diameters equal to or less than 0.61 m (24 in.), no traverse points shall be located within 1.3 cm (0.50 in.) of the stack walls. To meet these criteria, observe the procedures given below.
11.3.2 Stacks With Diameters Greater Than 0.61 m (24 in.).
11.3.2.1 When any of the traverse points as located in section 11.3.1 fall within 2.5 cm (1.0 in.) of the stack walls, relocate them away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 2.5 cm (1.0 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger. These relocated traverse points (on each end of a diameter) shall be the “adjusted” traverse points.
11.3.2.2 Whenever two successive traverse points are combined to form a single adjusted traverse point, treat the adjusted point as two separate traverse points, both in the sampling and/or velocity measurement procedure, and in recording of the data.
11.3.3 Stacks With Diameters Equal To or Less Than 0.61 m (24 in.). Follow the procedure in section 11.3.1.1, noting only that any “adjusted” points should be relocated away from the stack walls to: (1) a distance of 1.3 cm (0.50 in.); or (2) a distance equal to the nozzle inside diameter, whichever is larger.
11.3.4 Rectangular Stacks.
11.3.4.1 Determine the number of traverse points as explained in sections 11.1 and 11.2 of this method. From Table 1-1, determine the grid configuration. Divide the stack cross-section into as many equal rectangular elemental areas as traverse points, and then locate a traverse point at the centroid of each equal area according to the example in Figure 1-4.
11.3.4.2 To use more than the minimum number of traverse points, expand the “minimum number of traverse points” matrix (see Table 1-1) by adding the extra traverse points along one or the other or both legs of the matrix; the final matrix need not be balanced. For example, if a 4 × 3 “minimum number of points” matrix were expanded to 36 points, the final matrix could be 9 × 4 or 12 × 3, and would not necessarily have to be 6 × 6. After constructing the final matrix, divide the stack cross-section into as many equal rectangular, elemental areas as traverse points, and locate a traverse point at the centroid of each equal area.
11.3.4.3 The situation of traverse points being too close to the stack walls is not expected to arise with rectangular stacks. If this problem should ever arise, the Administrator must be contacted for resolution of the matter.
11.4 Verification of Absence of Cyclonic Flow.
11.4.1 In most stationary sources, the direction of stack gas flow is essentially parallel to the stack walls. However, cyclonic flow may exist (1) after such devices as cyclones and inertial demisters following venturi scrubbers, or (2) in stacks having tangential inlets or other duct configurations which tend to induce swirling; in these instances, the presence or absence of cyclonic flow at the sampling location must be determined. The following techniques are acceptable for this determination.
11.4.2 Level and zero the manometer. Connect a Type S pitot tube to the manometer and leak-check system. Position the Type S pitot tube at each traverse point, in succession, so that the planes of the face openings of the pitot tube are perpendicular to the stack cross-sectional plane; when the Type S pitot tube is in this position, it is at “0° reference.” Note the differential pressure (Δp) reading at each traverse point. If a null (zero) pitot reading is obtained at 0° reference at a given traverse point, an acceptable flow condition exists at that point. If the pitot reading is not zero at 0° reference, rotate the pitot tube (up to ±90° yaw angle), until a null reading is obtained. Carefully determine and record the value of the rotation angle (α) to the nearest degree. After the null technique has been applied at each traverse point, calculate the average of the absolute values of α; assign α values of 0° to those points for which no rotation was required, and include these in the overall average. If the average value of α is greater than 20°, the overall flow condition in the stack is unacceptable, and alternative methodology, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be used to perform accurate sample and velocity traverses.
11.5 Alternative Measurement Site Selection Procedure. The alternative site selection procedure may be used to determine the rotation angles in lieu of the procedure outlined in section 11.4 of this method.
11.5.1 This alternative procedure applies to sources where measurement locations are less than 2 equivalent or duct diameters downstream or less than one-half duct diameter upstream from a flow disturbance. The alternative should be limited to ducts larger than 24 inches in diameter where blockage and wall effects are minimal. A directional flow-sensing probe is used to measure pitch and yaw angles of the gas flow at 40 or more traverse points; the resultant angle is calculated and compared with acceptable criteria for mean and standard deviation.
11.5.2 Traverse Points. Use a minimum of 40 traverse points for circular ducts and 42 points for rectangular ducts for the gas flow angle determinations. Follow the procedure outlined in section 11.3 and table 1-1 or 1-2 of this method for the location and layout of the traverse points. If the alternative measurement location is determined to be acceptable according to the criteria in this alternative procedure, use the same minimum of 40 traverse points for circular ducts and 42 points for rectangular ducts that were used in the alternative measurement procedure for future sampling and velocity measurements.
11.5.3 Measurement Procedure.
11.5.3.1 Prepare the directional probe and differential pressure gauges as recommended by the manufacturer. Capillary tubing or surge tanks may be used to dampen pressure fluctuations. It is recommended, but not required, that a pretest leak check be conducted. To perform a leak check, pressurize or use suction on the impact opening until a reading of at least 7.6 cm (3 in.) H2O registers on the differential pressure gauge, then plug the impact opening. The pressure of a leak-free system will remain stable for at least 15 seconds.
11.5.3.2 Level and zero the manometers. Since the manometer level and zero may drift because of vibrations and temperature changes, periodically check the level and zero during the traverse.
11.5.3.3 Position the probe at the appropriate locations in the gas stream, and rotate until zero deflection is indicated for the yaw angle pressure gauge. Determine and record the yaw angle. Record the pressure gauge readings for the pitch angle, and determine the pitch angle from the calibration curve. Repeat this procedure for each traverse point. Complete a “back-purge” of the pressure lines and the impact openings prior to measurements of each traverse point.
11.5.3.4 A post-test check as described in section 11.5.3.1 is required. If the criteria for a leak-free system are not met, repair the equipment, and repeat the flow angle measurements.
11.5.4 Calibration. Use a flow system as described in sections 10.1.2.1 and 10.1.2.2 of Method 2. In addition, the flow system shall have the capacity to generate two test-section velocities: one between 365 and 730 m/min (1,200 and 2,400 ft/min) and one between 730 and 1,100 m/min (2,400 and 3,600 ft/min).
11.5.4.1 Cut two entry ports in the test section. The axes through the entry ports shall be perpendicular to each other and intersect in the centroid of the test section. The ports should be elongated slots parallel to the axis of the test section and of sufficient length to allow measurement of pitch angles while maintaining the pitot head position at the test-section centroid. To facilitate alignment of the directional probe during calibration, the test section should be constructed of plexiglass or some other transparent material. All calibration measurements should be made at the same point in the test section, preferably at the centroid of the test section.
11.5.4.2 To ensure that the gas flow is parallel to the central axis of the test section, follow the procedure outlined in section 11.4 for cyclonic flow determination to measure the gas flow angles at the centroid of the test section from two test ports located 90° apart. The gas flow angle measured in each port must be ±2° of 0°. Straightening vanes should be installed, if necessary, to meet this criterion.
11.5.4.3 Pitch Angle Calibration. Perform a calibration traverse according to the manufacturer's recommended protocol in 5° increments for angles from −60° to + 60° at one velocity in each of the two ranges specified above. Average the pressure ratio values obtained for each angle in the two flow ranges, and plot a calibration curve with the average values of the pressure ratio (or other suitable measurement factor as recommended by the manufacturer) versus the pitch angle. Draw a smooth line through the data points. Plot also the data values for each traverse point. Determine the differences between the measured data values and the angle from the calibration curve at the same pressure ratio. The difference at each comparison must be within 2° for angles between 0° and 40° and within 3° for angles between 40° and 60°.
11.5.4.4 Yaw Angle Calibration. Mark the three-dimensional probe to allow the determination of the yaw position of the probe. This is usually a line extending the length of the probe and aligned with the impact opening. To determine the accuracy of measurements of the yaw angle, only the zero or null position need be calibrated as follows: Place the directional probe in the test section, and rotate the probe until the zero position is found. With a protractor or other angle measuring device, measure the angle indicated by the yaw angle indicator on the three-dimensional probe. This should be within 2° of 0°. Repeat this measurement for any other points along the length of the pitot where yaw angle measurements could be read in order to account for variations in the pitot markings used to indicate pitot head positions.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
L = length.
n = total number of traverse points.
Pi = pitch angle at traverse point i, degree.
Ravg = average resultant angle, degree.
Ri = resultant angle at traverse point i, degree.
Sd = standard deviation, degree.
W = width.
Yi = yaw angle at traverse point i, degree.
12.2 For a rectangular cross section, an equivalent diameter (De) shall be calculated using the following equation, to determine the upstream and downstream distances:
12.3 If use of the alternative site selection procedure (Section 11.5 of this method) is required, perform the following calculations using the equations below: the resultant angle at each traverse point, the average resultant angle, and the standard deviation. Complete the calculations retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round the values after the final calculations.
12.3.1 Calculate the resultant angle at each traverse point:
12.3.2 Calculate the average resultant for the measurements:
12.3.3 Calculate the standard deviations:
12.3.4 Acceptability Criteria. The measurement location is acceptable if Ravg ≤20° and Sd ≤10°.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Determining Dust Concentration in a Gas Stream, ASME Performance Test Code No. 27. New York. 1957.
2. DeVorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Control District. Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.
3. Methods for Determining of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. ASTM Designation D 2928-71. Philadelphia, PA. 1971.
5. Hanson, H.A., et al. Particulate Sampling Strategies for Large Power Plants Including Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, ORD, ESRL, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976.
6. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Determination of the Optimum Number of Sampling Points: An Analysis of Method 1 Criteria. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA Contract No. 68-01-3172, Task 7.
7. Hanson, H.A., R.J. Davini, J.K. Morgan, and A.A. Iversen. Particulate Sampling Strategies for Large Power Plants Including Nonuniform Flow. USEPA, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/2-76-170. June 1976. 350 pp.
8. Brooks, E.F., and R.L. Williams. Flow and Gas Sampling Manual. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/2-76-203. July 1976. 93 pp.
9. Entropy Environmentalists, Inc. Traverse Point Study. EPA Contract No. 68-02-3172. June 1977. 19 pp.
10. Brown, J. and K. Yu. Test Report: Particulate Sampling Strategy in Circular Ducts. Emission Measurement Branch. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. July 31, 1980. 12 pp.
11. Hawksley, P.G.W., S. Badzioch, and J.H. Blackett. Measurement of Solids in Flue Gases. Leatherhead, England, The British Coal Utilisation Research Association. 1961. pp. 129-133.
12. Knapp, K.T. The Number of Sampling Points Needed for Representative Source Sampling. In: Proceedings of the Fourth National Conference on Energy and Environment. Theodore, L. et al. (ed). Dayton, Dayton section of the American Institute of Chemical Engineers. October 3-7, 1976. pp. 563-568.
13. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A Proposed Extension of EPA Method 1 Criteria. Pollution Engineering. XV (8):36-37. August 1983.
14. Gerhart, P.M. and M.J. Dorsey. Investigation of Field Test Procedures for Large Fans. University of Akron. Akron, OH. (EPRI Contract CS-1651). Final Report (RP-1649-5). December 1980.
15. Smith, W.S. and D.J. Grove. A New Look at Isokinetic Sampling—Theory and Applications. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. VIII (3):19-24. August 1983.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Number of tranverse points layout | Matrix |
|---|---|
| 9 | 3 × 3 |
| 12 | 4 × 3 |
| 16 | 4 × 4 |
| 20 | 5 × 4 |
| 25 | 5 × 5 |
| 30 | 6 × 5 |
| 36 | 6 × 6 |
| 42 | 7 × 6 |
| 49 | 7 × 7 |
| Traverse point number on a diameter | Number of traverse points on a diameter | |||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2 | 4 | 6 | 8 | 10 | 12 | 14 | 16 | 18 | 20 | 22 | 24 | |
| 1 | 14.6 | 6.7 | 4.4 | 3.2 | 2.6 | 2.1 | 1.8 | 1.6 | 1.4 | 1.3 | 1.1 | 1.1 |
| 2 | 85.4 | 25.0 | 14.6 | 10.5 | 8.2 | 6.7 | 5.7 | 4.9 | 4.4 | 3.9 | 3.5 | 3.2 |
| 3 | 75.0 | 29.6 | 19.4 | 14.6 | 11.8 | 9.9 | 8.5 | 7.5 | 6.7 | 6.0 | 5.5 | |
| 4 | 93.3 | 70.4 | 32.3 | 22.6 | 17.7 | 14.6 | 12.5 | 10.9 | 9.7 | 8.7 | 7.9 | |
| 5 | 85.4 | 67.7 | 34.2 | 25.0 | 20.1 | 16.9 | 14.6 | 12.9 | 11.6 | 10.5 | ||
| 6 | 95.6 | 80.6 | 65.8 | 35.6 | 26.9 | 22.0 | 18.8 | 16.5 | 14.6 | 13.2 | ||
| 7 | 89.5 | 77.4 | 64.4 | 36.6 | 28.3 | 23.6 | 20.4 | 18.0 | 16.1 | |||
| 8 | 96.8 | 85.4 | 75.0 | 63.4 | 37.5 | 29.6 | 25.0 | 21.8 | 19.4 | |||
| 9 | 91.8 | 82.3 | 73.1 | 62.5 | 38.2 | 30.6 | 26.2 | 23.0 | ||||
| 10 | 97.4 | 88.2 | 79.9 | 71.7 | 61.8 | 38.8 | 31.5 | 27.2 | ||||
| 11 | 93.3 | 85.4 | 78.0 | 70.4 | 61.2 | 39.3 | 32.3 | |||||
| 12 | 97.9 | 90.1 | 83.1 | 76.4 | 69.4 | 60.7 | 39.8 | |||||
| 13 | 94.3 | 87.5 | 81.2 | 75.0 | 68.5 | 60.2 | ||||||
| 14 | 98.2 | 91.5 | 85.4 | 79.6 | 73.8 | 67.7 | ||||||
| 15 | 95.1 | 89.1 | 83.5 | 78.2 | 72.8 | |||||||
| 16 | 98.4 | 92.5 | 87.1 | 82.0 | 77.0 | |||||||
| 17 | 95.6 | 90.3 | 85.4 | 80.6 | ||||||||
| 18 | 98.6 | 93.3 | 88.4 | 83.9 | ||||||||
| 19 | 96.1 | 91.3 | 86.8 | |||||||||
| 20 | 98.7 | 94.0 | 89.5 | |||||||||
| 21 | 96.5 | 92.1 | ||||||||||
| 22 | 98.9 | 94.5 | ||||||||||
| 23 | 96.8 | |||||||||||
| 24 | 98.9 |
Method 1A—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources With Small Stacks or Ducts
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Measured Parameters. The purpose of the method is to provide guidance for the selection of sampling ports and traverse points at which sampling for air pollutants will be performed pursuant to regulations set forth in this part.
1.2 Applicability. The applicability and principle of this method are identical to Method 1, except its applicability is limited to stacks or ducts. This method is applicable to flowing gas streams in ducts, stacks, and flues of less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m 2 (113 in. 2) in cross-sectional area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081 m 2 (12.57 in. 2) in cross-sectional area. This method cannot be used when the flow is cyclonic or swirling.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The method is designed to aid in the representative measurement of pollutant emissions and/or total volumetric flow rate from a stationary source. A measurement site or a pair of measurement sites where the effluent stream is flowing in a known direction is (are) selected. The cross-section of the stack is divided into a number of equal areas. Traverse points are then located within each of these equal areas.
2.2 In these small diameter stacks or ducts, the conventional Method 5 stack assembly (consisting of a Type S pitot tube attached to a sampling probe, equipped with a nozzle and thermocouple) blocks a significant portion of the cross-section of the duct and causes inaccurate measurements. Therefore, for particulate matter (PM) sampling in small stacks or ducts, the gas velocity is measured using a standard pitot tube downstream of the actual emission sampling site. The straight run of duct between the PM sampling and velocity measurement sites allows the flow profile, temporarily disturbed by the presence of the sampling probe, to redevelop and stabilize.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies [Reserved]
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport [Reserved]
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization [Reserved]
11.0 Procedure
11.1 Selection of Measurement Site.
11.1.1 Particulate Measurements—Steady or Unsteady Flow. Select a particulate measurement site located preferably at least eight equivalent stack or duct diameters downstream and 10 equivalent diameters upstream from any flow disturbances such as bends, expansions, or contractions in the stack, or from a visible flame. Next, locate the velocity measurement site eight equivalent diameters downstream of the particulate measurement site (see Figure 1A-1). If such locations are not available, select an alternative particulate measurement location at least two equivalent stack or duct diameters downstream and two and one-half diameters upstream from any flow disturbance. Then, locate the velocity measurement site two equivalent diameters downstream from the particulate measurement site. (See section 12.2 of Method 1 for calculating equivalent diameters for a rectangular cross-section.)
11.1.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or Velocity (Steady or Unsteady Flow) Measurements. For PM sampling when the volumetric flow rate in a duct is constant with respect to time, section 11.1.1 of Method 1 may be followed, with the PM sampling and velocity measurement performed at one location. To demonstrate that the flow rate is constant (within 10 percent) when PM measurements are made, perform complete velocity traverses before and after the PM sampling run, and calculate the deviation of the flow rate derived after the PM sampling run from the one derived before the PM sampling run. The PM sampling run is acceptable if the deviation does not exceed 10 percent.
11.2 Determining the Number of Traverse Points.
11.2.1 Particulate Measurements (Steady or Unsteady Flow). Use Figure 1-1 of Method 1 to determine the number of traverse points to use at both the velocity measurement and PM sampling locations. Before referring to the figure, however, determine the distances between both the velocity measurement and PM sampling sites to the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances. Then divide each distance by the stack diameter or equivalent diameter to express the distances in terms of the number of duct diameters. Then, determine the number of traverse points from Figure 1-1 of Method 1 corresponding to each of these four distances. Choose the highest of the four numbers of traverse points (or a greater number) so that, for circular ducts the number is a multiple of four; and for rectangular ducts, the number is one of those shown in Table 1-1 of Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter location criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of traverse points required is eight for circular ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.
11.2.2 PM Sampling (Steady Flow) or only Velocity (Non-Particulate) Measurements. Use Figure 1-2 of Method 1 to determine number of traverse points, following the same procedure used for PM sampling as described in section 11.2.1 of Method 1. When the optimum duct diameter location criteria can be satisfied, the minimum number of traverse points required is eight for circular ducts and nine for rectangular ducts.
11.3 Cross-sectional Layout, Location of Traverse Points, and Verification of the Absence of Cyclonic Flow. Same as Method 1, sections 11.3 and 11.4, respectively.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations [Reserved]
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 1, section 16.0, References 1 through 6, with the addition of the following:
1. Vollaro, Robert F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller Than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. January 1977.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 2—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate (Type S Pitot Tube)
1.0 Scope and Application.
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the average velocity and the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream.
1.2 This method is not applicable at measurement sites that fail to meet the criteria of Method 1, section 11.1. Also, the method cannot be used for direct measurement in cyclonic or swirling gas streams; section 11.4 of Method 1 shows how to determine cyclonic or swirling flow conditions. When unacceptable conditions exist, alternative procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be employed to produce accurate flow rate determinations. Examples of such alternative procedures are: (1) to install straightening vanes; (2) to calculate the total volumetric flow rate stoichiometrically, or (3) to move to another measurement site at which the flow is acceptable.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method.
2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack is determined from the gas density and from measurement of the average velocity head with a Type S (Stausscheibe or reverse type) pitot tube.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.
6.1 Type S Pitot Tube.
6.1.1 Pitot tube made of metal tubing (e.g., stainless steel) as shown in Figure 2-1. It is recommended that the external tubing diameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2-2b) be between 0.48 and 0.95 cm ( 3/16 and 3/8 inch). There shall be an equal distance from the base of each leg of the pitot tube to its face-opening plane (dimensions PA and PB, Figure 2-2b); it is recommended that this distance be between 1.05 and 1.50 times the external tubing diameter. The face openings of the pitot tube shall, preferably, be aligned as shown in Figure 2-2; however, slight misalignments of the openings are permissible (see Figure 2-3).
6.1.2 The Type S pitot tube shall have a known coefficient, determined as outlined in section 10.0. An identification number shall be assigned to the pitot tube; this number shall be permanently marked or engraved on the body of the tube. A standard pitot tube may be used instead of a Type S, provided that it meets the specifications of sections 6.7 and 10.2. Note, however, that the static and impact pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, whenever a standard pitot tube is used to perform a traverse, adequate proof must be furnished that the openings of the pitot tube have not plugged up during the traverse period. This can be accomplished by comparing the velocity head (Δp) measurement recorded at a selected traverse point (readable Δp value) with a second Δp measurement recorded after “back purging” with pressurized air to clean the impact and static holes of the standard pitot tube. If the before and after Δp measurements are within 5 percent, then the traverse data are acceptable. Otherwise, the data should be rejected and the traverse measurements redone. Note that the selected traverse point should be one that demonstrates a readable Δp value. If “back purging” at regular intervals is part of a routine procedure, then comparative Δp measurements shall be conducted as above for the last two traverse points that exhibit suitable Δp measurements.
6.2 Differential Pressure Gauge. An inclined manometer or equivalent device. Most sampling trains are equipped with a 10 in. (water column) inclined-vertical manometer, having 0.01 in. H20 divisions on the 0 to 1 in. inclined scale, and 0.1 in. H20 divisions on the 1 to 10 in. vertical scale. This type of manometer (or other gauge of equivalent sensitivity) is satisfactory for the measurement of Δp values as low as 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20. However, a differential pressure gauge of greater sensitivity shall be used (subject to the approval of the Administrator), if any of the following is found to be true: (1) the arithmetic average of all Δp readings at the traverse points in the stack is less than 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20; (2) for traverses of 12 or more points, more than 10 percent of the individual Δp readings are below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20; or (3) for traverses of fewer than 12 points, more than one Δp reading is below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20. Reference 18 (see section 17.0) describes commercially available instrumentation for the measurement of low-range gas velocities.
6.2.1 As an alternative to criteria (1) through (3) above, Equation 2-1 (Section 12.2) may be used to determine the necessity of using a more sensitive differential pressure gauge. If T is greater than 1.05, the velocity head data are unacceptable and a more sensitive differential pressure gauge must be used.
6.3 Temperature Sensor. A thermocouple, liquid-filled bulb thermometer, bimetallic thermometer, mercury-in-glass thermometer, or other gauge capable of measuring temperatures to within 1.5 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature. The temperature sensor shall be attached to the pitot tube such that the sensor tip does not touch any metal; the gauge shall be in an interference-free arrangement with respect to the pitot tube face openings (see Figure 2-1 and Figure 2-4). Alternative positions may be used if the pitot tube-temperature gauge system is calibrated according to the procedure of section 10.0. Provided that a difference of not more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is introduced, the temperature gauge need not be attached to the pitot tube. This alternative is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.4 Pressure Probe and Gauge. A piezometer tube and mercury- or water-filled U-tube manometer capable of measuring stack pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg. The static tap of a standard type pitot tube or one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face opening planes positioned parallel to the gas flow may also be used as the pressure probe.
6.5 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.54 mm (0.1 in.) Hg.
6.6 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Method 3 equipment, if needed (see section 8.6), to determine the stack gas dry molecular weight, and Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5 equipment for moisture content determination. Other methods may be used subject to approval of the Administrator.
6.7 Calibration Pitot Tube. Calibration of the Type S pitot tube requires a standard pitot tube for a reference. When calibration of the Type S pitot tube is necessary (see Section 10.1), a standard pitot tube shall be used for a reference. The standard pitot tube shall, preferably, have a known coefficient, obtained directly from the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST), Gaithersburg, MD 20899, (301) 975-2002; or by calibration against another standard pitot tube with a NIST-traceable coefficient. Alternatively, a standard pitot tube designed according to the criteria given in sections 6.7.1 through 6.7.5 below and illustrated in Figure 2-5 (see also References 7, 8, and 17 in section 17.0) may be used. Pitot tubes designed according to these specifications will have baseline coefficients of 0.99 ±0.01.
6.7.1 Standard Pitot Design.
6.7.1.1 Hemispherical (shown in Figure 2-5), ellipsoidal, or conical tip.
6.7.1.2 A minimum of six diameters straight run (based upon D, the external diameter of the tube) between the tip and the static pressure holes.
6.7.1.3 A minimum of eight diameters straight run between the static pressure holes and the centerline of the external tube, following the 90° bend.
6.7.1.4 Static pressure holes of equal size (approximately 0.1 D), equally spaced in a piezometer ring configuration.
6.7.1.5 90° bend, with curved or mitered junction.
6.8 Differential Pressure Gauge for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration. An inclined manometer or equivalent. If the single-velocity calibration technique is employed (see section 10.1.2.3), the calibration differential pressure gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H20. For multivelocity calibrations, the gauge shall be readable to the nearest 0.127 mm (0.005 in.) H20 for Δp values between 1.27 and 25.4 mm (0.05 and 1.00 in.) H20, and to the nearest 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20 for Δp values above 25.4 mm (1.00 in.) H20. A special, more sensitive gauge will be required to read Δp values below 1.27 mm (0.05 in.) H20 (see Reference 18 in section 16.0).
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 2-1. Capillary tubing or surge tanks installed between the manometer and pitot tube may be used to dampen ΔP fluctuations. It is recommended, but not required, that a pretest leak-check be conducted as follows: (1) blow through the pitot impact opening until at least 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H2O velocity head registers on the manometer; then, close off the impact opening. The pressure shall remain stable (±2.5 mm H2O, ±0.10 in. H2O) for at least 15 seconds; (2) do the same for the static pressure side, except using suction to obtain the minimum of 7.6 cm (3.0 in.) H2O. Other leak-check procedures, subject to the approval of the Administrator, may be used.
8.2 Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic checks during the traverse (at least once per hour). Record all necessary data on a form similar to that shown in Figure 2-6.
8.3 Measure the velocity head and temperature at the traverse points specified by Method 1. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is being used for the range of Δp values encountered (see section 6.2). If it is necessary to change to a more sensitive gauge, do so, and remeasure the Δp and temperature readings at each traverse point. Conduct a post-test leak-check (mandatory), as described in section 8.1 above, to validate the traverse run.
8.4 Measure the static pressure in the stack. One reading is usually adequate.
8.5 Determine the atmospheric pressure.
8.6 Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight. For combustion processes or processes that emit essentially CO2, O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3. For processes emitting essentially air, an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry molecular weight of 29.0. For other processes, other methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, must be used.
8.7 Obtain the moisture content from Method 4 (reference method, or equivalent) or from Method 5.
8.8 Determine the cross-sectional area of the stack or duct at the sampling location. Whenever possible, physically measure the stack dimensions rather than using blueprints. Do not assume that stack diameters are equal. Measure each diameter distance to verify its dimensions.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1-10.4 | Sampling equipment calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Type S Pitot Tube. Before its initial use, carefully examine the Type S pitot tube top, side, and end views to verify that the face openings of the tube are aligned within the specifications illustrated in Figures 2-2 and 2-3. The pitot tube shall not be used if it fails to meet these alignment specifications. After verifying the face opening alignment, measure and record the following dimensions of the pitot tube: (a) the external tubing diameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2-2b); and (b) the base-to-opening plane distances (dimensions PA and PB, Figure 2-2b). If Dt is between 0.48 and 0.95 cm 3/16 and 3/8 in.), and if PA and PB are equal and between 1.05 and 1.50 Dt, there are two possible options: (1) the pitot tube may be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, or (2) a baseline (isolated tube) coefficient value of 0.84 may be assigned to the pitot tube. Note, however, that if the pitot tube is part of an assembly, calibration may still be required, despite knowledge of the baseline coefficient value (see section 10.1.1). If Dt, PA, and PB are outside the specified limits, the pitot tube must be calibrated as outlined in sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5.
10.1.1 Type S Pitot Tube Assemblies. During sample and velocity traverses, the isolated Type S pitot tube is not always used; in many instances, the pitot tube is used in combination with other source-sampling components (e.g., thermocouple, sampling probe, nozzle) as part of an “assembly.” The presence of other sampling components can sometimes affect the baseline value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient (Reference 9 in section 17.0); therefore, an assigned (or otherwise known) baseline coefficient value may or may not be valid for a given assembly. The baseline and assembly coefficient values will be identical only when the relative placement of the components in the assembly is such that aerodynamic interference effects are eliminated. Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 illustrate interference-free component arrangements for Type S pitot tubes having external tubing diameters between 0.48 and 0.95 cm ( 3/16 and 3/8 in.). Type S pitot tube assemblies that fail to meet any or all of the specifications of Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8 shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in sections 10.1.2 through 10.1.5, and prior to calibration, the values of the intercomponent spacings (pitot-nozzle, pitot-thermocouple, pitot-probe sheath) shall be measured and recorded.
10.1.2 Calibration Setup. If the Type S pitot tube is to be calibrated, one leg of the tube shall be permanently marked A, and the other, B. Calibration shall be performed in a flow system having the following essential design features:
10.1.2.1 The flowing gas stream must be confined to a duct of definite cross-sectional area, either circular or rectangular. For circular cross sections, the minimum duct diameter shall be 30.48 cm (12 in.); for rectangular cross sections, the width (shorter side) shall be at least 25.4 cm (10 in.).
10.1.2.2 The cross-sectional area of the calibration duct must be constant over a distance of 10 or more duct diameters. For a rectangular cross section, use an equivalent diameter, calculated according to Equation 2-2 (see section 12.3), to determine the number of duct diameters. To ensure the presence of stable, fully developed flow patterns at the calibration site, or “test section,” the site must be located at least eight diameters downstream and two diameters upstream from the nearest disturbances.
10.1.2.3 The flow system shall have the capacity to generate a test-section velocity around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min). This velocity must be constant with time to guarantee constant and steady flow during the entire period of calibration. A centrifugal fan is recommended for this purpose, as no flow rate adjustment for back pressure of the fan is allowed during the calibration process. Note that Type S pitot tube coefficients obtained by single-velocity calibration at 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min) will generally be valid to ±3 percent for the measurement of velocities above 300 m/min (1,000 ft/min) and to ±6 percent for the measurement of velocities between 180 and 300 m/min (600 and 1,000 ft/min). If a more precise correlation between the pitot tube coefficient (Cp) and velocity is desired, the flow system should have the capacity to generate at least four distinct, time-invariant test-section velocities covering the velocity range from 180 to 1,500 m/min (600 to 5,000 ft/min), and calibration data shall be taken at regular velocity intervals over this range (see References 9 and 14 in section 17.0 for details).
10.1.2.4 Two entry ports, one for each of the standard and Type S pitot tubes, shall be cut in the test section. The standard pitot entry port shall be located slightly downstream of the Type S port, so that the standard and Type S impact openings will lie in the same cross-sectional plane during calibration. To facilitate alignment of the pitot tubes during calibration, it is advisable that the test section be constructed of Plexiglas TM or some other transparent material.
10.1.3 Calibration Procedure. Note that this procedure is a general one and must not be used without first referring to the special considerations presented in section 10.1.5. Note also that this procedure applies only to single-velocity calibration. To obtain calibration data for the A and B sides of the Type S pitot tube, proceed as follows:
10.1.3.1 Make sure that the manometer is properly filled and that the oil is free from contamination and is of the proper density. Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair or replace if necessary.
10.1.3.2 Level and zero the manometer. Switch on the fan, and allow the flow to stabilize. Seal the Type S pitot tube entry port.
10.1.3.3 Ensure that the manometer is level and zeroed. Position the standard pitot tube at the calibration point (determined as outlined in section 10.1.5.1), and align the tube so that its tip is pointed directly into the flow. Particular care should be taken in aligning the tube to avoid yaw and pitch angles. Make sure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed.
10.1.3.4 Read Δpstd, and record its value in a data table similar to the one shown in Figure 2-9. Remove the standard pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect it from the manometer. Seal the standard entry port. Make no adjustment to the fan speed or other wind tunnel volumetric flow control device between this reading and the corresponding Type S pitot reading.
10.1.3.5 Connect the Type S pitot tube to the manometer and leak-check. Open the Type S tube entry port. Check the manometer level and zero. Insert and align the Type S pitot tube so that its A side impact opening is at the same point as was the standard pitot tube and is pointed directly into the flow. Make sure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed.
10.1.3.6 Read Δps, and enter its value in the data table. Remove the Type S pitot tube from the duct, and disconnect it from the manometer.
10.1.3.7 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.6 until three pairs of Δp readings have been obtained for the A side of the Type S pitot tube, with all the paired observations conducted at a constant fan speed (no changes to fan velocity between observed readings).
10.1.3.8 Repeat Steps 10.1.3.3 through 10.1.3.7 for the B side of the Type S pitot tube.
10.1.3.9 Perform calculations as described in section 12.4. Use the Type S pitot tube only if the values of σA and σB are less than or equal to 0.01 and if the absolute value of the difference between C p(A) and C p(B) is 0.01 or less.
10.1.4 Special Considerations.
10.1.4.1 Selection of Calibration Point.
10.1.4.1.1 When an isolated Type S pitot tube is calibrated, select a calibration point at or near the center of the duct, and follow the procedures outlined in section 10.1.3. The Type S pitot coefficients measured or calculated, (i.e., C p(A) and C p(B)) will be valid, so long as either: (1) the isolated pitot tube is used; or (2) the pitot tube is used with other components (nozzle, thermocouple, sample probe) in an arrangement that is free from aerodynamic interference effects (see Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8).
10.1.4.1.2 For Type S pitot tube-thermocouple combinations (without probe assembly), select a calibration point at or near the center of the duct, and follow the procedures outlined in section 10.1.3. The coefficients so obtained will be valid so long as the pitot tube-thermocouple combination is used by itself or with other components in an interference-free arrangement (Figures 2-4, 2-7, and 2-8).
10.1.4.1.3 For Type S pitot tube combinations with complete probe assemblies, the calibration point should be located at or near the center of the duct; however, insertion of a probe sheath into a small duct may cause significant cross-sectional area interference and blockage and yield incorrect coefficient values (Reference 9 in section 17.0). Therefore, to minimize the blockage effect, the calibration point may be a few inches off-center if necessary, but no closer to the outer wall of the wind tunnel than 4 inches. The maximum allowable blockage, as determined by a projected-area model of the probe sheath, is 2 percent or less of the duct cross-sectional area (Figure 2-10a). If the pitot and/or probe assembly blocks more than 2 percent of the cross-sectional area at an insertion point only 4 inches inside the wind tunnel, the diameter of the wind tunnel must be increased.
10.1.4.2 For those probe assemblies in which pitot tube-nozzle interference is a factor (i.e., those in which the pitot-nozzle separation distance fails to meet the specifications illustrated in Figure 2-7A), the value of Cp(s) depends upon the amount of free space between the tube and nozzle and, therefore, is a function of nozzle size. In these instances, separate calibrations shall be performed with each of the commonly used nozzle sizes in place. Note that the single-velocity calibration technique is acceptable for this purpose, even though the larger nozzle sizes (>0.635 cm or 1/4 in.) are not ordinarily used for isokinetic sampling at velocities around 910 m/min (3,000 ft/min), which is the calibration velocity. Note also that it is not necessary to draw an isokinetic sample during calibration (see Reference 19 in section 17.0).
10.1.4.3 For a probe assembly constructed such that its pitot tube is always used in the same orientation, only one side of the pitot tube needs to be calibrated (the side which will face the flow). The pitot tube must still meet the alignment specifications of Figure 2-2 or 2-3, however, and must have an average deviation (σ) value of 0.01 or less (see section 12.4.4).
10.1.5 Field Use and Recalibration.
10.1.5.1 Field Use.
10.1.5.1.1 When a Type S pitot tube (isolated or in an assembly) is used in the field, the appropriate coefficient value (whether assigned or obtained by calibration) shall be used to perform velocity calculations. For calibrated Type S pitot tubes, the A side coefficient shall be used when the A side of the tube faces the flow, and the B side coefficient shall be used when the B side faces the flow. Alternatively, the arithmetic average of the A and B side coefficient values may be used, irrespective of which side faces the flow.
10.1.5.1.2 When a probe assembly is used to sample a small duct, 30.5 to 91.4 cm (12 to 36 in.) in diameter, the probe sheath sometimes blocks a significant part of the duct cross-section, causing a reduction in the effective value of Cp(s). Consult Reference 9 (see section 17.0) for details. Conventional pitot-sampling probe assemblies are not recommended for use in ducts having inside diameters smaller than 30.5 cm (12 in.) (see Reference 16 in section 17.0).
10.1.5.2 Recalibration.
10.1.5.2.1 Isolated Pitot Tubes. After each field use, the pitot tube shall be carefully reexamined in top, side, and end views. If the pitot face openings are still aligned within the specifications illustrated in Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, it can be assumed that the baseline coefficient of the pitot tube has not changed. If, however, the tube has been damaged to the extent that it no longer meets the specifications of Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, the damage shall either be repaired to restore proper alignment of the face openings, or the tube shall be discarded.
10.1.5.2.2 Pitot Tube Assemblies. After each field use, check the face opening alignment of the pitot tube, as in section 10.1.5.2.1. Also, remeasure the intercomponent spacings of the assembly. If the intercomponent spacings have not changed and the face opening alignment is acceptable, it can be assumed that the coefficient of the assembly has not changed. If the face opening alignment is no longer within the specifications of Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3, either repair the damage or replace the pitot tube (calibrating the new assembly, if necessary). If the intercomponent spacings have changed, restore the original spacings, or recalibrate the assembly.
10.2 Standard Pitot Tube (if applicable). If a standard pitot tube is used for the velocity traverse, the tube shall be constructed according to the criteria of section 6.7 and shall be assigned a baseline coefficient value of 0.99. If the standard pitot tube is used as part of an assembly, the tube shall be in an interference-free arrangement (subject to the approval of the Administrator).
10.3 Temperature Sensors.
10.3.1 After each field use, calibrate dial thermometers, liquid-filled bulb thermometers, thermocouple-potentiometer systems, and other sensors at a temperature within 10 percent of the average absolute stack temperature. For temperatures up to 405 °C (761 °F), use an ASTM mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or equivalent, as a reference. Alternatively, either a reference thermocouple and potentiometer (calibrated against NIST standards) or thermometric fixed points (e.g., ice bath and boiling water, corrected for barometric pressure) may be used. For temperatures above 405 °C (761 °F), use a reference thermocouple-potentiometer system calibrated against NIST standards or an alternative reference, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.3.2 The temperature data recorded in the field shall be considered valid. If, during calibration, the absolute temperature measured with the sensor being calibrated and the reference sensor agree within 1.5 percent, the temperature data taken in the field shall be considered valid. Otherwise, the pollutant emission test shall either be considered invalid or adjustments (if appropriate) of the test results shall be made, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to each field test.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Cross-sectional area of stack, m 2 (ft 2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 (reference method) or Method 5), proportion by volume.
Cp = Pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.
Cp(s) = Type S pitot tube coefficient, dimensionless.
Cp(std) = Standard pitot tube coefficient; use 0.99 if the coefficient is unknown and the tube is designed according to the criteria of sections 6.7.1 to 6.7.5 of this method.
De = Equivalent diameter.
K = 0.127 mm H2O (metric units). 0.005 in. H2O (English units).
Kp = Velocity equation constant.
L = Length.
Md = Molecular weight of stack gas, dry basis (see section 8.6), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Ms = Molecular weight of stack gas, wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
n = Total number of traverse points.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at measurement site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pg = Stack static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack pressure (Pbar + Pg), mm Hg (in. Hg),
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Qsd = Dry volumetric stack gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
T = Sensitivity factor for differential pressure gauges.
Ts(abavg) = Average absolute stack temperature, °K (°R).
= 273 + Ts for metric units,
= 460 + Ts for English units.
Ts = Stack temperature, °C (°F).
= 273 + Ts for metric units,
= 460 + Ts for English units.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
Vs = Average stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).
W = Width.
Δp = Velocity head of stack gas, mm H2O (in. H20).
Δpi = Individual velocity head reading at traverse point “i”, mm (in.) H2O.
Δpstd = Velocity head measured by the standard pitot tube, cm (in.) H2O.
Δps = Velocity head measured by the Type S pitot tube, cm (in.) H2O.
3600 = Conversion Factor, sec/hr.
18.0 = Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
12.2 Calculate T as follows:
12.3 Calculate De as follows:
12.4 Calibration of Type S Pitot Tube.
12.4.1 For each of the six pairs of Δp readings (i.e., three from side A and three from side B) obtained in section 10.1.3, calculate the value of the Type S pitot tube coefficient according to Equation 2-3:
12.4.2 Calculate C p(A), the mean A-side coefficient, and C p(B), the mean B-side coefficient. Calculate the difference between these two average values.
12.4.3 Calculate the deviation of each of the three A-side values of Cp(s) from C p(A), and the deviation of each of the three B-side values of Cp(s) from C p(B), using Equation 2-4:
12.4.4 Calculate σ the average deviation from the mean, for both the A and B sides of the pitot tube. Use Equation 2-5:
12.5 Molecular Weight of Stack Gas.
12.6 Average Stack Gas Velocity.
12.7 Average Stack Gas Dry Volumetric Flow Rate.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Mark, L.S. Mechanical Engineers' Handbook. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. 1951.
2. Perry, J.H., ed. Chemical Engineers' Handbook. New York. McGraw-Hill Book Co., Inc. 1960.
3. Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith. Significance of Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (Presented at the Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO., June 14-19, 1970).
4. Standard Method for Sampling Stacks for Particulate Matter. In: 1971 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 23. Philadelphia, PA. 1971. ASTM Designation D 2928-71.
5. Vennard, J.K. Elementary Fluid Mechanics. New York. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. 1947.
6. Fluid Meters—Their Theory and Application. American Society of Mechanical Engineers, New York, N.Y. 1959.
7. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. 1972. p. 208.
8. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 26. 1974. p. 648.
9. Vollaro, R.F. Guidelines for Type S Pitot Tube Calibration. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. (Presented at 1st Annual Meeting, Source Evaluation Society, Dayton, OH, September 18, 1975.)
10. Vollaro, R.F. A Type S Pitot Tube Calibration Study. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, N.C. July 1974.
11. Vollaro, R.F. The Effects of Impact Opening Misalignment on the Value of the Type S Pitot Tube Coefficient. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. October 1976.
12. Vollaro, R.F. Establishment of a Baseline Coefficient Value for Properly Constructed Type S Pitot Tubes. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
13. Vollaro, R.F. An Evaluation of Single-Velocity Calibration Technique as a Means of Determining Type S Pitot Tube Coefficients. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. August 1975.
14. Vollaro, R.F. The Use of Type S Pitot Tubes for the Measurement of Low Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
15. Smith, Marvin L. Velocity Calibration of EPA Type Source Sampling Probe. United Technologies Corporation, Pratt and Whitney Aircraft Division, East Hartford, CT. 1975.
16. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
17. Ower, E. and R.C. Pankhurst. The Measurement of Air Flow, 4th Ed. London, Pergamon Press. 1966.
18. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976. (Unpublished Paper).
19. Gnyp, A.W., et al. An Experimental Investigation of the Effect of Pitot Tube-Sampling Probe Configurations on the Magnitude of the S Type Pitot Tube Coefficient for Commercially Available Source Sampling Probes. Prepared by the University of Windsor for the Ministry of the Environment, Toronto, Canada. February 1975.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
PLANT
DATE
RUN NO.
STACK DIA. OR DIMENSIONS, m (in.)
BAROMETRIC PRESS., mm Hg (in. Hg)
CROSS SECTIONAL AREA, m 2 (ft 2)
OPERATORS
PITOT TUBE I.D. NO.
AVG. COEFFICIENT, Cp =
LAST DATE CALIBRATED
SCHEMATIC OF STACK CROSS SECTION
| Traverse Pt. No. |
Vel. Hd., Δp mm (in.) H2 O |
Stack temperature |
Pg mm Hg (in. Hg) |
(Δp)1/2 | |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Ts, °C ( °F) |
Ts, °K (°R) |
||||
| Average(1) |
Figure 2-6. Velocity Traverse Data
PITOT TUBE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER:
DATE:
CALIBRATED BY:
| Run No. | ΔPstd cm H2 O (in H2 O) |
ΔP(s) cm H2 O (in H2 O) |
Cp(s) | Deviation Cp(s)—Cp (A) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | ||||
| 2 | ||||
| 3 | ||||
| Cp, avg (SIDE A) |
| Run No. | ΔPstd cm H2 O (in H2 O) |
ΔP(s) cm H2 O (in H2 O) |
Cp(s) | Deviation Cp(s)—Cp (B) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | ||||
| 2 | ||||
| 3 | ||||
| Cp, avg (SIDE B) |
[Cp, avg (side A)—Cp, avg (side B)]*
*Must be less than or equal to 0.01
Figure 2-9. Pitot Tube Calibration Data
Method 2A—Direct Measurement of Gas Volume Through Pipes and Small Ducts
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of gas flow rates in pipes and small ducts, either in-line or at exhaust positions, within the temperature range of 0 to 50 °C (32 to 122 °F).
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas volume meter is used to measure gas volume directly. Temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow correction of the volume to standard conditions.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.
6.1 Gas Volume Meter. A positive displacement meter, turbine meter, or other direct measuring device capable of measuring volume to within 2 percent. The meter shall be equipped with a temperature sensor (accurate to within ±2 percent of the minimum absolute temperature) and a pressure gauge (accurate to within ±2.5 mm Hg). The manufacturer's recommended capacity of the meter shall be sufficient for the expected maximum and minimum flow rates for the sampling conditions. Temperature, pressure, corrosive characteristics, and pipe size are factors necessary to consider in selecting a suitable gas meter.
6.2 Barometer. A mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within ±2.5 mm Hg.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Installation. As there are numerous types of pipes and small ducts that may be subject to volume measurement, it would be difficult to describe all possible installation schemes. In general, flange fittings should be used for all connections wherever possible. Gaskets or other seal materials should be used to assure leak-tight connections. The volume meter should be located so as to avoid severe vibrations and other factors that may affect the meter calibration.
8.2 Leak Test.
8.2.1 A volume meter installed at a location under positive pressure may be leak-checked at the meter connections by using a liquid leak detector solution containing a surfactant. Apply a small amount of the solution to the connections. If a leak exists, bubbles will form, and the leak must be corrected.
8.2.2 A volume meter installed at a location under negative pressure is very difficult to test for leaks without blocking flow at the inlet of the line and watching for meter movement. If this procedure is not possible, visually check all connections to assure leak-tight seals.
8.3 Volume Measurement.
8.3.1 For sources with continuous, steady emission flow rates, record the initial meter volume reading, meter temperature(s), meter pressure, and start the stopwatch. Throughout the test period, record the meter temperatures and pressures so that average values can be determined. At the end of the test, stop the timer, and record the elapsed time, the final volume reading, meter temperature, and pressure. Record the barometric pressure at the beginning and end of the test run. Record the data on a table similar to that shown in Figure 2A-1.
8.3.2 For sources with noncontinuous, non-steady emission flow rates, use the procedure in section 8.3.1 with the addition of the following: Record all the meter parameters and the start and stop times corresponding to each process cyclical or noncontinuous event.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1-10.4 | Sampling equipment calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Volume Meter.
10.1.1 The volume meter is calibrated against a standard reference meter prior to its initial use in the field. The reference meter is a spirometer or liquid displacement meter with a capacity consistent with that of the test meter.
10.1.2 Alternatively, a calibrated, standard pitot may be used as the reference meter in conjunction with a wind tunnel assembly. Attach the test meter to the wind tunnel so that the total flow passes through the test meter. For each calibration run, conduct a 4-point traverse along one stack diameter at a position at least eight diameters of straight tunnel downstream and two diameters upstream of any bend, inlet, or air mover. Determine the traverse point locations as specified in Method 1. Calculate the reference volume using the velocity values following the procedure in Method 2, the wind tunnel cross-sectional area, and the run time.
10.1.3 Set up the test meter in a configuration similar to that used in the field installation (i.e., in relation to the flow moving device). Connect the temperature sensor and pressure gauge as they are to be used in the field. Connect the reference meter at the inlet of the flow line, if appropriate for the meter, and begin gas flow through the system to condition the meters. During this conditioning operation, check the system for leaks.
10.1.4 The calibration shall be performed during at least three different flow rates. The calibration flow rates shall be about 0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 times the rated maximum flow rate of the test meter.
10.1.5 For each calibration run, the data to be collected include: reference meter initial and final volume readings, the test meter initial and final volume reading, meter average temperature and pressure, barometric pressure, and run time. Repeat the runs at each flow rate at least three times.
10.1.6 Calculate the test meter calibration coefficient as indicated in section 12.2.
10.1.7 Compare the three Ym values at each of the flow rates tested and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no greater than 0.030. Extra runs may be required to complete this requirement. If this specification cannot be met in six successive runs, the test meter is not suitable for use. In addition, the meter coefficients should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications are met at all the flow rates, average all the Ym values from runs meeting the specifications to obtain an average meter calibration coefficient, Ym.
10.1.8 The procedure above shall be performed at least once for each volume meter. Thereafter, an abbreviated calibration check shall be completed following each field test. The calibration of the volume meter shall be checked with the meter pressure set at the average value encountered during the field test. Three calibration checks (runs) shall be performed using this average flow rate value. Calculate the average value of the calibration factor. If the calibration has changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of flow as described above.
10.2 Temperature Sensor. After each test series, check the temperature sensor at ambient temperature. Use an American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) mercury-in-glass reference thermometer, or equivalent, as a reference. If the sensor being checked agrees within 2 percent (absolute temperature) of the reference, the temperature data collected in the field shall be considered valid. Otherwise, the test data shall be considered invalid or adjustments of the results shall be made, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.3 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to the field test.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
f = Final reading.
i = Initial reading.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pg = Average static pressure in volume meter, mm Hg.
Qs = Gas flow rate, m 3/min, standard conditions.
s = Standard conditions, 20 °C and 760 mm Hg.
Tr = Reference meter average temperature, °K (°R).
Tm = Test meter average temperature, °K (°R).
Vr = Reference meter volume reading, m 3.
Vm = Test meter volume reading, m 3.
Ym = Test meter calibration coefficient, dimensionless.
θ = Elapsed test period time, min.
12.2 Test Meter Calibration Coefficient.
12.3 Volume.
12.4 Gas Flow Rate.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. APTD-0576. March 1972.
2. Wortman, Martin, R. Vollaro, and P.R. Westlin. Dry Gas Volume Meter Calibrations. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 2, No. 2. May 1977.
3. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. Vol. 3, No. 1. February 1978.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 2B—Determination of Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate From Gasoline Vapor Incinerators
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of exhaust volume flow rate from incinerators that process gasoline vapors consisting primarily of alkanes, alkenes, and/or arenes (aromatic hydrocarbons). It is assumed that the amount of auxiliary fuel is negligible.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Organic carbon concentration and volume flow rate are measured at the incinerator inlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and Method 2A, respectively. Organic carbon, carbon dioxide (CO2), and carbon monoxide (CO) concentrations are measured at the outlet using either Method 25A or Method 25B and Method 10, respectively. The ratio of total carbon at the incinerator inlet and outlet is multiplied by the inlet volume to determine the exhaust volume flow rate.
3.0 Definitions
Same as section 3.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A.
4.0 Interferences
Same as section 4.0 of Method 10.
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable, with the addition of the following:
6.1 This analyzer must meet the specifications set forth in section 6.1.2 of Method 10, except that the span shall be 15 percent CO2 by volume.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of Method 10 and Method 25A, with the following addition and exceptions:
7.1 Carbon Dioxide Analyzer Calibration. CO2 gases meeting the specifications set forth in section 7 of Method 6C are required.
7.2 Hydrocarbon Analyzer Calibration. Methane shall not be used as a calibration gas when performing this method.
7.3 Fuel Gas. If Method 25B is used to measure the organic carbon concentrations at both the inlet and exhaust, no fuel gas is required.
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Pre-test Procedures. Perform all pre-test procedures (e.g., system performance checks, leak checks) necessary to determine gas volume flow rate and organic carbon concentration in the vapor line to the incinerator inlet and to determine organic carbon, carbon monoxide, and carbon dioxide concentrations at the incinerator exhaust, as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable.
8.2 Sampling. At the beginning of the test period, record the initial parameters for the inlet volume meter according to the procedures in Method 2A and mark all of the recorder strip charts to indicate the start of the test. Conduct sampling and analysis as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable. Continue recording inlet organic and exhaust CO2, CO, and organic concentrations throughout the test. During periods of process interruption and halting of gas flow, stop the timer and mark the recorder strip charts so that data from this interruption are not included in the calculations. At the end of the test period, record the final parameters for the inlet volume meter and mark the end on all of the recorder strip charts.
8.3 Post-test Procedures. Perform all post-test procedures (e.g., drift tests, leak checks), as outlined in Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A and/or Method 25B as applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
Same as section 9.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as section 10.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
10.1 If an analyzer output does not meet the specifications of the method, invalidate the test data for the period. Alternatively, calculate the exhaust volume results using initial calibration data and using final calibration data and report both resulting volumes. Then, for emissions calculations, use the volume measurement resulting in the greatest emission rate or concentration.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
COe = Mean carbon monoxide concentration in system exhaust, ppm.
(CO2)a = Ambient carbon dioxide concentration, ppm (if not measured during the test period, may be assumed to equal the global monthly mean CO2 concentration posted at http://www.esrl.noaa.gov/gmd/ccgg/trends/global.html#global_data).
(CO2)e = Mean carbon dioxide concentration in system exhaust, ppm.
HCe = Mean organic concentration in system exhaust as defined by the calibration gas, ppm.
Hci = Mean organic concentration in system inlet as defined by the calibration gas, ppm.
Ke = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the exhaust hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless [equal to the number of carbon atoms per molecule of the gas used to calibrate the analyzer (2 for ethane, 3 for propane, etc.)].
Ki = Hydrocarbon calibration gas factor for the inlet hydrocarbon analyzer, unitless.
Ves = Exhaust gas volume, m 3.
Vis = Inlet gas volume, m 3.
Qes = Exhaust gas volume flow rate, m 3/min.
Qis = Inlet gas volume flow rate, m 3/min.
θ = Sample run time, min.
S = Standard conditions: 20 °C, 760 mm Hg.
12.2 Concentrations. Determine mean concentrations of inlet organics, outlet CO2, outlet CO, and outlet organics according to the procedures in the respective methods and the analyzers' calibration curves, and for the time intervals specified in the applicable regulations.
12.3 Exhaust Gas Volume. Calculate the exhaust gas volume as follows:
12.4 Exhaust Gas Volume Flow Rate. Calculate the exhaust gas volume flow rate as follows:
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as section 16.0 of Method 2A, Method 10, and Method 25A.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 2C—Determination of Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate in Small Stacks or Ducts (Standard Pitot Tube)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of average velocity and volumetric flow rate of gas streams in small stacks or ducts. Limits on the applicability of this method are identical to those set forth in Method 2, section 1.0, except that this method is limited to stationary source stacks or ducts less than about 0.30 meter (12 in.) in diameter, or 0.071 m 2 (113 in. 2) in cross-sectional area, but equal to or greater than about 0.10 meter (4 in.) in diameter, or 0.0081 m 2 (12.57 in. 2) in cross-sectional area.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The average gas velocity in a stack or duct is determined from the gas density and from measurement of velocity heads with a standard pitot tube.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 2, section 6.0, with the exception of the following:
6.1 Standard Pitot Tube (instead of Type S). A standard pitot tube which meets the specifications of section 6.7 of Method 2. Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated against another standard pitot tube with a NIST-traceable coefficient (see section 10.2 of Method 2).
6.2 Alternative Pitot Tube. A modified hemispherical-nosed pitot tube (see Figure 2C-1), which features a shortened stem and enlarged impact and static pressure holes. Use a coefficient of 0.99 unless it is calibrated as mentioned in section 6.1 above. This pitot tube is useful in particulate liquid droplet-laden gas streams when a “back purge” is ineffective.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Follow the general procedures in section 8.0 of Method 2, except conduct the measurements at the traverse points specified in Method 1A. The static and impact pressure holes of standard pitot tubes are susceptible to plugging in particulate-laden gas streams. Therefore, adequate proof that the openings of the pitot tube have not plugged during the traverse period must be furnished; this can be done by taking the velocity head (Δp) heading at the final traverse point, cleaning out the impact and static holes of the standard pitot tube by “back-purging” with pressurized air, and then taking another Δp reading. If the Δp readings made before and after the air purge are the same (within ±5 percent) the traverse is acceptable. Otherwise, reject the run. Note that if the Δp at the final traverse point is unsuitably low, another point may be selected. If “back purging” at regular intervals is part of the procedure, then take comparative Δp readings, as above, for the last two back purges at which suitably high Δp readings are observed.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.0 | Sampling equipment calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas velocity head. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 2, sections 10.2 through 10.4.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Same as Method 2, section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 2, section 16.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 2D—Measurement of Gas Volume Flow Rates in Small Pipes and Ducts
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of the volumetric flow rates of gas streams in small pipes and ducts. It can be applied to intermittent or variable gas flows only with particular caution.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 All the gas flow in the pipe or duct is directed through a rotameter, orifice plate or similar device to measure flow rate or pressure drop. The device has been previously calibrated in a manner that insures its proper calibration for the gas being measured. Absolute temperature and pressure measurements are made to allow correction of volumetric flow rates to standard conditions.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Specifications for the apparatus are given below. Any other apparatus that has been demonstrated (subject to approval of the Administrator) to be capable of meeting the specifications will be considered acceptable.
6.1 Gas Metering Rate or Flow Element Device. A rotameter, orifice plate, or other volume rate or pressure drop measuring device capable of measuring the stack flow rate to within ±5 percent. The metering device shall be equipped with a temperature gauge accurate to within ±2 percent of the minimum absolute stack temperature and a pressure gauge (accurate to within ±5 mm Hg). The capacity of the metering device shall be sufficient for the expected maximum and minimum flow rates at the stack gas conditions. The magnitude and variability of stack gas flow rate, molecular weight, temperature, pressure, dewpoint, and corrosive characteristics, and pipe or duct size are factors to consider in choosing a suitable metering device.
6.2 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section 6.5.
6.3 Stopwatch. Capable of measurement to within 1 second.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Installation and Leak Check. Same as Method 2A, sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.
8.2 Volume Rate Measurement.
8.2.1 Continuous, Steady Flow. At least once an hour, record the metering device flow rate or pressure drop reading, and the metering device temperature and pressure. Make a minimum of 12 equally spaced readings of each parameter during the test period. Record the barometric pressure at the beginning and end of the test period. Record the data on a table similar to that shown in Figure 2D-1.
8.2.2 Noncontinuous and Nonsteady Flow. Use volume rate devices with particular caution. Calibration will be affected by variation in stack gas temperature, pressure and molecular weight. Use the procedure in section 8.2.1 with the addition of the following: Record all the metering device parameters on a time interval frequency sufficient to adequately profile each process cyclical or noncontinuous event. A multichannel continuous recorder may be used.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.0 | Sampling equipment calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate or sample volume. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 2A, section 10.0, with the following exception:
10.1 Gas Metering Device. Same as Method 2A, section 10.1, except calibrate the metering device with the principle stack gas to be measured (examples: air, nitrogen) against a standard reference meter. A calibrated dry gas meter is an acceptable reference meter. Ideally, calibrate the metering device in the field with the actual gas to be metered. For metering devices that have a volume rate readout, calculate the test metering device calibration coefficient, Ym, for each run shown in Equation 2D-2 section 12.3.
10.2 For metering devices that do not have a volume rate readout, refer to the manufacturer's instructions to calculate the Vm2 corresponding to each Vr.
10.3 Temperature Gauge. Use the procedure and specifications in Method 2A, section 10.2. Perform the calibration at a temperature that approximates field test conditions.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate the barometer used against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to the field test.
11.0 Analytical Procedure.
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pm = Test meter average static pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Qr = Reference meter volume flow rate reading, m 3/min (ft 3/min).
Qm = Test meter volume flow rate reading, m 3/min (ft 3/min).
Tr = Absolute reference meter average temperature, °K (°R).
Tm = Absolute test meter average temperature, °K (°R).
Kl = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units, = 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.2 Gas Flow Rate.
12.3 Test Meter Device Calibration Coefficient. Calculation for testing metering device calibration coefficient, Ym.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Spink, L.K. Principles and Practice of Flowmeter Engineering. The Foxboro Company. Foxboro, MA. 1967.
2. Benedict, R.P. Fundamentals of Temperature, Pressure, and Flow Measurements. John Wiley & Sons, Inc. New York, NY. 1969.
3. Orifice Metering of Natural Gas. American Gas Association. Arlington, VA. Report No. 3. March 1978. 88 pp.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Plant
Date
Run No.
Sample location
Barometric pressure (mm Hg):
Start
Finish
Operators
Metering device No.
Calibration coefficient
Calibration gas
Date to recalibrate
| Time | Flow rate reading |
Static Pressure [mm Hg (in. Hg)] |
Temperature | |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| °C (°F) | °K (°R) | |||
| Average |
Figure 2D-1. Volume Flow Rate Measurement Data
Method 2E—Determination of Landfill Gas Production Flow Rate
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of landfill gas (LFG) production flow rate from municipal solid waste landfills and is used to calculate the flow rate of nonmethane organic compounds (NMOC) from landfills.
1.2 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Extraction wells are installed either in a cluster of three or at five dispersed locations in the landfill. A blower is used to extract LFG from the landfill. LFG composition, landfill pressures, and orifice pressure differentials from the wells are measured and the landfill gas production flow rate is calculated.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Since this method is complex, only experienced personnel should perform the test. Landfill gas contains methane, therefore explosive mixtures may exist at or near the landfill. It is advisable to take appropriate safety precautions when testing landfills, such as refraining from smoking and installing explosion-proof equipment.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Well Drilling Rig. Capable of boring a 0.61 m (24 in.) diameter hole into the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill depth. The depth of the well shall not extend to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid level.
6.2 Gravel. No fines. Gravel diameter should be appreciably larger than perforations stated in sections 6.10 and 8.2.
6.3 Bentonite.
6.4 Backfill Material. Clay, soil, and sandy loam have been found to be acceptable.
6.5 Extraction Well Pipe. Minimum diameter of 3 in., constructed of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), high density polyethylene (HDPE), fiberglass, stainless steel, or other suitable nonporous material capable of transporting landfill gas.
6.6 Above Ground Well Assembly. Valve capable of adjusting gas flow, such as a gate, ball, or butterfly valve; sampling ports at the well head and outlet; and a flow measuring device, such as an in-line orifice meter or pitot tube. A schematic of the aboveground well head assembly is shown in Figure 2E-1.
6.7 Cap. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.
6.8 Header Piping. Constructed of PVC or HDPE.
6.9 Auger. Capable of boring a 0.15-to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) diameter hole to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the extraction well, for pressure probe installation.
6.10 Pressure Probe. Constructed of PVC or stainless steel (316), 0.025-m (1-in.). Schedule 40 pipe. Perforate the bottom two-thirds. A minimum requirement for perforations is slots or holes with an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m ( 1/4-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.15 m (6 in.).
6.11 Blower and Flare Assembly. Explosion-proof blower, capable of extracting LFG at a flow rate of 8.5 m 3/min (300 ft 3/min), a water knockout, and flare or incinerator.
6.12 Standard Pitot Tube and Differential Pressure Gauge for Flow Rate Calibration with Standard Pitot. Same as Method 2, sections 6.7 and 6.8.
6.13 Orifice Meter. Orifice plate, pressure tabs, and pressure measuring device to measure the LFG flow rate.
6.14 Barometer. Same as Method 4, section 6.1.5.
6.15 Differential Pressure Gauge. Water-filled U-tube manometer or equivalent, capable of measuring within 0.02 mm Hg (0.01 in. H2O), for measuring the pressure of the pressure probes.
7.0 Reagents and Standards. Not Applicable
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Placement of Extraction Wells. The landfill owner or operator may install a single cluster of three extraction wells in a test area or space five equal-volume wells over the landfill. The cluster wells are recommended but may be used only if the composition, age of the refuse, and the landfill depth of the test area can be determined.
8.1.1 Cluster Wells. Consult landfill site records for the age of the refuse, depth, and composition of various sections of the landfill. Select an area near the perimeter of the landfill with a depth equal to or greater than the average depth of the landfill and with the average age of the refuse between 2 and 10 years old. Avoid areas known to contain nondecomposable materials, such as concrete and asbestos. Locate the cluster wells as shown in Figure 2E-2.
8.1.1.1 The age of the refuse in a test area will not be uniform, so calculate a weighted average age of the refuse as shown in section 12.2.
8.1.2 Equal Volume Wells. Divide the sections of the landfill that are at least 2 years old into five areas representing equal volumes. Locate an extraction well near the center of each area.
8.2 Installation of Extraction Wells. Use a well drilling rig to dig a 0.6 m (24 in.) diameter hole in the landfill to a minimum of 75 percent of the landfill depth, not to extend to the bottom of the landfill or the liquid level. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the extraction well pipe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes or slots with an open area equivalent to 0.01-m (0.5-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.1 to 0.2 m (4 to 8 in.). Place the extraction well in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill material 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite 0.9 m (3 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The specifications for extraction well installation are shown in Figure 2E-3.
8.3 Pressure Probes. Shallow pressure probes are used in the check for infiltration of air into the landfill, and deep pressure probes are use to determine the radius of influence. Locate pressure probes along three radial arms approximately 120° apart at distances of 3, 15, 30, and 45 m (10, 50, 100, and 150 ft) from the extraction well. The tester has the option of locating additional pressure probes at distances every 15 m (50 feet) beyond 45 m (150 ft). Example placements of probes are shown in Figure 2E-4. The 15-, 30-, and 45-m, (50-, 100-, and 150-ft) probes from each well, and any additional probes located along the three radial arms (deep probes), shall extend to a depth equal to the top of the perforated section of the extraction wells. All other probes (shallow probes) shall extend to a depth equal to half the depth of the deep probes.
8.3.1 Use an auger to dig a hole, 0.15- to 0.23-m (6-to 9-in.) in diameter, for each pressure probe. Perforate the bottom two thirds of the pressure probe. A minimum requirement for perforations is holes or slots with an open area equivalent to four 0.006-m (0.25-in.) diameter holes spaced 90° apart every 0.15 m (6 in.). Place the pressure probe in the center of the hole and backfill with gravel to a level 0.30 m (1 ft) above the perforated section. Add a layer of backfill material at least 1.2 m (4 ft) thick. Add a layer of bentonite at least 0.3 m (1 ft) thick, and backfill the remainder of the hole with cover material or material equal in permeability to the existing cover material. The specifications for pressure probe installation are shown in Figure 2E-5.
8.4 LFG Flow Rate Measurement. Place the flow measurement device, such as an orifice meter, as shown in Figure 2E-1. Attach the wells to the blower and flare assembly. The individual wells may be ducted to a common header so that a single blower, flare assembly, and flow meter may be used. Use the procedures in section 10.1 to calibrate the flow meter.
8.5 Leak-Check. A leak-check of the above ground system is required for accurate flow rate measurements and for safety. Sample LFG at the well head sample port and at the outlet sample port. Use Method 3C to determine nitrogen (N2) concentrations. Determine the difference between the well head and outlet N2 concentrations using the formula in section 12.3. The system passes the leak-check if the difference is less than 10,000 ppmv.
8.6 Static Testing. Close the control valves on the well heads during static testing. Measure the gauge pressure (Pg) at each deep pressure probe and the barometric pressure (Pbar) every 8 hours (hr) for 3 days. Convert the gauge pressure of each deep pressure probe to absolute pressure using the equation in section 12.4. Record as Pi (initial absolute pressure).
8.6.1 For each probe, average all of the 8-hr deep pressure probe readings (Pi) and record as Pia (average absolute pressure). Pia is used in section 8.7.5 to determine the maximum radius of influence.
8.6.2 Measure the static flow rate of each well once during static testing.
8.7 Short-Term Testing. The purpose of short-term testing is to determine the maximum vacuum that can be applied to the wells without infiltration of ambient air into the landfill. The short-term testing is performed on one well at a time. Burn all LFG with a flare or incinerator.
8.7.1 Use the blower to extract LFG from a single well at a rate at least twice the static flow rate of the respective well measured in section 8.6.2. If using a single blower and flare assembly and a common header system, close the control valve on the wells not being measured. Allow 24 hr for the system to stabilize at this flow rate.
8.7.2 Test for infiltration of air into the landfill by measuring the gauge pressures of the shallow pressure probes and using Method 3C to determine the LFG N2 concentration. If the LFG N2 concentration is less than 5 percent and all of the shallow probes have a positive gauge pressure, increase the blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O), wait 24 hr, and repeat the tests for infiltration. Continue the above steps of increasing blower vacuum by 3.7 mm Hg (2 in. H2O), waiting 24 hr, and testing for infiltration until the concentration of N2 exceeds 5 percent or any of the shallow probes have a negative gauge pressure. When this occurs,reduce the blower vacuum to the maximum setting at which the N2 concentration was less than 5 percent and the gauge pressures of the shallow probes are positive.
8.7.3 At this blower vacuum, measure atmospheric pressure (Pbar) every 8 hr for 24 hr, and record the LFG flow rate (Qs) and the probe gauge pressures (Pf) for all of the probes. Convert the gauge pressures of the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Qs as shown in section 12.4.
8.7.4 For each probe, average the 8-hr deep pressure probe absolute pressure readings and record as Pfa (the final average absolute pressure).
8.7.5 For each probe, compare the initial average pressure (Pia) from section 8.6.1 to the final average pressure (Pfa). Determine the furthermost point from the well head along each radial arm where Pfa ≤Pia. This distance is the maximum radius of influence (Rm), which is the distance from the well affected by the vacuum. Average these values to determine the average maximum radius of influence (Rma).
8.7.6 Calculate the depth (Dst) affected by the extraction well during the short term test as shown in section 12.6. If the computed value of Dst exceeds the depth of the landfill, set Dst equal to the landfill depth.
8.7.7 Calculate the void volume (V) for the extraction well as shown in section 12.7.
8.7.8 Repeat the procedures in section 8.7 for each well.
8.8 Calculate the total void volume of the test wells (Vv) by summing the void volumes (V) of each well.
8.9 Long-Term Testing. The purpose of long-term testing is to extract two void volumes of LFG from the extraction wells. Use the blower to extract LFG from the wells. If a single Blower and flare assembly and common header system are used, open all control valves and set the blower vacuum equal to the highest stabilized blower vacuum demonstrated by any individual well in section 8.7. Every 8 hr, sample the LFG from the well head sample port, measure the gauge pressures of the shallow pressure probes, the blower vacuum, the LFG flow rate, and use the criteria for infiltration in section 8.7.2 and Method 3C to test for infiltration. If infiltration is detected, do not reduce the blower vacuum, instead reduce the LFG flow rate from the well by adjusting the control valve on the well head. Adjust each affected well individually. Continue until the equivalent of two total void volumes (Vv) have been extracted, or until Vt = 2Vv.
8.9.1 Calculate Vt, the total volume of LFG extracted from the wells, as shown in section 12.8.
8.9.2 Record the final stabilized flow rate as Qf and the gauge pressure for each deep probe. If, during the long term testing, the flow rate does not stabilize, calculate Qf by averaging the last 10 recorded flow rates.
8.9.3 For each deep probe, convert each gauge pressure to absolute pressure as in section 12.4. Average these values and record as Psa. For each probe, compare Pia to Psa. Determine the furthermost point from the well head along each radial arm where Psa ≤Pia. This distance is the stabilized radius of influence. Average these values to determine the average stabilized radius of influence (Rsa).
8.10 Determine the NMOC mass emission rate using the procedures in section 12.9 through 12.15.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1 | LFG flow rate meter calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of LFG flow rate and sample volume |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 LFG Flow Rate Meter (Orifice) Calibration Procedure. Locate a standard pitot tube in line with an orifice meter. Use the procedures in section 8, 12.5, 12.6, and 12.7 of Method 2 to determine the average dry gas volumetric flow rate for at least five flow rates that bracket the expected LFG flow rates, except in section 8.1, use a standard pitot tube rather than a Type S pitot tube. Method 3C may be used to determine the dry molecular weight. It may be necessary to calibrate more than one orifice meter in order to bracket the LFG flow rates. Construct a calibration curve by plotting the pressure drops across the orifice meter for each flow rate versus the average dry gas volumetric flow rate in m 3/min of the gas.
11.0 Procedures [Reserved]
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Age of landfill, yr.
Aavg = Average age of the refuse tested, yr.
Ai = Age of refuse in the ith fraction, yr.
Ar = Acceptance rate, Mg/yr.
CNMOC = NMOC concentration, ppmv as hexane (CNMOC = Ct/6).
Co = Concentration of N2 at the outlet, ppmv.
Ct = NMOC concentration, ppmv (carbon equivalent) from Method 25C.
Cw = Concentration of N2 at the wellhead, ppmv.
D = Depth affected by the test wells, m.
Dst = Depth affected by the test wells in the short-term test, m.
e = Base number for natural logarithms (2.718).
f = Fraction of decomposable refuse in the landfill.
fi = Fraction of the refuse in the ith section.
k = Landfill gas generation constant, yr−1.
Lo = Methane generation potential, m 3/Mg.
Lo′ = Revised methane generation potential to account for the amount of nondecomposable material in the landfill, m 3/Mg.
Mi = Mass of refuse in the ith section, Mg.
Mr = Mass of decomposable refuse affected by the test well, Mg.
Pbar = Atmospheric pressure, mm Hg.
Pf = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during short-term testing, mm Hg.
Pfa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during short-term testing, mm Hg.
Pgf = final gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm Hg.
Pgi = Initial gauge pressure of the deep pressure probes, mm Hg.
Pi = Initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during static testing, mm Hg.
Pia = Average initial absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during static testing, mm Hg.
Ps = Final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during long-term testing, mm Hg.
Psa = Average final absolute pressure of the deep pressure probes during long-term testing, mm Hg.
Qf = Final stabilized flow rate, m 3/min.
Qi = LFG flow rate measured at orifice meter during the ith interval, m 3/min.
Qs = Maximum LFG flow rate at each well determined by short-term test, m 3/min.
Qt = NMOC mass emission rate, m 3/min.
Rm = Maximum radius of influence, m.
Rma = Average maximum radius of influence, m.
Rs = Stabilized radius of influence for an individual well, m.
Rsa = Average stabilized radius of influence, m.
ti = Age of section i, yr.
tt = Total time of long-term testing, yr.
tvi = Time of the ith interval (usually 8), hr.
V = Void volume of test well, m 3.
Vr = Volume of refuse affected by the test well, m 3.
Vt = Total volume of refuse affected by the long-term testing, m 3.
Vv = Total void volume affected by test wells, m 3.
WD = Well depth, m.
ρ = Refuse density, Mg/m 3 (Assume 0.64 Mg/m 3 if data are unavailable).
12.2 Use the following equation to calculate a weighted average age of landfill refuse.
12.3 Use the following equation to determine the difference in N2 concentrations (ppmv) at the well head and outlet location.
12.4 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressure (Pg) of each initial deep pressure probe to absolute pressure (Pi).
12.5 Use the following equation to convert the gauge pressures of the deep probes to absolute pressures for each 8-hr reading at Qs.
12.6 Use the following equation to calculate the depth (Dst) affected by the extraction well during the short-term test.
12.7 Use the following equation to calculate the void volume for the extraction well (V).
12.8 Use the following equation to calculate Vt, the total volume of LFG extracted from the wells.
12.9 Use the following equation to calculate the depth affected by the test well. If using cluster wells, use the average depth of the wells for WD. If the value of D is greater than the depth of the landfill, set D equal to the landfill depth.
12.10 Use the following equation to calculate the volume of refuse affected by the test well.
12.11 Use the following equation to calculate the mass affected by the test well.
12.12 Modify Lo to account for the nondecomposable refuse in the landfill.
12.13 In the following equation, solve for k (landfill gas generation constant) by iteration. A suggested procedure is to select a value for k, calculate the left side of the equation, and if not equal to zero, select another value for k. Continue this process until the left hand side of the equation equals zero, ±0.001.
12.14 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if the yearly acceptance rate of refuse has been consistent (10 percent) over the life of the landfill.
12.15 Use the following equation to determine landfill NMOC mass emission rate if the acceptance rate has not been consistent over the life of the landfill.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Same as Method 2, Appendix A, 40 CFR Part 60.
2. Emcon Associates, Methane Generation and Recovery from Landfills. Ann Arbor Science, 1982.
3. The Johns Hopkins University, Brown Station Road Landfill Gas Resource Assessment, Volume 1: Field Testing and Gas Recovery Projections. Laurel, Maryland: October 1982.
4. Mandeville and Associates, Procedure Manual for Landfill Gases Emission Testing.
5. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of North America, to Thorneloe, S., EPA. Response to July 28, 1988 request for additional information. August 18, 1988.
6. Letter and attachments from Briggum, S., Waste Management of North America, to Wyatt, S., EPA. Response to December 7, 1988 request for additional information. January 16, 1989.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 2F—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity And Volumetric Flow Rate With Three-Dimensional Probes
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of yaw angle, pitch angle, axial velocity and the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream in a stack or duct using a three-dimensional (3-D) probe. This method may be used only when the average stack or duct gas velocity is greater than or equal to 20 ft/sec. When the above condition cannot be met, alternative procedures, approved by the Administrator, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, shall be used to make accurate flow rate determinations.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A 3-D probe is used to determine the velocity pressure and the yaw and pitch angles of the flow velocity vector in a stack or duct. The method determines the yaw angle directly by rotating the probe to null the pressure across a pair of symmetrically placed ports on the probe head. The pitch angle is calculated using probe-specific calibration curves. From these values and a determination of the stack gas density, the average axial velocity of the stack gas is calculated. The average gas volumetric flow rate in the stack or duct is then determined from the average axial velocity.
3.0 Definitions
3.1. Angle-measuring Device Rotational Offset (RADO). The rotational position of an angle-measuring device relative to the reference scribe line, as determined during the pre-test rotational position check described in section 8.3.
3.2 Axial Velocity. The velocity vector parallel to the axis of the stack or duct that accounts for the yaw and pitch angle components of gas flow. The term “axial” is used herein to indicate that the velocity and volumetric flow rate results account for the measured yaw and pitch components of flow at each measurement point.
3.3 Calibration Pitot Tube. The standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube used as a reference when calibrating a 3-D probe under this method.
3.4 Field Test. A set of measurements conducted at a specific unit or exhaust stack/duct to satisfy the applicable regulation (e.g., a three-run boiler performance test, a single-or multiple-load nine-run relative accuracy test).
3.5 Full Scale of Pressure-measuring Device. Full scale refers to the upper limit of the measurement range displayed by the device. For bi-directional pressure gauges, full scale includes the entire pressure range from the lowest negative value to the highest positive value on the pressure scale.
3.6 Main probe. Refers to the probe head and that section of probe sheath directly attached to the probe head. The main probe sheath is distinguished from probe extensions, which are sections of sheath added onto the main probe to extend its reach.
3.7 “May,” “Must,” “Shall,” “Should,” and the imperative form of verbs.
3.7.1 “May” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is optional.
3.7.2 “Must,” “Shall,” and the imperative form of verbs (such as “record” or “enter”) are used to indicate that a provision of this method is mandatory.
3.7.3 “Should” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is not mandatory, but is highly recommended as good practice.
3.8 Method 1. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.”
3.9 Method 2. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).”
3.10 Method 2G. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2G—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with two-dimensional probes.”
3.11 Nominal Velocity. Refers to a wind tunnel velocity setting that approximates the actual wind tunnel velocity to within ±1.5 m/sec (±5 ft/sec).
3.12 Pitch Angle. The angle between the axis of the stack or duct and the pitch component of flow, i.e., the component of the total velocity vector in a plane defined by the traverse line and the axis of the stack or duct. (Figure 2F-1 illustrates the “pitch plane.”) From the standpoint of a tester facing a test port in a vertical stack, the pitch component of flow is the vector of flow moving from the center of the stack toward or away from that test port. The pitch angle is the angle described by this pitch component of flow and the vertical axis of the stack.
3.13 Readability. For the purposes of this method, readability for an analog measurement device is one half of the smallest scale division. For a digital measurement device, it is the number of decimals displayed by the device.
3.14 Reference Scribe Line. A line permanently inscribed on the main probe sheath (in accordance with section 6.1.6.1) to serve as a reference mark for determining yaw angles.
3.15 Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset (RSLO). The rotational position of a probe's reference scribe line relative to the probe's yaw-null position, as determined during the yaw angle calibration described in section 10.5.
3.16 Response Time. The time required for the measurement system to fully respond to a change from zero differential pressure and ambient temperature to the stable stack or duct pressure and temperature readings at a traverse point.
3.17 Tested Probe. A 3-D probe that is being calibrated.
3.18 Three-dimensional (3-D) Probe. A directional probe used to determine the velocity pressure and yaw and pitch angles in a flowing gas stream.
3.19 Traverse Line. A diameter or axis extending across a stack or duct on which measurements of differential pressure and flow angles are made.
3.20 Wind Tunnel Calibration Location. A point, line, area, or volume within the wind tunnel test section at, along, or within which probes are calibrated. At a particular wind tunnel velocity setting, the average velocity pressures at specified points at, along, or within the calibration location shall vary by no more than 2 percent or 0.3 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, from the average velocity pressure at the calibration pitot tube location. Air flow at this location shall be axial, i.e., yaw and pitch angles within ±3°. Compliance with these flow criteria shall be demonstrated by performing the procedures prescribed in sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. For circular tunnels, no part of the calibration location may be closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the tunnel diameter, whichever is farther from the wall. For elliptical or rectangular tunnels, no part of the calibration location may be closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the applicable cross-sectional axis, whichever is farther from the wall.
3.21 Wind Tunnel with Documented Axial Flow. A wind tunnel facility documented as meeting the provisions of sections 10.1.1 (velocity pressure cross-check) and 10.1.2 (axial flow verification) using the procedures described in these sections or alternative procedures determined to be technically equivalent.
3.22 Yaw Angle. The angle between the axis of the stack or duct and the yaw component of flow, i.e., the component of the total velocity vector in a plane perpendicular to the traverse line at a particular traverse point. (Figure 2F-1 illustrates the “yaw plane.”) From the standpoint of a tester facing a test port in a vertical stack, the yaw component of flow is the vector of flow moving to the left or right from the center of the stack as viewed by the tester. (This is sometimes referred to as “vortex flow,” i.e., flow around the centerline of a stack or duct.) The yaw angle is the angle described by this yaw component of flow and the vertical axis of the stack. The algebraic sign convention is illustrated in Figure 2F-2.
3.23 Yaw Nulling. A procedure in which a probe is rotated about its axis in a stack or duct until a zero differential pressure reading (“yaw null”) is obtained. When a 3-D probe is yaw-nulled, its impact pressure port (P1) faces directly into the direction of flow in the stack or duct and the differential pressure between pressure ports P2 and P3 is zero.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This test method may involve hazardous operations and the use of hazardous materials or equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish and implement appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before using this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Three-dimensional Probes. The 3-D probes as specified in subsections 6.1.1 through 6.1.3 below qualify for use based on comprehensive wind tunnel and field studies involving both inter-and intra-probe comparisons by multiple test teams. Other types of probes shall not be used unless approved by the Administrator. Each 3-D probe shall have a unique identification number or code permanently marked on the main probe sheath. The minimum recommended diameter of the sensing head of any probe used under this method is 2.5 cm (1 in.). Each probe shall be calibrated prior to use according to the procedures in section 10. Manufacturer-supplied calibration data shall be used as example information only, except when the manufacturer calibrates the 3-D probe as specified in section 10 and provides complete documentation.
6.1.1 Five-hole prism-shaped probe. This type of probe consists of five pressure taps in the flat facets of a prism-shaped sensing head. The pressure taps are numbered 1 through 5, with the pressures measured at each hole referred to as P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5, respectively. Figure 2F-3 is an illustration of the placement of pressure taps on a commonly available five-hole prism-shaped probe, the 2.5-cm (1-in.) DAT probe. (Note: Mention of trade names or specific products does not constitute endorsement by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.) The numbering arrangement for the prism-shaped sensing head presented in Figure 2F-3 shall be followed for correct operation of the probe. A brief description of the probe measurements involved is as follows: the differential pressure P2-P3 is used to yaw null the probe and determine the yaw angle; the differential pressure P4-P5 is a function of pitch angle; and the differential pressure P1-P2 is a function of total velocity.
6.1.2 Five-hole spherical probe. This type of probe consists of five pressure taps in a spherical sensing head. As with the prism-shaped probe, the pressure taps are numbered 1 through 5, with the pressures measured at each hole referred to as P1, P2, P3, P4, and P5, respectively. However, the P4 and P5 pressure taps are in the reverse location from their respective positions on the prism-shaped probe head. The differential pressure P2-P3 is used to yaw null the probe and determine the yaw angle; the differential pressure P4-P5 is a function of pitch angle; and the differential pressure P1-P2 is a function of total velocity. A diagram of a typical spherical probe sensing head is presented in Figure 2F-4. Typical probe dimensions are indicated in the illustration.
6.1.3 A manual 3-D probe refers to a five-hole prism-shaped or spherical probe that is positioned at individual traverse points and yaw nulled manually by an operator. An automated 3-D probe refers to a system that uses a computer-controlled motorized mechanism to position the five-hole prism-shaped or spherical head at individual traverse points and perform yaw angle determinations.
6.1.4 Other three-dimensional probes. [Reserved]
6.1.5 Probe sheath. The probe shaft shall include an outer sheath to: (1) provide a surface for inscribing a permanent reference scribe line, (2) accommodate attachment of an angle-measuring device to the probe shaft, and (3) facilitate precise rotational movement of the probe for determining yaw angles. The sheath shall be rigidly attached to the probe assembly and shall enclose all pressure lines from the probe head to the farthest position away from the probe head where an angle-measuring device may be attached during use in the field. The sheath of the fully assembled probe shall be sufficiently rigid and straight at all rotational positions such that, when one end of the probe shaft is held in a horizontal position, the fully extended probe meets the horizontal straightness specifications indicated in section 8.2 below.
6.1.6 Scribe lines.
6.1.6.1 Reference scribe line. A permanent line, no greater than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) in width, shall be inscribed on each manual probe that will be used to determine yaw angles of flow. This line shall be placed on the main probe sheath in accordance with the procedures described in section 10.4 and is used as a reference position for installation of the yaw angle-measuring device on the probe. At the discretion of the tester, the scribe line may be a single line segment placed at a particular position on the probe sheath (e.g., near the probe head), multiple line segments placed at various locations along the length of the probe sheath (e.g., at every position where a yaw angle-measuring device may be mounted), or a single continuous line extending along the full length of the probe sheath.
6.1.6.2 Scribe line on probe extensions. A permanent line may also be inscribed on any probe extension that will be attached to the main probe in performing field testing. This allows a yaw angle-measuring device mounted on the extension to be readily aligned with the reference scribe line on the main probe sheath.
6.1.6.3 Alignment specifications. This specification shall be met separately, using the procedures in section 10.4.1, on the main probe and on each probe extension. The rotational position of the scribe line or scribe line segments on the main probe or any probe extension must not vary by more than 2°. That is, the difference between the minimum and maximum of all of the rotational angles that are measured along the full length of the main probe or the probe extension must not exceed 2°.
6.1.7 Probe and system characteristics to ensure horizontal stability.
6.1.7.1 For manual probes, it is recommended that the effective length of the probe (coupled with a probe extension, if necessary) be at least 0.9 m (3 ft.) longer than the farthest traverse point mark on the probe shaft away from the probe head. The operator should maintain the probe's horizontal stability when it is fully inserted into the stack or duct. If a shorter probe is used, the probe should be inserted through a bushing sleeve, similar to the one shown in Figure 2F-5, that is installed on the test port; such a bushing shall fit snugly around the probe and be secured to the stack or duct entry port in such a manner as to maintain the probe's horizontal stability when fully inserted into the stack or duct.
6.1.7.2 An automated system that includes an external probe casing with a transport system shall have a mechanism for maintaining horizontal stability comparable to that obtained by manual probes following the provisions of this method. The automated probe assembly shall also be constructed to maintain the alignment and position of the pressure ports during sampling at each traverse point. The design of the probe casing and transport system shall allow the probe to be removed from the stack or duct and checked through direct physical measurement for angular position and insertion depth.
6.1.8 The tubing that is used to connect the probe and the pressure-measuring device should have an inside diameter of at least 3.2 mm (1/8 in.), to reduce the time required for pressure equilibration, and should be as short as practicable.
6.2 Yaw Angle-measuring Device. One of the following devices shall be used for measurement of the yaw angle of flow.
6.2.1 Digital inclinometer. This refers to a digital device capable of measuring and displaying the rotational position of the probe to within ±1°. The device shall be able to be locked into position on the probe sheath or probe extension, so that it indicates the probe's rotational position throughout the test. A rotational position collar block that can be attached to the probe sheath (similar to the collar shown in Figure 2F-6) may be required to lock the digital inclinometer into position on the probe sheath.
6.2.2 Protractor wheel and pointer assembly. This apparatus, similar to that shown in Figure 2F-7, consists of the following components.
6.2.2.1 A protractor wheel that can be attached to a port opening and set in a fixed rotational position to indicate the yaw angle position of the probe's scribe line relative to the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. The protractor wheel must have a measurement ring on its face that is no less than 17.8 cm (7 in.) in diameter, shall be able to be rotated to any angle and then locked into position on the stack or duct port, and shall indicate angles to a resolution of 1°.
6.2.2.2 A pointer assembly that includes an indicator needle mounted on a collar that can slide over the probe sheath and be locked into a fixed rotational position on the probe sheath. The pointer needle shall be of sufficient length, rigidity, and sharpness to allow the tester to determine the probe's angular position to within 1° from the markings on the protractor wheel. Corresponding to the position of the pointer, the collar must have a scribe line to be used in aligning the pointer with the scribe line on the probe sheath.
6.2.3 Other yaw angle-measuring devices. Other angle-measuring devices with a manufacturer's specified precision of 1° or better may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
6.3 Probe Supports and Stabilization Devices. When probes are used for determining flow angles, the probe head should be kept in a stable horizontal position. For probes longer than 3.0 m (10 ft.), the section of the probe that extends outside the test port shall be secured. Three alternative devices are suggested for maintaining the horizontal position and stability of the probe shaft during flow angle determinations and velocity pressure measurements: (1) Monorails installed above each port, (2) probe stands on which the probe shaft may be rested, or (3) bushing sleeves of sufficient length secured to the test ports to maintain probes in a horizontal position. Comparable provisions shall be made to ensure that automated systems maintain the horizontal position of the probe in the stack or duct. The physical characteristics of each test platform may dictate the most suitable type of stabilization device. Thus, the choice of a specific stabilization device is left to the judgment of the testers.
6.4 Differential Pressure Gauges. The pressure (ΔP) measuring devices used during wind tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be either electronic manometers (e.g., pressure transducers), fluid manometers, or mechanical pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicΔ gauges). Use of electronic manometers is recommended. Under low velocity conditions, use of electronic manometers may be necessary to obtain acceptable measurements.
6.4.1 Differential pressure-measuring device. This refers to a device capable of measuring pressure differentials and having a readability of ±1 percent of full scale. The device shall be capable of accurately measuring the maximum expected pressure differential. Such devices are used to determine the following pressure measurements: velocity pressure, static pressure, yaw-null pressure, and pitch-angle pressure. For an inclined-vertical manometer, the readability specification of ±1 percent shall be met separately using the respective full-scale upper limits of the inclined and vertical portions of the scales. To the extent practicable, the device shall be selected such that most of the pressure readings are between 10 and 90 percent of the device's full-scale measurement range (as defined in section 3.5). Typical velocity pressure (P1-P2) ranges for both the prism-shaped probe and the spherical probe are 0 to 1.3 cm H2O (0 to 0.5 in. H2O), 0 to 5.1 cm H2O (0 to 2 in. H2O), and 0 to 12.7 cm H2O (0 to 5 in. H2O). The pitch angle (P4-P5) pressure range is typically −6.4 to + 6.4 mm H2O (−0.25 to + 0.25 in. H2O) or −12.7 to + 12.7 mm H2O (−0.5 to + 0.5 in. H2O) for the prism-shaped probe, and −12.7 to + 12.7 mm H2O (−0.5 to + 0.5 in. H2O) or −5.1 to + 5.1 cm H2O (−2 to + 2 in. H2O) for the spherical probe. The pressure range for the yaw null (P2-P3) readings is typically −12.7 to + 12.7 mm H2O (−0.5 to + 0.5 in. H2O) for both probe types. In addition, pressure-measuring devices should be selected such that the zero does not drift by more than 5 percent of the average expected pressure readings to be encountered during the field test. This is particularly important under low pressure conditions.
6.4.2 Gauge used for yaw nulling. The differential pressure-measuring device chosen for yaw nulling the probe during the wind tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be bi-directional, i.e., capable of reading both positive and negative differential pressures. If a mechanical, bi-directional pressure gauge is chosen, it shall have a full-scale range no greater than 2.6 cm H2O (1 in. H2O) [i.e., −1.3 to + 1.3 cm H2O (−0.5 in. to + 0.5 in.)].
6.4.3 Devices for calibrating differential pressure-measuring devices. A precision manometer (e.g., a U-tube, inclined, or inclined-vertical manometer, or micromanometer) or NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) traceable pressure source shall be used for calibrating differential pressure-measuring devices. The device shall be maintained under laboratory conditions or in a similar protected environment (e.g., a climate-controlled trailer). It shall not be used in field tests. The precision manometer shall have a scale gradation of 0.3 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), or less, in the range of 0 to 5.1 cm H2O (0 to 2 in. H2O) and 2.5 mm H2O (0.1 in. H2O), or less, in the range of 5.1 to 25.4 cm H2O (2 to 10 in. H2O). The manometer shall have manufacturer's documentation that it meets an accuracy specification of at least 0.5 percent of full scale. The NIST-traceable pressure source shall be recertified annually.
6.4.4 Devices used for post-test calibration check. A precision manometer meeting the specifications in section 6.4.3, a pressure-measuring device or pressure source with a documented calibration traceable to NIST, or an equivalent device approved by the Administrator shall be used for the post-test calibration check. The pressure-measuring device shall have a readability equivalent to or greater than the tested device. The pressure source shall be capable of generating pressures between 50 and 90 percent of the range of the tested device and known to within ±1 percent of the full scale of the tested device. The pressure source shall be recertified annually.
6.5 Data Display and Capture Devices. Electronic manometers (if used) shall be coupled with a data display device (such as a digital panel meter, personal computer display, or strip chart) that allows the tester to observe and validate the pressure measurements taken during testing. They shall also be connected to a data recorder (such as a data logger or a personal computer with data capture software) that has the ability to compute and retain the appropriate average value at each traverse point, identified by collection time and traverse point.
6.6 Temperature Gauges. For field tests, a thermocouple or resistance temperature detector (RTD) capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5 °F) of the stack or duct temperature shall be used. The thermocouple shall be attached to the probe such that the sensor tip does not touch any metal and is located on the opposite side of the probe head from the pressure ports so as not to interfere with the gas flow around the probe head. The position of the thermocouple relative to the pressure port face openings shall be in the same configuration as used for the probe calibrations in the wind tunnel. Temperature gauges used for wind tunnel calibrations shall be capable of measuring temperature to within ±0.6 °C (±1 °F) of the temperature of the flowing gas stream in the wind tunnel.
6.7 Stack or Duct Static Pressure Measurement. The pressure-measuring device used with the probe shall be as specified in section 6.4 of this method. The static tap of a standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube or one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face opening planes positioned parallel to the gas flow may be used for this measurement. Also acceptable is the pressure differential reading of P1-Pbar from a five-hole prism-shaped probe (e.g., Type DA or DAT probe) with the P1 pressure port face opening positioned parallel to the gas flow in the same manner as the Type S probe. However, the spherical probe, as specified in section 6.1.2, is unable to provide this measurement and shall not be used to take static pressure measurements. Static pressure measurement is further described in section 8.11.
6.8 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section 2.5.
6.9 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Method 3 or 3A shall be used to determine the dry molecular weight of the stack gas. Method 4 shall be used for moisture content determination and computation of stack gas wet molecular weight. Other methods may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
6.10 Calibration Pitot Tube. Same as Method 2, section 2.7.
6.11 Wind Tunnel for Probe Calibration. Wind tunnels used to calibrate velocity probes must meet the following design specifications.
6.11.1 Test section cross-sectional area. The flowing gas stream shall be confined within a circular, rectangular, or elliptical duct. The cross-sectional area of the tunnel must be large enough to ensure fully developed flow in the presence of both the calibration pitot tube and the tested probe. The calibration site, or “test section,” of the wind tunnel shall have a minimum diameter of 30.5 cm (12 in.) for circular or elliptical duct cross-sections or a minimum width of 30.5 cm (12 in.) on the shorter side for rectangular cross-sections. Wind tunnels shall meet the probe blockage provisions of this section and the qualification requirements prescribed in section 10.1. The projected area of the portion of the probe head, shaft, and attached devices inside the wind tunnel during calibration shall represent no more than 4 percent of the cross-sectional area of the tunnel. The projected area shall include the combined area of the calibration pitot tube and the tested probe if both probes are placed simultaneously in the same cross-sectional plane in the wind tunnel, or the larger projected area of the two probes if they are placed alternately in the wind tunnel.
6.11.2 Velocity range and stability. The wind tunnel should be capable of maintaining velocities between 6.1 m/sec and 30.5 m/sec (20 ft/sec and 100 ft/sec). The wind tunnel shall produce fully developed flow patterns that are stable and parallel to the axis of the duct in the test section.
6.11.3 Flow profile at the calibration location. The wind tunnel shall provide axial flow within the test section calibration location (as defined in section 3.20). Yaw and pitch angles in the calibration location shall be within ±3° of 0°. The procedure for determining that this requirement has been met is described in section 10.1.2.
6.11.4 Entry ports in the wind tunnel test section.
6.11.4.1 Port for tested probe. A port shall be constructed for the tested probe. The port should have an elongated slot parallel to the axis of the duct at the test section. The elongated slot should be of sufficient length to allow attaining all the pitch angles at which the probe will be calibrated for use in the field. To facilitate alignment of the probe during calibration, the test section should include a window constructed of a transparent material to allow the tested probe to be viewed. This port shall be located to allow the head of the tested probe to be positioned within the calibration location (as defined in section 3.20) at all pitch angle settings.
6.11.4.2 Port for verification of axial flow. Depending on the equipment selected to conduct the axial flow verification prescribed in section 10.1.2, a second port, located 90° from the entry port for the tested probe, may be needed to allow verification that the gas flow is parallel to the central axis of the test section. This port should be located and constructed so as to allow one of the probes described in section 10.1.2.2 to access the same test point(s) that are accessible from the port described in section 6.11.4.1.
6.11.4.3 Port for calibration pitot tube. The calibration pitot tube shall be used in the port for the tested probe or a separate entry port. In either case, all measurements with the calibration pitot tube shall be made at the same point within the wind tunnel over the course of a probe calibration. The measurement point for the calibration pitot tube shall meet the same specifications for distance from the wall and for axial flow as described in section 3.20 for the wind tunnel calibration location.
6.11.5 Pitch angle protractor plate. A protractor plate shall be attached directly under the port used with the tested probe and set in a fixed position to indicate the pitch angle position of the probe relative to the longitudinal axis of the wind tunnel duct (similar to Figure 2F-8). The protractor plate shall indicate angles in 5° increments with a minimum resolution of ±2°. The tested probe shall be able to be locked into position at the desired pitch angle delineated on the protractor. The probe head position shall be maintained within the calibration location (as defined in section 3.20) in the test section of the wind tunnel during all tests across the range of pitch angles.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Equipment Inspection and Set-Up
8.1.1 All probes, differential pressure-measuring devices, yaw angle-measuring devices, thermocouples, and barometers shall have a current, valid calibration before being used in a field test. (See sections 10.3.3, 10.3.4, and 10.5 through10.10 for the applicable calibration requirements.)
8.1.2 Before each field use of a 3-D probe, perform a visual inspection to verify the physical condition of the probe head according to the procedures in section 10.2. Record the inspection results on a form similar to Table 2F-1. If there is visible damage to the 3-D probe, the probe shall not be used until it is recalibrated.
8.1.3 After verifying that the physical condition of the probe head is acceptable, set up the apparatus using lengths of flexible tubing that are as short as practicable. Surge tanks installed between the probe and pressure-measuring device may be used to dampen pressure fluctuations provided that an adequate measurement response time (see section 8.8) is maintained.
8.2 Horizontal Straightness Check. A horizontal straightness check shall be performed before the start of each field test, except as otherwise specified in this section. Secure the fully assembled probe (including the probe head and all probe shaft extensions) in a horizontal position using a stationary support at a point along the probe shaft approximating the location of the stack or duct entry port when the probe is sampling at the farthest traverse point from the stack or duct wall. The probe shall be rotated to detect bends. Use an angle-measuring device or trigonometry to determine the bend or sag between the probe head and the secured end. (See Figure 2F-9.) Probes that are bent or sag by more than 5° shall not be used. Although this check does not apply when the probe is used for a vertical traverse, care should be taken to avoid the use of bent probes when conducting vertical traverses. If the probe is constructed of a rigid steel material and consists of a main probe without probe extensions, this check need only be performed before the initial field use of the probe, when the probe is recalibrated, when a change is made to the design or material of the probe assembly, and when the probe becomes bent. With such probes, a visual inspection shall be made of the fully assembled probe before each field test to determine if a bend is visible. The probe shall be rotated to detect bends. The inspection results shall be documented in the field test report. If a bend in the probe is visible, the horizontal straightness check shall be performed before the probe is used.
8.3 Rotational Position Check. Before each field test, and each time an extension is added to the probe during a field test, a rotational position check shall be performed on all manually operated probes (except as noted in section 8.3.5, below) to ensure that, throughout testing, the angle-measuring device is either: aligned to within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line; or is affixed to the probe such that the rotational offset of the device from the reference scribe line is known to within ±1°. This check shall consist of direct measurements of the rotational positions of the reference scribe line and angle-measuring device sufficient to verify that these specifications are met. Annex A in section 18 of this method gives recommended procedures for performing the rotational position check, and Table 2F-2 gives an example data form. Procedures other than those recommended in Annex A in section 18 may be used, provided they demonstrate whether the alignment specification is met and are explained in detail in the field test report.
8.3.1 Angle-measuring device rotational offset. The tester shall maintain a record of the angle-measuring device rotational offset, RADO, as defined in section 3.1. Note that RADO is assigned a value of 0° when the angle-measuring device is aligned to within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line. The RADO shall be used to determine the yaw angle of flow in accordance with section 8.9.4.
8.3.2 Sign of angle-measuring device rotational offset. The sign of RADO is positive when the angle-measuring device (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is positioned in a clockwise direction from the reference scribe line and negative when the device is positioned in a counterclockwise direction from the reference scribe line.
8.3.3 Angle-measuring devices that can be independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a set screw), after being locked into position on the probe sheath, may be used. However, the RADO must also take into account this adjustment.
8.3.4 Post-test check. If probe extensions remain attached to the main probe throughout the field test, the rotational position check shall be repeated, at a minimum, at the completion of the field test to ensure that the angle-measuring device has remained within ±2° of its rotational position established prior to testing. At the discretion of the tester, additional checks may be conducted after completion of testing at any sample port or after any test run. If the ±2° specification is not met, all measurements made since the last successful rotational position check must be repeated. section 18.1.1.3 of Annex A provides an example procedure for performing the post-test check.
8.3.5 Exceptions.
8.3.5.1 A rotational position check need not be performed if, for measurements taken at all velocity traverse points, the yaw angle-measuring device is mounted and aligned directly on the reference scribe line specified in sections 6.1.6.1 and 6.1.6.3 and no independent adjustments, as described in section 8.3.3, are made to the device's rotational position.
8.3.5.2 If extensions are detached and re-attached to the probe during a field test, a rotational position check need only be performed the first time an extension is added to the probe, rather than each time the extension is re-attached, if the probe extension is designed to be locked into a mechanically fixed rotational position (e.g., through use of interlocking grooves) that can re-establish the initial rotational position to within ±1°.
8.4 Leak Checks. A pre-test leak check shall be conducted before each field test. A post-test check shall be performed at the end of the field test, but additional leak checks may be conducted after any test run or group of test runs. The post-test check may also serve as the pre-test check for the next group of test runs. If any leak check is failed, all runs since the last passed leak check are invalid. While performing the leak check procedures, also check each pressure device's responsiveness to the changes in pressure.
8.4.1 To perform the leak check, pressurize the probe's P1 pressure port until at least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O) pressure, or a pressure corresponding to approximately 75 percent of the pressure-measuring device's measurement scale, whichever is less, registers on the device; then, close off the pressure port. The pressure shall remain stable [±2.5 mm H2O (±0.10 in. H2O)] for at least 15 seconds. Check the P2, P3, P4, and P5 pressure ports in the same fashion. Other leak-check procedures may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
8.5 Zeroing the Differential Pressure-measuring Device. Zero each differential pressure-measuring device, including the device used for yaw nulling, before each field test. At a minimum, check the zero after each field test. A zero check may also be performed after any test run or group of test runs. For fluid manometers and mechanical pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicΔ gauges), the zero reading shall not deviate from zero by more than ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O) or one minor scale division, whichever is greater, between checks. For electronic manometers, the zero reading shall not deviate from zero between checks by more than: ±0.3 mm H2O (±0.01 in. H2O), for full scales less than or equal to 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O); or ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O), for full scales greater than 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O). (Note: If negative zero drift is not directly readable, estimate the reading based on the position of the gauge oil in the manometer or of the needle on the pressure gauge.) In addition, for all pressure-measuring devices except those used exclusively for yaw nulling, the zero reading shall not deviate from zero by more than 5 percent of the average measured differential pressure at any distinct process condition or load level. If any zero check is failed at a specific process condition or load level, all runs conducted at that process condition or load level since the last passed zero check are invalid.
8.6 Traverse Point Verification. The number and location of the traverse points shall be selected based on Method 1 guidelines. The stack or duct diameter and port nipple lengths, including any extension of the port nipples into stack or duct, shall be verified the first time the test is performed; retain and use this information for subsequent field tests, updating it as required. Physically measure the stack or duct dimensions or use a calibrated laser device; do not use engineering drawings of the stack or duct. The probe length necessary to reach each traverse point shall be recorded to within ±6.4 mm (±1/4 in.) and, for manual probes, marked on the probe sheath. In determining these lengths, the tester shall take into account both the distance that the port flange projects outside of the stack and the depth that any port nipple extends into the gas stream. The resulting point positions shall reflect the true distances from the inside wall of the stack or duct, so that when the tester aligns any of the markings with the outside face of the stack port, the probe's impact port shall be located at the appropriate distance from the inside wall for the respective Method 1 traverse point. Before beginning testing at a particular location, an out-of-stack or duct verification shall be performed on each probe that will be used to ensure that these position markings are correct. The distances measured during the verification must agree with the previously calculated distances to within ±1/4 in. For manual probes, the traverse point positions shall be verified by measuring the distance of each mark from the probe's P1 pressure port. A comparable out-of-stack test shall be performed on automated probe systems. The probe shall be extended to each of the prescribed traverse point positions. Then, the accuracy of the positioning for each traverse point shall be verified by measuring the distance between the port flange and the probe's P1 pressure port.
8.7 Probe Installation. Insert the probe into the test port. A solid material shall be used to seal the port.
8.8 System Response Time. Determine the response time of the probe measurement system. Insert and position the “cold” probe (at ambient temperature and pressure) at any Method 1 traverse point. Read and record the probe's P1-P2 differential pressure, temperature, and elapsed time at 15-second intervals until stable readings for both pressure and temperature are achieved. The response time is the longer of these two elapsed times. Record the response time.
8.9 Sampling.
8.9.1 Yaw angle measurement protocol. With manual probes, yaw angle measurements may be obtained in two alternative ways during the field test, either by using a yaw angle-measuring device (e.g., digital inclinometer) affixed to the probe, or using a protractor wheel and pointer assembly. For horizontal traversing, either approach may be used. For vertical traversing, i.e., when measuring from on top or into the bottom of a horizontal duct, only the protractor wheel and pointer assembly may be used. With automated probes, curve-fitting protocols may be used to obtain yaw-angle measurements.
8.9.1.1 If a yaw angle-measuring device affixed to the probe is to be used, lock the device on the probe sheath, aligning it either on the reference scribe line or in the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1.
8.9.1.2 If a protractor wheel and pointer assembly is to be used, follow the procedures in Annex B of this method.
8.9.1.3 Other yaw angle-determination procedures. If approved by the Administrator, other procedures for determining yaw angle may be used, provided that they are verified in a wind tunnel to be able to perform the yaw angle calibration procedure as described in section 10.5.
8.9.2 Sampling strategy. At each traverse point, first yaw-null the probe, as described in section 8.9.3, below. Then, with the probe oriented into the direction of flow, measure and record the yaw angle, the differential pressures and the temperature at the traverse point, after stable readings are achieved, in accordance with sections 8.9.4 and 8.9.5. At the start of testing in each port (i.e., after a probe has been inserted into the flue gas stream), allow at least the response time to elapse before beginning to take measurements at the first traverse point accessed from that port. Provided that the probe is not removed from the flue gas stream, measurements may be taken at subsequent traverse points accessed from the same test port without waiting again for the response time to elapse.
8.9.3 Yaw-nulling procedure. In preparation for yaw angle determination, the probe must first be yaw nulled. After positioning the probe at the appropriate traverse point, perform the following procedures.
8.9.3.1 Rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading (the difference in pressures across the P2 and P3 pressure ports is zero, i.e., P2 = P3) is indicated by the yaw angle pressure gauge. Read and record the angle displayed by the angle-measuring device.
8.9.3.2 Sign of the measured angle. The angle displayed on the angle-measuring device is considered positive when the probe's impact pressure port (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is oriented in a clockwise rotational position relative to the stack or duct axis and is considered negative when the probe's impact pressure port is oriented in a counterclockwise rotational position (see Figure 2F-10).
8.9.4 Yaw angle determination. After performing the yaw-nulling procedure in section 8.9.3, determine the yaw angle of flow according to one of the following procedures. Special care must be observed to take into account the signs of the recorded angle and all offsets.
8.9.4.1 Direct-reading. If all rotational offsets are zero or if the angle-measuring device rotational offset (RADO) determined in section 8.3 exactly compensates for the scribe line rotational offset (RSLO) determined in section 10.5, then the magnitude of the yaw angle is equal to the displayed angle-measuring device reading from section 8.9.3.1. The algebraic sign of the yaw angle is determined in accordance with section 8.9.3.2.
8.9.4.2 Compensation for rotational offsets during data reduction. When the angle-measuring device rotational offset does not compensate for reference scribe line rotational offset, the following procedure shall be used to determine the yaw angle:
(a) Enter the reading indicated by the angle-measuring device from section 8.9.3.1.
(b) Associate the proper algebraic sign from section 8.9.3.2 with the reading in step (a).
(c) Subtract the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, from the reading in step (b).
(d) Subtract the angle-measuring device rotational offset, RADO, if any, from the result obtained in step (c).
(e) The final result obtained in step (d) is the yaw angle of flow.
8.9.4.3 Record the yaw angle measurements on a form similar to Table 2F-3.
8.9.5 Velocity determination. Maintain the probe rotational position established during the yaw angle determination. Then, begin recording the pressure-measuring device readings for the impact pressure (P1-P2) and pitch angle pressure (P4-P5). These pressure measurements shall be taken over a sampling period of sufficiently long duration to ensure representative readings at each traverse point. If the pressure measurements are determined from visual readings of the pressure device or display, allow sufficient time to observe the pulsation in the readings to obtain a sight-weighted average, which is then recorded manually. If an automated data acquisition system (e.g., data logger, computer-based data recorder, strip chart recorder) is used to record the pressure measurements, obtain an integrated average of all pressure readings at the traverse point. Stack or duct gas temperature measurements shall be recorded, at a minimum, once at each traverse point. Record all necessary data as shown in the example field data form (Table 2F-3).
8.9.6 Alignment check. For manually operated probes, after the required yaw angle and differential pressure and temperature measurements have been made at each traverse point, verify (e.g., by visual inspection) that the yaw angle-measuring device has remained in proper alignment with the reference scribe line or with the rotational offset position established in section 8.3. If, for a particular traverse point, the angle-measuring device is found to be in proper alignment, proceed to the next traverse point; otherwise, re-align the device and repeat the angle and differential pressure measurements at the traverse point. In the course of a traverse, if a mark used to properly align the angle-measuring device (e.g., as described in section 18.1.1.1) cannot be located, re-establish the alignment mark before proceeding with the traverse.
8.10 Probe Plugging. Periodically check for plugging of the pressure ports by observing the responses on pressure differential readouts. Plugging causes erratic results or sluggish responses. Rotate the probe to determine whether the readouts respond in the expected direction. If plugging is detected, correct the problem and repeat the affected measurements.
8.11 Static Pressure. Measure the static pressure in the stack or duct using the equipment described in section 6.7.
8.11.1 If a Type DA or DAT probe is used for this measurement, position the probe at or between any traverse point(s) and rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading is obtained at P2-P3. Rotate the probe 90°. Disconnect the P2 pressure side of the probe and read the pressure P1-Pbar and record as the static pressure. (Note: The spherical probe, specified in section 6.1.2, is unable to provide this measurement and shall not be used to take static pressure measurements.)
8.11.2 If a Type S probe is used for this measurement, position the probe at or between any traverse point(s) and rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading is obtained. Disconnect the tubing from one of the pressure ports; read and record the ΔP. For pressure devices with one-directional scales, if a deflection in the positive direction is noted with the negative side disconnected, then the static pressure is positive. Likewise, if a deflection in the positive direction is noted with the positive side disconnected, then the static pressure is negative.
8.12 Atmospheric Pressure. Determine the atmospheric pressure at the sampling elevation during each test run following the procedure described in section 2.5 of Method 2.
8.13 Molecular Weight. Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight. For combustion processes or processes that emit essentially CO2, O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3 or 3A. For processes emitting essentially air, an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry molecular weight of 29.0. Other methods may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
8.14 Moisture. Determine the moisture content of the stack gas using Method 4 or equivalent.
8.15 Data Recording and Calculations. Record all required data on a form similar to Table 2F-3.
8.15.1 Selection of appropriate calibration curves. Choose the appropriate pair of F1 and F2 versus pitch angle calibration curves, created as described in section 10.6.
8.15.2 Pitch angle derivation. Use the appropriate calculation procedures in section 12.2 to find the pitch angle ratios that are applicable at each traverse point. Then, find the pitch angles corresponding to these pitch angle ratios on the “F1 versus pitch angle” curve for the probe.
8.15.3 Velocity calibration coefficient derivation. Use the pitch angle obtained following the procedures described in section 8.15.2 to find the corresponding velocity calibration coefficients from the “F2 versus pitch angle” calibration curve for the probe.
8.15.4 Calculations. Calculate the axial velocity at each traverse point using the equations presented in section 12.2 to account for the yaw and pitch angles of flow. Calculate the test run average stack gas velocity by finding the arithmetic average of the point velocity results in accordance with sections 12.3 and 12.4, and calculate the stack gas volumetric flow rate in accordance with section 12.5 or 12.6, as applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Quality Control Activities. In conjunction with the yaw angle determination and the pressure and temperature measurements specified in section 8.9, the following quality control checks should be performed.
9.1.1 Range of the differential pressure gauge. In accordance with the specifications in section 6.4, ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is being used for the range of ΔP values encountered. If it is necessary to change to a more sensitive gauge, replace the gauge with a gauge calibrated according to section 10.3.3, perform the leak check described in section 8.4 and the zero check described in section 8.5, and repeat the differential pressure and temperature readings at each traverse point.
9.1.2 Horizontal stability check. For horizontal traverses of a stack or duct, visually check that the probe shaft is maintained in a horizontal position prior to taking a pressure reading. Periodically, during a test run, the probe's horizontal stability should be verified by placing a carpenter's level, a digital inclinometer, or other angle-measuring device on the portion of the probe sheath that extends outside of the test port. A comparable check should be performed by automated systems.
10.0 Calibration
10.1 Wind Tunnel Qualification Checks. To qualify for use in calibrating probes, a wind tunnel shall have the design features specified in section 6.11 and satisfy the following qualification criteria. The velocity pressure cross-check in section 10.1.1 and axial flow verification in section 10.1.2 shall be performed before the initial use of the wind tunnel and repeated immediately after any alteration occurs in the wind tunnel's configuration, fans, interior surfaces, straightening vanes, controls, or other properties that could reasonably be expected to alter the flow pattern or velocity stability in the tunnel. The owner or operator of a wind tunnel used to calibrate probes according to this method shall maintain records documenting that the wind tunnel meets the requirements of sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2 and shall provide these records to the Administrator upon request.
10.1.1 Velocity pressure cross-check. To verify that the wind tunnel produces the same velocity at the tested probe head as at the calibration pitot tube impact port, perform the following cross-check. Take three differential pressure measurements at the fixed calibration pitot tube location, using the calibration pitot tube specified in section 6.10, and take three measurements with the calibration pitot tube at the wind tunnel calibration location, as defined in section 3.20. Alternate the measurements between the two positions. Perform this procedure at the lowest and highest velocity settings at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2F-4. At each velocity setting, the average velocity pressure obtained at the wind tunnel calibration location shall be within ±2 percent or 2.5 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, of the average velocity pressure obtained at the fixed calibration pitot tube location. This comparative check shall be performed at 2.5-cm (1-in.), or smaller, intervals across the full length, width, and depth (if applicable) of the wind tunnel calibration location. If the criteria are not met at every tested point, the wind tunnel calibration location must be redefined, so that acceptable results are obtained at every point. Include the results of the velocity pressure cross-check in the calibration data section of the field test report. (See section 16.1.4.)
10.1.2 Axial flow verification. The following procedures shall be performed to demonstrate that there is fully developed axial flow within the calibration location and at the calibration pitot tube location. Two testing options are available to conduct this check.
10.1.2.1 Using a calibrated 3-D probe. A 3-D probe that has been previously calibrated in a wind tunnel with documented axial flow (as defined in section 3.21) may be used to conduct this check. Insert the calibrated 3-D probe into the wind tunnel test section using the tested probe port. Following the procedures in sections 8.9 and 12.2 of this method, determine the yaw and pitch angles at all the point(s) in the test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the points in the calibration location and the point where the calibration pitot tube will be located. Determine the yaw and pitch angles at each point. Repeat these measurements at the highest and lowest velocities at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2F-5. Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates unacceptable flow in the test section. Until the problem is corrected and acceptable flow is verified by repetition of this procedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibration of probes. Include the results of the axial flow verification in the calibration data section of the field test report. (See section 16.1.4.)
10.1.2.2 Using alternative probes. Axial flow verification may be performed using an uncalibrated prism-shaped 3-D probe (e.g., DA or DAT probe) or an uncalibrated wedge probe. (Figure 2F-11 illustrates a typical wedge probe.) This approach requires use of two ports: the tested probe port and a second port located 90° from the tested probe port. Each port shall provide access to all the points within the wind tunnel test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is conducted. The probe setup shall include establishing a reference yaw-null position on the probe sheath to serve as the location for installing the angle-measuring device. Physical design features of the DA, DAT, and wedge probes are relied on to determine the reference position. For the DA or DAT probe, this reference position can be determined by setting a digital inclinometer on the flat facet where the P1 pressure port is located and then identifying the rotational position on the probe sheath where a second angle-measuring device would give the same angle reading. The reference position on a wedge probe shaft can be determined either geometrically or by placing a digital inclinometer on each side of the wedge and rotating the probe until equivalent readings are obtained. With the latter approach, the reference position is the rotational position on the probe sheath where an angle-measuring device would give a reading of 0°. After installing the angle-measuring device in the reference yaw-null position on the probe sheath, determine the yaw angle from the tested port. Repeat this measurement using the 90° offset port, which provides the pitch angle of flow. Determine the yaw and pitch angles at all the point(s) in the test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the points in the wind tunnel calibration location and the point where the calibration pitot tube will be located. Perform this check at the highest and lowest velocities at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2F-5. Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates unacceptable flow in the test section. Until the problem is corrected and acceptable flow is verified by repetition of this procedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibration of probes. Include the results in the probe calibration report.
10.1.3 Wind tunnel audits.
10.1.3.1 Procedure. Upon the request of the Administrator, the owner or operator of a wind tunnel shall calibrate a 3-D audit probe in accordance with the procedures described in sections 10.3 through 10.6. The calibration shall be performed at two velocities and over a pitch angle range that encompasses the velocities and pitch angles typically used for this method at the facility. The resulting calibration data and curves shall be submitted to the Agency in an audit test report. These results shall be compared by the Agency to reference calibrations of the audit probe at the same velocity and pitch angle settings obtained at two different wind tunnels.
10.1.3.2 Acceptance criteria. The audited tunnel's calibration is acceptable if all of the following conditions are satisfied at each velocity and pitch setting for the reference calibration obtained from at least one of the wind tunnels. For pitch angle settings between −15° and + 15°, no velocity calibration coefficient (i.e., F2) may differ from the corresponding reference value by more than 3 percent. For pitch angle settings outside of this range (i.e., less than −15° and greater than + 15°), no velocity calibration coefficient may differ by more than 5 percent from the corresponding reference value. If the acceptance criteria are not met, the audited wind tunnel shall not be used to calibrate probes for use under this method until the problems are resolved and acceptable results are obtained upon completion of a subsequent audit.
10.2 Probe Inspection. Before each calibration of a 3-D probe, carefully examine the physical condition of the probe head. Particular attention shall be paid to the edges of the pressure ports and the surfaces surrounding these ports. Any dents, scratches, or asymmetries on the edges of the pressure ports and any scratches or indentations on the surfaces surrounding the pressure ports shall be noted because of the potential effect on the probe's pressure readings. If the probe has been previously calibrated, compare the current condition of the probe's pressure ports and surfaces to the results of the inspection performed during the probe's most recent wind tunnel calibration. Record the results of this inspection on a form and in diagrams similar to Table 2F-1. The information in Table 2F-1 will be used as the basis for comparison during the probe head inspections performed before each subsequent field use.
10.3 Pre-Calibration Procedures. Prior to calibration, a scribe line shall have been placed on the probe in accordance with section 10.4. The yaw angle and velocity calibration procedures shall not begin until the pre-test requirements in sections 10.3.1 through 10.3.4 have been met.
10.3.1 Perform the horizontal straightness check described in section 8.2 on the probe assembly that will be calibrated in the wind tunnel.
10.3.2 Perform a leak check in accordance with section 8.4.
10.3.3 Except as noted in section 10.3.3.3, calibrate all differential pressure-measuring devices to be used in the probe calibrations, using the following procedures. At a minimum, calibrate these devices on each day that probe calibrations are performed.
10.3.3.1 Procedure. Before each wind tunnel use, all differential pressure-measuring devices shall be calibrated against the reference device specified in section 6.4.3 using a common pressure source. Perform the calibration at three reference pressures representing 30, 60, and 90 percent of the full-scale range of the pressure-measuring device being calibrated. For an inclined-vertical manometer, perform separate calibrations on the inclined and vertical portions of the measurement scale, considering each portion of the scale to be a separate full-scale range. [For example, for a manometer with a 0- to 2.5-cm H2O (0- to 1-in. H2O) inclined scale and a 2.5- to 12.7-cm H2O (1- to 5-in. H2O) vertical scale, calibrate the inclined portion at 7.6, 15.2, and 22.9 mm H2O (0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 in. H2O), and calibrate the vertical portion at 3.8, 7.6, and 11.4 cm H2O (1.5, 3.0, and 4.5 in. H2O).] Alternatively, for the vertical portion of the scale, use three evenly spaced reference pressures, one of which is equal to or higher than the highest differential pressure expected in field applications.
10.3.3.2 Acceptance criteria. At each pressure setting, the two pressure readings made using the reference device and the pressure-measuring device being calibrated shall agree to within ±2 percent of full scale of the device being calibrated or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. For an inclined-vertical manometer, these requirements shall be met separately using the respective full-scale upper limits of the inclined and vertical portions of the scale. Differential pressure-measuring devices not meeting the #2 percent of full scale or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02 in. H2O) calibration requirement shall not be used.
10.3.3.3 Exceptions. Any precision manometer that meets the specifications for a reference device in section 6.4.3 and that is not used for field testing does not require calibration, but must be leveled and zeroed before each wind tunnel use. Any pressure device used exclusively for yaw nulling does not require calibration, but shall be checked for responsiveness to rotation of the probe prior to each wind tunnel use.
10.3.4 Calibrate digital inclinometers on each day of wind tunnel or field testing (prior to beginning testing) using the following procedures. Calibrate the inclinometer according to the manufacturer's calibration procedures. In addition, use a triangular block (illustrated in Figure 2F-12) with a known angle, θ independently determined using a protractor or equivalent device, between two adjacent sides to verify the inclinometer readings.
Secure the triangular block in a fixed position. Place the inclinometer on one side of the block (side A) to measure the angle of inclination (R1). Repeat this measurement on the adjacent side of the block (side B) using the inclinometer to obtain a second angle reading (R2). The difference of the sum of the two readings from 180° (i.e., 180° −R1 −R2) shall be within ±2° of the known angle, Θ
10.4 Placement of Reference Scribe Line. Prior to the first calibration of a probe, a line shall be permanently inscribed on the main probe sheath to serve as a reference mark for determining yaw angles. Annex C in section 18 of this method gives a guideline for placement of the reference scribe line.
10.4.1 This reference scribe line shall meet the specifications in sections 6.1.6.1 and 6.1.6.3 of this method. To verify that the alignment specification in section 6.1.6.3 is met, secure the probe in a horizontal position and measure the rotational angle of each scribe line and scribe line segment using an angle-measuring device that meets the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3. For any scribe line that is longer than 30.5 cm (12 in.), check the line's rotational position at 30.5-cm (12-in.) intervals. For each line segment that is 30.5 cm (12 in.) or less in length, check the rotational position at the two endpoints of the segment. To meet the alignment specification in section 6.1.6.3, the minimum and maximum of all of the rotational angles that are measured along the full length of the main probe must not differ by more than 2°.
10.4.2 The scribe line should be placed on the probe first and then its offset from the yaw-null position established (as specified in section 10.5). The rotational position of the reference scribe line relative to the yaw-null position of the probe, as determined by the yaw angle calibration procedure in section 10.5, is defined as the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. The reference scribe line rotational offset shall be recorded and retained as part of the probe's calibration record.
10.4.3 Scribe line for automated probes. A scribe line may not be necessary for an automated probe system if a reference rotational position of the probe is built into the probe system design. For such systems, a “flat” (or comparable, clearly identifiable physical characteristic) should be provided on the probe casing or flange plate to ensure that the reference position of the probe assembly remains in a vertical or horizontal position. The rotational offset of the flat (or comparable, clearly identifiable physical characteristic) needed to orient the reference position of the probe assembly shall be recorded and maintained as part of the automated probe system's specifications.
10.5 Yaw Angle Calibration Procedure. For each probe used to measure yaw angles with this method, a calibration procedure shall be performed in a wind tunnel meeting the specifications in section 10.1 to determine the rotational position of the reference scribe line relative to the probe's yaw-null position. This procedure shall be performed on the main probe with all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field [such as thermocouples or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs)] that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration. At a minimum, this procedure shall include the following steps.
10.5.1 Align and lock the angle-measuring device on the reference scribe line. If a marking procedure (such as that described in section 18.1.1.1) is used, align the angle-measuring device on a mark within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line. Lock the angle-measuring device onto the probe sheath at this position.
10.5.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device used for yaw nulling.
10.5.3 Insert the probe assembly into the wind tunnel through the entry port, positioning the probe's impact port at the calibration location. Check the responsiveness of the pressure-measurement device to probe rotation, taking corrective action if the response is unacceptable.
10.5.4 Ensure that the probe is in a horizontal position, using a carpenter's level.
10.5.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise or counterclockwise until a yaw null (P2 = P3) is obtained.
10.5.6 Use the reading displayed by the angle-measuring device at the yaw-null position to determine the magnitude of the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, as defined in section 3.15. Annex D in section 18 of this method provides a recommended procedure for determining the magnitude of RSLO with a digital inclinometer and a second procedure for determining the magnitude of RSLO with a protractor wheel and pointer device. Table 2F-6 presents an example data form and Table 2F-7 is a look-up table with the recommended procedure. Procedures other than those recommended in Annex D in section 18 may be used, if they can determine RSLO to within ±1° and are explained in detail in the field test report. The algebraic sign of RSLO will either be positive, if the rotational position of the reference scribe line (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is clockwise, or negative, if counterclockwise with respect to the probe's yaw-null position. (This is illustrated in Figure 2F-13.)
10.5.7 The steps in sections 10.5.3 through 10.5.6 shall be performed twice at each of the velocities at which the probe will be calibrated (in accordance with section 10.6). Record the values of RSLO.
10.5.8 The average of all of the RSLO values shall be documented as the reference scribe line rotational offset for the probe.
10.5.9 Use of reference scribe line offset. The reference scribe line rotational offset shall be used to determine the yaw angle of flow in accordance with section 8.9.4.
10.6 Pitch Angle and Velocity Pressure Calibrations. Use the procedures in sections 10.6.1 through 10.6.16 to generate an appropriate set (or sets) of pitch angle and velocity pressure calibration curves for each probe. The calibration procedure shall be performed on the main probe and all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field (e.g., thermocouple or RTDs) that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration. (Note: If a sampling nozzle is part of the assembly, a wind tunnel demonstration shall be performed that shows the probe's ability to measure velocity and yaw null is not impaired when the nozzle is drawing a sample.) The calibration procedure involves generating two calibration curves, F1 versus pitch angle and F2 versus pitch angle. To generate these two curves, F1 and F2 shall be derived using Equations 2F-1 and 2F-2, below. Table 2F-8 provides an example wind tunnel calibration data sheet, used to log the measurements needed to derive these two calibration curves.
10.6.1 Calibration velocities. The tester may calibrate the probe at two nominal wind tunnel velocity settings of 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec) and average the results of these calibrations, as described in section 10.6.16.1, in order to generate a set of calibration curves. If this option is selected, this single set of calibration curves may be used for all field applications over the entire velocity range allowed by the method. Alternatively, the tester may customize the probe calibration for a particular field test application (or for a series of applications), based on the expected average velocity(ies) at the test site(s). If this option is selected, generate each set of calibration curves by calibrating the probe at two nominal wind tunnel velocity settings, at least one of which is greater than or equal to the expected average velocity(ies) for the field application(s), and average the results as described in section 10.6.16.1. Whichever calibration option is selected, the probe calibration coefficients (F2 values) obtained at the two nominal calibration velocities shall, for the same pitch angle setting, meet the conditions specified in section 10.6.16.
10.6.2 Pitch angle calibration curve (F1 versus pitch angle). The pitch angle calibration involves generating a calibration curve of calculated F1 values versus tested pitch angles, where F1 is the ratio of the pitch pressure to the velocity pressure, i.e.,
See Figure 2F-14 for an example F1 versus pitch angle calibration curve.
10.6.3 Velocity calibration curve (F2 versus pitch angle). The velocity calibration involves generating a calibration curve of the 3-D probe's F2 coefficient against the tested pitch angles, where
and
Cp = calibration pitot tube coefficient, and
ΔPstd = velocity pressure from the calibration pitot tube.
See Figure 2F-15 for an example F2 versus pitch angle calibration curve.
10.6.4 Connect the tested probe and calibration pitot probe to their respective pressure-measuring devices. Zero the pressure-measuring devices. Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair or replace, if necessary. Turn on the fan, and allow the wind tunnel air flow to stabilize at the first of the two selected nominal velocity settings.
10.6.5 Position the calibration pitot tube at its measurement location (determined as outlined in section 6.11.4.3), and align the tube so that its tip is pointed directly into the flow. Ensure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed. The calibration pitot tube may either remain in the wind tunnel throughout the calibration, or be removed from the wind tunnel while measurements are taken with the probe being calibrated.
10.6.6 Set up the pitch protractor plate on the tested probe's entry port to establish the pitch angle positions of the probe to within ±2°.
10.6.7 Check the zero setting of each pressure-measuring device.
10.6.8 Insert the tested probe into the wind tunnel and align it so that its P1 pressure port is pointed directly into the flow and is positioned within the calibration location (as defined in section 3.20). Secure the probe at the 0° pitch angle position. Ensure that the entry port surrounding the probe is properly sealed.
10.6.9 Read the differential pressure from the calibration pitot tube (ΔPstd), and record its value. Read the barometric pressure to within ±2.5 mm Hg (±0.1 in. Hg) and the temperature in the wind tunnel to within 0.6 °C (1 °F). Record these values on a data form similar to Table 2F-8.
10.6.10 After the tested probe's differential pressure gauges have had sufficient time to stabilize, yaw null the probe, then obtain differential pressure readings for (P1-P2) and (P4-P5). Record the yaw angle and differential pressure readings. After taking these readings, ensure that the tested probe has remained at the yaw-null position.
10.6.11 Either take paired differential pressure measurements with both the calibration pitot tube and tested probe (according to sections 10.6.9 and 10.6.10) or take readings only with the tested probe (according to section 10.6.10) in 5° increments over the pitch-angle range for which the probe is to be calibrated. The calibration pitch-angle range shall be symmetric around 0° and shall exceed the largest pitch angle expected in the field by 5°. At a minimum, probes shall be calibrated over the range of −15° to + 15°. If paired calibration pitot tube and tested probe measurements are not taken at each pitch angle setting, the differential pressure from the calibration pitot tube shall be read, at a minimum, before taking the tested probe's differential pressure reading at the first pitch angle setting and after taking the tested probe's differential pressure readings at the last pitch angle setting in each replicate.
10.6.12 Perform a second replicate of the procedures in sections 10.6.5 through 10.6.11 at the same nominal velocity setting.
10.6.13 For each replicate, calculate the F1 and F2 values at each pitch angle. At each pitch angle, calculate the percent difference between the two F2 values using Equation 2F-3.
If the percent difference is less than or equal to 2 percent, calculate an average F1 value and an average F2 value at that pitch angle. If the percent difference is greater than 2 percent and less than or equal to 5 percent, perform a third repetition at that angle and calculate an average F1 value and an average F2 value using all three repetitions. If the percent difference is greater than 5 percent, perform four additional repetitions at that angle and calculate an average F1 value and an average F2 value using all six repetitions. When additional repetitions are required at any pitch angle, move the probe by at least 5° and then return to the specified pitch angle before taking the next measurement. Record the average values on a form similar to Table 2F-9.
10.6.14 Repeat the calibration procedures in sections 10.6.5 through 10.6.13 at the second selected nominal wind tunnel velocity setting.
10.6.15 Velocity drift check. The following check shall be performed, except when paired calibration pitot tube and tested probe pressure measurements are taken at each pitch angle setting. At each velocity setting, calculate the percent difference between consecutive differential pressure measurements made with the calibration pitot tube. If a measurement differs from the previous measurement by more than 2 percent or 0.25 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, the calibration data collected between these calibration pitot tube measurements may not be used, and the measurements shall be repeated.
10.6.16 Compare the averaged F2 coefficients obtained from the calibrations at the two selected nominal velocities, as follows. At each pitch angle setting, use Equation 2F-3 to calculate the difference between the corresponding average F2 values at the two calibration velocities. At each pitch angle in the −15° to + 15° range, the percent difference between the average F2 values shall not exceed 3.0 percent. For pitch angles outside this range (i.e., less than −15°0 and greater than + 15°), the percent difference shall not exceed 5.0 percent.
10.6.16.1 If the applicable specification in section 10.6.16 is met at each pitch angle setting, average the results obtained at the two nominal calibration velocities to produce a calibration record of F1 and F2 at each pitch angle tested. Record these values on a form similar to Table 2F-9. From these values, generate one calibration curve representing F1 versus pitch angle and a second curve representing F2 versus pitch angle. Computer spreadsheet programs may be used to graph the calibration data and to develop polynomial equations that can be used to calculate pitch angles and axial velocities.
10.6.16.2 If the applicable specification in section 10.6.16 is exceeded at any pitch angle setting, the probe shall not be used unless: (1) the calibration is repeated at that pitch angle and acceptable results are obtained or (2) values of F1 and F2 are obtained at two nominal velocities for which the specifications in section 10.6.16 are met across the entire pitch angle range.
10.7 Recalibration. Recalibrate the probe using the procedures in section 10 either within 12 months of its first field use after its most recent calibration or after 10 field tests (as defined in section 3.4), whichever occurs later. In addition, whenever there is visible damage to the 3-D head, the probe shall be recalibrated before it is used again.
10.8 Calibration of pressure-measuring devices used in field tests. Before its initial use in a field test, calibrate each pressure-measuring device (except those used exclusively for yaw nulling) using the three-point calibration procedure described in section 10.3.3. The device shall be recalibrated according to the procedure in section 10.3.3 no later than 90 days after its first field use following its most recent calibration. At the discretion of the tester, more frequent calibrations (e.g., after a field test) may be performed. No adjustments, other than adjustments to the zero setting, shall be made to the device between calibrations.
10.8.1 Post-test calibration check. A single-point calibration check shall be performed on each pressure-measuring device after completion of each field test. At the discretion of the tester, more frequent single-point calibration checks (e.g., after one or more field test runs) may be performed. It is recommended that the post-test check be performed before leaving the field test site. The check shall be performed at a pressure between 50 and 90 percent of full scale by taking a common pressure reading with the tested device and a reference pressure-measuring device (as described in section 6.4.4) or by challenging the tested device with a reference pressure source (as described in section 6.4.4) or by performing an equivalent check using a reference device approved by the Administrator.
10.8.2 Acceptance criterion. At the selected pressure setting, the pressure readings made using the reference device and the tested device shall agree to within 3 percent of full scale of the tested device or 0.8 mm H2O (0.03 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. If this specification is met, the test data collected during the field test are valid. If the specification is not met, all test data collected since the last successful calibration or calibration check are invalid and shall be repeated using a pressure-measuring device with a current, valid calibration. Any device that fails the calibration check shall not be used in a field test until a successful recalibration is performed according to the procedures in section 10.3.3.
10.9 Temperature Gauges. Same as Method 2, section 4.3. The alternative thermocouple calibration procedures outlined in Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Approved Alternative Method (ALT-011) “Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibration Procedure” may be performed. Temperature gauges shall be calibrated no more than 30 days prior to the start of a field test or series of field tests and recalibrated no more than 30 days after completion of a field test or series of field tests.
10.10 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section 4.4. The barometer shall be calibrated no more than 30 days prior to the start of a field test or series of field tests.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
These calculations use the measured yaw angle, derived pitch angle, and the differential pressure and temperature measurements at individual traverse points to derive the axial flue gas velocity (va(i)) at each of those points. The axial velocity values at all traverse points that comprise a full stack or duct traverse are then averaged to obtain the average axial flue gas velocity (va (avg)). Round off figures only in the final calculation of reported values.
12.1 Nomenclature
A = Cross-sectional area of stack or duct, m 2 (ft 2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 or alternative), proportion by volume.
Kp Conversion factor (a constant),
for the metric system, and
for the English system.
Md = Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, dry basis (see section 8.13), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Ms = Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at measurement site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pg = Stack or duct static pressure, mm H2O (in. H2O).
Ps = Absolute stack or duct pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg),
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
13.6 = Conversion from mm H2O (in. H2O) to mm Hg (in. Hg).
Qsd = Average dry-basis volumetric stack or duct gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Qsw = Average wet-basis volumetric stack or duct gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, wscm/hr (wscf/hr).
Ts(avg) = Average absolute stack or duct gas temperature across all traverse points.
ts(i) = Stack or duct gas temperature, C (F), at traverse point i.
Ts(i) = Absolute stack or duct gas temperature, K (R), at traverse point i,
for the metric system, and
for the English system.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
F1(i) = Pitch angle ratio, applicable at traverse point i, dimensionless.
F2(i) = 3-D probe velocity calibration coefficient, applicable at traverse point i, dimensionless.
(P4-P5)i = Pitch differential pressure of stack or duct gas flow, mm H2O (in. H2O), at traverse point i.
(P1-P2)i = Velocity head (differential pressure) of stack or duct gas flow, mm H2O (in. H2O), at traverse point i.
va(i) = Reported stack or duct gas axial velocity, m/sec (ft/sec), at traverse point i.
va(avg) = Average stack or duct gas axial velocity, m/sec (ft/sec), across all traverse points.
3,600 = Conversion factor, sec/hr.
18.0 = Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
θy(i) = Yaw angle, degrees, at traverse point i.
θp(i) = Pitch angle, degrees, at traverse point i.
n = Number of traverse points.
12.2 Traverse Point Velocity Calculations. Perform the following calculations from the measurements obtained at each traverse point.
12.2.1 Selection of calibration curves. Select calibration curves as described in section 10.6.1.
12.2.2 Traverse point pitch angle ratio. Use Equation 2F-1, as described in section 10.6.2, to calculate the pitch angle ratio, F1(i), at each traverse point.
12.2.3 Pitch angle. Use the pitch angle ratio, F1(i), to derive the pitch angle, θp(i), at traverse point i from the F1 versus pitch angle calibration curve generated under section 10.6.16.1.
12.2.4 Velocity calibration coefficient. Use the pitch angle, θp(i), to obtain the probe velocity calibration coefficient, F2(i), at traverse point i from the “velocity pressure calibration curve,” i.e., the F2 versus pitch angle calibration curve generated under section 10.6.16.1.
12.2.5 Axial velocity. Use the following equation to calculate the axial velocity, va(i), from the differential pressure (P1-P2)i and yaw angle, θy(i), measured at traverse point i and the previously calculated values for the velocity calibration coefficient, F2(i), absolute stack or duct standard temperature, Ts(i), absolute stack or duct pressure, Ps, molecular weight, Ms, and pitch angle, “θp(i).
12.2.6 Handling multiple measurements at a traverse point. For pressure or temperature devices that take multiple measurements at a traverse point, the multiple measurements (or where applicable, their square roots) may first be averaged and the resulting average values used in the equations above. Alternatively, the individual measurements may be used in the equations above and the resulting multiple calculated values may then be averaged to obtain a single traverse point value. With either approach, all of the individual measurements recorded at a traverse point must be used in calculating the applicable traverse point value.
12.3 Average Axial Velocity in Stack or Duct. Use the reported traverse point axial velocity in the following equation.
12.4 Acceptability of Results. The test results are acceptable and the calculated value of va(avg) may be reported as the average axial velocity for the test run if the conditions in either section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2 are met.
12.4.1 The calibration curves were generated at nominal velocities of 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec).
12.4.2 The calibration curves were generated at nominal velocities other than 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec), and the value of va(avg) obtained using Equation 2F-9 is less than or equal to at least one of the nominal velocities used to derive the F1 and F2 calibration curves.
12.4.3 If the conditions in neither section 12.4.1 nor section 12.4.2 are met, the test results obtained in Equation 2F-9 are not acceptable, and the steps in sections 12.2 and 12.3 must be repeated using a set of F1 and F2 calibration curves that satisfies the conditions specified in section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2.
12.5 Average Gas Wet Volumetric Flow Rate in Stack or Duct. Use the following equation to compute the average volumetric flow rate on a wet basis.
12.6 Average Gas Dry Volumetric Flow Rate in Stack or Duct. Use the following equation to compute the average volumetric flow rate on a dry basis.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Reporting
16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports shall be submitted to the Agency according to applicable regulatory requirements. Field test reports should, at a minimum, include the following elements.
16.1.1 Description of the source. This should include the name and location of the test site, descriptions of the process tested, a description of the combustion source, an accurate diagram of stack or duct cross-sectional area at the test site showing the dimensions of the stack or duct, the location of the test ports, and traverse point locations and identification numbers or codes. It should also include a description and diagram of the stack or duct layout, showing the distance of the test location from the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances and all structural elements (including breachings, baffles, fans, straighteners, etc.) affecting the flow pattern. If the source and test location descriptions have been previously submitted to the Agency in a document (e.g., a monitoring plan or test plan), referencing the document in lieu of including this information in the field test report is acceptable.
16.1.2 Field test procedures. These should include a description of test equipment and test procedures. Testing conventions, such as traverse point numbering and measurement sequence (e.g., sampling from center to wall, or wall to center), should be clearly stated. Test port identification and directional reference for each test port should be included on the appropriate field test data sheets.
16.1.3 Field test data.
16.1.3.1 Summary of results. This summary should include the dates and times of testing and the average axial gas velocity and the average flue gas volumetric flow results for each run and tested condition.
16.1.3.2 Test data. The following values for each traverse point should be recorded and reported:
(a) P1-P2 and P4-P5 differential pressures
(b) Stack or duct gas temperature at traverse point i (ts(i))
(c) Absolute stack or duct gas temperature at traverse point i (Ts(i))
(d) Yaw angle at each traverse point i (θy(i))
(e) Pitch angle at each traverse point i (θp(i))
(f) Stack or duct gas axial velocity at traverse point i (va(i))
16.1.3.3 The following values should be reported once per run:
(a) Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 or alternative), proportion by volume (Bws), measured at the frequency specified in the applicable regulation
(b) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, dry basis (Md)
(c) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, wet basis (Ms)
(d) Stack or duct static pressure (Pg)
(e) Absolute stack or duct pressure (Ps)
(f) Carbon dioxide concentration in the flue gas, dry basis ( 0/0d CO2)
(g) Oxygen concentration in the flue gas, dry basis ( 0/0d O2)
(h) Average axial stack or duct gas velocity (va(avg)) across all traverse points
(i) Gas volumetric flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dry or wet basis as required by the applicable regulation (Qsd or Qsw)
16.1.3.4 The following should be reported once per complete set of test runs:
(a) Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at the test location (A)
(b) Measurement system response time (sec)
(c) Barometric pressure at measurement site (Pbar)
16.1.4 Calibration data. The field test report should include calibration data for all probes and test equipment used in the field test. At a minimum, the probe calibration data reported to the Agency should include the following:
(a) Date of calibration
(b) Probe type
(c) Probe identification number(s) or code(s)
(d) Probe inspection sheets
(e) Pressure measurements and intermediate calculations of F1 and F2 at each pitch angle used to obtain calibration curves in accordance with section 10.6 of this method
(f) Calibration curves (in graphic or equation format) obtained in accordance with sections 10.6.11 of this method
(g) Description and diagram of wind tunnel used for the calibration, including dimensions of cross-sectional area and position and size of the test section
(h) Documentation of wind tunnel qualification tests performed in accordance with section 10.1 of this method
16.1.5 Quality Assurance. Specific quality assurance and quality control procedures used during the test should be described.
17.0 Bibliography
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.
(2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2H—Determination of stack gas velocity taking into account velocity decay near the stack wall.
(3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).
(4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3—Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, excess air, and dry molecular weight.
(5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations in emissions from stationary sources (instrumental analyzer procedure).
(6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4—Determination of moisture content in stack gases.
(7) Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Approved Alternative Method (ALT-011) “Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibration Procedure.”
(8) Electric Power Research Institute, Interim Report EPRI TR-106698, “Flue Gas Flow Rate Measurement Errors,” June 1996.
(9) Electric Power Research Institute, Final Report EPRI TR-108110, “Evaluation of Heat Rate Discrepancy from Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems,” August 1997.
(10) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, Final Report, “Velocity Probe Tests in Non-axial Flow Fields,” November 1998, Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
(11) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, “Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and T-DAT Probes,” February 24, 1999, Technical Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W-1193-NALX.
(12) Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Report WBWT-TR-1317, “Calibration of Eight Wind Speed Probes Over a Reynolds Number Range of 46,000 to 725,000 Per Foot, Text and Summary Plots,” Plus appendices, October 15, 1998, Prepared for The Cadmus Group, Inc.
(13) National Institute of Standards and Technology, Special Publication 250, “NIST Calibration Services Users Guide 1991,” Revised October 1991, U.S. Department of Commerce, p. 2.
(14) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(15) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Five Autoprobes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(16) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(17) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(18) Norfleet, S.K., “An Evaluation of Wall Effects on Stack Flow Velocities and Related Overestimation Bias in EPA's Stack Flow Reference Methods,” EPRI CEMS User's Group Meeting, New Orleans, Louisiana, May 13-15, 1998.
(19) Page, J.J., E.A. Potts, and R.T. Shigehara, “3-D Pitot Tube Calibration Study,” EPA Contract No. 68-D1-0009, Work Assignment No. I-121, March 11, 1993.
(20) Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith, “Significance of Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements,” Presented at the Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, Missouri, June 14-19, 1970.
(21) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Findings Report,” EPA/430-R-99-009.
(22) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-015a.
(23) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hubbard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-017a.
(24) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co., G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-018a.
(25) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,” EPA/430-R-97-013.
18.0 Annexes
Annex A, C, and D describe recommended procedures for meeting certain provisions in sections 8.3, 10.4, and 10.5 of this method. Annex B describes procedures to be followed when using the protractor wheel and pointer assembly to measure yaw angles, as provided under section 8.9.1.
18.1 Annex A—Rotational Position Check. The following are recommended procedures that may be used to satisfy the rotational position check requirements of section 8.3 of this method and to determine the angle-measuring device rotational offset RADO.
18.1.1 Rotational position check with probe outside stack. Where physical constraints at the sampling location allow full assembly of the probe outside the stack and insertion into the test port, the following procedures should be performed before the start of testing. Two angle-measuring devices that meet the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3 are required for the rotational position check. An angle measuring device whose position can be independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a set screw) after being locked into position on the probe sheath shall not be used for this check unless the independent adjustment is set so that the device performs exactly like a device without the capability for independent adjustment. That is, when aligned on the probe such a device must give the same reading as a device that does not have the capability of being independently adjusted. With the fully assembled probe (including probe shaft extensions, if any) secured in a horizontal position, affix one yaw angle-measuring device to the probe sheath and lock it into position on the reference scribe line specified in section 6.1.6.1. Position the second angle-measuring device using the procedure in section 18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2.
18.1.1.1 Marking procedure. The procedures in this section should be performed at each location on the fully assembled probe where the yaw angle-measuring device will be mounted during the velocity traverse. Place the second yaw angle-measuring device on the main probe sheath (or extension) at the position where a yaw angle will be measured during the velocity traverse. Adjust the position of the second angle-measuring device until it indicates the same angle (±1°) as the reference device, and affix the second device to the probe sheath (or extension). Record the angles indicated by the two angle-measuring devices on a form similar to Table 2F-2. In this position, the second angle-measuring device is considered to be properly positioned for yaw angle measurement. Make a mark, no wider than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.), on the probe sheath (or extension), such that the yaw angle-measuring device can be re-affixed at this same properly aligned position during the velocity traverse.
18.1.1.2 Procedure for probe extensions with scribe lines. If, during a velocity traverse the angle-measuring device will be affixed to a probe extension having a scribe line as specified in section 6.1.6.2, the following procedure may be used to align the extension's scribe line with the reference scribe line instead of marking the extension as described in section 18.1.1.1. Attach the probe extension to the main probe. Align and lock the second angle-measuring device on the probe extension's scribe line. Then, rotate the extension until both measuring devices indicate the same angle (±1°). Lock the extension at this rotational position. Record the angles indicated by the two angle-measuring devices on a form similar to Table 2F-2. An angle-measuring device may be aligned at any position on this scribe line during the velocity traverse, if the scribe line meets the alignment specification in section 6.1.6.3.
18.1.1.3 Post-test rotational position check. If the fully assembled probe includes one or more extensions, the following check should be performed immediately after the completion of a velocity traverse. At the discretion of the tester, additional checks may be conducted after completion of testing at any sample port. Without altering the alignment of any of the components of the probe assembly used in the velocity traverse, secure the fully assembled probe in a horizontal position. Affix an angle-measuring device at the reference scribe line specified in section 6.1.6.1. Use the other angle-measuring device to check the angle at each location where the device was checked prior to testing. Record the readings from the two angle-measuring devices.
18.1.2 Rotational position check with probe in stack. This section applies only to probes that, due to physical constraints, cannot be inserted into the test port as fully assembled with all necessary extensions needed to reach the inner-most traverse point(s).
18.1.2.1 Perform the out-of-stack procedure in section 18.1.1 on the main probe and any attached extensions that will be initially inserted into the test port.
18.1.2.2 Use the following procedures to perform additional rotational position check(s) with the probe in the stack, each time a probe extension is added. Two angle-measuring devices are required. The first of these is the device that was used to measure yaw angles at the preceding traverse point, left in its properly aligned measurement position. The second angle-measuring device is positioned on the added probe extension. Use the applicable procedures in section 18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2 to align, adjust, lock, and mark (if necessary) the position of the second angle-measuring device to within ±1° of the first device. Record the readings of the two devices on a form similar to Table 2F-2.
18.1.2.3 The procedure in section 18.1.2.2 should be performed at the first port where measurements are taken. The procedure should be repeated each time a probe extension is re-attached at a subsequent port, unless the probe extensions are designed to be locked into a mechanically fixed rotational position (e.g., through use of interlocking grooves), which can be reproduced from port to port as specified in section 8.3.5.2.
18.2 Annex B—Angle Measurement Protocol for Protractor Wheel and Pointer Device. The following procedure shall be used when a protractor wheel and pointer assembly, such as the one described in section 6.2.2 and illustrated in Figure 2F-7 is used to measure the yaw angle of flow. With each move to a new traverse point, unlock, re-align, and re-lock the probe, angle-pointer collar, and protractor wheel to each other. At each such move, particular attention is required to ensure that the scribe line on the angle pointer collar is either aligned with the reference scribe line on the main probe sheath or is at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. The procedure consists of the following steps:
18.2.1 Affix a protractor wheel to the entry port for the test probe in the stack or duct.
18.2.2 Orient the protractor wheel so that the 0° mark corresponds to the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the specifications in section 6.2.1 to locate the 0° orientation. For ports on the top or bottom of horizontal ducts, identify the longitudinal axis at each test port and permanently mark the duct to indicate the 0° orientation. Once the protractor wheel is properly aligned, lock it into position on the test port.
18.2.3 Move the pointer assembly along the probe sheath to the position needed to take measurements at the first traverse point. Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line or at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the pointer device onto the probe sheath. Insert the probe into the entry port to the depth needed to take measurements at the first traverse point.
18.2.4 Perform the yaw angle determination as specified in sections 8.9.3 and 8.9.4 and record the angle as shown by the pointer on the protractor wheel. Then, take velocity pressure and temperature measurements in accordance with the procedure in section 8.9.5. Perform the alignment check described in section 8.9.6.
18.2.5 After taking velocity pressure measurements at that traverse point, unlock the probe from the collar and slide the probe through the collar to the depth needed to reach the next traverse point.
18.2.6 Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line on the main probe or at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. Lock the collar onto the probe.
18.2.7 Repeat the steps in sections 18.2.4 through 18.2.6 at the remaining traverse points accessed from the current stack or duct entry port.
18.2.8 After completing the measurement at the last traverse point accessed from a port, verify that the orientation of the protractor wheel on the test port has not changed over the course of the traverse at that port. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the specifications in section 6.2.1 to check the rotational position of the 0° mark on the protractor wheel. For ports on the top or bottom of horizontal ducts, observe the alignment of the angle wheel 0° mark relative to the permanent 0° mark on the duct at that test port. If these observed comparisons exceed ±2° of 0°, all angle and pressure measurements taken at that port since the protractor wheel was last locked into position on the port shall be repeated.
18.2.9 Move to the next stack or duct entry port and repeat the steps in sections 18.2.1 through 18.2.8.
18.3 Annex C—Guideline for Reference Scribe Line Placement. Use of the following guideline is recommended to satisfy the requirements of section 10.4 of this method. The rotational position of the reference scribe line should be either 90° or 180° from the probe's impact pressure port.
18.4 Annex D—Determination of Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset. The following procedures are recommended for determining the magnitude and sign of a probe's reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. Separate procedures are provided for two types of angle-measuring devices: digital inclinometers and protractor wheel and pointer assemblies.
18.4.1 Perform the following procedures on the main probe with all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field [such as thermocouples or resistance temperature detectors (RTDs)] that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration.
18.4.2 The procedures below assume that the wind tunnel duct used for probe calibration is horizontal and that the flow in the calibration wind tunnel is axial as determined by the axial flow verification check described in section 10.1.2. Angle-measuring devices are assumed to display angles in alternating 0° to 90° and 90° to 0° intervals. If angle-measuring devices with other readout conventions are used or if other calibration wind tunnel duct configurations are used, make the appropriate calculational corrections.
18.4.2.1 Position the angle-measuring device in accordance with one of the following procedures.
18.4.2.1.1 If using a digital inclinometer, affix the calibrated digital inclinometer to the probe. If the digital inclinometer can be independently adjusted after being locked into position on the probe sheath (e.g., by means of a set screw), the independent adjustment must be set so that the device performs exactly like a device without the capability for independent adjustment. That is, when aligned on the probe the device must give the same readings as a device that does not have the capability of being independently adjusted. Either align it directly on the reference scribe line or on a mark aligned with the scribe line determined according to the procedures in section 18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the digital inclinometer onto the probe sheath.
18.4.2.1.2 If using a protractor wheel and pointer device, orient the protractor wheel on the test port so that the 0° mark is aligned with the longitudinal axis of the wind tunnel duct. Maintaining this alignment, lock the wheel into place on the wind tunnel test port. Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line or with a mark aligned with the reference scribe line, as determined under section 18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the pointer device onto the probe sheath.
18.4.2.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device used for yaw nulling.
18.4.2.3 Insert the probe assembly into the wind tunnel through the entry port, positioning the probe's impact port at the calibration location. Check the responsiveness of the pressure-measuring device to probe rotation, taking corrective action if the response is unacceptable.
18.4.2.4 Ensure that the probe is in a horizontal position using a carpenter's level.
18.4.2.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise or counterclockwise until a yaw null (P2 = P3) is obtained.
18.4.2.6 Read and record the value of θnull, the angle indicated by the angle-measuring device at the yaw-null position. Record the angle reading on a form similar to Table 2F-6. Do not associate an algebraic sign with this reading.
18.4.2.7 Determine the magnitude and algebraic sign of the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. The magnitude of RSLO will be equal to either θnull or (90°−θnull), depending on the angle-measuring device used. (See Table 2F-7 for a summary.) The algebraic sign of RSLO will either be positive, if the rotational position of the reference scribe line is clockwise, or negative, if counterclockwise with respect to the probe's yaw-null position. Figure 2F-13 illustrates how the magnitude and sign of RSLO are determined.
18.4.2.8 Perform the steps in sections 18.4.2.3 through 18.4.2.7 twice at each of the two calibration velocities selected for the probe under section 10.6. Record the values of RSLO in a form similar to Table 2F-6.
18.4.2.9 The average of all RSLO values is the reference scribe line rotational offset for the probe.
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-2 to Part 60—Test Methods 2G through 3C
Method 2G—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate With Two-Dimensional Probes
Method 2H—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity Taking Into Account Velocity Decay Near the Stack Wall
Method 3—Gas analysis for the determination of dry molecular weight
Method 3A—Determination of Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Concentrations in Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
Method 3B—Gas analysis for the determination of emission rate correction factor or excess air
Method 3C—Determination of carbon dioxide, methane, nitrogen, and oxygen from stationary sources
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 2G—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate With Two-Dimensional Probes
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable for the determination of yaw angle, near-axial velocity, and the volumetric flow rate of a gas stream in a stack or duct using a two-dimensional (2-D) probe.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A 2-D probe is used to measure the velocity pressure and the yaw angle of the flow velocity vector in a stack or duct. Alternatively, these measurements may be made by operating one of the three-dimensional (3-D) probes described in Method 2F, in yaw determination mode only. From these measurements and a determination of the stack gas density, the average near-axial velocity of the stack gas is calculated. The near-axial velocity accounts for the yaw, but not the pitch, component of flow. The average gas volumetric flow rate in the stack or duct is then determined from the average near-axial velocity.
3.0 Definitions
3.1. Angle-measuring Device Rotational Offset (RADO). The rotational position of an angle-measuring device relative to the reference scribe line, as determined during the pre-test rotational position check described in section 8.3.
3.2 Calibration Pitot Tube. The standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube used as a reference when calibrating a probe under this method.
3.3 Field Test. A set of measurements conducted at a specific unit or exhaust stack/duct to satisfy the applicable regulation (e.g., a three-run boiler performance test, a single-or multiple-load nine-run relative accuracy test).
3.4 Full Scale of Pressure-measuring Device. Full scale refers to the upper limit of the measurement range displayed by the device. For bi-directional pressure gauges, full scale includes the entire pressure range from the lowest negative value to the highest positive value on the pressure scale.
3.5 Main probe. Refers to the probe head and that section of probe sheath directly attached to the probe head. The main probe sheath is distinguished from probe extensions, which are sections of sheath added onto the main probe to extend its reach.
3.6 “May,” “Must,” “Shall,” “Should,” and the imperative form of verbs.
3.6.1 “May” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is optional.
3.6.2 “Must,” “Shall,” and the imperative form of verbs (such as “record” or “enter”) are used to indicate that a provision of this method is mandatory.
3.6.3 “Should” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is not mandatory, but is highly recommended as good practice.
3.7 Method 1. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.”
3.8 Method 2. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).”
3.9 Method 2F. Refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional probes.”
3.10 Near-axial Velocity. The velocity vector parallel to the axis of the stack or duct that accounts for the yaw angle component of gas flow. The term “near-axial” is used herein to indicate that the velocity and volumetric flow rate results account for the measured yaw angle component of flow at each measurement point.
3.11 Nominal Velocity. Refers to a wind tunnel velocity setting that approximates the actual wind tunnel velocity to within ±1.5 m/sec (±5 ft/sec).
3.12 Pitch Angle. The angle between the axis of the stack or duct and the pitch component of flow, i.e., the component of the total velocity vector in a plane defined by the traverse line and the axis of the stack or duct. (Figure 2G-1 illustrates the “pitch plane.”) From the standpoint of a tester facing a test port in a vertical stack, the pitch component of flow is the vector of flow moving from the center of the stack toward or away from that test port. The pitch angle is the angle described by this pitch component of flow and the vertical axis of the stack.
3.13 Readability. For the purposes of this method, readability for an analog measurement device is one half of the smallest scale division. For a digital measurement device, it is the number of decimals displayed by the device.
3.14 Reference Scribe Line. A line permanently inscribed on the main probe sheath (in accordance with section 6.1.5.1) to serve as a reference mark for determining yaw angles.
3.15 Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset (RSLO). The rotational position of a probe's reference scribe line relative to the probe's yaw-null position, as determined during the yaw angle calibration described in section 10.5.
3.16 Response Time. The time required for the measurement system to fully respond to a change from zero differential pressure and ambient temperature to the stable stack or duct pressure and temperature readings at a traverse point.
3.17 Tested Probe. A probe that is being calibrated.
3.18 Three-dimensional (3-D) Probe. A directional probe used to determine the velocity pressure and the yaw and pitch angles in a flowing gas stream.
3.19 Two-dimensional (2-D) Probe. A directional probe used to measure velocity pressure and yaw angle in a flowing gas stream.
3.20 Traverse Line. A diameter or axis extending across a stack or duct on which measurements of velocity pressure and flow angles are made.
3.21 Wind Tunnel Calibration Location. A point, line, area, or volume within the wind tunnel test section at, along, or within which probes are calibrated. At a particular wind tunnel velocity setting, the average velocity pressures at specified points at, along, or within the calibration location shall vary by no more than 2 percent or 0.3 mm H20 (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, from the average velocity pressure at the calibration pitot tube location. Air flow at this location shall be axial, i.e., yaw and pitch angles within ±3° of 0°. Compliance with these flow criteria shall be demonstrated by performing the procedures prescribed in sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2. For circular tunnels, no part of the calibration location may be closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the tunnel diameter, whichever is farther from the wall. For elliptical or rectangular tunnels, no part of the calibration location may be closer to the tunnel wall than 10.2 cm (4 in.) or 25 percent of the applicable cross-sectional axis, whichever is farther from the wall.
3.22 Wind Tunnel with Documented Axial Flow. A wind tunnel facility documented as meeting the provisions of sections 10.1.1 (velocity pressure cross-check) and 10.1.2 (axial flow verification) using the procedures described in these sections or alternative procedures determined to be technically equivalent.
3.23 Yaw Angle. The angle between the axis of the stack or duct and the yaw component of flow, i.e., the component of the total velocity vector in a plane perpendicular to the traverse line at a particular traverse point. (Figure 2G-1 illustrates the “yaw plane.”) From the standpoint of a tester facing a test port in a vertical stack, the yaw component of flow is the vector of flow moving to the left or right from the center of the stack as viewed by the tester. (This is sometimes referred to as “vortex flow,” i.e., flow around the centerline of a stack or duct.) The yaw angle is the angle described by this yaw component of flow and the vertical axis of the stack. The algebraic sign convention is illustrated in Figure 2G-2.
3.24 Yaw Nulling. A procedure in which a Type-S pitot tube or a 3-D probe is rotated about its axis in a stack or duct until a zero differential pressure reading (“yaw null”) is obtained. When a Type S probe is yaw-nulled, the rotational position of its impact port is 90° from the direction of flow in the stack or duct and the ΔP reading is zero. When a 3-D probe is yaw-nulled, its impact pressure port (P1) faces directly into the direction of flow in the stack or duct and the differential pressure between pressure ports P2 and P3 is zero.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This test method may involve hazardous operations and the use of hazardous materials or equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish and implement appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before using this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Two-dimensional Probes. Probes that provide both the velocity pressure and the yaw angle of the flow vector in a stack or duct, as listed in sections 6.1.1 and 6.1.2, qualify for use based on comprehensive wind tunnel and field studies involving both inter-and intra-probe comparisons by multiple test teams. Each 2-D probe shall have a unique identification number or code permanently marked on the main probe sheath. Each probe shall be calibrated prior to use according to the procedures in section 10. Manufacturer-supplied calibration data shall be used as example information only, except when the manufacturer calibrates the probe as specified in section 10 and provides complete documentation.
6.1.1 Type S (Stausscheibe or reverse type) pitot tube. This is the same as specified in Method 2, section 2.1, except for the following additional specifications that enable the pitot tube to accurately determine the yaw component of flow. For the purposes of this method, the external diameter of the tubing used to construct the Type S pitot tube (dimension Dt in Figure 2-2 of Method 2) shall be no less than 9.5 mm (3/8 in.). The pitot tube shall also meet the following alignment specifications. The angles α1, α2, β1, and β2, as shown in Method 2, Figure 2-3, shall not exceed ±2°. The dimensions w and z, shown in Method 2, Figure 2-3 shall not exceed 0.5 mm (0.02 in.).
6.1.1.1 Manual Type S probe. This refers to a Type S probe that is positioned at individual traverse points and yaw nulled manually by an operator.
6.1.1.2 Automated Type S probe. This refers to a system that uses a computer-controlled motorized mechanism to position the Type S pitot head at individual traverse points and perform yaw angle determinations.
6.1.2 Three-dimensional probes used in 2-D mode. A 3-D probe, as specified in sections 6.1.1 through 6.1.3 of Method 2F, may, for the purposes of this method, be used in a two-dimensional mode (i.e., measuring yaw angle, but not pitch angle). When the 3-D probe is used as a 2-D probe, only the velocity pressure and yaw-null pressure are obtained using the pressure taps referred to as P1, P2, and P3. The differential pressure P1-P2 is a function of total velocity and corresponds to the ΔP obtained using the Type S probe. The differential pressure P2-P3 is used to yaw null the probe and determine the yaw angle. The differential pressure P4-P5, which is a function of pitch angle, is not measured when the 3-D probe is used in 2-D mode.
6.1.3 Other probes. [Reserved]
6.1.4 Probe sheath. The probe shaft shall include an outer sheath to: (1) provide a surface for inscribing a permanent reference scribe line, (2) accommodate attachment of an angle-measuring device to the probe shaft, and (3) facilitate precise rotational movement of the probe for determining yaw angles. The sheath shall be rigidly attached to the probe assembly and shall enclose all pressure lines from the probe head to the farthest position away from the probe head where an angle-measuring device may be attached during use in the field. The sheath of the fully assembled probe shall be sufficiently rigid and straight at all rotational positions such that, when one end of the probe shaft is held in a horizontal position, the fully extended probe meets the horizontal straightness specifications indicated in section 8.2 below.
6.1.5 Scribe lines.
6.1.5.1 Reference scribe line. A permanent line, no greater than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) in width, shall be inscribed on each manual probe that will be used to determine yaw angles of flow. This line shall be placed on the main probe sheath in accordance with the procedures described in section 10.4 and is used as a reference position for installation of the yaw angle-measuring device on the probe. At the discretion of the tester, the scribe line may be a single line segment placed at a particular position on the probe sheath (e.g., near the probe head), multiple line segments placed at various locations along the length of the probe sheath (e.g., at every position where a yaw angle-measuring device may be mounted), or a single continuous line extending along the full length of the probe sheath.
6.1.5.2 Scribe line on probe extensions. A permanent line may also be inscribed on any probe extension that will be attached to the main probe in performing field testing. This allows a yaw angle-measuring device mounted on the extension to be readily aligned with the reference scribe line on the main probe sheath.
6.1.5.3 Alignment specifications. This specification shall be met separately, using the procedures in section 10.4.1, on the main probe and on each probe extension. The rotational position of the scribe line or scribe line segments on the main probe or any probe extension must not vary by more than 2°. That is, the difference between the minimum and maximum of all of the rotational angles that are measured along the full length of the main probe or the probe extension must not exceed 2°.
6.1.6 Probe and system characteristics to ensure horizontal stability.
6.1.6.1 For manual probes, it is recommended that the effective length of the probe (coupled with a probe extension, if necessary) be at least 0.9 m (3 ft.) longer than the farthest traverse point mark on the probe shaft away from the probe head. The operator should maintain the probe's horizontal stability when it is fully inserted into the stack or duct. If a shorter probe is used, the probe should be inserted through a bushing sleeve, similar to the one shown in Figure 2G-3, that is installed on the test port; such a bushing shall fit snugly around the probe and be secured to the stack or duct entry port in such a manner as to maintain the probe's horizontal stability when fully inserted into the stack or duct.
6.1.6.2 An automated system that includes an external probe casing with a transport system shall have a mechanism for maintaining horizontal stability comparable to that obtained by manual probes following the provisions of this method. The automated probe assembly shall also be constructed to maintain the alignment and position of the pressure ports during sampling at each traverse point. The design of the probe casing and transport system shall allow the probe to be removed from the stack or duct and checked through direct physical measurement for angular position and insertion depth.
6.1.7 The tubing that is used to connect the probe and the pressure-measuring device should have an inside diameter of at least 3.2 mm ( 1/8 in.), to reduce the time required for pressure equilibration, and should be as short as practicable.
6.1.8 If a detachable probe head without a sheath [e.g., a pitot tube, typically 15.2 to 30.5 cm (6 to 12 in.) in length] is coupled with a probe sheath and calibrated in a wind tunnel in accordance with the yaw angle calibration procedure in section 10.5, the probe head shall remain attached to the probe sheath during field testing in the same configuration and orientation as calibrated. Once the detachable probe head is uncoupled or re-oriented, the yaw angle calibration of the probe is no longer valid and must be repeated before using the probe in subsequent field tests.
6.2 Yaw Angle-measuring Device. One of the following devices shall be used for measurement of the yaw angle of flow.
6.2.1 Digital inclinometer. This refers to a digital device capable of measuring and displaying the rotational position of the probe to within ±1°. The device shall be able to be locked into position on the probe sheath or probe extension, so that it indicates the probe's rotational position throughout the test. A rotational position collar block that can be attached to the probe sheath (similar to the collar shown in Figure 2G-4) may be required to lock the digital inclinometer into position on the probe sheath.
6.2.2 Protractor wheel and pointer assembly. This apparatus, similar to that shown in Figure 2G-5, consists of the following components.
6.2.2.1 A protractor wheel that can be attached to a port opening and set in a fixed rotational position to indicate the yaw angle position of the probe's scribe line relative to the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. The protractor wheel must have a measurement ring on its face that is no less than 17.8 cm (7 in.) in diameter, shall be able to be rotated to any angle and then locked into position on the stack or duct test port, and shall indicate angles to a resolution of 1°.
6.2.2.2 A pointer assembly that includes an indicator needle mounted on a collar that can slide over the probe sheath and be locked into a fixed rotational position on the probe sheath. The pointer needle shall be of sufficient length, rigidity, and sharpness to allow the tester to determine the probe's angular position to within 1° from the markings on the protractor wheel. Corresponding to the position of the pointer, the collar must have a scribe line to be used in aligning the pointer with the scribe line on the probe sheath.
6.2.3 Other yaw angle-measuring devices. Other angle-measuring devices with a manufacturer's specified precision of 1° or better may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
6.3 Probe Supports and Stabilization Devices. When probes are used for determining flow angles, the probe head should be kept in a stable horizontal position. For probes longer than 3.0 m (10 ft.), the section of the probe that extends outside the test port shall be secured. Three alternative devices are suggested for maintaining the horizontal position and stability of the probe shaft during flow angle determinations and velocity pressure measurements: (1) monorails installed above each port, (2) probe stands on which the probe shaft may be rested, or (3) bushing sleeves of sufficient length secured to the test ports to maintain probes in a horizontal position. Comparable provisions shall be made to ensure that automated systems maintain the horizontal position of the probe in the stack or duct. The physical characteristics of each test platform may dictate the most suitable type of stabilization device. Thus, the choice of a specific stabilization device is left to the judgement of the testers.
6.4 Differential Pressure Gauges. The velocity pressure (ΔP) measuring devices used during wind tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be either electronic manometers (e.g., pressure transducers), fluid manometers, or mechanical pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicΔ gauges). Use of electronic manometers is recommended. Under low velocity conditions, use of electronic manometers may be necessary to obtain acceptable measurements.
6.4.1 Differential pressure-measuring device. This refers to a device capable of measuring pressure differentials and having a readability of ±1 percent of full scale. The device shall be capable of accurately measuring the maximum expected pressure differential. Such devices are used to determine the following pressure measurements: velocity pressure, static pressure, and yaw-null pressure. For an inclined-vertical manometer, the readability specification of ±1 percent shall be met separately using the respective full-scale upper limits of the inclined anvertical portions of the scales. To the extent practicable, the device shall be selected such that most of the pressure readings are between 10 and 90 percent of the device's full-scale measurement range (as defined in section 3.4). In addition, pressure-measuring devices should be selected such that the zero does not drift by more than 5 percent of the average expected pressure readings to be encountered during the field test. This is particularly important under low pressure conditions.
6.4.2 Gauge used for yaw nulling. The differential pressure-measuring device chosen for yaw nulling the probe during the wind tunnel calibrations and field testing shall be bi-directional, i.e., capable of reading both positive and negative differential pressures. If a mechanical, bi-directional pressure gauge is chosen, it shall have a full-scale range no greater than 2.6 cm (i.e., −1.3 to + 1.3 cm) [1 in. H2O (i.e., −0.5 in. to + 0.5 in.)].
6.4.3 Devices for calibrating differential pressure-measuring devices. A precision manometer (e.g., a U-tube, inclined, or inclined-vertical manometer, or micromanometer) or NIST (National Institute of Standards and Technology) traceable pressure source shall be used for calibrating differential pressure-measuring devices. The device shall be maintained under laboratory conditions or in a similar protected environment (e.g., a climate-controlled trailer). It shall not be used in field tests. The precision manometer shall have a scale gradation of 0.3 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), or less, in the range of 0 to 5.1 cm H2O (0 to 2 in. H2O) and 2.5 mm H2O (0.1 in. H2O), or less, in the range of 5.1 to 25.4 cm H2O (2 to 10 in. H2O). The manometer shall have manufacturer's documentation that it meets an accuracy specification of at least 0.5 percent of full scale. The NIST-traceable pressure source shall be recertified annually.
6.4.4 Devices used for post-test calibration check. A precision manometer meeting the specifications in section 6.4.3, a pressure-measuring device or pressure source with a documented calibration traceable to NIST, or an equivalent device approved by the Administrator shall be used for the post-test calibration check. The pressure-measuring device shall have a readability equivalent to or greater than the tested device. The pressure source shall be capable of generating pressures between 50 and 90 percent of the range of the tested device and known to within ±1 percent of the full scale of the tested device. The pressure source shall be recertified annually.
6.5 Data Display and Capture Devices. Electronic manometers (if used) shall be coupled with a data display device (such as a digital panel meter, personal computer display, or strip chart) that allows the tester to observe and validate the pressure measurements taken during testing. They shall also be connected to a data recorder (such as a data logger or a personal computer with data capture software) that has the ability to compute and retain the appropriate average value at each traverse point, identified by collection time and traverse point.
6.6 Temperature Gauges. For field tests, a thermocouple or resistance temperature detector (RTD) capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5 °F) of the stack or duct temperature shall be used. The thermocouple shall be attached to the probe such that the sensor tip does not touch any metal. The position of the thermocouple relative to the pressure port face openings shall be in the same configuration as used for the probe calibrations in the wind tunnel. Temperature gauges used for wind tunnel calibrations shall be capable of measuring temperature to within ±0.6 °C (±1 °F) of the temperature of the flowing gas stream in the wind tunnel.
6.7 Stack or Duct Static Pressure Measurement. The pressure-measuring device used with the probe shall be as specified in section 6.4 of this method. The static tap of a standard (Prandtl type) pitot tube or one leg of a Type S pitot tube with the face opening planes positioned parallel to the gas flow may be used for this measurement. Also acceptable is the pressure differential reading of P1-Pbar from a five-hole prism-shaped 3-D probe, as specified in section 6.1.1 of Method 2F (such as the Type DA or DAT probe), with the P1 pressure port face opening positioned parallel to the gas flow in the same manner as the Type S probe. However, the 3-D spherical probe, as specified in section 6.1.2 of Method 2F, is unable to provide this measurement and shall not be used to take static pressure measurements. Static pressure measurement is further described in section 8.11.
6.8 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section 2.5.
6.9 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Method 3 or 3A shall be used to determine the dry molecular weight of the stack or duct gas. Method 4 shall be used for moisture content determination and computation of stack or duct gas wet molecular weight. Other methods may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
6.10 Calibration Pitot Tube. Same as Method 2, section 2.7.
6.11 Wind Tunnel for Probe Calibration. Wind tunnels used to calibrate velocity probes must meet the following design specifications.
6.11.1 Test section cross-sectional area. The flowing gas stream shall be confined within a circular, rectangular, or elliptical duct. The cross-sectional area of the tunnel must be large enough to ensure fully developed flow in the presence of both the calibration pitot tube and the tested probe. The calibration site, or “test section,” of the wind tunnel shall have a minimum diameter of 30.5 cm (12 in.) for circular or elliptical duct cross-sections or a minimum width of 30.5 cm (12 in.) on the shorter side for rectangular cross-sections. Wind tunnels shall meet the probe blockage provisions of this section and the qualification requirements prescribed in section 10.1. The projected area of the portion of the probe head, shaft, and attached devices inside the wind tunnel during calibration shall represent no more than 2 percent of the cross-sectional area of the tunnel. If the pitot and/or probe assembly blocks more than 2 percent of the cross-sectional area at an insertion point only 4 inches inside the wind tunnel, the diameter of the wind tunnel must be increased.
6.11.2 Velocity range and stability. The wind tunnel should be capable of achieving and maintaining a constant and steady velocity between 6.1 m/sec and 30.5 m/sec (20 ft/sec and 100 ft/sec) for the entire calibration period for each selected calibration velocity. The wind tunnel shall produce fully developed flow patterns that are stable and parallel to the axis of the duct in the test section.
6.11.3 Flow profile at the calibration location. The wind tunnel shall provide axial flow within the test section calibration location (as defined in section 3.21). Yaw and pitch angles in the calibration location shall be within ±3° of 0°. The procedure for determining that this requirement has been met is described in section 10.1.2.
6.11.4 Entry ports in the wind tunnel test section.
6.11.4.1 Port for tested probe. A port shall be constructed for the tested probe. This port shall be located to allow the head of the tested probe to be positioned within the wind tunnel calibration location (as defined in section 3.21). The tested probe shall be able to be locked into the 0° pitch angle position. To facilitate alignment of the probe during calibration, the test section should include a window constructed of a transparent material to allow the tested probe to be viewed.
6.11.4.2 Port for verification of axial flow. Depending on the equipment selected to conduct the axial flow verification prescribed in section 10.1.2, a second port, located 90° from the entry port for the tested probe, may be needed to allow verification that the gas flow is parallel to the central axis of the test section. This port should be located and constructed so as to allow one of the probes described in section 10.1.2.2 to access the same test point(s) that are accessible from the port described in section 6.11.4.1.
6.11.4.3 Port for calibration pitot tube. The calibration pitot tube shall be used in the port for the tested probe or in a separate entry port. In either case, all measurements with the calibration pitot tube shall be made at the same point within the wind tunnel over the course of a probe calibration. The measurement point for the calibration pitot tube shall meet the same specifications for distance from the wall and for axial flow as described in section 3.21 for the wind tunnel calibration location.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Equipment Inspection and Set Up
8.1.1 All 2-D and 3-D probes, differential pressure-measuring devices, yaw angle-measuring devices, thermocouples, and barometers shall have a current, valid calibration before being used in a field test. (See sections 10.3.3, 10.3.4, and 10.5 through 10.10 for the applicable calibration requirements.)
8.1.2 Before each field use of a Type S probe, perform a visual inspection to verify the physical condition of the pitot tube. Record the results of the inspection. If the face openings are noticeably misaligned or there is visible damage to the face openings, the probe shall not be used until repaired, the dimensional specifications verified (according to the procedures in section 10.2.1), and the probe recalibrated.
8.1.3 Before each field use of a 3-D probe, perform a visual inspection to verify the physical condition of the probe head according to the procedures in section 10.2 of Method 2F. Record the inspection results on a form similar to Table 2F-1 presented in Method 2F. If there is visible damage to the 3-D probe, the probe shall not be used until it is recalibrated.
8.1.4 After verifying that the physical condition of the probe head is acceptable, set up the apparatus using lengths of flexible tubing that are as short as practicable. Surge tanks installed between the probe and pressure-measuring device may be used to dampen pressure fluctuations provided that an adequate measurement system response time (see section 8.8) is maintained.
8.2 Horizontal Straightness Check. A horizontal straightness check shall be performed before the start of each field test, except as otherwise specified in this section. Secure the fully assembled probe (including the probe head and all probe shaft extensions) in a horizontal position using a stationary support at a point along the probe shaft approximating the location of the stack or duct entry port when the probe is sampling at the farthest traverse point from the stack or duct wall. The probe shall be rotated to detect bends. Use an angle-measuring device or trigonometry to determine the bend or sag between the probe head and the secured end. (See Figure 2G-6.) Probes that are bent or sag by more than 5° shall not be used. Although this check does not apply when the probe is used for a vertical traverse, care should be taken to avoid the use of bent probes when conducting vertical traverses. If the probe is constructed of a rigid steel material and consists of a main probe without probe extensions, this check need only be performed before the initial field use of the probe, when the probe is recalibrated, when a change is made to the design or material of the probe assembly, and when the probe becomes bent. With such probes, a visual inspection shall be made of the fully assembled probe before each field test to determine if a bend is visible. The probe shall be rotated to detect bends. The inspection results shall be documented in the field test report. If a bend in the probe is visible, the horizontal straightness check shall be performed before the probe is used.
8.3 Rotational Position Check. Before each field test, and each time an extension is added to the probe during a field test, a rotational position check shall be performed on all manually operated probes (except as noted in section 8.3.5 below) to ensure that, throughout testing, the angle-measuring device is either: aligned to within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line; or is affixed to the probe such that the rotational offset of the device from the reference scribe line is known to within ±1°. This check shall consist of direct measurements of the rotational positions of the reference scribe line and angle-measuring device sufficient to verify that these specifications are met. Annex A in section 18 of this method gives recommended procedures for performing the rotational position check, and Table 2G-2 gives an example data form. Procedures other than those recommended in Annex A in section 18 may be used, provided they demonstrate whether the alignment specification is met and are explained in detail in the field test report.
8.3.1 Angle-measuring device rotational offset. The tester shall maintain a record of the angle-measuring device rotational offset, RADO, as defined in section 3.1. Note that RADO is assigned a value of 0° when the angle-measuring device is aligned to within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line. The RADO shall be used to determine the yaw angle of flow in accordance with section 8.9.4.
8.3.2 Sign of angle-measuring device rotational offset. The sign of RADO is positive when the angle-measuring device (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is positioned in a clockwise direction from the reference scribe line and negative when the device is positioned in a counterclockwise direction from the reference scribe line.
8.3.3 Angle-measuring devices that can be independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a set screw), after being locked into position on the probe sheath, may be used. However, the RADO must also take into account this adjustment.
8.3.4 Post-test check. If probe extensions remain attached to the main probe throughout the field test, the rotational position check shall be repeated, at a minimum, at the completion of the field test to ensure that the angle-measuring device has remained within ±2° of its rotational position established prior to testing. At the discretion of the tester, additional checks may be conducted after completion of testing at any sample port or after any test run. If the ±2° specification is not met, all measurements made since the last successful rotational position check must be repeated. section 18.1.1.3 of Annex A provides an example procedure for performing the post-test check.
8.3.5 Exceptions.
8.3.5.1 A rotational position check need not be performed if, for measurements taken at all velocity traverse points, the yaw angle-measuring device is mounted and aligned directly on the reference scribe line specified in sections 6.1.5.1 and 6.1.5.3 and no independent adjustments, as described in section 8.3.3, are made to device's rotational position.
8.3.5.2 If extensions are detached and re-attached to the probe during a field test, a rotational position check need only be performed the first time an extension is added to the probe, rather than each time the extension is re-attached, if the probe extension is designed to be locked into a mechanically fixed rotational position (e.g., through the use of interlocking grooves), that can re-establish the initial rotational position to within ±1°.
8.4 Leak Checks. A pre-test leak check shall be conducted before each field test. A post-test check shall be performed at the end of the field test, but additional leak checks may be conducted after any test run or group of test runs. The post-test check may also serve as the pre-test check for the next group of test runs. If any leak check is failed, all runs since the last passed leak check are invalid. While performing the leak check procedures, also check each pressure device's responsiveness to changes in pressure.
8.4.1 To perform the leak check on a Type S pitot tube, pressurize the pitot impact opening until at least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O) velocity pressure, or a pressure corresponding to approximately 75 percent of the pressure device's measurement scale, whichever is less, registers on the pressure device; then, close off the impact opening. The pressure shall remain stable (±2.5 mm H2O, ±0.10 in. H2O) for at least 15 seconds. Repeat this procedure for the static pressure side, except use suction to obtain the required pressure. Other leak-check procedures may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
8.4.2 To perform the leak check on a 3-D probe, pressurize the probe's impact (P1) opening until at least 7.6 cm H2O (3 in. H2O) velocity pressure, or a pressure corresponding to approximately 75 percent of the pressure device's measurement scale, whichever is less, registers on the pressure device; then, close off the impact opening. The pressure shall remain stable (±2.5 mm H2O, ±0.10 in. H2O) for at least 15 seconds. Check the P2 and P3 pressure ports in the same fashion. Other leak-check procedures may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
8.5 Zeroing the Differential Pressure-measuring Device. Zero each differential pressure-measuring device, including the device used for yaw nulling, before each field test. At a minimum, check the zero after each field test. A zero check may also be performed after any test run or group of test runs. For fluid manometers and mechanical pressure gauges (e.g., MagnehelicΔ gauges), the zero reading shall not deviate from zero by more than ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O) or one minor scale division, whichever is greater, between checks. For electronic manometers, the zero reading shall not deviate from zero between checks by more than: ±0.3 mm H2O (±0.01 in. H2O), for full scales less than or equal to 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O); or ±0.8 mm H2O (±0.03 in. H2O), for full scales greater than 5.1 cm H2O (2.0 in. H2O). (Note: If negative zero drift is not directly readable, estimate the reading based on the position of the gauge oil in the manometer or of the needle on the pressure gauge.) In addition, for all pressure-measuring devices except those used exclusively for yaw nulling, the zero reading shall not deviate from zero by more than 5 percent of the average measured differential pressure at any distinct process condition or load level. If any zero check is failed at a specific process condition or load level, all runs conducted at that process condition or load level since the last passed zero check are invalid.
8.6 Traverse Point Verification. The number and location of the traverse points shall be selected based on Method 1 guidelines. The stack or duct diameter and port nipple lengths, including any extension of the port nipples into the stack or duct, shall be verified the first time the test is performed; retain and use this information for subsequent field tests, updating it as required. Physically measure the stack or duct dimensions or use a calibrated laser device; do not use engineering drawings of the stack or duct. The probe length necessary to reach each traverse point shall be recorded to within ±6.4 mm (± 1/4 in.) and, for manual probes, marked on the probe sheath. In determining these lengths, the tester shall take into account both the distance that the port flange projects outside of the stack and the depth that any port nipple extends into the gas stream. The resulting point positions shall reflect the true distances from the inside wall of the stack or duct, so that when the tester aligns any of the markings with the outside face of the stack port, the probe's impact port shall be located at the appropriate distance from the inside wall for the respective Method 1 traverse point. Before beginning testing at a particular location, an out-of-stack or duct verification shall be performed on each probe that will be used to ensure that these position markings are correct. The distances measured during the verification must agree with the previously calculated distances to within ± 1/4 in. For manual probes, the traverse point positions shall be verified by measuring the distance of each mark from the probe's impact pressure port (the P1 port for a 3-D probe). A comparable out-of-stack test shall be performed on automated probe systems. The probe shall be extended to each of the prescribed traverse point positions. Then, the accuracy of the positioning for each traverse point shall be verified by measuring the distance between the port flange and the probe's impact pressure port.
8.7 Probe Installation. Insert the probe into the test port. A solid material shall be used to seal the port.
8.8 System Response Time. Determine the response time of the probe measurement system. Insert and position the “cold” probe (at ambient temperature and pressure) at any Method 1 traverse point. Read and record the probe differential pressure, temperature, and elapsed time at 15-second intervals until stable readings for both pressure and temperature are achieved. The response time is the longer of these two elapsed times. Record the response time.
8.9 Sampling.
8.9.1 Yaw angle measurement protocol. With manual probes, yaw angle measurements may be obtained in two alternative ways during the field test, either by using a yaw angle-measuring device (e.g., digital inclinometer) affixed to the probe, or using a protractor wheel and pointer assembly. For horizontal traversing, either approach may be used. For vertical traversing, i.e., when measuring from on top or into the bottom of a horizontal duct, only the protractor wheel and pointer assembly may be used. With automated probes, curve-fitting protocols may be used to obtain yaw-angle measurements.
8.9.1.1 If a yaw angle-measuring device affixed to the probe is to be used, lock the device on the probe sheath, aligning it either on the reference scribe line or in the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1.
8.9.1.2 If a protractor wheel and pointer assembly is to be used, follow the procedures in Annex B of this method.
8.9.1.3 Curve-fitting procedures. Curve-fitting routines sweep through a range of yaw angles to create curves correlating pressure to yaw position. To find the zero yaw position and the yaw angle of flow, the curve found in the stack is computationally compared to a similar curve that was previously generated under controlled conditions in a wind tunnel. A probe system that uses a curve-fitting routine for determining the yaw-null position of the probe head may be used, provided that it is verified in a wind tunnel to be able to determine the yaw angle of flow to within ±1°.
8.9.1.4 Other yaw angle determination procedures. If approved by the Administrator, other procedures for determining yaw angle may be used, provided that they are verified in a wind tunnel to be able to perform the yaw angle calibration procedure as described in section 10.5.
8.9.2 Sampling strategy. At each traverse point, first yaw-null the probe, as described in section 8.9.3, below. Then, with the probe oriented into the direction of flow, measure and record the yaw angle, the differential pressure and the temperature at the traverse point, after stable readings are achieved, in accordance with sections 8.9.4 and 8.9.5. At the start of testing in each port (i.e., after a probe has been inserted into the flue gas stream), allow at least the response time to elapse before beginning to take measurements at the first traverse point accessed from that port. Provided that the probe is not removed from the flue gas stream, measurements may be taken at subsequent traverse points accessed from the same test port without waiting again for the response time to elapse.
8.9.3 Yaw-nulling procedure. In preparation for yaw angle determination, the probe must first be yaw nulled. After positioning the probe at the appropriate traverse point, perform the following procedures.
8.9.3.1 For Type S probes, rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading is obtained. The direction of the probe rotation shall be such that the thermocouple is located downstream of the probe pressure ports at the yaw-null position. Rotate the probe 90° back from the yaw-null position to orient the impact pressure port into the direction of flow. Read and record the angle displayed by the angle-measuring device.
8.9.3.2 For 3-D probes, rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading (the difference in pressures across the P2 and P3 pressure ports is zero, i.e., P2 = P3) is indicated by the yaw angle pressure gauge. Read and record the angle displayed by the angle-measuring device.
8.9.3.3 Sign of the measured angle. The angle displayed on the angle-measuring device is considered positive when the probe's impact pressure port (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is oriented in a clockwise rotational position relative to the stack or duct axis and is considered negative when the probe's impact pressure port is oriented in a counterclockwise rotational position (see Figure 2G-7).
8.9.4 Yaw angle determination. After performing the applicable yaw-nulling procedure in section 8.9.3, determine the yaw angle of flow according to one of the following procedures. Special care must be observed to take into account the signs of the recorded angle reading and all offsets.
8.9.4.1 Direct-reading. If all rotational offsets are zero or if the angle-measuring device rotational offset (RADO) determined in section 8.3 exactly compensates for the scribe line rotational offset (RSLO) determined in section 10.5, then the magnitude of the yaw angle is equal to the displayed angle-measuring device reading from section 8.9.3.1 or 8.9.3.2. The algebraic sign of the yaw angle is determined in accordance with section 8.9.3.3. [Note: Under certain circumstances (e.g., testing of horizontal ducts) a 90° adjustment to the angle-measuring device readings may be necessary to obtain the correct yaw angles.]
8.9.4.2 Compensation for rotational offsets during data reduction. When the angle-measuring device rotational offset does not compensate for reference scribe line rotational offset, the following procedure shall be used to determine the yaw angle:
(a) Enter the reading indicated by the angle-measuring device from section 8.9.3.1 or 8.9.3.2.
(b) Associate the proper algebraic sign from section 8.9.3.3 with the reading in step (a).
(c) Subtract the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, from the reading in step (b).
(d) Subtract the angle-measuring device rotational offset, RADO, if any, from the result obtained in step (c).
(e) The final result obtained in step (d) is the yaw angle of flow.
8.9.4.3 Record the yaw angle measurements on a form similar to Table 2G-3.
8.9.5 Impact velocity determination. Maintain the probe rotational position established during the yaw angle determination. Then, begin recording the pressure-measuring device readings. These pressure measurements shall be taken over a sampling period of sufficiently long duration to ensure representative readings at each traverse point. If the pressure measurements are determined from visual readings of the pressure device or display, allow sufficient time to observe the pulsation in the readings to obtain a sight-weighted average, which is then recorded manually. If an automated data acquisition system (e.g., data logger, computer-based data recorder, strip chart recorder) is used to record the pressure measurements, obtain an integrated average of all pressure readings at the traverse point. Stack or duct gas temperature measurements shall be recorded, at a minimum, once at each traverse point. Record all necessary data as shown in the example field data form (Table 2G-3).
8.9.6 Alignment check. For manually operated probes, after the required yaw angle and differential pressure and temperature measurements have been made at each traverse point, verify (e.g., by visual inspection) that the yaw angle-measuring device has remained in proper alignment with the reference scribe line or with the rotational offset position established in section 8.3. If, for a particular traverse point, the angle-measuring device is found to be in proper alignment, proceed to the next traverse point; otherwise, re-align the device and repeat the angle and differential pressure measurements at the traverse point. In the course of a traverse, if a mark used to properly align the angle-measuring device (e.g., as described in section 18.1.1.1) cannot be located, re-establish the alignment mark before proceeding with the traverse.
8.10 Probe Plugging. Periodically check for plugging of the pressure ports by observing the responses on the pressure differential readouts. Plugging causes erratic results or sluggish responses. Rotate the probe to determine whether the readouts respond in the expected direction. If plugging is detected, correct the problem and repeat the affected measurements.
8.11 Static Pressure. Measure the static pressure in the stack or duct using the equipment described in section 6.7.
8.11.1 If a Type S probe is used for this measurement, position the probe at or between any traverse point(s) and rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading is obtained. Disconnect the tubing from one of the pressure ports; read and record the ΔP. For pressure devices with one-directional scales, if a deflection in the positive direction is noted with the negative side disconnected, then the static pressure is positive. Likewise, if a deflection in the positive direction is noted with the positive side disconnected, then the static pressure is negative.
8.11.2 If a 3-D probe is used for this measurement, position the probe at or between any traverse point(s) and rotate the probe until a null differential pressure reading is obtained at P2-P3. Rotate the probe 90°. Disconnect the P2 pressure side of the probe and read the pressure P1-Pbar and record as the static pressure. (Note: The spherical probe, specified in section 6.1.2 of Method 2F, is unable to provide this measurement and shall not be used to take static pressure measurements.)
8.12 Atmospheric Pressure. Determine the atmospheric pressure at the sampling elevation during each test run following the procedure described in section 2.5 of Method 2.
8.13 Molecular Weight. Determine the stack or duct gas dry molecular weight. For combustion processes or processes that emit essentially CO2, O2, CO, and N2, use Method 3 or 3A. For processes emitting essentially air, an analysis need not be conducted; use a dry molecular weight of 29.0. Other methods may be used, if approved by the Administrator.
8.14 Moisture. Determine the moisture content of the stack gas using Method 4 or equivalent.
8.15 Data Recording and Calculations. Record all required data on a form similar to Table 2G-3.
8.15.1 2-D probe calibration coefficient. When a Type S pitot tube is used in the field, the appropriate calibration coefficient as determined in section 10.6 shall be used to perform velocity calculations. For calibrated Type S pitot tubes, the A-side coefficient shall be used when the A-side of the tube faces the flow, and the B-side coefficient shall be used when the B-side faces the flow.
8.15.2 3-D calibration coefficient. When a 3-D probe is used to collect data with this method, follow the provisions for the calibration of 3-D probes in section 10.6 of Method 2F to obtain the appropriate velocity calibration coefficient (F2 as derived using Equation 2F-2 in Method 2F) corresponding to a pitch angle position of 0°.
8.15.3 Calculations. Calculate the yaw-adjusted velocity at each traverse point using the equations presented in section 12.2. Calculate the test run average stack gas velocity by finding the arithmetic average of the point velocity results in accordance with sections 12.3 and 12.4, and calculate the stack gas volumetric flow rate in accordance with section 12.5 or 12.6, as applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Quality Control Activities. In conjunction with the yaw angle determination and the pressure and temperature measurements specified in section 8.9, the following quality control checks should be performed.
9.1.1 Range of the differential pressure gauge. In accordance with the specifications in section 6.4, ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is being used for the range of ΔP values encountered. If it is necessary to change to a more sensitive gauge, replace the gauge with a gauge calibrated according to section 10.3.3, perform the leak check described in section 8.4 and the zero check described in section 8.5, and repeat the differential pressure and temperature readings at each traverse point.
9.1.2 Horizontal stability check. For horizontal traverses of a stack or duct, visually check that the probe shaft is maintained in a horizontal position prior to taking a pressure reading. Periodically, during a test run, the probe's horizontal stability should be verified by placing a carpenter's level, a digital inclinometer, or other angle-measuring device on the portion of the probe sheath that extends outside of the test port. A comparable check should be performed by automated systems.
10.0 Calibration
10.1 Wind Tunnel Qualification Checks. To qualify for use in calibrating probes, a wind tunnel shall have the design features specified in section 6.11 and satisfy the following qualification criteria. The velocity pressure cross-check in section 10.1.1 and axial flow verification in section 10.1.2 shall be performed before the initial use of the wind tunnel and repeated immediately after any alteration occurs in the wind tunnel's configuration, fans, interior surfaces, straightening vanes, controls, or other properties that could reasonably be expected to alter the flow pattern or velocity stability in the tunnel. The owner or operator of a wind tunnel used to calibrate probes according to this method shall maintain records documenting that the wind tunnel meets the requirements of sections 10.1.1 and 10.1.2 and shall provide these records to the Administrator upon request.
10.1.1 Velocity pressure cross-check. To verify that the wind tunnel produces the same velocity at the tested probe head as at the calibration pitot tube impact port, perform the following cross-check. Take three differential pressure measurements at the fixed calibration pitot tube location, using the calibration pitot tube specified in section 6.10, and take three measurements with the calibration pitot tube at the wind tunnel calibration location, as defined in section 3.21. Alternate the measurements between the two positions. Perform this procedure at the lowest and highest velocity settings at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2G-4. At each velocity setting, the average velocity pressure obtained at the wind tunnel calibration location shall be within ±2 percent or 2.5 mm H2O (0.01 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive, of the average velocity pressure obtained at the fixed calibration pitot tube location. This comparative check shall be performed at 2.5-cm (1-in.), or smaller, intervals across the full length, width, and depth (if applicable) of the wind tunnel calibration location. If the criteria are not met at every tested point, the wind tunnel calibration location must be redefined, so that acceptable results are obtained at every point. Include the results of the velocity pressure cross-check in the calibration data section of the field test report. (See section 16.1.4.)
10.1.2 Axial flow verification. The following procedures shall be performed to demonstrate that there is fully developed axial flow within the wind tunnel calibration location and at the calibration pitot tube location. Two options are available to conduct this check.
10.1.2.1 Using a calibrated 3-D probe. A probe that has been previously calibrated in a wind tunnel with documented axial flow (as defined in section 3.22) may be used to conduct this check. Insert the calibrated 3-D probe into the wind tunnel test section using the tested probe port. Following the procedures in sections 8.9 and 12.2 of Method 2F, determine the yaw and pitch angles at all the point(s) in the test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the points in the calibration location and the point where the calibration pitot tube will be located. Determine the yaw and pitch angles at each point. Repeat these measurements at the highest and lowest velocities at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2G-5. Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates unacceptable flow in the test section. Until the problem is corrected and acceptable flow is verified by repetition of this procedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibration of probes. Include the results of the axial flow verification in the calibration data section of the field test report. (See section 16.1.4.)
10.1.2.2 Using alternative probes. Axial flow verification may be performed using an uncalibrated prism-shaped 3-D probe (e.g., DA or DAT probe) or an uncalibrated wedge probe. (Figure 2G-8 illustrates a typical wedge probe.) This approach requires use of two ports: the tested probe port and a second port located 90° from the tested probe port. Each port shall provide access to all the points within the wind tunnel test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is conducted. The probe setup shall include establishing a reference yaw-null position on the probe sheath to serve as the location for installing the angle-measuring device. Physical design features of the DA, DAT, and wedge probes are relied on to determine the reference position. For the DA or DAT probe, this reference position can be determined by setting a digital inclinometer on the flat facet where the P1 pressure port is located and then identifying the rotational position on the probe sheath where a second angle-measuring device would give the same angle reading. The reference position on a wedge probe shaft can be determined either geometrically or by placing a digital inclinometer on each side of the wedge and rotating the probe until equivalent readings are obtained. With the latter approach, the reference position is the rotational position on the probe sheath where an angle-measuring device would give a reading of 0°. After installation of the angle-measuring device in the reference yaw-null position on the probe sheath, determine the yaw angle from the tested port. Repeat this measurement using the 90° offset port, which provides the pitch angle of flow. Determine the yaw and pitch angles at all the point(s) in the test section where the velocity pressure cross-check, as specified in section 10.1.1, is performed. This includes all the points in the wind tunnel calibration location and the point where the calibration pitot tube will be located. Perform this check at the highest and lowest velocities at which the probes will be calibrated. Record the values on a form similar to Table 2G-5. Each measured yaw and pitch angle shall be within ±3° of 0°. Exceeding the limits indicates unacceptable flow in the test section. Until the problem is corrected and acceptable flow is verified by repetition of this procedure, the wind tunnel shall not be used for calibration of probes. Include the results in the probe calibration report.
10.1.3 Wind tunnel audits.
10.1.3.1 Procedure. Upon the request of the Administrator, the owner or operator of a wind tunnel shall calibrate a 2-D audit probe in accordance with the procedures described in sections 10.3 through 10.6. The calibration shall be performed at two velocities that encompass the velocities typically used for this method at the facility. The resulting calibration data shall be submitted to the Agency in an audit test report. These results shall be compared by the Agency to reference calibrations of the audit probe at the same velocity settings obtained at two different wind tunnels.
10.1.3.2 Acceptance criterion. The audited tunnel's calibration coefficient is acceptable if it is within ±3 percent of the reference calibrations obtained at each velocity setting by one (or both) of the wind tunnels. If the acceptance criterion is not met at each calibration velocity setting, the audited wind tunnel shall not be used to calibrate probes for use under this method until the problems are resolved and acceptable results are obtained upon completion of a subsequent audit.
10.2 Probe Inspection.
10.2.1 Type S probe. Before each calibration of a Type S probe, verify that one leg of the tube is permanently marked A, and the other, B. Carefully examine the pitot tube from the top, side, and ends. Measure the angles (α1, α2, β1, and β2) and the dimensions (w and z) illustrated in Figures 2-2 and 2-3 in Method 2. Also measure the dimension A, as shown in the diagram in Table 2G-1, and the external tubing diameter (dimension Dt, Figure 2-2b in Method 2). For the purposes of this method, Dt shall be no less than 9.5 mm ( 3/8 in.). The base-to-opening plane distances PA and PB in Figure 2-3 of Method 2 shall be equal, and the dimension A in Table 2G-1 should be between 2.10Dt and 3.00Dt. Record the inspection findings and probe measurements on a form similar to Table CD2-1 of the “Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems: Volume III, Stationary Source-Specific Methods” (EPA/600/R-94/038c, September 1994). For reference, this form is reproduced herein as Table 2G-1. The pitot tube shall not be used under this method if it fails to meet the specifications in this section and the alignment specifications in section 6.1.1. All Type S probes used to collect data with this method shall be calibrated according to the procedures outlined in sections 10.3 through 10.6 below. During calibration, each Type S pitot tube shall be configured in the same manner as used, or planned to be used, during the field test, including all components in the probe assembly (e.g., thermocouple, probe sheath, sampling nozzle). Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration.
10.2.2 3-D probe. If a 3-D probe is used to collect data with this method, perform the pre-calibration inspection according to procedures in Method 2F, section 10.2.
10.3 Pre-Calibration Procedures. Prior to calibration, a scribe line shall have been placed on the probe in accordance with section 10.4. The yaw angle and velocity calibration procedures shall not begin until the pre-test requirements in sections 10.3.1 through 10.3.4 have been met.
10.3.1 Perform the horizontal straightness check described in section 8.2 on the probe assembly that will be calibrated in the wind tunnel.
10.3.2 Perform a leak check in accordance with section 8.4.
10.3.3 Except as noted in section 10.3.3.3, calibrate all differential pressure-measuring devices to be used in the probe calibrations, using the following procedures. At a minimum, calibrate these devices on each day that probe calibrations are performed.
10.3.3.1 Procedure. Before each wind tunnel use, all differential pressure-measuring devices shall be calibrated against the reference device specified in section 6.4.3 using a common pressure source. Perform the calibration at three reference pressures representing 30, 60, and 90 percent of the full-scale range of the pressure-measuring device being calibrated. For an inclined-vertical manometer, perform separate calibrations on the inclined and vertical portions of the measurement scale, considering each portion of the scale to be a separate full-scale range. [For example, for a manometer with a 0-to 2.5-cm H2O (0-to 1-in. H2O) inclined scale and a 2.5-to 12.7-cm H2O (1-to 5-in. H2O) vertical scale, calibrate the inclined portion at 7.6, 15.2, and 22.9 mm H2O (0.3, 0.6, and 0.9 in. H2O), and calibrate the vertical portion at 3.8, 7.6, and 11.4 cm H2O (1.5, 3.0, and 4.5 in. H2O).] Alternatively, for the vertical portion of the scale, use three evenly spaced reference pressures, one of which is equal to or higher than the highest differential pressure expected in field applications.
10.3.3.2 Acceptance criteria. At each pressure setting, the two pressure readings made using the reference device and the pressure-measuring device being calibrated shall agree to within ±2 percent of full scale of the device being calibrated or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. For an inclined-vertical manometer, these requirements shall be met separately using the respective full-scale upper limits of the inclined and vertical portions of the scale. Differential pressure-measuring devices not meeting the ±2 percent of full scale or 0.5 mm H2O (0.02 in. H2O) calibration requirement shall not be used.
10.3.3.3 Exceptions. Any precision manometer that meets the specifications for a reference device in section 6.4.3 and that is not used for field testing does not require calibration, but must be leveled and zeroed before each wind tunnel use. Any pressure device used exclusively for yaw nulling does not require calibration, but shall be checked for responsiveness to rotation of the probe prior to each wind tunnel use.
10.3.4 Calibrate digital inclinometers on each day of wind tunnel or field testing (prior to beginning testing) using the following procedures. Calibrate the inclinometer according to the manufacturer's calibration procedures. In addition, use a triangular block (illustrated in Figure 2G-9) with a known angle θ, independently determined using a protractor or equivalent device, between two adjacent sides to verify the inclinometer readings. (Note: If other angle-measuring devices meeting the provisions of section 6.2.3 are used in place of a digital inclinometer, comparable calibration procedures shall be performed on such devices.) Secure the triangular block in a fixed position. Place the inclinometer on one side of the block (side A) to measure the angle of inclination (R1). Repeat this measurement on the adjacent side of the block (side B) using the inclinometer to obtain a second angle reading (R2). The difference of the sum of the two readings from 180° (i.e., 180°-R1-R2) shall be within ±2° of the known angle, θ.
10.4 Placement of Reference Scribe Line. Prior to the first calibration of a probe, a line shall be permanently inscribed on the main probe sheath to serve as a reference mark for determining yaw angles. Annex C in section 18 of this method gives a guideline for placement of the reference scribe line.
10.4.1 This reference scribe line shall meet the specifications in sections 6.1.5.1 and 6.1.5.3 of this method. To verify that the alignment specification in section 6.1.5.3 is met, secure the probe in a horizontal position and measure the rotational angle of each scribe line and scribe line segment using an angle-measuring device that meets the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3. For any scribe line that is longer than 30.5 cm (12 in.), check the line's rotational position at 30.5-cm (12-in.) intervals. For each line segment that is 12 in. or less in length, check the rotational position at the two endpoints of the segment. To meet the alignment specification in section 6.1.5.3, the minimum and maximum of all of the rotational angles that are measured along the full length of main probe must not differ by more than 2°. (Note: A short reference scribe line segment [e.g., 15.2 cm (6 in.) or less in length] meeting the alignment specifications in section 6.1.5.3 is fully acceptable under this method. See section 18.1.1.1 of Annex A for an example of a probe marking procedure, suitable for use with a short reference scribe line.)
10.4.2 The scribe line should be placed on the probe first and then its offset from the yaw-null position established (as specified in section 10.5). The rotational position of the reference scribe line relative to the yaw-null position of the probe, as determined by the yaw angle calibration procedure in section 10.5, is the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. The reference scribe line rotational offset shall be recorded and retained as part of the probe's calibration record.
10.4.3 Scribe line for automated probes. A scribe line may not be necessary for an automated probe system if a reference rotational position of the probe is built into the probe system design. For such systems, a “flat” (or comparable, clearly identifiable physical characteristic) should be provided on the probe casing or flange plate to ensure that the reference position of the probe assembly remains in a vertical or horizontal position. The rotational offset of the flat (or comparable, clearly identifiable physical characteristic) needed to orient the reference position of the probe assembly shall be recorded and maintained as part of the automated probe system's specifications.
10.5 Yaw Angle Calibration Procedure. For each probe used to measure yaw angles with this method, a calibration procedure shall be performed in a wind tunnel meeting the specifications in section 10.1 to determine the rotational position of the reference scribe line relative to the probe's yaw-null position. This procedure shall be performed on the main probe with all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field [such as thermocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs), or sampling nozzles] that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration. At a minimum, this procedure shall include the following steps.
10.5.1 Align and lock the angle-measuring device on the reference scribe line. If a marking procedure (such as described in section 18.1.1.1) is used, align the angle-measuring device on a mark within ±1° of the rotational position of the reference scribe line. Lock the angle-measuring device onto the probe sheath at this position.
10.5.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device used for yaw nulling.
10.5.3 Insert the probe assembly into the wind tunnel through the entry port, positioning the probe's impact port at the calibration location. Check the responsiveness of the pressure-measurement device to probe rotation, taking corrective action if the response is unacceptable.
10.5.4 Ensure that the probe is in a horizontal position, using a carpenter's level.
10.5.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise or counterclockwise until a yaw null [zero ΔP for a Type S probe or zero (P2-P3) for a 3-D probe] is obtained. If using a Type S probe with an attached thermocouple, the direction of the probe rotation shall be such that the thermocouple is located downstream of the probe pressure ports at the yaw-null position.
10.5.6 Use the reading displayed by the angle-measuring device at the yaw-null position to determine the magnitude of the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO, as defined in section 3.15. Annex D in section 18 of this method gives a recommended procedure for determining the magnitude of RSLO with a digital inclinometer and a second procedure for determining the magnitude of RSLO with a protractor wheel and pointer device. Table 2G-6 gives an example data form and Table 2G-7 is a look-up table with the recommended procedure. Procedures other than those recommended in Annex D in section 18 may be used, if they can determine RSLO to within 1° and are explained in detail in the field test report. The algebraic sign of RSLO will either be positive if the rotational position of the reference scribe line (as viewed from the “tail” end of the probe) is clockwise, or negative, if counterclockwise with respect to the probe's yaw-null position. (This is illustrated in Figure 2G-10.)
10.5.7 The steps in sections 10.5.3 through 10.5.6 shall be performed twice at each of the velocities at which the probe will be calibrated (in accordance with section 10.6). Record the values of RSLO.
10.5.8 The average of all of the RSLO values shall be documented as the reference scribe line rotational offset for the probe.
10.5.9 Use of reference scribe line offset. The reference scribe line rotational offset shall be used to determine the yaw angle of flow in accordance with section 8.9.4.
10.6 Velocity Calibration Procedure. When a 3-D probe is used under this method, follow the provisions for the calibration of 3-D probes in section 10.6 of Method 2F to obtain the necessary velocity calibration coefficients (F2 as derived using Equation 2F-2 in Method 2F) corresponding to a pitch angle position of 0°. The following procedure applies to Type S probes. This procedure shall be performed on the main probe and all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field (e.g., thermocouples, RTDs, sampling nozzles) that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration. (Note: If a sampling nozzle is part of the assembly, two additional requirements must be satisfied before proceeding. The distance between the nozzle and the pitot tube shall meet the minimum spacing requirement prescribed in Method 2, and a wind tunnel demonstration shall be performed that shows the probe's ability to yaw null is not impaired when the nozzle is drawing sample.) To obtain velocity calibration coefficient(s) for the tested probe, proceed as follows.
10.6.1 Calibration velocities. The tester may calibrate the probe at two nominal wind tunnel velocity settings of 18.3 m/sec and 27.4 m/sec (60 ft/sec and 90 ft/sec) and average the results of these calibrations, as described in sections 10.6.12 through 10.6.14, in order to generate the calibration coefficient, Cp. If this option is selected, this calibration coefficient may be used for all field applications where the velocities are 9.1 m/sec (30 ft/sec) or greater. Alternatively, the tester may customize the probe calibration for a particular field test application (or for a series of applications), based on the expected average velocity(ies) at the test site(s). If this option is selected, generate the calibration coefficients by calibrating the probe at two nominal wind tunnel velocity settings, one of which is less than or equal to and the other greater than or equal to the expected average velocity(ies) for the field application(s), and average the results as described in sections 10.6.12 through 10.6.14. Whichever calibration option is selected, the probe calibration coefficient(s) obtained at the two nominal calibration velocities shall meet the conditions specified in sections 10.6.12 through 10.6.14.
10.6.2 Connect the tested probe and calibration pitot tube to their respective pressure-measuring devices. Zero the pressure-measuring devices. Inspect and leak-check all pitot lines; repair or replace them, if necessary. Turn on the fan, and allow the wind tunnel air flow to stabilize at the first of the selected nominal velocity settings.
10.6.3 Position the calibration pitot tube at its measurement location (determined as outlined in section 6.11.4.3), and align the tube so that its tip is pointed directly into the flow. Ensure that the entry port surrounding the tube is properly sealed. The calibration pitot tube may either remain in the wind tunnel throughout the calibration, or be removed from the wind tunnel while measurements are taken with the probe being calibrated.
10.6.4 Check the zero setting of each pressure-measuring device.
10.6.5 Insert the tested probe into the wind tunnel and align it so that the designated pressure port (e.g., either the A-side or B-side of a Type S probe) is pointed directly into the flow and is positioned within the wind tunnel calibration location (as defined in section 3.21). Secure the probe at the 0° pitch angle position. Ensure that the entry port surrounding the probe is properly sealed.
10.6.6 Read the differential pressure from the calibration pitot tube (ΔPstd), and record its value. Read the barometric pressure to within ±2.5 mm Hg (±0.1 in. Hg) and the temperature in the wind tunnel to within 0.6 °C (1 °F). Record these values on a data form similar to Table 2G-8. Record the rotational speed of the fan or indicator of wind tunnel velocity control (damper setting, variac rheostat, etc.) and make no adjustment to fan speed or wind tunnel velocity control between this observation and the Type S probe reading.
10.6.7 After the tested probe's differential pressure gauges have had sufficient time to stabilize, yaw null the probe (and then rotate it back 90° for Type S probes), then obtain the differential pressure reading (ΔP). Record the yaw angle and differential pressure readings.
10.6.8 Take paired differential pressure measurements with the calibration pitot tube and tested probe (according to sections 10.6.6 and 10.6.7). The paired measurements in each replicate can be made either simultaneously (i.e., with both probes in the wind tunnel) or by alternating the measurements of the two probes (i.e., with only one probe at a time in the wind tunnel). Adjustments made to the fan speed or other changes to the system designed to change the air flow velocity of the wind tunnel between observation of the calibration pitot tube (ΔPstd) and the Type S pitot tube invalidates the reading and the observation must be repeated.
10.6.9 Repeat the steps in sections 10.6.6 through 10.6.8 at the same nominal velocity setting until three pairs of ΔP readings have been obtained from the calibration pitot tube and the tested probe.
10.6.10 Repeat the steps in sections 10.6.6 through 10.6.9 above for the A-side and B-side of the Type S pitot tube. For a probe assembly constructed such that its pitot tube is always used in the same orientation, only one side of the pitot tube need be calibrated (the side that will face the flow). However, the pitot tube must still meet the alignment and dimension specifications in section 6.1.1 and must have an average deviation (σ) value of 0.01 or less as provided in section 10.6.12.4.
10.6.11 Repeat the calibration procedures in sections 10.6.6 through 10.6.10 at the second selected nominal wind tunnel velocity setting.
10.6.12 Perform the following calculations separately on the A-side and B-side values.
10.6.12.1 Calculate a Cp value for each of the three replicates performed at the lower velocity setting where the calibrations were performed using Equation 2-2 in section 4.1.4 of Method 2.
10.6.12.2 Calculate the arithmetic average, Cp(avg-low), of the three Cp values.
10.6.12.3 Calculate the deviation of each of the three individual values of Cp from the A-side average Cp(avg-low) value using Equation 2-3 in Method 2.
10.6.12.4 Calculate the average deviation (σ) of the three individual Cp values from Cp(avg-low) using Equation 2-4 in Method 2. Use the Type S pitot tube only if the values of σ (side A) and σ (side B) are less than or equal to 0.01. If both A-side and B-side calibration coefficients are calculated, the absolute value of the difference between Cp(avg-low) (side A) and Cp(avg-low) (side B) must not exceed 0.01.
10.6.13 Repeat the calculations in section 10.6.12 using the data obtained at the higher velocity setting to derive the arithmetic Cp values at the higher velocity setting, Cp(avg-high), and to determine whether the conditions in 10.6.12.4 are met by both the A-side and B-side calibrations at this velocity setting.
10.6.14 Use equation 2G-1 to calculate the percent difference of the averaged Cp values at the two calibration velocities.
The percent difference between the averaged Cp values shall not exceed ±3 percent. If the specification is met, average the A-side values of Cp(avg-low) and Cp(avg-high) to produce a single A-side calibration coefficient, Cp. Repeat for the B-side values if calibrations were performed on that side of the pitot. If the specification is not met, make necessary adjustments in the selected velocity settings and repeat the calibration procedure until acceptable results are obtained.
10.6.15 If the two nominal velocities used in the calibration were 18.3 and 27.4 m/sec (60 and 90 ft/sec), the average Cp from section 10.6.14 is applicable to all velocities 9.1 m/sec (30 ft/sec) or greater. If two other nominal velocities were used in the calibration, the resulting average Cp value shall be applicable only in situations where the velocity calculated using the calibration coefficient is neither less than the lower nominal velocity nor greater than the higher nominal velocity.
10.7 Recalibration. Recalibrate the probe using the procedures in section 10 either within 12 months of its first field use after its most recent calibration or after 10 field tests (as defined in section 3.3), whichever occurs later. In addition, whenever there is visible damage to the probe head, the probe shall be recalibrated before it is used again.
10.8 Calibration of pressure-measuring devices used in the field. Before its initial use in a field test, calibrate each pressure-measuring device (except those used exclusively for yaw nulling) using the three-point calibration procedure described in section 10.3.3. The device shall be recalibrated according to the procedure in section 10.3.3 no later than 90 days after its first field use following its most recent calibration. At the discretion of the tester, more frequent calibrations (e.g., after a field test) may be performed. No adjustments, other than adjustments to the zero setting, shall be made to the device between calibrations.
10.8.1 Post-test calibration check. A single-point calibration check shall be performed on each pressure-measuring device after completion of each field test. At the discretion of the tester, more frequent single-point calibration checks (e.g., after one or more field test runs) may be performed. It is recommended that the post-test check be performed before leaving the field test site. The check shall be performed at a pressure between 50 and 90 percent of full scale by taking a common pressure reading with the tested probe and a reference pressure-measuring device (as described in section 6.4.4) or by challenging the tested device with a reference pressure source (as described in section 6.4.4) or by performing an equivalent check using a reference device approved by the Administrator.
10.8.2 Acceptance criterion. At the selected pressure setting, the pressure readings made using the reference device and the tested device shall agree to within ±3 percent of full scale of the tested device or 0.8 mm H2O (0.03 in. H2O), whichever is less restrictive. If this specification is met, the test data collected during the field test are valid. If the specification is not met, all test data collected since the last successful calibration or calibration check are invalid and shall be repeated using a pressure-measuring device with a current, valid calibration. Any device that fails the calibration check shall not be used in a field test until a successful recalibration is performed according to the procedures in section 10.3.3.
10.9 Temperature Gauges. Same as Method 2, section 4.3. The alternative thermocouple calibration procedures outlined in Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Approved Alternative Method (ALT-011) “Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibration Procedure” may be performed. Temperature gauges shall be calibrated no more than 30 days prior to the start of a field test or series of field tests and recalibrated no more than 30 days after completion of a field test or series of field tests.
10.10 Barometer. Same as Method 2, section 4.4. The barometer shall be calibrated no more than 30 days prior to the start of a field test or series of field tests.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
These calculations use the measured yaw angle and the differential pressure and temperature measurements at individual traverse points to derive the near-axial flue gas velocity (va(i)) at each of those points. The near-axial velocity values at all traverse points that comprise a full stack or duct traverse are then averaged to obtain the average near-axial stack or duct gas velocity (va(avg)).
12.1 Nomenclature
A = Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at the test port location, m 2 (ft 2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 or alternative), proportion by volume.
Cp = Pitot tube calibration coefficient, dimensionless.
F2(i) = 3-D probe velocity coefficient at 0 pitch, applicable at traverse point i.
Kp = Pitot tube constant,
for the metric system, and
for the English system.
Md = Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, dry basis (see section 8.13), g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Ms = Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, wet basis, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at velocity measurement site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pg = Stack or duct static pressure, mm H2O (in. H2O).
Ps = Absolute stack or duct pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg),
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
13.6 = Conversion from mm H2O (in. H2O) to mm Hg (in. Hg).
Qsd = Average dry-basis volumetric stack or duct gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Qsw = Average wet-basis volumetric stack or duct gas flow rate corrected to standard conditions, wscm/hr (wscf/hr).
ts(i) = Stack or duct temperature, °C (°F), at traverse point i.
Ts(i) = Absolute stack or duct temperature, °K (°R), at traverse point i.
for the metric system, and
for the English system.
Ts(avg) = Average absolute stack or duct gas temperature across all traverse points.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
va(i) = Measured stack or duct gas impact velocity, m/sec (ft/sec), at traverse point i.
va(avg) = Average near-axial stack or duct gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec) across all traverse points.
ΔPi = Velocity head (differential pressure) of stack or duct gas, mm H2O (in. H2O), applicable at traverse point i.
(P1-P2) = Velocity head (differential pressure) of stack or duct gas measured by a 3-D probe, mm H2O (in. H2O), applicable at traverse point i.
3,600 = Conversion factor, sec/hr.
18.0 = Molecular weight of water, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
θy(i) = Yaw angle of the flow velocity vector, at traverse point i.
n = Number of traverse points.
12.2 Traverse Point Velocity Calculations. Perform the following calculations from the measurements obtained at each traverse point.
12.2.1 Selection of calibration coefficient. Select the calibration coefficient as described in section 10.6.1.
12.2.2 Near-axial traverse point velocity. When using a Type S probe, use the following equation to calculate the traverse point near-axial velocity (va(i)) from the differential pressure (ΔPi), yaw angle (θy(i)), absolute stack or duct standard temperature (Ts(i)) measured at traverse point i, the absolute stack or duct pressure (Ps), and molecular weight (Ms).
Use the following equation when using a 3-D probe.
12.2.3 Handling multiple measurements at a traverse point. For pressure or temperature devices that take multiple measurements at a traverse point, the multiple measurements (or where applicable, their square roots) may first be averaged and the resulting average values used in the equations above. Alternatively, the individual measurements may be used in the equations above and the resulting calculated values may then be averaged to obtain a single traverse point value. With either approach, all of the individual measurements recorded at a traverse point must be used in calculating the applicable traverse point value.
12.3 Average Near-Axial Velocity in Stack or Duct. Use the reported traverse point near-axial velocity in the following equation.
12.4 Acceptability of Results. The acceptability provisions in section 12.4 of Method 2F apply to 3-D probes used under Method 2G. The following provisions apply to Type S probes. For Type S probes, the test results are acceptable and the calculated value of va(avg) may be reported as the average near-axial velocity for the test run if the conditions in either section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2 are met.
12.4.1 The average calibration coefficient Cp used in Equation 2G-6 was generated at nominal velocities of 18.3 and 27.4 m/sec (60 and 90 ft/sec) and the value of va(avg) calculated using Equation 2G-8 is greater than or equal to 9.1 m/sec (30 ft/sec).
12.4.2 The average calibration coefficient Cp used in Equation 2G-6 was generated at nominal velocities other than 18.3 or 27.4 m/sec (60 or 90 ft/sec) and the value of va(avg) calculated using Equation 2G-8 is greater than or equal to the lower nominal velocity and less than or equal to the higher nominal velocity used to derive the average Cp.
12.4.3 If the conditions in neither section 12.4.1 nor section 12.4.2 are met, the test results obtained from Equation 2G-8 are not acceptable, and the steps in sections 12.2 and 12.3 must be repeated using an average calibration coefficient Cp that satisfies the conditions in section 12.4.1 or 12.4.2.
12.5 Average Gas Volumetric Flow Rate in Stack or Duct (Wet Basis). Use the following equation to compute the average volumetric flow rate on a wet basis.
12.6 Average Gas Volumetric Flow Rate in Stack or Duct (Dry Basis). Use the following equation to compute the average volumetric flow rate on a dry basis.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Reporting.
16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports shall be submitted to the Agency according to applicable regulatory requirements. Field test reports should, at a minimum, include the following elements.
16.1.1 Description of the source. This should include the name and location of the test site, descriptions of the process tested, a description of the combustion source, an accurate diagram of stack or duct cross-sectional area at the test site showing the dimensions of the stack or duct, the location of the test ports, and traverse point locations and identification numbers or codes. It should also include a description and diagram of the stack or duct layout, showing the distance of the test location from the nearest upstream and downstream disturbances and all structural elements (including breachings, baffles, fans, straighteners, etc.) affecting the flow pattern. If the source and test location descriptions have been previously submitted to the Agency in a document (e.g., a monitoring plan or test plan), referencing the document in lieu of including this information in the field test report is acceptable.
16.1.2 Field test procedures. These should include a description of test equipment and test procedures. Testing conventions, such as traverse point numbering and measurement sequence (e.g., sampling from center to wall, or wall to center), should be clearly stated. Test port identification and directional reference for each test port should be included on the appropriate field test data sheets.
16.1.3 Field test data.
16.1.3.1 Summary of results. This summary should include the dates and times of testing, and the average near-axial gas velocity and the average flue gas volumetric flow results for each run and tested condition.
16.1.3.2 Test data. The following values for each traverse point should be recorded and reported:
(a) Differential pressure at traverse point i (ΔPi)
(b) Stack or duct temperature at traverse point i (ts(i))
(c) Absolute stack or duct temperature at traverse point i (Ts(i))
(d) Yaw angle at traverse point i (θy(i))
(e) Stack gas near-axial velocity at traverse point i (va(i))
16.1.3.3 The following values should be reported once per run:
(a) Water vapor in the gas stream (from Method 4 or alternative), proportion by volume (Bws), measured at the frequency specified in the applicable regulation
(b) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, dry basis (Md)
(c) Molecular weight of stack or duct gas, wet basis (Ms)
(d) Stack or duct static pressure (Pg)
(e) Absolute stack or duct pressure (Ps)
(f) Carbon dioxide concentration in the flue gas, dry basis (%d CO2)
(g) Oxygen concentration in the flue gas, dry basis (%d O2)
(h) Average near-axial stack or duct gas velocity (va(avg)) across all traverse points
(i) Gas volumetric flow rate corrected to standard conditions, dry or wet basis as required by the applicable regulation (Qsd or Qsw)
16.1.3.4 The following should be reported once per complete set of test runs:
(a) Cross-sectional area of stack or duct at the test location (A)
(b) Pitot tube calibration coefficient (Cp)
(c) Measurement system response time (sec)
(d) Barometric pressure at measurement site (Pbar)
16.1.4 Calibration data. The field test report should include calibration data for all probes and test equipment used in the field test. At a minimum, the probe calibration data reported to the Agency should include the following:
(a) Date of calibration
(b) Probe type
(c) Probe identification number(s) or code(s)
(d) Probe inspection sheets
(e) Pressure measurements and calculations used to obtain calibration coefficients in accordance with section 10.6 of this method
(f) Description and diagram of wind tunnel used for the calibration, including dimensions of cross-sectional area and position and size of the test section
(g) Documentation of wind tunnel qualification tests performed in accordance with section 10.1 of this method
16.1.5 Quality assurance. Specific quality assurance and quality control procedures used during the test should be described.
17.0 Bibliography.
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.
(2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube) .
(3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional probes.
(4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2H—Determination of stack gas velocity taking into account velocity decay near the stack wall.
(5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3—Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, excess air, and dry molecular weight.
(6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations in emissions from stationary sources (instrumental analyzer procedure).
(7) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4—Determination of moisture content in stack gases.
(8) Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Approved Alternative Method (ALT-011) “Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibration Procedure.”
(9) Electric Power Research Institute, Interim Report EPRI TR-106698, “Flue Gas Flow Rate Measurement Errors,” June 1996.
(10) Electric Power Research Institute, Final Report EPRI TR-108110, “Evaluation of Heat Rate Discrepancy from Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems,” August 1997.
(11) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, Final Report, “Velocity Probe Tests in Non-axial Flow Fields,” November 1998, Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
(12) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, “Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and T-DAT Probes,” February 24, 1999, Technical Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W-1193-NALX.
(13) Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Report WBWT-TR-1317, “Calibration of Eight Wind Speed Probes Over a Reynolds Number Range of 46,000 to 725,000 Per Foot, Text and Summary Plots,” Plus appendices, October 15, 1998, Prepared for The Cadmus Group, Inc.
(14) National Institute of Standards and Technology, Special Publication 250, “NIST Calibration Services Users Guide 1991,” Revised October 1991, U.S. Department of Commerce, p. 2.
(15) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(16) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed In-strumentation, Five Autoprobes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(17) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(18) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT Probes, “ Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG #DW13938432-01-0.
(19) Norfleet, S.K., “An Evaluation of Wall Effects on Stack Flow Velocities and Related Overestimation Bias in EPA's Stack Flow Reference Methods,” EPRI CEMS User's Group Meeting, New Orleans, Louisiana, May 13-15, 1998.
(20) Page, J.J., E.A. Potts, and R.T. Shigehara, “3-D Pitot Tube Calibration Study,” EPA Contract No. 68D10009, Work Assignment No. I-121, March 11, 1993.
(21) Shigehara, R.T., W.F. Todd, and W.S. Smith, “Significance of Errors in Stack Sampling Measurements,” Presented at the Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, Missouri, June 1419, 1970.
(22) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Findings Report,” EPA/430-R-99-009.
(23) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-015a.
(24) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hubbard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-017a.
(25) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co., G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-018a.
(26) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,” EPA/430-R-97-013.
18.0 Annexes
Annex A, C, and D describe recommended procedures for meeting certain provisions in sections 8.3, 10.4, and 10.5 of this method. Annex B describes procedures to be followed when using the protractor wheel and pointer assembly to measure yaw angles, as provided under section 8.9.1.
18.1 Annex A—Rotational Position Check. The following are recommended procedures that may be used to satisfy the rotational position check requirements of section 8.3 of this method and to determine the angle-measuring device rotational offset (RADO).
18.1.1 Rotational position check with probe outside stack. Where physical constraints at the sampling location allow full assembly of the probe outside the stack and insertion into the test port, the following procedures should be performed before the start of testing. Two angle-measuring devices that meet the specifications in section 6.2.1 or 6.2.3 are required for the rotational position check. An angle measuring device whose position can be independently adjusted (e.g., by means of a set screw) after being locked into position on the probe sheath shall not be used for this check unless the independent adjustment is set so that the device performs exactly like a device without the capability for independent adjustment. That is, when aligned on the probe such a device must give the same reading as a device that does not have the capability of being independently adjusted. With the fully assembled probe (including probe shaft extensions, if any) secured in a horizontal position, affix one yaw angle-measuring device to the probe sheath and lock it into position on the reference scribe line specified in section 6.1.5.1. Position the second angle-measuring device using the procedure in section 18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2.
18.1.1.1 Marking procedure. The procedures in this section should be performed at each location on the fully assembled probe where the yaw angle-measuring device will be mounted during the velocity traverse. Place the second yaw angle-measuring device on the main probe sheath (or extension) at the position where a yaw angle will be measured during the velocity traverse. Adjust the position of the second angle-measuring device until it indicates the same angle (±1°) as the reference device, and affix the second device to the probe sheath (or extension). Record the angles indicated by the two angle-measuring devices on a form similar to table 2G-2. In this position, the second angle-measuring device is considered to be properly positioned for yaw angle measurement. Make a mark, no wider than 1.6 mm ( 1/16 in.), on the probe sheath (or extension), such that the yaw angle-measuring device can be re-affixed at this same properly aligned position during the velocity traverse.
18.1.1.2 Procedure for probe extensions with scribe lines. If, during a velocity traverse the angle-measuring device will be affixed to a probe extension having a scribe line as specified in section 6.1.5.2, the following procedure may be used to align the extension's scribe line with the reference scribe line instead of marking the extension as described in section 18.1.1.1. Attach the probe extension to the main probe. Align and lock the second angle-measuring device on the probe extension's scribe line. Then, rotate the extension until both measuring devices indicate the same angle (±1°). Lock the extension at this rotational position. Record the angles indicated by the two angle-measuring devices on a form similar to table 2G-2. An angle-measuring device may be aligned at any position on this scribe line during the velocity traverse, if the scribe line meets the alignment specification in section 6.1.5.3.
18.1.1.3 Post-test rotational position check. If the fully assembled probe includes one or more extensions, the following check should be performed immediately after the completion of a velocity traverse. At the discretion of the tester, additional checks may be conducted after completion of testing at any sample port. Without altering the alignment of any of the components of the probe assembly used in the velocity traverse, secure the fully assembled probe in a horizontal position. Affix an angle-measuring device at the reference scribe line specified in section 6.1.5.1. Use the other angle-measuring device to check the angle at each location where the device was checked prior to testing. Record the readings from the two angle-measuring devices.
18.1.2 Rotational position check with probe in stack. This section applies only to probes that, due to physical constraints, cannot be inserted into the test port as fully assembled with all necessary extensions needed to reach the inner-most traverse point(s).
18.1.2.1 Perform the out-of-stack procedure in section 18.1.1 on the main probe and any attached extensions that will be initially inserted into the test port.
18.1.2.2 Use the following procedures to perform additional rotational position check(s) with the probe in the stack, each time a probe extension is added. Two angle-measuring devices are required. The first of these is the device that was used to measure yaw angles at the preceding traverse point, left in its properly aligned measurement position. The second angle-measuring device is positioned on the added probe extension. Use the applicable procedures in section 18.1.1.1 or 18.1.1.2 to align, adjust, lock, and mark (if necessary) the position of the second angle-measuring device to within ±1° of the first device. Record the readings of the two devices on a form similar to Table 2G-2.
18.1.2.3 The procedure in section 18.1.2.2 should be performed at the first port where measurements are taken. The procedure should be repeated each time a probe extension is re-attached at a subsequent port, unless the probe extensions are designed to be locked into a mechanically fixed rotational position (e.g., through use of interlocking grooves), which can be reproduced from port to port as specified in section 8.3.5.2.
18.2 Annex B—Angle Measurement Protocol for Protractor Wheel and Pointer Device. The following procedure shall be used when a protractor wheel and pointer assembly, such as the one described in section 6.2.2 and illustrated in Figure 2G-5 is used to measure the yaw angle of flow. With each move to a new traverse point, unlock, re-align, and re-lock the probe, angle-pointer collar, and protractor wheel to each other. At each such move, particular attention is required to ensure that the scribe line on the angle pointer collar is either aligned with the reference scribe line on the main probe sheath or is at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. The procedure consists of the following steps:
18.2.1 Affix a protractor wheel to the entry port for the test probe in the stack or duct.
18.2.2 Orient the protractor wheel so that the 0° mark corresponds to the longitudinal axis of the stack or duct. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the specifications in section 6.2.1 to locate the 0° orientation. For ports on the top or bottom of horizontal ducts, identify the longitudinal axis at each test port and permanently mark the duct to indicate the 0° orientation. Once the protractor wheel is properly aligned, lock it into position on the test port.
18.2.3 Move the pointer assembly along the probe sheath to the position needed to take measurements at the first traverse point. Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line or at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the pointer device onto the probe sheath. Insert the probe into the entry port to the depth needed to take measurements at the first traverse point.
18.2.4 Perform the yaw angle determination as specified in sections 8.9.3 and 8.9.4 and record the angle as shown by the pointer on the protractor wheel. Then, take velocity pressure and temperature measurements in accordance with the procedure in section 8.9.5. Perform the alignment check described in section 8.9.6.
18.2.5 After taking velocity pressure measurements at that traverse point, unlock the probe from the collar and slide the probe through the collar to the depth needed to reach the next traverse point.
18.2.6 Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line on the main probe or at the rotational offset position established under section 8.3.1. Lock the collar onto the probe.
18.2.7 Repeat the steps in sections 18.2.4 through 18.2.6 at the remaining traverse points accessed from the current stack or duct entry port.
18.2.8 After completing the measurement at the last traverse point accessed from a port, verify that the orientation of the protractor wheel on the test port has not changed over the course of the traverse at that port. For stacks, vertical ducts, or ports on the side of horizontal ducts, use a digital inclinometer meeting the specifications in section 6.2.1 to check the rotational position of the 0° mark on the protractor wheel. For ports on the top or bottom of horizontal ducts, observe the alignment of the angle wheel 0° mark relative to the permanent 0° mark on the duct at that test port. If these observed comparisons exceed ±2° of 0°, all angle and pressure measurements taken at that port since the protractor wheel was last locked into position on the port shall be repeated.
18.2.9 Move to the next stack or duct entry port and repeat the steps in sections 18.2.1 through 18.2.8.
18.3 Annex C—Guideline for Reference Scribe Line Placement. Use of the following guideline is recommended to satisfy the requirements of section 10.4 of this method. The rotational position of the reference scribe line should be either 90° or 180° from the probe's impact pressure port. For Type-S probes, place separate scribe lines, on opposite sides of the probe sheath, if both the A and B sides of the pitot tube are to be used for yaw angle measurements.
18.4 Annex D—Determination of Reference Scribe Line Rotational Offset. The following procedures are recommended for determining the magnitude and sign of a probe's reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. Separate procedures are provided for two types of angle-measuring devices: digital inclinometers and protractor wheel and pointer assemblies.
18.4.1 Perform the following procedures on the main probe with all devices that will be attached to the main probe in the field [such as thermocouples, resistance temperature detectors (RTDs), or sampling nozzles] that may affect the flow around the probe head. Probe shaft extensions that do not affect flow around the probe head need not be attached during calibration.
18.4.2 The procedures below assume that the wind tunnel duct used for probe calibration is horizontal and that the flow in the calibration wind tunnel is axial as determined by the axial flow verification check described in section 10.1.2. Angle-measuring devices are assumed to display angles in alternating 0° to 90° and 90° to 0° intervals. If angle-measuring devices with other readout conventions are used or if other calibration wind tunnel duct configurations are used, make the appropriate calculational corrections. For Type-S probes, calibrate the A-side and B-sides separately, using the appropriate scribe line (see section 18.3, above), if both the A and B sides of the pitot tube are to be used for yaw angle determinations.
18.4.2.1 Position the angle-measuring device in accordance with one of the following procedures.
18.4.2.1.1 If using a digital inclinometer, affix the calibrated digital inclinometer to the probe. If the digital inclinometer can be independently adjusted after being locked into position on the probe sheath (e.g., by means of a set screw), the independent adjustment must be set so that the device performs exactly like a device without the capability for independent adjustment. That is, when aligned on the probe the device must give the same readings as a device that does not have the capability of being independently adjusted. Either align it directly on the reference scribe line or on a mark aligned with the scribe line determined according to the procedures in section 18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the digital inclinometer onto the probe sheath.
18.4.2.1.2 If using a protractor wheel and pointer device, orient the protractor wheel on the test port so that the 0° mark is aligned with the longitudinal axis of the wind tunnel duct. Maintaining this alignment, lock the wheel into place on the wind tunnel test port. Align the scribe line on the pointer collar with the reference scribe line or with a mark aligned with the reference scribe line, as determined under section 18.1.1.1. Maintaining this rotational alignment, lock the pointer device onto the probe sheath.
18.4.2.2 Zero the pressure-measuring device used for yaw nulling.
18.4.2.3 Insert the probe assembly into the wind tunnel through the entry port, positioning the probe's impact port at the calibration location. Check the responsiveness of the pressure-measuring device to probe rotation, taking corrective action if the response is unacceptable.
18.4.2.4 Ensure that the probe is in a horizontal position using a carpenter's level.
18.4.2.5 Rotate the probe either clockwise or counterclockwise until a yaw null [zero ΔP for a Type S probe or zero (P2-P3) for a 3-D probe] is obtained. If using a Type S probe with an attached thermocouple, the direction of the probe rotation shall be such that the thermocouple is located downstream of the probe pressure ports at the yaw-null position.
18.4.2.6 Read and record the value of θnull, the angle indicated by the angle-measuring device at the yaw-null position. Record the angle reading on a form similar to Table 2G-6. Do not associate an algebraic sign with this reading.
18.4.2.7 Determine the magnitude and algebraic sign of the reference scribe line rotational offset, RSLO. The magnitude of RSLO will be equal to either θnull or (90°−θnull), depending on the type of probe being calibrated and the type of angle-measuring device used. (See Table 2G-7 for a summary.) The algebraic sign of RSLO will either be positive if the rotational position of the reference scribe line is clockwise or negative if counterclockwise with respect to the probe's yaw-null position. Figure 2G-10 illustrates how the magnitude and sign of RSLO are determined.
18.4.2.8 Perform the steps in sections 18.3.2.3 through 18.3.2.7 twice at each of the two calibration velocities selected for the probe under section 10.6. Record the values of RSLO in a form similar to Table 2G-6.
18.4.2.9 The average of all RSLO values is the reference scribe line rotational offset for the probe.
Method 2H—Determination of Stack Gas Velocity Taking Into Account Velocity Decay Near the Stack Wall
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 This method is applicable in conjunction with Methods 2, 2F, and 2G (40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A) to account for velocity decay near the wall in circular stacks and ducts.
1.2 This method is not applicable for testing stacks and ducts less than 3.3 ft (1.0 m) in diameter.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A wall effects adjustment factor is determined. It is used to adjust the average stack gas velocity obtained under Method 2, 2F, or 2G of this appendix to take into account velocity decay near the stack or duct wall.
2.2 The method contains two possible procedures: a calculational approach which derives an adjustment factor from velocity measurements and a default procedure which assigns a generic adjustment factor based on the construction of the stack or duct.
2.2.1 The calculational procedure derives a wall effects adjustment factor from velocity measurements taken using Method 2, 2F, or 2G at 16 (or more) traverse points specified under Method 1 of this appendix and a total of eight (or more) wall effects traverse points specified under this method. The calculational procedure based on velocity measurements is not applicable for horizontal circular ducts where build-up of particulate matter or other material in the bottom of the duct is present.
2.2.2 A default wall effects adjustment factor of 0.9900 for brick and mortar stacks and 0.9950 for all other types of stacks and ducts may be used without taking wall effects measurements in a stack or duct.
2.3 When the calculational procedure is conducted as part of a relative accuracy test audit (RATA) or other multiple-run test procedure, the wall effects adjustment factor derived from a single traverse (i.e., single RATA run) may be applied to all runs of the same RATA without repeating the wall effects measurements. Alternatively, wall effects adjustment factors may be derived for several traverses and an average wall effects adjustment factor applied to all runs of the same RATA.
3.0 Definitions.
3.1 Complete wall effects traverse means a traverse in which measurements are taken at drem (see section 3.3) and at 1-in. intervals in each of the four Method 1 equal-area sectors closest to the wall, beginning not farther than 4 in. (10.2 cm) from the wall and extending either (1) across the entire width of the Method 1 equal-area sector or (2) for stacks or ducts where this width exceeds 12 in. (30.5 cm) (i.e., stacks or ducts greater than or equal to 15.6 ft [4.8 m] in diameter), to a distance of not less than 12 in. (30.5 cm) from the wall. Note: Because this method specifies that measurements must be taken at whole number multiples of 1 in. from a stack or duct wall, for clarity numerical quantities in this method are expressed in English units followed by metric units in parentheses. To enhance readability, hyphenated terms such as “1-in. intervals” or “1-in. incremented,” are expressed in English units only.
3.2 dlast Depending on context, dlast means either (1) the distance from the wall of the last 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point or (2) the traverse point located at that distance (see Figure 2H-2).
3.3 drem Depending on context, drem means either (1) the distance from the wall of the centroid of the area between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall or (2) the traverse point located at that distance (see Figure 2H-2).
3.4 “May,” “Must,” “Shall,” “Should,” and the imperative form of verbs.
3.4.1 “May” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is optional.
3.4.2 “Must,” “Shall,” and the imperative form of verbs (such as “record” or “enter”) are used to indicate that a provision of this method is mandatory.
3.4.3 “Should” is used to indicate that a provision of this method is not mandatory but is highly recommended as good practice.
3.5 Method 1 refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.”
3.6 Method 1 exterior equal-area sector and Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall mean any one of the four equal-area sectors that are closest to the wall for a circular stack or duct laid out in accordance with section 2.3.1 of Method 1 (see Figure 2H-1).
3.7 Method 1 interior equal-area sector means any of the equal-area sectors other than the Method 1 exterior equal-area sectors (as defined in section 3.6) for a circular stack or duct laid out in accordance with section 2.3.1 of Method 1 (see Figure 2H-1).
3.8 Method 1 traverse point and Method 1 equal-area traverse point mean a traverse point located at the centroid of an equal-area sector of a circular stack laid out in accordance with section 2.3.1 of Method 1.
3.9 Method 2 refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).”
3.10 Method 2F refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional probes.”
3.11 Method 2G refers to 40 CFR part 60, appendix A, “Method 2G—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with two-dimensional probes.”
3.12 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point means any of the wall effects traverse points that are located at 1-in. intervals, i.e., traverse points d1 through dlast (see Figure 2H-2).
3.13 Partial wall effects traverse means a traverse in which measurements are taken at fewer than the number of traverse points required for a “complete wall effects traverse” (as defined in section 3.1), but are taken at a minimum of two traverse points in each Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, as specified in section 8.2.2.
3.14 Relative accuracy test audit (RATA) is a field test procedure performed in a stack or duct in which a series of concurrent measurements of the same stack gas stream is taken by a reference method and an installed monitoring system. A RATA usually consists of series of 9 to 12 sets of such concurrent measurements, each of which is referred to as a RATA run. In a volumetric flow RATA, each reference method run consists of a complete traverse of the stack or duct.
3.15 Wall effects-unadjusted average velocity means the average stack gas velocity, not accounting for velocity decay near the wall, as determined in accordance with Method 2, 2F, or 2G for a Method 1 traverse consisting of 16 or more points.
3.16 Wall effects-adjusted average velocity means the average stack gas velocity, taking into account velocity decay near the wall, as calculated from measurements at 16 or more Method 1 traverse points and at the additional wall effects traverse points specified in this method.
3.17 Wall effects traverse point means a traverse point located in accordance with sections 8.2.2 or 8.2.3 of this method.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This method does not purport to address all of the health and safety considerations associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this method to establish appropriate health and safety practices and to determine the applicability of occupational health and safety regulatory requirements prior to performing this method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 The provisions pertaining to equipment and supplies in the method that is used to take the traverse point measurements (i.e., Method 2, 2F, or 2G) are applicable under this method.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Default Wall Effects Adjustment Factors. A default wall effects adjustment factor of 0.9900 for brick and mortar stacks and 0.9950 for all other types of stacks and ducts may be used without conducting the following procedures.
8.2 Traverse Point Locations. Determine the location of the Method 1 traverse points in accordance with section 8.2.1 and the location of the traverse points for either a partial wall effects traverse in accordance with section 8.2.2 or a complete wall effects traverse in accordance with section 8.2.3.
8.2.1 Method 1 equal-area traverse point locations. Determine the location of the Method 1 equal-area traverse points for a traverse consisting of 16 or more points using Table 1-2 (Location of Traverse Points in Circular Stacks) of Method 1.
8.2.2 Partial wall effects traverse. For a partial wall effects traverse, measurements must be taken at a minimum of the following two wall effects traverse point locations in all four Method 1 equal-area sectors closest to the wall: (1) 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the wall (except as provided in section 8.2.2.1) and (2) drem, as determined using Equation 2H-1 or 2H-2 (see section 8.2.2.2).
8.2.2.1 If the probe cannot be positioned at 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the wall (e.g., because of insufficient room to withdraw the probe shaft) or if velocity pressure cannot be detected at 1 in. (2.5 cm) from the wall (for any reason other than build-up of particulate matter in the bottom of a duct), take measurements at the 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point closest to the wall where the probe can be positioned and velocity pressure can be detected.
8.2.2.2 Calculate the distance of drem from the wall to within ± 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) using Equation 2H-1 or Equation 2H-2 (for a 16-point traverse).
Where:
r = the stack or duct radius determined from direct measurement of the stack or duct diameter in accordance with section 8.6 of Method 2F or Method 2G, in. (cm);
p = the number of Method 1 equal-area traverse points on a diameter, p ≥8 (e.g., for a 16-point traverse, p = 8); dlast and drem are defined in sections 3.2 and 3.3 respectively, in. (cm).
For a 16-point Method 1 traverse, Equation 2H-1 becomes:
8.2.2.3 Measurements may be taken at any number of additional wall effects traverse points, with the following provisions.
(a) dlast must not be closer to the center of the stack or duct than the distance of the interior edge (boundary), db, of the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall (see Figure 2H-2 or 2H-3). That is,
Where:
Table 2H-1 shows db as a function of the stack or duct radius, r, for traverses ranging from 16 to 48 points (i.e., for values of p ranging from 8 to 24).
(b) Each point must be located at a distance that is a whole number (e.g., 1, 2, 3) multiple of 1 in. (2.5 cm).
(c) Points do not have to be located at consecutive 1-in. intervals. That is, one or more 1-in. incremented points may be skipped. For example, it would be acceptable for points to be located at 1 in. (2.5 cm), 3 in. (7.6 cm), 5 in. (12.7 cm), dlast, and drem; or at 1 in. (2.5 cm), 2 in. (5.1 cm), 4 in. (10.2 cm), 7 in. (17.8 cm), dlast, and drem. Follow the instructions in section 8.7.1.2 of this method for recording results for wall effects traverse points that are skipped. It should be noted that the full extent of velocity decay may not be accounted for if measurements are not taken at all 1-in. incremented points close to the wall.
8.2.3 Complete wall effects traverse. For a complete wall effects traverse, measurements must be taken at the following points in all four Method 1 equal-area sectors closest to the wall.
(a) The 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point closest to the wall where the probe can be positioned and velocity can be detected, but no farther than 4 in. (10.2 cm) from the wall.
(b) Every subsequent 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point out to the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector or to 12 in. (30.5 cm) from the wall, whichever comes first. Note: In stacks or ducts with diameters greater than 15.6 ft (4.8 m) the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector is farther from the wall than 12 in. (30.5 cm).
(c) drem, as determined using Equation 2H-1 or 2H-2 (as applicable). Note: For a complete traverse of a stack or duct with a diameter less than 16.5 ft (5.0 m), the distance between drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm). As discussed in section 8.2.4.2, when the distance between drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm), the velocity measured at dlast may be used for drem. Thus, it is not necessary to calculate the distance of drem or to take measurements at drem when conducting a complete traverse of a stack or duct with a diameter less than 16.5 ft (5.0 m).
8.2.4 Special considerations. The following special considerations apply when the distance between traverse points is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm).
8.2.4.1 A wall effects traverse point and the Method 1 traverse point. If the distance between a wall effects traverse point and the Method 1 traverse point is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm), taking measurements at both points is allowed but not required or recommended; if measurements are taken at only one point, take the measurements at the point that is farther from the wall and use the velocity obtained at that point as the value for both points (see sections 8.2.3 and 9.2 for related requirements).
8.2.4.2 drem and dlast. If the distance between drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm), taking measurements at drem is allowed but not required or recommended; if measurements are not taken at drem, the measured velocity value at dlast must be used as the value for both dlast and drem.
8.3 Traverse Point Sampling Order and Probe Selection. Determine the sampling order of the Method 1 and wall effects traverse points and select the appropriate probe for the measurements, taking into account the following considerations.
8.3.1 Traverse points on any radius may be sampled in either direction (i.e., from the wall toward the center of the stack or duct, or vice versa).
8.3.2 To reduce the likelihood of velocity variations during the time of the traverse and the attendant potential impact on the wall effects-adjusted and unadjusted average velocities, the following provisions of this method shall be met.
8.3.2.1 Each complete set of Method 1 and wall effects traverse points accessed from the same port shall be sampled without interruption. Unless traverses are performed simultaneously in all ports using separate probes at each port, this provision disallows first sampling all Method 1 points at all ports and then sampling all the wall effects points.
8.3.2.2 The entire integrated Method 1 and wall effects traverse across all test ports shall be as short as practicable, consistent with the measurement system response time (see section 8.4.1.1) and sampling (see section 8.4.1.2) provisions of this method.
8.3.3 It is recommended but not required that in each Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, the Method 1 equal-area traverse point should be sampled in sequence between the adjacent wall effects traverse points. For example, for the traverse point configuration shown in Figure 2H-2, it is recommended that the Method 1 equal-area traverse point be sampled between dlast and drem. In this example, if the traverse is conducted from the wall toward the center of the stack or duct, it is recommended that measurements be taken at points in the following order: d1, d2, dlast, the Method 1 traverse point, drem, and then at the traverse points in the three Method 1 interior equal-area sectors.
8.3.4 The same type of probe must be used to take measurements at all Method 1 and wall effects traverse points. However, different copies of the same type of probe may be used at different ports (e.g., Type S probe 1 at port A, Type S probe 2 at port B) or at different traverse points accessed from a particular port (e.g., Type S probe 1 for Method 1 interior traverse points accessed from port A, Type S probe 2 for wall effects traverse points and the Method 1 exterior traverse point accessed from port A). The identification number of the probe used to obtain measurements at each traverse point must be recorded.
8.4 Measurements at Method 1 and Wall Effects Traverse Points. Conduct measurements at Method 1 and wall effects traverse points in accordance with Method 2, 2F, or 2G and in accordance with the provisions of the following subsections (some of which are included in Methods 2F and 2G but not in Method 2), which are particularly important for wall effects testing.
8.4.1 Probe residence time at wall effects traverse points. Due to the steep temperature and pressure gradients that can occur close to the wall, it is very important for the probe residence time (i.e., the total time spent at a traverse point) to be long enough to ensure collection of representative temperature and pressure measurements. The provisions of Methods 2F and 2G in the following subsections shall be observed.
8.4.1.1 System response time. Determine the response time of each probe measurement system by inserting and positioning the “cold” probe (at ambient temperature and pressure) at any Method 1 traverse point. Read and record the probe differential pressure, temperature, and elapsed time at 15-second intervals until stable readings for both pressure and temperature are achieved. The response time is the longer of these two elapsed times. Record the response time.
8.4.1.2 Sampling. At the start of testing in each port (i.e., after a probe has been inserted into the stack gas stream), allow at least the response time to elapse before beginning to take measurements at the first traverse point accessed from that port. Provided that the probe is not removed from the stack gas stream, measurements may be taken at subsequent traverse points accessed from the same test port without waiting again for the response time to elapse.
8.4.2 Temperature measurement for wall effects traverse points. Either (1) take temperature measurements at each wall effects traverse point in accordance with the applicable provisions of Method 2, 2F, or 2G; or (2) use the temperature measurement at the Method 1 traverse point closest to the wall as the temperature measurement for all the wall effects traverse points in the corresponding equal-area sector.
8.4.3 Non-detectable velocity pressure at wall effects traverse points. If the probe cannot be positioned at a wall effects traverse point or if no velocity pressure can be detected at a wall effects point, measurements shall be taken at the first subsequent wall effects traverse point farther from the wall where velocity can be detected. Follow the instructions in section 8.7.1.2 of this method for recording results for wall effects traverse points where velocity pressure cannot be detected. It should be noted that the full extent of velocity decay may not be accounted for if measurements are not taken at the 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse points closest to the wall.
8.5 Data Recording. For each wall effects and Method 1 traverse point where measurements are taken, record all pressure, temperature, and attendant measurements prescribed in section 3 of Method 2 or section 8.0 of Method 2F or 2G, as applicable.
8.6 Point Velocity Calculation. For each wall effects and Method 1 traverse point, calculate the point velocity value (vi) in accordance with sections 12.1 and 12.2 of Method 2F for tests using Method 2F and in accordance with sections 12.1 and 12.2 of Method 2G for tests using Method 2 and Method 2G. (Note that the term (vi) in this method corresponds to the term (va(i)) in Methods 2F and 2G.) When the equations in the indicated sections of Method 2G are used in deriving point velocity values for Method 2 tests, set the value of the yaw angles appearing in the equations to 0°.
8.7 Tabulating Calculated Point Velocity Values for Wall Effects Traverse Points. Enter the following values in a hardcopy or electronic form similar to Form 2H-1 (for 16-point Method 1 traverses) or Form 2H-2 (for Method 1 traverses consisting of more than 16 points). A separate form must be completed for each of the four Method 1 equal-area sectors that are closest to the wall.
(a) Port ID (e.g., A, B, C, or D)
(b) Probe type
(c) Probe ID
(d) Stack or duct diameter in ft (m) (determined in accordance with section 8.6 of Method 2F or Method 2G)
(e) Stack or duct radius in in. (cm)
(f) Distance from the wall of wall effects traverse points at 1-in. intervals, in ascending order starting with 1 in. (2.5 cm) (column A of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2)
(g) Point velocity values (vd) for 1-in. incremented traverse points (see section 8.7.1), including dlast (see section 8.7.2)
(h) Point velocity value (vdrem) at drem (see section 8.7.3).
8.7.1 Point velocity values at wall effects traverse points other than dlast. For every 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point other than dlast, enter in column B of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 either the velocity measured at the point (see section 8.7.1.1) or the velocity measured at the first subsequent traverse point farther from the wall (see section 8.7.1.2). A velocity value must be entered in column B of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 for every 1-in. incremented traverse point from d1 (representing the wall effects traverse point 1 in. [2.5 cm] from the wall) to dlast.
8.7.1.1 For wall effects traverse points where the probe can be positioned and velocity pressure can be detected, enter the value obtained in accordance with section 8.6.
8.7.1.2 For wall effects traverse points that were skipped [see section 8.2.2.3(c)] and for points where the probe cannot be positioned or where no velocity pressure can be detected, enter the value obtained at the first subsequent traverse point farther from the wall where velocity pressure was detected and measured and follow the entered value with a “flag,” such as the notation “NM,” to indicate that “no measurements” were actually taken at this point.
8.7.2 Point velocity value at dlast. For dlast, enter in column B of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 the measured value obtained in accordance with section 8.6.
8.7.3 Point velocity value (vdrem) at drem. Enter the point velocity value obtained at drem in column G of row 4a in Form 2H-1 or 2H-2. If the distance between drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm), the measured velocity value at dlast may be used as the value at drem (see section 8.2.4.2).
9.0 Quality Control.
9.1 Particulate Matter Build-up in Horizontal Ducts. Wall effects testing of horizontal circular ducts should be conducted only if build-up of particulate matter or other material in the bottom of the duct is not present.
9.2 Verifying Traverse Point Distances. In taking measurements at wall effects traverse points, it is very important for the probe impact pressure port to be positioned as close as practicable to the traverse point locations in the gas stream. For this reason, before beginning wall effects testing, it is important to calculate and record the traverse point positions that will be marked on each probe for each port, taking into account the distance that each port nipple (or probe mounting flange for automated probes) extends out of the stack and any extension of the port nipple (or mounting flange) into the gas stream. To ensure that traverse point positions are properly identified, the following procedures should be performed on each probe used.
9.2.1 Manual probes. Mark the probe insertion distance of the wall effects and Method 1 traverse points on the probe sheath so that when a mark is aligned with the outside face of the stack port, the probe impact port is located at the calculated distance of the traverse point from the stack inside wall. The use of different colored marks is recommended for designating the wall effects and Method 1 traverse points. Before the first use of each probe, check to ensure that the distance of each mark from the center of the probe impact pressure port agrees with the previously calculated traverse point positions to within ± 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
9.2.2 Automated probe systems. For automated probe systems that mechanically position the probe head at prescribed traverse point positions, activate the system with the probe assemblies removed from the test ports and sequentially extend the probes to the programmed location of each wall effects traverse point and the Method 1 traverse points. Measure the distance between the center of the probe impact pressure port and the inside of the probe assembly mounting flange for each traverse point. The measured distances must agree with the previously calculated traverse point positions to within ± 1/4 in. (6.4 mm).
9.3 Probe Installation. Properly sealing the port area is particularly important in taking measurements at wall effects traverse points. For testing involving manual probes, the area between the probe sheath and the port should be sealed with a tightly fitting flexible seal made of an appropriate material such as heavy cloth so that leakage is minimized. For automated probe systems, the probe assembly mounting flange area should be checked to verify that there is no leakage.
9.4 Velocity Stability. This method should be performed only when the average gas velocity in the stack or duct is relatively constant over the duration of the test. If the average gas velocity changes significantly during the course of a wall effects test, the test results should be discarded.
10.0 Calibration
10.1 The calibration coefficient(s) or curves obtained under Method 2, 2F, or 2G and used to perform the Method 1 traverse are applicable under this method.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 The following calculations shall be performed to obtain a wall effects adjustment factor (WAF) from (1) the wall effects-unadjusted average velocity (T4avg), (2) the replacement velocity (v ej) for each of the four Method 1 sectors closest to the wall, and (3) the average stack gas velocity that accounts for velocity decay near the wall (v avg).
12.2 Nomenclature. The following terms are listed in the order in which they appear in Equations 2H-5 through 2H-21.
vavg = the average stack gas velocity, unadjusted for wall effects, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
vii = stack gas point velocity value at Method 1 interior equal-area sectors, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
vej = stack gas point velocity value, unadjusted for wall effects, at Method 1 exterior equal-area sectors, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
i = index of Method 1 interior equal-area traverse points;
j = index of Method 1 exterior equal-area traverse points;
n = total number of traverse points in the Method 1 traverse;
vdecd = the wall effects decay velocity for a sub-sector located between the traverse points at distances d−1 (in metric units, d−2.5) and d from the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
vd = the measured stack gas velocity at distance d from the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec); Note: v0 = 0;
d = the distance of a 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point from the wall, for traverse points d1 through dlast, in. (cm);
Ad = the cross-sectional area of a sub-sector located between the traverse points at distances d−1 (in metric units, d−2.5) and d from the wall, in. 2 (cm 2) ( e.g., sub-sector A2 shown in Figures 2H-3 and 2H-4);
r = the stack or duct radius, in. (cm);
Qd = the stack gas volumetric flow rate for a sub-sector located between the traverse points at distances d−1 (in metric units, d−2.5) and d from the wall, actual ft-in. 2/sec (m-cm 2/sec);
Qd1→dlast = the total stack gas volumetric flow rate for all sub-sectors located between the wall and dlast, actual ft-in. 2/sec (m-cm 2/sec);
dlast = the distance from the wall of the last 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point, in. (cm);
Adrem = the cross-sectional area of the sub-sector located between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, in. 2 (cm 2) (see Figure 2H-4);
p = the number of Method 1 traverse points per diameter, p≥8 (e.g., for a 16-point traverse, p = 8);
drem = the distance from the wall of the centroid of the area between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, in. (cm);
Qdrem = the total stack gas volumetric flow rate for the sub-sector located between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, actual ft-in. 2/sec (m-cm 2/sec);
vdrem = the measured stack gas velocity at distance drem from the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
QT = the total stack gas volumetric flow rate for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, actual ft-in. 2/sec (m-cm 2/sec);
v ej = the replacement stack gas velocity for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, i.e., the stack gas point velocity value, adjusted for wall effects, for the j th Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
v avg = the average stack gas velocity that accounts for velocity decay near the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
WAF = the wall effects adjustment factor derived from vavg and v avg for a single traverse, dimensionless;
v final = the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity that replaces the unadjusted average stack gas velocity obtained using Method 2, 2F, or 2G for a field test consisting of a single traverse, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
W A F = the wall effects adjustment factor that is applied to the average velocity, unadjusted for wall effects, in order to obtain the final wall effects-adjusted stack gas velocity, v final or, v final(k), dimensionless;
v final(k) = the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity that replaces the unadjusted average stack gas velocity obtained using Method 2, 2F, or 2G on run k of a RATA or other multiple-run field test procedure, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
vavg(k) = the average stack gas velocity, obtained on run k of a RATA or other multiple-run procedure, unadjusted for velocity decay near the wall, actual ft/sec (m/sec);
k=index of runs in a RATA or other multiple-run procedure.
12.3 Calculate the average stack gas velocity that does not account for velocity decay near the wall (vavg) using Equation 2H-5.
(Note that vavg in Equation 2H-5 is the same as v(a)avg in Equations 2F-9 and 2G-8 in Methods 2F and 2G, respectively.)
For a 16-point traverse, Equation 2H-5 may be written as follows:
12.4 Calculate the replacement velocity, v ej, for each of the four Method 1 equal-area sectors closest to the wall using the procedures described in sections 12.4.1 through 12.4.8. Forms 2H-1 and 2H-2 provide sample tables that may be used in either hardcopy or spreadsheet format to perform the calculations described in sections 12.4.1 through 12.4.8. Forms 2H-3 and 2H-4 provide examples of Form 2H-1 filled in for partial and complete wall effects traverses.
12.4.1 Calculate the average velocity (designated the “decay velocity,” vdecd) for each sub-sector located between the wall and dlast (see Figure 2H-3) using Equation 2H-7.
For each line in column A of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 that contains a value of d, enter the corresponding calculated value of vdecd in column C.
12.4.2 Calculate the cross-sectional area between the wall and the first 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse point and between successive 1-in. incremented wall effects traverse points, from the wall to dlast (see Figure 2H-3), using Equation 2H-8.
For each line in column A of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 that contains a value of d, enter the value of the expression 1/4 π(r−d + 1) 2 in column D, the value of the expression 1/4 π(r−d) 2 in column E, and the value of Ad in column F. Note that Equation 2H-8 is designed for use only with English units (in.). If metric units (cm) are used, the first term, 1/4 π(r−d + 1) 2, must be changed to 1/4 π(r−d + 2.5) 2. This change must also be made in column D of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.4.3 Calculate the volumetric flow through each cross-sectional area derived in section 12.4.2 by multiplying the values of vdecd, derived according to section 12.4.1, by the cross-sectional areas derived in section 12.4.2 using Equation 2H-9.
For each line in column A of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2 that contains a value of d, enter the corresponding calculated value of Qd in column G.
12.4.4 Calculate the total volumetric flow through all sub-sectors located between the wall and dlast, using Equation 2H-10.
Enter the calculated value of Qd1→cdlast in line 3 of column G of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.4.5 Calculate the cross-sectional area of the sub-sector located between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector (e.g., sub-sector Adrem shown in Figures 2H-3 and 2H-4) using Equation 2H-11.
For a 16-point traverse (eight points per diameter), Equation 2H-11 may be written as follows:
Enter the calculated value of Adrem in line 4b of column G of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.4.6 Calculate the volumetric flow for the sub-sector located between dlast and the interior edge of the Method 1 equal-area sector, using Equation 2H-13.
In Equation 2H-13, vdrem is either (1) the measured velocity value at drem or (2) the measured velocity at dlast, if the distance between drem and dlast is less than or equal to 1/2 in. (12.7 mm) and no velocity measurement is taken at drem (see section 8.2.4.2). Enter the calculated value of Qdrem in line 4c of column G of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.4.7 Calculate the total volumetric flow for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, using Equation 2H-14.
Enter the calculated value of QT in line 5a of column G of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.4.8 Calculate the wall effects-adjusted replacement velocity value for the Method 1 equal-area sector closest to the wall, using Equation 2H-15.
For a 16-point traverse (eight points per diameter), Equation 2H-15 may be written as follows:
Enter the calculated value of v ej in line 5B of column G of Form 2H-1 or 2H-2.
12.5 Calculate the wall effects-adjusted average velocity, v avg, by replacing the four values of vej shown in Equation 2H-5 with the four wall effects-adjusted replacement velocity values,v ej, calculated according to section 12.4.8, using Equation 2H-17.
For a 16-point traverse, Equation 2H-17 may be written as follows:
12.6 Calculate the wall effects adjustment factor, WAF, using Equation 2H-19.
12.6.1 Partial wall effects traverse. If a partial wall effects traverse (see section 8.2.2) is conducted, the value obtained from Equation 2H-19 is acceptable and may be reported as the wall effects adjustment factor provided that the value is greater than or equal to 0.9800. If the value is less than 0.9800, it shall not be used and a wall effects adjustment factor of 0.9800 may be used instead.
12.6.2 Complete wall effects traverse. If a complete wall effects traverse (see section 8.2.3) is conducted, the value obtained from Equation 2H-19 is acceptable and may be reported as the wall effects adjustment factor provided that the value is greater than or equal to 0.9700. If the value is less than 0.9700, it shall not be used and a wall effects adjustment factor of 0.9700 may be used instead. If the wall effects adjustment factor for a particular stack or duct is less than 0.9700, the tester may (1) repeat the wall effects test, taking measurements at more Method 1 traverse points and (2) recalculate the wall effects adjustment factor from these measurements, in an attempt to obtain a wall effects adjustment factor that meets the 0.9700 specification and completely characterizes the wall effects.
12.7 Applying a Wall Effects Adjustment Factor. A default wall effects adjustment factor, as specified in section 8.1, or a calculated wall effects adjustment factor meeting the requirements of section 12.6.1 or 12.6.2 may be used to adjust the average stack gas velocity obtained using Methods 2, 2F, or 2G to take into account velocity decay near the wall of circular stacks or ducts. Default wall effects adjustment factors specified in section 8.1 and calculated wall effects adjustment factors that meet the requirements of section 12.6.1 and 12.6.2 are summarized in Table 2H-2.
12.7.1 Single-run tests. Calculate the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity for field tests consisting of a single traverse using Equation 2H-20.
The wall effects adjustment factor, WAF, shown in Equation 2H-20, may be (1) a default wall effects adjustment factor, as specified in section 8.1, or (2) a calculated adjustment factor that meets the specifications in sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2. If a calculated adjustment factor is used in Equation 2H-20, the factor must have been obtained during the same traverse in which vavg was obtained.
12.7.2 RATA or other multiple run test procedure. Calculate the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity for any run k of a RATA or other multiple-run procedure using Equation 2H-21.
The wall effects adjustment factor, W A F , shown in Equation 2H-21 may be (1) a default wall effects adjustment factor, as specified in section 8.1; (2) a calculated adjustment factor (meeting the specifications in sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2) obtained from any single run of the RATA that includes run k; or (3) the arithmetic average of more than one WAF (each meeting the specifications in sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2) obtained through wall effects testing conducted during several runs of the RATA that includes run k. If wall effects adjustment factors (meeting the specifications in sections 12.6.1 or 12.6.2) are determined for more than one RATA run, the arithmetic average of all of the resulting calculated wall effects adjustment factors must be used as the value of W A F and applied to all runs of that RATA. If a calculated, not a default, wall effects adjustment factor is used in Equation 2H-21, the average velocity unadjusted for wall effects, vavg(k) must be obtained from runs in which the number of Method 1 traverse points sampled does not exceed the number of Method 1 traverse points in the runs used to derive the wall effects adjustment factor, W A F , shown in Equation 2H-21.
12.8 Calculating Volumetric Flow Using Final Wall Effects-Adjusted Average Velocity Value. To obtain a stack gas flow rate that accounts for velocity decay near the wall of circular stacks or ducts, replace vs in Equation 2-10 in Method 2, or va(avg) in Equations 2F-10 and 2F-11 in Method 2F, or va(avg) in Equations 2G-9 and 2G-10 in Method 2G with one of the following.
12.8.1 For single-run test procedures, use the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity, v final, calculated according to Equation 2H-20.
12.8.2 For RATA and other multiple run test procedures, use the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity, v final(k), calculated according to Equation 2H-21.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Reporting
16.1 Field Test Reports. Field test reports shall be submitted to the Agency according to the applicable regulatory requirements. When Method 2H is performed in conjunction with Method 2, 2F, or 2G to derive a wall effects adjustment factor, a single consolidated Method 2H/2F (or 2H/2G) field test report should be prepared. At a minimum, the consolidated field test report should contain (1) all of the general information, and data for Method 1 points, specified in section 16.0 of Method 2F (when Method 2H is used in conjunction with Method 2F) or section 16.0 of Method 2G (when Method 2H is used in conjunction with Method 2 or 2G) and (2) the additional general information, and data for Method 1 points and wall effects points, specified in this section (some of which are included in section 16.0 of Methods 2F and 2G and are repeated in this section to ensure complete reporting for wall effects testing).
16.1.1 Description of the source and site. The field test report should include the descriptive information specified in section 16.1.1 of Method 2F (when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using either Method 2 or 2G). It should also include a description of the stack or duct's construction material along with the diagram showing the dimensions of the stack or duct at the test port elevation prescribed in Methods 2F and 2G. The diagram should indicate the location of all wall effects traverse points where measurements were taken as well as the Method 1 traverse points. The diagram should provide a unique identification number for each wall effects and Method 1 traverse point, its distance from the wall, and its location relative to the probe entry ports.
16.1.2 Field test forms. The field test report should include a copy of Form 2H-1, 2H-2, or an equivalent for each Method 1 exterior equal-area sector.
16.1.3 Field test data. The field test report should include the following data for the Method 1 and wall effects traverse.
16.1.3.1 Data for each traverse point. The field test report should include the values specified in section 16.1.3.2 of Method 2F (when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using either Method 2 or 2G) for each Method 1 and wall effects traverse point. The provisions of section 8.4.2 of Method 2H apply to the temperature measurements reported for wall effects traverse points. For each wall effects and Method 1 traverse point, the following values should also be included in the field test report.
(a) Traverse point identification number for each Method 1 and wall effects traverse point.
(b) Probe type.
(c) Probe identification number.
(d) Probe velocity calibration coefficient (i.e., Cp when Method 2 or 2G is used; F2 when Method 2F is used).
For each Method 1 traverse point in an exterior equal-area sector, the following additional value should be included.
(e) Calculated replacement velocity, v ej, accounting for wall effects.
16.1.3.2 Data for each run. The values specified in section 16.1.3.3 of Method 2F (when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using either Method 2 or 2G) should be included in the field test report once for each run. The provisions of section 12.8 of Method 2H apply for calculating the reported gas volumetric flow rate. In addition, the following Method 2H run values should also be included in the field test report.
(a) Average velocity for run, accounting for wall effects, v avg.
(b) Wall effects adjustment factor derived from a test run, WAF.
16.1.3.3 Data for a complete set of runs. The values specified in section 16.1.3.4 of Method 2F (when using Method 2F) or 2G (when using either Method 2 or 2G) should be included in the field test report once for each complete set of runs. In addition, the field test report should include the wall effects adjustment factor, W A F , that is applied in accordance with section 12.7.1 or 12.7.2 to obtain the final wall effects-adjusted average stack gas velocity v final or v final(k).
16.1.4 Quality assurance and control. Quality assurance and control procedures, specifically tailored to wall effects testing, should be described.
16.2 Reporting a Default Wall Effects Adjustment Factor. When a default wall effects adjustment factor is used in accordance with section 8.1 of this method, its value and a description of the stack or duct's construction material should be reported in lieu of submitting a test report.
17.0 References.
(1) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 1—Sample and velocity traverses for stationary sources.
(2) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate (Type S pitot tube).
(3) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2F—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with three-dimensional probes.
(4) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 2G—Determination of stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate with two-dimensional probes.
(5) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3—Gas analysis for carbon dioxide, oxygen, excess air, and dry molecular weight.
(6) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 3A—Determination of oxygen and carbon dioxide concentrations in emissions from stationary sources (instrumental analyzer procedure).
(7) 40 CFR Part 60, Appendix A, Method 4—Determination of moisture content in stack gases.
(8) Emission Measurement Center (EMC) Approved Alternative Method (ALT-011) “Alternative Method 2 Thermocouple Calibration Procedure.”
(9) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, DeCordova Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-015a.
(10) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Texas Utilities, Lake Hubbard Steam Electric Station, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-017a.
(11) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1998, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Data Report, Pennsylvania Electric Co., G.P.U. Genco Homer City Station: Unit 1, Volume I: Test Description and Appendix A (Data Distribution Package),” EPA/430-R-98-018a.
(12) The Cadmus Group, Inc., May 1999, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Findings Report,” EPA/430-R-99-009.
(13) The Cadmus Group, Inc., 1997, “EPA Flow Reference Method Testing and Analysis: Wind Tunnel Experimental Results,” EPA/430-R-97-013.
(14) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four Prandtl Probes, Four S-Type Probes, Four French Probes, Four Modified Kiel Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG No. DW13938432-01-0.
(15) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Five Autoprobes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG No. DW13938432-01-0.
(16) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Eight Spherical Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG No. DW13938432-01-0.
(17) National Institute of Standards and Technology, 1998, “Report of Special Test of Air Speed Instrumentation, Four DAT Probes,” Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency under IAG No. DW13938432-01-0.
(18) Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT), 1998, “Calibration of Eight Wind Speed Probes Over a Reynolds Number Range of 46,000 to 725,000 per Foot, Text and Summary Plots,” Plus Appendices, WBWT-TR-1317, Prepared for The Cadmus Group, Inc., under EPA Contract 68-W6-0050, Work Assignment 0007AA-3.
(19) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, Final Report, “Velocity Probe Tests in Non-axial Flow Fields,” November 1998, Prepared for the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.
(20) Fossil Energy Research Corporation, “Additional Swirl Tunnel Tests: E-DAT and T-DAT Probes,” February 24, 1999, Technical Memorandum Prepared for U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, P.O. No. 7W-1193-NALX.
Method 3—Gas Analysis for the Determination of Dry Molecular Weight
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analytes | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Oxygen (O2) | 7782-44-7 | 2,000 ppmv. |
| Nitrogen (N2) | 7727-37-9 | N/A. |
| Carbon dioxide (CO2) | 124-38-9 | 2,000 ppmv. |
| Carbon monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 | N/A. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of CO2 and O2 concentrations and dry molecular weight of a sample from an effluent gas stream of a fossil-fuel combustion process or other process.
1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure described herein, are also applicable for all of the above determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include: (1) A multi-point grab sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to analyze the individual grab sample obtained at each point; (2) a method for measuring either CO2 or O2 and using stoichiometric calculations to determine dry molecular weight; and (3) assigning a value of 30.0 for dry molecular weight, in lieu of actual measurements, for processes burning natural gas, coal, or oil. These methods and modifications may be used, but are subject to the approval of the Administrator. The method may also be applicable to other processes where it has been determined that compounds other than CO2, O2, carbon monoxide (CO), and nitrogen (N2) are not present in concentrations sufficient to affect the results.
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following methods: (1) single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed for percent CO2 and percent O2. For dry molecular weight determination, either an Orsat or a Fyrite analyzer may be used for the analysis.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the results of Orsat or Fyrite analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO2 concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with O2 concentration measurement include unsaturated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia reacts chemically with the O2 absorbing solution, and when present in the effluent gas stream must be removed before analysis.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents.
5.2.1 A typical Orsat analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO2 absorbent, O2 absorbent, and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.
5.2.2 A typical Fyrite analyzer contains zinc chloride, hydrochloric acid, and either potassium hydroxide or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Grab Sampling (See Figure 3-1).
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or borosilicate glass tubing equipped with an in-stack or out-of-stack filter to remove particulate matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory for this purpose). Any other materials, resistant to temperature at sampling conditions and inert to all components of the gas stream, may be used for the probe. Examples of such materials may include aluminum, copper, quartz glass, and Teflon.
6.1.2 Pump. A one-way squeeze bulb, or equivalent, to transport the gas sample to the analyzer.
6.2 Integrated Sampling (Figure 3-2).
6.2.1 Probe. Same as in section 6.1.1.
6.2.2 Condenser. An air-cooled or water-cooled condenser, or other condenser no greater than 250 ml that will not remove O2, CO2, CO, and N2, to remove excess moisture which would interfere with the operation of the pump and flowmeter.
6.2.3 Valve. A needle valve, to adjust sample gas flow rate.
6.2.4 Pump. A leak-free, diaphragm-type pump, or equivalent, to transport sample gas to the flexible bag. Install a small surge tank between the pump and rate meter to eliminate the pulsation effect of the diaphragm pump on the rate meter.
6.2.5 Rate Meter. A rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring flow rate to ±2 percent of the selected flow rate. A flow rate range of 500 to 1000 ml/min is suggested.
6.2.6 Flexible Bag. Any leak-free plastic (e.g., Tedlar, Mylar, Teflon) or plastic-coated aluminum (e.g., aluminized Mylar) bag, or equivalent, having a capacity consistent with the selected flow rate and duration of the test run. A capacity in the range of 55 to 90 liters (1.9 to 3.2 ft 3) is suggested. To leak-check the bag, connect it to a water manometer, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H2O (2 to 4 in. H2O). Allow to stand for 10 minutes. Any displacement in the water manometer indicates a leak. An alternative leak-check method is to pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in.) H2O and allow to stand overnight. A deflated bag indicates a leak.
6.2.7 Pressure Gauge. A water-filled U-tube manometer, or equivalent, of about 30 cm (12 in.), for the flexible bag leak-check.
6.2.8 Vacuum Gauge. A mercury manometer, or equivalent, of at least 760 mm (30 in.) Hg, for the sampling train leak-check.
6.3 Analysis. An Orsat or Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents. As specified by the Orsat or Fyrite-type combustion analyzer manufacturer.
7.2 Standards. Two standard gas mixtures, traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards, to be used in auditing the accuracy of the analyzer and the analyzer operator technique:
7.2.1. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent O2 and 14 to 18 percent CO2.
7.2.2. Gas cylinder containing 2 to 4 percent CO2 and about 15 percent O2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Single Point, Grab Sampling Procedure.
8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1, making sure all connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the analyzer be leak-checked by following the procedure in section 11.5; however, the leak-check is optional.
8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point. Purge the sampling line long enough to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer, and immediately analyze it for percent CO2 and percent O2 according to section 11.2.
8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.
8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified in section 8.1.1.
8.2.2 Leak-check (optional) the flexible bag as in section 6.2.6. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2. Just before sampling, leak-check (optional) the train by placing a vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and then turning off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point. Purge the sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure that all connections are tight.
8.2.3 Sample Collection. Sample at a constant rate (±10 percent). The sampling run should be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate determination. Collection of at least 28 liters (1.0 ft 3) of sample gas is recommended; however, smaller volumes may be collected, if desired.
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant emission rate determination. Within 8 hours after the sample is taken, analyze it for percent CO2 and percent O2 using either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite type combustion gas analyzer according to section 11.3.
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling Procedure.
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1.
8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data as shown in Figure 3-3.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2 | Use of Fyrite to confirm Orsat results | Ensures the accurate measurement of CO2 and O2. |
| 10.1 | Periodic audit of analyzer and operator technique | Ensures that the analyzer is operating properly and that the operator performs the sampling procedure correctly and accurately. |
| 11.3 | Replicable analyses of integrated samples | Minimizes experimental error. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator's technique should be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a manifold containing a known mixture of CO2 and O2, and analyze according to the procedure in section 11.3. Repeat this procedure until the measured concentration of three consecutive samples agrees with the stated value ±0.5 percent. If necessary, take corrective action, as specified in the analyzer users manual.
10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat or Fyrite-type analyzer should be maintained and operated according to the manufacturers specifications.
11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O2 and CO2 concentration for dry molecular weight determination, using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check, described in section 11.5, be performed before this determination; however, the check is optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as indicated in section 12.0. Repeat the sampling, analysis, and calculation procedures until the dry molecular weights of any three grab samples differ from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular weights, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. Use either an Orsat analyzer or a Fyrite-type combustion gas analyzer to measure O2 and CO2 concentration for dry molecular weight determination, using procedures as specified in the analyzer user's manual. If an Orsat analyzer is used, it is recommended that the Orsat leak-check, described in section 11.5, be performed before this determination; however, the check is optional. Calculate the dry molecular weight as indicated in section 12.0. Repeat the analysis and calculation procedures until the individual dry molecular weights for any three analyses differ from their mean by no more than 0.3 g/g-mole (0.3 lb/lb-mole). Average these three molecular weights, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 g/g-mole (0.1 lb/lb-mole).
11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series of test runs as outlined in section 10.1.
11.5 Leak-Check Procedure for Orsat Analyzer. Moving an Orsat analyzer frequently causes it to leak. Therefore, an Orsat analyzer should be thoroughly leak-checked on site before the flue gas sample is introduced into it. The procedure for leak-checking an Orsat analyzer is as follows:
11.5.1 Bring the liquid level in each pipette up to the reference mark on the capillary tubing, and then close the pipette stopcock.
11.5.2 Raise the leveling bulb sufficiently to bring the confining liquid meniscus onto the graduated portion of the burette, and then close the manifold stopcock.
11.5.3 Record the meniscus position.
11.5.4 Observe the meniscus in the burette and the liquid level in the pipette for movement over the next 4 minutes.
11.5.5 For the Orsat analyzer to pass the leak-check, two conditions must be met:
11.5.5.1 The liquid level in each pipette must not fall below the bottom of the capillary tubing during this 4-minute interval.
11.5.5.2 The meniscus in the burette must not change by more than 0.2 ml during this 4-minute interval.
11.5.6 If the analyzer fails the leak-check procedure, check all rubber connections and stopcocks to determine whether they might be the cause of the leak. Disassemble, clean, and regrease any leaking stopcocks. Replace leaking rubber connections. After the analyzer is reassembled, repeat the leak-check procedure.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
Md = Dry molecular weight, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
%CO2 = Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis.
%O2 = Percent O2 by volume, dry basis.
%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.
%N2 = Percent N2 by volume, dry basis.
0.280 = Molecular weight of N2 or CO, divided by 100.
0.320 = Molecular weight of O2 divided by 100.
0.440 = Molecular weight of CO2 divided by 100.
12.2 Nitrogen, Carbon Monoxide Concentration. Determine the percentage of the gas that is N2 and CO by subtracting the sum of the percent CO2 and percent O2 from 100 percent.
12.3 Dry Molecular Weight. Use Equation 3-1 to calculate the dry molecular weight of the stack gas.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Altshuller, A.P. Storage of Gases and Vapors in Plastic Bags. International Journal of Air and Water Pollution. 6:75-81. 1963.
2. Conner, William D. and J.S. Nader. Air Sampling with Plastic Bags. Journal of the American Industrial Hygiene Association. 25:291-297. 1964.
3. Burrell Manual for Gas Analysts, Seventh edition. Burrell Corporation, 2223 Fifth Avenue, Pittsburgh, PA. 15219. 1951.
4. Mitchell, W.J. and M.R. Midgett. Field Reliability of the Orsat Analyzer. Journal of Air Pollution Control Association. 26:491-495. May 1976.
5. Shigehara, R.T., R.M. Neulicht, and W.S. Smith. Validating Orsat Analysis Data from Fossil Fuel-Fired Units. Stack Sampling News. 4(2):21-26. August 1976.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Time | Traverse point | Q (liter/min) | % Deviation a |
|---|---|---|---|
| Average | |||
| a % Dev.=[(Q−Qavg)/Qavg] × 100 (Must be ≤±10%) |
Figure 3-3. Sampling Rate Data
Method 3A—Determination of Oxygen and Carbon Dioxide Concentrations in Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 3A?
Method 3A is a procedure for measuring oxygen (O2) and carbon dioxide (CO2) in stationary source emissions using a continuous instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known quality. You must document your adherence to these specific requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis.
This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional test methods which are found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 3—Gas Analysis for the Determination of Molecular Weight.
(c) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
(d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method measures the concentration of oxygen and carbon dioxide.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Oxygen (O2) | 7782-44-7 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
| Carbon dioxide (CO2) | 124-38-9 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? The use of Method 3A may be required by specific New Source Performance Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State Implementation Plans and permits, where measurements of O2 and CO2 concentrations in stationary source emissions must be made, either to determine compliance with an applicable emission standard or to conduct performance testing of a continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS). Other regulations may also require the use of Method 3A.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must my collected data be? Refer to section 1.3 of Method 7E.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, you continuously or intermittently sample the effluent gas and convey the sample to an analyzer that measures the concentration of O2 or CO2. You must meet the performance requirements of this method to validate your data.
3.0 Definitions
Refer to section 3.0 of Method 7E for the applicable definitions.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
Refer to section 5.0 of Method 7E.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Figure 7E-1 in Method 7E is a schematic diagram of an acceptable measurement system.
6.1 What do I need for the measurement system? The components of the measurement system are described (as applicable) in sections 6.1 and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that the analyzer described in section 6.2 of this method must be used instead of the analyzer described in Method 7E. You must follow the noted specifications in section 6.1 of Method 7E except that the requirements to use stainless steel, Teflon, or non-reactive glass filters do not apply. Also, a heated sample line is not required to transport dry gases or for systems that measure the O2 or CO2 concentration on a dry basis, provided that the system is not also being used to concurrently measure SO2 and/or NOX.
6.2 What analyzer must I use? You must use an analyzer that continuously measures O2 or CO2 in the gas stream and meets the specifications in section 13.0.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases do I need? Refer to Section 7.1 of Method 7E for the calibration gas requirements. Example calibration gas mixtures are listed below. Pre-cleaned or scrubbed air may be used for the O2 high-calibration gas provided it does not contain other gases that interfere with the O2 measurement.
(a) CO2 in Nitrogen (N2).
(b) CO2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
(c) O2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
(d) O2/CO2/SO2 gas mixture in N2.
(e) CO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
(f) CO2/SO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
The tests for analyzer calibration error and system bias require high-, mid-, and low-level gases.
7.2 Interference Check. What reagents do I need for the interference check? Potential interferences may vary among available analyzers. Table 7E-3 of Method 7E lists a number of gases that should be considered in conducting the interference test.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You must follow the procedures of section 8.1 of Method 7E to determine the appropriate sampling points, unless you are using Method 3A only to determine the stack gas molecular weight and for no other purpose. In that case, you may use single-point integrated sampling as described in section 8.2.1 of Method 3. If the stratification test provisions in section 8.1.2 of Method 7E are used to reduce the number of required sampling points, the alternative acceptance criterion for 3-point sampling will be ±0.5 percent CO2 or O2, and the alternative acceptance criterion for single-point sampling will be ±0.3 percent CO2 or O2. In that case, you may use single-point integrated sampling as described in section 8.2.1 of Method 3.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. You must follow the procedures in section 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type measurement system is used, the special considerations in section 8.3 of Method 7E apply.
8.3 Interference Check. The O2 or CO2 analyzer must be documented to show that interference effects to not exceed 2.5 percent of the calibration span. The interference test in section 8.2.7 of Method 7E is a procedure that may be used to show this. The effects of all potential interferences at the concentrations encountered during testing must be addressed and documented. This testing and documentation may be done by the instrument manufacturer.
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the procedures in section 8.4 of Method 7E.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift Assessment. You must follow the procedures in section 8.5 of Method 7E.
9.0 Quality Control
Follow quality control procedures in section 9.0 of Method 7E.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Follow the procedures for calibration and standardization in section 10.0 of Method 7E.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the applicable procedures for calculations and data analysis in section 12.0 of Method 7E, substituting percent O2 and percent CO2 for ppmv of NOX as appropriate.
13.0 Method Performance
The specifications for the applicable performance checks are the same as in section 13.0 of Method 7E except for the alternative specifications for system bias, drift, and calibration error. In these alternative specifications, replace the term “0.5 ppmv” with the term “0.5 percent O2” or “0.5 percent CO2” (as applicable).
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures [Reserved]
17.0 References
1. “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards” September 1997 as amended, EPA-600/R-97/121.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Refer to section 18.0 of Method 7E.
Method 3B—Gas Analysis for the Determination of Emission Rate Correction Factor or Excess Air
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Oxygen (O2) | 7782-44-7 | 2,000 ppmv. |
| Carbon Dioxide (CO2) | 124-38-9 | 2,000 ppmv. |
| Carbon Monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 | N/A. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of O2, CO2, and CO concentrations in the effluent from fossil-fuel combustion processes for use in excess air or emission rate correction factor calculations. Where compounds other than CO2, O2, CO, and nitrogen (N2) are present in concentrations sufficient to affect the results, the calculation procedures presented in this method must be modified, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
1.3 Other methods, as well as modifications to the procedure described herein, are also applicable for all of the above determinations. Examples of specific methods and modifications include: (1) A multi-point sampling method using an Orsat analyzer to analyze individual grab samples obtained at each point, and (2) a method using CO2 or O2 and stoichiometric calculations to determine excess air. These methods and modifications may be used, but are subject to the approval of the Administrator.
1.4 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a stack by one of the following methods: (1) Single-point, grab sampling; (2) single-point, integrated sampling; or (3) multi-point, integrated sampling. The gas sample is analyzed for percent CO2, percent O2, and, if necessary, percent CO using an Orsat combustion gas analyzer.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Several compounds can interfere, to varying degrees, with the results of Orsat analyses. Compounds that interfere with CO2 concentration measurement include acid gases (e.g., sulfur dioxide, hydrogen chloride); compounds that interfere with O2 concentration measurement include unsaturated hydrocarbons (e.g., acetone, acetylene), nitrous oxide, and ammonia. Ammonia reacts chemically with the O2 absorbing solution, and when present in the effluent gas stream must be removed before analysis.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. A typical Orsat analyzer requires four reagents: a gas-confining solution, CO2 absorbent, O2 absorbent, and CO absorbent. These reagents may contain potassium hydroxide, sodium hydroxide, cuprous chloride, cuprous sulfate, alkaline pyrogallic acid, and/or chromous chloride. Follow manufacturer's operating instructions and observe all warning labels for reagent use.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Grab Sampling and Integrated Sampling. Same as in sections 6.1 and 6.2, respectively for Method 3.
6.2 Analysis. An Orsat analyzer only. For low CO2 (less than 4.0 percent) or high O2 (greater than 15.0 percent) concentrations, the measuring burette of the Orsat must have at least 0.1 percent subdivisions. For Orsat maintenance and operation procedures, follow the instructions recommended by the manufacturer, unless otherwise specified herein.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents. Same as in Method 3, section 7.1.
7.2 Standards. Same as in Method 3, section 7.2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Single-Point, Grab Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.1.1 The sampling point in the duct shall either be at the centroid of the cross section or at a point no closer to the walls than 1.0 m (3.3 ft), unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
8.1.2 Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-1 of Method 3, making sure all connections ahead of the analyzer are tight. Leak-check the Orsat analyzer according to the procedure described in section 11.5 of Method 3. This leak-check is mandatory.
8.1.3 Place the probe in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point; purge the sampling line long enough to allow at least five exchanges. Draw a sample into the analyzer. For emission rate correction factor determinations, immediately analyze the sample for percent CO2 or percent O2, as outlined in section 11.2. For excess air determination, immediately analyze the sample for percent CO2, O2, and CO, as outlined in section 11.2, and calculate excess air as outlined in section 12.2.
8.1.4 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer once again, as described in section 11.5 of Method 3. For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.
8.2 Single-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.2.1 The sampling point in the duct shall be located as specified in section 8.1.1.
8.2.2 Leak-check (mandatory) the flexible bag as in section 6.2.6 of Method 3. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 3-2 of Method 3. Just before sampling, leak-check (mandatory) the train by placing a vacuum gauge at the condenser inlet, pulling a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plugging the outlet at the quick disconnect, and then turning off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 0.5 minute. Evacuate the flexible bag. Connect the probe, and place it in the stack, with the tip of the probe positioned at the sampling point; purge the sampling line. Next, connect the bag, and make sure that all connections are tight.
8.2.3 Sample at a constant rate, or as specified by the Administrator. The sampling run must be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate determination. Collect at least 28 liters (1.0 ft 3) of sample gas. Smaller volumes may be collected, subject to approval of the Administrator.
8.2.4 Obtain one integrated flue gas sample during each pollutant emission rate determination. For emission rate correction factor determination, analyze the sample within 4 hours after it is taken for percent CO2 or percent O2 (as outlined in section 11.2).
8.3 Multi-Point, Integrated Sampling and Analytical Procedure.
8.3.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation, or by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of 12 traverse points shall be used for all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1.
8.3.2 Follow the procedures outlined in sections 8.2.2 through 8.2.4, except for the following: Traverse all sampling points, and sample at each point for an equal length of time. Record sampling data as shown in Figure 3-3 of Method 3.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Data Validation Using Fuel Factor. Although in most instances, only CO2 or O2 measurement is required, it is recommended that both CO2 and O2 be measured to provide a check on the quality of the data. The data validation procedure of section 12.3 is suggested.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Analyzer. The analyzer and analyzer operator technique should be audited periodically as follows: take a sample from a manifold containing a known mixture of CO2 and O2, and analyze according to the procedure in section 11.3. Repeat this procedure until the measured concentration of three consecutive samples agrees with the stated value ±0.5 percent. If necessary, take corrective action, as specified in the analyzer users manual.
10.2 Rotameter. The rotameter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instruction.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Maintenance. The Orsat analyzer should be maintained according to the manufacturers specifications.
11.2 Grab Sample Analysis. To ensure complete absorption of the CO2, O2, or if applicable, CO, make repeated passes through each absorbing solution until two consecutive readings are the same. Several passes (three or four) should be made between readings. (If constant readings cannot be obtained after three consecutive readings, replace the absorbing solution.) Although in most cases, only CO2 or O2 concentration is required, it is recommended that both CO2 and O2 be measured, and that the procedure in section 12.3 be used to validate the analytical data.
11.3 Integrated Sample Analysis. The Orsat analyzer must be leak-checked (see section 11.5 of Method 3) before the analysis. If excess air is desired, proceed as follows: (1) within 4 hours after the sample is taken, analyze it (as in sections 11.3.1 through 11.3.3) for percent CO2, O2, and CO; (2) determine the percentage of the gas that is N2 by subtracting the sum of the percent CO2, percent O2, and percent CO from 100 percent; and (3) calculate percent excess air, as outlined in section 12.2.
11.3.1 To ensure complete absorption of the CO2, O2, or if applicable, CO, follow the procedure described in section 11.2.
11.3.2 Repeat the analysis until the following criteria are met:
11.3.2.1 For percent CO2, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when CO2 is greater than 4.0 percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when CO2 is less than or equal to 4.0 percent. Average three acceptable values of percent CO2, and report the results to the nearest 0.2 percent.
11.3.2.2 For percent O2, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than (a) 0.3 percent by volume when O2 is less than 15.0 percent or (b) 0.2 percent by volume when O2 is greater than or equal to 15.0 percent. Average the three acceptable values of percent O2, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 percent.
11.3.2.3 For percent CO, repeat the analytical procedure until the results of any three analyses differ by no more than 0.3 percent. Average the three acceptable values of percent CO, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 percent.
11.3.3 After the analysis is completed, leak-check (mandatory) the Orsat analyzer once again, as described in section 11.5 of Method 3. For the results of the analysis to be valid, the Orsat analyzer must pass this leak-test before and after the analysis.
11.4 Standardization. A periodic check of the reagents and of operator technique should be conducted at least once every three series of test runs as indicated in section 10.1.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as section 12.1 of Method 3 with the addition of the following:
%EA = Percent excess air.
0.264 = Ratio of O2 to N2 in air, v/v.
12.2 Percent Excess Air. Determine the percentage of the gas that is N2 by subtracting the sum of the percent CO2, percent CO, and percent O2 from 100 percent. Calculate the percent excess air (if applicable) by substituting the appropriate values of percent O2, CO, and N2 into Equation 3B-1.
12.3 Data Validation When Both CO2 and O2 Are Measured.
12.3.1 Fuel Factor, Fo. Calculate the fuel factor (if applicable) using Equation 3B-2:
Where:
%O2 = Percent O2 by volume, dry basis.
%CO2 = Percent CO2 by volume, dry basis.
20.9 = Percent O2 by volume in ambient air.
If CO is present in quantities measurable by this method, adjust the O2 and CO2 values using Equations 3B-3 and 3B-4 before performing the calculation for Fo:
Where:
%CO = Percent CO by volume, dry basis.
12.3.2 Compare the calculated Fo factor with the expected Fo values. Table 3B-1 in section 17.0 may be used in establishing acceptable ranges for the expected Fo if the fuel being burned is known. When fuels are burned in combinations, calculate the combined fuel Fd and Fc factors (as defined in Method 19, section 12.2) according to the procedure in Method 19, sections 12.2 and 12.3. Then calculate the Fo factor according to Equation 3B-5.
12.3.3 Calculated Fo values, beyond the acceptable ranges shown in this table, should be investigated before accepting the test results. For example, the strength of the solutions in the gas analyzer and the analyzing technique should be checked by sampling and analyzing a known concentration, such as air; the fuel factor should be reviewed and verified. An acceptability range of ±12 percent is appropriate for the Fo factor of mixed fuels with variable fuel ratios. The level of the emission rate relative to the compliance level should be considered in determining if a retest is appropriate; i.e., if the measured emissions are much lower or much greater than the compliance limit, repetition of the test would not significantly change the compliance status of the source and would be unnecessarily time consuming and costly.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 3, section 16.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Fuel type | Fo range |
|---|---|
| Coal: | |
| Anthracite and lignite | 1.016-1.130 |
| Bituminous | 1.083-1.230 |
| Oil: | |
| Distillate | 1.260-1.413 |
| Residual | 1.210-1.370 |
| Gas: | |
| Natural | 1.600-1.836 |
| Propane | 1.434-1.586 |
| Butane | 1.405-1.553 |
| Wood | 1.000-1.120 |
| Wood bark | 1.003-1.130 |
Method 3C—Determination of Carbon Dioxide, Methane, Nitrogen, and Oxygen From Stationary Sources
1. Applicability and Principle
1.1 Applicability. This method applies to the analysis of carbon dioxide (CO2), methane (CH4), nitrogen (N2), and oxygen (O2) in samples from municipal solid waste landfills and other sources when specified in an applicable subpart.
1.2 Principle. A portion of the sample is injected into a gas chromatograph (GC) and the CO2, CH4, N2, and O2 concentrations are determined by using a thermal conductivity detector (TCD) and integrator.
2. Range and Sensitivity
2.1 Range. The range of this method depends upon the concentration of samples. The analytical range of TCD's is generally between approximately 10 ppmv and the upper percent range.
2.2 Sensitivity. The sensitivity limit for a compound is defined as the minimum detectable concentration of that compound, or the concentration that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of three to one. For CO2, CH4, N2, and O2, the sensitivity limit is in the low ppmv range.
3. Interferences
Since the TCD exhibits universal response and detects all gas components except the carrier, interferences may occur. Choosing the appropriate GC or shifting the retention times by changing the column flow rate may help to eliminate resolution interferences.
To assure consistent detector response, helium is used to prepare calibration gases. Frequent exposure to samples or carrier gas containing oxygen may gradually destroy filaments.
4. Apparatus
4.1 Gas Chromatograph. GC having at least the following components:
4.1.1 Separation Column. Appropriate column(s) to resolve CO2, CH4, N2, O2, and other gas components that may be present in the sample.
4.1.2 Sample Loop. Teflon or stainless steel tubing of the appropriate diameter.
4.1.3 Conditioning System. To maintain the column and sample loop at constant temperature.
4.1.4 Thermal Conductivity Detector.
4.2 Recorder. Recorder with linear strip chart. Electronic integrator (optional) is recommended.
4.3 Teflon Tubing. Diameter and length determined by connection requirements of cylinder regulators and the GC.
4.4 Regulators. To control gas cylinder pressures and flow rates.
4.5 Adsorption Tubes. Applicable traps to remove any O2 from the carrier gas.
5. Reagents
5.1 Calibration and Linearity Gases. Standard cylinder gas mixtures for each compound of interest with at least three concentration levels spanning the range of suspected sample concentrations. The calibration gases shall be prepared in helium.
5.2 Carrier Gas. Helium, high-purity.
6. Analysis
6.1 Sample Collection. Use the sample collection procedures described in Methods 3 or 25C to collect a sample of landfill gas (LFG).
6.2 Preparation of GC. Before putting the GC analyzer into routine operation, optimize the operational conditions according to the manufacturer's specifications to provide good resolution and minimum analysis time. Establish the appropriate carrier gas flow and set the detector sample and reference cell flow rates at exactly the same levels. Adjust the column and detector temperatures to the recommended levels. Allow sufficient time for temperature stabilization. This may typically require 1 hour for each change in temperature.
6.3 Analyzer Linearity Check and Calibration. Perform this test before sample analysis.
6.3.1 Using the gas mixtures in section 5.1, verify the detector linearity over the range of suspected sample concentrations with at least three concentrations per compound of interest. This initial check may also serve as the initial instrument calibration.
6.3.2 You may extend the use of the analyzer calibration by performing a single-point calibration verification. Calibration verifications shall be performed by triplicate injections of a single-point standard gas. The concentration of the single-point calibration must either be at the midpoint of the calibration curve or at approximately the source emission concentration measured during operation of the analyzer.
6.3.3 Triplicate injections must agree within 5 percent of their mean, and the average calibration verification point must agree within 10 percent of the initial calibration response factor. If these calibration verification criteria are not met, the initial calibration described in section 6.3.1, using at least three concentrations, must be repeated before analysis of samples can continue.
6.3.4 For each instrument calibration, record the carrier and detector flow rates, detector filament and block temperatures, attenuation factor, injection time, chart speed, sample loop volume, and component concentrations.
6.3.5 Plot a linear regression of the standard concentrations versus area values to obtain the response factor of each compound. Alternatively, response factors of uncorrected component concentrations (wet basis) may be generated using instrumental integration.
6.4 Sample Analysis. Purge the sample loop with sample, and allow to come to atmospheric pressure before each injection. Analyze each sample in duplicate, and calculate the average sample area (A). The results are acceptable when the peak areas for two consecutive injections agree within 5 percent of their average. If they do not agree, run additional samples until consistent area data are obtained. Determine the tank sample concentrations according to section 7.2.
7. Calculations
Carry out calculations retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off results only after the final calculation.
7.1 Nomenclature.
Bw = Moisture content in the sample, fraction.
CN2 = Measured N2 concentration (by Method 3C), fraction.
CN2Corr = Measured N2 concentration corrected only for dilution, fraction.
Ct = Calculated NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent.
Ctm = Measured NMOC concentration, ppmv C equivalent.
Pb = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pt = Gas sample tank pressure after sampling, but before pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
Ptf = Final gas sample tank pressure after pressurizing, mm Hg absolute.
Pti = Gas sample tank pressure after evacuation, mm Hg absolute.
Pw = Vapor pressure of H2O (from Table 25C-1), mm Hg.
r = Total number of analyzer injections of sample tank during analysis (where j = injection number, 1 . . . r).
R = Mean calibration response factor for specific sample component, area/ppm.
Tt = Sample tank temperature at completion of sampling, °K.
Tti = Sample tank temperature before sampling, °K.
Ttf = Sample tank temperature after pressurizing, °K.
7.2 Concentration of Sample Components. Calculate C for each compound using Equations 3C-1 and 3C-2. Use the temperature and barometric pressure at the sampling site to calculate Bw. If the sample was diluted with helium using the procedures in Method 25C, use Equation 3C-3 to calculate the concentration.
7.3 Measured N2 Concentration Correction. Calculate the reported N2 correction for Method 25-C using Eq. 3C-4. If oxygen is determined in place of N2, substitute the oxygen concentration for the nitrogen concentration in the equation.
8. Bibliography
1. McNair, H.M., and E.J. Bonnelli. Basic Gas Chromatography. Consolidated Printers, Berkeley, CA. 1969.
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-3 to Part 60—Test Methods 4 through 5I
Method 4—Determination of moisture content in stack gases
Method 5—Determination of particulate matter emissions from stationary sources
Method 5A—Determination of particulate matter emissions from the asphalt processing and asphalt roofing industry
Method 5B—Determination of nonsulfuric acid particulate matter emissions from stationary sources
Method 5C [Reserved]
Method 5D—Determination of particulate matter emissions from positive pressure fabric filters
Method 5E—Determination of particulate matter emissions from the wool fiberglass insulation manufacturing industry
Method 5F—Determination of nonsulfate particulate matter emissions from stationary sources
Method 5G—Determination of particulate matter emissions from wood heaters (dilution tunnel sampling location)
Method 5H—Determination of particulate emissions from wood heaters from a stack location
Method 5I—Determination of Low Level Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Water vapor (H2 O) | 7732-18-5 | N/A |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of the moisture content of stack gas.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted at a constant rate from the source; moisture is removed from the sample stream and determined gravimetrically.
2.2 The method contains two possible procedures: a reference method and an approximation method.
2.2.1 The reference method is used for accurate determinations of moisture content (such as are needed to calculate emission data). The approximation method, provides estimates of percent moisture to aid in setting isokinetic sampling rates prior to a pollutant emission measurement run. The approximation method described herein is only a suggested approach; alternative means for approximating the moisture content (e.g., drying tubes, wet bulb-dry bulb techniques, condensation techniques, stoichiometric calculations, previous experience, etc.) are also acceptable.
2.2.2 The reference method is often conducted simultaneously with a pollutant emission measurement run. When it is, calculation of percent isokinetic, pollutant emission rate, etc., for the run shall be based upon the results of the reference method or its equivalent. These calculations shall not be based upon the results of the approximation method, unless the approximation method is shown, to the satisfaction of the Administrator, to be capable of yielding results within one percent H2O of the reference method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 The moisture content of saturated gas streams or streams that contain water droplets, as measured by the reference method, may be positively biased. Therefore, when these conditions exist or are suspected, a second determination of the moisture content shall be made simultaneously with the reference method, as follows: Assume that the gas stream is saturated. Attach a temperature sensor [capable of measuring to ±1 °C (2 °F)] to the reference method probe. Measure the stack gas temperature at each traverse point (see section 8.1.1.1) during the reference method traverse, and calculate the average stack gas temperature. Next, determine the moisture percentage, either by: (1) Using a psychrometric chart and making appropriate corrections if the stack pressure is different from that of the chart, or (2) using saturation vapor pressure tables. In cases where the psychrometric chart or the saturation vapor pressure tables are not applicable (based on evaluation of the process), alternative methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, shall be used.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Reference Method. A schematic of the sampling train used in this reference method is shown in Figure 4-1.
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel or glass tubing, sufficiently heated to prevent water condensation, and equipped with a filter, either in-stack (e.g., a plug of glass wool inserted into the end of the probe) or heated out-of-stack (e.g., as described in Method 5), to remove particulate matter. When stack conditions permit, other metals or plastic tubing may be used for the probe, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.2 Condenser. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.8.
6.1.3 Cooling System. An ice bath container, crushed ice, and water (or equivalent), to aid in condensing moisture.
6.1.4 Metering System. Same as in Method 5, section 6.1.1.9, except do not use sampling systems designed for flow rates higher than 0.0283 m 3/min (1.0 cfm). Other metering systems, capable of maintaining a constant sampling rate to within 10 percent and determining sample gas volume to within 2 percent, may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.5 Barometer and Balance. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.2 and 6.2.5, respectively.
6.2. Approximation Method. A schematic of the sampling train used in this approximation method is shown in Figure 4-2.
6.2.1 Probe. Same as section 6.1.1.
6.2.2 Condenser. Two midget impingers, each with 30-ml capacity, or equivalent.
6.2.3 Cooling System. Ice bath container, crushed ice, and water, to aid in condensing moisture in impingers.
6.2.4 Drying Tube. Tube packed with new or regenerated 6- to 16-mesh indicating-type silica gel (or equivalent desiccant), to dry the sample gas and to protect the meter and pump.
6.2.5 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate the sample gas flow rate.
6.2.6 Pump. Leak-free, diaphragm type, or equivalent, to pull the gas sample through the train.
6.2.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, sufficiently accurate to measure the sample volume to within 2 percent, and calibrated over the range of flow rates and conditions actually encountered during sampling.
6.2.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure the flow range from 0 to 3 liters/min (0 to 0.11 cfm).
6.2.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml.
6.2.10 Barometer. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.2.
6.2.11 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760-mm (30-in.) Hg gauge, to be used for the sampling leak check.
7.0 Reagents and Standards [Reserved]
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Reference Method. The following procedure is intended for a condenser system (such as the impinger system described in section 6.1.1.8 of Method 5) incorporating volumetric analysis to measure the condensed moisture, and silica gel and gravimetric analysis to measure the moisture leaving the condenser.
8.1.1 Preliminary Determinations.
8.1.1.1 Unless otherwise specified by the Administrator, a minimum of eight traverse points shall be used for circular stacks having diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), a minimum of nine points shall be used for rectangular stacks having equivalent diameters less than 0.61 m (24 in.), and a minimum of twelve traverse points shall be used in all other cases. The traverse points shall be located according to Method 1. The use of fewer points is subject to the approval of the Administrator. Select a suitable probe and probe length such that all traverse points can be sampled. Consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack (four total sampling ports) for large stacks, to permit use of shorter probe lengths. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point.
8.1.1.2 Select a total sampling time such that a minimum total gas volume of 0.60 scm (21 scf) will be collected, at a rate no greater than 0.021 m 3/min (0.75 cfm). When both moisture content and pollutant emission rate are to be determined, the moisture determination shall be simultaneous with, and for the same total length of time as, the pollutant emission rate run, unless otherwise specified in an applicable subpart of the standards.
8.1.2 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.2.1 Transfer water into the first two impingers, leave the third impinger empty and add silica gel to the fourth impinger. Weigh the impingers before sampling and record the weight to the nearest 0.5g at a minimum.
8.1.2.2 Set up the sampling train as shown in Figure 4-1. Turn on the probe heater and (if applicable) the filter heating system to temperatures of approximately 120 °C (248 °F), to prevent water condensation ahead of the condenser. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. Place crushed ice and water in the ice bath container.
8.1.3 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.1.3.1 Leak Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 4-1. That portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter should be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each shipment. Leakage after the pump will result in less volume being recorded than is actually sampled. The following procedure is suggested (see Figure 5-2 of Method 5): Close the main valve on the meter box. Insert a one-hole rubber stopper with rubber tubing attached into the orifice exhaust pipe. Disconnect and vent the low side of the orifice manometer. Close off the low side orifice tap. Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm (5 to 7 in.) water column by blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing and observe the manometer for one minute. A loss of pressure on the manometer indicates a leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must be corrected.
8.1.3.2 Pretest Leak Check. A pretest leak check of the sampling train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is conducted, the following procedure should be used.
8.1.3.2.1 After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and set the filter and probe heating systems to the desired operating temperatures. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize.
8.1.3.2.2 Leak-check the train by first plugging the inlet to the filter holder and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Then connect the probe to the train, and leak-check at approximately 25 mm (1 in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe may be leak-checked with the rest of the sampling train, in one step, at 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, are unacceptable.
8.1.3.2.3 Start the pump with the bypass valve fully open and the coarse adjust valve completely closed. Partially open the coarse adjust valve, and slowly close the bypass valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as this will cause water to back up into the filter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, either leak-check at this higher vacuum, or end the leak check and start over.
8.1.3.2.4 When the leak check is completed, first slowly remove the plug from the inlet to the probe, filter holder, and immediately turn off the vacuum pump. This prevents the water in the impingers from being forced backward into the filter holder and the silica gel from being entrained backward into the third impinger.
8.1.3.3 Leak Checks During Sample Run. If, during the sampling run, a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes necessary, a leak check shall be conducted immediately before the change is made. The leak check shall be done according to the procedure outlined in section 8.1.3.2, except that it shall be done at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that point in the test. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction will need to be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered; if, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and plan to correct the sample volume as shown in section 12.3 of Method 5, or void the sample run.
Note: Immediately after component changes, leak checks are optional. If such leak checks are done, the procedure outlined in section 8.1.3.2 should be used.
8.1.3.4 Post-Test Leak Check. A leak check of the sampling train is mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run. The leak check shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in section 8.1.3.2, except that it shall be conducted at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m 3 min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction need be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered. If, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and correct the sample volume as shown in section 12.3 of Method 5 or void the sampling run.
8.1.4 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain a sampling rate within 10 percent of constant rate, or as specified by the Administrator. For each run, record the data required on a data sheet similar to that shown in Figure 4-3. Be sure to record the dry gas meter reading at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment and whenever sampling is halted. Take other appropriate readings at each sample point at least once during each time increment.
8.1.4.1 To begin sampling, position the probe tip at the first traverse point. Immediately start the pump, and adjust the flow to the desired rate. Traverse the cross section, sampling at each traverse point for an equal length of time. Add more ice and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the silica gel outlet.
8.1.4.2 At the end of the sample run, close the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, record the final DGM meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak check, as outlined in section 8.1.3.4.
8.2 Approximation Method.
8.2.1 Place exactly 5 ml water in each impinger. Leak check the sampling train as follows: Temporarily insert a vacuum gauge at or near the probe inlet. Then, plug the probe inlet and pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm (10 in.) Hg. Note the time rate of change of the dry gas meter dial; alternatively, a rotameter (0 to 40 ml/min) may be temporarily attached to the dry gas meter outlet to determine the leakage rate. A leak rate not in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate is acceptable.
8.2.2 Connect the probe, insert it into the stack, and sample at a constant rate of 2 liters/min (0.071 cfm). Continue sampling until the dry gas meter registers about 30 liters (1.1 ft 3) or until visible liquid droplets are carried over from the first impinger to the second. Record temperature, pressure, and dry gas meter readings as indicated by Figure 4-4.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| Section 8.1.3.2.2 | Leak rate of the sampling system cannot exceed four percent of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m3/min (0.020 cfm) | Ensures the accuracy of the volume of gas sampled. (Reference Method). |
| Section 8.2.1 | Leak rate of the sampling system cannot exceed two percent of the average sampling rate | Ensures the accuracy of the volume of gas sampled. (Approximation Method). |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Reference Method. Calibrate the metering system, temperature sensors, and barometer according to Method 5, sections 10.3, 10.5, and 10.6, respectively.
10.2 Approximation Method. Calibrate the metering system and the barometer according to Method 6, section 10.1 and Method 5, section 10.6, respectively.
10.3 Field Balance Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the balance used to weigh impingers with a weight that is at least 500g or within 50g of a loaded impinger. The weight must be ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference-see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 6 (or better). Daily, before use, the field balance must measure the weight within ± 0.5g of the certified mass. If the daily balance calibration check fails, perform corrective measures and repeat the check before using balance.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Reference Method. Weigh the impingers after sampling and record the difference in weight to the nearest 0.5 g at a minimum. Determine the increase in weight of the silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g at a minimum. Record this information (see example data sheet, Figure 4-5), and calculate the moisture content, as described in section 12.0.
11.2 Approximation Method. Weigh the contents of the two impingers, and measure the weight to the nearest 0.5 g.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the following calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Reference Method.
12.1.1 Nomenclature.
Bws = Proportion of water vapor, by volume, in the gas stream.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.015 g/g-mole (18.015 lb/lb-mole).
Pm = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 (mm Hg)(m 3)/(g-mole)(°K) for metric units and 21.85 (in. Hg)(ft 3)/(lb-mole) (°R) for English units.
Tm = Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293.15 °K (527.67 °R).
Vf = Final weight of condenser water plus impinger, g.
Vi = Initial weight, if any, of condenser water plus impinger, g.
Vm = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vwc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Vwsg(std) = Volume of water vapor collected in silica gel, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Wf = Final weight of silica gel or silica gel plus impinger, g.
Wi = Initial weight of silica gel or silica gel plus impinger, g.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
ΔVm = Incremental dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter at each traverse point, dcm (dcf).
12.1.2 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed.
Where:
K1 = 0.001335 m 3/g for metric units,
= 0.04716 ft 3/g for English units.
12.1.3 Volume of Water Collected in Silica Gel.
Where:
K3 = 0.001335 m 3/g for metric units = 0.04716 ft 3/g for English units.
12.1.4 Sample Gas Volume.
Where:
K4 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.1.5 Moisture Content.
12.1.6 Verification of Constant Sampling Rate. For each time increment, determine the ΔVm. Calculate the average. If the value for any time increment differs from the average by more than 10 percent, reject the results, and repeat the run.
12.1.7 In saturated or moisture droplet-laden gas streams, two calculations of the moisture content of the stack gas shall be made, one using a value based upon the saturated conditions (see section 4.1), and another based upon the results of the impinger analysis. The lower of these two values of Bws shall be considered correct.
12.2 Approximation Method. The approximation method presented is designed to estimate the moisture in the stack gas; therefore, other data, which are only necessary for accurate moisture determinations, are not collected. The following equations adequately estimate the moisture content for the purpose of determining isokinetic sampling rate settings.
12.2.1 Nomenclature.
Bwm = Approximate proportion by volume of water vapor in the gas stream leaving the second impinger, 0.025.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.015 g/g-mole (18.015 lb/lb-mole).
Pm = Absolute pressure (for this method, same as barometric pressure) at the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg)(m 3)]/[(g-mole)(K)] for metric units and 21.85 [(in. Hg)(ft 3)]/[(lb-mole)(°R)] for English units.
Tm = Absolute temperature at meter, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293.15 °K (527.67 °R).
Vf = Final weight of condenser water plus impinger, g.
Vi = Initial weight, if any, of condenser water plus impinger, g.
Vm = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vwc(std) = Volume of water vapor condensed, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
12.2.2 Volume of Water Vapor Collected.
K5 = 0.001335 m 3/g for metric units,
= 0.04716 ft 3/g for English units.
12.2.3 Sample Gas Volume.
Where:
K6 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.2.4 Approximate Moisture Content.
12.2.5 Using F-factors to determine approximate moisture for estimating moisture content where no wet scrubber is being used, for the purpose of determining isokinetic sampling rate settings with no fuel sample, is acceptable using the average Fc or Fd factor from Method 19 (see Method 19, section 12.3.1). If this option is selected, calculate the approximate moisture as follows:
Bws = BH + BA+ BF
Where:
BA = Mole Fraction of moisture in the ambient air.
Bws = Mole fraction of moisture in the stack gas.
Fd = Volume of dry combustion components per unit of heat content at 0 percent oxygen, dscf/10 6.
Btu (scm/J). See Table 19-2 in Method 19.
Fw = Volume of wet combustion components per unit of heat content at 0 percent oxygen, wet.
scf/10 6 Btu (scm/J). See Table 19-2 in Method 19.
%RH = Percent relative humidity (calibrated hygrometer acceptable), percent.
PBar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
T = Ambient temperature, °F.
W = Percent free water by weight, percent.
O2 = Percent oxygen in stack gas, dry basis, percent.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 The procedure described in Method 5 for determining moisture content is an acceptable alternative to Method 4.
16.2 The procedures in Method 6A for determining moisture is an acceptable alternative to Method 4.
16.3 Method 320 is an acceptable alternative to Method 4 for determining moisture.
16.4 Using F-factors to determine moisture is an acceptable alternative to Method 4 for a combustion stack not using a scrubber, and where a fuel sample is taken during the test run and analyzed for development of an Fd factor (see Method 19, section 12.3.2), and where stack O2 content is measured by Method 3A or 3B during each test run. If this option is selected, calculate the moisture content as follows:
Bws = BH + BA + BF
Where:
BA = Mole fraction of moisture in the ambient air.
BF = Mole fraction of moisture from free water in the fuel.
BH = Mole fraction of moisture from the hydrogen in the fuel.
Bws = Mole fraction of moisture in the stack gas.
Fd = Volume of dry combustion components per unit of heat content at 0 percent oxygen, dscf/10 6 Btu (scm/J). Develop a test specific Fd value using an integrated fuel sample from each test run and Equation 19-13 in section 12.3.2 of Method 19.
Fw = Volume of wet combustion components per unit of heat content at 0 percent oxygen, wet scf/10 6 Btu (scm/J). Develop a test specific Fw value using an integrated fuel sample from each test run and Equation 19-14 in section 12.3.2 of Method 19.
%RH = Percent relative humidity (calibrated hygrometer acceptable), percent.
PBar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
T = Ambient temperature, °F.
W = Percent free water by weight, percent.
O2 = Percent oxygen in stack gas, dry basis, percent.
17.0 References
1. Air Pollution Engineering Manual (Second Edition). Danielson, J.A. (ed.). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. AP-40. 1973.
2. Devorkin, Howard, et al. Air Pollution Source Testing Manual. Air Pollution Control District, Los Angeles, CA. November 1963.
3. Methods for Determination of Velocity, Volume, Dust and Mist Content of Gases. Western Precipitation Division of Joy Manufacturing Co. Los Angeles, CA. Bulletin WP-50. 1968.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Figure 4-3. Moisture Determination—Reference Method
Method 5—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application. The PM mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this method is shown in Figure 5-1 in section 18.0. Complete construction details are given in APTD-0581 (Reference 2 in section 17.0); commercial models of this train are also available. For changes from APTD-0581 and for allowable modifications of the train shown in Figure 5-1, see the following subsections.
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Stainless steel (316) or glass with a sharp, tapered leading edge. The angle of taper shall be ≤30°, and the taper shall be on the outside to preserve a constant internal diameter. The probe nozzle shall be of the button-hook or elbow design, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. If made of stainless steel, the nozzle shall be constructed from seamless tubing. Other materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling should be available. Typical nozzle sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm ( 1/8 to 1/2 in) inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm ( 1/16 in). Larger nozzles sizes are also available if higher volume sampling trains are used. Each nozzle shall be calibrated, according to the procedures outlined in section 10.1.
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass tubing with a heating system capable of maintaining a probe gas temperature during sampling of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F), or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or as approved by the Administrator for a particular application. Since the actual temperature at the outlet of the probe is not usually monitored during sampling, probes constructed according to APTD-0581 and utilizing the calibration curves of APTD-0576 (or calibrated according to the procedure outlined in APTD-0576) will be considered acceptable. Either borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners may be used for stack temperatures up to about 480 °C (900 °F); quartz glass liners shall be used for temperatures between 480 and 900 °C (900 and 1,650 °F). Both types of liners may be used at higher temperatures than specified for short periods of time, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The softening temperature for borosilicate glass is 820 °C (1500 °F), and for quartz glass it is 1500 °C (2700 °F). Whenever practical, every effort should be made to use borosilicate or quartz glass probe liners. Alternatively, metal liners (e.g., 316 stainless steel, Incoloy 825 or other corrosion resistant metals) made of seamless tubing may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.1.3 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in section 6.1 of Method 2, or other device approved by the Administrator. The pitot tube shall be attached to the probe (as shown in Figure 5-1) to allow constant monitoring of the stack gas velocity. The impact (high pressure) opening plane of the pitot tube shall be even with or above the nozzle entry plane (see Method 2, Figure 2-7) during sampling. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient, determined as outlined in section 10.0 of Method 2.
6.1.1.4 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer or equivalent device (two), as described in section 6.2 of Method 2. One manometer shall be used for velocity head (Δp) readings, and the other, for orifice differential pressure readings.
6.1.1.5 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass or Teflon frit filter support and a silicone rubber gasket. Other materials of construction (e.g., stainless steel or Viton) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The holder shall be attached immediately at the outlet of the probe (or cyclone, if used).
6.1.1.6 Filter Heating System. Any heating system capable of monitoring and maintaining temperature around the filter shall be used to ensure the sample gas temperature exiting the filter of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) during sampling or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application. The monitoring and regulation of the temperature around the filter may be done with the filter temperature sensor or another temperature sensor.
6.1.1.7 Filter Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (5.4 °F) shall be installed so that the sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in direct contact with the sample gas exiting the filter. The sensing tip of the sensor may be encased in glass, Teflon, or metal and must protrude at least 1/2 in. into the sample gas exiting the filter. The filter temperature sensor must be monitored and recorded during sampling to ensure a sample gas temperature exiting the filter of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F), or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
6.1.1.8 Condenser. The following system shall be used to determine the stack gas moisture content: Four impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings. The first, third, and fourth impingers shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) ID glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. The second impinger shall be of the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip. Modifications (e.g., using flexible connections between the impingers, using materials other than glass, or using flexible vacuum lines to connect the filter holder to the condenser) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The first and second impingers shall contain known quantities of water (Section 8.3.1), the third shall be empty, and the fourth shall contain a known weight of silica gel, or equivalent desiccant. A temperature sensor, capable of measuring temperature to within 1 °C (2 °F) shall be placed at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes. Alternatively, any system that cools the sample gas stream and allows measurement of the water condensed and moisture leaving the condenser, each to within 0.5 g may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. An acceptable technique involves the measurement of condensed water either gravimetrically and the determination of the moisture leaving the condenser by: (1) Monitoring the temperature and pressure at the exit of the condenser and using Dalton's law of partial pressures; or (2) passing the sample gas stream through a tared silica gel (or equivalent desiccant) trap with exit gases kept below 20 °C (68 °F) and determining the weight gain. If means other than silica gel are used to determine the amount of moisture leaving the condenser, it is recommended that silica gel (or equivalent) still be used between the condenser system and pump to prevent moisture condensation in the pump and metering devices and to avoid the need to make corrections for moisture in the metered volume.
6.1.1.9 Metering System. Vacuum gauge, leak-free pump, calibrated temperature sensors, dry gas meter (DGM) capable of measuring volume to within 2 percent, and related equipment, as shown in Figure 5-1. Other metering systems capable of maintaining sampling rates within 10 percent of isokinetic and of determining sample volumes to within 2 percent may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. When the metering system is used in conjunction with a pitot tube, the system shall allow periodic checks of isokinetic rates. The average DGM temperature for use in the calculations of section 12.0 may be obtained by averaging the two temperature sensors located at the inlet and outlet of the DGM as shown in Figure 5-3 or alternatively from a single temperature sensor located at the immediate outlet of the DGM or the plenum of the DGM.
6.1.1.10 Sampling trains utilizing metering systems designed for higher flow rates than that described in APTD-0581 or APTD-0576 may be used provided that the specifications of this method are met.
6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in.).
6.1.3 Gas Density Determination Equipment. Temperature sensor and pressure gauge, as described in sections 6.3 and 6.4 of Method 2, and gas analyzer, if necessary, as described in Method 3. The temperature sensor shall, preferably, be permanently attached to the pitot tube or sampling probe in a fixed configuration, such that the tip of the sensor extends beyond the leading edge of the probe sheath and does not touch any metal. Alternatively, the sensor may be attached just prior to use in the field. Note, however, that if the temperature sensor is attached in the field, the sensor must be placed in an interference-free arrangement with respect to the Type S pitot tube openings (see Method 2, Figure 2-4). As a second alternative, if a difference of not more than 1 percent in the average velocity measurement is to be introduced, the temperature sensor need not be attached to the probe or pitot tube. (This alternative is subject to the approval of the Administrator.)
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Nylon bristle brushes with stainless steel wire handles. The probe brush shall have extensions (at least as long as the probe) constructed of stainless steel, Nylon, Teflon, or similarly inert material. The brushes shall be properly sized and shaped to brush out the probe liner and nozzle.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Glass wash bottles are recommended. Alternatively, polyethylene wash bottles may be used. It is recommended that acetone not be stored in polyethylene bottles for longer than a month.
6.2.3 Glass Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant, borosilicate glass bottles, for acetone washes, 500 ml or 1000 ml. Screw cap liners shall either be rubber-backed Teflon or shall be constructed so as to be leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by acetone. (Narrow mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.) Alternatively, polyethylene bottles may be used.
6.2.4 Petri dishes. For filter samples; glass, polystyrene, or polyethylene, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
6.2.5 Balance. To measure condensed water to within 0.5 g at a minimum.
6.2.6 Plastic Storage Containers. Air-tight containers to store silica gel.
6.2.7 Funnel and Rubber Policeman. To aid in transfer of silica gel to container; not necessary if silica gel is weighed in the field.
6.2.8 Funnel. Glass or polyethylene, to aid in sample recovery.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equipment is required for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Glass Weighing Dishes.
6.3.2 Desiccator.
6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
6.3.4 Balance. To measure to within 0.5 g.
6.3.5 Beakers. 250 ml.
6.3.6 Hygrometer. To measure the relative humidity of the laboratory environment.
6.3.7 Temperature Sensor. To measure the temperature of the laboratory environment.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. The filter efficiency test shall be conducted in accordance with ASTM Method D 2986-71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). Test data from the supplier's quality control program are sufficient for this purpose. In sources containing SO2 or SO3, the filter material must be of a type that is unreactive to SO2 or SO3. Reference 10 in section 17.0 may be used to select the appropriate filter.
7.1.2 Silica Gel. Indicating type, 6 to 16 mesh. If previously used, dry at 175 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
7.1.3 Water. When analysis of the material caught in the impingers is required, deionized distilled water [to conform to ASTM D1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17)] with at least <0.001 percent residue shall be used or as specified in the applicable method requiring analysis of the water. Run reagent blanks prior to field use to eliminate a high blank on test samples.
7.1.4 Crushed Ice.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone, reagent grade, ≤0.001 percent residue, in glass bottles, is required. Acetone from metal containers generally has a high residue blank and should not be used. Sometimes, suppliers transfer acetone to glass bottles from metal containers; thus, acetone blanks shall be run prior to field use and only acetone with low blank values (≤0.001 percent) shall be used. In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of acetone used be subtracted from the sample weight.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents are required for sample analysis:
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, indicating type. Alternatively, other types of desiccants may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. It is suggested that sampling equipment be maintained according to the procedures described in APTD-0576. Alternative mercury-free thermometers may be used if the thermometers are at a minimum equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
8.1.1 Place 200 to 300 g of silica gel in each of several air-tight containers. Weigh each container, including silica gel, to the nearest 0.5 g, and record this weight. As an alternative, the silica gel need not be preweighed, but may be weighed directly in its impinger or sampling holder just prior to train assembly.
8.1.2 Check filters visually against light for irregularities, flaws, or pinhole leaks. Label filters of the proper diameter on the back side near the edge using numbering machine ink. As an alternative, label the shipping containers (glass, polystyrene or polyethylene petri dishes), and keep each filter in its identified container at all times except during sampling.
8.1.3 Desiccate the filters at 20 ±5.6 °C (68 ±10 °F) and ambient pressure for at least 24 hours. Weigh each filter (or filter and shipping container) at intervals of at least 6 hours to a constant weight (i.e., ≤0.5 mg change from previous weighing). Record results to the nearest 0.1 mg. During each weighing, the period for which the filter is exposed to the laboratory atmosphere shall be less than 2 minutes. Alternatively (unless otherwise specified by the Administrator), the filters may be oven dried at 105 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, desiccated for 2 hours, and weighed. Procedures other than those described, which account for relative humidity effects, may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations.
8.2.1 Select the sampling site and the minimum number of sampling points according to Method 1 or as specified by the Administrator. Determine the stack pressure, temperature, and the range of velocity heads using Method 2; it is recommended that a leak check of the pitot lines (see Method 2, section 8.1) be performed. Determine the moisture content using Approximation Method 4 or its alternatives for the purpose of making isokinetic sampling rate settings. Determine the stack gas dry molecular weight, as described in Method 2, section 8.6; if integrated Method 3 sampling is used for molecular weight determination, the integrated bag sample shall be taken simultaneously with, and for the same total length of time as, the particulate sample run.
8.2.2 Select a nozzle size based on the range of velocity heads, such that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain isokinetic sampling rates. During the run, do not change the nozzle size. Ensure that the proper differential pressure gauge is chosen for the range of velocity heads encountered (see section 8.3 of Method 2).
8.2.3 Select a suitable probe liner and probe length such that all traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack to reduce the required probe length.
8.2.4 Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the minimum total sampling time specified in the test procedures for the specific industry such that (l) the sampling time per point is not less than 2 minutes (or some greater time interval as specified by the Administrator), and (2) the sample volume taken (corrected to standard conditions) will exceed the required minimum total gas sample volume. The latter is based on an approximate average sampling rate.
8.2.5 The sampling time at each point shall be the same. It is recommended that the number of minutes sampled at each point be an integer or an integer plus one-half minute, in order to avoid timekeeping errors.
8.2.6 In some circumstances (e.g., batch cycles) it may be necessary to sample for shorter times at the traverse points and to obtain smaller gas sample volumes. In these cases, the Administrator's approval must first be obtained.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.3.1 During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep all openings where contamination can occur covered until just prior to assembly or until sampling is about to begin. Place 100 ml of water in each of the first two impingers, leave the third impinger empty, and transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from its container to the fourth impinger. More silica gel may be used, but care should be taken to ensure that it is not entrained and carried out from the impinger during sampling. Place the container in a clean place for later use in the sample recovery. Alternatively, the weight of the silica gel plus impinger may be determined to the nearest 0.5 g and recorded.
8.3.2 Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a labeled (identified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be sure that the filter is properly centered and the gasket properly placed so as to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter. Check the filter for tears after assembly is completed.
8.3.3 When glass probe liners are used, install the selected nozzle using a Viton A O-ring when stack temperatures are less than 260 °C (500 °F) or a heat-resistant string gasket when temperatures are higher. See APTD-0576 for details. Other connecting systems using either 316 stainless steel or Teflon ferrules may be used. When metal liners are used, install the nozzle as discussed above or by a leak-free direct mechanical connection. Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point.
8.3.4 Set up the train as shown in Figure 5-1 ensuring that the connections are leak-tight. Subject to the approval of the Administrator, a glass cyclone may be used between the probe and filter holder when the total particulate catch is expected to exceed 100 mg or when water droplets are present in the stack gas.
8.3.5 Place crushed ice around the impingers.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.4.1 Leak Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5-1. That portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter should be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each shipment. Leakage after the pump will result in less volume being recorded than is actually sampled. The following procedure is suggested (see Figure 5-2): Close the main valve on the meter box. Insert a one-hole rubber stopper with rubber tubing attached into the orifice exhaust pipe. Disconnect and vent the low side of the orifice manometer. Close off the low side orifice tap. Pressurize the system to 13 to 18 cm (5 to 7 in.) water column by blowing into the rubber tubing. Pinch off the tubing, and observe the manometer for one minute. A loss of pressure on the manometer indicates a leak in the meter box; leaks, if present, must be corrected.
8.4.2 Pretest Leak Check. A pretest leak check of the sampling train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is conducted, the following procedure should be used.
8.4.2.1 After the sampling train has been assembled, turn on and set the filter and probe heating systems to the desired operating temperatures. Allow time for the temperatures to stabilize. If a Viton A O-ring or other leak-free connection is used in assembling the probe nozzle to the probe liner, leak-check the train at the sampling site by plugging the nozzle and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum.
8.4.2.2 If a heat-resistant string is used, do not connect the probe to the train during the leak check. Instead, leak-check the train by first plugging the inlet to the filter holder (cyclone, if applicable) and pulling a 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum (see note in section 8.4.2.1). Then connect the probe to the train, and leak-check at approximately 25 mm (1 in.) Hg vacuum; alternatively, the probe may be leak-checked with the rest of the sampling train, in one step, at 380 mm (15 in.) Hg vacuum. Leakage rates in excess of 4 percent of the average sampling rate or 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm), whichever is less, are unacceptable.
8.4.2.3 The following leak-check instructions for the sampling train described in APTD-0576 and APTD-0581 may be helpful. Start the pump with the bypass valve fully open and the coarse adjust valve completely closed. Partially open the coarse adjust valve, and slowly close the bypass valve until the desired vacuum is reached. Do not reverse the direction of the bypass valve, as this will cause water to back up into the filter holder. If the desired vacuum is exceeded, either leak-check at this higher vacuum, or end the leak check and start over.
8.4.2.4 When the leak check is completed, first slowly remove the plug from the inlet to the probe, filter holder, or cyclone (if applicable), and immediately turn off the vacuum pump. This prevents the water in the impingers from being forced backward into the filter holder and the silica gel from being entrained backward into the third impinger.
8.4.3 Leak Checks During Sample Run. If, during the sampling run, a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes necessary, a leak check shall be conducted immediately before the change is made. The leak check shall be done according to the procedure outlined in section 8.4.2 above, except that it shall be done at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value recorded up to that point in the test. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction will need to be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered; if, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and plan to correct the sample volume as shown in section 12.3 of this method, or void the sample run.
8.4.4 Post-Test Leak Check. A leak check of the sampling train is mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run. The leak check shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in section 8.4.2, except that it shall be conducted at a vacuum equal to or greater than the maximum value reached during the sampling run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 0.00057 m 3 min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate (whichever is less), the results are acceptable, and no correction need be applied to the total volume of dry gas metered. If, however, a higher leakage rate is obtained, either record the leakage rate and correct the sample volume as shown in section 12.3 of this method, or void the sampling run.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. During the sampling run, maintain an isokinetic sampling rate (within 10 percent of true isokinetic unless otherwise specified by the Administrator) and a sample gas temperature through the filter of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) or such other temperature as specified by an applicable subpart of the standards or approved by the Administrator.
8.5.1 For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-3. Be sure to record the initial DGM reading. Record the DGM readings at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment, when changes in flow rates are made, before and after each leak check, and when sampling is halted. Take other readings indicated by Figure 5-3 at least once at each sample point during each time increment and additional readings when significant changes (20 percent variation in velocity head readings) necessitate additional adjustments in flow rate. Level and zero the manometer. Because the manometer level and zero may drift due to vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic checks during the traverse.
8.5.2 Clean the portholes prior to the test run to minimize the chance of collecting deposited material. To begin sampling, verify that the filter and probe heating systems are up to temperature, remove the nozzle cap, verify that the pitot tube and probe are properly positioned. Position the nozzle at the first traverse point with the tip pointing directly into the gas stream. Immediately start the pump, and adjust the flow to isokinetic conditions. Nomographs are available which aid in the rapid adjustment of the isokinetic sampling rate without excessive computations. These nomographs are designed for use when the Type S pitot tube coefficient (Cp) is 0.85 ±0.02, and the stack gas equivalent density [dry molecular weight (Md)] is equal to 29 ±4. APTD-0576 details the procedure for using the nomographs. If Cp and Md are outside the above stated ranges, do not use the nomographs unless appropriate steps (see Reference 7 in section 17.0) are taken to compensate for the deviations.
8.5.3 When the stack is under significant negative pressure (i.e., height of impinger stem), take care to close the coarse adjust valve before inserting the probe into the stack to prevent water from backing into the filter holder. If necessary, the pump may be turned on with the coarse adjust valve closed.
8.5.4 When the probe is in position, block off the openings around the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas stream.
8.5.5 Traverse the stack cross-section, as required by Method 1 or as specified by the Administrator, being careful not to bump the probe nozzle into the stack walls when sampling near the walls or when removing or inserting the probe through the portholes; this minimizes the chance of extracting deposited material.
8.5.6 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the temperature around the filter holder at the proper level to maintain the sample gas temperature exiting the filter; add more ice and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the condenser/silica gel outlet. Also, periodically check the level and zero of the manometer.
8.5.7 If the pressure drop across the filter becomes too high, making isokinetic sampling difficult to maintain, the filter may be replaced in the midst of the sample run. It is recommended that another complete filter assembly be used rather than attempting to change the filter itself. Before a new filter assembly is installed, conduct a leak check (see section 8.4.3). The total PM weight shall include the summation of the filter assembly catches.
8.5.8 A single train shall be used for the entire sample run, except in cases where simultaneous sampling is required in two or more separate ducts or at two or more different locations within the same duct, or in cases where equipment failure necessitates a change of trains. In all other situations, the use of two or more trains will be subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.5.9 At the end of the sample run, close the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, record the final DGM meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak check, as outlined in section 8.4.4. Also, leak-check the pitot lines as described in Method 2, section 8.1. The lines must pass this leak check, in order to validate the velocity head data.
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Calculate percent isokinetic (see Calculations, section 12.11) to determine whether the run was valid or another test run should be made. If there was difficulty in maintaining isokinetic rates because of source conditions, consult with the Administrator for possible variance on the isokinetic rates.
8.7 Sample Recovery.
8.7.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the probe to cool.
8.7.2 When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external PM near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it to prevent losing or gaining PM. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling down. This would create a vacuum in the filter holder, thereby drawing water from the impingers into the filter holder.
8.7.3 Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the sample train and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Cap the filter inlet where the probe was fastened. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger, and cap the impinger. If a flexible line is used between the first impinger or condenser and the filter holder, disconnect the line at the filter holder, and let any condensed water or liquid drain into the impingers or condenser. Cap off the filter holder outlet and impinger inlet. Either ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps may be used to close these openings.
8.7.4 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be minimized.
8.7.5 Save a portion of the acetone used for cleanup as a blank. From each storage container of acetone used for cleanup, save 200 ml and place in a glass sample container labeled “acetone blank.” To minimize any particulate contamination, rinse the wash bottle prior to filling from the tested container.
8.7.6 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.7.6.1 Container No. 1. Carefully remove the filter from the filter holder, and place it in its identified petri dish container. Use a pair of tweezers and/or clean disposable surgical gloves to handle the filter. If it is necessary to fold the filter, do so such that the PM cake is inside the fold. Using a dry Nylon bristle brush and/or a sharp-edged blade, carefully transfer to the petri dish any PM and/or filter fibers that adhere to the filter holder gasket. Seal the container.
8.7.6.2 Container No. 2. Taking care to see that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with acetone and placing the wash in a glass container. Deionized distilled water may be used instead of acetone when approved by the Administrator and shall be used when specified by the Administrator. In these cases, save a water blank, and follow the Administrator's directions on analysis. Perform the acetone rinse as follows:
8.7.6.2.1 Carefully remove the probe nozzle. Clean the inside surface by rinsing with acetone from a wash bottle and brushing with a Nylon bristle brush. Brush until the acetone rinse shows no visible particles, after which make a final rinse of the inside surface with acetone.
8.7.6.2.2 Brush and rinse the inside parts of the fitting with acetone in a similar way until no visible particles remain.
8.7.6.2.3 Rinse the probe liner with acetone by tilting and rotating the probe while squirting acetone into its upper end so that all inside surfaces will be wetted with acetone. Let the acetone drain from the lower end into the sample container. A funnel (glass or polyethylene) may be used to aid in transferring liquid washes to the container. Follow the acetone rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe in an inclined position, squirt acetone into the upper end as the probe brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe; hold a sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any acetone and particulate matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the brush through the probe three times or more until no visible PM is carried out with the acetone or until none remains in the probe liner on visual inspection. With stainless steel or other metal probes, run the brush through in the above prescribed manner at least six times since metal probes have small crevices in which particulate matter can be entrapped. Rinse the brush with acetone, and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a final acetone rinse of the probe.
8.7.6.2.4 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination.
8.7.6.2.5 Clean the inside of the front half of the filter holder by rubbing the surfaces with a Nylon bristle brush and rinsing with acetone. Rinse each surface three times or more if needed to remove visible particulate. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder. Carefully rinse out the glass cyclone, also (if applicable). After all acetone washings and particulate matter have been collected in the sample container, tighten the lid on the sample container so that acetone will not leak out when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to allow determination of whether leakage occurred during transport. Label the container to clearly identify its contents.
8.7.6.3 Container No. 3. Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent, and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth impinger to its original container, and seal. A funnel may make it easier to pour the silica gel without spilling. A rubber policeman may be used as an aid in removing the silica gel from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of dust particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, follow the procedure for Container No. 3 in section 11.2.3.
8.7.6.4 Impinger Water. Treat the impingers as follows: Make a notation of any color or film in the liquid catch. Measure the liquid that is in the first three impingers by weighing it to within 0.5 g at a minimum by using a balance. Record the weight of liquid present. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. Discard the liquid after measuring and recording the weight, unless analysis of the impinger catch is required (see Note, section 6.1.1.8). If a different type of condenser is used, measure the amount of moisture condensed gravimetrically.
8.8 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4, 10.1-10.6 | Sampling equipment leak check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. The following procedures are suggested to check the volume metering system calibration values at the field test site prior to sample collection. These procedures are optional.
9.2.1 Meter Orifice Check. Using the calibration data obtained during the calibration procedure described in section 10.3, determine the ΔH@ for the metering system orifice. The ΔH@ is the orifice pressure differential in units of in. H2O that correlates to 0.75 cfm of air at 528 °R and 29.92 in. Hg. The ΔH@ is calculated as follows:
Where:
ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter, in. H2O.
Tm = Absolute average DGM temperature, °R.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, in. Hg.
θ = Total sampling time, min.
Y = DGM calibration factor, dimensionless.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by DGM, dcf.
0.0319 = (0.0567 in. Hg/°R) (0.75 cfm) 2
9.2.1.1 Before beginning the field test (a set of three runs usually constitutes a field test), operate the metering system (i.e., pump, volume meter, and orifice) at the ΔH@ pressure differential for 10 minutes. Record the volume collected, the DGM temperature, and the barometric pressure. Calculate a DGM calibration check value, Yc, as follows:
where:
Yc = DGM calibration check value, dimensionless.
10 = Run time, min.
9.2.1.2 Compare the Yc value with the dry gas meter calibration factor Y to determine that: 0.97Y <Yc <1.03Y. If the Yc value is not within this range, the volume metering system should be investigated before beginning the test.
9.2.2 Calibrated Critical Orifice. A critical orifice, calibrated against a wet test meter or spirometer and designed to be inserted at the inlet of the sampling meter box, may be used as a check by following the procedure of section 16.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Probe Nozzle. Probe nozzles shall be calibrated before their initial use in the field. Using a micrometer, measure the ID of the nozzle to the nearest 0.025 mm (0.001 in.). Make three separate measurements using different diameters each time, and obtain the average of the measurements. The difference between the high and low numbers shall not exceed 0.1 mm (0.004 in.). When nozzles become nicked, dented, or corroded, they shall be reshaped, sharpened, and recalibrated before use. Each nozzle shall be permanently and uniquely identified.
10.2 Pitot Tube Assembly. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in section 10.1 of Method 2.
10.3 Metering System.
10.3.1 Calibration Prior to Use. Before its initial use in the field, the metering system shall be calibrated as follows: Connect the metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet test meter that is accurate to within 1 percent. Refer to Figure 5-4. The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft 3/rev). A spirometer of 400 liters (14 ft 3) or more capacity, or equivalent, may be used for this calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The wet test meter should be periodically calibrated with a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained. Run the metering system pump for about 15 minutes with the orifice manometer indicating a median reading as expected in field use to allow the pump to warm up and to permit the interior surface of the wet test meter to be thoroughly wetted. Then, at each of a minimum of three orifice manometer settings, pass an exact quantity of gas through the wet test meter and note the gas volume indicated by the DGM. Also note the barometric pressure and the temperatures of the wet test meter, the inlet of the DGM, and the outlet of the DGM. Select the highest and lowest orifice settings to bracket the expected field operating range of the orifice. Use a minimum volume of 0.14 m 3 (5 ft 3) at all orifice settings. Record all the data on a form similar to Figure 5-5 and calculate Y, the DGM calibration factor, and ΔH , the orifice calibration factor, at each orifice setting as shown on Figure 5-5. Allowable tolerances for individual Y and ΔH values are given in Figure 5-5. Use the average of the Y values in the calculations in section 12.0.
10.3.1.1 Before calibrating the metering system, it is suggested that a leak check be conducted. For metering systems having diaphragm pumps, the normal leak-check procedure will not detect leakages within the pump. For these cases the following leak-check procedure is suggested: make a 10-minute calibration run at 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm). At the end of the run, take the difference of the measured wet test meter and DGM volumes. Divide the difference by 10 to get the leak rate. The leak rate should not exceed 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm).
10.3.2 Calibration After Use. After each field use, the calibration of the metering system shall be checked by performing three calibration runs at a single, intermediate orifice setting (based on the previous field test), with the vacuum set at the maximum value reached during the test series. To adjust the vacuum, insert a valve between the wet test meter and the inlet of the metering system. Calculate the average value of the DGM calibration factor. If the value has changed by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the meter over the full range of orifice settings, as detailed in section 10.3.1.
10.3.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibration Check. If the DGM coefficient values obtained before and after a test series differ by more than 5 percent, the test series shall either be voided, or calculations for the test series shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of total sample volume.
10.4 Probe Heater Calibration. Use a heat source to generate air heated to selected temperatures that approximate those expected to occur in the sources to be sampled. Pass this air through the probe at a typical sample flow rate while measuring the probe inlet and outlet temperatures at various probe heater settings. For each air temperature generated, construct a graph of probe heating system setting versus probe outlet temperature. The procedure outlined in APTD-0576 can also be used. Probes constructed according to APTD-0581 need not be calibrated if the calibration curves in APTD-0576 are used. Also, probes with outlet temperature monitoring capabilities do not require calibration.
10.5 Temperature Sensors. Use the procedure in Section 10.3 of Method 2 to calibrate in-stack temperature sensors. Dial thermometers, such as are used for the DGM and condenser outlet, shall be calibrated against mercury-in-glass thermometers. An alternative mercury-free NIST-traceable thermometer may be used if the thermometer is, at a minimum, equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application. As an alternative, the following single-point calibration procedure may be used. After each test run series, check the accuracy (and, hence, the calibration) of each thermocouple system at ambient temperature, or any other temperature, within the range specified by the manufacturer, using a reference thermometer (either ASTM reference thermometer or a thermometer that has been calibrated against an ASTM reference thermometer). The temperatures of the thermocouple and reference thermometers shall agree to within ±2 °F.
10.6 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to the field test. Alternatively, barometric pressure may be obtained from a weather report that has been adjusted for the test point (on the stack) elevation.
10.7 Field Balance Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the balance used to weigh impingers with a weight that is at least 500g or within 50g of a loaded impinger. The weight must be ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 6 (or better). Daily before use, the field balance must measure the weight within ±0.5g of the certified mass. If the daily balance calibration check fails, perform corrective measures and repeat the check before using balance.
10.8 Analytical Balance Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical balance before the first use, and semiannually thereafter. The calibration of the analytical balance must be conducted using ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 2 (or better) tolerance weights. Audit the balance each day it is used for gravimetric measurements by weighing at least one ASTM E617-13 Class 2 tolerance (or better) calibration weight that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter or between 1g and 5g. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.5 mg of the certified mass, perform corrective measures, and conduct the multipoint calibration before use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-6.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Leave the contents in the shipping container or transfer the filter and any loose PM from the sample container to a tared weighing container. Desiccate for 24 hours in a desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Weigh to a constant weight, and report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For the purposes of this section, the term “constant weight” means a difference of no more than 0.5 mg or 1 percent of total weight less tare weight, whichever is greater, between two consecutive weighings, with no less than 6 hours of desiccation time between weighings. Alternatively, the sample may be oven dried at 104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cooled in the desiccator, and weighed to a constant weight, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. The sample may be oven dried at 104 °C (220 °F) for 2 to 3 hours. Once the sample has cooled, weigh the sample, and use this weight as a final weight.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.2.3 Container No. 3. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be conducted in the field.
11.2.4 Acetone Blank Container. Measure the acetone in this container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the acetone to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used, provided that they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
An = Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m 2 (ft 2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Ca = Acetone blank residue concentration, mg/mg.
cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
I = Percent of isokinetic sampling.
L1 = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the first component change, m 3/min (ft 3/min)
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest leak-check or for a leak-check following a component change; equal to 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.
Li = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the “i th” component change (i = 1, 2, 3 . . . n), m 3/min (cfm).
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check, m 3/min (cfm).
ma = Mass of residue of acetone after evaporation, mg.
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.015 g/g-mole (18.015 lb/lb-mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 ((mm Hg)(m 3))/((K)(g-mole)) {21.85 ((in. Hg) (ft 3))/((°R) (lb-mole))}.
Tm = Absolute average DGM temperature (see Figure 5-3), K (°R).
Ts = Absolute average stack gas temperature (see Figure 5-3), K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293.15 K (527.67 °R).
Va = Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
V1c = Total volume of liquid collected in impingers and silica gel (see Figure 5-6), g.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vw(std) = Volume of water vapor in the gas sample, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
Vs = Stack gas velocity, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2-7, using data obtained from Method 5, m/sec (ft/sec).
Wa = Weight of residue in acetone wash, mg.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter (see Figure 5-4), mm H2O (in. H2O).
ρa = Density of acetone, mg/ml (see label on bottle).
θ = Total sampling time, min.
θ1 = Sampling time interval, from the beginning of a run until the first component change, min.
θi = Sampling time interval, between two successive component changes, beginning with the interval between the first and second changes, min.
θp = Sampling time interval, from the final (nth) component change until the end of the sampling run, min.
13.6 = Specific gravity of mercury.
60 = Sec/min.
100 = Conversion to percent.
12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 5-3).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample volume measured by the dry gas meter to standard conditions (20 °C, 760mm Hg or 68 °F, 29.92 in. Hg) by using Equation 5-1.
Where:
K1 = 0.38572 °K/mm Hg for metric units = 17.636 °R/in. Hg for English units.
Note: Equation 5-1 can be used as written unless the leakage rate observed during any of the mandatory leak checks (i.e., the post-test leak check or leak checks conducted prior to component changes) exceeds La. If Lp or Li exceeds La, Equation 5-1 must be modified as follows:
(a) Case I. No component changes made during sampling run. In this case, replace Vm in Equation 5-1 with the expression:
(Vm − (Lp − La)θ)
(b) Case II. One or more component changes made during the sampling run. In this case, replace Vm in Equation 5-1 by the expression:
and substitute only for those leakage rates (Li or Lp) which exceed La.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed
Where:
K2 = 0.001335 m 3/g for metric units, = 0.04716 ft 3/g for English units.
12.5 Moisture Content.
12.6 Acetone Blank Concentration.
12.7 Acetone Wash Blank.
12.8 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate matter catch from the sum of the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2 less the acetone blank (see Figure 5-6).
12.9 Particulate Concentration.
Where:
K3 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.10 Conversion Factors:
| From | To | Multiply by |
|---|---|---|
| ft3 | m3 | 0.02832 |
| gr | mg | 64.80004 |
| gr/ft3 | mg/m3 | 2288.4 |
| mg | g | 0.001 |
| gr | lb | 1.429 × 10−4 |
12.11 Isokinetic Variation.
12.11.1 Calculation from Raw Data.
Where:
K4 = 0.003456 ((mm Hg)(m 3))/((ml)(°K)) for metric units,
= 0.002668 ((in. Hg)(ft 3))/((ml)(°R)) for English units.
12.11.2 Calculation from Intermediate Values.
Where:
K5 = 4.3209 for metric units = 0.09450 for English units.
12.11.3 Acceptable Results. If 90 percent ≤I ≤110 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PM results are low in comparison to the standard, and “I” is over 110 percent or less than 90 percent, the Administrator may opt to accept the results. Reference 4 in section 17.0 may be used to make acceptability judgments. If “I” is judged to be unacceptable, reject the results, and repeat the sampling run.
12.12 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using data obtained in this method and the equations in sections 12.3 and 12.4 of Method 2.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Dry Gas Meter as a Calibration Standard. A DGM may be used as a calibration standard for volume measurements in place of the wet test meter specified in section 10.3, provided that it is calibrated initially and recalibrated periodically as follows:
16.1.1 Standard Dry Gas Meter Calibration.
16.1.1.1. The DGM to be calibrated and used as a secondary reference meter should be of high quality and have an appropriately sized capacity (e.g., 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft 3/rev)). A spirometer (400 liters (14 ft 3) or more capacity), or equivalent, may be used for this calibration, although a wet test meter is usually more practical. The wet test meter should have a capacity of 30 liters/rev (1 ft 3/rev) and capable of measuring volume to within 1.0 percent. Wet test meters should be checked against a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy of the wet test meter. Spirometers or wet test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained.
16.1.1.2 Set up the components as shown in Figure 5-7. A spirometer, or equivalent, may be used in place of the wet test meter in the system. Run the pump for at least 5 minutes at a flow rate of about 10 liters/min (0.35 cfm) to condition the interior surface of the wet test meter. The pressure drop indicated by the manometer at the inlet side of the DGM should be minimized (no greater than 100 mm H2O (4 in. H2O) at a flow rate of 30 liters/min (1 cfm)). This can be accomplished by using large diameter tubing connections and straight pipe fittings.
16.1.1.3 Collect the data as shown in the example data sheet (see Figure 5-8). Make triplicate runs at each of the flow rates and at no less than five different flow rates. The range of flow rates should be between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or over the expected operating range.
16.1.1.4 Calculate flow rate, Q, for each run using the wet test meter volume, Vw, and the run time, θ. Calculate the DGM coefficient, Yds, for each run. These calculations are as follows:
Where:
K1 = 0.38572 °K/mm Hg for metric units = 17.636 °R/in. Hg for English units.
Vw = Wet test meter volume, liter (ft3).
Vds = Dry gas meter volume, liter (ft3).
Tds = Average dry gas meter temperature, °C ( °F).
Tadj = 273.15 °C for metric units = 459.67 °F for English units.
Tw = Average wet test meter temperature, °C ( °F).
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Δp = Dry gas meter inlet differential pressure, mm H2O (in. H2O).
θ = Run time, min.
16.1.1.5 Compare the three Yds values at each of the flow rates and determine the maximum and minimum values. The difference between the maximum and minimum values at each flow rate should be no greater than 0.030. Extra sets of triplicate runs may be made in order to complete this requirement. In addition, the meter coefficients should be between 0.95 and 1.05. If these specifications cannot be met in three sets of successive triplicate runs, the meter is not suitable as a calibration standard and should not be used as such. If these specifications are met, average the three Yds values at each flow rate resulting in no less than five average meter coefficients, Yds.
16.1.1.6 Prepare a curve of meter coefficient, Yds, versus flow rate, Q, for the DGM. This curve shall be used as a reference when the meter is used to calibrate other DGMs and to determine whether recalibration is required.
16.1.2 Standard Dry Gas Meter Recalibration.
16.1.2.1 Recalibrate the standard DGM against a wet test meter or spirometer annually or after every 200 hours of operation, whichever comes first. This requirement is valid provided the standard DGM is kept in a laboratory and, if transported, cared for as any other laboratory instrument. Abuse to the standard meter may cause a change in the calibration and will require more frequent recalibrations.
16.1.2.2 As an alternative to full recalibration, a two-point calibration check may be made. Follow the same procedure and equipment arrangement as for a full recalibration, but run the meter at only two flow rates [suggested rates are 14 and 30 liters/min (0.5 and 1.0 cfm)]. Calculate the meter coefficients for these two points, and compare the values with the meter calibration curve. If the two coefficients are within 1.5 percent of the calibration curve values at the same flow rates, the meter need not be recalibrated until the next date for a recalibration check.
16.2 Critical Orifices As Calibration Standards. Critical orifices may be used as calibration standards in place of the wet test meter specified in section 16.1, provided that they are selected, calibrated, and used as follows:
16.2.1 Selection of Critical Orifices.
16.2.1.1 The procedure that follows describes the use of hypodermic needles or stainless steel needle tubings which have been found suitable for use as critical orifices. Other materials and critical orifice designs may be used provided the orifices act as true critical orifices (i.e., a critical vacuum can be obtained, as described in section 16.2.2.2.3). Select five critical orifices that are appropriately sized to cover the range of flow rates between 10 and 34 liters/min (0.35 and 1.2 cfm) or the expected operating range. Two of the critical orifices should bracket the expected operating range. A minimum of three critical orifices will be needed to calibrate a Method 5 DGM; the other two critical orifices can serve as spares and provide better selection for bracketing the range of operating flow rates. The needle sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 5-1 in section 18.0 give the approximate flow rates.
16.2.1.2 These needles can be adapted to a Method 5 type sampling train as follows: Insert a serum bottle stopper, 13 by 20 mm sleeve type, into a 1/2-inch Swagelok (or equivalent) quick connect. Insert the needle into the stopper as shown in Figure 5-9.
16.2.2 Critical Orifice Calibration. The procedure described in this section uses the Method 5 meter box configuration with a DGM as described in section 6.1.1.9 to calibrate the critical orifices. Other schemes may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
16.2.2.1 Calibration of Meter Box. The critical orifices must be calibrated in the same configuration as they will be used (i.e., there should be no connections to the inlet of the orifice).
16.2.2.1.1 Before calibrating the meter box, leak check the system as follows: Fully open the coarse adjust valve, and completely close the by-pass valve. Plug the inlet. Then turn on the pump, and determine whether there is any leakage. The leakage rate shall be zero (i.e., no detectable movement of the DGM dial shall be seen for 1 minute).
16.2.2.1.2 Check also for leakages in that portion of the sampling train between the pump and the orifice meter. See section 8.4.1 for the procedure; make any corrections, if necessary. If leakage is detected, check for cracked gaskets, loose fittings, worn O-rings, etc., and make the necessary repairs.
16.2.2.1.3 After determining that the meter box is leakless, calibrate the meter box according to the procedure given in section 10.3. Make sure that the wet test meter meets the requirements stated in section 16.1.1.1. Check the water level in the wet test meter. Record the DGM calibration factor, Y.
16.2.2.2 Calibration of Critical Orifices. Set up the apparatus as shown in Figure 5-10.
16.2.2.2.1 Allow a warm-up time of 15 minutes. This step is important to equilibrate the temperature conditions through the DGM.
16.2.2.2.2 Leak check the system as in section 16.2.2.1.1. The leakage rate shall be zero.
16.2.2.2.3 Before calibrating the critical orifice, determine its suitability and the appropriate operating vacuum as follows: Turn on the pump, fully open the coarse adjust valve, and adjust the by-pass valve to give a vacuum reading corresponding to about half of atmospheric pressure. Observe the meter box orifice manometer reading, ΔH. Slowly increase the vacuum reading until a stable reading is obtained on the meter box orifice manometer. Record the critical vacuum for each orifice. Orifices that do not reach a critical value shall not be used.
16.2.2.2.4 Obtain the barometric pressure using a barometer as described in section 6.1.2. Record the barometric pressure, Pbar, in mm Hg (in. Hg).
16.2.2.2.5 Conduct duplicate runs at a vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 to 2 in. Hg) above the critical vacuum. The runs shall be at least 5 minutes each. The DGM volume readings shall be in increments of complete revolutions of the DGM. As a guideline, the times should not differ by more than 3.0 seconds (this includes allowance for changes in the DGM temperatures) to achieve ±0.5 percent in K′ (see Eq. 5-11). Record the information listed in Figure 5-11.
16.2.2.2.6 Calculate K′ using Equation 5-11.
Where:
K′ = Critical orifice coefficient,
[m 3)(°K) 1/2]/
[(mm Hg)(min)] {[(ft 3)(°R) 1/2)] [(in. Hg)(min)].
Tamb = Absolute ambient temperature, °K (°R).
Calculate the arithmetic mean of the K′ values. The individual K' values should not differ by more than ±0.5 percent from the mean value.
16.2.3 Using the Critical Orifices as Calibration Standards.
16.2.3.1 Record the barometric pressure.
16.2.3.2 Calibrate the metering system according to the procedure outlined in section 16.2.2. Record the information listed in Figure 5-12.
16.2.3.3 Calculate the standard volumes of air passed through the DGM and the critical orifices, and calculate the DGM calibration factor, Y, using the equations below:
Where:
Vcr(std) = Volume of gas sample passed through the critical orifice, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
K1 = 0.38572 °K/mm Hg for metric units = 17.636 °R/in. Hg for English units.
16.2.3.4 Average the DGM calibration values for each of the flow rates. The calibration factor, Y, at each of the flow rates should not differ by more than ±2 percent from the average.
16.2.3.5 To determine the need for recalibrating the critical orifices, compare the DGM Y factors obtained from two adjacent orifices each time a DGM is calibrated; for example, when checking orifice 13/2.5, use orifices 12/10.2 and 13/5.1. If any critical orifice yields a DGM Y factor differing by more than 2 percent from the others, recalibrate the critical orifice according to section 16.2.2.
16.3 Alternative Post-Test Metering System Calibration. The following procedure may be used as an alternative to the post-test calibration described in Section 10.3.2. This alternative procedure does not detect leakages between the inlet of the metering system and the dry gas meter. Therefore, two steps must be included to make it an equivalent alternative:
(1) The metering system must pass the post-test leak-check from either the inlet of the sampling train or the inlet of the metering system. Therefore, if the train fails the former leak-check, another leak-check from the inlet of the metering system must be conducted;
(2) The metering system must pass the leak-check of that portion of the train from the pump to the orifice meter as described in Section 8.4.1.
16.3.1 After each test run, do the following:
16.3.1.1 Ensure that the metering system has passed the post-test leak-check. If not, conduct a leak-check of the metering system from its inlet.
16.3.1.2 Conduct the leak-check of that portion of the train from the pump to the orifice meter as described in Section 10.3.1.1.
16.3.1.3 Calculate Yqa for each test run using the following equation:
Where:
Yqa = Dry gas meter calibration check value, dimensionless.
0.0319 = (29.92/528) (0.75) 2 (in. Hg/°R) cfm 2.
ΔH@ = Orifice meter calibration coefficient, in. H2O.
Md = Dry molecular weight of stack gas, lb/lb-mole.
29 = Dry molecular weight of air, lb/lb-mole.
16.3.2 After each test run series, do the following:
16.3.2.1 Average the three or more Yqa's obtained from the test run series and compare this average Yqa with the dry gas meter calibration factor Y. The average Yqa must be within 5 percent of Y.
16.3.2.2 If the average Yqa does not meet the 5 percent criterion, recalibrate the meter over the full range of orifice settings as detailed in Section 10.3.1. Then follow the procedure in Section 10.3.3.
17.0 References.
1. Addendum to Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. December 6, 1967.
2. Martin, Robert M. Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0581. April 1971.
3. Rom, Jerome J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576. March 1972.
4. Smith, W.S., R.T. Shigehara, and W.F. Todd. A Method of Interpreting Stack Sampling Data. Paper Presented at the 63rd Annual Meeting of the Air Pollution Control Association, St. Louis, MO. June 14-19, 1970.
5. Smith, W.S., et al. Stack Gas Sampling Improved and Simplified With New Equipment. APCA Paper No. 67-119. 1967.
6. Specifications for Incinerator Testing at Federal Facilities. PHS, NCAPC. 1967.
7. Shigehara, R.T. Adjustment in the EPA Nomograph for Different Pitot Tube Coefficients and Dry Molecular Weights. Stack Sampling News 2:4-11. October 1974.
8. Vollaro, R.F. A Survey of Commercially Available Instrumentation for the Measurement of Low-Range Gas Velocities. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976 (unpublished paper).
9. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 26. Gaseous Fuels; Coal and Coke; Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 617-622.
10. Felix, L.G., G.I. Clinard, G.E. Lacy, and J.D. McCain. Inertial Cascade Impactor Substrate Media for Flue Gas Sampling. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. Publication No. EPA-600/7-77-060. June 1977. 83 pp.
11. Westlin, P.R. and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3(1):17-30. February 1978.
12. Lodge, J.P., Jr., J.B. Pate, B.E. Ammons, and G.A. Swanson. The Use of Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air Sampling. J. Air Pollution Control Association. 16:197-200. 1966.
13. Shigehara, Roger T., P.G. Royals, and E.W. Steward. “Alternative Method 5 Post-Test Calibration.” Entropy Incorporated, Research Triangle Park, NC 27709.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Gauge/cm | Flow rate liters/min. |
Gauge/cm | Flow rate liters/min. |
|---|---|---|---|
| 12/7.6 | 32.56 | 14/2.5 | 19.54 |
| 12/10.2 | 30.02 | 14/5.1 | 17.27 |
| 13/2.5 | 25.77 | 14/7.6 | 16.14 |
| 13/5.1 | 23.50 | 15/3.2 | 14.16 |
| 13/7.6 | 22.37 | 15/7.6 | 11.61 |
| 13/10.2 | 20.67 | 15/10.2 | 10.48 |
Date
Train ID
DGM cal. factor
Critical orifice ID
| Dry gas meter | Run No. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | ||
| Final reading | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Initial reading | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Difference, Vm | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Inlet/Outlet | |||
| Temperatures: | °C ( °F) | / | / |
| Initial | °C ( °F) | / | / |
| Final | min/sec | / | / |
| Av. Temeperature, t m | min | ||
| Time, θ | |||
| Orifice man. rdg., ΔH | mm (in.) H 2 | ||
| Bar. pressure, P bar | mm (in.) Hg | ||
| Ambient temperature, tamb | mm (in.) Hg | ||
| Pump vacuum | |||
| K′ factor | |||
| Average |
Figure 5-11. Data sheet of determining K′ factor.
Date
Train ID
Critical orifice ID
Critical orifice K' factor
| Dry gas meter | Run No. | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2 | ||
| Final reading | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Initial reading | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Difference, Vm | m3 (ft3) | ||
| Inlet/outlet temperatures | °C ( °F) | / | / |
| Initial | °C ( °F) | / | / |
| Final | °C ( °F) | ||
| Avg. Temperature, tm | min/sec | / | / |
| Time, θ | min | ||
| Orifice man. rdg., ΔH | min | ||
| Bar. pressure, Pbar | mm (in.) H2 O | ||
| Ambient temperature, tamb | mm (in.) Hg | ||
| Pump vacuum | °C ( °F) | ||
| Vm(std) | mm (in.) Hg | ||
| Vcr(std) | m3 (ft3) | ||
| DGM cal. factor, Y | m3 (ft3) |
Figure 5-12. Data Sheet for Determining DGM Y Factor
Method 5A—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From the Asphalt Processing and Asphalt Roofing Industry
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from asphalt roofing industry process saturators, blowing stills, and other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F). The PM mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 6.1, with the following exceptions and additions:
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.2, with the note that at high stack gas temperatures greater than 250 °C (480 °F), water-cooled probes may be required to control the probe exit temperature to 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F).
6.1.2 Precollector Cyclone. Borosilicate glass following the construction details shown in Air Pollution Technical Document (APTD)-0581, “Construction Details of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment” (Reference 2 in Method 5, section 17.0).
6.1.3 Filter Heating System. Any heating (or cooling) system capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature at the exit end of the filter holder during sampling at 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F).
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, and Funnel and Rubber Policeman. Same as in Method 5, sections 6.2.1, 6.2.5, 6.2.6, and 6.2.7, respectively.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass.
6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant 500-ml or 1,000-ml borosilicate glass bottles, with rubber-backed Teflon screw cap liners or caps that are constructed so as to be leak-free, and resistant to chemical attack by 1,1,1-trichloroethane (TCE). (Narrow-mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.)
6.2.4 Petri Dishes. Glass, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator.
6.2.5 Funnel. Glass.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 6.3, with the following additions:
6.3.1 Beakers. Glass, 250-ml and 500-ml.
6.3.2 Separatory Funnel. 100-ml or greater.
7.0. Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters, Silica Gel, Water, and Crushed Ice. Same as in Method 5, sections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, and 7.1.4, respectively.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. TCE-insoluble, heat-stable grease (if needed). This is not necessary if screw-on connectors with Teflon sleeves, or similar, are used.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Reagent grade TCE, ≤0.001 percent residue and stored in glass bottles. Run TCE blanks before field use, and use only TCE with low blank values (≤0.001 percent). In no case shall a blank value of greater than 0.001 percent of the weight of TCE used be subtracted from the sample weight.
7.3 Analysis. Two reagents are required for the analysis:
7.3.1 TCE. Same as in section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Same as in Method 5, section 7.3.2.
8.0. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Unless otherwise specified, maintain and calibrate all components according to the procedure described in APTD-0576, “Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source-Sampling Equipment” (Reference 3 in Method 5, Section 17.0). Alternative mercury-free thermometers may be used if the thermometers are, at a minimum, equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
8.1.1 Prepare probe liners and sampling nozzles as needed for use. Thoroughly clean each component with soap and water followed by a minimum of three TCE rinses. Use the probe and nozzle brushes during at least one of the TCE rinses (refer to section 8.7 for rinsing techniques). Cap or seal the open ends of the probe liners and nozzles to prevent contamination during shipping.
8.1.2 Prepare silica gel portions and glass filters as specified in Method 5, section 8.1.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select the sampling site, probe nozzle, and probe length as specified in Method 5, section 8.2. Select a total sampling time greater than or equal to the minimum total sampling time specified in the “Test Methods and Procedures” section of the applicable subpart of the regulations. Follow the guidelines outlined in Method 5, section 8.2 for sampling time per point and total sample volume collected.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Prepare the sampling train as specified in Method 5, section 8.3, with the addition of the precollector cyclone, if used, between the probe and filter holder. The temperature of the precollector cyclone, if used, should be maintained in the same range as that of the filter, i.e., 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F). Use no stopcock grease on ground glass joints unless grease is insoluble in TCE.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as Method 5, section 8.4.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Operate the sampling train as described in Method 5, section 8.5, except maintain the temperature of the gas exiting the filter holder at 42 ±10 °C (108 ±18 °F).
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, section 8.6.
8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 8.7.1 through 8.7.6.1, with the addition of the following:
8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).
8.7.1.1 Taking care to see that material on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover PM or any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, precollector cyclone and collector flask (if used), and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with TCE and placing the wash in a glass container. Carefully measure the total amount of TCE used in the rinses. Perform the TCE rinses as described in Method 5, section 8.7.6.2, using TCE instead of acetone.
8.7.1.2 Brush and rinse the inside of the cyclone, cyclone collection flask, and the front half of the filter holder. Brush and rinse each surface three times or more, if necessary, to remove visible PM.
8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same as in Method 5, section 8.7.6.3.
8.7.3 Impinger Water. Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.4.
8.8 Blank. Save a portion of the TCE used for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this TCE directly from the wash bottle being used, and place it in a glass sample container labeled “TCE Blank.”
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
9.2 A quality control (QC) check of the volume metering system at the field site is suggested before collecting the sample. Use the procedure outlined in Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Analysis. Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5A-1. Handle each sample container as follows:
11.1.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Transfer the filter from the sample container to a tared glass weighing dish, and desiccate for 24 hours in a desiccator containing anhydrous calcium sulfate. Rinse Container No. 1 with a measured amount of TCE, and analyze this rinse with the contents of Container No. 2. Weigh the filter to a constant weight. For the purpose of this analysis, the term “constant weight” means a difference of no more than 10 percent of the net filter weight or 2 mg (whichever is greater) between two consecutive weighings made 24 hours apart. Report the “final weight” to the nearest 0.1 mg as the average of these two values.
11.1.2 Container No. 2 (Probe to Filter Holder).
11.1.2.1 Before adding the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container No. 2, note the level of liquid in Container No. 2, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If noticeable leakage occurred, either void the sample or take steps, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.1.2.2 Add the rinse from Container No. 1 to Container No. 2 and measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Check to see whether there is any appreciable quantity of condensed water present in the TCE rinse (look for a boundary layer or phase separation). If the volume of condensed water appears larger than 5 ml, separate the oil-TCE fraction from the water fraction using a separatory funnel. Measure the volume of the water phase to the nearest ml; adjust the stack gas moisture content, if necessary (see sections 12.3 and 12.4). Next, extract the water phase with several 25-ml portions of TCE until, by visual observation, the TCE does not remove any additional organic material. Transfer the remaining water fraction to a tared beaker and evaporate to dryness at 93 °C (200 °F), desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.1.2.3 Treat the total TCE fraction (including TCE from the filter container rinse and water phase extractions) as follows: Transfer the TCE and oil to a tared beaker, and evaporate at ambient temperature and pressure. The evaporation of TCE from the solution may take several days. Do not desiccate the sample until the solution reaches an apparent constant volume or until the odor of TCE is not detected. When it appears that the TCE has evaporated, desiccate the sample, and weigh it at 24-hour intervals to obtain a “constant weight” (as defined for Container No. 1 above). The “total weight” for Container No. 2 is the sum of the evaporated PM weight of the TCE-oil and water phase fractions. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.1.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This step may be conducted in the field. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
11.1.4 “TCE Blank” Container. Measure TCE in this container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the TCE to a tared 250-ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, section 12.1, with the following additions:
Ct = TCE blank residue concentration, mg/g.
mt = Mass of residue of TCE blank after evaporation, mg.
Vpc = Volume of water collected in precollector, ml.
Vt = Volume of TCE blank, ml.
Vtw = Volume of TCE used in wash, ml.
Wt = Weight of residue in TCE wash, mg.
ρt = Density of TCE (see label on bottle), g/ml.
12.2 Dry Gas Meter Temperature, Orifice Pressure Drop, and Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, sections 12.2 and 12.3, except use data obtained in performing this test.
12.3 Volume of Water Vapor.
Where:
K2 = 0.001333 m 3/ml for metric units.
= 0.04706 ft 3/ml for English units.
12.4 Moisture Content.
12.5 TCE Blank Concentration.
12.6 TCE Wash Blank.
12.7 Total PM Weight. Determine the total PM catch from the sum of the weights obtained from Containers 1 and 2, less the TCE blank.
12.8 PM Concentration.
Where:
K3 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units
12.9 Isokinetic Variation. Same as in Method 5, section 12.11.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Plant
Date
Run No.
Filter No.
Amount liquid lost during transport
Acetone blank volume, m1
Acetone blank concentration, mg/mg (Equation 5-4)
Acetone wash blank, mg (Equation 5-5)
| Container number | Weight of particulate collected, mg | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Final weight | Tare weight | Weight gain | |
| 1. | |||
| 2. | |||
| Total: | |||
| Less acetone blank | |||
| Weight of particulate matter |
| Volume of liquid water collected | ||
|---|---|---|
| Impinger volume, ml |
Silica gel weight, g |
|
| Final | ||
| Initial | ||
| Liquid collected | ||
| Total volume collected | g* ml | |
| * Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by density of water (1 g/ml). |
Method 5B—Determination of Nonsulfuric Acid Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfuric acid particulate matter. No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is determining applicable for the determination of nonsulfuric acid particulate matter from stationary sources, only where specified by an applicable subpart of the regulations or where approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F). The collected sample is then heated in an oven at 160 °C (320 °F) for 6 hours to volatilize any condensed sulfuric acid that may have been collected, and the nonsulfuric acid particulate mass is determined gravimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 5, section 6.0, with the following addition and exceptions:
6.1 Sample Collection. The probe liner heating system and filter heating system must be capable of maintaining a sample gas temperature of 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
6.2 Sample Preparation. An oven is required for drying the sample.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Method 5, section 7.0.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.
Same as Method 5, with the exception of the following:
8.1 Initial Filter Tare. Oven dry the filter at 160 ±5 °C (320 ±10 °F) for 2 to 3 hours, cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh. Desiccate to constant weight to obtain the initial tare weight. Use the applicable specifications and techniques of section 8.1.3 of Method 5 for this determination.
8.2 Probe and Filter Temperatures. Maintain the probe outlet and filter temperatures at 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Method 5, section 9.0.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record and report the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5B-1.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Leave the contents in the shipping container or transfer the filter and any loose PM from the sample container to a tared non-reactive oven-proof container. Oven dry the filter sample at a temperature of 160 ±5 °C (320 ±9 °F) for 6 hours. Cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh to constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. For the purposes of this section, the term “constant weight” means a difference of no more than 0.5 mg or 1 percent of total weight less tare weight, whichever is greater, between two consecutive weighings, with no less than 6 hours of desiccation time between weighings.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Note the level of liquid in the container, and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to ±1 ml or gravimetrically to ±0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Then oven dry the probe sample at a temperature of 160 ±5 °C (320 ±9 °F) for 6 hours. Cool in a desiccator for 2 hours, and weigh to constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.2.3 Container No. 3. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be conducted in the field.
11.2.4 Acetone Blank Container. Measure the acetone in this container either volumetrically or gravimetrically. Transfer the acetone to a tared 250 ml beaker, and evaporate to dryness at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate for 24 hours, and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
Note: The contents of Container No. 2 as well as the acetone blank container may be evaporated at temperatures higher than ambient. If evaporation is done at an elevated temperature, the temperature must be below the boiling point of the solvent; also, to prevent “bumping,” the evaporation process must be closely supervised, and the contents of the beaker must be swirled occasionally to maintain an even temperature. Use extreme care, as acetone is highly flammable and has a low flash point.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as in Method 5, section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Container number | Weight of particulate collected, mg | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Final weight | Tare weight | Weight gain | |
| 1. | |||
| 2. | |||
| Total: | |||
| Less acetone blank | |||
| Weight of particulate matter |
| Volume of liquid water collected | ||
|---|---|---|
| Impinger volume, | Silica gel weight, | |
| ml | g | |
| Final | ||
| Initial | ||
| Liquid collected | ||
| Total volume collected | g* ml | |
| * Convert weight of water to volume by dividing total weight increase by density of water (1 g/ml). |
Figure 5B-1. Analytical Data Sheet
Method 5C [Reserved]
Method 5D—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions from Positive Pressure Fabric Filters
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from positive pressure fabric filters. Emissions are determined in terms of concentration (mg/m 3 or gr/ft 3) and emission rate (kg/hr or lb/hr).
1.2.2 The General Provisions of 40 CFR part 60, § 60.8(e), require that the owner or operator of an affected facility shall provide performance testing facilities. Such performance testing facilities include sampling ports, safe sampling platforms, safe access to sampling sites, and utilities for testing. It is intended that affected facilities also provide sampling locations that meet the specification for adequate stack length and minimal flow disturbances as described in Method 1. Provisions for testing are often overlooked factors in designing fabric filters or are extremely costly. The purpose of this procedure is to identify appropriate alternative locations and procedures for sampling the emissions from positive pressure fabric filters. The requirements that the affected facility owner or operator provide adequate access to performance testing facilities remain in effect.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature at or above the exhaust gas temperature up to a nominal 120 °C (248 ±25 °F). The particulate mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same section 8.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17, except replace section 8.2.1 of Method 5 with the following:
8.1 Determination of Measurement Site. The configuration of positive pressure fabric filter structures frequently are not amenable to emission testing according to the requirements of Method 1. Following are several alternatives for determining measurement sites for positive pressure fabric filters.
8.1.1 Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use a measurement site as specified in Method 1, section 11.1.
8.1.2 Short Stacks Not Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Use stack extensions and the procedures in Method 1. Alternatively, use flow straightening vanes of the “egg-crate” type (see Figure 5D-1). Locate the measurement site downstream of the straightening vanes at a distance equal to or greater than two times the average equivalent diameter of the vane openings and at least one-half of the overall stack diameter upstream of the stack outlet.
8.1.3 Roof Monitor or Monovent. (See Figure 5D-2). For a positive pressure fabric filter equipped with a peaked roof monitor, ridge vent, or other type of monovent, use a measurement site at the base of the monovent. Examples of such locations are shown in Figure 5D-2. The measurement site must be upstream of any exhaust point (e.g., louvered vent).
8.1.4 Compartment Housing. Sample immediately downstream of the filter bags directly above the tops of the bags as shown in the examples in Figure 5D-2. Depending on the housing design, use sampling ports in the housing walls or locate the sampling equipment within the compartment housing.
8.2 Determination of Number and Location of Traverse Points. Locate the traverse points according to Method 1, section 11.3. Because a performance test consists of at least three test runs and because of the varied configurations of positive pressure fabric filters, there are several schemes by which the number of traverse points can be determined and the three test runs can be conducted.
8.2.1 Single Stacks Meeting Method 1 Criteria. Select the number of traverse points according to Method 1. Sample all traverse points for each test run.
8.2.2 Other Single Measurement Sites. For a roof monitor or monovent, single compartment housing, or other stack not meeting Method 1 criteria, use at least 24 traverse points. For example, for a rectangular measurement site, such as a monovent, use a balanced 5 × 5 traverse point matrix. Sample all traverse points for each test run.
8.2.3 Multiple Measurement Sites. Sampling from two or more stacks or measurement sites may be combined for a test run, provided the following guidelines are met:
8.2.3.1 All measurement sites up to 12 must be sampled. For more than 12 measurement sites, conduct sampling on at least 12 sites or 50 percent of the sites, whichever is greater. The measurement sites sampled should be evenly, or nearly evenly, distributed among the available sites; if not, all sites are to be sampled.
8.2.3.2 The same number of measurement sites must be sampled for each test run.
8.2.3.3 The minimum number of traverse points per test run is 24. An exception to the 24-point minimum would be a test combining the sampling from two stacks meeting Method 1 criteria for acceptable stack length, and Method 1 specifies fewer than 12 points per site.
8.2.3.4 As long as the 24 traverse points per test run criterion is met, the number of traverse points per measurement site may be reduced to eight.
8.2.3.5 Alternatively, conduct a test run for each measurement site individually using the criteria in section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to determine the number of traverse points. Each test run shall count toward the total of three required for a performance test. If more than three measurement sites are sampled, the number of traverse points per measurement site may be reduced to eight as long as at least 72 traverse points are sampled for all the tests.
8.2.3.6 The following examples demonstrate the procedures for sampling multiple measurement sites.
8.2.3.6.1 Example 1: A source with nine circular measurement sites of equal areas may be tested as follows: For each test run, traverse three measurement sites using four points per diameter (eight points per measurement site). In this manner, test run number 1 will include sampling from sites 1,2, and 3; run 2 will include samples from sites 4, 5, and 6; and run 3 will include sites 7, 8, and 9. Each test area may consist of a separate test of each measurement site using eight points. Use the results from all nine tests in determining the emission average.
8.2.3.6.2 Example 2: A source with 30 rectangular measurement sites of equal areas may be tested as follows: For each of the three test runs, traverse five measurement sites using a 3 × 3 matrix of traverse points for each site. In order to distribute the sampling evenly over all the available measurement sites while sampling only 50 percent of the sites, number the sites consecutively from 1 to 30 and sample all the even numbered (or odd numbered) sites. Alternatively, conduct a separate test of each of 15 measurement sites using section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to determine the number and location of traverse points, as appropriate.
8.2.3.6.3 Example 3: A source with two measurement sites of equal areas may be tested as follows: For each test of three test runs, traverse both measurement sites, using section 8.2.3 in determining the number of traverse points. Alternatively, conduct two full emission test runs for each measurement site using the criteria in section 8.2.1 or 8.2.2 to determine the number of traverse points.
8.2.3.7 Other test schemes, such as random determination of traverse points for a large number of measurement sites, may be used with prior approval from the Administrator.
8.3 Velocity Determination.
8.3.1 The velocities of exhaust gases from positive pressure baghouses are often too low to measure accurately with the type S pitot tube specified in Method 2 (i.e., velocity head <1.3 mm H2O (0.05 in. H2O)). For these conditions, measure the gas flow rate at the fabric filter inlet following the procedures outlined in Method 2. Calculate the average gas velocity at the measurement site as shown in section 12.2 and use this average velocity in determining and maintaining isokinetic sampling rates.
8.3.2 Velocity determinations to determine and maintain isokinetic rates at measurement sites with gas velocities within the range measurable with the type S pitot tube (i.e., velocity head greater than 1.3 mm H2O (0.05 in. H2O)) shall be conducted according to the procedures outlined in Method 2.
8.4 Sampling. Follow the procedures specified in sections 8.1 through 8.6 of Method 5 or sections 8.1 through 8.25 in Method 17 with the exceptions as noted above.
8.5 Sample Recovery. Follow the procedures specified in section 8.7 of Method 5 or section 8.2 of Method 17.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.0, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as section 10.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Same as section 11.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as section 12.0 of either Method 5 or Method 17 with the following exceptions:
12.1 Nomenclature.
Ao = Measurement site(s) total cross-sectional area, m 2 (ft 2).
C or Cavg = Average concentration of PM for all n runs, mg/scm (gr/scf).
Qi = Inlet gas volume flow rate, m 3/sec (ft 3/sec).
mi = Mass collected for run i of n, mg (gr).
To = Average temperature of gas at measurement site, °K (°R).
Ti = Average temperature of gas at inlet, °K (°R).
Voli = Sample volume collected for run i of n, scm (scf).
v = Average gas velocity at the measurement site(s), m/s (ft/s)
Qo = Total baghouse exhaust volumetric flow rate, m 3/sec (ft 3/sec).
Qd = Dilution air flow rate, m 3/sec (ft 3/sec).
Tamb = Ambient Temperature, (°K).
12.2 Average Gas Velocity. When following section 8.3.1, calculate the average gas velocity at the measurement site as follows:
12.3 Volumetric Flow Rate. Total volumetric flow rate may be determined as follows:
12.4 Dilution Air Flow Rate.
12.5 Average PM Concentration. For multiple measurement sites, calculate the average PM concentration as follows:
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 5E—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From the Wool Fiberglass Insulation Manufacturing Industry
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from wool fiberglass insulation manufacturing sources.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and is collected either on a glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature in the range of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) and in impingers in solutions of 0.1 N sodium hydroxide (NaOH). The filtered particulate mass, which includes any material that condenses at or above the filtration temperature, is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water. The condensed PM collected in the impinger solutions is determined as total organic carbon (TOC) using a nondispersive infrared type of analyzer. The sum of the filtered PM mass and the condensed PM is reported as the total PM mass.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly toxic. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent in air can be lethal in minutes. Will react with metals, producing hydrogen.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 6.1, with the exception of the following:
6.1.1 Probe Liner. Same as described in section 6.1.1.2 of Method 5 except use only borosilicate or quartz glass liners.
6.1.2 Filter Holder. Same as described in section 6.1.1.5 of Method 5 with the addition of a leak-tight connection in the rear half of the filter holder designed for insertion of a temperature sensor used for measuring the sample gas exit temperature.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 6.2, except three wash bottles are needed instead of two and only glass storage bottles and funnels may be used.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 6.3, with the additional equipment for TOC analysis as described below:
6.3.1 Sample Blender or Homogenizer. Waring type or ultrasonic.
6.3.2 Magnetic Stirrer.
6.3.3 Hypodermic Syringe. 0- to 100-µl capacity.
6.3.4 Total Organic Carbon Analyzer. Rosemount Model 2100A analyzer or equivalent and a recorder.
6.3.5 Beaker. 30-ml.
6.3.6 Water Bath. Temperature controlled.
6.3.7 Volumetric Flasks. 1000-ml and 500-ml.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 7.1, with the addition of 0.1 N NaOH (Dissolve 4 g of NaOH in water and dilute to 1 liter).
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 7.2, with the addition of the following:
7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The potassium permanganate (KMnO4) test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide. Same as described in section 7.1.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 7.3, with the addition of the following:
7.3.1 Carbon Dioxide-Free Water. Distilled or deionized water that has been freshly boiled for 15 minutes and cooled to room temperature while preventing exposure to ambient air by using a cover vented with an Ascarite tube.
7.3.2 Hydrochloric Acid. HCl, concentrated, with a dropper.
7.3.3 Organic Carbon Stock Solution. Dissolve 2.1254 g of dried potassium biphthalate (HOOCC6H4COOK) in CO2-free water, and dilute to 1 liter in a volumetric flask. This solution contains 1000 mg/L organic carbon.
7.3.4 Inorganic Carbon Stock Solution. Dissolve 4.404 g anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3.) in about 500 ml of CO2-free water in a 1-liter volumetric flask. Add 3.497 g anhydrous sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3) to the flask, and dilute to 1 liter with CO2 -free water. This solution contains 1000 mg/L inorganic carbon.
7.3.5 Oxygen Gas. CO2 -free.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation and Preliminary Determinations. Same as Method 5, sections 8.1 and 8.2, respectively.
8.2 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as Method 5, section 8.3, except that 0.1 N NaOH is used in place of water in the impingers. The volumes of the solutions are the same as in Method 5.
8.3 Leak-Check Procedures, Sampling Train Operation, Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, sections 8.4 through 8.6, respectively.
8.4 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, sections 8.7.1 through 8.7.4, with the addition of the following:
8.4.1 Save portions of the water, acetone, and 0.1 N NaOH used for cleanup as blanks. Take 200 ml of each liquid directly from the wash bottles being used, and place in glass sample containers labeled “water blank,” “acetone blank,” and “NaOH blank,” respectively.
8.4.2 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.4.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.1.
8.4.2.2 Container No. 2. Use water to rinse the sample nozzle, probe, and front half of the filter holder three times in the manner described in section 8.7.6.2 of Method 5 except that no brushing is done. Put all the water wash in one container, seal, and label.
8.4.2.3 Container No. 3. Rinse and brush the sample nozzle, probe, and front half of the filter holder with acetone as described for Container No. 2 in section 8.7.6.2 of Method 5.
8.4.2.4 Container No. 4. Place the contents of the silica gel impinger in its original container as described for Container No. 3 in section 8.7.6.3 of Method 5.
8.4.2.5 Container No. 5. Measure the liquid in the first three impingers and record the volume or weight as described for the Impinger Water in section 8.7.6.4 of Method 5. Do not discard this liquid, but place it in a sample container using a glass funnel to aid in the transfer from the impingers or graduated cylinder (if used) to the sample container. Rinse each impinger thoroughly with 0.1 N NaOH three times, as well as the graduated cylinder (if used) and the funnel, and put these rinsings in the same sample container. Seal the container and label to clearly identify its contents.
8.5 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control.
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.3, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.1.2, 11.2.5.3 | Repetitive analyses | Ensures precise measurement of total carbon and inorganic carbon concentration of samples, blank, and standards. |
| 10.1.4 | TOC analyzer calibration | Ensures linearity of analyzer response to standards. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, section 10.0, with the addition of the following procedures for calibrating the total organic carbon analyzer:
10.1 Preparation of Organic Carbon Standard Curve.
10.1.1 Add 10 ml, 20 ml, 30 ml, 40 ml, and 50 ml of the organic carbon stock solution to a series of five 1000-ml volumetric flasks. Add 30 ml, 40 ml, and 50 ml of the same solution to a series of three 500-ml volumetric flasks. Dilute the contents of each flask to the mark using CO2-free water. These flasks contain 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 80, and 100 mg/L organic carbon, respectively.
10.1.2 Use a hypodermic syringe to withdraw a 20- to 50-µl aliquot from the 10 mg/L standard solution and inject it into the total carbon port of the analyzer. Measure the peak height. Repeat the injections until three consecutive peaks are obtained within 10 percent of their arithmetic mean. Repeat this procedure for the remaining organic carbon standard solutions.
10.1.3 Calculate the corrected peak height for each standard by deducting the blank correction (see section 11.2.5.3) as follows:
Where:
A = Peak height of standard or sample, mm or other appropriate unit.
B = Peak height of blank, mm or other appropriate unit.
10.1.4 Prepare a linear regression plot of the arithmetic mean of the three consecutive peak heights obtained for each standard solution against the concentration of that solution. Calculate the calibration factor as the inverse of the slope of this curve. If the product of the arithmetic mean peak height for any standard solution and the calibration factor differs from the actual concentration by more than 5 percent, remake and reanalyze that standard.
10.2 Preparation of Inorganic Carbon Standard Curve. Repeat the procedures outlined in sections 10.1.1 through 10.1.4, substituting the inorganic carbon stock solution for the organic carbon stock solution, and the inorganic carbon port of the analyzer for the total carbon port.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-6 of Method 5.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.1, except that the filters must be dried at 20 ±6 °C (68 ±10 °F) and ambient pressure.
11.2.2 Containers No. 2 and No. 3. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.2, except that evaporation of the samples must be at 20 ±6 °C (68 ±10 °F) and ambient pressure.
11.2.3 Container No. 4. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.3.
11.2.4 “Water Blank” and “Acetone Blank” Containers. Determine the water and acetone blank values following the procedures for the “Acetone Blank” container in section 11.2.4 of Method 5. Evaporate the samples at ambient temperature (20 ±6 °C (68 ±10 °F)) and pressure.
11.2.5 Container No. 5. For the determination of total organic carbon, perform two analyses on successive identical samples, i.e., total carbon and inorganic carbon. The desired quantity is the difference between the two values obtained. Both analyses are based on conversion of sample carbon into carbon dioxide for measurement by a nondispersive infrared analyzer. Results of analyses register as peaks on a strip chart recorder.
11.2.5.1 The principal differences between the operating parameters for the two channels involve the combustion tube packing material and temperature. In the total carbon channel, a high temperature (950 °C (1740 °F)) furnace heats a Hastelloy combustion tube packed with cobalt oxide-impregnated asbestos fiber. The oxygen in the carrier gas, the elevated temperature, and the catalytic effect of the packing result in oxidation of both organic and inorganic carbonaceous material to CO2, and steam. In the inorganic carbon channel, a low temperature (150 °C (300 °F)) furnace heats a glass tube containing quartz chips wetted with 85 percent phosphoric acid. The acid liberates CO2 and steam from inorganic carbonates. The operating temperature is below that required to oxidize organic matter. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for assembly, testing, calibration, and operation of the analyzer.
11.2.5.2 As samples collected in 0.1 N NaOH often contain a high measure of inorganic carbon that inhibits repeatable determinations of TOC, sample pretreatment is necessary. Measure and record the liquid volume of each sample (or impinger contents). If the sample contains solids or immiscible liquid matter, homogenize the sample with a blender or ultrasonics until satisfactory repeatability is obtained. Transfer a representative portion of 10 to 15 ml to a 30-ml beaker, and acidify with about 2 drops of concentrated HCl to a pH of 2 or less. Warm the acidified sample at 50 °C (120 °F) in a water bath for 15 minutes.
11.2.5.3 While stirring the sample with a magnetic stirrer, use a hypodermic syringe to withdraw a 20-to 50-µ1 aliquot from the beaker. Analyze the sample for total carbon and calculate its corrected mean peak height according to the procedures outlined in sections 10.1.2 and 10.1.3. Similarly analyze an aliquot of the sample for inorganic carbon. Repeat the analyses for all the samples and for the 0.1 N NaOH blank.
11.2.5.4 Ascertain the total carbon and inorganic carbon concentrations (CTC and CIC, respectively) of each sample and blank by comparing the corrected mean peak heights for each sample and blank to the appropriate standard curve.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 5, section 12.0, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
Cc = Concentration of condensed particulate matter in stack gas, gas dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
CIC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample, from section 11.2.5, mg/L.
Ct = Total particulate concentration, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
CTC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample, from section 11.2.5, mg/L.
CTOC = Concentration of condensed TOC in the liquid sample, mg/L.
mTOC = Mass of condensed TOC collected in the impingers, mg.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, from section 12.3 of Method 5, dscm (dscf).
Vs = Total volume of liquid sample, ml.
12.2 Concentration of Condensed TOC in Liquid Sample.
12.3 Mass of Condensed TOC Collected.
Where:
0.001 = Liters per milliliter.
12.4 Concentration of Condensed Particulate Material.
Where:
K4 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.5 Total Particulate Concentration.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Total Organic Carbon Analyzer. Tekmar-Dohrmann analyzers using the single injection technique may be used as an alternative to Rosemount Model 2100A analyzers.
17.0 References.
Same as section 17.0 of Method 5, with the addition of the following:
1. American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, Water Pollution Control Federation. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Fifteenth Edition. Washington, D.C. 1980.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 5F—Determination of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Applications
1.1 Analyte. Nonsulfate particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of nonsulfate PM emissions from stationary sources. Use of this method must be specified by an applicable subpart of the standards, or approved by the Administrator for a particular application.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a filter maintained at a temperature in the range 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F). The collected sample is extracted with water. A portion of the extract is analyzed for sulfate content by ion chromatography. The remainder is neutralized with ammonium hydroxide (NH4OH), dried, and weighed. The weight of sulfate in the sample is calculated as ammonium sulfate ((NH4)2SO4), and is subtracted from the total particulate weight; the result is reported as nonsulfate particulate matter.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection and Recovery. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1 and 6.2, respectively.
6.2 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 6.3, with the addition of the following:
6.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml, with ground glass joints.
6.2.2 Air Condenser. With ground glass joint compatible with the Erlenmeyer flasks.
6.2.3 Beakers. 600-ml.
6.2.4 Volumetric Flasks. 1-liter, 500-ml (one for each sample), 200-ml, and 50-ml (one for each sample and standard).
6.2.5 Pipet. 5-ml (one for each sample and standard).
6.2.6 Ion Chromatograph. The ion chromatograph should have at least the following components.
6.2.6.1 Columns. An anion separation column or other column capable of resolving the sulfate ion from other species present and a standard anion suppressor column. Suppressor columns are produced as proprietary items; however, one can be produced in the laboratory using the resin available from BioRad Company, 32nd and Griffin Streets, Richmond, California. Other systems which do not use suppressor columns may also be used.
6.2.6.2 Pump. Capable of maintaining a steady flow as required by the system.
6.2.6.3 Flow Gauges. Capable of measuring the specified system flow rate.
6.2.6.4 Conductivity Detector.
6.2.6.5 Recorder. Compatible with the output voltage range of the detector.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 7.1.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 7.2, with the addition of the following:
7.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled, to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The potassium permanganate (KMnO4) test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.3 Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 7.3, with the addition of the following:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in section 7.2.1.
7.3.2 Stock Standard Solution, 1 mg (NH4)2SO4/ml. Dry an adequate amount of primary standard grade ammonium sulfate ((NH4)2SO4) at 105 to 110 °C (220 to 230 °F) for a minimum of 2 hours before preparing the standard solution. Then dissolve exactly 1.000 g of dried (NH4)2SO4 in water in a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to 1 liter. Mix well.
7.3.3 Working Standard Solution, 25 µg (NH4)2SO4/ml. Pipet 5 ml of the stock standard solution into a 200-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to 200 ml with water.
7.3.4 Eluent Solution. Weigh 1.018 g of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 1.008 g of sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and dissolve in 4 liters of water. This solution is 0.0024 M Na2CO3/0.003 M NaHCO3. Other eluents appropriate to the column type and capable of resolving sulfate ion from other species present may be used.
7.3.5 Ammonium Hydroxide. Concentrated, 14.8 M.
7.3.6 Phenolphthalein Indicator. 3,3-Bis(4-hydroxyphenyl)-1-(3H)-isobenzo-furanone. Dissolve 0.05 g in 50 ml of ethanol and 50 ml of water.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as Method 5, section 8.0, with the exception of the following:
8.1 Sampling Train Operation. Same as Method 5, section 8.5, except that the probe outlet and filter temperatures shall be maintained at 160 ±14 °C (320 ±25 °F).
8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 8.7, except that the recovery solvent shall be water instead of acetone, and a clean filter from the same lot as those used during testing shall be saved for analysis as a blank.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.3, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.1.2, 11.2.5.3 | Repetitive analyses | Ensures precise measurement of total carbon and inorganic carbon concentration of samples, blank, and standards. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 5, section 10.0, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Determination of Ion Chromatograph Calibration Factor S. Prepare a series of five standards by adding 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, and 10.0 ml of working standard solution (25 µg/ml) to a series of five 50-ml volumetric flasks. (The standard masses will equal 25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 µg.) Dilute each flask to the mark with water, and mix well. Analyze each standard according to the chromatograph manufacturer's instructions. Take peak height measurements with symmetrical peaks; in all other cases, calculate peak areas. Prepare or calculate a linear regression plot of the standard masses in µg (x-axis) versus their responses (y-axis). From this line, or equation, determine the slope and calculate its reciprocal which is the calibration factor, S. If any point deviates from the line by more than 7 percent of the concentration at that point, remake and reanalyze that standard. This deviation can be determined by multiplying S times the response for each standard. The resultant concentrations must not differ by more than 7 percent from each known standard mass (i.e., 25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 µg).
10.2 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate according to manufacturer's specifications prior to initial use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Extraction.
11.1.1 Note on the analytical data sheet, the level of the liquid in the container, and whether any sample was lost during shipment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.1.2 Cut the filter into small pieces, and place it in a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask with a ground glass joint equipped with an air condenser. Rinse the shipping container with water, and pour the rinse into the flask. Add additional water to the flask until it contains about 75 ml, and place the flask on a hot plate. Gently reflux the contents for 6 to 8 hours. Cool the solution, and transfer it to a 500-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the Erlenmeyer flask with water, and transfer the rinsings to the volumetric flask including the pieces of filter.
11.1.3 Transfer the probe rinse to the same 500-ml volumetric flask with the filter sample. Rinse the sample bottle with water, and add the rinsings to the volumetric flask. Dilute the contents of the flask to the mark with water.
11.1.4 Allow the contents of the flask to settle until all solid material is at the bottom of the flask. If necessary, remove and centrifuge a portion of the sample.
11.1.5 Repeat the procedures outlined in sections 11.1.1 through 11.1.4 for each sample and for the filter blank.
11.2 Sulfate (SO4) Analysis.
11.2.1 Prepare a standard calibration curve according to the procedures outlined in section 10.1.
11.2.2 Pipet 5 ml of the sample into a 50-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 50 ml with water. (Alternatively, eluent solution may be used instead of water in all sample, standard, and blank dilutions.) Analyze the set of standards followed by the set of samples, including the filter blank, using the same injection volume used for the standards.
11.2.3 Repeat the analyses of the standards and the samples, with the standard set being done last. The two peak height or peak area responses for each sample must agree within 5 percent of their arithmetic mean for the analysis to be valid. Perform this analysis sequence on the same day. Dilute any sample and the blank with equal volumes of water if the concentration exceeds that of the highest standard.
11.2.4 Document each sample chromatogram by listing the following analytical parameters: injection point, injection volume, sulfate retention time, flow rate, detector sensitivity setting, and recorder chart speed.
11.3 Sample Residue.
11.3.1 Transfer the remaining contents of the volumetric flask to a tared 600-ml beaker or similar container. Rinse the volumetric flask with water, and add the rinsings to the tared beaker. Make certain that all particulate matter is transferred to the beaker. Evaporate the water in an oven at 105 °C (220 °F) until only about 100 ml of water remains. Remove the beakers from the oven, and allow them to cool.
11.3.2 After the beakers have cooled, add five drops of phenolphthalein indicator, and then add concentrated ammonium hydroxide until the solution turns pink. Return the samples to the oven at 105 °C (220 °F), and evaporate the samples to dryness. Cool the samples in a desiccator, and weigh the samples to constant weight.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 5, section 12.0, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
CW = Water blank residue concentration, mg/ml.
F = Dilution factor (required only if sample dilution was needed to reduce the concentration into the range of calibration).
HS = Arithmetic mean response of duplicate sample analyses, mm for height or mm2 for area.
Hb = Arithmetic mean response of duplicate filter blank analyses, mm for height or mm2 for area.
mb = Mass of beaker used to dry sample, mg.
mf = Mass of sample filter, mg.
mn = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in the sample as collected, mg.
ms = Mass of ammonium sulfate in the sample as collected, mg.
mt = Mass of beaker, filter, and dried sample, mg.
mw = Mass of residue after evaporation of water blank, mg.
S = Calibration factor, µg/mm.
Vb = Volume of water blank, ml.
VS = Volume of sample collected, 500 ml.
12.2 Water Blank Concentration.
12.3 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
Where:
100 = Aliquot factor, 495 ml/5 ml
1000 = Constant, µg/mg
12.4 Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 The following procedure may be used as an alternative to the procedure in section 11.0
16.1.1 Apparatus. Same as for Method 6, sections 6.3.3 to 6.3.6 with the following additions.
16.1.1.1 Beakers. 250-ml, one for each sample, and 600-ml.
16.1.1.2 Oven. Capable of maintaining temperatures of 75 ±5 °C (167 ±9 °F) and 105 ±5 °C (221 ±9 °F).
16.1.1.3 Buchner Funnel.
16.1.1.4 Glass Columns. 25-mm × 305-mm (1-in. × 12-in.) with Teflon stopcock.
16.1.1.5 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml and 500-ml, one set for each sample, and 100-ml, 200-ml, and 1000-ml.
16.1.1.6 Pipettes. Two 20-ml and one 200-ml, one set for each sample, and 5-ml.
16.1.1.7 Filter Flasks. 500-ml.
16.1.1.8 Polyethylene Bottle. 500-ml, one for each sample.
16.1.2 Reagents. Same as Method 6, sections 7.3.2 to 7.3.5 with the following additions:
16.1.2.1 Water, Ammonium Hydroxide, and Phenolphthalein. Same as sections 7.2.1, 7.3.5, and 7.3.6 of this method, respectively.
16.1.2.2 Filter. Glass fiber to fit Buchner funnel.
16.1.2.3 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 1 m. Add 8.3 ml of concentrated HCl (12 M) to 50 ml of water in a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to 100 ml with water.
16.1.2.4 Glass Wool.
16.1.2.5 Ion Exchange Resin. Strong cation exchange resin, hydrogen form, analytical grade.
16.1.2.6 pH Paper. Range of 1 to 7.
16.1.3 Analysis.
16.1.3.1 Ion Exchange Column Preparation. Slurry the resin with 1 M HCl in a 250-ml beaker, and allow to stand overnight. Place 2.5 cm (1 in.) of glass wool in the bottom of the glass column. Rinse the slurried resin twice with water. Resuspend the resin in water, and pour sufficient resin into the column to make a bed 5.1 cm (2 in.) deep. Do not allow air bubbles to become entrapped in the resin or glass wool to avoid channeling, which may produce erratic results. If necessary, stir the resin with a glass rod to remove air bubbles, after the column has been prepared, never let the liquid level fall below the top of the upper glass wool plug. Place a 2.5-cm (1-in.) plug of glass wool on top of the resin. Rinse the column with water until the eluate gives a pH of 5 or greater as measured with pH paper.
16.1.3.2 Sample Extraction. Followup the procedure given in section 11.1.3 except do not dilute the sample to 500 ml.
16.1.3.3 Sample Residue.
16.1.3.3.1 Place at least one clean glass filter for each sample in a Buchner funnel, and rinse the filters with water. Remove the filters from the funnel, and dry them in an oven at 105 ±5 °C (221 ±9 °F); then cool in a desiccator. Weigh each filter to constant weight according to the procedure in Method 5, section 11.0. Record the weight of each filter to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.1.3.3.2 Assemble the vacuum filter apparatus, and place one of the clean, tared glass fiber filters in the Buchner funnel. Decant the liquid portion of the extracted sample (Section 16.1.3.2) through the tared glass fiber filter into a clean, dry, 500-ml filter flask. Rinse all the particulate matter remaining in the volumetric flask onto the glass fiber filter with water. Rinse the particulate matter with additional water. Transfer the filtrate to a 500-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to 500 ml with water. Dry the filter overnight at 105 ±5 °C (221 ±9 °F), cool in a desiccator, and weigh to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.1.3.3.3 Dry a 250-ml beaker at 75 ±5 °C (167 ±9 °F), and cool in a desiccator; then weigh to constant weight to the nearest 0.1 mg. Pipette 200 ml of the filtrate that was saved into a tared 250-ml beaker; add five drops of phenolphthalein indicator and sufficient concentrated ammonium hydroxide to turn the solution pink. Carefully evaporate the contents of the beaker to dryness at 75 ±5 °C (167 ±9 °F). Check for dryness every 30 minutes. Do not continue to bake the sample once it has dried. Cool the sample in a desiccator, and weigh to constant weight to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.1.3.4 Sulfate Analysis. Adjust the flow rate through the ion exchange column to 3 ml/min. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the filtrate onto the top of the ion exchange column, and collect the eluate in a 50-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the column with two 15-ml portions of water. Stop collection of the eluate when the volume in the flask reaches 50-ml. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the eluate into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 80 ml of 100 percent isopropanol and two to four drops of thorin indicator, and titrate to a pink end point using 0.0100 N barium perchlorate. Repeat and average the titration volumes. Run a blank with each series of samples. Replicate titrations must agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. Perform the ion exchange and titration procedures on duplicate portions of the filtrate. Results should agree within 5 percent. Regenerate or replace the ion exchange resin after 20 sample aliquots have been analyzed or if the end point of the titration becomes unclear.
16.1.3.5 Blank Determination. Begin with a sample of water of the same volume as the samples being processed and carry it through the analysis steps described in sections 16.1.3.3 and 16.1.3.4. A blank value larger than 5 mg should not be subtracted from the final particulate matter mass. Causes for large blank values should be investigated and any problems resolved before proceeding with further analyses.
16.1.4 Calibration. Calibrate the barium perchlorate solutions as in Method 6, section 10.5.
16.1.5 Calculations.
16.1.5.1 Nomenclature. Same as section 12.1 with the following additions:
ma = Mass of clean analytical filter, mg.
md = Mass of dissolved particulate matter, mg.
me = Mass of beaker and dissolved particulate matter after evaporation of filtrate, mg.
mp = Mass of insoluble particulate matter, mg.
mr = Mass of analytical filter, sample filter, and insoluble particulate matter, mg.
mbk = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter in blank sample, mg.
mn = Mass of nonsulfate particulate matter, mg.
ms = Mass of Ammonium sulfate, mg.
N = Normality of Ba(ClO4) titrant, meq/ml.
Va = Volume of aliquot taken for titration, 20 ml.
Vc = Volume of titrant used for titration blank, ml.
Vd = Volume of filtrate evaporated, 200 ml.
Ve = Volume of eluate collected, 50 ml.
Vf = Volume of extracted sample, 500 ml.
Vi = Volume of filtrate added to ion exchange column, 20 ml.
Vt = Volume of Ba(C104)2 titrant, ml.
W = Equivalent weight of ammonium sulfate, 66.07 mg/meq.
16.1.5.2 Mass of Insoluble Particulate Matter.
16.1.5.3 Mass of Dissolved Particulate Matter.
16.1.5.4 Mass of Ammonium Sulfate.
16.1.5.5 Mass of Nonsulfate Particulate Matter.
17.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Mulik, J.D. and E. Sawicki. Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 2, 1979.
2. Sawicki, E., J.D. Mulik, and E. Wittgenstein. Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 1. 1978.
3. Siemer, D.D. Separation of Chloride and Bromide from Complex Matrices Prior to Ion Chromatographic Determination. Analytical Chemistry 52(12): 1874-1877. October 1980.
4. Small, H., T.S. Stevens, and W.C. Bauman. Novel Ion Exchange Chromatographic Method Using Conductimetric Determination. Analytical Chemistry. 47(11):1801. 1975.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 5G—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Wood Heaters (Dilution Tunnel Sampling Location)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions from wood heaters.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 The exhaust from a wood heater is collected with a total collection hood, and is combined with ambient dilution air. Particulate matter is withdrawn proportionally from a single point in a sampling tunnel, and is collected on two glass fiber filters in series. The filters are maintained at a temperature of no greater than 32 °C (90 °F). The particulate mass is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
2.2 There are three sampling train approaches described in this method: (1) One dual-filter dry sampling train operated at about 0.015 m 3/min (0.5 cfm), (2) One dual-filter plus impingers sampling train operated at about 0.015 m 3/min (0.5 cfm), and (3) two dual-filter dry sampling trains operated simultaneously at any flow rate. Options (2) and (3) are referenced in section 16.0 of this method. The dual-filter dry sampling train equipment and operation, option (1), are described in detail in this method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train configuration is shown in Figure 5G-1 and consists of the following components:
6.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel (e.g., 316 or grade more corrosion resistant) or glass about 9.5 mm ( 3/8 in.) I.D., 0.6 m (24 in.) in length. If made of stainless steel, the probe shall be constructed from seamless tubing.
6.1.1.2 Pitot Tube. Type S, as described in section 6.1 of Method 2. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall have a known coefficient, determined as outlined in Method 2, section 10. Alternatively, a standard pitot may be used as described in Method 2, section 6.1.2.
6.1.1.3 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer or equivalent device, as described in Method 2, section 6.2. One manometer shall be used for velocity head (Δp) readings and another (optional) for orifice differential pressure readings (ΔH).
6.1.1.4 Filter Holders. Two each made of borosilicate glass, stainless steel, or Teflon, with a glass frit or stainless steel filter support and a silicone rubber, Teflon, or Viton gasket. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filters. The filter holders shall be placed in series with the backup filter holder located 25 to 100 mm (1 to 4 in.) downstream from the primary filter holder. The filter holder shall be capable of holding a filter with a 100 mm (4 in.) diameter, except as noted in section 16.
6.1.1.5 Filter Temperature Monitoring System. A temperature sensor capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5 °F). The sensor shall be installed at the exit side of the front filter holder so that the sensing tip of the temperature sensor is in direct contact with the sample gas or in a thermowell as shown in Figure 5G-1. The temperature sensor shall comply with the calibration specifications in Method 2, section 10.3. Alternatively, the sensing tip of the temperature sensor may be installed at the inlet side of the front filter holder.
6.1.1.6 Dryer. Any system capable of removing water from the sample gas to less than 1.5 percent moisture (volume percent) prior to the metering system. The system shall include a temperature sensor for demonstrating that sample gas temperature exiting the dryer is less than 20 °C (68 °F).
6.1.1.7 Metering System. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.9.
6.1.2 Barometer. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.2.
6.1.3 Dilution Tunnel Gas Temperature Measurement. A temperature sensor capable of measuring temperature to within ±3 °C (±5 °F).
6.1.4 Dilution Tunnel. The dilution tunnel apparatus is shown in Figure 5G-2 and consists of the following components:
6.1.4.1 Hood. Constructed of steel with a minimum diameter of 0.3 m (1 ft) on the large end and a standard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) coupling capable of connecting to standard 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) stove pipe on the small end.
6.1.4.2 90° Elbows. Steel 90° elbows, 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) in diameter for connecting mixing duct, straight duct and optional damper assembly. There shall be at least two 90° elbows upstream of the sampling section (see Figure 5G-2).
6.1.4.3 Straight Duct. Steel, 0.15 to 0.3 m (0.5 to 1 ft) in diameter to provide the ducting for the dilution apparatus upstream of the sampling section. Steel duct, 0.15 m (0.5 ft) in diameter shall be used for the sampling section. In the sampling section, at least 1.2 m (4 ft) downstream of the elbow, shall be two holes (velocity traverse ports) at 90° to each other of sufficient size to allow entry of the pitot for traverse measurements. At least 1.2 m (4 ft) downstream of the velocity traverse ports, shall be one hole (sampling port) of sufficient size to allow entry of the sampling probe. Ducts of larger diameter may be used for the sampling section, provided the specifications for minimum gas velocity and the dilution rate range shown in section 8 are maintained. The length of duct from the hood inlet to the sampling ports shall not exceed 9.1 m (30 ft).
6.1.4.4 Mixing Baffles. Steel semicircles (two) attached at 90° to the duct axis on opposite sides of the duct midway between the two elbows upstream of sampling section. The space between the baffles shall be about 0.3 m (1 ft).
6.1.4.5 Blower. Squirrel cage or other fan capable of extracting gas from the dilution tunnel of sufficient flow to maintain the velocity and dilution rate specifications in section 8 and exhausting the gas to the atmosphere.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery: probe brushes, wash bottles, sample storage containers, petri dishes, and funnel. Same as Method 5, sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.4, and 6.2.8, respectively.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items are required for sample analysis: glass weighing dishes, desiccator, analytical balance, beakers (250-ml or smaller), hygrometer, and temperature sensor. Same as Method 5, sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.3 and 6.3.5 through 6.3.7, respectively.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters. Glass fiber filters with a minimum diameter of 100 mm (4 in.), without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3-micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. Gelman A/E 61631 has been found acceptable for this purpose.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, section 7.1.5. 7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone-reagent grade, same as Method 5, section 7.2.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Two reagents are required for the sample analysis:
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as in section 7.2.
7.3.2 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, calcium chloride, or silica gel, indicating type.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Dilution Tunnel Assembly and Cleaning. A schematic of a dilution tunnel is shown in Figure 5G-2. The dilution tunnel dimensions and other features are described in section 6.1.4. Assemble the dilution tunnel, sealing joints and seams to prevent air leakage. Clean the dilution tunnel with an appropriately sized wire chimney brush before each certification test.
8.2 Draft Determination. Prepare the wood heater as in Method 28, section 6.2.1. Locate the dilution tunnel hood centrally over the wood heater stack exhaust. Operate the dilution tunnel blower at the flow rate to be used during the test run. Measure the draft imposed on the wood heater by the dilution tunnel (i.e., the difference in draft measured with and without the dilution tunnel operating) as described in Method 28, section 6.2.3. Adjust the distance between the top of the wood heater stack exhaust and the dilution tunnel hood so that the dilution tunnel induced draft is less than 1.25 Pa (0.005 in. H2O). Have no fire in the wood heater, close the wood heater doors, and open fully the air supply controls during this check and adjustment.
8.3 Pretest Ignition. Same as Method 28, section 8.7.
8.4 Smoke Capture. During the pretest ignition period, operate the dilution tunnel and visually monitor the wood heater stack exhaust. Operate the wood heater with the doors closed and determine that 100 percent of the exhaust gas is collected by the dilution tunnel hood. If less than 100 percent of the wood heater exhaust gas is collected, adjust the distance between the wood heater stack and the dilution tunnel hood until no visible exhaust gas is escaping. Stop the pretest ignition period, and repeat the draft determination procedure described in section 8.2.
8.5 Velocity Measurements. During the pretest ignition period, conduct a velocity traverse to identify the point of average velocity. This single point shall be used for measuring velocity during the test run.
8.5.1 Velocity Traverse. Measure the diameter of the duct at the velocity traverse port location through both ports. Calculate the duct area using the average of the two diameters. A pretest leak-check of pitot lines as in Method 2, section 8.1, is recommended. Place the calibrated pitot tube at the centroid of the stack in either of the velocity traverse ports. Adjust the damper or similar device on the blower inlet until the velocity indicated by the pitot is approximately 220 m/min (720 ft/min). Continue to read the Δp and temperature until the velocity has remained constant (less than 5 percent change) for 1 minute. Once a constant velocity is obtained at the centroid of the duct, perform a velocity traverse as outlined in Method 2, section 8.3 using four points per traverse as outlined in Method 1. Measure the Δp and tunnel temperature at each traverse point and record the readings. Calculate the total gas flow rate using calculations contained in Method 2, section 12. Verify that the flow rate is 4 ±0.40 dscm/min (140 ±14 dscf/min); if not, readjust the damper, and repeat the velocity traverse. The moisture may be assumed to be 4 percent (100 percent relative humidity at 85 °F). Direct moisture measurements (e.g., according to Method 4) are also permissible.
8.5.2 Testing Velocity Measurements. After obtaining velocity traverse results that meet the flow rate requirements, choose a point of average velocity and place the pitot and temperature sensor at that location in the duct. Alternatively, locate the pitot and the temperature sensor at the duct centroid and calculate a velocity correction factor for the centroidal position. Mount the pitot to ensure no movement during the test run and seal the port holes to prevent any air leakage. Align the pitot opening to be parallel with the duct axis at the measurement point. Check that this condition is maintained during the test run (about 30-minute intervals). Monitor the temperature and velocity during the pretest ignition period to ensure that the proper flow rate is maintained. Make adjustments to the dilution tunnel flow rate as necessary.
8.6 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method 5, section 8.1.
8.7 Preparation of Sampling Train. During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep all openings where contamination can occur covered until just prior to assembly or until sampling is about to begin.
Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place one labeled (identified) and weighed filter in each of the filter holders. Be sure that each filter is properly centered and that the gasket is properly placed so as to prevent the sample gas stream from circumventing the filter. Check each filter for tears after assembly is completed.
Mark the probe with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct. Set up the train as shown in Figure 5G-1.
8.8 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.8.1 Leak-Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5G-1. That portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter shall be leak-checked prior to initial use and after each certification or audit test. Leakage after the pump will result in less volume being recorded than is actually sampled. Use the procedure described in Method 5, section 8.4.1. Similar leak-checks shall be conducted for other types of metering systems (i.e., without orifice meters).
8.8.2 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-check of the sampling train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak check is conducted, the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.4.2 should be used. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) may be used instead of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
8.8.3 Post-Test Leak-Check. A leak-check of the sampling train is mandatory at the conclusion of each test run. The leak-check shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.4.2. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) or the highest vacuum measured during the test run, whichever is greater, may be used instead of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
8.9 Preliminary Determinations. Determine the pressure, temperature and the average velocity of the tunnel gases as in section 8.5. Moisture content of diluted tunnel gases is assumed to be 4 percent for making flow rate calculations; the moisture content may be measured directly as in Method 4.
8.10 Sampling Train Operation. Position the probe inlet at the stack centroid, and block off the openings around the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas stream. Be careful not to bump the probe into the stack wall when removing or inserting the probe through the porthole; this minimizes the chance of extracting deposited material.
8.10.1 Begin sampling at the start of the test run as defined in Method 28, section 8.8.1. During the test run, maintain a sample flow rate proportional to the dilution tunnel flow rate (within 10 percent of the initial proportionality ratio) and a filter holder temperature of no greater than 32 °C (90 °F). The initial sample flow rate shall be approximately 0.015 m 3/min (0.5 cfm).
8.10.2 For each test run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5G-3. Be sure to record the initial dry gas meter reading. Record the dry gas meter readings at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment and when sampling is halted. Take other readings as indicated on Figure 5G-3 at least once each 10 minutes during the test run. Since the manometer level and zero may drift because of vibrations and temperature changes, make periodic checks during the test run.
8.10.3 For the purposes of proportional sampling rate determinations, data from calibrated flow rate devices, such as glass rotameters, may be used in lieu of incremental dry gas meter readings. Proportional rate calculation procedures must be revised, but acceptability limits remain the same.
8.10.4 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the temperature between (or upstream of) the filters at the proper level. Do not change sampling trains during the test run.
8.10.5 At the end of the test run (see Method 28, section 6.4.6), turn off the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe from the stack, turn off the pump, record the final dry gas meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak-check, as outlined in section 8.8.2. Also, leak-check the pitot lines as described in Method 2, section 8.1; the lines must pass this leak-check in order to validate the velocity head data.
8.11 Calculation of Proportional Sampling Rate. Calculate percent proportionality (see section 12.7) to determine whether the run was valid or another test run should be made.
8.12 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 8.7, with the exception of the following:
8.12.1 An acetone blank volume of about 50-ml or more may be used.
8.12.2 Treat the samples as follows:
8.12.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.7.6.1. The filters may be stored either in a single container or in separate containers. Use the sum of the filter tare weights to determine the sample mass collected.
8.12.2.3 Container No. 2.
8.12.2.3.1 Taking care to see that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover particulate matter or any condensate from the probe and filter holders by washing and brushing these components with acetone and placing the wash in a labeled glass container. At least three cycles of brushing and rinsing are required.
8.12.2.3.2 Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination.
8.12.2.3.3 After all acetone washings and particulate matter have been collected in the sample containers, tighten the lids on the sample containers so that the acetone will not leak out when transferred to the laboratory weighing area. Mark the height of the fluid levels to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the containers clearly to identify contents.
8.13 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.8, 10.1-10.4 | Sampling equipment leak check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.5 | Analytical balance calibration | Ensure accurate and precise measurement of collected particulate. |
| 16.2.5 | Simultaneous, dual-train sample collection | Ensure precision of measured particulate concentration. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Pitot Tube. The Type S pitot tube assembly shall be calibrated according to the procedure outlined in Method 2, section 10.1, prior to the first certification test and checked semiannually, thereafter. A standard pitot need not be calibrated but shall be inspected and cleaned, if necessary, prior to each certification test.
10.2 Volume Metering System.
10.2.1 Initial and Periodic Calibration. Before its initial use and at least semiannually thereafter, calibrate the volume metering system as described in Method 5, section 10.3.1, except that the wet test meter with a capacity of 3.0 liters/rev (0.1 ft 3/rev) may be used. Other liquid displacement systems accurate to within ±1 percent, may be used as calibration standards.
10.2.2 Calibration After Use. After each certification or audit test (four or more test runs conducted on a wood heater at the four burn rates specified in Method 28), check calibration of the metering system by performing three calibration runs at a single, intermediate flow rate as described in Method 5, section 10.3.2.
10.2.3 Acceptable Variation in Calibration. If the dry gas meter coefficient values obtained before and after a certification test differ by more than 5 percent, the certification test shall either be voided and repeated, or calculations for the certification test shall be performed using whichever meter coefficient value (i.e., before or after) gives the lower value of total sample volume.
10.3 Temperature Sensors. Use the procedure in Method 2, section 10.3, to calibrate temperature sensors before the first certification or audit test and at least semiannually, thereafter.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer before the first certification test and at least semiannually, thereafter. If a mercury barometer is used, no calibration is necessary. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for operation.
10.5 Analytical Balance. Perform a multipoint calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical balance before the first certification test and semiannually, thereafter. Before each certification test, audit the balance by weighing at least one calibration weight (class F) that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.1 mg, conduct the multipoint calibration before use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5G-4. Use the same analytical balance for determining tare weights and final sample weights.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 11.2.1.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.2, except that the beaker may be smaller than 250 ml.
11.2.3 Acetone Blank Container. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.4, except that the beaker may be smaller than 250 ml.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume (assumed to be 0.04).
cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (gr/dscf).
E = Particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
Eadj = Adjusted particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest or post-test leak-check, equal to 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check, m 3/min (cfm).
ma = Mass of residue of acetone blank after evaporation, mg.
maw = Mass of residue from acetone wash after evaporation, mg.
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
PR = Percent of proportional sampling rate.
Ps = Absolute gas pressure in dilution tunnel, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Qsd = Average gas flow rate in dilution tunnel, calculated as in Method 2, Equation 2-8, dscm/hr (dscf/hr).
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter temperature (see Figure 5G-3), °K (°R).
Tmi = Absolute average dry gas meter temperature during each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run, °K (°R).
Ts = Absolute average gas temperature in the dilution tunnel (see Figure 5G-3), °K (°R).
Tsi = Absolute average gas temperature in the dilution tunnel during each 10 minute interval, i, of the test run, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
Va = Volume of acetone blank, ml.
Vaw = Volume of acetone used in wash, ml.
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter, dcm (dcf).
Vmi = Volume of gas sample as measured by dry gas meter during each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run, dcm.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vs = Average gas velocity in the dilution tunnel, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2-7, m/sec (ft/sec). The dilution tunnel dry gas molecular weight may be assumed to be 29 g/g mole (lb/lb mole).
Vsi = Average gas velocity in dilution tunnel during each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run, calculated by Method 2, Equation 2-7, m/sec (ft/sec).
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter, if used (see Figure 5G-2), mm H 2O (in. H 2O).
U = Total sampling time, min.
10 = 10 minutes, length of first sampling period.
13.6 = Specific gravity of mercury.
100 = Conversion to percent.
12.2 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, section 12.2, except that component changes are not allowable.
12.3 Solvent Wash Blank.
12.4 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate catch, mn, from the sum of the weights obtained from Container Nos. 1, 1A, and 2, less the acetone blank (see Figure 5G-4).
12.5 Particulate Concentration.
Where:
K2 = 0.001 g/mg for metric units.
= 0.0154 gr/mg for English units.
12.6 Particulate Emission Rate.
Where:
K3 = constant, 1.82 for metric units.
= constant, 0.643 for English units.
12.7 Proportional Rate Variation. Calculate PR for each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run.
Alternate calculation procedures for proportional rate variation may be used if other sample flow rate data (e.g., orifice flow meters or rotameters) are monitored to maintain proportional sampling rates. The proportional rate variations shall be calculated for each 10-minute interval by comparing the stack to nozzle velocity ratio for each 10-minute interval to the average stack to nozzle velocity ratio for the test run. Proportional rate variation may be calculated for intervals shorter than 10 minutes with appropriate revisions to Equation 5G-5. If no more than 10 percent of the PR values for all the intervals exceed 90 percent ≤PR ≤110 percent, and if no PR value for any interval exceeds 80 percent ≤PR ≤120 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PR values for the test run are judged to be unacceptable, report the test run emission results, but do not include the results in calculating the weighted average emission rate, and repeat the test run.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Method 5H Sampling Train. The sampling train and sample collection, recovery, and analysis procedures described in Method 5H, sections 6.1.1, 7.1, 7.2, 8.1, 8.10, 8.11, and 11.0, respectively, may be used in lieu of similar sections in Method 5G. Operation of the Method 5H sampling train in the dilution tunnel is as described in section 8.10 of this method. Filter temperatures and condenser conditions are as described in Method 5H. No adjustment to the measured particulate matter emission rate (Equation 5G-4, section 12.6) is to be applied to the particulate emission rate measured by this alternative method.
16.2 Dual Sampling Trains. Two sampling trains may be operated simultaneously at sample flow rates other than that specified in section 8.10, provided that the following specifications are met.
16.2.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train configuration shall be the same as specified in section 6.1.1, except the probe, filter, and filter holder need not be the same sizes as specified in the applicable sections. Filter holders of plastic materials such as Nalgene or polycarbonate materials may be used (the Gelman 1119 filter holder has been found suitable for this purpose). With such materials, it is recommended that solvents not be used in sample recovery. The filter face velocity shall not exceed 150 mm/sec (30 ft/min) during the test run. The dry gas meter shall be calibrated for the same flow rate range as encountered during the test runs. Two separate, complete sampling trains are required for each test run.
16.2.2 Probe Location. Locate the two probes in the dilution tunnel at the same level (see section 6.1.4.3). Two sample ports are necessary. Locate the probe inlets within the 50 mm (2 in.) diameter centroidal area of the dilution tunnel no closer than 25 mm (1 in.) apart.
16.2.3 Sampling Train Operation. Operate the sampling trains as specified in section 8.10, maintaining proportional sampling rates and starting and stopping the two sampling trains simultaneously. The pitot values as described in section 8.5.2 shall be used to adjust sampling rates in both sampling trains.
16.2.4 Recovery and Analysis of Sample. Recover and analyze the samples from the two sampling trains separately, as specified in sections 8.12 and 11.0, respectively.
16.2.4.1 For this alternative procedure, the probe and filter holder assembly may be weighed without sample recovery (use no solvents) described above in order to determine the sample weight gains. For this approach, weigh the clean, dry probe and filter holder assembly upstream of the front filter (without filters) to the nearest 0.1 mg to establish the tare weights. The filter holder section between the front and second filter need not be weighed. At the end of the test run, carefully clean the outside of the probe, cap the ends, and identify the sample (label). Remove the filters from the filter holder assemblies as described for container Nos. 1 and 1A in section 8.12.2.1. Reassemble the filter holder assembly, cap the ends, identify the sample (label), and transfer all the samples to the laboratory weighing area for final weighing. Requirements for capping and transport of sample containers are not applicable if sample recovery and analysis occur in the same room.
16.2.4.2 For this alternative procedure, filters may be weighed directly without a petri dish. If the probe and filter holder assembly are to be weighed to determine the sample weight, rinse the probe with acetone to remove moisture before desiccating prior to the test run. Following the test run, transport the probe and filter holder to the desiccator, and uncap the openings of the probe and the filter holder assembly. Desiccate for 24 hours and weigh to a constant weight. Report the results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
16.2.5 Calculations. Calculate an emission rate (Section 12.6) for the sample from each sampling train separately and determine the average emission rate for the two values. The two emission rates shall not differ by more than 7.5 percent from the average emission rate, or 7.5 percent of the weighted average emission rate limit in the applicable subpart of the regulations, whichever is greater. If this specification is not met, the results are unacceptable. Report the results, but do not include the results in calculating the weighted average emission rate. Repeat the test run until acceptable results are achieved, report the average emission rate for the acceptable test run, and use the average in calculating the weighted average emission rate.
17.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0, References 1 through 11, with the addition of the following:
1. Oregon Department of Environmental Quality. Standard Method for Measuring the Emissions and Efficiencies of Woodstoves. June 8, 1984. Pursuant to Oregon Administrative Rules Chapter 340, Division 21.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials. Proposed Test Methods for Heating Performance and Emissions of Residential Wood-fired Closed Combustion-Chamber Heating Appliances. E-6 Proposal P 180. August 1986.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 5H—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Wood Heaters From a Stack Location
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM and condensible emissions from wood heaters.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn proportionally from the wood heater exhaust and is collected on two glass fiber filters separated by impingers immersed in an ice water bath. The first filter is maintained at a temperature of no greater than 120 °C (248 °F). The second filter and the impinger system are cooled such that the temperature of the gas exiting the second filter is no greater than 20 °C (68 °F). The particulate mass collected in the probe, on the filters, and in the impingers is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions
Same as in Method 6C, section 3.0.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train configuration is shown in Figure 5H-1. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1, with the exception of the following:
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. The nozzle is optional; a straight sampling probe without a nozzle is an acceptable alternative.
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, section 6.1.1.2, except that the maximum length of the sample probe shall be 0.6 m (2 ft) and probe heating is optional.
6.1.1.3 Filter Holders. Two each of borosilicate glass, with a glass frit or stainless steel filter support and a silicone rubber, Teflon, or Viton gasket. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The front filter holder shall be attached immediately at the outlet of the probe and prior to the first impinger. The second filter holder shall be attached on the outlet of the third impinger and prior to the inlet of the fourth (silica gel) impinger.
6.1.2 Barometer. Same as Method 5, section 6.2.
6.1.3 Stack Gas Flow Rate Measurement System. A schematic of an example test system is shown in Figure 5H-2. The flow rate measurement system consists of the following components:
6.1.3.1 Sample Probe. A glass or stainless steel sampling probe.
6.1.3.2 Gas Conditioning System. A high density filter to remove particulate matter and a condenser capable of lowering the dew point of the gas to less than 5 °C (40 °F). Desiccant, such as Drierite, may be used to dry the sample gas. Do not use silica gel.
6.1.3.3 Pump. An inert (e.g., Teflon or stainless steel heads) sampling pump capable of delivering more than the total amount of sample required in the manufacturer's instructions for the individual instruments. A means of controlling the analyzer flow rate and a device for determining proper sample flow rate (e.g., precision rotameter, pressure gauge downstream of all flow controls) shall be provided at the analyzer. The requirements for measuring and controlling the analyzer flow rate are not applicable if data are presented that demonstrate that the analyzer is insensitive to flow variations over the range encountered during the test.
6.1.3.4 Carbon Monoxide (CO) Analyzer. Any analyzer capable of providing a measure of CO in the range of 0 to 10 percent by volume at least once every 10 minutes.
6.1.3.5 Carbon Dioxide (CO2) Analyzer. Any analyzer capable of providing a measure of CO2 in the range of 0 to 25 percent by volume at least once every 10 minutes.
6.1.3.6 Manifold. A sampling tube capable of delivering the sample gas to two analyzers and handling an excess of the total amount used by the analyzers. The excess gas is exhausted through a separate port.
6.1.3.7 Recorders (optional). To provide a permanent record of the analyzer outputs.
6.1.4 Proportional Gas Flow Rate System. To monitor stack flow rate changes and provide a measurement that can be used to adjust and maintain particulate sampling flow rates proportional to the stack gas flow rate. A schematic of the proportional flow rate system is shown in Figure 5H-2 and consists of the following components:
6.1.4.1 Tracer Gas Injection System. To inject a known concentration of sulfur dioxide (SO2) into the flue. The tracer gas injection system consists of a cylinder of SO2, a gas cylinder regulator, a stainless steel needle valve or flow controller, a nonreactive (stainless steel and glass) rotameter, and an injection loop to disperse the SO2 evenly in the flue.
6.1.4.2 Sample Probe. A glass or stainless steel sampling probe.
6.1.4.3 Gas Conditioning System. A combustor as described in Method 16A, sections 6.1.5 and 6.1.6, followed by a high density filter to remove particulate matter, and a condenser capable of lowering the dew point of the gas to less than 5 °C (40 °F). Desiccant, such as Drierite, may be used to dry the sample gas. Do not use silica gel.
6.1.4.4 Pump. Same as described in section 6.1.3.3.
6.1.4.5 SO2 Analyzer. Any analyzer capable of providing a measure of the SO2 concentration in the range of 0 to 1,000 ppm by volume (or other range necessary to measure the SO2 concentration) at least once every 10 minutes.
6.1.4.6 Recorder (optional). To provide a permanent record of the analyzer outputs.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 6.2.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 5, section 6.3, with the addition of the following:
6.3.1 Separatory Funnel. Glass or Teflon, 500-ml or greater.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 7.1, including deionized distilled water.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 7.2.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents and standards are required for sample analysis:
7.3.1 Acetone. Same as Method 5 section 7.2.
7.3.2 Dichloromethane (Methylene Chloride). Reagent grade, <0.001 percent residue in glass bottles.
7.3.3 Desiccant. Anhydrous calcium sulfate, calcium chloride, or silica gel, indicating type.
7.3.4 Cylinder Gases. For the purposes of this procedure, span value is defined as the upper limit of the range specified for each analyzer as described in section 6.1.3.4 or 6.1.3.5. If an analyzer with a range different from that specified in this method is used, the span value shall be equal to the upper limit of the range for the analyzer used (see note in section 6.1.3.5).
7.3.4.1 Calibration Gases. The calibration gases for the CO2, CO, and SO2 analyzers shall be CO2 in nitrogen (N2), CO in N2, and SO2 in N2, respectively. CO2 and CO calibration gases may be combined in a single cylinder. Use three calibration gases as specified in Method 6C, sections 7.2.1 through 7.2.3.
7.3.4.2 SO2 Injection Gas. A known concentration of SO2 in N2. The concentration must be at least 2 percent SO2 with a maximum of 100 percent SO2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method 5, section 8.1.
8.2 Calibration Gas and SO2 Injection Gas Concentration Verification, Sampling System Bias Check, Response Time Test, and Zero and Calibration Drift Tests. Same as Method 6C, sections 8.2.1, 8.2.3, 8.2.4, and 8.5, respectively, except that for verification of CO and CO2 gas concentrations, substitute Method 3 for Method 6.
8.3 Preliminary Determinations.
8.3.1 Sampling Location. The sampling location for the particulate sampling probe shall be 2.45 ±0.15 m (8 ±0.5 ft) above the platform upon which the wood heater is placed (i.e., the top of the scale).
8.3.2 Sampling Probe and Nozzle. Select a nozzle, if used, sized for the range of velocity heads, such that it is not necessary to change the nozzle size in order to maintain proportional sampling rates. During the run, do not change the nozzle size. Select a suitable probe liner and probe length to effect minimum blockage.
8.4 Preparation of Particulate Sampling Train. Same as Method 5, section 8.3, with the exception of the following:
8.4.1 The train should be assembled as shown in Figure 5H-1.
8.4.2 A glass cyclone may not be used between the probe and filter holder.
8.5 Leak-Check Procedures.
8.5.1 Leak-Check of Metering System Shown in Figure 5H-1. That portion of the sampling train from the pump to the orifice meter shall be leak-checked after each certification or audit test. Use the procedure described in Method 5, section 8.4.1.
8.5.2 Pretest Leak-Check. A pretest leak-check of the sampling train is recommended, but not required. If the pretest leak-check is conducted, the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.5.2 should be used. A vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) may be used instead of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
8.5.2 Leak-Checks During Sample Run. If, during the sampling run, a component (e.g., filter assembly or impinger) change becomes necessary, conduct a leak-check as described in Method 5, section 8.4.3.
8.5.3 Post-Test Leak-Check. A leak-check is mandatory at the conclusion of each sampling run. The leak-check shall be performed in accordance with the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.4.4, except that a vacuum of 130 mm Hg (5 in. Hg) or the greatest vacuum measured during the test run, whichever is greater, may be used instead of 380 mm Hg (15 in. Hg).
8.6 Tracer Gas Procedure. A schematic of the tracer gas injection and sampling systems is shown in Figure 5H-2.
8.6.1 SO2 Injection Probe. Install the SO2 injection probe and dispersion loop in the stack at a location 2.9 ±0.15 m (9.5 ±0.5 ft) above the sampling platform.
8.6.2 SO2 Sampling Probe. Install the SO2 sampling probe at the centroid of the stack at a location 4.1 ±0.15 m (13.5 ±0.5 ft) above the sampling platform.
8.7 Flow Rate Measurement System. A schematic of the flow rate measurement system is shown in Figure 5H-2. Locate the flow rate measurement sampling probe at the centroid of the stack at a location 2.3 ±0.3 m (7.5 ±1 ft) above the sampling platform.
8.8 Tracer Gas Procedure. Within 1 minute after closing the wood heater door at the start of the test run (as defined in Method 28, section 8.8.1), meter a known concentration of SO2 tracer gas at a constant flow rate into the wood heater stack. Monitor the SO2 concentration in the stack, and record the SO2 concentrations at 10-minute intervals or more often. Adjust the particulate sampling flow rate proportionally to the SO2 concentration changes using Equation 5H-6 (e.g., the SO2 concentration at the first 10-minute reading is measured to be 100 ppm; the next 10 minute SO2 concentration is measured to be 75 ppm: the particulate sample flow rate is adjusted from the initial 0.15 cfm to 0.20 cfm). A check for proportional rate variation shall be made at the completion of the test run using Equation 5H-10.
8.9 Volumetric Flow Rate Procedure. Apply stoichiometric relationships to the wood combustion process in determining the exhaust gas flow rate as follows:
8.9.1 Test Fuel Charge Weight. Record the test fuel charge weight (wet) as specified in Method 28, section 8.8.2. The wood is assumed to have the following weight percent composition: 51 percent carbon, 7.3 percent hydrogen, 41 percent oxygen. Record the wood moisture for each fuel charge as described in Method 28, section 8.6.5. The ash is assumed to have negligible effect on associated C, H, and O concentrations after the test burn.
8.9.2 Measured Values. Record the CO and CO2 concentrations in the stack on a dry basis every 10 minutes during the test run or more often. Average these values for the test run. Use as a mole fraction (e.g., 10 percent CO2 is recorded as 0.10) in the calculations to express total flow (see Equation 5H-6).
8.10 Sampling Train Operation.
8.10.1 For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5H-3. Be sure to record the initial dry gas meter reading. Record the dry gas meter readings at the beginning and end of each sampling time increment, when changes in flow rates are made, before and after each leak-check, and when sampling is halted. Take other readings as indicated on Figure 5H-3 at least once each 10 minutes during the test run.
8.10.2 Remove the nozzle cap, verify that the filter and probe heating systems are up to temperature, and that the probe is properly positioned. Position the nozzle, if used, facing into gas stream, or the probe tip in the 50 mm (2 in.) centroidal area of the stack.
8.10.3 Be careful not to bump the probe tip into the stack wall when removing or inserting the probe through the porthole; this minimizes the chance of extracting deposited material.
8.10.4 When the probe is in position, block off the openings around the probe and porthole to prevent unrepresentative dilution of the gas stream.
8.10.5 Begin sampling at the start of the test run as defined in Method 28, section 8.8.1, start the sample pump, and adjust the sample flow rate to between 0.003 and 0.014 m 3/min (0.1 and 0.5 cfm). Adjust the sample flow rate proportionally to the stack gas flow during the test run according to the procedures outlined in section 8. Maintain a proportional sampling rate (within 10 percent of the desired value) and a filter holder temperature no greater than 120 °C (248 °F).
8.10.6 During the test run, make periodic adjustments to keep the temperature around the filter holder at the proper level. Add more ice to the impinger box and, if necessary, salt to maintain a temperature of less than 20 °C (68 °F) at the condenser/silica gel outlet.
8.10.7 If the pressure drop across the filter becomes too high, making proportional sampling difficult to maintain, either filter may be replaced during a sample run. It is recommended that another complete filter assembly be used rather than attempting to change the filter itself. Before a new filter assembly is installed, conduct a leak-check (see section 8.5.2). The total particulate weight shall include the summation of all filter assembly catches. The total time for changing sample train components shall not exceed 10 minutes. No more than one component change is allowed for any test run.
8.10.8 At the end of the test run, turn off the coarse adjust valve, remove the probe and nozzle from the stack, turn off the pump, record the final dry gas meter reading, and conduct a post-test leak-check, as outlined in section 8.5.3.
8.11 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, section 8.7, with the exception of the following:
8.11.1 Blanks. The volume of the acetone blank may be about 50-ml, rather than 200-ml; a 200-ml water blank shall also be saved for analysis.
8.11.2 Samples.
8.11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.7.6.1. The filters may be stored either in a single container or in separate containers.
8.11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.2, except that the container should not be sealed until the impinger rinse solution is added (see section 8.10.2.4).
8.11.2.3 Container No. 3. Treat the impingers as follows: Measure the liquid which is in the first three impingers to within 1-ml by using a graduated cylinder or by weighing it to within 0.5 g by using a balance (if one is available). Record the volume or weight of liquid present. This information is required to calculate the moisture content of the effluent gas. Transfer the water from the first, second, and third impingers to a glass container. Tighten the lid on the sample container so that water will not leak out.
8.11.2.4 Rinse impingers and graduated cylinder, if used, with acetone three times or more. Avoid direct contact between the acetone and any stopcock grease or collection of any stopcock grease in the rinse solutions. Add these rinse solutions to sample Container No. 2.
8.11.2.5 Container No. 4. Same as Method 5, section 8.7.6.3
8.12 Sample Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be transferred in such a way that they remain upright at all times.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2 | Sampling system bias check | Ensures that bias introduced by measurement system, minus analyzer, is no greater than 3 percent of span. |
| 8.2 | Analyzer zero and calibration drift tests | Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measurement system output during the run is no greater than 3 percent of span. |
| 8.5, 10.1, 12.13 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration; proportional sampling rate verification | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.1 | Analytical balance calibration | Ensure accurate and precise measurement of collected particulate. |
| 10.3 | Analyzer calibration error check | Ensures that bias introduced by analyzer calibration error is no greater than 2 percent of span. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Volume Metering System, Temperature Sensors, Barometer, and Analytical Balance. Same as Method 5G, sections 10.2 through 10.5, respectively.
10.2 SO2 Injection Rotameter. Calibrate the SO2 injection rotameter system with a soap film flowmeter or similar direct volume measuring device with an accuracy of 2 percent. Operate the rotameter at a single reading for at least three calibration runs for 10 minutes each. When three consecutive calibration flow rates agree within 5 percent, average the three flow rates, mark the rotameter at the calibrated setting, and use the calibration flow rate as the SO2 injection flow rate during the test run. Repeat the rotameter calibration before the first certification test and semiannually thereafter.
10.3. Gas Analyzers. Same as Method 6C, section 10.0.
10.4 Field Balance Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the balance used to weigh impingers with a weight that is at least 500g or within 50g of a loaded impinger. The weight must be ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 6 (or better). Daily before use, the field balance must measure the weight within ± 0.5g of the certified mass. If the daily balance calibration check fails, perform corrective measures and repeat the check before using balance.
10.5 Analytical Balance Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical balance before the first use, and semiannually thereafter. The calibration of the analytical balance must be conducted using ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 2 (or better) tolerance weights. Audit the balance each day it is used for gravimetric measurements by weighing at least one ASTM E617-13 Class 2 tolerance (or better) calibration weight that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter or between 1g and 5g. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.5 mg of the certified mass, perform corrective measures, and conduct the multipoint calibration before use.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Record the data required on a sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5H-4.
11.2 Handle each sample container as follows:
11.2.1 Container Nos. 1 and 1A. Treat the two filters according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 11.2.1.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.2, except that the beaker may be smaller than 250-ml.
11.2.3 Container No. 3. Note the level of liquid in the container and confirm on the analysis sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Determination of sample leakage is not applicable if sample recovery and analysis occur in the same room. Measure the liquid in this container either volumetrically to within 1-ml or gravimetrically to within 0.5 g. Transfer the contents to a 500-ml or larger separatory funnel. Rinse the container with water, and add to the separatory funnel. Add 25-ml of dichloromethane to the separatory funnel, stopper and vigorously shake 1 minute, let separate and transfer the dichloromethane (lower layer) into a tared beaker or evaporating dish. Repeat twice more. It is necessary to rinse Container No. 3 with dichloromethane. This rinse is added to the impinger extract container. Transfer the remaining water from the separatory funnel to a tared beaker or evaporating dish and evaporate to dryness at 104 °C (220 °F). Desiccate and weigh to a constant weight. Evaporate the combined impinger water extracts at ambient temperature and pressure. Desiccate and weigh to a constant weight. Report both results to the nearest 0.1 mg.
11.2.4 Container No. 4. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance.
11.2.5 Acetone Blank Container. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.4, except that the beaker may be smaller than 250 ml.
11.2.6 Dichloromethane Blank Container. Treat the same as the acetone blank.
11.2.7 Water Blank Container. Transfer the water to a tared 250 ml beaker and evaporate to dryness at 104 °C (220 °F). Desiccate and weigh to a constant weight.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after the final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Sample flow rate adjustment factor.
BR = Dry wood burn rate, kg/hr (lb/hr), from Method 28, Section 8.3.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Ci = Tracer gas concentration at inlet, ppmv.
Co = Tracer gas concentration at outlet, ppmv.
Cs = Concentration of particulate matter in stack gas, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, g/dscm (g/dscf).
E = Particulate emission rate, g/hr (lb/hr).
ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter (see Figure 5H-1), mm H2O (in. H2O).
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a post-test leak-check or for a leak-check following a component change; equal to 0.00057 cmm (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.
L1 = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted before a component change, cmm (cfm).
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check, cmm (cfm).
mn = Total amount of particulate matter collected, mg.
Ma = Mass of residue of solvent after evaporation, mg.
NC = Grams of carbon/gram of dry fuel (lb/lb), equal to 0.0425.
NT = Total dry moles of exhaust gas/kg of dry wood burned, g-moles/kg (lb-moles/lb).
PR = Percent of proportional sampling rate.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in.Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in.Hg).
Qi = Gas volumetric flow rate at inlet, cfm (l/min).
Qo = Gas volumetric flow rate at outlet, cfm (l/min).
12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 5H-3).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, section 12.3.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor.
Where:
K2 = 0.001333 m 3/ml for metric units.
K2 = 0.04707 ft 3/ml for English units.
12.5 Moisture Content.
12.6 Solvent Wash Blank.
12.7 Total Particulate Weight. Determine the total particulate catch from the sum of the weights obtained from containers 1, 2, 3, and 4 less the appropriate solvent blanks (see Figure 5H-4).
12.8 Particulate Concentration.
12.9 Sample Flow Rate Adjustment.
12.10 Carbon Balance for Total Moles of Exhaust Gas (dry)/kg of Wood Burned in the Exhaust Gas.
Where:
K3 = 1000 g/kg for metric units.
K3 = 1.0 lb/lb for English units.
12.11 Total Stack Gas Flow Rate.
Where:
K4 = 0.02406 dscm/g-mole for metric units.
K4 = 384.8 dscf/lb-mole for English units.
12.12 Particulate Emission Rate.
12.13 Proportional Rate Variation. Calculate PR for each 10-minute interval, i, of the test run.
12.14 Acceptable Results. If no more than 15 percent of the PR values for all the intervals fall outside the range 90 percent ≤PR ≤110 percent, and if no PR value for any interval falls outside the range 75 ≤PR ≤125 percent, the results are acceptable. If the PR values for the test runs are judged to be unacceptable, report the test run emission results, but do not include the test run results in calculating the weighted average emission rate, and repeat the test.
12.15 Alternative Tracer Gas Flow Rate Determination.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Alternative Stack Gas Volumetric Flow Rate Determination (Tracer Gas).
16.1.1 Apparatus.
16.1.1.1 Tracer Gas Injector System. This is to inject a known concentration of tracer gas into the stack. This system consists of a cylinder of tracer gas, a gas cylinder regulator, a stainless steel needle valve or a flow controller, a nonreactive (stainless steel or glass) rotameter, and an injection loop to disperse the tracer gas evenly in the stack.
16.1.1.2 Tracer Gas Probe. A glass or stainless steel sampling probe.
16.1.1.3 Gas Conditioning System. A gas conditioning system is suitable for delivering a cleaned sample to the analyzer consisting of a filter to remove particulate and a condenser capable of lowering the dew point of the sample gas to less than 5 °C (40 °F). A desiccant such as anhydrous calcium sulfate may be used to dry the sample gas. Desiccants which react or absorb tracer gas or stack gas may not be used, e.g. silica gel absorbs CO2.
16.1.1.4 Pump. An inert (i.e., stainless steel or Teflon head) pump to deliver more than the total sample required by the manufacturer's specifications for the analyzer used to measure the downstream tracer gas concentration.
16.1.1.5 Gas Analyzer. A gas analyzer is any analyzer capable of measuring the tracer gas concentration in the range necessary at least every 10 minutes. A means of controlling the analyzer flow rate and a device for determining proper sample flow rate shall be provided unless data is provided to show that the analyzer is insensitive to flow variations over the range encountered during the test. The gas analyzer needs to meet or exceed the following performance specifications:
| Linearity | ±1 percent of full scale. |
| Calibration Error | ≤2 percent of span. |
| Response Time | ≤10 seconds. |
| Zero Drift (24 hour) | ≤2 percent of full scale. |
| Span Drift (24 hour) | ≤2 percent of full scale. |
| Resolution | ≤0.5 percent of span. |
16.1.1.6 Recorder (optional). To provide a permanent record of the analyzer output.
16.1.2 Reagents.
16.1.2.1 Tracer Gas. The tracer gas is sulfur hexafluoride in an appropriate concentration for accurate analyzer measurement or pure sulfur dioxide. The gas used must be nonreactive with the stack effluent and give minimal (<3 percent) interference to measurement by the gas analyzer.
16.1.3 Procedure. Select upstream and downstream locations in the stack or duct for introducing the tracer gas and delivering the sampled gas to the analyzer. The inlet location should be 8 or more duct diameters beyond any upstream flow disturbance. The outlet should be 8 or more undisturbed duct diameters from the inlet and 2 or more duct diameters from the duct exit. After installing the apparatus, meter a known concentration of the tracer gas into the stack at the inlet location. Use the gas sample probe and analyzer to show that no stratification of the tracer gas is found in the stack at the measurement locations. Monitor the tracer gas concentration from the outlet location and record the concentration at 10-minute intervals or more often at the option of the tester. A minimum of three measured intervals is recommended to determine the stack gas volumetric flow rate. Other statistical procedures may be applied for complete flow characterization and additional QA/QC.
17.0 References
Same as Method 5G, section 17.0.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 5I—Determination of Low Level Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
1. Scope and Application.
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of low level particulate matter (PM) emissions from stationary sources. The method is most effective for total PM catches of 50 mg or less. This method was initially developed for performing correlation of manual PM measurements to PM continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS), however it is also useful for other low particulate concentration applications.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods. Method 5I requires the use of paired trains. Acceptance criteria for the identification of data quality outliers from the paired trains are provided in section 12.2 of this Method.
2. Summary of Method.
2.1. Description. The system setup and operation is essentially identical to Method 5. Particulate is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a 47 mm glass fiber filter maintained at a temperature of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F). The PM mass is determined by gravimetric analysis after the removal of uncombined water. Specific measures in this procedure designed to improve system performance at low particulate levels include:
1. Improved sample handling procedures
2 Light weight sample filter assembly
3. Use of low residue grade acetone
Accuracy is improved through the minimization of systemic errors associated with sample handling and weighing procedures. High purity reagents, all glass, grease free, sample train components, and light weight filter assemblies and beakers, each contribute to the overall objective of improved precision and accuracy at low particulate concentrations.
2.2 Paired Trains. This method must be performed using a paired train configuration. These trains may be operated as co-located trains (to trains operating collecting from one port) or as simultaneous trains (separate trains operating from different ports at the same time). Procedures for calculating precision of the paired trains are provided in section 12.
2.3 Detection Limit. a. Typical detection limit for manual particulate testing is 0.5 mg. This mass is also cited as the accepted weight variability limit in determination of “constant weight” as cited in section 8.1.2 of this Method. EPA has performed studies to provide guidance on minimum PM catch. The minimum detection limit (MDL) is the minimum concentration or amount of an analyte that can be determined with a specified degree of confidence to be different from zero. We have defined the minimum or target catch as a concentration or amount sufficiently larger than the MDL to ensure that the results are reliable and repeatable. The particulate matter catch is the product of the average particulate matter concentration on a mass per volume basis and the volume of gas collected by the sample train. The tester can generally control the volume of gas collected by increasing the sampling time or to a lesser extent by increasing the rate at which sample is collected. If the tester has a reasonable estimate of the PM concentration from the source, the tester can ensure that the target catch is collected by sampling the appropriate gas volume.
b. However, if the source has a very low particulate matter concentration in the stack, the volume of gas sampled may need to be very large which leads to unacceptably long sampling times. When determining compliance with an emission limit, EPA guidance has been that the tester does not always have to collect the target catch. Instead, we have suggested that the tester sample enough stack gas, that if the source were exactly at the level of the emission standard, the sample catch would equal the target catch. Thus, if at the end of the test the catch were smaller than the target, we could still conclude that the source is in compliance though we might not know the exact emission level. This volume of gas becomes a target volume that can be translated into a target sampling time by assuming an average sampling rate. Because the MDL forms the basis for our guidance on target sampling times, EPA has conducted a systematic laboratory study to define what is the MDL for Method 5 and determined the Method to have a calculated practical quantitation limit (PQL) of 3 mg of PM and an MDL of 1 mg.
c. Based on these results, the EPA has concluded that for PM testing, the target catch must be no less than 3 mg. Those sample catches between 1 mg and 3 mg are between the detection limit and the limit of quantitation. If a tester uses the target catch to estimate a target sampling time that results in sample catches that are less than 3 mg, you should not automatically reject the results. If the tester calculated the target sampling time as described above by assuming that the source was at the level of the emission limit, the results would still be valid for determining that the source was in compliance. For purposes other than determining compliance, results should be divided into two categories—those that fall between 3 mg and 1 mg and those that are below 1 mg. A sample catch between 1 and 3 mg may be used for such purposes as calculating emission rates with the understanding that the resulting emission rates can have a high degree of uncertainty. Results of less than 1 mg should not be used for calculating emission rates or pollutant concentrations.
d. When collecting small catches such as 3 mg, bias becomes an important issue. Source testers must use extreme caution to reach the PQL of 3 mg by assuring that sampling probes are very clean (perhaps confirmed by low blank weights) before use in the field. They should also use low tare weight sample containers, and establish a well-controlled balance room to weigh the samples.
3. Definitions.
3.1 Light Weight Filter Housing. A smaller housing that allows the entire filtering system to be weighed before and after sample collection. (See. 6.1.3)
3.2 Paired Train. Sample systems trains may be operated as co-located trains (two sample probes attached to each other in the same port) or as simultaneous trains (two separate trains operating from different ports at the same time).
4. Interferences.
a. There are numerous potential interferents that may be encountered during performance of Method 5I sampling and analyses. This Method should be considered more sensitive to the normal interferents typically encountered during particulate testing because of the low level concentrations of the flue gas stream being sampled.
b. Care must be taken to minimize field contamination, especially to the filter housing since the entire unit is weighed (not just the filter media). Care must also be taken to ensure that no sample is lost during the sampling process (such as during port changes, removal of the filter assemblies from the probes, etc.).
c. Balance room conditions are a source of concern for analysis of the low level samples. Relative humidity, ambient temperatures variations, air draft, vibrations and even barometric pressure can affect consistent reproducible measurements of the sample media. Ideally, the same analyst who performs the tare weights should perform the final weights to minimize the effects of procedural differences specific to the analysts.
d. Attention must also be provided to weighing artifacts caused by electrostatic charges which may have to be discharged or neutralized prior to sample analysis. Static charge can affect consistent and reliable gravimetric readings in low humidity environments. Method 5I recommends a relative humidity of less than 50 percent in the weighing room environment used for sample analyses. However, lower humidity may be encountered or required to address sample precision problems. Low humidity conditions can increase the effects of static charge.
e. Other interferences associated with typical Method 5 testing (sulfates, acid gases, etc.) are also applicable to Method 5I.
5. Safety.
Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety concerns associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability and observe all regulatory limitations before using this method.
6. Equipment and Supplies.
6.1 Sample Collection Equipment and Supplies. The sample train is nearly identical in configuration to the train depicted in Figure 5-1 of Method 5. The primary difference in the sample trains is the lightweight Method 5I filter assembly that attaches directly to the exit to the probe. Other exceptions and additions specific to Method 5I include:
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Same as Method 5, with the exception that it must be constructed of borosilicate or quartz glass tubing.
6.1.2 Probe Liner. Same as Method 5, with the exception that it must be constructed of borosilicate or quartz glass tubing.
6.1.3 Filter Holder. The filter holder is constructed of borosilicate or quartz glass front cover designed to hold a 47-mm glass fiber filter, with a wafer thin stainless steel (SS) filter support, a silicone rubber or Viton O-ring, and Teflon tape seal. This holder design will provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The filter holder assembly fits into a SS filter holder and attaches directly to the outlet of the probe. The tare weight of the filter, borosilicate or quartz glass holder, SS filter support, O-ring and Teflon tape seal generally will not exceed approximately 35 grams. The filter holder is designed to use a 47-mm glass fiber filter meeting the quality criteria in of Method 5. These units are commercially available from several source testing equipment vendors. Once the filter holder has been assembled, desiccated and tared, protect it from external sources of contamination by covering the front socket with a ground glass plug. Secure the plug with an impinger clamp or other item that will ensure a leak-free fitting.
6.2 Sample Recovery Equipment and Supplies. Same as Method 5, with the following exceptions:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes. Teflon or nylon bristle brushes with stainless steel wire handles, should be used to clean the probe. The probe brush must have extensions (at least as long as the probe) of Teflon, nylon or similarly inert material. The brushes must be properly sized and shaped for brushing out the probe liner and nozzle.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Two Teflon wash bottles are recommended however, polyethylene wash bottles may be used at the option of the tester. Acetone should not be stored in polyethylene bottles for longer than one month.
6.2.3 Filter Assembly Transport. A system should be employed to minimize contamination of the filter assemblies during transport to and from the field test location. A carrying case or packet with clean compartments of sufficient size to accommodate each filter assembly can be used. This system should have an air tight seal to further minimize contamination during transport to and from the field.
6.3 Analysis Equipment and Supplies. Same as Method 5, with the following exception:
6.3.1 Lightweight Beaker Liner. Teflon or other lightweight beaker liners are used for the analysis of the probe and nozzle rinses. These light weight liners are used in place of the borosilicate glass beakers typically used for the Method 5 weighings in order to improve sample analytical precision.
6.3.2 Anti-static Treatment. Commercially available gaseous anti-static rinses are recommended for low humidity situations that contribute to static charge problems.
7. Reagents and Standards.
7.1 Sampling Reagents. The reagents used in sampling are the same as Method 5 with the following exceptions:
7.1.1 Filters. The quality specifications for the filters are identical to those cited for Method 5. The only difference is the filter diameter of 47 millimeters.
7.1.2 Stopcock Grease. Stopcock grease cannot be used with this sampling train. We recommend that the sampling train be assembled with glass joints containing O-ring seals or screw-on connectors, or similar.
7.1.3 Acetone. Low residue type acetone, ≤0.001 percent residue, purchased in glass bottles is used for the recovery of particulate matter from the probe and nozzle. Acetone from metal containers generally has a high residue blank and should not be used. Sometimes, suppliers transfer acetone to glass bottles from metal containers; thus, acetone blanks must be run prior to field use and only acetone with low blank values (≤0.001 percent residue, as specified by the manufacturer) must be used. Acetone blank correction is not allowed for this method; therefore, it is critical that high purity reagents be purchased and verified prior to use.
7.1.4 Gloves. Disposable, powder-free, latex surgical gloves, or their equivalent are used at all times when handling the filter housings or performing sample recovery.
7.2 Standards. There are no applicable standards commercially available for Method 5I analyses.
8. Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport.
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method 5 with several exceptions specific to filter assembly and weighing.
8.1.1 Filter Assembly. Uniquely identify each filter support before loading filters into the holder assembly. This can be done with an engraving tool or a permanent marker. Use powder free latex surgical gloves whenever handling the filter holder assemblies. Place the O-ring on the back of the filter housing in the O-ring groove. Place a 47 mm glass fiber filter on the O-ring with the face down. Place a stainless steel filter holder against the back of the filter. Carefully wrap 5 mm ( 1/4 inch) wide Teflon” tape one timearound the outside of the filter holder overlapping the stainless steel filter support by approximately 2.5 mm ( 1/8 inch). Gently brush the Teflon tape down on the back of the stainless steel filter support. Store the filter assemblies in their transport case until time for weighing or field use.
8.1.2 Filter Weighing Procedures. a. Desiccate the entire filter holder assemblies at 20 ±5.6 °C (68 ±10 °F) and ambient pressure for at least 24 hours. Weigh at intervals of at least 6 hours to a constant weight, i.e., 0.5 mg change from previous weighing. Record the results to the nearest 0.1 mg. During each weighing, the filter holder assemblies must not be exposed to the laboratory atmosphere for a period greater than 2 minutes and a relative humidity above 50 percent. Lower relative humidity may be required in order to improve analytical precision. However, low humidity conditions increase static charge to the sample media.
b. Alternatively (unless otherwise specified by the Administrator), the filters holder assemblies may be oven dried at 105 °C (220 °F) for a minimum of 2 hours, desiccated for 2 hours, and weighed. The procedure used for the tare weigh must also be used for the final weight determination.
c. Experience has shown that weighing uncertainties are not only related to the balance performance but to the entire weighing procedure. Therefore, before performing any measurement, establish and follow standard operating procedures, taking into account the sampling equipment and filters to be used.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Select the sampling site, traverse points, probe nozzle, and probe length as specified in Method 5.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as Method 5, section 8.3, with the following exception: During preparation and assembly of the sampling train, keep all openings where contamination can occur covered until justbefore assembly or until sampling is about to begin. Using gloves, place a labeled (identified) and weighed filter holder assembly into the stainless steel holder. Then place this whole unit in the Method 5 hot box, and attach it to the probe. Do not use stopcock grease.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as Method 5.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation.
8.5.1. Operation. Operate the sampling train in a manner consistent with those described in Methods 1, 2, 4 and 5 in terms of the number of sample points and minimum time per point. The sample rate and total gas volume should be adjusted based on estimated grain loading of the source being characterized. The total sampling time must be a function of the estimated mass of particulate to be collected for the run. Targeted mass to be collected in a typical Method 5I sample train should be on the order of 10 to 20 mg. Method 5I is most appropriate for total collected masses of less than 50 milligrams, however, there is not an exact particulate loading cutoff, and it is likely that some runs may exceed 50 mg. Exceeding 50 mg (or less than 10 mg) for the sample mass does not necessarily justify invalidating a sample run if all other Method criteria are met.
8.5.2 Paired Train. This Method requires PM samples be collected with paired trains.
8.5.2.1 It is important that the systems be operated truly simultaneously. This implies that both sample systems start and stop at the same times. This also means that if one sample system is stopped during the run, the other sample systems must also be stopped until the cause has been corrected.
8.5.2.2 Care should be taken to maintain the filter box temperature of the paired trains as close as possible to the Method required temperature of 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F). If separate ovens are being used for simultaneously operated trains, it is recommended that the oven temperature of each train be maintained within ±14 °C (±25 °F) of each other.
8.5.2.3 The nozzles for paired trains need not be identically sized.
8.5.2.4 Co-located sample nozzles must be within the same plane perpendicular to the gas flow. Co-located nozzles and pitot assemblies should be within a 6.0 cm × 6.0 cm square (as cited for a quadruple train in Reference Method 301).
8.5.3 Duplicate gas samples for molecular weight determination need not be collected.
8.6 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5 with several exceptions specific to the filter housing.
8.6.1 Before moving the sampling train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the train and seal the nozzle inlet and outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Cap the filter inlet using a standard ground glass plug and secure the cap with an impinger clamp. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger and cap the impinger. If a flexible line is used between the first impinger condenser and the filter holder, disconnect the line at the filter holder and let any condensed water or liquid drain into the impingers or condenser.
8.6.2 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This area must be clean and protected from the wind so that the possibility of losing any of the sample will be minimized.
8.6.3 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly and note any abnormal conditions such as particulate color, filter loading, impinger liquid color, etc.
8.6.4 Container No. 1, Filter Assembly. Carefully remove the cooled filter holder assembly from the Method 5 hot box and place it in the transport case. Use a pair of clean gloves to handle the filter holder assembly.
8.6.5 Container No. 2, Probe Nozzle and Probe Liner Rinse. Rinse the probe and nozzle components with acetone. Be certain that the probe and nozzle brushes have been thoroughly rinsed prior to use as they can be a source of contamination.
8.6.6 All Other Train Components. (Impingers) Same as Method 5.
8.7 Sample Storage and Transport. Whenever possible, containers should be shipped in such a way that they remain upright at all times. All appropriate dangerous goods shipping requirements must be observed since acetone is a flammable liquid.
9. Quality Control.
9.1 Miscellaneous Field Quality Control Measures.
9.1.1 A quality control (QC) check of the volume metering system at the field site is suggested before collecting the sample using the procedures in Method 5, section 4.4.1.
9.1.2 All other quality control checks outlined in Methods 1, 2, 4 and 5 also apply to Method 5I. This includes procedures such as leak-checks, equipment calibration checks, and independent checks of field data sheets for reasonableness and completeness.
9.2 Quality Control Samples.
9.2.1 Required QC Sample. A laboratory reagent blank must be collected and analyzed for each lot of acetone used for a field program to confirm that it is of suitable purity. The particulate samples cannot be blank corrected.
9.2.2 Recommended QC Samples. These samples may be collected and archived for future analyses.
9.2.2.1 A field reagent blank is a recommended QC sample collected from a portion of the acetone used for cleanup of the probe and nozzle. Take 100 ml of this acetone directly from the wash bottle being used and place it in a glass sample container labeled “field acetone reagent blank.” At least one field reagent blank is recommended for every five runs completed. The field reagent blank samples demonstrate the purity of the acetone was maintained throughout the program.
9.2.2.2 A field bias blank train is a recommended QC sample. This sample is collected by recovering a probe and filter assembly that has been assembled, taken to the sample location, leak checked, heated, allowed to sit at the sample location for a similar duration of time as a regular sample run, leak-checked again, and then recovered in the same manner as a regular sample. Field bias blanks are not a Method requirement, however, they are recommended and are very useful for identifying sources of contamination in emission testing samples. Field bias blank train results greater than 5 times the method detection limit may be considered problematic.
10. Calibration and Standardization Same as Method 5, section 5.
10.1 Field Balance Calibration Check. Check the calibration of the balance used to weigh impingers with a weight that is at least 500g or within 50g of a loaded impinger. The weight must be ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 6 (or better). Daily, before use, the field balance must measure the weight within ±0.5g of the certified mass. If the daily balance calibration check fails, perform corrective measures and repeat the check before using balance.
10.2 Analytical Balance Calibration. Perform a multipoint calibration (at least five points spanning the operational range) of the analytical balance before the first use, and semiannually thereafter. The calibration of the analytical balance must be conducted using ASTM E617-13 “Standard Specification for Laboratory Weights and Precision Mass Standards” (incorporated by reference—see 40 CFR 60.17) Class 2 (or better) tolerance weights. Audit the balance each day it is used for gravimetric measurements by weighing at least one ASTM E617-13 Class 2 tolerance (or better) calibration weight that corresponds to 50 to 150 percent of the weight of one filter or between 1g and 5g. If the scale cannot reproduce the value of the calibration weight to within 0.5 mg of the certified mass, perform corrective measures and conduct the multipoint calibration before use.
11. Analytical Procedures.
11.1 Analysis. Same as Method 5, sections 11.1-11.2.4, with the following exceptions:
11.1.1 Container No. 1. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.1, with the following exception: Use disposable gloves to remove each of the filter holder assemblies from the desiccator, transport container, or sample oven (after appropriate cooling).
11.1.2 Container No. 2. Same as Method 5, section 11.2.2, with the following exception: It is recommended that the contents of Container No. 2 be transferred to a 250 ml beaker with a Teflon liner or similar container that has a minimal tare weight before bringing to dryness.
12. Data Analysis and Calculations.
12.1 Particulate Emissions. The analytical results cannot be blank corrected for residual acetone found in any of the blanks. All other sample calculations are identical to Method 5.
12.2 Paired Trains Outliers. a. Outliers are identified through the determination of precision and any systemic bias of the paired trains. Data that do not meet this criteria should be flagged as a data quality problem. The primary reason for performing dual train sampling is to generate information to quantify the precision of the Reference Method data. The relative standard deviation (RSD) of paired data is the parameter used to quantify data precision. RSD for two simultaneously gathered data points is determined according to:
where, Ca and Cb are concentration values determined from trains A and B respectively. For RSD calculation, the concentration units are unimportant so long as they are consistent.
b. A minimum precision criteria for Reference Method PM data is that RSD for any data pair must be less than 10% as long as the mean PM concentration is greater than 10 mg/dscm. If the mean PM concentration is less than 10 mg/dscm higher RSD values are acceptable. At mean PM concentration of 1 mg/dscm acceptable RSD for paired trains is 25%. Between 1 and 10 mg/dscm acceptable RSD criteria should be linearly scaled from 25% to 10%. Pairs of manual method data exceeding these RSD criteria should be eliminated from the data set used to develop a PM CEMS correlation or to assess RCA. If the mean PM concentration is less than 1 mg/dscm, RSD does not apply and the mean result is acceptable.
13. Method Performance [Reserved]
14. Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15. Waste Management [Reserved]
16. Alternative Procedures. Same as Method 5.
17. Bibliography. Same as Method 5.
18. Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts and Validation Data. Figure 5I-1 is a schematic of the sample train.
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-4 to Part 60—Test Methods 6 through 10B
Method 6—Determination of sulfur dioxide emissions from stationary sources
Method 6A—Determination of sulfur dioxide, moisture, and carbon dioxide emissions from fossil fuel combustion sources
Method 6B—Determination of sulfur dioxide and carbon dioxide daily average emissions from fossil fuel combustion sources
Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
Method 7—Determination of nitrogen oxide emissions from stationary sources
Method 7A—Determination of nitrogen oxide emissions from stationary sources—Ion chromatographic method
Method 7B—Determination of nitrogen oxide emissions from stationary sources (Ultraviolet spectrophotometry)
Method 7C—Determination of nitrogen oxide emissions from stationary sources—Alkaline-permanganate/colorimetric method
Method 7D—Determination of nitrogen oxide emissions from stationary sources—Alkaline-permanganate/ion chromatographic method
Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
Method 8—Determination of sulfuric acid mist and sulfur dioxide emissions from stationary sources
Method 9—Visual determination of the opacity of emissions from stationary sources
Alternate method 1—Determination of the opacity of emissions from stationary sources remotely by lidar
Method 10—Determination of carbon monoxide emissions from stationary sources
Method 10A—Determination of carbon monoxide emissions in certifying continuous emission monitoring systems at petroleum refineries
Method 10B—Determination of carbon monoxide emissions from stationary sources
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 6—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| SO2 | 7449-09-5 | 3.4 mg SO2/m3 (2.12 × 10)−7 lb/ft3 |
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of sulfur dioxide (SO2) emissions from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the sampling point in the stack. The SO2 and the sulfur trioxide, including those fractions in any sulfur acid mist, are separated. The SO2 fraction is measured by the barium-thorin titration method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Free Ammonia. Free ammonia interferes with this method by reacting with SO2 to form particulate sulfite and by reacting with the indicator. If free ammonia is present (this can be determined by knowledge of the process and/or noticing white particulate matter in the probe and isopropanol bubbler), alternative methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator are required. One approved alternative is listed in Reference 13 of section 17.0.
4.2 Water-Soluble Cations and Fluorides. The cations and fluorides are removed by a glass wool filter and an isopropanol bubbler; therefore, they do not affect the SO2 analysis. When samples are collected from a gas stream with high concentrations of metallic fumes (i.e., very fine cation aerosols) a high-efficiency glass fiber filter must be used in place of the glass wool plug (i.e., the one in the probe) to remove the cation interferent.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations before performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear gloves when handling.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train is shown in Figure 6-1. The sampling equipment described in Method 8 may be substituted in place of the midget impinger equipment of Method 6. However, the Method 8 train must be modified to include a heated filter between the probe and isopropanol impinger, and the operation of the sampling train and sample analysis must be at the flow rates and solution volumes defined in Method 8. Alternatively, SO2 may be determined simultaneously with particulate matter and moisture determinations by either (1) replacing the water in a Method 5 impinger system with a 3 percent H2O2 solution, or (2) replacing the Method 5 water impinger system with a Method 8 isopropanol-filter-H2O2 system. The analysis for SO2 must be consistent with the procedure of Method 8. The Method 6 sampling train consists of the following components:
6.1.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass or stainless steel (other materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator), approximately 6 mm (0.25 in.) inside diameter, with a heating system to prevent water condensation and a filter (either in-stack or heated out-of-stack) to remove particulate matter, including sulfuric acid mist. A plug of glass wool is a satisfactory filter.
6.1.1.2 Bubbler and Impingers. One midget bubbler with medium-coarse glass frit and borosilicate or quartz glass wool packed in top (see Figure 6-1) to prevent sulfuric acid mist carryover, and three 30-ml midget impingers. The midget bubbler and midget impingers must be connected in series with leak-free glass connectors. Silicone grease may be used, if necessary, to prevent leakage. A midget impinger may be used in place of the midget bubbler.
6.1.1.3 Glass Wool. Borosilicate or quartz.
6.1.1.4 Stopcock Grease. Acetone-insoluble, heat-stable silicone grease may be used, if necessary.
6.1.1.5 Temperature Sensor. Dial thermometer, or equivalent, to measure temperature of gas leaving impinger train to within 1 °C (2 °F).
6.1.1.6 Drying Tube. Tube packed with 6- to 16- mesh indicating-type silica gel, or equivalent, to dry the gas sample and to protect the meter and pump. If silica gel is previously used, dry at 177 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.1.7 Valve. Needle valve, to regulate sample gas flow rate.
6.1.1.8 Pump. Leak-free diaphragm pump, or equivalent, to pull gas through the train. Install a small surge tank between the pump and rate meter to negate the pulsation effect of the diaphragm pump on the rate meter.
6.1.1.9 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring flow rate to within 2 percent of the selected flow rate of about 1 liter/min (0.035 cfm).
6.1.1.10 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter (DGM), sufficiently accurate to measure the sample volume to within 2 percent, calibrated at the selected flow rate and conditions actually encountered during sampling, and equipped with a temperature sensor (dial thermometer, or equivalent) capable of measuring temperature accurately to within 3 °C (5.4 °F). A critical orifice may be used in place of the DGM specified in this section provided that it is selected, calibrated, and used as specified in section 16.0.
6.1.2 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg). See the note in Method 5, section 6.1.2.
6.1.3 Vacuum Gauge and Rotameter. At least 760-mm Hg (30-in. Hg) gauge and 0- to 40-ml/min rotameter, to be used for leak-check of the sampling train.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are needed for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Two polyethylene or glass bottles, 500-ml.
6.2.2 Storage Bottles. Polyethylene bottles, 100-ml, to store impinger samples (one per sample).
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following equipment is needed for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Pipettes. Volumetric type, 5-ml, 20-ml (one needed per sample), and 25-ml sizes.
6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml size (one per sample) and 1000-ml size.
6.3.3 Burettes. 5- and 50-ml sizes.
6.3.4 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 250-ml size (one for each sample, blank, and standard).
6.3.5 Dropping Bottle. 125-ml size, to add indicator.
6.3.6 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml size.
6.3.7 Spectrophotometer. To measure absorbance at 352 nm.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.1.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume. Mix 80 ml of isopropanol with 20 ml of water.
7.1.2.1 Check each lot of isopropanol for peroxide impurities as follows: Shake 10 ml of isopropanol with 10 ml of freshly prepared 10 percent potassium iodide solution. Prepare a blank by similarly treating 10 ml of water. After 1 minute, read the absorbance at 352 nm on a spectrophotometer using a 1-cm path length. If absorbance exceeds 0.1, reject alcohol for use.
7.1.2.2 Peroxides may be removed from isopropanol by redistilling or by passage through a column of activated alumina; however, reagent grade isopropanol with suitably low peroxide levels may be obtained from commercial sources. Rejection of contaminated lots may, therefore, be a more efficient procedure.
7.1.3 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 3 Percent by Volume. Add 10 ml of 30 percent H2O2 to 90 ml of water. Prepare fresh daily.
7.1.4 Potassium Iodide Solution, 10 Percent Weight by Volume (w/v). Dissolve 10.0 g of KI in water, and dilute to 100 ml. Prepare when needed.
7.2 Sample Recovery. The following reagents are required for sample recovery:
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.1.
7.2.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume. Same as in section 7.1.2.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents and standards are required for sample analysis:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.1.
7.3.2 Isopropanol, 100 Percent.
7.3.3 Thorin Indicator. 1-(o-arsonophenylazo)-2-naphthol-3,6-disulfonic acid, disodium salt, or equivalent. Dissolve 0.20 g in 100 ml of water.
7.3.4 Barium Standard Solution, 0.0100 N. Dissolve 1.95 g of barium perchlorate trihydrate [Ba(ClO4)2 3H2O] in 200 ml water, and dilute to 1 liter with isopropanol. Alternatively, 1.22 g of barium chloride dihydrate [BaCl2 2H2O] may be used instead of the barium perchlorate trihydrate. Standardize as in section 10.5.
7.3.5 Sulfuric Acid Standard, 0.0100 N. Purchase or standardize to ±0.0002 N against 0.0100 N NaOH which has previously been standardized against potassium acid phthalate (primary standard grade).
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage and Transport
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Measure 15 ml of 80 percent isopropanol into the midget bubbler and 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2 into each of the first two midget impingers. Leave the final midget impinger dry. Assemble the train as shown in Figure 6-1. Adjust the probe heater to a temperature sufficient to prevent water condensation. Place crushed ice and water around the impingers.
8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Procedure. A leak-check prior to the sampling run is recommended, but not required. A leak-check after the sampling run is mandatory. The leak-check procedure is as follows:
8.2.1 Temporarily attach a suitable (e.g., 0- to 40- ml/min) rotameter to the outlet of the DGM, and place a vacuum gauge at or near the probe inlet. Plug the probe inlet, pull a vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), and note the flow rate as indicated by the rotameter. A leakage rate in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate is not acceptable.
8.2.2 It is suggested (not mandatory) that the pump be leak-checked separately, either prior to or after the sampling run. To leak-check the pump, proceed as follows: Disconnect the drying tube from the probe-impinger assembly. Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet to either the drying tube or the pump, pull a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 30 seconds.
If performed prior to the sampling run, the pump leak-check shall precede the leak-check of the sampling train described immediately above; if performed after the sampling run, the pump leak-check shall follow the sampling train leak-check.
8.2.3 Other leak-check procedures may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.3 Sample Collection.
8.3.1 Record the initial DGM reading and barometric pressure. To begin sampling, position the tip of the probe at the sampling point, connect the probe to the bubbler, and start the pump. Adjust the sample flow to a constant rate of approximately 1.0 liter/min as indicated by the rate meter. Maintain this constant rate (±10 percent) during the entire sampling run.
8.3.2 Take readings (DGM volume, temperatures at DGM and at impinger outlet, and rate meter flow rate) at least every 5 minutes. Add more ice during the run to keep the temperature of the gases leaving the last impinger at 20 °C (68 °F) or less.
8.3.3 At the conclusion of each run, turn off the pump, remove the probe from the stack, and record the final readings. Conduct a leak-check as described in section 8.2. (This leak-check is mandatory.) If a leak is detected, void the test run or use procedures acceptable to the Administrator to adjust the sample volume for the leakage.
8.3.4 Drain the ice bath, and purge the remaining part of the train by drawing clean ambient air through the system for 15 minutes at the sampling rate. Clean ambient air can be provided by passing air through a charcoal filter or through an extra midget impinger containing 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2. Alternatively, ambient air without purification may be used.
8.4 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the impingers after purging. Discard the contents of the midget bubbler. Pour the contents of the midget impingers into a leak-free polyethylene bottle for shipment. Rinse the three midget impingers and the connecting tubes with water, and add the rinse to the same storage container. Mark the fluid level. Seal and identify the sample container.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 7.1.2 | Isopropanol check | Ensure acceptable level of peroxide impurities in isopropanol. |
| 8.2, 10.1-10.4 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.5 | Barium standard solution standardization | Ensure precision of normality determination |
| 11.2.3 | Replicate titrations | Ensure precision of titration determinations. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Volume Metering System.
10.1.1 Initial Calibration.
10.1.1.1 Before its initial use in the field, leak-check the metering system (drying tube, needle valve, pump, rate meter, and DGM) as follows: Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet to the drying tube and pull a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg). Plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum must remain stable for at least 30 seconds. Carefully release the vacuum gauge before releasing the flow meter end.
10.1.1.2 Remove the drying tube, and calibrate the metering system (at the sampling flow rate specified by the method) as follows: Connect an appropriately sized wet-test meter (e.g., 1 liter per revolution) to the inlet of the needle valve. Make three independent calibration runs, using at least five revolutions of the DGM per run. Calculate the calibration factor Y (wet-test meter calibration volume divided by the DGM volume, both volumes adjusted to the same reference temperature and pressure) for each run, and average the results (Yi). If any Y-value deviates by more than 2 percent from (Yi), the metering system is unacceptable for use. If the metering system is acceptable, use (Yi) as the calibration factor for subsequent test runs.
10.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. After each field test series, conduct a calibration check using the procedures outlined in section 10.1.1.2, except that three or more revolutions of the DGM may be used, and only two independent runs need be made. If the average of the two post-test calibration factors does not deviate by more than 5 percent from Yi, then Yi is accepted as the DGM calibration factor (Y), which is used in Equation 6-1 to calculate collected sample volume (see section 12.2). If the deviation is more than 5 percent, recalibrate the metering system as in section 10.1.1, and determine a post-test calibration factor (Yf). Compare Yi and Yf; the smaller of the two factors is accepted as the DGM calibration factor. If recalibration indicates that the metering system is unacceptable for use, either void the test run or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to determine an acceptable value for the collected sample volume.
10.1.3 DGM as a Calibration Standard. A DGM may be used as a calibration standard for volume measurements in place of the wet-test meter specified in section 10.1.1.2, provided that it is calibrated initially and recalibrated periodically according to the same procedures outlined in Method 5, section 10.3 with the following exceptions: (a) the DGM is calibrated against a wet-test meter having a capacity of 1 liter/rev (0.035 ft 3/rev) or 3 liters/rev (0.1 ft 3/rev) and having the capability of measuring volume to within 1 percent; (b) the DGM is calibrated at 1 liter/min (0.035 cfm); and (c) the meter box of the Method 6 sampling train is calibrated at the same flow rate.
10.2 Temperature Sensors. Calibrate against mercury-in-glass thermometers. An alternative mercury-free thermometer may be used if the thermometer is, at a minimum, equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
10.3 Rate Meter. The rate meter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to the field test.
10.5 Barium Standard Solution. Standardize the barium perchlorate or chloride solution against 25 ml of standard sulfuric acid to which 100 ml of 100 percent isopropanol has been added. Run duplicate analyses. Calculate the normality using the average of duplicate analyses where the titrations agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note level of liquid in container and confirm whether any sample was lost during shipment; note this finding on the analytical data sheet. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.2 Sample Analysis.
11.2.1 Transfer the contents of the storage container to a 100-ml volumetric flask, dilute to exactly 100 ml with water, and mix the diluted sample.
11.2.2 Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of the diluted sample into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask and add 80 ml of 100 percent isopropanol plus two to four drops of thorin indicator. While stirring the solution, titrate to a pink endpoint using 0.0100 N barium standard solution.
11.2.3 Repeat the procedures in section 11.2.2, and average the titration volumes. Run a blank with each series of samples. Replicate titrations must agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature
CSO2 = Concentration of SO2, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, mg/dscm (lb/dscf).
N = Normality of barium standard titrant, meq/ml.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Tm = Average DGM absolute temperature, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
Va = Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml.
Vm = Dry gas volume as measured by the DGM, dcm (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the DGM, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vsoln = Total volume of solution in which the SO2 sample is contained, 100 ml.
Vt = Volume of barium standard titrant used for the sample (average of replicate titration), ml.
Vtb = Volume of barium standard titrant used for the blank, ml.
Y = DGM calibration factor.
12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K1 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
K1 = 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.3 SO2 Concentration.
Where:
K2 = 32.03 mg SO2/meq for metric units,
K2 = 7.061 × 10−5 lb SO2/meq for English units.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. The minimum detectable limit of the method has been determined to be 3.4 mg SO2/m 3 (2.12 × 10−7 lb/ft 3). Although no upper limit has been established, tests have shown that concentrations as high as 80,000 mg/m 3 (0.005 lb/ft 3) of SO2 can be collected efficiently at a rate of 1.0 liter/min (0.035 cfm) for 20 minutes in two midget impingers, each containing 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2. Based on theoretical calculations, the upper concentration limit in a 20 liter (0.7 ft 3) sample is about 93,300 mg/m 3 (0.00583 lb/ft 3).
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Nomenclature. Same as section 12.1, with the following additions:
Bwa = Water vapor in ambient air, proportion by volume.
Ma = Molecular weight of the ambient air saturated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Ms = Molecular weight of the sample gas saturated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole (lb/lb-mole).
Pc = Inlet vacuum reading obtained during the calibration run, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Psr = Inlet vacuum reading obtained during the sampling run, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Q std = Volumetric flow rate through critical orifice, scm/min (scf/min).
Qstd = Average flow rate of pre-test and post-test calibration runs, scm/min (scf/min).
Tamb = Ambient absolute temperature of air, °K (°R).
Vsb = Volume of gas as measured by the soap bubble meter, m 3 (ft 3).
Vsb(std) = Volume of gas as measured by the soap bubble meter, corrected to standard conditions, scm (scf).
θ = Soap bubble travel time, min.
θs = Time, min.
16.2 Critical Orifices for Volume and Rate Measurements. A critical orifice may be used in place of the DGM specified in section 6.1.1.10, provided that it is selected, calibrated, and used as follows:
16.2.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Assemble the sampling train as shown in Figure 6-2. The rate meter and surge tank are optional but are recommended in order to detect changes in the flow rate.
16.2.2 Selection of Critical Orifices.
16.2.2.1 The procedure that follows describes the use of hypodermic needles and stainless steel needle tubings, which have been found suitable for use as critical orifices. Other materials and critical orifice designs may be used provided the orifices act as true critical orifices, (i.e., a critical vacuum can be obtained) as described in this section. Select a critical orifice that is sized to operate at the desired flow rate. The needle sizes and tubing lengths shown in Table 6-1 give the following approximate flow rates.
16.2.2.2 Determine the suitability and the appropriate operating vacuum of the critical orifice as follows: If applicable, temporarily attach a rate meter and surge tank to the outlet of the sampling train, if said equipment is not present (see section 16.2.1). Turn on the pump and adjust the valve to give an outlet vacuum reading corresponding to about half of the atmospheric pressure. Observe the rate meter reading. Slowly increase the vacuum until a stable reading is obtained on the rate meter. Record the critical vacuum, which is the outlet vacuum when the rate meter first reaches a stable value. Orifices that do not reach a critical value must not be used.
16.2.3 Field Procedures.
16.2.3.1 Leak-Check Procedure. A leak-check before the sampling run is recommended, but not required. The leak-check procedure is as follows: Temporarily attach a suitable (e.g., 0-40 ml/min) rotameter and surge tank, or a soap bubble meter and surge tank to the outlet of the pump. Plug the probe inlet, pull an outlet vacuum of at least 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), and note the flow rate as indicated by the rotameter or bubble meter. A leakage rate in excess of 2 percent of the average sampling rate (Q std) is not acceptable. Carefully release the probe inlet plug before turning off the pump.
16.2.3.2 Moisture Determination. At the sampling location, prior to testing, determine the percent moisture of the ambient air using the wet and dry bulb temperatures or, if appropriate, a relative humidity meter.
16.2.3.3 Critical Orifice Calibration. At the sampling location, prior to testing, calibrate the entire sampling train (i.e., determine the flow rate of the sampling train when operated at critical conditions). Attach a 500-ml soap bubble meter to the inlet of the probe, and operate the sampling train at an outlet vacuum of 25 to 50 mm Hg (1 to 2 in. Hg) above the critical vacuum. Record the information listed in Figure 6-4. Calculate the standard volume of air measured by the soap bubble meter and the volumetric flow rate using the equations below:
16.2.3.4 Sampling.
16.2.3.4.1 Operate the sampling train for sample collection at the same vacuum used during the calibration run. Start the watch and pump simultaneously. Take readings (temperature, rate meter, inlet vacuum, and outlet vacuum) at least every 5 minutes. At the end of the sampling run, stop the watch and pump simultaneously.
16.2.3.4.2 Conduct a post-test calibration run using the calibration procedure outlined in section 16.2.3.3. If the Qstd obtained before and after the test differ by more than 5 percent, void the test run; if not, calculate the volume of the gas measured with the critical orifice using Equation 6-6 as follows:
16.2.3.4.3 If the percent difference between the molecular weight of the ambient air at saturated conditions and the sample gas is more that ±3 percent, then the molecular weight of the gas sample must be considered in the calculations using the following equation:
16.2.3.4.4 Drain the ice bath, and purge the sampling train using the procedure described in section 8.3.4.
16.3 Elimination of Ammonia Interference. The following alternative procedures must be used in addition to those specified in the method when sampling at sources having ammonia emissions.
16.3.1 Sampling. The probe shall be maintained at 275 °C (527 °F) and equipped with a high-efficiency in-stack filter (glass fiber) to remove particulate matter. The filter material shall be unreactive to SO2. Whatman 934AH (formerly Reeve Angel 934AH) filters treated as described in Reference 10 in section 17.0 of Method 5 is an example of a filter that has been shown to work. Where alkaline particulate matter and condensed moisture are present in the gas stream, the filter shall be heated above the moisture dew point but below 225 °C (437 °F).
16.3.2 Sample Recovery. Recover the sample according to section 8.4 except for discarding the contents of the midget bubbler. Add the bubbler contents, including the rinsings of the bubbler with water, to a separate polyethylene bottle from the rest of the sample. Under normal testing conditions where sulfur trioxide will not be present significantly, the tester may opt to delete the midget bubbler from the sampling train. If an approximation of the sulfur trioxide concentration is desired, transfer the contents of the midget bubbler to a separate polyethylene bottle.
16.3.3 Sample Analysis. Follow the procedures in sections 11.1 and 11.2, except add 0.5 ml of 0.1 N HCl to the Erlenmeyer flask and mix before adding the indicator. The following analysis procedure may be used for an approximation of the sulfur trioxide concentration. The accuracy of the calculated concentration will depend upon the ammonia to SO2 ratio and the level of oxygen present in the gas stream. A fraction of the SO2 will be counted as sulfur trioxide as the ammonia to SO2 ratio and the sample oxygen content increases. Generally, when this ratio is 1 or less and the oxygen content is in the range of 5 percent, less than 10 percent of the SO2 will be counted as sulfur trioxide. Analyze the peroxide and isopropanol sample portions separately. Analyze the peroxide portion as described above. Sulfur trioxide is determined by difference using sequential titration of the isopropanol portion of the sample. Transfer the contents of the isopropanol storage container to a 100-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to exactly 100 ml with water. Pipette a 20-ml aliquot of this solution into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 0.5 ml of 0.1 N HCl, 80 ml of 100 percent isopropanol, and two to four drops of thorin indicator. Titrate to a pink endpoint using 0.0100 N barium perchlorate. Repeat and average the titration volumes that agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is larger. Use this volume in Equation 6-2 to determine the sulfur trioxide concentration. From the flask containing the remainder of the isopropanol sample, determine the fraction of SO2 collected in the bubbler by pipetting 20-ml aliquots into 250-ml Erlenmeyer flasks. Add 5 ml of 3 percent H2O2, 100 ml of 100 percent isopropanol, and two to four drips of thorin indicator, and titrate as before. From this titration volume, subtract the titrant volume determined for sulfur trioxide, and add the titrant volume determined for the peroxide portion. This final volume constitutes Vt, the volume of barium perchlorate used for the SO2 sample.
17.0 References
1. Atmospheric Emissions from Sulfuric Acid Manufacturing Processes. U.S. DHEW, PHS, Division of Air Pollution. Public Health Service Publication No. 999-AP-13. Cincinnati, OH. 1965.
2. Corbett, P.F. The Determination of SO2 and SO3 in Flue Gases. Journal of the Institute of Fuel. 24:237-243. 1961.
3. Matty, R.E., and E.K. Diehl. Measuring Flue-Gas SO2 and SO3. Power. 101:94-97. November 1957.
4. Patton, W.F., and J.A. Brink, Jr. New Equipment and Techniques for Sampling Chemical Process Gases. J. Air Pollution Control Association. 13:162. 1963.
5. Rom, J.J. Maintenance, Calibration, and Operation of Isokinetic Source Sampling Equipment. Office of Air Programs, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-0576. March 1972.
6. Hamil, H.F., and D.E. Camann. Collaborative Study of Method for the Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions from Stationary Sources (Fossil-Fuel Fired Steam Generators). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-650/4-74-024. December 1973.
7. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 31; Water, Atmospheric Analysis. American Society for Testing and Materials. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 40-42.
8. Knoll, J.E., and M.R. Midgett. The Application of EPA Method 6 to High Sulfur Dioxide Concentrations. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. EPA-600/4-76-038. July 1976.
9. Westlin, P.R., and R.T. Shigehara. Procedure for Calibrating and Using Dry Gas Volume Meters as Calibration Standards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3(1):17-30. February 1978.
10. Yu, K.K. Evaluation of Moisture Effect on Dry Gas Meter Calibration. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 5(1):24-28. February 1980.
11. Lodge, J.P., Jr., et al. The Use of Hypodermic Needles as Critical Orifices in Air Sampling. J. Air Pollution Control Association. 16:197-200. 1966.
12. Shigehara, R.T., and C.B. Sorrell. Using Critical Orifices as Method 5 CalibrationStandards. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 10:4-15. August 1985.
13. Curtis, F., Analysis of Method 6 Samples in the Presence of Ammonia. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 13(1):9-15 February 1988.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts and Validation Data
| Needle size (gauge) |
Needle length (cm) |
Flow rate (ml/min) |
|---|---|---|
| 21 | 7.6 | 1,100 |
| 22 | 2.9 | 1,000 |
| 22 | 3.8 | 900 |
| 23 | 3.8 | 500 |
| 23 | 5.1 | 450 |
| 24 | 3.2 | 400 |
Method 6A—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide, Moisture, and Carbon Dioxide From Fossil Fuel Combustion Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| SO2 | 7449-09-05 | 3.4 mg SO2/m3 (2.12 × 10−7 lb/ft3) |
| CO2 | 124-38-9 | N/A |
| H2 O | 7732-18-5 | N/A |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of sulfur dioxide (SO2) emissions from fossil fuel combustion sources in terms of concentration (mg/dscm or lb/dscf) and in terms of emission rate (ng/J or lb/10 6 Btu) and for the determination of carbon dioxide (CO2) concentration (percent). Moisture content (percent), if desired, may also be determined by this method.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from a sampling point in the stack. The SO2 and the sulfur trioxide, including those fractions in any sulfur acid mist, are separated. The SO2 fraction is measured by the barium-thorin titration method. Moisture and CO2 fractions are collected in the same sampling train, and are determined gravimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Same as Method 6, section 4.0.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. Same as Method 6, section 5.2.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 6, section 6.1, with the exception of the following:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this method is shown in Figure 6A-1.
6.1.1.1 Impingers and Bubblers. Two 30 = ml midget impingers with a 1 = mm restricted tip and two 30 = ml midget bubblers with unrestricted tips. Other types of impingers and bubblers (e.g., Mae West for SO2 collection and rigid cylinders containing Drierite for moisture absorbers), may be used with proper attention to reagent volumes and levels, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.1.2 CO2 Absorber. A sealable rigid cylinder or bottle with an inside diameter between 30 and 90 mm , a length between 125 and 250 mm, and appropriate connections at both ends. The filter may be a separate heated unit or may be within the heated portion of the probe. If the filter is within the sampling probe, the filter should not be within 15 cm of the probe inlet or any unheated section of the probe, such as the connection to the first bubbler. The probe and filter should be heated to at least 20 °C (68 °F) above the source temperature, but not greater than 120 °C (248 °F). The filter temperature (i.e., the sample gas temperature) should be monitored to assure the desired temperature is maintained. A heated Teflon connector may be used to connect the filter holder or probe to the first impinger.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 6, section 6.2.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6, section 6.3, with the addition of a balance to measure within 0.05 g.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 6, section 7.1, with the addition of the following:
7.1.1 Drierite. Anhydrous calcium sulfate (CaSO4) desiccant, 8 mesh, indicating type is recommended.
7.1.2 CO2 Absorbing Material. Ascarite II. Sodium hydroxide-coated silica, 8- to 20-mesh.
7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 7.2 and 7.3, respectively.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.1 Measure 15 ml of 80 percent isopropanol into the first midget bubbler and 15 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide into each of the two midget impingers (the second and third vessels in the train) as described in Method 6, section 8.1. Insert the glass wool into the top of the isopropanol bubbler as shown in Figure 6A-1. Place about 25 g of Drierite into the second midget bubbler (the fourth vessel in the train). Clean the outside of the bubblers and impingers and allow the vessels to reach room temperature. Weigh the four vessels simultaneously to the nearest 0.1 g, and record this initial weight (mwi).
8.1.2 With one end of the CO2 absorber sealed, place glass wool into the cylinder to a depth of about 1 cm (0.5 in.). Place about 150 g of CO2 absorbing material in the cylinder on top of the glass wool, and fill the remaining space in the cylinder with glass wool. Assemble the cylinder as shown in figure 6A-2. With the cylinder in a horizontal position, rotate it around the horizontal axis. The CO2 absorbing material should remain in position during the rotation, and no open spaces or channels should be formed. If necessary, pack more glass wool into the cylinder to make the CO2 absorbing material stable. Clean the outside of the cylinder of loose dirt and moisture and allow the cylinder to reach room temperature. Weigh the cylinder to the nearest 0.1 g, and record this initial weight (mai).
8.1.3 Assemble the train as shown in figure 6A-1. Adjust the probe heater to a temperature sufficient to prevent condensation (see note in section 6.1). Place crushed ice and water around the impingers and bubblers. Mount the CO2 absorber outside the water bath in a vertical flow position with the sample gas inlet at the bottom. Flexible tubing (e.g., Tygon) may be used to connect the last SO2 absorbing impinger to the moisture absorber and to connect the moisture absorber to the CO2 absorber. A second, smaller CO2 absorber containing Ascarite II may be added in-line downstream of the primary CO2 absorber as a breakthrough indicator. Ascarite II turns white when CO2 is absorbed.
8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Procedure and Sample Collection. Same as Method 6, sections 8.2 and 8.3, respectively.
8.3 Sample Recovery.
8.3.1 Moisture Measurement. Disconnect the isopropanol bubbler, the SO2 impingers, and the moisture absorber from the sample train. Allow about 10 minutes for them to reach room temperature, clean the outside of loose dirt and moisture, and weigh them simultaneously in the same manner as in section 8.1. Record this final weight (mwf).
8.3.2 Peroxide Solution. Discard the contents of the isopropanol bubbler and pour the contents of the midget impingers into a leak-free polyethylene bottle for shipping. Rinse the two midget impingers and connecting tubes with water, and add the washing to the same storage container.
8.3.3 CO2 Absorber. Allow the CO2 absorber to warm to room temperature (about 10 minutes), clean the outside of loose dirt and moisture, and weigh to the nearest 0.1 g in the same manner as in section 8.1. Record this final weight (maf). Discard used Ascarite II material.
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Method 6, section 9.0.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 6, section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Analysis. The sample analysis procedure for SO2 is the same as that specified in Method 6, section 11.0.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 6, section 12.0, with the addition of the following:
12.1 Nomenclature.
Cw = Concentration of moisture, percent.
CCO2 = Concentration of CO2, dry basis, percent.
ESO2 = Emission rate of SO2, ng/J (lb/10 6 Btu).
FC = Carbon F-factor from Method 19 for the fuel burned, dscm/J (dscf/10 6 Btu).
mwi = Initial weight of impingers, bubblers, and moisture absorber, g.
mwf = Final weight of impingers, bubblers, and moisture absorber, g.
mai = Initial weight of CO2 absorber, g.
maf = Final weight of CO2 absorber, g.
mSO2 = Mass of SO2 collected, mg.
VCO2(std) = Equivalent volume of CO2 collected at standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vw(std) = Equivalent volume of moisture collected at standard conditions, scm (scf).
12.2 CO2 Volume Collected, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K3 = Equivalent volume of gaseous CO2 at standard conditions, 5.467 × 10−4 dscm/g (1.930 × 10−2 dscf/g).
12.3 Moisture Volume Collected, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K4 = Equivalent volume of water vapor at standard conditions, 1.336 × 10−3 scm/g (4.717 × 10−2 scf/g).
12.4 SO2 Concentration.
Where:
K2 = 32.03 mg SO2/meq. SO2 (7.061 × 10−5 lb SO2/meq. SO2)
12.5 CO2 Concentration.
12.6 Moisture Concentration.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range and Precision. The minimum detectable limit and the upper limit for the measurement of SO2 are the same as for Method 6. For a 20-liter sample, this method has a precision of ±0.5 percent CO2 for concentrations between 2.5 and 25 percent CO2 and ±1.0 percent moisture for moisture concentrations greater than 5 percent.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Methods
If the only emission measurement desired is in terms of emission rate of SO2 (ng/J or lb/10 6 Btu), an abbreviated procedure may be used. The differences between the above procedure and the abbreviated procedure are described below.
16.1 Sampling Train. The sampling train is the same as that shown in Figure 6A-1 and as described in section 6.1, except that the dry gas meter is not needed.
16.2 Preparation of the Sampling Train. Follow the same procedure as in section 8.1, except do not weigh the isopropanol bubbler, the SO2 absorbing impingers, or the moisture absorber.
16.3 Sampling Train Leak-Check Procedure and Sample Collection. Leak-check and operate the sampling train as described in section 8.2, except that dry gas meter readings, barometric pressure, and dry gas meter temperatures need not be recorded during sampling.
16.4 Sample Recovery. Follow the procedure in section 8.3, except do not weigh the isopropanol bubbler, the SO2 absorbing impingers, or the moisture absorber.
16.5 Sample Analysis. Analysis of the peroxide solution is the same as that described in section 11.1.
16.6 Calculations.
16.6.1 SO2 Collected.
Where:
K2 = 32.03 mg SO2/meq. SO2
K2 = 7.061 × 10−5 lb SO2/meq. SO2
16.6.2 Sulfur Dioxide Emission Rate.
Where:
K5 = 1.829 × 10 9 mg/dscm
K2 = 0.1142 lb/dscf
17.0 References
Same as Method 6, section 17.0, References 1 through 8, with the addition of the following:
1. Stanley, Jon and P.R. Westlin. An Alternate Method for Stack Gas Moisture Determination. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 3(4). November 1978.
2. Whittle, Richard N. and P.R. Westlin. Air Pollution Test Report: Development and Evaluation of an Intermittent Integrated SO2/CO2 Emission Sampling Procedure. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Standard and Engineering Division, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. December 1979. 14 pp.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 6B—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide and Carbon Dioxide Daily Average Emissions From Fossil Fuel Combustion Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-05 | 3.4 mg SO2/m3 (2.12 × 10−7 lb/ft3) |
| Carbon dioxide (CO2) | 124-38-9 | N/A |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of SO2 emissions from combustion sources in terms of concentration (ng/dscm or lb/dscf) and emission rate (ng/J or lb/10 6 Btu), and for the determination of CO2 concentration (percent) on a daily (24 hours) basis.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the sampling point in the stack intermittently over a 24-hour or other specified time period. The SO2 fraction is measured by the barium-thorin titration method. Moisture and CO2 fractions are collected in the same sampling train, and are determined gravimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Same as Method 6, section 4.0.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. Same as Method 6, section 5.2.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as Method 6A, section 6.0, with the following exceptions and additions:
6.1 The isopropanol bubbler is not used. An empty bubbler for the collection of liquid droplets, that does not allow direct contact between the collected liquid and the gas sample, may be included in the sampling train.
6.2 For intermittent operation, include an industrial timer-switch designed to operate in the “on” position at least 2 minutes continuously and “off” the remaining period over a repeating cycle. The cycle of operation is designated in the applicable regulation. At a minimum, the sampling operation should include at least 12, equal, evenly-spaced periods per 24 hours.
6.3 Stainless steel sampling probes, type 316, are not recommended for use with Method 6B because of potential sample contamination due to corrosion. Glass probes or other types of stainless steel, e.g., Hasteloy or Carpenter 20, are recommended for long-term use.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as Method 6A, section 7.0, with the following exceptions:
7.1 Isopropanol is not used for sampling.
7.2 The hydrogen peroxide absorbing solution shall be diluted to no less than 6 percent by volume, instead of 3 percent as specified in Methods 6 and 6A.
7.3 If the Method 6B sampling train is to be operated in a low sample flow condition (less than 100 ml/min or 0.21 ft 3/hr), molecular sieve material may be substituted for Ascarite II as the CO2 absorbing material. The recommended molecular sieve material is Union Carbide 1/16 inch pellets, 5 A°, or equivalent. Molecular sieve material need not be discarded following the sampling run, provided that it is regenerated as per the manufacturer's instruction. Use of molecular sieve material at flow rates higher than 100 ml/min (0.21 ft 3/hr) may cause erroneous CO2 results.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as Method 6A, section 8.1, with the addition of the following:
8.1.1 The sampling train is assembled as shown in Figure 6A-1 of Method 6A, except that the isopropanol bubbler is not included.
8.1.2 Adjust the timer-switch to operate in the “on” position from 2 to 4 minutes on a 2-hour repeating cycle or other cycle specified in the applicable regulation. Other timer sequences may be used with the restriction that the total sample volume collected is between 25 and 60 liters (0.9 and 2.1 ft 3) for the amounts of sampling reagents prescribed in this method.
8.1.3 Add cold water to the tank until the impingers and bubblers are covered at least two-thirds of their length. The impingers and bubbler tank must be covered and protected from intense heat and direct sunlight. If freezing conditions exist, the impinger solution and the water bath must be protected.
8.2 Sampling Train Leak-Check Procedure. Same as Method 6, section 8.2.
8.3 Sample Collection.
8.3.1 The probe and filter (either in-stack, out-of-stack, or both) must be heated to a temperature sufficient to prevent water condensation.
8.3.2 Record the initial dry gas meter reading. To begin sampling, position the tip of the probe at the sampling point, connect the probe to the first impinger (or filter), and start the timer and the sample pump. Adjust the sample flow to a constant rate of approximately 1.0 liter/min (0.035 cfm) as indicated by the rotameter. Observe the operation of the timer, and determine that it is operating as intended (i.e., the timer is in the “on” position for the desired period, and the cycle repeats as required).
8.3.3 One time between 9 a.m. and 11 a.m. during the 24-hour sampling period, record the dry gas meter temperature (Tm) and the barometric pressure (P(bar)).
8.3.4 At the conclusion of the run, turn off the timer and the sample pump, remove the probe from the stack, and record the final gas meter volume reading. Conduct a leak-check as described in section 8.2. If a leak is found, void the test run or use procedures acceptable to the Administrator to adjust the sample volume for leakage. Repeat the steps in sections 8.3.1 to 8.3.4 for successive runs.
8.4 Sample Recovery. The procedures for sample recovery (moisture measurement, peroxide solution, and CO2 absorber) are the same as those in Method 6A, section 8.3.
9.0 Quality Control
Same as Method 6, section 9.0., with the exception of the isopropanol-check.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 6, section 10.0, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Periodic Calibration Check. After 30 days of operation of the test train, conduct a calibration check according to the same procedures as the post-test calibration check (Method 6, section 10.1.2). If the deviation between initial and periodic calibration factors exceeds 5 percent, use the smaller of the two factors in calculations for the preceding 30 days of data, but use the most recent calibration factor for succeeding test runs.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 11.1 and 11.2, respectively.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 6A, section 12.0, except that Pbar and Tm correspond to the values recorded in section 8.3.3 of this method. The values are as follows:
Pbar = Initial barometric pressure for the test period, mm Hg.
Tm = Absolute meter temperature for the test period, °K.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range.
13.1.1 Sulfur Dioxide. Same as Method 6.
13.1.2 Carbon Dioxide. Not determined.
13.2 Repeatability and Reproducibility. EPA-sponsored collaborative studies were undertaken to determine the magnitude of repeatability and reproducibility achievable by qualified testers following the procedures in this method. The results of the studies evolve from 145 field tests including comparisons with Methods 3 and 6. For measurements of emission rates from wet, flue gas desulfurization units in (ng/J), the repeatability (intra-laboratory precision) is 8.0 percent and the reproducibility (inter-laboratory precision) is 11.1 percent.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Methods
Same as Method 6A, section 16.0, except that the timer is needed and is operated as outlined in this method.
17.0 References
Same as Method 6A, section 17.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Butler, Frank E., et. al. The Collaborative Test of Method 6B: Twenty-Four-Hour Analysis of SO2 and CO2. JAPCA. Vol. 33, No. 10. October 1983.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 6C?
Method 6C is a procedure for measuring sulfur dioxide (SO2) in stationary source emissions using a continuous instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known quality. You must document your adherence to these specific requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis.
This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional test methods which are found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
(c) Method 6—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions from Stationary Sources.
(d) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method measures the concentration of sulfur dioxide.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| SO2 | 7446-09-5 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? The use of Method 6C may be required by specific New Source Performance Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State Implementation Plans, and permits where SO2 concentrations in stationary source emissions must be measured, either to determine compliance with an applicable emission standard or to conduct performance testing of a continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS). Other regulations may also require the use of Method 6C.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. How good must my collected data be? Refer to section 1.3 of Method 7E.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, you continuously sample the effluent gas and convey the sample to an analyzer that measures the concentration of SO2. You must meet the performance requirements of this method to validate your data.
3.0 Definitions
Refer to section 3.0 of Method 7E for the applicable definitions.
4.0 Interferences
Refer to Section 4.0 of Method 7E.
5.0 Safety
Refer to section 5.0 of Method 7E.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Figure 7E-1 of Method 7E is a schematic diagram of an acceptable measurement system.
6.1 What do I need for the measurement system? The essential components of the measurement system are the same as those in sections 6.1 and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that the SO2 analyzer described in section 6.2 of this method must be used instead of the analyzer described in section 6.2 of Method 7E. You must follow the noted specifications in section 6.1 of Method 7E.
6.2 What analyzer must I use? You may use an instrument that uses an ultraviolet, non-dispersive infrared, fluorescence, or other detection principle to continuously measure SO2 in the gas stream and meets the performance specifications in section 13.0. The low-range and dual-range analyzer provisions in sections 6.2.8.1 and 6.2.8.2 of Method 7E apply.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases do I need? Refer to section 7.1 of Method 7E for the calibration gas requirements. Example calibration gas mixtures are listed below.
(a) SO2 in nitrogen (N2).
(b) SO2 in air.
(c) SO2 and CO2 in N2.
(d) SO2 andO2 in N2.
(e) SO2/CO2/O2 gas mixture in N2.
(f) CO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
(g) CO2/SO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
7.2 Interference Check. What additional reagents do I need for the interference check? The test gases for the interference check are listed in Table 7E-3 of Method 7E. For the alternative interference check, you must use the reagents described in section 7.0 of Method 6.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You must follow the procedures of section 8.1 of Method 7E.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. You must follow the procedures in section 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type measurement system is used, the special considerations in section 8.3 of Method 7E also apply.
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow the procedures of section 8.2.7 of Method 7E to conduct an interference check, substituting SO2 for NOX as the method pollutant. For dilution-type measurement systems, you must use the alternative interference check procedure in section 16 and a co-located, unmodified Method 6 sampling train.
8.4 Sample Collection. You must follow the procedures of section 8.4 of Method 7E.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift Assessment. You must follow the procedures of section 8.5 of Method 7E.
9.0 Quality Control
Follow quality control procedures in section 9.0 of Method 7E.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Follow the procedures for calibration and standardization in section 10.0 of Method 7E.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the applicable procedures for calculations and data analysis in section 12.0 of Method 7E as applicable, substituting SO2 for NOX as appropriate.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 The specifications for the applicable performance checks are the same as in section 13.0 of Method 7E.
13.2 Alternative Interference Check. The results are acceptable if the difference between the Method 6C result and the modified Method 6 result is less than 7.0 percent of the Method 6 result for each of the three test runs. For the purposes of comparison, the Method 6 and 6C results must be expressed in the same units of measure.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Alternative Interference Check. You may perform an alternative interference check consisting of at least three comparison runs between Method 6C and Method 6. This check validates the Method 6C results at each particular source category (type of facility) where the check is performed. When testing under conditions of low concentrations (<15 ppm), this alternative interference check is not allowed.
a. Build the modified Method 6 sampling train (flow control valve, two midget impingers containing 3 percent hydrogen peroxide, and dry gas meter) shown in Figure 6C-1. Connect the sampling train to the sample bypass discharge vent. Record the dry gas meter reading before you begin sampling. Simultaneously collect modified Method 6 and Method 6C samples. Open the flow control valve in the modified Method 6 train as you begin to sample with Method 6C. Adjust the Method 6 sampling rate to 1 liter per minute (.10 percent). The sampling time per run must be the same as for Method 6 plus twice the average measurement system response time. If your modified Method 6 train does not include a pump, you risk biasing the results high if you over-pressurize the midget impingers and cause a leak. You can reduce this risk by cautiously increasing the flow rate as sampling begins.
b. After completing a run, record the final dry gas meter reading, meter temperature, and barometric pressure. Recover and analyze the contents of the midget impingers using the procedures in Method 6. Determine the average gas concentration reported by Method 6C for the run.
17.0 References
1. “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards” September 1997 as amended, EPA-600/R-97/121
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 7—Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | 2-400 mg/dscm |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the measurement of nitrogen oxides (NOX) emitted from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sample methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
A grab sample is collected in an evacuated flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid-hydrogen peroxide absorbing solution, and the nitrogen oxides, except nitrous oxide, are measured colorimetrically using the phenoldisulfonic acid (PDS) procedure.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Biased results have been observed when sampling under conditions of high sulfur dioxide concentrations. At or above 2100 ppm SO2, use five times the H2O2 concentration of the Method 7 absorbing solution. Laboratory tests have shown that high concentrations of SO2 (about 2100 ppm) cause low results in Method 7 and 7A. Increasing the H2O2 concentration to five times the original concentration eliminates this bias. However, when no SO2 is present, increasing the concentration by five times results in a low bias.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Phenoldisulfonic Acid. Irritating to eyes and skin.
5.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.4 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
5.2.5 Phenol. Poisonous and caustic. Do not handle with bare hands as it is absorbed through the skin.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the sampling train used in performing this method is shown in Figure 7-1. Other grab sampling systems or equipment, capable of measuring sample volume to within 2.0 percent and collecting a sufficient sample volume to allow analytical reproducibility to within 5 percent, will be considered acceptable alternatives, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The following items are required for sample collection:
6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass tubing, sufficiently heated to prevent water condensation and equipped with an in-stack or heated out-of-stack filter to remove particulate matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory for this purpose). Stainless steel or Teflon tubing may also be used for the probe. Heating is not necessary if the probe remains dry during the purging period.
6.1.2 Collection Flask. Two-liter borosilicate, round bottom flask, with short neck and 24/40 standard taper opening, protected against implosion or breakage.
6.1.3 Flask Valve. T-bore stopcock connected to a 24/40 standard taper joint.
6.1.4 Temperature Gauge. Dial-type thermometer, or other temperature gauge, capable of measuring 1 °C (2 °F) intervals from −5 to 50 °C (23 to 122 °F).
6.1.5 Vacuum Line. Tubing capable of withstanding a vacuum of 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute pressure, with “T” connection and T-bore stopcock.
6.1.6 Vacuum Gauge. U-tube manometer, 1 meter (39 in.), with 1 mm (0.04 in.) divisions, or other gauge capable of measuring pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.10 in.) Hg.
6.1.7 Pump. Capable of evacuating the collection flask to a pressure equal to or less than 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute.
6.1.8 Squeeze Bulb. One-way.
6.1.9 Volumetric Pipette. 25-ml.
6.1.10 Stopcock and Ground Joint Grease. A high-vacuum, high-temperature chlorofluorocarbon grease is required. Halocarbon 25-5S has been found to be effective.
6.1.11 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm (0.1 in.) Hg. See note in Method 5, section 6.1.2.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml with 1 ml divisions.
6.2.2 Storage Containers. Leak-free polyethylene bottles.
6.2.3 Wash Bottle. Polyethylene or glass.
6.2.4 Glass Stirring Rod.
6.2.5 Test Paper for Indicating pH. To cover the pH range of 7 to 14.
6.3 Analysis. The following items are required for analysis:
6.3.1 Volumetric Pipettes. Two 1-ml, two 2-ml, one 3-ml, one 4-ml, two 10-ml, and one 25-ml for each sample and standard.
6.3.2 Porcelain Evaporating Dishes. 175- to 250-ml capacity with lip for pouring, one for each sample and each standard. The Coors No. 45006 (shallowform, 195-ml) has been found to be satisfactory. Alternatively, polymethyl pentene beakers (Nalge No. 1203, 150-ml), or glass beakers (150-ml) may be used. When glass beakers are used, etching of the beakers may cause solid matter to be present in the analytical step; the solids should be removed by filtration.
6.3.3 Steam Bath. Low-temperature ovens or thermostatically controlled hot plates kept below 70 °C (160 °F) are acceptable alternatives.
6.3.4 Dropping Pipette or Dropper. Three required.
6.3.5 Polyethylene Policeman. One for each sample and each standard.
6.3.6 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml with 1-ml divisions.
6.3.7 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml (one for each sample and each standard), 100-ml (one for each sample and each standard, and one for the working standard KNO3 solution), and 1000-ml (one).
6.3.8 Spectrophotometer. To measure at 410 nm.
6.3.9 Graduated Pipette. 10-ml with 0.1-ml divisions.
6.3.10 Test Paper for Indicating pH. To cover the pH range of 7 to 14.
6.3.11 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sampling:
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.1.2 Absorbing Solution. Cautiously add 2.8 ml concentrated H2SO4 to a 1-liter flask partially filled with water. Mix well, and add 6 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide, freshly prepared from 30 percent hydrogen peroxide solution. Dilute to 1 liter of water and mix well. The absorbing solution should be used within 1 week of its preparation. Do not expose to extreme heat or direct sunlight.
7.2 Sample Recovery. The following reagents are required for sample recovery:
7.2.1 Water. Same as in 7.1.1.
7.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide, 1 N. Dissolve 40 g NaOH in water, and dilute to 1 liter.
7.3 Analysis. The following reagents and standards are required for analysis:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in 7.1.1.
7.3.2 Fuming Sulfuric Acid. 15 to 18 percent by weight free sulfur trioxide. HANDLE WITH CAUTION.
7.3.3 Phenol. White solid.
7.3.4 Sulfuric Acid. Concentrated, 95 percent minimum assay.
7.3.5 Potassium Nitrate (KNO3). Dried at 105 to 110 °C (221 to 230 °F) for a minimum of 2 hours just prior to preparation of standard solution.
7.3.6 Standard KNO3 Solution. Dissolve exactly 2.198 g of dried KNO3 in water, and dilute to 1 liter with water in a 1000-ml volumetric flask.
7.3.7 Working Standard KNO3 Solution. Dilute 10 ml of the standard solution to 100 ml with water. One ml of the working standard solution is equivalent to 100 µg nitrogen dioxide (NO2).
7.3.8 Phenoldisulfonic Acid Solution. Dissolve 25 g of pure white phenol solid in 150 ml concentrated sulfuric acid on a steam bath. Cool, add 75 ml fuming sulfuric acid (15 to 18 percent by weight free sulfur trioxide—HANDLE WITH CAUTION), and heat at 100 °C (212 °F) for 2 hours. Store in a dark, stoppered bottle.
7.3.9 Concentrated Ammonium Hydroxide.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage and Transport
8.1 Sample Collection.
8.1.1 Flask Volume. The volume of the collection flask and flask valve combination must be known prior to sampling. Assemble the flask and flask valve, and fill with water to the stopcock. Measure the volume of water to ±10 ml. Record this volume on the flask.
8.1.2 Pipette 25 ml of absorbing solution into a sample flask, retaining a sufficient quantity for use in preparing the calibration standards. Insert the flask valve stopper into the flask with the valve in the “purge” position. Assemble the sampling train as shown in Figure 7-1, and place the probe at the sampling point. Make sure that all fittings are tight and leak-free, and that all ground glass joints have been greased properly with a high-vacuum, high temperature chlorofluorocarbon-based stopcock grease. Turn the flask valve and the pump valve to their “evacuate” positions. Evacuate the flask to 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute pressure, or less. Evacuation to a pressure approaching the vapor pressure of water at the existing temperature is desirable. Turn the pump valve to its “vent” position, and turn off the pump. Check for leakage by observing the manometer for any pressure fluctuation. (Any variation greater than 10 mm (0.4 in.) Hg over a period of 1 minute is not acceptable, and the flask is not to be used until the leakage problem is corrected. Pressure in the flask is not to exceed 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute at the time sampling is commenced.) Record the volume of the flask and valve (Vf), the flask temperature (Ti), and the barometric pressure. Turn the flask valve counterclockwise to its “purge” position, and do the same with the pump valve. Purge the probe and the vacuum tube using the squeeze bulb. If condensation occurs in the probe and the flask valve area, heat the probe, and purge until the condensation disappears. Next, turn the pump valve to its “vent” position. Turn the flask valve clockwise to its “evacuate” position, and record the difference in the mercury levels in the manometer. The absolute internal pressure in the flask (Pi) is equal to the barometric pressure less the manometer reading. Immediately turn the flask valve to the “sample” position, and permit the gas to enter the flask until pressures in the flask and sample line (i.e., duct, stack) are equal. This will usually require about 15 seconds; a longer period indicates a plug in the probe, which must be corrected before sampling is continued. After collecting the sample, turn the flask valve to its “purge” position, and disconnect the flask from the sampling train.
8.1.3 Shake the flask for at least 5 minutes.
8.1.4 If the gas being sampled contains insufficient oxygen for the conversion of NO to NO2 (e.g., an applicable subpart of the standards may require taking a sample of a calibration gas mixture of NO in N2), then introduce oxygen into the flask to permit this conversion. Oxygen may be introduced into the flask by one of three methods: (1) Before evacuating the sampling flask, flush with pure cylinder oxygen, then evacuate flask to 75 mm (3 in.) Hg absolute pressure or less; or (2) inject oxygen into the flask after sampling; or (3) terminate sampling with a minimum of 50 mm (2 in.) Hg vacuum remaining in the flask, record this final pressure, and then vent the flask to the atmosphere until the flask pressure is almost equal to atmospheric pressure.
8.2 Sample Recovery. Let the flask sit for a minimum of 16 hours, and then shake the contents for 2 minutes.
8.2.1 Connect the flask to a mercury filled U-tube manometer. Open the valve from the flask to the manometer, and record the flask temperature (Tf), the barometric pressure, and the difference between the mercury levels in the manometer. The absolute internal pressure in the flask (Pf) is the barometric pressure less the manometer reading. Transfer the contents of the flask to a leak-free polyethylene bottle. Rinse the flask twice with 5 ml portions of water, and add the rinse water to the bottle. Adjust the pH to between 9 and 12 by adding 1 N NaOH, dropwise (about 25 to 35 drops). Check the pH by dipping a stirring rod into the solution and then touching the rod to the pH test paper. Remove as little material as possible during this step. Mark the height of the liquid level so that the container can be checked for leakage after transport. Label the container to identify clearly its contents. Seal the container for shipping.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Spectrophotometer.
10.1.1 Optimum Wavelength Determination.
10.1.1.1 Calibrate the wavelength scale of the spectrophotometer every 6 months. The calibration may be accomplished by using an energy source with an intense line emission such as a mercury lamp, or by using a series of glass filters spanning the measuring range of the spectrophotometer. Calibration materials are available commercially and from the National Institute of Standards and Technology. Specific details on the use of such materials should be supplied by the vendor; general information about calibration techniques can be obtained from general reference books on analytical chemistry. The wavelength scale of the spectrophotometer must read correctly within 5 nm at all calibration points; otherwise, repair and recalibrate the spectrophotometer. Once the wavelength scale of the spectrophotometer is in proper calibration, use 410 nm as the optimum wavelength for the measurement of the absorbance of the standards and samples.
10.1.1.2 Alternatively, a scanning procedure may be employed to determine the proper measuring wavelength. If the instrument is a double-beam spectrophotometer, scan the spectrum between 400 and 415 nm using a 200 µg NO2 standard solution in the sample cell and a blank solution in the reference cell. If a peak does not occur, the spectrophotometer is probably malfunctioning and should be repaired. When a peak is obtained within the 400 to 415 nm range, the wavelength at which this peak occurs shall be the optimum wavelength for the measurement of absorbance of both the standards and the samples. For a single-beam spectrophotometer, follow the scanning procedure described above, except scan separately the blank and standard solutions. The optimum wavelength shall be the wavelength at which the maximum difference in absorbance between the standard and the blank occurs.
10.1.2 Determination of Spectrophotometer Calibration Factor Kc. Add 0 ml, 2.0 ml, 4.0 ml, 6.0 ml, and 8.0 ml of the KNO3 working standard solution (1 ml = 100 µg NO2) to a series of five 50-ml volumetric flasks. To each flask, add 25 ml of absorbing solution and 10 ml water. Add 1 N NaOH to each flask until the pH is between 9 and 12 (about 25 to 35 drops). Dilute to the mark with water. Mix thoroughly, and pipette a 25-ml aliquot of each solution into a separate porcelain evaporating dish. Beginning with the evaporation step, follow the analysis procedure of section 11.2 until the solution has been transferred to the 100-ml volumetric flask and diluted to the mark. Measure the absorbance of each solution at the optimum wavelength as determined in section 10.1.1. This calibration procedure must be repeated on each day that samples are analyzed. Calculate the spectrophotometer calibration factor as shown in section 12.2.
10.1.3 Spectrophotometer Calibration Quality Control. Multiply the absorbance value obtained for each standard by the Kc factor (reciprocal of the least squares slope) to determine the distance each calibration point lies from the theoretical calibration line. The difference between the calculated concentration values and the actual concentrations (i.e., 100, 200, 300, and 400 µg NO2) shall be less than 7 percent for all standards.
10.2 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer or NIST-traceable barometer prior to the field test.
10.3 Temperature Gauge. Calibrate dial thermometers against mercury-in-glass thermometers. An alternative mercury-free thermometer may be used if the thermometer is, at a minimum, equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
10.4 Vacuum Gauge. Calibrate mechanical gauges, if used, against a mercury manometer such as that specified in section 6.1.6.
10.5 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against standard weights.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the level of the liquid in the container, and confirm whether any sample was lost during shipment. Note this on the analytical data sheet. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Immediately prior to analysis, transfer the contents of the shipping container to a 50 ml volumetric flask, and rinse the container twice with 5 ml portions of water. Add the rinse water to the flask, and dilute to mark with water; mix thoroughly. Pipette a 25-ml aliquot into the porcelain evaporating dish. Return any unused portion of the sample to the polyethylene storage bottle. Evaporate the 25-ml aliquot to dryness on a steam bath, and allow to cool. Add 2 ml phenoldisulfonic acid solution to the dried residue, and triturate thoroughly with a polyethylene policeman. Make sure the solution contacts all the residue. Add 1 ml water and 4 drops of concentrated sulfuric acid. Heat the solution on a steam bath for 3 minutes with occasional stirring. Allow the solution to cool, add 20 ml water, mix well by stirring, and add concentrated ammonium hydroxide, dropwise, with constant stirring, until the pH is 10 (as determined by pH paper). If the sample contains solids, these must be removed by filtration (centrifugation is an acceptable alternative, subject to the approval of the Administrator) as follows: Filter through Whatman No. 41 filter paper into a 100-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the evaporating dish with three 5-ml portions of water. Filter these three rinses. Wash the filter with at least three 15-ml portions of water. Add the filter washings to the contents of the volumetric flask, and dilute to the mark with water. If solids are absent, the solution can be transferred directly to the 100-ml volumetric flask and diluted to the mark with water.
11.3 Sample Analysis. Mix the contents of the flask thoroughly, and measure the absorbance at the optimum wavelength used for the standards (section 10.1.1), using the blank solution as a zero reference. Dilute the sample and the blank with equal volumes of water if the absorbance exceeds A4, the absorbance of the 400-µg NO2 standard (see section 10.1.3).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculations.
12.1 12.1 Nomenclature
A = Absorbance of sample.
A1 = Absorbance of the 100-µg NO2 standard.
A2 = Absorbance of the 200-µg NO2 standard.
A3 = Absorbance of the 300-µg NO2 standard.
A4 = Absorbance of the 400-µg NO2 standard.
C = Concentration of NOX as NO2, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, mg/dsm 3 (lb/dscf).
F = Dilution factor (i.e., 25/5, 25/10, etc., required only if sample dilution was needed to reduce the absorbance into the range of the calibration).
Kc = Spectrophotometer calibration factor.
M = Mass of NOX as NO2 in gas sample, µg.
Pf = Final absolute pressure of flask, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pi = Initial absolute pressure of flask, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
Tf = Final absolute temperature of flask, °K (°R).
Ti = Initial absolute temperature of flask, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528°R).
Vsc = Sample volume at standard conditions (dry basis), ml.
Vf = Volume of flask and valve, ml.
Va = Volume of absorbing solution, 25 ml.
12.2 Spectrophotometer Calibration Factor.
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K1 = 0.3858 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
K1 = 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.4 Total µg NO2 per sample.
Where:
2 = 50/25, the aliquot factor.
12.5 Sample Concentration, Dry Basis, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K2 = 10 3 (mg/m 3)/(µg/ml) for metric units,
K2 = 6.242 × 10−5 (lb/scf)/(µg/ml) for English units.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. The analytical range of the method has been determined to be 2 to 400 milligrams NOX (as NO2) per dry standard cubic meter, without having to dilute the sample.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis. 6th ed. New York, D. Van Nostrand Co., Inc. 1962. Vol. 1, pp. 329-330.
2. Standard Method of Test for Oxides of Nitrogen in Gaseous Combustion Products (Phenoldisulfonic Acid Procedure). In: 1968 Book of ASTM Standards, Part 26. Philadelphia, PA. 1968. ASTM Designation D 1608-60, pp. 725-729.
3. Jacob, M.B. The Chemical Analysis of Air Pollutants. New York. Interscience Publishers, Inc. 1960. Vol. 10, pp. 351-356.
4. Beatty, R.L., L.B. Berger, and H.H. Schrenk. Determination of Oxides of Nitrogen by the Phenoldisulfonic Acid Method. Bureau of Mines, U.S. Dept. of Interior. R.I. 3687. February 1943.
5. Hamil, H.F. and D.E. Camann. Collaborative Study of Method for the Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions from Stationary Sources (Fossil Fuel-Fired Steam Generators). Southwest Research Institute Report for Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. October 5, 1973.
6. Hamil, H.F. and R.E. Thomas. Collaborative Study of Method for the Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions from Stationary Sources (Nitric Acid Plants). Southwest Research Institute Report for Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. May 8, 1974.
7. Stack Sampling Safety Manual (Draft). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standards, Research Triangle Park, NC. September 1978.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 7A—Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Ion Chromatographic Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | 65-655 ppmv |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of NOX emissions from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
A grab sample is collected in an evacuated flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid-hydrogen peroxide absorbing solution. The nitrogen oxides, excluding nitrous oxide (N2O), are oxidized to nitrate and measured by ion chromatography.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Biased results have been observed when sampling under conditions of high sulfur dioxide concentrations. At or above 2100 ppm SO2, use five times the H2O2 concentration of the Method 7 absorbing solution. Laboratory tests have shown that high concentrations of SO2 (about 2100 ppm) cause low results in Method 7 and 7A. Increasing the H2O2 concentration to five times the original concentration eliminates this bias. However, when no SO2 is present, increasing the concentration by five times results in a low bias.
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/m 3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 7, section 6.1.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method 7, section 6.2, except the stirring rod and pH paper are not needed.
6.3 Analysis. For the analysis, the following equipment and supplies are required. Alternative instrumentation and procedures will be allowed provided the calibration precision requirement in section 10.1.2 can be met.
6.3.1 Volumetric Pipets. Class A;1-, 2-, 4-, 5-ml (two for the set of standards and one per sample), 6-, 10-, and graduated 5-ml sizes.
6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml (two per sample and one per standard), 200-ml, and 1-liter sizes.
6.3.3 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
6.3.4 Ion Chromatograph. The ion chromatograph should have at least the following components:
6.3.4.1 Columns. An anion separation or other column capable of resolving the nitrate ion from sulfate and other species present and a standard anion suppressor column (optional). Suppressor columns are produced as proprietary items; however, one can be produced in the laboratory using the resin available from BioRad Company, 32nd and Griffin Streets, Richmond, California. Peak resolution can be optimized by varying the eluent strength or column flow rate, or by experimenting with alternative columns that may offer more efficient separation. When using guard columns with the stronger reagent to protect the separation column, the analyst should allow rest periods between injection intervals to purge possible sulfate buildup in the guard column.
6.3.4.2 Pump. Capable of maintaining a steady flow as required by the system.
6.3.4.3 Flow Gauges. Capable of measuring the specified system flow rate.
6.3.4.4 Conductivity Detector.
6.3.4.5 Recorder. Compatible with the output voltage range of the detector.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7, section 7.1.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 7, section 7.1.1.
7.3 Analysis. The following reagents and standards are required for analysis:
7.3.1 Water. Same as Method 7, section 7.1.1.
7.3.2 Stock Standard Solution, 1 mg NO2/ml. Dry an adequate amount of sodium nitrate (NaNO3) at 105 to 110 °C (221 to 230 °F) for a minimum of 2 hours just before preparing the standard solution. Then dissolve exactly 1.847 g of dried NaNO3 in water, and dilute to l liter in a volumetric flask. Mix well. This solution is stable for 1 month and should not be used beyond this time.
7.3.3 Working Standard Solution, 25 µg/ml. Dilute 5 ml of the standard solution to 200 ml with water in a volumetric flask, and mix well.
7.3.4 Eluent Solution. Weigh 1.018 g of sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 1.008 g of sodium bicarbonate (NaHCO3), and dissolve in 4 liters of water. This solution is 0.0024 M Na2CO3/0.003 M NaHCO3. Other eluents appropriate to the column type and capable of resolving nitrate ion from sulfate and other species present may be used.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling. Same as in Method 7, section 8.1.
8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method 7, section 8.2, except delete the steps on adjusting and checking the pH of the sample. Do not store the samples more than 4 days between collection and analysis.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1 | Ion chromatographn calibration | Ensure linearity of ion chromatograph response to standards. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
10.1 Ion Chromatograph.
10.1.1 Determination of Ion Chromatograph Calibration Factor S. Prepare a series of five standards by adding 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, and 10.0 ml of working standard solution (25 µg/ml) to a series of five 50-ml volumetric flasks. (The standard masses will equal 25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 µg.) Dilute each flask to the mark with water, and mix well. Analyze with the samples as described in section 11.2, and subtract the blank from each value. Prepare or calculate a linear regression plot of the standard masses in µg (x-axis) versus their peak height responses in millimeters (y-axis). (Take peak height measurements with symmetrical peaks; in all other cases, calculate peak areas.) From this curve, or equation, determine the slope, and calculate its reciprocal to denote as the calibration factor, S.
10.1.2 Ion Chromatograph Calibration Quality Control. If any point on the calibration curve deviates from the line by more than 7 percent of the concentration at that point, remake and reanalyze that standard. This deviation can be determined by multiplying S times the peak height response for each standard. The resultant concentrations must not differ by more than 7 percent from each known standard mass (i.e., 25, 50, 100, 150, and 250 µg).
10.2 Conductivity Detector. Calibrate according to manufacturer's specifications prior to initial use.
10.3 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.
10.4 Temperature Gauge. Calibrate dial thermometers against mercury-in-glass thermometers. An alternative mercury-free thermometer may be used if the thermometer is, at a minimum, equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
10.5 Vacuum Gauge. Calibrate mechanical gauges, if used, against a mercury manometer such as that specified in section 6.1.6 of Method 7.
10.6 Analytical Balance. Calibrate against standard weights.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Preparation.
11.1.1 Note on the analytical data sheet, the level of the liquid in the container, and whether any sample was lost during shipment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results. Immediately before analysis, transfer the contents of the shipping container to a 50-ml volumetric flask, and rinse the container twice with 5 ml portions of water. Add the rinse water to the flask, and dilute to the mark with water. Mix thoroughly.
11.1.2 Pipet a 5-ml aliquot of the sample into a 50-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to the mark with water. Mix thoroughly. For each set of determinations, prepare a reagent blank by diluting 5 ml of absorbing solution to 50 ml with water. (Alternatively, eluent solution may be used instead of water in all sample, standard, and blank dilutions.)
11.2 Analysis.
11.2.1 Prepare a standard calibration curve according to section 10.1.1. Analyze the set of standards followed by the set of samples using the same injection volume for both standards and samples. Repeat this analysis sequence followed by a final analysis of the standard set. Average the results. The two sample values must agree within 5 percent of their mean for the analysis to be valid. Perform this duplicate analysis sequence on the same day. Dilute any sample and the blank with equal volumes of water if the concentration exceeds that of the highest standard.
11.2.2 Document each sample chromatogram by listing the following analytical parameters: injection point, injection volume, nitrate and sulfate retention times, flow rate, detector sensitivity setting, and recorder chart speed.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out the calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculations.
12.1 Sample Volume. Calculate the sample volume Vsc (in ml), on a dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, using Equation 7-2 of Method 7.
12.2 Sample Concentration of NOX as NO2.
12.2.1 Calculate the sample concentration C (in mg/dscm) as follows:
Where:
H = Sample peak height, mm.
S = Calibration factor, µg/mm.
F = Dilution factor (required only if sample dilution was needed to reduce the concentration into the range of calibration), dimensionless.
10 4 = 1:10 dilution times conversion factor of: (mg/10 3 µg)(10 6 ml/m 3).
12.2.2 If desired, the concentration of NO2 may be calculated as ppm NO2 at standard conditions as follows:
Where:
0.5228 = ml/mg NO2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. The analytical range of the method is from 125 to 1250 mg NOX/m 3 as NO2 (65 to 655 ppmv), and higher concentrations may be analyzed by diluting the sample. The lower detection limit is approximately 19 mg/m 3 (10 ppmv), but may vary among instruments.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Mulik, J.D., and E. Sawicki. Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 2, 1979.
2. Sawicki, E., J.D. Mulik, and E. Wittgenstein. Ion Chromatographic Analysis of Environmental Pollutants. Ann Arbor, Ann Arbor Science Publishers, Inc. Vol. 1. 1978.
3. Siemer, D.D. Separation of Chloride and Bromide from Complex Matrices Prior to Ion Chromatographic Determination. Anal. Chem. 52(12):1874-1877. October 1980.
4. Small, H., T.S. Stevens, and W.C. Bauman. Novel Ion Exchange Chromatographic Method Using Conductimetric Determination. Anal. Chem. 47(11):1801. 1975.
5. Yu, K.K., and P.R. Westlin. Evaluation of Reference Method 7 Flask Reaction Time. Source Evaluation Society Newsletter. 4(4). November 1979. 10 pp.
6. Stack Sampling Safety Manual (Draft). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Office of Air Quality Planning and Standard, Research Triangle Park, NC. September 1978.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 7B—Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Ultraviolet Spectrophotometric Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | 30-786 ppmv |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of NOX emissions from nitric acid plants.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A grab sample is collected in an evacuated flask containing a dilute sulfuric acid-hydrogen peroxide absorbing solution; the NOX, excluding nitrous oxide (N2O), are measured by ultraviolet spectrophotometry.
3.0 Definition [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/m 3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7, section 6.1.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Wash Bottle. Polyethylene or glass.
6.2.2 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml (one for each sample).
6.3 Analysis. The following items are required for analysis:
6.3.1 Volumetric Pipettes. 5-, 10-, 15-, and 20-ml to make standards and sample dilutions.
6.3.2 Volumetric Flasks. 1000- and 100-ml for preparing standards and dilution of samples.
6.3.3 Spectrophotometer. To measure ultraviolet absorbance at 210 nm.
6.3.4 Analytical Balance. To measure to within 0.1 mg.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7, section 7.1. It is important that the amount of hydrogen peroxide in the absorbing solution not be increased. Higher concentrations of peroxide may interfere with sample analysis.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 7, section 7.2.
7.3 Analysis. Same as Method 7, sections 7.3.1, 7.3.3, and 7.3.4, with the addition of the following:
7.3.1 Working Standard KNO3 Solution. Dilute 10 ml of the standard solution to 1000 ml with water. One milliliter of the working standard is equivalent to 10 µg NO2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 7, section 8.1.
8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.2.1 Let the flask sit for a minimum of 16 hours, and then shake the contents for 2 minutes.
8.2.2 Connect the flask to a mercury filled U-tube manometer. Open the valve from the flask to the manometer, and record the flask temperature (Tf), the barometric pressure, and the difference between the mercury levels in the manometer. The absolute internal pressure in the flask (Pf) is the barometric pressure less the manometer reading.
8.2.3 Transfer the contents of the flask to a leak-free wash bottle. Rinse the flask three times with 10-ml portions of water, and add to the bottle. Mark the height of the liquid level so that the container can be checked for leakage after transport. Label the container to identify clearly its contents. Seal the container for shipping.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 10.1 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensures linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
Same as Method 7, sections 10.2 through 10.5, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Determination of Spectrophotometer Standard Curve. Add 0 ml, 5 ml, 10 ml, 15 ml, and 20 ml of the KNO3 working standard solution (1 ml = 10 µg NO2) to a series of five 100-ml volumetric flasks. To each flask, add 5 ml of absorbing solution. Dilute to the mark with water. The resulting solutions contain 0.0, 50, 100, 150, and 200 µg NO2, respectively. Measure the absorbance by ultraviolet spectrophotometry at 210 nm, using the blank as a zero reference. Prepare a standard curve plotting absorbance vs. µg NO2.
10.1.1 Calculate the spectrophotometer calibration factor as follows:
Where:
Mi = Mass of NO2 in standard i, µg.
Ai = Absorbance of NO2 standard i.
n = Total number of calibration standards.
10.1.2 For the set of calibration standards specified here, Equation 7B-1 simplifies to the following:
10.2 Spectrophotometer Calibration Quality Control. Multiply the absorbance value obtained for each standard by the Kc factor (reciprocal of the least squares slope) to determine the distance each calibration point lies from the theoretical calibration line. The difference between the calculated concentration values and the actual concentrations (i.e., 50, 100, 150, and 200 µg NO2) should be less than 7 percent for all standards.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the level of the liquid in the container, and confirm whether any sample was lost during shipment. Note this on the analytical data sheet. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Immediately prior to analysis, transfer the contents of the shipping container to a 100-ml volumetric flask, and rinse the container twice with 5-ml portions of water. Add the rinse water to the flask, and dilute to mark with water.
11.3 Sample Analysis. Mix the contents of the flask thoroughly and pipette a 20 ml-aliquot of sample into a 100-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to the mark with water. Using the blank as zero reference, read the absorbance of the sample at 210 nm.
11.4 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as Method 7, section 11.4, except that a set of audit samples must be analyzed with each set of compliance samples or once per analysis day, or once per week when averaging continuous samples.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as Method 7, section 12.0, except replace section 12.3 with the following:
12.1 Total µg NO2 Per Sample.
Where:
5 = 100/20, the aliquot factor.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. The analytical range of the method as outlined has been determined to be 57 to 1500 milligrams NOX (as NO2) per dry standard cubic meter, or 30 to 786 parts per million by volume (ppmv) NOX.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Recommendations for Occupational Exposure to Nitric Acid. In: Occupational Safety and Health Reporter. Washington, D.C. Bureau of National Affairs, Inc. 1976. p. 149.
2. Rennie, P.J., A.M. Sumner, and F.B. Basketter. Determination of Nitrate in Raw, Potable, and Waste Waters by Ultraviolet Spectrophotometry. Analyst. 104:837. September 1979.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 7C—Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Alkaline Permanganate/Colorimetric Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS no. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-07 | ppmv |
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of NOX emissions from fossil-fuel fired steam generators, electric utility plants, nitric acid plants, or other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack and passed through impingers containing an alkaline potassium permanganate solution; NOX (NO + NO2) emissions are oxidized to NO2 and NO3. Then NO3−is reduced to NO2−with cadmium, and the NO2−is analyzed colorimetrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Possible interferents are sulfur dioxides (SO2) and ammonia (NH3).
4.1 High concentrations of SO2 could interfere because SO2 consumes MnO4 (as does NOX) and, therefore, could reduce the NOX collection efficiency. However, when sampling emissions from a coal-fired electric utility plant burning 2.1 percent sulfur coal with no control of SO2 emissions, collection efficiency was not reduced. In fact, calculations show that sampling 3000 ppm SO2 will reduce the MnO4 concentration by only 5 percent if all the SO2 is consumed in the first impinger.
4.2 Ammonia (NH3) is slowly oxidized to NO3− by the absorbing solution. At 100 ppm NH3 in the gas stream, an interference of 6 ppm NOX (11 mg NO2/m 3) was observed when the sample was analyzed 10 days after collection. Therefore, the method may not be applicable to plants using NH3 injection to control NOX emissions unless means are taken to correct the results. An equation has been developed to allow quantification of the interference and is discussed in Reference 5 of section 16.0.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly toxic and corrosive. Causes severe damage to skin. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to vapor concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be lethal in minutes. Will react with metals, producing hydrogen.
5.2.2 Oxalic Acid (COOH)2. Poisonous. Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and throat.
5.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with small amounts of water.
5.2.4 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily contact with.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recovery. A schematic of the Method 7C sampling train is shown in Figure 7C-1, and component parts are discussed below. Alternative apparatus and procedures are allowed provided acceptable accuracy and precision can be demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Administrator.
6.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass tubing, sufficiently heated to prevent water condensation and equipped with an in-stack or heated out-of-stack filter to remove particulate matter (a plug of glass wool is satisfactory for this purpose). Stainless steel or Teflon tubing may also be used for the probe.
6.1.2 Impingers. Three restricted-orifice glass impingers, having the specifications given in Figure 7C-2, are required for each sampling train. The impingers must be connected in series with leak-free glass connectors. Stopcock grease may be used, if necessary, to prevent leakage. (The impingers can be fabricated by a glass blower if not available commercially.)
6.1.3 Glass Wool, Stopcock Grease, Drying Tube, Valve, Pump, Barometer, and Vacuum Gauge and Rotameter. Same as in Method 6, sections 6.1.1.3, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively.
6.1.4 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, accurate to within 2 percent at the selected flow rate of between 400 and 500 ml/min (0.014 to 0.018 cfm). For rotameters, a range of 0 to 1 liter/min (0 to 0.035 cfm) is recommended.
6.1.5 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter (DGM) capable of measuring the sample volume under the sampling conditions of 400 to 500 ml/min (0.014 to 0.018 cfm) for 60 minutes within an accuracy of 2 percent.
6.1.6 Filter. To remove NOX from ambient air, prepared by adding 20 g of 5-angstrom molecular sieve to a cylindrical tube (e.g., a polyethylene drying tube).
6.1.7 Polyethylene Bottles. 1-liter, for sample recovery.
6.1.8 Funnel and Stirring Rods. For sample recovery.
6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
6.2.1 Hot Plate. Stirring type with 50- by 10-mm Teflon-coated stirring bars.
6.2.2 Beakers. 400-, 600-, and 1000-ml capacities.
6.2.3 Filtering Flask. 500-ml capacity with side arm.
6.2.4 Buchner Funnel. 75-mm ID, with spout equipped with a 13-mm ID by 90-mm long piece of Teflon tubing to minimize possibility of aspirating sample solution during filtration.
6.2.5 Filter Paper. Whatman GF/C, 7.0-cm diameter.
6.2.6 Stirring Rods.
6.2.7 Volumetric Flasks. 100-, 200- or 250-, 500-, and 1000-ml capacity.
6.2.8 Watch Glasses. To cover 600- and 1000-ml beakers.
6.2.9 Graduated Cylinders. 50- and 250-ml capacities.
6.2.10 Pipettes. Class A.
6.2.11 pH Meter. To measure pH from 0.5 to 12.0.
6.2.12 Burette. 50-ml with a micrometer type stopcock. (The stopcock is Catalog No. 8225-t-05, Ace Glass, Inc., Post Office Box 996, Louisville, Kentucky 50201.) Place a glass wool plug in bottom of burette. Cut off burette at a height of 43 cm (17 in.) from the top of plug, and have a blower attach a glass funnel to top of burette such that the diameter of the burette remains essentially unchanged. Other means of attaching the funnel are acceptable.
6.2.13 Glass Funnel. 75-mm ID at the top.
6.2.14 Spectrophotometer. Capable of measuring absorbance at 540 nm; 1-cm cells are adequate.
6.2.15 Metal Thermometers. Bimetallic thermometers, range 0 to 150 °C (32 to 300 °F).
6.2.16 Culture Tubes. 20-by 150-mm, Kimax No. 45048.
6.2.17 Parafilm “M.” Obtained from American Can Company, Greenwich, Connecticut 06830.
6.2.18 CO2 Measurement Equipment. Same as in Method 3, section 6.0.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, it is intended that all reagents conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection.
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.1.2 Potassium Permanganate, 4.0 Percent (w/w), Sodium Hydroxide, 2.0 Percent (w/w) solution (KMnO4/NaOH solution). Dissolve 40.0 g of KMnO4 and 20.0 g of NaOH in 940 ml of water.
7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.1.
7.2.2 Oxalic Acid Solution. Dissolve 48 g of oxalic acid [(COOH)2·2H2O] in water, and dilute to 500 ml. Do not heat the solution.
7.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide, 0.5 N. Dissolve 20 g of NaOH in water, and dilute to 1 liter.
7.2.4 Sodium Hydroxide, 10 N. Dissolve 40 g of NaOH in water, and dilute to 100 ml.
7.2.5 Ethylenediamine Tetraacetic Acid (EDTA) Solution, 6.5 percent (w/v). Dissolve 6.5 g of EDTA (disodium salt) in water, and dilute to 100 ml. Dissolution is best accomplished by using a magnetic stirrer.
7.2.6 Column Rinse Solution. Add 20 ml of 6.5 percent EDTA solution to 960 ml of water, and adjust the pH to between 11.7 and 12.0 with 0.5 N NaOH.
7.2.7 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), 2 N. Add 86 ml of concentrated HCl to a 500 ml-volumetric flask containing water, dilute to volume, and mix well. Store in a glass-stoppered bottle.
7.2.8 Sulfanilamide Solution. Add 20 g of sulfanilamide (melting point 165 to 167 °C (329 to 333 °F)) to 700 ml of water. Add, with mixing, 50 ml concentrated phosphoric acid (85 percent), and dilute to 1000 ml. This solution is stable for at least 1 month, if refrigerated.
7.2.9 N-(1-Naphthyl)-Ethylenediamine Dihydrochloride (NEDA) Solution. Dissolve 0.5 g of NEDA in 500 ml of water. An aqueous solution should have one absorption peak at 320 nm over the range of 260 to 400 nm. NEDA that shows more than one absorption peak over this range is impure and should not be used. This solution is stable for at least 1 month if protected from light and refrigerated.
7.2.10 Cadmium. Obtained from Matheson Coleman and Bell, 2909 Highland Avenue, Norwood, Ohio 45212, as EM Laboratories Catalog No. 2001. Prepare by rinsing in 2 N HCl for 5 minutes until the color is silver-grey. Then rinse the cadmium with water until the rinsings are neutral when tested with pH paper. CAUTION: H2 is liberated during preparation. Prepare in an exhaust hood away from any flame or combustion source.
7.2.11 Sodium Nitrite (NaNO2) Standard Solution, Nominal Concentration, 1000 µg NO2−/ml. Desiccate NaNO2 overnight. Accurately weigh 1.4 to 1.6 g of NaNO2 (assay of 97 percent NaNO2 or greater), dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact NO2-concentration using Equation 7C-1 in section 12.2. This solution is stable for at least 6 months under laboratory conditions.
7.2.12 Potassium Nitrate (KNO3) Standard Solution. Dry KNO3 at 110 °C (230 °F) for 2 hours, and cool in a desiccator. Accurately weigh 9 to 10 g of KNO3 to within 0.1 mg, dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact NO3− concentration using Equation 7C-2 in section 12.3. This solution is stable for 2 months without preservative under laboratory conditions.
7.2.13 Spiking Solution. Pipette 7 ml of the KNO3 standard into a 100-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to volume.
7.2.14 Blank Solution. Dissolve 2.4 g of KMnO4 and 1.2 g of NaOH in 96 ml of water. Alternatively, dilute 60 ml of KMnO4/NaOH solution to 100 ml.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. Add 200 ml of KMnO4/NaOH solution (Section 7.1.2) to each of three impingers, and assemble the train as shown in Figure 7C-1. Adjust the probe heater to a temperature sufficient to prevent water condensation.
8.2 Leak-Checks. Same as in Method 6, section 8.2.
8.3 Sample Collection.
8.3.1 Record the initial DGM reading and barometric pressure. Determine the sampling point or points according to the appropriate regulations (e.g., § 60.46(b)(5) of 40 CFR Part 60). Position the tip of the probe at the sampling point, connect the probe to the first impinger, and start the pump. Adjust the sample flow to a value between 400 and 500 ml/min (0.014 and 0.018 cfm). CAUTION: DO NOT EXCEED THESE FLOW RATES. Once adjusted, maintain a constant flow rate during the entire sampling run. Sample for 60 minutes. For relative accuracy (RA) testing of continuous emission monitors, the minimum sampling time is 1 hour, sampling 20 minutes at each traverse point.
8.3.2 Record the DGM temperature, and check the flow rate at least every 5 minutes. At the conclusion of each run, turn off the pump, remove the probe from the stack, and record the final readings. Divide the sample volume by the sampling time to determine the average flow rate. Conduct the mandatory post-test leak-check. If a leak is found, void the test run, or use procedures acceptable to the Administrator to adjust the sample volume for the leakage.
8.4 CO2 Measurement. During sampling, measure the CO2 content of the stack gas near the sampling point using Method 3. The single-point grab sampling procedure is adequate, provided the measurements are made at least three times (near the start, midway, and before the end of a run), and the average CO2 concentration is computed. The Orsat or Fyrite analyzer may be used for this analysis.
8.5 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the impingers. Pour the contents of the impingers into a 1-liter polyethylene bottle using a funnel and a stirring rod (or other means) to prevent spillage. Complete the quantitative transfer by rinsing the impingers and connecting tubes with water until the rinsings are clear to light pink, and add the rinsings to the bottle. Mix the sample, and mark the solution level. Seal and identify the sample container.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2, 10.1-10.3 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume. |
| 10.4 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards |
| 11.3 | Spiked sample analysis. | Ensure reduction efficiency of column. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
10.1 Volume Metering System. Same as Method 6, section 10.1. For detailed instructions on carrying out these calibrations, it is suggested that section 3.5.2 of Reference 4 of section 16.0 be consulted.
10.2 Temperature Sensors and Barometer. Same as in Method 6, sections 10.2 and 10.4, respectively.
10.3 Check of Rate Meter Calibration Accuracy (Optional). Disconnect the probe from the first impinger, and connect the filter. Start the pump, and adjust the rate meter to read between 400 and 500 ml/min (0.014 and 0.018 cfm). After the flow rate has stabilized, start measuring the volume sampled, as recorded by the dry gas meter and the sampling time. Collect enough volume to measure accurately the flow rate. Then calculate the flow rate. This average flow rate must be less than 500 ml/min (0.018 cfm) for the sample to be valid; therefore, it is recommended that the flow rate be checked as above prior to each test.
10.4 Spectrophotometer.
10.4.1 Dilute 5.0 ml of the NaNO2 standard solution to 200 ml with water. This solution nominally contains 25 µg NO2−/ml. Use this solution to prepare calibration standards to cover the range of 0.25 to 3.00 µg NO2−/ml. Prepare a minimum of three standards each for the linear and slightly nonlinear (described below) range of the curve. Use pipettes for all additions.
10.4.2 Measure the absorbance of the standards and a water blank as instructed in section 11.5. Plot the net absorbance vs. µg NO2−/ml. Draw a smooth curve through the points. The curve should be linear up to an absorbance of approximately 1.2 with a slope of approximately 0.53 absorbance units/µg NO2−/ml. The curve should pass through the origin. The curve is slightly nonlinear from an absorbance of 1.2 to 1.6.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Stability. Collected samples are stable for at least four weeks; thus, analysis must occur within 4 weeks of collection.
11.2 Sample Preparation.
11.2.1 Prepare a cadmium reduction column as follows: Fill the burette with water. Add freshly prepared cadmium slowly, with tapping, until no further settling occurs. The height of the cadmium column should be 39 cm (15 in). When not in use, store the column under rinse solution.
11.2.2 Note the level of liquid in the sample container, and determine whether any sample was lost during shipment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, the volume lost can be determined from the difference between initial and final solution levels, and this value can then be used to correct the analytical result. Quantitatively transfer the contents to a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume.
11.2.3 Take a 100-ml aliquot of the sample and blank (unexposed KMnO4/NaOH) solutions, and transfer to 400-ml beakers containing magnetic stirring bars. Using a pH meter, add concentrated H2SO4 with stirring until a pH of 0.7 is obtained. Allow the solutions to stand for 15 minutes. Cover the beakers with watch glasses, and bring the temperature of the solutions to 50 °C (122 °F). Keep the temperature below 60 °C (140 °F). Dissolve 4.8 g of oxalic acid in a minimum volume of water, approximately 50 ml, at room temperature. Do not heat the solution. Add this solution slowly, in increments, until the KMnO4 solution becomes colorless. If the color is not completely removed, prepare some more of the above oxalic acid solution, and add until a colorless solution is obtained. Add an excess of oxalic acid by dissolving 1.6 g of oxalic acid in 50 ml of water, and add 6 ml of this solution to the colorless solution. If suspended matter is present, add concentrated H2SO4 until a clear solution is obtained.
11.2.4 Allow the samples to cool to near room temperature, being sure that the samples are still clear. Adjust the pH to between 11.7 and 12.0 with 10 N NaOH. Quantitatively transfer the mixture to a Buchner funnel containing GF/C filter paper, and filter the precipitate. Filter the mixture into a 500-ml filtering flask. Wash the solid material four times with water. When filtration is complete, wash the Teflon tubing, quantitatively transfer the filtrate to a 500-ml volumetric flask, and dilute to volume. The samples are now ready for cadmium reduction. Pipette a 50-ml aliquot of the sample into a 150-ml beaker, and add a magnetic stirring bar. Pipette in 1.0 ml of 6.5 percent EDTA solution, and mix.
11.3 Determine the correct stopcock setting to establish a flow rate of 7 to 9 ml/min of column rinse solution through the cadmium reduction column. Use a 50-ml graduated cylinder to collect and measure the solution volume. After the last of the rinse solution has passed from the funnel into the burette, but before air entrapment can occur, start adding the sample, and collect it in a 250-ml graduated cylinder. Complete the quantitative transfer of the sample to the column as the sample passes through the column. After the last of the sample has passed from the funnel into the burette, start adding 60 ml of column rinse solution, and collect the rinse solution until the solution just disappears from the funnel. Quantitatively transfer the sample to a 200-ml volumetric flask (a 250-ml flask may be required), and dilute to volume. The samples are now ready for NO2-analysis.
11.5 Sample Analysis. Pipette 10 ml of sample into a culture tube. Pipette in 10 ml of sulfanilamide solution and 1.4 ml of NEDA solution. Cover the culture tube with parafilm, and mix the solution. Prepare a blank in the same manner using the sample from treatment of the unexposed KMnO4/NaOH solution. Also, prepare a calibration standard to check the slope of the calibration curve. After a 10-minute color development interval, measure the absorbance at 540 nm against water. Read µg NO2−/ml from the calibration curve. If the absorbance is greater than that of the highest calibration standard, use less than 10 ml of sample, and repeat the analysis. Determine the NO2−concentration using the calibration curve obtained in section 10.4.
11.6 Audit Sample Analysis. Same as in Method 7, section 11.4.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
B = Analysis of blank, µg NO2−/ml.
C = Concentration of NOX as NO2, dry basis, mg/dsm 3.
E = Column efficiency, dimensionless
K2 = 10−3 mg/µg.
m = Mass of NOX, as NO2, in sample, µg.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
s = Concentration of spiking solution, µg NO3/ml.
S = Analysis of sample, µg NO2−/ml.
Tm = Average dry gas meter absolute temperature, °K.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vm = Dry gas volume as measured by the dry gas meter, scm (scf).
x = Analysis of spiked sample, µg NO2−/ml.
X = Correction factor for CO2 collection = 100/(100 − %CO2(V/V)).
y = Analysis of unspiked sample, µg NO2−/ml.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
1.0 ppm NO = 1.247 mg NO/m 3 at STP.
1.0 ppm NO2 = 1.912 mg NO2/m 3 at STP.
1 ft 3 = 2.832 × 10−2 m 3.
12.2 NO2 Concentration. Calculate the NO2 concentration of the solution (see section 7.2.11) using the following equation:
12.3 NO3 Concentration. Calculate the NO3 concentration of the KNO3 solution (see section 7.2.12) using the following equation:
12.4 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K1 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units.
K1 = 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.5 Efficiency of Cadmium Reduction Column. Calculate this value as follows:
Where:
200 = Final volume of sample and blank after passing through the column, ml.
1.0 = Volume of spiking solution added, ml.
46.01=µg NO2−/µmole.
62.01=µg NO3−/µmole.
12.6 Total µg NO2.
Where:
500 = Total volume of prepared sample, ml.
50 = Aliquot of prepared sample processed through cadmium column, ml.
100 = Aliquot of KMnO4/NaOH solution, ml.
1000 = Total volume of KMnO4/NaOH solution, ml.
12.7 Sample Concentration.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory relative standard deviation for a single measurement is 2.8 and 2.9 percent at 201 and 268 ppm NOX, respectively.
13.2 Bias. The method does not exhibit any bias relative to Method 7.
13.3 Range. The lower detectable limit is 13 mg NOX/m 3, as NO2 (7 ppm NOX) when sampling at 500 ml/min for 1 hour. No upper limit has been established; however, when using the recommended sampling conditions, the method has been found to collect NOX emissions quantitatively up to 1782 mg NOX/m 3, as NO2 (932 ppm NOX).
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Margeson, J.H., W.J. Mitchell, J.C. Suggs, and M.R. Midgett. Integrated Sampling and Analysis Methods for Determining NOX Emissions at Electric Utility Plants. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association. 32:1210-1215. 1982.
2. Memorandum and attachment from J.H. Margeson, Source Branch, Quality Assurance Division, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, to The Record, EPA. March 30, 1983. NH3 Interference in Methods 7C and 7D.
3. Margeson, J.H., J.C. Suggs, and M.R. Midgett. Reduction of Nitrate to Nitrite with Cadmium. Anal. Chem. 52:1955-57. 1980.
4. Quality Assurance Handbook for Air Pollution Measurement Systems. Volume III—Stationary Source Specific Methods. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, NC. Publication No. EPA-600/4-77-027b. August 1977.
5. Margeson, J.H., et al. An Integrated Method for Determining NOX Emissions at Nitric Acid Plants. Analytical Chemistry. 47 (11):1801. 1975.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 7D—Determination of Nitrogen Oxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Alkaline-Permanganate/Ion Chromatographic Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitrogen oxides (NOX), as NO2, including: | ||
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | 7 ppmv |
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of NOX emissions from fossil-fuel fired steam generators, electric utility plants, nitric acid plants, or other sources as specified in the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack and passed through impingers containing an alkaline-potassium permanganate solution; NOX (NO + NO2) emissions are oxidized to NO3−. Then NO3− is analyzed by ion chromatography.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Same as in Method 7C, section 4.0.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a strong oxidizing agent; avoid contact with skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear gloves when handling.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Potassium Permanganate (KMnO4). Caustic, strong oxidizer. Avoid bodily contact with.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recovery. Same as Method 7C, section 6.1. A schematic of the sampling train used in performing this method is shown in Figure 7C-1 of Method 7C.
6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
6.2.1 Magnetic Stirrer. With 25- by 10-mm Teflon-coated stirring bars.
6.2.2 Filtering Flask. 500-ml capacity with sidearm.
6.2.3 Buchner Funnel. 75-mm ID, with spout equipped with a 13-mm ID by 90-mm long piece of Teflon tubing to minimize possibility of aspirating sample solution during filtration.
6.2.4 Filter Paper. Whatman GF/C, 7.0-cm diameter.
6.2.5 Stirring Rods.
6.2.6 Volumetric Flask. 250-ml.
6.2.7 Pipettes. Class A.
6.2.8 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 250-ml.
6.2.9 Ion Chromatograph. Equipped with an anion separator column to separate NO3−, H3 + suppressor, and necessary auxiliary equipment. Nonsuppressed and other forms of ion chromatography may also be used provided that adequate resolution of NO3− is obtained. The system must also be able to resolve and detect NO2−.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection.
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM specification D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17).
7.1.2 Potassium Permanganate, 4.0 Percent (w/w), Sodium Hydroxide, 2.0 Percent (w/w). Dissolve 40.0 g of KMnO4 and 20.0 g of NaOH in 940 ml of water.
7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis.
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.1.
7.2.2 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 5 Percent. Dilute 30 percent H2O2 1:5 (v/v) with water.
7.2.3 Blank Solution. Dissolve 2.4 g of KMnO4 and 1.2 g of NaOH in 96 ml of water. Alternatively, dilute 60 ml of KMnO4/NaOH solution to 100 ml.
7.2.4 KNO3 Standard Solution. Dry KNO3 at 110 °C for 2 hours, and cool in a desiccator. Accurately weigh 9 to 10 g of KNO3 to within 0.1 mg, dissolve in water, and dilute to 1 liter. Calculate the exact NO3− concentration using Equation 7D-1 in section 12.2. This solution is stable for 2 months without preservative under laboratory conditions.
7.2.5 Eluent, 0.003 M NaHCO3/0.0024 M Na2CO3. Dissolve 1.008 g NaHCO3 and 1.018 g Na2CO3 in water, and dilute to 4 liters. Other eluents capable of resolving nitrate ion from sulfate and other species present may be used.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage.
8.1 Sampling. Same as in Method 7C, section 8.1.
8.2 Sample Recovery. Same as in Method 7C, section 8.2.
8.3 Sample Preparation for Analysis.
8.3.1 Note the level of liquid in the sample container, and determine whether any sample was lost during shipment. If a noticeable amount of leakage has occurred, the volume lost can be determined from the difference between initial and final solution levels, and this value can then be used to correct the analytical result. Quantitatively transfer the contents to a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume.
8.3.2 Sample preparation can be started 36 hours after collection. This time is necessary to ensure that all NO2− is converted to NO3− in the collection solution. Take a 50-ml aliquot of the sample and blank, and transfer to 250-ml Erlenmeyer flasks. Add a magnetic stirring bar. Adjust the stirring rate to as fast a rate as possible without loss of solution. Add 5 percent H2O2 in increments of approximately 5 ml using a 5-ml pipette. When the KMnO4 color appears to have been removed, allow the precipitate to settle, and examine the supernatant liquid. If the liquid is clear, the H2O2 addition is complete. If the KMnO4 color persists, add more H2O2, with stirring, until the supernatant liquid is clear.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2, 10.1-10.3 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume. |
| 10.4 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards. |
| 11.3 | Spiked sample analysis | Ensure reduction efficiency of column. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
10.1 Dry Gas Meter (DGM) System.
10.1.1 Initial Calibration. Same as in Method 6, section 10.1.1. For detailed instructions on carrying out this calibration, it is suggested that section 3.5.2 of Citation 4 in section 16.0 of Method 7C be consulted.
10.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. Same as in Method 6, section 10.1.2.
10.2 Thermometers for DGM and Barometer. Same as in Method 6, sections 10.2 and 10.4, respectively.
10.3 Ion Chromatograph.
10.3.1 Dilute a given volume (1.0 ml or greater) of the KNO3 standard solution to a convenient volume with water, and use this solution to prepare calibration standards. Prepare at least four standards to cover the range of the samples being analyzed. Use pipettes for all additions. Run standards as instructed in section 11.2. Determine peak height or area, and plot the individual values versus concentration in µg NO3−/ml.
10.3.2 Do not force the curve through zero. Draw a smooth curve through the points. The curve should be linear. With the linear curve, use linear regression to determine the calibration equation.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 The following chromatographic conditions are recommended: 0.003 M NaHCO3/0.0024 Na2CO3 eluent solution (Section 7.2.5), full scale range, 3 µMHO; sample loop, 0.5 ml; flow rate, 2.5 ml/min. These conditions should give a NO3− retention time of approximately 15 minutes (Figure 7D-1).
11.2 Establish a stable baseline. Inject a sample of water, and determine whether any NO3− appears in the chromatogram. If NO3− is present, repeat the water load/injection procedure approximately five times; then re-inject a water sample and observe the chromatogram. When no NO3− is present, the instrument is ready for use. Inject calibration standards. Then inject samples and a blank. Repeat the injection of the calibration standards (to compensate for any drift in response of the instrument). Measure the NO3− peak height or peak area, and determine the sample concentration from the calibration curve.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as in Method 7C, section 12.1.
12.2 NO3− concentration. Calculate the NO3− concentration in the KNO3 standard solution (see section 7.2.4) using the following equation:
12.3 Sample Volume, Dry Basis, Corrected to Standard Conditions. Same as in Method 7C, section 12.4.
12.4 Total µg NO2 Per Sample.
Where:
250 = Volume of prepared sample, ml.
1000 = Total volume of KMnO4 solution, ml.
50 = Aliquot of KMnO4/NaOH solution, ml.
46.01 = Molecular weight of NO3−.
62.01 = Molecular weight of NO3−.
12.5 Sample Concentration. Same as in Method 7C, section 12.7.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory relative standard deviation for a single measurement is approximately 6 percent at 200 to 270 ppm NOX.
13.2 Bias. The method does not exhibit any bias relative to Method 7.
13.3 Range. The lower detectable limit is similar to that of Method 7C. No upper limit has been established; however, when using the recommended sampling conditions, the method has been found to collect NOX emissions quantitatively up to 1782 mg NOX/m 3, as NO2 (932 ppm NOX).
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as Method 7C, section 16.0, References 1, 2, 4, and 5.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 7E?
Method 7E is a procedure for measuring nitrogen oxides (NOX) in stationary source emissions using a continuous instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known quality. You must document your adherence to these specific requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis. This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional test methods which are found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method measures the concentration of nitrogen oxides as NO2.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Nitric oxide (NO) | 10102-43-9 | Typically <2% of |
| Nitrogen dioxide (NO2) | 10102-44-0 | Calibration Span. |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? The use of Method 7E may be required by specific New Source Performance Standards, Clean Air Marketing rules, State Implementation Plans, and permits where measurement of NOX concentrations in stationary source emissions is required, either to determine compliance with an applicable emissions standard or to conduct performance testing of a continuous monitoring system (CEMS). Other regulations may also require the use of Method 7E.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives (DQO). How good must my collected data be? Method 7E is designed to provide high-quality data for determining compliance with Federal and State emission standards and for relative accuracy testing of CEMS. In these and other applications, the principal objective is to ensure the accuracy of the data at the actual emission levels encountered. To meet this objective, the use of EPA traceability protocol calibration gases and measurement system performance tests are required.
1.4 Data Quality Assessment for Low Emitters. Is performance relief granted when testing low-emission units? Yes. For low-emitting sources, there are alternative performance specifications for analyzer calibration error, system bias, drift, and response time. Also, the alternative dynamic spiking procedure in section 16 may provide performance relief for certain low-emitting units.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, a sample of the effluent gas is continuously sampled and conveyed to the analyzer for measuring the concentration of NOX. You may measure NO and NO2 separately or simultaneously together but, for the purposes of this method, NOX is the sum of NO and NO2. You must meet the performance requirements of this method to validate your data.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Analyzer Calibration Error, for non-dilution systems, means the difference between the manufacturer certified concentration of a calibration gas and the measured concentration of the same gas when it is introduced into the analyzer in direct calibration mode.
3.2 Calibration Curve means the relationship between an analyzer's response to the injection of a series of calibration gases and the actual concentrations of those gases.
3.3 Calibration Gas means the gas mixture containing NOX at a known concentration and produced and certified in accordance with “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards,” September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999, EPA-600/R-97/121 or more recent updates. The tests for analyzer calibration error, drift, and system bias require the use of calibration gas prepared according to this protocol. If a zero gas is used for the low-level gas, it must meet the requirements under the definition for “zero air material” in 40 CFR 72.2 in place of being prepared by the traceability protocol.
3.3.1 Low-Level Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is less than 20 percent of the calibration span and may be a zero gas.
3.3.2 Mid-Level Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is 40 to 60 percent of the calibration span.
3.3.3 High-Level Gas means a calibration gas with a concentration that is equal to the calibration span.
3.4 Calibration Span means the upper limit of the analyzer's calibration that is set by the choice of high-level calibration gas. No valid run average concentration may exceed the calibration span. To the extent practicable, the measured emissions should be between 20 to 100 percent of the selected calibration span. This may not be practicable in some cases of low-concentration measurements or testing for compliance with an emission limit when emissions are substantially less than the limit. In such cases, calibration spans that are practicable to achieving the data quality objectives without being excessively high should be chosen.
3.5 Centroidal Area means the central area of the stack or duct that is no greater than 1 percent of the stack or duct cross section. This area has the same geometric shape as the stack or duct.
3.6 Converter Efficiency Gas means a calibration gas with a known NO or NO2 concentration and of Traceability Protocol quality.
3.7 Data Recorder means the equipment that permanently records the concentrations reported by the analyzer.
3.8 Direct Calibration Mode means introducing the calibration gases directly into the analyzer (or into the assembled measurement system at a point downstream of all sample conditioning equipment) according to manufacturer's recommended calibration procedure. This mode of calibration applies to non-dilution-type measurement systems.
3.9 Drift means the difference between the pre- and post-run system bias (or system calibration error) checks at a specific calibration gas concentration level (i.e. low-, mid- or high-).
3.10 Gas Analyzer means the equipment that senses the gas being measured and generates an output proportional to its concentration.
3.11 Interference Check means the test to detect analyzer responses to compounds other than the compound of interest, usually a gas present in the measured gas stream, that is not adequately accounted for in the calibration procedure and may cause measurement bias.
3.12 Low-Concentration Analyzer means any analyzer that operates with a calibration span of 20 ppm NOX or lower. Each analyzer model used routinely to measure low NOX concentrations must pass a manufacturer's stability test (MST). An MST subjects the analyzer to a range of line voltages and temperatures that reflect potential field conditions to demonstrate its stability following procedures similar to those provided in 40 CFR 53.23. Ambient-level analyzers are exempt from the MST requirements of section 16.3. A copy of this information must be included in each test report. Table 7E-5 lists the criteria to be met.
3.13 Measurement System means all of the equipment used to determine the NOX concentration. The measurement system comprises six major subsystems: Sample acquisition, sample transport, sample conditioning, calibration gas manifold, gas analyzer, and data recorder.
3.14 Response Time means the time it takes the measurement system to respond to a change in gas concentration occurring at the sampling point when the system is operating normally at its target sample flow rate or dilution ratio.
3.15 Run means a series of gas samples taken successively from the stack or duct. A test normally consists of a specific number of runs.
3.16 System Bias means the difference between a calibration gas measured in direct calibration mode and in system calibration mode. System bias is determined before and after each run at the low- and mid- or high-concentration levels. For dilution-type systems, pre- and post-run system calibration error is measured rather than system bias.
3.17 System Calibration Error applies to dilution-type systems and means the difference between the measured concentration of low-, mid-, or high-level calibration gas and the certified concentration for each gas when introduced in system calibration mode. For dilution-type systems, a 3-point system calibration error test is conducted in lieu of the analyzer calibration error test, and 2-point system calibration error tests are conducted in lieu of system bias tests.
3.18 System Calibration Mode means introducing the calibration gases into the measurement system at the probe, upstream of the filter and all sample conditioning components.
3.19 Test refers to the series of runs required by the applicable regulation.
4.0 Interferences
Note that interferences may vary among instruments and that instrument-specific interferences must be evaluated through the interference test.
5.0 Safety
What safety measures should I consider when using this method? This method may require you to work with hazardous materials and in hazardous conditions. We encourage you to establish safety procedures before using the method. Among other precautions, you should become familiar with the safety recommendations in the gas analyzer user's manual. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) regulations concerning cylinder and noxious gases may apply. Nitric oxide and NO2 are toxic and dangerous gases. Nitric oxide is immediately converted to NO2 upon reaction with air. Nitrogen dioxide is a highly poisonous and insidious gas. Inflammation of the lungs from exposure may cause only slight pain or pass unnoticed, but the resulting edema several days later may cause death. A concentration of 100 ppm is dangerous for even a short exposure, and 200 ppm may be fatal. Calibration gases must be handled with utmost care and with adequate ventilation. Emission-level exposure to these gases should be avoided.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
The performance criteria in this method will be met or exceeded if you are properly using equipment designed for this application.
6.1 What do I need for the measurement system? You may use any equipment and supplies meeting the following specifications:
(1) Sampling system components that are not evaluated in the system bias or system calibration error test must be glass, Teflon, or stainless steel. Other materials are potentially acceptable, subject to approval by the Administrator.
(2) The interference, calibration error, and system bias criteria must be met.
(3) Sample flow rate must be maintained within 10 percent of the flow rate at which the system response time was measured.
(4) All system components (excluding sample conditioning components, if used) must maintain the sample temperature above the moisture dew point. Ensure minimal contact between any condensate and the sample gas. Section 6.2 provides example equipment specifications for a NOX measurement system. Figure 7E-1 is a diagram of an example dry-basis measurement system that is likely to meet the method requirements and is provided as guidance. For wet-basis systems, you may use alternative equipment and supplies as needed (some of which are described in Section 6.2), provided that the measurement system meets the applicable performance specifications of this method.
6.2 Measurement System Components
6.2.1 Sample Probe. Glass, stainless steel, or other approved material, of sufficient length to traverse the sample points.
6.2.2 Particulate Filter. An in-stack or out-of-stack filter. The filter must be made of material that is non-reactive to the gas being sampled. The filter media for out-of-stack filters must be included in the system bias test. The particulate filter requirement may be waived in applications where no significant particulate matter is expected (e.g., for emission testing of a combustion turbine firing natural gas).
6.2.3 Sample Line. The sample line from the probe to the conditioning system/sample pump should be made of Teflon or other material that does not absorb or otherwise alter the sample gas. For a dry-basis measurement system (as shown in Figure 7E-1), the temperature of the sample line must be maintained at a sufficiently high level to prevent condensation before the sample conditioning components. For wet-basis measurement systems, the temperature of the sample line must be maintained at a sufficiently high level to prevent condensation before the analyzer.
6.2.4 Conditioning Equipment. For dry basis measurements, a condenser, dryer or other suitable device is required to remove moisture continuously from the sample gas. Any equipment needed to heat the probe or sample line to avoid condensation prior to the sample conditioning component is also required.
For wet basis systems, you must keep the sample above its dew point either by: (1) Heating the sample line and all sample transport components up to the inlet of the analyzer (and, for hot-wet extractive systems, also heating the analyzer) or (2) by diluting the sample prior to analysis using a dilution probe system. The components required to do either of the above are considered to be conditioning equipment.
6.2.5 Sampling Pump. For systems similar to the one shown in Figure 7E-1, a leak-free pump is needed to pull the sample gas through the system at a flow rate sufficient to minimize the response time of the measurement system. The pump may be constructed of any material that is non-reactive to the gas being sampled. For dilution-type measurement systems, an ejector pump (eductor) is used to create a vacuum that draws the sample through a critical orifice at a constant rate.
6.2.6 Calibration Gas Manifold. Prepare a system to allow the introduction of calibration gases either directly to the gas analyzer in direct calibration mode or into the measurement system, at the probe, in system calibration mode, or both, depending upon the type of system used. In system calibration mode, the system should be able to flood the sampling probe and vent excess gas. Alternatively, calibration gases may be introduced at the calibration valve following the probe. Maintain a constant pressure in the gas manifold. For in-stack dilution-type systems, a gas dilution subsystem is required to transport large volumes of purified air to the sample probe and a probe controller is needed to maintain the proper dilution ratio.
6.2.7 Sample Gas Manifold. For the type of system shown in Figure 7E-1, the sample gas manifold diverts a portion of the sample to the analyzer, delivering the remainder to the by-pass discharge vent. The manifold should also be able to introduce calibration gases directly to the analyzer (except for dilution-type systems). The manifold must be made of material that is non-reactive to the gas sampled or the calibration gas and be configured to safely discharge the bypass gas.
6.2.8 NOX Analyzer. An instrument that continuously measures NOX in the gas stream and meets the applicable specifications in section 13.0. An analyzer that operates on the principle of chemiluminescence with an NO2 to NO converter is one example of an analyzer that has been used successfully in the past. Analyzers operating on other principles may also be used provided the performance criteria in section 13.0 are met.
6.2.8.1 Dual Range Analyzers. For certain applications, a wide range of gas concentrations may be encountered, necessitating the use of two measurement ranges. Dual-range analyzers are readily available for these applications. These analyzers are often equipped with automated range-switching capability, so that when readings exceed the full-scale of the low measurement range, they are recorded on the high range. As an alternative to using a dual-range analyzer, you may use two segments of a single, large measurement scale to serve as the low and high ranges. In all cases, when two ranges are used, you must quality-assure both ranges using the proper sets of calibration gases. You must also meet the interference, calibration error, system bias, and drift checks. However, we caution that when you use two segments of a large measurement scale for dual range purposes, it may be difficult to meet the performance specifications on the low range due to signal-to-noise ratio considerations.
6.2.8.2 Low Concentration Analyzer. When an analyzer is routinely calibrated with a calibration span of 20 ppmv or less, the manufacturer's stability test (MST) is required. See Table 7E-5 for test parameters.
6.2.9 Data Recording. A strip chart recorder, computerized data acquisition system, digital recorder, or data logger for recording measurement data may be used.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases do I need? Your calibration gas must be NO in N2 and certified (or recertified) within an uncertainty of 2.0 percent in accordance with “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards” September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999, EPA-600/R-97/121. Blended gases meeting the Traceability Protocol are allowed if the additional gas components are shown not to interfere with the analysis. If a zero gas is used for the low-level gas, it must meet the requirements under the definition for “zero air material” in 40 CFR 72.2. The calibration gas must not be used after its expiration date. Except for applications under part 75 of this chapter, it is acceptable to prepare calibration gas mixtures from EPA Traceability Protocol gases in accordance with Method 205 in appendix M to part 51 of this chapter. For part 75 applications, the use of Method 205 is subject to the approval of the Administrator. The goal and recommendation for selecting calibration gases is to bracket the sample concentrations. The following calibration gas concentrations are required:
7.1.1 High-Level Gas. This concentration is chosen to set the calibration span as defined in Section 3.4.
7.1.2 Mid-Level Gas. 40 to 60 percent of the calibration span.
7.1.3 Low-Level Gas. Less than 20 percent of the calibration span.
7.1.4 Converter Efficiency Gas. What reagents do I need for the converter efficiency test? The converter efficiency gas is a manufacturer-certified gas with a concentration sufficient to show NO2 conversion at the concentrations encountered in the source. A test gas concentration in the 40 to 60 ppm range is suggested, but other concentrations may be more appropriate to specific sources. For the test described in section 8.2.4.1, NO2 is required. For the alternative converter efficiency tests in section 16.2, NO is required.
7.2 Interference Check. What reagents do I need for the interference check? Use the appropriate test gases listed in Table 7E-3 or others not listed that can potentially interfere (as indicated by the test facility type, instrument manufacturer, etc.) to conduct the interference check. These gases should be manufacturer certified but do not have to be prepared by the EPA traceability protocol.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Emission Test Procedure
Since you are allowed to choose different options to comply with some of the performance criteria, it is your responsibility to identify the specific options you have chosen, to document that the performance criteria for that option have been met, and to identify any deviations from the method.
8.1 What sampling site and sampling points do I select?
8.1.1 Unless otherwise specified in an applicable regulation or by the Administrator, when this method is used to determine compliance with an emission standard, conduct a stratification test as described in section 8.1.2 to determine the sampling traverse points to be used. For performance testing of continuous emission monitoring systems, follow the sampling site selection and traverse point layout procedures described in the appropriate performance specification or applicable regulation (e.g., Performance Specification 2 in appendix B to this part).
8.1.2 Determination of Stratification. Perform a stratification test at each test site to determine the appropriate number of sample traverse points. If testing for multiple pollutants or diluents at the same site, a stratification test using only one pollutant or diluent satisfies this requirement. A stratification test is not required for small stacks that are less than 4 inches in diameter. To test for stratification, use a probe of appropriate length to measure the NOX (or pollutant of interest) concentration at 12 traverse points located according to Table 1-1 or Table 1-2 of Method 1. Alternatively, you may measure at three points on a line passing through the centroidal area. Space the three points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line. Sample for a minimum of twice the system response time (see section 8.2.6) at each traverse point. Calculate the individual point and mean NOX concentrations. If the concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by no more than: ±5.0 percent of the mean concentration; or ±0.5 ppm (whichever is less restrictive), the gas stream is considered unstratified, and you may collect samples from a single point that most closely matches the mean. If the 5.0 percent or 0.5 ppm criterion is not met, but the concentration at each traverse point differs from the mean concentration for all traverse points by not more than: ±10.0 percent of the mean concentration; or ±1.0 ppm (whichever is less restrictive), the gas stream is considered to be minimally stratified and you may take samples from three points. Space the three points at 16.7, 50.0, and 83.3 percent of the measurement line. Alternatively, if a 12-point stratification test was performed and the emissions were shown to be minimally stratified (all points within ± 10.0 percent of their mean or within ±1.0 ppm), and if the stack diameter (or equivalent diameter, for a rectangular stack or duct) is greater than 2.4 meters (7.8 ft), then you may use 3-point sampling and locate the three points along the measurement line exhibiting the highest average concentration during the stratification test at 0.4, 1.2 and 2.0 meters from the stack or duct wall. If the gas stream is found to be stratified because the 10.0 percent or 1.0 ppm criterion for a 3-point test is not met, locate 12 traverse points for the test in accordance with Table 1-1 or Table 1-2 of Method 1.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. What initial performance criteria must my system meet before I begin collecting samples? Before measuring emissions, perform the following procedures:
(a) Calibration gas verification,
(b) Measurement system preparation,
(c) Calibration error test,
(d) NO2 to NO conversion efficiency test, if applicable,
(e) System bias check,
(f) System response time test, and
(g) Interference check
8.2.1 Calibration Gas Verification. How must I verify the concentrations of my calibration gases? Obtain a certificate from the gas manufacturer documenting the quality of the gas. Confirm that the manufacturer certification is complete and current. Ensure that your calibration gas certifications have not expired. This documentation should be available on-site for inspection. To the extent practicable, select a high-level gas concentration that will result in the measured emissions being between 20 and 100 percent of the calibration span.
8.2.2 Measurement System Preparation. How do I prepare my measurement system? Assemble, prepare, and precondition the measurement system according to your standard operating procedure. Adjust the system to achieve the correct sampling rate or dilution ratio (as applicable).
8.2.3 Calibration Error Test. How do I confirm my analyzer calibration is correct? After you have assembled, prepared and calibrated your sampling system and analyzer, you must conduct a 3-point analyzer calibration error test (or a 3-point system calibration error test for dilution systems) before the first run and again after any failed system bias test (or 2-point system calibration error test for dilution systems) or failed drift test. Introduce the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases sequentially. For non-dilution-type measurement systems, introduce the gases in direct calibration mode. For dilution-type measurement systems, introduce the gases in system calibration mode.
(1) For non-dilution systems, you may adjust the system to maintain the correct flow rate at the analyzer during the test, but you may not make adjustments for any other purpose. For dilution systems, you must operate the measurement system at the appropriate dilution ratio during all system calibration error checks, and may make only the adjustments necessary to maintain the proper ratio.
(2) Record the analyzer's response to each calibration gas on a form similar to Table 7E-1. For each calibration gas, calculate the analyzer calibration error using Equation 7E-1 in section 12.2 or the system calibration error using Equation 7E-3 in section 12.4 (as applicable). The calibration error specification in section 13.1 must be met for the low-, mid-, and high-level gases. If the calibration error specification is not met, take corrective action and repeat the test until an acceptable 3-point calibration is achieved.
8.2.4 NO2 to NO Conversion Efficiency Test. Before or after each field test, you must conduct an NO2 to NO conversion efficiency test if your system converts NO2 to NO before analyzing for NOX. You may risk testing multiple facilities before performing this test provided you pass this test at the conclusion of the final facility test. A failed final conversion efficiency test in this case will invalidate all tests performed subsequent to the test in which the converter efficiency test was passed. Follow the procedures in section 8.2.4.1, or 8.2.4.2. If desired, the converter efficiency factor derived from this test may be used to correct the test results for converter efficiency if the NO2 fraction in the measured test gas is known. Use Equation 7E-8 in section 12.8 for this correction.
8.2.4.1 Introduce NO2 converter efficiency gas to the analyzer in direct calibration mode and record the NOX concentration displayed by the analyzer. Calculate the converter efficiency using Equation 7E-7 in section 12.7. The specification for converter efficiency in section 13.5 must be met. The user is cautioned that state-of-the-art NO2 calibration gases may have limited shelf lives, and this could affect the ability to pass the 90-percent conversion efficiency requirement.
8.2.4.2 Alternatively, either of the procedures for determining conversion efficiency using NO in section 16.2 may be used.
8.2.5 Initial System Bias and System Calibration Error Checks. Before sampling begins, determine whether the high-level or mid-level calibration gas best approximates the emissions and use it as the upscale gas. Introduce the upscale gas at the probe upstream of all sample conditioning components in system calibration mode. Record the time it takes for the measured concentration to increase to a value that is at least 95 percent or within 0.5 ppm (whichever is less restrictive) of a stable response for both the low-level and upscale gases. Continue to observe the gas concentration reading until it has reached a final, stable value. Record this value on a form similar to Table 7E-2.
(1) Next, introduce the low-level gas in system calibration mode and record the time required for the concentration response to decrease to a value that is within 5.0 percent or 0.5 ppm (whichever is less restrictive) of the certified low-range gas concentration. If the low-level gas is a zero gas, use the procedures described above and observe the change in concentration until the response is 0.5 ppm or 5.0 percent of the upscale gas concentration (whichever is less restrictive).
(2) Continue to observe the low-level gas reading until it has reached a final, stable value and record the result on a form similar to Table 7E-2. Operate the measurement system at the normal sampling rate during all system bias checks. Make only the adjustments necessary to achieve proper calibration gas flow rates at the analyzer.
(3) From these data, calculate the measurement system response time (see section 8.2.6) and then calculate the initial system bias using Equation 7E-2 in section 12.3. For dilution systems, calculate the system calibration error in lieu of system bias using equation 7E-3 in section 12.4. See section 13.2 for acceptable performance criteria for system bias and system calibration error. If the initial system bias (or system calibration error) specification is not met, take corrective action. Then, you must repeat the applicable calibration error test from section 8.2.3 and the initial system bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check until acceptable results are achieved, after which you may begin sampling.
(Note: For dilution-type systems, data from the 3-point system calibration error test described in section 8.2.3 may be used to meet the initial 2-point system calibration error test requirement of this section, if the calibration gases were injected as described in this section, and if response time data were recorded).
8.2.6 Measurement System Response Time. As described in section 8.2.5, you must determine the measurement system response time during the initial system bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check. Observe the times required to achieve 95 percent of a stable response for both the low-level and upscale gases. The longer interval is the response time.
8.2.7 Interference Check. Conduct an interference response test of the gas analyzer prior to its initial use in the field. If you have multiple analyzers of the same make and model, you need only perform this alternative interference check on one analyzer. You may also meet the interference check requirement if the instrument manufacturer performs this or a similar check on an analyzer of the same make and model of the analyzer that you use and provides you with documented results.
(1) You may introduce the appropriate interference test gases (that are potentially encountered during a test; see examples in Table 7E-3) into the analyzer separately or as mixtures. Test the analyzer with the interference gas alone at the highest concentration expected at a test source and again with the interference gas and NOX at a representative NOX test concentration. For analyzers measuring NOX greater than 20 ppm, use a calibration gas with a NOX concentration of 80 to 100 ppm and set this concentration equal to the calibration span. For analyzers measuring less than 20 ppm NOX, select an NO concentration for the calibration span that reflects the emission levels at the sources to be tested, and perform the interference check at that level. Measure the total interference response of the analyzer to these gases in ppmv. Record the responses and determine the interference using Table 7E-4. The specification in section 13.4 must be met.
(2) A copy of this data, including the date completed and signed certification, must be available for inspection at the test site and included with each test report. This interference test is valid for the life of the instrument unless major analytical components (e.g., the detector) are replaced with different model parts. If major components are replaced with different model parts, the interference gas check must be repeated before returning the analyzer to service. If major components are replaced, the interference gas check must be repeated before returning the analyzer to service. The tester must ensure that any specific technology, equipment, or procedures that are intended to remove interference effects are operating properly during testing.
8.3 Dilution-Type Systems—Special Considerations. When a dilution-type measurement system is used, there are three important considerations that must be taken into account to ensure the quality of the emissions data. First, the critical orifice size and dilution ratio must be selected properly so that the sample dew point will be below the sample line and analyzer temperatures. Second, a high-quality, accurate probe controller must be used to maintain the dilution ratio during the test. The probe controller should be capable of monitoring the dilution air pressure, eductor vacuum, and sample flow rates. Third, differences between the molecular weight of calibration gas mixtures and the stack gas molecular weight must be addressed because these can affect the dilution ratio and introduce measurement bias.
8.4 Sample Collection.
(1) Position the probe at the first sampling point. Purge the system for at least two times the response time before recording any data. Then, traverse all required sampling points, sampling at each point for an equal length of time and maintaining the appropriate sample flow rate or dilution ratio (as applicable). You must record at least one valid data point per minute during the test run.
(2) Each time the probe is removed from the stack and replaced, you must recondition the sampling system for at least two times the system response time prior to your next recording. If the average of any run exceeds the calibration span value, that run is invalid.
(3) You may satisfy the multipoint traverse requirement by sampling sequentially using a single-hole probe or a multi-hole probe designed to sample at the prescribed points with a flow within 10 percent of mean flow rate. Notwithstanding, for applications under part 75 of this chapter, the use of multi-hole probes is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check and Drift Assessment.
How do I confirm that each sample I collect is valid? After each run, repeat the system bias check or 2-point system calibration error check (for dilution systems) to validate the run. Do not make adjustments to the measurement system (other than to maintain the target sampling rate or dilution ratio) between the end of the run and the completion of the post-run system bias or system calibration error check. Note that for all post-run system bias or 2-point system calibration error checks, you may inject the low-level gas first and the upscale gas last, or vice-versa. If conducting a relative accuracy test or relative accuracy test audit, consisting of nine runs or more, you may risk sampling for up to three runs before performing the post-run bias or system calibration error check provided you pass this test at the conclusion of the group of three runs. A failed post-run bias or system calibration error check in this case will invalidate all runs subsequent to the last passed check. When conducting a performance or compliance test, you must perform a post-run system bias or system calibration error check after each individual test run.
(1) If you do not pass the post-run system bias (or system calibration error) check, then the run is invalid. You must diagnose and fix the problem and pass another calibration error test (Section 8.2.3) and system bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check (Section 8.2.5) before repeating the run. Record the system bias (or system calibration error) results on a form similar to Table 7E-2.
(2) After each run, calculate the low-level and upscale drift, using Equation 7E-4 in section 12.5. If the post-run low- and upscale bias (or 2-point system calibration error) checks are passed, but the low-or upscale drift exceeds the specification in section 13.3, the run data are valid, but a 3-point calibration error test and a system bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check must be performed and passed before any more test runs are done.
(3) For dilution systems, data from a 3-point system calibration error test may be used to met the pre-run 2-point system calibration error requirement for the first run in a test sequence. Also, the post-run bias (or 2-point calibration error) check data may be used as the pre-run data for the next run in the test sequence at the discretion of the tester.
8.6 Alternative Interference and System Bias Checks (Dynamic Spike Procedure). If I want to use the dynamic spike procedure to validate my data, what procedure should I follow? Except for applications under part 75 of this chapter, you may use the dynamic spiking procedure and requirements provided in section 16.1 during each test as an alternative to the interference check and the pre- and post-run system bias checks. The calibration error test is still required under this option. Use of the dynamic spiking procedure for Part 75 applications is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
8.7 Moisture correction. You must determine the moisture content of the flue gas and correct the measured gas concentrations to a dry basis using Method 4 or other appropriate methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, when the moisture basis (wet or dry) of the measurements made with this method is different from the moisture basis of either: (1) The applicable emissions limit; or (2) the CEMS being evaluated for relative accuracy. Moisture correction is also required if the applicable limit is in lb/mmBtu and the moisture basis of the Method 7E NOX analyzer is different from the moisture basis of the Method 3A diluent gas (CO2 or O2) analyzer.
9.0 Quality Control
What quality control measures must I take?
The following table is a summary of the mandatory, suggested, and alternative quality assurance and quality control measures and the associated frequency and acceptance criteria. All of the QC data, along with the sample run data, must be documented and included in the test report.
| Status | Process or element | QA/QC specification | Acceptance criteria | Checking frequency |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| S | Identify Data User | Regulatory Agency or other primary end user of data | Before designing test. | |
| S | Analyzer Design | Analyzer resolution or sensitivity | <2.0% of full-scale range | Manufacturer design. |
| M | Interference gas check | Sum of responses ≤2.5% of calibration span Alternatively, sum of responses: | ||
| ≤0.5 ppmv for calibration spans of 5 to 10 ppmv | ||||
| ≤0.2 ppmv for calibration spans <5 ppmv | ||||
| See Table 7E-3 | ||||
| M | Calibration Gases | Traceability protocol (G1, G2) | Valid certificate required Uncertainty ≤2.0% of tag value | |
| M | High-level gas | Equal to the calibration span | Each test. | |
| M | Mid-level gas | 40 to 60% of calibration span | Each test. | |
| M | Low-level gas | <20% of calibration span | Each test. | |
| S | Data Recorder Design | Data resolution | ≤0.5% of full-scale range | Manufacturer design. |
| S | Sample Extraction | Probe material | SS or quartz if stack >500 °F | East test. |
| M | Sample Extraction | Probe, filter and sample line temperature | For dry-basis analyzers, keep sample above the dew point by heating, prior to sample conditioning | Each run. |
| For wet-basis analyzers, keep sample above dew point at all times, by heating or dilution | ||||
| S | Sample Extraction | Calibration valve material | SS | Each test. |
| S | Sample Extraction | Sample pump material | Inert to sample constituents | Each test. |
| S | Sample Extraction | Manifolding material | Inert to sample constituents | Each test. |
| S | Moisture Removal | Equipment efficiency | <5% target compound removal | Verified through system bias check. |
| S | Particulate Removal | Filter inertness | Pass system bias check | Each bias check. |
| M | Analyzer & Calibration Gas Performance | Analyzer calibration error (of 3-point system calibration error for dilution systems) | Within ±2.0 percent of the calibration span of the analyzer for the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases | Before initial run and after a failed system bias test or drift test. |
| Alternative specification: ≤0.5 ppmv absolute difference | ||||
| M | System Performance | System bias (or pre- and post-run 2-point system calibration error for dilution (Systems) | Within ±5.0% of the analyzer calibration span for low-sacle and upscale calibration gases | Before and after each run. |
| Alternative specification: ≤0.5 ppmv absolute difference | ||||
| M | System Performance | System response time | Determines minimum sampling time per point | During initial sampling system bias test. |
| M | System Performance | Drift | ≤3.0% of calibration span for low-level and mid- or high-level gases | After each test run. |
| Alternative specification: ≤0.5 ppmv absolute difference | ||||
| M | System Performance | NO2-NO conversion efficiency | ≥90% of certified test gas concentration | Before or after each test. |
| M | System Performance | Purge time | ≥2 times system response time | Before starting the first run and when probe is removed from and re-inserted into the stack. |
| M | System Performance | Minimum sample time at each point | Two times the system response time | Each sample point. |
| M | System Performance | Stable sample flow rate (surrogate for maintaining system response time) | Within 10% of flow rate established during system response time check | Each run. |
| M | Sample Point Selection | Stratification test | All points within: | Prior to first run. |
| ±5% of mean for 1-point sampling | ||||
| ±10% of mean for 3-point | ||||
| Alternatively, all points within: | ||||
| ±0.5 ppm of mean for 1-point sampling | ||||
| ±1.0 ppm of mean for 3-point sampling | ||||
| A | Multiple sample points simultaneously | No. of openings in probe | Multi-hole probe with verifiable constant flow through all holes within 10% of mean flow rate (requires Administrative approval for Part 75) | Each run. |
| M | Data Recording | Frequency | ≤1 minute average | During run. |
| S | Data Parameters | Sample concentration range | All 1-minute averages within calibration span | Each run. |
| M | Date Parameters | Average concentration for the run | Run average ≤calibration span | Each run. |
| S = Suggest. | ||||
| M = Mandatory. | ||||
| A = Alternative. | ||||
| Agency. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
What measurement system calibrations are required?
(1) The initial 3-point calibration error test as described in section 8.2.3 and the system bias (or system calibration error) checks described in section 8.2.5 are required and must meet the specifications in section 13 before you start the test. Make all necessary adjustments to calibrate the gas analyzer and data recorder. Then, after the test commences, the system bias or system calibration error checks described in section 8.5 are required before and after each run. Your analyzer must be calibrated for all species of NOX that it detects. Analyzers that measure NO and NO2 separately without using a converter must be calibrated with both NO and NO2.
(2) You must include a copy of the manufacturer's certification of the calibration gases used in the testing as part of the test report. This certification must include the 13 documentation requirements in the EPA Traceability Protocol For Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999. When Method 205 is used to produce diluted calibration gases, you must document that the specifications for the gas dilution system are met for the test. You must also include the date of the most recent dilution system calibration against flow standards and the name of the person or manufacturer who carried out the calibration in the test report.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the procedures for calculations and data analysis listed in this section.
12.1 Nomenclature. The terms used in the equations are defined as follows:
ACE = Analyzer calibration error, percent of calibration span.
BWS = Moisture content of sample gas as measured by Method 4 or other approved method, percent/100.
CAvg = Average unadjusted gas concentration indicated by data recorder for the test run, ppmv.
CD = Pollutant concentration adjusted to dry conditions, ppmv.
CDir = Measured concentration of a calibration gas (low, mid, or high) when introduced in direct calibration mode, ppmv.
CGas = Average effluent gas concentration adjusted for bias, ppmv.
CM = Average of initial and final system calibration bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check responses for the upscale calibration gas, ppmv.
CMA = Actual concentration of the upscale calibration gas, ppmv.
CNative = NOX concentration in the stack gas as calculated in section 12.6, ppmv.
CO = Average of the initial and final system calibration bias (or 2-point system calibration error) check responses from the low-level (or zero) calibration gas, ppmv.
COA = Actual concentration of the low-level calibration gas, ppmv.
CS = Measured concentration of a calibration gas (low, mid, or high) when introduced in system calibration mode, ppmv.
CSS = Concentration of NOX measured in the spiked sample, ppmv.
CSpike = Concentration of NOX in the undiluted spike gas, ppmv.
CCalc = Calculated concentration of NOX in the spike gas diluted in the sample, ppmv.
CV = Manufacturer certified concentration of a calibration gas (low, mid, or high), ppmv.
CW = Pollutant concentration measured under moist sample conditions, wet basis, ppmv.
CS = Calibration span, ppmv.
D = Drift assessment, percent of calibration span.
DF = Dilution system dilution factor or spike gas dilution factor, dimensionless.
EffNO2 = NO2 to NO converter efficiency, percent.
NOXCorr = The NOX concentration corrected for the converter efficiency, ppmv.
NOXFinal = The final NOX concentration observed during the converter efficiency test in section 16.2.2, ppmv.
NOXPeak = The highest NOX concentration observed during the converter efficiency test in section 16.2.2, ppmv.
QSpike = Flow rate of spike gas introduced in system calibration mode, L/min.
QTotal = Total sample flow rate during the spike test, L/min.
R = Spike recovery, percent.
SB = System bias, percent of calibration span.
SBi = Pre-run system bias, percent of calibration span.
SBfinal = Post-run system bias, percent of calibration span.
SCE = System calibration error, percent of calibration span.
SCEi = Pre-run system calibration error, percent of calibration span.
SCEFinal = Post-run system calibration error, percent of calibration span.
12.2 Analyzer Calibration Error. For non-dilution systems, use Equation 7E-1 to calculate the analyzer calibration error for the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases.
12.3 System Bias. For non-dilution systems, use Equation 7E-2 to calculate the system bias separately for the low-level and upscale calibration gases.
12.4 System Calibration Error. Use Equation 7E-3 to calculate the system calibration error for dilution systems. Equation 7E-3 applies to both the initial 3-point system calibration error test and the subsequent 2-point calibration error checks between test runs. In this equation, the term “Cs” refers to the diluted calibration gas concentration measured by the analyzer.
12.5 Drift Assessment. Use Equation 7E-4 to separately calculate the low-level and upscale drift over each test run. For dilution systems, replace “SBfinal” and “SBi” with “SCEfinal” and “SCEi”, respectively, to calculate and evaluate drift.
12.6 Effluent Gas Concentration. For each test run, calculate Cavg, the arithmetic average of all valid NOX concentration values (e.g., 1-minute averages). Then adjust the value of Cavg for bias using Equation 7E-5a if you use a non-zero gas as your low-level calibration gas, or Equation 7E-5b if you use a zero gas as your low-level calibration gas.
12.7 NO2—NO Conversion Efficiency. If the NOX converter efficiency test described in section 8.2.4.1 is performed, calculate the efficiency using Equation 7E-7.
12.8 NO2—NO Conversion Efficiency Correction. If desired, calculate the total NOX concentration with a correction for converter efficiency using Equation 7E-8.
12.9 Alternative NO2 Converter Efficiency. If the alternative procedure of section 16.2.2 is used, determine the NOX concentration decrease from NOXPeak after the minimum 30-minute test interval using Equation 7E-9. This decrease from NOXPeak must meet the requirement in section 13.5 for the converter to be acceptable.
12.10 Moisture Correction. Use Equation 7E-10 if your measurements need to be corrected to a dry basis.
12.11 Calculated Spike Gas Concentration and Spike Recovery for the Example Alternative Dynamic Spiking Procedure in section 16.1.3. Use Equation 7E-11 to determine the calculated spike gas concentration. Use Equation 7E-12 to calculate the spike recovery.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Calibration Error. This specification is applicable to both the analyzer calibration error and the 3-point system calibration error tests described in section 8.2.3. At each calibration gas level (low, mid, and high) the calibration error must either be within ±2.0 percent of the calibration span. Alternatively, the results are acceptable if |Cdir − Cv| or |Cs−Cv| (as applicable) is ≤0.5 ppmv.
13.2 System Bias. This specification is applicable to both the system bias and 2-point system calibration error tests described in section 8.2.5 and 8.5. The pre- and post-run system bias (or system calibration error) must be within ±5.0 percent of the calibration span for the low-level and upscale calibration gases. Alternatively, the results are acceptable if | Cs −Cdir | is ≤0.5 ppmv or if | Cs− Cv | is ≤0.5 ppmv (as applicable).
13.3 Drift. For each run, the low-level and upscale drift must be less than or equal to 3.0 percent of the calibration span. The drift is also acceptable if the pre- and post-run bias (or the pre- and post-run system calibration error) responses do not differ by more than 0.5 ppmv at each gas concentration (i.e. | Cs post-run− Cs pre-run | ≤0.5 ppmv).
13.4 Interference Check. The total interference response (i.e., the sum of the interference responses of all tested gaseous components) must not be greater than 2.50 percent of the calibration span for the analyzer tested. In summing the interferences, use the larger of the absolute values obtained for the interferent tested with and without the pollutant present. The results are also acceptable if the sum of the responses does not exceed 0.5 ppmv for a calibration span of 5 to 10 ppmv, or 0.2 ppmv for a calibration span <5 ppmv.
13.5 NO2 to NO Conversion Efficiency Test (as applicable). The NO2 to NO conversion efficiency, calculated according to Equation 7E-7, must be greater than or equal to 90 percent. The alternative conversion efficiency check, described in section 16.2.2 and calculated according to Equation 7E-9, must not result in a decrease from NOXPeak by more than 2.0 percent.
13.6 Alternative Dynamic Spike Procedure. Recoveries of both pre-test spikes and post-test spikes must be within 100 ±10 percent. If the absolute difference between the calculated spike value and measured spike value is equal to or less than 0.20 ppmv, then the requirements of the ADSC are met.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Dynamic Spike Procedure. Except for applications under part 75 of this chapter, you may use a dynamic spiking procedure to validate your test data for a specific test matrix in place of the interference check and pre- and post-run system bias checks. For part 75 applications, use of this procedure is subject to the approval of the Administrator. Best results are obtained for this procedure when source emissions are steady and not varying. Fluctuating emissions may render this alternative procedure difficult to pass. To use this alternative, you must meet the following requirements.
16.1.1 Procedure Documentation. You must detail the procedure you followed in the test report, including how the spike was measured, added, verified during the run, and calculated after the test.
16.1.2 Spiking Procedure Requirements. The spikes must be prepared from EPA Traceability Protocol gases. Your procedure must be designed to spike field samples at two target levels both before and after the test. Your target spike levels should bracket the average sample NOX concentrations. The higher target concentration must be less than the calibration span. You must collect at least 5 data points for each target concentration. The spiking procedure must be performed before the first run and repeated after the last run of the test program.
16.1.3 Example Spiking Procedure. Determine the NO concentration needed to generate concentrations that are 50 and 150 percent of the anticipated NOX concentration in the stack at the total sampling flow rate while keeping the spike flow rate at or below 10 percent of this total. Use a mass flow meter (accurate within 2.0 percent) to generate these NO spike gas concentrations at a constant flow rate. Use Equation 7E-11 in section 12.11 to determine the calculated spike concentration in the collected sample.
(1) Prepare the measurement system and conduct the analyzer calibration error test as described in sections 8.2.2 and 8.2.3. Following the sampling procedures in section 8.1, determine the stack NOX concentration and use this concentration as the average stack concentration (Cavg) for the first spike level, or if desired, for both pre-test spike levels. Introduce the first level spike gas into the system in system calibration mode and begin sample collection. Wait for at least two times the system response time before measuring the spiked sample concentration. Then record at least five successive 1-minute averages of the spiked sample gas. Monitor the spike gas flow rate and maintain at the determined addition rate. Average the five 1-minute averages and determine the spike recovery using Equation 7E-12. Repeat this procedure for the other pre-test spike level. The recovery at each level must be within the limits in section 13.6 before proceeding with the test.
(2) Conduct the number of runs required for the test. Then repeat the above procedure for the post-test spike evaluation. The last run of the test may serve as the average stack concentration for the post-test spike test calculations. The results of the post-test spikes must meet the limits in section 13.6.
16.2 Alternative NO2 to NO Conversion Efficiency Procedures. You may use either of the following procedures to determine converter efficiency in place of the procedure in section 8.2.4.1.
16.2.1 The procedure for determining conversion efficiency using NO in 40 CFR 86.123-78.
16.2.2 Bag Procedure. Perform the analyzer calibration error test to document the calibration (both NO and NOX modes, as applicable). Fill a Tedlar or equivalent bag approximately half full with either ambient air, pure oxygen, or an oxygen standard gas with at least 19.5 percent by volume oxygen content. Fill the remainder of the bag with mid- to high-level NO in N2 (or other appropriate concentration) calibration gas. (Note that the concentration of the NO standard should be sufficiently high enough for the diluted concentration to be easily and accurately measured on the scale used. The size of the bag should be large enough to accommodate the procedure and time required. Verify through the manufacturer that the Tedlar alternative is suitable for NO and make this verifed information available for inspection.)
(1) Immediately attach the bag to the inlet of the NOX analyzer (or external converter if used). In the case of a dilution-system, introduce the gas at a point upstream of the dilution assembly. Measure the NOX concentration for a period of 30 minutes. If the NOX concentration drops more than 2 percent absolute from the peak value observed, then the NO2 converter has failed to meet the criteria of this test. Take corrective action. The highest NOX value observed is considered to be NOXPeak. The final NOX value observed is considered to be NOXfinal.
(2) [Reserved]
16.3 Manufacturer's Stability Test. A manufacturer's stability test is required for all analyzers that routinely measure emissions below 20 ppmv and is optional but recommended for other analyzers. This test evaluates each analyzer model by subjecting it to the tests listed in Table 7E-5 following procedures similar to those in 40 CFR 53.23 for thermal stability and insensitivity to supply voltage variations. If the analyzer will be used under temperature conditions that are outside the test conditions in Table B-4 of Part 53.23, alternative test temperatures that better reflect the analyzer field environment should be used. Alternative procedures or documentation that establish the analyzer's stability over the appropriate line voltages and temperatures are acceptable.
17.0 References
1. “ERA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards” September 1997 as amended, ERA-600/R-97/121.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Potential interferent gas 1 | Concentrations 2 sample conditioning type | |
|---|---|---|
| Hot wet | Dried | |
| CO2 | 5 and 15% | 5 and 15% |
| H2 O | 25% | 1% |
| NO | 15 ppmv | 15 ppmv |
| NO2 | 15 ppmv | 15 ppmv |
| N2 O | 10 ppmv | 10 ppmv |
| CO | 50 ppmv | 50 ppmv |
| NH3 | 10 ppmv | 10 ppmv |
| CH4 | 50 ppmv | 50 ppmv |
| SO2 | 20 ppmv | 20 ppmv |
| H2 | 50 ppmv | 50 ppmv |
| HCl | 10 ppmv | 10 ppmv |
| 1 Any applicable gas may be eliminated or tested at a reduced level if the manufacturer has provided reliable means for limiting or scrubbing that gas to a specified level. | ||
| 2 As practicable, gas concentrations should be the highest expected at test sites. |
Table 7E-4—Interference Response
Date of Test:
Analyzer Type:
Model No.:
Serial No:
Calibration Span:
| Test gas type | Concentration (ppm) |
Analyzer response |
|---|---|---|
| Sum of Responses | ||
| % of Calibration Span |
| Test description | Acceptance criteria (note 1) |
|---|---|
| Thermal Stability | Temperature range when drift does not exceed 3.0% of analyzer range over a 12-hour run when measured with NOX present @ 80% of calibration span. |
| Fault Conditions | Identify conditions which, when they occur, result in performance which is not in compliance with the Manufacturer's Stability Test criteria. These are to be indicated visually or electrically to alert the operator of the problem. |
| Insensitivity to Supply Voltage Variations | ±10.0% (or manufacturers alternative) variation from nominal voltage must produce a drift of ≤2.0% of calibration span for either zero or concentration ≥80% NOX present. |
| Analyzer Calibration Error | For a low-, medium-, and high-calibration gas, the difference between the manufacturer certified value and the analyzer response in direct calibration mode, no more than 2.0% of calibration span. |
| Note 1: If the instrument is to be used as a Low Range analyzer, all tests must be performed at a calibration span of 20 ppm or less. |
Method 8—Determination of Sulfuric Acid and Sulfur Dioxide Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Sulfuric acid, including: Sulfuric acid (H2 SO4) mist, Sulfur trioxide (SO3) | 7664-93-9, 7449-11-9 | 0.05 mg/m3 (0.03 × 10−7 lb/ft3). |
| Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-5 | 1.2 mg/m3 (3 × 10−9 lb/ft3). |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of H2SO4 (including H2SO4 mist and SO3) and gaseous SO2 emissions from stationary sources.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
A gas sample is extracted isokinetically from the stack. The H2SO4 and the SO2 are separated, and both fractions are measured separately by the barium-thorin titration method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Possible interfering agents of this method are fluorides, free ammonia, and dimethyl aniline. If any of these interfering agents is present (this can be determined by knowledge of the process), alternative methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, are required.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. Same as Method 6, section 5.2.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as Method 5, section 6.1, with the following additions and exceptions:
6.1.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this method is shown in Figure 8-1; it is similar to the Method 5 sampling train, except that the filter position is different, and the filter holder does not have to be heated. See Method 5, section 6.1.1, for details and guidelines on operation and maintenance.
6.1.1.1 Probe Nozzle. Borosilicate or quartz glass with a sharp, tapered leading edge and coupled to the probe liner using a polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) or glass-lined union (e.g., fused silica, Slico, or equivalent). When the stack temperature exceeds 210 °C (410 °F), a leak-free ground glass fitting or other leak free, non-contaminating fitting must be used to couple the nozzle to the probe liner. It is also acceptable to use a one-piece glass nozzle/liner assembly. The angle of the taper shall be ≤30°, and the taper shall be on the outside to preserve a constant internal diameter. The probe nozzle shall be of the button-hook or elbow design, unless otherwise specified by the Administrator. Other materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. A range of nozzle sizes suitable for isokinetic sampling should be available. Typical nozzle sizes range from 0.32 to 1.27 cm ( 1/8 to 1/2 in) inside diameter (ID) in increments of 0.16 cm ( 1/16 in). Larger nozzles sizes are also available if higher volume sampling trains are used.
6.1.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate or quartz glass, with a heating system to prevent visible condensation during sampling. Do not use metal probe liners.
6.1.1.3 Filter Holder. Borosilicate glass, with a glass frit filter support and a silicone rubber gasket. Other gasket materials (e.g., Teflon or Viton) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The holder design shall provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. The filter holder shall be placed between the first and second impingers. Do not heat the filter holder.
6.1.1.4 Impingers. Four, of the Greenburg-Smith design, as shown in Figure 8-1. The first and third impingers must have standard tips. The second and fourth impingers must be modified by replacing the insert with an approximately 13-mm ( 1/2-in.) ID glass tube, having an unconstricted tip located 13 mm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom of the impinger. Similar collection systems, subject to the approval of the Administrator, may be used.
6.1.1.5 Temperature Sensor. Thermometer, or equivalent, to measure the temperature of the gas leaving the impinger train to within 1 °C (2 °F).
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are required for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Wash Bottles. Two polyethylene or glass bottles, 500-ml.
6.2.2 Graduated Cylinders. Two graduated cylinders (volumetric flasks may be used), 250-ml, 1-liter.
6.2.3 Storage Bottles. Leak-free polyethylene bottles, 1-liter size (two for each sampling run).
6.2.4 Trip Balance. 500-g capacity, to measure to ±0.5 g (necessary only if a moisture content analysis is to be done).
6.3 Analysis. The following items are required for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Pipettes. Volumetric 10-ml, 100-ml.
6.3.2 Burette. 50-ml.
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flask. 250-ml (one for each sample, blank, and standard).
6.3.4 Graduated Cylinder. 100-ml.
6.3.5 Dropping Bottle. To add indicator solution, 125-ml size.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters and Silica Gel. Same as in Method 5, sections 7.1.1 and 7.1.2, respectively.
7.1.2 Water. Same as in Method 6, section 7.1.1.
7.1.3 Isopropanol, 80 Percent by Volume. Mix 800 ml of isopropanol with 200 ml of water.
7.1.4 Hydrogen Peroxide (H 2O 2), 3 Percent by Volume. Dilute 100 ml of 30 percent H2O2) to 1 liter with water. Prepare fresh daily.
7.1.5 Crushed Ice.
7.2 Sample Recovery. The reagents and standards required for sample recovery are:
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.2.
7.2.2 Isopropanol, 80 Percent. Same as in section 7.1.3.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6, section 7.3.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as Method 5, section 8.1, except that filters should be inspected but need not be desiccated, weighed, or identified. If the effluent gas can be considered dry (i.e., moisture-free), the silica gel need not be weighed.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same as Method 5, section 8.2.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as Method 5, section 8.3, with the following exceptions:
8.3.1 Use Figure 8-1 instead of Figure 5-1.
8.3.2 Replace the second sentence of Method 5, section 8.3.1 with: Place 100 ml of 80 percent isopropanol in the first impinger, 100 ml of 3 percent H2O2 in both the second and third impingers; retain a portion of each reagent for use as a blank solution. Place about 200 g of silica gel in the fourth impinger.
8.3.3 Ignore any other statements in section 8.3 of Method 5 that are obviously not applicable to the performance of Method 8.
8.4 Metering System Leak-Check Procedure. Same as Method 5, section 8.4.1.
8.5 Pretest Leak-Check Procedure. Follow the basic procedure in Method 5, section 8.4.2, noting that the probe heater shall be adjusted to the minimum temperature required to prevent condensation, and also that verbage such as “* * * plugging the inlet to the filter holder * * * ” found in section 8.4.2.2 of Method 5 shall be replaced by “ * * * plugging the inlet to the first impinger * * * ”. The pretest leak-check is recommended, but is not required.
8.6 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the basic procedures in Method 5, section 8.5, in conjunction with the following special instructions:
8.6.1 Record the data on a sheet similar to that shown in Figure 8-2 (alternatively, Figure 5-2 in Method 5 may be used). The sampling rate shall not exceed 0.030 m 3/min (1.0 cfm) during the run. Periodically during the test, observe the connecting line between the probe and first impinger for signs of condensation. If condensation does occur, adjust the probe heater setting upward to the minimum temperature required to prevent condensation. If component changes become necessary during a run, a leak-check shall be performed immediately before each change, according to the procedure outlined in section 8.4.3 of Method 5 (with appropriate modifications, as mentioned in section 8.5 of this method); record all leak rates. If the leakage rate(s) exceeds the specified rate, the tester shall either void the run or plan to correct the sample volume as outlined in section 12.3 of Method 5. Leak-checks immediately after component changes are recommended, but not required. If these leak-checks are performed, the procedure in section 8.4.2 of Method 5 (with appropriate modifications) shall be used.
8.6.2 After turning off the pump and recording the final readings at the conclusion of each run, remove the probe from the stack. Conduct a post-test (mandatory) leak-check as outlined in section 8.4.4 of Method 5 (with appropriate modifications), and record the leak rate. If the post-test leakage rate exceeds the specified acceptable rate, either correct the sample volume, as outlined in section 12.3 of Method 5, or void the run.
8.6.3 Drain the ice bath and, with the probe disconnected, purge the remaining part of the train by drawing clean ambient air through the system for 15 minutes at the average flow rate used for sampling.
8.7 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, section 8.6.
8.8 Sample Recovery. Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the probe to cool. Treat the samples as follows:
8.8.1 Container No. 1.
8.8.1.1 If a moisture content analysis is to be performed, clean and weigh the first impinger (plus contents) to the nearest 0.5 g, and record this weight.
8.8.1.2 Transfer the contents of the first impinger to a 250-ml graduated cylinder. Rinse the probe, first impinger, all connecting glassware before the filter, and the front half of the filter holder with 80 percent isopropanol. Add the isopropanol rinse solution to the cylinder. Dilute the contents of the cylinder to 225 ml with 80 percent isopropanol, and transfer the cylinder contents to the storage container. Rinse the cylinder with 25 ml of 80 percent isopropanol, and transfer the rinse to the storage container. Add the filter to the solution in the storage container and mix. Seal the container to protect the solution against evaporation. Mark the level of liquid on the container, and identify the sample container.
8.8.2 Container No. 2.
8.8.2.1 If a moisture content analysis is to be performed, clean and weigh the second and third impingers (plus contents) to the nearest 0.5 g, and record the weights. Also, weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g, and record the weight.
8.8.2.2 Transfer the solutions from the second and third impingers to a 1-liter graduated cylinder. Rinse all connecting glassware (including back half of filter holder) between the filter and silica gel impinger with water, and add this rinse water to the cylinder. Dilute the contents of the cylinder to 950 ml with water. Transfer the solution to a storage container. Rinse the cylinder with 50 ml of water, and transfer the rinse to the storage container. Mark the level of liquid on the container. Seal and identify the sample container.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 7.1.3 | Isopropanol check | Ensure acceptable level of peroxide impurities in isopropanol. |
| 8.4, 8.5, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.2 | Barium standard solution standardization | Ensure normality determination. |
| 11.2 | Replicate titrations | Ensure precision of titration determinations. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Method 5, section 10.0.
10.2 Barium Standard Solution. Same as Method 6, section 10.5.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1. Sample Loss. Same as Method 6, section 11.1.
11.2. Sample Analysis.
11.2.1 Container No. 1. Shake the container holding the isopropanol solution and the filter. If the filter breaks up, allow the fragments to settle for a few minutes before removing a sample aliquot. Pipette a 100-ml aliquot of this solution into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 2 to 4 drops of thorin indicator, and titrate to a pink endpoint using 0.0100 N barium standard solution. Repeat the titration with a second aliquot of sample, and average the titration values. Replicate titrations must agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is greater.
11.2.2 Container No. 2. Thoroughly mix the solution in the container holding the contents of the second and third impingers. Pipette a 10-ml aliquot of sample into a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 40 ml of isopropanol, 2 to 4 drops of thorin indicator, and titrate to a pink endpoint using 0.0100 N barium standard solution. Repeat the titration with a second aliquot of sample, and average the titration values. Replicate titrations must agree within 1 percent or 0.2 ml, whichever is greater.
11.2.3 Blanks. Prepare blanks by adding 2 to 4 drops of thorin indicator to 100 ml of 80 percent isopropanol. Titrate the blanks in the same manner as the samples.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 5, section 12.1, with the following additions and exceptions:
CH2SO4 = Sulfuric acid (including SO3) concentration, g/dscm (lb/dscf).
CSO2 = Sulfur dioxide concentration, g/dscm (lb/dscf).
N = Normality of barium perchlorate titrant, meq/ml.
Va = Volume of sample aliquot titrated, 100 ml for H2SO4 and 10 ml for SO2.
Vsoln = Total volume of solution in which the sample is contained, 1000 ml for the SO2 sample and 250 ml for the H2SO4 sample.
Vt = Volume of barium standard solution titrant used for the sample, ml.
Vtb = Volume of barium standard solution titrant used for the blank, ml.
12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop. See data sheet (Figure 8-2).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Same as Method 5, section 12.3.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor Condensed and Moisture Content. Calculate the volume of water vapor using Equation 5-2 of Method 5; the weight of water collected in the impingers and silica gel can be converted directly to milliliters (the specific gravity of water is 1 g/ml). Calculate the moisture content of the stack gas (Bws) using Equation 5-3 of Method 5. The note in section 12.5 of Method 5 also applies to this method. Note that if the effluent gas stream can be considered dry, the volume of water vapor and moisture content need not be calculated.
12.5 Sulfuric Acid Mist (Including SO3) Concentration.
Where:
K3 = 0.04904 g/meq for metric units,
K3 = 1.081 × 10−4 lb/meq for English units.
12.6 Sulfur Dioxide Concentration.
Where:
K4 = 0.03203 g/meq for metric units,
K4 = 7.061 × 10−5 lb/meq for English units.
12.7 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method 5, section 12.11.
12.8 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate, if needed, using data obtained in this method and the equations in sections 12.6 and 12.7 of Method 2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analytical Range. Collaborative tests have shown that the minimum detectable limits of the method are 0.06 mg/m 3 (4 × 10−9 lb/ft 3) for H2SO4 and 1.2 mg/m 3 (74 × 10−9 lb/ft 3) for SO2. No upper limits have been established. Based on theoretical calculations for 200 ml of 3 percent H2O2 solution, the upper concentration limit for SO2 in a 1.0 m 3 (35.3 ft 3) gas sample is about 12,000 mg/m 3 (7.7 × 10−4 lb/ft 3). The upper limit can be extended by increasing the quantity of peroxide solution in the impingers.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as section 17.0 of Methods 5 and 6.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 9—Visual Determination of the Opacity of Emissions From Stationary Sources
Many stationary sources discharge visible emissions into the atmosphere; these emissions are usually in the shape of a plume. This method involves the determination of plume opacity by qualified observers. The method includes procedures for the training and certification of observers, and procedures to be used in the field for determination of plume opacity. The appearance of a plume as viewed by an observer depends upon a number of variables, some of which may be controllable and some of which may not be controllable in the field. Variables which can be controlled to an extent to which they no longer exert a significant influence upon plume appearance include: Angle of the observer with respect to the plume; angle of the observer with respect to the sun; point of observation of attached and detached steam plume; and angle of the observer with respect to a plume emitted from a rectangular stack with a large length to width ratio. The method includes specific criteria applicable to these variables.
Other variables which may not be controllable in the field are luminescence and color contrast between the plume and the background against which the plume is viewed. These variables exert an influence upon the appearance of a plume as viewed by an observer, and can affect the ability of the observer to accurately assign opacity values to the observed plume. Studies of the theory of plume opacity and field studies have demonstrated that a plume is most visible and presents the greatest apparent opacity when viewed against a contrasting background. It follows from this, and is confirmed by field trials, that the opacity of a plume, viewed under conditions where a contrasting background is present can be assigned with the greatest degree of accuracy. However, the potential for a positive error is also the greatest when a plume is viewed under such contrasting conditions. Under conditions presenting a less contrasting background, the apparent opacity of a plume is less and approaches zero as the color and luminescence contrast decrease toward zero. As a result, significant negative bias and negative errors can be made when a plume is viewed under less contrasting conditions. A negative bias decreases rather than increases the possibility that a plant operator will be cited for a violation of opacity standards due to observer error.
Studies have been undertaken to determine the magnitude of positive errors which can be made by qualified observers while reading plumes under contrasting conditions and using the procedures set forth in this method. The results of these studies (field trials) which involve a total of 769 sets of 25 readings each are as follows:
(1) For black plumes (133 sets at a smoke generator), 100 percent of the sets were read with a positive error 1 of less than 7.5 percent opacity; 99 percent were read with a positive error of less than 5 percent opacity.
1 For a set, positive error = average opacity determined by observers' 25 observations—average opacity determined from transmissometer's 25 recordings.
(2) For white plumes (170 sets at a smoke generator, 168 sets at a coal-fired power plant, 298 sets at a sulfuric acid plant), 99 percent of the sets were read with a positive error of less than 7.5 percent opacity; 95 percent were read with a positive error of less than 5 percent opacity.
The positive observational error associated with an average of twenty-five readings is therefore established. The accuracy of the method must be taken into account when determining possible violations of applicable opacity standards.
1. Principle and Applicability
1.1 Principle. The opacity of emissions from stationary sources is determined visually by a qualified observer.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of the opacity of emissions from stationary sources pursuant to § 60.11(b) and for qualifying observers for visually determining opacity of emissions.
2. Procedures
The observer qualified in accordance with section 3 of this method shall use the following procedures for visually determining the opacity of emissions:
2.1 Position. The qualified observer shall stand at a distance sufficient to provide a clear view of the emissions with the sun oriented in the 140° sector to his back. Consistent with maintaining the above requirement, the observer shall, as much as possible, make his observations from a position such that his line of vision is approximately perpendicular to the plume direction, and when observing opacity of emissions from rectangular outlets (e.g., roof monitors, open baghouses, noncircular stacks), approximately perpendicular to the longer axis of the outlet. The observer's line of sight should not include more than one plume at a time when multiple stacks are involved, and in any case the observer should make his observations with his line of sight perpendicular to the longer axis of such a set of multiple stacks (e.g., stub stacks on baghouses).
2.2 Field Records. The observer shall record the name of the plant, emission location, type facility, observer's name and affiliation, a sketch of the observer's position relative to the source, and the date on a field data sheet (Figure 9-1). The time, estimated distance to the emission location, approximate wind direction, estimated wind speed, description of the sky condition (presence and color of clouds), and plume background are recorded on a field data sheet at the time opacity readings are initiated and completed.
2.3 Observations. Opacity observations shall be made at the point of greatest opacity in that portion of the plume where condensed water vapor is not present. The observer shall not look continuously at the plume, but instead shall observe the plume momentarily at 15-second intervals.
2.3.1 Attached Steam Plumes. When condensed water vapor is present within the plume as it emerges from the emission outlet, opacity observations shall be made beyond the point in the plume at which condensed water vapor is no longer visible. The observer shall record the approximate distance from the emission outlet to the point in the plume at which the observations are made.
2.3.2 Detached Steam Plume. When water vapor in the plume condenses and becomes visible at a distinct distance from the emission outlet, the opacity of emissions should be evaluated at the emission outlet prior to the condensation of water vapor and the formation of the steam plume.
2.4 Recording Observations. Opacity observations shall be recorded to the nearest 5 percent at 15-second intervals on an observational record sheet. (See Figure 9-2 for an example.) A minimum of 24 observations shall be recorded. Each momentary observation recorded shall be deemed to represent the average opacity of emissions for a 15-second period.
2.5 Data Reduction. Opacity shall be determined as an average of 24 consecutive observations recorded at 15-second intervals. Divide the observations recorded on the record sheet into sets of 24 consecutive observations. A set is composed of any 24 consecutive observations. Sets need not be consecutive in time and in no case shall two sets overlap. For each set of 24 observations, calculate the average by summing the opacity of the 24 observations and dividing this sum by 24. If an applicable standard specifies an averaging time requiring more than 24 observations, calculate the average for all observations made during the specified time period. Record the average opacity on a record sheet. (See Figure 9-1 for an example.)
3. Qualifications and Testing
3.1 Certification Requirements. To receive certification as a qualified observer, a candidate must be tested and demonstrate the ability to assign opacity readings in 5 percent increments to 25 different black plumes and 25 different white plumes, with an error not to exceed 15 percent opacity on any one reading and an average error not to exceed 7.5 percent opacity in each category. Candidates shall be tested according to the procedures described in section 3.2. Smoke generators used pursuant to section 3.2 shall be equipped with a smoke meter which meets the requirements of section 3.3.
The certification shall be valid for a period of 6 months, at which time the qualification procedure must be repeated by any observer in order to retain certification.
3.2 Certification Procedure. The certification test consists of showing the candidate a complete run of 50 plumes—25 black plumes and 25 white plumes—generated by a smoke generator. Plumes within each set of 25 black and 25 white runs shall be presented in random order. The candidate assigns an opacity value to each plume and records his observation on a suitable form. At the completion of each run of 50 readings, the score of the candidate is determined. If a candidate fails to qualify, the complete run of 50 readings must be repeated in any retest. The smoke test may be administered as part of a smoke school or training program, and may be preceded by training or familiarization runs of the smoke generator during which candidates are shown black and white plumes of known opacity.
3.3 Smoke Generator Specifications. Any smoke generator used for the purposes of section 3.2 shall be equipped with a smoke meter installed to measure opacity across the diameter of the smoke generator stack. The smoke meter output shall display instack opacity based upon a pathlength equal to the stack exit diameter, on a full 0 to 100 percent chart recorder scale. The smoke meter optical design and performance shall meet the specifications shown in Table 9-1. The smoke meter shall be calibrated as prescribed in section 3.3.1 prior to the conduct of each smoke reading test. At the completion of each test, the zero and span drift shall be checked and if the drift exceeds ±1 percent opacity, the condition shall be corrected prior to conducting any subsequent test runs. The smoke meter shall be demonstrated, at the time of installation, to meet the specifications listed in Table 9-1. This demonstration shall be repeated following any subsequent repair or replacement of the photocell or associated electronic circuitry including the chart recorder or output meter, or every 6 months, whichever occurs first.
| Parameter | Specification |
|---|---|
| a. Light source | Incandescent lamp operated at nominal rated voltage. |
| b. Spectral response of photocell | Photopic (daylight spectral response of the human eye—Citation 3). |
| c. Angle of view | 15° maximum total angle. |
| d. Angle of projection | 15° maximum total angle. |
| e. Calibration error | ±3% opacity, maximum. |
| f. Zero and span drift | ±1% opacity, 30 minutes. |
| g. Response time | 5 seconds. |
3.3.1 Calibration. The smoke meter is calibrated after allowing a minimum of 30 minutes warmup by alternately producing simulated opacity of 0 percent and 100 percent. When stable response at 0 percent or 100 percent is noted, the smoke meter is adjusted to produce an output of 0 percent or 100 percent, as appropriate. This calibration shall be repeated until stable 0 percent and 100 percent readings are produced without adjustment. Simulated 0 percent and 100 percent opacity values may be produced by alternately switching the power to the light source on and off while the smoke generator is not producing smoke.
3.3.2 Smoke Meter Evaluation. The smoke meter design and performance are to be evaluated as follows:
3.3.2.1 Light Source. Verify from manufacturer's data and from voltage measurements made at the lamp, as installed, that the lamp is operated within ±5 percent of the nominal rated voltage.
3.3.2.2 Spectral Response of Photocell. Verify from manufacturer's data that the photocell has a photopic response; i.e., the spectral sensitivity of the cell shall closely approximate the standard spectral-luminosity curve for photopic vision which is referenced in (b) of Table 9-1.
| Company | Observer | |
| Location | Type facility | |
| Test Number | Point of emissions | |
| Date |
| Hr. | Min. | Seconds | Steam plume (check if applicable) | Comments | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 15 | 30 | 45 | Attached | Detached | |||
| 0 | ||||||||
| 1 | ||||||||
| 2 | ||||||||
| 3 | ||||||||
| 4 | ||||||||
| 5 | ||||||||
| 6 | ||||||||
| 7 | ||||||||
| 8 | ||||||||
| 9 | ||||||||
| 10 | ||||||||
| 11 | ||||||||
| 12 | ||||||||
| 13 | ||||||||
| 14 | ||||||||
| 15 | ||||||||
| 16 | ||||||||
| 17 | ||||||||
| 18 | ||||||||
| 19 | ||||||||
| 20 | ||||||||
| 21 | ||||||||
| 22 | ||||||||
| 23 | ||||||||
| 24 | ||||||||
| 25 | ||||||||
| 26 | ||||||||
| 27 | ||||||||
| 28 | ||||||||
| 29 |
| Company | Observer | |
| Location | Type facility | |
| Test Number | Point of emissions | |
| Date |
| Hr. | Min. | Seconds | Steam plume (check if applicable) | Comments | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 0 | 15 | 30 | 45 | Attached | Detached | |||
| 30 | ||||||||
| 31 | ||||||||
| 32 | ||||||||
| 33 | ||||||||
| 34 | ||||||||
| 35 | ||||||||
| 36 | ||||||||
| 37 | ||||||||
| 38 | ||||||||
| 39 | ||||||||
| 40 | ||||||||
| 41 | ||||||||
| 42 | ||||||||
| 43 | ||||||||
| 44 | ||||||||
| 45 | ||||||||
| 46 | ||||||||
| 47 | ||||||||
| 48 | ||||||||
| 49 | ||||||||
| 50 | ||||||||
| 51 | ||||||||
| 52 | ||||||||
| 53 | ||||||||
| 54 | ||||||||
| 55 | ||||||||
| 56 | ||||||||
| 57 | ||||||||
| 58 | ||||||||
| 59 |
3.3.2.3 Angle of View. Check construction geometry to ensure that the total angle of view of the smoke plume, as seen by the photocell, does not exceed 15°. The total angle of view may be calculated from: θ = 2 tan−1d/2L, where θ = total angle of view; d = the sum of the photocell diameter + the diameter of the limiting aperture; and L = the distance from the photocell to the limiting aperture. The limiting aperture is the point in the path between the photocell and the smoke plume where the angle of view is most restricted. In smoke generator smoke meters this is normally an orifice plate.
3.3.2.4 Angle of Projection. Check construction geometry to ensure that the total angle of projection of the lamp on the smoke plume does not exceed 15°. The total angle of projection may be calculated from: θ = 2 tan−1d/2L, where θ = total angle of projection; d = the sum of the length of the lamp filament + the diameter of the limiting aperture; and L = the distance from the lamp to the limiting aperture.
3.3.2.5 Calibration Error. Using neutral-density filters of known opacity, check the error between the actual response and the theoretical linear response of the smoke meter. This check is accomplished by first calibrating the smoke meter according to 3.3.1 and then inserting a series of three neutral-density filters of nominal opacity of 20, 50, and 75 percent in the smoke meter pathlength. Filters calibrated within ±2 percent shall be used. Care should be taken when inserting the filters to prevent stray light from affecting the meter. Make a total of five nonconsecutive readings for each filter. The maximum error on any one reading shall be 3 percent opacity.
3.3.2.6 Zero and Span Drift. Determine the zero and span drift by calibrating and operating the smoke generator in a normal manner over a 1-hour period. The drift is measured by checking the zero and span at the end of this period.
3.3.2.7 Response Time. Determine the response time by producing the series of five simulated 0 percent and 100 percent opacity values and observing the time required to reach stable response. Opacity values of 0 percent and 100 percent may be simulated by alternately switching the power to the light source off and on while the smoke generator is not operating.
4. Bibliography
1. Air Pollution Control District Rules and Regulations, Los Angeles County Air Pollution Control District, Regulation IV, Prohibitions, Rule 50.
2. Weisburd, Melvin I., Field Operations and Enforcement Manual for Air, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. APTD-1100, August 1972, pp. 4.1-4.36.
3. Condon, E.U., and Odishaw, H., Handbook of Physics, McGraw-Hill Co., New York, NY, 1958, Table 3.1, p. 6-52.
Alternate Method 1—Determination of the Opacity of Emissions From Stationary Sources Remotely by Lidar
This alternate method provides the quantitative determination of the opacity of an emissions plume remotely by a mobile lidar system (laser radar; Light Detection and Ranging). The method includes procedures for the calibration of the lidar and procedures to be used in the field for the lidar determination of plume opacity. The lidar is used to measure plume opacity during either day or nighttime hours because it contains its own pulsed light source or transmitter. The operation of the lidar is not dependent upon ambient lighting conditions (light, dark, sunny or cloudy).
The lidar mechanism or technique is applicable to measuring plume opacity at numerous wavelengths of laser radiation. However, the performance evaluation and calibration test results given in support of this method apply only to a lidar that employs a ruby (red light) laser [Reference 5.1].
1. Principle and Applicability
1.1 Principle. The opacity of visible emissions from stationary sources (stacks, roof vents, etc.) is measured remotely by a mobile lidar (laser radar).
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the remote measurement of the opacity of visible emissions from stationary sources during both nighttime and daylight conditions, pursuant to 40 CFR § 60.11(b). It is also applicable for the calibration and performance verification of the mobile lidar for the measurement of the opacity of emissions. A performance/design specification for a basic lidar system is also incorporated into this method.
1.3 Definitions.
Azimuth angle: The angle in the horizontal plane that designates where the laser beam is pointed. It is measured from an arbitrary fixed reference line in that plane.
Backscatter: The scattering of laser light in a direction opposite to that of the incident laser beam due to reflection from particulates along the beam's atmospheric path which may include a smoke plume.
Backscatter signal: The general term for the lidar return signal which results from laser light being backscattered by atmospheric and smoke plume particulates.
Convergence distance: The distance from the lidar to the point of overlap of the lidar receiver's field-of-view and the laser beam.
Elevation angle: The angle of inclination of the laser beam referenced to the horizontal plane.
Far region: The region of the atmosphere's path along the lidar line-of-sight beyond or behind the plume being measured.
Lidar: Acronym for Light Detection and Ranging.
Lidar range: The range or distance from the lidar to a point of interest along the lidar line-of-sight.
Near region: The region of the atmospheric path along the lidar line-of-sight between the lidar's convergence distance and the plume being measured.
Opacity: One minus the optical transmittance of a smoke plume, screen target, etc.
Pick interval: The time or range intervals in the lidar backscatter signal whose minimum average amplitude is used to calculate opacity. Two pick intervals are required, one in the near region and one in the far region.
Plume: The plume being measured by lidar.
Plume signal: The backscatter signal resulting from the laser light pulse passing through a plume.
1/R 2Correction: The correction made for the systematic decrease in lidar backscatter signal amplitude with range.
Reference signal: The backscatter signal resulting from the laser light pulse passing through ambient air.
Sample interval: The time period between successive samples for a digital signal or between successive measurements for an analog signal.
Signal spike: An abrupt, momentary increase and decrease in signal amplitude.
Source: The source being tested by lidar.
Time reference: The time (to) when the laser pulse emerges from the laser, used as the reference in all lidar time or range measurements.
2. Procedures
The mobile lidar calibrated in accordance with Paragraph 3 of this method shall use the following procedures for remotely measuring the opacity of stationary source emissions:
2.1 Lidar Position. The lidar shall be positioned at a distance from the plume sufficient to provide an unobstructed view of the source emissions. The plume must be at a range of at least 50 meters or three consecutive pick intervals (whichever is greater) from the lidar's transmitter/receiver convergence distance along the line-of-sight. The maximum effective opacity measurement distance of the lidar is a function of local atmospheric conditions, laser beam diameter, and plume diameter. The test position of the lidar shall be selected so that the diameter of the laser beam at the measurement point within the plume shall be no larger than three-fourths the plume diameter. The beam diameter is calculated by Equation (AM1-1):
D(lidar) = A + Rφ≤0.75 D(Plume) (AM1-1)
Where:
D(Plume) = diameter of the plume (cm),
φ = laser beam divergence measured in radians
R = range from the lidar to the source (cm)
D(Lidar) = diameter of the laser beam at range R (cm),
A = diameter of the laser beam or pulse where it leaves the laser.
The lidar range, R, is obtained by aiming and firing the laser at the emissions source structure immediately below the outlet. The range value is then determined from the backscatter signal which consists of a signal spike (return from source structure) and the atmospheric backscatter signal [Reference 5.1]. This backscatter signal should be recorded.
When there is more than one source of emissions in the immediate vicinity of the plume, the lidar shall be positioned so that the laser beam passes through only a single plume, free from any interference of the other plumes for a minimum of 50 meters or three consecutive pick intervals (whichever is greater) in each region before and beyond the plume along the line-of-sight (determined from the backscatter signals). The lidar shall initially be positioned so that its line-of-sight is approximately perpendicular to the plume.
When measuring the opacity of emissions from rectangular outlets (e.g., roof monitors, open baghouses, noncircular stacks, etc.), the lidar shall be placed in a position so that its line-of-sight is approximately perpendicular to the longer (major) axis of the outlet.
2.2 Lidar Operational Restrictions. The lidar receiver shall not be aimed within an angle of ±15° (cone angle) of the sun.
This method shall not be used to make opacity measurements if thunderstorms, snowstorms, hail storms, high wind, high-ambient dust levels, fog or other atmospheric conditions cause the reference signals to consistently exceed the limits specified in section 2.3.
2.3 Reference Signal Requirements. Once placed in its proper position for opacity measurement, the laser is aimed and fired with the line-of-sight near the outlet height and rotated horizontally to a position clear of the source structure and the associated plume. The backscatter signal obtained from this position is called the ambient-air or reference signal. The lidar operator shall inspect this signal [Section V of Reference 5.1] to: (1) determine if the lidar line-of-sight is free from interference from other plumes and from physical obstructions such as cables, power lines, etc., for a minimum of 50 meters or three consecutive pick intervals (whichever is greater) in each region before and beyond the plume, and (2) obtain a qualitative measure of the homogeneity of the ambient air by noting any signal spikes.
Should there be any signal spikes on the reference signal within a minimum of 50 meters or three consecutive pick intervals (whichever is greater) in each region before and beyond the plume, the laser shall be fired three more times and the operator shall inspect the reference signals on the display. If the spike(s) remains, the azimuth angle shall be changed and the above procedures conducted again. If the spike(s) disappears in all three reference signals, the lidar line-of-sight is acceptable if there is shot-to-shot consistency and there is no interference from other plumes.
Shot-to-shot consistency of a series of reference signals over a period of twenty seconds is verified in either of two ways. (1) The lidar operator shall observe the reference signal amplitudes. For shot-to-shot consistency the ratio of Rf to Rn [amplitudes of the near and far region pick intervals (Section 2.6.1)] shall vary by not more than ±6% between shots; or (2) the lidar operator shall accept any one of the reference signals and treat the other two as plume signals; then the opacity for each of the subsequent reference signals is calculated (Equation AM1-2). For shot-to-shot consistency, the opacity values shall be within ±3% of 0% opacity and the associated So values less than or equal to 8% (full scale) [Section 2.6].
If a set of reference signals fails to meet the requirements of this section, then all plume signals [Section 2.4] from the last set of acceptable reference signals to the failed set shall be discarded.
2.3.1 Initial and Final Reference Signals. Three reference signals shall be obtained within a 90-second time period prior to any data run. A final set of three reference signals shall be obtained within three (3) minutes after the completion of the same data run.
2.3.2 Temporal Criterion for Additional Reference Signals. An additional set of reference signals shall be obtained during a data run if there is a change in wind direction or plume drift of 30° or more from the direction that was prevalent when the last set of reference signals was obtained. An additional set of reference signals shall also be obtained if there is an increase in value of SIn (near region standard deviation, Equation AM1-5) or SIf (far region standard deviation, Equation AM1-6) that is greater than 6% (full scale) over the respective values calculated from the immediately previous plume signal, and this increase in value remains for 30 seconds or longer. An additional set of reference signals shall also be obtained if there is a change in amplitude in either the near or the far region of the plume signal, that is greater than 6% of the near signal amplitude and this change in amplitude remains for 30 seconds or more.
2.4 Plume Signal Requirements. Once properly aimed, the lidar is placed in operation with the nominal pulse or firing rate of six pulses/minute (1 pulse/10 seconds). The lidar operator shall observe the plume backscatter signals to determine the need for additional reference signals as required by section 2.3.2. The plume signals are recorded from lidar start to stop and are called a data run. The length of a data run is determined by operator discretion. Short-term stops of the lidar to record additional reference signals do not constitute the end of a data run if plume signals are resumed within 90 seconds after the reference signals have been recorded, and the total stop or interrupt time does not exceed 3 minutes.
2.4.1 Non-hydrated Plumes. The laser shall be aimed at the region of the plume which displays the greatest opacity. The lidar operator must visually verify that the laser is aimed clearly above the source exit structure.
2.4.2 Hydrated Plumes. The lidar will be used to measure the opacity of hydrated or so-called steam plumes. As listed in the reference method, there are two types, i.e., attached and detached steam plumes.
2.4.2.1 Attached Steam Plumes. When condensed water vapor is present within a plume, lidar opacity measurements shall be made at a point within the residual plume where the condensed water vapor is no longer visible. The laser shall be aimed into the most dense region (region of highest opacity) of the residual plume.
During daylight hours the lidar operator locates the most dense portion of the residual plume visually. During nighttime hours a high-intensity spotlight, night vision scope, or low light level TV, etc., can be used as an aid to locate the residual plume. If visual determination is ineffective, the lidar may be used to locate the most dense region of the residual plume by repeatedly measuring opacity, along the longitudinal axis or center of the plume from the emissions outlet to a point just beyond the steam plume. The lidar operator should also observe color differences and plume reflectivity to ensure that the lidar is aimed completely within the residual plume. If the operator does not obtain a clear indication of the location of the residual plume, this method shall not be used.
Once the region of highest opacity of the residual plume has been located, aiming adjustments shall be made to the laser line-of-sight to correct for the following: movement to the region of highest opacity out of the lidar line-of-sight (away from the laser beam) for more than 15 seconds, expansion of the steam plume (air temperature lowers and/or relative humidity increases) so that it just begins to encroach on the field-of-view of the lidar's optical telescope receiver, or a decrease in the size of the steam plume (air temperature higher and/or relative humidity decreases) so that regions within the residual plume whose opacity is higher than the one being monitored, are present.
2.4.2.2 Detached Steam Plumes. When the water vapor in a hydrated plume condenses and becomes visible at a finite distance from the stack or source emissions outlet, the opacity of the emissions shall be measured in the region of the plume clearly above the emissions outlet and below condensation of the water vapor.
During daylight hours the lidar operators can visually determine if the steam plume is detached from the stack outlet. During nighttime hours a high-intensity spotlight, night vision scope, low light level TV, etc., can be used as an aid in determining if the steam plume is detached. If visual determination is ineffective, the lidar may be used to determine if the steam plume is detached by repeatedly measuring plume opacity from the outlet to the steam plume along the plume's longitudinal axis or center line. The lidar operator should also observe color differences and plume reflectivity to detect a detached plume. If the operator does not obtain a clear indication of the location of the detached plume, this method shall not be used to make opacity measurements between the outlet and the detached plume.
Once the determination of a detached steam plume has been confirmed, the laser shall be aimed into the region of highest opacity in the plume between the outlet and the formation of the steam plume. Aiming adjustments shall be made to the lidar's line-of-sight within the plume to correct for changes in the location of the most dense region of the plume due to changes in wind direction and speed or if the detached steam plume moves closer to the source outlet encroaching on the most dense region of the plume. If the detached steam plume should move too close to the source outlet for the lidar to make interference-free opacity measurements, this method shall not be used.
2.5 Field Records. In addition to the recording recommendations listed in other sections of this method the following records should be maintained. Each plume measured should be uniquely identified. The name of the facility, type of facility, emission source type, geographic location of the lidar with respect to the plume, and plume characteristics should be recorded. The date of the test, the time period that a source was monitored, the time (to the nearest second) of each opacity measurement, and the sample interval should also be recorded. The wind speed, wind direction, air temperature, relative humidity, visibility (measured at the lidar's position), and cloud cover should be recorded at the beginning and end of each time period for a given source. A small sketch depicting the location of the laser beam within the plume should be recorded.
If a detached or attached steam plume is present at the emissions source, this fact should be recorded. Figures AM1-I and AM1-II are examples of logbook forms that may be used to record this type of data. Magnetic tape or paper tape may also be used to record data.
2.6 Opacity Calculation and Data Analysis. Referring to the reference signal and plume signal in Figure AM1-III, the measured opacity (Op) in percent for each lidar measurement is calculated using Equation AM1-2. (Op = 1−Tp; Tp is the plume transmittance.)
Where:
In = near-region pick interval signal amplitude, plume signal, 1/R 2 corrected,
If = far-region pick interval signal amplitude, plume signal, 1/R 2 corrected,
Rn = near-region pick interval signal amplitude, reference signal, 1/R 2 corrected, and
Rf = far-region pick interval signal amplitude, reference signal, 1/R 2 corrected.
The 1/R 2 correction to the plume and reference signal amplitudes is made by multiplying the amplitude for each successive sample interval from the time reference, by the square of the lidar time (or range) associated with that sample interval [Reference 5.1].
The first step in selecting the pick intervals for Equation AM1-2 is to divide the plume signal amplitude by the reference signal amplitude at the same respective ranges to obtain a “normalized” signal. The pick intervals selected using this normalized signal, are a minimum of 15 m (100 nanoseconds) in length and consist of at least 5 contiguous sample intervals. In addition, the following criteria, listed in order of importance, govern pick interval selection. (1) The intervals shall be in a region of the normalized signal where the reference signal meets the requirements of section 2.3 and is everywhere greater than zero. (2) The intervals (near and far) with the minimum average amplitude are chosen. (3) If more than one interval with the same minimum average amplitude is found, the interval closest to the plume is chosen. (4) The standard deviation, So, for the calculated opacity shall be 8% or less. (So is calculated by Equation AM1-7).
If So is greater than 8%, then the far pick interval shall be changed to the next interval of minimal average amplitude. If So is still greater than 8%, then this procedure is repeated for the far pick interval. This procedure may be repeated once again for the near pick interval, but if So remains greater than 8%, the plume signal shall be discarded.
The reference signal pick intervals, Rn and Rf, must be chosen over the same time interval as the plume signal pick intervals, In and If, respectively [Figure AM1-III]. Other methods of selecting pick intervals may be used if they give equivalent results. Field-oriented examples of pick interval selection are available in Reference 5.1.
The average amplitudes for each of the pick intervals, In, If, Rn, Rf, shall be calculated by averaging the respective individual amplitudes of the sample intervals from the plume signal and the associated reference signal each corrected for 1/R 2. The amplitude of In shall be calculated according to Equation (AM-3).
Where:
Ini = the amplitude of the ith sample interval (near-region),
Σ = sum of the individual amplitudes for the sample intervals,
m = number of sample intervals in the pick interval, and
In = average amplitude of the near-region pick interval.
Similarly, the amplitudes for If, Rn, and Rf are calculated with the three expressions in Equation (AM1-4).
The standard deviation, SIn, of the set of amplitudes for the near-region pick interval, In, shall be calculated using Equation (AM1-5).
Similarly, the standard deviations SIf, SRn, and SRf are calculated with the three expressions in Equation (AM1-6).
The standard deviation, So, for each associated opacity value, Op, shall be calculated using Equation (AM1-7).
The calculated values of In, If, Rn, Rf, SIn, SIf, SRn, SRf, Op, and So should be recorded. Any plume signal with an So greater than 8% shall be discarded.
2.6.1 Azimuth Angle Correction. If the azimuth angle correction to opacity specified in this section is performed, then the elevation angle correction specified in section 2.6.2 shall not be performed. When opacity is measured in the residual region of an attached steam plume, and the lidar line-of-sight is not perpendicular to the plume, it may be necessary to correct the opacity measured by the lidar to obtain the opacity that would be measured on a path perpendicular to the plume. The following method, or any other method which produces equivalent results, shall be used to determine the need for a correction, to calculate the correction, and to document the point within the plume at which the opacity was measured.
Figure AM1-IV(b) shows the geometry of the opacity correction. L′ is the path through the plume along which the opacity measurement is made. P′ is the path perpendicular to the plume at the same point. The angle ε is the angle between L′ and the plume center line. The angle (π/2-ε), is the angle between the L′ and P′. The measured opacity, Op, measured along the path L′ shall be corrected to obtain the corrected opacity, Opc, for the path P′, using Equation (AM1-8).
The correction in Equation (AM1-8) shall be performed if the inequality in Equation (AM1-9) is true.
Figure AM1-IV(a) shows the geometry used to calculate ε and the position in the plume at which the lidar measurement is made. This analysis assumes that for a given lidar measurement, the range from the lidar to the plume, the elevation angle of the lidar from the horizontal plane, and the azimuth angle of the lidar from an arbitrary fixed reference in the horizontal plane can all be obtained directly.
Rs = range from lidar to source*
βs = elevation angle of Rs*
Rp = range from lidar to plume at the opacity measurement point*
βp = elevation angle of Rp*
Ra = range from lidar to plume at some arbitrary point, Pa, so the drift angle of the plume can be determined*
βa = elevation angle of Ra*
α = angle between Rp and Ra
R′s = projection of Rs in the horizontal plane
R′p = projection of Rp in the horizontal plane
R′a = projection of Ra in the horizontal plane
ψ′ = angle between R′s and R′p*
α′ = angle between R′p and R′a*
R≤ = distance from the source to the opacity measurement point projected in the horizontal plane
Rθ = distance from opacity measurement point Pp to the point in the plume Pa.
The correction angle ε shall be determined using Equation AM1-10.
*Obtained directly from lidar. These values should be recorded.
Where:
α = Cos−1 (Cosβp Cosβa Cosα′ + Sinβp Sinβa),
and
Rθ = (Rp2 + Ra2 − 2 Rp Ra Cosα) 1/2
R≤, the distance from the source to the opacity measurement point projected in the horizontal plane, shall be determined using Equation AM1-11.
Where:
R′s = Rs Cos βs, and
R′p = Rp Cos βp.
In the special case where the plume centerline at the opacity measurement point is horizontal, parallel to the ground, Equation AM1-12 may be used to determine ε instead of Equation AM1-10.
Where:
R″s = (R′ 2s + Rp 2Sin 2βp)1/2.
If the angle ε is such that ε≤30° or ε ≥150°, the azimuth angle correction shall not be performed and the associated opacity value shall be discarded.
2.6.2 Elevation Angle Correction. An individual lidar-measured opacity, Op, shall be corrected for elevation angle if the laser elevation or inclination angle, βp [Figure AM1-V], is greater than or equal to the value calculated in Equation AM1-13.
The measured opacity, Op, along the lidar path L, is adjusted to obtain the corrected opacity, Opc, for the actual plume (horizontal) path, P, by using Equation (AM1-14).
Where:
βp = lidar elevation or inclination angle,
Op = measured opacity along path L, and
Opc = corrected opacity for the actual plume thickness P.
The values for βp, Op and Opc should be recorded.
2.6.3 Determination of Actual Plume Opacity. Actual opacity of the plume shall be determined by Equation AM1-15.
2.6.4 Calculation of Average Actual Plume Opacity. The average of the actual plume opacity, Opa, shall be calculated as the average of the consecutive individual actual opacity values, Opa, by Equation AM1-16.
Where:
(Opa)k = the kth actual opacity value in an averaging interval containing n opacity values; k is a summing index.
Σ = the sum of the individual actual opacity values.
n = the number of individual actual opacity values contained in the averaging interval.
Opa = average actual opacity calculated over the averaging interval.
3. Lidar Performance Verification
The lidar shall be subjected to two types of performance verifications that shall be performed in the field. The annual calibration, conducted at least once a year, shall be used to directly verify operation and performance of the entire lidar system. The routine verification, conducted for each emission source measured, shall be used to insure proper performance of the optical receiver and associated electronics.
3.1 Annual Calibration Procedures. Either a plume from a smoke generator or screen targets shall be used to conduct this calibration.
If the screen target method is selected, five screens shall be fabricated by placing an opaque mesh material over a narrow frame (wood, metal extrusion, etc.). The screen shall have a surface area of at least one square meter. The screen material should be chosen for precise optical opacities of about 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%. Opacity of each target shall be optically determined and should be recorded. If a smoke generator plume is selected, it shall meet the requirements of section 3.3 of Reference Method 9. This calibration shall be performed in the field during calm (as practical) atmospheric conditions. The lidar shall be positioned in accordance with section 2.1.
The screen targets must be placed perpendicular to and coincident with the lidar line-of-sight at sufficient height above the ground (suggest about 30 ft) to avoid ground-level dust contamination. Reference signals shall be obtained just prior to conducting the calibration test.
The lidar shall be aimed through the center of the plume within 1 stack diameter of the exit, or through the geometric center of the screen target selected. The lidar shall be set in operation for a 6-minute data run at a nominal pulse rate of 1 pulse every 10 seconds. Each backscatter return signal and each respective opacity value obtained from the smoke generator transmissometer, shall be obtained in temporal coincidence. The data shall be analyzed and reduced in accordance with section 2.6 of this method. This calibration shall be performed for 0% (clean air), and at least five other opacities (nominally 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%).
The average of the lidar opacity values obtained during a 6-minute calibration run shall be calculated and should be recorded. Also the average of the opacity values obtained from the smoke generator transmissometer for the same 6-minute run shall be calculated and should be recorded.
Alternate calibration procedures that do not meet the above requirements but produce equivalent results may be used.
3.2 Routine Verification Procedures. Either one of two techniques shall be used to conduct this verification. It shall be performed at least once every 4 hours for each emission source measured. The following parameters shall be directly verified.
1) The opacity value of 0% plus a minimum of 5 (nominally 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80%) opacity values shall be verified through the PMT detector and data processing electronics.
2) The zero-signal level (receiver signal with no optical signal from the source present) shall be inspected to insure that no spurious noise is present in the signal. With the entire lidar receiver and analog/digital electronics turned on and adjusted for normal operating performance, the following procedures shall be used for Techniques 1 and 2, respectively.
3.2.1 Procedure for Technique 1. This test shall be performed with no ambient or stray light reaching the PMT detector. The narrow band filter (694.3 nanometers peak) shall be removed from its position in front of the PMT detector. Neutral density filters of nominal opacities of 10, 20, 40, 60, and 80% shall be used. The recommended test configuration is depicted in Figure AM1-VI.
The zero-signal level shall be measured and should be recorded, as indicated in Figure AM1-VI(a). This simulated clear-air or 0% opacity value shall be tested in using the selected light source depicted in Figure AM1-VI(b).
The light source either shall be a continuous wave (CW) laser with the beam mechanically chopped or a light emitting diode controlled with a pulse generator (rectangular pulse). (A laser beam may have to be attenuated so as not to saturate the PMT detector). This signal level shall be measured and should be recorded. The opacity value is calculated by taking two pick intervals [Section 2.6] about 1 microsecond apart in time and using Equation (AM1-2) setting the ratio Rn/Rf = 1. This calculated value should be recorded.
The simulated clear-air signal level is also employed in the optical test using the neutral density filters. Using the test configuration in Figure AM1-VI(c), each neutral density filter shall be separately placed into the light path from the light source to the PMT detector. The signal level shall be measured and should be recorded. The opacity value for each filter is calculated by taking the signal level for that respective filter (If), dividing it by the 0% opacity signal level (In) and performing the remainder of the calculation by Equation (AM1-2) with Rn/Rf = 1. The calculated opacity value for each filter should be recorded.
The neutral density filters used for Technique 1 shall be calibrated for actual opacity with accuracy of ±2% or better. This calibration shall be done monthly while the filters are in use and the calibrated values should be recorded.
3.2.2 Procedure for Technique 2. An optical generator (built-in calibration mechanism) that contains a light-emitting diode (red light for a lidar containing a ruby laser) is used. By injecting an optical signal into the lidar receiver immediately ahead of the PMT detector, a backscatter signal is simulated. With the entire lidar receiver electronics turned on and adjusted for normal operating performance, the optical generator is turned on and the simulation signal (corrected for 1/R 2) is selected with no plume spike signal and with the opacity value equal to 0%. This simulated clear-air atmospheric return signal is displayed on the system's video display. The lidar operator then makes any fine adjustments that may be necessary to maintain the system's normal operating range.
The opacity values of 0% and the other five values are selected one at a time in any order. The simulated return signal data should be recorded. The opacity value shall be calculated. This measurement/calculation shall be performed at least three times for each selected opacity value. While the order is not important, each of the opacity values from the optical generator shall be verified. The calibrated optical generator opacity value for each selection should be recorded.
The optical generator used for Technique 2 shall be calibrated for actual opacity with an accuracy of ±1% or better. This calibration shall be done monthly while the generator is in use and calibrated value should be recorded.
Alternate verification procedures that do not meet the above requirements but produce equivalent results may be used.
3.3 Deviation. The permissible error for the annual calibration and routine verification are:
3.3.1 Annual Calibration Deviation.
3.3.1.1 Smoke Generator. If the lidar-measured average opacity for each data run is not within ±5% (full scale) of the respective smoke generator's average opacity over the range of 0% through 80%, then the lidar shall be considered out of calibration.
3.3.1.2 Screens. If the lidar-measured average opacity for each data run is not within ±3% (full scale) of the laboratory-determined opacity for each respective simulation screen target over the range of 0% through 80%, then the lidar shall be considered out of calibration.
3.3.2 Routine Verification Error. If the lidar-measured average opacity for each neutral density filter (Technique 1) or optical generator selection (Technique 2) is not within ±3% (full scale) of the respective laboratory calibration value then the lidar shall be considered non-operational.
4. Performance/Design Specification for Basic Lidar System
4.1 Lidar Design Specification. The essential components of the basic lidar system are a pulsed laser (transmitter), optical receiver, detector, signal processor, recorder, and an aiming device that is used in aiming the lidar transmitter and receiver. Figure AM1-VII shows a functional block diagram of a basic lidar system.
4.2 Performance Evaluation Tests. The owner of a lidar system shall subject such a lidar system to the performance verification tests described in section 3, prior to first use of this method. The annual calibration shall be performed for three separate, complete runs and the results of each should be recorded. The requirements of section 3.3.1 must be fulfilled for each of the three runs.
Once the conditions of the annual calibration are fulfilled the lidar shall be subjected to the routine verification for three separate complete runs. The requirements of section 3.3.2 must be fulfilled for each of the three runs and the results should be recorded. The Administrator may request that the results of the performance evaluation be submitted for review.
5. References
5.1 The Use of Lidar for Emissions Source Opacity Determination, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Enforcement Investigations Center, Denver, CO. EPA-330/1-79-003-R, Arthur W. Dybdahl, current edition [NTIS No. PB81-246662].
5.2 Field Evaluation of Mobile Lidar for the Measurement of Smoke Plume Opacity, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, National Enforcement Investigations Center, Denver, CO. EPA/NEIC-TS-128, February 1976.
5.3 Remote Measurement of Smoke Plume Transmittance Using Lidar, C. S. Cook, G. W. Bethke, W. D. Conner (EPA/RTP). Applied Optics 11, pg 1742. August 1972.
5.4 Lidar Studies of Stack Plumes in Rural and Urban Environments, EPA-650/4-73-002, October 1973.
5.5 American National Standard for the Safe Use of Lasers ANSI Z 136.1-176, March 8, 1976.
5.6 U.S. Army Technical Manual TB MED 279, Control of Hazards to Health from Laser Radiation, February 1969.
5.7 Laser Institute of America Laser Safety Manual, 4th Edition.
5.8 U.S. Department of Health, Education and Welfare, Regulations for the Administration and Enforcement of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968, January 1976.
5.9 Laser Safety Handbook, Alex Mallow, Leon Chabot, Van Nostrand Reinhold Co., 1978.
Method 10—Determination of Carbon Monoxide Emissions From Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 10?
Method 10 is a procedure for measuring carbon monoxide (CO) in stationary source emissions using a continuous instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known quality. You must document your adherence to these specific requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis. This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional test methods which are found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 1—Sample and Velocity Traverses for Stationary Sources.
(b) Method 4—Determination of Moisture Content in Stack Gases.
(c) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure).
1.1 Analytes. What does this method determine? This method measures the concentration of carbon monoxide.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| CO | 630-08-0 | Typically <2% of Calibration Span. |
1.2 Applicability. When is this method required? The use of Method 10 may be required by specific New Source Performance Standards, State Implementation Plans, and permits where CO concentrations in stationary source emissions must be measured, either to determine compliance with an applicable emission standard or to conduct performance testing of a continuous emission monitoring system (CEMS). Other regulations may also require the use of Method 10.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Refer to section 1.3 of Method 7E.
2.0 Summary of Method
In this method, you continuously or intermittently sample the effluent gas and convey the sample to an analyzer that measures the concentration of CO. You must meet the performance requirements of this method to validate your data.
3.0 Definitions
Refer to section 3.0 of Method 7E for the applicable definitions.
4.0 Interferences
Substances having a strong absorption of infrared energy may interfere to some extent in some analyzers. Instrumental correction may be used to compensate for the interference. You may also use silica gel and ascarite traps to eliminate the interferences. If this option is used, correct the measured gas volume for the carbon dioxide (CO2) removed in the trap.
5.0 Safety
Refer to section 5.0 of Method 7E.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
What do I need for the measurement system?
6.1 Continuous Sampling. Figure 7E-1 of Method 7E is a schematic diagram of an acceptable measurement system. The components are the same as those in sections 6.1 and 6.2 of Method 7E, except that the CO analyzer described in section 6.2 of this method must be used instead of the analyzer described in section 6.2 of Method 7E. You must follow the noted specifications in section 6.1 of Method 7E except that the requirements to use stainless steel, Teflon, or non-reactive glass filters do not apply. Also, a heated sample line is not required to transport dry gases or for systems that measure the CO concentration on a dry basis.
6.2 Integrated Sampling.
6.2.1 Air-Cooled Condenser or Equivalent. To remove any excess moisture.
6.2.2 Valve. Needle valve, or equivalent, to adjust flow rate.
6.2.3 Pump. Leak-free diaphragm type, or equivalent, to transport gas.
6.2.4 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure a flow range from 0 to 1.0 liter per minute (0.035 cfm).
6.2.5 Flexible Bag. Tedlar, or equivalent, with a capacity of 60 to 90 liters (2 to 3 ft 3). (Verify through the manufacturer that the Tedlar alternative is suitable for CO and make this verified information available for inspection.) Leak-test the bag in the laboratory before using by evacuating with a pump followed by a dry gas meter. When the evacuation is complete, there should be no flow through the meter.
6.2.6 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or aluminum tank equipped with a pressure indicator with a minimum volume of 4 liters.
6.3 What analyzer must I use? You must use an instrument that continuously measures CO in the gas stream and meets the specifications in section 13.0. The dual-range analyzer provisions in section 6.2.8.1 of Method 7E apply.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Calibration Gas. What calibration gases do I need? Refer to section 7.1 of Method 7E for the calibration gas requirements.
7.2 Interference Check. What additional reagents do I need for the interference check? Use the appropriate test gases listed in Table 7E-3 of Method 7E (i.e., potential interferents, as identified by the instrument manufacturer) to conduct the interference check.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Emission Test Procedure
8.1 Sampling Site and Sampling Points. You must follow section 8.1 of Method 7E.
8.2 Initial Measurement System Performance Tests. You must follow the procedures in section 8.2 of Method 7E. If a dilution-type measurement system is used, the special considerations in section 8.3 of Method 7E also apply.
8.3 Interference Check. You must follow the procedures of section 8.2.7 of Method 7E.
8.4 Sample Collection.
8.4.1 Continuous Sampling. You must follow the procedures of section 8.4 of Method 7E.
8.4.2 Integrated Sampling. Evacuate the flexible bag or sample tank. Set up the equipment as shown in Figure 10-1 with the bag disconnected. Place the probe in the stack and purge the sampling line. Connect the bag, making sure that all connections are leak-free. Sample at a rate proportional to the stack velocity. If needed, the CO2 content of the gas may be determined by using the Method 3 integrated sample procedures, or by weighing an ascarite CO2 removal tube used and computing CO2 concentration from the gas volume sampled and the weight gain of the tube. Data may be recorded on a form similar to Table 10-1. If a sample tank is used for sample collection, follow procedures similar to those in sections 8.1.2, 8.2.3, 8.3, and 12.4 of Method 25 as appropriate to prepare the tank, conduct the sampling, and correct the measured sample concentration.
8.5 Post-Run System Bias Check, Drift Assessment, and Alternative Dynamic Spike Procedure. You must follow the procedures in sections 8.5 and 8.6 of Method 7E.
9.0 Quality Control
Follow the quality control procedures in section 9.0 of Method 7E.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Follow the procedures for calibration and standardization in section 10.0 of Method 7E.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
You must follow the procedures for calculations and data analysis in section 12.0 of Method 7E, as applicable, substituting CO for NOX as applicable.
12.1 Concentration Correction for CO2 Removal. Correct the CO concentration for CO2 removal (if applicable) using Eq. 10-1.
Where:
CAvg = Average gas concentration for the test run, ppm.
CCO stack = Average unadjusted stack gas CO concentration indicated by the data recorder for the test run, ppmv.
FCO2 = Volume fraction of CO2 in the sample, i.e., percent CO2 from Orsat analysis divided by 100.
13.0 Method Performance
The specifications for analyzer calibration error, system bias, drift, interference check, and alternative dynamic spike procedure are the same as in section 13.0 of Method 7E.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
The dynamic spike procedure and the manufacturer stability test are the same as in sections 16.1 and 16.3 of Method 7E
17.0 References
1. “EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards— September 1997 as amended, EPA-600/R-97/121
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Location: Date: | ||
| Test: Operator: | ||
| Clock Time | Rotameter Reading liters/min (cfm) | Comments |
Method 10A—Determination of Carbon Monoxide Emissions in Certifying Continuous Emission Monitoring Systems at Petroleum Refineries
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Carbon monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 | 3 ppmv |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of CO emissions at petroleum refineries. This method serves as the reference method in the relative accuracy test for nondispersive infrared (NDIR) CO continuous emission monitoring systems (CEMS) that are required to be installed in petroleum refineries on fluid catalytic cracking unit catalyst regenerators (§ 60.105(a)(2) of this part).
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack, passed through an alkaline permanganate solution to remove sulfur oxides and nitrogen oxides, and collected in a Tedlar or equivalent bag. (Verify through the manufacturer that the Tedlar alternative is suitable for NO and make this verified information available for inspection.) The CO concentration in the sample is measured spectrophotometrically using the reaction of CO with p-sulfaminobenzoic acid.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Sulfur oxides, nitric oxide, and other acid gases interfere with the colorimetric reaction. They are removed by passing the sampled gas through an alkaline potassium permanganate scrubbing solution. Carbon dioxide (CO2) does not interfere, but, because it is removed by the scrubbing solution, its concentration must be measured independently and an appropriate volume correction made to the sampled gas.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method. The analyzer users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedure.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train shown in Figure 10A-1 is required for sample collection. Component parts are described below:
6.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel, sheathed Pyrex glass, or equivalent, equipped with a glass wool plug to remove particulate matter.
6.1.2 Sample Conditioning System. Three Greenburg-Smith impingers connected in series with leak-free connections.
6.1.3 Pump. Leak-free pump with stainless steel and Teflon parts to transport sample at a flow rate of 300 ml/min (0.01 ft 3/min) to the flexible bag.
6.1.4 Surge Tank. Installed between the pump and the rate meter to eliminate the pulsation effect of the pump on the rate meter.
6.1.5 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure flow rate at 300 ml/min (0.01 ft 3/min). Calibrate according to section 10.2.
6.1.6 Flexible Bag. Tedlar, or equivalent, with a capacity of 10 liters (0.35 ft 3) and equipped with a sealing quick-connect plug. The bag must be leak-free according to section 8.1. For protection, it is recommended that the bag be enclosed within a rigid container.
6.1.7 Sample Tank. Stainless steel or aluminum tank equipped with a pressure indicator with a minimum volume of 10 liters.
6.1.8 Valves. Stainless-steel needle valve to adjust flow rate, and stainless-steel 3-way valve, or equivalent.
6.1.9 CO2 Analyzer. Fyrite, or equivalent, to measure CO2 concentration to within 0.5 percent.
6.1.10 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter, capable of measuring the sample volume under calibration conditions of 300 ml/min (0.01 ft 3/min) for 10 minutes.
6.1.11 Pressure Gauge. A water filled U-tube manometer, or equivalent, of about 30 cm (12 in.) to leak-check the flexible bag.
6.2 Sample Analysis.
6.2.1 Spectrophotometer. Single- or double-beam to measure absorbance at 425 and 600 nm. Slit width should not exceed 20 nm.
6.2.2 Spectrophotometer Cells. 1-cm pathlength.
6.2.3 Vacuum Gauge. U-tube mercury manometer, 1 meter (39 in.), with 1-mm divisions, or other gauge capable of measuring pressure to within 1 mm Hg.
6.2.4 Pump. Capable of evacuating the gas reaction bulb to a pressure equal to or less than 40 mm Hg absolute, equipped with coarse and fine flow control valves.
6.2.5 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 1 mm Hg.
6.2.6 Reaction Bulbs. Pyrex glass, 100-ml with Teflon stopcock (Figure 10A-2), leak-free at 40 mm Hg, designed so that 10 ml of the colorimetric reagent can be added and removed easily and accurately. Commercially available gas sample bulbs such as Supelco Catalog No. 2-2161 may also be used.
6.2.7 Manifold. Stainless steel, with connections for three reaction bulbs and the appropriate connections for the manometer and sampling bag as shown in Figure 10A-3.
6.2.8 Pipets. Class A, 10-ml size.
6.2.9 Shaker Table. Reciprocating-stroke type such as Eberbach Corporation, Model 6015. A rocking arm or rotary-motion type shaker may also be used. The shaker must be large enough to accommodate at least six gas sample bulbs simultaneously. It may be necessary to construct a table top extension for most commercial shakers to provide sufficient space for the needed bulbs (Figure 10A-4).
6.2.10 Valve. Stainless steel shut-off valve.
6.2.11 Analytical Balance. Capable of weighing to 0.1 mg.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents shall conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available; otherwise, the best available grade shall be used.
7.1 Sample Collection.
7.1.1 Water. Deionized distilled, to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the potassium permanganate test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted.
7.1.2 Alkaline Permanganate Solution, 0.25 M KMnO4/1.5 M Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Dissolve 40 g KMnO4 and 60 g NaOH in approximately 900 ml water, cool, and dilute to 1 liter.
7.2 Sample Analysis.
7.2.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.1.
7.2.2 1 M Sodium Hydroxide Solution. Dissolve 40 g NaOH in approximately 900 ml of water, cool, and dilute to 1 liter.
7.2.3 0.1 M NaOH Solution. Dilute 50 ml of the 1 M NaOH solution prepared in section 7.2.2 to 500 ml.
7.2.4 0.1 M Silver Nitrate (AgNO3) Solution. Dissolve 8.5 g AgNO3 in water, and dilute to 500 ml.
7.2.5 0.1 M Para-Sulfaminobenzoic Acid (p-SABA) Solution. Dissolve 10.0 g p-SABA in 0.1 M NaOH, and dilute to 500 ml with 0.1 M NaOH.
7.2.6 Colorimetric Solution. To a flask, add 100 ml of 0.1 M p-SABA solution and 100 ml of 0.1 M AgNO3 solution. Mix, and add 50 ml of 1 M NaOH with shaking. The resultant solution should be clear and colorless. This solution is acceptable for use for a period of 2 days.
7.2.7 Standard Gas Mixtures. Traceable to National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST) standards and containing between 50 and 1000 ppm CO in nitrogen. At least two concentrations are needed to span each calibration range used (Section 10.3). The calibration gases must be certified by the manufacturer to be within 2 percent of the specified concentrations.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sample Bag or Tank Leak-Checks. While a leak-check is required after bag or sample tank use, it should also be done before the bag or sample tank is used for sample collection. The tank should be leak-checked according to the procedure specified in section 8.1.2 of Method 25. The bag should be leak-checked in the inflated and deflated condition according to the following procedure:
8.1.1 Connect the bag to a water manometer, and pressurize the bag to 5 to 10 cm H2O (2 to 4 in H2O). Allow the bag to stand for 60 minutes. Any displacement in the water manometer indicates a leak.
8.1.2 Evacuate the bag with a leakless pump that is connected to the downstream side of a flow indicating device such as a 0- to 100-ml/min rotameter or an impinger containing water. When the bag is completely evacuated, no flow should be evident if the bag is leak-free.
8.2 Sample Collection.
8.2.1 Evacuate and leak check the sample bag or tank as specified in section 8.1. Assemble the apparatus as shown in Figure 10A-1. Loosely pack glass wool in the tip of the probe. Place 400 ml of alkaline permanganate solution in the first two impingers and 250 ml in the third. Connect the pump to the third impinger, and follow this with the surge tank, rate meter, and 3-way valve. Do not connect the bag or sample tank to the system at this time.
8.2.2 Leak-check the sampling system by plugging the probe inlet, opening the 3-way valve, and pulling a vacuum of approximately 250 mm Hg on the system while observing the rate meter for flow. If flow is indicated on the rate meter, do not proceed further until the leak is found and corrected.
8.2.3 Purge the system with sample gas by inserting the probe into the stack and drawing the sample gas through the system at 300 ml/min ±10 percent for 5 minutes. Connect the evacuated bag or sample tank to the system, record the starting time, and sample at a rate of 300 ml/min for 30 minutes, or until the bag is nearly full, or the sample tank reaches ambient pressure. Record the sampling time, the barometric pressure, and the ambient temperature. Purge the system as described above immediately before each sample.
8.2.4 The scrubbing solution is adequate for removing sulfur oxides and nitrogen oxides from 50 liters (1.8 ft 3) of stack gas when the concentration of each is less than 1,000 ppm and the CO2 concentration is less than 15 percent. Replace the scrubber solution after every fifth sample.
8.3 Carbon Dioxide Measurement. Measure the CO2 content in the stack to the nearest 0.5 percent each time a CO sample is collected. A simultaneous grab sample analyzed by the Fyrite analyzer is acceptable.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.1 | Sampling equipment leak-checks and calibration | Ensure accuracy and precision of sampling measurements. |
| 10.3 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Gas Bulb Calibration. Weigh the empty bulb to the nearest 0.1 g. Fill the bulb to the stopcock with water, and again weigh to the nearest 0.1 g. Subtract the tare weight, and calculate the volume in liters to three significant figures using the density of water at the measurement temperature. Record the volume on the bulb. Alternatively, mark an identification number on the bulb, and record the volume in a notebook.
10.2 Rate Meter Calibration. Assemble the system as shown in Figure 10A-1 (the impingers may be removed), and attach a volume meter to the probe inlet. Set the rotameter at 300 ml/min, record the volume meter reading, start the pump, and pull ambient air through the system for 10 minutes. Record the final volume meter reading. Repeat the procedure and average the results to determine the volume of gas that passed through the system.
10.3 Spectrophotometer Calibration Curve.
10.3.1 Collect the standards as described in section 8.2. Prepare at least two sets of three bulbs as standards to span the 0 to 400 or 400 to 1000 ppm range. If any samples span both concentration ranges, prepare a calibration curve for each range using separate reagent blanks. Prepare a set of three bulbs containing colorimetric reagent but no CO to serve as a reagent blank. Analyze each standard and blank according to the sample analysis procedure of section 11.0 Reject the standard set where any of the individual bulb absorbances differs from the set mean by more than 10 percent.
10.3.2 Calculate the average absorbance for each set (3 bulbs) of standards using Equation 10A-1 and Table 10A-1. Construct a graph of average absorbance for each standard against its corresponding concentration. Draw a smooth curve through the points. The curve should be linear over the two concentration ranges discussed in section 13.3.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Assemble the system shown in Figure 10A-3, and record the information required in Table 10A-1 as it is obtained. Pipet 10.0 ml of the colorimetric reagent into each gas reaction bulb, and attach the bulbs to the system. Open the stopcocks to the reaction bulbs, but leave the valve to the bag closed. Turn on the pump, fully open the coarse-adjust flow valve, and slowly open the fine-adjust valve until the pressure is reduced to at least 40 mm Hg. Now close the coarse adjust valve, and observe the manometer to be certain that the system is leak-free. Wait a minimum of 2 minutes. If the pressure has increased less than 1 mm Hg, proceed as described below. If a leak is present, find and correct it before proceeding further.
11.2 Record the vacuum pressure (Pv) to the nearest 1 mm Hg, and close the reaction bulb stopcocks. Open the bag valve, and allow the system to come to atmospheric pressure. Close the bag valve, open the pump coarse adjust valve, and evacuate the system again. Repeat this fill/evacuation procedure at least twice to flush the manifold completely. Close the pump coarse adjust valve, open the bag valve, and let the system fill to atmospheric pressure. Open the stopcocks to the reaction bulbs, and let the entire system come to atmospheric pressure. Close the bulb stopcocks, remove the bulbs, record the room temperature and barometric pressure (Pbar, to nearest mm Hg), and place the bulbs on the shaker table with their main axis either parallel to or perpendicular to the plane of the table top. Purge the bulb-filling system with ambient air for several minutes between samples. Shake the samples for exactly 2 hours.
11.3 Immediately after shaking, measure the absorbance (A) of each bulb sample at 425 nm if the concentration is less than or equal to 400 ppm CO or at 600 nm if the concentration is above 400 ppm.
11.4 Use a small portion of the sample to rinse a spectrophotometer cell several times before taking an aliquot for analysis. If one cell is used to analyze multiple samples, rinse the cell with deionized distilled water several times between samples. Prepare and analyze standards and a reagent blank as described in section 10.3. Use water as the reference. Reject the analysis if the blank absorbance is greater than 0.1. All conditions should be the same for analysis of samples and standards. Measure the absorbances as soon as possible after shaking is completed.
11.5 Determine the CO concentration of each bag sample using the calibration curve for the appropriate concentration range as discussed in section 10.3.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Carry out calculations retaining at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Sample absorbance, uncorrected for the reagent blank.
Ar = Absorbance of the reagent blank.
As = Average sample absorbance per liter, units/liter.
Bw = Moisture content in the bag sample.
C = CO concentration in the stack gas, dry basis, ppm.
Cb = CO concentration of the bag sample, dry basis, ppm.
Cg = CO concentration from the calibration curve, ppm.
F = Volume fraction of CO2 in the stack.
n = Number of reaction bulbs used per bag sample.
Pb = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pv = Residual pressure in the sample bulb after evacuation, mm Hg.
Pw = Vapor pressure of H2O in the bag (from Table 10A-2), mm Hg.
Vb = Volume of the sample bulb, liters.
Vr = Volume of reagent added to the sample bulb, 0.0100 liter.
12.2 Average Sample Absorbance per Liter. Calculate As for each gas bulb using Equation 10A-1, and record the value in Table 10A-1. Calculate the average As for each bag sample, and compare the three values to the average. If any single value differs by more than 10 percent from the average, reject this value, and calculate a new average using the two remaining values.
12.3 CO Concentration in the Bag. Calculate Cb using Equations 10A-2 and 10A-3. If condensate is visible in the bag, calculate Bw using Table 10A-2 and the temperature and barometric pressure in the analysis room. If condensate is not visible, calculate Bw using the temperature and barometric pressure at the sampling site.
12.4 CO Concentration in the Stack.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. The estimated intralaboratory standard deviation of the method is 3 percent of the mean for gas samples analyzed in duplicate in the concentration range of 39 to 412 ppm. The interlaboratory precision has not been established.
13.2 Accuracy. The method contains no significant biases when compared to an NDIR analyzer calibrated with NIST standards.
13.3 Range. Approximately 3 to 1800 ppm CO. Samples having concentrations below 400 ppm are analyzed at 425 nm, and samples having concentrations above 400 ppm are analyzed at 600 nm.
13.4 Sensitivity. The detection limit is 3 ppmv based on a change in concentration equal to three times the standard deviation of the reagent blank solution.
13.5 Stability. The individual components of the colorimetric reagent are stable for at least one month. The colorimetric reagent must be used within two days after preparation to avoid excessive blank correction. The samples in the bag should be stable for at least one week if the bags are leak-free.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Butler, F.E., J.E. Knoll, and M.R. Midgett. Development and Evaluation of Methods for Determining Carbon Monoxide Emissions. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. June 1985. 33 pp.
2. Ferguson, B.B., R.E. Lester, and W.J. Mitchell. Field Evaluation of Carbon Monoxide and Hydrogen Sulfide Continuous Emission Monitors at an Oil Refinery. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/4-82-054. August 1982. 100 pp.
3. Lambert, J.L., and R.E. Weins. Induced Colorimetric Method for Carbon Monoxide. Analytical Chemistry. 46(7):929-930. June 1974.
4. Levaggi, D.A., and M. Feldstein. The Colorimetric Determination of Low Concentrations of Carbon Monoxide. Industrial Hygiene Journal. 25:64-66. January-February 1964.
5. Repp, M. Evaluation of Continuous Monitors For Carbon Monoxide in Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/2-77-063. March 1977. 155 pp.
6. Smith, F., D.E. Wagoner, and R.P. Donovan. Guidelines for Development of a Quality Assurance Program: Volume VIII—Determination of CO Emissions from Stationary Sources by NDIR Spectrometry. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-650/4-74-005-h. February 1975. 96 pp.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
| Sample No./type |
Room temp °C |
Stack %CO2 |
Bulb No. |
Bulb vol. liters |
Reagent vol. in bulb, liter |
Partial pressure of gas in bulb, mm Hg |
Pb, mm Hg |
Shaking time, min |
Abs versus water |
A-Ar | As | Avg As |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| blank | ||||||||||||
| Std. 1 | ||||||||||||
| Std. 2 | ||||||||||||
| Sample 1 | ||||||||||||
| Sample 2 | ||||||||||||
| Sample 3 |
| Temperature °C | Vapor pressure of H2 O, mm Hg |
Temperature °C | Vapor pressure of H2, mm Hg |
|---|---|---|---|
| 4 | 6.1 | 18 | 15.5 |
| 6 | 7.0 | 20 | 17.5 |
| 8 | 8.0 | 22 | 19.8 |
| 10 | 9.2 | 24 | 22.4 |
| 12 | 10.5 | 26 | 25.2 |
| 14 | 12.0 | 28 | 28.3 |
| 16 | 13.6 | 30 | 31.8 |
Method 10B—Determination of Carbon Monoxide Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Carbon monoxide (CO) | 630-08-0 | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method applies to the measurement of CO emissions at petroleum refineries and from other sources when specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted from the sampling point, passed through a conditioning system to remove interferences, and collected in a Tedlar or equivalent bag. (Verify through the manufacturer that the Tedlar alternative is suitable for NO and make this verifying information available for inspection.) The CO is separated from the sample by gas chromatography (GC) and catalytically reduced to methane (CH4) which is determined by flame ionization detection (FID). The analytical portion of this method is identical to applicable sections in Method 25 detailing CO measurement.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Carbon dioxide (CO2) and organics potentially can interfere with the analysis. Most of the CO2 is removed from the sample by the alkaline permanganate conditioning system; any residual CO2 and organics are separated from the CO by GC.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method. The analyzer users manual should be consulted for specific precautions concerning the analytical procedure.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 10A, section 6.1 (paragraphs 6.1.1 through 6.1.11).
6.2 Sample Analysis. A GC/FID analyzer, capable of quantifying CO in the sample and consisting of at least the following major components, is required for sample analysis. [Alternatively, complete Method 25 analytical systems (Method 25, section 6.3) are acceptable alternatives when calibrated for CO and operated in accordance with the Method 25 analytical procedures (Method 25, section 11.0).]
6.2.1 Separation Column. A column capable of separating CO from CO2 and organic compounds that may be present. A 3.2-mm ( 1/8-in.) OD stainless steel column packed with 1.7 m (5.5 ft.) of 60/80 mesh Carbosieve S-II (available from Supelco) has been used successfully for this purpose.
6.2.2 Reduction Catalyst. Same as in Method 25, section 6.3.1.2.
6.2.3 Sample Injection System. Same as in Method 25, Section 6.3.1.4, equipped to accept a sample line from the bag.
6.2.4 Flame Ionization Detector. Meeting the linearity specifications of section 10.3 and having a minimal instrument range of 10 to 1,000 ppm CO.
6.2.5 Data Recording System. Analog strip chart recorder or digital integration system, compatible with the FID, for permanently recording the analytical results.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 10A, section 7.1.
7.2 Sample Analysis.
7.2.1 Carrier, Fuel, and Combustion Gases. Same as in Method 25, sections 7.2.1, 7.2.2, and 7.2.3, respectively.
7.2.2 Calibration Gases. Three standard gases with nominal CO concentrations of 20, 200, and 1,000 ppm CO in nitrogen. The calibration gases shall be certified by the manufacturer to be ±2 percent of the specified concentrations.
7.2.3 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check Calibration Gas. Standard CH4 gas with a nominal concentration of 1,000 ppm in air.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as in Method 10A, section 8.0.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.0 | Sample bag/sampling system leak-checks | Ensures that negative bias introduced through leakage is minimized. |
| 10.1 | Carrier gas blank check | Ensures that positive bias introduced by contamination of carrier gas is less than 5 ppmv. |
| 10.2 | Reduction catalyst efficiency check | Ensures that negative bias introduced by inefficient reduction catalyst is less than 5 percent. |
| 10.3 | Analyzer calibration | Ensures linearity of analyzer response to standards. |
| 11.2 | Triplicate sample analyses | Ensures precision of analytical results. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Carrier Gas Blank Check. Analyze each new tank of carrier gas with the GC analyzer according to section 11.2 to check for contamination. The corresponding concentration must be less than 5 ppm for the tank to be acceptable for use.
10.2 Reduction Catalyst Efficiency Check. Prior to initial use, the reduction catalyst shall be tested for reduction efficiency. With the heated reduction catalyst bypassed, make triplicate injections of the 1,000 ppm CH4 gas (Section 7.2.3) to calibrate the analyzer. Repeat the procedure using 1,000 ppm CO gas (Section 7.2.2) with the catalyst in operation. The reduction catalyst operation is acceptable if the CO response is within 5 percent of the certified gas value.
10.3 Analyzer Calibration. Perform this test before the system is first placed into operation. With the reduction catalyst in operation, conduct a linearity check of the analyzer using the standards specified in section 7.2.2. Make triplicate injections of each calibration gas, and then calculate the average response factor (area/ppm) for each gas, as well as the overall mean of the response factor values. The instrument linearity is acceptable if the average response factor of each calibration gas is within 2.5 percent of the overall mean value and if the relative standard deviation (calculated in section 12.8 of Method 25) for each set of triplicate injections is less than 2 percent. Record the overall mean of the response factor values as the calibration response factor (R).
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Preparation for Analysis. Before putting the GC analyzer into routine operation, conduct the calibration procedures listed in section 10.0. Establish an appropriate carrier flow rate and detector temperature for the specific instrument used.
11.2 Sample Analysis. Purge the sample loop with sample, and then inject the sample. Analyze each sample in triplicate, and calculate the average sample area (A). Determine the bag CO concentration according to section 12.2.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
Carry out calculations retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off results only after the final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Average sample area.
Bw = Moisture content in the bag sample, fraction.
C = CO concentration in the stack gas, dry basis, ppm.
Cb = CO concentration in the bag sample, dry basis, ppm.
F = Volume fraction of CO2 in the stack, fraction.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pw = Vapor pressure of the H2O in the bag (from Table 10A-2, Method 10A), mm Hg.
R = Mean calibration response factor, area/ppm.
12.2 CO Concentration in the Bag. Calculate Cb using Equations 10B-1 and 10B-2. If condensate is visible in the bag, calculate Bw using Table 10A-2 of Method 10A and the temperature and barometric pressure in the analysis room. If condensate is not visible, calculate Bw using the temperature and barometric pressure at the sampling site.
12.3 CO Concentration in the Stack
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as in Method 25, section 16.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Butler, F.E, J.E. Knoll, and M.R. Midgett. Development and Evaluation of Methods for Determining Carbon Monoxide Emissions. Quality Assurance Division, Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. June 1985. 33 pp.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-5 to Part 60—Test Methods 11 through 15A
Method 11—Determination of hydrogen sulfide content of fuel gas streams in petroleum refineries
Method 12—Determination of inorganic lead emissions from stationary sources
Method 13A—Determination of total fluoride emissions from stationary sources—SPADNS zirconium lake method
Method 13B—Determination of total fluoride emissions from stationary sources—Specific ion electrode method
Method 14—Determination of fluoride emissions from potroom roof monitors for primary aluminum plants
Method 14A—Determination of Total Fluoride Emissions from Selected Sources at Primary Aluminum Production Facilities
Method 15—Determination of hydrogen sulfide, carbonyl sulfide, and carbon disulfide emissions from stationary sources
Method 15A—Determination of total reduced sulfur emissions from sulfur recovery plants in petroleum refineries
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 11—Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide Content of Fuel Gas Streams in Petroleum Refineries
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Hydrogen sulfide (H2 S) | 7783-06-4 | 8 mg/m3—740 mg/m3, (6 ppm—520 ppm). |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of the H2S content of fuel gas streams at petroleum refineries.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A sample is extracted from a source and passed through a series of midget impingers containing a cadmium sulfate (CdSO4) solution; H2S is absorbed, forming cadmium sulfide (CdS). The latter compound is then measured iodometrically.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Any compound that reduces iodine (I2) or oxidizes the iodide ion will interfere in this procedure, provided it is collected in the CdSO4 impingers. Sulfur dioxide in concentrations of up to 2,600 mg/m 3 is removed with an impinger containing a hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) solution. Thiols precipitate with H2S. In the absence of H2S, only traces of thiols are collected. When methane-and ethane-thiols at a total level of 300 mg/m 3 are present in addition to H2S, the results vary from 2 percent low at an H2S concentration of 400 mg/m 3 to 14 percent high at an H2S concentration of 100 mg/m 3. Carbonyl sulfide at a concentration of 20 percent does not interfere. Certain carbonyl-containing compounds react with iodine and produce recurring end points. However, acetaldehyde and acetone at concentrations of 1 and 3 percent, respectively, do not interfere.
4.2 Entrained H2O2 produces a negative interference equivalent to 100 percent of that of an equimolar quantity of H2S. Avoid the ejection of H2O2 into the CdSO4 impingers.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide. Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. 30% H2O2 is a strong oxidizing agent. Avoid contact with skin, eyes, and combustible material. Wear gloves when handling.
5.2.2 Hydrochloric Acid. Highly toxic. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be lethal in minutes. Will react with metals, producing hydrogen.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The following items are needed for sample collection:
6.1.1 Sampling Line. Teflon tubing, 6- to 7- mm ( 1/4-in.) ID, to connect the sampling train to the sampling valve.
6.1.2 Impingers. Five midget impingers, each with 30-ml capacity. The internal diameter of the impinger tip must be 1 mm ±0.05 mm. The impinger tip must be positioned 4 to 6 mm from the bottom of the impinger.
6.1.3 Tubing. Glass or Teflon connecting tubing for the impingers.
6.1.4 Ice Water Bath. To maintain absorbing solution at a low temperature.
6.1.5 Drying Tube. Tube packed with 6- to 16- mesh indicating-type silica gel, or equivalent, to dry the gas sample and protect the meter and pump. If the silica gel has been used previously, dry at 175 °C (350 °F) for 2 hours. New silica gel may be used as received. Alternatively, other types of desiccants (equivalent or better) may be used, subject to approval of the Administrator.
6.1.6 Sampling Valve. Needle valve, or equivalent, to adjust gas flow rate. Stainless steel or other corrosion-resistant material.
6.1.7 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter (DGM), sufficiently accurate to measure the sample volume within 2 percent, calibrated at the selected flow rate (about 1.0 liter/min) and conditions actually encountered during sampling. The meter shall be equipped with a temperature sensor (dial thermometer or equivalent) capable of measuring temperature to within 3 °C (5.4 °F). The gas meter should have a petcock, or equivalent, on the outlet connector which can be closed during the leak-check. Gas volume for one revolution of the meter must not be more than 10 liters.
6.1.8 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, to measure flow rates in the range from 0.5 to 2 liters/min (1 to 4 ft 3/hr).
6.1.9 Graduated Cylinder. 25-ml size.
6.1.10 Barometer. Mercury, aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in. Hg). In many cases, the barometric reading may be obtained from a nearby National Weather Service station, in which case, the station value (which is the absolute barometric pressure) shall be requested and an adjustment for elevation differences between the weather station and the sampling point shall be applied at a rate of minus 2.5 mm Hg (0.1 in Hg) per 30 m (100 ft) elevation increase or vice-versa for elevation decrease.
6.1.11 U-tube Manometer. 0-; to 30-cm water column, for leak-check procedure.
6.1.12 Rubber Squeeze Bulb. To pressurize train for leak-check.
6.1.13 Tee, Pinchclamp, and Connecting Tubing. For leak-check.
6.1.14 Pump. Diaphragm pump, or equivalent. Insert a small surge tank between the pump and rate meter to minimize the pulsation effect of the diaphragm pump on the rate meter. The pump is used for the air purge at the end of the sample run; the pump is not ordinarily used during sampling, because fuel gas streams are usually sufficiently pressurized to force sample gas through the train at the required flow rate. The pump need not be leak-free unless it is used for sampling.
6.1.15 Needle Valve or Critical Orifice. To set air purge flow to 1 liter/min.
6.1.16 Tube Packed with Active Carbon. To filter air during purge.
6.1.17 Volumetric Flask. One 1000-ml.
6.1.18 Volumetric Pipette. One 15-ml.
6.1.19 Pressure-Reduction Regulator. Depending on the sampling stream pressure, a pressure-reduction regulator may be needed to reduce the pressure of the gas stream entering the Teflon sample line to a safe level.
6.1.20 Cold Trap. If condensed water or amine is present in the sample stream, a corrosion-resistant cold trap shall be used immediately after the sample tap. The trap shall not be operated below 0 °C (32 °F) to avoid condensation of C3 or C4 hydrocarbons.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are needed for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Sample Container. Iodine flask, glass-stoppered, 500-ml size.
6.2.2 Volumetric Pipette. One 50-ml.
6.2.3 Graduated Cylinders. One each 25- and 250-ml.
6.2.4 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml.
6.2.5 Wash Bottle.
6.2.6 Volumetric Flasks. Three 1000-ml.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items are needed for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Flask. Glass-stoppered iodine flask, 500-ml.
6.3.2 Burette. 50-ml.
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flask. 125-ml.
6.3.4 Volumetric Pipettes. One 25-ml; two each 50- and 100-ml.
6.3.5 Volumetric Flasks. One 1000-ml; two 500-ml.
6.3.6 Graduated Cylinders. One each 10- and 100-ml.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample collection:
7.1.1 CdSO4 Absorbing Solution. Dissolve 41 g of 3CdSO48H2O and 15 ml of 0.1 M sulfuric acid in a 1-liter volumetric flask that contains approximately 3/4 liter of water. Dilute to volume with deionized, distilled water. Mix thoroughly. The pH should be 3 ±0.1. Add 10 drops of Dow-Corning Antifoam B. Shake well before use. This solution is stable for at least one month. If Antifoam B is not used, a more labor-intensive sample recovery procedure is required (see section 11.2).
7.1.2 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 Percent. Dilute 30 percent H2O2 to 3 percent as needed. Prepare fresh daily.
7.1.3 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.2 Sample Recovery. The following reagents are needed for sample recovery:
7.2.1 Water. Same as section 7.1.3.
7.2.2 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution, 3 M. Add 240 ml of concentrated HCl (specific gravity 1.19) to 500 ml of water in a 1-liter volumetric flask. Dilute to 1 liter with water. Mix thoroughly.
7.2.3 Iodine (I2) Solution, 0.1 N. Dissolve 24 g of potassium iodide (KI) in 30 ml of water. Add 12.7 g of resublimed iodine (I2) to the KI solution. Shake the mixture until the I2 is completely dissolved. If possible, let the solution stand overnight in the dark. Slowly dilute the solution to 1 liter with water, with swirling. Filter the solution if it is cloudy. Store solution in a brown-glass reagent bottle.
7.2.4 Standard I2 Solution, 0.01 N. Pipette 100.0 ml of the 0.1 N iodine solution into a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with water. Standardize daily as in section 10.2.1. This solution must be protected from light. Reagent bottles and flasks must be kept tightly stoppered.
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents and standards are needed for sample analysis:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.3.
7.3.2 Standard Sodium Thiosulfate Solution, 0.1 N. Dissolve 24.8 g of sodium thiosulfate pentahydrate (Na2S2O3·5H2O) or 15.8 g of anhydrous sodium thiosulfate (Na2S2O3) in 1 liter of water, and add 0.01 g of anhydrous sodium carbonate (Na2CO3) and 0.4 ml of chloroform (CHCl3) to stabilize. Mix thoroughly by shaking or by aerating with nitrogen for approximately 15 minutes, and store in a glass-stoppered, reagent bottle. Standardize as in section 10.2.2.
7.3.3 Standard Sodium Thiosulfate Solution, 0.01 N. Pipette 50.0 ml of the standard 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution into a volumetric flask, and dilute to 500 ml with water.
7.3.4 Standard Phenylarsine Oxide Solution, 0.01 N. Dissolve 1.80 g of (C6H5AsO) in 150 ml of 0.3 N sodium hydroxide. After settling, decant 140 ml of this solution into 800 ml of water. Bring the solution to pH 6-7 with 6 N HCl, and dilute to 1 liter with water. Standardize as in section 10.2.3.
7.3.5 Starch Indicator Solution. Suspend 10 g of soluble starch in 100 ml of water, and add 15 g of potassium hydroxide (KOH) pellets. Stir until dissolved, dilute with 900 ml of water, and let stand for 1 hour. Neutralize the alkali with concentrated HCl, using an indicator paper similar to Alkacid test ribbon, then add 2 ml of glacial acetic acid as a preservative.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling Train Preparation. Assemble the sampling train as shown in Figure 11-1, connecting the five midget impingers in series. Place 15 ml of 3 percent H2O2 solution in the first impinger. Leave the second impinger empty. Place 15 ml of the CdSO4 solution in the third, fourth, and fifth impingers. Place the impinger assembly in an ice water bath container, and place water and crushed ice around the impingers. Add more ice during the run, if needed.
8.2 Leak-Check Procedure.
8.2.1 Connect the rubber bulb and manometer to the first impinger, as shown in Figure 11-1. Close the petcock on the DGM outlet. Pressurize the train to 25 cm water with the bulb, and close off the tubing connected to the rubber bulb. The train must hold 25 cm water pressure with not more than a 1 cm drop in pressure in a 1-minute interval. Stopcock grease is acceptable for sealing ground glass joints.
8.2.2 If the pump is used for sampling, it is recommended, but not required, that the pump be leak-checked separately, either prior to or after the sampling run. To leak-check the pump, proceed as follows: Disconnect the drying tube from the impinger assembly. Place a vacuum gauge at the inlet to either the drying tube or the pump, pull a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg), plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum should remain stable for at least 30 seconds. If performed prior to the sampling run, the pump leak-check should precede the leak-check of the sampling train described immediately above; if performed after the sampling run, the pump leak-check should follow the sampling train leak-check.
8.3 Purge the connecting line between the sampling valve and the first impinger by disconnecting the line from the first impinger, opening the sampling valve, and allowing process gas to flow through the line for one to two minutes. Then, close the sampling valve, and reconnect the line to the impinger train. Open the petcock on the dry gas meter outlet. Record the initial DGM reading.
8.4 Open the sampling valve, and then adjust the valve to obtain a rate of approximately 1 liter/min (0.035 cfm). Maintain a constant (±10 percent) flow rate during the test. Record the DGM temperature.
8.5 Sample for at least 10 minutes. At the end of the sampling time, close the sampling valve, and record the final volume and temperature readings. Conduct a leak-check as described in Section 8.2. A yellow color in the final cadmium sulfate impinger indicates depletion of the absorbing solution. An additional cadmium sulfate impinger should be added for subsequent samples and the sample with yellow color in the final impinger should be voided.
8.6 Disconnect the impinger train from the sampling line. Connect the charcoal tube and the pump as shown in Figure 11-1. Purge the train [at a rate of 1 liter/min (0.035 ft 3/min)] with clean ambient air for 15 minutes to ensure that all H2S is removed from the H2O2. For sample recovery, cap the open ends, and remove the impinger train to a clean area that is away from sources of heat. The area should be well lighted, but not exposed to direct sunlight.
8.7 Sample Recovery.
8.7.1 Discard the contents of the H2O2 impinger. Carefully rinse with water the contents of the third, fourth, and fifth impingers into a 500-ml iodine flask.
8.7.2 Proceed to section 11 for the analysis.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of sample volume. |
| 11.2 | Replicate titrations of blanks | Ensure precision of titration determinations. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Calibration. Calibrate the sample collection equipment as follows.
10.1.1 Dry Gas Meter.
10.1.1.1 Initial Calibration. The DGM shall be calibrated before its initial use in the field. Proceed as follows: First, assemble the following components in series: Drying tube, needle valve, pump, rotameter, and DGM. Then, leak-check the metering system as follows: Place a vacuum gauge (at least 760 mm Hg) at the inlet to the drying tube, and pull a vacuum of 250 mm Hg (10 in. Hg); plug or pinch off the outlet of the flow meter, and then turn off the pump. The vacuum shall remain stable for at least 30 seconds. Carefully release the vacuum gauge before releasing the flow meter end. Next, calibrate the DGM (at the sampling flow rate specified by the method) as follows: Connect an appropriately sized wet-test meter (e.g., 1 liter per revolution) to the inlet of the drying tube. Make three independent calibration runs, using at least five revolutions of the DGM per run. Calculate the calibration factor, Y (wet-test meter calibration volume divided by the DGM volume, both volumes adjusted to the same reference temperature and pressure), for each run, and average the results. If any Y value deviates by more than 2 percent from the average, the DGM is unacceptable for use. Otherwise, use the average as the calibration factor for subsequent test runs.
10.1.1.2 Post-Test Calibration Check. After each field test series, conduct a calibration check as in section 10.1.1.1, above, except for the following two variations: (a) three or more revolutions of the DGM may be used and (b) only two independent runs need be made. If the calibration factor does not deviate by more than 5 percent from the initial calibration factor (determined in section 10.1.1.1), then the DGM volumes obtained during the test series are acceptable. If the calibration factor deviates by more than 5 percent, recalibrate the DGM as in section 10.1.1.1, and for the calculations, use the calibration factor (initial or recalibration) that yields the lower gas volume for each test run.
10.1.2 Temperature Sensors. Calibrate against mercury-in-glass thermometers. An alternative mercury-free thermometer may be used if the thermometer is at a minimum equivalent in terms of performance or suitably effective for the specific temperature measurement application.
10.1.3 Rate Meter. The rate meter need not be calibrated, but should be cleaned and maintained according to the manufacturer's instructions.
10.1.4 Barometer. Calibrate against a mercury barometer.
10.2 Standardization.
10.2.1 Iodine Solution Standardization. Standardize the 0.01 N I2 solution daily as follows: Pipette 25 ml of the I2 solution into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 2 ml of 3 M HCl. Titrate rapidly with standard 0.01 N Na2S2O3 solution or with 0.01 N C6H5AsO until the solution is light yellow, using gentle mixing. Add four drops of starch indicator solution, and continue titrating slowly until the blue color just disappears. Record the volume of Na2S2O3 solution used, VSI, or the volume of C6H5AsO solution used, VAI, in ml. Repeat until replicate values agree within 0.05 ml. Average the replicate titration values which agree within 0.05 ml, and calculate the exact normality of the I2 solution using Equation 11-3. Repeat the standardization daily.
10.2.2 Sodium Thiosulfate Solution Standardization. Standardize the 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution as follows: Oven-dry potassium dichromate (K2Cr2O7) at 180 to 200 °C (360 to 390 °F). To the nearest milligram, weigh 2 g of the dichromate (W). Transfer the dichromate to a 500-ml volumetric flask, dissolve in water, and dilute to exactly 500 ml. In a 500-ml iodine flask, dissolve approximately 3 g of KI in 45 ml of water, then add 10 ml of 3 M HCl solution. Pipette 50 ml of the dichromate solution into this mixture. Gently swirl the contents of the flask once, and allow it to stand in the dark for 5 minutes. Dilute the solution with 100 to 200 ml of water, washing down the sides of the flask with part of the water. Titrate with 0.1 N Na2S2O3 until the solution is light yellow. Add 4 ml of starch indicator and continue titrating slowly to a green end point. Record the volume of Na2S2O3 solution used, VS, in ml. Repeat until replicate values agree within 0.05 ml. Calculate the normality using Equation 11-1. Repeat the standardization each week or after each test series, whichever time is shorter.
10.2.3 Phenylarsine Oxide Solution Standardization. Standardize the 0.01 N C6H5AsO (if applicable) as follows: Oven-dry K2Cr2O7 at 180 to 200 °C (360 to 390 °F). To the nearest milligram, weigh 2 g of the dichromate (W). Transfer the dichromate to a 500-ml volumetric flask, dissolve in water, and dilute to exactly 500 ml. In a 500-ml iodine flask, dissolve approximately 0.3 g of KI in 45 ml of water, then add 10 ml of 3 M HCl. Pipette 5 ml of the dichromate solution into the iodine flask. Gently swirl the contents of the flask once, and allow it to stand in the dark for 5 minutes. Dilute the solution with 100 to 200 ml of water, washing down the sides of the flask with part of the water. Titrate with 0.01 N C6H5AsO until the solution is light yellow. Add 4 ml of starch indicator, and continue titrating slowly to a green end point. Record the volume of C6H5AsO used, VA, in ml. Repeat until replicate analyses agree within 0.05 ml. Calculate the normality using Equation 11-2. Repeat the standardization each week or after each test series, whichever time is shorter.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Conduct the titration analyses in a clean area away from direct sunlight.
11.1 Pipette exactly 50 ml of 0.01 N I2 solution into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10 ml of 3 M HCl to the solution. Quantitatively rinse the acidified I2 into the iodine flask. Stopper the flask immediately, and shake briefly.
11.2 Use these alternative procedures if Antifoam B was not used or if significant quantities of yellow CdS remain in the impingers. Extract the remaining CdS from the third, fourth, and fifth impingers using the acidified I2 solution. Immediately after pouring the acidified I2 into an impinger, stopper it and shake for a few moments, then transfer the liquid to the iodine flask. Do not transfer any rinse portion from one impinger to another; transfer it directly to the iodine flask. Once the acidified I2 solution has been poured into any glassware containing CdS, the container must be tightly stoppered at all times except when adding more solution, and this must be done as quickly and carefully as possible. After adding any acidified I2 solution to the iodine flask, allow a few minutes for absorption of the H2S before adding any further rinses. Repeat the I2 extraction until all CdS is removed from the impingers. Extract that part of the connecting glassware that contains visible CdS. Quantitatively rinse all the I2 from the impingers, connectors, and the beaker into the iodine flask using water. Stopper the flask and shake briefly.
11.3 Allow the iodine flask to stand about 30 minutes in the dark for absorption of the H2S into the I2, then complete the titration analysis as outlined in sections 11.5 and 11.6.
11.4 Prepare a blank by adding 45 ml of CdSO4 absorbing solution to an iodine flask. Pipette exactly 50 ml of 0.01 N I2 solution into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 10 ml of 3 M HCl. Stopper the flask, shake briefly, let stand 30 minutes in the dark, and titrate with the samples.
11.5 Using 0.01 N Na2S2O3 solution (or 0.01 N C6H5AsO, if applicable), rapidly titrate each sample in an iodine flask using gentle mixing, until solution is light yellow. Add 4 ml of starch indicator solution, and continue titrating slowly until the blue color just disappears. Record the volume of Na2S2O3 solution used, VTT, or the volume of C6H5AsO solution used, VAT, in ml.
11.6 Titrate the blanks in the same manner as the samples. Run blanks each day until replicate values agree within 0.05 ml. Average the replicate titration values which agree within 0.05 ml.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures only after the final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature.
CH2S = Concentration of H2S at standard conditions, mg/dscm.
NA = Normality of standard C6H5AsO solution, g-eq/liter.
NI = Normality of standard I2 solution, g-eq/liter.
NS = Normality of standard (≃0.1 N) Na2S2O3 solution, g-eq/liter.
NT = Normality of standard (≃0.01 N) Na2S2O3 solution, assumed to be 0.1 NS, g-eq/liter.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg.
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg.
Tm = Average DGM temperature, °K.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K.
VA = Volume of C6H5AsO solution used for standardization, ml.
VAI = Volume of standard C6H5AsO solution used for titration analysis, ml.
VI = Volume of standard I2 solution used for standardization, ml.
VIT = Volume of standard I2 solution used for titration analysis, normally 50 ml.
Vm = Volume of gas sample at meter conditions, liters.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample at standard conditions, liters.
VSI = Volume of “0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution used for standardization, ml.
VT = Volume of standard (≃0.01 N) Na2S2O3 solution used in standardizing iodine solution (see section 10.2.1), ml.
VTT = Volume of standard (∼0.01 N) Na2S2O3 solution used for titration analysis, ml.
W = Weight of K2Cr2O7 used to standardize Na2s2O3 or C6H5AsO solutions, as applicable (see sections 10.2.2 and 10.2.3), g.
Y = DGM calibration factor.
12.2 Normality of the Standard (≃0.1 N) Sodium Thiosulfate Solution.
Where:
2.039 = Conversion factor
= (6 g-eq I2/mole K2Cr2O7) (1,000 ml/liter)/(294.2 g K2Cr2O7/mole) (10 aliquot factor)
12.3 Normality of Standard Phenylarsine Oxide Solution (if applicable).
Where:
0.2039 = Conversion factor.
= (6 g-eq I2/mole K2Cr2O7) (1,000 ml/liter)/(294.2 g K2Cr2O7/mole) (100 aliquot factor)
12.4 Normality of Standard Iodine Solution.
12.5 Dry Gas Volume. Correct the sample volume measured by the DGM to standard conditions (20 °C and 760 mm Hg).
12.6 Concentration of H2S. Calculate the concentration of H2S in the gas stream at standard conditions using Equation 11-5:
Where:
17.04 × 10 3 = Conversion factor
= (34.07 g/mole H2S) (1,000 liters/m 3) (1,000mg/g)/(1,000 ml/liter) (2H2S eq/mole)
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. Collaborative testing has shown the intra-laboratory precision to be 2.2 percent and the inter-laboratory precision to be 5 percent.
13.2 Bias. The method bias was shown to be −4.8 percent when only H2S was present. In the presence of the interferences cited in section 4.0, the bias was positive at low H2S concentration and negative at higher concentrations. At 230 mg H2S/m 3, the level of the compliance standard, the bias was + 2.7 percent. Thiols had no effect on the precision.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide, Ammoniacal Cadmium Chloride Method. API Method 772-54. In: Manual on Disposal of Refinery Wastes, Vol. V: Sampling and Analysis of Waste Gases and Particulate Matter. American Petroleum Institute, Washington, D.C. 1954.
2. Tentative Method of Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide and Mercaptan Sulfur in Natural Gas. Natural Gas Processors Association, Tulsa, OK. NGPA Publication No. 2265-65. 1965.
3. Knoll, J.D., and M.R. Midgett. Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide in Refinery Fuel Gases. Environmental Monitoring Series, Office of Research and Development, USEPA. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. EPA 600/4-77-007.
4. Scheil, G.W., and M.C. Sharp. Standardization of Method 11 at a Petroleum Refinery. Midwest Research Institute Draft Report for USEPA. Office of Research and Development. Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. EPA Contract No. 68-02-1098. August 1976. EPA 600/4-77-088a (Volume 1) and EPA 600/4-77-088b (Volume 2).
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 12—Determination of Inorganic Lead Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Inorganic Lead Compounds as lead (Pb) | 7439-92-1 | see section 13.3. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of inorganic lead emissions from stationary sources, only as specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate and gaseous Pb emissions are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and are collected on a filter and in dilute nitric acid. The collected samples are digested in acid solution and are analyzed by atomic absorption spectrophotometry using an air/acetylene flame.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Copper. High concentrations of copper may interfere with the analysis of Pb at 217.0 nm. This interference can be avoided by analyzing the samples at 283.3 nm.
4.2 Matrix Effects. Analysis for Pb by flame atomic absorption spectrophotometry is sensitive to the chemical composition and to the physical properties (e.g., viscosity, pH) of the sample. The analytical procedure requires the use of the Method of Standard Additions to check for these matrix effects, and requires sample analysis using the Method of Standard Additions if significant matrix effects are found to be present.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Nitric Acid (HNO3). Highly corrosive to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs. Vapors cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Reaction to inhalation may be delayed as long as 30 hours and still be fatal. Provide ventilation to limit exposure. Strong oxidizer. Hazardous reaction may occur with organic materials such as solvents.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the sampling train used in performing this method is shown in Figure 12-1 in section 18.0; it is similar to the Method 5 train. The following items are needed for sample collection:
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Probe Liner, Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter Holder, Filter Heating System, Temperature Sensor, Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.1.1 through 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively.
6.1.2 Impingers. Four impingers connected in series with leak-free ground glass fittings or any similar leak-free noncontaminating fittings are needed. For the first, third, and fourth impingers, use the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) ID glass tube extending to about 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. For the second impinger, use the Greenburg-Smith design with the standard tip.
6.1.3 Temperature Sensor. Place a temperature sensor, capable of measuring temperature to within 1 °C (2 °F) at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are needed for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-Liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Petri Dishes, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, and Funnel and Rubber Policeman. Same as Method 5, sections 6.2.1 and 6.2.4 through 6.2.7, respectively.
6.2.2 Wash Bottles. Glass (2).
6.2.3 Sample Storage Containers. Chemically resistant, borosilicate glass bottles, for 0.1 N nitric acid (HNO3) impinger and probe solutions and washes, 1000-ml. Use screw-cap liners that are either rubber-backed Teflon or leak-free and resistant to chemical attack by 0.1 N HNO3. (Narrow mouth glass bottles have been found to be less prone to leakage.)
6.2.4 Funnel. Glass, to aid in sample recovery.
6.3 Sample Analysis. The following items are needed for sample analysis:
6.3.1 Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometer. With lead hollow cathode lamp and burner for air/acetylene flame.
6.3.2 Hot Plate.
6.3.3 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125-ml, 24/40 standard taper.
6.3.4 Membrane Filters. Millipore SCWPO 4700, or equivalent.
6.3.5 Filtration Apparatus. Millipore vacuum filtration unit, or equivalent, for use with the above membrane filter.
6.3.6 Volumetric Flasks. 100-ml, 250-ml, and 1000-ml.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are needed for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filter. Gelman Spectro Grade, Reeve Angel 934 AH, MSA 1106 BH, all with lot assay for Pb, or other high-purity glass fiber filters, without organic binder, exhibiting at least 99.95 percent efficiency (<0.05 percent penetration) on 0.3 micron dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. Conduct the filter efficiency test using ASTM D 2986-71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) or use test data from the supplier's quality control program.
7.1.2 Silica Gel and Crushed Ice. Same as Method 5, sections 7.1.2 and 7.1.4, respectively.
7.1.3 Water. Deionized distilled, to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the potassium permanganate test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted.
7.1.4 Nitric Acid, 0.1 N. Dilute 6.5 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 1 liter with water. (It may be desirable to run blanks before field use to eliminate a high blank on test samples.)
7.2 Sample Recovery. 0.1 N HNO3 (Same as in section 7.1.4 above).
7.3 Sample Analysis. The following reagents and standards are needed for sample analysis:
7.3.1 Water. Same as in section 7.1.3.
7.3.2 Nitric Acid, Concentrated.
7.3.3 Nitric Acid, 50 Percent (v/v). Dilute 500 ml of concentrated HNO3 to 1 liter with water.
7.3.4 Stock Lead Standard Solution, 1000 µg Pb/ml. Dissolve 0.1598 g of lead nitrate [Pb(NO3)2] in about 60 ml water, add 2 ml concentrated HNO3, and dilute to 100 ml with water.
7.3.5 Working Lead Standards. Pipet 0.0, 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0, and 5.0 ml of the stock lead standard solution (Section 7.3.4) into 250-ml volumetric flasks. Add 5 ml of concentrated HNO3 to each flask, and dilute to volume with water. These working standards contain 0.0, 4.0, 8.0, 12.0, 16.0, and 20.0 µg Pb/ml, respectively. Prepare, as needed, additional standards at other concentrations in a similar manner.
7.3.6 Air. Suitable quality for atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
7.3.7 Acetylene. Suitable quality for atomic absorption spectrophotometry.
7.3.8 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 Percent (v/v). Dilute 10 ml of 30 percent H2O2 to 100 ml with water.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the same general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.1, except that the filter need not be weighed.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Follow the same general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.2.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Follow the same general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.3, except place 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 (instead of water) in each of the first two impingers. As in Method 5, leave the third impinger empty and transfer approximately 200 to 300 g of preweighed silica gel from its container to the fourth impinger. Set up the train as shown in Figure 12-1.
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as Method 5, section 8.4.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Same as Method 5, section 8.5.
8.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as Method 5, section 8.6.
8.7 Sample Recovery. Same as Method 5, sections 8.7.1 through 8.7.6.1, with the addition of the following:
8.7.1 Container No. 2 (Probe).
8.7.1.1 Taking care that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, quantitatively recover sample matter and any condensate from the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, and front half of the filter holder by washing these components with 0.1 N HNO3 and placing the wash into a glass sample storage container. Measure and record (to the nearest 2 ml) the total amount of 0.1 N HNO3 used for these rinses. Perform the 0.1 N HNO3 rinses as follows:
8.7.1.2 Carefully remove the probe nozzle, and rinse the inside surfaces with 0.1 N HNO3 from a wash bottle while brushing with a stainless steel, Nylon-bristle brush. Brush until the 0.1 N HNO3 rinse shows no visible particles, then make a final rinse of the inside surface with 0.1 N HNO3.
8.7.1.3 Brush and rinse with 0.1 N HNO3 the inside parts of the Swagelok fitting in a similar way until no visible particles remain.
8.7.1.4 Rinse the probe liner with 0.1 N HNO3. While rotating the probe so that all inside surfaces will be rinsed with 0.1 N HNO3, tilt the probe, and squirt 0.1 N HNO3 into its upper end. Let the 0.1 N HNO3 drain from the lower end into the sample container. A glass funnel may be used to aid in transferring liquid washes to the container. Follow the rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe in an inclined position, squirt 0.1 N HNO3 into the upper end of the probe as the probe brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe; hold the sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any 0.1 N HNO3 and sample matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the brush through the probe three times or more until no visible sample matter is carried out with the 0.1 N HNO3 and none remains on the probe liner on visual inspection. With stainless steel or other metal probes, run the brush through in the above prescribed manner at least six times, since metal probes have small crevices in which sample matter can be entrapped. Rinse the brush with 0.1 N HNO3, and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a final rinse of the probe as described above.
8.7.1.5 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to minimize loss of sample. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination.
8.7.1.6 Brush and rinse with 0.1 N HNO3 the inside of the front half of the filter holder. Brush and rinse each surface three times or more, if needed, to remove visible sample matter. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder. After all 0.1 N HNO3 washings and sample matter are collected in the sample container, tighten the lid on the sample container so that the fluid will not leak out when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the container to identify its contents clearly.
8.7.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine if it has been completely spent, and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth impinger to the original container, and seal. A funnel may be used to pour the silica gel from the impinger and a rubber policeman may be used to remove the silica gel from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of particles that may adhere to the walls and are difficult to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, follow the procedure for Container No. 3 in section 11.4.2.
8.7.3 Container No. 4 (Impingers). Due to the large quantity of liquid involved, the impinger solutions may be placed in several containers. Clean each of the first three impingers and connecting glassware in the following manner:
8.7.3.1 Cap the impinger ball joints.
8.7.3.2 Rotate and agitate each impinger, so that the impinger contents might serve as a rinse solution.
8.7.3.3 Treat the impingers as follows: Make a notation of any color or film in the liquid catch. Measure the liquid that is in the first three impingers by weighing it to within 0.5 g at a minimum by using a balance. Record the weight of liquid present. The liquid weight is needed, along with the silica gel data, to calculate the stack gas moisture content (see Method 5, Figure 5-6).
8.7.3.4 Transfer the contents to Container No. 4.
8.7.3.5 Pour approximately 30 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 into each of the first three impingers and agitate the impingers. Drain the 0.1 N HNO3 through the outlet arm of each impinger into Container No. 4. Repeat this operation a second time; inspect the impingers for any abnormal conditions.
8.7.3.6 Rinse the insides of each piece of connecting glassware for the impingers twice with 0.1 N HNO3; transfer this rinse into Container No. 4. Do not rinse or brush the glass-fritted filter support. Mark the height of the fluid level to determine whether leakage occurs during transport. Label the container to identify its contents clearly.
8.8 Blanks.
8.8.1 Nitric Acid. Save 200 ml of the 0.1 N HNO3 used for sampling and cleanup as a blank. Take the solution directly from the bottle being used and place into a glass sample container labeled “0.1 N HNO3 blank.”
8.8.2 Filter. Save two filters from each lot of filters used in sampling. Place these filters in a container labeled “filter blank.”
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-checks and calibration | Ensure accuracy and precision of sampling measurements. |
| 10.2 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Ensure linearity of spectrophotometer response to standards. |
| 11.5 | Check for matrix effects | Eliminate matrix effects. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Method 5, section 10.0.
10.2 Spectrophotometer.
10.2.1 Measure the absorbance of the standard solutions using the instrument settings recommended by the spectrophotometer manufacturer. Repeat until good agreement (±3 percent) is obtained between two consecutive readings. Plot the absorbance (y-axis) versus concentration in µg Pb/ml (x-axis). Draw or compute a straight line through the linear portion of the curve. Do not force the calibration curve through zero, but if the curve does not pass through the origin or at least lie closer to the origin than ±0.003 absorbance units, check for incorrectly prepared standards and for curvature in the calibration curve.
10.2.2 To determine stability of the calibration curve, run a blank and a standard after every five samples, and recalibrate as necessary.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Prior to analysis, check the liquid level in Containers Number 2 and Number 4. Note on the analytical data sheet whether leakage occurred during transport. If a noticeable amount of leakage occurred, either void the sample or take steps, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to adjust the final results.
11.2 Sample Preparation.
11.2.1 Container No. 1 (Filter). Cut the filter into strips and transfer the strips and all loose particulate matter into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Rinse the petri dish with 10 ml of 50 percent HNO3 to ensure a quantitative transfer, and add to the flask.
11.2.2 Containers No. 2 and No. 4 (Probe and Impingers). Combine the contents of Containers No. 2 and No. 4, and evaporate to dryness on a hot plate.
11.2.3 Sample Extraction for Lead.
11.2.3.1 Based on the approximate stack gas particulate concentration and the total volume of stack gas sampled, estimate the total weight of particulate sample collected. Next, transfer the residue from Containers No. 2 and No. 4 to the 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask that contains the sampling filter using a rubber policeman and 10 ml of 50 percent HNO3 for every 100 mg of sample collected in the train or a minimum of 30 ml of 50 percent HNO3, whichever is larger.
11.2.3.2 Place the Erlenmeyer flask on a hot plate, and heat with periodic stirring for 30 minutes at a temperature just below boiling. If the sample volume falls below 15 ml, add more 50 percent HNO3. Add 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2, and continue heating for 10 minutes. Add 50 ml of hot (80 °C, 176 °F) water, and heat for 20 minutes. Remove the flask from the hot plate, and allow to cool. Filter the sample through a Millipore membrane filter, or equivalent, and transfer the filtrate to a 250-ml volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with water.
11.2.4 Filter Blank. Cut each filter into strips, and place each filter in a separate 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Add 15 ml of 50 percent HNO3, and treat as described in section 11.2.3 using 10 ml of 3 percent H2O2 and 50 ml of hot water. Filter and dilute to a total volume of 100 ml using water.
11.2.5 Nitric Acid Blank, 0.1 N. Take the entire 200 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 to dryness on a steam bath, add 15 ml of 50 percent HNO3, and treat as described in section 11.2.3 using 10 ml of 3 percent H202 and 50 ml of hot water. Dilute to a total volume of 100 ml using water.
11.3 Spectrophotometer Preparation. Turn on the power; set the wavelength, slit width, and lamp current; and adjust the background corrector as instructed by the manufacturer's manual for the particular atomic absorption spectrophotometer. Adjust the burner and flame characteristics as necessary.
11.4 Analysis.
11.4.1 Lead Determination. Calibrate the spectrophotometer as outlined in section 10.2, and determine the absorbance for each source sample, the filter blank, and 0.1 N HNO3 blank. Analyze each sample three times in this manner. Make appropriate dilutions, as needed, to bring all sample Pb concentrations into the linear absorbance range of the spectrophotometer. Because instruments vary between manufacturers, no detailed operating instructions will be given here. Instead, the instructions provided with the particular instrument should be followed. If the Pb concentration of a sample is at the low end of the calibration curve and high accuracy is required, the sample can be taken to dryness on a hot plate and the residue dissolved in the appropriate volume of water to bring it into the optimum range of the calibration curve.
11.4.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). This step may be conducted in the field. Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g; record this weight.
11.5 Check for Matrix Effects. Use the Method of Standard Additions as follows to check at least one sample from each source for matrix effects on the Pb results:
11.5.1 Add or spike an equal volume of standard solution to an aliquot of the sample solution.
11.5.2 Measure the absorbance of the resulting solution and the absorbance of an aliquot of unspiked sample.
11.5.3 Calculate the Pb concentration Cm in µg/ml of the sample solution using Equation 12-1 in section 12.5.
Volume corrections will not be required if the solutions as analyzed have been made to the same final volume. Therefore, Cm and Ca represent Pb concentration before dilutions.
Method of Standard Additions procedures described on pages 9-4 and 9-5 of the section entitled “General Information” of the Perkin Elmer Corporation Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry Manual, Number 303-0152 (Reference 1 in section 17.0) may also be used. In any event, if the results of the Method of Standard Additions procedure used on the single source sample do not agree to within ±5 percent of the value obtained by the routine atomic absorption analysis, then reanalyze all samples from the source using the Method of Standard Additions procedure.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
Am = Absorbance of the sample solution.
An = Cross-sectional area of nozzle, m 2 (ft 2).
At = Absorbance of the spiked sample solution.
Bws = Water in the gas stream, proportion by volume.
Ca = Lead concentration in standard solution, µg/ml.
Cm = Lead concentration in sample solution analyzed during check for matrix effects, µg/ml.
Cs = Lead concentration in stack gas, dry basis, converted to standard conditions, mg/dscm (gr/dscf).
I = Percent of isokinetic sampling.
L1 = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the first component change, m 3/min (ft 3/min).
La = Maximum acceptable leakage rate for either a pretest leak-check or for a leak-check following a component change; equal to 0.00057 m 3/min (0.020 cfm) or 4 percent of the average sampling rate, whichever is less.
Li = Individual leakage rate observed during the leak-check conducted prior to the “ith” component change (i = 1, 2, 3 * * * n), m 3/min (cfm).
Lp = Leakage rate observed during the post-test leak-check, m 3/min (cfm).
mt = Total weight of lead collected in the sample, µg.
Mw = Molecular weight of water, 18.0 g/g-mole (18.0 lb/lb-mole).
Pbar = Barometric pressure at the sampling site, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Ps = Absolute stack gas pressure, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
R = Ideal gas constant, 0.06236 [(mm Hg) (m 3)]/[(°K) (g-mole)] {21.85 [(in. Hg) (ft 3)]/[(°R) (lb-mole)]}.
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter temperature (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5), °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
vs = Stack gas velocity, m/sec (ft/sec).
Vm = Volume of gas sample as measured by the dry gas meter, dry basis, m 3 (ft 3).
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample as measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, m 3 (ft 3).
Vw(std) = Volume of water vapor collected in the sampling train, corrected to standard conditions, m 3 (ft 3).
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
ΔH = Average pressure differential across the orifice meter (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5), mm H2O (in. H2O).
θ = Total sampling time, min.
θl = Sampling time interval, from the beginning of a run until the first component change, min.
θi = Sampling time interval, between two successive component changes, beginning with the interval between the first and second changes, min.
θp = Sampling time interval, from the final (nth) component change until the end of the sampling run, min.
12.2 Average Dry Gas Meter Temperatures (Tm) and Average Orifice Pressure Drop (ΔH). See data sheet (Figure 5-3 of Method 5).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume, Volume of Water Vapor Condensed, and Moisture Content. Using data obtained in this test, calculate Vm(std), Vw(std), and Bws according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, sections 12.3 through 12.5.
12.4 Total Lead in Source Sample. For each source sample, correct the average absorbance for the contribution of the filter blank and the 0.1 N HNO3 blank. Use the calibration curve and this corrected absorbance to determine the Pb concentration in the sample aspirated into the spectrophotometer. Calculate the total Pb content mt (in µg) in the original source sample; correct for all the dilutions that were made to bring the Pb concentration of the sample into the linear range of the spectrophotometer.
12.5 Sample Lead Concentration. Calculate the Pb concentration of the sample using the following equation:
12.6 Lead Concentration. Calculate the stack gas Pb concentration Cs using Equation 12-2:
Where:
K3 = 0.001 mg/µg for metric units.
= 1.54 × 10−5 gr/µg for English units
12.7 Stack Gas Velocity and Volumetric Flow Rate. Calculate the average stack gas velocity and volumetric flow rate using data obtained in this method and the equations in sections 12.2 and 12.3 of Method 2.
12.8 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method 5, section 12.11.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Precision. The within-laboratory precision, as measured by the coefficient of variation, ranges from 0.2 to 9.5 percent relative to a run-mean concentration. These values were based on tests conducted at a gray iron foundry, a lead storage battery manufacturing plant, a secondary lead smelter, and a lead recovery furnace of an alkyl lead manufacturing plant. The concentrations encountered during these tests ranged from 0.61 to 123.3 mg Pb/m 3.
13.2 Analytical Range. For a minimum analytical accuracy of ±10 percent, the lower limit of the range is 100 µg. The upper limit can be extended considerably by dilution.
13.3 Analytical Sensitivity. Typical sensitivities for a 1-percent change in absorption (0.0044 absorbance units) are 0.2 and 0.5 µg Pb/ml for the 217.0 and 283.3 nm lines, respectively.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Simultaneous Determination of Particulate Matter and Lead Emissions. Method 12 may be used to simultaneously determine Pb and particulate matter provided:
(1) A glass fiber filter with a low Pb background is used and this filter is checked, desiccated and weighed per section 8.1 of Method 5,
(2) An acetone rinse, as specified by Method 5, sections 7.2 and 8.7.6.2, is used to remove particulate matter from the probe and inside of the filter holder prior to and kept separate from the 0.1 N HNO3 rinse of the same components,
(3) The recovered filter, the acetone rinse, and an acetone blank (Method 5, section 7.2) are subjected to the gravimetric analysis of Method 5, sections 6.3 and 11.0 prior to the analysis for Pb as described below, and
(4) The entire train contents, including the 0.1 N HNO3 impingers, filter, acetone and 0.1 N HNO3 probe rinses are treated and analyzed for Pb as described in sections 8.0 and 11.0 of this method.
16.2 Filter Location. A filter may be used between the third and fourth impingers provided the filter is included in the analysis for Pb.
16.3 In-Stack Filter. An in-stack filter may be used provided: (1) A glass-lined probe and at least two impingers, each containing 100 ml of 0.1 N HNO3 after the in-stack filter, are used and (2) the probe and impinger contents are recovered and analyzed for Pb. Recover sample from the nozzle with acetone if a particulate analysis is to be made as described in section 16.1 of this method.
16.4 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES) Analysis. ICP-AES may be used as an alternative to atomic absorption analysis provided the following conditions are met:
16.4.1 Sample collection/recovery, sample loss check, and sample preparation procedures are as defined in sections 8.0, 11.1, and 11.2, respectively, of this method.
16.4.2 Analysis shall be conducted following Method 6010D of SW-846 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). The limit of detection for the ICP-AES must be demonstrated according to section 15.0 of Method 301 in appendix A of part 63 of this chapter and must be no greater than one-third of the applicable emission limit. Perform a check for matrix effects according to section 11.5 of this method.
16.5 Inductively Coupled Plasma-Mass Spectrometry (ICP-MS) Analysis. ICP-MS may be used as an alternative to atomic absorption analysis provided the following conditions are met:
16.5.1 Sample collection/recovery, sample loss check, and sample preparation procedures are as defined in sections 8.0, 11.1, and 11.2, respectively of this method.
16.5.2 Analysis shall be conducted following Method 6020B of SW-846 (incorporated by reference, see § 60.17). The limit of detection for the ICP-MS must be demonstrated according to section 15.0 of Method 301 in appendix A to part 63 of this chapter and must be no greater than one-third of the applicable emission limit. Use the multipoint calibration curve option in section 10.4 of Method 6020B and perform a check for matrix effects according to section 11.5 of this method.
17.0 References
Same as Method 5, section 17.0, References 2, 3, 4, 5, and 7, with the addition of the following:
1. Perkin Elmer Corporation. Analytical Methods for Atomic Absorption Spectrophotometry. Norwalk, Connecticut. September 1976.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials. Annual Book of ASTM Standards, Part 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadelphia, PA 1974. p. 40-42.
3. Kelin, R., and C. Hach. Standard Additions—Uses and Limitations in Spectrophotometric Analysis. Amer. Lab. 9:21-27. 1977.
4. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. Determining Inorganic and Alkyl Lead Emissions from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Emission Monitoring and Support Laboratory. Research Triangle Park, NC. (Presented at National APCA Meeting, Houston. June 26, 1978).
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 13A—Determination of Total Fluoride Emissions From Stationary Sources (Spadns Zirconium Lake Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total fluorides as Fluorine | 7782-41-4 | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of fluoride (F−) emissions from sources as specified in the regulations. It does not measure fluorocarbons, such as Freons.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary
Gaseous and particulate F− are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected in water and on a filter. The total F− is then determined by the SPADNS Zirconium Lake Colorimetric method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Chloride. Large quantities of chloride will interfere with the analysis, but this interference can be prevented by adding silver sulfate into the distillation flask (see section 11.3). If chloride ion is present, it may be easier to use the specific ion electrode method of analysis (Method 13B).
4.2 Grease. Grease on sample-exposed surfaces may cause low F− results due to adsorption.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl). Highly toxic. Vapors are highly irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs, causing severe damage. May cause bronchitis, pneumonia, or edema of lungs. Exposure to concentrations of 0.13 to 0.2 percent can be lethal in minutes. Will react with metals, producing hydrogen.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. A schematic of the sampling train used in performing this method is shown in Figure 13A-1; it is similar to the Method 5 sampling train except that the filter position is interchangeable. The sampling train consists of the following components:
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Pitot Tube, Differential Pressure Gauge, Filter Heating System, Temperature Sensor, Metering System, Barometer, and Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as Method 5, sections 6.1.1.1, 6.1.1.3 through 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.9, 6.1.2, and 6.1.3, respectively. The filter heating system and temperature sensor are needed only when moisture condensation is a problem.
6.1.2 Probe Liner. Borosilicate glass or 316 stainless steel. When the filter is located immediately after the probe, a probe heating system may be used to prevent filter plugging resulting from moisture condensation, but the temperature in the probe shall not be allowed to exceed 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F).
6.1.3 Filter Holder. With positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter. If the filter is located between the probe and first impinger, use borosilicate glass or stainless steel with a 20-mesh stainless steel screen filter support and a silicone rubber gasket; do not use a glass frit or a sintered metal filter support. If the filter is located between the third and fourth impingers, borosilicate glass with a glass frit filter support and a silicone rubber gasket may be used. Other materials of construction may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.4 Impingers. Four impingers connected as shown in Figure 13A-1 with ground-glass (or equivalent), vacuum-tight fittings. For the first, third, and fourth impingers, use the Greenburg-Smith design, modified by replacing the tip with a 1.3-cm ( 1/2 in.) ID glass tube extending to 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom of the flask. For the second impinger, use a Greenburg-Smith impinger with the standard tip. Modifications (e.g., flexible connections between the impingers or materials other than glass) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. Place a temperature sensor, capable of measuring temperature to within 1 °C (2 °F), at the outlet of the fourth impinger for monitoring purposes.
6.2 Sample Recovery. The following items are needed for sample recovery:
6.2.1 Probe-liner and Probe-Nozzle Brushes, Wash Bottles, Graduated Cylinder and/or Balance, Plastic Storage Containers, Funnel and Rubber Policeman, and Funnel. Same as Method 5, sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2 and 6.2.5 to 6.2.8, respectively.
6.2.2 Sample Storage Container. Wide-mouth, high-density polyethylene bottles for impinger water samples, 1 liter.
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The following items are needed for sample preparation and analysis:
6.3.1 Distillation Apparatus. Glass distillation apparatus assembled as shown in Figure 13A-2.
6.3.2 Bunsen Burner.
6.3.3 Electric Muffle Furnace. Capable of heating to 600 °C (1100 °F).
6.3.4 Crucibles. Nickel, 75- to 100-ml.
6.3.5 Beakers. 500-ml and 1500-ml.
6.3.6 Volumetric Flasks. 50-ml.
6.3.7 Erlenmeyer Flasks or Plastic Bottles. 500-ml.
6.3.8 Constant Temperature Bath. Capable of maintaining a constant temperature of ±1.0 °C at room temperature conditions.
6.3.9 Balance. 300-g capacity, to measure to ±0.5 g.
6.3.10 Spectrophotometer. Instrument that measures absorbance at 570 nm and provides at least a 1-cm light path.
6.3.11 Spectrophotometer Cells. 1-cm path length.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents are to conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available. Otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are needed for sample collection:
7.1.1 Filters.
7.1.1.1 If the filter is located between the third and fourth impingers, use a Whatman No. 1 filter, or equivalent, sized to fit the filter holder.
7.1.1.2 If the filter is located between the probe and first impinger, use any suitable medium (e.g., paper, organic membrane) that can withstand prolonged exposure to temperatures up to 135 °C (275 °F), and has at least 95 percent collection efficiency (<5 percent penetration) for 0.3 µm dioctyl phthalate smoke particles. Conduct the filter efficiency test before the test series, using ASTM D 2986-71, 78, or 95a (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17), or use test data from the supplier's quality control program. The filter must also have a low F− blank value (<0.015 mg F−/cm 2 of filter area). Before the test series, determine the average F− blank value of at least three filters (from the lot to be used for sampling) using the applicable procedures described in sections 8.3 and 8.4 of this method. In general, glass fiber filters have high and/or variable F− blank values, and will not be acceptable for use.
7.1.2 Water. Deionized distilled, to conform to ASTM D 1193-77 or 91, Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). If high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present, the potassium permanganate test for oxidizable organic matter may be deleted.
7.1.3 Silica Gel, Crushed Ice, and Stopcock Grease. Same as Method 5, sections 7.1.2, 7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Water, as described in section 7.1.2, is needed for sample recovery.
7.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The following reagents and standards are needed for sample preparation and analysis:
7.3.1 Calcium Oxide (CaO). Certified grade containing 0.005 percent F− or less.
7.3.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator. Dissolve 0.1 g of phenolphthalein in a mixture of 50 ml of 90 percent ethanol and 50 ml of water.
7.3.3 Silver Sulfate (Ag2SO4).
7.3.4 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), Pellets.
7.3.5 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4), Concentrated.
7.3.6 Sulfuric Acid, 25 Percent (v/v). Mix 1 part of concentrated H2SO4 with 3 parts of water.
7.3.7 Filters. Whatman No. 541, or equivalent.
7.3.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl), Concentrated.
7.3.9 Water. Same as in section 7.1.2.
7.3.10 Fluoride Standard Solution, 0.01 mg F−/ml. Dry approximately 0.5 g of sodium fluoride (NaF) in an oven at 110 °C (230 °F) for at least 2 hours. Dissolve 0.2210 g of NaF in 1 liter of water. Dilute 100 ml of this solution to 1 liter with water.
7.3.11 SPADNS Solution [4,5 Dihydroxyl-3-(p-Sulfophenylazo)-2,7-Naphthalene-Disulfonic Acid Trisodium Salt]. Dissolve 0.960 ±0.010 g of SPADNS reagent in 500 ml water. If stored in a well-sealed bottle protected from the sunlight, this solution is stable for at least 1 month.
7.3.12 Spectrophotometer Zero Reference Solution. Add 10 ml of SPADNS solution to 100 ml water, and acidify with a solution prepared by diluting 7 ml of concentrated HCl to 10 ml with deionized, distilled water. Prepare daily.
7.3.13 SPADNS Mixed Reagent. Dissolve 0.135 ±0.005 g of zirconyl chloride octahydrate (ZrOCl2 8H2O) in 25 ml of water. Add 350 ml of concentrated HCl, and dilute to 500 ml with deionized, distilled water. Mix equal volumes of this solution and SPADNS solution to form a single reagent. This reagent is stable for at least 2 months.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Preparation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.1, except that the filter need not be weighed.
8.2 Preliminary Determinations. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.2, except that the nozzle size must be selected such that isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm) can be maintained.
8.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.3, except for the following variation: Assemble the train as shown in Figure 13A-1 with the filter between the third and fourth impingers. Alternatively, if a 20-mesh stainless steel screen is used for the filter support, the filter may be placed between the probe and first impinger. A filter heating system to prevent moisture condensation may be used, but shall not allow the temperature to exceed 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F). Record the filter location on the data sheet (see section 8.5).
8.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Follow the leak-check procedures given in Method 5, section 8.4.
8.5 Sampling Train Operation. Follow the general procedure given in Method 5, section 8.5, keeping the filter and probe temperatures (if applicable) at 120 ±14 °C (248 ±25 °F) and isokinetic sampling rates below 28 liters/min (1.0 cfm). For each run, record the data required on a data sheet such as the one shown in Method 5, Figure 5-3.
8.6 Sample Recovery. Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the probe to cool.
8.6.1 When the probe can be safely handled, wipe off all external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle, and place a cap over it to keep from losing part of the sample. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling down as this would create a vacuum in the filter holder, thus drawing water from the impingers into the filter holder.
8.6.2 Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, remove the probe from the sample train, wipe off any silicone grease, and cap the open outlet of the probe. Be careful not to lose any condensate that might be present. Remove the filter assembly, wipe off any silicone grease from the filter holder inlet, and cap this inlet. Remove the umbilical cord from the last impinger, and cap the impinger. After wiping off any silicone grease, cap off the filter holder outlet and any open impinger inlets and outlets. Ground-glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps may be used to close these openings.
8.6.3 Transfer the probe and filter-impinger assembly to the cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be minimized.
8.6.4 Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly, and note any abnormal conditions. Treat the samples as follows:
8.6.4.1 Container No. 1 (Probe, Filter, and Impinger Catches).
8.6.4.1.1 Using a graduated cylinder, measure to the nearest ml, and record the volume of the water in the first three impingers; include any condensate in the probe in this determination. Transfer the impinger water from the graduated cylinder into a polyethylene container. Add the filter to this container. (The filter may be handled separately using procedures subject to the Administrator's approval.) Taking care that dust on the outside of the probe or other exterior surfaces does not get into the sample, clean all sample-exposed surfaces (including the probe nozzle, probe fitting, probe liner, first three impingers, impinger connectors, and filter holder) with water. Use less than 500 ml for the entire wash. Add the washings to the sample container. Perform the water rinses as follows:
8.6.4.1.2 Carefully remove the probe nozzle and rinse the inside surface with water from a wash bottle. Brush with a Nylon bristle brush, and rinse until the rinse shows no visible particles, after which make a final rinse of the inside surface. Brush and rinse the inside parts of the Swagelok fitting with water in a similar way.
8.6.4.1.3 Rinse the probe liner with water. While squirting the water into the upper end of the probe, tilt and rotate the probe so that all inside surfaces will be wetted with water. Let the water drain from the lower end into the sample container. A funnel (glass or polyethylene) may be used to aid in transferring the liquid washes to the container. Follow the rinse with a probe brush. Hold the probe in an inclined position, and squirt water into the upper end as the probe brush is being pushed with a twisting action through the probe. Hold the sample container underneath the lower end of the probe, and catch any water and particulate matter that is brushed from the probe. Run the brush through the probe three times or more. With stainless steel or other metal probes, run the brush through in the above prescribed manner at least six times since metal probes have small crevices in which particulate matter can be entrapped. Rinse the brush with water, and quantitatively collect these washings in the sample container. After the brushing, make a final rinse of the probe as described above.
8.6.4.1.4 It is recommended that two people clean the probe to minimize sample losses. Between sampling runs, keep brushes clean and protected from contamination.
8.6.4.1.5 Rinse the inside surface of each of the first three impingers (and connecting glassware) three separate times. Use a small portion of water for each rinse, and brush each sample-exposed surface with a Nylon bristle brush, to ensure recovery of fine particulate matter. Make a final rinse of each surface and of the brush.
8.6.4.1.6 After ensuring that all joints have been wiped clean of the silicone grease, brush and rinse with water the inside of the filter holder (front-half only, if filter is positioned between the third and fourth impingers). Brush and rinse each surface three times or more if needed. Make a final rinse of the brush and filter holder.
8.6.4.1.7 After all water washings and particulate matter have been collected in the sample container, tighten the lid so that water will not leak out when it is shipped to the laboratory. Mark the height of the fluid level to transport. Label the container clearly to identify its contents.
8.6.4.2 Container No. 2 (Sample Blank). Prepare a blank by placing an unused filter in a polyethylene container and adding a volume of water equal to the total volume in Container No. 1. Process the blank in the same manner as for Container No. 1.
8.6.4.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Note the color of the indicating silica gel to determine whether it has been completely spent, and make a notation of its condition. Transfer the silica gel from the fourth impinger to its original container, and seal. A funnel may be used to pour the silica gel and a rubber policeman to remove the silica gel from the impinger. It is not necessary to remove the small amount of dust particles that may adhere to the impinger wall and are difficult to remove. Since the gain in weight is to be used for moisture calculations, do not use any water or other liquids to transfer the silica gel. If a balance is available in the field, follow the analytical procedure for Container No. 3 in section 11.4.2.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate and sample volume. |
| 10.2 | Spectrophotometer calibration | Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of standards. |
| 11.3.3 | Interference/recovery efficiency check during distillation | Minimize negative effects of used acid. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Calibrate the probe nozzle, pitot tube, metering system, probe heater, temperature sensors, and barometer according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, sections 10.1 through 10.6. Conduct the leak-check of the metering system according to the procedures outlined in Method 5, section 8.4.1.
10.2 Spectrophotometer.
10.2.1 Prepare the blank standard by adding 10 ml of SPADNS mixed reagent to 50 ml of water.
10.2.2 Accurately prepare a series of standards from the 0.01 mg F−/ml standard fluoride solution (Section 7.3.10) by diluting 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 ml to 100 ml with deionized, distilled water. Pipet 50 ml from each solution, and transfer each to a separate 100-ml beaker. Then add 10 ml of SPADNS mixed reagent (Section 7.3.13) to each. These standards will contain 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, and 70 µg F−(0 to 1.4 µg/ml), respectively.
10.2.3 After mixing, place the blank and calibration standards in a constant temperature bath for 30 minutes before reading the absorbance with the spectrophotometer. Adjust all samples to this same temperature before analyzing.
10.2.4 With the spectrophotometer at 570 nm, use the blank standard to set the absorbance to zero. Determine the absorbance of the standards.
10.2.5 Prepare a calibration curve by plotting µg F−/50 ml versus absorbance on linear graph paper. Prepare the standard curve initially and thereafter whenever the SPADNS mixed reagent is newly made. Also, run a calibration standard with each set of samples and, if it differs from the calibration curve by more than ±2 percent, prepare a new standard curve.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check. Note the liquid levels in Containers No. 1 and No. 2, determine whether leakage occurred during transport, and note this finding on the analytical data sheet. If noticeable leakage has occurred, either void the sample or use methods, subject to the approval of the Administrator, to correct the final results.
11.2 Sample Preparation. Treat the contents of each sample container as described below:
11.2.1 Container No. 1 (Probe, Filter, and Impinger Catches). Filter this container's contents, including the sampling filter, through Whatman No. 541 filter paper, or equivalent, into a 1500-ml beaker.
11.2.1.1 If the filtrate volume exceeds 900 ml, make the filtrate basic (red to phenolphthalein) with NaOH, and evaporate to less than 900 ml.
11.2.1.2 Place the filtered material (including sampling filter) in a nickel crucible, add a few ml of water, and macerate the filters with a glass rod.
11.2.1.2.1 Add 100 mg CaO to the crucible, and mix the contents thoroughly to form a slurry. Add two drops of phenolphthalein indicator. Place the crucible in a hood under infrared lamps or on a hot plate at low heat. Evaporate the water completely. During the evaporation of the water, keep the slurry basic (red to phenolphthalein) to avoid loss of F−. If the indicator turns colorless (acidic) during the evaporation, add CaO until the color turns red again.
11.2.1.2.2 After evaporation of the water, place the crucible on a hot plate under a hood, and slowly increase the temperature until the Whatman No. 541 and sampling filters char. It may take several hours to char the filters completely.
11.2.1.2.3 Place the crucible in a cold muffle furnace. Gradually (to prevent smoking) increase the temperature to 600 °C (1100 °F), and maintain this temperature until the contents are reduced to an ash. Remove the crucible from the furnace, and allow to cool.
11.2.1.2.4 Add approximately 4 g of crushed NaOH to the crucible, and mix. Return the crucible to the muffle furnace, and fuse the sample for 10 minutes at 600 °C.
11.2.1.2.5 Remove the sample from the furnace, and cool to ambient temperature. Using several rinsings of warm water, transfer the contents of the crucible to the beaker containing the filtrate. To ensure complete sample removal, rinse finally with two 20-ml portions of 25 percent H2SO4, and carefully add to the beaker. Mix well, and transfer to a 1-liter volumetric flask. Dilute to volume with water, and mix thoroughly. Allow any undissolved solids to settle.
11.2.2 Container No. 2 (Sample Blank). Treat in the same manner as described in section 11.2.1 above.
11.2.3 Adjustment of Acid/Water Ratio in Distillation Flask. Place 400 ml of water in the distillation flask, and add 200 ml of concentrated H2SO4. Add some soft glass beads and several small pieces of broken glass tubing, and assemble the apparatus as shown in Figure 13A-2. Heat the flask until it reaches a temperature of 175 °C (347 °F) to adjust the acid/water ratio for subsequent distillations. Discard the distillate.
Caution: Use a protective shield when carrying out this procedure. Observe standard precautions when mixing H2SO4 with water. Slowly add the acid to the flask with constant swirling.
11.3 Distillation.
11.3.1 Cool the contents of the distillation flask to below 80 °C (180 °F). Pipet an aliquot of sample containing less than 10.0 mg F− directly into the distillation flask, and add water to make a total volume of 220 ml added to the distillation flask. (To estimate the appropriate aliquot size, select an aliquot of the solution, and treat as described in section 11.4.1. This will be an approximation of the F− content because of possible interfering ions.)
11.3.2 Place a 250-ml volumetric flask at the condenser exit. Heat the flask as rapidly as possible with a Bunsen burner, and collect all the distillate up to 175 °C (347 °F). During heatup, play the burner flame up and down the side of the flask to prevent bumping. Conduct the distillation as rapidly as possible (15 minutes or less). Slow distillations have been found to produce low F− recoveries. Be careful not to exceed 175 °C (347 °F) to avoid causing H2SO4 to distill over. If F− distillation in the mg range is to be followed by a distillation in the fractional mg range, add 220 ml of water and distill it over as in the acid adjustment step to remove residual F− from the distillation system.
11.3.3 The acid in the distillation flask may be used until there is carry-over of interferences or poor F− recovery. Check for interference and for recovery efficiency every tenth distillation using a water blank and a standard solution. Change the acid whenever the F− recovery is less than 90 percent or the blank value exceeds 0.1 µg/ml.
11.4 Sample Analysis.
11.4.1 Containers No. 1 and No. 2.
11.4.1.1 After distilling suitable aliquots from Containers No. 1 and No. 2 according to section 11.3, dilute the distillate in the volumetric flasks to exactly 250 ml with water, and mix thoroughly. Pipet a suitable aliquot of each sample distillate (containing 10 to 40 µg F−/ml) into a beaker, and dilute to 50 ml with water. Use the same aliquot size for the blank. Add 10 ml of SPADNS mixed reagent (Section 7.3.13), and mix thoroughly.
11.4.1.2 After mixing, place the sample in a constant-temperature bath containing the standard solutions for 30 minutes before reading the absorbance on the spectrophotometer.
11.4.1.3 Set the spectrophotometer to zero absorbance at 570 nm with the zero reference solution (Section 7.3.12), and check the spectrophotometer calibration with the standard solution (Section 7.3.10). Determine the absorbance of the samples, and determine the concentration from the calibration curve. If the concentration does not fall within the range of the calibration curve, repeat the procedure using a different size aliquot.
11.4.2 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Weigh the spent silica gel (or silica gel plus impinger) to the nearest 0.5 g using a balance. This step may be conducted in the field.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation. Other forms of the equations may be used, provided that they yield equivalent results.
12.1 Nomenclature.
Ad = Aliquot of distillate taken for color development, ml.
At = Aliquot of total sample added to still, ml.
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, portion by volume.
Cs = Concentration of F− in stack gas, mg/dscm (gr/dscf).
Fc = F− concentration from the calibration curve, µg.
Ft = Total F− in sample, mg.
Tm = Absolute average dry gas meter (DGM) temperature (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5), °K (°R).
Ts = Absolute average stack gas temperature (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5), °K (°R).
Vd = Volume of distillate as diluted, ml.
Vm(std) = Volume of gas sample as measured by DGM at standard conditions, dscm (dscf).
Vt = Total volume of F− sample, after final dilution, ml.
Vw(std) = Volume of water vapor in the gas sample at standard conditions, scm (scf)
12.2 Average DGM Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop (see Figure 5-3 of Method 5).
12.3 Dry Gas Volume. Calculate Vm(std), and adjust for leakage, if necessary, using Equation 5-1 of Method 5.
12.4 Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content. Calculate Vw(std) and Bws from the data obtained in this method. Use Equations 5-2 and 5-3 of Method 5.
12.5 Total Fluoride in Sample. Calculate the amount of F− in the sample using the following equation:
Where:
K = 10−3 mg/µg (metric units)
= 1.54 × 10−5 gr/µg (English units)
12.6 Fluoride Concentration in Stack Gas. Determine the F− concentration in the stack gas using the following equation:
12.7 Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method 5, section 12.11.
13.0 Method Performance
The following estimates are based on a collaborative test done at a primary aluminum smelter. In the test, six laboratories each sampled the stack simultaneously using two sampling trains for a total of 12 samples per sampling run. Fluoride concentrations encountered during the test ranged from 0.1 to 1.4 mg F−/m 3.
13.1 Precision. The intra- and inter-laboratory standard deviations, which include sampling and analysis errors, were 0.044 mg F−/m 3 with 60 degrees of freedom and 0.064 mg F−/m 3 with five degrees of freedom, respectively.
13.2 Bias. The collaborative test did not find any bias in the analytical method.
13.3 Range. The range of this method is 0 to 1.4 µg F−/ml.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Compliance with ASTM D 3270-73T, 80, 91, or 95 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17) “Analysis of Fluoride Content of the Atmosphere and Plant Tissues (Semiautomated Method) is an acceptable alternative for the requirements specified in sections 11.2, 11.3, and 11.4.1 when applied to suitable aliquots of Containers 1 and 2 samples.
17.0 References
1. Bellack, Ervin. Simplified Fluoride Distillation Method. J. of the American Water Works Association. 50:5306. 1958.
2. Mitchell, W.J., J.C. Suggs, and F.J. Bergman. Collaborative Study of EPA Method 13A and Method 13B. Publication No. EPA-300/4-77-050. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC. December 1977.
3. Mitchell, W.J., and M.R. Midgett. Adequacy of Sampling Trains and Analytical Procedures Used for Fluoride. Atm. Environ. 10:865-872. 1976.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 13B—Determination of Total Fluoride Emissions From Stationary Sources (Specific Ion Electrode Method)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total fluorides as Fluorine | 7782-41-4 | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of fluoride (F−) emissions from sources as specified in the regulations. It does not measure fluorocarbons, such as Freons.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary
Gaseous and particulate F− are withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected in water and on a filter. The total F− is then determined by the specific ion electrode method.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
Grease on sample-exposed surfaces may cause low F− results because of adsorption.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method does not purport to address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.2.1 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eye tissues and to skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.2 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recovery. Same as Method 13A, sections 6.1 and 6.2, respectively.
6.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The following items are required for sample preparation and analysis:
6.2.1 Distillation Apparatus, Bunsen Burner, Electric Muffle Furnace, Crucibles, Beakers, Volumetric Flasks, Erlenmeyer Flasks or Plastic Bottles, Constant Temperature Bath, and Balance. Same as Method 13A, sections 6.3.1 to 6.3.9, respectively.
6.2.2 Fluoride Ion Activity Sensing Electrode.
6.2.3 Reference Electrode. Single junction, sleeve type.
6.2.4 Electrometer. A pH meter with millivolt-scale capable of ±0.1-mv resolution, or a specific ion meter made specifically for specific ion electrode use.
6.2.5 Magnetic Stirrer and Tetrafluoroethylene (TFE) Fluorocarbon-Coated Stirring Bars.
6.2.6 Beakers. Polyethylene, 100-ml.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents are to conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available. Otherwise, use the best available grade.
7.1 Sample Collection and Sample Recovery. Same as Method 13A, sections 7.1 and 7.2, respectively.
7.2 Sample Preparation and Analysis. The following reagents and standards are required for sample analysis:
7.2.1 Calcium Oxide (CaO). Certified grade containing 0.005 percent F− or less.
7.2.2 Phenolphthalein Indicator. Dissolve 0.1 g phenolphthalein in a mixture of 50 ml of 90 percent ethanol and 50 ml water.
7.2.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH), Pellets.
7.2.4 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4), Concentrated.
7.2.5 Filters. Whatman No. 541, or equivalent.
7.2.6 Water. Same as section 7.1.2 of Method 13A.
7.2.7 Sodium Hydroxide, 5 M. Dissolve 20 g of NaOH in 100 ml of water.
7.2.8 Sulfuric Acid, 25 Percent (v/v). Mix 1 part of concentrated H2SO4 with 3 parts of water.
7.2.9 Total Ionic Strength Adjustment Buffer (TISAB). Place approximately 500 ml of water in a 1-liter beaker. Add 57 ml of glacial acetic acid, 58 g of sodium chloride, and 4 g of cyclohexylene dinitrilo tetraacetic acid. Stir to dissolve. Place the beaker in a water bath and cool to 20 °C (68 °F). Slowly add 5 M NaOH to the solution, measuring the pH continuously with a calibrated pH/reference electrode pair, until the pH is 5.3. Pour into a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to volume with deionized, distilled water. Commercially prepared TISAB may be substituted for the above.
7.2.10 Fluoride Standard Solution, 0.1 M. Oven dry approximately 10 g of sodium fluoride (NaF) for a minimum of 2 hours at 110 °C (230 °F), and store in a desiccator. Then add 4.2 g of NaF to a 1-liter volumetric flask, and add enough water to dissolve. Dilute to volume with water.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as Method 13A, section 8.0.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.0, 10.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate and sample volume. |
| 10.2 | Fluoride electrode | Evaluate analytical technique, preparation of standards. |
| 11.1 | Interference/recovery efficiency-check during distillation | Minimize negative effects of used acid. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardizations
10.1 Sampling Equipment. Same as Method 13A, section 10.1.
10.2 Fluoride Electrode. Prepare fluoride standardizing solutions by serial dilution of the 0.1 M fluoride standard solution. Pipet 10 ml of 0.1 M fluoride standard solution into a 100-ml volumetric flask, and make up to the mark with water for a 10−2 M standard solution. Use 10 ml of 10−2 M solution to make a 10−3 M solution in the same manner. Repeat the dilution procedure, and make 10−4 and 10−5 M solutions.
10.2.1 Pipet 50 ml of each standard into a separate beaker. Add 50 ml of TISAB to each beaker. Place the electrode in the most dilute standard solution. When a steady millivolt reading is obtained, plot the value on the linear axis of semilog graph paper versus concentration on the log axis. Plot the nominal value for concentration of the standard on the log axis, (e.g., when 50 ml of 10−2 M standard is diluted with 50 ml of TISAB, the concentration is still designated “10−2 M”).
10.2.2 Between measurements, soak the fluoride sensing electrode in water for 30 seconds, and then remove and blot dry. Analyze the standards going from dilute to concentrated standards. A straight-line calibration curve will be obtained, with nominal concentrations of 10−4, 10−3, 10−2, 10−1 fluoride molarity on the log axis plotted versus electrode potential (in mv) on the linear scale. Some electrodes may be slightly nonlinear between 10−5 and 10−4 M. If this occurs, use additional standards between these two concentrations.
10.2.3 Calibrate the fluoride electrode daily, and check it hourly. Prepare fresh fluoride standardizing solutions daily (10−2 M or less). Store fluoride standardizing solutions in polyethylene or polypropylene containers.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Sample Loss Check, Sample Preparation, and Distillation. Same as Method 13A, sections 11.1 through 11.3, except that the note following section 11.3.1 is not applicable.
11.2 Analysis.
11.2.1 Containers No. 1 and No. 2. Distill suitable aliquots from Containers No. 1 and No. 2. Dilute the distillate in the volumetric flasks to exactly 250 ml with water, and mix thoroughly. Pipet a 25-ml aliquot from each of the distillate into separate beakers. Add an equal volume of TISAB, and mix. The sample should be at the same temperature as the calibration standards when measurements are made. If ambient laboratory temperature fluctuates more than ±2 °C from the temperature at which the calibration standards were measured, condition samples and standards in a constant-temperature bath before measurement. Stir the sample with a magnetic stirrer during measurement to minimize electrode response time. If the stirrer generates enough heat to change solution temperature, place a piece of temperature insulating material, such as cork, between the stirrer and the beaker. Hold dilute samples (below 10−4 M fluoride ion content) in polyethylene beakers during measurement.
11.2.2 Insert the fluoride and reference electrodes into the solution. When a steady millivolt reading is obtained, record it. This may take several minutes. Determine concentration from the calibration curve. Between electrode measurements, rinse the electrode with water.
11.2.3 Container No. 3 (Silica Gel). Same as in Method 13A, section 11.4.2.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra significant figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculation.
12.1 Nomenclature. Same as Method 13A, section 12.1, with the addition of the following:
M = F− concentration from calibration curve, molarity.
12.2 Average DGM Temperature and Average Orifice Pressure Drop, Dry Gas Volume, Volume of Water Vapor and Moisture Content, Fluoride Concentration in Stack Gas, and Isokinetic Variation. Same as Method 13A, sections 12.2 to 12.4, 12.6, and 12.7, respectively.
12.3 Total Fluoride in Sample. Calculate the amount of F− in the sample using Equation 13B-1:
Where:
K = 19 [(mg·l)/(mole·ml)] (metric units)
= 0.292 [(gr·l)/(mole·ml)] (English units)
13.0 Method Performance
The following estimates are based on a collaborative test done at a primary aluminum smelter. In the test, six laboratories each sampled the stack simultaneously using two sampling trains for a total of 12 samples per sampling run. Fluoride concentrations encountered during the test ranged from 0.1 to 1.4 mg F−/m 3.
13.1 Precision. The intra-laboratory and inter-laboratory standard deviations, which include sampling and analysis errors, are 0.037 mg F−/m 3 with 60 degrees of freedom and 0.056 mg F−/m 3 with five degrees of freedom, respectively.
13.2 Bias. The collaborative test did not find any bias in the analytical method.
13.3 Range. The range of this method is 0.02 to 2,000 µg F−/ml; however, measurements of less than 0.1 µg F−/ml require extra care.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Compliance with ASTM D 3270-73T, 91, 95 “Analysis for Fluoride Content of the Atmosphere and Plant Tissues (Semiautomated Method)” is an acceptable alternative for the distillation and analysis requirements specified in sections 11.1 and 11.2 when applied to suitable aliquots of Containers 1 and 2 samples.
17.0 References
Same as Method 13A, section 16.0, References 1 and 2, with the following addition:
1. MacLeod, Kathryn E., and Howard L. Crist. Comparison of the SPADNS-Zirconium Lake and Specific Ion Electrode Methods of Fluoride Determination in Stack Emission Samples. Analytical Chemistry. 45:1272-1273. 1973.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 14—Determination of Fluoride Emissions From Potroom Roof Monitors for Primary Aluminum Plants
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total fluorides as Fluorine | 7782-41-4 | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of fluoride emissions from roof monitors at primary aluminum reduction plant potroom groups.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Gaseous and particulate fluoride roof monitor emissions are drawn into a permanent sampling manifold through several large nozzles. The sample is transported from the sampling manifold to ground level through a duct. The fluoride content of the gas in the duct is determined using either Method 13A or Method 13B. Effluent velocity and volumetric flow rate are determined using anemometers located in the roof monitor.
3.0 Definitions
Potroom means a building unit which houses a group of electrolytic cells in which aluminum is produced.
Potroom group means an uncontrolled potroom, a potroom which is controlled individually, or a group of potrooms or potroom segments ducted to a common control system.
Roof monitor means that portion of the roof of a potroom where gases not captured at the cell exit from the potroom.
4.0 Interferences
Same as section 4.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, with the addition of the following:
4.1 Magnetic Field Effects. Anemometer readings can be affected by potroom magnetic field effects. section 6.1 provides for minimization of this interference through proper shielding or encasement of anemometer components.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and to determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive Reagents. Same as section 5.2 of either Method 13A or Method 13B.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
Same as section 6.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addition of the following:
6.1 Velocity Measurement Apparatus.
6.1.1 Anemometer Specifications. Propeller anemometers, or equivalent. Each anemometer shall meet the following specifications:
6.1.1.1 Its propeller shall be made of polystyrene, or similar material of uniform density. To ensure uniformity of performance among propellers, it is desirable that all propellers be made from the same mold.
6.1.1.2 The propeller shall be properly balanced, to optimize performance.
6.1.1.3 When the anemometer is mounted horizontally, its threshold velocity shall not exceed 15 m/min (50 ft/min).
6.1.1.4 The measurement range of the anemometer shall extend to at least 600 m/min (2,000 ft/min).
6.1.1.5 The anemometer shall be able to withstand prolonged exposure to dusty and corrosive environments; one way of achieving this is to purge the bearings of the anemometer continuously with filtered air during operation.
6.1.1.6 All anemometer components shall be properly shielded or encased, such that the performance of the anemometer is uninfluenced by potroom magnetic field effects.
6.1.1.7 A known relationship shall exist between the electrical output signal from the anemometer generator and the propeller shaft rpm (see section 10.2.1). Anemometers having other types of output signals (e.g., optical) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. If other types of anemometers are used, there must be a known relationship between output signal and shaft rpm (see section 10.2.2).
6.1.1.8 Each anemometer shall be equipped with a suitable readout system (see section 6.1.3).
6.1.2 Anemometer Installation Requirements.
6.1.2.1 Single, Isolated Potroom. If the affected facility consists of a single, isolated potroom (or potroom segment), install at least one anemometer for every 85 m (280 ft) of roof monitor length. If the length of the roof monitor divided by 85 m (280 ft) is not a whole number, round the fraction to the nearest whole number to determine the number of anemometers needed. For monitors that are less than 130 m (430 ft) in length, use at least two anemometers. Divide the monitor cross-section into as many equal areas as anemometers, and locate an anemometer at the centroid of each equal area. See exception in section 6.1.2.3.
6.1.2.2 Two or More Potrooms. If the affected facility consists of two or more potrooms (or potroom segments) ducted to a common control device, install anemometers in each potroom (or segment) that contains a sampling manifold. Install at least one anemometer for every 85 m (280 ft) of roof monitor length of the potroom (or segment). If the potroom (or segment) length divided by 85 m (280 ft) is not a whole number, round the fraction to the nearest whole number to determine the number of anemometers needed. If the potroom (or segment) length is less than 130 m (430 ft), use at least two anemometers. Divide the potroom (or segment) monitor cross-section into as many equal areas as anemometers, and locate an anemometer at the centroid of each equal area. See exception in section 6.1.2.3.
6.1.2.3 Placement of Anemometer at the Center of Manifold. At least one anemometer shall be installed in the immediate vicinity (i.e., within 10 m (33 ft)) of the center of the manifold (see section 6.2.1). For its placement in relation to the width of the monitor, there are two alternatives. The first is to make a velocity traverse of the width of the roof monitor where an anemometer is to be placed and install the anemometer at a point of average velocity along this traverse. The traverse may be made with any suitable low velocity measuring device, and shall be made during normal process operating conditions. The second alternative is to install the anemometer half-way across the width of the roof monitor. In this latter case, the velocity traverse need not be conducted.
6.1.3 Recorders. Recorders that are equipped with suitable auxiliary equipment (e.g., transducers) for converting the output signal from each anemometer to a continuous recording of air flow velocity or to an integrated measure of volumetric flowrate shall be used. A suitable recorder is one that allows the output signal from the propeller anemometer to be read to within 1 percent when the velocity is between 100 and 120 m/min (330 and 390 ft/min). For the purpose of recording velocity, “continuous” shall mean one readout per 15-minute or shorter time interval. A constant amount of time shall elapse between readings. Volumetric flow rate may be determined by an electrical count of anemometer revolutions. The recorders or counters shall permit identification of the velocities or flowrates measured by each individual anemometer.
6.1.4 Pitot Tube. Standard-type pitot tube, as described in section 6.7 of Method 2, and having a coefficient of 0.99 ±0.01.
6.1.5 Pitot Tube (Optional). Isolated, Type S pitot, as described in section 6.1 of Method 2, and having a known coefficient, determined as outlined in section 4.1 of Method 2.
6.1.6 Differential Pressure Gauge. Inclined manometer, or equivalent, as described in section 6.1.2 of Method 2.
6.2 Roof Monitor Air Sampling System.
6.2.1 Manifold System and Ductwork. A minimum of one manifold system shall be installed for each potroom group. The manifold system and ductwork shall meet the following specifications:
6.2.1.1 The manifold system and connecting duct shall be permanently installed to draw an air sample from the roof monitor to ground level. A typical installation of a duct for drawing a sample from a roof monitor to ground level is shown in Figure 14-1 in section 17.0. A plan of a manifold system that is located in a roof monitor is shown in Figure 14-2. These drawings represent a typical installation for a generalized roof monitor. The dimensions on these figures may be altered slightly to make the manifold system fit into a particular roof monitor, but the general configuration shall be followed.
6.2.1.2 There shall be eight nozzles, each having a diameter of 0.40 to 0.50 m.
6.2.1.3 The length of the manifold system from the first nozzle to the eighth shall be 35 m (115 ft) or eight percent of the length of the potroom (or potroom segment) roof monitor, whichever is greater. Deviation from this requirement is subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.2.1.4 The duct leading from the roof monitor manifold system shall be round with a diameter of 0.30 to 0.40 m (1.0 to 1.3 ft). All connections in the ductwork shall be leak-free.
6.2.1.5 As shown in Figure 14-2, each of the sample legs of the manifold shall have a device, such as a blast gate or valve, to enable adjustment of the flow into each sample nozzle.
6.2.1.6 The manifold system shall be located in the immediate vicinity of one of the propeller anemometers (see section 8.1.1.4) and as close as possible to the midsection of the potroom (or potroom segment). Avoid locating the manifold system near the end of a potroom or in a section where the aluminum reduction pot arrangement is not typical of the rest of the potroom (or potroom segment). The sample nozzles shall be centered in the throat of the roof monitor (see Figure 14-1).
6.2.1.7 All sample-exposed surfaces within the nozzles, manifold, and sample duct shall be constructed with 316 stainless steel. Alternatively, aluminum may be used if a new ductwork is conditioned with fluoride-laden roof monitor air for a period of six weeks before initial testing. Other materials of construction may be used if it is demonstrated through comparative testing, to the satisfaction of the Administrator, that there is no loss of fluorides in the system.
6.2.1.8 Two sample ports shall be located in a vertical section of the duct between the roof monitor and the exhaust fan (see section 6.2.2). The sample ports shall be at least 10 duct diameters downstream and three diameters upstream from any flow disturbance such as a bend or contraction. The two sample ports shall be situated 90° apart. One of the sample ports shall be situated so that the duct can be traversed in the plane of the nearest upstream duct bend.
6.2.2 Exhaust Fan. An industrial fan or blower shall be attached to the sample duct at ground level (see Figure 14-1). This exhaust fan shall have a capacity such that a large enough volume of air can be pulled through the ductwork to maintain an isokinetic sampling rate in all the sample nozzles for all flow rates normally encountered in the roof monitor. The exhaust fan volumetric flow rate shall be adjustable so that the roof monitor gases can be drawn isokinetically into the sample nozzles. This control of flow may be achieved by a damper on the inlet to the exhauster or by any other workable method.
6.3 Temperature Measurement Apparatus. To monitor and record the temperature of the roof monitor effluent gas, and consisting of the following:
6.3.1 Temperature Sensor. A temperature sensor shall be installed in the roof monitor near the sample duct. The temperature sensor shall conform to the specifications outlined in Method 2, section 6.3.
6.3.2 Signal Transducer. Transducer, to change the temperature sensor voltage output to a temperature readout.
6.3.3 Thermocouple Wire. To reach from roof monitor to signal transducer and recorder.
6.3.4 Recorder. Suitable recorder to monitor the output from the thermocouple signal transducer.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as section 7.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, as applicable.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Roof Monitor Velocity Determination.
8.1.1 Velocity Estimate(s) for Setting Isokinetic Flow. To assist in setting isokinetic flow in the manifold sample nozzles, the anticipated average velocity in the section of the roof monitor containing the sampling manifold shall be estimated before each test run. Any convenient means to make this estimate may be used (e.g., the velocity indicated by the anemometer in the section of the roof monitor containing the sampling manifold may be continuously monitored during the 24-hour period before the test run). If there is question as to whether a single estimate of average velocity is adequate for an entire test run (e.g., if velocities are anticipated to be significantly different during different potroom operations), the test run may be divided into two or more “sub-runs,” and a different estimated average velocity may be used for each sub-run (see section 8.4.2).
8.1.2 Velocity Determination During a Test Run. During the actual test run, record the velocity or volumetric flowrate readings of each propeller anemometer in the roof monitor. Readings shall be taken from each anemometer at equal time intervals of 15 minutes or less (or continuously).
8.2 Temperature Recording. Record the temperature of the roof monitor effluent gases at least once every 2 hours during the test run.
8.3 Pretest Ductwork Conditioning. During the 24-hour period immediately preceding the test run, turn on the exhaust fan, and draw roof monitor air through the manifold system and ductwork. Adjust the fan to draw a volumetric flow through the duct such that the velocity of gas entering the manifold nozzles approximates the average velocity of the air exiting the roof monitor in the vicinity of the sampling manifold.
8.4 Manifold Isokinetic Sample Rate Adjustment(s).
8.4.1 Initial Adjustment. Before the test run (or first sub-run, if applicable; see sections 8.1.1 and 8.4.2), adjust the fan such that air enters the manifold sample nozzles at a velocity equal to the appropriate estimated average velocity determined under section 8.1.1. Use Equation 14-1 (Section 12.2.2) to determine the correct stream velocity needed in the duct at the sampling location, in order for sample gas to be drawn isokinetically into the manifold nozzles. Next, verify that the correct stream velocity has been achieved, by performing a pitot tube traverse of the sample duct (using either a standard or Type S pitot tube); use the procedure outlined in Method 2.
8.4.2 Adjustments During Run. If the test run is divided into two or more “sub-runs” (see section 8.1.1), additional isokinetic rate adjustment(s) may become necessary during the run. Any such adjustment shall be made just before the start of a sub-run, using the procedure outlined in section 8.4.1 above.
8.5 Pretest Preparation, Preliminary Determinations, Preparation of Sampling Train, Leak-Check Procedures, Sampling Train Operation, and Sample Recovery. Same as Method 13A, sections 8.1 through 8.6, with the exception of the following:
8.5.1 A single train shall be used for the entire sampling run. Alternatively, if two or more sub-runs are performed, a separate train may be used for each sub-run; note, however, that if this option is chosen, the area of the sampling nozzle shall be the same (±2 percent) for each train. If the test run is divided into sub-runs, a complete traverse of the duct shall be performed during each sub-run.
8.5.2 Time Per Run. Each test run shall last 8 hours or more; if more than one run is to be performed, all runs shall be of approximately the same (±10 percent) length. If questions exist as to the representativeness of an 8-hour test, a longer period should be selected. Conduct each run during a period when all normal operations are performed underneath the sampling manifold. For most recently-constructed plants, 24 hours are required for all potroom operations and events to occur in the area beneath the sampling manifold. During the test period, all pots in the potroom group shall be operated such that emissions are representative of normal operating conditions in the potroom group.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures.
| Section | Quality Control Measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.0, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of gas flow rate in duct and of sample volume. |
| 10.3, 10.4 | Initial and periodic performance checks of roof monitor effluent gas characterization apparatus | Ensure accurate and precise measurement of roof monitor effluent gas temperature and flow rate. |
| 11.0 | Interference/recovery efficiency check during distillation | Minimize negative effects of used acid. |
9.2 Volume Metering System Checks. Same as Method 5, section 9.2.
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as section 10.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addition of the following:
10.1 Manifold Intake Nozzles. The manifold intake nozzles shall be calibrated when the manifold system is installed or, alternatively, the manifold may be preassembled and the nozzles calibrated on the ground prior to installation. The following procedures shall be observed:
10.1.1 Adjust the exhaust fan to draw a volumetric flow rate (refer to Equation 14-1) such that the entrance velocity into each manifold nozzle approximates the average effluent velocity in the roof monitor.
10.1.2 Measure the velocity of the air entering each nozzle by inserting a standard pitot tube into a 2.5 cm or less diameter hole (see Figure 14-2) located in the manifold between each blast gate (or valve) and nozzle. Note that a standard pitot tube is used, rather than a type S, to eliminate possible velocity measurement errors due to cross-section blockage in the small (0.13 m diameter) manifold leg ducts. The pitot tube tip shall be positioned at the center of each manifold leg duct. Take care to ensure that there is no leakage around the pitot tube, which could affect the indicated velocity in the manifold leg.
10.1.3 If the velocity of air being drawn into each nozzle is not the same, open or close each blast gate (or valve) until the velocity in each nozzle is the same. Fasten each blast gate (or valve) so that it will remain in position, and close the pitot port holes.
10.2 Initial Calibration of Propeller Anemometers.
10.2.1 Anemometers that meet the specifications outlined in section 6.1.1 need not be calibrated, provided that a reference performance curve relating anemometer signal output to air velocity (covering the velocity range of interest) is available from the manufacturer. If a reference performance curve is not available from the manufacturer, such a curve shall be generated.
For the purpose of this method, a “reference” performance curve is defined as one that has been derived from primary standard calibration data, with the anemometer mounted vertically. “Primary standard” data are obtainable by: (a) direct calibration of one or more of the anemometers by the National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST); (b) NIST-traceable calibration; or (c) Calibration by direct measurement of fundamental parameters such as length and time (e.g., by moving the anemometers through still air at measured rates of speed, and recording the output signals).
10.2.2 Anemometers having output signals other than electrical (e.g., optical) may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. If other types of anemometers are used, a reference performance curve shall be generated, using procedures subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.2.3 The reference performance curve shall be derived from at least the following three points: 60 ±15, 900 ±100, and 1800 ±100 rpm.
10.3 Initial Performance Checks. Conduct these checks within 60 days before the first performance test.
10.3.1 Anemometers. A performance-check shall be conducted as outlined in sections 10.3.1.1 through 10.3.1.3. Alternatively, any other suitable method that takes into account the signal output, propeller condition, and threshold velocity of the anemometer may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator.
10.3.1.1 Check the signal output of the anemometer by using an accurate rpm generator (see Figure 14-3) or synchronous motors to spin the propeller shaft at each of the three rpm settings described in section 10.2.3, and measuring the output signal at each setting. If, at each setting, the output signal is within 5 percent of the manufacturer's value, the anemometer can be used. If the anemometer performance is unsatisfactory, the anemometer shall either be replaced or repaired.
10.3.1.2 Check the propeller condition, by visually inspecting the propeller, making note of any significant damage or warpage; damaged or deformed propellers shall be replaced.
10.3.1.3 Check the anemometer threshold velocity as follows: With the anemometer mounted as shown in Figure 14-4(A), fasten a known weight (a straight-pin will suffice) to the anemometer propeller at a fixed distance from the center of the propeller shaft. This will generate a known torque; for example, a 0.1-g weight, placed 10 cm from the center of the shaft, will generate a torque of 1.0 g-cm. If the known torque causes the propeller to rotate downward, approximately 90° [see Figure 14-4(B)], then the known torque is greater than or equal to the starting torque; if the propeller fails to rotate approximately 90°, the known torque is less than the starting torque. By trying different combinations of weight and distance, the starting torque of a particular anemometer can be satisfactorily estimated. Once an estimate of the starting torque has been obtained, the threshold velocity of the anemometer (for horizontal mounting) can be estimated from a graph such as Figure 14-5 (obtained from the manufacturer). If the horizontal threshold velocity is acceptable [<15 m/min (50 ft/min), when this technique is used], the anemometer can be used. If the threshold velocity of an anemometer is found to be unacceptably high, the anemometer shall either be replaced or repaired.
10.3.2 Recorders and Counters. Check the calibration of each recorder and counter (see section 6.1.2) at a minimum of three points, approximately spanning the expected range of velocities. Use the calibration procedures recommended by the manufacturer, or other suitable procedures (subject to the approval of the Administrator). If a recorder or counter is found to be out of calibration by an average amount greater than 5 percent for the three calibration points, replace or repair the system; otherwise, the system can be used.
10.3.3 Temperature Measurement Apparatus. Check the calibration of the Temperature Measurement Apparatus, using the procedures outlined in section 10.3 of Method 2, at temperatures of 0, 100, and 150 °C (32, 212, and 302 °F). If the calibration is off by more than 5 °C (9 °F) at any of the temperatures, repair or replace the apparatus; otherwise, the apparatus can be used.
10.4 Periodic Performance Checks. Repeat the procedures outlined in section 10.3 no more than 12 months after the initial performance checks. If the above systems pass the performance checks (i.e., if no repair or replacement of any component is necessary), continue with the performance checks on a 12-month interval basis. However, if any of the above systems fail the performance checks, repair or replace the system(s) that failed, and conduct the periodic performance checks on a 3-month interval basis, until sufficient information (to the satisfaction of the Administrator) is obtained to establish a modified performance check schedule and calculation procedure.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
Same as section 11.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
Same as section 12.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, as applicable, with the following additions and exceptions:
12.1 Nomenclature.
A = Roof monitor open area, m 2 (ft 2).
Bws = Water vapor in the gas stream, portion by volume.
Cs = Average fluoride concentration in roof monitor air, mg F/dscm (gr/dscf).
Dd = Diameter of duct at sampling location, m (ft).
Dn = Diameter of a roof monitor manifold nozzle, m (ft).
F = Emission Rate multiplication factor, dimensionless.
Ft = Total fluoride mass collected during a particular sub-run (from Equation 13A-1 of Method 13A or Equation 13B-1 of Method 13B), mg F− (gr F−).
Md = Mole fraction of dry gas, dimensionless.
Prm = Pressure in the roof monitor; equal to barometric pressure for this application.
Qsd = Average volumetric flow from roof monitor at standard conditions on a dry basis, m 3/min.
Trm = Average roof monitor temperature (from section 8.2), °C ( °F).
Vd = Desired velocity in duct at sampling location, m/sec.
Vm = Anticipated average velocity (from section 8.1.1) in sampling duct, m/sec.
Vmt = Arithmetic mean roof monitor effluent gas velocity, m/sec.
Vs = Actual average velocity in the sampling duct (from Equation 2-9 of Method 2 and data obtained from Method 13A or 13B), m/sec.
12.2 Isokinetic Sampling Check.
12.2.1 Calculate the arithmetic mean of the roof monitor effluent gas velocity readings (vm) as measured by the anemometer in the section of the roof monitor containing the sampling manifold. If two or more sub-runs have been performed, the average velocity for each sub-run may be calculated separately.
12.2.2 Calculate the expected average velocity (vd) in the duct, corresponding to each value of vm obtained under section 12.2.1, using Equation 14-1.
Where:
8 = number of required manifold nozzles.
60 = sec/min.
12.2.3 Calculate the actual average velocity (vs) in the sampling duct for each run or sub-run according to Equation 2-9 of Method 2, using data obtained during sampling (Section 8.0 of Method 13A).
12.2.4 Express each vs value from section 12.2.3 as a percentage of the corresponding vd value from section 12.2.2.
12.2.4.1 If vs is less than or equal to 120 percent of vd, the results are acceptable (note that in cases where the above calculations have been performed for each sub-run, the results are acceptable if the average percentage for all sub-runs is less than or equal to 120 percent).
12.2.4.2 If vs is more than 120 percent of vd, multiply the reported emission rate by the following factor:
12.3 Average Velocity of Roof Monitor Effluent Gas. Calculate the arithmetic mean roof monitor effluent gas velocity (vmt) using all the velocity or volumetric flow readings from section 8.1.2.
12.4 Average Temperature of Roof Monitor Effluent Gas. Calculate the arithmetic mean roof monitor effluent gas temperature (Tm) using all the temperature readings recorded in section 8.2.
12.5 Concentration of Fluorides in Roof Monitor Effluent Gas.
12.5.1 If a single sampling train was used throughout the run, calculate the average fluoride concentration for the roof monitor using Equation 13A-2 of Method 13A.
12.5.2 If two or more sampling trains were used (i.e., one per sub-run), calculate the average fluoride concentration for the run using Equation 14-3:
Where:
n = Total number of sub-runs.
12.6 Mole Fraction of Dry Gas.
12.7 Average Volumetric Flow Rate of Roof Monitor Effluent Gas. Calculate the arithmetic mean volumetric flow rate of the roof monitor effluent gases using Equation 14-5.
Where:
K1 = 0.3858 K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.64 °R/in. Hg for English units.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
Same as section 16.0 of either Method 13A or Method 13B, as applicable, with the addition of the following:
1. Shigehara, R.T. A Guideline for Evaluating Compliance Test Results (Isokinetic Sampling Rate Criterion). U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch, Research Triangle Park, NC. August 1977.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 14A—Determination of Total Fluoride Emissions from Selected Sources at Primary Aluminum Production Facilities
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total fluorides | None assigned | Not determined. |
| Includes hydrogen fluoride | 007664-39-3 | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of total fluorides (TF) emissions from sources specified in the applicable regulation. This method was developed by consensus with the Aluminum Association and the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA).
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Total fluorides, in the form of solid and gaseous fluorides, are withdrawn from the ascending air stream inside of an aluminum reduction potroom and, prior to exiting the potroom roof monitor, into a specific cassette arrangement. The cassettes are connected by tubing to flowmeters and a manifold system that allows for the equal distribution of volume pulled through each cassette, and finally to a dry gas meter. The cassettes have a specific internal arrangement of one unaltered cellulose filter and support pad in the first section of the cassette for solid fluoride retention and two cellulose filters with support pads that are impregnated with sodium formate for the chemical absorption of gaseous fluorides in the following two sections of the cassette. A minimum of eight cassettes shall be used for a potline and shall be strategically located at equal intervals across the potroom roof so as to encompass a minimum of 8 percent of the total length of the potroom. A greater number of cassettes may be used should the regulated facility choose to do so. The mass flow rate of pollutants is determined with anemometers and temperature sensing devices located immediately below the opening of the roof monitor and spaced evenly within the cassette group.
3.0 Definitions
3.1 Cassette. A segmented, styrene acrylonitrile cassette configuration with three separate segments and a base, for the purpose of this method, to capture and retain fluoride from potroom gases.
3.2 Cassette arrangement. The cassettes, tubing, manifold system, flowmeters, dry gas meter, and any other related equipment associated with the actual extraction of the sample gas stream.
3.3 Cassette group. That section of the potroom roof monitor where a distinct group of cassettes is located.
3.4 Potline. A single, discrete group of electrolytic reduction cells electrically connected in series, in which alumina is reduced to form aluminum.
3.5 Potroom. A building unit that houses a group of electrolytic reduction cells in which aluminum is produced.
3.6 Potroom group. An uncontrolled potroom, a potroom that is controlled individually, or a group of potrooms or potroom segments ducted to a common primary control system.
3.7 Primary control system. The equipment used to capture the gases and particulate matter generated during the reduction process and the emission control device(s) used to remove pollutants prior to discharge of the cleaned gas to the atmosphere.
3.8 Roof monitor. That portion of the roof of a potroom building where gases, not captured at the cell, exit from the potroom.
3.9 Total fluorides (TF). Elemental fluorine and all fluoride compounds as measured by Methods 13A or 13B of this appendix or by an approved alternative method.
4.0 Interferences and Known Limitations
4.1 There are two principal categories of limitations that must be addressed when using this method. The first category is sampling bias and the second is analytical bias. Biases in sampling can occur when there is an insufficient number of cassettes located along the roof monitor of a potroom or if the distribution of those cassettes is spatially unequal. Known sampling biases also can occur when there are leaks within the cassette arrangement and if anemometers and temperature devices are not providing accurate data. Applicable instruments must be properly calibrated to avoid sampling bias. Analytical biases can occur when instrumentation is not calibrated or fails calibration and the instrument is used out of proper calibration. Additionally, biases can occur in the laboratory if fusion crucibles retain residual fluorides over lengthy periods of use. This condition could result in falsely elevated fluoride values. Maintaining a clean work environment in the laboratory is crucial to producing accurate values.
4.2 Biases during sampling can be avoided by properly spacing the appropriate number of cassettes along the roof monitor, conducting leak checks of the cassette arrangement, calibrating the dry gas meter every 30 days, verifying the accuracy of individual flowmeters (so that there is no more than 5 percent difference in the volume pulled between any two flowmeters), and calibrating or replacing anemometers and temperature sensing devices as necessary to maintain true data generation.
4.3 Analytical biases can be avoided by calibrating instruments according to the manufacturer's specifications prior to conducting any analyses, by performing internal and external audits of up to 10 percent of all samples analyzed, and by rotating individual crucibles as the “blank” crucible to detect any potential residual fluoride carry-over to samples. Should any contamination be discovered in the blank crucible, the crucible shall be thoroughly cleaned to remove any detected residual fluorides and a “blank” analysis conducted again to evaluate the effectiveness of the cleaning. The crucible shall remain in service as long as no detectable residual fluorides are present.
5.0 Safety
5.1 This method may involve the handling of hazardous materials in the analytical phase. This method does not purport to address all of the potential safety hazards associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burn as thermal burn.
5.3 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.4 Perchloric Acid (HClO4). Corrosive to eyes, skin, nose, and throat. Provide ventilation to limit exposure. Very strong oxidizer. Keep separate from water and oxidizable materials to prevent vigorous evolution of heat, spontaneous combustion, or explosion. Heat solutions containing HClO4 only in hoods specifically designed for HClO4.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling.
6.1.1 Cassette arrangement. The cassette itself is a three-piece, styrene acrylonitrile cassette unit (a Gelman Sciences product), 37 millimeter (mm), with plastic connectors. In the first section (the intake section), an untreated Gelman Sciences 37 mm, 0.8 micrometer (µm) DM-800 metricel membrane filter and cellulose support pad, or equivalent, is situated. In the second and third segments of the cassette there is placed one each of Gelman Sciences 37 mm, 5 µm GLA-5000 low-ash PVC filter with a cellulose support pad or equivalent product. Each of these two filters and support pads shall have been immersed in a solution of 10 percent sodium formate (volume/volume in an ethyl alcohol solution). The impregnated pads shall be placed in the cassette segments while still wet and heated at 50 °C (122 °F) until the pad is completely dry. It is important to check for a proper fit of the filter and support pad to the cassette segment to ensure that there are no areas where gases could bypass the filter. Once all of the cassette segments have been prepared, the cassette shall be assembled and a plastic plug shall be inserted into the exhaust hole of the cassette. Prior to placing the cassette into service, the space between each segment shall be taped with an appropriately durable tape to prevent the infiltration of gases through the points of connection, and an aluminum nozzle shall be inserted into the intake hole of the cassette. The aluminum nozzle shall have a short section of tubing placed over the opening of the nozzle, with the tubing plugged to prevent dust from entering the nozzle and to prepare the nozzle for the cassette arrangement leak check. An alternate nozzle type can be used if historical results or scientific demonstration of applicability can be shown.
6.1.2 Anemometers and temperature sensing devices. To calculate the mass flow rate of TF from the roof monitor under standard conditions, anemometers that meet the specifications in section 2.1.1 in Method 14 of this appendix or an equivalent device yielding equivalent information shall be used. A recording mechanism capable of accurately recording the exit gas temperature at least every 2 hours shall be used.
6.1.3 Barometer. To correct the volumetric flow from the potline roof monitor to standard conditions, a mercury (Hg), aneroid, or other barometer capable of measuring atmospheric pressure to within 2.5 mm [0.1 inch (in)] Hg shall be used.
6.2 Sample recovery.
6.2.1 Hot plate.
6.2.2 Muffle furnace.
6.2.3 Nickel crucible.
6.2.4 Stirring rod. Teflon.
6.2.5 Volumetric flask. 50-milliliter (ml).
6.2.6 Plastic vial. 50-ml.
6.3 Analysis.
6.3.1 Primary analytical method. An automated analyzer having the following components or equivalent: a multichannel proportioning pump, multiposition sampler, voltage stabilizer, colorimeter, instrument recording device, microdistillation apparatus, flexible Teflon ® heating bath, vacuum pump, pulse suppressers and an air flow system.
6.3.2 Secondary analytical method. Specific Ion Electrode (SIE).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Water. Deionized distilled to conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-77, Type 3 (incorporated by reference in § 60.17(a)(22) of this part). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.2 Calcium oxide.
7.3 Sodium hydroxide (NaOH). Pellets.
7.4 Perchloric acid (HClO4). Mix 1:1 with water. Sulfuric acid (H2SO4) may be used in place of HClO4.
7.5 Audit samples. The audit samples discussed in section 9.1 shall be prepared from reagent grade, water soluble stock reagents, or purchased as an aqueous solution from a commercial supplier. If the audit stock solution is purchased from a commercial supplier, the standard solution must be accompanied by a certificate of analysis or an equivalent proof of fluoride concentration.
8.0 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.1 Preparing cassette arrangement for sampling. The cassettes are initially connected to flexible tubing. The tubing is connected to flowmeters and a manifold system. The manifold system is connected to a dry gas meter (Research Appliance Company model 201009 or equivalent). The length of tubing is managed by pneumatically or electrically operated hoists located in the roof monitor, and the travel of the tubing is controlled by encasing the tubing in aluminum conduit. The tubing is lowered for cassette insertion by operating a control box at floor level. Once the cassette has been securely inserted into the tubing and the leak check performed, the tubing and cassette are raised to the roof monitor level using the floor level control box. Arrangements similar to the one described are acceptable if the scientific sample collection principles are followed.
8.2 Test run sampling period. A test run shall comprise a minimum of a 24-hour sampling event encompassing at least eight cassettes per potline (or four cassettes per potroom group). Monthly compliance shall be based on three test runs during the month. Test runs of greater than 24 hours are allowed; however, three such runs shall be conducted during the month.
8.3 Leak-check procedures.
8.3.1 Pretest leak check. A pretest leak-check is recommended; however, it is not required. To perform a pretest leak-check after the cassettes have been inserted into the tubing, isolate the cassette to be leak-checked by turning the valves on the manifold to stop all flows to the other sampling points connected to the manifold and meter. The cassette, with the plugged tubing section securing the intake of the nozzle, is subjected to the highest vacuum expected during the run. If no leaks are detected, the tubing plug can be briefly removed as the dry gas meter is rapidly turned off.
8.3.2 Post-test leak check. A leak check is required at the conclusion of each test run for each cassette. The leak check shall be performed in accordance with the procedure outlined in section 8.3.1 of this method except that it shall be performed at a vacuum greater than the maximum vacuum reached during the test run. If the leakage rate is found to be no greater than 4 percent of the average sampling rate, the results are acceptable. If the leakage rate is greater than 4 percent of the average sampling rate, either record the leakage rate and correct the sampling volume as discussed in section 12.4 of this method or void the test run if the minimum number of cassettes were used. If the number of cassettes used was greater than the minimum required, discard the leaking cassette and use the remaining cassettes for the emission determination.
8.3.3 Anemometers and temperature sensing device placement. Install the recording mechanism to record the exit gas temperature. Anemometers shall be installed as required in section 6.1.2 of Method 14 of this appendix, except replace the word “manifold” with “cassette group” in section 6.1.2.3. These two different instruments shall be located near each other along the roof monitor. See conceptual configurations in Figures 14A-1, 14A-2, and 14A-3 of this method. Fewer temperature devices than anemometers may be used if at least one temperature device is located within the span of the cassette group. Other anemometer location siting scenarios may be acceptable as long as the exit velocity of the roof monitor gases is representative of the entire section of the potline being sampled.
8.4 Sampling. The actual sample run shall begin with the removal of the tubing and plug from the cassette nozzle. Each cassette is then raised to the roof monitor area, the dry gas meter is turned on, and the flowmeters are set to the calibration point, which allows an equal volume of sampled gas to enter each cassette. The dry gas meter shall be set to a range suitable for the specific potroom type being sampled that will yield valid data known from previous experience or a range determined by the use of the calculation in section 12 of this method. Parameters related to the test run that shall be recorded, either during the test run or after the test run if recording devices are used, include: anemometer data, roof monitor exit gas temperature, dry gas meter temperature, dry gas meter volume, and barometric pressure. At the conclusion of the test run, the cassettes shall be lowered, the dry gas meter turned off, and the volume registered on the dry gas meter recorded. The post-test leak check procedures described in section 8.3.2 of this method shall be performed. All data relevant to the test shall be recorded on a field data sheet and maintained on file.
8.5 Sample recovery.
8.5.1 The cassettes shall be brought to the laboratory with the intake nozzle contents protected with the section of plugged tubing previously described. The exterior of cassettes shall carefully be wiped free of any dust or debris, making sure that any falling dust or debris does not present a potential laboratory contamination problem.
8.5.2 Carefully remove all tape from the cassettes and remove the initial filter, support pad, and all loose solids from the first (intake) section of the cassette. Fold the filter and support pad several times and, along with all loose solids removed from the interior of the first section of the cassette, place them into a nickel crucible. Using water, wash the interior of the nozzle into the same nickel crucible. Add 0.1 gram (g) [±0.1 milligram (mg)] of calcium oxide and a sufficient amount of water to make a loose slurry. Mix the contents of the crucible thoroughly with a Teflon” stirring rod. After rinsing any adhering residue from the stirring rod back into the crucible, place the crucible on a hot plate or in a muffle furnace until all liquid is evaporated and allow the mixture to gradually char for 1 hour.
8.5.3 Transfer the crucible to a cold muffle furnace and ash at 600 °C (1,112 °F). Remove the crucible after the ashing phase and, after the crucible cools, add 3.0 g (±0.1 g) of NaOH pellets. Place this mixture in a muffle furnace at 600 °C (1,112 °F) for 3 minutes. Remove the crucible and roll the melt so as to reach all of the ash with the molten NaOH. Let the melt cool to room temperature. Add 10 to 15 ml of water to the crucible and place it on a hot plate at a low temperature setting until the melt is soft or suspended. Transfer the contents of the crucible to a 50-ml volumetric flask. Rinse the crucible with 20 ml of 1:1 perchloric acid or 20 ml of 1:1 sulfuric acid in two (2) 10 ml portions. Pour the acid rinse slowly into the volumetric flask and swirl the flask after each addition. Cool to room temperature. The product of this procedure is particulate fluorides.
8.5.4 Gaseous fluorides can be isolated for analysis by folding the gaseous fluoride filters and support pads to approximately 1/4 of their original size and placing them in a 50-ml plastic vial. To the vial add exactly 10 ml of water and leach the sample for a minimum of 1 hour. The leachate from this process yields the gaseous fluorides for analysis.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Laboratory auditing. Laboratory audits of specific and known concentrations of fluoride shall be submitted to the laboratory with each group of samples submitted for analysis. An auditor shall prepare and present the audit samples as a “blind” evaluation of laboratory performance with each group of samples submitted to the laboratory. The audits shall be prepared to represent concentrations of fluoride that could be expected to be in the low, medium and high range of actual results. Average recoveries of all three audits must equal 90 to 110 percent for acceptable results; otherwise, the laboratory must investigate procedures and instruments for potential problems.
10.0 Calibrations
10.1 Equipment evaluations. To ensure the integrity of this method, periodic calibrations and equipment replacements are necessary.
10.1.1 Metering system. At 30-day intervals the metering system shall be calibrated. Connect the metering system inlet to the outlet of a wet test meter that is accurate to 1 percent. Refer to Figure 5-4 of Method 5 of this appendix. The wet-test meter shall have a capacity of 30 liters/revolution [1 cubic foot (ft 3)/revolution]. A spirometer of 400 liters (14 ft 3) or more capacity, or equivalent, may be used for calibration; however, a wet-test meter is usually more practical. The wet-test meter shall be periodically tested with a spirometer or a liquid displacement meter to ensure the accuracy. Spirometers or wet-test meters of other sizes may be used, provided that the specified accuracies of the procedure are maintained. Run the metering system pump for about 15 min. with the orifice manometer indicating a median reading as expected in field use to allow the pump to warm up and to thoroughly wet the interior of the wet-test meter. Then, at each of a minimum of three orifice manometer settings, pass an exact quantity of gas through the wet-test meter and record the volume indicated by the dry gas meter. Also record the barometric pressure, the temperatures of the wet test meter, the inlet temperatures of the dry gas meter, and the temperatures of the outlet of the dry gas meter. Record all calibration data on a form similar to the one shown in Figure 5-5 of Method 5 of this appendix and calculate Y, the dry gas meter calibration factor, and ΔH@, the orifice calibration factor at each orifice setting. Allowable tolerances for Y and ΔH@ are given in Figure 5-6 of Method 5 of this appendix. Allowable tolerances for Y and ΔH@ are given in Figure 5-5 of Method 5 of this appendix.
10.1.2 Estimating volumes for initial test runs. For a facility's initial test runs, the regulated facility must have a target or desired volume of gases to be sampled and a target range of volumes to use during the calibration of the dry gas meter. Use Equations 14A-1 and 14A-2 in section 12 of this method to derive the target dry gas meter volume (Fv) for these purposes.
10.1.3 Calibration of anemometers and temperature sensing devices. If the standard anemometers in Method 14 of this appendix are used, the calibration and integrity evaluations in sections 10.3.1.1 through 10.3.1.3 of Method 14 of this appendix shall be used as well as the recording device described in section 2.1.3 of Method 14. The calibrations or complete change-outs of anemometers shall take place at a minimum of once per year. The temperature sensing and recording devices shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's specifications.
10.1.4 Calibration of flowmeters. The calibration of flowmeters is necessary to ensure that an equal volume of sampled gas is entering each of the individual cassettes and that no large differences, which could possibly bias the sample, exist between the cassettes.
10.1.4.1 Variable area, 65 mm flowmeters or equivalent shall be used. These flowmeters can be mounted on a common base for convenience. These flowmeters shall be calibrated by attaching a prepared cassette, complete with filters and pads, to the flowmeter and then to the system manifold. This manifold is an aluminum cylinder with valved inlets for connections to the flowmeters/cassettes and one outlet to a dry gas meter. The connection is then made to the wet-test meter and finally to a dry gas meter. All connections are made with tubing.
10.1.4.2 Turn the dry gas meter on for 15 min. in preparation for the calibration. Turn the dry gas meter off and plug the intake hole of the cassette. Turn the dry gas meter back on to evaluate the entire system for leaks. If the dry gas meter shows a leakage rate of less than 0.02 ft 3/min at 10 in. of Hg vacuum as noted on the dry gas meter, the system is acceptable to further calibration.
10.1.4.3 With the dry gas meter turned on and the flow indicator ball at a selected flow rate, record the exact amount of gas pulled through the flowmeter by taking measurements from the wet test meter after exactly 10 min. Record the room temperature and barometric pressure. Conduct this test for all flowmeters in the system with all flowmeters set at the same indicator ball reading. When all flowmeters have gone through the procedure above, correct the volume pulled through each flowmeter to standard conditions. The acceptable difference between the highest and lowest flowmeter rate is 5 percent. Should one or more flowmeters be outside of the acceptable limit of 5 percent, repeat the calibration procedure at a lower or higher indicator ball reading until all flowmeters show no more than 5 percent difference among them.
10.1.4.4 This flowmeter calibration shall be conducted at least once per year.
10.1.5 Miscellaneous equipment calibrations. Miscellaneous equipment used such as an automatic recorder/ printer used to measure dry gas meter temperatures shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's specifications in order to maintain the accuracy of the equipment.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 The preferred primary analytical determination of the individual isolated samples or the combined particulate and gaseous samples shall be performed by an automated methodology. The analytical method for this technology shall be based on the manufacturer's instructions for equipment operation and shall also include the analysis of five standards with concentrations in the expected range of the actual samples. The results of the analysis of the five standards shall have a coefficient of correlation of at least 0.99. A check standard shall be analyzed as the last sample of the group to determine if instrument drift has occurred. The acceptable result for the check standard is 95 to 105 percent of the standard's true value.
11.2 The secondary analytical method shall be by specific ion electrode if the samples are distilled or if a TISAB IV buffer is used to eliminate aluminum interferences. Five standards with concentrations in the expected range of the actual samples shall be analyzed, and a coefficient of correlation of at least 0.99 is the minimum acceptable limit for linearity. An exception for this limit for linearity is a condition when low-level standards in the range of 0.01 to 0.48 µg fluoride/ml are analyzed. In this situation, a minimum coefficient of correlation of 0.97 is required. TISAB II shall be used for low-level analyses.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Carry out calculations, retaining at least one extra decimal point beyond that of the acquired data. Round off values after the final calculation. Other forms of calculations may be used as long as they give equivalent results.
12.2 Estimating volumes for initial test runs.
Where
Fv = Desired volume of dry gas to be sampled, ft 3.
Fd = Desired or analytically optimum mass of TF per cassette, micrograms of TF per cassette (µg/cassette).
X = Number of cassettes used.
Fe = Typical concentration of TF in emissions to be sampled, µg/ft 3, calculated from Equation 14A-2.
Where
Re = Typical emission rate from the facility, pounds of TF per ton (lb/ton) of aluminum.
Rp = Typical production rate of the facility, tons of aluminum per minute (ton/min).
Vr = Typical exit velocity of the roof monitor gases, feet per minute (ft/min).
Ar = Open area of the roof monitor, square feet (ft 2).
12.2.1 Example calculation. Assume that the typical emission rate (Re) is 1.0 lb TF/ton of aluminum, the typical roof vent gas exit velocity (Vr) is 250 ft/min, the typical production rate (Rp) is 0.10 ton/min, the known open area for the roof monitor (Ar) is 8,700 ft 2, and the desired (analytically optimum) mass of TF per cassette is 1,500 µg. First calculate the concentration of TF per cassette (Fe) in µg/ft 3 using Equation 14A-2. Then calculate the desired volume of gas to be sampled (Fv) using Equation 14A-1.
This is a total of 575.40 ft 3 for eight cassettes or 71.925 ft 3/cassette.
12.3 Calculations of TF emissions from field and laboratory data that would yield a production related emission rate can be calculated as follows:
12.3.1 Obtain a standard cubic feet (scf) value for the volume pulled through the dry gas meter for all cassettes by using the field and calibration data and Equation 5-1 of Method 5 of this appendix.
12.3.2 Derive the average quantity of TF per cassette (in µg TF/cassette) by adding all laboratory data for all cassettes and dividing this value by the total number of cassettes used. Divide this average TF value by the corrected dry gas meter volume for each cassette; this value then becomes TFstd (µg/ft 3).
12.3.3 Calculate the production-based emission rate (Re) in lb/ton using Equation 14A-5.
12.3.4 As an example calculation, assume eight cassettes located in a potline were used to sample for 72 hours during the run. The analysis of all eight cassettes yielded a total of 3,000 µg of TF. The dry gas meter volume was corrected to yield a total of 75 scf per cassette, which yields a value for TFstd of 3,000/75 = 5 µg/ft 3. The open area of the roof monitor for the potline (Ar) is 17,400 ft 2. The exit velocity of the roof monitor gases (Vr) is 250 ft/min. The production rate of aluminum over the previous 720 hours was 5,000 tons, which is 6.94 tons/hr or 0.116 ton/min (Rp). Substituting these values into Equation 14A-5 yields:
12.4 Corrections to volumes due to leakage. Should the post-test leak check leakage rate exceed 4 percent as described in section 8.3.2 of this method, correct the volume as detailed in Case I in section 6.3 of Method 5 of this appendix.
Method 15—Determination of Hydrogen Sulfide, Carbonyl Sulfide, and Carbon Disulfide Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity (See Sec 13.2) |
|---|---|---|
| Carbon disulfide [CS2] | 75-15-0 | 0.5 ppmv |
| Carbonyl sulfide [COS] | 463-58-1 | 0.5 ppmv |
| Hydrogen sulfide [H2 S] | 7783-06-4 | 0.5 ppmv |
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This method applies to the determination of emissions of reduced sulfur compounds from tail gas control units of sulfur recovery plants, H2S in fuel gas for fuel gas combustion devices, and where specified in other applicable subparts of the regulations.
1.2.2 The method described below uses the principle of gas chromatographic (GC) separation and flame photometric detection (FPD). Since there are many systems or sets of operating conditions that represent useable methods for determining sulfur emissions, all systems which employ this principle, but differ only in details of equipment and operation, may be used as alternative methods, provided that the calibration precision and sample-line loss criteria are met.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the emission source and diluted with clean dry air (if necessary). An aliquot of the diluted sample is then analyzed for CS2, COS, and H2S by GC/FPD.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Moisture Condensation. Moisture condensation in the sample delivery system, the analytical column, or the FPD burner block can cause losses or interferences. This potential is eliminated by heating the probe, filter box, and connections, and by maintaining the SO2 scrubber in an ice water bath. Moisture is removed in the SO2 scrubber and heating the sample beyond this point is not necessary provided the ambient temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F). Alternatively, moisture may be eliminated by heating the sample line, and by conditioning the sample with dry dilution air to lower its dew point below the operating temperature of the GC/FPD analytical system prior to analysis.
4.2 Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Carbon Dioxide (CO2). CO and CO2 have substantial desensitizing effects on the FPD even after 9:1 dilution. (Acceptable systems must demonstrate that they have eliminated this interference by some procedure such as eluting CO and CO2 before any of the sulfur compounds to be measured.) Compliance with this requirement can be demonstrated by submitting chromatograms of calibration gases with and without CO2 in the diluent gas. The CO2 level should be approximately 10 percent for the case with CO2 present. The two chromatograms should show agreement within the precision limits of section 13.3.
4.3 Elemental Sulfur. The condensation of sulfur vapor in the sampling system can lead to blockage of the particulate filter. This problem can be minimized by observing the filter for buildup and changing as needed.
4.4 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2). SO2 is not a specific interferent but may be present in such large amounts that it cannot be effectively separated from the other compounds of interest. The SO2 scrubber described in section 6.1.3 will effectively remove SO2 from the sample.
4.5 Alkali Mist. Alkali mist in the emissions of some control devices may cause a rapid increase in the SO2 scrubber pH, resulting in low sample recoveries. Replacing the SO2 scrubber contents after each run will minimize the chances of interference in these cases.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations to performing this test.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. See Figure 15-1. The sampling train component parts are discussed in the following sections:
6.1.1 Probe. The probe shall be made of Teflon or Teflon-lined stainless steel and heated to prevent moisture condensation. It shall be designed to allow calibration gas to enter the probe at or near the sample point entry. Any portion of the probe that contacts the stack gas must be heated to prevent moisture condensation. The probe described in section 6.1.1 of Method 16A having a nozzle directed away from the gas stream is recommended for sources having particulate or mist emissions. Where very high stack temperatures prohibit the use of Teflon probe components, glass or quartz-lined probes may serve as substitutes.
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon filter holder and a 1- to 2-micron porosity Teflon filter (available through Savillex Corporation, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Minnesota 55343). The filter holder must be maintained in a hot box at a temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F).
6.1.3 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon segment impingers connected in series with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. (Impinger parts and tubing available through Savillex.) The first two impingers contain 100 ml of citrate buffer, and the third impinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube inserted into the solution should be constricted to less than 3-mm ( 1/8-in.) ID and should be immersed to a depth of at least 50 cm (2 in.). Immerse the impingers in an ice water bath and maintain near 0 °C. The scrubber solution will normally last for a 3-hour run before needing replacement. This will depend upon the effects of moisture and particulate matter on the solution strength and pH. Connections between the probe, particulate filter, and SO2 scrubber shall be made of Teflon and as short in length as possible. All portions of the probe, particulate filter, and connections prior to the SO2 scrubber (or alternative point of moisture removal) shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F).
6.1.4 Sample Line. Teflon, no greater than 13-mm ( 1/2-in.) ID. Alternative materials, such as virgin Nylon, may be used provided the line-loss test is acceptable.
6.1.5 Sample Pump. The sample pump shall be a leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm type or equivalent.
6.2 Analysis. The following items are needed for sample analysis:
6.2.1 Dilution System. The dilution system must be constructed such that all sample contacts are made of Teflon, glass, or stainless steel. It must be capable of approximately a 9:1 dilution of the sample.
6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph (see Figure 15-2). The gas chromatograph must have at least the following components:
6.2.2.1 Oven. Capable of maintaining the separation column at the proper operating temperature ±1 °C.
6.2.2.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor column oven, detector, and exhaust temperature ±1 °C.
6.2.2.3 Flow System. Gas metering system to measure sample, fuel, combustion gas, and carrier gas flows.
6.2.2.4 Flame Photometric Detector.
6.2.2.4.1 Electrometer. Capable of full scale amplification of linear ranges of 10−9 to 10−4 amperes full scale.
6.2.2.4.2 Power Supply. Capable of delivering up to 750 volts.
6.2.2.5 Recorder. Compatible with the output voltage range of the electrometer.
6.2.2.6 Rotary Gas Valves. Multiport Teflon-lined valves equipped with sample loop. Sample loop volumes shall be chosen to provide the needed analytical range. Teflon tubing and fittings shall be used throughout to present an inert surface for sample gas. The GC shall be calibrated with the sample loop used for sample analysis.
6.2.2.7 GC Columns. The column system must be demonstrated to be capable of resolving three major reduced sulfur compounds: H2S, COS, and CS2. To demonstrate that adequate resolution has been achieved, a chromatogram of a calibration gas containing all three reduced sulfur compounds in the concentration range of the applicable standard must be submitted. Adequate resolution will be defined as base line separation of adjacent peaks when the amplifier attenuation is set so that the smaller peak is at least 50 percent of full scale. Base line separation is defined as a return to zero (±5 percent) in the interval between peaks. Systems not meeting this criteria may be considered alternate methods subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.3 Calibration System (See Figure 15-3). The calibration system must contain the following components:
6.3.1 Flow System. To measure air flow over permeation tubes within 2 percent. Each flowmeter shall be calibrated after each complete test series with a wet-test meter. If the flow measuring device differs from the wet-test meter by more than 5 percent, the completed test shall be discarded. Alternatively, use the flow data that will yield the lowest flow measurement. Calibration with a wet-test meter before a test is optional. Flow over the permeation device may also be determined using a soap bubble flowmeter.
6.3.2 Constant Temperature Bath. Device capable of maintaining the permeation tubes at the calibration temperature within 0.1 °C.
6.3.3 Temperature Sensor. Thermometer or equivalent to monitor bath temperature within 0.1 °C.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Fuel. Hydrogen gas (H2). Prepurified grade or better.
7.2 Combustion Gas. Oxygen (O2) or air, research purity or better.
7.3 Carrier Gas. Prepurified grade or better.
7.4 Diluent. Air containing less than 0.5 ppmv total sulfur compounds and less than 10 ppmv each of moisture and total hydrocarbons.
7.5 Calibration Gases.
7.5.1 Permeation Devices. One each of H2S, COS, and CS2, gravimetrically calibrated and certified at some convenient operating temperature. These tubes consist of hermetically sealed FEP Teflon tubing in which a liquified gaseous substance is enclosed. The enclosed gas permeates through the tubing wall at a constant rate. When the temperature is constant, calibration gases covering a wide range of known concentrations can be generated by varying and accurately measuring the flow rate of diluent gas passing over the tubes. These calibration gases are used to calibrate the GC/FPD system and the dilution system.
7.5.2 Cylinder Gases. Cylinder gases may be used as alternatives to permeation devices. The gases must be traceable to a primary standard (such as permeation tubes) and not used beyond the certification expiration date.
7.6 Citrate Buffer. Dissolve 300 g of potassium citrate and 41 g of anhydrous citric acid in 1 liter of water. Alternatively, 284 g of sodium citrate may be substituted for the potassium citrate. Adjust the pH to between 5.4 and 5.6 with potassium citrate or citric acid, as required.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Transport, and Storage
8.1 Pretest Procedures. After the complete measurement system has been set up at the site and deemed to be operational, the following procedures should be completed before sampling is initiated. These procedures are not required, but would be helpful in preventing any problem which might occur later to invalidate the entire test.
8.1.1 Leak-Check. Appropriate leak-check procedures should be employed to verify the integrity of all components, sample lines, and connections. The following procedure is suggested: For components upstream of the sample pump, attach the probe end of the sample line to a manometer or vacuum gauge, start the pump and pull a vacuum greater than 50 mm (2 in.) Hg, close off the pump outlet, and then stop the pump and ascertain that there is no leak for 1 minute. For components after the pump, apply a slight positive pressure and check for leaks by applying a liquid (detergent in water, for example) at each joint. Bubbling indicates the presence of a leak. As an alternative to the initial leak-test, the sample line loss test described in section 8.3.1 may be performed to verify the integrity of components.
8.1.2 System Performance. Since the complete system is calibrated at the beginning and end of each day of testing, the precise calibration of each component is not critical. However, these components should be verified to operate properly. This verification can be performed by observing the response of flowmeters or of the GC output to changes in flow rates or calibration gas concentrations, respectively, and ascertaining the response to be within predicted limits. If any component or the complete system fails to respond in a normal and predictable manner, the source of the discrepancy should be identified and corrected before proceeding.
8.2 Sample Collection and Analysis
8.2.1 After performing the calibration procedures outlined in section 10.0, insert the sampling probe into the test port ensuring that no dilution air enters the stack through the port. Begin sampling and dilute the sample approximately 9:1 using the dilution system. Note that the precise dilution factor is the one determined in section 10.4. Condition the entire system with sample for a minimum of 15 minutes before beginning the analysis. Inject aliquots of the sample into the GC/FPD analyzer for analysis. Determine the concentration of each reduced sulfur compound directly from the calibration curves or from the equation for the least-squares line.
8.2.2 If reductions in sample concentrations are observed during a sample run that cannot be explained by process conditions, the sampling must be interrupted to determine if the probe or filter is clogged with particulate matter. If either is found to be clogged, the test must be stopped and the results up to that point discarded. Testing may resume after cleaning or replacing the probe and filter. After each run, the probe and filter shall be inspected and, if necessary, replaced.
8.2.3 A sample run is composed of 16 individual analyses (injects) performed over a period of not less than 3 hours or more than 6 hours.
8.3 Post-Test Procedures.
8.3.1 Sample Line Loss. A known concentration of H2S at the level of the applicable standard, ±20 percent, must be introduced into the sampling system at the opening of the probe in sufficient quantities to ensure that there is an excess of sample which must be vented to the atmosphere. The sample must be transported through the entire sampling system to the measurement system in the same manner as the emission samples. The resulting measured concentration is compared to the known value to determine the sampling system loss. For sampling losses greater than 20 percent, the previous sample run is not valid. Sampling losses of 0-20 percent must be corrected by dividing the resulting sample concentration by the fraction of recovery. The known gas sample may be calibration gas as described in section 7.5. Alternatively, cylinder gas containing H2S mixed in nitrogen and verified according to section 7.1.4 of Method 16A may be used. The optional pretest procedures provide a good guideline for determining if there are leaks in the sampling system.
8.3.2 Determination of Calibration Drift. After each run, or after a series of runs made within a 24-hour period, perform a partial recalibration using the procedures in section 10.0. Only H2S (or other permeant) need be used to recalibrate the GC/FPD analysis system and the dilution system. Partial recalibration may be performed at the midlevel calibration gas concentration or at a concentration measured in the samples but not less than the lowest calibration standard used in the initial calibration. Compare the calibration curves obtained after the runs to the calibration curves obtained under section 10.3. The calibration drift should not exceed the limits set forth in section 13.4. If the drift exceeds this limit, the intervening run or runs should be considered invalid. As an option, the calibration data set that gives the highest sample values may be chosen by the tester.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.3.1 | Sample line loss check | Ensures that uncorrected negative bias introduced by sample loss is no greater than 20 percent, and provides for correction of bias of 20 percent or less. |
| 8.3.2 | Calibration drift test | Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measurement system output during the run is no greater than 5 percent. |
| 10.0 | Analytical calibration | Ensures precision of analytical results within 5 percent. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Prior to any sampling run, calibrate the system using the following procedures. (If more than one run is performed during any 24-hour period, a calibration need not be performed prior to the second and any subsequent runs. However, the calibration drift must be determined as prescribed in section 8.3.2 after the last run is made within the 24-hour period.)
10.1 Calibration Gas Permeation Tube Preparation.
10.1.1 Insert the permeation tubes into the tube chamber. Check the bath temperature to assure agreement with the calibration temperature of the tubes within 0.1 °C. Allow 24 hours for the tubes to equilibrate. Alternatively, equilibration may be verified by injecting samples of calibration gas at 1-hour intervals. The permeation tubes can be assumed to have reached equilibrium when consecutive hourly samples agree within 5 percent of their mean.
10.1.2 Vary the amount of air flowing over the tubes to produce the desired concentrations for calibrating the analytical and dilution systems. The air flow across the tubes must at all times exceed the flow requirement of the analytical systems. The concentration in ppmv generated by a tube containing a specific permeant can be calculated using Equation 15-1 in section 12.2.
10.2 Calibration of Analytical System. Generate a series of three or more known concentrations spanning the linear range of the FPD (approximately 0.5 to 10 ppmv for a 1-ml sample) for each of the three major sulfur compounds. Bypassing the dilution system, inject these standards into the GC/FPD and monitor the responses until three consecutive injections for each concentration agree within 5 percent of their mean. Failure to attain this precision indicates a problem in the calibration or analytical system. Any such problem must be identified and corrected before proceeding.
10.3 Calibration Curves. Plot the GC/FPD response in current (amperes) versus their causative concentrations in ppmv on log-log coordinate graph paper for each sulfur compound. Alternatively, a least-squares equation may be generated from the calibration data using concentrations versus the appropriate instrument response units.
10.4 Calibration of Dilution System. Generate a known concentration of H2S using the permeation tube system. Adjust the flow rate of diluent air for the first dilution stage so that the desired level of dilution is approximated. Inject the diluted calibration gas into the GC/FPD system until the results of three consecutive injections for each dilution agree within 5 percent of their mean. Failure to attain this precision in this step is an indication of a problem in the dilution system. Any such problem must be identified and corrected before proceeding. Using the calibration data for H2S (developed under section 10.3), determine the diluted calibration gas concentration in ppmv. Then calculate the dilution factor as the ratio of the calibration gas concentration before dilution to the diluted calibration gas concentration determined under this section. Repeat this procedure for each stage of dilution required. Alternatively, the GC/FPD system may be calibrated by generating a series of three or more concentrations of each sulfur compound and diluting these samples before injecting them into the GC/FPD system. These data will then serve as the calibration data for the unknown samples and a separate determination of the dilution factor will not be necessary. However, the precision requirements are still applicable.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
C = Concentration of permeant produced, ppmv.
COS = Carbonyl sulfide concentration, ppmv.
CS2 = Carbon disulfide concentration, ppmv.
d = Dilution factor, dimensionless.
H2S = Hydrogen sulfide concentration, ppmv.
K = 24.04 L/g mole. (Gas constant at 20 °C and 760 mm Hg)
L = Flow rate, L/min, of air over permeant 20 °C, 760 mm Hg.
M = Molecular weight of the permeant, g/g-mole.
N = Number of analyses performed.
Pr = Permeation rate of the tube, µg/min.
12.2 Permeant Concentration. Calculate the concentration generated by a tube containing a specific permeant (see section 10.1) using the following equation:
12.3 Calculation of SO2 Equivalent. SO2 equivalent will be determined for each analysis made by summing the concentrations of each reduced sulfur compound resolved during the given analysis. The SO2 equivalent is expressed as SO2 in ppmv.
12.4 Average SO2 Equivalent. This is determined using the following equation. Systems that do not remove moisture from the sample but condition the gas to prevent condensation must correct the average SO2 equivalent for the fraction of water vapor present. This is not done under applications where the emission standard is not specified on a dry basis.
Where:
Avg SO2 equivalent = Average SO2 equivalent in ppmv, dry basis.
Average SO2 equivalent i = SO2 in ppmv as determined by Equation 15-2.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Range. Coupled with a GC system using a 1-ml sample size, the maximum limit of the FPD for each sulfur compound is approximately 10 ppmv. It may be necessary to dilute samples from sulfur recovery plants a hundredfold (99:1), resulting in an upper limit of about 1000 ppmv for each compound.
13.2 Sensitivity. The minimum detectable concentration of the FPD is also dependent on sample size and would be about 0.5 ppmv for a 1-ml sample.
13.3 Calibration Precision. A series of three consecutive injections of the same calibration gas, at any dilution, shall produce results which do not vary by more than 5 percent from the mean of the three injections.
13.4 Calibration Drift. The calibration drift determined from the mean of three injections made at the beginning and end of any run or series of runs within a 24-hour period shall not exceed 5 percent.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References.
1. O'Keeffe, A.E., and G.C. Ortman. “Primary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis.” Anal. Chem. 38,760. 1966.
2. Stevens, R.K., A.E. O'Keeffe, and G.C. Ortman. “Absolute Calibration of a Flame Photometric Detector to Volatile Sulfur Compounds at Sub-Part-Per-Million Levels.” Environmental Science and Technology 3:7. July 1969.
3. Mulik, J.D., R.K. Stevens, and R. Baumgardner. “An Analytical System Designed to Measure Multiple Malodorous Compounds Related to Kraft Mill Activities.” Presented at the 12th Conference on Methods in Air Pollution and Industrial Hygiene Studies, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA, April 6-8, 1971.
4. Devonald, R.H., R.S. Serenius, and A.D. McIntyre. “Evaluation of the Flame Photometric Detector for Analysis of Sulfur Compounds.” Pulp and Paper Magazine of Canada, 73,3. March 1972.
5. Grimley, K.W., W.S. Smith, and R.M. Martin. “The Use of a Dynamic Dilution System in the Conditioning of Stack Gases for Automated Analysis by a Mobile Sampling Van.” Presented at the 63rd Annual APCA Meeting in St. Louis, MO. June 14-19, 1970.
6. General Reference. Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis Volume III-A and III-B: Instrumental Analysis. Sixth Edition. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 15A—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions From Sulfur Recovery Plants in Petroleum Refineries
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Reduced sulfur compounds | None assigned | Not determined. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of emissions of reduced sulfur compounds from sulfur recovery plants where the emissions are in a reducing atmosphere, such as in Stretford units.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack, and combustion air is added to the oxygen (O2)-deficient gas at a known rate. The reduced sulfur compounds [including carbon disulfide (CS2), carbonyl sulfide (COS), and hydrogen sulfide (H2S)] are thermally oxidized to sulfur dioxide (SO2), which is then collected in hydrogen peroxide as sulfate ion and analyzed according to the Method 6 barium-thorin titration procedure.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds, other than CS2, COS, and H2S, that are present in the emissions will also be oxidized to SO2, causing a positive bias relative to emission standards that limit only the three compounds listed above. For example, thiophene has been identified in emissions from a Stretford unit and produced a positive bias of 30 percent in the Method 15A result. However, these biases may not affect the outcome of the test at units where emissions are low relative to the standard.
4.2 Calcium and aluminum have been shown to interfere in the Method 6 titration procedure. Since these metals have been identified in particulate matter emissions from Stretford units, a Teflon filter is required to minimize this interference.
4.3 Dilution of the hydrogen peroxide (H2O2) absorbing solution can potentially reduce collection efficiency, causing a negative bias. When used to sample emissions containing 7 percent moisture or less, the midget impingers have sufficient volume to contain the condensate collected during sampling. Dilution of the H2O2 does not affect the collection of SO2. At higher moisture contents, the potassium citrate-citric acid buffer system used with Method 16A should be used to collect the condensate.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/m 3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train used in performing this method is shown in Figure 15A-1, and component parts are discussed below. Modifications to this sampling train are acceptable provided that the system performance check is met.
6.1.1 Probe. 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) OD Teflon tubing sequentially wrapped with heat-resistant fiber strips, a rubberized heating tape (with a plug at one end), and heat-resistant adhesive tape. A flexible thermocouple or some other suitable temperature-measuring device shall be placed between the Teflon tubing and the fiber strips so that the temperature can be monitored. The probe should be sheathed in stainless steel to provide in-stack rigidity. A series of bored-out stainless steel fittings placed at the front of the sheath will prevent flue gas from entering between the probe and sheath. The sampling probe is depicted in Figure 15A-2.
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. A 50-mm Teflon filter holder and a 1- to 2-mm porosity Teflon filter (available through Savillex Corporation, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Minnesota 55345). The filter holder must be maintained in a hot box at a temperature high enough to prevent condensation.
6.1.3 Combustion Air Delivery System. As shown in the schematic diagram in Figure 15A-3. The rate meter should be selected to measure an air flow rate of 0.5 liter/min (0.02 ft 3/min).
6.1.4 Combustion Tube. Quartz glass tubing with an expanded combustion chamber 2.54 cm (1 in.) in diameter and at least 30.5 cm (12 in.) long. The tube ends should have an outside diameter of 0.6 cm ( 1/4 in.) and be at least 15.3 cm (6 in.) long. This length is necessary to maintain the quartz-glass connector near ambient temperature and thereby avoid leaks. Alternatively, the outlet may be constructed with a 90 degree glass elbow and socket that would fit directly onto the inlet of the first peroxide impinger.
6.1.5 Furnace. Of sufficient size to enclose the combustion tube. The furnace must have a temperature regulator capable of maintaining the temperature at 1100 ±50 °C (2,012 ±90 °F). The furnace operating temperature must be checked with a thermocouple to ensure accuracy. Lindberg furnaces have been found to be satisfactory.
6.1.6 Peroxide Impingers, Stopcock Grease, Temperature Sensor, Drying Tube, Valve, Pump, and Barometer. Same as in Method 6, sections 6.1.1.2, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.5, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, and 6.1.2, respectively, except that the midget bubbler of Method 6, section 6.1.1.2 is not required.
6.1.7 Vacuum Gauge and Rate Meter. At least 760 mm Hg (30 in. Hg) gauge and rotameter, or equivalent, capable of measuring flow rate to ±5 percent of the selected flow rate and calibrated as in section 10.2.
6.1.8 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter capable of measuring the sample volume under the particular sampling conditions with an accuracy of 2 percent.
6.1.9 U-tube manometer. To measure the pressure at the exit of the combustion gas dry gas meter.
6.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 6.2 and 6.3, except a 10-ml buret with 0.05-ml graduations is required for titrant volumes of less than 10.0 ml, and the spectrophotometer is not needed.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents and standards are required for sample analysis:
7.1.1 Water. Same as Method 6, section 7.1.1.
7.1.2 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2), 3 Percent by Volume. Same as Method 6, section 7.1.3 (40 ml is needed per sample).
7.1.3 Recovery Check Gas. Carbonyl sulfide in nitrogen [100 parts per million by volume (ppmv) or greater, if necessary] in an aluminum cylinder. Concentration certified by the manufacturer with an accuracy of ±2 percent or better, or verified by gas chromatography where the instrument is calibrated with a COS permeation tube.
7.1.4 Combustion Gas. Air, contained in a gas cylinder equipped with a two-stage regulator. The gas shall contain less than 50 ppb of reduced sulfur compounds and less than 10 ppm total hydrocarbons.
7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 7.2 and 7.3.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train. For the Method 6 part of the train, measure 20 ml of 3 percent H2O2 into the first and second midget impingers. Leave the third midget impinger empty and add silica gel to the fourth impinger. Alternatively, a silica gel drying tube may be used in place of the fourth impinger. Place crushed ice and water around all impingers. Maintain the oxidation furnace at 1100 ±50 °C (2,012 ±90 °F) to ensure 100 percent oxidation of COS. Maintain the probe and filter temperatures at a high enough level (no visible condensation) to prevent moisture condensation and monitor the temperatures with a thermocouple.
8.2 Leak-Check Procedure. Assemble the sampling train and leak-check as described in Method 6, section 8.2. Include the combustion air delivery system from the needle valve forward in the leak-check.
8.3 Sample Collection. Adjust the pressure on the second stage of the regulator on the combustion air cylinder to 10 psig. Adjust the combustion air flow rate to 0.5 ±0.05 L/min (1.1 ±0.1 ft 3/hr) before injecting combustion air into the sampling train. Then inject combustion air into the sampling train, start the sample pump, and open the stack sample gas valve. Carry out these three operations within 15 to 30 seconds to avoid pressurizing the sampling train. Adjust the total sample flow rate to 2.0 ±0.2 L/min (4.2 ±0.4 ft 3/hr). These flow rates produce an O2 concentration of 5.0 percent in the stack gas, which must be maintained constantly to allow oxidation of reduced sulfur compounds to SO2. Adjust these flow rates during sampling as necessary. Monitor and record the combustion air manometer reading at regular intervals during the sampling period. Sample for 1 or 3 hours. At the end of sampling, turn off the sample pump and combustion air simultaneously (within 30 seconds of each other). All other procedures are the same as in Method 6, section 8.3, except that the sampling train should not be purged. After collecting the sample, remove the probe from the stack and conduct a leak-check according to the procedures outlined in section 8.2 of Method 6 (mandatory). After each 3-hour test run (or after three 1-hour samples), conduct one system performance check (see section 8.5). After this system performance check and before the next test run, it is recommended that the probe be rinsed and brushed and the filter replaced.
8.4 Sample Recovery. Recover the hydrogen peroxide-containing impingers as detailed in Method 6, section 8.4.
8.5 System Performance Check.
8.5.1 A system performance check is done (1) to validate the sampling train components and procedure (before testing, optional) and (2) to validate a test run (after a run, mandatory). Perform a check in the field before testing consisting of at least two samples (optional), and perform an additional check after each 3-hour run or after three 1-hour samples (mandatory).
8.5.2 The checks involve sampling a known concentration of COS and comparing the analyzed concentration with the known concentration. Mix the recovery gas with N2 as shown in Figure 15A-4 if dilution is required. Adjust the flow rates to generate a COS concentration in the range of the stack gas or within 20 percent of the applicable standard at a total flow rate of at least 2.5 L/min (5.3 ft 3/hr). Use Equation 15A-4 (see section 12.5) to calculate the concentration of recovery gas generated. Calibrate the flow rate from both sources with a soap bubble flow tube so that the diluted concentration of COS can be accurately calculated. Collect 30-minute samples, and analyze in the same manner as the emission samples. Collect the samples through the probe of the sampling train using a manifold or some other suitable device that will ensure extraction of a representative sample.
8.5.3 The recovery check must be performed in the field before replacing the particulate filter and before cleaning the probe. A sample recovery of 100 ±20 percent must be obtained for the data to be valid and should be reported with the emission data, but should not be used to correct the data. However, if the performance check results do not affect the compliance or noncompliance status of the affected facility, the Administrator may decide to accept the results of the compliance test. Use Equation 15A-5 (see section 12.6) to calculate the recovery efficiency.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.5 | System performance check | Ensures validity of sampling train components and analytical procedure. |
| 8.2, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensures accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.0 | Barium standard solution standardization | Ensures precision of normality determination. |
| 11.1 | Replicate titrations | Ensures precision of titration determinations. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
10.1 Metering System, Temperature Sensors, Barometer, and Barium Perchlorate Solution. Same as Method 6, sections 10.1, 10.2, 10.4, and 10.5, respectively.
10.2 Rate Meter. Calibrate with a bubble flow tube.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 11.1 and 11.2.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
In the calculations, retain at least one extra decimal figure beyond that of the acquired data. Round off figures after final calculations.
12.1 Nomenclature.
CCOS = Concentration of COS recovery gas, ppm.
CRG(act) = Actual concentration of recovery check gas (after dilution), ppm.
CRG(m) = Measured concentration of recovery check gas generated, ppm.
CRS = Concentration of reduced sulfur compounds as SO2, dry basis, corrected to standard conditions, ppm.
N = Normality of barium perchlorate titrant, milliequivalents/ml.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at exit orifice of the dry gas meter, mm Hg.
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg.
QCOS = Flow rate of COS recovery gas, liters/min.
QN = Flow rate of diluent N2, liters/min.
R = Recovery efficiency for the system performance check, percent.
Tm = Average dry gas meter absolute temperature, °K.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K.
Va = Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml.
Vms = Dry gas volume as measured by the sample train dry gas meter, liters.
Vmc = Dry gas volume as measured by the combustion air dry gas meter, liters.
Vms(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the sample train dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, liters.
Vmc(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the combustion air dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, liters.
Vsoln = Total volume of solution in which the sulfur dioxide sample is contained, 100 ml.
Vt = Volume of barium perchlorate titrant used for the sample (average of replicate titrations), ml.
Vtb = Volume of barium perchlorate titrant used for the blank, ml.
Y = Calibration factor for sampling train dry gas meter.
Yc = Calibration factor for combustion air dry gas meter.
32.03 = Equivalent weight of sulfur dioxide, mg/meq.
12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K1 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.3 Combustion Air Gas Volume, corrected to Standard Conditions.
12.4 Concentration of reduced sulfur compounds as ppm SO2.
Where:
12.5 Concentration of Generated Recovery Gas.
12.6 Recovery Efficiency for the System Performance Check.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analytical Range. The lower detectable limit is 0.1 ppmv when sampling at 2 lpm for 3 hours or 0.3 ppmv when sampling at 2 lpm for 1 hour. The upper concentration limit of the method exceeds concentrations of reduced sulfur compounds generally encountered in sulfur recovery plants.
13.2 Precision. Relative standard deviations of 2.8 and 6.9 percent have been obtained when sampling a stream with a reduced sulfur compound concentration of 41 ppmv as SO2 for 1 and 3 hours, respectively.
13.3 Bias. No analytical bias has been identified. However, results obtained with this method are likely to contain a positive bias relative to emission regulations due to the presence of nonregulated sulfur compounds (that are present in petroleum) in the emissions. The magnitude of this bias varies accordingly, and has not been quantified.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. American Society for Testing and Materials Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadelphia, Pennsylvania. 1974. pp. 40-42.
2. Blosser, R.O., H.S. Oglesby, and A.K. Jain. A Study of Alternate SO2 Scrubber Designs Used for TRS Monitoring. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, New York. Special Report 77-05. July 1977.
3. Curtis, F., and G.D. McAlister. Development and Evaluation of an Oxidation/Method 6 TRS Emission Sampling Procedure. Emission Measurement Branch, Emission Standards and Engineering Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, North Carolina. February 1980.
4. Gellman, I. A Laboratory and Field Study of Reduced Sulfur Sampling and Monitoring Systems. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, New York. Atmospheric Quality Improvement Technical Bulletin No. 81. October 1975.
5. Margeson, J.H., et al. A Manual Method for TRS Determination. Journal of Air Pollution Control Association. 35:1280-1286. December 1985.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]
Appendix A-6 to Part 60—Test Methods 16 through 18
Method 16—Semicontinuous determination of sulfur emissions from stationary sources
Method 16A—Determination of total reduced sulfur emissions from stationary sources (impinger technique)
Method 16B—Determination of total reduced sulfur emissions from stationary sources
Method 16C—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions From Stationary Sources
Method 17—Determination of particulate emissions from stationary sources (in-stack filtration method)
Method 18—Measurement of gaseous organic compound emissions by gas chromatography
The test methods in this appendix are referred to in § 60.8 (Performance Tests) and § 60.11 (Compliance With Standards and Maintenance Requirements) of 40 CFR part 60, subpart A (General Provisions). Specific uses of these test methods are described in the standards of performance contained in the subparts, beginning with Subpart D.
Within each standard of performance, a section title “Test Methods and Procedures” is provided to: (1) Identify the test methods to be used as reference methods to the facility subject to the respective standard and (2) identify any special instructions or conditions to be followed when applying a method to the respective facility. Such instructions (for example, establish sampling rates, volumes, or temperatures) are to be used either in addition to, or as a substitute for procedures in a test method. Similarly, for sources subject to emission monitoring requirements, specific instructions pertaining to any use of a test method as a reference method are provided in the subpart or in Appendix B.
Inclusion of methods in this appendix is not intended as an endorsement or denial of their applicability to sources that are not subject to standards of performance. The methods are potentially applicable to other sources; however, applicability should be confirmed by careful and appropriate evaluation of the conditions prevalent at such sources.
The approach followed in the formulation of the test methods involves specifications for equipment, procedures, and performance. In concept, a performance specification approach would be preferable in all methods because this allows the greatest flexibility to the user. In practice, however, this approach is impractical in most cases because performance specifications cannot be established. Most of the methods described herein, therefore, involve specific equipment specifications and procedures, and only a few methods in this appendix rely on performance criteria.
Minor changes in the test methods should not necessarily affect the validity of the results and it is recognized that alternative and equivalent methods exist. section 60.8 provides authority for the Administrator to specify or approve (1) equivalent methods, (2) alternative methods, and (3) minor changes in the methodology of the test methods. It should be clearly understood that unless otherwise identified all such methods and changes must have prior approval of the Administrator. An owner employing such methods or deviations from the test methods without obtaining prior approval does so at the risk of subsequent disapproval and retesting with approved methods.
Within the test methods, certain specific equipment or procedures are recognized as being acceptable or potentially acceptable and are specifically identified in the methods. The items identified as acceptable options may be used without approval but must be identified in the test report. The potentially approvable options are cited as “subject to the approval of the Administrator” or as “or equivalent.” Such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives may be used at the discretion of the owner without prior approval. However, detailed descriptions for applying these potentially approvable techniques or alternatives are not provided in the test methods. Also, the potentially approvable options are not necessarily acceptable in all applications. Therefore, an owner electing to use such potentially approvable techniques or alternatives is responsible for: (1) assuring that the techniques or alternatives are in fact applicable and are properly executed; (2) including a written description of the alternative method in the test report (the written method must be clear and must be capable of being performed without additional instruction, and the degree of detail should be similar to the detail contained in the test methods); and (3) providing any rationale or supporting data necessary to show the validity of the alternative in the particular application. Failure to meet these requirements can result in the Administrator's disapproval of the alternative.
Method 16—Semicontinuous Determination of Sulfur Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Dimethyl disulfide [(CH3)2 S2] | 62-49-20 | 50 ppb. |
| Dimethyl sulfide [(CH3)2 S] | 75-18-3 | 50 ppb. |
| Hydrogen sulfide [H2 S] | 7783-06-4 | 50 ppb. |
| Methyl mercaptan [CH4 S] | 74-93-1 | 50 ppb. |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of total reduced sulfur (TRS) compounds from recovery furnaces, lime kilns, and smelt dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills and fuel gas combustion devices at petroleum refineries.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the emission source and an aliquot is analyzed for hydrogen sulfide (H2S), methyl mercaptan (MeSH), dimethyl sulfide (DMS), and dimethyl disulfide (DMDS) by GC/FPD. These four compounds are known collectively as TRS.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Moisture. Moisture condensation in the sample delivery system, the analytical column, or the FPD burner block can cause losses or interferences. This is prevented by maintaining the probe, filter box, and connections at a temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F). Moisture is removed in the SO2 scrubber and heating the sample beyond this point is not necessary when the ambient temperature is above 0 °C (32 °F). Alternatively, moisture may be eliminated by heating the sample line, and by conditioning the sample with dry dilution air to lower its dew point below the operating temperature of the GC/FPD analytical system prior to analysis.
4.2 Carbon Monoxide (CO) and Carbon Dioxide (CO2). CO and CO2 have a substantial desensitizing effect on the flame photometric detector even after dilution. Acceptable systems must demonstrate that they have eliminated this interference by some procedure such as eluting these compounds before any of the compounds to be measured. Compliance with this requirement can be demonstrated by submitting chromatograms of calibration gases with and without CO2 in the diluent gas. The CO2 level should be approximately 10 percent for the case with CO2 present. The two chromatograms should show agreement within the precision limits of section 10.2.
4.3 Particulate Matter. Particulate matter in gas samples can cause interference by eventual clogging of the analytical system. This interference is eliminated by using the Teflon filter after the probe.
4.4 Sulfur Dioxide (SO2). Sulfur dioxide is not a specific interferant but may be present in such large amounts that it cannot effectively be separated from the other compounds of interest. The SO2 scrubber described in section 6.1.3 will effectively remove SO2 from the sample.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Hydrogen Sulfide. A flammable, poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs. H2S is extremely hazardous and can cause collapse, coma, and death within a few seconds of one or two inhalations at sufficient concentrations. Low concentrations irritate the mucous membranes and may cause nausea, dizziness, and headache after exposure.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1. Sample Collection. The following items are needed for sample collection.
6.1.1 Probe. Teflon or Teflon-lined stainless steel. The probe must be heated to prevent moisture condensation. It must be designed to allow calibration gas to enter the probe at or near the sample point entry. Any portion of the probe that contacts the stack gas must be heated to prevent moisture condensation. Figure 16-1 illustrates the probe used in lime kilns and other sources where significant amounts of particulate matter are present. The probe is designed with the deflector shield placed between the sample and the gas inlet holes to reduce clogging of the filter and possible adsorption of sample gas. As an alternative, the probe described in section 6.1.1 of Method 16A having a nozzle directed away from the gas stream may be used at sources having significant amounts of particulate matter.
6.1.2 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon filter holder and a 1- to 2-micron porosity Teflon filter (available through Savillex Corporation, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Minnesota 55343). The filter holder must be maintained in a hot box at a temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F).
6.1.3 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon segmented impingers connected in series with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. (Impinger parts and tubing available through Savillex.) The first two impingers contain 100 ml of citrate buffer and the third impinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube inserted into the solution should be constricted to less than 3 mm ( 1/8 in.) ID and should be immersed to a depth of at least 5 cm (2 in.). Immerse the impingers in an ice water bath and maintain near 0 °C (32 °F). The scrubber solution will normally last for a 3-hour run before needing replacement. This will depend upon the effects of moisture and particulate matter on the solution strength and pH. Connections between the probe, particulate filter, and SO2 scrubber must be made of Teflon and as short in length as possible. All portions of the probe, particulate filter, and connections prior to the SO2 scrubber (or alternative point of moisture removal) must be maintained at a temperature of at least 120 °C (248 °F).
6.1.4 Sample Line. Teflon, no greater than 1.3 cm ( 1/2 in.) ID. Alternative materials, such as virgin Nylon, may be used provided the line loss test is acceptable.
6.1.5 Sample Pump. The sample pump must be a leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm type or equivalent.
6.2 Analysis. The following items are needed for sample analysis:
6.2.1 Dilution System. Needed only for high sample concentrations. The dilution system must be constructed such that all sample contacts are made of Teflon, glass, or stainless steel.
6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph. The gas chromatograph must have at least the following components:
6.2.2.1 Oven. Capable of maintaining the separation column at the proper operating temperature ±1 °C (2 °F).
6.2.2.2 Temperature Gauge. To monitor column oven, detector, and exhaust temperature ±1 °C (2 °F).
6.2.2.3 Flow System. Gas metering system to measure sample, fuel, combustion gas, and carrier gas flows.
6.2.2.4 Flame Photometric Detector.
6.2.2.4.1 Electrometer. Capable of full scale amplification of linear ranges of 10−9 to 10−4 amperes full scale.
6.2.2.4.2 Power Supply. Capable of delivering up to 750 volts.
6.2.2.4.3 Recorder. Compatible with the output voltage range of the electrometer.
6.2.2.4.4 Rotary Gas Valves. Multiport Teflon-lined valves equipped with sample loop. Sample loop volumes must be chosen to provide the needed analytical range. Teflon tubing and fittings must be used throughout to present an inert surface for sample gas. The gas chromatograph must be calibrated with the sample loop used for sample analysis.
6.2.3 Gas Chromatogram Columns. The column system must be demonstrated to be capable of resolving the four major reduced sulfur compounds: H2S, MeSH, DMS, and DMDS. It must also demonstrate freedom from known interferences. To demonstrate that adequate resolution has been achieved, submit a chromatogram of a calibration gas containing all four of the TRS compounds in the concentration range of the applicable standard. Adequate resolution will be defined as base line separation of adjacent peaks when the amplifier attenuation is set so that the smaller peak is at least 50 percent of full scale. Baseline separation is defined as a return to zero ±5 percent in the interval between peaks. Systems not meeting this criteria may be considered alternate methods subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.3 Calibration. A calibration system, containing the following components, is required (see Figure 16-2).
6.3.1 Tube Chamber. Chamber of glass or Teflon of sufficient dimensions to house permeation tubes.
6.3.2 Flow System. To measure air flow over permeation tubes at ±2 percent. Flow over the permeation device may also be determined using a soap bubble flowmeter.
6.3.3 Constant Temperature Bath. Device capable of maintaining the permeation tubes at the calibration temperature within 0.1 °C (0.2 °F).
6.3.4 Temperature Gauge. Thermometer or equivalent to monitor bath temperature within 1 °C (2 °F).
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Fuel. Hydrogen (H2), prepurified grade or better.
7.2 Combustion Gas. Oxygen (O2) or air, research purity or better.
7.3 Carrier Gas. Prepurified grade or better.
7.4 Diluent (if required). Air containing less than 50 ppb total sulfur compounds and less than 10 ppmv each of moisture and total hydrocarbons.
7.5 Calibration Gases
7.5.1 Permeation tubes, one each of H2S, MeSH, DMS, and DMDS, gravimetrically calibrated and certified at some convenient operating temperature. These tubes consist of hermetically sealed FEP Teflon tubing in which a liquified gaseous substance is enclosed. The enclosed gas permeates through the tubing wall at a constant rate. When the temperature is constant, calibration gases covering a wide range of known concentrations can be generated by varying and accurately measuring the flow rate of diluent gas passing over the tubes. These calibration gases are used to calibrate the GC/FPD system and the dilution system.
7.5.2 Cylinder Gases. Cylinder gases may be used as alternatives to permeation devices. The gases must be traceable to a primary standard (such as permeation tubes) and not used beyond the certification expiration date.
7.6 Citrate Buffer and Sample Line Loss Gas. Same as Method 15, sections 7.6 and 7.7.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
Same as Method 15, section 8.0, except that the references to the dilution system may not be applicable.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.0 | Sample line loss check | Ensures that uncorrected negative bias introduced by sample loss is no greater than 20 percent, and provides for correction of bias of 20 percent or less. |
| 8.0 | Calibration drift test | Ensures that bias introduced by drift in the measurement system output during the run is no greater than 5 percent. |
| 10.0 | Analytical calibration | Ensures precision of analytical results within 5 percent. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
Same as Method 15, section 10.0, with the following addition and exceptions:
10.1 Use the four compounds that comprise TRS instead of the three reduced sulfur compounds measured by Method 15.
10.2 Flow Meter. Calibration before each test run is recommended, but not required; calibration following each test series is mandatory. Calibrate each flow meter after each complete test series with a wet-test meter. If the flow measuring device differs from the wet-test meter by 5 percent or more, the completed test runs must be voided. Alternatively, the flow data that yield the lower flow measurement may be used. Flow over the permeation device may also be determined using a soap bubble flowmeter.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Sample collection and analysis are concurrent for this method (see section 8.0).
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Concentration of Reduced Sulfur Compounds. Calculate the average concentration of each of the four analytes (i.e., DMDS, DMS, H2S, and MeSH) over the sample run (specified in section 8.2 of Method 15 as 16 injections).
Where:
Si = Concentration of any reduced sulfur compound from the i th sample injection, ppm.
C = Average concentration of any one of the reduced sulfur compounds for the entire run, ppm.
N = Number of injections in any run period.
12.2 TRS Concentration. Using Equation 16-2, calculate the TRS concentration for each sample run.
Where:
CTRS = TRS concentration, ppmv.
CH2S = Hydrogen sulfide concentration, ppmv.
CMeSH = Methyl mercaptan concentration, ppmv.
CDMS = Dimethyl sulfide concentration, ppmv.
CDMDS = Dimethyl disulfide concentration, ppmv.
d = Dilution factor, dimensionless.
12.3 Average TRS Concentration. Calculate the average TRS concentration for all sample runs performed.
Where:
Average TRS = Average total reduced sulfur in ppm.
TRSi = Total reduced sulfur in ppm as determined by Equation 16-2.
N = Number of samples.
Bwo = Fraction of volume of water vapor in the gas stream as determined by Method 4—Determination of Moisture in Stack Gases.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analytical Range. The analytical range will vary with the sample loop size. Typically, the analytical range may extend from 0.1 to 100 ppmv using 10- to 0.1-ml sample loop sizes. This eliminates the need for sample dilution in most cases.
13.2 Sensitivity. Using the 10-ml sample size, the minimum detectable concentration is approximately 50 ppb.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. O'Keeffe, A.E., and G.C. Ortman. “Primary Standards for Trace Gas Analysis.” Analytical Chemical Journal, 38,76. 1966.
2. Stevens, R.K., A.E. O'Keeffe, and G.C. Ortman. “Absolute Calibration of a Flame Photometric Detector to Volatile Sulfur Compounds at Sub-Part-Per-Million Levels.” Environmental Science and Technology, 3:7. July 1969.
3. Mulik, J.D., R.K. Stevens, and R. Baumgardner. “An Analytical System Designed to Measure Multiple Malodorous Compounds Related to Kraft Mill Activities.” Presented at the 12th Conference on Methods in Air Pollution and Industrial Hygiene Studies, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA. April 6-8, 1971.
4. Devonald, R.H., R.S. Serenius, and A.D. McIntyre. “Evaluation of the Flame Photometric Detector for Analysis of Sulfur Compounds.” Pulp and Paper Magazine of Canada, 73,3. March 1972.
5. Grimley, K.W., W.S. Smith, and R.M. Martin. “The Use of a Dynamic Dilution System in the Conditioning of Stack Gases for Automated Analysis by a Mobile Sampling Van.” Presented at the 63rd Annual APCA Meeting, St. Louis, MO. June 14-19, 1970.
6. General Reference. Standard Methods of Chemical Analysis, Volumes III-A and III-B Instrumental Methods. Sixth Edition. Van Nostrand Reinhold Co.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 16A—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions From Stationary Sources (Impinger Technique)
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. | Sensitivity |
|---|---|---|
| Total reduced sulfur (TRS) including: | N/A | See section 13.1. |
| Dimethyl disulfide [(CH3)2 S2] | 62-49-20 | |
| Dimethyl sulfide [(CH3)2 S] | 75-18-3 | |
| Hydrogen sulfide [H2 S] | 7783-06-4 | |
| Methyl mercaptan [CH4 S] | 74-93-1 | |
| Reduced sulfur (RS) including: | N/A | |
| H2 S | 7783-06-4 | |
| Carbonyl sulfide [COS] | 463-58-1 | |
| Carbon disulfide [CS2] | 75-15-0 | |
| Reported as: Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-5 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of TRS emissions from recovery boilers, lime kilns, and smelt dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills, reduced sulfur compounds (H2S, carbonyl sulfide, and carbon disulfide) from sulfur recovery units at onshore natural gas processing facilities, and from other sources when specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. The flue gas must contain at least 1 percent oxygen for complete oxidation of all TRS to SO2. Note: If sources other than kraft pulp mills experience low oxygen levels in the emissions, the method results may be biased low.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack. SO2 is removed selectively from the sample using a citrate buffer solution. TRS compounds are then thermally oxidized to SO2, collected in hydrogen peroxide as sulfate, and analyzed by the Method 6 barium-thorin titration procedure.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds other than those regulated by the emission standards, if present, may be measured by this method. Therefore, carbonyl sulfide, which is partially oxidized to SO2 and may be present in a lime kiln exit stack, would be a positive interferant.
4.2 Particulate matter from the lime kiln stack gas (primarily calcium carbonate) can cause a negative bias if it is allowed to enter the citrate scrubber; the particulate matter will cause the pH to rise and H2S to be absorbed prior to oxidation. Furthermore, if the calcium carbonate enters the hydrogen peroxide impingers, the calcium will precipitate sulfate ion. Proper use of the particulate filter described in section 6.1.3 will eliminate this interference.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Corrosive reagents. The following reagents are hazardous. Personal protective equipment and safe procedures are useful in preventing chemical splashes. If contact occurs, immediately flush with copious amounts of water for at least 15 minutes. Remove clothing under shower and decontaminate. Treat residual chemical burns as thermal burns.
5.2.1 Hydrogen Peroxide (H2O2). Irritating to eyes, skin, nose, and lungs.
5.2.2 Sodium Hydroxide (NaOH). Causes severe damage to eyes and skin. Inhalation causes irritation to nose, throat, and lungs. Reacts exothermically with limited amounts of water.
5.2.3 Sulfuric Acid (H2SO4). Rapidly destructive to body tissue. Will cause third degree burns. Eye damage may result in blindness. Inhalation may be fatal from spasm of the larynx, usually within 30 minutes. May cause lung tissue damage with edema. 3 mg/m 3 will cause lung damage in uninitiated. 1 mg/m 3 for 8 hours will cause lung damage or, in higher concentrations, death. Provide ventilation to limit inhalation. Reacts violently with metals and organics.
5.3 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S). A flammable, poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs. H2S is extremely hazardous and can cause collapse, coma, and death within a few seconds of one or two inhalations at sufficient concentrations. Low concentrations irritate the mucous membranes and may cause nausea, dizziness, and headache after exposure.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train is shown in Figure 16A-1 and component parts are discussed below. Modifications to this sampling train are acceptable provided the system performance check is met (see section 8.5).
6.1.1 Probe. Teflon tubing, 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) diameter, sequentially wrapped with heat-resistant fiber strips, a rubberized heat tape (plug at one end), and heat-resistant adhesive tape. A flexible thermocouple or other suitable temperature measuring device should be placed between the Teflon tubing and the fiber strips so that the temperature can be monitored to prevent softening of the probe. The probe should be sheathed in stainless steel to provide in-stack rigidity. A series of bored-out stainless steel fittings placed at the front of the sheath will prevent moisture and particulate from entering between the probe and sheath. A 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) Teflon elbow (bored out) should be attached to the inlet of the probe, and a 2.54 cm (1 in.) piece of Teflon tubing should be attached at the open end of the elbow to permit the opening of the probe to be turned away from the particulate stream; this will reduce the amount of particulate drawn into the sampling train. The probe is depicted in Figure 16A-2.
6.1.2 Probe Brush. Nylon bristle brush with handle inserted into a 3.2-mm ( 1/8-in.) Teflon tubing. The Teflon tubing should be long enough to pass the brush through the length of the probe.
6.1.3 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon filter holder and a 1- to 2-µm porosity, Teflon filter (available through Savillex Corporation, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Minnesota 55343). The filter holder must be maintained in a hot box at a temperature sufficient to prevent moisture condensation. A temperature of 121 °C (250 °F) was found to be sufficient when testing a lime kiln under sub-freezing ambient conditions.
6.1.4 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon segmented impingers connected in series with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. (Impinger parts and tubing available through Savillex.) The first two impingers contain 100 ml of citrate buffer and the third impinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube inserted into the solution should be constricted to less than 3 mm ( 1/8-in.) ID and should be immersed to a depth of at least 5 cm (2 in.).
6.1.5 Combustion Tube. Quartz glass tubing with an expanded combustion chamber 2.54 cm (1 in.) in diameter and at least 30.5 cm (12 in.) long. The tube ends should have an outside diameter of 0.6 cm ( 1/4 in.) and be at least 15.3 cm (6 in.) long. This length is necessary to maintain the quartz-glass connector near ambient temperature and thereby avoid leaks. Alternatively, the outlet may be constructed with a 90-degree glass elbow and socket that would fit directly onto the inlet of the first peroxide impinger.
6.1.6 Furnace. A furnace of sufficient size to enclose the combustion chamber of the combustion tube with a temperature regulator capable of maintaining the temperature at 800 ±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F). The furnace operating temperature should be checked with a thermocouple to ensure accuracy.
6.1.7 Peroxide Impingers, Stopcock Grease, Temperature Sensor, Drying Tube, Valve, Pump, and Barometer. Same as Method 6, sections 6.1.1.2, 6.1.1.4, 6.1.1.5, 6.1.1.6, 6.1.1.7, 6.1.1.8, and 6.1.2, respectively, except that the midget bubbler of Method 6, section 6.1.1.2 is not required.
6.1.8 Vacuum Gauge. At least 760 mm Hg (30 in. Hg) gauge.
6.1.9 Rate Meter. Rotameter, or equivalent, accurate to within 5 percent at the selected flow rate of approximately 2 liters/min (4.2 ft 3/hr).
6.1.10 Volume Meter. Dry gas meter capable of measuring the sample volume under the sampling conditions of 2 liters/min (4.2 ft 3/hr) with an accuracy of 2 percent.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Polyethylene Bottles, 250-ml (one per sample).
6.3 Sample Preparation and Analysis. Same as Method 6, section 6.3, except a 10-ml buret with 0.05-ml graduations is required, and the spectrophotometer is not needed.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sample Collection. The following reagents are required for sample analysis:
7.1.1 Water. Same as in Method 6, section 7.1.1.
7.1.2 Citrate Buffer. Dissolve 300 g of potassium citrate (or 284 g of sodium citrate) and 41 g of anhydrous citric acid in 1 liter of water (200 ml is needed per test). Adjust the pH to between 5.4 and 5.6 with potassium citrate or citric acid, as required.
7.1.3 Hydrogen Peroxide, 3 percent. Same as in Method 6, section 7.1.3 (40 ml is needed per sample).
7.1.4 Recovery Check Gas. Hydrogen sulfide (100 ppmv or less) in nitrogen, stored in aluminum cylinders. Verify the concentration by Method 11 or by gas chromatography where the instrument is calibrated with an H2S permeation tube as described below. For Method 11, the relative standard deviation should not exceed 5 percent on at least three 20-minute runs.
7.1.5 Combustion Gas. Gas containing less than 50 ppb reduced sulfur compounds and less than 10 ppmv total hydrocarbons. The gas may be generated from a clean-air system that purifies ambient air and consists of the following components: Diaphragm pump, silica gel drying tube, activated charcoal tube, and flow rate measuring device. Flow from a compressed air cylinder is also acceptable.
7.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 7.2.1 and 7.3, respectively.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Preparation of Sampling Train.
8.1.1 For the SO2 scrubber, measure 100 ml of citrate buffer into the first and second impingers; leave the third impinger empty. Immerse the impingers in an ice bath, and locate them as close as possible to the filter heat box. The connecting tubing should be free of loops. Maintain the probe and filter temperatures sufficiently high to prevent moisture condensation, and monitor with a suitable temperature sensor.
8.1.2 For the Method 6 part of the train, measure 20 ml of 3 percent hydrogen peroxide into the first and second midget impingers. Leave the third midget impinger empty, and place silica gel in the fourth midget impinger. Alternatively, a silica gel drying tube may be used in place of the fourth impinger. Maintain the oxidation furnace at 800 ±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F). Place crushed ice and water around all impingers.
8.2 Citrate Scrubber Conditioning Procedure. Condition the citrate buffer scrubbing solution by pulling stack gas through the Teflon impingers and bypassing all other sampling train components. A purge rate of 2 liters/min for 10 minutes has been found to be sufficient to obtain equilibrium. After the citrate scrubber has been conditioned, assemble the sampling train, and conduct (optional) a leak-check as described in Method 6, section 8.2.
8.3 Sample Collection. Same as in Method 6, section 8.3, except the sampling rate is 2 liters/min (±10 percent) for 1 or 3 hours. After the sample is collected, remove the probe from the stack, and conduct (mandatory) a post-test leak-check as described in Method 6, section 8.2. The 15-minute purge of the train following collection should not be performed. After each 3-hour test run (or after three 1-hour samples), conduct one system performance check (see section 8.5) to determine the reduced sulfur recovery efficiency through the sampling train. After this system performance check and before the next test run, rinse and brush the probe with water, replace the filter, and change the citrate scrubber (optional but recommended).
8.4 Sample Recovery. Disconnect the impingers. Quantitatively transfer the contents of the midget impingers of the Method 6 part of the train into a leak-free polyethylene bottle for shipment. Rinse the three midget impingers and the connecting tubes with water and add the washings to the same storage container. Mark the fluid level. Seal and identify the sample container.
8.5 System Performance Check.
8.5.1 A system performance check is done (1) to validate the sampling train components and procedure (prior to testing; optional) and (2) to validate a test run (after a run). Perform a check in the field prior to testing consisting of at least two samples (optional), and perform an additional check after each 3 hour run or after three 1-hour samples (mandatory).
8.5.2 The checks involve sampling a known concentration of H2S and comparing the analyzed concentration with the known concentration. Mix the H2S recovery check gas (Section 7.1.4) and combustion gas in a dilution system such as that shown in Figure 16A-3. Adjust the flow rates to generate an H2S concentration in the range of the stack gas or within 20 percent of the applicable standard and an oxygen concentration greater than 1 percent at a total flow rate of at least 2.5 liters/min (5.3 ft 3/hr). Use Equation 16A-3 to calculate the concentration of recovery gas generated. Calibrate the flow rate from both sources with a soap bubble flow meter so that the diluted concentration of H2S can be accurately calculated.
8.5.3 Collect 30-minute samples, and analyze in the same manner as the emission samples. Collect the sample through the probe of the sampling train using a manifold or some other suitable device that will ensure extraction of a representative sample.
8.5.4 The recovery check must be performed in the field prior to replacing the SO2 scrubber and particulate filter and before the probe is cleaned. Use Equation 16A-4 (see section 12.5) to calculate the recovery efficiency. Report the recovery efficiency with the emission data; do not correct the emission data for the recovery efficiency. A sample recovery of 100 ±20 percent must be obtained for the emission data to be valid. However, if the recovery efficiency is not in the 100 ±20 percent range but the results do not affect the compliance or noncompliance status of the affected facility, the Administrator may decide to accept the results of the compliance test.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.5 | System performance check | Ensure validity of sampling train components and analytical procedure. |
| 8.2, 10.0 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.0 | Barium standard solution standardization | Ensure precision of normality determination. |
| 11.1 | Replicate titrations | Ensure precision of titration determinations. |
10.0 Calibration
Same as Method 6, section 10.0.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Sample Loss Check and Sample Analysis. Same as Method 6, sections 11.1 and 11.2, respectively, with the following exception: for 1-hour sampling, take a 40-ml aliquot, add 160 ml of 100 percent isopropanol and four drops of thorin.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
In the calculations, at least one extra decimal figure should be retained beyond that of the acquired data. Figures should be rounded off after final calculations.
12.1 Nomenclature.
CTRS = Concentration of TRS as SO2, dry basis corrected to standard conditions, ppmv.
CRG(act) = Actual concentration of recovery check gas (after dilution), ppm.
CRG(m) = Measured concentration of recovery check gas generated, ppm.
CH2S = Verified concentration of H2S recovery gas.
N = Normality of barium perchlorate titrant, milliequivalents/ml.
Pbar = Barometric pressure at exit orifice of the dry gas meter, mm Hg (in. Hg).
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg (29.92 in. Hg).
QH2S = Calibrated flow rate of H2S recovery gas, liters/min.
QCG = Calibrated flow rate of combustion gas, liters/min.
R = Recovery efficiency for the system performance check, percent.
Tm = Average dry gas meter absolute temperature, °K (°R).
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K (528 °R).
Va = Volume of sample aliquot titrated, ml.
Vm = Dry gas volume as measured by the dry gas meter, liters (dcf).
Vm(std) = Dry gas volume measured by the dry gas meter, corrected to standard conditions, liters (dscf).
Vsoln = Total volume of solution in which the sulfur dioxide sample is contained, 100 ml.
Vt = Volume of barium perchlorate titrant used for the sample, ml (average of replicate titrations).
Vtb = Volume of barium perchlorate titrant used for the blank, ml.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor.
32.03 = Equivalent weight of sulfur dioxide, mg/meq.
12.2 Dry Sample Gas Volume, Corrected to Standard Conditions.
Where:
K1 = 0.3855 °K/mm Hg for metric units,
= 17.65 °R/in. Hg for English units.
12.3 Concentration of TRS as ppm SO2.
Where:
12.4 Concentration of Recovery Gas Generated in the System Performance Check.
12.5 Recovery Efficiency for the System Performance Check.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analytical Range. The lower detectable limit is 0.1 ppmv SO2 when sampling at 2 liters/min (4.2 ft 3/hr) for 3 hours or 0.3 ppmv when sampling at 2 liters/min (4.2 ft 3/hr) for 1 hour. The upper concentration limit of the method exceeds the TRS levels generally encountered at kraft pulp mills.
13.2 Precision. Relative standard deviations of 2.0 and 2.6 percent were obtained when sampling a recovery boiler for 1 and 3 hours, respectively.
13.3 Bias.
13.3.1 No bias was found in Method 16A relative to Method 16 in a separate study at a recovery boiler.
13.3.2 Comparison of Method 16A with Method 16 at a lime kiln indicated that there was no bias in Method 16A. However, instability of the source emissions adversely affected the comparison. The precision of Method 16A at the lime kiln was similar to that obtained at the recovery boiler (Section 13.2.1).
13.3.3 Relative standard deviations of 2.7 and 7.7 percent have been obtained for system performance checks.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
As an alternative to the procedures specified in section 7.1.4, the following procedure may be used to verify the H2S concentration of the recovery check gas.
16.1 Summary. The H2S is collected from the calibration gas cylinder and is absorbed in zinc acetate solution to form zinc sulfide. The latter compound is then measured iodometrically.
16.2 Range. The procedure has been examined in the range of 5 to 1500 ppmv.
16.3 Interferences. There are no known interferences to this procedure when used to analyze cylinder gases containing H2S in nitrogen.
16.4 Precision and Bias. Laboratory tests have shown a relative standard deviation of less than 3 percent. The procedure showed no bias when compared to a gas chromatographic method that used gravimetrically certified permeation tubes for calibration.
16.5 Equipment and Supplies.
16.5.1 Sampling Apparatus. The sampling train is shown in Figure 16A-4. Its component parts are discussed in sections 16.5.1.1 through 16.5.2.
16.5.1.1 Sampling Line. Teflon tubing ( 1/4-in.) to connect the cylinder regulator to the sampling valve.
16.5.1.2 Needle Valve. Stainless steel or Teflon needle valve to control the flow rate of gases to the impingers.
16.5.1.3 Impingers. Three impingers of approximately 100-ml capacity, constructed to permit the addition of reagents through the gas inlet stem. The impingers shall be connected in series with leak-free glass or Teflon connectors. The impinger bottoms have a standard 24/25 ground-glass fitting. The stems are from standard 6.4-mm ( 1/4-in.) ball joint midget impingers, custom lengthened by about 1 in. When fitted together, the stem end should be approximately 1.27 cm ( 1/2 in.) from the bottom (Southern Scientific, Inc., Micanopy, Florida: Set Number S6962-048). The third in-line impinger acts as a drop-out bottle.
16.5.1.4 Drying Tube, Rate Meter, and Barometer. Same as Method 11, sections 6.1.5, 6.1.8, and 6.1.10, respectively.
16.5.1.5 Cylinder Gas Regulator. Stainless steel, to reduce the pressure of the gas stream entering the Teflon sampling line to a safe level.
16.5.1.6 Soap Bubble Meter. Calibrated for 100 and 500 ml, or two separate bubble meters.
16.5.1.7 Critical Orifice. For volume and rate measurements. The critical orifice may be fabricated according to section 16.7.3 and must be calibrated as specified in section 16.12.4.
16.5.1.8 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml size.
16.5.1.9 Volumetric Flask. 1-liter size.
16.5.1.10 Volumetric Pipette. 15-ml size.
16.5.1.11 Vacuum Gauge. Minimum 20 in. Hg capacity.
16.5.1.12 Stopwatch.
16.5.2 Sample Recovery and Analysis.
16.5.2.1 Erlenmeyer Flasks. 125- and 250-ml sizes.
16.5.2.2 Pipettes. 2-, 10-, 20-, and 100-ml volumetric.
16.5.2.3 Burette. 50-ml size.
16.5.2.4 Volumetric Flask. 1-liter size.
16.5.2.5 Graduated Cylinder. 50-ml size.
16.5.2.6 Wash Bottle.
16.5.2.7 Stirring Plate and Bars.
16.6 Reagents and Standards. Unless otherwise indicated, all reagents must conform to the specifications established by the Committee on Analytical Reagents of the American Chemical Society, where such specifications are available. Otherwise, use the best available grade.
16.6.1 Water. Same as Method 11, section 7.1.3.
16.6.2 Zinc Acetate Absorbing Solution. Dissolve 20 g zinc acetate in water, and dilute to 1 liter.
16.6.3 Potassium Bi-iodate [KH(IO3)2] Solution, Standard 0.100 N. Dissolve 3.249 g anhydrous KH(IO3)2 in water, and dilute to 1 liter.
16.6.4 Sodium Thiosulfate (Na2S2O3) Solution, Standard 0.1 N. Same as Method 11, section 7.3.2. Standardize according to section 16.12.2.
16.6.5 Na2S2O3 Solution, Standard 0.01 N. Pipette 100.0 ml of 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution into a 1-liter volumetric flask, and dilute to the mark with water.
16.6.6 Iodine Solution, 0.1 N. Same as Method 11, section 7.2.3.
16.6.7 Standard Iodine Solution, 0.01 N. Same as in Method 11, section 7.2.4. Standardize according to section 16.12.3.
16.6.8 Hydrochloric Acid (HCl) Solution, 10 Percent by Weight. Add 230 ml concentrated HCl (specific gravity 1.19) to 770 ml water.
16.6.9 Starch Indicator Solution. To 5 g starch (potato, arrowroot, or soluble), add a little cold water, and grind in a mortar to a thin paste. Pour into 1 liter of boiling water, stir, and let settle overnight. Use the clear supernatant. Preserve with 1.25 g salicylic acid, 4 g zinc chloride, or a combination of 4 g sodium propionate and 2 g sodium azide per liter of starch solution. Some commercial starch substitutes are satisfactory.
16.7 Pre-test Procedures.
16.7.1 Selection of Gas Sample Volumes. This procedure has been validated for estimating the volume of cylinder gas sample needed when the H2S concentration is in the range of 5 to 1500 ppmv. The sample volume ranges were selected in order to ensure a 35 to 60 percent consumption of the 20 ml of 0.01 N iodine (thus ensuring a 0.01 N Na2S2O3 titer of approximately 7 to 12 ml). The sample volumes for various H2S concentrations can be estimated by dividing the approximate ppm-liters desired for a given concentration range by the H2S concentration stated by the manufacturer. For example, for analyzing a cylinder gas containing approximately 10 ppmv H2S, the optimum sample volume is 65 liters (650 ppm-liters/10 ppmv). For analyzing a cylinder gas containing approximately 1000 ppmv H2S, the optimum sample volume is 1 liter (1000 ppm-liters/1000 ppmv).
| Approximate cylinder gas H2 S concentration (ppmv) | Approximate ppm-liters desired |
|---|---|
| 5 to <30 | 650 |
| 30 to <500 | 800 |
| 500 to <1500 | 1000 |
16.7.2 Critical Orifice Flow Rate Selection. The following table shows the ranges of sample flow rates that are desirable in order to ensure capture of H2S in the impinger solution. Slight deviations from these ranges will not have an impact on measured concentrations.
| Cylinder gas H2 S concentration (ppmv) | Critical orifice flow rate (ml/min) |
|---|---|
| 5 to 50 ppmv | 1500 ±500 |
| 50 to 250 ppmv | 500 ±250 |
| 250 to <1000 ppmv | 200 ±50 |
| >1000 ppmv | 75 ±25 |
16.7.3 Critical Orifice Fabrication. Critical orifice of desired flow rates may be fabricated by selecting an orifice tube of desired length and connecting 1/16-in. × 1/4-in. (0.16 cm × 0.64 cm) reducing fittings to both ends. The inside diameters and lengths of orifice tubes needed to obtain specific flow rates are shown below.
| Tube (in. OD) |
Tube (in. ID) |
Length (in.) |
Flowrate (ml/min) |
Altech Catalog No. |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1/16 | 0.007 | 1.2 | 85 | 301430 |
| 1/16 | 0.01 | 3.2 | 215 | 300530 |
| 1/16 | 0.01 | 1.2 | 350 | 300530 |
| 1/16 | 0.02 | 1.2 | 1400 | 300230 |
16.7.4 Determination of Critical Orifice Approximate Flow Rate. Connect the critical orifice to the sampling system as shown in Figure 16A-4 but without the H2S cylinder. Connect a rotameter in the line to the first impinger. Turn on the pump, and adjust the valve to give a reading of about half atmospheric pressure. Observe the rotameter reading. Slowly increase the vacuum until a stable flow rate is reached, and record this as the critical vacuum. The measured flow rate indicates the expected critical flow rate of the orifice. If this flow rate is in the range shown in section 16.7.2, proceed with the critical orifice calibration according to section 16.12.4.
16.7.5 Determination of Approximate Sampling Time. Determine the approximate sampling time for a cylinder of known concentration. Use the optimum sample volume obtained in section 16.7.1.
16.8 Sample Collection.
16.8.1 Connect the Teflon tubing, Teflon tee, and rotameter to the flow control needle valve as shown in Figure 16A-4. Vent the rotameter to an exhaust hood. Plug the open end of the tee. Five to 10 minutes prior to sampling, open the cylinder valve while keeping the flow control needle valve closed. Adjust the delivery pressure to 20 psi. Open the needle valve slowly until the rotameter shows a flow rate approximately 50 to 100 ml above the flow rate of the critical orifice being used in the system.
16.8.2 Place 50 ml of zinc acetate solution in two of the impingers, connect them and the empty third impinger (dropout bottle) and the rest of the equipment as shown in Figure 16A-4. Make sure the ground-glass fittings are tight. The impingers can be easily stabilized by using a small cardboard box in which three holes have been cut, to act as a holder. Connect the Teflon sample line to the first impinger. Cover the impingers with a dark cloth or piece of plastic to protect the absorbing solution from light during sampling.
16.8.3 Record the temperature and barometric pressure. Note the gas flow rate through the rotameter. Open the closed end of the tee. Connect the sampling tube to the tee, ensuring a tight connection. Start the sampling pump and stopwatch simultaneously. Note the decrease in flow rate through the excess flow rotameter. This decrease should equal the known flow rate of the critical orifice being used. Continue sampling for the period determined in section 16.7.5.
16.8.4 When sampling is complete, turn off the pump and stopwatch. Disconnect the sampling line from the tee and plug it. Close the needle valve followed by the cylinder valve. Record the sampling time.
16.9 Blank Analysis. While the sample is being collected, run a blank as follows: To a 250-ml Erlenmeyer flask, add 100 ml of zinc acetate solution, 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solution, and 2 ml HCl solution. Titrate, while stirring, with 0.01 N Na2S2O3 until the solution is light yellow. Add starch, and continue titrating until the blue color disappears. Analyze a blank with each sample, as the blank titer has been observed to change over the course of a day.
16.10 Sample Analysis. Sample treatment is similar to the blank treatment. Before detaching the stems from the bottoms of the impingers, add 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solution through the stems of the impingers holding the zinc acetate solution, dividing it between the two (add about 15 ml to the first impinger and the rest to the second). Add 2 ml HCl solution through the stems, dividing it as with the iodine. Disconnect the sampling line, and store the impingers for 30 minutes. At the end of 30 minutes, rinse the impinger stems into the impinger bottoms. Titrate the impinger contents with 0.01 N Na2S2O3. Do not transfer the contents of the impinger to a flask because this may result in a loss of iodine and cause a positive bias.
16.11 Post-test Orifice Calibration. Conduct a post-test critical orifice calibration run using the calibration procedures outlined in section 16.12.4. If the Qstd obtained before and after the test differs by more than 5 percent, void the sample; if not, proceed to perform the calculations.
16.12 Calibrations and Standardizations.
16.12.1 Rotameter and Barometer. Same as Method 11, sections 10.1.3 and 10.1.4.
16.12.2 Na2S2O3 Solution, 0.1 N. Standardize the 0.1 N Na2S2O3 solution as follows: To 80 ml water, stirring constantly, add 1 ml concentrated H2SO4, 10.0 ml of 0.100 N KH(IO3)2 and 1 g potassium iodide. Titrate immediately with 0.1 N Na2S2O3 until the solution is light yellow. Add 3 ml starch solution, and titrate until the blue color just disappears. Repeat the titration until replicate analyses agree within 0.05 ml. Take the average volume of Na2S2O3 consumed to calculate the normality to three decimal figures using Equation 16A-5.
16.12.3 Iodine Solution, 0.01 N. Standardize the 0.01 N iodine solution as follows: Pipet 20.0 ml of 0.01 N iodine solution into a 125-ml Erlenmeyer flask. Titrate with standard 0.01 N Na2S2O3 solution until the solution is light yellow. Add 3 ml starch solution, and continue titrating until the blue color just disappears. If the normality of the iodine tested is not 0.010, add a few ml of 0.1 N iodine solution if it is low, or a few ml of water if it is high, and standardize again. Repeat the titration until replicate values agree within 0.05 ml. Take the average volume to calculate the normality to three decimal figures using Equation 16A-6.
16.12.4 Critical Orifice. Calibrate the critical orifice using the sampling train shown in Figure 16A-4 but without the H2S cylinder and vent rotameter. Connect the soap bubble meter to the Teflon line that is connected to the first impinger. Turn on the pump, and adjust the needle valve until the vacuum is higher than the critical vacuum determined in section 16.7.4. Record the time required for gas flow to equal the soap bubble meter volume (use the 100-ml soap bubble meter for gas flow rates below 100 ml/min, otherwise use the 500-ml soap bubble meter). Make three runs, and record the data listed in Table 16A-1. Use these data to calculate the volumetric flow rate of the orifice.
16.13 Calculations.
16.13.1 Nomenclature.
Bwa = Fraction of water vapor in ambient air during orifice calibration.
CH2S = H2S concentration in cylinder gas, ppmv.
Ma = Molecular weight of ambient air saturated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole.
Ms = Molecular weight of sample gas (nitrogen) saturated at impinger temperature, g/g-mole.
NI = Normality of standard iodine solution (0.01 N), g-eq/liter.
NT = Normality of standard Na2S2O3 solution (0.01 N), g-eq/liter.
Pbar = Barometric pressure, mm Hg.
Pstd = Standard absolute pressure, 760 mm Hg.
Qstd = Average volumetric flow rate through critical orifice, liters/min.
Tamb = Absolute ambient temperature, °K.
Tstd = Standard absolute temperature, 293 °K.
θs = Sampling time, min.
θsb = Time for soap bubble meter flow rate measurement, min.
Vm(std) = Sample gas volume measured by the critical orifice, corrected to standard conditions, liters.
Vsb = Volume of gas as measured by the soap bubble meter, ml.
Vsb(std) = Volume of gas as measured by the soap bubble meter, corrected to standard conditions, liters.
VI = Volume of standard iodine solution (0.01 N) used, ml.
VT = Volume of standard Na2S2O3 solution (0.01 N) used, ml.
VTB = Volume of standard Na2S2O3 solution (0.01 N) used for the blank, ml.
16.13.2 Normality of Standard Na2S2O3 Solution (0.1 N).
16.13.3 Normality of Standard Iodine Solution (0.01 N).
16.13.4 Sample Gas Volume.
16.13.5 Concentration of H2S in the Gas Cylinder.
17.0 References
1. American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water Pollution Control Federation. Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater. Washington, DC. American Public Health Association. 1975. pp. 316-317.
2. American Society for Testing and Materials. Annual Book of ASTM Standards. Part 31: Water, Atmospheric Analysis. Philadelphia, PA. 1974. pp. 40-42.
3. Blosser, R.O. A Study of TRS Measurement Methods. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, NY. Technical Bulletin No. 434. May 1984. 14 pp.
4. Blosser, R.O., H.S. Oglesby, and A.K. Jain. A Study of Alternate SO2 Scrubber Designs Used for TRS Monitoring. A Special Report by the National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, NY. July 1977.
5. Curtis, F., and G.D. McAlister. Development and Evaluation of an Oxidation/Method 6 TRS Emission Sampling Procedure. Emission Measurement Branch, Emission Standards and Engineering Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711. February 1980.
6. Gellman, I. A Laboratory and Field Study of Reduced Sulfur Sampling and Monitoring Systems. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc., New York, NY. Atmospheric Quality Improvement Technical Bulletin No. 81. October 1975.
7. Margeson, J.H., J.E. Knoll, and M.R. Midgett. A Manual Method for TRS Determination. Source Branch, Quality Assurance Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
8. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement. An Investigation of H2S and SO2. Calibration Cylinder Gas Stability and Their Standardization Using Wet Chemical Techniques. Special Report 76-06. New York, NY. August 1976.
9. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement. Wet Chemical Method for Determining the H2S Concentration of Calibration Cylinder Gases. Technical Bulletin Number 450. New York, NY. January 1985. 23 pp.
10. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement. Modified Wet Chemical Method for Determining the H2S Concentration of Calibration Cylinder Gases. Draft Report. New York, NY. March 1987. 29 pp.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Date
Critical orifice ID
Soap bubble meter volume, Vsb____ liters
Time, θsb
Run no. 1 ____ min ____ sec
Run no. 2 ____ min ____ sec
Run no. 3 ____ min ____ sec
Average ____ min ____ sec
Covert the seconds to fraction of minute:
Time=____ min + ____ Sec/60=____ min
Barometric pressure, Pbar=____ mm Hg
Ambient temperature, t amb = 273 + ____ °C=____ °K=____ mm Hg. (This should be approximately 0.4 times barometric pressure.)
Pump vacuum,
Table 16A-1. Critical Orifice Calibration Data
Method 16B—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analytes.
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Total reduced sulfur (TRS) including: | N/A |
| Dimethyl disulfide (DMDS), [(CH3)2 S2] | 62-49-20 |
| Dimethyl sulfide (DMS), [(CH3)2 S] | 75-18-3 |
| Hydrogen sulfide (H2 S) | 7783-06-4 |
| Methyl mercaptan (MeSH), [CH4 S] | 74-93-1 |
| Reported as: Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-5 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for determining TRS emissions from recovery furnaces (boilers), lime kilns, and smelt dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills, and from other sources when specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations. The flue gas must contain at least 1 percent oxygen for complete oxidation of all TRS to SO2.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 A gas sample is extracted from the stack. The SO2 is removed selectively from the sample using a citrate buffer solution. The TRS compounds are then thermally oxidized to SO2 and analyzed as SO2 by gas chromatography (GC) using flame photometric detection (FPD).
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds other than those regulated by the emission standards, if present, may be measured by this method. Therefore, carbonyl sulfide, which is partially oxidized to SO2 and may be present in a lime kiln exit stack, would be a positive interferant.
4.2 Particulate matter from the lime kiln stack gas (primarily calcium carbonate) can cause a negative bias if it is allowed to enter the citrate scrubber; the particulate matter will cause the pH to rise and H2S to be absorbed before oxidation. Proper use of the particulate filter, described in section 6.1.3 of Method 16A, will eliminate this interference.
4.3 Carbon monoxide (CO) and carbon dioxide (CO2) have substantial desensitizing effects on the FPD even after dilution. Acceptable systems must demonstrate that they have eliminated this interference by some procedure such as eluting these compounds before the SO2. Compliance with this requirement can be demonstrated by submitting chromatograms of calibration gases with and without CO2 in diluent gas. The CO2 level should be approximately 10 percent for the case with CO2 present. The two chromatograms should show agreement within the precision limits of section 13.0.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
5.2 Hydrogen Sulfide (H2S). A flammable, poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs. H2S is extremely hazardous and can cause collapse, coma, and death within a few seconds of one or two inhalations at sufficient concentrations. Low concentrations irritate the mucous membranes and may cause nausea, dizziness, and headache after exposure.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sample Collection. The sampling train is shown in Figure 16B-1. Modifications to the apparatus are accepted provided the system performance check in section 8.3.1 is met.
6.1.1 Probe, Probe Brush, Particulate Filter, SO2 Scrubber, Combustion Tube, and Furnace. Same as in Method 16A, sections 6.1.1 to 6.1.6.
6.1.2 Sampling Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm type or equivalent.
6.2 Analysis.
6.2.1 Dilution System (optional), Gas Chromatograph, Oven, Temperature Gauges, Flow System, Flame Photometric Detector, Electrometer, Power Supply, Recorder, Calibration System, Tube Chamber, Flow System, and Constant Temperature Bath. Same as in Method 16, sections 6.2.1, 6.2.2, and 6.3.
6.2.2 Gas Chromatograph Columns. Same as in Method 16, section 6.2.3. Other columns with demonstrated ability to resolve SO2 and be free from known interferences are acceptable alternatives. Single column systems such as a 7-ft Carbsorb B HT 100 column have been found satisfactory in resolving SO2 from CO2.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
Same as in Method 16, section 7.0, except for the following:
7.1 Calibration Gas. SO2 permeation tube gravimetrically calibrated and certified at some convenient operating temperature. These tubes consist of hermetically sealed FEP Teflon tubing in which a liquefied gaseous substance is enclosed. The enclosed gas permeates through the tubing wall at a constant rate. When the temperature is constant, calibration gases covering a wide range of known concentrations can be generated by varying and accurately measuring the flow rate of diluent gas passing over the tubes. In place of SO2 permeation tubes, cylinder gases containing SO2 in nitrogen may be used for calibration. The cylinder gas concentration must be verified according to section 8.2.1 of Method 6C. The calibration gas is used to calibrate the GC/FPD system and the dilution system.
7.2 Recovery Check Gas.
7.2.1 Hydrogen sulfide [100 parts per million by volume (ppmv) or less] in nitrogen, stored in aluminum cylinders. Verify the concentration by Method 11, the procedure discussed in section 16.0 of Method 16A, or gas chromatography where the instrument is calibrated with an H2S permeation tube as described below. For the wet-chemical methods, the standard deviation should not exceed 5 percent on at least three 20-minute runs.
7.2.2 Hydrogen sulfide recovery gas generated from a permeation device gravimetrically calibrated and certified at some convenient operation temperature may be used. The permeation rate of the device must be such that at a dilution gas flow rate of 3 liters/min (64 ft 3/hr), an H2S concentration in the range of the stack gas or within 20 percent of the emission standard can be generated.
7.3 Combustion Gas. Gas containing less than 50 ppbv reduced sulfur compounds and less than 10 ppmv total hydrocarbons. The gas may be generated from a clean-air system that purifies ambient air and consists of the following components: diaphragm pump, silica gel drying tube, activated charcoal tube, and flow rate measuring device. Gas from a compressed air cylinder is also acceptable.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pretest Procedures. Same as in Method 15, section 8.1.
8.2 Sample Collection. Before any source sampling is performed, conduct a system performance check as detailed in section 8.3.1 to validate the sampling train components and procedures. Although this test is optional, it would significantly reduce the possibility of rejecting tests as a result of failing the post-test performance check. At the completion of the pretest system performance check, insert the sampling probe into the test port making certain that no dilution air enters the stack though the port. Condition the entire system with sample for a minimum of 15 minutes before beginning analysis. If the sample is diluted, determine the dilution factor as in section 10.4 of Method 15.
8.3. Post-Test Procedures
8.3.1 System Performance Check. Same as in Method 16A, section 8.5. A sufficient number of sample injections should be made so that the precision requirements of section 13.2 are satisfied.
8.3.2 Determination of Calibration Drift. Same as in Method 15, section 8.3.2.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.2, 8.3 | System performance check | Ensure validity of sampling train components and analytical procedure. |
| 8.1 | Sampling equipment leak-check and calibration | Ensure accurate measurement of stack gas flow rate, sample volume. |
| 10.0 | Analytical calibration | Ensure precision of analytical results within 5 percent. |
10.0 Calibration
Same as in Method 16, section 10, except SO2 is used instead of H2S.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
11.1 Analysis. Inject aliquots of the sample into the GC/FPD analyzer for analysis. Determine the concentration of SO2 directly from the calibration curves or from the equation for the least-squares line.
11.2 Perform analysis of a minimum of three aliquots or one every 15 minutes, whichever is greater, spaced evenly over the test period.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
CSO2 = Sulfur dioxide concentration, ppmv.
CTRS = Total reduced sulfur concentration as determined by Equation 16B-1, ppmv.
d = Dilution factor, dimensionless.
N = Number of samples.
12.2 SO2 Concentration. Determine the concentration of SO2, CSO2, directly from the calibration curves. Alternatively, the concentration may be calculated using the equation for the least-squares line.
12.3 TRS Concentration.
12.4 Average TRS Concentration
13.0 Method Performance.
13.1 Range and Sensitivity. Coupled with a GC using a 1-ml sample size, the maximum limit of the FPD for SO2 is approximately 10 ppmv. This limit is extended by diluting the sample gas before analysis or by reducing the sample aliquot size. For sources with emission levels between 10 and 100 ppm, the measuring range can be best extended by reducing the sample size.
13.2 GC/FPD Calibration and Precision. A series of three consecutive injections of the sample calibration gas, at any dilution, must produce results which do not vary by more than 5 percent from the mean of the three injections.
13.3 Calibration Drift. The calibration drift determined from the mean of the three injections made at the beginning and end of any run or series of runs within a 24-hour period must not exceed 5 percent.
13.4 System Calibration Accuracy. Losses through the sample transport system must be measured and a correction factor developed to adjust the calibration accuracy to 100 percent.
13.5 Field tests between this method and Method 16A showed an average difference of less than 4.0 percent. This difference was not determined to be significant.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. Same as in Method 16, section 16.0.
2. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc, A Study of TRS Measurement Methods. Technical Bulletin No. 434. New York, NY. May 1984. 12p.
3. Margeson, J.H., J.E. Knoll, and M.R. Midgett. A Manual Method for TRS Determination. Draft available from the authors. Source Branch, Quality Assurance Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 16C—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
What is Method 16C?
Method 16C is a procedure for measuring total reduced sulfur (TRS) in stationary source emissions using a continuous instrumental analyzer. Quality assurance and quality control requirements are included to assure that you, the tester, collect data of known quality. You must document your adherence to these specific requirements for equipment, supplies, sample collection and analysis, calculations, and data analysis. This method does not completely describe all equipment, supplies, and sampling and analytical procedures you will need but refers to other methods for some of the details. Therefore, to obtain reliable results, you should also have a thorough knowledge of these additional test methods which are found in appendix A to this part:
(a) Method 6C—Determination of Sulfur Dioxide Emissions from Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
(b) Method 7E—Determination of Nitrogen Oxides Emissions from Stationary Sources (Instrumental Analyzer Procedure)
(c) Method 16A—Determination of Total Reduced Sulfur Emissions from Stationary Sources (Impinger Technique)
1.1 Analytes. What does Method 16C determine?
| Analyte | CAS No. |
|---|---|
| Total reduced sulfur including: | N/A |
| Dimethyl disulfide (DMDS), [(CH3)2 S2] | 62-49-20 |
| Dimethyl sulfide (DMS), [(CH3)2 S] | 75-18-3 |
| Hydrogen sulfide (H2 S) | 7783-06-4 |
| Methyl mercaptan (MeSH), (CH4 S) | 74-93-1 |
| Reported as: Sulfur dioxide (SO2) | 7449-09-5 |
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for determining TRS emissions from recovery furnaces (boilers), lime kilns, and smelt dissolving tanks at kraft pulp mills, and from other sources when specified in an applicable subpart of the regulations.
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements described in Method 16C will enhance the quality of the data obtained.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 An integrated gas sample is extracted from the stack. The SO2 is removed selectively from the sample using a citrate buffer solution. The TRS compounds are then thermally oxidized to SO2 and determined as SO2 by an instrumental analyzer. This method is a combination of the sampling procedures of Method 16A and the analytical procedures of Method 6C (referenced in Method 7E), with minor modifications to facilitate their use together.
3.0 Definitions
Analyzer calibration error, Calibration curve, Calibration gas, Low-level gas, Mid-level gas, High-level gas, Calibration drift, Calibration span, Data recorder, Direct calibration mode, Gas analyzer, Interference check, Measurement system, Response time, Run, System calibration mode, System performance check, and Test are the same as used in Methods 16A and 6C.
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Reduced sulfur compounds other than those defined as TRS, if present, may be measured by this method. Compounds like carbonyl sulfide, which is partially oxidized to SO2 and may be present in a lime kiln exit stack, would be a positive interferent. Interferences may vary among instruments, and instrument-specific interferences must be evaluated through the interference check.
4.2 Particulate matter from the lime kiln stack gas (primarily calcium carbonate) can cause a negative bias if it is allowed to enter the citrate scrubber; the particulate matter will cause the pH to rise and H2S to be absorbed before oxidation. Proper use of the particulate filter, described in section 6.1.3 of Method 16A, will eliminate this interference.
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user to establish appropriate safety and health practices before performing this test method.
5.2 Hydrogen Sulfide. Hydrogen sulfide is a flammable, poisonous gas with the odor of rotten eggs. Hydrogen sulfide is extremely hazardous and can cause collapse, coma, and death within a few seconds of one or two inhalations at sufficient concentrations. Low concentrations irritate the mucous membranes and may cause nausea, dizziness, and headache after exposure. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
What do I need for the measurement system?
The measurement system is similar to those applicable components in Methods 16A and 6C. Modifications to the apparatus are accepted provided the performance criteria in section 13.0 are met.
6.1 Probe. Teflon tubing, 6.4-mm ( 1/4 in.) diameter, sequentially wrapped with heat-resistant fiber strips, a rubberized heat tape (plug at one end), and heat-resistant adhesive tape. A flexible thermocouple or other suitable temperature measuring device must be placed between the Teflon tubing and the fiber strips so that the temperature can be monitored to prevent softening of the probe. The probe must be sheathed in stainless steel to provide in-stack rigidity. A series of bored-out stainless steel fittings placed at the front of the sheath will prevent moisture and particulate from entering between the probe and sheath. A 6.4-mm ( 1/4 in.) Teflon elbow (bored out) must be attached to the inlet of the probe, and a 2.54 cm (1 in.) piece of Teflon tubing must be attached at the open end of the elbow to permit the opening of the probe to be turned away from the particulate stream; this will reduce the amount of particulate drawn into the sampling train. The probe is depicted in Figure 16A-2 of Method 16A.
6.2 Probe Brush. Nylon bristle brush with handle inserted into a 3.2-mm ( 1/8 in.) Teflon tubing. The Teflon tubing should be long enough to pass the brush through the length of the probe.
6.3 Particulate Filter. 50-mm Teflon filter holder and a 1- to 2-µm porosity, Teflon filter (may be available through Savillex Corporation, 5325 Highway 101, Minnetonka, Minnesota 55343, or other suppliers of filters). The filter holder must be maintained in a hot box at a temperature sufficient to prevent moisture condensation. A temperature of 121 °C (250 °F) was found to be sufficient when testing a lime kiln under sub-freezing ambient conditions.
6.4 SO2 Scrubber. Three 300-ml Teflon segmented impingers connected in series with flexible, thick-walled, Teflon tubing. (Impinger parts and tubing may be available through Savillex or other suppliers.) The first two impingers contain 100 ml of citrate buffer, and the third impinger is initially dry. The tip of the tube inserted into the solution should be constricted to less than 3 mm ( 1/8 in.) ID and should be immersed to a depth of at least 5 cm (2 in.).
6.5 Combustion Tube. Quartz glass tubing with an expanded combustion chamber 2.54 cm (1 in.) in diameter and at least 30.5 cm (12 in.) long. The tube ends should have an outside diameter of 0.6 cm ( 1/4 in.) and be at least 15.3 cm (6 in.) long. This length is necessary to maintain the quartz-glass connector near ambient temperature and thereby avoid leaks. Alternative combustion tubes are acceptable provided they are shown to combust TRS at concentrations encountered during tests.
6.6 Furnace. A furnace of sufficient size to enclose the combustion chamber of the combustion tube with a temperature regulator capable of maintaining the temperature at 800 ±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F). The furnace operating temperature should be checked with a thermocouple to ensure accuracy.
6.7 Sampling Pump. A leak-free pump is required to pull the sample gas through the system at a flow rate sufficient to minimize the response time of the measurement system and must be constructed of material that is non-reactive to the gas it contacts. For dilution-type measurement systems, an eductor pump may be used to create a vacuum that draws the sample through a critical orifice at a constant rate.
6.8 Calibration Gas Manifold. The calibration gas manifold must allow the introduction of calibration gases either directly to the gas analyzer in direct calibration mode or into the measurement system, at the probe, in system calibration mode, or both, depending upon the type of system used. In system calibration mode, the system must be able to flood the sampling probe and vent excess gas. Alternatively, calibration gases may be introduced at the calibration valve following the probe. Maintain a constant pressure in the gas manifold. For in-stack dilution-type systems, a gas dilution subsystem is required to transport large volumes of purified air to the sample probe, and a probe controller is needed to maintain the proper dilution ratio.
6.9 Sample Gas Manifold. The sample gas manifold diverts a portion of the sample to the analyzer, delivering the remainder to the by-pass discharge vent. The manifold should also be able to introduce calibration gases directly to the analyzer. The manifold must be made of material that is non-reactive to SO2 and be configured to safely discharge the bypass gas.
6.10 SO2 Analyzer. You must use an instrument that uses an ultraviolet, non-dispersive infrared, fluorescence, or other detection principle to continuously measure SO2 in the gas stream provided it meets the performance specifications in section 13.0.
6.11 Data Recording. A strip chart recorder, computerized data acquisition system, digital recorder, or data logger for recording measurement data must be used.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Water. Deionized distilled water must conform to ASTM Specification D 1193-77 or 91 Type 3 (incorporated by reference—see § 60.17). The KMnO4 test for oxidizable organic matter may be omitted when high concentrations of organic matter are not expected to be present.
7.2 Citrate Buffer. Dissolve 300 g of potassium citrate (or 284 g of sodium citrate) and 41 g of anhydrous citric acid in 1 liter of water (200 ml is needed per test). Adjust the pH to between 5.4 and 5.6 with potassium citrate or citric acid, as required.
7.3 Calibration Gas. Refer to section 7.1 of Method 7E (as applicable) for the calibration gas requirements. Example calibration gas mixtures are listed below.
(a) SO2 in nitrogen (N2).
(b) SO2 in air.
(c) SO2 and carbon dioxide (CO2) in N2.
(d) SO2 and oxygen (O2) in N2.
(e) SO2/CO2/O2 gas mixture in N2.
(f) CO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
(g) CO2/SO2/NOX gas mixture in N2.
For fluorescence-based analyzers, the O2 and CO2 concentrations of the calibration gases as introduced to the analyzer must be within 1.0 percent (absolute) O2 and 1.0 percent (absolute) CO2 of the O2 and CO2 concentrations of the effluent samples as introduced to the analyzer. Alternatively, for fluorescence-based analyzers, use calibration blends of SO2 in air and the nomographs provided by the vendor to determine the quenching correction factor (the effluent O2 and CO2 concentrations must be known). This requirement does not apply to ambient-level fluorescence analyzers that are used in conjunction with sample dilution systems. Alternatively, H2S in O2 or air may be used to calibrate the analyzer through the tube furnace.
7.4 System Performance Check Gas. You must use H2S (100 ppmv or less) stored in aluminum cylinders with the concentration certified by the manufacturer. Hydrogen sulfide in nitrogen is more stable than H2S in air, but air may be used as the balance gas.
7.5 Interference Check. Examples of test gases for the interference check are listed in Table 7E-3 of Method 7E.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Pre-sampling Tests. Before measuring emissions, perform the following procedures:
(a) Calibration gas verification,
(b) Calibration error test,
(c) System performance check,
(d) Verification that the interference check has been satisfied.
8.1.1 Calibration Gas Verification. Obtain a certificate from the gas manufacturer documenting the quality of the gas. Confirm that the manufacturer certification is complete and current. Ensure that your calibration gas certifications have not expired. This documentation should be available on-site for inspection. To the extent practicable, select a high-level gas concentration that will result in the measured emissions being between 20 and 100 percent of the calibration span.
8.1.2 Analyzer Calibration Error Test. After you have assembled, prepared, and calibrated your sampling system and analyzer, you must conduct a 3-point analyzer calibration error test before the first run and again after any failed system performance check or failed drift test to ensure the calibration is acceptable. Introduce the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases sequentially to the analyzer in direct calibration mode. For each calibration gas, calculate the analyzer calibration error using Equation 16C-1 in section 12.2. The calibration error for the low-, mid-, and high-level gases must not exceed 5.0 percent or 0.5 ppmv. If the calibration error specification is not met, take corrective action and repeat the test until an acceptable 3-point calibration is achieved.
8.1.3 System Performance Check. A system performance check is done (1) to validate the sampling train components and procedure (prior to testing), and (2) to validate a test run (after a run). You must conduct a performance check in the field prior to testing, and after each 3-hour run or after three 1-hour runs. A performance check consists of sampling and analyzing a known concentration of H2S (system performance check gas) and comparing the analyzed concentration to the known concentration. To conduct the system performance check, mix the system performance check gas (Section 7.4) and ambient air, that has been conditioned to remove moisture and sulfur-containing gases, in a dilution system such as that shown in Figure 16A-3 of Method 16A. Alternatively, ultra-high purity (UHP) grade air may be used. Adjust the gas flow rates to generate an H2S concentration in the range of the stack gas or within 20 percent of the applicable standard and an oxygen concentration greater than 1 percent at a total flow rate of at least 2.5 liters/min (5.3 ft3/hr). Use Equation 16A-3 from Method 16A to calculate the concentration of system performance check gas generated. Calibrate the flow rate from both gas sources with a soap bubble flow meter so that the diluted concentration of H2S can be accurately calculated. Alternatively, mass flow controllers with documented calibrations may be used if UHP grade air is being used. Sample duration should be sufficiently long to ensure a stable response from the analyzer. Analyze in the same manner as the emission samples. Collect the sample through the probe of the sampling train using a manifold or other suitable device that will ensure extraction of a representative sample. The TRS sample concentration measured between system performance checks is corrected by the average of the pre- and post-system performance checks.
8.1.4 Interference Check. Same as in Method 7E, section 8.2.7.
8.2 Measurement System Preparation.
8.2.1 For the SO2 scrubber, measure 100 ml of citrate buffer into the first and second impingers; leave the third impinger empty. Immerse the impingers in an ice bath, and locate them as close as possible to the filter heat box. The connecting tubing should be free of loops. Maintain the probe and filter temperatures sufficiently high to prevent moisture condensation, and monitor with a suitable temperature sensor. Prepare the oxidation furnace and maintain at 800 ±100 °C (1472 ±180 °F).
8.2.2 Citrate Scrubber Conditioning Procedure. Condition the citrate buffer scrubbing solution by pulling stack gas through the Teflon impingers as described in section 8.4.1.
8.3 Pretest Procedures. After the complete measurement system has been set up at the site and deemed to be operational, the following procedures must be completed before sampling is initiated.
8.3.1 Leak-Check. Appropriate leak-check procedures must be employed to verify the integrity of all components, sample lines, and connections. For components upstream of the sample pump, attach the probe end of the sample line to a manometer or vacuum gauge, start the pump and pull a vacuum greater than 50 mm (2 in.) Hg, close off the pump outlet, and then stop the pump and ascertain that there is no leak for 1 minute. For components after the pump, apply a slight positive pressure and check for leaks by applying a liquid (detergent in water, for example) at each joint. Bubbling indicates the presence of a leak.
8.3.2 Initial System Performance Check. A system performance check using the test gas (Section 7.4) is performed prior to testing to validate the sampling train components and procedure.
8.4 Sample Collection and Analysis.
8.4.1 After performing the required pretest procedures described in section 8.1, insert the sampling probe into the test port ensuring that no dilution air enters the stack through the port. Condition the sampling system and citrate buffer solution for a minimum of 15 minutes before beginning analysis. Begin sampling and analysis. A source test consists of three test runs. A test run shall consist of a single sample collected over a 3-hour period or three separate 1-hour samples collected over a period not to exceed six hours.
8.5 Post-Run Evaluations.
8.5.1 System Performance Check. Perform a post-run system performance check before replacing the citrate buffer solution and particulate filter and before the probe is cleaned. The check results must not exceed the 100 ±20 percent limit set forth in section 13.2. If this limit is exceeded, the intervening run is considered invalid. However, if the recovery efficiency is not in the 100 ±20 percent range, but the results do not affect the compliance or noncompliance status of the affected facility, the Administrator may decide to accept the results of the compliance test.
8.5.2 Calibration Drift. After a run or series of runs, not to exceed a 24-hour period after initial calibration, perform a calibration drift test using a calibration gas (preferably the level that best approximates the sample concentration) in direct calibration mode. This drift must not differ from the initial calibration error percent by more than 3.0 percent or 0.5 ppm. If the drift exceeds this limit, the intervening run or runs are considered valid, but a new analyzer calibration error test must be performed and passed before continuing sampling.
9.0 Quality Control
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.1.2 | Analyzer calibration error test | Establishes initial calibration accuracy within 5.0%. |
| 8.1.3, 8.5.1 | System performance check | Ensures accuracy of sampling/analytical procedure to 100 ±20%. |
| 8.5.2 | Calibration drift test | Ensures calibration drift is within 3.0%. |
| 8.1.4 | Interference check | Checks for analytical interferences. |
| 8.3 | Sampling equipment leak-check | Ensures accurate measurement of sample gas flow rate, sample volume. |
10.0 Calibration
10.1 Calibrate the system using the gases described in section 7.3. Perform the initial 3-point calibration error test as described in section 8.1.2 before you start the test. The specification in section 13 must be met. Conduct an initial system performance test described in section 8.1.3 as well before the test to validate the sampling components and procedures before sampling. After the test commences, a system performance check is required after each run. You must include a copy of the manufacturer's certification of the calibration gases used in the testing as part of the test report. This certification must include the 13 documentation requirements in the EPA Traceability Protocol for Assay and Certification of Gaseous Calibration Standards, September 1997, as amended August 25, 1999.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Because sample collection and analysis are performed together (see section 8.0), additional discussion of the analytical procedure is not necessary.
12.0 Calculations and Data Analysis
12.1 Nomenclature.
ACE = Analyzer calibration error, percent of calibration span.
CD = Calibration drift, percent.
CDir = Measured concentration of a calibration gas (low, mid, or high) when introduced in direct calibration mode, ppmv.
CH2S = Concentration of the system performance check gas, ppmv H2S.
CS = Measured concentration of the system performance gas when introduced in system calibration mode, ppmv H2S.
CV = Manufacturer certified concentration of a calibration gas (low, mid, or high), ppmv SO2.
CSO2 = Unadjusted sample SO2 concentration, ppmv.
CTRS = Total reduced sulfur concentration corrected for system performance, ppmv.
CS = Calibration span, ppmv.
DF = Dilution system (if used) dilution factor, dimensionless.
SP = System performance, percent.
12.2 Analyzer Calibration Error. For non-dilution systems, use Equation 16C-1 to calculate the analyzer calibration error for the low-, mid-, and high-level calibration gases.
12.3 System Performance Check. Use Equation 16C-2 to calculate the system performance.
12.4 Calibration Drift. Use Equation 16C-3 to calculate the calibration drift at a single concentration level after a run or series of runs (not to exceed a 24-hr period) from initial calibration. Compare the single-level calibration gas error (ACEn) to the original error obtained for that gas in the initial analyzer calibration error test (ACEi).
12.5 TRS Concentration as SO2. For each sample or test run, calculate the arithmetic average of SO2 concentration values (e.g., 1-minute averages). Then calculate the sample TRS concentration by adjusting the average value of CSO2 for system performance using Equation 16C-4.
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Analyzer Calibration Error. At each calibration gas level (low, mid, and high), the calibration error must either not exceed 5.0 percent of the calibration span or |CDir−Cv| must be ≤0.5 ppmv.
13.2 System Performance. Each system performance check must not deviate from the system performance gas concentration by more than 20 percent. Alternatively, the results are acceptable if |Cs−CH2S| is ≤0.5 ppmv.
13.3 Calibration Drift. The calibration drift at the end of any run or series of runs within a 24-hour period must not differ by more than 3.0 percent from the original ACE at the test concentration level or |ACEi−ACEn| must not exceed 0.5 ppmv.
13.4 Interference Check. For the analyzer, the total interference response (i.e., the sum of the interference responses of all tested gaseous components) must not be greater than 2.5 percent of the calibration span. Any interference is also acceptable if the sum of the responses does not exceed 0.5 ppmv for a calibration span of 5 to 10 ppmv, or 0.2 ppmv for a calibration span <5 ppmv.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 References
1. The references are the same as in section 16.0 of Method 16, section 17.0 of Method 16A, and section 17.0 of Method 6C.
2. National Council of the Paper Industry for Air and Stream Improvement, Inc,. A Study of TRS Measurement Methods. Technical Bulletin No. 434. New York, NY. May 1984. 12p.
3. Margeson, J.H., J.E. Knoll, and M.R. Midgett. A Manual Method for TRS Determination. Draft available from the authors. Source Branch, Quality Assurance Division, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Research Triangle Park, NC 27711.
17.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data [Reserved]
Method 17—Determination of Particulate Matter Emissions From Stationary Sources
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Particulate matter (PM). No CAS number assigned.
1.2 Applicability. This method is applicable for the determination of PM emissions, where PM concentrations are known to be independent of temperature over the normal range of temperatures characteristic of emissions from a specified source category. It is intended to be used only when specified by an applicable subpart of the standards, and only within the applicable temperature limits (if specified), or when otherwise approved by the Administrator. This method is not applicable to stacks that contain liquid droplets or are saturated with water vapor. In addition, this method shall not be used as written if the projected cross-sectional area of the probe extension-filter holder assembly covers more than 5 percent of the stack cross-sectional area (see section 8.1.2).
1.3 Data Quality Objectives. Adherence to the requirements of this method will enhance the quality of the data obtained from air pollutant sampling methods.
2.0 Summary of Method
2.1 Particulate matter is withdrawn isokinetically from the source and collected on a glass fiber filter maintained at stack temperature. The PM mass is determined gravimetrically after the removal of uncombined water.
3.0 Definitions
Same as Method 5, section 3.0.
4.0 Interferences [Reserved]
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Sampling Train. A schematic of the sampling train used in this method is shown in Figure 17-1. The sampling train components and operation and maintenance are very similar to Method 5, which should be consulted for details.
6.1.1 Probe Nozzle, Differential Pressure Gauge, Metering System, Barometer, Gas Density Determination Equipment. Same as in Method 5, sections 6.1.1, 6.1.4, 6.1.8, 6.1.9, and 6.1.10, respectively.
6.1.2 Filter Holder. The in-stack filter holder shall be constructed of borosilicate or quartz glass, or stainless steel. If a gasket is used, it shall be made of silicone rubber, Teflon, or stainless steel. Other holder and gasket materials may be used, subject to the approval of the Administrator. The filter holder shall be designed to provide a positive seal against leakage from the outside or around the filter.
6.1.3 Probe Extension. Any suitable rigid probe extension may be used after the filter holder.
6.1.4 Pitot Tube. Same as in Method 5, section 6.1.3.
6.1.4.1 It is recommended (1) that the pitot tube have a known baseline coefficient, determined as outlined in section 10 of Method 2; and (2) that this known coefficient be preserved by placing the pitot tube in an interference-free arrangement with respect to the sampling nozzle, filter holder, and temperature sensor (see Figure 17-1). Note that the 1.9 cm ( 3/4-in.) free-space between the nozzle and pitot tube shown in Figure 17-1, is based on a 1.3 cm ( 1/2-in.) ID nozzle. If the sampling train is designed for sampling at higher flow rates than that described in APTD-0581, thus necessitating the use of larger sized nozzles, the free-space shall be 1.9 cm ( 3/4-in.) with the largest sized nozzle in place.
6.1.4.2 Source-sampling assemblies that do not meet the minimum spacing requirements of Figure 17-1 (or the equivalent of these requirements, e.g., Figure 2-4 of Method 2) may be used; however, the pitot tube coefficients of such assemblies shall be determined by calibration, using methods subject to the approval of the Administrator.
6.1.5 Condenser. It is recommended that the impinger system or alternatives described in Method 5 be used to determine the moisture content of the stack gas. Flexible tubing may be used between the probe extension and condenser. Long tubing lengths may affect the moisture determination.
6.2 Sample Recovery. Probe-liner and probe-nozzle brushes, wash bottles, glass sample storage containers, petri dishes, graduated cylinder and/or balance, plastic storage containers, funnel and rubber policeman, funnel. Same as in Method 5, sections 6.2.1 through 6.2.8, respectively.
6.3 Sample Analysis. Glass weighing dishes, desiccator, analytical balance, balance, beakers, hygrometer, temperature sensor. Same as in Method 5, sections 6.3.1 through 6.3.7, respectively.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Sampling. Filters, silica gel, water, crushed ice, stopcock grease. Same as in Method 5, sections 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, and 7.1.5, respectively. Thimble glass fiber filters may also be used.
7.2 Sample Recovery. Acetone (reagent grade). Same as in Method 5, section 7.2.
7.3 Sample Analysis. Acetone and Desiccant. Same as in Method 5, sections 7.3.1 and 7.3.2, respectively.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.1 Sampling.
8.1.1 Pretest Preparation. Same as in Method 5, section 8.1.1.
8.1.2 Preliminary Determinations. Same as in Method 5, section 8.1.2, except as follows: Make a projected-area model of the probe extension-filter holder assembly, with the pitot tube face openings positioned along the centerline of the stack, as shown in Figure 17-2. Calculate the estimated cross-section blockage, as shown in Figure 17-2. If the blockage exceeds 5 percent of the duct cross sectional area, the tester has the following options exist: (1) a suitable out-of-stack filtration method may be used instead of in-stack filtration; or (2) a special in-stack arrangement, in which the sampling and velocity measurement sites are separate, may be used; for details concerning this approach, consult with the Administrator (see also Reference 1 in section 17.0). Select a probe extension length such that all traverse points can be sampled. For large stacks, consider sampling from opposite sides of the stack to reduce the length of probes.
8.1.3 Preparation of Sampling Train. Same as in Method 5, section 8.1.3, except the following: Using a tweezer or clean disposable surgical gloves, place a labeled (identified) and weighed filter in the filter holder. Be sure that the filter is properly centered and the gasket properly placed so as not to allow the sample gas stream to circumvent the filter. Check filter for tears after assembly is completed. Mark the probe extension with heat resistant tape or by some other method to denote the proper distance into the stack or duct for each sampling point. Assemble the train as in Figure 17-1, using a very light coat of silicone grease on all ground glass joints and greasing only the outer portion (see APTD-0576) to avoid possibility of contamination by the silicone grease. Place crushed ice around the impingers.
8.1.4 Leak-Check Procedures. Same as in Method 5, section 8.1.4, except that the filter holder is inserted into the stack during the sampling train leak-check. To do this, plug the inlet to the probe nozzle with a material that will be able to withstand the stack temperature. Insert the filter holder into the stack and wait approximately 5 minutes (or longer, if necessary) to allow the system to come to equilibrium with the temperature of the stack gas stream.
8.1.5 Sampling Train Operation. The operation is the same as in Method 5. Use a data sheet such as the one shown in Figure 5-3 of Method 5, except that the filter holder temperature is not recorded.
8.1.6 Calculation of Percent Isokinetic. Same as in Method 5, section 12.11.
8.2 Sample Recovery.
8.2.1 Proper cleanup procedure begins as soon as the probe extension assembly is removed from the stack at the end of the sampling period. Allow the assembly to cool.
8.2.2 When the assembly can be safely handled, wipe off all external particulate matter near the tip of the probe nozzle and place a cap over it to prevent losing or gaining particulate matter. Do not cap off the probe tip tightly while the sampling train is cooling down as this would create a vacuum in the filter holder, forcing condenser water backward.
8.2.3 Before moving the sample train to the cleanup site, disconnect the filter holder-probe nozzle assembly from the probe extension; cap the open inlet of the probe extension. Be careful not to lose any condensate, if present. Remove the umbilical cord from the condenser outlet and cap the outlet. If a flexible line is used between the first impinger (or condenser) and the probe extension, disconnect the line at the probe extension and let any condensed water or liquid drain into the impingers or condenser. Disconnect the probe extension from the condenser; cap the probe extension outlet. After wiping off the silicone grease, cap off the condenser inlet. Ground glass stoppers, plastic caps, or serum caps (whichever are appropriate) may be used to close these openings.
8.2.4 Transfer both the filter holder-probe nozzle assembly and the condenser to the cleanup area. This area should be clean and protected from the wind so that the chances of contaminating or losing the sample will be minimized.
8.2.5 Save a portion of the acetone used for cleanup as a blank. Take 200 ml of this acetone from the wash bottle being used and place it in a glass sample container labeled “acetone blank.” Inspect the train prior to and during disassembly and not any abnormal conditions. Treat the sample as discussed in Method 5, section 8.2.
9.0 Quality Control [Reserved]
10.0 Calibration and Standardization
The calibrations of the probe nozzle, pitot tube, metering system, temperature sensors, and barometer are the same as in Method 5, sections 10.1 through 10.3, 10.5, and 10.6, respectively.
11.0 Analytical Procedure
Same as in Method 5, section 11.0. Analytical data should be recorded on a form similar to that shown in Figure 5-6 of Method 5.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations.
Same as in Method 5, section 12.0.
13.0 Method Performance [Reserved]
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
Same as in Method 5, section 16.0.
17.0 References
Same as in Method 5, section 17.0, with the addition of the following:
1. Vollaro, R.F. Recommended Procedure for Sample Traverses in Ducts Smaller than 12 Inches in Diameter. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Emission Measurement Branch. Research Triangle Park, NC. November 1976.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
Method 18—Measurement of Gaseous Organic Compound Emissions By Gas Chromatography
1.0 Scope and Application
1.1 Analyte. Total gaseous organic compounds.
1.2 Applicability.
1.2.1 This method is designed to measure gaseous organics emitted from an industrial source. While designed for ppm level sources, some detectors are quite capable of detecting compounds at ambient levels, e.g., ECD, ELCD, and helium ionization detectors. Some other types of detectors are evolving such that the sensitivity and applicability may well be in the ppb range in only a few years.
1.2.2 This method will not determine compounds that (1) are polymeric (high molecular weight), (2) can polymerize before analysis, or (3) have very low vapor pressures at stack or instrument conditions.
1.3 Range. The lower range of this method is determined by the sampling system; adsorbents may be used to concentrate the sample, thus lowering the limit of detection below the 1 part per million (ppm) typically achievable with direct interface or bag sampling. The upper limit is governed by GC detector saturation or column overloading; the upper range can be extended by dilution of sample with an inert gas or by using smaller volume gas sampling loops. The upper limit can also be governed by condensation of higher boiling compounds.
1.4 Sensitivity. The sensitivity limit for a compound is defined as the minimum detectable concentration of that compound, or the concentration that produces a signal-to-noise ratio of three to one. The minimum detectable concentration is determined during the presurvey calibration for each compound.
2.0 Summary of Method
The major organic components of a gas mixture are separated by gas chromatography (GC) and individually quantified by flame ionization, photoionization, electron capture, or other appropriate detection principles. The retention times of each separated component are compared with those of known compounds under identical conditions. Therefore, the analyst confirms the identity and approximate concentrations of the organic emission components beforehand. With this information, the analyst then prepares or purchases commercially available standard mixtures to calibrate the GC under conditions identical to those of the samples. The analyst also determines the need for sample dilution to avoid detector saturation, gas stream filtration to eliminate particulate matter, and prevention of moisture condensation.
3.0 Definitions [Reserved]
4.0 Interferences
4.1 Resolution interferences that may occur can be eliminated by appropriate GC column and detector choice or by shifting the retention times through changes in the column flow rate and the use of temperature programming.
4.2 The analytical system is demonstrated to be essentially free from contaminants by periodically analyzing blanks that consist of hydrocarbon-free air or nitrogen.
4.3 Sample cross-contamination that occurs when high-level and low-level samples or standards are analyzed alternately is best dealt with by thorough purging of the GC sample loop between samples.
4.4 To assure consistent detector response, calibration gases are contained in dry air. To adjust gaseous organic concentrations when water vapor is present in the sample, water vapor concentrations are determined for those samples, and a correction factor is applied.
4.5 The gas chromatograph run time must be sufficient to clear all eluting peaks from the column before proceeding to the next run (in order to prevent sample carryover).
5.0 Safety
5.1 Disclaimer. This method may involve hazardous materials, operations, and equipment. This test method may not address all of the safety problems associated with its use. It is the responsibility of the user of this test method to establish appropriate safety and health practices and determine the applicability of regulatory limitations prior to performing this test method. The analyzer users manual should be consulted for specific precautions to be taken with regard to the analytical procedure.
6.0 Equipment and Supplies
6.1 Equipment needed for the presurvey sampling procedure can be found in section 16.1.1.
6.2 Equipment needed for the integrated bag sampling and analysis procedure can be found in section 8.2.1.1.1.
6.3 Equipment needed for direct interface sampling and analysis can be found in section 8.2.2.1.
6.4 Equipment needed for the dilution interface sampling and analysis can be found in section 8.2.3.1.
6.5 Equipment needed for adsorbent tube sampling and analysis can be found in section 8.2.4.1.
7.0 Reagents and Standards
7.1 Reagents needed for the presurvey sampling procedure can be found in section 16.1.2.
8.0 Sample Collection, Preservation, Storage, and Transport
8.2 Final Sampling and Analysis Procedure. Considering safety (flame hazards) and the source conditions, select an appropriate sampling and analysis procedure (Section 8.2.1, 8.2.2, 8.2.3 or 8.2.4). In situations where a hydrogen flame is a hazard and no intrinsically safe GC is suitable, use the flexible bag collection technique or an adsorption technique.
8.2.1 Integrated Bag Sampling and Analysis.
8.2.1.1 Evacuated Container Sampling Procedure. In this procedure, the bags are filled by evacuating the rigid air-tight container holding the bags. Use a field sample data sheet as shown in Figure 18-10. Collect triplicate samples from each sample location.
8.2.1.1.1 Apparatus.
8.2.1.1.1.1 Probe. Stainless steel, Pyrex glass, or Teflon tubing probe, according to the duct temperature, with Teflon tubing of sufficient length to connect to the sample bag. Use stainless steel or Teflon unions to connect probe and sample line.
8.2.1.1.1.2 Quick Connects. Male (2) and female (2) of stainless steel construction.
8.2.1.1.1.3 Needle Valve. To control gas flow.
8.2.1.1.1.4 Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm-type pump or equivalent. To deliver at least 1 liter/min.
8.2.1.1.1.5 Charcoal Adsorption Tube. Tube filled with activated charcoal, with glass wool plugs at each end, to adsorb organic vapors.
8.2.1.1.1.6 Flowmeter. 0 to 500-ml flow range; with manufacturer's calibration curve.
8.2.1.1.2 Sampling Procedure. To obtain a sample, assemble the sample train as shown in Figure 18-9. Leak-check both the bag and the container. Connect the vacuum line from the needle valve to the Teflon sample line from the probe. Place the end of the probe at the centroid of the stack or at a point no closer to the walls than 1 in., and start the pump. Set the flow rate so that the final volume of the sample is approximately 80 percent of the bag capacity. After allowing sufficient time to purge the line several times, connect the vacuum line to the bag, and evacuate until the rotameter indicates no flow. Then position the sample and vacuum lines for sampling, and begin the actual sampling, keeping the rate proportional to the stack velocity. As a precaution, direct the gas exiting the rotameter away from sampling personnel. At the end of the sample period, shut off the pump, disconnect the sample line from the bag, and disconnect the vacuum line from the bag container. Record the source temperature, barometric pressure, ambient temperature, sampling flow rate, and initial and final sampling time on the data sheet shown in Figure 18-10. Protect the bag and its container from sunlight. Record the time lapsed between sample collection and analysis, and then conduct the recovery procedure in Section 8.4.2.
8.2.1.2 Direct Pump Sampling Procedure. Follow 8.2.1.1, except place the pump and needle valve between the probe and the bag. Use a pump and needle valve constructed of inert material not affected by the stack gas. Leak-check the system, and then purge with stack gas before connecting to the previously evacuated bag.
8.2.1.3 Explosion Risk Area Bag Sampling Procedure. Follow 8.2.1.1 except replace the pump with another evacuated can (see Figure 18-9a). Use this method whenever there is a possibility of an explosion due to pumps, heated probes, or other flame producing equipment.
8.2.1.4 Other Modified Bag Sampling Procedures. In the event that condensation is observed in the bag while collecting the sample and a direct interface system cannot be used, heat the bag during collection and maintain it at a suitably elevated temperature during all subsequent operations. (Note: Take care to leak-check the system prior to the dilutions so as not to create a potentially explosive atmosphere.) As an alternative, collect the sample gas, and simultaneously dilute it in the bag.
8.2.1.4.1 First Alternative Procedure. Heat the box containing the sample bag to 120 °C (±5 °C). Then transport the bag as rapidly as possible to the analytical area while maintaining the heating, or cover the box with an insulating blanket. In the analytical area, keep the box heated to 120 °C (±5 °C) until analysis. Be sure that the method of heating the box and the control for the heating circuit are compatible with the safety restrictions required in each area.
8.2.1.4.2 Second Alternative Procedure. Prefill the bag with a known quantity of inert gas. Meter the inert gas into the bag according to the procedure for the preparation of gas concentration standards of volatile liquid materials (Section 10.1.2.2), but eliminate the midget impinger section. Take the partly filled bag to the source, and meter the source gas into the bag through heated sampling lines and a heated flowmeter, or Teflon positive displacement pump. Verify the dilution factors before sampling each bag through dilution and analysis of gases of known concentration.
8.2.1.5 Analysis of Bag Samples.
8.2.1.5.1 Apparatus. Same as section 8.1. A minimum of three gas standards are required.
8.2.1.5.2 Procedure.
8.2.1.5.2.1 Establish proper GC operating conditions as described in section 10.2, and record all data listed in Figure 18-7. Prepare the GC so that gas can be drawn through the sample valve. Flush the sample loop with calibration gas mixture, and activate the valve (sample pressure at the inlet to the GC introduction valve should be similar during calibration as during actual sample analysis). Obtain at least three chromatograms for the mixture. The results are acceptable when the peak areas for the three injections agree to within 5 percent of their average. If they do not agree, run additional samples or correct the analytical techniques until this requirement is met. Then analyze the other two calibration mixtures in the same manner. Prepare a calibration curve as described in section 10.2.
8.2.1.5.2.2 Analyze the three source gas samples by connecting each bag to the sampling valve with a piece of Teflon tubing identified with that bag. Analyze each bag sample three times. Record the data in Figure 18-11. If certain items do not apply, use the notation “N.A.” If the bag has been maintained at an elevated temperature as described in section 8.2.1.4, determine the stack gas water content by Method 4. After all samples have been analyzed, repeat the analysis of the mid-level calibration gas for each compound. Compare the average response factor of the pre- and post-test analysis for each compound. If they differ by >5percent, analyze the other calibration gas levels for that compound, and prepare a calibration curve using all the pre- and post-test calibration gas mixture values. If the two response factor averages (pre-and post-test) differ by less than 5 percent from their mean value, the tester has the option of using only the pre-test calibration curve to generate the concentration values.
8.2.1.6 Determination of Bag Water Vapor Content. Measure the ambient temperature and barometric pressure near the bag. From a water saturation vapor pressure table, determine and record the water vapor content of the bag as a decimal figure. (Assume the relative humidity to be 100 percent unless a lesser value is known.) If the bag has been maintained at an elevated temperature as described in section 8.2.1.4, determine the stack gas water content by Method 4.
8.2.1.8 Emission Calculations. From the calibration curve described in section 8.2.1.5, select the value of Cs that corresponds to the peak area. Calculate the concentration Cc in ppm, dry basis, of each organic in the sample using Equation 18-5 in section 12.6.
8.2.2 Direct Interface Sampling and Analysis Procedure. The direct interface procedure can be used provided that the moisture content of the gas does not interfere with the analysis procedure, the physical requirements of the equipment can be met at the site, and the source gas concentration falls within the linear range of the detector. Adhere to all safety requirements with this method.
8.2.2.1 Apparatus.
8.2.2.1.1 Probe. Constructed of stainless steel, Pyrex glass, or Teflon tubing as dictated by duct temperature and reactivity of target compounds. A filter or glass wool plug may be needed if particulate is present in the stack gas. If necessary, heat the probe with heating tape or a special heating unit capable of maintaining a temperature greater than 110 °C.
8.2.2.1.2 Sample Lines. 6.4-mm OD (or other diameter as needed) Teflon lines, heat-traced to prevent condensation of material (greater than 110 °C).
8.2.2.1.3 Quick Connects. To connect sample line to gas sampling valve on GC instrument and to pump unit used to withdraw source gas. Use a quick connect or equivalent on the cylinder or bag containing calibration gas to allow connection of the calibration gas to the gas sampling valve.
8.2.2.1.4 Thermocouple Readout Device. Potentiometer or digital thermometer, to measure source temperature and probe temperature.
8.2.2.1.5 Heated Gas Sampling Valve. Of two-position, six-port design, to allow sample loop to be purged with source gas or to direct source gas into the GC instrument.
8.2.2.1.6 Needle Valve. To control gas sampling rate from the source.
8.2.2.1.7 Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm-type pump or equivalent, capable of at least 1 liter/minute sampling rate.
8.2.2.1.8 Flowmeter. Of suitable range to measure sampling rate.
8.2.2.1.9 Charcoal Adsorber. To adsorb organic vapor vented from the source to prevent exposure of personnel to source gas.
8.2.2.1.10 Gas Cylinders. Carrier gas, oxygen and fuel as needed to run GC and detector.
8.2.2.1.11 Gas Chromatograph. Capable of being moved into the field, with detector, heated gas sampling valve, column required to complete separation of desired components, and option for temperature programming.
8.2.2.1.12 Recorder/Integrator. To record results.
8.2.2.2 Procedure. Calibrate the GC using the procedures in section 8.2.1.5.2.1. To obtain a stack gas sample, assemble the sampling system as shown in Figure 18-12. Make sure all connections are tight. Turn on the probe and sample line heaters. As the temperature of the probe and heated line approaches the target temperature as indicated on the thermocouple readout device, control the heating to maintain a temperature greater than 110 °C. Conduct a 3-point calibration of the GC by analyzing each gas mixture in triplicate. Generate a calibration curve. Place the inlet of the probe at the centroid of the duct, or at a point no closer to the walls than 1 m, and draw source gas into the probe, heated line, and sample loop. After thorough flushing, analyze the stack gas sample using the same conditions as for the calibration gas mixture. For each run, sample, analyze, and record five consecutive samples. A test consists of three runs (five samples per run times three runs, for a total of fifteen samples). After all samples have been analyzed, repeat the analysis of the mid-level calibration gas for each compound. For each calibration standard, compare the pre- and post-test average response factors (RF) for each compound. If the two calibration RF values (pre- and post-analysis) differ by more than 5 percent from their mean value, then analyze the other calibration gas levels for that compound and determine the stack gas sample concentrations by comparison to both calibration curves (this is done by preparing a calibration curve using all the pre- and post-test calibration gas mixture values.) If the two calibration RF values differ by less than 5 percent from their mean value, the tester has the option of using only the pre-test calibration curve to generate the concentration values. Record this calibration data and the other required data on the data sheet shown in Figure 18-11, deleting the dilution gas information.
8.2.2.3 Determination of Stack Gas Moisture Content. Use Method 4 to measure the stack gas moisture content.
8.2.2.5 Emission Calculations. Same as section 8.2.1.8.
8.2.3 Dilution Interface Sampling and Analysis Procedure. Source samples that contain a high concentration of organic materials may require dilution prior to analysis to prevent saturating the GC detector. The apparatus required for this direct interface procedure is basically the same as that described in the section 8.2.2, except a dilution system is added between the heated sample line and the gas sampling valve. The apparatus is arranged so that either a 10:1 or 100:1 dilution of the source gas can be directed to the chromatograph. A pump of larger capacity is also required, and this pump must be heated and placed in the system between the sample line and the dilution apparatus.
8.2.3.1 Apparatus. The equipment required in addition to that specified for the direct interface system is as follows:
8.2.3.1.1 Sample Pump. Leakless Teflon-coated diaphragm-type that can withstand being heated to 120 °C and deliver 1.5 liters/minute.
8.2.3.1.2 Dilution Pumps. Two Model A-150 Komhyr Teflon positive displacement type delivering 150 cc/minute, or equivalent. As an option, calibrated flowmeters can be used in conjunction with Teflon-coated diaphragm pumps.
8.2.3.1.3 Valves. Two Teflon three-way valves, suitable for connecting to Teflon tubing.
8.2.3.1.4 Flowmeters. Two, for measurement of diluent gas.
8.2.3.1.5 Diluent Gas with Cylinders and Regulators. Gas can be nitrogen or clean dry air, depending on the nature of the source gases.
8.2.3.1.6 Heated Box. Suitable for being heated to 120 °C, to contain the three pumps, three-way valves, and associated connections. The box should be equipped with quick connect fittings to facilitate connection of: (1) the heated sample line from the probe, (2) the gas sampling valve, (3) the calibration gas mixtures, and (4) diluent gas lines. A schematic diagram of the components and connections is shown in Figure 18-13. The heated box shown in Figure 18-13 is designed to receive a heated line from the probe. An optional design is to build a probe unit that attaches directly to the heated box. In this way, the heated box contains the controls for the probe heaters, or, if the box is placed against the duct being sampled, it may be possible to eliminate the probe heaters. In either case, a heated Teflon line is used to connect the heated box to the gas sampling valve on the chromatograph.
8.2.3.2 Procedure.
8.2.3.2.1 Assemble the apparatus by connecting the heated box, shown in Figure 18-13, between the heated sample line from the probe and the gas sampling valve on the chromatograph. Vent the source gas from the gas sampling valve directly to the charcoal filter, eliminating the pump and rotameter. Heat the sample probe, sample line, and heated box. Insert the probe and source thermocouple at the centroid of the duct, or to a point no closer to the walls than 1 m. Measure the source temperature, and adjust all heating units to a temperature 0 to 3 °C above this temperature. If this temperature is above the safe operating temperature of the Teflon components, adjust the heating to maintain a temperature high enough to prevent condensation of water and organic compounds (greater than 110 °C). Calibrate the GC through the dilution system by following the procedures in section 8.2.1.5.2.1. Determine the concentration of the diluted calibration gas using the dilution factor and the certified concentration of the calibration gas. Record the pertinent data on the data sheet shown in Figure 18-11.
8.2.3.2.2 Once the dilution system and GC operations are satisfactory, proceed with the analysis of source gas, maintaining the same dilution settings as used for the standards.
8.2.3.2.3 Analyze the audit samples using either the dilution system, or directly connect to the gas sampling valve as required. Record all data and report the results to the audit supervisor.
8.2.3.3 Determination of Stack Gas Moisture Content. Same as section 8.2.2.3.
8.2.3.4 Quality Assurance. Same as section 8.2.2.4.
8.2.3.5 Emission Calculations. Same as section 8.2.2.5, with the dilution factor applied.
8.2.4 Adsorption Tube Procedure. Any commercially available adsorbent is allowed for the purposes of this method, as long as the recovery study criteria in section 8.4.3 are met. Help in choosing the adsorbent may be found by calling the distributor, or the tester may refer to National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) methods for the particular organics to be sampled. For some adsorbents, the principal interferent will be water vapor. If water vapor is thought to be a problem, the tester may place a midget impinger in an ice bath before the adsorbent tubes. If this option is chosen, the water catch in the midget impinger shall be analyzed for the target compounds. Also, the spike for the recovery study (in section 8.4.3) shall be conducted in both the midget impinger and the adsorbent tubes. The combined recovery (add the recovered amount in the impinger and the adsorbent tubes to calculate R) shall then meet the criteria in section 8.4.3.
8.2.4.1 Additional Apparatus. The following items (or equivalent) are suggested.
8.2.4.1.1 Probe. Borosilicate glass or stainless steel, approximately 6-mm ID, with a heating system if water condensation is a problem, and a filter (either in-stack or out-of-stack, heated to stack temperature) to remove particulate matter. In most instances, a plug of glass wool is a satisfactory filter.
8.2.4.1.2 Flexible Tubing. To connect probe to adsorption tubes. Use a material that exhibits minimal sample adsorption.
8.2.4.1.3 Leakless Sample Pump. Flow controlled, constant rate pump, with a set of limiting (sonic) orifices.
8.2.4.1.4 Bubble-Tube Flowmeter. Volume accuracy within 1 percent, to calibrate pump.
8.2.4.1.5 Stopwatch. To time sampling and pump rate calibration.
8.2.4.1.6 Adsorption Tubes. Precleaned adsorbent, with mass of adsorbent to be determined by calculating breakthrough volume and expected concentration in the stack.
8.2.4.1.7 Barometer. Accurate to 5 mm Hg, to measure atmospheric pressure during sampling and pump calibration.
8.2.4.1.8 Rotameter. O to 100 cc/min, to detect changes in flow rate during sampling.
8.2.4.2 Sampling and Analysis.
8.2.4.2.1 Calibrate the pump and limiting orifice flow rate through adsorption tubes with the bubble tube flowmeter before sampling. The sample system can be operated as a “recirculating loop” for this operation. Record the ambient temperature and barometric pressure. Then, during sampling, use the rotameter to verify that the pump and orifice sampling rate remains constant.
8.2.4.2.2 Use a sample probe, if required, to obtain the sample at the centroid of the duct or at a point no closer to the walls than 1 m. Minimize the length of flexible tubing between the probe and adsorption tubes. Several adsorption tubes can be connected in series, if the extra adsorptive capacity is needed. Adsorption tubes should be maintained vertically during the test in order to prevent channeling. Provide the gas sample to the sample system at a pressure sufficient for the limiting orifice to function as a sonic orifice. Record the total time and sample flow rate (or the number of pump strokes), the barometric pressure, and ambient temperature. Obtain a total sample volume commensurate with the expected concentration(s) of the volatile organic(s) present and recommended sample loading factors (weight sample per weight adsorption media). Laboratory tests prior to actual sampling may be necessary to predetermine this volume. If water vapor is present in the sample at concentrations above 2 to 3 percent, the adsorptive capacity may be severely reduced. Operate the gas chromatograph according to the manufacturer's instructions. After establishing optimum conditions, verify and document these conditions during all operations. Calibrate the instrument and then analyze the emission samples.
8.2.4.3 Standards and Calibration. If using thermal desorption, obtain calibration gases using the procedures in section 10.1. If using solvent extraction, prepare liquid standards in the desorption solvent. Use a minimum of three different standards; select the concentrations to bracket the expected average sample concentration. Perform the calibration before and after each day's sample analyses using the procedures in section 8.2.1.5.2.1.
8.2.4.4 Quality Assurance.
8.2.4.4.1 Determine the recovery efficiency of the pollutants of interest according to section 8.4.3.
8.2.4.4.2 Determination of Sample Collection Efficiency (Optional). If sample breakthrough is thought to be a problem, a routine procedure for determining breakthrough is to analyze the primary and backup portions of the adsorption tubes separately. If the backup portion exceeds 10 percent of the total amount (primary and back-up), it is usually a sign of sample breakthrough. For the purposes of this method, only the recovery efficiency value (Section 8.4.3) is used to determine the appropriateness of the sampling and analytical procedure.
8.2.4.4.3 Volume Flow Rate Checks. Perform this check immediately after sampling with all sampling train components in place. Use the bubble-tube flowmeter to measure the pump volume flow rate with the orifice used in the test sampling, and record the result. If it has changed by more than 5 but less than 20 percent, calculate an average flow rate for the test. If the flow rate has changed by more than 20 percent, recalibrate the pump and repeat the sampling.
8.2.4.4.4 Calculations. Correct all sample volumes to standard conditions. If a sample dilution system has been used, multiply the results by the appropriate dilution ratio. Correct all results according to the applicable procedure in section 8.4.3. Report results as ppm by volume, dry basis.
8.3 Reporting of Results. At the completion of the field analysis portion of the study, ensure that the data sheets shown in Figure 18-11 have been completed. Summarize this data on the data sheets shown in Figure 18-15.
8.4 Recovery Study. After conducting the presurvey and identifying all of the pollutants of interest, conduct the appropriate recovery study during the test based on the sampling system chosen for the compounds of interest.
8.4.1 Recovery Study for Direct Interface or Dilution Interface Sampling. If the procedures in section 8.2.2 or 8.2.3 are to be used to analyze the stack gas, conduct the calibration procedure as stated in section 8.2.2.2 or 8.2.3.2, as appropriate. Upon successful completion of the appropriate calibration procedure, attach the mid-level calibration gas for at least one target compound to the inlet of the probe or as close as possible to the inlet of the probe, but before the filter. Repeat the calibration procedure by sampling and analyzing the mid-level calibration gas through the entire sampling and analytical system in triplicate. The mean of the calibration gas response sampled through the probe shall be within 10 percent of the analyzer response. If the difference in the two means is greater than 10 percent, check for leaks throughout the sampling system and repeat the analysis of the standard through the sampling system until this criterion is met.
8.4.2 Recovery Study for Bag Sampling.
8.4.2.1 Follow the procedures for the bag sampling and analysis in section 8.2.1. After analyzing all three bag samples, choose one of the bag samples and tag this bag as the spiked bag. Spike the chosen bag sample with a known mixture (gaseous or liquid) of all of the target pollutants. The theoretical concentration, in ppm, of each spiked compound in the bag shall be 40 to 60 percent of the average concentration measured in the three bag samples. If a target compound was not detected in the bag samples, the concentration of that compound to be spiked shall be 5 times the limit of detection for that compound. Store the spiked bag for the same period of time as the bag samples collected in the field. After the appropriate storage time has passed, analyze the spiked bag three times. Calculate the average fraction recovered (R) of each spiked target compound with the equation in section 12.7.
8.4.2.2 For the bag sampling technique to be considered valid for a compound, 0.70 ≤R ≤1.30. If the R value does not meet this criterion for a target compound, the sampling technique is not acceptable for that compound, and therefore another sampling technique shall be evaluated for acceptance (by repeating the recovery study with another sampling technique). Report the R value in the test report and correct all field measurements with the calculated R value for that compound by using the equation in section 12.8.
8.4.3 Recovery Study for Adsorption Tube Sampling. If following the adsorption tube procedure in section 8.2.4, conduct a recovery study of the compounds of interest during the actual field test. Set up two identical sampling trains. Collocate the two sampling probes in the stack. The probes shall be placed in the same horizontal plane, where the first probe tip is 2.5 cm from the outside edge of the other. One of the sampling trains shall be designated the spiked train and the other the unspiked train. Spike all of the compounds of interest (in gaseous or liquid form) onto the adsorbent tube(s) in the spiked train before sampling. The mass of each spiked compound shall be 40 to 60 percent of the mass expected to be collected with the unspiked train. Sample the stack gas into the two trains simultaneously. Analyze the adsorbents from the two trains utilizing identical analytical procedures and instrumentation. Determine the fraction of spiked compound recovered (R) using the equations in section 12.9.
8.4.3.1 Repeat the procedure in section 8.4.3 twice more, for a total of three runs. In order for the adsorbent tube sampling and analytical procedure to be acceptable for a compound, 0.70≤R≤1.30 (R in this case is the average of three runs). If the average R value does not meet this criterion for a target compound, the sampling technique is not acceptable for that compound, and therefore another sampling technique shall be evaluated for acceptance (by repeating the recovery study with another sampling technique). Report the R value in the test report and correct all field measurements with the calculated R value for that compound by using the equation in section 12.8.
9.0 Quality Control
9.1 Miscellaneous Quality Control Measures
| Section | Quality control measure | Effect |
|---|---|---|
| 8.4.1 | Recovery study for direct interface or dilution interface sampling | Ensure that there are no significant leaks in the sampling system. |
| 8.4.2 | Recovery study for bag sampling | Demonstrate that proper sampling/analysis procedures were selected. |
| 8.4.3 | Recovery study for adsorption tube sampling | Demonstrate that proper sampling/analysis procedures were selected. |
10.0 Calibration and Standardization.
10.1 Calibration Standards. Obtain calibration gas standards for each target compound to be analyzed. Commercial cylinder gases certified by the manufacturer to be accurate to within 1 percent of the certified label value are preferable, although cylinder gases certified by the manufacturer to 2 percent accuracy are allowed. Another option allowed by this method is for the tester to obtain high concentration certified cylinder gases and then use a dilution system meeting the requirements of Test Method 205, 40 CFR Part 51, Appendix M to make multi-level calibration gas standards. Prepare or obtain enough calibration standards so that there are three different concentrations of each organic compound expected to be measured in the source sample. For each organic compound, select those concentrations that bracket the concentrations expected in the source samples. A calibration standard may contain more than one organic compound. If samples are collected in adsorbent tubes and extracted using solvent extraction, prepare or obtain standards in the same solvent used for the sample extraction procedure. Verify the stability of all standards for the time periods they are used.
10.2 Preparation of Calibration Curves.
10.2.1 Establish proper GC conditions, then flush the sampling loop for 30 seconds. Allow the sample loop pressure to equilibrate to atmospheric pressure, and activate the injection valve. Record the standard concentration, attenuator factor, injection time, chart speed, retention time, peak area, sample loop temperature, column temperature, and carrier gas flow rate. Analyze each standard in triplicate.
10.2.2 Repeat this procedure for each standard. Prepare a graphical plot of concentration (Cs) versus the calibration area values. Perform a regression analysis, and draw the least square line.
11.0 Analytical Procedures
11.1 Analysis Development
11.1.1 Selection of GC Parameters
11.1.1.1 Column Choice. Based on the initial contact with plant personnel concerning the plant process and the anticipated emissions, choose a column that provides good resolution and rapid analysis time. The choice of an appropriate column can be aided by a literature search, contact with manufacturers of GC columns, and discussion with personnel at the emission source.
11.1.1.2 Preliminary GC Adjustment. Using the standards and column obtained in section 11.1.1.1, perform initial tests to determine appropriate GC conditions that provide good resolution and minimum analysis time for the compounds of interest.
11.1.1.3 Preparation of Presurvey Samples. If the samples were collected on an adsorbent, extract the sample as recommended by the manufacturer for removal of the compounds with a solvent suitable to the type of GC analysis. Prepare other samples in an appropriate manner.
11.1.1.4 Presurvey Sample Analysis.
11.1.1.4.1 Before analysis, heat the presurvey sample to the duct temperature to vaporize any condensed material. Analyze the samples by the GC procedure, and compare the retention times against those of the calibration samples that contain the components expected to be in the stream. If any compounds cannot be identified with certainty by this procedure, identify them by other means such as GC/mass spectroscopy (GC/MS) or GC/infrared techniques. A GC/MS system is recommended.
11.1.1.4.2 Use the GC conditions determined by the procedure of section 11.1.1.2 for the first injection. Vary the GC parameters during subsequent injections to determine the optimum settings. Once the optimum settings have been determined, perform repeat injections of the sample to determine the retention time of each compound. To inject a sample, draw sample through the loop at a constant rate (100 ml/min for 30 seconds). Be careful not to pressurize the gas in the loop. Turn off the pump and allow the gas in the sample loop to come to ambient pressure. Activate the sample valve, and record injection time, loop temperature, column temperature, carrier flow rate, chart speed, and attenuator setting. Calculate the retention time of each peak using the distance from injection to the peak maximum divided by the chart speed. Retention times should be repeatable within 0.5 seconds.
11.1.1.4.3 If the concentrations are too high for appropriate detector response, a smaller sample loop or dilutions may be used for gas samples, and, for liquid samples, dilution with solvent is appropriate. Use the standard curves (Section 10.2) to obtain an estimate of the concentrations.
11.1.1.4.4 Identify all peaks by comparing the known retention times of compounds expected to be in the retention times of peaks in the sample. Identify any remaining unidentified peaks which have areas larger than 5 percent of the total using a GC/MS, or estimation of possible compounds by their retention times compared to known compounds, with confirmation by further GC analysis.
12.0 Data Analysis and Calculations
12.1 Nomenclature.
Bws = Water vapor content of the bag sample or stack gas, proportion by volume.
Cs = Concentration of the organic from the calibration curve, ppm.
Gv = Gas volume or organic compound injected, ml.
Lv = Liquid volume of organic injected, µl.
M = Molecular weight of organic, g/g-mole.
ms = Total mass of compound measured on adsorbent with spiked train (µg).
mu = Total mass of compound measured on adsorbent with unspiked train (µg).
mv = Mass per volume of spiked compound measured (µg/L).
Pi = Barometric or absolute sample loop pressure at time of sample analysis, mm Hg.
Pm = Absolute pressure of dry gas meter, mm Hg.
Pr = Reference pressure, the barometric pressure or absolute sample loop pressure recorded during calibration, mm Hg.
Ps = Absolute pressure of syringe before injection, mm Hg.
qc = Flow rate of the calibration gas to be diluted.
qc1 = Flow rate of the calibration gas to be diluted in stage 1.
qc2 = Flow rate of the calibration gas to be diluted in stage 2.
qd = Diluent gas flow rate.
qd1 = Flow rate of diluent gas in stage 1.
qd2 = Flow rate of diluent gas in stage 2.
s = Theoretical concentration (ppm) of spiked target compound in the bag.
S = Theoretical mass of compound spiked onto adsorbent in spiked train (µg).
t = Measured average concentration (ppm) of target compound and source sample (analysis results subsequent to bag spiking)
Ti = Sample loop temperature at the time of sample analysis, °K.
Tm = Absolute temperature of dry gas meter, °K.
Ts = Absolute temperature of syringe before injection, °K.
u = Source sample average concentration (ppm) of target compound in the bag (analysis results before bag spiking).
Vm = Gas volume indicated by dry gas meter, liters.
vs = volume of stack gas sampled with spiked train (L).
vu = volume of stack gas sampled with unspiked train (L).
X = Mole or volume fraction of the organic in the calibration gas to be diluted.
Y = Dry gas meter calibration factor, dimensionless.
µl = Liquid organic density as determined, g/ml.
24.055 = Ideal gas molar volume at 293 °K and 760 mm Hg, liters/g-mole.
1000 = Conversion factor, ml/liter.
10 6 = Conversion to ppm.
12.2 Calculate the concentration, Cs, in ppm using the following equation:
12.3 Calculate the concentration, Cs, in ppm of the organic in the final gas mixture using the following equation:
12.4 Calculate each organic standard concentration, Cs, in ppm using the following equation:
12.5 Calculate each organic standard concentration, Cs, in ppm using the following equation:
12.6 Calculate the concentration, Cc, in ppm, dry basis, of each organic is the sample using the following equation:
12.7 Calculate the average fraction recovered (R) of each spiked target compound using the following equation:
12.8 Correct all field measurements with the calculated R value for that compound using the following equation:
12.9 Determine the mass per volume of spiked compound measured using the following equation:
12.10 Calculate the fraction of spiked compound recovered, R, using the following equation:
13.0 Method Performance
13.1 Since a potential sample may contain a variety of compounds from various sources, a specific precision limit for the analysis of field samples is impractical. Precision in the range of 5 to 10 percent relative standard deviation (RSD) is typical for gas chromatographic techniques, but an experienced GC operator with a reliable instrument can readily achieve 5 percent RSD. For this method, the following combined GC/operator values are required.
(a) Precision. Triplicate analyses of calibration standards fall within 5 percent of their mean value.
(b) Recovery. After developing an appropriate sampling and analytical system for the pollutants of interest, conduct the procedure in section 8.4. Conduct the appropriate recovery study in section 8.4 at each sampling point where the method is being applied. Submit the data and results of the recovery procedure with the reporting of results under section 8.3.
14.0 Pollution Prevention [Reserved]
15.0 Waste Management [Reserved]
16.0 Alternative Procedures
16.1 Optional Presurvey and Presurvey Sampling.
Perform a presurvey for each source to be tested. Refer to Figure 18-1. Some of the information can be collected from literature surveys and source personnel. Collect gas samples that can be analyzed to confirm the identities and approximate concentrations of the organic emissions.
16.1.1 Apparatus. This apparatus list also applies to sections 8.2 and 11.
16.1.1.1 Teflon Tubing. (Mention of trade names or specific products does not constitute endorsement by the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.) Diameter and length determined by connection requirements of cylinder regulators and the GC. Additional tubing is necessary to connect the GC sample loop to the sample.
16.1.1.2 Gas Chromatograph. GC with suitable detector, columns, temperature-controlled sample loop and valve assembly, and temperature programmable oven, if necessary. The GC shall achieve sensitivity requirements for the compounds under study.
16.1.1.3 Pump. Capable of pumping 100 ml/min. For flushing sample loop.
16.1.1.4 Flow Meter. To measure flow rates.
16.1.1.5 Regulators. Used on gas cylinders for GC and for cylinder standards.
16.1.1.6 Recorder. Recorder with linear strip chart is minimum acceptable. Integrator (optional) is recommended.
16.1.1.7 Syringes. 0.5-ml, 1.0- and 10-microliter size, calibrated, maximum accuracy (gas tight) for preparing calibration standards. Other appropriate sizes can be used.
16.1.1.8 Tubing Fittings. To plumb GC and gas cylinders.
16.1.1.9 Septa. For syringe injections.
16.1.1.10 Glass Jars. If necessary, clean, colored glass jars with Teflon-lined lids for condensate sample collection. Size depends on volume of condensate.
16.1.1.11 Soap Film Flowmeter. To determine flow rates.
16.1.1.12 Flexible Bags. Tedlar or equivalent, 10- and 50-liter capacity, for preparation of standards. (Verify through the manufacturer that the Tedlar alternative is suitable for the compound of interest and make this verifying information available for inspection.)
16.1.1.13 Dry Gas Meter with Temperature and Pressure Gauges. Accurate to ±2 percent, for preparation of gas standards.
16.1.1.14 Midget Impinger/Hot Plate Assembly. For preparation of gas standards.
16.1.1.15 Sample Flasks. For presurvey samples, must have gas-tight seals.
16.1.1.16 Adsorption Tubes. If necessary, blank tubes filled with necessary adsorbent (charcoal, Tenax, XAD-2, etc.) for presurvey samples.
16.1.1.17 Personnel Sampling Pump. Calibrated, for collecting adsorbent tube presurvey samples.
16.1.1.18 Dilution System. Calibrated, the dilution system is to be constructed following the specifications of an acceptable method.
16.1.1.19 Sample Probes. Pyrex or stainless steel, of sufficient length to reach centroid of stack, or a point no closer to the walls than 1 m.
16.1.1.20 Barometer. To measure barometric pressure.
16.1.2 Reagents.
16.1.2.1 Water. Deionized distilled.
16.1.2.2 Methylene chloride.
16.1.2.3 Calibration Gases. A series of standards prepared for every compound of interest.
16.1.2.4 Organic Compound Solutions. Pure (99.9 percent), or as pure as can reasonably be obtained, liquid samples of all the organic compounds needed to prepare calibration standards.
16.1.2.5 Extraction Solvents. For extraction of adsorbent tube samples in preparation for analysis.
16.1.2.6 Fuel. As recommended by the manufacturer for operation of the GC.
16.1.2.7 Carrier Gas. Hydrocarbon free, as recommended by the manufacturer for operation of the detector and compatibility with the column.
16.1.2.8 Zero Gas. Hydrocarbon free air or nitrogen, to be used for dilutions, blank preparation, and standard preparation.
16.1.3 Sampling.
16.1.3.1 Collection of Samples with Glass Sampling Flasks. Presurvey samples may be collected in precleaned 250-ml double-ended glass sampling flasks. Teflon stopcocks, without grease, are preferred. Flasks should be cleaned as follows: Remove the stopcocks from both ends of the flasks, and wipe the parts to remove any grease. Clean the stopcocks, barrels, and receivers with methylene chloride (or other non-target pollutant solvent, or heat and humidified air). Clean all glass ports with a soap solution, then rinse with tap and deionized distilled water. Place the flask in a cool glass annealing furnace, and apply heat up to 500 °C. Maintain at this temperature for 1 hour. After this time period, shut off and open the furnace to allow the flask to cool. Return the stopcocks to the flask receivers. Purge the assembly with high-purity nitrogen for 2 to 5 minutes. Close off the stopcocks after purging to maintain a slight positive nitrogen pressure. Secure the stopcocks with tape. Presurvey samples can be obtained either by drawing the gases into the previously evacuated flask or by drawing the gases into and purging the flask with a rubber suction bulb.
16.1.3.1.1 Evacuated Flask Procedure. Use a high-vacuum pump to evacuate the flask to the capacity of the pump; then close off the stopcock leading to the pump. Attach a 6-mm outside diameter (OD) glass tee to the flask inlet with a short piece of Teflon tubing. Select a 6-mm OD borosilicate sampling probe, enlarged at one end to a 12-mm OD and of sufficient length to reach the centroid of the duct to be sampled. Insert a glass wool plug in the enlarged end of the probe to remove particulate matter. Attach the other end of the probe to the tee with a short piece of Teflon tubing. Connect a rubber suction bulb to the third leg of the tee. Place the filter end of the probe at the centroid of the duct, and purge the probe with the rubber suction bulb. After the probe is completely purged and filled with duct gases, open the stopcock to the grab flask until the pressure in the flask reaches duct pressure. Close off the stopcock, and remove the probe from the duct. Remove the tee from the flask and tape the stopcocks to prevent leaks during shipment. Measure and record the duct temperature and pressure.
16.1.3.1.2 Purged Flask Procedure. Attach one end of the sampling flask to a rubber suction bulb. Attach the other end to a 6-mm OD glass probe as described in section 8.3.3.1.1. Place the filter end of the probe at the centroid of the duct, or at a point no closer to the walls than 1 m, and apply suction with the bulb to completely purge the probe and flask. After the flask has been purged, close off the stopcock near the suction bulb, and then close off the stopcock near the probe. Remove the probe from the duct, and disconnect both the probe and suction bulb. Tape the stopcocks to prevent leakage during shipment. Measure and record the duct temperature and pressure.
16.1.3.2 Flexible Bag Procedure. Any leak-free plastic (e.g., Tedlar, Mylar, Teflon) or plastic-coated aluminum (e.g., aluminized Mylar) bag, or equivalent, can be used to obtain the pre-survey sample. Use new bags, and leak-check them before field use. In addition, check the bag before use for contamination by filling it with nitrogen or air and analyzing the gas by GC at high sensitivity. Experience indicates that it is desirable to allow the inert gas to remain in the bag about 24 hours or longer to check for desorption of organics from the bag. Follow the leak-check and sample collection procedures given in Section 8.2.1.
16.1.3.3 Determination of Moisture Content. For combustion or water-controlled processes, obtain the moisture content from plant personnel or by measurement during the presurvey. If the source is below 59 °C, measure the wet bulb and dry bulb temperatures, and calculate the moisture content using a psychrometric chart. At higher temperatures, use Method 4 to determine the moisture content.
16.1.4 Determination of Static Pressure. Obtain the static pressure from the plant personnel or measurement. If a type S pitot tube and an inclined manometer are used, take care to align the pitot tube 90° from the direction of the flow. Disconnect one of the tubes to the manometer, and read the static pressure; note whether the reading is positive or negative.
16.1.5 Collection of Presurvey Samples with Adsorption Tube. Follow section 8.2.4 for presurvey sampling.
17.0 References
1. American Society for Testing and Materials. C1 Through C5 Hydrocarbons in the Atmosphere by Gas Chromatography. ASTM D 2820-72, Part 23. Philadelphia, Pa. 23:950-958. 1973.
2. Corazon, V.V. Methodology for Collecting and Analyzing Organic Air Pollutants. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA-600/2-79-042. February 1979.
3. Dravnieks, A., B.K. Krotoszynski, J. Whitfield, A. O'Donnell, and T. Burgwald. Environmental Science and Technology. 5(12):1200-1222. 1971.
4. Eggertsen, F.T., and F.M. Nelsen. Gas Chromatographic Analysis of Engine Exhaust and Atmosphere. Analytical Chemistry. 30(6): 1040-1043. 1958.
5. Feairheller, W.R., P.J. Marn, D.H. Harris, and D.L. Harris. Technical Manual for Process Sampling Strategies for Organic Materials. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/2-76-122. April 1976. 172 p.
6. Federal Register, 39 FR 9319-9323. 1974.
7. Federal Register, 39 FR 32857-32860. 1974.
8. Federal Register, 23069-23072 and 23076-23090. 1976.
9. Federal Register, 46569-46571. 1976.
10. Federal Register, 41771-41776. 1977.
11. Fishbein, L. Chromatography of Environmental Hazards, Volume II. Elesevier Scientific Publishing Company. New York, N.Y. 1973.
12. Hamersma, J.W., S.L. Reynolds, and R.F. Maddalone. EPA/IERL-RTP Procedures Manual: Level 1 Environmental Assessment. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/276-160a. June 1976. 130 p.
13. Harris, J.C., M.J. Hayes, P.L. Levins, and D.B. Lindsay. EPA/IERL-RTP Procedures for Level 2 Sampling and Analysis of Organic Materials. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/7-79-033. February 1979. 154 p.
14. Harris, W.E., H.W. Habgood. Programmed Temperature Gas Chromatography. John Wiley and Sons, Inc. New York. 1966.
15. Intersociety Committee. Methods of Air Sampling and Analysis. American Health Association. Washington, D.C. 1972.
16. Jones, P.W., R.D. Grammer, P.E. Strup, and T.B. Stanford. Environmental Science and Technology. 10:806-810. 1976.
17. McNair Han Bunelli, E.J. Basic Gas Chromatography. Consolidated Printers. Berkeley. 1969.
18. Nelson, G.O. Controlled Test Atmospheres, Principles and Techniques. Ann Arbor. Ann Arbor Science Publishers. 1971. 247 p.
19. NIOSH Manual of Analytical Methods, Volumes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7. U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health. Center for Disease Control. 4676 Columbia Parkway, Cincinnati, Ohio 45226. April 1977—August 1981. May be available from the Superintendent of Documents, Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402. Stock Number/Price:
Volume 1—O17-033-00267-3/$13
Volume 2—O17-033-00260-6/$11
Volume 3—O17-033-00261-4/$14
Volume 4—O17-033-00317-3/$7.25
Volume 5—O17-033-00349-1/$10
Volume 6—O17-033-00369-6/$9
Volume 7—O17-033-00396-5/$7
Prices subject to change. Foreign orders add 25 percent.
20. Schuetzle, D., T.J. Prater, and S.R. Ruddell. Sampling and Analysis of Emissions from Stationary Sources; I. Odor and Total Hydrocarbons. Journal of the Air Pollution Control Association. 25(9): 925-932. 1975.
21. Snyder, A.D., F.N. Hodgson, M.A. Kemmer and J.R. McKendree. Utility of Solid Sorbents for Sampling Organic Emissions from Stationary Sources. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. Research Triangle Park, N.C. Publication No. EPA 600/2-76-201. July 1976. 71 p.
22. Tentative Method for Continuous Analysis of Total Hydrocarbons in the Atmosphere. Intersociety Committee, American Public Health Association. Washington, D.C. 1972. p. 184-186.
23. Zwerg, G. CRC Handbook of Chromatography, Volumes I and II. Sherma, Joseph (ed.). CRC Press. Cleveland. 1972.
18.0 Tables, Diagrams, Flowcharts, and Validation Data
I. Name of company
Date
Address
Contracts
Phone
Process to be sampled
Duct or vent to be sampled
II. Process description
Raw material
Products
Operating cycle
Check: Batch ________ Continuous ________ Cyclic ________
Timing of batch or cycle
Best time to test
III. Sampling site
A. Description
Site decription
Duct shape and size
Material
Wall thickness ________ inches
Upstream distance ________ inches ________ diameter
Downstream distance ________ inches ________ diameter
Size of port
Size of access area
Hazards ________ Ambient temp. ________ °F
B. Properties of gas stream
Temperature ________ °C ________ °F, Data source ________
Velocity ________, Data source ________
Static pressure ________ inches H2O, Data source ________
Moisture content ________%, Data source ________
Particulate content ________, Data source________
Gaseous components
N2 ________ % Hydrocarbons ________ ppm
O2 ________% ________
CO ________ % ________ ________
CO2 ________ % ________ ________
SO2 ________ % ________ ________
Hydrocarbon components
________ ________ ppm
________ ________ ppm
________ ________ ppm
________ ________ ppm
________ ________ ppm
________ ________ ppm
C. Sampling considerations
Location to set up GC
Special hazards to be considered
Power available at duct
Power available for GC
Plant safety requirements
Vehicle traffic rules
Plant entry requirements
Security agreements
Potential problems
D. Site diagrams. (Attach additional sheets if required).
Figure 18-1. Preliminary Survey Data Sheet
Components to be analyzed and Expected concentration
Suggested chromatographic column
Column flow rate __ ml/min
Head pressure ________ mm Hg
Column temperature: Isothermal ________ °C, Programmed from ________ °C to ________ °C at ________ °C/min
Injection port/sample loop temperature ________ °C
Detector temperature ________ °C
Detector flow rates: Hydrogen ________ ml/min., head pressure ________ mm Hg, Air/Oxygen ________ ml/min., head pressure ________ mm Hg.
Chart speed ________ inches/minute
Compound data:
Compound and Retention time and Attenuation
Figure 18-2. Chromatographic Conditions Data Sheet
| Standards | |||
|---|---|---|---|
| Mixture #1 | Mixture #2 | Mixture #3 | |
| Standards Preparation Data: | |||
| Organic: | |||
| Bag number or identification | |||
| Dry gas meter calibration factor | |||
| Final meter reading (liters) | |||
| Initial meter reading (liters) | |||
| Metered volume (liters) | |||
| Average meter temperature (°K) | |||
| Average meter pressure, gauge (mm Hg) | |||
| Average atmospheric perssure (mm Hg) | |||
| Average meter pressure, absolute (mm Hg) | |||
| Syringe temperature (°K) (see section 10.1.2.1) | |||
| Syringe pressure, absolute (mm Hg) (see section 10.1.2.1) | |||
| Volume of gas in syringe (ml) (Section 10.1.2.1) | |||
| Density of liquid organic (g/ml) (Section 10.1.2.1) | |||
| Volume of liquid in syringe (ml) (Section 10.1.2.1) | |||
| GC Operating Conditions: | |||
| Sample loop volume (ml) | |||
| Sample loop temperature ( °C) | |||
| Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min) | |||
| Column temperature: | |||
| Initial ( °C) | |||
| Rate change ( °C/min) | |||
| Final ( °C) | |||
| Organic Peak Identification and Calculated Concentrations: | |||
| Injection time (24 hour clock) | |||
| Distance to peak (cm) | |||
| Chart speed (cm/min) | |||
| Organic retention time (min) | |||
| Attenuation factor | |||
| Peak height (mm) | |||
| Peak area (mm2) | |||
| Peak area * attenuation factor (mm2) | |||
| Calculated concentration (ppm) (Equation 18-3 or 18-4) | |||
| Plot peak area * attenuation factor against calculated concentration to obtain calibration curve. |
Flowmeter number or identification
Flowmeter Type
Method: Bubble meter____ Spirometer____ Wet test meter ____
Readings at laboratory conditions:
Laboratory temperature (Tlab) ____ °K
Laboratory barometric pressure (Plab)____ mm Hg
Flow data:
| Reading (as marked) | Temp. (°K) | Pressure (absolute) |
|---|---|---|
| Time (min) | Gas volume a | Flow rate b |
|---|---|---|
| a Vol. of gas may be measured in milliliters, liters or cubic feet. | ||
| b Convert to standard conditions (20 °C and 760 mm Hg). Plot flowmeter reading against flow rate (standard conditions), and draw a smooth curve. If the flowmeter being calibrated is a rotameter or other flow device that is viscosity dependent, it may be necessary to generate a “family” of calibration curves that cover the operating pressure and temperature ranges of the flowmeter. While the following technique should be verified before application, it may be possible to calculate flow rate reading for rotameters at standard conditions Qstd as follows: |
| Flow rate (laboratory conditions) | Flow rate (STD conditions) |
|---|---|
Figure 18-4. Flowmeter Calibration
| Standards preparation data: | Date: | ||
|---|---|---|---|
| Mixture 1 | Mixture 2 | Mixture 3 | |
| Stage 1: | |||
| Standard gas flowmeter reading | |||
| Diluent gas flowmeter reading | |||
| Laboratory temperature (°K) | |||
| Barometric pressure (mm Hg) | |||
| Flowmeter gage pressure (mm Hg) | |||
| Flow rate cylinder gas at standard conditions (ml/min) | |||
| Flow rate diluent gas at standard conditions (ml/min) | |||
| Calculated concentration (ppm) | |||
| Stage 2 (if used): | |||
| Standard gas flowmeter reading | |||
| Diluent gas flowmeter reading | |||
| Flow rate Stage 1 gas at standard conditions (ml/min) | |||
| Flow rate diluent gas at standard conditions | |||
| Calculated concentration (ppm) | |||
| GC Operating Conditions: | |||
| Sample loop volume (ml) | |||
| Sample loop temperature ( °C) | |||
| Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min) | |||
| Column temperature: | |||
| Initial ( °C) | |||
| Program rate ( °C/min) | |||
| Final ( °C) | |||
| Organic Peak Identification and Calculated Concentrations: | |||
| Injection time (24-hour clock) | |||
| Distance to peak (cm) | |||
| Chart speed (cm/min) | |||
| Retention time (min) | |||
| Attenuation factor | |||
| Peak area (mm2) | |||
| Peak area *attenuation factor | |||
| Plot peak area *attenuation factor against calculated concentration to obtain calibration curve. |
Figure 18-7. Standards Prepared by Dilution of Cylinder Standard
| Sample 1 | Sample 2 | Sample 3 | |
|---|---|---|---|
| Source temperature ( °C) | |||
| Barometric pressure (mm Hg) | |||
| Ambient temperature ( °C) | |||
| Sample flow rate (appr.) | |||
| Bag number | |||
| Start time | |||
| Finish time |
Figure 18-10. Field Sample Data Sheet—Tedlar or Tedlar-Equivalent Bag Collection Method
| 1. General information: | |
| Source temperature ( °C) | |
| Probe temperature ( °C) | |
| Ambient temperature ( °C) | |
| Atmospheric pressure (mm) | |
| Source pressure (′Hg) | |
| Absolute source pressure (mm) | |
| Sampling rate (liter/min) | |
| Sample loop volume (ml) | |
| Sample loop temperature ( °C) | |
| Columnar temperature: | |
| Initial ( °C) time (min) | |
| Program rate ( °C/min) | |
| Final ( °C)/time (min) | |
| Carrier gas flow rate (ml/min) | |
| Detector temperature ( °C) | |
| Injection time (24-hour basis) | |
| Chart Speed (mm/min) | |
| Dilution gas flow rate (ml/min) | |
| Dilution gas used (symbol) | |
| Dilution ratio |
| Components | Area | Attenuation | A × A Factor | Conc.__ (ppm) |
|---|---|---|---|---|
Figure 18-11. Field Analysis Data Sheets
| Date | ||
|---|---|---|
| 1. Presurvey data: | ||
| A. Grab sample collected | □ | ______ |
| B. Grab sample analyzed for composition | □ | ______ |
| Method GC | □ | ______ |
| GC/MS | □ | ______ |
| Other | □ | ______ |
| C. GC-FID analysis performed | □ | ______ |
| 2. Laboratory calibration data: | ||
| A. Calibration curves prepared | □ | ______ |
| Number of components | □ | ______ |
| Number of concentrations/component (3 required) | □ | ______ |
| B. Audit samples (optional): | ||
| Analysis completed | □ | ______ |
| Verified for concentration | □ | ______ |
| OK obtained for field work | □ | ______ |
| 3. Sampling procedures: | ||
| A. Method: | ||
| Bag sample | □ | ______ |
| Direct interface | □ | ______ |
| Dilution interface | □ | ______ |
| B. Number of samples collected | □ | ______ |
| 4. Field Analysis: | ||
| A. Total hydrocarbon analysis performed | □ | ______ |
| B. Calibration curve prepared | □ | ______ |
| Number of components | □ | ______ |
| Number of concentrations per component (3 required) | □ | ______ |
Gaseous Organic Sampling and Analysis Data
Plant
Date
Location
| 1. Pre-survey data | Date |
| A. Grab sample collected | ________ |
| B. Grab sample analyzed for composition | ________ |
| Method GC | ________ |
| GC/MS | ________ |
| Other________________________ | ________ |
| C. GC-FID analysis performed | ________ |
| 2. Laboratory calibration curves prepared | ________ |
| A. Number of components | ________ |
| B. Number of concentrations per component (3 required) | ________ |
| C. OK obtained for field work | ________ |
| 3. Sampling procedures | |
| A. Method | |
| Bag sample | ________ |
| Direct interface | ________ |
| Dilution interface | ________ |
| B. Number of samples collected | ________ |
| 4. Field Analysis | |
| A. Total hydrocarbon analysis performed | ________ |
| B. Calibration curve prepared | ________ |
| Number of components | ________ |
| Number of concentrations per component (3 required) | ________ |
Figure 18-14. Sampling and Analysis Sheet
[36 FR 24877, Dec. 23, 1971]